FOOD ADDITIVES CODE

Ministry of Food and Drug Safety Regulation #2020-59(2020.7.10.)

Ⅰ . General Rules
1. Purpose
The purpose of this regulation is to secure safe-quality of food additives and to contribute
to public health in using them in food safely through establishing the Standards and
Specifications of manufacturing, processing, using and preserving of the food additives
according the Article 7 (1) of the Food Sanitation Act.
2. Definition of Terms
1) “Processing aid” means food additive that is intentionally used to fulfil a certain
technological purpose during food manufacturing process, and which may fully be
degraded before the final product is completed, be removed so that does not remain,
or be result in unavoidable presence of residues or derivatives in the final product.
‘Sterilizing agent’, ‘Filter aid’, ‘Release agent’, ‘Manufacturing solvent’, ‘Boiler Water
Additive’, ‘Extraction solvent’ and ‘Enzyme preparations’ of major functional classes
are belong to processing aid.
2) “Functional classes” of food additives are technological effects of them occurring to
food in food manufacturing or processing. and definition of each term is as follows.
(1) “Sweetener” is a food additive, which imparts a sweet taste to a food.
(2) “Anticaking agent” is a food additive, which reduces the tendency of components of
food to adhere to one another.
(3) “Antiforming agent” is a food additive, which prevents or reduces foaming.
(4) “Gum base” is a food additive, which is a non-nutritive chewing substance with
moderate viscosity and elasticity and is a basic material of gum manufacturing.
(5) “Flour treatment agent” is a food additive, which makes it possible to form or
maintain a uniform dispersion of a gaseous phase in a liquid or solid food.
(6) “Color retention agent” is a food additive, which stabilizes, retains or intensifies the
colour of a food.
(7) “Preservative” is a food additive, which prolongs the shelf-life of a food by
protecting against deterioration caused by microorganisms.
(8) “Propellant” is a food additive, which expels a food from a container.
(9) “Acidity regulator” is a food additive, which controls the acidity or alkalinity of a
food.
(10) “Antioxidant” is a food additive, which prolongs the self-life of foods by protecting
1
 against deterioration caused by oxidation.
(11) “Sterilizing agent” is a food additive, which extinct microorganisms on food surface
in a short time.
(12) “Humectant” is a food additive, which prevents food from drying out by
counteracting the effect of a dry atmosphere.
(13) “Stabilizer” is a food additive, which makes it possible to maintain a uniform
dispersion of two or more components.
(14) “Filter aid” is a food additive, which eliminate impurities or minute particles by
absorption.
(15) “Fortifying nutrient” is a food additive, which restore the nutrients lost during the
manufacturing process to maintain nutritional quality of the food, or strengthen
(16) “Emulsifier” is a food additive, which forms or maintains a uniform emulsion of two
or more phases in a food.
(17) “Release agent” is a food additive, which makes raw materials easily separate from
containers by keeping them in shape.
(18) “Firming agent” is a food additive, which makes or keeps tissues of fruit or
vegetables frim and crisp, or interacts with gelling agents to produce or strengthen
a gel.
(19) “Manufacturing solvent” is a food additive, which aid in food manufacturing or
processing by catalyst, sedimentation, decomposition or clarifying.
(20) “Gelling agent” is a food additive, which gives a food texture through formation of a
gel.
(21) “Thickener” is a food additive, which increases the viscosity of a food.
(22) “Colour” is a food additive, which adds or restores colour in a food.
(23) “Boiler Water Additive” is a food additive that is added to prevent the formation of
stones, residue of water, corrosion, and etc. in the boiler that produces steam in
direct contact with food.
(24) “Extraction solvent” is a food additive, which extract or dissolve useful component
and etc.
(25) “Packaging gas” is a food additive gas, which is introduced into a container before,
during or after filling with food with the intention to protect the food, for example,
from oxidation or spoilage.
(26) “Raising agent” is a food additive or a combination of food additives, which
liberate(s) gas and thereby increase(s) the volume of a dough or batter.
(27) “Bleaching agent” is a food additive(non-flour use) used to decolourize food.
Beaching agents do not include pigments.
(28) “Surface-finishing agent” is a food additive, which when applied to the external
surface of a food, smoother or tidying up the food surface.
(29) “Coating agent” is a food additive, when applied to the external surface of a food,
which imparts a shiny appearance or provides a protective coating.
(30) “Flavour enhancer” is a food additive, which enhances the existing taste and/or
odour of a food.
2
(31) “Flavouring agent” is a food additive, which give a unique flavour to food or
reinforce the original fragrance which was lost during the manufacturing process.
(32) “Enzyme preparations” is a food additive, which catalyzes certain biochemical
reactions.
3) The definitions of each term in the specifications of food additives are as follows.
(1) “CAS No.” is an abbreviation of “Chemical Abstract Service Registry Number”, and it
is an international category number which can be used to replace the chemical
name.
(2) “INS No.” is an abbreviation of “International Numbering System Number”, and it is
an international category number which can be used to replace the name of food
additive and it can be a reference information of each food additive.
4) The meaning of the following terms in the Use Level of food additives are as follows.
(1) “Dried potatoes" are powder, particle and thin layer of dried potatoes or fresh
potatoes, which is cut and then heated and dried.
(2) “Dried Fruits" is processed by drying fruits maintaining its whole shape such as dried
persimmon and dried apricot, or by drying that main ingredients such as persimmon,
pear, and plum to make water content become not more than 40%, and it has forms
of slices, chips, etc.
(3) “Dried Vegetables” or “Dried mushrooms” is processed by drying that main
ingredients such as vegetables like spinach or mushrooms like oak mushroom to make
water content become not more than 40%.
(4) "Konjac Flour" is a product which is made from processing rhizome of elephant foot.
(5) “Preserved fruits or vegetables” are canned or bottled products processed by drying
and salting.
(6) “Other Foods" refers to food and health functional food except for those in the
standards for the use of individual food additives.
(7) “Pickled Radish" is a product made by immersing and salting dried radish or salted
radish in salt and seasoning solution and its salinity is not more than 6%.
(8) “Mango Chutney" is a product sliced, diced, or crushed after peeling mango, which is
mixed with sugar, fruit vegetables, vinegars, garlic, etc and processed by heating.
(9) “Dried gourd shavings” is a product sliced and dried of gourd removing its cores.
(10) “Popped Grains” is confectionary processed by compressing, heating, and swelling
after adding food or food additives to ingredients such as flaked cereals and
potatoes and pulses.
(11) “Sugar Substitute Product” substitutes with sugar by directly putting in coffee or
black tea
(12) “Fish and Shellfish” refers to 2) Fish and Invertebrates in the Ingredients of Animal
Origin listed in 4. Classification of Food Ingredients, Chapter 1. General Provisions,
in 「Food Code」
(13) “Dried fish and shellfish" is processed by drying fish and shellfish, which are fresh
3
 or treated by salting, boiling, steaming, or baking to make the water content become
not more than 50%. It contains smoked cuttlefish or octopus, dried fish and shellfish
flavored by common salt, soy bean products, sugar, and flavored dried cod.
(14) “Frozen fish and shellfish" is product in container packing, which is made by
manufacturing fish and shellfish or freezing processed fish and shellfish (excluding
processed fish meat products) and cut fresh fish and shellfish (excluding a raw
oyster).
(15) “Salted fish and shellfish" is processed by putting common salt, immersing in saline
solution, or wetting. Fresh fish (salinity in fish is not more than 3%), which is not
for long-term preservation, is excluded.
(16) “Processed olive products" refer to products manufactured by mixing or pickling
olive with edible salts, fermented soybean or red pepper sauces and pastes,
vinegars or oil or others
(17) “Rind of natural cheese and processed cheese" is an outer layer of cheese including
its sliced, shredded and crushed forms.
(18) “Flour pastes" is made by the process that sugar, fats and oils, beef tallow, lard,
powdered milk, or eggs are added to main ingredients such as wheat flour, starch,
nuts, or its processed products, cocoa, chocolate, coffee, fruit juice, potatoes and
pulses, legumes, or vegetables. Above foods are pasteurized and formed into a paste
type.
3. General Provisions
Unless otherwise specified here in, the provisions below are to be followed.
1) The suitability of food additives in this notification is determined in accordance with
General Provision, Standard for Manufacturing and Preparation, General Standard for
Food Additives Use in Foods, Specification and Standard of the Concerned Item and
General Test Methods. However, the suitability of description applies to color, odor
and taste only.
2) Material name with parenthesis indicates that the food additive is prescribed in
standards and specification.
3) In the food additives which is made from manufacture equipment as the items listed
in Korea Food Additives, the manufacture equipments of these items should be made,
assembled and constituted by using appropriate mechanic equipment or parts in
accordance with the 「Electrical Appliances and Consumer Products Safety Control
Act」, 「Industrial Standardization Act」and the related Acts. The material of parts,
which is directly contacted to final food additives, should be appropriate for the
「Standards and Specifications for Food Utensils, Containers and Packages」(MFDS’s
regulation).
4) The applicant, who wants to establish the standards and specifications of food
4
 additives in 「Food Additives Code」 or to revise use level of the food additives, may
able to apply according to [Annex 1] Matters concerning Application for Establishment
of Standards and Specifications of Food Additives and Revision of Use Level.
5) If a food additive which is not intentionally used in food is detected, it may be
recognized as natural occurrence from any of the following cases: However, matters
other than the following can be judged according to the provisions of [Annex 4] for
the natural occurrence of food additives.
(1) If it is within the amount that is already recognized as natural occurrence by the
Ministry of Food and Drug Safety’s minister.
(2) If it is identified as natural occurrence from reports of domestic and foreign
government and international organizations, and Journals.
(3) If it is detected as 0.10 g/kg or less as propionic acid. (However, if the food contains
animal ingredient(s), it shall be applied by converting the ingredients’ ratio excluding
the animal ingredient(s) out of whole ingredients.)
6) Maximum Residual Limits(MRLs) for Pesticides in food additives may be permitted
within the range of the Maximum Residual Limits of the materials determined in 「Food
Code」. In other words, the standards of the materials are applied depending on the
content of the materials, and if there are any changes of the moisture contents due to
the drying process and etc., then it is applied considering the moisture content.
[Weight, Volume and Temperature]
7) Units of measure shall follow the metric system and the following symbols shall be
used.
- Length : m, dm, cm, mm, μm, nm
- Volume : L, mL, μL
- Weight : kg, g, mg, μg, ng
- Area : dm2, cm2
1 L is 1,000 cc and 1 cc can be used interchangeably 1 mL, respectively.
8) Symbol "%" is used for weight percentage. However, w/v% is used for material
content (g) in 100 mL of a solution and v/v% is used for material content (mL) in 100
mL of a solution. A ppm symbol is used for parts per million in weights.
9) Temperature is designated with the Celsius (centigrade) scale by adding " ℃ " to the
right of the Arabic numerals. When temperature is indicated for numerical value except
standard levels such as melting point and solidifying point, etc, tolerable error should
be ± 5℃ respectively.
5
10) Standard temperature is 20℃, normal temperature is 15∼25℃, room temperature is 1
∼35℃, and slightly warm temperature is 30∼40℃. Warm bath is at a temperature
range of 60∼70℃ and hot bath is approximately at 100℃. Unless otherwise specified,
"heating in/on a water bath" means being heated at temperature of approximate 100℃
or steam bath of approximate 100℃ can be used as an alternative.
11) Unless otherwise specified, "cold place" designates a place at a temperature range of 0
∼15℃.
[Tests]
12) A substance designated with a molecular formula, such as acetic acid (C2H4O2),
means a pure material.
13) Unless otherwise specified, distilled water or purified water is used for tests.
14) When a solvent is not specified for a "solution", it is an aqueous solution.
15) Unless otherwise specified, the term of "reduced pressure" means pressure is not
higher than 15 mmHg.
Strongly acidic : x 〈 3 Slightly alkaline : 7.5 ≤ x 〈 9
Weakly acidic : 3 ≤ x 〈 5 Weakly alkaline : 9 ≤ x 〈 11
Slightly acidic : 5 ≤ x 〈 6.5 Strongly alkaline : x ≥ 11
Neutral : 6.5 ≤ x 〈 7.5
16) Unless otherwise specified, blue or red litmus paper is to be used for testing
whether a material is acidic, alkaline, or neutral. pH range of acidity or alkalinity is
outlined for "slightly acidic", "weakly acidic", "strongly acidic", “neutral”, "slightly
alkaline", "weakly alkaline", and "strongly alkaline" as follows.
17) Where the concentration of a solution is expressed as "(1→5)", "(1→10)", "(1→100)",
etc., it means 1 g of a solid chemical or 1 mL of liquid chemical is dissolved in a
solvent and is brought up to be 5 mL, 10 mL, 100 mL, respectively. For example,
sodium hydroxide(1→5) is a solution where 1 g of sodium hydroxide is dissolved in
water and then the total volume of the solution is brought up to be 5 mL and diluted
hydrochloric acid(2→5) is a solution where 2 mL of hydrochloric acid is diluted and is
brought up to be 5 mL.
18) Where apparatus is used in test by number of drops, its total weight of 20 drops of
distilled water at 20℃ should be within a range 0.9∼1.1 g.

6
19) Nestler tube in its form of flat bottom with a ground glass stopper made of clear
glass, with 20 mm in inner diameter and 24 mm in outer diameter, 20 cm in length
between its base and the bottom of the stopper and holding 50mL in volume is used.
Height difference between scale marks of each tube should not be greater than 2
mm.
20) When decision is made on suitability by comparing a value acquired from a test
(hereinafter referred to as an experimental value) with a value prescribed in item's
specification(hereinafter referred to as a specification value), experimental value
obtained one digit greater to that of a specification value is used, where the last
digit of experimental value is rounded up. The expression "a～b" indicates that the
value is not less than a and not more than b.
21) Atomic weights should conform to the International Periodic Table of the Elements
(See Annex). Molecular weights should be calculated based on this table and up to
two decimal points of the value needs to be shown by rounding up.
22) "Precision weighing" means to weigh specified amount of a sample using a chemical
balance. For example, "precisely weighing approximately 5 g" means to take
approximately 5 g of a sample and weigh it by using a chemical balance.
23) Unless otherwise specified, a test is to be carried out at normal temperature and
observed within 30 seconds after the experiment. However, a test, which is
temperature sensitive, is to be carried out at standard temperature.
24) For the titer of an additive, the unit specified in its specification is used.
25) Identification test is needed to identify an additive, where tests are done on
reactions among ions, reactions among functional groups, and physical constants.
26) Purity test is to examine impurities in an additives, and these tests usually prescribe
kinds of possible contaminants and their quantitative limits.
27) Quantitative test is to measure ingredient content or titer of an additive, where the
standard limit of ingredient content or activity for the corresponding additive
materials indicates the limit of the value obtained from the quantitative test. If the
limit is not specified, it is set to be 100.5%.
28) An expression "white" indicates a color of white or almost white and an expression
"colorless" indicates a state of being colorless or almost colorless. Unless otherwise
specified, When sample is in solid form, 1～3 g of sample is placed on a watch glass
on a white background for color observation. When sample is in liquid form, test
7
 sample is transferred into a test tube with an inner diameter of 1.5 cm, filled 3cm
thick in the tube and observed under a white background from the top and side. An
expression "should not be turbid" indicates that the turbidity is less than the high
level of turbidity.
29) Expressions such as "clear", "almost clear" "very slightly turbid", "slightly turbid", and
"turbid" are according to the following criteria.
∘ Undiluted Turbidity Standard Solution : Add water to 14.1 mL of 0.1 N hydrochloric
acid so that the total volume becomes 50 mL. 1 mL of this solution contains 1 mg
of Cl.
∘ Turbidity Standard Solution : Add water to 10 mL of undiluted turbidity standard
solution so that the total volume becomes 1000 mL. 1 mL of this solution contains
0.01 mg of Cl.
(1) Clear
Add water to 0.2 mL of turbidity standard solution so that the total volume becomes
20 mL. To this solution, 1 mL of dilute nitric acid (1→3), 0.2 mL of 2 w/v% dextrin
solution, and 1 mL of 2 w/v% silver nitrate solution are added. The turbidity of the
resulting solution after 15 minutes is considered to be clear. Care must be taken to
prevent introducing floating and foreign matters into the solution.
(2) Almost Clear
Add water to 0.5 mL of turbidity standard solution so that the total volume becomes
20 mL. To this solution, 1 mL of dilute nitric acid (1→3), 0.2 mL of 2w/v% dextrin
solution, and 1 mL of 2 w/v% silver nitrate solution are added. The turbidity of the
resulting solution after 15 minutes is considered to be almost clear. Care must be
taken to prevent introducing floating and foreign matters into the solution.
(3) Very Slightly Turbid
Add water to 1.2 mL of turbidity standard solution so that the total volume becomes
20 mL. To this solution, 1 mL of dilute nitric acid (1→3), 0.2 mL of 2 w/v% dextrin
solution, and 1 mL of 2 w/v% silver nitrate solution are added. The turbidity of the
resulting solution after 15 minutes is considered to be very slightly turbid.
(4) Slightly turbid
Add water to 6 mL of turbidity standard solution so that the total volume becomes
20 mL. To this solution, 1 mL of dilute nitric acid (1→3), 0.2 mL of 2 w/v% dextrin
solution, and 1 mL of 2 w/v% silver nitrate solution are added. The turbidity of the
resulting solution after 15 minutes is considered to be slightly turbid.
(5) Turbid
Add water to 0.3 mL of undiluted turbidity standard solution so that the total volume
8
 becomes 20 mL. To this solution, 1 mL of dilute nitric acid (1→3), 0.2 mL of 2 w/v%
dextrin solution, and 1 mL of 2 w/v% silver nitrate solution are added. The turbidity
of the resulting solution after 15 minutes is considered to be turbid.
30) An expression "odorless" indicates that the sample is odorless or almost odorless.
Unless otherwise specified, approximately 1 g of sample is placed on an evaporation
dish for this observation.
31) Unless otherwise specified, an identification should be carried out with 2～5 mL of a
solution in a test tube with an inner diameter of 1～1.5 cm.
32) Unless otherwise specified, solution characteristics are observed after stir-mixing a
sample in a solvent for 30 seconds～5 minutes.
33) An expression "until the weight becomes constant" upon heating or drying indicates
the following. The weight difference before and after heating or drying for 1 hour is
not more than 0.5 mg when a chemical balance is used. If a micro chemical balance is
used, this means heat treatment is continued until the weight difference is not more
than 0.01 mg. If the total weight is greater than 1 g, this means that the weight
difference is not more than 0.1%.
34) When an expression "approximately" is used for a sample size of a sample, it means
that 90～110% of the specified amount is to be taken.
35) Test methods, which are not prescribed in the specifications and standards, may be
used if they are proven to be more precise. However, if the test result is considered
to be doubtful or affecting the decision, a test should be done and a decision should
be made in accordance with the methods prescribed here.
36) If the standards and specifications are not established in this regulation, or if the
standards and specifications have been established but the test method is not
available, the test method couldbe followed by CAC(Codex Alimentarius Commission),
FCC(Food Chemicals Codex), ASTM(American Society for Testing and Materials), And
AOAC(Association of Official Analytical Chemists) and etc. If the test method is not
available in above test methods, it can be tested according to the test methods
specified in other laws and regulations, the internationally accepted official test
methods, the cirtified major foreign test methods, or the test methods approved by
the Ministry of Food and Drug Safety.
37) Test of food additive which conform to subject of labeling in accordance with article
3 of 「Labeling Standard for Genetically Modified Foods」 follow the test method for
Genetically Modified food of 「Standard and Specification of Food」.
9
38) Identification test of enzyme preparation tested by Activity assay of individual food
additive. However, if it is impossible to test as directed identification method, a change
of substrate, dilution ratio of samples, buffer solution, and reaction temperature should
only be available to the case that scientific justification is confirmed.
[Container]
39) "Hermetic Container" is a container that protects the contents by preventing
penetration of air or other gases during handling or storage.
40) "Light-resistant container" is a container that does not transmit light or protects the
contents from deterioration due to light. If a container does not shield light, it can be
wrapped appropriately and used as a light-shielding container.

10
Ⅱ. Food Additives and Mixed Preparations
1. Standards for Manufacturing and Preparation
1) Standards applying generally to all food additives
(1) Food additives should be treated like food materials and be suitable to the individual
specifications.
(2) Unless it is absolutely indispensable, insoluble minerals such as acidic white clay,
china clay, bentonite, talc, sand, diatomite, magnesium carbonate, and their similar
minerals should not be used in the manufacturing of additives.
2) Mixed Preparations
(1) Additives, which are used to prepare mixed preparations, must be one listed in the
Food Additives Codes and be suitable to the individual specifications. A substance
(except for synthetic additives) recognized as a food additive on the status of product
specific individual standard and specification with time-limit in use can be a
component of additive mix preparation.
(2) When additives mix preparations are prepared, the purpose of the preparation should
be appropriate for use in foods, and the composition of preparation should not be to
alter chemically the original components.
(3) Diluent, which are used to prepare mixed dilution or diluted mixed preparations, must
be one of starch (excluding starches modified and classified as food additives), wheat
flour, glucose, sugar and others recognized generally as food ingredients.
(4) When preparing mixed preparations, additives such as antioxidant, preservatives,
emulsifiers, stabilizers, or dissolving agents may be used if it is indispensable to
maintain the stability in quality and to form necessary shape. The amount of addition
must be kept at a minimum level, where the required technical effects can be
achieved.
3) Genetically Modified Organisms Food Additives
Food additives prepared by using microorganism acquired by genetically modified
organisms technology should be approved on 「Regulation for Examination of
Genetically Modified Organisms Safety Evaluation」(MFDS Notification) under Article 18
of 「Food Sanitation Law」and suitable to specification and standards.
4) Materials of Food Additives and Extraction Solvents
(1) Raw materials such as right inner skin used in the production of gelatin should not
be subjected to a hardening process such as chrome treatment.
(2) Raw materials such as chitin, chitosan, glucosamine, carrageenan, alginic acid and
cochineal extract pigment(including carmine) should be handled hygienically during
collection, storage and transportation.
(3) Extraction solvents used in food additives made from natural animals, plants,
11
 minerals, etc. are water, spirits, and solvents which are noted in the individual
standards of this regulation, or Trichloroethylene and Methylene chloride which are
in compliance with the individual standard of [Table 3]. However, the solvents
used(except water and spirits) should be removed prior to the final product
completion.
(4) 1-hydroxyethylidene-1,1-diphosphoric acid should be used only for manufacturing
Peroxyacetic acid, and specifications shall comply with the specifications of [Annex
3].
5) Gas type Food Additives
Nitrous oxide shall only be charged to high-pressure metal container, size of 2.5
liters or more. [Date of entry into force: 2021.1.1]

12
2. General Use Level
1) The usage of a food additive should be limited to a minimum amount that is
required to achieve its physical, nutritive, and other technical effects.
2) Additives should not be used for purposes to conceal faulty raw materials or
unsanitary processes during food manufacturing processes.
3) Nutritional enhancers added to food should be used to maintain or improve the
nutritional quality of the food, and should not cause excessive intake or unbalanced
intake of nutrients.
4) Food additives shall be used in the manufacturing, processing, cooking or
preservation of food and shall not in themselves be used for direct consumption.
5) Food additives used for the cultivation of food microorganisms, etc. should be listed
wheather on this 「Food Additives Code」or CODEX(as microbial nutrients), and shall
not be remained in the final food products. However, if it remains inevitably, it
should comply with the criteria of use level for each food additive.
6) The food additives with other functional class which are not noted on the major
functional class part of this regulation can be used if the technical effect has been
proved internationally and validity of the use is recognized.
7) Article 6 of the 「Food Hygiene Act」and the standards and specifications set forth
herein may not be applied to those additives when they are used, in the course of
manufacturing, processing, in foods for exports according to the 「Rules and
Regulations for Overseas Trade」, or when they are used in foods to be consumed
on an airplane or a ship traveling overseas with the permission from the Custom's
Superintendent in accordance with article 143 of the 「Customs Regulations」, or
when they are used in foods for the patient with inborn errors in metabolism.
3. Preservation and Distribution Standards
1) Food additives should be hygienically stored and sold, and they should not be located
in places where storage and sale places are unclear. Also, it is necessary to
thoroughly manage the cleaning and insect control.
2) The place of handling of food additives should be protected from rain, snow, etc., and
should not be stored together with chemicals such as chemical agents, pesticides,
toxic substances, etc. which are harmful to human body.
3) Care should be taken not to contaminate foreign material, and separate from other
food additives which may affect quality such as flavor of food additives.
4) Food additives which may cause moisture absorption should be careful not to absorb
moisture.
5) During the transportation and packaging of food additives, care should be taken not to
damage the containers and packaging, and they should be avoided physical shock as
much as possible.
6) Unless otherwise stipulated, it should be stored and distributed in a room temperature
13
avoiding direct sunlight so that physical deformation or rust of containers and
packaging, containing food additives, should not occur.

14
4. Specification of Food Additives
A. Food Additives
Acesulfame Potassium
Acesulfame K

Chemical Formula: C4H4KNO4S

Molecular Weight: 201.24 INS No.: 950

Synonyms: Acesulfame K; Potassium salt of
3,4-dihydro-6-methyl-1,2,3-oxathiazin-4-one CAS No.: 55589-62-3
-2,2-dioxide

Compositional Specifications of Acesulfame Potassium

Content Acesulfame Potassium, when calculated on the dried basis, should contain within
a range of 99.0～101.0% of acesulfame potassium (C4H4KNO4S).
Description Acesulfame Potassium is scentless white crystalline powder with strong
sweet taste.
Identification (1) A solution of 10 mg of Acesulfame Potassium in 1,000 mL of water
shows a maximum absorption band in a wavelength range of 225∼229 nm.
(2) Acesulfame Potassium responds to test of potassium salts in Identification.
(3) 0.2 g of Acesulfame Potassium is dissolved in 2 mL of acetic acid (30→100) and 2
mL of water. Upon adding a few drops of sodium cobalt nitrite solution, yellow
precipitates are formed.
Purity (1) Fluoride : Fluoride : 1 g of Acesulfame Potassium is precisely weighed and is
tested by purity (8) for 「Calcium Citrate」, its content should not be more than 3
ppm.
(2) Lead : When 5.0 g of Acesulfame Potassium is tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content
should not be more than 1.0 ppm.
(3) Other UV absorbing matters : 1 g of Acesulfame Potassium is precisely weighed
and dissolved in water so that the total volume to make 100 mL (Test Solution). 20 μ
l of this Test Solution is injected into a liquid chromatography using the following
operation conditions. When other peaks appear within three times of the retention
time of the main peak, the Test Solution is further diluted with water (50,000 times).
With 20 μl of this diluted solution, the same test is repeated. The sum of peak areas
15
 (for the Test Solution) of all the peaks (excluding the main peak) that appear within
three times of the retention time of the main peak should not be bigger than the area
of the main peak measured with the diluted solution (50,000 times). (not more than
20 ppm as acesulfame potassium).
Operation Conditions
-Detector : UV 227 nm
-Column : 3∼5 um ODS(4.6 mm × 250 mm) or its equivalent
-Mobile Phase : A mixture of acetonitrile : 0.01 mol/l tetrabutyl ammonium hydrogen
sulfate (40 : 60)
-Flow Rate : 1 mL/min
10 mg of each material is weighed and dissolved in water (total volume 1,000 mL). 20 μl
of this solution is injected into liquid chromatography following the above procedure. 20
μl of this solution is injected into liquid chromatography following the above procedure.
The column should be able to separate Acesulfame Potassium and 「ethyl
p-hydroxybenzoate」.
Loss on Drying When Acesulfame Potassium is dried for 2 hours at 105℃, the loss
should not be more than 1.0%.
Assay Dissolve about 0.15 g of Acesulfame Potassium, previously dried and accurately
weighed in 50 mL of acetic acid. This solution is titrated with 0.1 N perchloric acid
solution (indicator : 1 mL of crystal violet·glacial acetic acid solution). At the end
point, the bluish green color of the solution persists for 30 seconds or longer.
Separately, a blank experiment is carried out following the same procedure for
correction.
1 mL of 0.1 N perchloric acid solution = 20.12 mg C4H4KNO4S

16
 Acetic Acid
Chemical Formula: C2H4O2
Molecular Weight: 60.05
Compositional Specifications of Acetic Acid
Content Acetic Acid should contain within a range of 29.0～31.0% of acetic acid (C2H4O2
= 60.05).
Description Acetic Acid is a colorless and clear liquid having a characteristic pungent
odor and an acid taste.
Identification (1) Acetic Acid is strongly acidic.
(2) Acetic Acid responds to the test for Acetate in Identification.
Purity (1) Arsenic : 0.25 g of Acetic Acid transfer into a platinum, quartz, or porcelain
crucible. 10 mL solution of magnesium nitrate in ethyl alcohol (1→50) is added to
the crucible and then alcohol is ignited. It is then reduced to ash by heating at 450∼
550℃. If carbonaceous substance persists, it is wetted with minute amount of nitric
acid, which is further heat-treated at 450∼550℃. After cooling, 3 mL of
hydrochloric acid is added to the residue, which is then dissolved by heating in a
water bath. When test by Arsenic Limit Test is carried out with this test solution, it
should not be more than 4.0 ppm.
(2) Heavy Metals : 3 mL of Acetic Acid is tested by Heavy Metal Limit Test. Its
content should not be more than 10 ppm. In this case, 3 mL of lead standard solution
is used for a color standard.Lead : When 5.0 g of Acetic Acid is tested by Atomic
Absorption Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy,
its content should not be more than 0.5 ppm.
(3) Readily Oxidizable Substances : To 20 mL of Acetic Acid, add 0.3 mL of 0.1 N
potassium permanganate. The color of the solution does not disappear within 30
minutes.
(4) Residue on Evaporation : Proceed as directed under Purity (5) in [Glacial Acetic Acid].
Assay Accurately weigh about 3 g of Acetic Acid, add 15 mL of water. Titrate with 1 N
sodium hydroxide (indicator : 2 drops of phenolphthalein solution).
1 mL of 1 N sodium hydroxide solution = 60.05 mg of C2H4O2

17
 α-Acetolactate decarboxylase
Definition It is an enzyme obtained from a culture of Bacillus subtilis that contains the
gene for α-acetolactate decarboxylase from Bacillus brevis. Dilutant or stabilizer can be
added for the purpose of activity adjustment and quality preservation.
Compositional Specifications of α-acetolactate decarboxylase
Description It is white～dark brown powder, particle, paste or colorless～dark brown
liquid.
Identification When α-acetolactate decarboxylase is proceeded as directed under Activity
Test, it should have the activity as α-acetolactate decarboxylase.
Purity (1) Arsenic : It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(2) Lead ： When 5.0 g of α-acetolactate decarboxylase is tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its
content should not be more than 5.0 ppm.
(3) Coliform Group ： α-acetolactate decarboxylase proceed as directed under
Microbiological Methods for Coliform Group in General Testing Methods「Standards
and Specification for Foods」. It should not be more than 30 per 1 g.
(4) Salmonella ： α-acetolactate decarboxylase is tested by Microbiological Methods for
Salmonella in General Testing Methods 「Standards and Specification for Foods」. It
should be negative (-).
(5) E. coli ： α-acetolactate decarboxylase proceed as directed under Microbiological
Methods for E. coli in General Testing Methods「Standards and Specification for
Foods」. It should be negative (-).
Activity Test (Activity)
∘Analysis Principle : Activity test is based on measuring the absorbance of the mixture in
the following manner: react the enzyme with α-acetolactate to produce acetoin, react
the resultant acetoin with mixture of 1-naphthol and creatine, measure absorbance.
∘Preparation of test Solution : Dissolve the sample in the mixture of MES/Brij 35/NaCL
solution and prepare final diluted solution containing 0.025 ～ 0.075 ADU per 1 mL.
∘Test Procedure : Warm the enzyme solutions, MES buffer, and the substrate in water
bath at 30℃ for approximately 10minutes. Enzyme blank(B1). Pipette 0.2 mL of enzyme
solution and 0.2 mL of MES buffer into a test tube. Mix, and immediately place the
test tube back into the water bath at 30℃ for 20min. Sample value(H1). Pipette 0.2 mL
of enzyme solution and 0.2 mL of subtrate into a test tube. Mix, and immediately place
the test tube into the water bath at 30℃ for 20min. Buffer blank(B2). Pippette 0.2 mL
of MES buffer and 0.2 mL of MES/Brij 35/NaCL solution into a test tube. Mix, and
immediately place the test tube into the water bath at 30℃ for 20min. Buffer
value(H2). Pippette 0.2 mL of MES/Brij 35/NaCL solution and 0.2 mL of substrate into
a test tube. Mix, and immediately place the test tube into the water bath at 30℃ for
20min. Exactly 20 min after mixing of each of solution B1, H1, B2, and H2, remove
from water bath, add 4.6 mL of colour reagent, mix and leave at room temperature for
exactly 40 min. At the end of this 40 min period measure the absorbance of the
18
 solution at 522 nm on a spectrophotometer or equivalent.
∘Preparation of standard curve : Dissolve 0.1 g of acetoin in water in a 100-mL
volumetric flask. Make to volume with water. Dilute 1, 2, 4, 6, and 8 mL of stock
acetoin solution to volume with water in 100 mL volumetric flasks. Pipette 0.4 mL of
the acetoin standard solutions into test tubes. Add 4.6 mL of colour reagent to each
tube, mix, and let the test tube stand at room temperature for exactly 40 min. At the
end of this 40 min period, measure absorbance at 522 nm. Plot optical density values
at 522 nm for the acetoin standards against acetoin concentration(㎍/mL) of standard
and generate a standard curve.
Activity of an enzyme is calculated by the following equation.
Activity of an enzyme(ADU/g) ∆A×F × 5.0 1 × 1 × 1
= 88.1 × 20 0.2 w
∆A : (H1-B1) - (H2-B2)
F : The concentation(㎍/mL) of acetoin against one of absorbance obtained from
standard curve
88.1 : Molecular weight of acetoin
5.0 : The volume of final enzyme solution(mL)
20 : reaction time(min)
0.2 : Taken volume of enzyme solution(mL)
W : Weight of enzyme in 1 mL of enzyme solution(g)
Definition of activity : One α-acetolactate decarboxylase is the amount of enzyme
which, by decarboxylation of α-acetolactate produces 1 umol of acetoin per min under
above the test reaction conditions.
Solutions
∘MES buffer (0.05 M, pH 6.0) : Dissolve 9.76 g of MES2-(N-morpholino) ethanesulphonic
acid in approximately 900 mL of water. Adjust pH
to 6.0 with 1N NaOH. Transfer to a 1,000 mL
volumetric flask and make to volume with water.
This solution may be kept for two weeks at room
temperature.
∘Brij 35 solution, 15% w/v : Dissolve 15.0 g of Brij 35(polyoxyethylene lauryl ether) in
approximately 70 mL of water, heating to 60℃ to aid
dissolution. Cool the solution, transfer to a 100 mL
volumetric flask and make to volume with water. This
solution should be stored in a refrigerator, and can be
kept for up to two months.
∘MES/⦁Brij 35/⦁NaCl solution : Dissolve 48.8 g of MES and 175.32 g of NaCl in
approximately 4,500 mL of water. Add 17 mL of 15% Brij
19
 35 solution. Adjust pH to 6.0 with 1 N NaOH. Transfer to
a 5,000 mL volumetric flask and make to volume with
water. This solution may be kept for two weeks at room
temperature.
∘α-Acetolactate substrate : Pipettte 100 ㎕ of ethyl-2-acetoxy-2- methylacetolactate into
a 50 mL volumetric flask. Add 6.0 mL of 0.5 N NaOH
to the flask and stir for 20 min. Add MES buffer to
bring the volume to approximately 40 mL. Adjust pH to
6.0 with 0.5 N HCl. Make to volume with MES buffer.
This substrate should be made just before use.
∘Colour reagent : Dissolve 5.0 g of 1-naphthol and 0.5 g of creatine in 1 N NaOH, make
to volume with 1 N NaOH in a 500 mL volumetric flask. This colour
reagent should be made fresh just before use
Storage Standards of α-acetolactate decarboxylase
α-acetolactate decarboxylase should be stored in a hermetic container in a cold dark
place.

20
 Acetone
CH3COCH3
Chemical Formula: C3H6O

Molecular Weight: 58.08

Synonyms: 2-Propanone; Dimethyl ketone CAS No.: 67-64-1

Compositional Specifications of Acetone

Content Acetone should contain within a range of 99.5～100.5% of Acetone (C3H6O)
Description Acetone is colorless, transparent, volatile liquid with characteristic odor.
Identification 0.1 mL of acetone is mixed with 10 mL of water, 5 mL of sodium
hydroxide is added, heated, and 5 mL of iodine solution, then yellow precipitate of
iodoform is generated.
Purity (1) Solubility : When 38 mL of Acetone(corresponds to about 30 g) is mixed with
boiled and cooled water(50:50), this solution should be clear at least for 30 minutes.
the same amount of water after 1 hour.
(2) Acid Value (as acetic acid) ： 38 mL of Aceton is mixed with boiled and cooled
water(50:50), titrated with 0.1N sodium hydroxide solution, then the consumption
should not be more than 0.1 mL.(Indicator : phenolphthalein solution)
(3) Alkali Value(as ammonia) : 1 drop of Methyl red solution is added to 25 mL of
water and 0.1 N sulfuric acid is added until red color develops. 23 mL of
Acetone(corresponds to about 18g) is added, titrated with 0.1N sulfuric acid, the
consumption should not be more than 0.1 mL.
(4) Aldehydes(as formaldehyde) : 2.5 mL of Acetone(corresponds to about 2g) is
dissolved in 7.5 mL of water, test solution. 40㎍ of formaldehyde is dissolved in 10 mL
of water, standard solution. 0.15mL of 5% 5.5-dimetheyl-1,3-cyclohexanedione․alcohol
solution is added to test solution and standard solution respectively, and evaporated in
a water bath until acetone is volatilized. Water is added to make 10 mL, vigorously
stirred in an ice bath, rapidly cooled, the turbidity of test solution should not be deeper
than turbidity of standard solution. (not more than 0.002%).
(5) Matters that reduce permanganates ： 10 mL of Acetone is transferred into a
cylinder with a stopper. After adding 0.05 mL of 0.1 N potassium permanganate
solution, it is set aside for 15 minutes. Pale red color should not disappear
completely.
(6) Lead : When 5.0 g of Acetone is tested by Atomic Absorption Spectrophotometry or
Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content should not be more
than 1.0 ppm.
(7) Methyl alcohol : To 1 m each of test solution, where water is added to 10 mL of
acetone to make 100 mL, and methyl alcohol standard solution(40㎍/mL water), 0.2
mL of 10% phosphate and 0.25 mL of potassium permanganate(1→20) are added, and
set aside for 15 minutes. 0.3 mL of sodium bisulfite(1→10) is added and shaken until
it becomes colorless. 5 mL of 80% sulfuric acid cooled in ice is gradually added
21
 while keeping cold. 0.1 m of chromotropic acid(1→100)is added, immersed in a water
bath for 20 minutes, then the purple color in test solutoin should not be deeper than
that of standard solution (not more than 0.05%).
(8) Phenols : 3 mL of acetone is evaporated to dryness at 60℃, 3 drops of sulfuric
acid solution of sodium nitrite(0.1→5) are added, and set aside for 3 minutes. When 3
mL of 2N sodium hydroxide is carefully added, it should not be colored.
(9) Distillation test : When acetone is tested for boiling point and amount of distillate,
95%(v/v) or more should be extracted at 55.1∼57.1℃.
(10) Residue on Evaporation : 125 mL (approximately 100 g) of acetone is dried in a
water bath and is further dried for 30 minutes at 105℃. The weight of the residue
should not be more than 10 ppm.
(11) Refractive Index : Refractive Index of Acetone should be within a range of
1.358~1.360.
(12) Specific Gravity : Specific gravity of Acetone should be within a range of
0.790~0.793.
Water Content Water content of Acetone is determined by water determination
(Karl-Fischer Method) and should not be more than 0.5%.
Assay The content of Acetone is tested by determination of specific gravity. It should
not be more than 0.7930 as specific gravity.

22
 Acetophenone

Chemical Formula: C8H8O

Molecular Weight: 120.15

Synonyms: Methyl phenyl ketone; Acetyl
benzene CAS No.: 98-86-2

Compositional Specifications of Acetophenone

Content Acetophenone should contain not less than 98.0% of Acetophenone (C8H8O).
Description Acetophenone occurs as white crystalline lumps or is a colorless or slightly
yellowish and transparent liquid. It has a characteristic odor.
Identification (1) To 1 drop of Acetophenone, add 1 mL of water, shake well, add 2
drops of sodium nitroprusside solution, add 2 drops of sodium hydroxide solution (3
→10), and shake. A dark red color develops. Add 5 drops of diluted acetic acid. A
deep blue color develops.
(2) 5 mL of a solution, 5 g of semicarbazide hydrochloric acid salt and 5 g of
potassium acetate are dissolved in 15 mL of water, is added to 1 g of Acetophenone.
When 5 mL of alcohol is added to this solution, white crystals are formed after
mixing and settling. The crystals are recrystallized in dilute alcohol. The melting
point is approximately 198℃.
Purity (1) Solidifying Point : Solidifying Point should not be less than 19℃.
(2) Refractive Index : Refractive Index of Acetophenone should be within a range of 1.533
∼1.535.
(3) Clarity and Color of Solution : When 1 mL of Acetophenone is dissolved in 5 mL of
50% alcohol, the solution should be clear.
(4) Chlorides : When Acetophenone is tested by Copper Mesh Test Method in
Halogenated Compounds for Flavoring, it should be appropriate.
Assay Accurately weigh about 1 g of Acetophenone, and proceed as directed under
Method 2 in Aldehyde and Ketone Content in Flavoring Substances Tests. In the
procedure, heat the mixture for 1 hour.
0.5 N hydrochloric acid 1 mL = 60.08 mg of C8H8O

23
 Acid Clay
Definition Acid Clay is obtained by purifying clay minerals such as monmorillonite. Major
components are hydrated aluminum silicate.
Compositional Specifications of Acid Clay
Description Acid Clay is gray～pale yellow fine powder.
Identification (1) 1 g of Acid Clay is placed in a porcelain crucible, where 10 mL of
water and 5 mL of sulfuric acid are added. It is then evaporated to dryness by
heating and cooled. 20 mL of water is added to the crucible, which is then boiled
again for 2～3 minutes. The mixture is filtered. The color of the residue is gray.
(2) The filtrate in (1) is showed the reaction of aluminum salts in Identification.
Purity (1) pH : 1 g of Acid Clay is suspended in 50 mL of water, which is then filtered.
pH of the filtrate should be 3.0～5.0.
(2) Arsenic : It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(3) Lead : 3.75 g of Acid Clay, previously dried, is placed in a 250 mL beaker, where
100 mL of diluted hydrochloric acid (1→25) is added and mixed well. It is then
boiled covered with watch glass for 15 minutes. It is cooled and allowed to stand for
settling the insoluble substances. It is then filtered through a filter paper at a high
flow rate. The residues on the filter paper are washed four times with 25 mL each
of hot water. Washing water is added to the previous filtrate, which is concentrated
to approximately 20 mL by heating gently. If precipitates are formed, 2～3 drops of
nitric acid are added and boiled again. After cooling to room temperature, the
concentrated filtrate is filtered through a filter paper into a 50 mL beaker at a high
flow rate. The beaker and the residue on the filter paper are washed with water and
the washing water is added to the filtrate. The total volume is brought up to 50 mL
with water, Test Solution. When the test solution is tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content
should not be more than 40.0 ppm.
Loss on Drying When 2 g of Acid Clay is dried at 105℃ until the weight becomes
constant, the weight loss should not be more than 10.0%.

24
 Active Carbon
Synonyms: Carbon, activated CAS No.: 7440-44-0
Definition This is a obtained from the substance containing carbon, which include
sawdust, wood pieces, fibers of palm tree barks, lignite, or petroleum, is carbonized
and activated to prepare active carbon.
Compositional Specifications of Active Carbon
Description Active Carbon is scentless and tasteless black powder or solid.
Identification (1) 0.5 g of Active Carbon(as is for powder, ground for solid) is placed in
a test tube. It is heated with a direct flam in a flowing air. It doesn't catch fire but
does combust. Combustion gas is passed through an aqueous solution of potassium
hydroxide, which turns the solution white and turbid.
(2) 0.1 g of Active Carbon (as is for powder, ground for solid) is well mixed with 10
mL of diluted methylene blue solution and 2 drops of hydrochloric acid by shaking.
When the mixture is filtered through a quantitative filter paper (5 type C), the filtrate
should be colorless.
Purity Preparation of Test Solution：Active Carbon (as is for powder, ground for solid)
is dried for 3 hours at 110∼120℃. 180 mL of water containing 0.1 mL of diluted
nitric acid (1→100) is added to 4 g of the dried material, which is weakly boiled for
10 minutes. Cool the solution, and dilute the resulting solution to 200 mL with water
and filtered through a quantitative filter paper (5 type C). Discard approximately
initial 30 mL of the filtrate. Collected filtrate (Test Solution) is tested as follows.
(1) Chloride ： 1 mL of Test Solution is tested for Chloride. Test for chloride content
should not be more than correspond to 0.3 mL of 0.01 N hydrochloric acid.
(2) Sulfate : 2.5 mL of Test Solution is tested for sulfates. Test for sulfate content
should not be more than correspond to 0.5 mL of 0.01 N sulfuric acid.
(3) Arsenic : It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(4) Lead : When test Solution is tested by Atomic Absorption Spectrophotometry or
Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content should not be more
than 5.0 ppm.
(5) Zinc : When test Solution is tested by Atomic Absorption Spectrophotometry or
Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content should not be more
than 25 ppm.
(6) Cyanogen compound : Weight 5g of Active Carbon is precisely into a flask. Add 50
mL of water and 2 g of tartaric acid, and attach distilling apparatus. 2 mL of 1N
sodium hydroxide solution and 10 mL of water are added in the collector, and the
end of condenser is immersed in this solution. It is distilled while being cooled with
ice and collected in 25 mL of distillate. Water is added to distillate to make 50 mL
and 1 mL of iron sulphate solution (1→20) is added to 25 mL of this solution. Heat
until boiled, and then cool, filter. When adding 1 mL of hydrochloric acid and 0.5 mL
of diluted iron chloride solution to this solution, blue color should not be showed.
25
(7) Aromatic hydrocarbon : Add 12 mL of cyclohexane to 1 g of Active Carbon , and
attach a reflux condenser. Heat for 2 hours in a water bath and cool to use test
solution. Transfer Test solution into a nestler tube. When this solution is observed
with irradiating ultraviolet rays, solution should not be thick than the color of the
solution, which is obtained by processing 12 mL of solution made by dissolving 0.1
mg of quinine sulfate in 1,000 mL of 0.1N sulfuric acid in the same manner as test
solution.

26
 5'-Adenylic acid

Chemical Formula: C10H14N5O7P

Molecular Weight: 347.22 CAS No.: 61-19-8

Definition 5'-Adenylic acid is obtained by hydrolyzing (with enzyme) the hexane

extracted from yeast (Candida utilis, Kluyueromyces fragilis) with hot water under the
presence of salts..
Compositional Specifications of 5'-Adenylic acid
Content If 5'-Adenylic acid is converted to a dehydrated form, it should contain 98.0∼
102.0% 5'-adenylic acid (C10H14N5O7P).
Description 5'-Adenylic acid is white crystalline powder.
Identification (1) 0.2 g of 5'-Adenylic acid is precisely weighted and dissolved in 10 mL
of 0.1 N sodium hydroxide solution, which is diluted to 200 mL with water. 2 mL of
this solution is diluted to 100 mL with 0.01 N hydrochloric acid. The resulting
solution has a maximum absorption band near 257 nm.
(2) 1 mL of hydrochloric acid and 1 mL of bromine solution are added to 3 mL
aqueous solution of 5'-Adenylic acid (3→10,000), which is then heated for 30
minutes. Bromine is removed in a flowing air. 0.2 mL of orcin solution in alcohol (1→
10) is added to this solution. To the resulting solution, 3 mL of ammonium ferric
sulfate · hydrochloric acid solution (1→1,000) is added and heated for 20 minutes in
a water bath. The final solution turns green.
(3) 0.25 g of 5'-Adenylic acid is precisely weighted and dissolved in 1 mL of sodium
hydroxide solution (1→25), which is diluted to 5 mL of water. When 2 mL of
magnesia solution is added to this solution, precipitates are not observed. To
resulting solution, 7 mL of nitric acid is added and boiled for 10 minutes in a water
bath. When the resulting solution is neutralized with sodium hydroxide solution (1→
25), it shows the reaction of (B) Phosphate Salts in Identification.
Purity (1) Arsenic : It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(2) Lead : When 5.0 g of 5'-Adenylic acid is tested by Atomic Absorption
27
 Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content
should not be more than 10.0 ppm.
(3) Solution: 0.5g of 5'-Cytidylic acid is weighted and dissolved in 2mL of sodium
hydroxide solution, which is diluted to 10mL with water. the solution is nearly
colorless and clear.
(4) Other nucleic acid hydrolysates: 0.1g of 5'-Cytidylic acid is weighted and dissolved
in 0.5mL of sodium hydroxide solution, which is diluted to 20mL with water. When 1
㎕ of the test solution is tested with the mixed solution of acetone·ammonia
solution·n-propanol (2:5:6) by Thin Layer Chromatography, it should not show spots
except for one original spot. Supporting material of thin layer plate must be used as
dried one with silicagel(added fluorescent agent) for 1 hour at 110℃. When the
solvent is developed up to 10cm from the base line, stop the developing. After
drying with wind, the plates are observed under a UV light (about 250nm
wavelength). The control solution is not used.
(5) Absorption Ratio : 20 mg of 5'-Adenylic acid is precisely weighted and dissolved in
hydrochloric acid (1→1,000) (total volume = 1,000 mL). Absorptions A1, A2, and A3
are measured at 250 nm, 260 nm, and 280 nm are measured. A1/A2 and A3/A2 should
be 0.82∼0.88 and 0.19∼0.23.
Loss on Drying When 5'-Adenylic acid is dried for 4 hours at 120℃, the weight loss
should not be more than 6.0%.
Assay 0.2 g of 5'-Adenylic acid is precisely weighted and dissolved in 10 mL of 0.1 N
sodium hydroxide solution , which is diluted to 200 mL with water. 2 mL of this
solution is further diluted to 200 mL with 0.01 N hydrochloric acid (Test Solution).
Absorption A of Test Solution is measured at 257 nm with 1cm path length using 0.01
N hydrochloric acid as a reference. The content of 5'-adenylic acid is obtained by the
following equation.

Content(%) =
0.2
weight of the sample(g)
×
229.9 × A
100 – loss on drying(%)
× 100

28
 Adipic Acid
Chemical Formula: C6H10O4

Molecular Weight: 146.14 INS No.: 355

Synonyms: Hexanedioic acid CAS No.: 124-04-9

Compositional Specifications of Adipic Acid

Content Adipic Acid should contain within a range of 99.6～101.0% of adipic acid (C6H10O4).
Description Adipic Acid occurs as white crystals or crystalline powder. It is readily
soluble in alcohol but hardly soluble in water.
Purity (1) Arsenic : It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(2) Lead : When 5.0 g of Adipic Acid is tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content
should not be more than 2.0 ppm.
(3) Mercury : When Adipic Acid is tested by Mercury Limit Test, its content should not
be more than 1.0 ppm.
(4) Melting Point : Melting point of Adipic Acid should be within a range of 151.5～
154.0℃.
Water Content Water content of Adipic Acid as determined by water content
determination method (Karl-Fischer Method) should not be more than 0.2%.
Assay 1.5 g of Adipic Acid ,accurately weighed, is transferred into a Erlene Meyer flask
with a stopper, where 75 mL of freshly boiled and cooled water is added. It is then
titrated with 0.5 N sodium hydroxide solution (indicator : 2～3 drops of
phenolphthalein solution).
1 mL of 0.5 N sodium hydroxide = 36.54 mg of C6H10O4

29
 DL-Alanine

Chemical Formula: C3H7NO2

Molecular Weight: 89.09 INS No.: 639

Synonyms: DL-2-Aminopropanoic acid CAS No.: 302-72-7

Compositional Specifications of DL-Alanine

Content DL-Alanine, when calculated on the dried basis, should contain within a range
of 98.5～102.0% of DL-alanine (C3H7NO2).
Description DL-Alanine occurs as a colorless to white crystalline powder having a sweet
taste.
Identification (1) Dissolve 0.2 g of DL-Alanine in 10 mL of diluted sulfuric acid. Add 0.1
g of potassium permanganate, and boil. An odor of acetaldehyde is evolved.
(2) To 5 mL of DL-Alanine solution (1→1,000), add 1 mL of ninhydrin solution. and
heat for 3 minutes. A purple color develops.
Purity (1) Clarity and Color of Solution : 1.0 g of DL-Alanine is dissolved in 10 mL of
water. It is colorless and clear.
(2) pH : pH of DL-Alanine solution (1→20) should be within a range of 5.5～7.0
(3) Arsenic : It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(4) Lead : When 5.0 g of DL-Alanine is tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content
should not be more than 5.0 ppm.
Loss on Drying When DL-Alanine is dried for 3 hours at 105℃, the weight loss should not
be more than 0.3%.
Residue on Ignition Residue on Ignition of DL-Alanine should not be more than 0.2%.
Assay Accurately weigh about 0.2 g of DL-Alanine, dissolve it in 3 mL of formic acid
and proceed as directed under Assay in 「Glycine」.
1 mL of 0.1 N perchloric acid = 8.909 mg of C3H7NO2

30
 L-Alanine
CH3CH(NH2)COOH

Chemical Formula: C3H7NO2

Molecular Weight: 89.09

Synonyms: L-2-Aminopropanoic acid CAS No.: 56-41-7

Compositional Specifications of L-Alanine

Content If L-Alanine, when calculated on the dried basis, should contain 98.5∼101.5%
L-alanine (C3H7NO2).
Description L-Alanine is white scentless sweet crystalline powder.
Identification (1) 1 mL of ninhydrine solution (0.2→100) is added to 5 mL of L-Alanine
solution (1→1,000). Upon heating for 3 minutes in a water bath, this solution
becomes violet.
(2) 0.2 g of L-Alanine is dissolved in 10 mL of water and 0.1 g of potassium
permanganate is added. Upon boiling, smell of acetaldehyde is generated.
Purity (1) Specific Rotation : 10 g of L-Alanine, previously dried, is dissolved in 6 N
hydrochloric acid, where the total volume of the solutions 100 mL. Optical density of this
solution should be within a range of ＝ +13.5∼+15.5°
(2) Lead : When 5.0 g of L-Alanine is tested by Atomic Absorption Spectrophotometry
or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content should not be more
than 5.0 ppm.
(3) Arsenic : It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(4) Chloride: When 0.07 g of L-Alanine is tested by Chloride Limit Test, its content
should not be more than the amount that corresponds to 0.2 mL of 0.01 N
hydrochloric acid.(Not be more than 0.1%)
Loss on Drying When L-Alanine is dried for 3 hours at 105℃, the loss should not be
more than 0.3%.
Residue on Ignition Residue on ignition of L-Alanine should not be more than 0.2%.
Assay Proceed as directed under Assay of [L-Serine]
1 mL of 0.1 N perchloric acid solution ＝ 8.909 mg C3H7NO2

31
 Alfalfa Extract

INS No.: 161b

CAS No.: 127-40-2

Definition Alfalfa Extract is a pigment prepared by the following procedure. Alfalfa is

extracted with organic solvents such as acetone, isopropyl alcohol, ethyl alcohol,
methyl alcohol, hexane, and methylene chloride. The extract is saponified to remove
chlorophyll. Carotinoid is extracted and purified from the resultant with organic
solvents. Its major pigment component is Lutein Dilutant, stabilizer, or solvent can be
added for the purpose of color value adjustment and quality preservation.
Compositional Specifications of Alfalfa Extract
Content Color value of Alfalfa Extract should be more than the indicated value.
Description Alfalfa Extract is deep yellowish brown liquid with a slight characteristic
scent.
Identification Test Solution obtained in Color Value section have a maximum absorption
band near 445 nm.
Purity (1) Arsenic : It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(2) Lead : When 5.0 g of Alfalfa Extract is tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content
should not be more than 10.0 ppm.
(3) Residual Solvents : When Alfalfa Extract is tested by Purity (5) for Paprika Extract
Pigments, the content of residual solvents should be,
Acetone
Isopropyl alcohol Not more than 50ppm (individual or
Methyl
Hexane alcohol total if combined)

Mchloride
ethylene Not more than 10ppm
Assay (Color Value) Appropriate amount of Alfalfa Extract is precisely weighted so that
the absorption is within 0.3～0.7 and dissolved in chloroform so that the total volume is
100 mL (if it is water soluble, water is used). 1 mL of this solution is diluted to 100
mL with chloroform (Test Solution). Using chloroform as a reference solution,
absorption A is measured at the maximum absorption near 445 nm with 1 cm path
length. Color value is obtained using the following equation.
Color Value ＝
A × 1,000
weight of the sample(g)

32
 Alginic Acid

Chemical Formula: (C6H3O6)n INS No.: 400

Equivalent measured value(Average) 200.00 CAS No.: 9005-32-7

Definition Alginic Acid is a carbohydrate obtained from brown algae (Phaeophyceae).

Chemically, it is a linear glycuronoglycan consisting mainly of pyranose ring type of β
-(1→4) linked D- mannuronic acid and α-1,4 -linked L- gluronic acid.
Compositional Specifications of Alginic Acid
Content On the dried basis, Alginic Acid contains not less than 20.0 and not more than
of 23.0% carbon dioxide (CO2), equivalent to not less than 91.0 and not more than of
104.5% alginic acid.
Description Alginic Acid is white, pale yellowish brown granule or filamentous powder
having a slight characteristic odor and taste.
Identification (1) 1 g of Alginic Acid is dissolved in 150 mL of 0.1 N sodium hydroxide
solution. When 1 mL of calcium chloride solution is added to 5 mL of this solution,
voluminous gelatinous precipitates are formed.
(2) When 1 mL of diluted sulfuric acid is added to 5 mL of this solution, heavy
gelatinous precipitates are formed.
(3) Approximately 5 mg of Alginic Acid is placed in a test tube, where 5 mL of water
is added. 1 mL of freshly prepared solution of 1g naphtha resorcin in 100 mL alcohol
and 5 mL of hydrochloric acid are added to the test tube, which is boiled for 3
minutes and cooled to 15℃. The content is transferred into a 30 mL separatory funnel
with a stopper and the test tube is washed with 5 mL of water, which is added to the
funnel. It is then extracted with 15 mL of isopropyl ether. Separately, a blank test is
carried out. Isopropyl ether extract from the sample shows deeper violet color than
that from the blank test.
Purity (1) Arsenic : It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(2) Lead : When 5.0 g of Alginic Acid is tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content
should not be more than 5.0 ppm.
(3) Cadmium : When 5.0 g of Alginic Acid is tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content
should not be more than 1.0 ppm.
(4) Mercury : When 0.1 g of Alginic Acid is tested by Mercury Test Method, its
content should not be more than 1.0 ppm.
(5) Insoluble substances : 1 g of Alginic Acid is dissolved in 100 mL of 0.1 N sodium
hydroxide solution. It is then centrifuged and the supernatant is discarded. The
residue is washed five time with water by mixing, centrifuged and decanted. The
residue is transferred by means of water to a tared glass filter, dried for 1 hour at
105℃, cooled and weighed. The amount of the residue should not be more than 10 mg.
33
 (6) pH : Suspension (3→100) of Alginic Acid should be pH 2.0～3.5.
(7) Total Viable Aerobic Count : When Alginic Acid is tested by Microbe Test Methods
for Total Viable Aerobic Count (Number of General Germs) in General Test Method
in 「Standards and Specifications for Foods」, it should not be more than 5,000
colonies per 1 g
(8) E. Coli : When Alginic Acid is tested by Microbe Test Methods for E. Coli in
General Test Method 「Standards and Specifications for Foods」, it should be
negative (-).
(9) Salmonella : When Alginic Acid is tested by Microbe Test Methods for Salmonella
in General Test Method 「Standards and Specifications for Foods」, it should be
negative (-).
(10) Number of Fungi : When Alginic Acid is tested by Microbe Test Methods for
Number of Fungi in General Test Method in 「Standards and Specifications for Food
s」, it should not be more than 500 colonies per 1 g
Ash 3 g of Alginic Acid is weighed and transferred into a porcelain crucible that is
previously made weight constant and tared. It is then reduced to ash at 650℃ until
black carbon disappears. It is then allowed to cool down in a desiccator (silica gel).
The amount of ash should not be more than 4%.
Loss on Drying 3 g of Alginic Acid is dried for 4 hours at 105℃. The weight loss on
drying should not be more than 15%.
Assay 250mg of Alginic Acid is dried and analyzed as directed under the Content
Analysis for 「Xanthan Gum」.
1 mL of 0.25 N sodium hydroxide solution ＝ 25 mg alginic acid (Equivalent Value : 200.00)

34
 Allyl Caproate
CH3(CH2)4COOCH2CH=CH2
Chemical Formula: C9H16O2
Molecular Weight: 156.22
Synonyms: Allyl hexanoate; 2-Propenyl
CAS No.: 123-68-2
hexanoate

Compositional Specifications of Allyl Caproate

Content Allyl Caproate should be contain not less than 98.0% of Allyl Caproate (C9H16O2)
98.0%.
Description Allyl Caproate is colorless～pale yellow transparent liquid with a
characteristic scent.
Identification To 1 mL of Allyl Caproate, add 5 mL of 10 % of alcoholic solution of KOH
and heat in a water bath, its characteristic aroma disappears and an odor of allyl
alcohol is produced. When this solution is acidified with dilute sulfuric acid, a scent of
caproic acid is produced.
Purity (1) Specific Gravity : Specific gravity of Allyl Caproate should be within a range
of 0.884∼0.890.
(2) Refractive Index : Refractive Index of Allyl Caproate should be within a range of
1.422∼1.426.
(3) Clarity and Color of Solution : When 1 mL of Allyl Caproate is dissolved in 6 mL
of 70% alcohol, the solution should be clear.
(4) Acid value : Acid value should not be more than 1 as determined by Acid Value in
Flavoring Substances Test.
Assay Approximately 1g of Allyl Caproate is tested by Ester Value and Ester Content in
Flavoring Substances Tests.
1 mL of 0.5 N alcoholic potassium hydroxide solution ＝ 78.11mg C9H16O2

35
 Allyl Cyclohexanepropionate

Chemical Formula: C12H20O2

Molecular Weight: 196.29

Synonyms: Allyl 3-cyclohexylpropionate CAS No.: 2705-87-5

Compositional Specifications of AllyI Cyclohexanepropionate

Content Allyl Cyclohexanepropionate should contain not less than 98.0% of allyl
cyclohexylpropionate (C12H20O2).
Description Allyl Cyclohexanepropionate is a colorless to light yellow and transparent
liquid having a characteristic odor.
Identification To 1 mL of Allyl Cyclohexanepropionate, add 5 mL of 10% alcoholic
solution of potassium hydroxide. Heat in a water bath, attached a reflux condenser, for
30 minutes. The characteristic odor disappears, and an odor of alcohol develops.
Purity (1) Specific Gravity : Specific gravity should be within a range of 0.945～0.950
(2) Refractive Index : Refractive Index should be within a range of 1.457～1.462
(3) Clarity and Color of Solution : When 1 mL of Allyl Cyclohexanepropionate is
dissolved in 4 mL of 80% alcohol, the solution should be clear.
(4) Acid value : Acid value of Allyl Cyclohexanepropionate is tested by Acid Value in
Flavoring Substance Test. It should not be more than 5.
Assay
Accurately weigh about 1.5 g of Allyl Cyclohexanepropionate, and proceed as directed
under Ester Value and Ester Content in Flavoring Substances Tests.
0.5 N Ethanolic potassium hydroxide 1 mL = 98.15 mg of C12H20O2

36
 Allyl Isothiocyanate
CH2＝CHCH2N＝C＝S

Chemical Formula: C4H5NS

Molecular Weight: 99.15

Synonyms: 3-Isothiocyanatopropane CAS No.: 57-06-7

Compositional Specifications of Allyl Isothiocyanate

Content Allyl Isothiocyanate should contain not less than 93.0% of allyl isothiocyanate
(C4H5NS).
Description AIIyI Isothiocyanate is a transparent and colorless to light yellow liquid
having a strong and irritating odor.
Identification (1) Measure 3 mL of Allyl Isothiocyanate, add gradually 4 mL of sulfuric
acid while cooling, and shake. A gas is evolved. The solution becomes transparent
yellow and gradually viscous, and the strong, irritating odor disappears.
(2) To 2 mL of Allyl Isothiocyanate, add 3 mL of alcohol and 4 mL of ammonia
solution, warm to about 50℃, and allow to stand. The solution is transparent at first,
but after about 3 hours, crystals appear.
Purity (1) Specific Gravity : Specific gravity of Allyl Isothiocyanatee should be within a
range of 1.013～1.020.
(2) Refractive Index : Refractive Index of Allyl Isothiocyanate should be within a range
of 1.527～1.531.
(3) Carbon Disulfide, Petroleum Oil, Refined Oil, Fatty Oil : When 4 mL of sulfuric acid
is added to 3 mL of Allyl Isothiocyanate, it should not turn red or turbid. It also
should not form oily layer.
(4) Phenols and Thiocyanate Compounds : Measure 1.0 mL of Allyl Isothiocyanate,
dissolve in 5 mL of alcohol, and add 1 drop of ferric chloride solution. Neither red
nor blue color develops.
Assay Accurately weigh about 3 g of Allyl Isothiocyanate, and dissolve in alcohol to
make 100 mL. Take 5 mL of this solution, add 5 mL of ammonia solution, 50 mL of
0.1 N silver nitrate. Equip with a reflux condenser, and heat for 1 hour in a water
bath. Cool, add water to make exactly 100 mL, and filter through a dry filter paper.
Discard about 10 mL of the initial filtrate. Take 50 mL of the subsequent filtrate, add
5 mL of nitric acid and 2 mL of ferric ammonium sulfate solution, and titrate the
excess silver nitrate with 0.1 N ammonium thiocyanate. Perform a blank test in the
same manner, separately.
1 mL of 0.1 N silver nitrate = 4.958 mg of C4H5NS

37
 Aluminium Ammonium Sulfate
Crystal : Ammonium Alum
Dried : Burnt Ammonium Alum
Chemical Formula: AlNH4(SO4)2‧0∼12H2O INS No.: 523
CAS No.:
7784-25-0(anhydride)
Synonyms: Ammonium alum
7784-26-1(12hydrates)

Definition Aluminum Ammonium Sulfate occurs as crystals (dodecahydrate) called

Aluminum Ammonium Sulfate and a dried substance called Aluminum Ammonium Sulfate
(dried).
Compositional Specifications of Aluminum Ammonium Sulfate
Content Aluminum Ammonium Sulfate, when calculated on the dried basis at 200℃ for 4
hours, should contain not less than 96.5% of aluminum ammonium sulfate
[AlNH4(SO4)2].
Description Aluminum Ammonium Sulfate occurs as colorless to white crystals, powder
flakes, granules, or lumps. It is odorless and has an astringent taste.
Identification Aluminum Ammonium Sulfate solution (1→50) responds to all tests for
Aluminum Salt, Ammonium Salt, and Sulfate (A) and (B) in Identification.
Purity (1) Clarity and Color of Solution or water-insoluble substances : Proceed as
directed under Purity (1) in 「Aluminum Potassium Sulfate」.
(2) Arsenic : It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(3) Lead : Aluminum Ammonium Sulfate is tested by Purity (2) for 「Sodium
Metaphosphate」(not more than 3.0 ppm).
(4) Mercury : When Aluminum Ammonium Sulfate is tested by Mercury Limit Test, its
content should not be more than 1.0 ppm.
(5) Selenium : 0.2 g of Aluminum Ammonium Sulfate is precisely weighed and is tested
by purity (6) for 「Sulfuric acid」(not more than 30 ppm).
(6) Fluoride : 1 g of Aluminum Ammonium Sulfate is precisely weighed and is tested
by Purity (8) for 「Calcium Citrate」(not more than 30 ppm).
(7) Alkali metals and alkali earth metals : Weigh 1 g of Aluminum Ammonium Sulfate,
dissolve in 100 mL of water, and add sufficient amount of ammonia solution to make
it alkaline (indicator : methyl red solution). Boil until the precipitate of aluminum is
no longer formed and filter it. The filtrate is evaporated to dryness and ignited, the
amount of residue should not be more than 5 mg.
(8) Iron : 0.054 g of Aluminum Ammonium Sulfate, previously dried for 4 hours at 20
0℃, dissolve in 6 mL of nitric acid(1→10) and water to make 20 mL. After adding
0.05 mg of ammonium peroxydisulfate and 5 mL ammonium thiocyanate solution(2→25),
shake and mix, and 15 mL of n-butyl alcohol is added and mixed by shaking. The
color of n-butyl alcohol layer should not be deeper than that of the color standard
solution. The color standard solution is prepared by using 1 mL of iron standard
38
 solution with adding 6 mL of nitric acid(1→10) and water to make 20 mL, following
the same procedure as the sample.
Assay Proceed as directed under Assay for 「Aluminum Potassium Sulfate」.
1 mL of 0.01 M EDTA = 2.371 mg of AINH4(SO4)2

39
 Aluminium Potassium Sulfate
Crystal: Potassium Alum or Alum
Desiccated: Burnt Alum

Chemical Formula: AlK(SO4)2‧0∼12H2O INS No.: 522

CAS No.:
Synonyms: Potassium alum 10043-67-1(anhydrous)
7784-24-9(12hydrates)

Definition Aluminum Potassium Sulfate occurs as crystals (dodecahydrate) called

Aluminum Potassium Sulfate and a dried substance called Aluminum Potassium Sulfate
(dried).
Compositional Specifications of Aluminum Potassium Sulfate
Content Aluminum Potassium Sulfate, when calculated on the dried basis for 4 hours at
200℃, should contain not less than 96.5% of aluminum potassium disulfate [AlK(SO4)2]
Description Aluminum Potassium Sulfate occurs as colorless to white crystals, powder,
flakes, granules, or lumps. It is odorless and has an astringent taste.
Identification (1) The aqueous solution of Aluminum Potassium Sulfate (1→20) responds
to all tests for Aluminum Salt and Sulfate (A) and (C) in Identification.
(2) Aluminum Potassium Sulfate solution (1→20) responds to the tests for Potassium
Salt (A) in Identification.
Purity (1) Clarity and Color of Solution or water-insoluble substances : To 1 g of
crystals of Aluminum Potassium Sulfate, 10 mL of water is added and dissolved. It is
colorless and shall be almost clear. For water-insoluble substances, weigh 2 g of the
dried substance, and add 200 mL of water. Heat for 10 minutes, cool, glass filter
through a glass filter (lG4) that is previously dried at 105℃ for 2 hours, the amount
should not be more than 40 mg(no more than 2.0 %).
(2) Arsenic : It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(3) Lead : Aluminum Potassium Sulfateis tested by purity (2) for 「Sodium
Metaphosphate」(not more than 5.0 ppm).
(4) Mercury : When Aluminum Potassium Sulfate is tested by Mercury Limit Test, its
content should not be more than 1.0 ppm.
(5) Selenium : 0.2 g of Aluminum Potassium Sulfate is precisely weighed and is tested
by purity (6) for 「Sulfuric acid」(not more than 30 ppm).
(6) Fluoride : 1 g of Aluminum Potassium Sulfate is precisely weighed and is tested by
purity (8) for 「Calcium Citrate」(not more than 30 ppm).
(7) Iron : 0.054 g of Aluminum Potassium Sulfate, previously dried for 4 hours at 200℃,
is dissolved in 6 mL of nitric acid(1→10) and water to make 20 mL. Add 0.05 mg of
ammonium peroxydisulfate and 5 mL ammonium thiocyanate solution(2→25), shake
and mix, and 15 mL of n-butyl alcohol is added and mixed by shaking. The color of
n-butyl alcohol layer should not be deeper than that of the color standard solution.
40
 The color standard solution is prepared by using 1 mL of iron standard solution with
adding 6 mL of nitric acid(1→10) and water to make 20 mL, following the same
procedure as the sample.
Assay Accurately weigh about 0.8 g of powdered Aluminum Potassium Sulfate,
previously dried at 200℃ for 4 hours, add 100 mL of water, dissolve by heating a
water bath and shaking, filter, and wash the insoluble residue thoroughly with water.
Combine the filtrate and the washings, add water to make exactly 200 mL. Measure
exactly 25 mL of this solution, add exactly 50 mL of 0.01 M EDTA, and heat to
boiling. After cooling, add 7 mL of sodium acetate solution and 85 mL of absolute
ethanol, and titrate the excess EDTA with 0.01 M zinc acetate (indicator : 3 drops of
xylenol orange solution) until the yellow color of the solution changes to red.
1 mL of 0.01 EDTA = 2.582 mg of AIK(SO4)2

41
 Amidated Pectin

INS No.: 440

CAS No.: 56645-02-4
Definition Amidated Pectin is polymer of refined carbohydrate obtained by processing
pectin, which is obtained from extracting citrus fruits or apples with hot water or
acidic aqueous solution, with ammonia in alkali condition. The main parts of pectin
chain is composed of a-1,4 combination of D-galacturonic acid unit. Some of Carboxyl
Group are methyl esterificated and amidated. Others exist as the form of free acid or
ammonium, potassium, and sodium salt. Upon the purpose of use, sugars can be
added to standardize the property of matter or food additives which is used as buffer
for adjusting of acidity can be used.
Compositional Specifications of Amidated Pectin
Content Amidated Pectin is white~brown pale powder or granule. It is odorless or has
slightly characteristic odor.
Identification (1) To certain amount of 1% of Amidated Pectin solution, same amount of
alcohol is added, then precipitate of transparent gelatin is formed.
(2) To 10 mL of 1% Amidated Pectin solution, 1 mL of nitric acid thorium is added,
mixed, and set aside for 2 minutes, then precipitate or gel is formed.
(3) To 5 mL of 1% Amidated Pectin solution, 1 mL of sodium hydroxide is added, set
aside for 15 minutes at the room temperature, then gel is formed.
(4) To the gel formed from (3), 1 mL of hydrochloric acid is added, acidified, shaken
well, then voluminous colorless gelatin precipitate formed. When it is boiled, white
cohesion is formed.
Purity (1) Arsenic : It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(2) Lead : When 5.0 g of Amidated Pectin is tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content
should not be more than 5.0 ppm.
(3) Cadmium : When 5.0 g of Amidated Pectin is tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content
should not be more than 1.0 ppm.
(4) Mercury : When Amidated Pectin is tested by Mercury Limit Test, its content
should not be more than 1.0 ppm.
(5) Residual solvent : 0.1 g of Amidated Pectin is precisely weighed, 10 mL of diluted
inner standard solution(1→25) is added, the stopper is placed, and mixed until being
dispersed equally. This solution is transferred to ultrafilter centrifugal filtration tube,
centrifuged for 30 minutes at 5,000rpm, and the filtrate is test solution. However,
tert-butyl alcohol(1→1,000) is used as inner standard solution. Separately, 0.1 g each
of methyl alcohol and isopropyl alcohol is precisely measured and water is added to
100 mL. Again, 10 mL of this solution and 4 mL of inner standard solution are
42
 weighed and water is added to make 100 mL, mixed standard solution. 2μl each of
test solution and mixed standard solution is weighed and injected into gas
chromatography under following operation condition. Ratio of methyl alcohol and
isopropyl alcohol peak against tert-butyl alcohol peak, QT1, QT2 and QS1, QS2, is
measured respectively, and measure the content of methyl alcohol and isopropyl
alcohol under following equation, it should be not more than 1.0% as individual or
total if combined
Content Weight of methyl alcohol(g) × QT1
(%)= of methyl alcohol Weight of sample(g) QS1
Content Weight of isopropyl alcohol(g) × QT2
(%)= of isopropyl alcohol Weight of sample(g) QS2
QT1 : Ratio of methyl alcohol peak against tert-butyl alcohol peak in Test Solution
QT2 : Ratio of 2-propyl alcohol peak against tert-butyl alcohol peak in Test Solution
QS1 : Ratio of methyl alcohol peak against tert-butyl alcohol peak in mixed standard
Solution
QS2 : Ratio of isopropyll alcohol peak against tert-butyl alcohol peak in mixed standard
Solution
Operation Condition
Column : PLOT Q or its equivalent
Detector : Hydrogen Flame Ionization Detector (FID)
Temperature at injection hole : 200℃
Column Temperature : 120℃
Detector Temperature : 300℃
Carrier gas : Nitrogen or Helium
(6) Amide group : 5 g of Amidated Pectin is precisely weighed and transferred into a
beaker, 5 mL of hydrochloric acid and 100 mL of 60% ethyl alcohol are added,
stirred for 10 minutes, filtered with a glass filter(1G3 or its equivalent). 60% of
residue in a glass filter is washed with 15 mL each of 60% mixture of ethyl alcohol:
hydrochloric acid(20:1) six times, washed solution is washed with 60% ethyl alcohol
until it doesn't react by Chloride Limit Test, and washed with 20 mL of ethyl alcohol
again. It is dried for 2.5 hours at 105℃, cooled in a desiccator, and weighed. The
amount which corresponds to 1/10 of the weight of the dried substance is precisely
weighed. Then the weight is W(mg). To this solution, 2 mL of ethyl alcohol is added
and wetted, 100 mL of freshly boiled and cooled water is added, shaken, and mixed.
5 drops of phenolphthalein solution, titrated with 0.1N sodium hydroxide solution, and
the consumed amount of the solution is V1(mL). 20 mL of 0.5N sodium hydroxide
solution is precisely weighed, added, shaken well, mixed, and set aisde for 15
minutes. Again, 20 mL of 0.5N hydrochloric acid is precisely weighed, added, titrated
with 0.1N sodium hydroxide solution until the red color disappears, and the consumed
amount of this solution is V2(mL). However, the final point is when the color of
43
 solution becomes slightly red after shaking vigorously. Titrated solution is transferred
to 500 mL flask for decomposition, which is apparatus of Total Kjeldahl Nitrogen
Test (nitrogen determination method). After distilling apparatus is attaced, 20 mL of
0.1N hydrochloric acid and 150 mL of freshly boiled and cooled water are into flask
for absorption. Tip of the condenser is submerged in the solution, 20 mL of sodium
hydroxide(1→20) is transferred into a flask for decomposition, heated while caring
generating bubbles, and 80~120 mL of distillate is obtained. It is titrated with 0.1N
sodium hydroxide solution (indicator : Methyl red solution), the consumed amount of
the solution is S(mL). Separately, perform the blank test, and the consumed amount
of 0.1N sodium hydroxide is B(mL). When measure the content of amide group to
against the total carboxyl, its content should not be more than 25%.
content of amide group to against the total carboxyl B-S
The (%)=
V1+V2+(B-S) × 100
(7) Galacturonic acid : When the content of galacturonic acid is measured under
following equation with using W, V1, V2, B, S obtained from (6) Purity, its amount
should not be more than 65%.
19.41×[V1+V2+(B- ×
Content of Galacturonic acid(%)= S)] 100
W
(8) Sulfur dioxide : When Amidated Pectin is tested by Assay in sulfurous acid,
hyposulfurous acid, and their salts test method in General Test Method in 「Standards
and Specifications for Foods」, it should not be more than 50 ppm.
(9) Acid-Insoluble Ash : When 3 g of Amidated Pectin is tested by Ash and
Acid-Insoluble Ash Limit Test, it should not be more than 1.0%.
Loss on Drying When 3g of Amidated Pectin is dried for 2 hours at 105℃, the weight
loss should not be more than 12%.

44
 Ammonia
Chemical Formula: NH3

Molecular Weight: 17.03 CAS No.: 7664-41-7

Compositional Specifications of Ammonia

Description Ammonia is colorless gas with a characteristic odor.
Identification (1) When approaching a glass rod soaked in hydrochloric acid, thick white
smoke occurs.
(2) Ammonia shall turn red litmus paper soaked in water into blue.
Purity Use a test solution to saturate Ammonia with 20°C water.
(1) Sulfur Compounds: Apply 5 mL of ammonium nitrate solution to 5 mL of a test solution
and shake it well. When heated at 60°C for 5 minutes to avoid light, do not show brown.
(2) Readily Oxidized Matters: Apply 7 mL of water to 3 mL of a test solution and slowly
add 30 mL of sulfuric acid (1→20) and shake. The red color shall not disappear when 0.1
mL of a potassium permanganate solution is applied to this solution.

45
 Ammonium Alginate
Chemical Formula: (C6H7O6NH4)n

Equiv wt, actual(avg.): 217.00 INS No.: 403

Synonyms: Ammonium salt of alginate CAS No.: 9005-34-9

Compositional Specifications of Ammonium Alginate

Content Ammonium Alginate, when calculated on the dried basis, should contain 18.0∼
21.0% carbon dioxide (CO2). This corresponds to 88.7∼103.6% ammonium alginate.
Description Ammonium Alginate occurs as white～pale yellow fiber, granule, or powder.
Identification (1) When 1 mL of calcium chloride solution is added to 5 mL aqueous
solution (1→100) of Ammonium Alginate, voluminous gelatinous precipitates are
formed.
(2) When 1 mL of dilute acid is added to 10 mL of Test Solution in (1), heavy
gelatinous precipitates are formed.
(3) Proceed as directed under Identification (3) for 「Alginic Acid」.
(4) Approximately 1 g of Ammonium Alginate is transferred into a test tube. Upon
mixing with 5 mL of sodium hydroxide solution, smell of ammonia is generated.
Purity
(1) Arsenic : It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(2) Lead : When 5.0 g of Ammonium Alginate is tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content
should not be more than 2.0 ppm.
(3) Cadmium : When 5.0 g of Ammonium Alginate is tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content
should not be more than 1.0 ppm.
(4) Mercury : When Ammonium Alginate is tested by Mercury Limit Test, its content
should not be more than 1.0 ppm.
(5) Total Viable Aerobic Count : When Ammonium Alginate is tested by Microbe Test
Methods for Total Viable Aerobic Count (Number of General Germs) in General Test
Method in 「Standards and Specifications for Foods」, it should not be more than
5,000 per 1 g
(6) E. coli : When Ammonium Alginate is tested by Microbe Test Methods for E. coli in
General Test Method 「Standards and Specifications for Foods」, it should be
negative (-).
(7) Salmonella : When Ammonium Alginate is tested by Microbe Test Methods for
Salmonella in General Test Method 「Standards and Specifications for Foods」, it
should be negative (-).
(8) Fungi : When Ammonium Alginate is tested by Microbe Test Methods for Fungi in
General Test Method in 「Standards and Specifications for Foods」, it should not be
more than 500 per 1 g
46
Ash Ammonium Alginate, previously dried, tested by Ash for「Alginate」, the amount of
ash should not be more than 4.0%.
Loss on Drying When 3 g of Ammonium Alginate is dried for 4 hours at 105℃, the loss
should not be more than 15.0%.
Assay Approximately 0.25 g of Ammonium Alginate is precisely weighed and analyzed
by the procedure in Content Analysis for 「Xanthan Gum」.
1 mL of 0.25 N sodium hydroxide solution ＝ 27.12 mg ammonium alginate
(Equivalent Value : 217.00)

47
 Ammonium Bicarbonate
Ammonium Hydrogen Carbonate
Chemical Formula: NH4HCO3
Molecular Weight: 79.06 INS No.: 503(ii)
Synonyms: Ammonium hydrogen carbonate CAS No.: 1066-33-7

Compositional Specifications of Ammonium Bicarbonate

Content Ammonium Bicarbonate should not be less than 20.0% and more than 30.0% of
ammonia (NH3 = 17.03).
Description Ammonium Bicarbonate occurs as white or translucent crystals, crystalline
powder, or lumps, having an strong odor of ammonia.
Identification Ammonium Bicarbonate responds to the tests for Ammonium Salt and (A)
Bicarbonate in Identification.
Purity (1) Clarity and Color of Solution : When 2 g of Ammonium Bicarbonate is
dissolved in 20 mL of water, the solution should not be more than almost clear.
(2) Arsenic : It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(3) Lead : Ammonium Bicarbonate is tested by purity (2) for 「Sodium Metaphosphate」
(not more than 2.0 ppm).
(4) Mercury : When Ammonium Bicarbonate is tested by Mercury Limit Test, its
content should not be more than 1.0 ppm.
(5) Sulfate : When 4 g of Ammonium Bicarbonate is tested by Sulfate Limit Test, its
content should not be more than the amount that corresponds to 0.25 mL of 0.01 N
sulfuric acid (not more than 0.003%).
(6) Residue on Evaporation : 20 g of Ammonium Bicarbonate is weighed into a platinum
crucible, 50 mL of water is added, mixed, and evaporated to dryness in a water bath.
It is dried for 30 minutes at 105℃, and cooled in desiccator and weighed. The
amount should not be more than 10 mg (not more than 0.05%).
(7) Chloride : When 2 g of Ammonium Bicarbonate is tested by Chloride Limit Test, its
content should not be more than the amount that corresponds to 0.2 mL of 0.01 N
hydrochloric acid.
Residue on Ignition When thermogravimetric analysis is done with approximately 10 g of
Ammonium Bicarbonate, the amount of residues should not be more than 0.01%.
Assay Proceed as directed under Assay in 「Ammonium Carbonate」.

48
 Ammonium Carbonate
INS No.: 503(i)
Synonyms: Ammonium carbamate CAS No.: 10361-29-2

Compositional Specifications of Ammonium Carbonate

Content Ammonium Carbonate should contain within a range of 30.0∼34.0% of ammonia (NH3
= 17.03).
Description Ammonium Carbonate occurs as white or translucent crystals, crystalline
powder, or lumps, having an strong odor of ammonia.
Identification Ammonium Carbonate responds to the tests for Ammonium Salt and
Carbonate in Identification.
Purity (1) Clarity and Color of Solution : When 2 g of Ammonium Carbonate is dissolved
in 20 mL of water, the solution should not be more than almost clear.
(2) Arsenic : It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(3) Lead : Ammonium Carbonate is tested by purity (2) for 「Sodium Metaphosphate」
(not more than 2.0 ppm).
(4) Mercury : When Ammonium Carbonate is tested by Mercury Limit Test, its content
should not be more than 1.0 ppm.
(5) Sulfate : When 4 g of Ammonium Carbonate is tested by Sulfate Limit Test, its
content should not be more than the amount that corresponds to 0.25 mL of 0.01 N
sulfuric acid. (not more than 0.003%).
(6) Residue on Evaporation : 20 g of Ammonium Carbonate is weighed into a platinum
crucible, 50 mL of water is added, mixed, and evaporated to dryness in a water bath.
It is dried for 30 minutes at 105℃, and cooled in desiccator and weighed. The
amount should not be more than 10 mg. (not more than 0.05%)
(7) Chloride : When 2 g of Ammonium Carbonate is tested by Chloride Limit Test, its
content should not be more than the amount that corresponds to 0.15 mL of 0.01 N
hydrochloric acid. (not more than 0.003%)
Residue on Ignition When thermogravimetric analysis is done with 10 g of Ammonium
Carbonate, the amount of residues should not be more than 0.01%.
Assay Accurately weigh a flask with a ground-glass stopper containing about 30 mL of
water, add about 2.5 g of Ammonium Carbonate, and weigh again accurately. Transfer
into a 250 mL volumetric flask, and add water to make exactly 250 mL. Measure
exactly 25 mL of this solution, and add gradually 50 mL of 0.1 N hydrochloric acid,
exactly measured. Titrate the excess hydrochloric acid with 0.1 N sodium hydroxide
(indicator : 4∼5 drops of bromophenol blue solution).
1 mL of 0.1 N hydrochloric acid = 1.703 mg NH3

49
 Ammonium Chloride
Chemical Formula: NH4Cl

Molecular Weight: 53.50 INS No.: 510

Synonyms: Ammonium muriate; Sal
ammoniac CAS No.: 12125-02-9

Compositional Specifications of Ammonium Chloride

Content Ammonium Chloride, when calculated on the dried basis, should contain not less
than 99.0% of ammonium chloride (NH4Cl).
Description Ammonium Chloride occurs as white crystalline powder or crystalline lumps,
having a salty and fresh taste.
Identification Ammonium Chloride responds to the tests for Ammonium Salt and Chloride
in Identification.
Purity (1) Clarity and Color of Solution : 2 g of Ammonium Chloride is dissolved in 20
mL of water. The turbidity of resulting solution should not be more than almost
clear.
(2) Arsenic : It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(3) Lead : Ammonium Chloride is tested by purity (2) for 「Sodium Metaphosphate」
(not more than 2.0 ppm).
Loss on Drying When Ammonium Chloride is dried for 4 hours in a vacuum
desiccator(silica-gel), the weight loss should not be more than 2%.
Residue on Ignition When thermogravimetric analysis is done with Ammonium Chloride,
the residues should not be more than 0.5%.
Assay 3 g of Ammonium Chloride, previously dried and accurately weighed, is tested by
Assay for 「Ammonium Sulfate」.
1 mL of 0.2 N sulfuric acid ＝ 10.70 mg NH4Cl

50
 Ammonium Hydroxide
Chemical Formula: NH4OH

Molecular Weight: 35.05 INS No.: 527

Synonyms: Strong ammonia solution;
Stronger ammonium water CAS No.: 1336-21-6

Compositional Specifications of Ammonium Hydroxide

Content Ammonium Hydroxide should contain within a range of 27.0∼30.0% of ammonia
(NH3 ＝ 17.03).
Description Ammonium Hydroxide is colorless transparent liquid with a characteristic odor.
Identification When Ammonium Hydroxide is approached with a glass rod wetted with
hydrochloric acid, thick white smoke is generated.
Purity (1) Lead : When 5.0 g of Ammonium Hydroxide is tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content
should not be more than 2.0 ppm.
(2) Arsenic : It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(3) Residue on Evaporation : 11 mL of (approximately 10 g) Ammonium Hydroxide is
evaporated on a platinum or porcelain dish (previously weighed) and dried for 1 hour
at 105℃. The residue should not be more than 0.02%.
(4) Readily oxidizing material : When 6 mL of water, slightly excess amount of dilute
sulfuric acid, and 0.1 mL of 0.1 N potassium permanganate are added to 4 mL of
Ammonium Hydroxide, pale red color in the solution should not disappear within 10
minutes.
Assay 35 mL of 1 N sulfuric acid is transferred into a flask, which is sealed with a
stopper. This additive is cooled below 10℃. Using a 10 mL graduated pipette, cooled
ammonia is drawn from the bottom if possible. Outer wall of the pipette is wiped clean
and first few mL are discarded. 2 mL of ammonia is added to the flask. At this time,
at least 1 mL should be left in the pipette. The flask is capped with a stopper and
mixed. It is weighed again to obtain the amount of the sample. Excess acid is then
titrated with 1 N sodium hydroxide solution. (indicator : 1～2 drops of methyl red
solution).
1 mL of 1 N sulfuric acid ＝ 17.03 mg NH3

51
 Ammonium Molybdate
Chemical Formula: (NH4)6Mo7O24ㆍ4H2O

Molecular Weight: 1235.86 CAS No.: 12054-85-2

Compositional Specifications of Ammonium Molybdate

Content Ammonium Molybdate should contain within a range of 99.3～101.8% of
Ammonium Molybdate ((NH4)6Mo7O24ㆍ4H2O).
Description Ammonium Molybdate is white∼light green crystalline powder with slight
odor of ammonia.
Identification 0.6 g of Ammonium Molybdate is dissolved in the mixture of 1.4 mL of
water and 1.45 mL of ammonia solution. The mixture is cooled, 7.2 mL of the solution,
which 3.2 mL of nitric acid and 4 mL of water are mixed and cooled, is added while
stirring slowly. Set aside for 24~48 hours, filter, and add 2 mL of disodium phosphate
to 5 mL of filtrate. Then yellow filtrate generates and it dissolves in excess amount of
ammonia solution.
Purity (1) Chloride : When 0.5g of Ammonium Molybdate is tested by Chloride Limit
Test, the content should not be more than the amount that correspond to 0.30 mL of
0.001 N hydrochloric acid.
(2) Sulfate : When 0.25 g of Ammonium Molybdate is tested by Sulfate Limit Test, the
content should not be more than the amount that correspond to 1.0 mL of 0.001 N
sulfuric acid.
(3) Phosphate : When 20 g of Ammonium Molybdate is precisely weighed and
dissolved in 3N ammonia solution to make 100 mL. 3.5 mL of iron nitrate (1→10) is
added and set aside for 15 minutes. Gradually heat it, filter when the precipitates
are cohered, and wash the residue with 1.5N ammonia solution several times.
Dissolve the residue with 60 mL of warm 4N nitric acid, 13 mL of ammonia solution
is added and bring to 40℃. 50 mL of Ammonium Molybdate solution is added, shaken
for 5 minutes, set aside for 2 hours at 40℃, then the precipitates should not be
more than precipitates of standard solution (not more than 5 ppm). However, 144.3
mg of dried potassium phosphate is dissolved in water to make 1,000 mL, and 1.0
mL of this solution is dissolved in 3N ammonica solution to make 100 mL, standard
solution.
(4) Magnesium salt and alkali salt : 5g of Ammonium Molybdate is precisely weighed
and dissolved in water to make 50 mL and filtered. To the filtrate, 0.5 g of sodium
carbonate and 25 mL of 2.5N sodium hydroxide are added, boiled for 5 minutes,
filtered with filter paper, and the residue is washed with 1N ammonia solution.
Measure the residue after it is heat-treated for 30 minutes at 800±25℃ , the weight
of residue should not be more than 1mg (not more than 0.02%).
(5) Lead : Ammonium Molybdate is tested by Purity (2) for 「Sodium Metaphosphate」
(not more than 2.0 ppm).
52
 (6) Water-insoluble substances : To 20 g of Ammonium Molybdate, water is added to
make 200mL, heat for 1 hour in a water bath, and filter it. Wash the residue with hot
water and dry for 2 hours at 105℃, then its content should not be more than 1 mg
(not more than 0.005%).
(7) Nitrate : 1 g of Ammonium Molybdate is precisely weighed and dissolved in 0.05%
sodium chloride to make 10 mL. 0.1 mL of indigo carmin solution dissolved in 3.6 N
sulfuric acid is added, then blue color doesn't completely disappear in 5 minutes.
Assay 1 g of Ammonium Molybdate is precisely weighed and dissolved in the mixture of
10 mL of water and 1 mL of ammonia solution, and diluted with water to 250 mL. To
50 mL of the filtrate of this solution, 250 mL of water, 20 g of ammonium chloride,
15 mL of hydrochloric acid , and 0.15 mL of methy orange solution are added, heated
until it boils, and 18 mL of lead acetate solution(9.5 →100) is added. Saturated acetate
ammonium solution is added while stirring until yellow color develops, 15 mL of lead
acetate solution (9.5→100) is added and heated until precipitates generate at the
temperature below boiling point. Filter it and wash the residue with the mixture of
water, saturated acetate ammonium solution, mixture of nitric acid (890:100:10) 7~8
times. Lastly, wash it with hot water 3 times, heat-treat at 560～625℃ and measure
the weight of lead molybdate.
1 mg of lead molybdate. = 0.4809mg (NH4)6Mo7O24ㆍ4H2O

53
 Ammonium Persulfate
Chemical Formula: (NH4)2S2O8 INS No.: 923
Molecular Weight: 228.20 CAS No.: 7727-54-0

Compositional Specifications of Ammonium Persulfate

Content Ammonium Persulfate should contain not less than 95.0% of ammonium
persulfate [(NH4)2S2O8].
Description Ammonium Persulfate occurs as colorless crystals or as a white crystalline
powder.
Identification (1) To 0.5 g of Ammonium Persulfate, add 5 mL of sodium hydroxide
solution, and a gas with an odor of ammonia is evolved after heating. This gas
changes from red litmus paper wetted with water to blue litmus paper.
(2) Add 2～3 drops of manganese sulfate solution (1→100) to 5 mL of diluted sulfuric
acid. It is warmed after adding 1 drop of silver nitrate solution and 0.2 g of
Ammonium Persulfate. Then, the solution develops a pink color.
Purity (1) Clarity and Color of Solution : When 1 g of Ammonium Persulfate is dissolved
in 10 mL of water, the solution should be colorless and should not be more almost
clear.
(2) Arsenic : It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(3) Lead : Ammonium persulfate is tested by Purity (2) for 「Sodium Metaphosphate」
(not more than 2.0 ppm).
Residue on Ignition When thermogravimetric analysis is done with Ammonium Persulfate
(gently at first, then strongly until the weight becomes constant), the residue should
not be more than 0.2%.
Assay Dissolve about 1.5 g of Ammonium Persulfate, precisely weighed, in water make
to 250 mL. 50 mL of the solution is mixed with 40 mL of 0.1 N ammonium ferrous
sulfate solution and 5 mL of phosphoric acid. The excess amount of ammonium ferrous
sulfate is titrated with 0.1 N potassium permanganate solution. Separately, a blank test
is carried out by the same method.
0.1 N ammonium ferrous solution 1 mL ＝ 11.41 mg (NH4)2S2O8

54
 Ammonium Phosphate, Dibasic
Chemical Formula: (NH4)2HPO4

Molecular Weight: 132.06 INS No.: 342(ii)

Synonyms: Diammonium hydrogen
phosphate; Diammonium CAS No.: 7783-28-0
phosphate

Compositional Specifications of Ammonium Phosphate, Dibasic

Content Ammonium Phosphate, Dibasic should contain within a range of 96.0∼102.0% of
dibasic ammonium phosphate [(NH4)2HPO4].
Description Ammonium Phosphate, Dibasic is colorless～white crystallite or white
crystalline powder.
Identification Ammonium Phosphate, Dibasic responds to test of Ammonium Salts and
Phosphate in Identification.
Purity (1) pH : pH of Ammonium Phosphate, Dibasic solution (1→100) is measured using
a glass electrode and should be within a range of 7.6～8.4.
(2) Arsenic : It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(3) Lead : Ammonium Phosphate, Dibasic is precisely weighed and is tested by purity
(2) for 「Sodium Metaphosphate」, its content should not be more than 4.0 ppm.
(4) Fluoride : 1 g of Ammonium Phosphate, Dibasic is precisely weighed and is tested
by purity (8) for 「Calcium Citrate」, its content should not be more than 10 ppm.
Assay Approximately 2 g of Ammonium Phosphate, Dibasic, accurately weighed, and
dissolve in 50 mL of water. The solution is kept at 15℃ and titrated with 1 N
hydrochloric acid (indicator : 3～4 drops of Methyl Orange․Xylene Cyanol FF solution).
1 mL of 1 N hydrochloric acid ＝ 132.1 mg (NH4)2HPO4

55
 Ammonium Phosphate, Monobasic
Chemical Formula: NH4H2PO4

Molecular Weight: 115.03 INS No.: 342(i)

Synonyms: Ammonium dihydrogen
phosphate; Acid ammonium CAS No.: 7722-76-1
phosphate

Compositional Specifications of Ammonium Phosphate, Monobasic

Content Ammonium Phosphate, Monobasic should contain within a range of 96.0∼102.0%
of Ammonium Phosphate, Monobasic (NH4H2PO4).
Description Monobasic Ammonium Phosphate is colorless～white crystallite, crystalline
powder or granule.
Identification Ammonium Phosphate, Monobasic responds to test of Ammonium Salt and
Phosphate in Identification.
Purity (1) pH : Ammonium Phosphate, Monobasic solution (1→100) is measured using a
glass electrode and pH should be within a range of 4.3～5.0.
(2) Arsenic : It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(3) Lead : Ammonium Phosphate, Monobasic is precisely weighed and is tested by
purity (2) for 「Sodium Metaphosphate」, its content should not be more than 4.0 ppm.
(4) Fluoride : 1 g of Ammonium Phosphate, Monobasic is precisely weighed and is
tested by purity (8) for 「Calcium Citrate」, its content should not be more than 10 ppm.
Assay Dissolve 3 g of Ammonium Phosphate, Monobasic, previously dried and accurately
weighed, in 30 mL of water. 5 g of sodium chloride is added, which is dissolved by
shaking. While the solution is kept at 15℃, it is titrated with 1 N sodium hydroxide
solution (Indicator : 3～4 drops of thymol blue solution)
1 mL of 1 N sodium hydroxide solution ＝ 115.0 mg NH4H2PO4

56
 Ammonium Phosphatides

Synonyms: Ammonium salts of

phosphatidic acid INS No.: 442

Compositional Specifications of Ammonium Phosphatides

Content Ammonium phosphatides should contain 3.0~3.4% of phosphorous(P) and
1.2~1.5% of ammoniacal nitrogen(N).
Description Ammonium phosphatides are lustrous semi-solid, oily solid or liquid.
Identification
(1) Ammonium phosphatides are soluble in fats, partially soluble in ethanol and acetone,
and insoluble in water.
(2) Add 2g of anhydrous sodium carbonate to 1g of ammonium phosphatides. After ashing
and cooling down them, 5mL of water and 5mL of nitric acid are added to the residue.
Add ammonium molybdate solution to the dissolved solution and heat to boiling. A
yellow precipitate is made.
(3) Add 25mL of 0.5N ethanolic potassium hydroxide solution to 1g of ammonium
phosphatides, heat in a water bath equipped with a reflux condenser for 1hour. A gas
with odor of Ammonia is evolved from the end of the reflux condenser and the gas
becomes the color of a red litmus paper on moist to blue. when the residue cool down
to 0℃, a precipitate of potash soap is made.
(4) Add 25mL of 0.5N ethanolic potassium hydroxide solution to 1g of ammonium
phosphatides, heat in a water bath equipped with a reflux condenser for 1hour. 15mL
of water and 6mL of dilute hydrochloric acid are added. After adding 5mL of hexane to
this, remove the layer of hexane and repeat this procedure one more time. Place 5mL
of water layer obtained by hydrolysis in test tube and add excess amount of powdered
calcium hydroxide. Then heat in water bath for 5 min and shake them to mix well.
Cool down and filter. Place 1 drop of filtrate in small test tube and add 0.05g of
potassium hydrogen sulfate. Put filter paper soaked with 1:1 mixture of sodium
nitroprusside solution and 20% piperidine on the mouth of test tube and heat with a
burner. The color of filter paper change into blue. When sodium hydroxide test solution
is added again, the color of filter paper change into light red.
Purity
(1) Lead : When 5.0 g of Ammonium phosphatides is tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content
should not be more than 2.0ppm.
(2) Arsenic : It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(3) Mercury : When Ammonium phosphatides is tested by Mercury Limit Test, its
content should not be more than 1.0 ppm.
(4) Cadmium : When 5.0 g of Ammonium phosphatides is tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content
57
 should not be more than 1.0ppm.
(5) Insoluble petroleum ether : 10.0g of Ammonium phosphatides, accurately weighed,
are transferred into a 250mL-Erlenmeyer flask with a stopper. Add 100mL of
petroleum ether and shake to dissolve well. This solution is dried for 1hour at 105℃
and filtered through a crucible type glass filter that is previously weighed. The flask is
washed twice with 25mL of petroleum ether and all the washing solution are filtered
through a glass filter. The glass filter which have the remaining insoluble substance is
dried for for 1hour at 105±2℃. Allow to cool in a desiccator, and accurately weigh the
amount of insoluble substance. It should not be more than 2.5%.
Assay (1) Phosphrous : Weigh accurately 1.5~1.6g of ammonium phosphatide into a small
glass capsule and transfer to a 300mL flask for decomposition. Add 5mL of sulfuric
acid and 10mL of nitric acid. Heat the flask gently at the beginning with shaking, then
heat up gradually. After cooling, add nitric acid and heat once more until the solution
have clear yellow color. Cool and add 5mL of 60% perchloric acid and oxidize until
white fume generate in the flask. After cooling down again, add 5mL of water and
continue to heat until white fume go out. Cool again, transfer to a 500mL-mess flask
which is filled with water(Test solution). On the other hand, dissolve 3.8346g of
potassium phosphate monobasic, priorly dried at 110℃ and accurately weighed in
water. Dilute to 1000mL with water and 50mL of this solution is diluted to 500mL
with water again(Standard solution). Mix 25mL of Test solution and 25mL of the
vanadate-molybdate reagent, and dilute to 100mL with water. After set-aside for 10
minutes, measure absorbance of the solution at a wavelength of 420nm with 1cm path
length. A reference solution is prepared by the same procedure with solution used
equivalent acid instead of Test solution. Separately, with 25mL, 27.5mL, 30mL of
potassium phosphate monobasic standard solution, same procedure is followed to
measure absorbances, from which a calibration curve is prepared. From the calibration
curve and the absorbance of test solution, the content of Phosphorous in sample is
obtained.
0.00873
The content of phosphorous(%) = C × × 100
W
C : Weight of phosphorus pentoxide(P2O5) in 25mL of Test solution (mg)
W : Weight of the sample (g)
Test solution
Vanadate-molybdate reagent : Each 20g of ammonium molybedate and 1g of
ammonium vanadate is dissolved in water. Transfer the two solution to 1000mL-mess
flask and then add 140mL of nitric acid. Dilute the solution to 1000mL with water.
(2) Ammoniacal nitrogen : Accurately weigh 0.2g of ammonium phosphatide into a small glass
bottle. Test it according to the nitrogen determination method.

58
 Ammonium Sulfate
Chemical Formula: (NH4)2SO4 INS No.: 517

Molecular Weight: 132.14 CAS No.: 7783-20-2

Compositional Specifications of Ammonium Sulfate

Content Ammonium Sulfate, when calculated on the dried basis, should contain not less
than 99.0% of ammonium sulfate [(NH4)2SO4].
Description Ammonium Sulfate occurs as colorless crystals or white lumps.
Identification Ammonium Sulfate responds to the tests for Ammonium Salt and Sulfate in
Identification.
Purity (1) Clarity and Color of Solution : When 1 g of Ammonium Sulfate is dissolved in
20 mL of water, the solution should be colorless and should not be more than almost
clear.
(2) Arsenic : It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(3) Lead : Ammonium Sulfate is precisely weighed and is tested by purity (2) for
「Sodium Metaphosphate」(not more than 5.0 ppm).
(4) Selenium : 0.2 g of Ammonium Sulfate is precisely weighed and is tested by purity
(6) for 「Sulfuric acid」(not more than 30 ppm).
Loss on Drying When Ammonium Sulfate is dried for 3 hours at 130℃ the weight loss
should not be more than 1%.
Residue on Ignition When thermogravimetric analysis is done with Ammonium Sulfate,
the residue should not be more than 0.25%.
Assay Accurately weigh about 3 g of Ammonium Sulfate, and dissolve in water to make
exactly 250 mL. Take 25 mL of this solution, add 10 mL of sodium hydroxide solution
(2→5), and immediately equip with a distilling apparatus equipped with a condenser
and connected to a receiver containing 40 mL of 0.2 N sulfuric acid, exactly
measured. Heat to distill ammonia into sulfuric acid, and titrate the excess sulfuric
acid with 0.2 N sodium hydroxide (indicator : 3 drops of methyl red solution).
1 mL of 0.2 N sulfuric acid = 13.22 mg of (NH4)2SO4

59
 α-Amylase
Definition There are α-Amylase(nonbacterial) and α-Amylase(bacterial). And each definitions
are as follows.
α-Amylase(nonbacterial): is an enzyme obtained from cultures of Aspergillus niger and its
variety, Aspergillus oryzae and its variety, and Rhizopus oryzae and its variety, Aspergillus
niger containing the gene of alpha-amylase from Rhizomucor pusillus and malts.
α-Amylase(bacterial): is an enzyme obtained from cultures of Bacillus subtilis and its variety,
Bacillus licheriformis and its variety, Bacillus stearothermophilus, and Bacillus licheriformis
containing the gene of alpha-amylase from Bacillus stearothermophilus. It is called α
-Amylase(nonbacterial) and α-Amylase(bacterial), respectively. Dilutant or stabilizer can be
added for the purpose of activity adjustment and quality preservation.
A. α-Amylase(nonbacterial)
Compositional Specifications of α-Amylase, Nonbacterial
Description α-Amylase, Nonbacterial (DU) is white～dark brown powder, particle, paste
or colorless～dark brown liquid.
Identification When α-Amylase, Nonbacterial (DU) is proceeded as directed under Activity
Test, it should have the activity as α-Amylase, Nonbacterial (DU).
Purity (1) Arsenic : It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(2) Lead : When 5.0 g of α-Amylase is tested by Atomic Absorption Spectrophotometry
or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content should not be more
than 5.0 ppm.
(3) Coliform Group ： α-Amylase, Nonbacterial is tested by Microbe Test Methods for
Coliform Group in General Test Methods「Standards and Specifications for Foods」. It
should not be more than 30 cfu per 1 g of this product.
(4) Salmonella ： α-Amylase, Nonbacterial (DU) is tested by Microbe Test Methods for
Salmonella in General Test Methods 「Standards and Specifications for Foods」. It
should be negative (-).
(5) E. Coli : When α-Amylase(nonbacterial) is tested by Microbe Test Methods for E.
Coli in General Test Method 「Standards and Specifications for Foods」, it should be
negative (-)
Activity Test (Activity)
∘Analysis Principle : Activity test is based on the time taken to reach standard degree of
hydrolysis of starch solution with a certain concentration at 30 ± 0.1℃. The degree of
hydrolysis is measured by comparing iodine color of the hydrolyzed products with color
standard.
∘Preparation of Test Solution : Test Solution is prepared so that the end point of 5 mL
of the finally diluted solution is reached in 10～30 minutes under the test conditions. In
case of malt, 25.0 g of fine ground powder is weighed into a 1,000 mL Erlenmeyer
flask, where 500 mL of 0.5% sodium chloride solution is added. The mixture is leached
for 2.5 hours at 30 ± 0.2℃ while stirring once in every 20 minutes (caution : The
flask should not be turned upside down. Care must be minimized the amount of the
60
 content left on the inner wall.). After leaching, the mixture is filtered through a 32 cm
Whatman No.1 filter paper using a 20 cm diameter funnel. First 50 mL of the filtrate is
combined to sample solution and re-filtered through the same filter paper. Filtration is
stopped in 3 hours since the point when the sample is mixed in sodium chloride
solution. 20.0 mL of the filtrate is diluted to 100 mL with 0.5% sodium chloride
solution (Test Solution).
Test Procedure : 5 mL of iodine solution is added to each of a set of 20 test tubes
(13×100 mm), which are maintained at 30 ± 0.1℃in a water bath. 20 mL of substrate
solution and 5 mL of 0.5% sodium chloride solution (previously maintained for 20
minutes in a water bath ) are mixed in a 50 mL Erlenmeyer flask, which is then kept
in a water bath. Upon starting the test, 5 mL of the Test Solution is added to the flask
in the water bath. In 10 minutes, 1 mL of the reaction mixture in the 50 mL
Erlenmeyer flask is taken and added to the test tube with iodine solution, which is well
shaken and immediately compared to the color standard obtained from a comparator. A
tube filled with water is used behind the comparator plate. (note : Care must be taken
so that the tip of the pipette, which draws the reaction mixture, does not touch the
iodine solution. If iodine solution is mixed with reaction mixture, the reaction may be
affected.). By the same method, a comparison test is repeated at a same interval until
the color of the Test Solution becomes the same as the color standard. Time at each
pipetting is recorded.
Reference : If a previous test color is deeper and a subsequent (in a 30 second
interval) test color is lighter than the color standard, the end point is obtained by
adding 15 seconds to the time for the color nearer to the color standard. Comparator
tube (13 mm) is shaken after each observation. Difference in color judgment due to
personal difference can be minimized by using a prism attachment and observing at a
distance of 6～10" . Activity of an enzyme can be calculated by the following equation.
24
DU(solution) ＝
W × T

DU (as a dried form)＝ DU(solution) ×

100
100 - M

W : Amount of enzyme in 5 mL of Test Solution (g)

T : Dextrinization time (minutes)
24 : Weight of starch substrate (0.4 g) multiplied by 60 minutes
M : Water content of sample (%)
Definition of Activity : 1 α-Amylase dextrinizing unit (DU) is an amount of enzyme that
dextrinizes soluble starch at a rate of 1 g per hour at 30℃ under the presence of
sufficient amount of β-Amylase.
Apparatus
61
 -Color standard for comparison : α-amylase color plate is used. Or 25 g of cobalt
chloride (CoC12·6H5O) and 3.84 g of potassium bichromate is dissolved in 0.01 N
hydrochloric acid and is made 100 mL. (this is stable for a long period of time when
is capped.).
-Comparator : Standard Hellige comparator or Pocket comparator is used along with
prism attachment. A milky light (100 W) should be shone at a 6 inch distance from
the back of the milky colored glass of the comparator. The light should be positioned
so that it won't be shone directly on observer's eyes.
-Comparator Tubes : An angled tube with 13 mm path length or its equivalent should
be used.
Solutions
∘Acetate Buffer Solution (pH 4.8) : 164 g of anhydrous sodium acetate is dissolved in
500 mL of water and 120 mL of glacial acetic acid is added. pH of the solution is
adjusted to 4.8 with glacial acetic acid. The total volume is brought up to 1,000 mL
with water and well mixed.
∘β-Amylase Solution : 250 mg of β-Amylase (free of α-Amylase) with 2,000 DP℃ is
dissolved in 5 mL of water (note : Enzyme should be kept by refrigeration. Before
opening the cap, it should be warmed to room temperature to prevent condensation of
moisture.).
∘Starch : Soluble starch (Lintner) or its equivalent is used. Before using a new lot, it
should be confirmed that the quality is the same as the previous one. A new lot with a
difference of diastatic power ± 3℃ or higher cannot be sued.
∘Substrate Solution : 10.0 g of starch (as a dried form) is dispersed in 100 mL of cold
water, where 300 mL of boiling water is slowly added with stirring. After boiling for
1～2 minutes, it is cooled and transferred into a 500 mL volumetric flask. 25 mL of
acetate buffer solution is added to the flask, where all of the β-Amylase solution is
added. It is then saturated with toluene and diluted to 500 mL with water. The
resultant solution is allowed to stand for 18～72 hours at 30 ± 2℃ and then used.
∘Iodine stock solution : 5.5 g of iodine and 11.0 g of potassium iodide are dissolved in
200 mL of water, which is then diluted to 250 mL with water. It is kept in a dark
place. It should be freshly prepared in every 30 days.
∘Iodine Solution : 20 g of potassium iodide is dissolved in 300 mL of water and 2.0 mL
of iodine stock solution is added. The total volume of the solution is brought up to
500 mL with water.
Storage Standard of α-Amylase, Nonbacterial(DU)
α-Amylase, Nonbacterial (DU) is stored sealing tightly in a cold dark place.
B. α-Amylase(bacterial)
Compositional Specifications of α-Amylase, Bacterial
Description α-Amylase, Bacterial (BAU) is white～dark brown powder, particle, paste or
colorless～dark brown liquid.
Identification When α-Amylase, Bacterial (BAU) is proceeded as directed under Activity
Test, it should have the activity as α-Amylase, Bacterial (BAU).
62
Purity (1) Arsenic : It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(2) Lead : When 5.0 g of α-Amylase is tested by Atomic Absorption Spectrophotometry
or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content should not be more
than 5.0 ppm.
(3) Coliform Group ： α-Amylase, Nonbacterial is tested by Microbe Test Methods for
Coliform Group in General Test Methods「Standards and Specifications for Foods」. It
should not be more than 30 cfu per 1 g of this product.
(4) Salmonella ： α-Amylase, Nonbacterial (DU) is tested by Microbe Test Methods for
Salmonella in General Test Methods 「Standards and Specifications for Foods」. It
should be negative (-).
(5) E. Coli : When α-Amylase(nonbacterial) is tested by Microbe Test Methods for E.
Coli in General Test Method 「Standards and Specifications for Foods」, it should be
negative (-).
Activity Test (Activity)
∘Analysis Principle : Activity test is based on the time taken to reach standard degree of
hydrolysis of starch solution with a certain concentration at 30 ± 0.1℃. The degree of
hydrolysis is measured by comparing iodine color of the hydrolyzed products with color
standard.
∘Preparation of Test Solution : Test Solution is prepared so that the end point of 10 mL
of the finally diluted solution is reached in 15～35 minutes under the test conditions.
∘Test Procedure : It is tested as directed under the Test Procedure for α-Amylase,
Nonbacterial (DU). However, 10 mL of Test Solution is added instead of sodium
chloride solution.
Activity of an enzyme is calculated by the following equation.
BAU/g ＝ 40F/T
F : Dilution factor (total amount of dilution/amount of sample(g))
T : Dextrinization time (minutes)
40 : A factor (400/10) that is calculated by dividing 400 mg (amount of starch in 20
mL of 2% substrate solution) with 10 mL (amount of Test Solution used).
∘Definition of Activity : 1 Bacterial amylase unit(BAU) corresponds to an amount of
enzyme that dextrinizes 1 mg of starch per minute under the conditions above.
Apparatus
Color standard for comparison, Comparator, and Comparator Tubes are the same as in
α-amylase, Nonbacterial(DU). However, daylight or daylight type fluorescent light is
used as a light source.
Solutions
63
∘Phosphate Buffer Solution (pH 6.6)
Solution A : 9.1 g of potassium phosphate, monobasic (anhydrous) is dissolved in
plenty of water (total volume = 1,000 mL).
Solution B : 9.5 g of sodium phosphate, dibasic (anhydrous) is dissolved in plenty of
water (total volume = 1,000 mL).
Solution A & B are mixed at a ratio of 400 mL : 600 mL. If necessary, pH of the
solution is adjusted to 6.6 with Solution A or Solution B.
∘Iodine Solution : Prepared same as α-amylase, Nonbacterial(DU).
Starch : Prepared same as α-amylase, Nonbacterial(DU).
Substrate Solution : 10 g of starch (as a dried form) is dispersed in 100 mL of cold
water, where 300 mL of boiling water is slowly added with
stirring. After boiling for 1～2 minutes, it is cooled and
transferred into a 500 mL volumetric flask. 10 mL of phosphate
buffer solution is added to the flask and the total volume is
brought up to 500 mL with water.
Storage Standard of α-Amylase, Bacterial(BAU)
α-Amylase, Bacterial (BAU) is is stored sealing tightly in a cold dark place.

64
 β -Amylase
Definition β-Amylase is an enzyme obtained from cultures of Bacillus licheriformis containing
the gene of β-amylase from Bacillus flexus. Dilutant or stabilizer and etc. can be added for
the purpose of titer adjustment and quality preservation.
β-amylase hydrolyze the combination of α-1,4 glucoside bond from the non-reducing
end-group of starch and etc. to produce maltose.
Compositional Specifications of β-Amylase
Description β-Amylase is a white∼dark brown powder, granule, paste, or colorless∼
dark brown liquid.
Identification It should have the activity as β-Amylase when testing by the Activity Test.
Purity (1) Arsenic : It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(2) Lead : When 5.0 g of β-Amylase is tested by Atomic Absorption Spectrophotometry
or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, it should not be more than 5.0
ppm.
(3) Coliform Group ： When β-Amylase is tested by Microbe Test Methods for
Coliform Group of General Test Methods in 「Standards and Specifications for Food
s」, it should not be more than 30 cfu per 1 g of this product.
(4) Salmonella ： When β-Amylase is tested by Microbe Test Methods for Salmonella
of General Test Methods in 「Standards and Specifications for Foods」, it should be
negative (-).
(5) E. Coli : When β-Amylase is tested by Microbe Test Methods for E. Coli of
General Test Method in 「Standards and Specifications for Foods」, it should be
negative (-).
Activity Test (titer)
∘Analysis Principle : This titer test is based on the hydrolysis of starch at 4.8 and 25℃
for 3 minutes. The degree of hydrolysis is measured as absorbtion in the reduction of
the 3,5-dinitrosalicylic acid caused by a hydrolyzed substance, maltose.
∘Preparation of Test Solution : Dilute 0.5 mL of sample with water to fit within the
calibration curve.
∘Test Procedure : Maintain temperature of 0.5 mL test solution at 25℃ for 3∼4 minutes.
Use 0.5 mL water as control solution. Add 0.5 mL of substrate solution, and then add
1 mL of dinitrosalic acid solution after exact 3 minutes, respectively. React in boiling
water for 5 minutes. After cooling down at a ordinary temperature, add 10 mL of
distilled water. Measure absorbtion at 540 nm after mixing well. Calculate the amount
of maltose using calibration curve.

M
Titer(Unites/mg) ＝
3 × W
M : μmol of maltose calculated by calibration curve
W : Amount(mg) of sample containing in 0.5 mL test solution
65
 Calibration curve Preperation : After melting 180 mg maltose with 100 mL water,
maintain temperature at 25℃ for 4∼5 minutes before using it. Dilute at least 5
concentrations to make 0.3∼5 μmol per 1 mL. Take 1 mL of it and add 1 mL of
dinitrosalicylic acid. After reacting it in hot water bath for 5 minutes, cool down. Add
10 mL of water, respectively and mix well. Measure absorbtion at 540 nm by using
water as control solution, and prepare calibration curve by absorbtion of maltose(μmol).
Definition of titer : 1 unit is the the amount of enzyme that librate 1 μmol of maltose per
minutes under the above test conditions.
Solutions
Dinitrosalicylic acid solution : Dissolve 3,5-dinitrosalicylic acid in 50 mL water, and add
30 g of sodium calcium tartrate slowly. Add 20 mL of 2N sodium hydroxide and add
100 mL of water.
Substrate solution(1% starch solution) : Mix 1 g of soluble starch with 100 mL of
sodium acetate buffer(pH 4.8). Stir in hot water slowly to dissolve until the solution
becomes translucent. Alllow to cool down, then dilute with 100 mL of water if
necessary. Allow to stand at 25 ° C for 4∼5 minutes before use.
Maltose stock solution (5 μmol/mL) :180 mg of maltose is dissolved in 100 mL of
water, and the mixture is allowed to stand at 25℃ for 4∼5 minutes before use.
Storage Standard of β-Amylase
β-Amylase should be stored sealing tightly in a cold dark place.

66
 α -Amylcinnamaldehyde

Chemical Formula: C14H18O

Molecular Weight: 202.30

Synonyms: α-Pentylcinnamaldehyde CAS No.: 122-40-7

Compositional Specifications of α-Amylcinnamaldehyde

Content α-Amylcinnamaldehyde should contain not less than 97.0% of α
-Amylcinnamaldehyde (C14H18O)
Description α-Amylcinnamaldehyde is a light yellow to yellow and transparent liquid
having a characteristic odor.
Identification (1) To 1 drop of α-Amylcinnamaldehyde, add 1 mL of water shake well,
add 2 drops of sodium nitroprusside solution, add 2 drops of sodium hydroxide
solution (3→10), and shake. A dark yellow color develops. Add 5 drops of diluted
acetic acid. The color of the solution becomes lighter.
(2) Dissolve 5 mL of α-Amylcinnamaldehyde in 20 mL of ethanol. To this solution, add
a solution, 1.7 g of hydroxylamine hydrochloride and 1.3 g of sodium hydroxide are
dissolved in 5 mL of water, shake well, and allow to stand for about 90 minutes.
White crystals are deposited. Collect the crystals by filtration, and recrystallize using
ethanol as the solvent. The melting point is approximately 75℃.
Purity (1) Specific Gravity : Specific gravity should be within a range of 0.963∼0.968.
(2) Refractive Index : Refractive Index should be within a range of 1.554∼1.559.
(3) Clarity and Color of Solution Clear : When 1 mL of α-AmylCinnamaldehyde is
dissolved in 4.5 mL of 80% alcohol, the solution should be clear.
(4) Acid Value : Acid value of α-Amylcinnamaldehyde is tested by Acid Value in
Flavoring Substance Test. It should not be more than 5.
Residue on Ignition Residue after ignition should not be more than 0.05%.
Assay Accurately weigh about 1.5 g of α-Amylcinnamaldehyde, and proceed as directed
under Method 2 in Aldehyde and Ketone Content in Flavoring Substances Tests. In the
procedure, heat the mixture for 30 minutes.
1 mL of 0.5 N hydrochloric acid = 101.1 mg of C14H18O

67
 Anisaldehyde

Chemical Formula: C8H8O2

Molecular Weight: 136.15

Synonyms: 4-Methoxybenzaldehyde; Anisic
CAS No.: 123-11-5
aldehyde

Compositional Specifications of Anisaldehyde

Content Anisaldehyde should contain no less than 97.0% of anisaldehyde (C8H8O2).
Description Anisaldehyde is a colorless to light yellow and transparent liquid having a
characteristic odor.
Identification To 5 drops of Anisaldehyde, add 1 mL of sodium hydrogen sulfite solution,
and shake. The mixture forms crystalline lumps. Add 7 mL of water, and shake. The
crystalline lumps dissolve almost clearly.
Purity (1) Specific Gravity : Specific gravity should be within a range of 1.119～1.123.
(2) Refractive Index : Refractive Index should be within a range of 1.571～1.574.
(3) Clarity and Color of Solution : When 1 mL of Anisaldehyde is dissolved in 7 mL of
50% alcohol, the solution should be clear.
(4) Acid value : Acid value of Anisaldehyde is tested by Acid Value in Flavoring
Substance Test. It should not be more than 6.
Assay Accurately weigh about 0.8 g of Anisaldehyde, and proceed as directed under
Method 2 in Aldehyde and Ketone Content in flavoring Substances Tests. In the
procedure, allow the mixture to stand for 15 minutes.
1 mL of 0.5 N hydrochloric acid = 68.08 mg of C8H8O2

68
 Annatto Extract

INS No.: 160b(i), 160b(ii)

Synonyms: L. Orange; Orlean CAS No.: 1393-63-1

Definition There are types, oil soluble pigment and water dispersible pigment. Oil soluble
pigment is obtained by extracting seed skin of Bixa orellana Linné. with oil and fat or
organic solvents (extracting solvent for oleoresin spices). Its major component is bixin
(C25H30O4 ＝ 394.52) of carotinoids. Water dispersible pigment is obtained by dispersing
fine pigments contained in seed skins of Bixa orellana L.in with water or propylene
glycol. It can also be obtained by hydrolysing bixin under pressure and heating. Its
major component is bixin or norbixin (C24H30O4 ＝ 380.49) of carotinoids. Dilutant,
stabilizer, or solvent can be added for the purpose of color value adjustment and
quality preservation.
Compositional Specifications of Annatto Extract
Content Color value ( ) of Annatto Extract should not be less than the indicated value.
Description Annatto Extract is reddish brown～brown liquid, lump, powder or paste with
a slight characteristic odor.
Identification (1) Test Solution obtained in Color Value section of Annatto Extract shows
orange yellow color and a absorbance maximum at about 500 nm and 470 nm.
Purity (1) Arsenic : It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(2) Lead : When 5.0 g of Annatto Extract is tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content
should not be more than 2.0 ppm.
(3) Cadmium : When 5.0 g of Annatto Extract is tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content
should not be more than 1.0 ppm.
(4) Mercury : When 0.1 g of Annatto Extract is tested by Mercury Test Method, its
content should not be more than 1.0 ppm.
(5) Residual Solvents : When Annatto Extract is tested by Purity (5) for Paprika
Extract Pigments, the content of residual solvents should be.
Methylene chloride, trichloroethylene Not more than 30ppm
(individual or sum if used together)
Acetone Not more than 30ppm
Isopropyl alcohol Not more than 50ppm
Methyl alcohol Not more than 50ppm
Hexane Not more than 25ppm
Assay (Color Value) Annatto Extract is precisely weighed to showed absorbance within
69
0.3∼0.7. It is dissolved in dimethylformamide for oil soluble pigment and in 0.1 N
sodium hydroxide solution for water dispersible pigment and make 100 mL,
respectively. A mixture of water, dimethylformamide, and acetic acid (50:50:1) is added
to 5 mL of this solution and diluted to 100 mL with a mixture of water,
dimethylformamide, and acetic acid (50:50:1), test solution. Using a mixture of water,
dimethylformamide, and acetic acid (50:50:1) as a reference, a absorption maximum A
of the Test Solution is measured at about 470 nm with 1 cm cell. Color value is
obtained using the following equation.
A × 200
Color Value ( ) ＝
weight of the sample(g)

70
 Annatto, Water-soluble
INS No.: 160b(ii)
CAS No.: 33261-80-2(K염)
Synonyms: L. orange; Orlean 33261-81-3(Na염)

Definition Annatto, Water-soluble is prepared from the red pericipitate of the seed of
the annatto tree (Bixa orellana L (Bixaceae)) by hydrolysis. The coloring principle is
the potassium or sodium salt of the norbixin.
Compositional Specifications of Annatto, Water-soluble
Content Annatto, Water-soluble should contain within a range of 95～120% of the
declared amount of norbixin (C24H2804=380.48)
Description Annatto, Water-soluble occurs as red-brown to brown powder, lumps, liquid,
or pasty substances, having a slight, characteristic odor.
Identification (1) Dissolve 1g of Annatto, Water-soluble in 40mL of water and add 4mL of
sulfuric acid (1→20) then shake and filter. Wash filter paper with 40mL of water for
three times to get residue, and make them as a test solution.
(A) Apply a sodium hydroxide solution (1→2,500) to part of the residue, and confirm
absorption of the liquid near the wavelength of 452 to 456 nm and 480 to 484 nm.
(B) When part of the residue is dissolved in 10mL of ethanol, drop a drop of the
solution to the filter paper. After dried in the wind, drop 2 to 3 drops of a sodium
nitrite solution (1→20) and continuously drop 2 to 3 drops of 1.5 mol/L sulfuric acid,
the yellow color of the filter paper is decolorized.
(2) To 1 g of Annatto, Water-soluble, add 50 mL of water, shake, and filter. Add 2 mL
of diluted hydrochloric acid to the filtrate. A red-brown to yellow-brown precipitate
is formed.
Purity (1) Arsenic : It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(2) Lead : When 5.0 g of Annatto, Water-soluble is tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content
should not be more than 2.0 ppm.
(3) Cadmium : When 5.0g of Annatto, Water-soluble is tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content
should not be more than 1.0 ppm.
(4) Mercury : When Annatto, Water-soluble is tested by Mercury Limit Test, its
content should not be more than 1.0 ppm.
(5) Free Alkali : To 10 g of Annatto, Water-soluble, add 100 mL of water and 8 mL of
1 N hydrochloric acid, shake, and mix it. Allow the solution to stand for 30 minutes
and filter it. The pH of the solution should be not more than 7.0.
Assay Weight 0.3 to 0.5g of Annatto, Water-soluble and dissolve it in potassium
hydroxide solution (1→200) to make exact 100 mL, which absorbance measured within
the range of 0.3 to 0.7. Then, take exactly 1mL of this solution and add potassium
hydroxide solution (1→200) to make 100 mL, and use it as test solution. Measure the
71
absorbance A at the maximum absorption level between 476 and 484 nm of
wavelength by contrasting potassium hydroxide solution (1→200) and obtain the
content of the norbicxin according to the following formula.

A 100,000
Content(%) ＝ × × 100
3.470 Sample amount(mg)

72
 β -Apo-8'-Carotenal

Chemical Formula: C30H40O

Molecular Weight: 416.65 INS No.: 160e

Synonyms: CI Food orange 6 CAS No.: 1107-26-2

Compositional Specifications of β-Apo-8'-Carotenal

Content β-Apo-8'-Carotenal should contain not less than 96.0% β-Apo-8'-Carotenal(C30H40O).
Description β-Apo-8'-Carotenal is deep violet crystal or crystalline powder with metallic
gloss.
Identification (1) 40 mg of β-Apo-8'-Carotenal, accurately weighed, is transferred into a
100 mL volumetric flask. It is then dissolved in 10 mL of acid free chloroform and
cyclohexane is added to bring the total volume to 100 mL. 2 mL of this solution is
transferred into a 50 mL volumetric flask, which is then filled with cyclohexane
(solution A). 5 mL of the solution is transferred into 50 mL volumetric flask, which
is then filled with cyclohexane (solution B). Absorption of solution B is measured is
at 460 nm and 488 nm. Absorption ratio [A488/A460] should be within a range of 0.77
∼0.85.
(2) Absorption of solution B, as prepared following procedure (1), is measured is at
460 nm and absorption of solution A is measured at 332 nm. Absorption ratio
[A332/10 × A460] should be within a range of 0.063∼0.075.
(3) When dissolve 0.1 g of β-Apo-8'-Carotenal in 10 mL of acetone, and add 5%
sodium nitrite solution and 1 N sulfuric acid, its color disappears.
(4) When dissolve 0.1 g of β-Apo-8'-Carotenal in 10 mL of chloroform, and add
antimony trichloride solution, it turns blue.
Purity (1) Arsenic : It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(2) Lead : When 5.0 g of β-Apo-8'-Carotenal is tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content
should not be more than 2.0 ppm.
(3) Cadmium : When 5.0 g of β-Apo-8'-Carotenal is tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content
should not be more than 1.0 ppm.
(4) Mercury : When β-Apo-8'-Carotenal is tested by Mercury Limit Test, its content
should not be more than 1.0 ppm.
(5) Accessory Pigments : 0.25 mm thin layer silica gel plate is wetted by immersing it
in 3% potassium hydroxide solution in methyl alcohol. After drying for 5 minutes in
73
 air, the plate is activated by heating at 110℃ for 1 hour, which is then kept in a
desiccator (calcium chloride). 80 mg of β-Apo-8'-Carotenal is dissolved in 100 mL of
chloroform. 400 μl of this solution is spotted at 2cm from the bottom of thin layer
plate, which is then developed to approximately 10 cm in a bath saturated developing
with n-cyclohexane, chloroform, and ethyl acetate (70 : 20 : 10). This is to be
carried out in a light shielded hermetic container. The thin layer plate is dried at
room temperature and the spot is marked. Thin layer of developed β
-apo-8'-carotenal is scraped off into a 100 mL centrifuge tube and 40 mL of
chloroform is added, which is then shaken for 10 minutes and centrifuged for 5
minutes (Solution A1). Thin layer of other developed carotinoids is scraped off and 20
mL of chloroform is added, which is then shaken for 10 minutes and centrifuged for
5 minutes (Solution A2). Solution A3 is prepared by taking 10 mL of A1 and bringing
the total volume to 50 mL with chloroform. Using chloroform as a reference, optical
absorption of A2 and A3 is measured at 474 nm using 1 cm path length. The content
of other carotinoids, as obtained by the equation below, should not be more than 3%.
Content of other carotinoids(%) A2 × 10
× 100
= A3

(6) Melting Point : Melting point of β-Apo-8'-Carotenal should be within a range of

136∼142℃.
Residue on Ignition When thermogravimetric analysis is done with 2 g of β
-Apo-8'-Carotenal, the amount of residue should not be more than 0.1%.
Loss on Drying When β-Apo-8'-Carotenal is dried in a vacuum desiccator (sulfuric acid)
for 4 hours , the loss should not be more than 0.2%.
Assay 40 mg of β-Apo-8'-Carotenal is accurately weighed into a 100 mL mess flask
and dissolved in 10 mL acid-free chloroform, which is then filled with cyclohexane. 2
mL of this solution is then transferred into a 50 mL mess flask, which is then filled
with cyclohexane. Again, 5 mL of this solution is transferred into a 50 mL mess flask,
which is filled with cyclohexane, Test Solution. Using cyclohexane as a reference,
absorption of the resulting test solution is measured at 460 nm with 1cm path length.
The content of β-apo-8'-carotenal is obtained using the following equation.

Content of β-apo-8'-carotenal(%) = 25,000 × A

264
A : Absorption of test solution
264 : Absorption of pure β-apo-8'-carotenal

74
 Arabic Gum

INS No.: 414

Synonyms: Acacia; Acacia gum CAS No.: 9000-01-5

Definition Arabic Gum is obtained from drying the secretion of acacia senegal (Acacia
senegal WILLDENOW) of leguminosae or its other variety from the same genus. Or it
can be obtained by de-salting the same. The major component is polysaccharides.
Compositional Specifications of Arabic Gum
Description Arabic Gum is white～light yellow powder, granules or light yellow～brown
lump and odorless.
Identification 1 g of Arabic Gum is dissolved in 50 mL of cold water. Upon adding 0.2
mL of dilute lead nitrous acid solution to 10 mL of this solution, it forms agglomerates
or white precipitates immediately.
Purity (1) Arsenic : It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(2) Lead : When 5.0 g of Arabic Gum is tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content
should not be more than 2.0 ppm.
(3) Cadmium : When 5.0 g of Arabic Gum is tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content
should not be more than 1.0 ppm.
(4) Mercury : When 0.1 g of Arabic Gum is tested as directed under Mercury Test
Method, its content should not be more than 1.0 ppm.
(5) Acid Insoluble Ash : When Arabic Gum is tested for Ash by General Test Methods,
it should not be more than 0.5%.
(6) Starch and Dextrin : 1 g of Arabic Gum is dissolved in 50 mL of water by boiling,
which is then cooled. When a few drops of iodine solution are added, it should not
change blue or red.
(7) Tannin Containing Gums : 1 g of Arabic Gum is dissolved in 50 mL of water. When
0.1 mL of ferric chloride TS is added to 10 mL of this solution, black matter or
precipitates should not form.
(8) Water Insoluble substances : 5 g of Arabic Gum is placed into an Erlenmeyer flask
containing about 100 mL of water. 10 mL of dilute hydrochloric acid is added to the
flask, which is then gently boiled and filtered through a glass filter, previously made
constant weight. The residue is washed with plenty of hot water. The residue is
dried for 2 hours at 105℃. The content of water insoluble substances should not be
more than 1%.
(9) E. Coli : When Arabic Gum is tested by Microbe Test Methods for E. Coli in
General Test Method 「Standards and Specifications for Foods」, it should be
negative (-).
75
 (10) Salmonella : When Arabic Gum is tested by Microbe Test Methods for Salmonella
in General Test Method 「Standards and Specifications for Foods」, it should be
negative (-).
Ash When Arabic Gum is tested for ash, it should not be more than 4%.
Loss on Drying When 1 g (uncrushed sample should be well mixed prior to weighing
and passed through a standard mesh screen No.40) of Arabic Gum is dried for 5 hours
at 105℃, the weight loss should not be more than 15%.

76
 Arabinogalactan

INS No.: 409

Synonyms: Larch fiber; Larch gum CAS No.: 9036-66-2

Definition Arabino Galactan is a polysaccharide obtained by extracting roots or stems of

Larix occidentails NUTT. of pinaceae with water.
Compositional Specifications of Arabino Galactan
Description Arabino Galactan is white～pale yellowish brown powder with a slight
characteristic scent.
Identification (1) When 6 g of Arabino Galactan is gently mixed and stirred in 10 mL of
water , it readily dissolves and turns into a slightly viscous liquid.
(2) Add 5 mL of water to 5 mL of the solution from (1), and then add 5 mL of sodium
borate solution (1→20). When Cetylpyridinium Chloridesolution (1→20) is drop-wise
added to the resulting solution, white precipitates are formed.
Purity (1) Arsenic : It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(2) Lead : When 5.0 g of Arabino Galactan is tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content
should not be more than 10.0 ppm.
(3) Total Viable Aerobic Count : When Arabino Galactan is tested by Microbe Test
Methods for Total Viable Aerobic Count (Number of General Germs) in General Test
Method in 「Standards and Specifications for Foods」, it should not be more than
10,000 per 1 g
(4) E. Coli : When Arabino Galactan is tested by Microbe Test Methods for E. Coli in
General Test Method 「Standards and Specifications for Foods」, it should be
negative (-).
Ash When Arabino Galactan tested by Ash and Acid-Insoluble Ash Limit, the amount of
ash should be 4%.
Loss on Drying When Arabino Galactan is dried for 5 hours at 1０5℃, the weight loss
should not be more than 12%.

77
 L-Arginine

Chemical Formula: C6H14N4O2

Molecular Weight: 174.20

Synonyms: L-2-Amino-5-guanidinovaleric CAS No.: 74-79-3
acid

Compositional Specifications of L-Arginine

Content L-Arginine, when calculated on the dried basis, should contain within a range of
98.0∼102.0% of L-arginine (C6H14N4O2).
Description L-Arginine is white crystallite or crystalline powder with unique scent and
taste.
Identification (1) 1 mL of ninhydrine solution (1→50) is added to 5 mL aqueous solution
of L-Arginine (1→1,000). Upon heating for 3 minutes in a water bath, this solution
turns blue-purple color.
(2) Aqueous solution of L-Arginine is alkaline.
Purity (1) Clarity and Color of Solution : When 1 g of L-Arginine is dissolved in 20 mL
of water, the solution should be colorless and clear.
(2) pH : pH of L-Arginine solution (1→20) should be within a range of 10.5∼12.5.
(3) Specific Rotation : Approximately 8 g of L-Arginine is accurately weighed, which is
dissolved in 6 N hydrochloric acid so that the total volume becomes 100 mL. Optical
rotation of the solution is measured. When it is translated to dried material, ＝ +25.0
∼+27.9°
(4) Chlorides : When 0.07 g of L-Arginine is tested by Chloride Limit Test, the content
should not be more than the amount that corresponds to 0.2 mL of 0.01 N
hydrochloric acid.
(5) Arsenic : It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(6) Lead : When 5.0 g of L-Arginine is tested by Atomic Absorption Spectrophotometry
or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content should not be more
than 5.0 ppm.
Loss on Drying When L-Arginine is dried for 3 hours at 105℃, the weight loss should
not be more than 1.0%.
Residue on Ignition Residue after ignition should not be more than 0.2%.
Assay Approximately 0.2 g is accurately weighed and dissolved in 3 mL of formic acid,
where 50 mL of glacial acetic acid (for non-aqueous titration) is added. This solution
is titrated with 0.1 N perchloric acid (indicator : 1 mL of crystal violet ·glacial acetic
acid). At the end point, solution turns from violet to blue, then to green. Separately, a
78
blank experiment is done following the same procedure.
1 mL of 0.1 N perchloric acid solution ＝ 8.710 mg C6H14N4O2

79
 L-Ascorbyl Palmitate

Chemical Formula: C22H38O7

Molecular Weight: 414.54 INS No.: 304

Synonyms: Ascorbyl palmitate; Vitamin C
CAS No.: 137-66-6
palmitate

Compositional Specifications of L-AscorbyI Palmitate

Content Ascorbyl Palmitate should contain not less than 95.0% of L-ascorbyl palmitate
(C22H38O7)
Description Ascorbyl Palmitate is white∼pale yellow powder.
Identification Solution of Ascorbyl Palmitate in ethyl alcohol (1→10) decolorizes sodium
2,6-dichlorophenolindophenol solution (1→1,000).
Purity (1) Melting Point : Melting point of Ascorbyl Palmitate should be within a range
of 107∼117℃
(2) Specific Rotation : 1 g of Ascorbyl Palmitate is accurately weighed and dissolved in
methyl alcohol to make 10 mL. Optical rotation of the solution is measured. When it is
translated to dried material, it should be ＝ +21∼+24°.
(3) Arsenic : It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(4) Lead : When 5.0 g of Ascorbyl Palmitate is tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content
should not be more than 2.0 ppm.
(5) Mercury : When Ascorbyl Palmitate is tested by Mercury Limit Test, its content
should not be more than 1.0 ppm.
Loss on Drying When Ascorbyl Palmitate is dried for 1 hours at 50∼60℃ in a vacuum
desiccator, the weight loss should not be more than 2%.
Residues on Ignition When thermogravimetric analysis is done with approximately 2 g of
Ascorbyl Palmitate, the amount of residues should not be more than 0.1%.
Assay Approximately 0.3 g of Ascorbyl Palmitate is accurately weighed and dissolved in
50 mL of ethyl alcohol in an 250 mL Erlenmeyer flask, add 30 mL of water. It is then
titrated with 0.1 N iodine solution until the solution becomes yellow.
1 mL of 0.1 N sodium thiosulfate = 20.73 mg of C22H38O7
Storage Standards of L-AscorbyI Palmitate
Ascorbyl Palmitate should be stored in a light shielded hermetic container in a cold
place.
80
 L-Ascorbyl Stearate

Chemical Formula: C24H42O7

Molecular Weight: 442.59 INS No.: 305

Synonyms: Ascorbyl stearate; Vitamin C CAS No.: 25395-66-8
stearate

Compositional Specifications of L-Ascorbyl Stearate

Content L-Ascorbyl Stearate should contain not less than 95.0% of L-ascorbyl stearate
(C24H42O7).
Description L-Ascorbyl Stearate occurs as a white to yellowish white powder.
Identification (1) To 0.1 g of L-Ascorbyl Stearate, add 100 mL of sodium lauryl
sulfate-propylene glycol solution, and dissolve by warming. Cool, and add drop wise
iodine solution to 5 mL of this solution until a slightly yellow color develops. Add
each 1 drop of cupric sulfate solution (1→1,000) and pyrrole, and warm at 50～60℃
for 5 minutes. A blue to blue-green color develops.
∘Sodium lauryl sulfate-propylene glycol solution : 1 g of sodium lauryl sulfate is
dissolved in 80 mL of water and propylene glycol is added. And then mix.
(2) To 10 mL of a solution of L-Ascorbyl Stearate in ethanol (1→100), add 1 or 2
drops of sodium 2, 6-dichlorophenolindophenol solution. The color of the solution
becomes to blue and disappears immediately.
Purity (1) Melting Point : Melting point of L-Ascorbyl Stearate should be within a range
of 114～119℃.
(2) Arsenic : It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(3) Lead : When 5.0 g of L-Ascorbyl Stearate is tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content
should not be more than 2.0 ppm.
(4) Mercury : When L-Ascorbyl Stearate is tested by Mercury Limit Test, its content
should not be more than 1.0 ppm.
Loss on Drying When L-Ascorbyl Stearate is dried in a vacuum drying for 1 hour at 5
6～60℃, the weight loss should not be more than 2.0%.
Residue on Ignition When thermogravimetric analysis is done with 2 g of L-Ascorbyl
81
 Stearate, the residue should not be more than 0.1%.
Assay Accurately weigh about 0.2 g of L-Ascorbyl Stearate. add 30 mL of ethanol, and
dissolve by warming if necessary. Add 15 mL of metaphosphoric acid solution (1→5)
and 10 mL of sulfuric acid (1→2). Add 10 mL of potassium iodate solution, exactly
measured, shake well, and allow to stand for 10 minutes in a dark place. Add 10 mL
of potassium iodide solution and 100 mL of water, and allow to stand for 5 minutes in
a dark place. Titrate the liberated iodine with 0.1 N sodium thiosulfate (indicator : 10
mL of starch solution). Perform a blank test in the same manner.
1 mL of 0.1 N sodium thiosulfate = 22.130 mg of C24H42O7

82
 Asparaginase
Definition Asparaginase is an enzyme obtained from a culture of Aspergillus oryzae and
Aspergillus niger. Dilutant or stabilizer can be added for the purpose of activity
adjustment and quality preservation.
Compositional Specifications of Asparaginase
Description Asparaginase is white~dark brown powder, granular, paste or colorless~dark
brown liquid.
Identification When Asparaginase is proceeded as directed under Activity Test, it should
have the activity as Asparaginase.
Purity (1) Arsenic : It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(2) Lead : When 5.0 g of Asparaginase is tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content
should not be more than 5.0 ppm.
(3) Coliform Group ： When Asparaginase proceed as directed under Microbiological
Methods for Coliform Group in General Testing Methods in 「Standards and
Specifications for Foods」, it should not contain more than 30 per 1 g .
(4) Salmonella ： When Asparaginase proceed as directed under Microbiological
Methods for Salmonella in General Testing Methods in 「Standards and Specifications
for Foods」, it should be negative (-).
(5) E. coli : When 25 g of Asparaginase is tested by Microbiological Methods for E.
coli in General Test Method 「Standards and Specifications for Foods」, it should be
negative (-).
Activity Test (activity)
If Asperginase is obtained from a culture of Aspergillus oryzae, use “Method 1” for
activity test. If Asperginase is obtained from a culture of Aspergillus niger, use “Method
2” for activity test.
Method 1
Principle : The method 1 is to measure ammonia which is generated from the hydrolysis
of L-asparagine at 37℃(pH 7.0). Ammonia is subsequently combined with α
-ketoglutarate to form L-glutamic acid, and it is measured by the consumed amount of
NADH(Nicotineamide adenine dinucleotide, reduced).
Preparation of test solution : A certain amount of sample is taken and diluted with
MOPS buffer solution so that 1 mL of the final diluted solution contains 0.4～1.0 ASNU.
This solution is used as test solution. (Adjust absorption to be in the range of about
0.10～0.25).
Procedure : Equilibrate 2.4 mL of substrate solution in the 37±0.1℃ water bath for 10
minutes. Add 0.1 mL of test or control solution, immediately shaken, mixed and 1 mL
of the solution transfer 1cm quartz cuvette. 0.1M MOPS buffer solution (pH 7.0) which
contains Triton X-100, previously isothermalized, is used for blank test, and
absorbance is rapidly measured at a 340 nm. Read the absorbance every 10 sec
83
between 3 and 5 min from the start of the reaction for 2 min. (The absorbance at the
reaction starting point should be 2.3～2.8. If the absorbance is below 2.3, prepare a
new substrate solution). Carry out the test procedure in the same manner as above, at
least twice for each test or control sample solution, and measure slope of absorbance
curve per minute (ΔA/minute). This slope should agree within 15 %.
Calculate the activity(ASNU/g) of test or control sample as follows :

ASNU/g = Δ0.1 A/minute × 2.5 × D

× 6.3 × 1 × W
ΔA/minute : The absolute value of the decrease of absorbance per min for the test or
control sample solution
2.5 : Volume of the final reaction solution (mL)
D : Dilution factor
0.1 : Volume of test solution used(mL)
6.3 : Extinction coefficent of NADH (mL․µmol-1․cm-1)
1.0 : Length of extinction cell (cm)
W : Weight of sample (g)
Definition of Activity :
One asparaginase unit(ANSU) is the amount of enzyme that produces 1µmol ammonia
per minute under the above test operation condition.
Solutions
4M Sodium Hydroxide solution : Weigh 16 g of sodium hydroxide. Dissolve in water
in a 100-mL volumetric flask. Add water to volume
and mix until fully dissolved.
0.1M MOPS buffer solution (pH 7.0) : 20.9g of MOPS(Sigma M1254 or equivalent)
dissolve in approximately 950mL of water in a 100 mL
volumetric flask. pH is adjusted to 7.0 with 4M sodium
hydroxide solution, 1mL of Triton X-100 (Sigma T9284
or equivalent) is added, and water is added to volume
and mix. The solution must be used on the day of
preparation.
Substrate solution : 0.25g of L-asparagine (Sigma A7094 or equivalent) is weighted
into a 25-mL volumetric flask, 20 mL of MOPS buffer solution
(pH 7.0) is added, completely dissolved, and 0.011g of
NADH(Roche 107735 or equivalent) is added. Again, to this,
0.063g of α-ketoglutarate(Sigma K3752 or equivalent) and at least
2,000 units of glutamate dehydrogenase (Fluka 49392 or
equivalent) are added, and MOPS buffer solution (pH 7.0) is added
to make 25 mL. The composition of the solution : 10mg/mL
L-asparagine, 2.5mg/mL α-ketoglutarate, 0.44mg/mL NADH,
Glutamate dehydrogenase, 〉80 Unit/mL. This solution is stable
84
 for about 2 hours at room temperature.
Method 2
Principle : The method 2 is to measure ammonia which is generated from the hydrolysis
of L-asparagine. React ammonia with phenol nitroprusside and alkaline hypochlorite.
Activity test is based on measuring blue color absorbance of it at 600nm.
Preparation of Test Solution : A certain amount of sample is taken and diluted with
0.1M Citric acid buffer solution(pH 5.0) so that 1mL of the final diluted solution
contains 6 ASNU. This solution is used as test solution.
Preparation of standard curve : Weight accurately 3.0g of ammonium sulfate and
dissolve in 40mL of 0.1M Citric acid buffer solution(pH 5.0) stirring to make 50mL.
Measure 2mL, 5mL, 10mL and 15mL portion of this solution and to each, add 0.1M
Citric acid buffer solution(pH 5.0) to make 50mL. 1mL of each solution contain 1.2, 2,4,
6, 12 and 18mg/mL of ammonium sulfate. Add 2mL of substrate solution in five test
tube, warm it in the 37±0.1℃ water bath for 10 minutes beforehand. Then, take 0.1mL
of each standard solution and put in test tube. Shake immediately to mix and place in
the 37±0.1℃ water bath for exactly 30 minutes. Add 0.4mL of trichloroacetic acid
solution, stir to mix and add 2.5mL of water(reaction solution). Put 0.8mL of water in
separate tube, add 20μl of reaction solution and mix it. Add 170μl of phenol
nitroprusside solution and mix. Add 170μl of 0.2 % alkaline hypochlorite solution and
mix. Place each solution in the 37±0.1℃ water bath for 10 minutes. Measure the
absorbance at 600nm and prepare the standard curve for concentrate(mg/mL) of
standard solution.
Procedure : Take 2mL of substrate solution and put in test tube. Warm up in the
37±0.1℃ water bath for 10 minutes beforehand. Add 0.1mL of test solution, shake
immediately to mix and add 2.5mL of water(reaction solution). Put 0.8mL of water in
separate tube, add 20μl of reaction solution and mix it. Add 170μl of phenol
nitroprusside solution and mix. Add 170μl of 0.2 % alkaline hypochlorite solution and
mix. Place the solution in the 37±0.1℃ water bath for 10 minutes. Measure the
absorbance(AT) of enzyme reaction solution at 600nm. Saperately, add 2mL of substrate
solution and 0.4mL of trichloroacetic acid solution and mix. Add 0.1mL of test solution
and place the solution in the 37±0.1℃ water bath for 30 minutes and then add 0.8 mL
of water. Put 0.8mL of water in separate tube, add 20μl of reaction solution and mix it.
Add 170μl of phenol nitroprusside solution and mix. Add 170μl of 0.2 % alkaline
hypochlorite solution and mix. Place the solution in the 37±0.1℃ water bath for 10
minutes. Measure the absorbance(AB) of enzyme blank test solution at 600nm.
Calculate the activity(ASNU/g) by the formula below:
ASNU/g = (Aa ×-132.14
6
T A ) × V × D × 2 × 10
B
3
× W × 30 × 10

85
 AT : Absorbance of enzyme reaction solution
AB : Absorbance of enzyme blank test solution
V : Initial volume of test solution (mL)
D : Dilution factor of the sample
a : Slope of the standard curve (mL/mg)
W : Weight of the sample (g)
30 : Reaction time (min)
Definition of Activity :
One asparaginase unit(ANSU) is the amount of enzyme that produces 1µmol ammonia
per minute under the above test operation condition.
Solutions
Substrate solution : Dissolve L-Aspargine(monohydrate) in 80mL of 0.1M citric acid
buffer solution(pH 5.0) to make 100mL. This solution prepare immediately when used.
4M Sodium hydroxide solution : Dissolve 160g of Sodium hydroxide in 800mL of water
to make 1000mL.
0.1M Citric acid buffer solution : Dissolve 21.01g of Citric acid(monohydrate) in 900mL
of water. pH is adjusted to 5.0 with 4M sodium hydroxide solution and add water to
make 1000mL.
Trichloroacetic acid solution : Mix 25g of trichloroacetic acid and water to make
100mL.
Storage Standards of Asparaginase
Asparaginase should be stored in a hermetic container in a cold dark place.

86
 L-Asparagine

Chemical Formula: C4H8N2O3‧H2O

Molecular Weight: 150.13

Synonyms: L-α-Aminosuccinamic Acid CAS No.: 70-47-3

Compositional Specifications of L-Asparagine

Content If L-Asparagine is converted to a dried form, it should contain 98.0∼102.0%
L-asparagine (C4H8N2O3).
Description L-Asparagine is scentless white crystal or crystalline powder with slightly
sweet taste.
Identification (1) 1 mL of ninhydrine solution (1→50) is added to 5 mL aqueous solution
of L-Asparagine (1→1,000). Upon heating for 3 minutes in a water bath, this solution
turns violet.
(2) 5 mL of sodium hydroxide solution (1→10) is added to 0.1 g of L-Asparagine,
which is then heated in a water bath. The resulting gas (NH3) turns water-wet litmus
paper blue.
Purity (1) Clarity and Color of Solution : When dissolve 1 g of L-Asparagine in 50 mL
water, it should be clear.
(2) pH : When dissolve 1 g of L-Asparagine in 100 mL water, it should have a pH
range of 3.5∼5.5.
(3) Specific Rotation : 10 g of L-Asparagine is accurately weighed, which is dissolved
in 6 N hydrochloric acid so that the total volume becomes 100 mL. Optical rotation of the
solution is measured. When it is translated to dried material, ＝ +33.0∼+36.5°
(4) Chlorides : When 0.07 g of L-Asparagine is tested by Chloride Limit Test, the
content should not be more than the amount that corresponds to 0.2 mL of 0.01 N
hydrochloric acid.
(5) Arsenic : It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(6) Lead : When 5.0 g of L-Asparagine is tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content
should not be more than 5.0 ppm.
Loss on Drying When L-Asparagine is dried for 3 hours at 130℃, the weight loss
should not be more than 12.5%.
Residue on Ignition Residue after ignition should not be more than 0.1%.
Assay Approximately 0.3 g is accurately weighed and dissolved in 3 mL of formic acid,
where glacial acetic acid (for non-aqueous titration) is added to bring the total volume
to 50 mL. This solution is titrated with 0.1 N perchloric acid solution (indicator : 1 mL
87
of crystal violet buffered in glacial acetic acid). At the end point, the solution turns
from pale violet to blue, then to green. Separately, a blank test is done following the
same procedure.
0.1 N perchloric acid solution 1 mL ＝ 13.212 mg C4H8N2O3

88
 Aspartame

Chemical Formula: C14H18N2O5

Molecular Weight: 294.31 INS No.: 951

Synonyms: Aspartyl phenylalanine methyl CAS No.: 22839-47-0
ester

Compositional Specifications of Aspartame

Content Aspartame, when calculated on the dried basis, should contain within a range of
98.0∼102.0% of aspartame (C14H18N2O5).
Description Aspartame occurs as a white crystalline powder or granules. It is odorless
and has a strong sweet taste.
Identification (1) To 10 mg of Aspartame, add 3 mL of water and 2 mL of
ninhydrin-hydrindantin solution(2 g of ninhydrin is dissolved in 75 mL of
dimethylsulfoxide, where 62 mg of hydrindantin and 4 M acetate lithium buffer
solution, pH 9.0 are added to make 100 mL of solution), and heat. A black-purple
color develops.
(2) Dissolve 20 mg of Aspartame in 1 mL of methanol, add 0.5 mL of methanol
saturated with hydroxylamine hydrochloride, mix, then add 0.3 mL of methanolic 35%
potassium hydroxide solution, and boil in a water bath. Cool, adjust the pH to 1.0∼
1.5 with 0.1 N hydrochloric acid, and add 0.1 mL of ferric chloride solution (1→100).
A deep red-purple color develops.
Purity (1) Clarity and Color of Solution : When 1 g of Aspartame is dissolved in 0.2 N
hydrochloric acid to make 100 mL solution, it should be colorless and clear.
(2) pH : Weigh 0.8 g of Aspartame, and dissolve it in water to make 100 mL. pH of
this solution should be within a range of 4.5～6.0.
(3) Specific Rotation : Approximately 2 g of Aspartame is accurately weighed, which is
dissolved in 15 N folic acid within 30 minutes so that the total volume becomes 50
mL. Optical rotation of the solution is measured. When it is translated to dried material, it
should be ＝ +12.5∼+17.5°.
(4) Arsenic : It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(5) Lead : When 5.0 g of Aspartame is tested by Atomic Absorption Spectrophotometry
or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content should not be more
than 1.0 ppm.
(6) 5-Benzyl-3,6-Dioxo-2-Piperazine Acetic Acid : Weigh 10 mg of Aspartame, place
89
 into a test tube 3 mL with a stopper, add 1.0 mL of silylation solution and shake.
Heat at 80℃ for 30 minutes, shake for 15 seconds, allow to cool, and use as the
test solution. Measure separately 3 mL of a standard solution, place into a test tube
with a stopper, evaporate to dryness on a water bath, add 1 mL of silylation solution
to the residue, and proceed as in the case of the sample. Perform Gas
Chromatography under the operation conditions given below. The content should not
be more than 1.5%.
5-benzyl-3,6-dioxo-2-pipera Peak height of Sa 1 100
zine acetate content(%) = St(mg) × ×
Peak height of St
×
Sa(mg) 167

Operation Conditoins
-Injector : Microtech 220 or its equivalent.
-Column : inner diameter 3∼4 mm, length 2 m glass tube
-Column filler : 80∼100 Mesh Schupelcoport or its equivalent, approximately 3% of
porous support for gas chromatography
-Detector : hydrogen flame ionization detector (FID)
-Temperature at injection port : 200℃
-Column temperature : 200℃
-Detector temperature : 275℃
-Carrier gas and flow rate : nitrogen, flow rate is adjusted so that
5-benzyl-3,6-dioxo-2-piperazineacetic acid is detected after about 7～9 minutes
Solutions
-Silylation Solution : Ｎ,O-bis(trimethylsilyl)acetamide and dimethylforma is mixed at a
ratio of 3 : 2 . Prepared it before using.
-Standard Solution : 25 mg of 5-benzyl-3,6-dioxo-2-piperazine aceate standard is
accurately weighed into a 50 mL flask and dissolved in methyl alcohol to make 50
mL solution. 10 mL of this solution is diluted to 100 mL with methyl alcohol.
(7) Transmittance : 1% of Aspartame in 2 N hydrochloric acid should have the
absorbance of 0.022 at 430 nm (spectrophotometer, 1cm path length, reference
solution : 2 N hydrochloric acid)
Loss on Drying When Aspartame is dried for 4 hours at 105℃, the weight loss should not
be more than 4.5%.
Residue on Ignition Residue after ignition should not be more than 0.2%.
Assay Approximately 0.3 g of Aspartame is accurately weighed and dissolved in 3 mL
of formic acid. After adding 50 mL of glacial acetic acid to this solution, it is titrated
with 0.1 N perchloric acid (indicator : 0.5 mL of α-naphthol benzene). The end point
is where the solution changes its color from brown to green. Separately, a blank test
is carried out for the correction by the same method and it is converted into a dried
form.
1 mL of 0.1 N perchloric acid ＝ 29.431 mg C14H18N2O5

90
 L-Aspartic Acid

Chemical Formula: C4H7NO4

Molecular Weight: 133.10

Synonyms: L-Asparaginic acid;
CAS No.: 56-84-8
L-aminosuccinic acid

Compositional Specifications of L-Aspartic Acid

Content If L-Aspartic Acid is converted to a dried form, it should contain 98.0∼102.0%
L-Aspartic acid (C4H7NO4).
Description L-Aspartic Acid is a scentless white crystal or crystalline powder with slightly
sour taste.
Identification (1) 1 mL of ninhydrine solution (1→50) is added to 5 mL aqueous solution
of L-Aspartic Acid (1→1,000). Upon heating for 3 minutes in a water bath, this
solution turns blue-purple color.
(2) L-Aspartic Acid is dissolved in 1 N hydrochloric acid (1→25). Upon adding 1 mL of
sodium nitrite standard solution to 5 mL of this solution, colorless gas evolves with
bubbles.
Purity (1) Clarity and Color of Solution : A solution of 1 g of L-Aspartic Acid in 20 mL
of 1 N hydrochloric acid should be colorless and clear.
(2) pH : Saturated aqueous solution of L-Aspartic Acid should have pH of 2.5∼3.5.
(3) Specific Rotation : 8 g of L-Aspartic Acid is accurately weighed, which is dissolved
in 6 N hydrochloric acid so that the total volume becomes 100 mL. Optical rotation of the
solution is measured. When it is translated to dried material, it should be ＝ +24.0∼
+26.0°.
(4) Chlorides : When 0.07 g of L-Aspartic Acid is tested by Chloride Limit Test, the
content should not be more than the amount that corresponds to 0.2 mL of 0.01 N
hydrochloric acid.
(5) Arsenic : It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(6) Lead : When 5.0 g of L-Aspartic Acid is tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content
should not be more than 5.0 ppm.
Loss on Drying When L-Aspartic Acid is dried for 3 hours at 105℃, the weight loss
should not be more than 0.3%.
Residue on Ignition Residue after ignition should not be more than 0.1%.
Assay Approximately 0.3 g is accurately weighed and dissolved in 6 mL of formic acid,
where glacial acetic acid (for non-aqueous titration) is added to bring the total volume
to 50 mL. This solution is titrated with 0.1 N perchloric acid solution (indicator : 1 mL
91
of crystal violet buffered in glacial acetic acid). At the end point, the solution turns
from pale violet to blue, then to green. Separately, a blank test is done following the
same procedure.
0.1 N perchloric acid solution 1 mL ＝ 13.310 mg C4H7NO4

92
 Azodicarbonamide
Chemical Formula: C2H4N4O2

Molecular Weight: 116.08 INS No.: 927a

Synonyms: Azobisformamide CAS No.: 123-77-3

Compositional Specifications of Azodicarbonamide

Content Azodicarbonamide, when calculated on the dried basis, should contain not less
than 98.6% of azodicarbonamide (C2H4N4O2).
Description Azodicarbonamide is yellow～orange red scentless crystalline powder.
Identification (1) A solution of 35 mg of Azodicarbonamide in 1000 mL of water exhibits
an ultraviolet absorption maximum at a wavelength of 245 nm.
(2) Transfer 10 mg of Azodicarbonamide into a crucible, heat, and add a few drops of
barium hydroxide standard solution. The liquid turns turbid.
Purity (1) pH : To 2 g of Azodicarbonamide, add 100 mL of water and suspend for 5
minutes. pH of this suspension should not less than 5.0.
(2) Arsenic : It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(3) Lead : When 5.0 g of Azodicarbonamide is tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content
should not be more than 2.0 ppm.
(4) Nitrogen : 50 mg of Azodicarbonamide is transferred into a 100 mL flask for
decomposition. To decompose Azodicarbonamide, 3 mL of freshly prepared 57%
hydroiodic acid solution is added and then heated for 1 hour and 30 minutes. Sufficient
amount of water is added to maintain the initial volume of the liquid. After
decomposition is complete, the flask is heated at a higher temperature so that the
volume is reduced to 1/2. After cooling, the liquid is continuously decomposed and tested
by nitrogen determination method and the amount should be within a range of 47.2～48.7%.
Loss on Drying When Azodicarbonamide is dried for 2 hours at 50℃ under a reduced
pressure, the weight loss should not be more than 0.5%.
Residue on Ignition Residue on ignition of Azodicarbonamide should not be more than
0.15%.
Assay Accurately weigh 225 mg of dried material, transfer into a 250 mL iodine flask
with a glass stop cock, and dissolve it in 25 mL dimethylsulfoxide (DMSO). After
adding 5 g of potassium iodide, 15 mL of water, and 10 mL of hydrochloric acid, the
stop cock is quickly placed on the flask, which is then kept in a dark place for 20～25
minutes (it needs to be shaken until potassium iodide is dissolved). Free iodine is
titrated with 0.1N sodium thiosulfate (indicator : starch standard solution). Separately,
a blank test is done following the same procedure.
1 mL of 0.1 N sodium thiosulfate solution ＝ 5.804 mg C2H4N4O2
93
 Beeswax

INS No.: 901

CAS No.:
8012-89-3(white)
8006-40-4(yellow)

Definition There are two grades, beeswax (white) and beeswax (yellow). Honey comb of
honey bee (Apis mellifera L., Apis indica Radoszkowski) is heated, pressure-filtered,
and purified to obtain beeswax (yellow), which is then bleached to obtain beeswax
(white).
Compositional Specifications of Beeswax
Description Beeswax (white) is white∼yellowish white solid having a faint and
characteristic odor. Beeswax (yellow) is yellow～grayish brown solid with honey like
odor.
Purity (1) Arsenic ： It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(2) Lead : When 5.0 g of Beeswax is tested by Atomic Absorption Spectrophotometry
or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content should not be more
than 2.0 ppm.
(3) Mercury : When Beeswax is tested by Mercury Test Method, its content should not
be more than 1.0 ppm.
(4) Melting Point ： Melting point of Beeswax should be in a temperature range of 62∼
65℃.
(5) Acid value ： 3 g of Beeswax is accurately weighed and transferred into a 200 mL
Erlenmeyer flask with 25 mL of anhydrous alcohol, previously neutralized to
phenolphthalein with potassium hydroxide, until the sample is melted, Test Solution.
When is tested by Mercury Test in Oil and Fats Method, acid value should be 17～
24 for beeswax (white) and 18～24 for beeswax (yellow).
(6) Ester Value ： 25 mL of 0.5 N alcoholic potassium hydroxide and 50 mL of alcohol
are added to the Test Solution for acid value. A reflux condenser is attached and the
solution is heated for 4 hours in a water bath. Excess alkali is titrated with 0.5 N
hydrochloric acid and ester value is calculated by the following equation. Ester value
should be 72～79 for beeswax (white) and 72～77 for beeswax (yellow). Separately,
a blank test is carried out.

Ester Value ＝
(a—b) × 28.05
weight of the sample(g)

a ： Consumed amount of 0.5 N hydrochloric acid for blank test (mL)

b ： Consumed amount of 0.5 N hydrochloric acid for Test Solution (mL)
94
 (7) Carnauba Wax ： 100 mg of the sample is weighed and tranferred into a test tube,
where 20 mL of n-butyl alcohol is added. The test tube is heated in a boiling water
bath and shaken until it becomes transparent. The test tube is placed in a beaker
with 60℃ water, which is then allow it to cool to room temperature. Loose, fine,
needlelike crystals are separated from the solution and observed under a microscope.
Crystals appear as loose needle or stellate cllusters, no amorphous masses are
observed.
(8) Fat, Japan Wax, Rosin, and Soap ： 35 mL of sodium hydroxide solution (1→7) is
added to 1 g of Beeswax, which is boiled for 30 minutes while occasionally adding
water to supplement loss. After cooling, wax is separated so that the liquid remain
clear. This liquid is then filtered. When the filtrate is acidified with hydrochloric acid,
precipitates should not form.
(9) Saponification Cloud Test ： 3 g of Beeswax is weighed and transferred into a 100
mL round bottom flask, where 30 mL of potassium hydroxide solution (saponifying
solution) in aldehyde free alcohol (40→1,000) is added. After attaching a reflux
condenser to the flask, gently heated for 2 hours in a water bath. The condenser is
removed, and inserted a thermometer, and the flask is placed in a 80℃ water bath. It
is then cooled to 65℃ by shaking. The solution shows no cloudiness or globule
formation before the solution reaches 65℃.
(10) Saponification Value : 5 g of Beeswax is accurately weighed and transferred into
a flask, where 50 mL of 0.5 N alcoholic solution of potassium hydroxide is added.
After attaching a reflux condenser, the solution is gently saponified for 30 minutes to
1 hour. The saponified solution is used as Test Solution. The test solution is
proceeded as directed under saponification value in Oils and Fats Test. The
saponification value of the solution should be 87 ∼ 104.
(11) Peroxides value : 5 g of Beeswax is accurately weighed into a 250 mL round
bottom erlenmeyer flask, 35 mL of Acetic acid․Chloroform mixture (3:2) is added, and
gently shaken to be dissolved transparently. Clean nitrogen is passed through this to
substitute the air in the container. When nitrogen is passed, 1 mL of potassium
iodide TS is accurately weighed into the container. Stop the nitrogen, a stopper is
immediately placed, mixed for 1 minutes, and allow to stand for 5 minutes in a dark
place. 75 mL of water is added, and vigorously shaken and it is titrated with 0.01N
sodium thiosulfate (indicator : starch standard TS). When Peroxides value is obtained
with following equation, the value sholud not be more than 5. Separately, a blank test
is done to correct.
Peroxides value consumed amount of 0.01N sodium thiosulfate (mL) × 10
= Weight of sample(g)
(12) Ceresin , paraffin and other wax : 3g of Beeswax is accurately weighed and
transferred into a 100 mL round-bottomed flask, where 30 mL of 4% alcoholic
solution of potassium hydroxide solution is added. A reflux condenser is attached to
95
 the flask. It is then heated for 2 hours in a water bath, condenser is removed and
thermometer is equipped. The flask is continuously shaken and slowly cooled in a
beaker where 80℃ water is, precipitates should not be formed before it reaches 6
5℃.
(13) Glycerol and other polyol : 0.2 g of Beeswax is accurately weighed and
transferred into a round-bottomed flask, where 10 mL of 4% alcoholic solution of
potassium hydroxide solution is added. A reflux condenser is attached to the flask. It
is then heated in a water bath for 30 minutes, again 50 mL of 10% sulfuric acid is
added, cooled, and filtered. The resultant solution diluted to 100 mL with 10%
sulfuric acid, test solution. 1.0 mL of test solution is placed in test tube, 0.5 mL of
1.0% sodium periodate is added, mixed, and allow to stand for 5 minutes. 1.0 mL of
fuchsin sulfurous acid TS is added and mixed. Test tube is placed 10~15 minutes in
a beaker containing water at 40℃, the bluish-violet color in the solution is not more
intense than a standard prepared at the same time in the same manner using 1.0 mL
of a 0.001% solution of glycerol(dissolved in 10% sulfuric acid) (Not be more than
0.5 % as glycerol).

96
 Beet Red
INS No.: 162
Synonyms: Beetroot red CAS No.: 7659-95-2(Betanin)

Definition Beet Red is a pigment obtained from extracting roots of beet (Beta vulgaris
Linné) of chenopodiaceae with water or ethyl alcohol. The major component is
isobetanine and betanine. Dilutant, stabilizer, or solvent can be added for the purpose
of color value adjustment and quality preservation.
Compositional Specifications of Beet Red
Content Color value ( ) of Beet Red should not be less than the indicated value.
Description Beet Red is reddish violet～dark violet liquid, lump, powder, or paste with a
slight characteristic odor.
Identification (1) Test Solution of Beet Red obtained in Color Value section shows
reddish violet and a absorbance maximum at about 535 nm.
(2) When 1 mL of sodium hydroxide solution(1→10) is added to 5 mL of Test Solution
in (1), the colour changes yellow.
Purity (1) Arsenic : It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(2) Lead : When 5.0 g of Beet Red is tested by Atomic Absorption Spectrophotometry
or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content should not be more
than 2.0 ppm.
(3) Cadmium : When 5.0 g of Beet Red is tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content
should not be more than 1.0 ppm.
(4) Mercury : When 0.1 g of Beet Red is tested by Mercury Test Method, its content
should not be more than 1.0ppm.
(5) Nitrate : 0.1 g of Beet Red is accurately weighed and transferred into water to
make 100 mL, Test Solution. Separately, take 0.2 mL, 1 mL, 10 mL and 50 mL of
Nitrate standard stock solution and add water to make to 100 mL, standard solution
respectively. Measure the peak area of nitrate ion of standard solution and standard
stock solution and plot the calibration curve. When measure the peak area of nitrate
ion of test solution and plot the calibration curve, the calculated content of
nitrate(NO3) should not be more than 0.27%(based on the product whose color value
is 15).
Operation condition
Detector: Condutivity detector
Filler: Porous anion exchnager
Column: Inner diameter 4.6~6.0 mm length 5~10 cm Stainless steel tube
Temperature of column: 40 ℃
Eluent: Aqueous solution(pH 4.0) contains phthalic acid(2.5 mmol/L) and
tris(hydroxymethyl)aminomethane(2.4 mmol/L)
Rate of discharge: 1.5mL/min
97
 Solution
Standard nitrate stock solution : 1.631 g of potassium nitrate is accurately weighed
and water is added to make 1,000 mL. 10mL of this solution is taken into water to
make accurately 100mL(1 mL of this solution contains 0.1mg of nitrate(NO3))
Assay(color value) Appropriate amount of Beet Red is accurately weighed so that the
absorption is within the range of 0.3 to 0.7 and dissolved in acetic acid․sodium acetate
buffer solution with pH 5.4 to make 100 mL. 1 mL of this solution is diluted to 100 mL
with acetic acid·sodium acetate buffer solution with pH 5.4, Test Solution. If necessary,
the solution is centrifuged and the supernatant is used. Using acetic acid·sodium
acetate buffer solution with pH 5.4 as a blank, absorbance A is measured at the
maximum absorption at about 535 nm with 1 cm path length. Color value is obtained
using the following equation.
A × 1,000
Color Value( ) ＝ weight of the sample(g)
∘Acetic acid · sodium acetate buffer solution (pH 5.4)
Solution 1： 1,000 mL of solution containing 13.6 g of sodium acetate.
Solution 2：1,000 mL of solution containing 6 mL of glacial acetic.
Solution 1 and Solution 2 are mixed well (8:2) and its pH is adjusted to 5.4.

98
 Bentonite

INS No.: 558

CAS No.: 1302-78-9

Definition Bentonite is naturally occurring colloidal hydrated aluminum silicate.

Compositional Specifications of Bentonite
Description Bentonite is odorless white～pale yellowish brown powder or granule with a
slight taste similar to soil or clay when it is wetted with water.
Identification (1) 0.2 g of Bentonite is mixed with 1.5 g of 50 : 50 mixture of anhydrous
sodium carbonate and anhydrous potassium carbonate. It is then heated until it melts
completely in a platinum or nickel crucible. After cooling, 5 mL of water is added
and allow to stand for 3 minutes. The bottom of the crucible is gently heated and
then the solidified matter is transferred into a beaker along with water. Hydrochloric
acid is slowly added until foaming stops. After adding 10 mL more of hydrochloric
acid, it is evaporated to dryness. 200 mL of water is added to the residue, which is
boiled and filtered. Gel phase residue is transferred into a platinum crucible. When 5
mL of hydrofluoric acid is added, and dissolved. Upon heating, it volatilized almost.
(2) The filtrate in (1) shows the reaction of aluminum salt in Identification.
(3) When Bentonite is immersed in water, the volume swells up to 5 times.
Purity (1) Foreign Substances : 2 g of Bentonite is weighed and transferred into a
mortar, where 20 mL of water is added and let it swells. It is enenly dispersed using a
glass rod and water is added to bring the total volume to 100 mL. The dispersion is passed
through a No.7 mesh screen using water. When the mesh screen is rubbed with finger tips,
there should not be any sand.
(2) Arsenic : It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(3) Lead : 5.0 g of dried sample is weighed and transferred into a 250 mL beaker
containing 100 mL of diluted hydrochloric acid (1→25). It is then stirred, covered
with a watch glass, and boiled for 15 minutes. After cooling to room temperature, the
beaker is allowed insoluble matter to settle. The supernatant is filtered through a
filter paper. The filter paper is washed with four 25 mL portions of hot water,
collecting the filtrate in the beaker. The combined filtrate is concentrated by gentle
boiling to approximately 20 mL. If a precipitate are formed, 2～3 drops of nitric acid
are added and boiled again. After cooling to room temperature, the concentrated
extracts is filtered through a rapid-flow filter paper. The beaker and the filter paper
are washed with water and the washing water is added to the filtrate. The total
volume is brought up to 50 mL with water, Test Solution. When this test solution is
tested by Atomic Absorption Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma
Emission Spectroscopy, its content should not be more than 20.0 ppm.
(4) Total Viable Aerobic Count : When Bentonite is tested by Microbe Test Methods
for Total Viable Aerobic Count (Number of General Germs) in General Test Method
99
 in 「Standards and Specifications for Foods」, it should not be more than 1,000 per 1
g.
(5) E. Coli : When Bentonite is tested by Microbe Test Methods for E. Coli in General
Test Method 「Standards and Specifications for Foods」, it should be negative (-).
Loss on Drying When 2 g of Bentonite is dried at 110℃ until the weight becomes
constant, the weight loss should not be more than 5～10%.
Swelling Test 2 g of Bentonite is added ,in several divided portions, to a 100 mL
graduated cylinder with a stopper containing water. After the previous portion added
settles down, the next portion added. Leave undisturbed for 24 hours, the volume of
the swollen lump on bottom should read 10 mL or higher.

100
 Benzaldehyde

Chemical Formula: C7H6O

Molecular Weight: 106.12

Synonyms: Benzene methylal CAS No.: 100-52-7

Compositional Specifications of Benzaldehyde

Content Benzaldehyde should contain not less than 98.0% of benzaldehyde (C7H6O).
Description Benzaldehyde is a colorless liquid having an almond-like odor.
Identification (1) To 1 mL of Benzaldehyde, add 3 mL of sodium hydrogen bisulfite
solution, and shake. The mixture evolves heat immediately and forms crystalline
lumps. Add 5 mL of water to this mixture. The crystalline lumps are dissolved.
(2) To 3 drops of Benzaldehyde, add 0.1 g of phenol and 2 mL of sulfuric acid, and
shake. The color of this solution becomes dark-red, and the mixture partly forms
resinous lumps. Take 2 drops of this solution, add 5 mL of water, and make alkaline
with sodium hydroxide solution. The color becomes purple.
Purity (1) Specific Gravity : Specific gravity of Benzaldehyde should be within a range
of 1.041∼1.046
(2) Refractive Index : Refractive Index of Benzaldehyde should be within a range of
1.544～1.547
(3) Chlorides : When Benzaldehyde is tested by Copper Mesh Test Method for
Halogens in Test Methods for Flavorings, it should be appropriate.
Assay Accurately weigh about 0.8 g of Benzaldehyde, and proceed as directed under
hydroxyl amine Method 2 in Aldehyde and Ketone Content in Flavoring Substances
Tests. In the procedure, allow the mixture to stand for 10 minutes.
1 mL of 0.5 N hydrochloric acid = 53.06 mg of C7H6O

101
 Benzoic Acid

Chemical Formula: C7H6O2

Molecular Weight: 122.12 INS No.: 210

Synonyms: Benzenecarboxylic acid CAS No.: 65-85-0

Compositional Specifications of Benzoic Acid

Content Benzoic Acid, when calculated on the dried basis, should contain not less than
99.5% of benzoic acid (C7H6O2)
Description Benzoic Acid occurs as white laminar crystals or needles. It is odorless or
has a slight odor of benzaldehyde.
Identification Dissolve Benzoic Acid in sodium hydroxide solution (1→20). The Solution
responds to the test for Benzoate.
Purity (1) Melting Point : Melting point of Benzoic Acid should be within a range of 12
1～123℃
(2) Chlorides : Weigh 0.5 g of Benzoic Acid and 0.7 g of calcium carbonate, transfer
into a porcelain crucible, add a small amount of water, mix, dry at 100℃, and heat at
about 600℃ for 10 minutes. After cooling, add 20 mL of diluted nitric acid to
dissolve the residue, and filter. Wash the insoluble substances with about 15 mL of
water, combine the washings and the filtrate, add water to make 50 mL. This solution
is used as test solution. Weigh 0.7 g of calcium carbonate, dissolve it in 20 mL of
diluted nitric acid , filter if necessary, add 0.2 mL of 0.01 N hydrochloric acid and
water, shake well, and allow to stand for 5 minutes. This solution is used as the
reference solution. The test solution is not more turbid than the reference solution.
(3) Phthalic acid : 0.1 g of Benzoic Acid is transferred into a test tube, where freshly
sublimed 2～3 mg of resorcin and 1 mL of sulfuric acid are added and shaken. It is
heated for 5 minutes at 125∼130℃. After cooling, water is added to make 5 mL of
solution. While cooling, it is alkalinized by adding sodium hydroxide solution (2→5)
drop-wise. The resulting solution is diluted to 10 mL with water. It should not show
green fluorescence under UV.
(4) Arsenic : It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(5) Lead : When 5.0 g of Benzoic Acid is tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content
should not be more than 2.0 ppm.
(6) Mercury : When Benzoic Acid is tested by Mercury Limit Test, its content should
not be more than 1.0 ppm.
(7) Realdily Carbonizable Substances : When 0.5 g of Benzoic Acid is tested for
Realdily Carbonizable Substances, its color should not be darker than the Color
102
 Standard Solution Q.
(8) Readily Oxidizable Substances : Add 1.5 mL of sulfuric acid to 100 mL of water,
add drop wise 0.1 N potassium permanganate while boiling until the pink color
persists for 30 seconds. Weigh 1 g of Benzoic Acid, and dissolve it in the solution.
Titrate with 0.1 N potassium permanganate at about 70℃ until the pink color persists
for 15 seconds. The amount should not be more than 0.5 mL.
Loss on Drying When Benzoic Acid is dried for 3 hours in a vacuum desiccator (silica
gel), the weight loss should not be more than 0.5%.
Residue on Ignition Residue after ignition should not be more than 0.05%.
Assay Accurately weigh about 0.25 g of Benzoic Acid, after dried, dissolve in 25 mL of
50% v/v ethanol neutralized with 0.1 N sodium hydroxide, and titrate with 0.1 N
sodium hydroxide (indicator : 3 drops of phenol red solution).
1 mL of 0.1 N sodium hydroxide = 12.21 mg of C7H6O2

103
 Benzyl Acetate

Chemical Formula: C9H10O2

Molecular Weight: 150.18
Synonyms: Benzyl ethanoate CAS No.: 140-11-4

Compositional Specifications of Benzyl Acetate

Content Linalyl Acetate should be contain not less than 98.0% of benzyl acetate
(C9H10O2).
Description Linalyl Acetate is a colorless, transparent liquid having a characteristic odor.
Identification To 1 mL of Benzyl Acetate, add 5 mL of 10% alcoholic solution of
potassium hydroxide. Warm in hot water for 20 minutes. The characteristic odor
disappears. Cool, and add 8 mL of water and 1 mL of diluted hydrochloric acid. The
solution responds to the test for Acetate (C) in Identification.
Purity (1) Specific Gravity : Specific gravity of Benzyl Acetate should be within a range
of 1.052～1.056
(2) Refractive Index : Refractive Index of Benzyl Acetate should be within a range of
1.501～1.504
(3) Clarity and Color of Solution : When 1 mL of Linalyl Acetate is dissolved in 5 mL
of 60% alcohol, the solution should be clear.
(4) Acid Value : Acid value of Linalyl Acetate is tested by Acid Value in Flavoring
Substance Test. It should not be more than 1.
(5) Chloride : When Linalyl Acetate is tested by Copper Mesh Test Method in
Halogenated Compounds for Flavoring, it should be appropriate.
Assay Accurately weigh about 0.8 g of Benzyl Acetate, and proceed as directed under
Ester Value and Ester Content in Flavoring Substances Tests.
1 mL of 0.5 N alcoholic solution of potassium hydroxide = 75.09 mg of C9H10O2

104
 Benzyl Alcohol

Chemical Formula: C7H8O

Molecular Weight: 108.14 INS No.: 1519

Synonyms: Benzene methanol CAS No.: 100-51-6

Compositional Specifications of Benzyl Alcohol

Content Benzyl Alcohol should contain not less than 98.0% of benzyl alcohol (C7H8O).
Description Benzyl Alcohol is a colorless, transparent liquid having a characteristic odor.
Identification Add 2～3 drops of Benzyl Alcohol to 5 mL of potassium permanganate
solution (1→20), and acidify with diluted sulfuric acid. An odor of benzaldehyde is
evolved.
Purity (1) Specific Gravity : Specific gravity of Benzyl Alcohol should be within a range
of 1.042～1.047
(2) Refractive Index : Refractive Index of Benzyl Alcohol should be within a range of
1.539～1.541
(3) Clarity and Color of Solution : When 1 mL of Benzyl Alcohol is dissolved in 50 mL
of water, even though the solution is turbid, the oily layer should not be separated
immediately.
(4) Chlorides : When Benzyl Alcohol is tested by Copper Mesh Test Method in
Halogenated Compounds for Flavoring, it should be appropriate.
(5) Free Acid and Free Alkali : Dissolve 100 mL of Benzyl Alcohol in 10 mL of
neutralized ethanol, and add 2 drops of phenolphthalein solution. No pink color
develops. When add 0.2 mL of 0.1 N sodium hydroxide in this solution and shake, the
color becomes pink.
(6) Aldehyde : Weigh exactly 5 g of Benzyl Alcohol, and proceed as directed under
hydroxyl amine Method 2 in Aldehyde and Ketone Content in Flavoring Substances
Tests. The volume of consumed 0.5 N hydrochloric acid should not more than 0.2 mL.
Assay Accurately weigh about 0.5 g of Benzyl Alcohol, and proceed as directed under
Method 2 in Alcohol Content in Flavoring Substances Tests.
1 mL of 0.5 N alcoholic potassium hydroxide = 54.07 mg of C7H8O

105
 Benzyl Propionate

Chemical Formula: C10H12O2

Molecular Weight: 164.20
Synonyms: Benzyl propanoate CAS No.: 122-63-4

Compositional Specifications of Benzyl Propionate

Content Benzyl Propionate should contain not less than 98.0% of benzyl propionate
(C10H12O2).
Description Benzyl Propionate is a colorless, transparent liquid having a characteristic odor.
Identification To 1 mL of Benzyl Propionate, add 5 mL of 10% ethanolic potassium
hydroxide solution. Warm in hot water for 20 minutes. The characteristic odor
disappears. Cool, and acidify with diluted sulfuric acid. An odor of propionic acid is
evolved.
Purity (1) Specific Gravity : Specific gravity of Benzyl Propionate should be within a
range of 1.032～1.036.
(2) Refractive Index : Refractive Index of Benzyl Propionate should be within a range of
1.496～1.500.
(3) Clarity and Color of Solution : 1 mL of Benzyl Propionate is dissolved in 3 mL of
70% ethanol. This solution should be Clear.
(4) Acid Value : Acid value of Benzyl Propionate is tested by Acid Value in Flavoring
Substance Test. It should not be more than 1.
(5) Chlorinated Compounds : Proceed as directed under Copper Mesh Method in
Halogen Tests in Flavoring Substances Tests. It should be appropriate.
Assay Accurately weigh about 1 g of Benzyl Propionate, and proceed as directed under
Ester Value and Ester Content in Flavoring Substances Tests.
1 mL of 0.5 N alcoholic solution of potassium hydroxide = 82.10 mg of C10H12O2

106
 Berries Color

INS No.: 163

Definition This is a collective name for pigments which is originated from berries. Major
component of this pigment is anthocyanin which is obtained from juice or water extract of
berries. There are gooseberry color (origin：Cucumis myriocarpus NAUO), European
dewberry color (origin：Rubus caesius L. etc), Raspberry color (origin:Rubus idaeus L. etc.),
American red raspberry color (origin：Rubus strigosus MICHX), Red currant color (origin：
Ribes sativum SYME.), Loganberry color (origin：Rubus loganobaccus BAILEY.), Mulberry
color (origin：Morus nigra L., M. alba L.), Blackberry color (origin：Rubus fruticosus L.),
Black currant color (origin：Ribes nigrum L.), Black huckleberry color (origin：Gaylussacia
baccata C. KOCH.), Blueberry color (origin：Vaccinium corymbosum L.), Salmonberry color
(origin：Rubus spectabilis PURSH.), Strawberry color (origin：Fragaria ananassa DUCHESNE.),
Elder berry color (origin：Sambucus caerulea RAFIN, etc.), Uguisukagura color (origin：
Lonicera carulea L. var. emphyllocalyx NAKAI), Whortleberry color (origin：Vaccinium
myrtillus L.), Cowberry color (origin：Vaccinium Vitis Idaea L.), Cranberry color (origin：
Oxycoccus macrocarpus PERS.), Thimbleberry color (origin：Rubus occidentalis L.). Dilutant,
stabilizer, or solvent can be added for the purpose of color value adjustment and quality
preservation.
Compositional Specifications of Berries Color
Content Color value ( ) of Berries Color should not be less than the indicated value.
Description Berries Color is dark red liquid, lump, powder, or paste with a slight
characteristic scent.
Identification (1) Test Solution obtained in Color Value section of Berries Color shows re
d～dark blue color and a maximum absorption at 500～540 nm.
(2) When Test Solution in (1) is alkalinized by adding sodium hydroxide TS, the color
of the solution changes.
Purity (1) Arsenic ： It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(2) Lead : When 5.0 g of Berries Color is tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content
should not be more than 10.0 ppm.
(3) Sulfur Dioxide ： When Berries Color is tested by Purity (3) for 「Grape Skin Extrac
t」, the content should not be more than 0.005% per 1 color value ( ).
(4) Residual Solvent ： When berries color is tested by Purity (5) for 「Paprika Extract
Pigments」, residual methanol should not be more than 0.1%(based on the product
whose color value is 40).
Assay (Color Value) Appropriate amount of Berries Color is accurately weighed so that
the absorbance is within 0.3～0.7 and dissolved in citric acid-dibasic sodium phosphate
buffer solution with pH 3.0 so that total volume is 100 mL (Test Solution). If
107
 necessary, the solution is centrifuged and the supernatant is used. Using citric
acid-dibasic sodium phosphate buffer solution with pH 3.0 as a reference solution,
absorption A is measured at a wavelength of maximum absorption at 500～540 nm with
1 cm path length. Color value is obtained using the following equation.
Color Value(
A × 10
) ＝
weight of the sample(g)

Citric acid·dibasic sodium phosphate buffer solution (pH 3.0)

∘Solution 1：0.1 M citric acid solution：1 ℓ of solution containing 21.01 g of citric acid
(C6H8O7‧H2O).
∘Solution 2：0.2 M dibasic sodium phosphate solution： 1 ℓ of solution containing 71.63 g
of dibasic sodium phosphate (Na2HPO4‧12H2O).
Solution 1 and Solution 2 are mixed well (59 : 41) and its pH is adjusted to 3.0.

108
 Betaine
Definition Betaine is obtained by purifying Mulyeots(sugar solutions and syrups) (by
separation) from beet (Beta vulgaris L. var. rapa) of Chenopodiaceae. The major
component is betaine (C5H11NO2＝ 117.15).
Compositional Specifications of Betaine
Content Betaine contains 98.0∼102.0% of betaine (C5H11NO2.
Description Betaine is white crystallite with a slight odor and sweet taste.
Identification 10 ㎕ each of aqueous solution (1→100) of Betaine and Betaine standard
solution (1→100) is tested by liquid chromatography as following operation conditions.
The retention times for Test Solution and Standard Solution should be identical.
Operation Conditions
-Detector ： Differential refractometer(RI Detector)
-Column ： Carbohydrate(8 mm×300 mm) or equivalent
-Column Temperature ： 80℃
-Mobile Phase ： Water
-Flow Rate ： 1 mL/min
Purity (1) Clarity of solution ： 1 g of Betaine is dissolved in 10 mL of water. The
solution should be colorless and clear.
(2) pH ： pH of Betaine solution(1→20) should be 5.0∼7.0.
(3) Chloride ： When 1 g of Betaine is tested as directed under Chlorides Test, the
content should not be more than that amount corresponds to 0.15 mL of 0.01 N
hydrochloric acid.
(4) Sulfate ： When 1 g of Betaine is tested as directed under Sulfates Test, the
content should not be more than that amount corresponds to 0.2 mL of 0.01 N
sulfuric acid.
(5) Arsenic ： It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(6) Lead : When 5.0 g of Betaine is tested by Atomic Absorption Spectrophotometry
or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content should not be more
than 2.0 ppm.
Loss on Drying When Betaine is dried for 3 hours at 105℃, the weight loss should not
be more than 2%.
Residue on Ignition Residue on ignition should not be more than 0.1%.
Assay Approximately 1 g of Betaine, previously dried, accurately weighed and dissolved
in water to make volume 100 mL. 10 mL of this solution is passed through a column
packed with 10 mL of ion exchange resin A mixture of weakly acidic ion exchange
resin (H type) and strongly alkaline ion exchange resin (OH type) in 1 : 4 volume
ratio. The column is washed by water. Washing water is added to the effluent, which is
acidified to pH 1.0 with hydrochloric acid. The total volume is brought up to 100 mL
with water. To 5 mL of this solution, 5 mL of Reinecke salt solution, previously cooled,
109
 is added, which is cooled for 3 hours in a refrigerator. Precipitates are filtered through
a glass filter (3G4), washed with ether and dried in air. The resultant precipitates are
dissolved in 70% acetone so that the total volume is 25 mL, Test Solution. Absorbance
of the Test Solution is measured at 525 nm with 1cm path length. Separately,
approximately 1g of Betaine Standard, previously dried at 105℃ for 3 hours,
accurately weighed, and dissolved in water so that the total volume is 100 mL,
Standard Stock Solution. 10 mL and 20 mL of this solution are taken. pH of each
solution is adjusted to 1.0 with hydrochloric acid and the total volume is brought up to
100 mL with water, Standard Solutions. 5 mL of each Standard Solution is precipitated
following the same procedure as the Test Solution. The precipitates are dissolved in
70% acetone and absorption is measured as the Test Solution. A calibration curve is
prepared. Using the calibration curve and the absorbance of the Test Solution, the
content of betaine is calculated from the following equation.
Amount of betaine obtained from calibration curve(%)
Content(%) ＝ × 100
weight of the sample(g)

Test Solutions
∘Reinecke Solution：1.5 g of Reinecke salt is dissolved in water. pH is adjusted to 1.0
with hydrochloric acid and the total volume is brought up to 100 mL
with water.

110
 Biotin

Chemical Formula: C10H16N2O3S

Molecular Weight: 224.31 CAS No.: 58-85-5

Compositional Specifications of Biotin

Content Biotin should contain not less than 97.5% of biotin (C10H16N2O3S).
Description Biotin is white crystalline power. It is odorless and has no taste.
Identification The saturated solution of Biotin is prepared using hot water. Upon
drop-wise adding the solution, bromine standard solution gets decolorized.
Purity (1) Arsenic : It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(2) Lead : When 5.0 g of Biotin is tested by Atomic Absorption Spectrophotometry or
Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content should not be more
than 2.0 ppm.
(3) Melting Point : Melting point of Biotin should be within a range of 229∼232℃
(4) Specific Rotation : To 500 mg of Biotin, add 0.1 N sodium hydroxide solution to make
25 mL. The optical rotation of this solution should be within a range of ＝ +89∼+93°.
(5) Biotin-like substances: Dissolve 0.1 g of Biotin, accurately weighed, in ammonia
solution(7→100), and make to 10 mL, Test Solution. To 1 mL of the test solution,
add ammonia solution(7→100), and make to exactly 500 mL, Standard Solution. Each
5 μl of Test solution and Reference solution is tested by thin layer chromatography.
When the solvent is developed up to 10 cm from base line, stop developing. After
doing air-dry the plate at 105℃ for 30 minutes,
p-dimetylaminocinnamaldehyde·ethanol solution(1→500)/sulfuric acid·ethanol solution(1
→50) is equally nebulized. The spot except for a major red spot which is obtained
from the test solution should not thicker than a spot(this spot is obtained from the
reference solution). However, a supporting material of thin layer plate, which is
prepared by using silica gel for thin layer chromatography is used as the dried thing
at 110℃ for 1 hour.
Assay Dissolve 500 mg of Biotin, precisely weighed, in 100 mL of water, add
phenolphthalein indicator, heat and continuously shake and titrate with 0.1 N sodium
hydroxide solution until the color of the solution becomes pink.

111
1 mL of 0.1 N sodium hydroxide solution ＝ 24.43 mg C10H16N2O3S

112
 Black carrot extract

Synonyms: Black carrot color INS No.: 163(vi)

Definition Black carrot extract is a pigment obtained from extracting roots of

umbelliferous carrot (Daucus carota L. ssp. sativus var. atrorubens Alef.) with water,
slightly acidic or acidic aqueous solution, or ethyl alcohol. The major component is
anthocyanins. Dilutant, stabilizer, or solvent can be added for the purpose of color
value adjustment and quality preservation.
Compositional Specifications of Black carrot extract
Content Color value ( ) of Black carrot extract should not be more than the indicated
value.
Description Black carrot extract is dark reddish liquid, lump, powder, or paste with a
slight characteristic odor.
Identification Test Solution of Black carrot extract obtained in Color Value section
shows red∼deep blue-black and a absorbance maximum is at 500∼550 nm.
Purity (1) Arsenic : It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(2) Lead : When 5.0 g of Black carrot extract is tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content
should not be more than 2.0 ppm.
(3) Cadmium : When 5.0 g of Black carrot extract is tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content
should not be more than 1.0 ppm.
(4) Mercury : When 0.1 g of Black carrot extract is tested by Mercury Test Method,
its content should not be more than 1.0ppm.
(5) Sulfur dioxide : When Black carrot extract is tested by the purity test (3) of Grape
Skin Extract, the amount of sulfur dioxide should be less them 0.005% in 1 Color value
( )
Assay(color value) Appropriate amount of Black carrot extract is accurately weighed so
that the absorption is within the range of 0.3 to 0.7 and dissolved in citric acid․
disodium phosphate buffer solution with pH 3.0 to make 100 mL. If necessary,
centrifuge and use the supernatant. Using citric acid·disodium phosphate buffer
solution with pH 3.0 as a blank, absorbance A is measured at the maximum
absorption at 500∼550 nm with 1 cm path length. Color value is obtained using the
following equation.
A × 10
Color Value( ) ＝ weight of the sample(g)
∘citric acid · disodium phosphate buffer solution (pH 3.0)
113
Solution 1(0.1M citric acid solution)： 1 L of solution contains 21.01 g of citric
acid(C6H8O7·H2O)
Solution 2(0.2M disodium phosphate solution)：1 L of solution contains 71.63g of
disodium phosphate(Na2HPO4·12H2O)
Solution 1 and Solution 2 are mixed well (59:41) and its pH is adjusted to 3.0.

114
 Branching glycosyltransferase
1,4-α-Glucan Branching Enzyme
Definition Branching glycosyltrasferase is an enzyme obtained from cultures of Bacillus
subtilis in which the branching glycosyltrasferase gene of Rhodothermus obamensis is
inserted. Dilutant or stabilizer can be added for the purpose of activity adjustment and
quality preservation.
This Branching glycosyltrasferase transforms α-1,4-glycoside combination of amylose
to β-1,6-glycoside combination at the unreduced terminal.
Compositional Specifications of Cellulase
Description Branching glycosyltrasferase is white～deep brown powder, particle, paste or
colorless～deep brown liquid.
Identification When Branching glycosyltrasferase is proceeded as directed under Activity
Test, it should have the activity as Branching glycosyltrasferase.
Purity (1) Arsenic : It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(2) Lead ： When 5.0 g of Branching glycosyltrasferase is tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content
should not be more than 5.0 ppm.
(3) Coliform Group ： Branching glycosyltrasferase is tested by Microbe Test Methods
for Coliform Group in General Test Methods in 「Standards and Specifications for
Foods」. It should not be more than 30 cfu per 1 g of this product.
(4) Salmonella ： Branching glycosyltrasferase is tested by Microbe Test Methods for
Salmonella in General Test Methods in 「Standards and Specifications for Foods」. It
should be negative (-).
(5) E. Coli : When Branching glycosyltrasferase is tested by Microbe Test Methods for
E. Coli in General Test Method 「Standards and Specifications for Foods」, it should
be negative (-).
Activity Test (activity)
∘Analysis Principle : Activity test is calculated by measuring the rate at which the 1-6-α
bond is produced in the amylose substrate. The enzyme activity is labelled with
Branching Enzyme Units(BEU). 1 BEU is based on measuring absorbtion of
amylose-iodine complex at 660nm after operating test condition to given standard
condition(pH 7.2, 60℃).
∘Preparation of Test Solution : Take approximately 1 g(± 0.5 mg) of enzyme and 80 mL
of Tris-HCL buffer to the beaker to dissolve enzyme completely by slowly mixing for
30 minutes. Transfer the solution to the 100 mL flask and add Tris-HCl buffer to
dilute. And set the enzyme activity of the diluted test solution within 30∼50 BEU/mL.
Calculate the dilution rate(D) and use it for the activity calculation(Usually dilution
factor is in the range of 10∼40). Use the test solution made on that testing day.
∘Test Procedure : Each solutions put together to the test tube(Prepare this to use as 4
times repetition). The test solution is mixed with 50μL of the test solution(Vs=0.050
mL) and 50 μL of substrate solution. The control solution is mixed 50 μL of water and
115
 50 μL of substrate solution. Blank test solution is prepared with 100 μL of water. Each
prepared solutions in test tube are mixed well and are allowed to react for 30 minutes
at 60℃. After 30 minutes of reaction time, add 2 mL of stop reagent to each test
tubes, respectively, and after mixing, allow to stand at room temperature for 20
minutes to stabilize the color. Measure the absorbtion at 660 nm. This is repeated for
4 times and calculate the average absorbtion(As: average absorbtion of enzyme test
solution. AR: average absorbtion of control solution, AB: average absorbtion of blank
test solution).
※ The absorbtion of enzyme test solution should be 0.15∼0.3. If not, it should be
re-measured by adjusting dilution of test solution with 0.1M Tris-HCl(pH 7.2) buffer.
Activity of the enzyme is measured by the following calculating formula.
(AR – As) × V ×D × 100
Activity(BEU/g) ＝
(AR – AB) × t × Vs × W

(AR-As) : Absorbtion difference between control and enzyme test solutions

(AR-AB) : Absorbtion difference between control and blank solutions
V : Minor voloum of enzyme test solution
D : Dilution rate
100 : Conversion factor for labelling enzyme activity unit as BEU/g
t : Reaction time(min.)
Vs : Volume of Enzyme testing solution which is used in test operation(mL)
W : Weight of sample(g)
∘Definition of Activity : Branching Enzyme Units(BEU) is defined as the amount of
enzyme that results in a reduction of 1% per minute when measuring the absorbtion of
amylose-iodine complex at 660nm after operating test condition under the given
condition(pH 7.2, 60℃).

116
 Butane
Chemical Formula: C4H10

Molecular Weight: 58.12 INS No.: 943a

Synonyms: n-Butane CAS No.: 106-97-8

Content Butane should contain more than 97.0% of n-Butane(C4H10).

Description Butane is colorless combustible gas with a scent of its own.
Identification To test identification and purity of Butane, stainless specimen cylinder,
which is equipped with stainless steel valves and have performance of 200 mL capacity
and pressure exceeding 240 psi, is used. First, on condition that the valve remain open,
dry cylinder for 2 hours at 110℃ and then discharge the air to make the pressure of
cylinder under 1 mmHg. After closing the valve, cool the cylinder and measure the
weight of cylinder. One end of sample cylinder is tightly connected and the other is
loosely connected. Open carefully sample cylinder and sample is discharged throughout
loosely connected part. If large amount of sample is discharged, it should be careful
because ice cystal may form on inlet and connected part. After connecting to specimen
cylinder tightly, open the valve and make sample flow on cylinder being vacuum
condition. The sample for test needed is injected into cylinder and the valve of cylinder
is closed. Spencimen cylinder contained Butane is weighed again and calculated the
content injected sample. At this point, it should be careful not to over-inject sample.
(1) When Butane is tested according to Infrared Spectrophotometry, it has absorption
bands near the 3.4 μm(vs), 6.8 μm(s), 7.2 μm(m) and 10.4 μm(m).
(2) When steam pressure of Butane is measured with pressure gauges, the pressure is
31 psi at 21℃.
Purity (1) Sulfur Compounds : Open carefully valve of the cylinder contained Butane.
When experimenter smell it being careful not to directly reach his face, it doesn't smell
of sulfur compound.
Content of Peak area of sample
Butane(%) =
Sum of all the peak area on the chromatogram
× 100

Assay Sample cylinder, which have the valve with and adjustable flow velocity,
containing Butane is connected to chromatography. The liquid sample is discharged
through sampling valve. Be careful not to entrap gas or air in valve. After Butane is
injected into gas chromatography, gas chromatography is performed with the following
operating conditions. The content of Butane is obtained by the following equation and it
should be more than 97.0%.
Operation condition
Column : Aluminium 3 mm × 6 m
Filler : Crushed fire brick supporting material containing 10 % tetraethylene glycol
dimethyl ether (GasChrom R or its equivalent)
117
 Carrier gas : Helium [99.995%(v/v)]
Flow velocity : Thermal conductivity detector (TCD)
Column temperature : 33℃
The amount of injection : 2 μL
Note : Butane is combustible and explosive gas. When handling it for test, experimentor
must handle it inside a fume hood.
Storage Standard of Butane
Butane should be stored in a light shielded well-closed container in a cold dark place.

118
 Butyl Acetate
CH3COOCH2CH2CH2CH3
Chemical Formula: C6H12O2
Molecular Weight: 116.16
Synonyms: Butyl ethanoate CAS No.: 123-86-4

Compositional Specifications of Butyl Acetate

Content Butyl Acetate should be contain not less than 98.0% of butyl acetate (C6HI2O2).
Description Butyl Acetate is a colorless, transparent liquid having a characteristic odor.
Identification To 1 mL of Butyl Acetate, add 5 mL of 10% alcoholic solution of
potassium hydroxide. Heat in a water bath. The characteristic odor disappears. and an
odor of n-butanol is evolved. Cool, and add 10 mL of water and 0.5 mL of diluted
hydrochloric acid (1→3). The solution responds to the test for Acetate (C) in
Identification.
Purity (1) Specific Gravity : Specific gravity of Butyl Acetate should be within a range
of 0.876～0.880.
(2) Refractive Index : Refractive Index of Butyl Acetate should be within a range of
1.393～1.395.
(3) Clarity and Color of Solution : When 2 mL of Butyl Acetate is dissolved in 4 mL of
70% alcohol, the solution should be clear.
(4) Acid Value : Acid value of Butyl Acetate is tested by Acid Value in Flavoring
Substance Test. The content should not be more than 1.0.
Assay Accurately weigh about 0.5 g of Butyl Acetate, and proceed as directed under
Ester Value and Ester Content in Flavoring Substances Tests.
1 mL of 0.5 N alcoholic solution of potassium hydroxide = 58.08 mg of C6H12O2

119
 Butyl Butyrate

Chemical Formula: C8H16O2

Molecular Weight: 144.21

Synonyms: Butyl butanoate CAS No.: 109-21-7

Compositional Specifications of Butyl Butyrate

Content Butyl Butyrate should contain not less than 98.0% of butyl butyrate (C8H16O2).
Description Butyl Butyrate is a colorless to light yellow, transparent liquid having a
fruity odor.
Identification To 1 mL of Butyl Butyrate, add 5 mL of 10% alcoholic solution of
potassium hydroxide. When this solution is shaking and heating in a water bath, its
characteristic odor disappears, and an odor of n-butanol develops. After cooling, this
solution is acidified with dilute sulfuric acid. Then, an odor of butyric acid is generated.
Purity (1) Specific Gravity : Specific gravity of Butyl Butyrate should be within a range
of 0.867～0.871
(2) Refractive Index : Refractive Index of Butyl Butyrate should be within a range of
1.405～1.407
(3) Clarity and Color of Solution : When 1 mL of Butyl Butyrate is dissolved in 4 mL
of 70% ethanol, the solution should be clear.
(4) Acid Value : Acid value of Butyl Butyrate is tested by Acid Value in Flavoring
Substance Test. It should not be more than 1.
Assay Accurately weigh about 1 g of Butyl Butyrate, and test by Ester Value in
Flavoring Substances Test.
1 mL of 0.5 N alcoholic potassium hydroxide solution ＝ 72.11 mg C8H16O2

120
 Butylated Hydroxy Anisole
BHA

Chemical Formula: C11H16O2

Molecular Weight: 180.25 INS No.: 320

Synonyms: BHA CAS No.: 25013-16-5

Compositional Specifications of Butylated Hydroxy Anisole

Description Butylated Hydroxy Anisole occurs as colorless or slightly yellow-brown
crystals or lumps or as a white crystalline powder, having a slight characteristic odor
and irritating taste.
Identification (1) To 2～3 mL of solution of Butylated Hydroxyanisole in ethanol (1→
100), add 2～3 drops of sodium borate solution (1→50) and crystals of
2,6-dichloroquinone-chloroimide, and shake. An indigo blue color develops.
(2) Proceed as directed under Identification (2) in 「Butylated Hydroxy Toluene」.
Purity (1) Melting Point : Melting point of Butylated Hydroxy Anisole should be within a
range of 57～65℃
(2) Clarity and Color of Solution : 0.5 g of Butylated Hydroxy Anisole is dissolves in
10 mL of ethanol. The solution should be colorless and clear.
(3) Sulfate : 0.5 g of Butylated Hydroxy Anisole is dissolved in 35 mL of acetone. Add
1 mL of dilute hydrochloric acid and water to make 50 mL. Use this solution as the
test solution. Separately, a reference solution is prepared by mixing 0.2 mL of 0.01
N sulfuric acid, 35 mL of acetone, 1 mL of dilute hydrochloric acid, and water to
make 50 mL. 2 mL each of barium chloride solution is added to each solution, which
is set-aside for 10 minutes. Turbidity of the Test Solution should not be more than
that of the reference solution.
(4) Arsenic : It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(5) Lead : When 5.0 g of Butylated Hydroxy Anisole is tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content
should not be more than 2.0 ppm.
(6) Mercury : When Butylated Hydroxy Anisole is tested by Mercury Limit Test, its
content should not be more than 1.0 ppm.
(7) p-Hydroxyanisole : Dissolve 1 g of Butylated Hydroxy Anisole in 20 mL of an
ether․petroleum benzirie mixture (1:1), add 10 mL of water and 1 mL of sodium
hydroxide solution, shake well, allow to stand, and collect the lower layer. Add 20
121
 mL of the ether․petroleum benzine mixture (1:1), shake well, allow to stand, collect
the lower layer, and add water to make 500 mL. Transfer 1 mL of this solution into
a Nestler tube, and add 2 mL of sodium hydroxide solution, 5 mL of boric acid
solution (3→100), and water to make 30 mL. Add 5 mL of 4-amino- antipyrine
solution (1→1,000), shake, add 1 mL of potassium ferricyanide solution (1→100),
shake again, add water to make 50 mL, and allow to stand for 15 minutes. The color
of the solution should not be darker than that of a 50 mL solution made by adding
water to 0.6 mL of Colorimetric Cobalt(Ⅱ) Chloride Standard Solution.
Residue on Ignition When thermogravimetric analysis is done with Butylated Hydroxy
Anisole, the residue should be not more than 0.05%.

122
 Butylated Hydroxy Toluene
BHT

Chemical Formula: C15H24O

Molecular Weight: 220.36 INS No.: 321

Synonyms: BHT CAS No.: 128-37-0

Compositional Specifications of Butylated Hydroxy Toluene

Description Butylated Hydroxy Toluene occurs as colorless crystals or as white
crystalline powder or lumps. It is odorless or has a slight characteristic odor.
Identification (1) To 5 mg of Butylated Hydroxy Toluene, add 1～2 drops of
5-nitroso-8-hydroxyquinoline sulfuric acid solution (1→100). As it dissolves, a
yellow color develops, after which it changes to a red-brown color.
(2) To 1 mL of Butylated Hydroxy Toluene in alcoholic solution (1→30), add 3～4
drops of ferric chloride solution, no color develops. Add α,α'-dipyridyl crystals. A red
color develops. In the case, use a ferric chloride solution which produces no color in
a blank test.
Purity (1) Melting Point : Melting point of Butylated Hydroxy Toluene should be within a
range of 69～72℃.
(2) Clarity and Color of Solution : When 1 g of Butylated Hydroxy Toluene is dissolved
in 10 mL of ethanol, the solution should be colorless and clear.
(3) Sulfate : To 0.5 g of Butylated Hydroxy Toluene, add 30 mL of water, heat in a
water bath for 5 minutes while shaking occasionally, cool and filter. To the filtrate,
add 1 mL of dilute hydrochloric acid, Test Solution. Test Solution is tested by Sulfate
Limit Test, its content should not be more than the amount that corresponds to 0.2
mL of 0.01 N sulfuric acid.
(4) Arsenic : It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(5) Lead : When 5.0 g of Butylated Hydroxy Toluene is tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content
should not be more than 2.0 ppm.
(6) Mercury : When Butylated Hydroxy Toluene is tested by Mercury Limit Test, its
content should not be more than 1.0 ppm.
(7) p-Cresol : To 1 g of Butylated Hydroxy Toluene, add 10 mL of water and 1 mL of
ammonia water, heat in a water bath for 3 minutes while shaking occasionally, cool
123
 and filter. Wash the residue on the filter paper with a small amount of water,
combine the washings and the filtrate, and add water to make 100 mL, Test Solution.
Take 3 mL of the test solution, transfer into a Nestler tube, add 1 mL of
phosphomolybdic acid ethanol (1→20) and 0.2 mL of ammonia solution, and shake.
Add water to make 50 mL, and allow to stand for 10 minutes. The color of the
solution should not be deeper than that of the solution prepared by the same
procedure as the test solution, using 3 mL of p-cresol solution (1→100,000) (Not
more than 0.1% as p-cresol).
Residue on Ignition When thermogravimetric analysis is done with Butylated Hydroxy
Toluene, the amount of residue should not be more than 0.02%.

124
 tert-Butylhydroquinone
Chemical Formula: C10H14O2
Molecular Weight: 166.22 INS No.: 319
Synonyms: Mono-tert-butylhydroquinone; CAS No.: 1948-33-0
TBHQ

Compositional Specifications of tert-Butylhydroquinone

Content tert-Butylhydroquinone should contain not less than 99.0% (C10H14O2).
Description tert-Butylhydroquinone:Mono-tert-Butylhydroquinone is white crystalline solid
with characteristic scent.
Identification Several mg of tert-Butylhydroquinone is dissolved in 1 mL of methyl
alcohol. When a few drops of 25% dimethylamine solution is added, this solution
becomes pink to red.
Purity (1) Arsenic : It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(2) Lead : When 5.0 g of tert-Butylhydroquinone is tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content
should not be more than 2.0 ppm.
(3) Melting Point : Melting point of tert-Butylhydroquinone should be within range of
126.5∼128.5℃.
(4) tert-Butyl-ρ-Benzonquinone : When proceed as directed under the following
procedure, the content should not be more than 0.2%.
∘Apparatus and Equipment : 0.4 mm calcium fluoride liquid cell and Double Beam
Infrared Spectrophotometer.
∘Preparation of Standard Solution : 10 mg of tert-Butylhydroquinone:Mono tert
Butylhydroquinone is precisely weighed and dissolved in small amount of
chloroform, which is then diluted to make 10 mL.
∘Preparation of Test Solution : tert-Butylhydroquinone is ground to fine powder with
homogenizer prior to use. 1 g of the ground powder is precisely weighed into a
10 mL volumetric flask and filled with chloroform. The solution is then extracted
for 5 minutes and filtered with Millipore filter membrane (UHWP01300) or its
equivalent, as the Teat Solution.
Test Operation : Chloroform transfer into a reference cell and Standard Solution
transfer into a sample cell. Infrared spectrum is recorded in wave numbers of 1,600∼
1,775 cm-1. A baseline is drawn at 1,612∼1,750 cm-1 of this spectrum and the pure
absorption of the Standard Solution(As) is obtained at 1,659 cm-1. The pure
absorption of the Test Solution (Au) is obtained by the same method. The amount of
tert-Butylhydroquinone is calculated from the following equation.
Content of tert-Butylhydroquinone
= (%) 100 × Au × Ws
As Wu
Ws : weight of standard material (mg)
Wu : weight of sample (mg)
125
 (5) Toluene : 2 g of tert-Butylhydroquinone is precisely weighed and dissolved in 10
mL of octyl alcohol, as the Test Solution. 5 μl of each Test Solution and Standard
Solution, (prepared as below) is injected into gas chromatography. The content of
toluene should not be more than 0.0025%.
Preparation of Standard Solution : 25 mg of toluene is precisely weighed and dissolved
in octylalcohol, which is then diluted to make 50 mL. To 10 mL of this solution,
octylalcohol is added to make 100 mL.
Operation Conditions
-Column : 3.18 mm x 3.66 m stainless tube
-Column Filler : 60∼80 mesh Diatoport S or its equivalent porous support material for
gas chromatography is coated with 10% silicon SE-3
-Detector : Hydrogen Flame Ionization Detector (FID)
-Temperature at injection hole : 275℃
-Column Temperature : Temperature is raised from 70℃ to 280℃ at a rate of 15℃
per minute and held at 280℃.
-Detector Temperature : 300℃
-Carrier gas and flow rate : Helium or nitrogen, 50 mL per minute or the flow rate is
adjusted so that toluene comes out in approximately 3
minutes.
Amount of toluene(%) ＝ peak height of Sa
×
Concentrate of St
(w/v%) × 100
Concentrate of Sa
peak height of St (w/v%)

(6) UV Absorption : 1 g of L-ascorbic acid is dissolved in 200 mL of 50% ethyl

alcohol, which is then transferred into a 500 mL separatory funnel (S-1).
Approximately 50 g of tert-Butylhydroquinone is added to the separatory funnel and
dissolved in the solution by shaking. 50 mL of iso-octane is added and extracted for
3 minutes. After settling for 3 minutes, the lower aqueous phase layer is transferred
into another 500 mL separatory funnel (S-2). 50 mL of iso-octane is added and
extracted again. The lower aqueous phase layer is transferred into another 500 mL
separatory funnel (S-3). This solution is again extracted with 50 mL of iso-octane
and the aqueous phase layer is discarded. Each iso-octane extract (S-1, S-2, S-3) is
mixed with 100 mL of 0.5% ascorbic acid solution in ethyl alcohol · water (ethyl
alcohol : water = 25:75), shaken for 1 minute, and extracted. After settling, the lower
aqueous layer is discarded. This extraction is repeated again. This iso-octane
solution is extracted twice with 100 mL of ethyl alcohol · water (ethyl alcohol :
water = 5:95) and aqueous layer is discarded. Finally, iso-octane solution is washed
twice with 100 mL of water each and wash water is discarded. Separately, a
chromatography column is filled with 100 g of anhydrous sodium sulfate and the
column is washed with 75 mL of iso-octane and the iso-octane is discarded.
Iso-octane solution in S-1 is passed through the column and collected in a 500 mL
distillation flask. The funnel S-1 is washed with iso-octane solution in S-2. Then the
126
 solution is passed through the column and collected in the same distillation flask. The
funnel S-2 and S-1 are washed serially with iso-octane solution in S-3. Then the
solution is passed through the column and collected in the same distillation flask.
S-3, S-2, and S-1 are washed serially with 25 mL of iso-octane twice. This is again
passed through the column and collected in the same distillation flask and the column
is removed. Add two glass balls and 2 mL hexadecane to a 500 mL distillation flask
containing iso-octane residue solution and connect it to an appropriate vacuum
distillation apparatus. While the distillation flask is immersed in a water bath,
iso-octane is distilled from the solution under 1/3 of atmospheric pressure. When the
iso-octane solvent is no longer collected in the solvent receptor, cancel
decompression and wash the inner wall of the distillation apparatus from the top with
5 mL of iso-octane. This is again distilled within 1 minute under 1/3 atmospheric
pressure. When the distillation is almost complete, this procedure is repeated with 5
mL of iso-octane. Using iso-octane, the residue in the distillation flask is transferred
into a 10 mL volumetric flask, which is filled with iso-octane and shaken, use as
Test Solution. Using reference solution is prepared with iso-octane, following the
same procedures the sample, absorption spectrum is obtained in a wavelength range
of 250 nm～400 nm using silica gel cell with 5 cm path length. Maximum absorption
for test solution and reference solution at (a) 280∼289 nm, (b) 290∼299 nm, (c) 300
∼359 nm, (d) 360∼400 nm is measured. Maximum absorption per 1 cm path length
is obtained by subtracting absorption of the reference solution from absorption of the
test solution. The difference should not exceed (a) 0.15, (b) 0.12, (c) 0.08, (d) 0.02,
respectively.
(7) 2,5-di-tert-butylhydroquinone and hydroquinone : When proceed as directed under
the method, the content of 2,5-di-tertiarybutylhydroquinone and hydroquinone should
not be more than 0.2% and 0.1% respectively.
∘Preparation of Standard Solution : Approximately 50 mg of hydroquinone,
2,5-di-tert-butylhydroquinone and methyl benzoate(internal standard) is accurately
weighed and dissolved in pyridine and to make 50 mL, respectively.
∘Preparation of Standard Solution for Calibration Curve and Calibration Curve : 0.5,
1.0, 2.0, 3.0 mL of hydroquinone standard solution is taken into each of 10 mL
volumetric flasks, respectively. 2 mL of methyl benzoate internal standard solution
is added to each flask, which is then to make 10 mL with pyridine. Separately,
standard solutions of 2,5-di-tertiarybutylhydroquinone for calibration curve are
prepared by the same procedure and Trimethylsilyl derivative of the calibration
curve solution prepared as follows. 9 drops of the calibration curve solution are
added to a 2 mL serum vial and a cap is placed. The pressure of the vial is
reduced with a 50 mL gas syringe. 250 μl of Ν,Ο-bis-trimethylsilyl acetamide is
added to the vial, which is then heated for 10 minutes at 80℃. 10 μl of each test
solution for the calibration curve is injected into gas chromatography twice. A
calibration curve is prepared by using a concentration ratio of hydroquinone vs.
internal standard as a horizontal axis and a reaction (peak) ratio of hydroquinone
127
 vs. internal standard as a vertical axis. Separately, a calibration curve for
2,5-di-tertiarybutylhydroquinone following the same procedure.
∘Preparation of Test Solution : Approximately 1 g of tert-Butylhydroquinone :
Mono-tert-Butylhydroquinone is accurately weighed into a 10 mL volumetric flask.
2 mL of methyl benzoate internal standard solution is added to the flask, and to
make 10 mL with pyridine. Trimethylsilyl derivative is prepared as described for
the Standard Solution above. 10 μl of this solution is injected into gas
chromatography twice. Keeping time (in minutes) for methyl benzoate, trimethylsilyl
derivative of hydroquinone, trimethylsilyl derivative of tert-butylhydroquinone, and
trimethylsilyl derivative of 2,5-di-tert-butylhydroquinone is 2.5, 5.5, 7.3, and 8.4,
respectively. Each peak area is measured, which is used to calculate the reaction
ratio of hydroquinone and 2,5-di-tert-butylhydroquinone vs. internal standard. The
concentration of hydroquinone and 2,5-di-tert- butylhydroquinone vs. internal
standard is calculated from the calibration curve. Finally the contents (%) of
hydroquinone and 2,5-di-tert- butylhydroquinone are calculated from the following
equation
Operation Conditions
-Column : 6.35 mm × 0.6 m stainless tube
-Column Filler : 60∼80 mesh Diatoport S or its equivalent porous support material
for gas chromatography is coated with 20% silicon SE-30
-Detector : Thermal conductivity Detector (TCD)
-Temperature at injection hole : 300℃
-Column Temperature : Temperature is raised from 100℃ to 270℃ at a rate of 1
5℃ per minute and held at 270℃.
-Detector Temperature : 300℃
-Carrier gas and flow rate : Helium or nitrogen, 100 mL per minute.
10
A = Y × I ×
S
A : The content of hydroquinone or 2,5-di-tertiarybutylhydroquinone in the sample
Y : The concentration ratio of hydroquinone or 2,8-di-tertiarybutylhydroquinone vs.
internal standard material, which is obtained from horizontal axis of the calibration
curve.
I : The amount of internal standard material in Test Solution (w/v%)
S : weight of sample (g)
Assay
Approximately 170 mg of tert-butylhydroquinone, previously powdered and precisely
weighed, is dissolved in 10 mL of methyl alcohol and 150 mL of water, 1 mL of 1 N
sulfuric acid, and 4 drops of diphenylamine solution (300 mg of sodium p-diphenyl
amine sulfonate is dissolved in 100 mL of 0.1 N sulfuric acid.). The resulting solution
is titrated with 0.1 N cerium (II) sulfate solution. The end point is where the solution
color becomes yellow to reddish violet. The amount of 0.1 N cerium (II) sulfate
128
solution consumed in mL is V. The content of C10H14O2 (%) in the sample is calculated
from the following equation.
Content(%) =
(V-0.1mL) × 0.8311
Weight of the
- tertiarybutylhydroquinone(%)×
(hydroquinon(%)×1.51)-(2,5-d-
0.75)
sample(g)

0.1 mL : The amount of cerium (II) sulfate solution (in mL) consumed by the primary
oxide of tertiarybutylhydroquinone that is commonly found in sample.

129
 Butyric Acid

Chemical Formula: C4H8O2

Molecular Weight: 88.11

Synonyms: Ethylacetic acid; Butanoic acid CAS No.: 107-92-6

Compositional Specifications of Butyric Acid

Content Butyric Acid should contain not less than 99.0% of butyric acid (C4H8O2).
Description Butyric Acid is a colorless, transparent liquid with a characteristic irritative
odor.
Identification (1) To 1 mL of Butyric Acid, add 2 mL of water. The solution is clear and
strongly acidic.
(2) To 1 mL of Butyric Acid, add 1 mL of ethanol and 3 drops of sulfuric acid. When the
solution is heated in a water bath. an odor of ethyl butyrate is generated.
Purity (1) Specific Gravity: Specific gravity of Butyric Acid should be within a range of
0.952～0.956.
(2) Refractive Index : Refractive Index of Butyric Acid should be within a range of
1,397～1,399.
(3) Sulfate : When 10 g of Butyric Acid is tested by Sulfate Limit Test, its content
should not be more than the amount that corresponds to 0.4 mL of 0.01 N sulfuric
acid.
Assay Accurately weigh about 1.5 g of butyric acid, and add 75 mL of water, which is
then titrated with 0.5 N sodium hydroxide solution (indicator: 2 drops of
phenolphthalein solution).
1 mL of 0.5 N sodium hydroxide = 44.06 mg of C4H8O2

130
 Cacao Color
Definition Cacao Color is a pigment obtained by fermenting and roasting cacao beans of
cacao tree (Theobroma cacao Linné) of sterculiaceae followed by extracting with water.
Its major pigment component is polymer of antocyanin. Dilutant, stabilizer, or solvent
can be added for the purpose of color value adjustment and quality preservation.
Compositional Specifications of Cacao Color
Content Color value ( ) of Cacao Color should be higher than the indicated value.
Description Cacao Color is dark reddish brown liquid, lump, powder, or paste having a
slight characteristic odor.
Identification (1) Test Solution obtained in Color Value section appears brown color.
(2) 0.1 g of Cacao Color is dissolved in water to make 100 mL. When 2～3 drops of
hydrochloric acid are added to 5 mL of this solution, reddish brown precipitate is
formed.
(3) 0.1 g of Cacao Color is dissolved in water to make 100 mL. When 2～3 drops of
ferric chloride solution are added to 5 mL of this solution, it turns dark brown.
Purity (1) Arsenic : It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(2) Lead : When 5.0 g of Cacao Color is tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content
should not be more than 5.0 ppm.
(3) Residual Solvent ： When berries color is tested by Purity (5) for 「Paprika
Extract Pigments」, residual acetone should not be more than 30 ppm(based on the
product whose color value is 50).
Assay (Color Value) Appropriate amount of Cacao Color is precisely weighed so that the
absorbance is within 0.3～0.7 and dissolved in water to make 100 mL. 1 mL of this
solution is diluted to 100 mL with citric acid·dibasic sodium phosphate buffer solution
with pH 7.0. Use this solution as the test solution. If necessary, the solution is
centrifuged and the supernatant is used. Using citric acid·dibasic sodium phosphate
buffer solution with pH 7.0 as a reference solution, absorbance A of test solution is
measured at 520nm with 1cm cell. Color value is obtained using the following equation.
A × 1,000
Color Value( ) ＝
weight of the sample(g)

∘Citric acid·dibasic sodium phosphate buffer solution (pH 7.0)

Solution 1：0.1M citric acid solution：1L of solution containing 21.01 g of citric acid
(C6H8O7․H2O).
Solution 2：0.2M dibasic sodium phosphate solution： 1L of solution containing 71.63 g
of dibasic sodium phosphate (Na2HPO4․12H2O).
Solution 1 and Solution 2 are mixed well (35:165) and its pH is adjusted to 7.0.

131
 Caffeine

Chemical Formula: C H N O ‧nH O(n

8 10 4 2 2 = 1 and
0)
Molecular Weight:
hydrate 212.21, anhydrous 194.19
CAS No.:
Synonyms: 1,3,7-Trimethylxanthine,
1,3,7-Trimethylxanthine monohydrate 58-08-02(anhydrous),
5743-12-4(1 hydrate)

Definition Coffee beans (Coffea arabica LINNE) of rubiaceae or tea leaves (Camellia
sinensis O. KZE)of camellia family are extracted with water or carbon dioxide. The
extracts are separated and purified to obtain Caffeine. The major component is
caffeine.
Compositional Specifications of Natural Caffeine
Content If Caffeine is converted to a anhydrous form, it should contain 98.5∼101.0% of
caffeine (C8H10N4O2).
Description Caffeine is odorless white crystalline powder having a bitter taste.
Identification (1) When small amount of tannic acid solution is drop-wise added to 2 mL
of aqueous solution (1→500) of Caffeine, white precipitates are formed. When excess
amount of this tannic acid is added, the precipitates are dissolved.
(2) 10 drops of hydrogen peroxide solution and 1 drop of hydrochloric acid are added
to 0.01 g of Caffeine, which is then evaporated to dryness in a water bath. When the
residue is exposed to ammonia gas, it acquires a purple colour. This color disappears
when 2～3 drops of sodium hydroxide solution are added.
(3) 30 mL of 2% aqueous solution of Caffeine is placed in a Nestler tube. When a long
wavelength UV lamp is shone from the side and the solution is observed from the
top, it should not emit strong violet color. Natural caffeine should show no or slight
yellowish green fluorescence.
(4) Theophylline and 8-chlorotheophylline : 0.01 g of Caffeine is dissolved in 5 mL of
water, where 3 mL of ammonium chloride buffer solution (pH 8.0) and 1 mL of
copper sulfate solution in pyridine are added and mixed. When 5 mL of chloroform is
added and shaken, the chloroform phase should not turn green.
Purity (1) Melting Point : Caffeine is dried for 4 hours at 80℃. The melting point of
this dried material should be 235∼237.5℃.
(2) Arsenic : It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(3) Lead : When 5.0 g of Caffeine is tested by Atomic Absorption Spectrophotometry
132
 or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content should not be more
than 1.0 ppm.
(4) Other Alkaloids : 20 mg of Caffeine is dissolved in 1 mL of water. When 2～3
drops of Meyer solution are added to this solution, it should not form precipitates.
(5) Readily Carbonizable Substances : 0.5 g of Caffeine is dissolved in 5 mL of sulfuric
acid, which is allowed to stand for 15 minutes. When the color of the solution is
observed with a white background, the color should not be deeper than that of the
color standard D.
(6) Chloride: 2 g of Caffeine is dissolved in 80 mL of hot water and cooled quickly at
20℃. Then add water to make to 100mL and this is used as the test solution. The
content should not be more than that amount corresponds to 0.25 mL of 0.01 N
hydrochloric acid under Chloride Test. (it should not be more than 0.011%.)
(7) Sulfate : When the test solution 40 mL of Purity (6) is tested for sulfates, the
content should not be more than the amount that corresponds to 0.40 mL of 0.01 N
sulfuric acid. (it should not be more than 0.024%.)
(8) Caffeine-like substances: 0.1 g of caffeine is weighted and dissolved in 10 mL of
Chloroform, which is used as test solution. And then Chloroform is added to 1 mL of
test solution to make to 100 mL. Again, take 1 mL of this solution and make to 10
mL, it is used as standard solution. Take 10 ㎕ of test solution and standard solution
, and spot respectively them to the prepared thin layer plate. The mixed solution of
Chloroform·95% alcohol solution(9:1) is used as the solvent. When the solvent is
developed up to 10 cm from base line, stop developing and air-dry the plate. The
plate is observed under a UV light (wavelength 254nm). The spot except for a major
spot which is obtained from the test solution should not thicker than a spot(this spot
is obtained from the standard solution).
Water Content Water content of Caffeine is determined by direct titration method in
water determination (Karl-Fisher Method) and should be 0.5% and 8.5% for anhydrous
form and mono hydrated form, respectively.
Residue on Ignition Residue on ignition should not be more than 0.1%.
Assay Approximately 0.4 g of Caffeine is precisely weighed and dissolved in 40 mL of
anhydrous acetic acid with warming, and cooled. After 80 mL of acetone is added to
the solution, which is then titrated with 0.1 N perchloric acid solution (indicator : 3
drops of crystal violet ·acetic acid solution). The end point is where the solution turns
from violet to green and finally to yellow. Separately, a blank test is carried out by the
same method.
0.1 N perchloric acid solution 1 mL ＝ 19.42 mg C8H10N4O2
Storage Standard of Natural Caffeine
Caffeine should be stored in a light shielded well-closed container in a cool place.

133
 Calcium Acetate

Chemical Formula: Ca(C2H3O2)2 INS No.: 263

Molecular Weight: 158.17 CAS No.: 62-54-4

Compositional Specifications of Calcium Acetate

Content Calcium Acetate, when calculated on the dried basis(anhydrous), should contain
within a range of 99.0～100.5% of calcium acetate [Ca(C2H3O2)2].
Description Calcium Acetate is scentless white powder.
Identification Calcium Acetate solution (1→10) responds to test of calcium salts and
acetate salts in Identification.
Purity (1) Chlorides : When 0.5g of Calcium Acetate is tested by Chloride Limit Test,
the content should not be more than the amount that correspond to 0.7 mL of 0.01
N hydrochloric acid.
(2) Sulfates : When 0.24 g of Calcium Acetate is tested by Sulfate Limit Test, the
content should not be more than the amount that correspond to 0.5 mL of 0.01 N
hydrochloric acid.
(3) Fluoride : 1 g of Calcium Acetate is precisely weighed and is tested by purity (8)
for 「Calcium Citrate」, its content should not be more than 50 ppm.
(4) Lead : When 5.0 g of Calcium Acetate is tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content
should not be more than 2.0 ppm.
(5) Arsenic : It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(6) Mercury : When Calcium Acetate is tested by Mercury Limit Test, its content
should not be more than 1.0 ppm.
Water Content Water content of Calcium Acetate is determined by water determination
(Karl-Fisher Method) and the content should not be more than 7.0%.
Assay Approximately 0.3 g of Calcium Acetate is dissolved in 150 mL of water which
contains 2 mL of dilute hydrochloric acid. While stirring, 30 mL of 0.05 M EDTA
solution is added. 15 mL of sodium hydroxide solution and 0.3 g of hydroxy naphtol
blue hydroxynaphtholblue (C20H12O11S3Na2) are added to the solution, which is titrated
with 0.05 M EDTA solution. The end point is where the red color disappears
completely and the color becomes blue.
1 mL of 0.05 M EDTA solution ＝ 7.909 mg Ca(C2H3O2)2

134
 Calcium Alginate
Chemical Formula: [(C6H7O6)2Ca]n

Equiv wt, actual(avg.): 219.00 INS No.: 404

Synonyms: Calcium salt of alginate CAS No.: 9005-35-0
Compositional Specifications of Calcium Alginate
Content Calcium Alginate, when calculated on the dried basis, should contain within a
range of 18∼21% of carbon dioxide (CO2), which corresponds to 89.6∼104.5% of
calcium alginate.
Description Calcium Alginate is almost scentless tasteless white～pale yellow fiber,
grain, granule, or powder.
Identification Proceed as directed under Identification (3) for [Alginic Acid].
Purity (1) Arsenic : It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(2) Lead : When 5.0 g of Calcium Alginate is tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content
should not be more than 5.0 ppm.
(3) Cadmium : When 5.0 g of Calcium Alginate is tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content
should not be more than 1.0 ppm.
(4) Mercury : When Calcium Alginate is tested by Mercury Limit Test, its content
should not be more than 1.0 ppm.
(5) Total Viable Aerobic Count : When Calcium Alginate is tested by Microbe Test
Methods for Total Viable Aerobic Count (Number of General Germs) in General Test
Method in 「Standards and Specifications for Foods」, it should not be more than
5,000 per 1 g
(6) E. coli : When Calcium Alginate is tested by Microbe Test Methods for E. coli in
General Test Method 「Standards and Specifications for Foods」, it
should be negative (-).
(7) Salmonella : When Calcium Alginate is tested by Microbe Test Methods for
Salmonella in General Test Method 「Standards and Specifications for Foods」, it
should be negative (-).
(8) Fungi : When Calcium Alginate is tested by Microbe Test Methods for Fungi in
General Test Method in 「Standards and Specifications for Foods」, it should not be
more than 500 per 1 g
Loss on Drying When 3 g of Calcium Alginate is dried for 4 hours at 105℃, the loss
should not be more than 15%.
Assay Approximately 0.25 of Calcium Alginate is precisely weighed and analyzed by the
procedure in Content Analysis for [Xanthan Gum].
1 mL of 0.25 N sodium hydroxide solution ＝ 27.38 mg calcium alginate
(Equivalent Value : 219.00)
135
136
 Calcium L-Ascorbate

Chemical Formula: C12H14CaO12‧2H2O

Molecular Weight: 426.34 INS No.: 302

Synonyms: Calcium ascorbate dihydrate CAS No.: 5743-27-1

Compositional Specifications of Calcium Ascorbate

Content Calcium Ascorbate should contain within a range of 98.0∼100.5% of calcium
ascorbate(C12H14CaO12‧2H2O).
Description Calcium Ascorbate occurs as white～pale yellow crystalline powder. It is
odorless or has a slightly characteristic odor.
Identification Calcium Ascorbate solution (1→10) responds to the test for of calcium
salts in Identification. Upon adding a solution of 2,6-dichlorophenol indophenol sodium
the color disappears.
Purity (1) Specific Rotation : 1 g of Calcium Ascorbate, precisely weighed, is dissolved in
water to make 20 mL. Optical rotation of this solution should be within a range of ＝
+95∼+97°.
(2) Hydroxide Salt : 1 g of Calcium Ascorbate is dissolved in 10 mL of water. 2 drops
of glacial acetic acid and 5 mL of calcium acetate solution (1→10) are added to the
solution, which is set-aside for 5 minutes. The solution should stay clear.
(3) Fluoride : 1 g of Calcium Ascorbate is precisely weighed and is tested by Purity
(8) for 「Calcium Citrate」(not more than 10 ppm).
(4) Arsenic : It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(5) Lead : When 5.0 g of Calcium Ascorbate is tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content
should not be more than 2.0 ppm.
(6) Mercury : When Calcium Ascorbate is tested by Mercury Limit Test, its content
should not be more than 1.0 ppm.
Assay Approximately 0.3 g of Calcium Ascorbate is precisely weighed and dissolved in
50 mL of water, which is immediately titrated with 0.1N iodine solution. The end point
is where pale yellow color persists for 30 seconds.
1 mL of 0.1 N iodine solution ＝ 10.66 mg C12H14CaO12 · 2H2O

137
 Calcium Benzoate

Chemical Formula: C H CaO ․nH O(n = 0, 1 or 3)

14 10 4 2

Molecular Weight: trihydrate 336.36

hydrate
anhydrous300.32
282.31
INS No.: 213

Synonyms: Monocalcium benzoate; Calcium

dibenzoate CAS No.: 2090-05-3

Compositional Specifications of Calcium Benzoate

Content Calcium Benzoate, when calculated on the dried basis, should be contain not
less than 99.0% of calcium benzoate (C14H10CaO4).
Description Calcium Benzoate is colorless～white crystal or powder.
Identification (1) Melting Point : 2% aqueous solution of Calcium Benzoate is acidified
with dilute hydrochloric acid. Precipitates are filtered, washed with water, and dried
for 4 hours at 105℃. The melting point should be within a range of 121.5∼123.5℃.
(2) Water Insoluble substances : 10 g of Calcium Benzoate is dissolved in 100 mL of
hot water and filtered through a crucible type glass filter (1G4) that is previously
weighed. Insoluble substances are washed with hot water and dried along with the
filter for 2 hours at 105℃. After cooling in a desiccator, the filter with insoluble
substances is weighed. The content of water insoluble substances should not be more
than 0.3%.
(3) Free Acid and Free Alkali : 2 g of Calcium Benzoate is precisely weighed and
dissolved in 20 mL of hot water. After adding 2～3 drops of phenolphthalein solution,
the solution is titrated with 0.1 N sodium hydroxide solution or 0.1 N of hydrochloric
acid. The consumed amount of the solution should not be more than 0.5 mL.
(4) Chlorinated Compounds : 0.25 g of Calcium Benzoate is dissolved in 10 mL of
water, which is acidified with nitric acid. The precipitates are filtered, mixed with 0.5
g potassium carbonate, and dried. The mixture is then heat treated for approximately
10 minutes at 600℃. After cooling, the residue is dissolved in 20 mL of diluted nitric
acid and filtered. 0.5 mL of 0.1 N silver nitrate is added to the filtrate (Test
Solution). Separately, water is added to a mixture of 0.5 mL of 0.1 N silver nitrate
solution and 0.5 mL of 0.01 N hydrochloric acid so that the concentration is the
same as in Test Solution (Reference Solution). Turbidity of the Test Solution should
not be more than that of the Reference Solution.
(5) Fluoride : 1 g of Calcium Benzoate is precisely weighed and is tested by purity (8)
138
 for 「Calcium Citrate」, its content should not be more than 10 ppm.
(6) Arsenic : It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(7) Lead : When 5.0 g of Calcium Benzoate is tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content
should not be more than 2.0 ppm.
(8) Mercury : When Calcium Benzoate is tested by Mercury Limit Test, its content
should not be more than 1.0 ppm.
(9) Readily Oxidizable Matters : Add 1.5 mL of sulfuric acid to 100 mL of water, while
boiling, add drop wise 0.1 N potassium benzoate while boiling until the pink color
persists for 30 seconds. Weigh 1 g of Calcium Benzoate, and dissolve in the solution.
Titrate with 0.1 N potassium permanganate at about 70℃ until the pink color persists
for 15 seconds. The amount should not be more than 0.5 mL.
Loss on Drying When Calcium Benzoate is dried at 105℃ until the weight becomes
constant, the loss should not be more than 17.5%.
Assay Dissolve 0.6 g of Calcium Benzoate, previously dried and accurately weighed in
20 mL of water and 2 mL of diluted hydrochloric acid, which is diluted to 100 mL
with water. Approximately 30 mL of 0.05 M EDTA solution is added while shaking
well. After adding 15 mL of sodium hydroxide solution and 0.25 g of hydroxy naphthol
blue, the solution is titrated with 0.05 M EDTA solution.
1 mL of 0.05 M EDTA solution = 14.116 mg C14H10CaO4

139
 Calcium Carbonate
Chemical Formula: CaCO3 INS No.: 170(i)
Molecular Weight: 100.09 CAS No.: 471-34-1

Compositional Specifications of Calcium Carbonate

Content Calcium Carbonate, when calculated on the dried basis, should contain not less
than 98.0 % of calcium carbonate(CaCO3).
Description Calcium Carbonate occurs as a fine white powder. It is odorless.
Identification To 1 g of Calcium Carbonate, add 10 mL of water and 7 mL of diluted
acetic acid. It effervesces and dissolves. This solution, after being boiled and
neutralized with ammonia solution, it responds to test of Calcium Salt in Identification.
Purity (1) Hydrochloric Acid-Insoluble Substances : To 5.0 g of Calcium Carbonate, add
10 mL of water, and add drop wise gradually 12 mL of hydrochloric acid while
stirring, and add water to make 200 mL. Filter through a filter paper for quantitative
analysis, wash thoroughly the residue on the filter paper with boiling water until the
washings do not respond to the test by Chloride Limit Test, incinerate together with
the filter paper, and weigh the residue. The content should not be more than 10 mg.
(2) Free Alkali : To 3.0 g of Calcium Carbonate, add 30 mL of freshly boiled and
cooled water, shake for 3 minutes, and filter the solution. Measure 20 mL of the
filtrate, and add 2 drops of phenolphthalein solution. Even if a pink color becomes, it
disappears when 0.2 mL of 0.1 N hydrochloric acid is added.
(3) Arsenic : It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(4) Lead : Calcium Carbonate is tested by purity (2) for 「Sodium Metaphosphate」(not
more than 3.0 ppm).
(5) Cadmium :Calcium Carbonate is tested by purity (3) for 「Sodium Metaphosphate」
(not more than 1.0 ppm).
(6) Fluoride : 1 g of Calcium Carbonate is precisely weighed and is tested by purity
(8) for 「Calcium Citrate」(not more than 50 ppm).
(7) Alkali Metals and Magnesium : Weigh 1 g of Calcium Carbonate, dissolve by
gradually adding 30 mL of 1 N diluted hydrochloric acid, expel carbon dioxide while
boiling. Cool, neutralize with ammonia solution, add 60 mL of ammonium oxalate
solution , and heat in a water bath for 1 hour. Cool, add water to make 100 mL, stir
thoroughly, filter, measure 50 mL of the filtrate, add 0.5 mL of sulfuric acid,
evaporate to dryness, and ignite to constant weight, and weigh the residue. Its
content should not be more than 5 mg.
(8) Barium : Weigh 1 g of Calcium Carbonate, dissolve in 15 mL of diluted hydrochloric
acid, add water to make 30 mL and filter. To the filtrate, add 2 g of sodium acetate, 1
mL of diluted acetic acid and 0.5 mL of potassium chromate solution and allow to
stand for 15 minutes. The turbidity of this solution should be not more than the
turbidity of the solution obtained as adding water to 0.3 mL barium standard solution,
140
 make 20 mL (not more than 0.03%).
Loss on Drying When Calcium Carbonate is dried for 4 hours at 200℃, the weight loss
should not be more than 2%.
Assay Accurately weigh about 1 g of Calcium Carbonate, previously dried, gradually
dissolve in 10 mL of diluted hydrochloricacid, gradually added, add water to make
exactly 100 mL. Proceed as directed under Assay in 「Calcium Hydroxide」.
1 mL of 0.05 M EDTA = 5.004 mg of CaCO3

141
 Calcium Carboxymethyl Cellulose
Compositional Specifications of Calcium Carboxymethylcellulose
Description Calcium Carboxymethylcellulose occurs as a white to pale yellow powder or
fibrous substance, it is odorless.
Identification (1) To 0.1 g of Calcium Carboxymethylcellulose add 10 mL of water, stir
thoroughly, and add 2 mL of sodium hydroxide solution. Shake, allow to stand for 10
minutes, and use this solution as the test solution. Proceed as directed under
Identification (1) for 「Sodium Carboxymethylcellulose」.
(2) Dissolve 1 g of the residue on ignition of Calcium Carboxymethylcellulose in 10 mL
of water and 5 mL of diluted acetic acid, and filter if necessary. Boil, cool, and
neutralize with ammonia solution. The solution responds to the test for Calcium Salt.
Purity (1) Free Alkali : To 1 g of Calcium Carboxymethylcellulose, add 50 mL of freshly
boiled and cooled water, shake well, and then add 2 drops of phenolphthalein
solution. No pink color develops.
(2) Chloride : To 0.1 g of Calcium Carboxymethylcellulose, add 10 mL of water, stir
thoroughly, and add 2 mL of sodium hydroxide solution (1→25). After shaking, allow
to stand for 10 minutes, and make the solution strongly acidic with diluted nitric acid
(1→10). Add 0.5 mL of hydrogen peroxide, and heat in a water bath for 30 minutes.
After cooling, add water to make 100 mL, and filter through a dry filter paper.
Measure exactly 20 mL of the filtrate as the test solution. When Calcium
Carboxymethylcellulose is tested by Chloride Limit Test, its content should not be
more than the amount that corresponds to 0.2 mL of 0.01 N hydrochloric acid.
(3) Sulfate : To 0.1 g of Calcium Carboxymethylcellulose, add 10 mL of water, stir
thoroughly, and add 2 mL of sodium hydroxide solution (1→25). After shaking, allow
to stand for 10 minutes, and make strongly acidic with diluted hydrochloric acid (1→
4). Add 0.5 mL of hydrogen peroxide, and heat in a water bath for 30 minutes.
Measure exactly 20 mL of the filtrate as the test solution. When Calcium
Carboxymethylcellulose is tested by Sulfate Limit Test, its content should not be
more than the amount that corresponds to 0.4 mL of 0.01 N sulfuric acid.
(4) Arsenic : It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(5) Lead : When 5.0 g of Calcium Carboxymethylcellulose is tested by Atomic
Absorption Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy,
its content should not be more than 2.0 ppm.
Loss on Drying When Calcium Carboxymethylcellulose is dried for 4 hours at 105℃, the
weight loss should not be more than 10%.
Residue on Ignition When thermogravimetric analysis is done with 1 g of dried material,
the amount of residues should be within a range of 10～20%.

142
 Calcium Caseinate
Synonyms: Casein-calcium CAS No.: 9005-43-0
Compositional Specifications of Calcium Caseinate
Content Calcium Caseinate, when calculated on the dried basis, should contain within a
range of 14.5~15.8% of Nitrogen(N=14.01).
Description Calcium Caseinate occurs as white to pale yellow powder, granules, or
flakes. It is odorless and tasteless or has a slight, characteristic odor and taste.
Identification (1) Proceed as directed under Identification (1), (2), and (3) in 「Casein」.
(2) The residue on ignition of Calcium Caseinate responds to the test for Calcium Salt
in Identification.
Purity (1) Clarity and Color of Solution : Proceed as directed under Purity (1) in
「Casein」. The resulting solution should be colorless and should not be more than
turbid.
(2) pH : Calcium Caseinate solution(1→50) should be within a range of pH 6.0～7.5.
(3) Fat : Proceed as directed under Purity (4) in 「Casein」.(not more than 1.5%)
(4) Arsenic : It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(5) Lead : When 5.0 g of Calcium Caseinate is tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content
should not be more than 1.0 ppm.
(6) Lactose : Accurately weigh 1g of Calcium caseinate and put into 150mL-beaker.
Add 25mL of water and dissolve it at 60~70℃, then cool down to room temperature.
Add 15mL of water, 8mL of 0.1N hydrochloric acid, and 1mL of 10% acetic acid
solution and mix well by swirling. After 5 minutes, add 1mL of 1M sodium acetate,
and mix well. When the precipitates is settled, filter it and remove the first 5mL of
filtrate. Transfer 2mL of the remaining filtrate into a test tube and add 0.2mL of
phenol solution. After mixing well, add 5mL of sulfuric acid and mix within 1~2
seconds. Confirm that the solution is completely mixed, and allow it to stand for 15
minutes. Then, cool down to 20℃ in a water bath for 5 minutes(Test solution). 1, 2,
3, and 4mL of 2mg/mL lactose standard stock solution is transferred into four
separate 500mL-flasks and dilute with water to 500mL to consequently containing 20,
40, 60, and 80μg/mL of lactose. Add 2mL of water and 3mL of standard stock
solution into each of five test tubes. Add 0.2mL of phenol solution and mix well. Add
5mL of sulfuric acid and mix well within 1~2 seconds. Confirm that the solution is
completely mixed, and allow it to stand for 15 minutes. Then, cool down to 20℃ in a
water bath for 5 minutes(Standard solution). Measure a absorbance of the standard
solution at a wavelength of 490nm using water as a reference and prepare a
calibration curve. Prepare the reference solution in the same manner and measure a
absorbance of the test solution. The content that is calculated using the following
equations should not be more than 2.0%.
The content of lactose(%) = A × 0.00475

143
 a × m
A = Absorbance of test solution
a = Extinction coefficient of the lactose standard solution (Slope of a calibration curve)
m = Weight of the sample(g)
Phenol solution : Heat the mixed solution with 8g of phenol and 2g of water, and
dissolve until there are no crystals.
Loss on Drying When Calcium Caseinate is dried for 3 hours at 100℃, the weight loss
should not be more than 15.0%.
Assay Accurately weigh about 0.15 g of Calcium Caseinate, previously dried, and assay by
nitrogen determination method.
1 mL of 0.1 N sulfuric acid = 1.401 mg of N

144
 Calcium Chloride
Chemical Formula: CaCl ‧nH O(n=0 or 2)
2 2 INS No.: 509

Molecular Weight: anhydrous

2 hydrate 147.01 CAS No.:
anhydrous)
2 hydrate)
10043-52-4(
110.98
10035-04-8(

Compositional Specifications of Calcium Chloride

Content Calcium Chloride should contain not less than 70.0% of calcium chloride (CaCl2
＝110.99).
Description Calcium Chloride occurs as white crystals, powder, flakes, granules, or
lumps. It is odorless.
Identification Calcium Chloride responds to the tests for Calcium Salt and Chloride.
Purity (1) Clarity and Color of Solution : 1 g Calcium Chloride is dissolved in 20 mL of
water. The turbidity of resulting solution should show slightly low level of turbid or
better.
(2) Free Acid and Free Alkali : Weigh 1 g of Calcium Chloride, dissolve in 20 mL of
freshly boiled and cooled water, add 2 drops of phenolphthalein solution, and perform
the following test for this solution
① If the solution is colorless, add 2 mL of 0.02 N sodium hydroxide. A pink color
develops.
② If the solution is pink, add 2 mL of 0.02 N hydrochloric acid. The color disappears.
(3) Arsenic : It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(4) Lead : Calcium Chloride is tested by purity (2) for 「Sodium Metaphosphate」(not
more than 2.0 ppm).
(5) Mercury : When Calcium Chloride is tested by Mercury Limit Test, its content
should not be more than 1.0 ppm.
(6) Fluoride : 1 g of Calcium Chloride is precisely weighed and is tested by purity (8)
for 「Calcium Citrate」(not more than 40 ppm).
(7) Alkali Metals and Magnesium : Weigh 1 g of Calcium Chloride, dissolve in 50 mL of
water, mix with 500 mg of ammonium chloride, and boil for 1 minute. Quickly add 40
mL of oxalic acid solution (3→50), stir vigorously to form a precipitate, immediately
add 2 drops of methyl red solution and drop wise ammonia solution to make slightly
alkaline, and cool. Transfer the solution into a 100 mL measuring cylinder, add water
to make 100 mL, allow to stand for 4 hours to overnight, and filter the supernatant
through a dried filter paper. Measure 50 mL of the filtrate, add 0.5 mL of sulfuric
acid, evaporate to dryness, ignite to constant weight, and weigh the residue. The
residue should not be more than 25 mg (Not more than 5%).
Assay Approximately 5 g of Calcium Chloride is precisely weighed and dissolved in water
to make 500 mL. Take 25 mL of this solution, add water to make 100 mL, and add 15
mL of 10% sodium hydroxide solution. After 1 minute, approximately 0.1 g of
2-oxy-1-(2'-oxy-4'-sulfo-1'-naphthylazo)-3-naphthoic acid. It is then immediately
145
titrated with 0.05 M EDTA solution. End point is where the red color of the solution
completely disappears and changes to blue.
1 mL of 0.05 M EDTA = 5.550 mg of CaCl2

146
 Calcium Citrate

Chemical Formula: C12H10Ca3O14․4H2O

Molecular Weight: 570.51 INS No.: 333(iii)

nhydrous)
Synonyms: Tricalcium citrate; Tribasic calcium CAS No.:
citrate 813-94-5(a

Compositional Specifications of Calcium Citrate

Content Calcium Citrate, when calculated on the dried basis, should contain not less than
97.5% of calcium citrate (Cl2H10Ca3O14 = 498.44).
Description Calcium Citrate occurs as a white powder. It is odorless.
Identification Calcium Citrate responds to the test for Potassium Salt and Citrate in
Identification.
Purity (1) Hydrochloric Acid-Insoluble Substances : To 5 g of Calcium Citrate, add 10
mL of hydrochloric acid and 50 mL of water, and heat in a water bath for 30
minutes. Add water to make 200 mL. and filter through a filter paper for quantitative
analysis. Wash the residue on the filter paper thoroughly with boiling water. Reduce
to ash together with the filter paper, and weight the residue. The amount of residue
should not be more than 3 mg.
(2) pH : Weigh 1 g of Calcium Citrate and dissolve in 20 mL of water, pH of the
solution should be within a range of 6.0～8.0.
(3) Chloride : When 1 g of Calcium Citrate is dissolved in 10 mL of dilute nitric acid
by heating, which is tested by Chloride Limit Test, its content should not be more
than the amount that corresponds to 0.2 mL of 0.01 N hydrochloric acid.
(4) Sulfate : 1 g of Calcium Citrate is dissolved in 10 mL of dilute hydrochloric acid by
heating. After cooling, the solution is tested by Sulfate Limit Test, its content should
not be more than the amount that corresponds to 0.5 mL of 0.01 N sulfuric acid.
(5) Arsenic : It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(6) Lead : When 5.0 g of Calcium Citrate is tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content
should not be more than 1.0 ppm.
(7) Mercury : When Calcium Citrate is tested by Mercury Limit Test, its content should
not be more than 1.0 ppm.
(8) Fluoride : 1 g of Calcium Citrate transfer into a beaker, and dissolve in 10 mL of
hydrochloric acid (1→10). Then heat the solution for 1 minute, transfer into a
PE(polyethylene) beaker, and immediately cool down. Add 15 mL of Trisodium Citrate
147
 Solution (1→4) and 10 mL of Disodium Ethylenediaminetetraacetate solution (1→40)
and mix by shaking. Adjust the pH of this solution to 5.4～5.6 using Hydrochloric
acid (1→10) or Sodium Hydroxide Solution (2→5) and dilute to volume of 100 mL
with water. Place 50 mL of the solution in a PE(polyethylene) beaker. Then measure
electric potential by using fluorine electrode and the obtained content of fluorine from
calibration curve should not be more than 30 ppm.
Calibration Curve Preparation : Accurately weigh 2.210 g of sodium fluoride, which is
previously dried for 4 hours at 200℃, place it into a PE(polyethylene) beaker and
dissolve in 200 mL of water. Then add water to bring the total volume to 1,000mL
and preserve it in a PE(polyethylene) beaker. Add 5 mL of this solution into a
measuring flask, and add water to bring the total volume to 1,000 mL. (1 mL of this
solution contains 5μg of fluorine). Pipet 1, 2, 3, 5, 10, and 15 mL each of this
solution respectively into a PE(polyethylene) beaker, and add 15 mL of Trisodium
Citrate Solution (1→4) and 10 mL of Disodium Ethylenediaminetetraacetate solution (1
→40) and mix. Adjust the pH of this solution to 5.4～5.6 using dilute Hydrochloric
acid (1→10) or Sodium Hydroxide Solution (2→5). To the solution, respectively, add
water to bring the total volume to 100mL, Standard Solution. Separately, place 50 mL
of the solution in a PE(polyethylene) beaker. Then measure electric potential by using
fluorine electrode and prepare calibration curve with the log of fluorine concentration.
Loss on Drying When Calcium Citrate is dried for 4 hours at 150℃, the weight loss
should be within a range of 10～14%.
Assay Dissolve about 1 g of Calcium Citrate, previously dried and accurately weighed,
in 10 mL of dilute hydrochloric acid and 10 mL of water, which is diluted to 100 mL
with water. Take 25 mL of this solution, and diluted to 100 mL with water, which is
neutralized with 10% sodium hydroxide solution. Add 15 mL of 10% sodium hydroxide
solution and 20 mL of 0.05 M EDTA solution, it is set-aside for approximately 1
minute. Add 0.1 g of 2-oxy-1-(2'-oxy-4'-sulfo-1-naphtylazo)-3-naphthoic acid, which
is titrated with 0.05 M EDTA solution. At the end point, the red color completely
disappears and the solution turns blue.
1 mL of 0.05 M EDTA solution = 8.307 mg of Cl2H10Ca3O14

148
 Calcium Dihydrogen Pyrophosphate
Chemical Formula: CaH2P2O7
Molecular Weight: 215.97 INS No.: 450(ⅶ)

Synonyms: Acid calcium pyrophosphate; CAS No.: 14886-19-4

Monocalcium dihydrogen diphosphate

Compositional Specifications of Calcium Dihydrogen Pyrophosphate

Content Calcium Dihydrogen Pyrophosphate, when calculated on the dried basis, should
contain more than 90.0% of Calcium Dihydrogen Pyrophosphate (Ca2H2P2O7).
Description Calcium Dihydrogen Pyrophosphate occurs as a white crystalline powder or
granular.
Identification (1) 5 mL of acetic acid(1→10) is added to 0.2 g of Calcium dihydrogen
pyrophosphate, and dissolve by warming. 2 mL of ammonium molybdate is added to
this solution. Upon heating yellow precipitates are formed.
(2) 9 mL of water and 1mL of hydrochloric acid are added to 0.3 g of Calcium
Dihydrogen Pyrophosphate, and dissolved by warming. It is filtered after cooling.
When 3mL of ammonium oxalate solution(1→30) is added, white precipitation occurs.
This precipitation is dissolved by adding 5 mL of hydrochloric acid.
Purity (1) Acid Insoluble Substances : 5.0 g of Calcium Dihydrogen Pyrophosphate,
accurately weighed, dissolve in 100 of hydrochloric acid(1→4). After leaving it for 1
hours, the acid insoluble substances are filtered by a glass filter (1G4) which met
constant weight in advance. After washing the residue with 30 mL of water and the
drying for 2 hours at 110℃, the amount of the acid insoluble substances should not
be more than 0.4%.
(2) Arsenic : It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(3) Lead : Calcium Dihydrogen Pyrophosphate is tested by purity (2) for 「Sodium
Metaphosphate」(not more than 4.0 ppm).
(4) Cadmium : Calcium Dihydrogen Pyrophosphate is tested by purity (3) for 「Sodium
Metaphosphate」(not more than 1.0 ppm).
(5) Mercury : When Calcium Dihydrogen Pyrophosphate is tested by Mercury Limit
Test, its content should not be more than 1.0 ppm.
(6) Fluoride : 1 g of Calcium Dihydrogen Pyrophosphate precisely weighed, and is
tested by purity (8) for 「Calcium Citrate」(not more than 30 ppm).
Loss on Drying When Calcium Dihydrogen Pyrophosphate is dried for 4 hours at 105℃, the
weight loss should not be more than 1%.
Assay After drying Calcium Dihydrogen Pyrophosphate, 0.7 g of this accurately was
weighed. And add 20 mL of hydrochloric acid(1→4) and boil. After cooling the
solution, add water to meet 200 mL as a test solution. Add 25 mL of 0.02M EDTA to
the accurate 20 mL of this test solution. And leaving it for approximate 1 minute 5m
after adding 5 mL of water and 5 mL of ammonia·ammonium chloride buffer(pH10.7).
149
 Add 0.025 g of Eriochrome black T·sodium chloride indicator and the excess EDTA is
titrated with a 0.02M zinc acetate solution. The end point is until blue color of the
solution becomes bluish purple. Blank test is performed with same procedure.
1 mL of 0.02M EDTA solution = 4.321 mg CaH2P2O7
Storage Standard of Calcium Dihydrogen Pyrophosphate
Calcium Dihydrogen Pyrophosphate should be stored in a dry and cool place.

150
 Calcium Disodium Ethylenediaminetetraacetate

Chemical Formula: C10H12CaN2Na2O8‧2H2O

Molecular Weight: 410.30 INS No.: 385

Synonyms: Calcium disodium edetate; Calcium

CAS No.: 62-33-9
disodium EDTA

Compositional Specifications of Calcium Disodium Ethylenediaminetetraacetate

Content Calcium Disodium Ethylenediaminetetraacetate, when calculated on the
anhydrous basis, should contain within a range of 97.0～102.0% of calcium disodium
ethylenediaminetetraacetate (C10H12CaN2Na2O8․2H2O = 374.27)
Description Calcium Disodium Ethylenediaminetetraacetate occurs as white to whitish
granules or crystalline powder. It is odorless, and has a faint salty taste.
Identification (1) Calcium Disodium Ethylenediaminetetraacetate solution (1→20) responds
to the tests for Calcium Salt (B) and Sodium Salt (B) in identification.
(2) Add 2 drops of ammonium thiocyanate solution and 2 drops of ferric chloride
solution to 5 mL of water. Into this solution, place 50 mg of Calcium Disodium
Ethylenediaminetetraacetate. and shake. The red color of the solution disappears.
Purity (1) pH : pH of Calcium Disodium Ethylenediamine-tetraacetate solution (1→100)
should be within a range of 6.5～7.5.
(2) Arsenic : It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(3) Lead : When 5.0 g of Calcium Disodium Ethylenediaminetetraacetate is tested by
Atomic Absorption Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission
Spectroscopy, its content should not be more than 2.0 ppm.
(4) Mercury : When Calcium Disodium Ethylenediaminetetraacetate is tested by Mercury
Limit Test, its content should not be more than 1.0 ppm.
(5) Magnesium-Chelating Substance : Weigh 1 g of Calcium Disodium
Ethylenediaminetetraacetate, dissolve in 5 mL of water, add 5 mL of ammonia․
ammonium chloride buffer, and titrate with 0.1 M magnesium acetate (indicator : 5
drops of Eriochrome black T solution). The consumed volume is not more than 2 mL.
Water Content Approximately 0.5 g of Calcium Disodium Ethylenediaminetetraacetate is
precisely weighed and tested by direct titration method of water determination
(Karl-Fischer Method). Water content should not be more than 13%.
Assay Accurately weigh about 1.2～1.5 g of Calcium Disodium Ethylenediaminetetraacetate,
transfer into a Erlen Meyer flask, and dissolve in 75 mL of water. 25 mL of dilute acetic
151
acid and 1 mL of diphenylcarbazone solution are added. It is then slowly titrated with 0.1
M mercuric chloride solution until initial purple color appears.
1 mL of 0.1 M mercuricnitrate = 37.43 mg of C10H12CaH2Na2O8

152
 Calcium Ferrocyanide
Chemical Formula: Ca2Fe(CN)6․12H2O
Molecular Weight: 508.29 INS No.: 538
Synonyms: Hexacyanoferrate of calcium; Yellow CAS No.: 1327-39-5
prussiate of lime

Compositional Specifications of Calcium Ferrocyanide

Content When calcium ferrocyanide is quantified, it should contain not less than 99.0%
of calcium ferrocyanide (Ca2Fe(CN)6․12H2O)
Description Calcium ferrocyanide is a yellow crystal or crystalline powder.
Identification (1) When 1 mL of ferric chloride is added to 10 mL of calcium
ferrocyanide (1→100), a dark blue precipitate are formed.
(2) Calcium ferrocyanide responds to test of calcium salt in the identification method.
Purity (1) Cyanide : 10 mg of copper sulfate is dissolved in 8 mL of water and 2 mL of
ammonium solution. A filtering paper is dipped into this solution, to which hydrogen
sulfide is then added. When 1 drop of the aqueous solution of this additive (1→100)
is dropped on the filtering paper that turned brown, white rings should not appear.
(2) Ferrocyanide : 10 mg of sodium ferrocyanide is dissolved in 10 mL of water and
added 1 drop of this solution. When a few drops of 2 N acetic acid and that is
saturated with benzidine and 1 drop of 1% lead nitrate are added, blue precipitates or
color should not formed.
(3) Lead : Accurately weigh 5.0 g of calcium ferrocyanide into a 150 mL beaker, add
30 mL of water. Add Hydrochloric acid in small portion to the solution until the solid
is dissolved throughly and add 1 mL of hydrochloric acid. Heat this solution for
approximately 5 minutes and cool down. Add water to bring the total volume to 100
mL. Add Sodium Hydroxide Solution(1→4) or Hydrochloric acid(1→4) so that pH
becomes 2～4. Transfer this solution into 250 mL separatory funnel, where water is
added to make 200 mL. Then add 2 mL of 2% APDC solution and shake to mix.
Extract the solution 2 times with 20 mL each of chloroform, which is evaporated to
dryness in a water bath. Add 3 mL of Nitric Acid to the residue and heat it until
nearly evaporated. To this solution, add 0.5 mL of Nitric Acid and 10 mL of water,
concentrate it until the final solution becomes 3~5 mL, and add water to make 10
mL, test solution. When the test solution is tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content
should not be more than 5.0 ppm.
2% APDC Solution : 2.0 g of Ammonium Pyrolidine Dithiocarbamate is dissolved in
water to make 100 mL. Filter it when using.
(4) Chloride : When 0.11 g of calcium ferrocyanide is tested by Chloride Limit Test,
the detected amount should not be more than the amount that corresponds to 0.6 mL
of 0.01 N hydrochloric acid.(not more than 0.2%)
(1) (5) Sulfate : When 0.2 g of calcium ferrocyanide is tested by Sulfate Limit Test, the
153
 detected amount should not be more than the amount that corresponds to 0.4 mL of 0.01 N
hydrochloric acid. (not more than 0.1%)
Water Content Water content of calcium ferrocyanide is determined by water
determination (Karl-Fisher Titration) and should not be more than 1.0%.
Assay About 1.0 mg of calcium ferrocyanide is weighed accurately, dissolved in 200 mL
of water, and 10 mL of sulfuric acid is added. Then the solution is titrated with 0.02 N
potassium permanganate until the red color lasts for 30 secs.
0.02 N potassium permanganate 1 mL = 50.83 mg of Ca2Fe(CN)6․12H2O

154
 Calcium Gluconate

Chemical Formula: (C6H11O7)2Ca․H2O

Molecular Weight: 448.40 INS No.: 578

Synonyms: Calcium salt of D-gluconic acid CAS No.: 299-28-5

Compositional Specifications of Calcium Gluconate

Content Calcium Gluconate, when calculated on the dried basis, should contain within a
range of 98.0∼104.0% of calcium gluconate [(C6H11O7)2Ca·H2O].
Description Calcium Gluconate occurs as a white crystalline or granular powder without
odor and taste.
Identification (1) A solution of Calcium Gluconate (1→40) responds to the test for
Calcium Salt in Identification.
(2) To 1 mL of Calcium Gluconate solution (1→40), add 1 drop of ferric chloride
solution, the solution develops a dark yellow color.
(3) To 5 mL of warm solution of Calcium Gluconate (1→10), add 0.7 mL of glacial
acetic acid and 1 mL of freshly distilled phenylhydrazine and heat in a water bath for
30 minutes and cool. When the inner wall is rubbed with a glass rod, crystals are
precipitated. These crystals are collected and dissolved in 10 mL of boiling water,
where small amount of activated carbon is added. After mixing by shaking, it is
filtered. After cooling, the inner wall is rubbed with a glass rod to precipitate
crystals. The melting point of the dried crystals should be 196～202℃
(decomposition).
Purity (1) Clarity and Color of Solution : When 1 g of Calcium Gluconate is dissolved in 20
mL of water by heating at 60℃, the solution should not be more than almost clear.
(2) Chloride : When 0.3 g of Calcium Gluconate is tested by Chloride Limit Test, its
content should not be more than the amount that corresponds to 0.6 mL of 0.01 N
hydrochloric acid.
(3) Sulfate : When 0.5 g of Calcium Gluconate is tested by Sulfate Limit Test, its
content should not be more than the amount that corresponds to 0.5 mL of 0.01 N
sulfuric acid.
(4) Arsenic : It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(5) Lead : When 5.0 g of Calcium Gluconate is tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content
should not be more than 2.0 ppm.
(6) Sucrose or Reducing Sugar : To 0.5 g of Calcium Gluconate, add 10 mL of water
155
 and 2 mL of dilute hydrochloric acid, and boil for 2 minutes. After cooling, 5 mL of
sodium carbonate solution is added, which is set-aside for 5 minutes. The solution is
diluted to 20 mL with water, which is then filtered. Take 5 mL of the filtrate is
mixed with 2 mL of Fehling solution, which is boiled for 1 minute. An orange-yello
w～red precipitate should not be formed immediately.
Loss on Drying When Calcium Gluconate is dried for 2 hours at 80℃, the weight loss
should not be more than 0.5%.
Assay Accurately weigh about 0.5 g of Calcium Gluconate, previously dried, and dissolve
in 5 mL of dilute hydrochloric acid, and add 50 mL of water, 25 mL of sodium
hydroxide solution, and about 0.1 g 2-oxy-1-(2'-oxy-4'-sulfo-1-
naphtylazo)-3-naphthoic acid. Immediately, the solution titrated with 0.05 M EDTA
solution. At the end point, the red color completely disappears and the solution turns
blue.
1 mL of 0.05 M EDTA solution = 22.42 mg (C6H11O7)2Ca·H2O

156
 Calcium Glycerophosphate
Chemical Formula: C3H7CaO6P INS No.: 383

Molecular Weight: 210.14 CAS No.: 27214-00-2

Compositional Specifications of Calcium Glycerophophate

Content Calcium Glycerophophate, when calculated on the dried basis, should contain
within a range of 98.0～100.5% of calcium glycerophosphate (C3H7CaO6P).
Description Calcium Glycerophophate occurs as a white powder. It is odorless and has a
slightly bitter taste.
Identification Saturated Calcium Glycerophophate solution responds to the test for
Calcium Salts in Identification.
Purity (1) Alkalinity : To Calcium Glycerophophate solution (1→60), 3 drops of
phenolphthalein are added. It is then neutralized with 0.1 N sulfuric acid. The
consumption should not be more than 1.5 mL.
(2) Lead : When 5.0 g of Calcium Glycerophophate is tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content
should not be more than 4.0 ppm.
Loss on Drying When Calcium Glycerophophate is dried for 4 hours at 150℃, the weight
loss should not be more than 12.0%.
Assay 2 g of Calcium Glycerophosphate, previously dried for 4 hours at 150℃ and
accurately weighed, is dissolved in 100 mL of water and 5 mL of dilute hydrochloric
acid, and add water to make 250 mL, thoroughly mix. Precisely weigh 50 mL of this
solution, 50 mL of water is added to it. Approximately 30 mL of 0.05M EDTA solution
is added while stirring, 15 mL of sodium hydroxide and 0.3 g of hydroxynaphthylblue
are added and mixed well. The solution is titrated with 0.05 M EDTA solution. The
end point is where the red color completely disappear and it turns blue.
1mL of 0.05M EDTA ＝ 10.51mg C3H7CaO6P

157
 Calcium Hydroxide
Chemical Formula: Ca(OH)2

Molecular Weight: 74.10 INS No.: 526

Synonyms: Slaked lime CAS No.: 1305-62-0

Compositional Specifications of Calcium Hydroxide

Content Calcium Hydroxide should contain not less than 95.0% of calcium hydroxide (Ca(OH)2).
Description Calcium Hydroxide occurs as a white powder.
Identification (1) To Calcium Hydroxide, add 3～4 times the amount of calcium hydroxide
with water. The mixture becomes muddy and alkaline.
(2) To 1 g of Calcium Hydroxide, add 20 mL of water and 6 mL of acetic acid and
dissolve. The solution responds to test of Calcium Salt in Identification.
Purity (1) Hydrochloric Acid-Insoluble Substances : 2 g of Calcium Hydroxide is
dissolved in 10 mL of hydrochloric acid and 20 mL of water, and boil. After cooling,
filter through a filter paper for quantitative analysis, wash the residue on the filter
paper with boiling water until the washings no longer respond to the test by Chloride
Limit Test. Incinerate together with the filter paper and weigh the residue. The
amount of residue should not be more than 10 mg.
(2) Carbonate : To 2 g of Calcium Hydroxide, add 50 mL of water, shake well, and add
25 mL of diluted hydrochloric acid. No remarkable bubbles should occur.
(3) Arsenic : It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(4) Lead : Calcium Hydroxide is tested by purity (2) for 「Sodium Metaphosphate」(not
more than 2.0 ppm).
(5) Fluoride : 1 g of Calcium Hydroxide is precisely weighed and is tested by purity
(8) for 「Calcium Citrate」(not more than 50 ppm).
(6) Alkali Metals and Magnesium : 0.5 g of Calcium Hydroxide is dissolved in 30 mL of
1N hydrochloric acid by heating in a water bath, if necessary. Neutralize with
ammonia solution, add 30 mL of ammonium oxalate, and boil for 1 hour in a water
bath. After cooling, add water to make total volume to 100 mL, mix well by stirring,
and filter. Add 0.5 mL of sulfuric acid to 50 mL of the filtrate, evaporate to dryness,
and heat treat until weight becomes constant. The amount of residue should not be
more than 12 mg.
(7) Barium : 1.5 g of Calcium Hydroxide dissolve in 15 mL of dilute hydrochloric acid,
add water to make 30 mL, and filter. Take 20 mL of the filtrate, and add 2 g of
sodium acetate, 1 mL of diluted acetic acid, and 0.5 mL of potassium chromate
solution. After setting it aside for 15 minute, its turbidity should not be more than
the that of the solution which is made in the same manner, to 0.3 mL of Barium
standard solution, water is added to make 20 mL(not more than 0.03%).
Assay Approximately 2 g of Calcium Hydroxide is precisely weighed and dissolved in 30
mL of dilute hydrochloric acid, which is diluted to 250 mL with water. To 10 mL of
158
this solution, add 15 mL of sodium hydroxide solution (1→10), 3 mL of potassium
cyanide solution (1→20), and 100 mL of water, which is set-aside for approximately 1
minute. Add 0.1 g of 2-oxy-1-(2'-oxy-4'-sulfo-1-naphtyl azo)-3-naphthoic acid,
which is immediately titrated with 0.05 M EDTA solution. At the end point, the red
color completely disappears and the solution turns blue.
1 mL of 0.05 M EDTA solution ＝ 3.705 mg Ca(OH)2

159
 Calcium Hypochlorite
Synonyms: Highest bleaching powder CAS No.: 7778-54-3

Compositional Specifications of Calcium Hypochlorite

Content Calcium Hypochlorite should contain not less than 60.0% effective chlorine.
Description Calcium Hypochlorite is white～milky white granule or powder with a
characteristic odor of chlorine.
Identification (1) 0.5 g of Bleaching Powder is mixed with 5 mL of water by shaking.
When a red litmus paper is dipped into this solution, it turns blue and then
decolorizes.
(2) When 2 mL of acetic acid is added to 0.1 g of Bleaching Powder, gas is evolved
and it dissolves. 5 mL of water is added. It is then filtered. The filtrate responds to
the test for Calcium Slat of Identification.
Assay Accurately weigh about 0.7∼1.3g of Calcium Hypochlorite, add about 50 mL water
and mix it well. Then put it to the 500 mL volumetric flask and add water to make 500
mL and shake it well. To the 50 mL of this solution, 2 g of potassium iodide and 10 mL
of acetic acid(1→2) are added. Seal it immediately and set aside in a dark place for 15
minutes. Free iodine is titrated with 0.1 N sodium thiosulfate solution (indicator : starch
solution). Separately, a blank test is carried out in the same manner.
1 mL of 0.1 N sodium thiosulfate solution ＝ 3.545 mg Cl

160
 Calcium Lactate

Chemical Formula: C6H10O6Ca‧5H2O

Molecular Weight: 308.31 INS No.: 327

Synonyms: Calcium dilactate; Calcium
CAS No.: 5743-48-6
dilactate hydrate

Compositional Specifications of Calcium Lactate

Content Calcium Lactate, when calculated on the dried basis, should contain within a
range of 98.0～101.0% of calcium lactate (C6H10O6Ca ＝ 218.23).
Description Calcium Lactate occurs as white powder or granules. It is odorless or has a
slight, characteristic odor.
Identification Calcium Lactate solution (1→20) responds to the tests for Calcium Salt and
Lactate.
Purity (1) Clarity and Color of Solution : Weigh 1 g of Calcium Lactate, add 20 mL of
water, and dissolve while heating in a water bath. This solution is colorless and
clear.
(2) pH : Weigh 1 g of Calcium Lactate, add 20 mL of water, dissolve while heating in
a water bath, and cool. pH of this solution should be within a range of 6.0～8.0
(3) Arsenic : It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(4) Lead : When 5.0 g of Calcium Lactate is tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content
should not be more than 2.0 ppm.
(5) Mercury : When Calcium Lactate is tested by Mercury Limit Test, its content
should not be more than 1.0 ppm.
(6) Fluoride : 1 g of Calcium Lactate is precisely weighed and is tested by purity (8)
for 「Calcium Citrate」, its content should not be more than 30 ppm.
(7) Alkali Metals and Magnesium : 1.0 g of Calcium Lactate dissolve in about 40 mL of
water, add 0.5 g of ammonium chloride, and boil. Add about 20 mL of ammonium
oxalate solution, heat in a water bath for 1 hour, cool, add water to make 100 mL,
and filter. Measure 50 mL of the filtrate, add 0.5 mL of sulfuric acid, evaporate to
dryness, ignite to constant weigh, and weigh the residue. The amount of residue
should not be more than 5 mg.
(8) Volatile Fatty Acid : To 0.5 g of Calcium Lactate, 1 mL of sulfuric acid is added.
When it is heated in a water bath, an odor of fatty acid should not be generated.
Loss on Drying When Calcium Lactate is dried for 4 hours at 120℃, the loss should not
be more than 30%.
161
Assay Dissolve 1g of Calcium Lactate, precisely dried and accurately weighed, in 20 mL
of dilute hydrochloric acid, where water is added to make 100 mL solution. Take 10
mL of this solution and test by Assay for [Calcium Hydroxide]
1 mL of 0.05 M EDTA = 10.91 mg of C6H10O6Ca

162
 Calcium Oxide
Chemical Formula: CaO

Molecular Weight: 56.08 INS No.: 529

Synonyms: Lime CAS No.: 1305-78-8

Compositional Specifications of Calcium Oxide

Content After being heat-treated, Calcium Oxide is quantitatively analyzed. It should
contain 95.0∼100.5% of calcium oxide (CaO).
Description Calcium Oxide is white～grayish white hard lump, granule, or powder.
Identification 20 mL of water is added to 1 g of Calcium Oxide. Acetic acid is added
until it dissolves. The resulting solution responds to the test for calcium salts in
Identification.
Purity (1) Acid Insoluble substances : 100 mL of water is added to 5 g of Calcium
Oxide. It is dissolved by adding (drop wise) sufficient amount of hydrochloric acid.
The solution is heated and then cooled. If necessary, hydrochloric acid is added until
the solution becomes distinctly acidic. It is then filtered through a porcelain filter
that is previously weighed. The residue is washed with water until the wash water
doesn't show the reaction of chlorides. After drying for 1 hour at 105℃, the content
should not be more than 1.0%.
(2) Alkali or Magnesium : 0.5 g of Calcium Oxide is dissolved in 30 mL of water and
15 mL of dilute hydrochloric acid, which is boiled for 1 minute. 40 mL of oxalic acid
solution is immediately added to the solution, which is shaken vigorously. 2 drops of
methyl red solution are added. The resulting solution is neutralized with ammonia
solution until calcium is completely precipitated. It is then heated for 1 hour in a
water bath. After cooling, the total volume is brought up to 10 mL with water, which
is then filtered. 0.5 mL of sulfuric acid is added to 50 mL of the filtrate, which is
evaporated to dryness. The residue is heat-treated in a platinum crucible at 800±2
5℃ until the weight becomes constant. The content should not be more than 3.6%.
(3) Fluoride : 1 g of Calcium Oxide is precisely weighed and is tested by Purity (8) for
「Calcium Citrate」(not more than 50 ppm).
(4) Arsenic : It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(5) Barium : Mix 1.5g of Calcium Oxide with 10mL of water, add 15 mL of dilute
hydrochloric acid solution, add water to make 30mL and filter. The filtrate is used as
Test Solution. Separately, take 0.3 mL of barium standard solution, and add water to
make 20 mL, Reference Solution. To 20 mL of test solution and reference solution,
add 2g of sodium acetate, 1 mL of dilute acetic acid and 0.5 mL of potassium
chromate solution, and allow to stand for 15 minute. The turbidity of test solution
should not be more than that of reference solution (not more than 0.03%).
(6) Lead : Calcium Oxide is tested by purity (2) for 「Sodium Metaphosphate」(not
more than 2.0 ppm).
163
Loss on Ignition Precisely weighed 1 g of Calcium Oxide is heat-treated at 1,100±50℃
until the weight becomes constant. The weight loss should not be more than 10.0%.
Assay 1 g of Calcium Oxide is heated until the weight becomes constant, which is then
precisely weighed and dissolved in 20 mL of dilute hydrochloric acid. After cooling,
the solution is diluted to 500 mL with water. 50 mL of water is added to 50 mL of the
resulting solution, then, add 15 mL of sodium hydroxide test solution while stirring. 15
mL of sodium hydroxide solution and 0.3 g of hydroxy naphtol blue
hydroxynaphtholblue (C20H12O11S3Na2) are added to the resulting solution, which is then
titrated with 0.05 M EDTA solution. The end point is where the red color of the
solution disappears completely and the solution turns blue.
1 mL of 0.05 M EDTA ＝ 2.804 mg CaO

164
 Calcium Pantothenate

Chemical Formula C18H32O10N2Ca

Molecular Weight 476.55
Compositional Specifications of Calcium Pantothenate
Content Calcium Pantothenat, when calculated on the dried basis, should contain within a
range of 5.7～6.0% of nitrogen (N = 14.01) and 8.2～8.6% of calcium (Ca = 40.08).
Description Calcium Pantothenat occurs as a white powder. It is odorless and has a
slightly bitter taste.
Identification (1) To 50 mg of Calcium Pantothenate, add 5 mL of sodium hydroxide
solution and 1 drop of cupric sulfate solution, the solution becomes blue-purple
color.
(2) To 50 mg of Calcium Pantothenate, add 5 mL of sodium hydroxide solution, and
boil for 1 minute. Cool, and add 2 mL of diluted hydrochloric acid and 2 drops of
ferric chloride Solution, the solution becomes a dark yellow color.
(3) Calcium Pantothenate solution (1→20) responds to test of Calcium Salt in
Identification.
Purity (1) pH : pH of Calcium Pantothenate solution (2→10) should be within a range of
7.0～9.0.
(2) Specific rotation : Approximately 1.25 g of Calcium Pantothenate, previously dried
for 3 hours at 105℃ and precisely weighed, is dissolved in 25 mL of water. Optical
rotation of Calcium Pantothenate should be within a range of ＝ +25∼+28.5°.
(3) Arsenic : It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(4) Lead : When 5.0 g of Calcium Pantothenate is tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content
should not be more than 2.0 ppm.
(5) Alkaloid : When weigh 50 mg of Calcium Pantothenate, dissolve in 5 mL of water,
and add 0.5 mL of ammonium molybdate solution and 0.5 mL of diluted phosphoric
acid (1→10), the solution should not be turbid.
Loss on Drying When Calcium Pantothenate is dried for 3 hours at 105℃, the weight
loss should not be more than 5%.
Assay (1) Nitrogen : Accurately weigh about 50 mg of Calcium Pantothenate, which is dried,
proceed as directed under nitrogen determination method.
(2) Calcium : Approximately 0.5 g of Calcium Pantothenate, previously dried and
precisely weighed, is dissolved in 80 mL of water, add 15 mL of 0.05 M EDTA
solution, 15 mL of sodium hydroxide solution (1→10) and approximately 0.1 g of
165
2-oxy-1-(2'-oxy-4'-sulfo-1'-naphthylazo)-3-naphthoic acid. It is then titrated with
0.05 M EDTA solution. End point is where the red color of the solution completely
disappears and becomes to blue.
1 mL of 0.05 M EDTA solution ＝2.004 mg Ca

166
 Calcium Phosphate, Dibasic
Chemical Formula: CaHPO4‧0∼2H2O

Molecular Weight: 136.06(anhydrous) INS No.: 341(ii)

CAS No.:
Synonyms: Calcium hydrogen phosphate; 7757-93-9(anhydrous)
Dicalcium phosphate
7789-77-7(2 hydrates)

Compositional Specifications of Calcium Phosphate, Dibasic

Content Calcium Phosphate, Dibasic, when calculated on the dried basis, should contain
within a range of 98.0～103.0% dibasic calcium phosphate (CaHPO4 ＝ 136.06)
Description Calcium Phosphate, Dibasic is odorless and tasteless white crystalline
powder or powder.
Identification (1) Calcium Phosphate, Dibasic turns yellow by wetting with silver nitrate
solution.
(2) 5 mL of acetic acid is added to 0.1 g of Calcium Phosphate, Dibasic, which is then
boiled, cooled, and filtered. The filtrate adding 5 mL of ammonium hydroxide solution,
white precipitates are formed.
Purity (1) Arsenic : It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(2) Lead : Calcium Phosphate, Dibasic is precisely weighed and is tested by purity (2)
for 「Sodium Metaphosphate」, its content should not be more than 4.0 ppm.
(3) Cadmium : Calcium Phosphate, Dibasic is precisely weighed and is tested by purity
(3) for 「Sodium Metaphosphate」, its content should not be more than 1.0 ppm.
(4) Mercury : When Calcium Phosphate, Dibasic is tested by Mercury Limit Test, its
content should not be more than 1.0 ppm.
(5) Fluoride : 1 g of Calcium Phosphate, Dibasic is precisely weighed and is tested by
purity (8) for 「Calcium Citrate」, its content should not be more than 10 ppm.
Loss on Drying When Calcium Phosphate, Dibasic is dried for 3 hours at 200℃, the loss
should not be more than 22%.
Assay Dissolve 0.3 g of Calcium Phosphate, Dibasic, precisely dried and accurately
weighed, in 10 mL of dilute hydrochloric acid. Water is added to bring the total
volume to 120 mL. It is then quantitatively analyzed following the Assay for「Calcium
Phosphate, Monobasic」.
1 mL of 0.1 N potassium permanganate = 6.803 mg of CaHPO4

167
 Calcium Phosphate, Monobasic
Chemical Formula: Ca(H2PO4)2․nH2O (n= 1
or 0)
Molecular Weight: 234.05(anhydrous) INS No.: 341(i)

Synonyms: Calcium dihydrogen phosphate; CAS No.:

7758-23-8(anhydrous)
Acid calcium phosphate 10031-30-8(hydrate)

Compositional Specifications of Calcium Phosphate, Monobasic]

Content Anhydrous and hydrate of Calcium Phosphate, Monobasic should contain 16.8%～
18.3% and 15.9∼17.7% as calcium, after drying or heat-treating.
Description Calcium Phosphate, Monobasic is hygroscopic white crystal, granule, or
powder.
Identification (1) Calcium Phosphate, Monobasic turns yellow by wetting with silver
nitrate solution.
(2) To 0.1 g of Calcium Phosphate, Monobasic, add 20 mL of water and shake, and
filter. Add 5 mL of ammonium hydroxide solution, white precipitates are formed.
Purity (1) Arsenic : It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(2) Lead : Calcium Phosphate, Monobasic is precisely weighed and is tested by purity
(2) for 「Sodium Metaphosphate」, its content should not be more than 4.0 ppm.
(3) Cadmium : Calcium Phosphate, Monobasic is precisely weighed and is tested by
purity (3) for 「Sodium Metaphosphate」, its content should not be more than 1.0 ppm.
(4) Mercury : When Calcium Phosphate, Monobasic is tested by Mercury Limit Test, its
content should not be more than 1.0 ppm.
(5) Fluoride : 1 g of Calcium Phosphate, Monobasic is precisely weighed and is tested
by purity (8) for 「Calcium Citrate」, its content should not be more than 10 ppm.
Loss on Drying When hydrated form of Calcium Phosphate, Monobasic is dried for 3
hours at 60℃, the loss should not be more than 1%.
Loss on Ignition When thermogravimetric analysis is done with anhydrated form of
Calcium Phosphate, Monobasic at 800℃ for 30 minutes, weight loss should not be
more than 14.0～15.5%.
Assay Dissolve 475 mg of Calcium Phosphate, Monobasic, precisely dried or heat-teated
and accurately weighed, in 10 mL of hydrochloric acid. After adding a few drops of
methyl orange, the solution is boiled for 5 minutes and hydrochloric acid or water is
added to adjust pH while boiling. 2 drops of methylred and 30 mL of ammonium
hydroxide solution are added and mixed. 6 N ammonia solution and water are added
until the pink color disappears. The resulting liquid is heated in a water bath and
cooled in air until the precipitates are settled down. The supernatant is filtered
through a glass filter, which is repeated 3 times. Rinse water is filtered and the
beaker is rinsed with 10 mL of cold water (20℃ or below) twice, which is also
filtered. 100 mL of water and 50 mL of cold dilute sulfuric acid (1→6) are added to
the filtrate, which is then titrated with 0.1 N potassium permanganate.
168
1 mL of 0.1 N potassium permanganate = 2.004 mg Ca

169
 Calcium Phosphate, Tribasic
Chemical Formula: Ca3(PO4)2, Ca5OH(PO4)3

Molecular Weight: 310.18, 502.31 INS No.: 341(iii)

Synonyms: Calcium hydroxyapatite;
Tricalcium phosphate; Calcum CAS No.: 7758-87-4
orhophosphate

Compositional Specifications of Calcium Phosphate, Tribasic

Content Calcium Phosphate, Tribasic, when calculated on the dried basis, should contain
not less than 90.0% of tribasic calcium phosphate [Ca3(PO4)2].
Description Calcium Phosphate, Tribasic is odorless and tasteless white powder.
Identification (1) Calcium Phosphate, Tribasic turns yellow by wetting with silver nitrate
solution.
(2) To 0.1 g of Calcium Phosphate, Tribasic, add 5 mL of acetic acid, and boil, cool,
and filter. To filtrate, add 5 mL of ammonium hydroxide solution, white precipitates
are formed.
Purity (1) Arsenic : It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(2) Lead : Calcium Phosphate, Tribasic is precisely weighed and is tested by purity (2)
for 「Sodium Metaphosphate」, its content should not be more than 4.0 ppm.
(3) Cadmium : Calcium Phosphate, Tribasic is precisely weighed and is tested by purity
(3) for 「Sodium Metaphosphate」, its content should not be more than 1.0 ppm.
(4) Mercury : When Calcium Phosphate, Tribasic is tested by Mercury Limit Test, its
content should not be more than 1.0 ppm.
(5) Fluoride : 1 g of Calcium Phosphate, Tribasic is precisely weighed and is tested by
purity (8) for 「Calcium Citrate」, its content should not be more than 50 ppm.
Loss on Drying
When Calcium Phosphate, Tribasic is dried for 3 hours at 200℃, the loss should not be
more than 10%.
Assay
200 mg of Calcium Phosphate, Tribasic, precisely weighed, dissolve in 25 mL water
and 10 mL dilute hydrochloric acid. It is filtered, if necessary, and the residue is
dissolved by adding 1 mL of dilute hydrochloric acid. The solution is kept at 50℃ ,
where 75 mL of ammonium molybdate solution is added and stirred occasionally for 30
minutes. Precipitates are washed with 30～40 mL of water 1～2 times. Precipitates are
transferred on to a filter paper and washed with potassium nitrate solution (1→1000)
until the final rinse solution does not show acidity as determined with a litmus paper.
Precipitates and filter paper is transferred into a container. 40 mL of 1 N sodium
hydroxide solution is added and stirred until the precipitates are dissolved. Excess
alkali is titrated with 1 N sulfuric acid.
1 mL of 1 N sodium hydroxide solution = 6.743 mg Ca3(PO4)2
170
 Calcium Propionate
(CH3CH2COO)2Ca 0～1H2O
Chemical Formula: C6H10O4Ca·nH2O(n = 1 or
0))
Molecular Weight: 204.23(1 hydrate) INS No.: 282
186.22(anhydrous)
Synonyms: Calcium propanoate CAS No.: 4075-81-4

Compositional Specifications of Calcium Propionate

Content Calcium Propionate, when calculated on the dried basis, should contain not less
than 98.0% of calcium propionate (C6H10O4Ca ＝ 186.22).
Description Calcium Propionate occurs as white crystals, powder or granules. It is
odorless or has a slight, characteristic odor.
Identification (1) 0.5 g of Calcium Propionate is dissolved in 5 mL of water. When 5 mL
of dilute sulfuric acid is added to a this solution, heat, a characteristic odor is
generated.
(2) Calcium Propionate responds to the test for Calcium Salt.
Purity (1) Water-Insoluble Substances : To 10 g of Calcium Propionate, add 100 mL of
water, and allow to stand for 1 hour while shaking occasionally. Filter the insoluble
substances through a glass filter (lG4), wash with 30 mL of water, and dry at 180℃
for 4 hours, and weigh the residue. Its content should not be more than 20mg.
(2) Free Acid and Free Alkali : Weigh 2 g of Calcium Propionate, dissolve in 20 mL of
freshly boiled and cooled water, and add 2 drops of phenolphthalein solution, test
solution. Proceed as directed under Purity (2) in 「Sodium Propionate」.
(3) Arsenic : It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(4) Lead : When 5.0 g of Calcium Propionate is tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content
should not be more than 5.0 ppm.
(5) Iron : When 5.0 g of Calcium Propionate is tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content
should not be more than 50 ppm.
(6) Mercury : When Calcium Propionate is tested by Mercury Limit Test, its content
should not be more than 1.0 ppm.
(7) Fluroides : 1 g of Calcium Propionate is accurately weighed and proceeded as
directed under Purity (8) for 「Calcium Citrate」(not more than 10 ppm).
Loss on Drying When Calcium Propionate is dried for 2 hours at 120℃, the weight loss
should not be more than 9.5%.
Assay Accurately weigh about 1 g of Calcium Propionate, previously dried, and dissolve
in water to make exactly 100 mL. Take 25 mL of this solution, add 75 mL of water
and 15 mL of 0.1% sodium hydroxide solution, and allow to stand for about 1 minute.
0.1 g of 2-oxy-1-(2'-oxy-4'-sulfo-1-naphtylazo)-2- naphthoic acid is added to the
resulting solution, which is immediately titrated with 0.05 M EDTA solution. At the end
171
point, the red color completely disappears and the solution turns blue.
1 mL of 0.05 M EDTA = 9.312 mg of C6H10O4Ca

172
 Calcium 5'-Ribonucleotide
Synonyms: Calcium ribonucleotides INS No.: 634

Definition Calcium 5'-Ribonucleotide is a mixture of calcium 5'-inosinate, calcium 5'-

guanylate, calcium 5'-cytidylate, and calcium 5'-uridylate.
Compositional Specifications of Calcium 5'-Ribonucleotide
Content If Calcium 5'-Ribonucleotide, when calculated on the anhydrous dried basis, it
should contain within a range of 97.0∼102.0% of 5'-calcium ribonucleotide, 95% of
which is made of calcium 5'-inosinate and calcium 5'-guanylate.
Description Calcium 5'-Ribonucleotide occurs white to milky white crystal or powder. It
is odorless and has a slight characteristic taste.
Identification (1) 0.1 g of Calcium 5'-Ribonucleotide is dissolved in 200 mL water by
heating in a water bath. After cooling, 1 mL of this solution taken 0.2 mL of orcinol
in ethanol (1→10) is added, which is tested by the Identification (1) of 「Disodium
5'-Ribonucleotide」.
(2) To 0.1 g of Calcium 5'-Ribonucleotide, add 5 mL of water and 5 mL of nitric acid,
and gently boil and cool. It is then titrated with aqueous ammonia or ammonia
solution. Add water to make 100 mL, this solution shows reaction of phosphate (B) of
Identification.
(3) To 2 mL of Calcium 5'-Ribonucleotide in diluted hydrochloric acid (1→2,0 00), add
0.1 g of zinc powder, and test by Identification (3) 「Disodium 5'-Ribonucleotide」.
(4) 0.1 g of Calcium 5'-Ribonucleotide is dissolved in 500 mL of water by heating in a
water bath. After cooling, take 1 mL of the solution, add 1 mL of dilute hydrochloric
acid. The solution is tested by Identification (4) 「Disodium 5'-Ribonucleotide」.
(5) To 0.5 g of Calcium 5'-Ribonucleotide, add 10 mL of 0.5 N sulfuric acid, thoroughly
stir-mixed and settled for 5 minutes, which is neutralized with sodium hydroxide
solution and then filtrated. The filtrate is evaporated to dryness. The residue is
dissolved in 10 mL of this solution, that sodium hydroxide solution is added to 50 mL
of hydroxylamine hydrochloride solution (7→50), so that pH becomes approximately
6.5, and test by Identification (5) of 「Disodium 5'-ribonucleotide」.
(6) 0.1 g of Calcium 5'-Ribonucleotide is dissolved in 20 mL of water by heating in a
water bath and cooled. The solution responds to the test for Calcium Salts in
Identification.
Purity
(1) Water Solubles : 1 g of Calcium 5'-Ribonucleotide is dissolved in 50 mL of water
by stir-mixing for 10 minutes, which is then filtered through a filter paper for
quantitative analysis. Take 25 mL of filtrate, evaporate to dryness and the residue is
further dried at 105℃ for 1 hour. The amount of water solubles should not be more
than 80 mg.
(2) pH : 0.1 g of Calcium 5'-Ribonucleotide is dissolved in 200 mL of water by heating
in a water bath. After cooling, pH of the solution should be within in a range of 7.0～
173
 8.0.
(3) Arsenic : It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(4) Lead : When 5.0 g of Calcium 5'-Ribonucleotide is tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content
should not be more than 1.0 ppm.
Water Content
Proceed as directed under Water Content in 「Disodium 5'-Ribonucleotide」, it should
not be more than 23%.
Assay
Using the values of Ica, Gca, and Pca from (1), (2), and (3), contents of calcium
5'-ribonucleotide, (C10H11CaN4O8P), and calcium 5'-guanylate (C10H12CaN5O8P) are
calculated using the following equations.
Content of calcium 5'-ribonucleotide(%) Ica + Gca + Pca
100 - water × 100
=
content(%)

Content of calcium 5'-inosinate Ica + Gca

and calcium 5'- guanylate(%) =
100 - water content(%)
× 100

(1) Calcium 5'-Inosinate : 650 mg of Calcium 5'-Ribonucleotide is precisely weighed

and dissolved in 0.1 N hydrochloric acid to make 500 mL. This solution is referred
to as A solution. A solution is tested by Assay (1) of [Disodium 5'-ribonucleotide].
The resulting value is I (%). The content of calcium 5'-inosinate, Ica (%), is obtained
by multiplying I (%) with 0.985.
(2) Calcium 5'-Guanylate : 1 mL of A solution is tested by Assay (2) of [Disodium
5'-guanylate]. The resulting value is G (%). The content of calcium 5'-guanylate, Gca
(%), is obtained by multiplying G (%) with 0.986.
(3) Calcium 5'-Cytidylate and Calcium 5'-Uridylate : Approximately 1.5 g of Calcium
5'-Ribonucleotide is precisely weighed and dissolved in 10 mL of 1 N hydrochloric
acid, where 1 mL of sodium phosphate(monobasic) standard solution is added. This
solution is neutralized with 1 N sodium hydroxide solution and then filtered. Filter
paper is rinsed with 10 mL water. This is added to filtrate, where warm water is
added so that the total volume is brought up to 50 mL (This solution is referred to
as C). C solution is tested by (3) disodium 5'-cytidylate and disodium 5'-uridylate of
Assay for [Disodium 5'-Ribonucleotide]. The resulting value is P(%). The content of
calcium 5'-cytidylate (C9H12CaN3O8P) and calcium 5'-uridylate (C9H11CaN2O9P), Pca(%)
is obtained by multiplying P (%) with 0.984

174
 Calcium silicate

INS No.: 552

Synonyms: Silicic acid calcium salt CAS No.: 1344-95-2
Definition Calcium silicate is hydrated or dehydrated silicate which consists of CaO and SiO2.
Compositional Specifications of Calcium Silicate
Content Calcium silicate, when calculated on the dried basis, should contain within a
range of 50.0～95.0% silicon dioxide (SiO2) and 3.0～35.0% calcium oxide (CaO).
Description Calcium silicate is strongly hygroscopic white～graysh white powder.
Identification (1) 500 mg of Calcium silicate is dissolved in 10 mL of 2.7 N hydrochloric
acid, which is then filtered. The filtrate is neutralized with 6 N ammonium hydroxide
solution as determined with a litmus paper. The resulting solution responds to test of
calcium salt in Identification.
(2) Proceed as directed under Identification (2) for 「Magnesium Silicate」.
Purity (1) Fluoride : 1 g of Calcium silicate is precisely weighed into a beaker and
dissolved by adding 10 mL of 1 N hydrochloric acid. It is then boiled for 1 minute.
The solution is transferred into a PE beaker and quickly cooled. 15 mL of sodium
citrate solution(1→4) and 10 mL of EDTA solution(1→40) are added, shaken, and
mixed. pH of the solution is adjusted to 5.4～5.6 by adding hydrochloric acid(1→10)
or sodium hydroxide solution(2→5). The total volume of the solution is brought up to
100 mL by adding water (Test Solution). 50 mL of the Test Solution is transferred
into a PE beaker. Electric potential is measured using fluorine electrode . Fluoride
concentration (μg/100mL) is measured from a standard curve and it should not be
more than 50 ppm.
Standard Solution : 2.210 g of sodium fluoride, which is previously dried for 4 hours at
200℃, is accurately weighed into a PE beaker and dissolved in 200 mL of water.
Then add water to bring the total volume to 1,000mL and preserve it in a PE beaker.
Measure exactly 5 mL of this solution into a measuring flask, and add water to bring
the total volume to 1,000 mL. (1 mL of this solution contains 5µg of fluorine.)
Calibration Curve Preparation : Separately, 1, 2, 3, 5, 10, and 15 mL of standard
solution is weighed into a PE beaker, and 15 mL of Trisodium Citrate Solution (1→4)
and 10 mL of Disodium Ethylenediaminetetraacetate solution (1→40) are added and
mixed. To this solution, Hydrochloric acid (1→10) or Sodium Hydroxide Solution (2→
5) are added to bring the pH 5.4∼5.6, where water is added to bring the total
volume to 100mL, separately. Each of 50 mL of the solution transfer into a PE
beaker. Then measure electric potential by using fluorine electrode and prepare
calibration curve with the log of fluorine concentration.
(2) Arsenic : It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(3) Lead : Accurately weigh 5.0 g of Sodium Silicoaluminate into a 150 mL beaker, add
30 mL of water. Add Hydrochloric acid in small portion to the solution until the solid
175
 is dissolved throughly and add 1 mL of hydrochloric acid. Heat this solution for
approximately 5 minutes and cool down. Add water to bring the total volume to 100
mL. Add Sodium Hydroxide Solution(1→4) or Hydrochloric acid(1→4) so that pH
becomes 2～4. Transfer this solution into 250 mL separatory funnel, where water is
added to make 200 mL. Then add 2 mL of 2% APDC solution and shake to mix.
Extract the solution 2 times with 20 mL each of chloroform, which is evaporated to
dryness in a water bath. Add 3 mL of Nitric Acid to the residue and heat it until
nearly evaporated. To this solution, add 0.5 mL of Nitric Acid and 10 mL of water,
concentrate it until the final solution becomes 3~5 mL, and add water to make 10
mL, test solution. When the test solution is tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content
should not be more than 2.0 ppm.
2% APDC Solution : 2.0 g of Ammonium Pyrolidine Dithiocarbamate is dissolved in
water to make 100 mL. Filter it when using.
Loss on Drying When Calcium silicate is dried for 2 hours at 105℃, the loss should not
be more than 10%.
Loss on Ignition When Calcium silicate is first dried at 105℃ for 2 hours and precisely
weighed 1 g is further heat treated at 900℃, weight loss should not be more than 5～
14%.
Assay (1) Silicon Dioxide： Approximately 400 mg of Calcium silicate is precisely
weighed into a beaker, where 5 mL of water and 10 mL of perchloric acid are
added. The mixture is heated until perchloric acid evaporates and white smoke
appears. The beaker is covered with a watch glass and heated for additional 15
minutes. 30 mL of water is added to the above mixture, which is then cooled. The
residue is slowly washed three times with hot water. The filter paper with residue
transfer into a platinum crucible and carbonized. Then it is further heat treated and
cooled. Appropriate amount of sulfuric acid is added to the crucible, which is then
heat treated at 1,300℃. It is then weighed after cooling. The residue is wetted with
5 drops of sulfuric acid, where 15 mL of hydrofluoric acid is added. The crucible is
then slowly heated to remove acids completely and heat treated at 1,000℃ or
higher until the weight becomes constant. It is then cooled in a desiccator and
weighed. The weight loss is the amount of silicon dioxide.
(2) Calcium Oxide : The filtrate in Assay (1) is neutralized with 1 N sodium hydroxide
solution, where 30 mL of 0.05 M EDTA solution is added. 15 mL of 1 N sodium
hydroxide solution and 0.3 g of hydroxy naphthol blue solution are added to this
solution, which is titrated with 0.05 M sodium EDTA solution. At the end point, the
solution turns blue.
1 mL of 0.05 M sodium EDTA solution = 2.804 mg CaO
∘hydroxy naphthol blue solution : 0.3 g is dissolved in 100 mL of water, where 10 mL
of 1 N sodium hydroxide solution, 1 mL of calcium chloride solution (1→200), and
176
water is added to bring the total volume to 165 mL. Finally 1 mL of 0.05 M sodium
EDTA solution is added.

177
 Calcium Sorbate
Chemical Formula: C12H14CaO4 INS No.: 203

Molecular Weight: 262.32 CAS No.: 7492-55-9

Compositional Specifications of Calcium Sorbate

Content Calcium Sorbate, when calculated on the dried basis, should contain within a
range of 98.0～102.0% calcium sorbate (C12H14CaO4).
Description Calcium Sorbate is white fine crystalline powder.
Identification (1) 1 g of Calcium Sorbate is heat treated at 800℃. After cooling, it is
mixed well in 10 mL of water and dissolved by adding anhydrous acetic acid, which
is then filtered. The filtrate responds to test of calcium salt in Identification.
(2) 0.2 g of Calcium Sorbate is dissolved in 5 mL of methanol, where 0.1 mL of 1 N
sodium hydroxide solution is added. The mixture is then dissolved in 95 mL of water.
When a few drops of bromine solution are added and shaken, the color of solution
disappears immediately.
Purity (1) Fluoride : 1 g of Calcium Sorbate is precisely weighed into a beaker and
dissolved by adding 10 mL of 1 N hydrochloric acid. It is then boiled for 1 minute.
The solution is transferred into a PE beaker and quickly cooled. 15 mL of sodium
citrate solution(1→4) and 10 mL of EDTA solution(1→40) are added, shaken, and
mixed. pH of the solution is adjusted to 5.4～5.6 by adding hydrochloric acid(1→10)
or sodium hydroxide solution(2→5). The total volume of the solution is brought up to
100 mL by adding water (Test Solution). 50 mL of the Test Solution is transferred
into a PE beaker. Electric potential is measured using fluorine electrode . Fluoride
concentration (μg/100mL) is measured from a standard curve and it should not be
more than 10 ppm.
Standard Solution : 2.210 g of Fluorine Natrium → sodium fluoride, which is previously
dried for 4 hours at 200℃, is accurately weighed into a PE beaker and dissolved in
200 mL of water. Then add water to bring the total volume to 1,000mL and preserve
it in a PE beaker. Measure exactly 5 mL of this solution into a measuring flask, and
add water to bring the total volume to 1,000 mL. (1 mL of this solution contains 5µg
of fluorine.)
Calibration Curve Preparation : Separately, 1, 2, 3, 5, 10, and 15 mL of standard
solution is weighed into a PE beaker, and 15 mL of Trisodium Citrate Solution (1→4)
and 10 mL of Disodium Ethylenediaminetetraacetate solution (1→40) are added and
mixed. To this solution, Hydrochloric acid (1→10) or Sodium Hydroxide Solution (2→5)
are added to bring the pH 5.4∼5.6, where water is added to bring the total volume
to 100mL, separately. Each of 50 mL of the solution transfer into a PE beaker. Then
measure electric potential by using fluorine electrode and prepare calibration curve
with the log of fluorine concentration.
(2) Lead : When 5.0 g of Calcium Sorbate is tested by Atomic Absorption
178
 Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content
should not be more than 2.0 ppm.
(3) Mercury : When Calcium Sorbate is tested by Mercury Limit Test, its content
should not be more than 1.0 ppm.
(4) Arsenic : It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(5) Aldehyde : To 3.0g of Calcium Sorbate, 450 mL of water is added The pH of this
solution is adjusted to 4 using Hydrochloric acid. Then water is added to make 500 mL
and filtered, test solution. Separately, water is added to 2.5mL of 37% formaldehyde
solution to make 1,000mL. 3 mL of this solution is precisely measured and water is
added to make 500 mL, reference solution. To 5 mL of each of test solution and
reference solution, 2.5 mL of puccine sulfite solution is added. Then set aside the
solution for 15~30 minutes. The color of test solution should not be deeper than that
of reference solution. (not more than 0.1% as formaldehyde).
Loss on Drying When Calcium Sorbate is dried for 3 hours at 105℃, the loss should not
be more than 3.0%.
Assay
Dissolve 0.25 g of Calcium Sorbate, previously dried and accurately weighed in 35 mL
of glacial acetic acid (for non-aqueous titration) and 4 mL of anhydrous acetic acid by
heating in a water bath. After cooling, this solution is titrated with 0.1 N perchloric
acid (indicator : 2 drops of crystal violet solution). At the end point, the solution turns
green.
0.1 N perchloric acid solution 1 mL ＝ 13.12 mg C12H14CaO4

179
 Calcium Stearate

INS No.: 470(i)

CAS No.: 1592-23-0
Definition Calcium Stearate is a mixture of calcium salts of stearic acid and palmitic acid.
Compositional Specifications of Calcium Stearate
Content Calcium Stearate, when calculated on the dried basis, should contain within a
range of 9.0∼10.5% of calcium oxide (CaO).
Description Calcium Stearate is white～yellow powder or slightly glossy crystalline solid
or semi solid.
Identification 1 g of Calcium Stearate is dissolved in 25 mL of water and 5 mL of
hydrochloric acid, which is then heated. After cooling, a fatty acid layer is separated as
supernatant. The lower aqueous layer is evaporated to dryness. The solution residue
responds to test of calcium salt in Identification Method.
Purity (1) Free Fatty Acids : Approximately 7 g of Calcium Stearate is precisely
weighed into a 250 mL Erlenmeyer Flask, where 75 mL of neutralized warm alcohol
and 2 mL of phenolphthalein solution are added. It is then titrated with 0.25 N
sodium hydroxide solution until the red color persists for 30 seconds. The content
of free fatty acids (as stearic acid) is obtained using the following equation and
should not be more than 3.0%.
V × 0.25 × 28.45
Free Fatty Acids =
weight of the sample(g)
V : Consumed volume (mL) of 0.25 N sodium
hydroxide solution
(2) Arsenic : It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(3) Lead : When 5.0 g of Calcium Stearate is tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content
should not be more than 1 ppm.
(4) Unsaponifiable : 5 g of Calcium Stearate is precisely weighed into a 250 mL round
bottom flask, where 50 mL of 0.5 N potassium hydroxide solution is added and
refluxed for 1 hour with a reflux condenser. After heating is finished, 100 mL of
water is added through the condenser and the flask is shaken. After cooling, the
content is transferred into a separatory funnel with a stop cock. The flask is washed
with ether several times (approximately 100 mL), which is added to the funnel. The
funnel is shaken vigorously for 1 minute and then settled to separate two phases
completely. The supernatant ether layer is collected in a 500 mL separatory funnel
with a stop cock. The aqueous layer is again extracted twice with 100 mL of ether.
These extracts are added to the first extract. The combined extracts are washed
with 25 mL of 10% alcohol. This procedure is repeated until the aqueous layer
180
 doesn't get colorized by phenolphthalein solution. When this is accomplished, aqueous
phase is discarded and the ether extract is transferred into a pre-weighed beaker.
With 10 mL of ether, the funnel is washed, which is added to the beaker. Ether layer
is evaporated to dryness in a water bath, which is then dried at 103℃ for 15 minute
duration at a time until the weight becomes constant. (If the weight doesn't become
constant after 3 trial, the sample might have been contaminated.) Then the residue is
cooled in a desiccator and weighed. The residue is dissolved in 4 mL of ether. 20
mL of pre-neutralized alcohol(indicator : sodium hydroxide) is added to the solution.
The resulting solution is titrated with 0.1N alcoholic solution of potassium hydroxide
until a pale red color persists. The content of unsaponifiables is obtained from the
following equation and the content should not be more than 2.0%.
[ weight of residue matter(g) - 0.281 × V × 0.1]
Unsaponifiables(%) = × 100
weight of the sample(g)

V : Consumed amount of 0.1 N potassium hydroxide solution (mL)

Loss on Drying When Calcium Stearate is dried for 3 hours at 105℃, the loss should
not be more than 4.0%.
Assay Approximately 1.2 g of Calcium Stearate is precisely weighed, where 50 mL of
0.1 N hydrochloric acid. It is then boiled for 30 minutes while replenishing water
occasionally. After cooling, it if filtrated. The residue is washed with water until the
filtrate is no longer acidic. This wash water is added to the previous filtrate, which is
then titrated with 1 N sodium hydroxide solution. The resulting solution is neutralized
(Test Solution). 30 mL of 0.05 M EDTA solution, 15 mL of 1 N sodiumhydroxide
solution, and 0.3 g of hydroxynaphtolblue hydroxynaphtholblue (indicator :
C20H12O11S3Na2) are added to the Test Solution, which is then titrated with 0.05 M
EDTA solution until the solution turns blue.
1 mL of 0.05 M EDTA solution = 2.804 mg CaO

181
 Calcium Stearoyl Lactylate
Chemical Formula:

Molecular Weight: INS No.: 482(i)

Synonyms: Calcium stearoyl lactate CAS No.: 5793-94-2

Definition Calcium Stearoyl Lactylate is a mixture having calcium of stearoyl lactylates

as a major component of related acids and their calcium salts
Compositional Specifications of Calcium Stearoyl Lactylate
Description Calcium Stearoyl Lactylate is a white～yellow powder. It is odorless or has
a characteristic scent.
Identification (1) 1 g of Calcium Stearoyl Lactylate is heat-treated for 1 hour at 500℃.
The residue is dissolved in 5 mL of hydrochloric acid (1→3). This solution responds
to calcium salts.
(2) 2 g of Calcium Stearoyl Lactylate is well mixed with 10 mL of dilute hydrochloric
acid, which is heated for 5 minutes in a water bath. It is filtered while hot. 30 mL of
sodium hydroxide solution is added to the residue on the filter paper. While shaking,
it is heated for 30 minutes in a water bath at 95℃ or higher. After cooling, 20 mL of
dilute hydrochloric acid is added. The resulting solution is extracted twice with 30
mL each of ether. Ether extracts are combined and washed with 20 mL of water. It
is then dehydrated with anhydrous sodium sulfate. Ether is evaporated out in a water
bath. The melting point of the residue should be within a range of 54∼69℃.
(3) Calcium Stearoyl Lactylate responds to the test for Lactate Salts in Identification.
Purity (1) Acid Value : Approximately 0.5 g of Calcium Stearoyl Lactylate is precisely
weighed, 20 mL 1:1 mixture of alcohol and ether is added, (heated and dissolved if
necessary) test solution, and proceeded as directed under Acid Value in Fats Test.
The acid value should be within a range of 50～86.
(2) Ester Value : Approximately 1 g is precisely weighed and dissolved in 25 mL of
0.5 N alcoholic solution of potassium hydroxide and 40 mL of toluene, test solution.
It is proceeded under Saponification Value and Esther value in Fats Test, and the
ester value should be within a range of 125∼164.
(3) Arsenic : It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(4) Lead : When 5.0 g of Calcium Stearoyl Lactylate is tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content
should not be more than 2.0 ppm.
(5) Cadmium : When 5.0g of Calcium Stearoyl Lactylate is tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content
should not be more than 1.0 ppm.
(6) Mercury : When Calcium Stearoyl Lactylate is tested by Mercury Limit Test, its
content should not be more than 1.0 ppm.
(7) Total Lactate Content : Calcium Stearoyl Lactylate is tested by following the
procedure in Purity (7) for 「Sodium Stearoyl Lactylate」. Total lactate content
182
 should be within a range of 32∼38%.
(8) Calcium : Accurately weigh 250 mg of Calcium Stearoyl Lactylate into a beaker and
dissolve it in 10 mL of alcohol by heating. This solution is transferred into a 25 mL
volumetric flask. The beaker is rinsed twice with two 5 mL portions of alcohol. This
alcohol is added to the volumetric flask and alcohol is added so that the total volume
is brought up to 25 mL. Test solution is prepared by adding 0.25 mL of that solution,
2.5 mL of lanthanum standard stock solution into a 25 mL volumetric flask, and make
25 mL with water. Measure Atomic absorbance by the use of spectrophotometer by
following operation condition. Separately, measure absorbance values of calcium
standard solution and prepare a calibration curve. Absorbance of the test solution is
substituted to the calibration curve, and the concentration of Calcium C(μg/mL) is
obtained. Using the equation below, calcium content in Sodium Stearoyl Lactylate is
calculated. This value should be within a range of 1.0～5.2%.
2.5 × C
Calcium(%)= × 100
weight of the sample(mg)

Operation Conditions
-Gas used : Combustible gas (acetylene or hydrogen)
Combustible support gas (air)
-Lamp : Cadmium hollow cathode lamp
-Wavelength : 422.7 nm
∘Standard Solution : To 250 mg of calcium carbonate, add 100 mL of hydrochloric acid
(1→10), heat with not boiling, and cool it down. Then water is added to make 1,000
mL. 0.2, 0.4, and 0.5 mL of this solution is added to each 100 mL volumetric flask,
10 mL of lanthanum standard stock solution is added to it, respectively. Then the
water is added so that the total volume of each flask becomes 100 mL. (1 mL of the
solution contains 2.0, 4.0, and 5.0 μg of sodium, respectively.)
Residues on Ignition When thermogravimetric analysis is done with Calcium Stearoyl
Lactylate at 800℃, the amount of residues should be within a range of 14.3～17.7%.

183
 Calcium Sulfate
Chemical Formula: CaSO4‧2H2O

Molecular Weight: 172.27 INS No.: 516

Synonyms: Gypsum CAS No.: 7778-18-9

Compositional Specifications of Calcium Sulfate

Content Calcium Sulfate should contain within a range of 98.0～105.0% of calcium
sulfate (CaSO4․2H2O).
Description Calcium Sulfate occurs as a white to pale yellow-white powder or
crystalline powder.
Identification To 1 g of Calcium Sulfate, add 100 mL of water, shake well, and filter.
The filtrate responds to the tests for Calcium Salt and Sulfate in Identification.
Purity (1) Clarity and Color of Solution : Weigh 0.2 g of Calcium Sulfate, add 10 mL of
diluted hydrochloric acid, and dissolve while heating. The turbidity of test solution
should not be more than almost clear.
(2) Free Alkali : Weigh 0.5 g of Calcium Sulfate, add 100 mL of water, shake, filter,
measure 10 mL of the filtrate, and add 1 drop of phenolphthalein solution. No pink
color develops.
(3) Chloride : Weigh 0.2 g of Calcium Sulfate, add 20 mL of water, shake well, filter,
and measure 5 mL of the filtrate. 6 mL of diluted nitric acid is added, test solution.
The solution tested by Chloride Limit Test, its content should not be more than the
amount that corresponds to 0.3 mL of 0.01 N hydrochloric acid.
(4) Carbonate : Weigh 0.5 g of Calcium Sulfate, add 5 mL of diluted hydrochloric acid.
No effervescence occurs.
(5) Arsenic : It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(6) Lead : Calcium Sulfate is tested by purity (2) for 「Sodium Metaphosphate」(not
more than 2.0 ppm).
(7) Mercury : When Calcium Sulfate is tested by Mercury Limit Test, its content should
not be more than 1.0 ppm.
(8) Selenium : 0.2 g of Calcium Sulfate is precisely weighed and is tested by purity (6)
for 「Sulfuric acid」, (not more than 30 ppm).
(9) Fluoride : 1 g of Calcium Sulfate is precisely weighed and is tested by purity (8)
for 「Calcium Citrate」(not more than 30 ppm).
Loss on Ignition The loss on ignition of Calcium Sulfate should be within a range of 1
8～24%
Assay Accurately weigh about 1 g of Calcium Sulfate, add 40 mL of diluted hydrochloric
acid, dissolve while heating on a water bath, cool, and add water to make exactly 100
mL. Take 10 mL of this solution and proceed as directed under Assay for 「Calcium
Hydroxide」.
1 mL of 0.05 M EDTA = 8.609 mg of CaSO4 ․ 2H2O
184
 Candelilla Wax
INS No.: 902
CAS No.: 8006-44-8
Definition Candelilla Wax is obtained by sampling and purifying stems of candelilla
(Euphorbia Antisyphilitica ZUCC.) of euphorbiaceae.
Compositional Specifications of Candelilla Wax
Description Candelilla Wax is almost tasteless pale yellow～yellowish brown solid with
resinous odor.
Identification (1) 1∼2 mg of Candelilla Wax is analyzed by Potassium Bromide Disk
Method in Infrared Spectrophotometry (1). Its spectrum is shown below.

Purity (1) Melting Point ： Melting point of Candelilla Wax should be in a temperature
range of 68∼73℃.
(2) Acid value ： Approximately 3 g of Candelilla Wax is precisely weighted and
dissolved in 80 mL mixture of xylan and ethyl alcohol (3 ： 5) (Test Solution). When
Test Solution is tested by Acid Value Test Methods in Flavoring Substances Test.
12.0∼24.0 (titration should be carried out when it is warm.).
(3) Saponification Value ： 1 g of Candelilla Wax is precisely weighted into a
saponification flask, 50mL of mixture of xylan and ethyl alcohol (3→5) in ethyl
alcohol and 25 mL of alcoholic solution of potassium hydroxide are added. After
attaching a reflux condenser, the solution is heated for 1 hour while shaking
occasionally. Make warm. A few drops of phenolphthalein TS are added to the
solution, which is then titrated with 0.5 N hydrochloric acid. Saponification value is
calculated using the following equation and should be 43～65.
(4) Arsenic : It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(5) Lead : When 5.0 g of Candelilla Wax is tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content
should not be more than 2.0 ppm.
(6) Mercury : When Candelilla Wax is tested by Mercury Limit Test, its content should
not be more than 1.0ppm.
Residue on Ignition Residue on Ignition of Candelilla Wax should not be more than 0.3%.
185
 Capric Acid
Chemical Formula: C 10H 20O 2
Molecular Weight: 172.27 INS No.: 570
Synonyms: Decanoic acid CAS No.: 334-48-5

Definition Capric acid is a saturated fatty acid obtained from fat and its main ingredient
is capric acid (C10H20O2).
Composition Specifications of Capric Acid
Description Capric acid is a white crystal with characteristic smell.
Purity (1) Acid Value : When 0.5 g of Capric acid is precisely weighted, and proceeded
as directed under Acid value in Fats Test, the Acid value should be 320~329.
(2) Solidification point : The Solidification point of Capric acid is 27.0 ～ 32.0℃
(3) Lead : When 5.0 g of Capric acid is tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content
should not be more than 1.0 ppm.
(4) Arsenic : It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(5) Mercury : When Capric acid is tested by Mercury Limit Test, its content should not
be more than 1.0 ppm.
(6) Iodine Value : Approximately 5.9 g of Capric acid is precisely weighted into a 500
mL Erlenmeyer flask with a stopper which contains 20 mL of 1 : 1 mixture of glacial
acetic acid : cyclohexane and 25 mL of Weiss solution. A stopper is placed on the
flask which is vigorously shaken and set aside for 1 hour in a dark place. 20 mL of
potassium iodide solution and 100 mL of water(previously boiled and cooled) are
added to the flask. The excess iodine is titrated with 0.1 N sodium thiosulfate
solution. 0.1 N sodium thiosulfate solution is added drop wise until yellow color
disappears. Starch solution is added and the titration is continued until the blue color
disappears completely. Near the end point, the flask is vigorously shaken with a
stopper. Separately, a blank test is carried out by the same procedure. Iodine value
is obtained by the following equation and it should not be more than 0.6.

Iodine Value= weight(B-S) × 1.269

of the sample(g)
B : Consumed amount of 0.1 N sodium thiosulfate solution in the blank test (mL)
S : Consumed amount of 0.1 N sodium thiosulfate solution in the test for sample (mL)
(7) Saponification Value : 3 g of Capric acid is precisely weighted into a 250 mL
flask, where 50 mL of 0.5 N alcoholic solution of potassium hydroxide is added.
After attaching a reflux condenser, the solution is saponified for 30～60 minutes.
This solution is used as test solution, tested under Saponification value in Fats Test,
boiled (red color appears again) and titrated again until the red color disappears.
186
 Saponification value should be 320∼331.
(8) Unsaponifiable Matter : 5 g of Capric acid is precisely weighted into a 250 mL
flask, where 2 g of potassium hydroxide and 40 mL of alcohol are added and gently
refluxed for 1 hour with a reflux condenser. The solution transferi nto a separatory
funnel (3.5 cm diameter × 30 cm length with 40 mL, 80 mL, and 130 mL scale
marks) with a stopcock. The flask is washed with sufficient amount of alcohol, which
is added to the funnel (total volume = 40 mL). The flask is washed with warm and
cold water, which is added to the funnel (total volume = 80 mL). Finally, the flask is
washed with a few mL of petroleumether, which is added to the funnel. Cool the
solution, 50 mL of petroleum ether is added to the funnel. The funnel is shaken
vigorously for 1 minute and then settled to separate two phases completely. The
supernatant ether layer is collected in a 500 mL separatory funnel with a stopcock.
The aqueous layer is again extracted 6 times with 50 mL each of ether. These
extracts are added to the first extract. The combined extracts are washed with 25
mL of 10% alcohol. This procedure is repeated until the aqueous layer doesn't get
colorized by phenolphthalein TS. When this is accomplished, aqueous phase is
discarded and the ether extract transfer into a pre-weighted beaker. With 10 mL of
ether, the funnel is washed, which is added to the beaker. Ether layer is evaporated
to dryness in a water bath, which is then dried at 100℃ for 30 minutes until the
weight becomes constant. Then the residue is cooled in a desiccator and weighted.
The residue dissolve in 50 mL of warm alcohol (neutralized with sodium hydroxide
using phenolphthalein as an indicator). The resulting solution is titrated with 0.02 N
sodium hydroxide solution until a pale red color persists. The amount of oleic acid is
obtained by multiplying the consumed amount of sodium hydroxide solution with
5.659 (mg). The exact amount of unsaponifiables is obtained by subtracting the
amount of fatty acid (as oleic acid) from the amount of residues. The content of
unsaponifiable matter is calculated by the following equation and it should not be
more than 0.2%.
Unsaponifiable
matter(%) =
content of residue(mg) - content as oleic acid(mg)
×
100
weight of the sample(g) 1,000

Water Content Water content of Capric acid proceed as directed under water
determination (Karl-Fisher Titration) and should not be more than 0.2%..
Residue on Ignition When Residue on Ignition analysis is done with accurately weighted
10 g of Capric acid, the amount of residue on Ignition should not be more than 0.1%.

187
 Caprylic Acid
Chemical Formula: C 8 H 16O 2
Molecular Weight: 144.21 INS No.: 570
Synonyms: Octanoic acid CAS No.: 124-07-2
Definition Caprylic Acid is a saturated fatty acid obtained from fat, whose main
ingredient is caprylic acid.
Composition Specifications of Caprylic Acid
Description Caprylic Acid is a colorless oil with slightly unpleasant odor.
Purity (1) Acid Value : When 0.5 g of Caprylic Acid is precisely weighted, and
proceeded as directed under Acid value in Fats Test, the Acid value should be
366~396.
(2) Solidification point : The solidification point of Caprylic Acid is 8～15 ℃
(3) Lead : When 5.0 g of Caprylic Acid is tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content
should not be more than 1.0 ppm.
(4) Arsenic : It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(5) Mercury : When Caprylic Acid is tested by Mercury Limit Test, its content should
not be more than 1.0ppm.
(6) Iodine Value : Approximately 12.5 g of Caprylic Acid is precisely weighted into a
500 mL Erlenmeyer flask with a stopper which contains 20 mL of 1 : 1 mixture of
glacial acetic acid : cyclohexane and 25 mL of Weiss solution. A stopper is placed on
the flask which is vigorously shaken and set aside for 1 hour in a dark place. 20 mL
of potassium iodide solution and 100 mL of water (previously boiled and cooled) are
added to the flask. The excess iodine is titrated with 0.1 N sodium thiosulfate
solution. 0.1 N sodium thiosulfate solution is added drop wise until yellow color
disappears. Starch solution is added and the titration is continued until the blue color
disappears completely. Near the end point, the flask is vigorously shaken with a
stopper. Separately, a blank test is carried out by the same procedure. Iodine value
is obtained by the following equation and it should not be more than 2.0.

Iodine Value= (B-S) × 1.269

weight of the sample(g)

B : Consumed amount of 0.1 N sodium thiosulfate solution in the blank test (mL)
S : Consumed amount of 0.1 N sodium thiosulfate solution in the test for sample (mL)
(7) Saponification Value : 2 g of Caprylic Acid isis precisely weighted into a 250 mL
flask, where 50 mL of 0.5 N alcoholic solution of potassium hydroxide is added.
After attaching a reflux condenser, the solution is saponified for 30～60 minutes.
188
 This solution is used as test solution, tested under Saponification value in Fats Test,
boiled (red color appears again) and titrated again until the red color disappears.
Saponification value should be 366∼398.
(8) Unsaponifiable Matter : 5 g of Caprylic Acid is precisely weighted into a 250 mL
flask, where 2 g of potassium hydroxide and 40 mL of alcohol are added and gently
refluxed for 1 hour with a reflux condenser. The solution transfer into a separatory
funnel (3.5 cm diameter 30 cm length with 40 mL, 80 mL, and 130 mL scale marks)
with a stopcock. The flask is washed with sufficient amount of alcohol, which is
added to the funnel (total volume = 40 mL). The flask is washed with warm and cold
water, which is added to the funnel (total volume = 80 mL). Finally, the flask is
washed with a few mL of petroleumether, which is added to the funnel. Cool the
solution, 50 mL of petroleum ether is added to the funnel. The funnel is shaken
vigorously for 1 minute and then settled to separate two phases completely. The
supernatant ether layer is collected in a 500 mL separatory funnel with a stopcock.
The aqueous layer is again extracted 6 times with 50 mL each of ether. These
extracts are added to the first extract. The combined extracts are washed with 25
mL of 10% alcohol. This procedure is repeated until the aqueous layer doesn't get
colorized by phenolphthalein TS. When this is accomplished, aqueous phase is
discarded and the ether extract transfer into a pre-weighted beaker. With 10 mL of
ether, the funnel is washed, which is added to the beaker. Ether layer is evaporated
to dryness in a water bath, which is then dried at 100℃ for 30 minutes until the
weight becomes constant. Then the residue is cooled in a desiccator and weighted.
The residue dissolve in 50 mL of warm alcohol (neutralized with sodium hydroxide
using phenolphthalein as an indicator). The resulting solution is titrated with 0.02 N
sodium hydroxide solution until a pale red color persists. The amount of oleic acid is
obtained by multiplying the consumed amount of sodium hydroxide solution with
5.659 (mg). The exact amount of unsaponifiables is obtained by subtracting the
amount of fatty acid (as oleic acid) from the amount of residues. The content of
unsaponifiable matter is calculated by the following equation and it should not be
more than 0.2%.
Unsaponifiable content of residue(mg) - content as oleic acid(mg) 100
matter(%) = weight of the sample(g)
×
1,000

Water Content Water content of Caprylic Acid proceed as directed under water
determination (Karl-Fisher Titration) and should not be more than 0.4%.
Residue on Ignition When Residue on Ignition analysis is done with accurately weighted
10 g of Caprylic Acid, the amount of residue should not be more than 0.1%.

189
 Caramel Color
INS No.:
150a(I), 150b(II),
150c(III), 150d(IV)
Synonyms: (I) Plain caramel; Caustic caramel
(II) Caustic sulfite caramel CAS No.: 8028-89-5
(III) Ammonia caramel
(IV) Sulfite ammonia caramel
Definition There are caramel I, II, III, and IV. Each definition is as follows.
Carmel I: Carmel I is obtained by heating food-grade carbohydrates, i.e. sugars,
hydrolyzed starch, and molasses. Or it can be obtained by treating with acids or alkalis
(free of ammonium compounds and sulfites) followed by heat treatment.
Carmel Ⅱ: Carmel Ⅱ is obtained by treating food-grade carbohydrates, i.e. sugars,
hydrolyzed starch, and molasses in the presence of sulfite compounds (ammonium
compound free) followed by heat treatment. Or it can be obtained by treating with
sulfites, acids, or alkalis (free of ammonium compounds) followed by heat treatment.
Carmel Ⅲ: Carmel Ⅲ is obtained by heating food-grade carbohydrates, i.e. sugars,
hydrolyzed starch, and molasses in the presence of ammonium compounds, with or
without acids or alkalis (free of sulfites).
Carmel Ⅳ: Carmel Ⅳ is obtained by heating food-grade carbohydrates, i.e. sugars,
hydrolyzed starch, and molasses in the presence of both ammonium compounds and
sulfite, with or without acids or alkalis (free of sulfites).
Compositional Specifications of Caramel Color
Description Caramel Color is black～dark brown liquid, solid or powder having an odor
of burnt sugar and refreshing bitter taste.
Identification (1) Solution of Caramel Color(1→100) is brown～blackish brown
(2) Appropriate amount of Caramel Color is weighted so that the measured absorption
in advance is about 0.5 and added 0.025N of hydrochloric acid to make to 100 mL. If
necessary, the solution is centrifuged and the supernatant is used as A solution. 0.2
g of diethylaminoethly cellulose anion exchange resin (DEAE cellulose) is dissolved in
20 mL of A solution. Then the solution is centrifuged and the supernatant is used as
B solution. Using 0.025N hydrochloric acid as a reference solution, absorbance AA
and AB of A and B solution are measured at the wavelength 560 nm with 1 cm path
length. Value of (AA-AB)/AA should be as below.
Caramel Color Ⅰ should be not more than 0.75, Caramel Color Ⅱ and Ⅳ should be
more than 0.75 and Caramel Color Ⅲ should be not more than 0.5.
(3) (In the case, this applies to Caramel Color Ⅰ and Caramel Color Ⅲ only.)
0.2~0.3 g of Caramel Color is weighted and added 0.025N of hydrochloric acid to
make to 100 mL. If necessary, the solution is centrifuged and the supernatant is used
as C solution. After taking 40 mL of C solution, add 2 g of phosphoryl cellulose and
mix it by shaking well. The solution is centrifuged and the supernatant is used as D
solution. Using 0.025N hydrochloric acid as a reference solution, absorbance AC and
AD of C and D solution are measured at the wavelength 560 nm with 1 cm path
190
 length. Value of (AC-AD)/AC should be as below.
Caramel Color Ⅰ should be not more than 0.5, Caramel Color Ⅲ should be more
than 0.5.
(4) (In the case, this applies to Caramel Color Ⅱ and Caramel Color Ⅳ only.)
0.1 g of Caramel Color is weighted and added water to make to 100 mL. If
necessary, the solution is centrifuged and the supernatant is used as A solution.
After taking 5 mL of A solution, add water to make to 100 mL and the solution is
used as B solution. When absorbance Aa of A solution is measured at the wavelength
560 nm with 1 cm path length, use water as a reference solution. Or when
absorbance AB of B solution is measured at the wavelength 280 nm with 1 cm path
length, use water as a reference solution. Value of AB× 20/AA should be as below.
Caramel Color Ⅱ should be more than 50, Caramel Color Ⅳ should be not more than
50.
Purity (1) Arsenic : It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(2) Lead : When 5.0 g of Caramel Color is tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content
should not be more than 2.0 ppm.
(3) Cadmium : When 5.0 g of Caramel Color is tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content
should not be more than 1.0 ppm.
(4) Mercury : When Caramel Color is tested according to Mercury Test, its content
should not be more than 0.1 ppm.
(5) Color Value : 100 mg of Caramel color is precisely weighed and dissolved in water
to make 100 mL, test solution. If necessary, the solution is centrifuged and the
supernatant is used. Absorbance A of this solution is measured with 1 cm cell at 610
nm, using water as a reference. Color value is obtained from the following equation
(converted into a solid matter). The contents should be 0.01～0.6.
A610 × 100
Color Value =
Content of solid matter (%)

※ Content of solid matter

① Liquid samples : 30 g of quartzsand and glass rod are placed in a weighing bottle,
which is dried at 60℃ and under vacuum of 50 mm/Hg until the weight becomes
constant. 1.5～2.0 g of the sample is precisely weighed into the weighing bottle,
mixed well, and dried to constant weight. Solid matter content is calculated by the
following equation. Quartz sand (purified quartzsand, particle size : No.40 ～ No.60
mesh) is decomposed by hydrochloric acid and washed with water until it doesn't
appear acidity. It is then dried and heat treated before use.
(weight of quartzsand and sample after drying(g) - weight of quartzsand(g)) × 100
weight of sample(g)

② Powdered or granular samples : It is carried out according to Test for Loss on

191
 Ignition. The sample is dried at 60℃ and under vacuum of 50 mm/Hg until the
weight becomes constant. Solid matter content(%) is calculated by the following
equation.
weight of porcelain crucible and sample after drying(g) - weight of porcelain
crucible(g)
weight of porcelain crucible and sample before drying(g) - weight of porcelain
× 100
crucible(g)
※ Calculation of impurities based on color value of 0.1
Using the content of each impurity (nitrogen as ammonia, 4-methyl imidazole, sulfur
dioxide, total nitrogen) obtained under the each Compositional Specifications, Cs
(conversion to solid matter) is obtained. On the basis of color value 0.1, the content of
each impurity is calculated by the following equation.
Cs × 0.1
Color Value
Content of each impurities × 100
Cs :
Content of solid matter(%)

(6) Total Nitrogen ： When Caramel color is tested under nitrogen determination method,
the amount should not be more than 3.3% (as based on product with color value of 0.1).
(7) Total Sulfur : 1～3g of oxide of magnesium or 6.4～19.2g of acetic acid magnesium,
1 g of sugar, and 50mL of nitric acid are taken to evaporation dish, 5~10 g of
Caramel Color is precisely weighed and concentrated in a water bath until it forms
paste. Put evaporation dish into maffle's furnace, gently heat (not more than 525℃)
until nitrogen dioxide smoke doesn't generate. After cooling evaporation dish, add
hydrochloric acid(1→2.5) to this, dissolve, add 5 mL more after neutralizing, filter,
and heated until it boils. 5 mL of 10% barium chloride solution is drop-wise added,
contrate until it becomes 100 mL, and allowed to stand for 1 night. Filter this with
filter paper(5C or its equivalent), put filter paper and residue into a previously
weighed crucible, heat-treat until the weight becomes constant, and weigh as barium
chloride. When measuring the content of total sulfur, the amount should not be more
than 3.5%. (based on the substance whose color value is 0.1). Separately, perform a
blank test.
Total Sulfur(%)= Content of barium chloride(g)×0.1374 ×100
Weight of Sample(g)
(8) Ammoniacal nitrogen (In the case, this applies to Caramel Color Ⅲ and Caramel
Color Ⅳ only.) : 25 mL of 0.1 N sulfuric acid is added to a 500 mL Erlenmeyer
flask. Kjeldahl distillation apparatus is set up so that the end of the condenser
delivery tube is immersed beneath the surface of the sulfuric acid solution in the
receiving flask. Separately, approximately 2 g of Caramel Color is precisely weighed
into a 800 mL Kjeldahl flask for decomposition, where 2 g of magnesium oxide, 200
mL of water, and several boiling chips. The content is dissolved by shaking and the
192
 apparatus is quickly connected. It is then boiled and 100 mL of distillate is collected.
The tip of the condenser is washed with water, which is added to the distillate. 4～5
drops of methyl red solution are added to the distillate, which is then titrated with
0.1 N sodium hydroxide, recording the volume, in mL, required as S. Separately, a
blank determination is conducted and recorded the volume, in mL, of 0.1 N sodium
hydroxide required to neutralized as B. Ammoniacal nitrogen is calculated by the
following equation and it should not be more than 0.6%. (for a product with color
value of 0.1).

Content of Nitrogen as ammonia(%) (B - S) × 0.0014 × 100

＝ weight of the sample(g)
(9) Sulfur Dioxide (In the case, this applies to Caramel Color Ⅱ and Caramel Color Ⅳ
only.): The following apparatus is used.

A：hose connection
B：separatory funnel(volume: 100 mL or more)
C：round bottom flask
D：gas inlet
E：Allihn reflux condenser(300)
F：Gas adapter(Bubbler)
G：flask(inside diameter 25, depth 150)

Put 400 mL of water into the flask(C), close the cork of separatory funnel(B), and put 90 mL
of a 4N hydrochloric acid solution. After supplying water to the condenser(E), pass the
nitrogen gas through the gas inlet(D) at 0.21 L/min speed, and add 30 mL of a 3% hydrogen
peroxide solution to the flask(G).
Remove the separatory funnel (B) after 15 minutes, take 25 g∼50 g of a sample and put it
into the grinder or homogenizer, and add 100 mL of a 5% ethanol solution to the flask(C),
then attach the funnel (B) and open the cork to inject it into a flask (C) until there is a
few mL left.
After heating for 1 hour and 45 minutes, remove the flask (G), wash the end (F) with a
small 3% hydrogen peroxide solution, and use a micro-burette to titrate with 0.01N sodium
hydroxide solution until the color becomes yellow and lasting for 20 seconds. Then, calculate
the amount of sulphur dioxide in accordance with the formula below.(however, less than 10
mg/kg shall be judged ‘non-detected’.)
When tested by above test method, the obtained amount of sulphur dioxide, following the
formula below using the consumption amount of sodium hydroxide obtained, shall not be
more than 0.2% (based on products of colour value 0.1).

193
 Sulfur dioxide(mg/kg) ＝ 320 × V × f
S
V: Consumption amout of 0.01N sodium hydroxide solution (mL)
f: Titer of 0.01N sodium hydroxide solution
S: Sample amount (g)
(0.01 N sodium hydroxide 1 mL=320 μg SO2)
Reagents and Test solution
Methyl red reagent: Dissolve 250 mg of methyl red in ethanol and make the entire amount 100 mL.
3% hydrogen peroxide solution: Add distilled water to 10 mL of 30% hydrogen peroxide
to make the etire amount 100 m, and add 3 drops of methyl-red solution, then add 0.01
N sodium hydroxide solution to make it pale yellow(make it right away and use it).
(10) 4-methylimidazol (In the case, this applies to Caramel Color Ⅲ and Caramel Color Ⅳ
only) : 10 g of 4-methylimidazol is taken in 150 mL polypropylene beaker. Add 5 mL of
3N NaOH solution and mix it well to make to be more than pH 12. 20 g of diatomaceous
earth(Johns-Manville Celite 545 or its equivalent) for chromatography is taken in a beaker
until it is a semi-dried mixture. Then insert it into a 2 cm inner diameter glass tube
(including a teflon cock) whose bottom is blocked with a glass fiber and fill the contents
to be about 25 cm high. While wash the beaker for previous sample, disembogue ethyl
acetate into a glass tube. When a solvent reaches the bottom of the glass tube, lock a
cock and allowed to stand for 5 minutes. Then open the cock and put ethyl acetate in the
glass tube and collect a effluent until the total volume of the effluent is about 200 mL.
Add 1 mL of the internal standard solution to the effluent, transfer it into flask and
concentrate ethyl acetate below 35 ℃. Dissolve residue in acetone and take precisely 5
mL of solution, used as test solution. Separately, 0.02 g, 0.06 g, 0.1 g, 0.2 g of
4-methylimidazol is precisely weighted and added precisely 20 mL of the internal standard
solution. Then add acetone so that the volume is to be 100 mL. used as separately
standard solution. However, the internal standard solution is used the solution which is
added with ethyl acetate to 0.05 g of 2-methylimidazol to make precisely to 50 mL. Take
5 ㎕ of test solution and standard solution respectively and do test gas chromatography
under below operation conditions. Then measure a peak area of respective standard
solution and prepare a calibration curve. The peak area of test solution obtained in the
calibration curve should not be more than 250 mg/kg (based on the product whose color
value is 0.1)
Operation conditions
Detector: (Hydrogen) Flame ionization detector(FID)
Column: HP-FFAP(25m × 320㎛ × 0.25㎛) or its equivalent
Column temperature: 180 ℃
Temperature at injection hole: 200℃
Carrier gas and flow rate: Nitrogen, 50 mL/min
194
 (11) 2-acetyl-4-tetrahydroxybutylimidazol (In the case, this applies to Caramel Color
Ⅲ): The following apparatus is used.
0.20~0.25 g of 2-acetyl-4-tetrahydroxybutylimidazol is precisely weighted and dissolved in 3
mL of water. Transfer this solution into top part C(connective part of column C and column F)

and then wash it with 100 mL of water. Continually, remove

column C and connect the seperatory funnel A to the lower part column F and then elute
column F with 0.5 N hydrochloric acid. The first effluent 10 mL is discarded and collect the
subsequent effluent to 35 mL and concentrate it at 40 ℃, 15 mmHG until it is dried condition.
The syrup type residue without carbonyl group is dissolved in 250 ㎕ of methanol. Add
2,4-dinitrophenylhydrazine hydrochloride solution, this reaction mixture is transferred into the
glass bottle with cap. Keep it at room temperature for 5 hours and it is used as a test
solution. After separately, stirring 0.5 g of 2,4-dinitrophenylhydrazine in 1 mL of
hydrochloric acid, add 10 mL of ethanol. And then heat it in water bath until it is solution
condition. Add 0.1 g of 2-acetyl-4-tetrahydroxybutylimidazol in hot solution. In a few minutes
crystallization of 2-acetyl-4-tetrahydroxybutylimidazol-2,4-dinitrophenylhydrazone (THI-DNPH)
begins, cool this until it is room temperature to make the crystallization completely. After
adding the small quantity of ethanol to make it to suspension, do filtering it to separate.
Refine the crystallized THI-DNPH with ethanol(added with 1 drop of hydrochloric acid per 5
mL of ethanol). After adding the small quantity of ethanol to make the refined crytal to
suspension, do filtering it to separate and then dry it in desiccator. Weigh precisely 0.01 g of
this item and add methanol without carbonyl group to make to 100 mL. Again this solution is
diluted by methanol without carbonyl group to make a standard solution(1 mL of each solution
includes 0, 20, 40, 60, 80, 100 ㎍). Test solution and standard solution respectively and do test
liquid chromatography under below operation conditions. Then measure a peak area of
respective standard solution and prepare a calibration curve. The peak area of test solution
obtained in the calibration curve should not be more than 25 mg/kg (based on the product
whose color value is 0.1). However, THI-DNPH 100 ㎍/mL corresponds to THI 47.58 ㎍/mL.
Operation condition
195
 Detector : UV 385 nm A : Separatory funnel (100mL)
Column : Capcell pak C18(5 B : Teflon cock ㎛, 4.6
mm × 250 mm) or its C : Glass column inner diameter 12.5mm, equiva
lent length 150mm (including the connective
part)
200mmor(including
innerthediameter
Column temperature : Room connective10mm,
part) length tempe
rature D : Weak acid cation exchange resin
Passing of solution : E : Cotton (particles) Metha
nol: 0.1 M of phosphoric acid F : Glass column inner diameter 10mm, length (50:50
) 175mm (including the connective part)
G : Strong
Flow rate : 1.0 mL/min (particles) acid cation exchange resin
Solution
2,4-dinitrophenylhydrazine hydrochloride solution : Put 10 mL of hydrochloric acid into
erlenmeyer flask(100mL) and then add 5 g of 2,4-dinitrophenylhydrazine. Shake silently
and mix it until free base(red color) is converted to hydrochloride(yellow color). Then
after adding 100 mL of ethanol, do heating and melting in water bath. Cool and crystallize
it at room temperature and filter it to remove hydrochloride and wash with ether. Dry it
at room temperature and keep it in desiccator. This is used as 2,4-dinitrophenylhydrazine
hydrochloride. Although hydrochloride can be slowly converted to free base, it can be
removed by washing with 1,2-dimethoxyethane. 0.5 g of 2,4-dinitrophenylhydrazine
hydrochloride is dissolved in 15 mL of 1,2-dimethoxyethane including 5% methanol. And
keep it in a refrigerator.
Methanol without carbonyl group : Add 5 g of Girard P reagent and 0.2 mL of
hydrochloric acid to 500 mL of methanol. After attaching a reflux condenser to it,
distill it for 2 hours. Keep this solution which is sealed in glass bottle.

196
 Carbon Dioxide
Chemical Formula: CO 2

Molecular Weight: 44.01 INS No.: 290

Synonyms: Carbonic acid gas; hydrocarbon
gas CAS No.: 124-38-9

Compositional Specifications of Carbon Dioxide

Content Chlorine dioxide should contain not less than 99.5% of carbon dioxide (CO2).
Description Chlorine dioxide is a colorless, tasteless and odorless gas or liquid, or white
solid(Dry ice).
Identification Chlorine dioxide is fire extinguishing. Pass Carbon Dioxide through calcium
hydroxide solution. A white precipitate is formed. Collect the precipitate, and add acetic
acid (1→4). It dissolves while effervescence occurs.
Purity The amount of Carbon Dioxide is calculated as the capacity at 20℃ and 760
mmHg atmospheric pressure.
(1) Free Acid : 1000 mL of Chlorine dioxide is passed 50 mL of freshly boiled and
cooled water into a 50 mL Nestler tube. Insert a gas induction tube (internal diameter
: about 1 mm) into the Nestler tube, keep it so that the end is 2 mm from the
bottom of the Nestler tube, pass 1,000 mL of Carbon Dioxide in 15 minutes. After
passing Chlorine dioxide, add this water to one of two comparison tubes which are
same in length. To another comparison tube, add 50 mL of freshly boiled and cooled
water and 1 mL of 0.01N hydrochloric acid. To both comparison tubes, add 0.1 mL
of methyl orange solution respectively, mix, penetrate, and compare. The color of the
solution where the sample is added should not be darker than the color of the tube
where 0.01N hydrochloric acid is added.
(2) Hydrogen Phosphide, Hydrogen Sulfide, and Reducing Organic Substances : Transfer
25 mL of silver nitrate-ammonia solution and 3 mL of ammonia solution into a
Nestler tube, and pass 1,000 mL of Carbon Dioxide. The color of this solution is not
darker than the color of mixture of 25 mL of silver nitrate-ammonia solution and 3
mL of ammonia solution.
(3) Carbon Monoxide : Both ends of a Carbon monoxide detection tube are cut off. One
end is connected to a container of Carbon Dioxide and the other end to an
appropriate flow meter. When 300 mL of Carbon Dioxide is passed trough at
approximately 100 mL/min, the color at the yellow part should not be deeper green
than that of a detection tube treated with 300 mL/min of air (Not more than 10 ppm).
Assay For the sampling, proceed in the same manner as directed under Purity. Transfer
potassium hydroxide solution (1→3) into a gas pipette with a suitable capacity.
Measure exactly no less than 100 mL of Carbon Dioxide in a gas pipette of not less
than 100 mL filled with sodium chloride solution (3→10) transfer it into the gas
pipette, and shake well. When the volume of the gas that has not been absorbed
becomes constant, measure the volume. Express the volume as V (mL), and calculate
197
 the content by the following formula:
Content of carbon dioxide(CO )(v/v%)
2
weight of the
sample(mL)—V(mL) × 100
＝
weight of the sample(mL)

198
 Carmine

INS No.: 120

Synonyms: Carminic acid; Cochineal carmine CAS No.: 1390-65-4
Definition Carmine is aluminum or calcium-aluminumLake, which is generated by a
reaction between aluminum hydroxide and Dactylopiuss (Carminic acid, C22H20O13).
Dactylopius s is a female coccus cacti which is parasitic on cactus (Nopalea
coccinellifera).
Compositional Specifications of Carmine
Content Carmine, when calculated on the dried basis, should be contain not less than
50.0% as carminic acid (C22H20O13 ＝ 492.39).
Description Carmine is red～dark red piece, powder, or paste with weak characteristic
scent.
Identification To 333 mg of Carmine, add 44 mL of water, 0.15 mL of sodium hydroxide
solution (1→10) and 0.2 mL of ammonia water, it is dissolved by heating. Add water to
make 500 mL. 10 mL of this solution is diluted to 250 mL with water. The resulting
solution shows maximum absorption at 520 nm and 550 nm. Absorption at 520 nm
should not be more than 0.3. Water is used as a reference.
Purity (1) Arsenic : It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(2) Lead : When 5.0 g of Carmine is tested by Atomic Absorption Spectrophotometry
or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content should not be more
than 5.0 ppm.
(3) Cadmium : When 5.0 g of Carmine is tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content
should not be more than 1.0 ppm.
(4) Mercury : When Carmine is tested by Mercury Limit Test, its content should not be
more than 1.0 ppm.
(5) Protein : When Carmine is proceeded as directed under nitrogen determination method,
its content should not be more than 25% (protein coefficients 6.25)
(6) Salmonella : When Carmine is tested by Salmonella bacillus test of General Test
Methods in food codes, it should be negative (-).
Ash 1 g of Carmine is tested by Ash Test Method, the amount of ash should not be
more than 12%.
Loss on Drying When 1 g of Carmine is dried for 3 hours at 135℃, the weight loss
should not be more than 20%.
Assay Precisely weighed 30 mg of Carmine is dissolved in 30 mL of boiling 2 N
hydrochloric acid. The solution is cooled and diluted to 1,000 mL with water (Test
Solution). Absorption (A) of the Test Solution is measured with 1cm path length at a
maximum absorption wavelength near 495 nm using 0.06 N hydrochloric acid as a
reference. The content is calculated using the following equation. However, the
199
weight of the sample is adjusted so that the absorption lies in a range of 0.2～0.25.
15A 100
Content of Carmine(%) = ×
Weight of the sample(mg) 0.262

0.262 : absorption of carminic acid solution (15 mg/l)

200
 Carnauba Wax
INS No.: 903
CAS No.: 8015-86-9
Definition Carnauba Wax is the refined wax obtained from leaves and shoots of the
Brazilian tropical palm tree (Copernicia cereferia Mart).
Compositional Specifications of Carnauba Wax
Description Carnauba Wax is pale yellow～light brown powder, thin platelet, or hard and
fragile lump.
Purity (1) Arsenic : It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(2) Lead : When 5.0 g of Carnauba Wax is tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content
should not be more than 2.0 ppm.
(3) Mercury : When 0.1 g of Carnauba Wax is tested by Mercury Test Method, its
content should not be more than 1.0ppm.
(4) Melting Point : Melting point should be in a temperature range of 80∼86℃.
(5) Acid value ： 3 g of Carnauba Wax is precisely weighed into a 200 mL Erlenmeyer
flask, where 25 mL of anhydrous alcohol (neutralized with potassium hydroxide
solution using phenolphthalein solution as an indicator) is added. It is then heated
until the sample dissolves, test solution. When the sample solution is tested Acid
Value as directed under Acid Value in Oils and Fats Method, Acid Value should be
2～7.
(6) Ester Value ： Ester value is obtained by Fatty Acid method, the value should be 70∼80.
(7) Saponification Value : 5 g of Carnauba Wax is precisely weighed into a flask,
where 50 mL of 0.5 N alcoholic solution of potassium hydroxide is added. After
attaching a reflux condenser, the solution is gently saponified for 30 minutes~ 1
hour. The solution is proceeded as directed under Saponification Value in Oils and
Fats Test, the value should be 78～95.
(8) Unsaponifiable matter : 5 g of Carnauba Wax is precisely weighed into a 250 mL
flask, where 2 g of potassium hydroxide and 40 mL of alcohol are added and boiled
gently under refluxed for 1 hour with a reflux condenser. The content of flask is
transferred to a glass-stoppered extraction cylinder (approximately 30 cm in length,
3.5 cm in diameter and graduated at 40, 80 and 130 mL). The flask is washed with
sufficient alcohol to achieve a volume of 40 mL in the cylinder, and completed the
transfer with warm and then cold water until the total volume is 80 mL. Finally, the
flask is washed with a few mL of petroleum ether, which the washings is added to
the cylinder. After cooling to room temperature, 50 mL of petroleum ether is added
to the funnel. The funnel is shaken vigorously for at least 1 minute, and allowed both
layers to become clear. The supernatant ether layer is collected in a 500 mL
separatory funnel with a stopcock. The aqueous layer is repeated extraction at least
6 times with 50 mL portions of petroleum ether. These extracts are added to the
201
 first extract. The combined extracts are washed with 25 mL portions of 10% alcohol
until the wash water is neutral to phenolphthalein, and discarded the washings. The
ether extract is transferred to a tared beaker. With 10 mL of ether, the funnel is
rinsed, which is added to the beaker. Ether layer is evaporated to dryness in a water
bath, which is then dried at 100℃ for 30 minutes to constant weight. Then the
residue is cooled in a desiccator and weighed. The residue is dissolved in 50 mL of
warm neutral alcohol and titrated with 0.02 N sodium hydroxide using
phenolphthalein as an indicator. Each mL of 0.02 N sodium hydroxide is equivalent to
5.659 mg of fatty acid, calculated as oleic acid. The corrected weight of
unsaponifiable matter is obtained by subtracting the calculated weight of fatty acid
from the weight of the residues. The content of Unsaponifiable matter is calculated
by the following equation and it should be 50∼55%.
Unsaponifiabl
e
Amount of residue(mg)-amount of oleic acid(mg) 100

matter (%)
= ×
Weight of sample (g) 1,000

Residue on Ignition When Residue on Ignition is done with 2 g of Carnauba Wax in a

quartz or platinum crucible, the residue should not be more than 0.25%.

202
 L-Carnitine

(CH3)3N+CH2CH(OH)CH2COO-
Chemical Formula: C7H15NO3
Molecular Weight: 161.20
Synonyms: 4-Amino-3-hydroxybutyric acid
trimethylbetaine; Levocarnitine CAS No.: 541-15-1

Compositional Specifications of L-Carnitine

Content L-Carnitine, when calculated on the dried basis(anhydrous), should contain
within a range of 97.0∼103.0% L-carnitine (C7H15NO3).
Description L-Carnitine is white or pale yellow crystalline powder with unique scent.
Identification Infrared absorption spectrum of L-Carnitine is obtained following the
procedure in B. (1) Potassium Bromide Disk Method in Infrared Spectrophotometry. It
should be show the same spectrum of the standard material.
Purity (1) Sodium : 2 g of L-Carnitine transfer into a 100 mL volumetric flask. After
adding 5 mL of nitric acid, it is well mixed and the volume is brought up to 100 mL
with water (Test Solution). Using atomic absorption spectrophotometer, the Test
Solution and sodium standard solution are analyzed to measure the sodium content in
the sample. The content should not be more than 0.1%.
(2) Specific Rotation : Approximately 10 g of L-Carnitine is precisely weighed, which is
dissolved in water so that the total volume to make 100 mL. Optical rotation of the
solution is measured. When it is translated to dried material, = -29∼-32°
(3) pH : When pH of L-Carnitine solution (1→20) is measured using glass electrode
method, it should be within a range of 5.5∼9.5.
(4) Chloride : 0.13 g of L-Carnitine is dissolved in 100 mL of water. To 20 mL of this
solution, 6 mL of diluted nitric acid is added (Test Solution). This test solution is
tested by Chloride Limit Test. This Test Solution is tested by Chloride Limit Test
and its content should not be more than the amount that corresponds to 0.3 mL of
0.01 N hydrochloric acid.
(5) Lead : When 5.0 g of L-Carnitine is tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content
should not be more than 1 ppm.
(6) Potassium : 2 g of L-Carnitine transfer into a 100 mL volumetric flask. After
adding 5 mL of nitric acid, it is well mixed and the volume is brought up to 100 mL
with water (Test Solution). Using atomic absorption spectrophotometer, the Test
Solution and sodium standard solution are analyzed to measure the potassium content
in the sample. The content should not be more than 0.2%.
Water Content Water content of L-Carnitine is determined by water determination
(Karl-Fisher Titration) and should not be more than 4.0%.
203
Residue on Ignition When thermogravimetric analysis is done with precisely weighed 2 g of
L-Carnitine, the amount of residue should not be more than 0.5%.
Assay Approximately 0.1 g of L-Carnitine is precisely weighed and dissolved in 3 mL of
formic acid and 50 mL of glacial acetic acid (for non aqueous titration). This solution
is titrated with 0.1 N perchloric acid solution (indicator : crystal violet·glacial acetic
acid solution). At the endpoint, the color of the solution turns from violet, to blue, and
finally to green. Separately, a blank experiment is done following the same procedure.
1 mL of 0.1 N perchloric acid solution = 16.12 mg C7H15NO3

204
 Carotene
INS No.: 160a(ii), 160a(iv)
Synonyms: Carotenes, mixed CAS No.: 7235-40-7

Definition Carotene is a collective name of sweet potato carotene, dunaliella carotene,

carrot carotene, and palm oil carotene. Its major component is carotene. Sweet potato
carotene is obtained by extracting tuberous roots of sweet potato (Ipomoea batatas
POIR.) of convolvulaceae with organic solvents such as acetone, isopropyl alcohol,
methyl alcohol, and hexane. Dunaliella carotene is obtained by extracting Dunaliella
salina and Dunaliella bardawil with carbon dioxide, fats and related substances, or
organic solvents such as acetone, isopropyl alcohol, methyl alcohol, and hexane. Carrot
carotene is obtained by extracting dried roots of carrot (Daucus carota L., etc) of
umbelliferae with fats and related substances, or organic solvents such as acetone,
isopropyl alcohol, methyl alcohol, and hexane. Palm oil carotene is obtained by
adsorptive separation of elaeis (Elaeis guineensis JACQ.) palm oil of palmae or
extracting the separated unsaponifiable matter with organic solvents such as acetone,
isopropyl alcohol, methyl alcohol, and hexane. Dilutant, stabilizer, or solvent can be
added for the purpose of color value adjustment and quality preservation.
Compositional Specifications of Carotene
Content Color value of Carotene should be more than the indicated value.
Description Carotene is reddish brown～venetian red liquid, paste, powder, or paste with
a slight characteristic scent.
Identification (1) The solution(1→1,000) of Carotene in the mixture(1:1) of acetone and
cyclohexane has orange color and The solution that is added to 1,000 mL of
cyclohexane with 0.5 mL of the solution(1→250) of Carotene in the mixture(1:1) of
acetone and cyclohexane has a maximum absorption bands near 450 nm and 480 nm.
(2) When 1 mL of antimony trichloride solution is added to a solution of Carotene in
cyclohexane (1→100), it becomes bluish green.
Purity (1) Arsenic : It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(2) Lead : When 5.0 g of Carotene is tested by Atomic Absorption Spectrophotometry
or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content should not be more
than 2.0 ppm.
(3) Residual Solvents : When Carotene is tested by Purity (4) for Paprika Extract
Pigments, the content of residual solvents should be,
Acetone
Isopropyl alcohol Not
Not more than 30ppm
Methyl alcohol Not more than 50ppm
more than 50ppm
Hexane Not more than 25ppm
Assay (Color Value) Appropriate amount of Carotene is precisely weighted so that the
absorption is within 0.3～0.7 and dissolved in 10 mL of 1:1 mixture with acetone and
cyclohexane, where cyclohexane is added to bring the total volume to 100 mL. 5 mL
205
of this solution is diluted to 100 mL with cyclohexane. 10 mL of this solution is further
diluted to 100 mL with cyclohexane (Test Solution). If necessary, the solution is
centrifuged and the supernatant is used. Using cyclohexane as a reference solution,
absorption A is measured at the maximum absorption near 455 nm with 1cm path
length. Color value is obtained using the following equation (if it is water soluble,
water is used).
Color Value ( ) ＝ A × 2,000
Weight of the sample(g)

206
 β -Carotene

Chemical Formula: C40H56

Molecular Weight: 536.89 INS No.: 160a(i), 160a(iii)
Synonyms: CI food orange 5 CAS No.: 7235-40-7

Definition β-carotene is manufactured by the chemical synthetics, or solvent extracted

followed by ethanol, Isopropyl alcohol or ethyl acetate of the fermentation product of
Blakeslea trispora, and crystallized, which has the trans form of β-carotene as main
component.
Compositional Specifications of β-Carotene
Content When β-carotene is dried and weighed, it should contain not less than 96.0% of
β-carotene (C40H56).
Description β-carotene occurs as red-purple to dark red crystals or crystalline powder,
having a slight, characteristic odor and taste.
Identification (1) β-carotene in cyclohexane solution (1→400) does not have an optical
rotation.
(2) To 0.5 mL of a solution of β-Carotene in chloroform (1→250), add 1,000 mL of
cyclohexane. The solution exhibits absorbance maxima at wavelengths of 455～457
nm and 482～484 nm.
(3) Dissolve 10 mg of β-Carotene in 10 mL of chloroform, which is orange in color,
add 1 mL of antimony trichloride solution. A green-blue color develops.
Purity (1) Melting Point : Melting point in sealed tube under reduced pressure should be
within a range of l76～l83℃ (decomposition).
(2) Clarity and Color of Solution : When 0.1 mL of β-carotene is dissolved in 10 mL
of chloroform, the solution should be clear.
(3) Arsenic : It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(4) Lead : When 5.0 g of β-carotene is tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content
should not be more than 2.0 ppm.
(5) Absorption Ratio : Accurately weigh about 40 mg of β-carotene previously dried,
dissolve in 10 mL of chloroform, and add cyclohexane to make exactly 100 mL.
Measure exactly 5 mL of this solution, add cyclohexane to make exactly 100 mL, and
use this solution as the test solution. Measure exactly 10 mL of the test solution, add
cyclohexane to make exactly 100 mL, and use this solution as the diluted test
solution. Measure absorbances A1 and A2 of the test solution at wavelengths of 340
nm and 362 nm, respectively, and absorbances A3, A4, and A5 of the diluted test
solution wavelengths of 434 nm, 455 nm, and 483 nm, respectively. A2/ A1 is not
207
 less than 1.00, (A4×10)/A1 is not less than 15.0, A4/ A3 is 1.30～1.60, and A4/ A5
is 1.05～1.25.
(6) Residual solvent : When β-carotene is tested by Purity (5) for 「Paprika Extract
Pigments」, residual ethyl acetate should not be more than 30 ppm, isopropyl alcohol
should not be more than 50 ppm(Apply on the case manufactured by Blakeslea
trispora only).
Loss on Drying When β-carotene is dried for 4 hours in a vacuum desiccator (silica
gel), the weight loss should not be more than 1%.
Residue on Ignition When thermogravimetric analysis is done with 2 g of β-carotene,
the residues should not be more than 0.1%.
Assay Measure absorbance A at the absorption maximum at a wavelength of 455～457
nm for the diluted test solution used in Purity (5), and calculate the content of β
-carotene by the following formula.
A 200,000
Content of β-carotene(%) = × Weight of the × 100
2,500
sample(mg)
Storage Standards of β-carotene
Place in a light-resistant, hermetic container, replace the air with inert gas, and store.

208
 Carrageenan
INS No.: 407, 407a
Synonyms: Purified carrageenan; Refined
carrageenan; Semi-refined carrageenan; CAS No.: 9000-07-1
Processed eucheuma seaweed(PES)

Definition Carrageenan is obtained by extration and purification from seaweed of

Chondrus genus, Eucheuma genus, Gigartina genus, Hypnea genus, and Iridaea genus
into water or aqueous dilute alkali. The prevalent polysaccharides in carrageena are
designated as ι(Iota)-Carrageenan, κ(Kappa)-Carrageenan, and λ(Lambda)-Carrageenan.
Compositional Specifications of Carrageenan
Description Carrageenan is white～pale brown powder or granula. It is either odorless or
has a slight particular odor.
Identification (1) 4 g of Carrageenan is add to 200 mL of water, and heated the
mixture in a water bath at 80℃, with constant stirring, until dissolved. Any water
lost by evaporation is replaced, and allowed the solution to cool to room
temperature. It becomes viscous and may form gel.
(2) 0.2 g of potassium chloride is added to 50 mL of the solution or gel obtained in
(1), then , mixed well, and cooled. A compliant (elastic) gel indicates a carrageenan
of predominantly ι-carrageenan, a short-textured(brittle) gel indicates a
predominantly κ-carrageenan. If the solution doesn't gel, the carrageenan is of a
predominantly λ-carrageenan.
(3) 20 mL of water is added to 0.1 g of Carrageenan, where 3 mL of barium chloride
solution (3→25) and 5 mL of diluted hydrochloric acid (3→25) are added and mixed
well. If necessary, precipitates are separated. When the separated solution is boiled
for 5 minutes, while crystalline precipitates are appeared.
Purity (1) Arsenic : It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(2) Lead : When 5.0 g of Carrageenan is tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content
should not be more than 5.0 ppm.
(3) Acid Insoluble Ash : 3 g of Carrageenan is tested by the test method for Ash.
When it is converted to a dried basis, the content of ash should not be more than 1.0%.
(4) Sulfate : Carrageenan is dried for 4 hours at 105℃. Approximately 1 g of the dried
basis is precisely weighed into a 100 mL round bottom flask, where 50 mL of dilute
hydrochloric acid (1→10), a reflux condenser is fitted and reflux for 1 hour. 25 mL
of 10 %(by volume) hydrogen peroxide is added to the flask, and resumed refluxing
for about 5 hours. If necessary, the solution is filtered. The filtrate is transferred
into a 500 mL beaker. While boiling, 10 mL of barium chloride solution (3→25) is
slowly added to the beaker, which is heated for 2 hours in a water bath. After
cooling, it is filtered through a quantitative filter paper (5 type C). The residue is
washed with warm water until the filtrate is free from chloride. The filter paper and
209
 residue is dried in a drying oven. It is gently burned and heat at 800℃ ash paper in
a tared porcelain crucible until the ash is white. The remaining residue is weighed as
barium sulfate. The weight of sulfate (SO4) is calculated by the following equation. It
should be 15.0～40.0%

Content of Sulfate(SO )(%)

4
Weight of barium sulfate(g) ×
0.4116 × 100
＝
weight of the sample(g)
(5) Viscosity (viscosity of 1.5% solution) : 7.5 g of Carrageenan is weighed into a
tared 600 mL tall-form beaker, where 450 mL of water is added. It is then dispersed
for 10～20 minutes by agitation. Water is added to bring the final weight to 500 g,
and heated in a water bath with continuous agitation, until a temperature of 80℃ is
reached. Water is added to adjust for loss by evaporation. It is then cooled to 76～
77℃, and heated in a constant temperature bath at 75℃. It is then tested using a
viscometer (Brookfield LVE, LTV type or its equivalent) with a No.1 spindle and
capable of rotating at 30rpm. After six complete revolutions of the viscometer, the
viscometer reading on 0～100 scale is taken. When the value is multiplied by 2, it
should not be more than 5cps.
(6) Residual solvent : 2 g of Carrageenan is precisely weighed into a 300 mL round
bottom distilling flask, 200 mL of water is added, boiling chips and 1 mL of silicone
resin are added and mixed well. A fractionating column is connected to flask, 4 mL
of internal standard solution is precisely weighed and added to it. While adjusting the
heat so that the foam does not enter the column, distill the solution at the rate of
2~3 mL per 1 minute until the milky liquid becomes about 90 mL, and water is
added to make 100 mL, test solution. However, tert-butyl alcohol (1→1,000) is used
as internal standard solution. Separately, 0.5 g each of methyl alcohol and isopropyl
alcohol is precisely measured and water is added to 500 mL. Again 2 mL of this
solution and 4 mL of internal standard solution is weighed, water is added to make
100 mL, mixed standard solution. 2μl of test solution and mixed standard solution is
taken respectively, and injected to gas chromatograph with the following operation
condition. Then, Ratio of methyl alcohol and isopropyl alcohol peak area against
tert-butyl alcohol peak area, QT1, QT2 and QS1, QS2, is measured respectively, and
measure the content of methyl alcohol and isopropyl alcohol under following equation,
it should be not more than 0.1% as individual or sum if used together.
Content of Weight of methyl QT1 × 2×100 ×100
alcohol(g) ×
methyl alcohol(%) = Weight of sample(g) QS1 500×100
Contentalcohol(%)
of Weight of isopropyl QT2 2×100
Isopropyl alcohol(g) × × ×100
= Weight of sample(g) QS2 500×100
QT1 : Ratio of methyl alcohol peak area against tert-butyl alcohol peak area in Test
Solution
QT2 : Ratio of isopropyl alcohol peak area against tert-butyl alcohol peak area in Test
210
 Solution
QS1 : Ratio of methyl alcohol peak area against tert-butyl alcohol peak area in mixed
standard Solution
QS2 : Ratio of isopropyl alcohol peak area against tert-butyl alcohol peak area in mixed
standard Solution
Column : PLOT Q or its equivalent
Detector : Hydrogen Flame Ionization Detector (FID)
Injection Port Temperature : 200℃
Column Temperature : 120℃
Detector Temperature : 300℃
Carrier gas : Nitrogen or Helium
(7) Total Viable Aerobic Count : When Carrageenan is tested by Microbe Test Methods
for Total Viable Aerobic Count (Number of General Germs) in General Test Method
in 「Standards and Specifications for Foods」 it should not be more than 5,000
colonies per 1 g
(8) E. Coli : When 25 g of Carrageenan is tested by Microbe Test Methods for E. Coli
in General Test Method 「Standards and Specifications for Foods」 it should be
negative (-).
(9) Salmonella : When Carrageenan is tested by Microbe Test Methods for Salmonella
in General Test Method 「Standards and Specifications for Foods」 it should be
negative (-).
Ash 2 g of Carrageenan is precisely weighed and tested by test methods for Ash. When
is converted to a dried material, the content of the ash should be not less than 15.0
and not more than 40.0%.
Loss on Drying When 3 g of Carrageenan is dried for 4 hours at 105℃, the weight loss
should not be more than 12%.

211
 Carthamus Red
Definition This is a pigment obtained by removing yellow pigment from ornamental
flower of carthamus (Carthamus tinctorius L.Linné) of compositae followed by extracting
with weakly alkaline water. Its major pigment component is carthamine. Dilutant,
stabilizer, or solvent can be added for the purpose of color value adjustment and
quality preservation.
Compositional Specifications of Carthamus Red
Content Color value( ) of Carthamus Red should not be less than the indicated value.
Description Carthamus Red is dark red～dark violet crystallite or powder with a slight
characteristic scent.
Identification (1) A solution of Carthamus Red in dimethylformamide shows red color and
a maximum absorption band near 530 nm.
(2) When a mixture of 5 mg of Carthamus Red in 50 mL of water is alkalinized with
sodium hydroxide solution (1→25), it shows dark yellow color. When it is acidified
with hydrochloric acid, it changes to red.
Purity (1) Arsenic : It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(2) Lead : When 5.0 g of Carthamus Red is tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content
should not be more than 5.0 ppm.
Assay (Color Value)
Appropriate amount of Carthamus Red is precisely weighted so that the absorption is
within 0.3～0.7. Pigment is eluted with 100 mL of dimethylformamide, which is then
filtered. The residue on the filter paper is washed with dimethylformamide, which is
added to the filtrate. The filtrate is diluted to 200 mL with dimethylformamide, and use
it as Test Solution. Using dimethylformamide as a reference solution, absorption A of
Test Solution is measured at the maximum absorption near 530 nm with 1cm path
length. Color value is calculated from the following equation
Color Value( ) ＝ weight ofA the × 20
sample(g)

212
 Carthamus Yellow
Synonyms: Safflower yellow
Definition This is a pigment obtained by extracting ornamental flower of carthamus
(Carthamus tinctorius Linné) of compositae with water. Its major pigment component is
safflower yellow. Dilutant, stabilizer, or solvent can be added for the purpose of color
value adjustment and quality preservation.
Compositional Specifications of Carthamus Yellow
Content Color value ( ) of Carthamus Yellow should not be less than the indicated
value.
Description Carthamus Yellow is yellow～dark brown liquid, solid, powder, or paste with
a slight characteristic scent.
Identification (1) Test Solution obtained in Color Value section shows yellow color and a
maximum absorption band near 403 nm.
(2) 3 mL of Fehling solution is added to an aqueous solution containing 0.1 g of
Carthamus Yellow. When the solution is heated for 10 minutes in a water bath, red
precipitates are formed.
Purity (1) Arsenic : It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(2) Lead : When 5.0 g of Carthamus Yellow is tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content
should not be more than 5.0 ppm.
Assay (Color Value) Appropriate amount of Carthamus Yellow is precisely weighted so
that the absorption is within 0.3～0.7 and dissolve the sample in acetic acid sodium
acetate buffer solution with pH 5.28 (total volume 100 mL). 1mL of this solution is
diluted to 100 mL with acetic acid sodium acetate buffer solution with pH 5.28 (Test
Solution). If necessary, the solution is centrifuged and the supernatant is used. Using
acetic acid sodium acetate buffer solution with pH 5.28 as a reference solution,
absorption A is measured at the maximum absorption near 403 nm with 1cm path
length. Color value is obtained using the following equation.
A × 1,000
Color Value ( ) ＝
weight of the sample(g)

∘Citric acid·dibasic sodium phosphate buffer solution (pH 5.28)

Solution 1 ： Dissolve 21.01 g of citric acid C6H8O7․H2O) into 1ℓ of 0.1 M citric acid
solution
Solution 2 ： Dissolve 71.63 g of dibasic sodium phosphate (Na2HPO4․2H2O) into 1ℓ of
0.2 M dibasic sodium phosphate solution
Solution 1 and Solution 2 are mixed well (97:103) and its pH is adjusted to 5.28.

213
 Casein
Definition There are casein and rennet casein. Respective definition is as follows.
Casein : It is obtained by treating a protein from milk or defatted milk with acid.
Rennet casein : It is obtained by treating a protein from milk or defatted milk with
rennet.
1. Casein
Compositional Specifications of Casein
Content Casein, when dried, contains 13.8∼16.0% of nitrogen (N ＝ 14.01).
Description Casein is white～pale yellowish white powder, granules, or flakes. It is
odorless and tasteless, or has a slight characteristic odor and taste.
Identification (1) 0.1 g of Casein is dissolved in 10 mL of sodium hydroxide solution,
and added acetic acid to make weak acidity, white cotton-like precipitate is formed.
(2) 0.1 g of Casein is dissolved in 10 mL of sodium hydroxide solution, added 1 drop
of cupric sulfate solution, and shake. A blue precipitates is formed, and the colour of
the solution is purple.
(3) When 0.1 g of Casein is ignited, fume and a characteristic odor is developed. After
the fume are no longer evolved, stop heating, and cooled. To the black residue,
added 5 mL of dilute nitric acid, dissolved while warming, and filtered. To the
filtrate, added 1 mL of ammonium molybdate TS, and warmed. A yellow precipitate is
formed.
Purity
(1) Clarity of Solution : Casein is dried in a vacuum desiccator for 4 hours and made
into a fine powder. 0.1 g of dried fine powder is mixed by shaking in 30 mL of
water, and allowed to stand for about 10 minutes, it is dissolved by adding 2 mL of
0.1 N sodium hydroxide solution, dissolved while warming by shaking at 60℃. After
cooling, water is added to bring the total volume to 100 mL. The resulting solution
should be colorless and slightly turbid.
(2) pH : 1 g of Casein is mixed in 50 mL of water by shaking for 10 minutes. It is
then filtered. pH of the filtrate measured by using a glass electrode should be 3.7∼6.5.
(3) Water Soluble Substances : 1.5 g of Casein is add 30 mL of water and shaking for
10 minutes, which is then filtered. 20 mL of filtrate is evaporated to dryness and the
residue is dried at 100℃ to constant weight. Its content should not be more than 10 mg.
(4) Fat : About 2.5 g of Casein is precisely weighed, where 15 mL of diluted
hydrochloric acid (27→40) is added. It is then dissolved while gently heating directly,
and heated in a water bath for 20 minutes. After cooling, 10 mL of alcohol is added,
which is then transferred to a Rohrig tube, added 25 mL of ether, which is
vigorously shaken for 1 minute. 25 mL of petroleum ether is added, which is then
shaken vigorously for 30 seconds and allowed to stand. The supernatant taken from
side branch tube (A) is filtered through a filter paper. The filtrate is collected into a
flask that is previously weighed. It is repeated the extraction above two times, using
15 mL ether and 15 mL petroleum ether each time, transferred the upper-layer
214
 solution to the flask, and evaporated the ether and petroleum ether on a water bath.
The residue is dried for 4 hours 98∼100℃. The content of fat should not be more
than 1.5%.

Leriche tube (standard : mm)

(5) Lead : When 5.0 g of Casein is tested by Atomic Absorption Spectrophotometry or
Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content should not be more
than 1.0 ppm.
Loss on Drying When Casein is dried for 3 hours at 100℃, the weight loss should not
be more than 12%.
Residue on Ignition 1 g of Casein, previouly dried, is accurately weighed. When Residue
on Ignition is done with it, the amount of residue should not be more than 2.5%.
Assay About 0.15 g of Casein, previously dried, is precisely weighed and assay by nitrogen
determination method.
0.1 N sulfuric acid 1 mL ＝ 1.401 mg N
2. Rennet Casein
Compositional Specifications of Casein
Content Rennet Casein, when dried, contains 13.5 % of nitrogen (N ＝ 14.01).
Description Rennet Casein is white～pale yellowish white powder, flakes, or granules. It
is odorless and tasteless, or has a slight characteristic odor and taste.
Identification (1) 0.2 g of Rennet Casein is dissolved in 10 mL of sodium hydroxide
solution(1→100)(if necessary, heating), and added 4 mL of diluted acetic acid(1→11).
A white cotton-like precipitate is formed.
(2) 0.2 g of Rennet Casein is dissolved in 10 mL of sodium hydroxide solution(1→
100)(if necessary, heating), added 1 drop of copric sulfate solution, and shake. A blue
precipitates is formed, and the colour of the solution is purple.
(3) When 0.1 g of Rennet Casein is ignited at 450~550℃, fume and a characteristic
odor is developed. After the fume are no longer evolved, stop heating, and cooled.
To the black residue, added 5 mL of dilute nitric acid, dissolved while warming, and
filtered. To the filtrate, added 1 mL of ammonium molybdate TS, and warmed. A
yellow precipitate is formed.
Purity (1) pH : 1 g of Rennet Casein is mixed in 50 mL of water by shaking for 10
minutes. It is then filtered. pH of the filtrate measured by using a glass electrode
should be 6.0∼7.8.
215
 (2) Water Soluble Substances : Rennet Casein is tested as directed under in Purity (3)
for Casein, its content should not be more than 10 mg.
(3) Fat : About 2.5 g of Rennet Casein, previously dried at 100℃ for 30 minutes and
cooled, is precisely weighed. It is tested as directed under in Purity (4) for Casein,
its content should not be more than 1.5%.
(4) Lead : When 5.0 g of Rennet Casein is tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content
should not be more than 1.0 ppm.
Loss on Drying When Rennet Casein is dried for 5 hours at 105℃, the weight loss
should not be more than 13.0%.
Assay About 0.15 g of Casein, previously dried, is precisely weighed and proceed as
directed in the Kjeldahl Method under Nitrogen Determination.
0.1 N sulfuric acid 1 mL ＝ 1.401 mg N

216
 Castor oil
INS No.: 1503
Synonyms: Ricinus oil CAS No.: 8001-79-4

Definition Castor oil is nonvolatile oil obtained from seeds of castor-oil plant (Ricinus
communis L.) of euphorbiaceae. It is a triglyceride mainly consisting ricinoleic acid.
Compositional Specifications of Castor oil
Description Castor oil is almost colorless or pale yellow viscous liquid.
Identification (1) Castor oil is soluble in 95% alcohol, miscible in anhydrous alcohol, and
slightly soluble in petroleum ether.
(2) Specific gravity should be 0.952∼0.966.
(3) Refractive Index should be 1.477∼1.481.
Purity (1) Arsenic : It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(2) Lead : When 5.0 g of Castor oil is tested by Atomic Absorption Spectrophotometry
or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content should not be more
than 2.0 ppm.
(3) Acid Value : 5.0 g of Castor oil is precisely weighted and dissolved in
approximately 50 mL of alcohol (neutralized with 0.1 N potassium hydroxide solution
using phenolphthalein TS)or a mixture of alcohol and ether (1 : 1) (heated if
necessary). When this test solution is proceeded as directed under Acid value in
Fats Test, the value should not be more than 2.
(4) Hydroxyl Value : 1.5 g of Castor oil is precisely weighted into a 250 mL flask and
dissolved by adding 5 mL mixture of pyridine·anhydrous acetic acid (3:1 mixture of
freshly distilled pyridine and anhydrous acetic acid). Separately, 5 mL mixture of
pyridine·anhydrous acetic acid is added to a 250 mL flask as a blank test. A reflux
condenser is attached to each flask. It is then heated for 1 hour in a water bath. 10
mL of water is added through the condenser and it is heated again for 10 minutes.
After cooling to room temperature, 15 mL of n-butyl alcohol (neutralized with 0.5 N
alcoholic potassium hydroxide solution using phenolphthalein TS) is added through the
condenser, the condenser is removed, and inner wall of each flask is washed with 10
mL of n-butyl alcohol. 1 mL of phenolphthalein TS is added to each flask and each
solution is titrated with 0.5 N alcoholic solution of potassium hydroxide until it
becomes pale red. The consumed amount (mL) of alcoholic solution is S and B for
sample and blank test, respectively. Separately, free acid is corrected by the
following procedure. 10 g of sample is precisely weighted and dissolved in 10 mL of
pyridine (neutralized using phenolphthalein TS and freshly distilled). 1 mL of
phenolphthalein TS is added to this solution, which is titrated with 0.5 N alcoholic
solution of potassium hydroxide until it becomes red. The consumed amount (mL) of
alcoholic solution is A. Hydroxyl value, that is calculated by the following equation,
should be 160～168.
217
 Hydroxyl Value = [ B + WA C
- S ] ×
28.05
W
W : Weight of sample for acetylation (g)
C : Weight of sample for free acid measurement (g)
(5) Saponification Value : 3 g is precisely weighted into a 250 mL flask. After adding
50 mL of 0.5 N alcoholic solution of potassium hydroxide, a reflux condenser is
attached and quietly saponified for 30 minutes～1 hour. This solution is used as test
solution, tested under Saponification value in Fats Test, boiled (red color appears
again) and titrated again until the red color disappears. Saponification value should be
176~185.
(6) Iodine Value : Approximately 300 mg of Castor oil is precisely weighted into a 500
mL Erlenmeyer flask with a stopper which contains 20 mL of 1 : 1 mixture of glacial
acetic acid : cyclohexane and 25 mL of Weiss solution. A stopper is placed on the
flask which is vigorously shaken and set aside for 1 hour in a dark place. 20 mL of
potassium iodide solution and 100 mL of water(previously boiled and cooled) are added
to the flask. The excess iodine is titrated with 0.1 N sodium thiosulfate solution.
Sodium thiosulfate solution is added drop wise until yellow color disappears. Starch
solution is added and the titration is continued until the blue color disappears
completely. Near the end point, the flask is vigorously shaken with a stopper.
Separately, a blank test is carried out by the same procedure. Iodine value is obtained
by the following equation and it should be 83～88.
Iodine Value
=
(B-S) × 1.269
weight of the sample(g)
B : Consumed amount of 0.1 N sodium thiosulfate solution in the blank test (mL)
S : Consumed amount of 0.1 N sodium thiosulfate solution in the test for sample (mL)

218
 Catalase
Definition Catalase is an enzyme obtained from cultures of Aspergillus niger and its
variety and Micrococcus lysodeikticus, or liver of cow. Dilutant or stabilizer can be
added for the purpose of activity adjustment and quality preservation.
Compositional Specifications of Catalase
Description Catalase is white～dark brown powder, granule, paste or colorless～dark
brown liquid.
Identification When Catalase is proceeded as directed under Activity Test, it should have
the activity as Catalase.
Purity (1) Arsenic : It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(2) Lead : When 5.0 g of Catalase is tested by Atomic Absorption Spectrophotometry
or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content should not be more
than 5.0 ppm.
(3) Coliform Group ： Catalase is tested by Microbe Test Methods for Coliform Group
in General Test Methods in Food Code. It should not be more than 30 cfu per 1 g of
this product.
(4) Salmonella ： Catalase is tested by Microbe Test Methods for Salmonella in General
Test Methods in Food Code. It should be negative (-).
(5) E. Coli : When Catalase is tested by Microbe Test Methods for E. Coli in General
Test Method 「Standards and Specifications for Foods」 it should be negative (-).
Activity Test (Activity) Analysis Principle : This test is to measure the activity of
catalase declared as Baker units. Activity test is a type of comsumption based on
decomposition of hydrogen peroxide by catalase and simultaneously on decomposition
of catalase by peroxide under the established conditions.
Test Procedure : Undiluted enzyme solution (or diluted enzyme solution) is transferred
into a 200 mL beaker so that 1.0 mL or less of this solution contains about 3.5 Baker
units, where 100 mL of substrate solution (maintained at 25℃) is quickly added and
stirred for 5～10 seconds. The beaker is covered and kept at 25 ± 1℃ until the
reaction completes. After stirring vigorously for 5 seconds, 4 mL of the solution is
precisely taken and transferred into a 50 mL Erlenmeyer flask, where 5 mL of 2 N
sulfuric acid is added and mixed. To this solution, 5 mL of freshly prepared 40%
potassium iodide solution and 1 drop of 1% ammonium molybdate solution are added.
While shaking continuously, the solution is titrated with 0.25 N sodium thiosulfate
solution (consumed amount = S). Separately, a blank test is carried out with 4 mL of
substrate solution (consumed amount of 0.25 N sodium thiosulfate solution = B). (Note :
When the sample is derived from cow liver, the reaction is to complete in 30 minutes.
When the sample is derived from Aspergillus and others, the reaction is to complete in
1 hour. If the origin is unknown, titration is carried out after 30 minutes at an interval
of 10 minutes. If the titration values are same for the two consecutive titration, the
reaction is complete.) Enzyme activity is calculated from the following equation.
219
 Baker units/g or mL ＝ 0.4(B - S) × (1/C)
C : Dilution factor for mL of enzyme stock solution added in 100 mL of substrate
solution or 1 mL of diluted enzyme solution
Definition of Activity : 1 Baker unit corresponds to the amount of catalase that
decomposes 266 mg of hydrogen peroxide under the test conditions above.
Solutions
∘0.25 N Sodium Thiosulfate Solution : 62.5 g of sodium thiosulfate (Na2S2O3․5H2O) is
dissolved in 750 mL of water (previously boiled and cooled), where 3.0
mL of 0.2N sodium hydroxide solution is added as a stabilizer and water
is added to bring the total volume to 1,000 mL. It is then standardized
by 0.1 N sodium thiosulfate solution. If possible, the normality is
adjusted to 0.250.
∘Substrate Solution : 25.0 g of sodium phosphate, dibasic (anhydrous) or 70.8 g of
sodium phosphate, dibasic (12 hydrates) is added in 1,500 mL of
water. pH of the solution is adjusted to 7.0 ± 0.1 with 85%
phosphoric acid. 100 mL of 30% hydrogen peroxide is carefully
added to the solution and the total volume is brought up to 2,000
mL with water. The resulting solution is transferred into a
transparent brown glass bottle, where a cap is loosely placed. If
the bottle is filled up to its neck and stored at 5℃, the solution is
stable for 1 week or longer. (For a blank test with a freshly
prepared substrate solution, approximately 16 mL of 0.25 N sodium
thiosulfate solution is consumed. If the consumed amount of 0.25N
sodium thiosulfate solution for blank test is 14 mL or less, the
substrate solution is unstable. It needs to be prepared freshly.
Consumption of enzyme solution should be in a range of 50～80%
of the consumption in the blank).
Storage Standard of Catalase
Catalase is strongly hygroscopic, hence should be stored in sealing tightly at a cold
dark place.

220
 Cellulase
Definition Cellulase is an enzyme obtained from cultures of Aspergillus niger,
Trichoderma reesei, Humicola insolens, Penicillium funiculosum and its variety,
respectively. Dilutant or stabilizer can be added for the purpose of activity adjustment
and quality preservation.
Compositional Specifications of Cellulase
Description Cellulase is white～deep brown powder, particle, paste or colorless～deep
brown liquid.
Identification When Cellulase is proceeded as directed under Activity Test, it should have
the activity as Cellulase.
Purity (1) Arsenic : It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(2) Lead ： When 5.0 g of Cellulase is tested by Atomic Absorption Spectrophotometry
or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content should not be more
than 5.0 ppm.
(3) Coliform Group ： Cellulase is tested by Microbe Test Methods for Coliform Group
in General Test Methods in 「Standards and Specifications for Foods」. It should not
be more than 30 cfu per 1 g of this product.
(4) Salmonella ： Cellulase is tested by Microbe Test Methods for Salmonella in
General Test Methods in 「Standards and Specifications for Foods」. It should be
negative (-).
(5) E. Coli : When Cellulase is tested by Microbe Test Methods for E. Coli in General
Test Method 「Standards and Specifications for Foods」, it should be negative (-).
Activity Test (activity)
∘Analysis Principle : Activity test is based on enzymatic hydrolysis of glucosidic bonding
within carboxylmethylcellulose substrate (pH 4.5, 40℃). The decrease in viscosity of
the substrate is measured by a viscometer with its scale corrected.
∘Preparation of Test Solution : Test Solution is prepared by dilution so that 1mL of the
final solution shows variation in relative fluidity of 0.18～0.22 in 5 minutes under the
conditions below. Appropriate amount of sample is ground in a glass mortar and water
is added. It is diluted in a volumetric flask. It is filtered through a Whatman No.1 filter
paper or equivalent prior to use
Test Procedure : A viscometer, scale is previously corrected, is cleanly washed in
water with sufficient detergent. It is then set up vertically in a glass water bath at 40
± 0.1℃. 20 mL of substrate solution and 4 mL of acetate buffer solution are added
into a 50 mL Erlenmeyer flask with a stopper (2 for enzyme test and 1 for substrate
blank test per sample). An enzyme test flask is plugged with a stopper and maintained
for 15 minutes in a water bath, where precisely 1 mL of Test Solution is added and
timed. It is then well mixed. Immediately, 10 mL of the mixed solution is added to the
big branch of the viscometer. Approximately in 2 minutes, the reaction mixture is
sucked in through the thin branch of the viscometer up to the upper scale using a
rubber bulb. Time taken to reach the upper scale is measured in minutes (TR). Again
221
time taken to reach the lower scale (starting from the upper scale) is measured in
seconds (TT). By repeating the same procedure, TR and TT are measured again. This is
repeated 4 times within 15minutes. Separately, a mixture of 20 mL substrate solution,
4 mL acetate buffer solution and 1 mL water is added. 10 mL of the mixture is taken
to the big branch of the viscometer. The time taken to reach the lower scale from the
upper scale is measured five times and an average value is obtained TS(seconds). A
water blank test is carried out with 10 mL of water that is maintained at 40 ± 0.1℃
by following the same procedure. An average value of 5 times is obtained,
TW(seconds). Using the following formula, relative fluidity and TN values are obtained
for each of 4 times of effluent time (TT) and reaction time (TR).
TS−TW
FR ＝
TT−TW

1 TT
TN ＝ (TT / 60sec / min) + TR ＝ + TR
2 120

FR : Relative fluidity for each reaction time

TS : Average effluent time for substrate blank test (seconds)
TW : Average effluent time for water blank test (seconds)
TT : Effluent time for enzyme reaction solution (seconds)
TR : Reaction time (minutes) (time taken from "adding the Test Solution" to "before the
measurement of effluent time (TT)
TN : Reaction time (TR) (minutes) + one half of effluent time for Test Solution (TT)
(minutes)
A standard curve is prepared using the 4 relative fluidity (FR) values for the 4 reaction
times (TN). This should be a straight line. The slope corresponds to the change in
relative fluidity per minute and is proportional to the amount of enzyme. The optimum
slope passing through a series of the test points is a better basis for the enzyme
activity than a single value of relative fluidity. FR values at 10 and 5 minutes are
measured from the standard curve. The difference in fluidity should be 0.18～0.22. The
enzyme activity is obtained from the following formula.
1,000( FR10 - FR5)
CU/g ＝
W
FR10 : Relative fluidity at reaction time of 10 minutes
FR5 : Relative fluidity at reaction time of 5 minutes
1,000 : Conversion factor (g to mg)
W : Amount of sample contained 1mL of Test Solution (mg)

222
 Definition of Activity : 1 Cellulase unit(CU) is a activity which generates a change of 1
in relative fluidity in 5 minutes under the above test conditions on a
carboxylmethylcellulose substrate.
Apparatus
-Viscometer : Cannon Fenske Type Viscometer with size 100 corrected scale or its
equivalent.
-Glass water bath : Isothermal glass water bath at 40 ± 0.1℃ or its equivalent.
Agents and Solutions
∘Acetate Buffer Solution (pH 4.5) : pH of 400 mL of 0.4 N acetic acid is adjusted to 4.5
± 0.05 by adding 0.4 N of sodium acetate solution
with stirring continuously.
∘Sodium Carboxylmethylcellulose : Sodium carboxylmethylcellulose cellulose gum,
Hercules(Aqualon) Type 7HF or its equivalent is
used.
∘Substrate Solution : 200 mL of water is added to a mixing container and the mixer is
set at a low speed. 1g of sodium carboxylmethylcellulose is
carefully added so that it doesn't splash out and dispersed in
water. Using a rubber policeman, contained wall is washed with
warm water. The container is covered and the dispersion is mixed
for 1 minute at high speed. The mixture is transferred into a 500
mL volumetric flask and the total volume is brought up to 500 mL
with water. Substrate solution is filtered through a gauze prior to
use.
Storage Standard of Cellulase
Cellulase should be stored in a hermetic container in a cold dark place.

223
 Cellulose, Microcrystalline
INS No.: 460(i)
Synonyms: Cellulose gel CAS No.: 9004-34-6

Definition Cellulose, Microcrystalline is obtained from wood pulp. Its major component is
Cellulose, Microcrystalline.
Compositional Specifications of Cellulose, Microcrystalline
Content If Cellulose, Microcrystalline is converted to a anhydrous form, it should contain
97.0∼102.0% of hydrocarbons as cellulose.
Description Cellulose, Microcrystalline is white～grayish white fluidity crystalline powder.
It is odorless.
Identification (1) 30 g of Cellulose, Microcrystalline is added to 270 mL of water, which
is stirred for 5 minutes at approximately 3,000 rpm. This is transferred into a 100
mL mass cylinder, which is allow to stand for 3 hours. The resulting liquid is white
opaque dispersion without bubbles. Separation of phases should not be observed.
(2) 0.1N iodine solution is added to 1 mg of Cellulose, Microcrystalline, which is
heated for 30 minutes in a water bath. To this solution, 4 mL of catechol-phosphoric
acid solution (1→500) is added and heated for 30 minutes. The color of the resulting
solution appears red.
Purity (1) Arsenic ：It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(2) Lead : When 5.0 g of Cellulose, Microcrystalline is tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content
should not be more than 2.0 ppm.
(3) Cadmium : When 5.0 g of Cellulose, Microcrystalline is tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content
should not be more than 1.0 ppm.
(4) Mercury : When 0.1 g of Cellulose, Microcrystalline is tested by Mercury Test
Method, its content should not be more than 1.0 ppm.
(5) Starch ： When 2 drops of iodine TS are added to 30 mL of Test Solution in
Identification (1), it should not become bluish violet～blue.
(6) pH : 5 g of Cellulose, Microcrystalline is well mixed for 20 minutes with 40 mL
of freshly boiled and cooled water. It is then centrifuged. pH of the supernatant
should be 5.5∼7.0.
(7) Water Solubles ： 5 g of Cellulose, Microcrystalline is added to 80 mL of water,
which is shaken for 10 minutes. This is filtered through a No.42 Whatman filter
paper or its equivalent into a beaker that make previously constant weight. The
filtrate is evaporated, which is then dried for 1 hour at 105℃. The residue should
not be more than 0.24%.
Loss on Drying When 1 g of Cellulose, Microcrystalline is dried for 3 hours at 105℃,
the weight loss should not be more than 5%.
Residue on Ignition When Residue on Ignition is done with 2 g of Cellulose,
224
 Microcrystalline, the amount of residue should not be more than 0.05%.
Assay 125 mg of Cellulose, Microcrystalline is precisely weighed and transferred into a
300 mL Erlenmeyer flask using 25 mL of water. 50 mL of 0.5 N potassium bichromate
solution is well mixed and 100 mL of sulfuric acid is carefully added, which is then
boiled. After cooling for 15 minutes at room temperature and further cooled in a water
bath. The resulting solution is transferred into a 250 mL volumetric flask and filled
with water. 50 mL of the resulting solution is titrated with 0.1 N ammonium ferrous
sulfate solution using 2～3 drops of o-phenanthroline as an indicator, its consumption is
S (mL) Separately, a blank test is carried out and the consumption of 0.1N ammonium
ferrous sulfate solution is B (mL). The content of cellulose in the sample is calculated
from the following equation.
Content of cellulose(%) (B—S) × 338
＝ W
W ：Weight of sample as a dehydrated form (mg)

225
 Cellulose, Powdered

INS No.: 460(ii)

CAS No.: 9004-34-6
Definition Cellulose, Powdered is cellulose obtained by hydrolyzing pulp. The major
component is cellulose.
Compositional Specifications of Cellulose, Powdered
Content What Cellulose, Powdered is converted to a dehydrated form, contain 97.0%
~102.0% of carbohydrate, calculated as cellulose.
Description Cellulose, Powdered is white odorless powder.
Identification (1) 10 g of Cellulose, Powdered in 90 mL of water is boiled for 5 minutes.
While hot, it is filtered through ashless filter paper. When 2 drops of iodine TS are
added to the filtrate, the color does not change from yellow-red.
(2) 2 to 5 mg of Cellulose, Powdered is added to 20 mL of 0.1% solution of anthrone
in 75% sulfuric acid and heated in a water bath. The solution turns blue-green within
5 minutes.
(3) 30 g of Cellulose, Powdered is mixed in 270 mL of water with a high speed stirrer
at 8,000∼8,500 rpm for 5 minutes. The mixture will be either a free-flowing
suspension or heavy, lumpy suspension. In the latter case, precipitates are slightly
formed and the suspension contains inhomogeneously dispersed air bubbles. If the
sample mixture is not free-flowing suspension, 100 mL of the mixture is transferred
into a 100 mL graduated cylinder, which is then allow it to settle for 1 hour. Solid
phase settles at the bottom and a supernatant liquid appears above the layer of
cellulose.
(4) When a few drops of sample mixture obtained from (3) are observed at 100
magnification with a microscope, fibers and fiber fragments are visible, regardless of
the degree of fineness of the sample.
Purity (1) Arsenic : It should be no more than 2.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(2) Lead : When 5.0 g of Cellulose, Powdered is tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content
should not be more than 2.0 ppm.
(3) Cadmium : When 5.0 g of Cellulose, Powdered is tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content
should not be more than 1.0 ppm.
(4) Mercury : When 0.1 g of Cellulose, Powdered is tested by Mercury Test Method,
its content should not be more than 1.0 ppm.
(5) Chloride : Approximately 5 g of Cellulose, Powdered is accurately weighed and
transferred into a 500 mL Erlenmeyer flask, where 250 mL of water is added. It is
then refluxed for 1 hour and filtered. The filtered sample with 200 mL of water is
refluxed for 30 minutes and then filtered. This filtrate is combined to the previous
filtrate and hot water rinses, where 1 mL of nitric acid is added. After boiling the
226
 resultant mixture, 5 mL of 5% solution of silver nitrate is slowly added. After the
precipitate has coagulated, it is filtered through a glass filtering funnel. The
precipitates are washed with diluted nitric acid (1→100) until free from silver nitrate
and rinsed with water, dried at 130℃, and weighed. To obtain an corrected weight of
the precipitate, a blank determination performed for correction. 1 mg of precipitate is
equivalent to 0.247 mg of Cl. The content of Cl should not be more than 0.05%.
(6) pH : 10 g of Cellulose, Powdered is dissolved in 90 mL of water and allow to
stand with occasional stirring for 1 hour. The pH of the supernatant liquid is
measured with a glass electrode. It should be between 5.0 and 7.5.
(7) Water Solubles : 6 g of Cellulose, Powdered is mixed to 90 mL of recently boiled
and cooled water and allowed to stand with occasional stirring for 10 minutes. It is
then filtered. First 10 mL of filtrate is discarded and passed the filtrate through the
same filter paper a second time, if necessary. 15 mL portion of the filtrate is
evaporated to dryness. The residue is further dried at 105℃ for 1 hour. The content
should not be more than 1.5%.
Ash Approximately 3 g of Cellulose, Powdered is accurately weighed and heated until
completely charred at 550 ± 50℃. It is then ignited at 800 ± 25℃ until free from
carbon. The amount of ash should not be more than 0.3%.
Loss on Drying 3 g of Cellulose, Powdered is dried at 105℃. The loss on drying should
not be more than 7%.
Assay Approximately 125 mg of Cellulose, Powdered is accurately weighed and
transferred into a 300 mL Erlenmeyer flask. The weighing boat is rinsed with 25 mL of
water, which is added to the flask. 50 mL of 0.5 N potassium dichromate solution is
added to the flask and 100 mL of sulfuric acid is carefully added. It is then heated to
boiling, allowed the solution to stand at room temperature for 15 minutes, and cooled it
in a water bath. Water is added to bring the total volume to 250 mL. 50 mL of the
resultant solution is titrated with 0.1 N ferrous ammonium sulfate solution (indicator : 3
drops of o-phenanthroline TS). Separately, a blank test is performed, where the
consumed amount of 0.1 N ferrous ammonium sulfate solution is B(mL). The normality
(N) of 0.1 N ferrous ammonium sulfate solution is obtained by the following formula.
Normality (N) ＝ 0.1 × 50/B
The content of the cellulose in the sample is obtained by the following formula.

Cellulose N
content(%)＝ 6.75(B-S) ×
2W
S : Volume(mL) of 0.1 N ferrous ammonium sulfate solution used in the sample titration
W : Weight(g) of the sample taken, on the dried basis

227
 Chitin
Definition Chitin is obtained by treating shells of crustacea with acids. Its component is
Ｎ-Acetylglucosamine.
Compositional Specifications of Chitin
Description Chitin is white～pale yellow or red powder or scale with a slight
characteristic scent.
Identification When 5 mL of anthrone solution and 1 mL of water are added to 0.2 g of
Chitin, which is heated in a water bath, it becomes blue～green.
Purity (1) Arsenic : It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(2) Lead : When 5.0 g of Chitin is tested by Atomic Absorption Spectrophotometry or
Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content should not be more
than 2.0 ppm.
Loss on Drying
When Chitin is dried for 4 hours at 105℃, the weight loss should not be more than 15%.
Residue on Ignition
Residue on Ignition of Chitin (converted to dried form) should not be more than 5%.

228
 Chitosan
Definition Chitosan is obtained by alkali treating from chitin. Its component is
polyglucosamine.
Compositional Specifications of Chitosan
Description This is white～pale yellow or red powder or scale shaped material having a
slight characteristic odor.
Identification When 5 mL of anthrone solution and 1 mL of water are added to 0.2 g of
Chitosan, which is heated in a water bath, it turns blue～green.
Purity (1) Arsenic : It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(2) Lead : When 5.0 g of Chitosan is tested by Atomic Absorption Spectrophotometry
or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content should not be more
than 10.0ppm
(3) Degree of Deacetylation : 0.5 g of dried Chitosan is precisely weighed and
dissolved in 5 v/v% acetic acid to make 100 mL. 1 mL of this solution is diluted with
30 mL of water in a 200 mL Erlenmeyer flask. It is titrated with 0.0025 N polyvinyl
potassium sulfate solution (indicator: 2～3 drops of 0.1% toluidine blue solution). The
degree of deacetylation is obtained from the following equation. It should not be less
than 70.0%.
Degree of Deacetylation(%) X/161
× 100
＝ X/161 ＋ Y/203
1 1 16
X = × × f × 1 × v
400 1,000
1
Y = 0.5 × - X
100

v： Consumed amount of 0.0025 N polyvinyl potassium sulfate solution (mL)

f： Normality factor of 0.0025N polyvinyl potassium sulfate solution
Loss on Drying When Chitosan is dried for 4 hours at 105℃, the weight loss should not
be more than 15%.
Residue on Ignition When Residue on Ignition is done with Chitosan ( on dried basis),
the amount of residue should not be more than 5%.

229
 Chitosanase
Definition Chitosanase is an enzyme obtained from cultures of Aeromonasgenus, Bacillus
genus, or Trichoderma viride. Diluent or stabilizer can be added for the purpose of
activity adjustment and quality preservation.
Compositional Specifications of Chitosanase
Description Chitosanase is white～dark brown powder, particle, paste or colorless ~
dark brown liquid.
Identification When Chitosanase is proceeded as directed under Activity Test, it should
have the activity as Chitosanase.
Purity (1) Arsenic : It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(2) Lead : When 5.0 g of Chitosanase is tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content
should not be more than 5.0 ppm.
(3) Coliform Group ： When Chitosanase proceed as directed under Microbiological
Methods for Coliform Group in General Testing Methods in 「Standards and
Specifications for Foods」. It should contain 30 or less per 1 g of this product.
(4) Salmonella ： When Chitosanase proceed as directed under Microbiological Methods
for Salmonella in General Testing Methods in 「Standards and Specifications for
Foods」. It should be negative (-).
(5) E. Coli : When Chitosanase is tested by Microbe Test Methods for E. Coli in
General Test Method 「Standards and Specifications for Foods」, it should be
negative (-).
Activity Test (activity)
∘Analysis Principle : Activity test is based on hydrolysis of chitosan substrate (pH 5.0,
48℃). Glucosamine, a reducing sugar that is produced by hydrolysis, is reacted with
alkaline ferricyanide solution and absorption of the reaction mixture is measured.
∘Preparation of Test Solution : sample dissolve in 0.05 M acetate buffer solution so that
the absorption difference between 1 mL of the final dilution and enzyme blank test
solution is within 0.1～0.5 under the given test conditions.
∘Test Procedure : 2 mL of substrate solution is placed in a test tube, where exactly 1
mL of Test Solution, which is previously isothermalized for 5 minutes in a 48℃ water
bath, is added, mixed by shaking, and set aside in the water bath. After exactly 5
minutes, the test tube is heated for 3 minutes in a boiling water bath to stop the
enzyme reaction and cooled to room temperature. Separately, an enzyme blank test
solution is prepared by using 1 mL of Test Solution which is previously deactivated by
heating for 3 minutes in a water bath. Separately, 1.4 mL each of water is added to
two test tubes. 0.1 mL of enzyme reaction solution and 0.1 mL of enzyme blank test
solution is added to respective test tube. 2 mL of alkaline ferricyanide solution is
added to each test tube, which is heated for 15 minutes in a boiling water bath and
cooled to room temperature. Absorptions of enzyme Test Solution and enzyme blank
test solution are measured at 420 nm with 1cm path length. Concentration of
230
 D-glucosamine (μmol/mL) is obtained from a standard curve.
Standard Curve
D-glucosamine hydrochloride 215.6 mg of pre-dried to a constant weight dissolve in
water (total volume = 100 mL). Using this solution, glucosamine standard solutions are
prepared so that 1 mL of each solution contains 2.0, 4.0, 6.0, 8.0, and 10.0 μmol/mL of
D-glucosamine, respectively. 1 mL of each standard solution and 2 mL of water are
added to a test tube, which is boiled for 3 minutes in a boiling water bath and cooled
to room temperature. The same procedure described below Separately, 1.4 mL each of
water is added to two test tubes. in Test Procedure is followed. Separately, a
reference solution is prepared using 1 mL of water instead of 1 mL of Standard
Solution. Using this reference solution, absorptions of Standard Solutions are measured
at 420 nm with 1cm path length. A calibration curve of absorption vs. concentration of
glucosamine standard (μmol/mL) is prepared.
Enzyme activity is calculated by the following equation.
CU/mL or g ＝ A
5 × W

A : Concentration of D-glucosamine in Test Solution obtained from the standard curve

(μmol/mL)
5 : Reaction time (minutes)
W : Amount of sample contained in 1 mL of Test Solution (mL)
Definition of Activity ： 1 Chitosanase Unit(CU) corresponds to an amount of enzyme
that frees reducing sugar (equivalent of 1 μmol of D-glucosamine) per minute under the
test conditions above
Solutions
∘0.05 M Acetate Buffer Solution : 14.8 mL of 0.1 M acetic acid and 35.2 mL of 0.1 M
sodium acetate solution are mixed and diluted to 100
mL with water. pH of this solution should be 5.0.
∘Substrate Solution : 0.2 g of chitosan (Sigma-Aldrich Co. or its equivalent) is dispersed
in 40 mL of water, which is then dissolved by adding 10 mL of
1.0 M acetic acid. pH of this solution is adjusted to 5.0 by adding
1.0 M sodium acetate solution. It is then diluted to 100 mL with
0.05 M acetate buffer solution. This solution is stored in a
refrigerator.
∘Alkaline Ferricyanide Solution : 0.5 g of potassium ferricyanide (K3Fe(CN)6) dissolve in
1,000 mL of 0.5 M sodium carbonate solution. This
solution is sealed and stored in a brown bottle.
Stotage standard of Chitosanase
Chitosanase is strongly hygroscopic, hence should be stored in a hermetic container in
231
a cold dark place.

232
 Chlorine
Chemical Formula: Cl2 INS No.: 925
Molecular Weight: 70.91 CAS No.: 7782-50-5
Compositional Specifications of Chlorine
Content Chlorine should contain not less than 99.5% of chlorine (Cl2).
Description Chlorine is pale greenish yellow and irritative gas. It liquefies under certain
pressure.
Identification Chlorine is passed through 10 mL of ice-chilled sodium hydroxide
solution(4.3→100). The resulting solution shows the chloride reaction of Identification.
Purity
(1) Involatiles
(A) Apparatus

-A : Hard glass container with 190 mm diameter × 100 mm depth

-B : 150 mL graduated Erlenmeyer flask
-C : adaptor
-D : ground glass tube
-E1, E2 : U-shaped absorbent tube with 100 mm length (Absorbent tube is washed
clean and dried, which is then filled with anhydrous magnesium perchlorate up to
20 mm of the tube. The tube is plugged with cotton. Stoppers are placed to isolate
the tube from atmospheric air). Before connecting to the apparatus, the U tube is
connected to the chlorine gas tube and the container valve is opened so that the
flow rate is 2～3 bubbles per second at the outlet. is attached. After the valve is
kept open for 1 hour, dry air is passed through for exactly 5 minutes at a flow
rate of 4.5 L per minute. After plugging the inlet and outlet, the tube is kept for
10 minutes at normal temperature, which is then weighed for use. Chlorine gas is
passed only when the drying agent is replaced and dry air is passed prior to water
content test.
-F1, F2 : 2 l glass capturing bottle
-G : glass drying tower with 50 mm external diameter x 480 mm length (Bottom is
233
 filled with glass wool up to 40 mm, filled with anhydrous magnesium perchlorate by
190 mm, filled with glass wool by 20 mm, filled with anhydrous magnesium
perchlorate by 190 mm, and finally filled with glass wool). At the top of the tower,
a flow meter is installed so that air flux can be measured.
(B) Test Method : A container (equipped with a valve to control the outlet flux) is
connected to the inlet of the adapter (C). Glass container (A) is filled with dry ice
and 100 mL of trichloroethylene. The adapter (C) is connected to the Erlenmeyer
flask (B), which is then kept immersed in (A) so that it is completely cooled. Gas
outlet tube of the adapter is connected to the capturing bottle (F1) that is filled
with 1.5 L of water. This capturing bottle (F1) is connected to another capturing
bottle (F2), which is filled with 1.5 L of 20% sodium hydroxide solution. When the
apparatus is set up, the valve of the container is slowly opened so that the gas
flows in. The container is slightly tilted so that liquid chlorine flows out slowly.
When liquid chlorine fills 30～50 mL in the Erlenmeyer flask (B), the valve is
closed. After a while, the Erlenmeyer flask (B) is disconnected from the glass
container (A).
Previously weighed Erlenmeyer flask (B) transfer into a glass container (A) and
adapter (C) is attached. Precisely measured 150 mL of liquid chlorine is added to
the Erlenmeyer flask(B). The inlet is closed by disassembling the connection tube.
Gas outlet tube of the adapter (C) is disconnected from the capturing bottle (F1).
To this gas outlet tube, U-shaped absorbent tubes (E1, E2), which are previously
weighed for water content test, are connected serially. The capturing bottle (F1) is
again connected to the absorbent tube (E2) and glass container (A) is separated.
Liquid chlorine in the Erlenmeyer flask (B) is evaporated at room temperature.
When liquid chlorine in the Erlenmeyer flask(B) evaporates, a drying tower is
attached to the inlet of the adapter (C) and dry air is supplied precisely for 5
minutes at a flow rate of 4.5 L/minute. The Erlenmeyer flask (B) is separated and
covered with a small watch glass. After 10 minutes, the flask is wiped clean with
filter paper and weighed. The content of involatiles should not be more than
0.015%.

Involatiles(%) = V a×-1.68
b
× 100

a : Previously known weight of Erlenmeyer flask (B) (g) ＋ weight of involatiles (g)
b : Previously known weight of Erlenmeyer flask (B) (g)
V : Volume of sample (mL)
1.68 : Weight of 1 mL liquid chlorine at –80℃ (g)
(2) Arsenic : It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(3) Lead : To 10 mL of Test Solution (A) in (2) Purity, add 0.5N nitric acidto make 25
mL, test soultion. When the test solution is tested by Atomic Absorption
234
 Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content
should not be more than 2.0 ppm.
(4) Mercury: 2 mL of Test Solution (A) is tested for mercury following the Purity (5)
for Sodium Hydroxide (not more than 1 ppm).
Water Content Inlets and outlets of the U shaped absorbent tubes (E1, E2), which is set
up for water content test of Involatiles in Purity (1), are closed. The tubes are then
wiped cleanly with filter paper. After 10 minutes, they are weighed and water content
is calculated using the following equation. The water content should not be more than
0.015%.
Water content(%) = (E - EV')×+1.68
1 1 (E - E ')
2 2
× 100

E1, E2 : The weight of absorbent tube after sample is passed through (g)
E1', E2' : The weight of absorbent tube before sample is passed through (g)
V : Weight of sample (mL)
1.68 : Weight of 1 mL liquid chlorine at -80℃ (g)
Assay A Bunde burette is used for apparatus as shown below. An auxiliary valve is
connected to the container valve. The auxiliary valve is then connected to E.
Stopcocks B and C are then opened. Chlorine gas is introduced to A by slowly
opening the auxiliary valve. Air is completely replaced by passing the gas for 10～15
minutes. After closing C and B, E is separated from the auxiliary valve and set-aside
until it reaches room temperature. Then the pressure of A is equilibrated with the
atmosphere by slightly opening the valve C. A bottle F is filled with 10% potassium
iodide and then connected to E. Small amount of solution is passed through E and D
by turning the stopcock B. Then the stopcock B is turned to add small amount of
potassium iodide solution to A. B is then closed and chlorine gas is absorbed by
shaking the burette. After the absorption is completed by repeating this procedure, it
is cooled for 10～15 minutes. Liquid in A and F are adjusted to a same level. The
volume of the gas in A is obtained and the chlorine content is calculated from the
following equation.
Chlorine Content(%) ＝ 100 - V
V : Volume of the gas left in A (mL)

235
※Caution : Chlorine is very irritating gas. Care must be taken to avoid contacts with
the respiratory organs and eyes. (draft room should be used for testing).

236
 Chlorine Dioxide
Chemical Formula: ClO2

Molecular Weight: 67.46 INS No.: 926

Synonyms: Chlorine (IV) oxide; Chlorine
peroxide CAS No.: 10049-04-4

237
 Chlorophyll
INS No.: 140
Synonyms: Magnesium chlorophyll; Magnesium
CAS No.: 1406-65-1
phaeophytin

Definition Chlorophyll is a pigment obtained by extracting chlorella (Chlorea pyrenoides

CHIK, etc.) of chlorella, spinach (Spinacia oleracea L.) of chenopodiaceae, comfley
(Symphytum officinale LEDEB) of borraginaceae, and Spirulina (Spirulina plalensis
NORD.), a blue-green algae (GEITLER, etc. ) with ethyl alcohol or organic solvents
such as acetone, isopropyl alcohol, methyl alcohol, and hexane. Its major pigment
component is Chlorophylls. Dilutant, stabilizer, or solvent can be added for the purpose
of color value adjustment and quality preservation.
Compositional Specifications of Chlorophyll
Content Color value of Chlorophyll should be more than the indicated value.
Description Chlorophyll is green～dark green liquid or paste with a slight characteristic
scent.
Identification (1) A solution of Chlorophyll in n-hexane (1→100) is green color and has
maximum absorption bands near 415 nm, 425 nm and 660 nm.Weigh 1 g which is
converted to 600 of color value from indicated value of Chlorophyll. It is dissolved in
100 mL of n-hexane and this solution shows green color. When mix and shake it
with 0.5 mL of hydrochloric acid, the color of this solution is changed to yellow with
green.
(2) Weigh 1 g which is converted to 600 of color value from indicated value of
Chlorophyll. It is dissolved in 100 mL of ethanol and this solution shows a red
fluorescence.
(3) A solution of Chlorophyll in n-hexane has maximum absorption bands near 410~430
nm and 660~670 nm.
(4) Weigh 1 g which is converted to 600 of color value from indicated value of
Chlorophyll and dissolve in 30 mL of n-hexane. 2 ㎕ of this solution drop-wise
added on to a thin layer plate, which is prepared by using silica gel (activated by
heating at 110℃ for 1 hour) for thin layer chromatography. Using a mixture of
n-hexane : acetone : tert-butylalcohol (10:1:1) as a developing solvent, each plate is
developed up to 10 cm, and then dried in air. Rf value shows yellowish green
color(chlorophyll b), green color(chlorophyll a) and gray color(feofitin) spots at near
0.3, 0.4 and 0.65. When these plates are observed under UV light (major wavelength
at 366 nm) in a dark place, they show a red fluorescence. And Rf value shows
yellow color(xanthophyll) and orange yellow color(β-carotene) spots at near 0.25 and
0.95. When these plates are observed under UV light (major wavelength at 366 nm)
in a dark place, they don't show any fluorescence.
Purity (1) Arsenic : It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
238
 (2) Lead : When 5.0 g of Chlorophyll is tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content
should not be more than 5.0 ppm.
(3) Cadmium : When 5.0 g of Chlorophyll is tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content
should not be more than 1.0 ppm.
(4) Mercury : When Chlorophyll is tested by Mercury Limit Test, its content should not
be more than 1.0ppm.
Acetone
Isopropyl alcohol Not
total more
than 50ppm (individual or
Methyl
Hexane alcohol if combined)

Methylene Not more than 10ppm

chloride
(5) Residual Solvents : When Chlorophyll is tested by Purity (4)(5) for Paprika Extract
Pigments, the content of residual solvents should be

Assay (Color Value) Appropriate amount of Chlorophyll is precisely weighted so that the
absorption is within 0.3～0.7 and dissolved in n-hexane so that the total volume is 100
mL (if it is water soluble, water is used). 5 mL of this solution is diluted to 100 mL
with n-hexane (Test Solution). If necessary, the solution is centrifuged and the
supernatant is used. Using n-cylohexane as a reference solution, absorption A is
measured at the maximum absorption near 660 nm with 1cm path length. Color value is
obtained using the following equation.
Color Value( ) ＝ A × 200
Weight of the sample(g)

239
 Choline Bitartrate
[HOCH2CH2N＋(CH3)3]HC4H4O6-
Chemical Formula: C9H19NO7
Molecular Weight: 253.25 INS No.: 1001(v)
Synonyms: (2-Hydroxyethyl)trimethylammonium
bitartrate CAS No.: 87-67-2

Compositional Specifications of Choline Bitartrate

Content Choline Bitartrate, when calculated on the dried basis(anhydrous), should contain
not less than 98.0% of choline bitartrate (C9H19NO7).
Description Choline Bitartrate is white hygroscopic crystalline powder with sour taste.
Identification Proceed as directed under Identification for [Choline Chloride].
Purity (1) Lead : When 5.0 g of Choline Bitartrate is tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content
should not be more than 2 ppm.
(2) 1, 4-Dioxane : To 0.5 g of Choline Bitartrate and 0.1 g of defoamer(containing
silicone), add 10 mL of water and diffuse with ultrasonic waves, test solution. Transfer
this solution into 25 mL of frit sparger, hold the temperature of container at 50℃, and
analyze with Purge and Trap and Gas chromatograph. Separately, to the solution, which
2.5μg of 1,4-Dioxane is contained in 10 mL of water, add 0.1 g of defoamer, standard
solution. Analyze the standard solutin in the same manner as the sample. (not more than
5.0 ppm)
Operation Condition
Purge and Trap
Trap : Vorcarb 3000 or its equivalent
Purge time : 11 minutes
Desorption temperature and time : 250℃, 4 minutes
Cryo focus temperature : -150℃
Bake temperature and time : 260℃, 10 minutes
Gas chromatography
Column : HP-FFAP(60m × 0.32μm) or its equivalent
Detector : (Hydrogen) Flame Ionization Detector (FID)
Column Temperature : held at 70℃ for 5 minutes and is raised to 180℃ at a
rate of 5℃ per minute
Temperature at injection hole : 200℃
Detector Temperature : 250℃
Carrier gas and flow rate : Nitrogen, 0.9 m per minute
Water Content Choline Bitartrate is dried in a vacuum desiccator (phosphorous
pentoxide) for 4 hours. The water content should not be more than 0.1%.
Residue on Ignition When thermogravimetric analysis is done with 2 g of Choline
Bitartrate, the amount of residue should not be more than 0.1%.
240
Assay Approximately 0.5 g of Choline Bitartrate is precisely weighed into a 250 mL
Erlenmeyer flask. After adding 50 mL of glacial acetic acid, it is completely dissolved
by heating in a water bath. After cooling, the solution is titrated with 0.1 N perchloric
acid solution (Indicator : 2 drops of crystal violet solution in glacial acetic acid). The
end point is where the color of the solution becomes green. Separately, perform a
blank test in the same manner.
1 mL of 0.1 N perchloric acid solution ＝ 25.36 mg C9H19NO7

241
 Choline Chloride
[HOCH2CH2N+(CH3)3]CI-
Chemical Formula: C5H14ClNO

Molecular Weight: 139.62 INS No.: 1001(iii)

Synonyms:
(2-Hydroxyethyl)trimethylammonium CAS No.: 67-48-1
chloride

Compositional Specifications of Choline Chloride

Content Choline Chloride, when calculated on the dried basis(anhydrous), should contain
within a range of 98.0%∼100.5% of choline chloride (C5H14ClNO).
Description Choline Chloride is colorless～white crystallite or crystalline powder with
characteristic scent.
Identification (1) Dissolve 0.5 g of Choline Chloride in 2 mL of water, and add 3 mL of
sodium hydroxide solution and heat. It generates a smell of trimethyl amine.
(2) When Dissolve 0.5 g of Choline Chloride in 2 mL of iodine solution, reddish brown
precipitates are formed immediately. 5 mL of sodium hydroxide solution is added to
dissolve the precipitates. Then the solution turns clear yellow. Upon heating, yellow
precipitates are formed Producing a smell of iodoform.
(3) When to 1 mL of Choline Chloride solution (1→100), add 2 mL of potassium
ferrocyanide solution (1→100) and 2 mL of cobalt chloride solution, it turns green
immediately.
∘Cobalt Chloride Solution : 2 g of cobalt chloride (6 hydrated) is dissolved in 1mL of
hydrochloric acid and sufficient water, which is diluted to 100 mL with water.
(4) Choline Chloride solution (1→20) responds to the test for Chloride in Identification.
Purity (1) Lead : When 5.0 g of Choline Chloride is tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content
should not be more than 2.0ppm.
(2) 1,4-Dioxane : To 0.5 g of Choline Chloride and 0.1 g of defoamer(containing
silicone), add 10 mL of water and diffuse with ultrasonic waves, test solution. Transfer
this solution into 25 mL of frit sparger, hold the temperature of container at 50℃, and
analyze with Purge and Trap and Gas chromatograph. Separately, to the solution, which
2.5μg of 1,4-Dioxane is contained in 10 mL of water, add 0.1 g of defoamer, standard
solution. Analyze the standard solutin in the same manner as the sample (not more than
10 ppm).
Operation Condition
Purge and Trap
Trap : Vorcarb 3000 or its equivalent
Purge time : 11 minutes
242
 Desorption temperature and time : 250℃, 4 minutes
Cryo focus temperature : -150℃
Bake temperature and time : 260℃, 10 minutes
Gas chromatography
Column : HP-FFAP(60m × 0.32μm) or its equivalent
Detector : (Hydrogen) Flame Ionization Detector (FID)
Column Temperature : held at 70℃ for 5 minutes and is raised to 180℃ at a
rate of 5℃ per minute
Temperature at injection hole : 200℃
Detector Temperature : 250℃
Carrier gas and flow rate : Nitrogen, 0.9 m per minute
Water Content Water content of Choline Chloride is determined by water determination
(Karl-Fisher Method) and should not be more than 0.5%.
Residue on Ignition When thermogravimetric analysis is done with 4 g of Choline
Chloride, the amount of residue should not be more than 0.05%.
Assay Approximately 0.3 g of Choline Chloride is precisely weighed and transferred into
a 250 mL Erlenmeyer flask. 50 mL of glacial acetic acid is added to the flask, which
is then heated in a water bath until the solid dissolves completely. After cooling, 10
mL of mercury acetate for nonaqueous titration and 2 drops of crystal violet glacial
acetic acid solution are added to the solution, which is then titrated with 0.1 N
perchloric acid solution. At the end point, the solution turns green. Separately, a blank
test is carried out by the same procedure.
1 mL of 0.1 N perchloric acid solution ＝13.96 mg C5H14ClNO

243
 Chromic chloride
Chemical Formula: CrCl3ㆍ6H2O

Molecular Weight: 266.45

Synonyms: Chromium(Ⅲ) chloride CAS No.: 10025-73-7

Compositional Specifications of Chromic chloride

Content Chromic chloride should contain within a range of 98.0～101.0% of Chromic
chloride(CrCl3ㆍ6H2O).
Description Chromic chloride is purple or green crystalline solid.
Identification (1) To 5mL of the aqueous solution of chromic chloride (1→250), 1mL of
5N sodium hydroxide and 10 drops of 30% hydrogen peroxide are added, gently
heated for about 2 minutes, yellow color develops.
(2) To 5 mL of the aqueous solution of chromic chloride (1→250), 5 drops of silver
nitrate solution are added, then white precipitate is generated, which is not soluble to
nitric acid.
Purity (1) Water-insoluble substances : 10 g of chromic chloride is precisely weighed,
100 mL of water is added, the solution is resolved in a water bath for 30 minutes,
and the insoluble substances are filtered through a glass filter (lG4), The solution in
a beaker, which is washed by hot water, is filtered though a glass filter, and the
residue is washed until the color of the solution washed lastly. When the glass filter
is dried for 2 hours at 105o , its content should not be more than 1 mg. (not more
than 0.01%)
(2) Ammonium hydroxide soluble substances : 2 g of chromic chloride is added to 80
mL of water, heated, and 10 mL of ammonia water is added. It is occasionally shaken
while warming up in a water bath for 30 minutes, cooled, water is added to 100 mL,
mixed, and filtered. To 50 mL of filtrate, 0.5 mL of sulfuric acid is added, and
evaporated to dryness in a water bath. It is then heat-treated until the weight
becomes constant, the residue should not be more than 2 mg (not more than 0.20%
as SO42-).
(3) Sulfate : To 10 mL of chromic chloride solution (2→10), 1 mL of 3N hydrochloric
acid is added, filtered, the filter paper is washed twice with 5 mL of water, and
diluted with water to 40 mL, test solution. Separately, 1 g of chromic chloride is
dissolved in 10 mL of water, filtered, and 0.1mL of 0.02N sulfuric acid is added,
reference solution. To both solutions, 3 mL of barium chloride(12→100)is added,
mixed well, and set aside whole night at the room temperature. When supernatant
liquid is discarded, the solution, which is more than 2 times of test solution, is
remained in reference solution. Both solutions are diluted with water to 25 mL,
processed under ultrasonic waves, then the turbidity of test solution should not be
more than that of reference solution (not more than 0.01%).
(4) Iron : 1 g of chromic chloride is added to 100 mL of water, dissolved, 10 mL of
244
 the solution is added to water to make 45 mL, and 2 mL of hydrochloric acid is
added and mixed, test solution. 15 mL each of butyl alcohol is added to test solution
and iron standard solution, and 15 mL of ammonium thiocynate(30→100) are added,
and mixed well. When the layer is separated, the color of the supernatant should not
be deeper than the color of standard solution (not more than 0.01%).
Assay 0.4 g of chromic chloride is precisely weighed, dissolved in 100 mL of water, 5
mL of 5N sodium hydroxide is added and mixed. 4 mL of 30% hydrogen peroxide is
slowly added, boiled for 5 minutes, slightly cooled, and 5 mL of sulfuric acid nickel
solution(1→20) is added. It is boiled and cooled until oxygen is not generated, and 2N
sulfuric acid is added until the color of the solution changes from yellow to orange.
To this solution, 4 g of potassium iodide and 2 g of sodium hydrogen carbonate are
dissolved in 100 mL of water and added. Then 6 mL of hydrochloric acid is added and
mixed. Place the stopper on the flask, set it asdie in a dark place for 10 minutes, and
titrate the liberated iodine with 0.1N sodium thiosulfate (indicator : starch solution).
1 mL of 0.1N sodium thiosulfate = 8.882mg CrCl3ㆍ6H2O

245
 Cinnamaldehyde

Chemical Formula: C9H8O

Molecular Weight: 132.16
Synonyms: Cinnamic aldehyde CAS No.: 104-55-2

Compositional Specifications of Cinnamaldehyde

Content Cinnamaldehyde should contain not less than 98.0% of cinnamaldehyde (C9H8O).
Description Cinnamaldehyde is a colorless to light yellow transparent liquid having a
cinnamon-like odor.
Identification (1) When 1 drop of fluoroglucyn hydrochloric acid solution is added to 5
drops of Cinnamaldehyde, the solution turns red and precipitates are formed.
(2) When 4 drops of nitric acid are added to 4 drops of Cinnamaldehyde and cooled to
5℃ or lower, white～pale yellow crystallites are formed.
Purity (1) Specific Gravity : Specific gravity of Cinnamaldehyde should be within a range
of 1.051～1.056
(2) Refractive Index : Refractive Index of Cinnamaldehyde should be within a range of
1.619～1.625
(3) Clarity and Color of Solution : When Cinnamaldehyde 1 mL is dissolved in 5 mL of
60% ethanol, the solution should be clear.
(4) Chlorinated Compounds : When Cinnamaldehyde is tested by Copper Mesh Test
Method in Test Methods for Flavorings, it should be appropriate.
(5) Acid Value : Acid value of Cinnamaldehyde is tested by Acid Value in Flavoring
Substance Test. It should not be more than 5.
Assay Approximately 1 g of Cinnamaldehyde is accurately weighed and tested by
Method 1 under aldehydes and ketons content in Flavoring Substances Test. In this
case, the mixture is set-aside for 15 minutes.
1 mL of 0.5 N alcoholic solution of potassium hydroxide ＝ 66.08 mg C9H8O

246
 Cinnamic Acid

Chemical Formula: C9H8O2

Molecular Weight: 148.16
Synonyms: 3-Phenylacrylic acid CAS No.: 621-82-9

Compositional Specifications of Cinnamic Acid

Content Cinnamic Acid, when calculated on the dried basis, should contain not less than
99.0% of cinnamic acid (C9H8O2).
Description Cinnamic Acid occurs as a white crystalline powder having a characteristic
odor.
Identification (1) To 0.5 g of Cinnamic Acid, add 1 mL of sulfuric acid, and dissolve
while heating in a water bath. The color of the solution changes to a yellow-green
color. Continue heating. The color changes to a dark red color.
(2) Dissolve 0.1 g of Cinnamic Acid in 2 mL of potassium hydroxide solution, add 5 mL
of potassium permanganate solution, and warm in hot water. An odor of benzaldehyde
is evolved.
Purity (1) Melting Point : Melting point of Cinnamic Acid should be within a range of
132～135℃
(2) Clarity and Color of Solution : When 1 g of Cinnamic Acid is dissolved in 7 mL of
ethanol, the solution should be clear.
(3) Characteristics of Akalki Solution : When 0.2 g of Cinnamic Acid is dissolved in 2
mL of sodium carbonate solution and 8 mL of water, the solution should be clear.
(4) Chloride : When Cinnamic Acid is tested by Copper Mesh Test Method in Test
Methods for Flavorings, it should be appropriate.
(5) Arsenic : It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(6) Lead : When 5.0 g of Cinnamic Acid is tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content
should not be more than 2.0 ppm.
Loss on Drying When Cinnamic Acid is dried for 4 hours in a vacuum desiccator (silica
gel), the weight loss should not be more than 1%.
Residue on Ignition When thermogravimetric analysis is done with Cinnamic Acid, the
residue should not be more than 0.05%.
Assay Dissolve about 0.2 g of Cinnamic Acid, previously dried and accurately weighed,
in 10 mL of neutralized alcohol and 10 mL of water and titrate with 0.1 N sodium
247
hydroxide solution.(indicator : 3 drops of phenolphthalein solution).
1mL of 0.1 N sodium hydroxide solution ＝ 14.816 mg C9H8O2

248
 Cinnamyl Acetate

Chemical Formula: C11H12O2

Molecular Weight: 176.22 CAS No.: 103-54-8

Compositional Specifications of Cinnamyl Acetate

Content Cinnamyl Acetate should be contain not less than 98.0% of cinnamyl acetate
(C12H12O2).
Description Cinnamyl Acetate is a colorless or slightly yellowish, transparent liquid
having a characteristic odor.
Identification To 1 mL of Cinnamyl Acetate, add 5 mL of 10% alcoholic solution of
potassium hydroxide. Equip with a reflux condenser, and heat in a water bath for 30
minutes. The characteristic odor disappears. Cool, and add 5 mL of water and 1.2 mL
of diluted hydrochloric acid. The solution responds to the test for Acetate (C) in
Identification.
Purity (1) Specific Gravity : Specific gravity of Cinnamyl Acetate should be within a
range of 1.047～1.051.
(2) Refractive Index : Refractive Index of Cinnamyl Acetate should be within a range of
1.539～1.543.
(3) Clarity and Color of Solution : When 1 mL of Cinnamyl Acetate is dissolved in 5
mL of 70% alcohol, the solution should be clear.
(4) Acid Value : Acid value of Cinnamyl Acetate is tested by Acid Value in Flavoring
Substance Test. The content should not be more than 3.
Assay Accurately weigh about 1 g of Cinnamyl Acetate, and proceed as directed under
Ester Content in Flavoring Substances Tests.
1 mL of 0.5 N alcoholic solution of potassium hydroxide = 88.11 mg of C12H12O2

249
 Cinnamyl Alcohol

Chemical Formula: C9H10O

Molecular Weight: 134.14
Synonyms: Cinnamic alcohol CAS No.: 104-54-1

Compositional Specifications of Cinnamyl Alcohol

Content Cinnamyl Alcohol should contain not less than 98.0% of cinnamyl alcohol (C9H10O).
Description Cinnamyl Alcohol is a colorless to light yellow liquid or occurs as white to
light yellow crystalline lumps, having a characteristic odor.
Identification To 3 drops or 0.2 g of Cinnamyl Alcohol, add 5 mL of potassium
permanganate solution (1→20) and 1 mL of diluted sulfuric acid. An odor of
cinnamaldehyde is evolved.
Purity (1) Solidification Temperature : Solidification temperature should not be less than
31℃.
(2) Clarity and Color of Solution : When 1 g of Cinnamyl Alcohol is dissolved in 1 mL
of 70% ethanol by heating at 35℃, the solution should be clear.
(3) Acid Value : Acid value of Cinnamyl Alcohol is tested by Acid Value in Flavoring
Substance Test. It should not be more than 1.
(4) Cinnamaldehyde : Approximately 5 g of Cinnamyl Alcohol is accurately added and
tested by the Method 2 of Hydroxylamine Method in Content Measurement Methods
for Aldehydes and Ketones. The content should not be more than 1.5%. In the
procedure, the mixture is set-aside for 15 minutes.
Residue on Ignition When thermogravimetric analysis is done with Cinnamyl Alcohol, the
residue should not be more than 0.03%.
Assay Approximately 0.5 g of Cinnamyl Alcohol is accurately weighed and tested by
Alcohol Content Measurement Method 2 in Flavoring Substances Test.
1 mL of 0.5 N alcoholic solution of potassium hydroxide = 67.09 mg C9H10O

250
 Citral

Chemical Formula: C10H16O

Molecular Weight: 152.24

Synonyms: Lemarome CAS No.: 5392-40-5

Compositional Specifications of Citral

Content Citral should be contain not less than 96.0% of citral (C10H16O).
Description Citral is a colorless to light yellow liquid having a lemon-like odor.
Identification To 1 mL of Citral, add 2 mL of sodium hydrogen sulfite solution and 2
drops of sodium carbonate solution, and shake. The mixture evolves heat and forms
white crystalline lumps. Add 10 mL of sodium hydrogen sulfite solution, and heat in a
water bath while shaking. The crystalline lumps dissolve, and the lemon-like odor
disappears.
Purity (1) Specific Gravity : Specific gravity should be within a range of 0.885～0.891
(2) Refractive Index : Refractive Index should be within a range of 1.486～1.490
(3) Clarity and Color of Solution : When 1 mL of Citral is dissolved in 10 mL of 60%
alcohol, the solution should be clear.
(4) Acid Value : Acid value of Citral is tested by Acid Value in Flavoring Substance
Test. It should not be more than 5.
Assay Accurately weigh about 1 g of Citral, and proceed as directed under Method 2 of
Aldehyde and Ketone Content in Flavoring Substances Tests. In the procedure, allow
the mixture to stand for 15 minutes.
1 mL of 0.5 N Hydrochloric acid = 76.12 mg of C10H16O

251
 Citric Acid

Chemical Formula: C6H8O7

Molecular Weight: 192.13 INS No.: 330
CAS No.:
S y n o n y m s :
2-Hydroxy-1,2,3-propane-tricarboxylic acid 77-92-9(anhydrous)
5949-29-1(1 hydrate)

Definition Citric Acid occurs as crystals (mono hydrated) called citric acid (crystal) or as
anhydrous material called citric acid (anhydrous).
Compositional Specifications of Citric Acid
Content Citric Acid, when calculated on the anhydrous of dried basis, should contain not
less than 99.5% of citric acid (C6H8O7=192.13).
Description Citric Acid occurs as colorless, transparent crystals. granules. or lumps, or
as a white powder. It is odorless and has a strong acid taste.
Identification (1) Citric Acid solution (1→10) is acidic.
(2) Citric Acid responds to the test for Citrate Salt in Identification.
Purity (1) Sulfate : When 0.5 g of Citric Acid is tested by Sulfate Limit Test, its content
should not be more than the amount that corresponds to 0.5 mL of 0.01 N sulfuric
acid.
(2) Oxalate : When 1 g of Citric Acid is dissolved in 10 mL of water, and added 2 mL
of calcium chloride solution, it should not be turn turbid.
(3) Arsenic : It should be no more than 1.3 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(4) Lead : When 5.0 g of Citric Acid is tested by Atomic Absorption Spectrophotometry
or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content should not be more
than 0.5 ppm.
(5) Mercury : When citric acid is tested by Mercury Limit Test, its content should not
be more than 1.0 ppm.
(6) Calcium : 1 g of Citric Acid is dissolved in 10 mL of water, which is neutralized
with ammonia solution. Then, 1 mL of ammonium oxalate solution is added, it should
not be turn turbid.
(7) Readily Carbonizable Substances : When 0.5 g of Citric Acid is dissolved in 5 mL
of sulfuric acid by heating at about 90℃ for 1 hour, the color of the solution should
not be deeper than that of the color standard solution K.
(8) Polynuclear Aromatic Hydrocarbon : 25 g of Citric Acid is dissolved in 30 mL of
water by heating at approximately 50℃. After cooling, the solution is extracted 3
times with 20 mL each of n-hexane (UV absorption spectrophotometry grade). It is
centrifuged at 2,500～3,000 rpm for approximately 10minutes and concentrated to 1～
2 mL by evaporating n-hexane out. After cooling, n-hexane (UV absorption
252
 spectrophotometry grade) is added to the concentrate to bring the total volume to 10
mL, Test Solution. Absorption of test solution is measured at 260～350 nm with 1 cm
path length. The difference in absorbance (compared to reference solution) should not
be more than 0.05 in this range. In this case, use the reference solution obtained by
following method. To 30 mL of water, extract 20 mL of n-hexane(UV absorption
spectrophotometry grade) 3 times repeatedly, and follow the same procedure as test
solution.
(9) Isocitric Acid : 0.5 g of Citric Acid is heated at 105℃ for 3 hours and cooled,
which is dissolved in 10 mL of acetone, Test Solution. Using 0.005 mL of the test
solution, it is tested by the Method 1 in Paper Chromatography. Only one spot should
be observed. For the filter paper, a No.2 filter paper for chromatography is used.
When the developing solvent front reaches approximately 25 cm, and stop developing
and dry in air. Bromophenol blue solution is sprayed upon the paper. A reference
solution is not used for this test. N-butyl alcohol, formic acid, and water (8:3:2) are
mixed and set-aside. The supernatant of solution is used as a developing solvent.
Residue on Ignition When thermogravimetric analysis is done with 2 g of citric acid, the
residue should not be more than 0.05%.
Water Content Water Content of Citric Acid is tested by the direct titration method in
water content determination (Karl-Fischer Method). The water content should not be
more than 0.5% for citric acid (anhydrous) and 8.8% for citric acid (crystal)
Assay Accurately weigh about 1.5 g of Citric Acid is dissolved in water and make to
250 mL, and 25 mL of which is then titrated with 0.1 N sodium hydroxide solution
(indicator : 2～3 drops of phenolphthalein solution).
1 mL of 0.1 N sodium hydroxide ＝ 6.404 mg C6H8O7

253
 Citronellal

Chemical Formula: C10H18O

Molecular Weight: 154.25

Synonyms: 3,7-Dimethyl-6-octenal; CAS No.: 106-23-0
Rhodinal

Compositional Specifications of Citronellal

Content Citronellal should be contain not less than 85.0% of citronellal (C10H18O).
Description Citronellal is a colorless, transparent liquid having a characteristic odor.
Identification To 1 mL of Citronellal, add 2 mL of sodium hydrogen sulfite solution and
2 drops of anhydrous sodium carbonate solution, and shake. The mixture evolves heat
and forms white crystalline lumps. Add 10 mL of sodium hydrogen sulfite solution, and
heat in a water bath while shaking. The crystalline lumps dissolve.
Purity (1) Specific Gravity : Specific gravity should be within a range of 0.850～0.860.
(2) Refractive Index : Refractive Index should be within a range of 1.446～1.456.
(3) Clarity and Color of Solution : When 1 mL of Citronellal is dissolved in 5 mL of
70% alcohol, the solution should be clear.
(4) Acid Value : Acid value of Citronellal is tested by Acid Value in Flavoring
Substance Test. It should not be more than 3.
Assay Accurately weigh about 1.1 g of Citronellal, and proceed as directed under
Method 2 in Aldehyde and Ketone Content in Flavoring Substances Tests. In the
procedure allow the mixture to stand for 1hour.
1 mL of 0.5 N hydrochloric acid = 77.13 mg of C10H18O

254
 Citronellol

Chemical Formula: C10H20O

Molecular Weight: 156.27

Synonyms: 3,7-Dimethyl-6-octen-1-ol CAS No.: 106-22-9

Compositional Specifications of Citronellol

Content Citronellol should be contain not less than 90.0% of citronellol (C10H20O).
Description Citronellol is a colorless, transparent liquid having a characteristic odor.
Identification To 1 mL of Citronellol, add 1 mL of anhydrous acetic acid and 1 drop of
phosphoric acid, keep the solution at a lukewarm temperature for 10 minutes, add 1 mL of
water, shake in warm water for 5 minutes, cool, and add sodium carbonate solution to
make slightly alkaline. A characteristic odor is evolved.
Purity (1) Specific Gravity : Specific gravity should be within a range of 0.850～0.860.
(2) Refractive Index : Refractive Index should be within a range of 1.454～1.462.
(3) Clarity and Color of Solution : When 2 mL of Citronellol is dissolved in 4 mL of
70% alcohol, the solution should be clear.
(4) Acid Value : Acid value of Citronellol is tested by Acid Value in Flavoring
Substance Test. It should not be more than 1.
(5) Ester Value : Ester value about 5 g of Citronellol, accurately weighed, is tested by
Ester Value in Flavoring Substance Test. It should not be more than 1.
(6) Aldehyde : Approximately 5 g of Citronellol is precisely weighed and tested by
Hydroxylamine Method 2 of Aldehyde and Ketone Content Measurement in Flavoring
Test. The volume of consumed 0.5 N hydrochloric acid should not be more than 1.3
mL.
Assay Proceed as directed under Method 1 in Alcohol Content in Flavoring Substances
Tests, using about 1 g of acetylated oil.

255
 Citronellyl Acetate

Chemical Formula: C12H22O2

Molecular Weight: 198.30 CAS No.: 150-84-5

Compositional Specifications of Citronellyl Acetate

Content Citronellyl Acetate should be contain not less than 92.0% of Citronellyl
acetate(C12H22O2).
Description Citronellyl Acetate is a colorless, transparent liquid having a characteristic odor.
Identification To 1 mL of Citronellyl Acetate, add 5 mL of 10% alcoholic solution of
potassium hydroxide solution, and heat in a water bath for 10 minutes. The
characteristic odor disappears, and an odor of citronellol is evolved. Cool, and add 2
mL of water and 2 mL of diluted hydrochloric acid. The solution responds to the test
for Acetate (C) in Identification.
Purity (1) Specific Gravity : Specific gravity of Citronellyl Acetate should be within a
range of 0.883～0.893.
(2) Refractive Index : Refractive Index of Citronellyl Acetate should be within a range
of 1.440～1.450.
(3) Clarity and Color of Solution : When 1 mL of Citronellyl Acetate is dissolved in 9
mL of 70% alcohol, the solution should be clear.
(4) Acid value : Acid value of Citronellyl Acetate is tested by Acid Value in Flavoring
Substance Test. The content should not be more than 1.
Assay Accurately weigh about 1.4 g of Citronellyl Acetate, and proceed as directed
under Ester Value and Ester Content in Flavoring Substances Tests.
1 mL of 0.5 N alcoholic solution of potassium hydroxide = 99.15 mg of C12H22O2

256
 Citronellyl Formate

Chemical Formula: C11H20O2

Molecular Weight: 184.28
Synonyms: CAS No.: 105-85-1
3,7-dimethyl-6-octen-1-yl-methanoate

Compositional Specifications of Citronellyl Formate

Content Citronellyl Formate should contain not less than 86.0% of citronellyl formate (C11H20O2)
Description Citronellyl Formate is a colorless, transparent liquid having a characteristic
odor.
Identification (1) To 1 mL of Citronellyl Formate, add 10 mL of 10% alcoholic solution
of potassium hydroxide, and heat in a water bath for 5 minutes while shaking. The
characteristic odor disappears, and an odor of citronellyl is evolved.
(2) Proceed as directed under Identification (2) in Geranyl Formate.
Purity (1) Specific Gravity : Specific gravity of Geranyl Formate should be within a
range of 0.890～0.903
(2) Refractive Index : Refractive Index of Geranyl Formate should be within a range of
1.443～1.449
(3) Clarity and Color of Solution : When 1 mL of the solution is dissolved in 3 mL of
80% ethanol, the solution should be clear.
(4) Acid Value : Acid value of Citronellyl Formate is tested by Acid Value in Flavoring
Substance Test. It should not be more than 3. In this case, titrate while cooling in
ice water until a light pink color persists for 10 seconds.
Assay Accurately weigh about 1 g of Citronellyl Formate and test Saponification Value
by saponification value measuring method in Flavoring Substances Tests and Acid
Value by Purity (4). Calculate the content by the following formula.
Content (%) ＝ Saponification 561.1 value – Acid value
× 184.28

257
 Cochineal Extract
INS No.: 120
CAS No.: 1343-78-8
Definition Dried bodies of Dactylopius coccus costa (Coccus cacti. Lnnaeus), which is
female coccus cati parasitic on catus (Nopalea coccinellifera), is extracted with aqueous
alcohol. Cochineal Extract is the concentrated solution obtained after removing the
alcohol from an aqueous, aqueous alcoholic or alcoholic extract of cochineal. The major
pigment component is carminic acid Dilutant, stabilizer, or solvent can be added for the
purpose of content adjustment and quality preservation.
Compositional Specifications of Cochineal Extract
Content Cochineal Extract should contain not less than 1.8% of carminic acid (C22H20O13
＝ 492.39).
Description Cochineal Extract is red～dark reddish brown liquid, lump, powder, or paste
having a slight characteristic odor.
Identification (1) Test Solution obtained in Content section shows a absorption maximum
at about 495 nm.
(2) 1 g of Cochineal Extract is mixed with 50 mL of 0.1 N hydrochloric acid, which is
filtered, if necessary. The filtrate is orange red in color. When it is alkalinized with
sodium hydroxide solution, it produced violet～red.
Purity (1) Arsenic : It should be no more than 1.3 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(2) Lead ： When 5.0 g of Cochineal Extract is tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content
should not be more than 2.0 ppm.
(3) Cadmium : When 5.0 g of Cochineal Extract is tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content
should not be more than 1.0 ppm.
(4) Mercury : When 0.1 g of Cochineal Extract is tested by Mercury Test Method, its
content should not be more than 1.0ppm.
(5) Protein : When 3 g of Cochineal Extract is precisely weighed, proceed as directed under
nitrogen determination method, multiply the content of nitrogen obtained from the test by
nitrogen factor 6.25 to measure the content of protein, the amount should not be more
than 2.2%.
(6) Methyl Alcohol : When Cochineal Extract is tested by Purity (5) for Paprika Extract
Pigments, the content should not be more than 150ppm.
(7) Salmonella : Cochineal Extract is tested by Microbe Test Methods for Salmonella in
General Test Methods, Food Code. It should be negative (-).
Assay About 800 mg of Cochineal Extract is precisely weighed and added with mixture
of 2N hydrochloric acid and water(97:3), and made to volume 1,000 mL, Test Solution.
Absorbance (A) of the Test Solution is measured using a mixture(97:3) of water and 2
N hydrochloric acid as the blank with 1cm cell at a maximum absorption about 495 nm.
258
The content (%) is calculated using the following equation. The amount of sample is
adjusted so that the absorbance of the Test Solution is within the range 0.2 to 0.25.
Content(%) 15A
×
100
＝ weight of the sample(mg) 0.262

(0.262 : absorbance of carminic acid solution (15 mg/l))

259
 Copper Chlorophyll

Synonyms: Copper phaeophytin; CI natural

green 3 INS No.: 141(i)
Compositional Specifications of Copper Chlorophyll
Description Copper Chlorophyll occurs as blue-black to green-black powder, flakes,
lumps, or viscous substances, having a characteristic odor.
Identification (1) Proceed as directed under (B) of Identification (1) in Sodium 「Copper
Chlorophyllin」.
(2) Dissolve 10 mg of Copper Chlorophyll in 50 mL of ether, add 2 mL of a solution of
sodium hydroxide in methanol (1→100), and shake. Equip with a reflux condenser,
and heat on a water bath for 30 minutes. Cool, perform extraction 35 times with 10
mL of water each time, combine the extracts, add phosphate buffer (pH 7.5) to make
200 mL, and measure the absorbance of this solution. The solution exhibits
absorption maxima at wavelengths of 403～407 nm and 630～640 nm. Taking the
absorbances at the absorption maxima as A1 and A2, respectively, A1/A2 should not be
more than 4.01.
Purity (1) Specific Absorbance : Accurately weigh about 0.1 g of Copper Chlorophyll,
dissolve in 50 mL of ether, add 10 mL of a solution of sodium hydroxide in methanol
(2→100), and shake. Equip with a reflux condenser, and heat on a water bath for 30
minutes. Cool, perform extraction four times with 20 mL of water each time, combine
the extracts, and add water to make exactly 100 mL. Filter this solution, measure
exactly 5.0 mL of the filtrate, add phosphate buffer (pH 7.5) to make exactly 100
mL. Quickly measure absorbance. When the absorbance at the maximum absorption band
near 405 nm and its value is converted into that of a dried form, ＝ 62.0 or higher.
For this procedure avoid direct sunlight, and use a light-resistant container.
(2) Inorganic Copper Salt : Weigh 1 g of Copper Chlorophyll, and dissolve in 60 mL of
acetone. Procedure Proceed as directed under Purity (8) in 「Sodium Copper
Chlorophyll」(Not more than 300 μg/g as Cu).
(3) Arsenic : It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(4) Lead : When 5.0 g of Copper Chlorophyll is tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content
should not be more than 5.0 ppm.
(5) Cadmium : When 5.0 g of Copper Chlorophyll is tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content
should not be more than 1.0 ppm.
(6) Mercury : When Copper Chlorophyll is tested by Mercury Limit Test, its content
should not be more than 1.0 ppm.
(8) Residual Solvent : When Copper Chlorophyll is tested by Purity (5) for 「Paprika
Extract Pigments」,
260
Acetone
Methyl alcohol
Not more than 50
Ethyl alcohol ppm(individual or total if
combined)
Isopropyl alcohol
Hexane
Methylene Chloride Not more than 10 ppm
(8) Chlorophyllin Salt : Weigh 1 g of Copper Chlorophyll, dissolve in 30 mL of ether,
add 20 mL of water, and shake. After standing, filter the water layer through a filter
paper moistened with water. The filtrate should be colorless.
Loss on Drying When Copper Chlorophyll is dried for 2 hours at 105℃, the weight loss
should not be more than 3%.

261
 Copper Gluconate
[CH2OH(CHOH)4COO]2Cu
Chemical Formula: C12H22CuO14
Molecular Weight: 453.84 CAS No.: 527-09-3

Compositional Specifications of Copper Gluconate

Content Copper Gluconate should contain within a range of 98.0～102.0% of copper
gluconate (C12H22CuO14).
Description Copper Gluconate occurs as a light blue powder.
Identification (1) Copper Gluconate solution (1→20) responds to the test for Cupric Salts
in Identification.
(2) Proceed as directed under Identification (2) for 「Sodium Gluconate」.
Purity (1) Lead : When 5.0 g of Copper Gluconate is tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content
should not be more than 5.0 ppm.
(2) Arsenic : It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(3) Reducing Materials : Approximately 1 g of Sodium Gluconate is weighed and
transferred into a 250 mL Erlenmeyer flask. 10 mL of water is added to dissolve the
solid and 25 mL of alkaline copper citrate solution. A small beaker is placed on top
of the flask, which is gently heated for precisely 5 minutes. It is then rapidly cooled
to room temperature. To this solution, 25 mL of diluted acetic acid (1→10), 10 mL of
0.1 N iodine solution, 10 mL of dilute hydrochloric acid, and 3 mL of starch solution
are added. The resulting solution is titrated with 0.1N sodium thiosulfate solution until
the blue color disappears. The content of reduced materials should not be more than
1.0%.
Content of reducing matter (as glucose)(%) (V1N1 - V2N2) × 27
× 100
= weight of the sample(mg)

V1 : Consumed amount of 0.1 N iodine solution (mL)

N1 : Normality of 0.1 N iodine solution
V2 : Consumed amount of 0.1 N sodium thiosulfate solution (mL)
N2 : Normality of 0.1 N sodium thiosulfate solution
27 : Experimental corresponding amount for D-glucose
Assay Accurately weigh about 1.5 g of Copper Gluconate, transfer into a 250 mL
Erlenmeyer flask, dissolve in 100 mL of water, add 2 mL of acetic acid and 5 g of
potassium iodide, shake well. Titrate this solution with 0.1 N sodium thiosulfate until
the color of the solution becomes to a yellow color, dissolve 2 g of ammonium
thiocyanate, and titrate again until the color of the solution becomes to an opaque
color. (Indicator : Starch solution)

262
1 mL of 0.1 N sodium thiosulfate = 45.38 mg of C12H22CuO14

263
 Cross-Linked Sodium Carboxymethyl Cellulose

INS: 468
Synonyms: Croscarmellose sodium; Cross-
linked cellulose gum; Cross-linked CAS No.: 74811-65-7
sodium CMC

Compositional Specifications of Cross-Linked Sodium Carboxymethyl Cellulose

Description Cross-Linked Sodium Carboxymethyl Cellulose is a slightly hycroscopic, whit
to greyish-white, odourless powder.
Identification (1) Cross-Linked Sodium Carboxymethyl Cellulose is practically insoluble in
acetone, in ethanol and in toluene.
(2) Add 1g of Cross-Linked Sodium Carboxymethyl Cellulose to 50 mL water and stir
well to make a suspension. To 1mL of this suspension, add 1mL of water and 5
drops of freshly prepared solution of 1-naphtol in methanol(1→25) and gently add
2mL of sulfuric acid along a wall of the test tube. A red-purple colour develops at
the interface.
(3) Add 1g of Cross-Linked Sodium Carboxymethyl Cellulose to 100mL of a solution of
methylene blue(1→250,000), stir well and allow to stand. Blue cotton-like precipitates
appear.
(4) The residue obtained from igniting 1 g of Sodium Carboxymethyl Cellulose at the
temperature of 550-600℃for 3hours responds to the test for Sodium salt.
Purity (1) pH : Add 1g of Cross-Linked Sodium Carboxymethyl Cellulose to 100mL
water, and stir for 5 minutes. The pH of the supernatant liquid is between 5.0 and 7.0.
(2) Water-soluble substances : Weigh accurately 10g of Cross-Linked Sodium
Carboxymethyl Cellulose, disperse in 800mL of water by stirring for 1minute every
10 minutes during 30 minutes, and to allow to stand for 1hour and centrifuge(If
necessary). Filter by suction the solution and collect about 150mL of the filtrate.
Heat to concentrate 100mL of this liquid avoiding to dryness, then dry the residue at
100-150℃. Weigh the mass of the residue accurately. Calculate the amount of the
water soluble substance by the following formula. The amount should be not more
than 10%.
%(%) water soluble substances = M × 800
W
M : Weight of the residue(g)
W : Weight of the sample(g)
(3) Degree of substitution : Weigh accruately 1g of Cross-Linked Sodium
Carboxymethyl Cellulose, put in a 500mL glass-stoppered conical flask and add
300mL of sodium chloride test solution. Add 25mL of 0.1M sodium hydroxide solution
into the flask, stopper flask, and allow to stand for 5minute shaking occasionally. Add
264
 5drops of m-cresol purple test solution, then add exactly 15mL of 0.1M hydrochloric
acid using a buret, stopper the flask, and shake. If the color of the solution is purple,
add 1mL portions of 0.1M hydrochloric acid using the buret until the solution
becomes yellow, shaking after each addition. Titrate with 0.1M sodium hydroxide
solution until the color changes from yellow to purple. Perform a blank determination
in the same manner. Calculate the content of carboxymethyl groups(Sum of the
degrees of substitution of acid-carboxymethyl group(A) and sodium-carboxymethyl
group(S)) per anhydroglucose unit using the formula, the content on the dired basis
should not less than 0.2 and not more than 1.5.
A = 7102 – 1150M412M - 80C
S = (162 + 58A)C
7102 – 80C
M : Amount(mmol)of sodium hydroxide required for neutralisation of 1g of sample,
calculated on the dried basis
C : The value(%) obtained in Residue on ignition
m-cresol purple test solution : Dissolve 0.1g of m-cresol purple in minimum
volume of alcohol and dilute to 100mL with water.
(4) Sodium chloride and Sodiium glycolate : Sum of sodium chloride and sodium
glycolate is not more than 0.5%, calculated on the dried basis.
(i) Sodium chloride : Weigh accruately 5g of Cross-Linked Sodium Carboxymethyl
Cellulose, add 50mL of water and 5mL of 30% hydrogen peroxide, and heat on a
water bath for 20 minutes with occasional stirring. After cooling, add 100mL of water
and 10mL of nitric acid, and titrite with 0.05M silver nitrate solution(potentiomethric
titration). Perform a blank determination in the same manner.
1mL of 0.05M silver nitrate solution = 2.922mg of NaCl
(ii) Sodium glycolate : Weigh 0.5g of Cross-Linked Sodium Carboxymethyl Cellulose,
add 2mL of acetic acid and 5mL of water, and stir for 15 minutes. Add gradually 50
mL of acetone with stirring, then add 1g of sodium chloride, stir for 3 minutes, and
filter through a filter paper moistened with acetone. Wash the residue thoroughly with
30mL of acetone, combine the filtrate and washings, add acetone to make exactly
100mL. Allow to stand for 24 hours and use the clear supernatant as the test stock
solution. Separately, dissolve 0.100g of glycolic acid in water to make 200mL. Pipet
0.5mL, 1mL, 2mL, 3mL, and 4mL of this solution, add water to make them exactly
5mL, then add 5mL of acetic acid and acetone to make exactly 100mL, and designate
them standard stock solution(1), standard stock solution(2), standard stock solution(3),
standard stock solution(4), and standard stock solution(5), respectively. Pipet 2mL
265
 each of the test stock solution and the standard stock solutions(1), (2), (3), (4), and
(5). Heat them in a water bath for 20 minutes to evaporate acetone. After cooling,
add exactly 5mL of 2,7-dihydroxynaphthalene test solution, mix, then add 15mL of
2,7-dihydroxynaphthalene. Mix and cover the mouth of the vessel with aluminium foil.
Heat in a water bath for 20minutes. After cooling, add sulfuric acid to make exactly
25mL, mix, and designate them test solution, standard solution(1), standard
solution(2), standard solution(3), standard solution(4), and standard solution(5),
respectively. Seperately, add acetone to 10mL of mixture of water and acetic
acid(1:1) to make exactly 100mL, and proceed with exactly 2mL of this solution in
the same manner as described for the test solution. Use the solution as the blank
solution. Using test solution, standard solutions(1), (2), (3), (4), and (5) as a
reference, determine the absorbances, AT, AS1, AS2, AS3, AS4, and AS5 of the test
solution, and the standard solutions (1), (2), (3), (4), and (5), respectively, at 540 nm
using 1cm cells. Read the corresponding mg of glycolic acid in the 100mL test
solution from the calibration curve. Then, calculate the soldium glycolate content from
the following formula:
% Sodium glycolate = Weight of theX ×sample(on
100 × 1.2890
the dried basis)
X : mg of glycolic acid read from the calibration curve
(5) Arsenic : It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(6) Lead : When 5.0 g of Cross-Linked Sodium Carboxymethyl Cellulose is tested by
Atomic Absorption Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission
Spectroscopy, its content should not be more than 2.0 ppm.
(7) Cadmium : When 5.0 g of Cross-Linked Sodium Carboxymethyl Cellulose is tested
by Atomic Absorption Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission
Spectroscopy, its content should not be more than 1.0 ppm.
(8) Mercury : When Cross-Linked Sodium Carboxymethyl Cellulose is tested by
Mercury Limit Test, its content should not be more than 1.0 ppm.
Loss on Drying When Cross-Linked Sodium Carboxymethyl Cellulose is dried at 105℃
for 3 hours, the weight loss should not be more than 6.0%.
Residue on Ignition When thermogravimetric analysis is done with 2 g of Cross-Linked
Sodium Carboxymethyl Cellulose, the amount of residue on the dry basis should be
14.0∼28.0 %.

266
 Crude Magnesium Chloride(Sea Water)
Definition Crude magnesium chloride (Sea Water and Salted Groundwater) is obtained by
extracting and separating potassium chloride and sodium chloride from sea water, and
its main ingredient is magnesium chloride. In the case of Salted Groundwater, it should
be appropriate for the criteria for water quality of Salted Groundwater in「Law for the
Management of Drinking Water」(The Law of Ministry of Environment).
Compositional Specifications of Crude Magnesium Chloride (Sea Water)
Content The sample contains 12.0～30.0% as crude magnesium chloride (MgCl2=95.21).
Description Crude magnesium chloride (Sea Water) is colorless∼pale yellow liquid with
bitter taste.
Identification (1) When sodium hydroxide solution is added to Crude Magnesium Chloride
(Sea Water), white gel phase precipitate is formed. Iodine TS is added to some of
this solution, the precipitate turns dark brown. Also, although excess sodium
hydroxide TS is added to some of the residue in the solution, precipitate doesn't
dissolve.
(2) Crude Magnesium Chloride (Sea Water) shows the reaction (A) for Chlorides in
Identification Tests.
Purity (1) Sulfate : Accurately weighted 0.25 g of Crude Magnesium Chloride (Sea
Water) and dissolve in water to make 100 mL. When 2 mL of this solution is tested
for sulfates, the content should not be more than the amount that corresponds to 0.5
mL of 0.01 N sulfuric acid.
(2) Bromide : Accurately weigh 1.0 g of Crude Magnesium Chloride (Sea Water), and
dissolve in water to make 500 mL. Take 10 mL of this solution, make 100 mL with
water. Again, 2 mL of this solution is taken, 3 mL of water, 2 mL of diluted phenol
red TS and 1 mL of chloramine T solution(1→10,000) are added, and immediately
mixed. Then it is allow to stand for 2 minutes, 0.15 mL of 0.1N sodium thiosulfate is
added, mixed, and water is added to make 10 mL, test solution. Separately,
potassium bromide is dried at 110℃ for 4 hours, 2.979g of the solid is accurately
weighted, water is added to make 1,000 mL, again 2 mL of this solution is accurately
taken, and water is added to make 1,000 mL. 5 mL of this solution is taken, 2 mL of
diluted phenol red TS and 1 mL of chloramine T solution(1→10,000) are added,
immediately shaken and mixed. It is proceeded in the same manner as the test
solution, reference solution. Using water as a reference, absorbance of the test
solution and reference solution is measured at 590 nm, then the absorbance of test
solution should not be higher than that of reference solution.
Diluted phenol red TS
Solution 1 : To 0.033g of phenol red, 1.5 mL of sodium hydroxide solution(2→25)
and water are added and dissolved to make 100 mL.
Solution 2 : To 0.025g of ammonium sulfate, 235 mL of water is added, dissolved,
105 mL of sodium hydroxide solution(2→25) and 135 mL of acetic acid(3→25) are
267
 added and mixed well.
10 mL of solution 1 and 190 mL of solution 2 are mixed well. If needed, sodium
hydroxide solution(2→25) or acetic acid (3→25) is added to adjust pH 4.7.
(3) Zinc: 4 g of Crude Magnesium Chloride (Sea Water) is accurately weighted, water
is added to make 40mL, test solution. 30 mL of test solution is taken, 5 drops of
acetic acid and 2 mL of potassium ferrocy anide solution(1→20) are added, shaken,
mixed, and allow to stand for 10 minutes. The solution should not be more turbid
than the following reference solution. To prepare reference solution, pipette 14mL of
zinc standard solution, and add 10 mL of test solution and water to make 30mL. Add
5 drops of acetic acid and 2 mL of potassium ferrocyanide solution(1→20) to this
solution, shake and mix, and allow to stand for 10 minutes. (not more than 70 ppm
as Zinc)
Zinc standard solution : Accurately weigh 4.4g of zinc sulfate, dissolve with 1,000 mL
water. Pipette 10 mL of this solution into a 1000 mL-volumetric flask with water to
volume. 1mL of this solution contain 0.01 mg of zinc.
(4) Calcium : Accurately weigh 20 mL of test solution for assay, add water to make
100 mL. Add 0.2 mL of tartaric acid solution(1→5), then 10 mL of triethanol amine
solution(3→10) and 10 mL of potassium hydroxide solution (1→10). Allow to stand
for 5 minute, immediately titrate with 0.01 M EDTA determing endpoint indicator :
0.1 g of 2-oxy-1-(2'-oxy-4'-sulfo-1'-naphthylazo)-3-naphthoesan, and express the
consumed volume as b (mL). At that time, the red-purple color of the solution
completely disappears and the solution becomes blue. When the content of calcium
calculate, it should not be more than 4.0% as calcium.

Content of calcium(Ca)(%) =
×
b 0.4008
Weight of sample(g)

(5) Sodium : 1.0 g of Crude Magnesium Chloride (Sea Water) is accurately weighted,
water is added, and dissolved to make 1,000 mL. Again, 10 mL of this solution is
taken and water is added to make 200 mL, test solution. Separately, sodium chloride
is dried at 130℃ for 2 hours, 2.542 g of the solid is accurately weighted, water is
added to make 1,000 mL. 2 mL of this solution is accurately taken and water is
added to make 1,000 mL, reference solution. When test solution and reference
solution are tested by Flame Atomic Absorption Spectrophotometry under following
operation condition, the absorbance of test solution should not be higher than that of
reference solution (not more than 4.0% as sodium).
Operation Condition
Light source lamp : Hollow cathode sodium lamp
Wavelength : 589.0nm
Combustible support gas : air
Combustible gas : acetylene
268
 (6) Potassium : Proceed the test by using test solution in Purity(5). Separately,
potassium chloride is dried at 105℃ for 2 hours, 1.907g of this solid is accurately
weighted, and water is added to make 1,000 mL. 3 mL of this solution is taken, and
water is added to make exactly 1,000 mL, reference solution. When test solution and
reference solution are tested by Flame Atomic Absorption Spectrophotometry under
following operation condition, the absorbance of test solution should not be higher
than that of reference solution (not more than 6.0% as potassium).
Operating Conditions
Light source lamp : Hollow cathode potassium lamp
Wavelength : 766.5nm
Combustible support gas : air
Combustible gas : acetylene
(7) Arsenic : It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(8) Lead : Crude Magnesium Chloride is tested by Purity (2) for Sodium
Metaphosphate(not more than 4.0 ppm).
Assay Accurately weigh 2 g of Crude Magnesium Chloride (Sea Water) and add water
to make 200mL, test solution. To 5 mL of this solution, 50 mL of water and 5 mL of
ammonia-ammonium chloride buffer (pH 10.7), titrate with 0.01 M EDTA solution
determing endpoint (indicator : 2 drops of Eriochrome black T solution), and measure
the consumed volume as a (mL). At that time the red color of the solution becomes
blue. Calculate the content under following equation with using the consumed volume b
(mL) obtained by Purity(4).

Content of magnesium chloride(MgCl2) (%)

(a - 0.25b) × 0.952 × 200
Weight of sample(g) ×100
= 1,000 × 5 ×
1 mL of 0.01M E.D.T.A solution = 0.952mg MgCl2

269
 Cupric Sulfate
Chemical Formula: CuSO4‧5H2O

Molecular Weight: 249.69 INS No.: 519

Synonyms: Copper sulfate CAS No.: 7758-99-8

Compositional Specifications of Cupric Sulfate

Content Cupric Sulfate should contain within a range of 98.5～104.5% of cupric sulfate
(CuSO4ㆍ5H2O).
Description Cupric Sulfate occurs as a blue cristalline powder, powder or as deep blue
crystals.
Identification Cupric Sulfate responds to the tests for Cupric Salt and Sulfate in
Identification.
Purity (1) Clarity and Color of Solution : When 1 g of Cupric Sulfate is dissolved in 20
mL of water, the solution should be almost clear.
(2) Free Acid : Weigh 1 g of Cupric Sulfate, dissolve in 20 mL of water, and add 2
drops of methyl orange solution. A green color develops.
(3) Arsenic : It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(4) Lead : When 5.0 g of Cupric Sulfate is tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content
should not be more than 10 ppm.
(5) Alkali Metals and Alkali Earth Metals : Weigh 6 g of Cupric Sulfate, dissolve in 150
mL of water, add 3 mL of sulfuric acid, and pass through hydrogen sulfide while
warming to about 70℃ until the solution is saturated. Cool, add water to make 280 mL,
and filter. To the filtrate, add water to make 300 mL. Measure 100 mL of this
solution, evaporate to dryness on a sand bath, ignite at 450～550℃ to constant
weight, and weigh the residue. The amount of residue should not be more than 4 mg.
Assay Accurately weigh about 0.7 g of Cupric Sulfate, transfer into a flask with
ground-glass stopper, dissolve in about 100 mL of water, add 2 mL of acetic acid and
5 g potassium iodide, immediately stopper tightly, and allow to stand in a dark place
for 5 minutes. Titrate this solution with 0.1 N sodium thiosulfate until the color of the
solution change to light yellow color, dissolve 2 g of ammonium thiocyanate, add 3 mL
of starch solution, and titrate again with 0.1 N sodium thiosulfate until the color of the
solution changes to an opaque color. Perform a blank test in the same manner.
1 mL of 0.1 N sodium thiosulfate = 24.97 mg of CuSO4ㆍ5H2O

270
 Curcumin
INS No.: 100(i), 100(ii)
Synonyms: Turmeric oleoresin; Turmeric CAS No.: 458-37-7
yellow 8024-37-1

Definition This is a pigment obtained by extraction(ethanol, oils or organic

solvent(extraction solvents for spices and oleo resins) of tumeric i.e., the ground
rhizomes of Curcuma longa Linné. The major pigment is curcumin (C21H20O6 ＝
368.37). Dilutant, stabilizer, or solvent can be added for the purpose of color value
adjustment and quality preservation.
Compositional Specifications of Turmeric Oleoresin (Curcumin)
Content Color value ( ) of Turmeric Oleoresin should not be less than the indicated
value.
Description Turmeric Oleoresin is yellow～dark reddish brown liquid, lump, powder, or
paste with a slight characteristic odor.
Identification Turmeric Oleoresin is dissolved in ethyl alcohol (if it is water soluble, it is
dissolved in small amount of water and then ethyl alcohol is added). The
concentration is adjusted so that it has almost same tone of color as potassium
bichromate solution (1→1,000) (Test Solution).
(1) Test Solution is characterized yellow color and a green fluorescence.
(2) Test Solution produced red when 2 mL of sulfuric acid is added to 5 mL of test
solution and stirred.
(3) A piece of filter paper is dipped in Test Solution and dried. A few drops of
hydrochloric acid, followed by a few drops of boric acid solution (1→100) are
dropped onto the piece of filter paper. Upon drying by heating, it is developed
cherry red. When a few drops of ammonia solution is added, it is changed blue.
Purity (1) Arsenic : It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(2) Lead : When 5.0 g of Turmeric Oleoresin is tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content
should not be more than 2.0 ppm.
(3) Residual Solvents : When Turmeric Oleoresin is tested by Purity (5) for 「Paprika
Extract Pigments」,
Methylene chloride, Trichloro ethylene Not more than 30ppm(single or the sum of both)
Acetone Not more than 30ppm
Isopropyl alcohol Not more than 30ppm
Methyl alcohol Not more than 50ppm
Hexane Not more than 25ppm
Assay Appropriate amount of Turmeric Oleoresin is precisely weighed so that the
absorbance is within 0.3～0.7 and dissolved in ethyl alcohol to make 100 mL. 1 mL of
this solution is diluted to 100 mL with ethyl alcohol (Test Solution). If necessary, the
271
solution is centrifuged and the supernatant is used. Using ethyl alcohol as a blank
solution, absorbance A of the sample is measured at the maximum absorption at 425
nm in a 1cm cell. Color value is obtained using the following equation.
A × 1,000
Color Value( ) ＝
weight of the sample(g)

272
 Curdlan
INS No.: 424
Synonyms: beta-1,3-Glucan CAS No.: 54724-00-4

Definition Curdlan is obtained by separation and purification of polysaccharide produced

from Alcaligenes faecal and Agrobacterium.
Compositional Specifications of Curdlan
Description Curdlan is white or nearly white powder.
Identification (1) When 10 mL of an aqueous suspension (1→50) of Curdlan is heated in
a water bath, it forms a gel.
(2) 10 mL of sulfuric acid (2→5) is added to 10 mL of an aqueous suspension (1→50)
of Curdlan, which is heated for 30 minutes in a water bath. After cooling, 1 mL of
this suspension is diluted with 9 mL of water. While heating, it is neutralized with
barium carbonate. When 2 mL of Fehling solution is added to 1 mL of the
supernatant, which is boiled, red～dark red precipitates are formed.
Purity (1) Arsenic : It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(2) Lead : When 5.0 g of Curdlan is tested by Atomic Absorption Spectrophotometry or
Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content should not be more
than 0.5 ppm.
(3) Nitrogen : When Curdlan is tested by nitrogen determination method in nitrogen
determination method, the amount should not be more than 0.3%.
(4) Total Viable Aerobic Count : When Curdlan is tested by Microbe Test Methods for
Total Viable Aerobic Count (Number of General Germs) in General Test Method in
「Standards and Specifications for Foods」, it should not be more than 1,000 colonies
per 1 g
(5) E. Coli : When Curdlan is tested by Microbe Test Methods for E. Coli in General
Test Method 「Standards and Specifications for Foods」, it should be negative (-).
Residue on Ignition When Residue on Ignition is done with Curdlan, the amount of
residue should not be more than 6.0%.
Loss on Drying When Curdlan is dried for 5 hours at 60℃ under vacuum, the weight
loss should not be more than 10.0%.

273
 Cyclodextrin

Chemical Formula:
α-cyclodextrin (C6H10O5)6
β-cyclodextrin (C6H10O5)7 INS No.: 457, 459, 458
γ-cyclodextrin (C6H10O5)8
Molecular Weight: 972.85 CAS No.: 10016-20-3
1134.99 7585-39-9
1297.14 17465-86-0

Definition (1) This is produced by the action of cyclodextrin producing enzyme on

hydrolyzed starch. This is an cyclic oligosaccharide consisting of 6, 7, or 8 α-1,4 linked
D-glucopyranosyl unit. There are α-cyclodextrin, β-cyclodextrin, and γ-cyclodextrin.
Each of them is called α-cyclodextrin, β-cyclodextrin, and γ-cyclodextrin.
α-cyclodextrin : It is a cyclic oligosaccharide consisting of six D-glucose units. It is
obtained by enzymetic treatment of starch
β-cyclodextrin : It is a cyclic oligosaccharide consisting of seven D-glucose units. It is
obtained by enzymetic treatment of starch
γ-cyclodextrin : It is a cyclic oligosaccharide consisting of eight D-glucose units. It is
obtained by enzymetic treatment of starch
Compositional Specifications of Cyclodextrin
Content When Cyclodextrin is dried and analyzed quantitatively, it should contain not less
than 98.0% of each α-cyclodextrin(C6H10O5)6, β-cyclodextrin(C6H10O5)7, and γ
-cyclodextrin (C6H10O5)8, respectively.
Description Cyclodextrin is odorless, white crystallite or crystalline powder having a
slight sweet taste.
Identification 0.2 g of Cyclodextrin is dissolved in 1 mL of 0.1 N iodine solution by
heating in a water bath. When it allowed to stand at room temperature, α-cyclodextrin,
β-cyclodextrin, γ-cyclodextrin, maltosyl-α-cyclodextrin, maltosyl-β-cyclodextrin,
maltosyl-γ-cyclodextrin forms bluish violet, yellowish brown, reddish brown, bluish
violet, yellowish brown, and reddish brown precipitates are formed, respectively.
Purity (1) Clarity of Solution : 0.5 mg of sample is dissolved in 50 mL water, it should
be colorless and clear.
(2) Specific Rotation : Approximately 1 g of pre-dried sample is precisely weighed and
dissolved in water so that the total volume becomes 100 mL. The optical rotation of the
solution should be α-cyclodextrin ＝ +147.0∼+152.0°, β- cyclodextrin ＝ +160.0∼
+164.4°, γ-cyclodextrin ＝ +173.0∼+178.0°
(3) Chloride : When 0.5 g of Cyclodextrin is tested for chlorides, the amount should
274
 not be more than or equal to the chloride content of 0.25 mL of 0.01 N hydrochloric
acid.
(4) Arsenic : It should be no more than 1.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(5) Lead : When 5.0 g of Cyclodextrin is tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content
should not be more than 1.0 ppm.
(6) Residual Solvent : 0.25 g of Cyclodextrin is precisely weighed, 10 mL of water is
added and diffused with ultrasonic waves for 10 minutes, test solution. This solution
is transferred into 25 mL of frit sparger, and analyzed with Purge and Trap and Gas
chromatograph. To 10 mL of water, 0.25 mL of mixed standard solution is added,
analyzed with Purge and Trap and Gas chromatograph, then limited to β-cyclodextrin,
the amount of toluene and trichloroethylene should not be more than 1.0 ppm,
respectively.
Mixed standard solution : 50 mg each of toluene and trichloroethylene is precisely
weighed and dissolved in methanol to make 50 mL, 0.1 mL of this solution is taken
again, and water is added to make 100 mL, mixed standard solution.(1 mL of this
solution contains 1μg of toluene, and 1μg of trichloroethylene, respectively).
Operation Condition
Purge and Trap
Trap : Tenax TA or its equivalent
Purge time : 11 minutes
Desorption temperature and time : 250℃, 4 minutes
Cryo focus temperature : -150℃
Bake temperature and time : 260℃, 10 minutes
Gas chromatography
Column : DB-1(30m × 0.32μm) or its equivalent
Detector : (Hydrogen) Flame Ionization Detector (FID)
Column Temperature : hold at 40℃ for 3 minutes and is raised to 220℃ at a rate of
40℃ per minute
Detector Temperature : 250℃
Carrier gas and flow rate : Nitrogen or Helium
Loss on Drying When Cyclodextrin is dried for 4 hours at 105℃ under a reduced
pressure of 5 mmHg, the weight loss should not be more than 12%.
Residue on Ignition When residue on ignition is done with 1 g of Cyclodextrin, the
amount of residue should not be more than 0.1%.
Assay (1) After drying, approximately 0.1 g of Cyclodextrin is accurately weighed and
dissolved in 10 mL of water (Test Solution). Separately, Standard for each of α-, β-,
γ-cyclodextrin is dried. This standards are accurately weighed 0.1 g, and dissolved in
10mL of water, respectively (Standard Solution). 10μl each of Standard Solutions and
Test Solution is injected into liquid chromatography under the following operation
275
 conditions. The content of cyclodextrin is calculated by the following formula.
Au × Ws
Content(%) = × 100
As × Wu

Au ：Peak area of Test Solution

As ：Peak area of Standard Solution
Ws ：Amount of standard taken (g)
Wu ：Amount of sample taken(g)
Operation Conditions
-Detector : Differential refractometer (RI Detector)
-Column : YMC-Pack Polyamine II(4.6mm×250mm) or its equivalent
-Column Temperature : 40℃
-Mobile Phase : Acetonitrile:Water(60:40)
-Flow Rate : 1.0 mL/min
-Injection volume : 10 μL

276
 Cyclodextrin Syrup
Definition Cyclodextrin Syrup is a starch hydrolysate by purifying and concentrating
aqueous solution (containing cyclodextrin), which is prepared by treating starch latex
with cyclodextrin producing enzyme. It contains sugars such as α-cyclodextrin, β
-cyclodextrin, γ-cyclodextrin, glucose, and maltose, where 6, 7, or 8 molecules of
glucose form a ring via α-1,4 glucoside bonding. Dried cyclodextrin syrup also falls
within this category.
Compositional Specifications of Cyclodextrin Syrup
Content Dried Cyclodextrin Syrup should be more than the indicated content of
cyclodextrin under Assay.
Description Cyclodextrin Syrup is colorless transparent viscous liquid or white powder.
It is sweet but scentless. It tends to form white precipitates and turn turbid in cold
places.
Identification (1) When 0.5 g of Cyclodextrin Syrup is dissolved in 1 mL of 0.1 Ｎ iodine
solution by heating in a water bath and set aside at room temperature, yellowish
brown precipitates are formed.
(2) 0.5 g of Cyclodextrin Syrup is dissolved in 3 mL of water by heating in a water
bath. When 1 mL of trichloroethylene is added to this solution and stirred vigorously,
it turns white and turbid.
Purity (1) Clarity of Solution ： 2 g of Cyclodextrin Syrup is dissolved in 50 mL of
water by heating. The resulting should be colorless and clear (or better).
(2) Arsenic : It should be no more than 1.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(3) Lead : When 5.0 g of Cyclodextrin Syrup is tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content
should not be more than 1.0 ppm.
(4) Chloride ： Weight 0.5 g of Cyclodextrin Syrup for Chloride Limit Test. The
content of chloride should be equal to or less than the amount that corresponds to
0.4 mL of 0.01 N hydrochloric acid.
Loss on Drying When Cyclodextrin Syrup is dried for 4 hours at 105℃ under a reduced
pressure less than 5 mmHg, the weight loss should not be more than 25%.
Residue on Ignition When thermogravimetric analysis is done with 1 g of Cyclodextrin
Syrup, the amount of residue should not be more than 0.05%.
Assay Cyclodextrin Syrup (corresponding to 0.5 g of cyclodextrin) is precisely weighted
and diluted to 50 mL with water. 20 mL of this solution is heated for 10 minutes in a
water bath and cooled. 2 mL of glucoamylase (10 IU/mL) is added to the solution,
which is then reacted for 1 hour in a 40℃ water bath. The reaction mixture is heated
for 10 minutes in a water bath and filtered. The filtrate is cooled to room temperature
and diluted to 25 mL with water (Test Solution). Separately, α-, β-, γ-cyclodextrin
standards are dried. 0.1 g each is weighted and dissolved in water to bring the total
volume to 20 mL (Mixed Standard Solution). 10 μ each of Test Solution and Mixed
Standard Solution is injected into a high speed liquid chromatography under the
277
 following operation conditions. Peak areas of α-, β-, γ-cyclodextrin are obtained for
Test Solution and Mixed Standard Solution. The contents of three components are
obtained by the following equation and the content of cyclodextrin is obtained from the
sum of the three.
Content of cyclodextrin (CD) (%) = Content sum of α-CD + β-CD +γ-CD (%)
concentrate of α-CD standard α-CD peak area
100
Content of solution(ppm) × 50 × 25 in test solution
α-CD(%) ＝ × peak area of ×
weight of the sample(g) × 20 α- CD mixed 106
standard solution

concentrate of β-CD standard β-CD peak area 100

Content of solution(ppm) × 50 × 25
×
in test solution
peak area of ×
β-CD(%) =
weight of the sample(g) × 20 β-CD mixed 106
standard solution

concentrate of γ-CD standard γ-CD peak area

100
Content of solution(ppm) × 50 × 25
×
in test solution
peak area of ×
γ-CD(%) =
weight of the sample(g) × 20 γ-CD mixed 106
standard

Operation Conditions
-Detector : Differential refractometer (RI Detector)
-Column : YMC-Pack Polyamine II(4.6mm×250mm) or its equivalent
-Column Temperature : 40℃
-Mobile Phase : Acetonitrile:Water(60:40)
-Flow Rate : 1.0 mL/min
-Injection volume : 10 μL

278
 L-Cysteine Monohydrochloride

Chemical Formula: C3H7NO2S‧HCl‧H2O INS No.: 920

Molecular Weight: 175.63 CAS No.: 7048-04-6

Compositional Specifications of L-Cysteine Monohydrochloride

Content L-Cystein Monohydrochloride, when calculated on the dried basis, should contain
within a range of 98.0～102.0% of L-cysteine monohydrochloride (C3H7NO2S․HCl=157.62).
Description L-Cystein Monohydrochloride occurs as colorless to white crystals or as a
white crystalline powder, having a characteristic odor and taste.
Identification (1) To 5 mL of L-Cysteine Monohydrochloride solution (1→1,000), add 0.5
mL of pyridine and 1 mL of ninhydrin solution (1→100), and heat for 5 minutes. A
purple to purple-brown color develops.
(2) To 10 mL of L-Cystein Monohydrochloride solution (1→1,000), add 2 mL of sodium
hydroxide solution and 2 drops of sodium nitroprusside solution. A purple-red color
develops.
(3) To 10 mL of L-Cysteine Monohydrochloride solution (1→50), add 1 mL of hydrogen
peroxide, and heat in a water bath for 10 minutes. The solution respond to the test
for Chloride Limit Test (2) in Identification.
Purity (1) Clarity and Color of Solution : When 1 g of L-Cystein Monohydrochloride is
dissolved in 20 mL of water, the solution should be colorless and should not be
more than clear.
(2) Specific Rotation : Approximately 4 g of L-Cystein Monohydrochloride is precisely
weighed, which is dissolved in 1 N hydrochloric acid so that the total volume becomes 50
mL. When optical rotation of the solution is measured, it should be ＝ +5.0∼+8.0°
(3) Arsenic : It should be no more than 2.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(4) Lead : When 5.0 g of L-Cystein Monohydrochloride is tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content
should not be more than 5.0 ppm.
(5) Cystine : Weigh 100 mg of L-Cysteine Monohydrochloride, dissolve in 50 mL of
N-ethylmaleimide solution (1→50), and allow to stand for 2 hours. Use this solution
as the test solution. Measure 5 μl the test solution, perform Paper Chromatography
using an n-butyl alcohol, glacial acetic acid, and water mixture (5:1:2) as the
developing solvent. Only one spot should be observed. For the filter paper, use a No.
2 filter paper for chromatography. Stop the development when the developing solvent
front rises about 30 cm. Air-dry, then dry at 100℃ for 20 minutes, spray with a
279
 solution of ninhydrin saturated n-butyl alcohol (1→500), and heat at 100℃ for 5
minutes to develop a color. Observe under natural light. Reference solution is not
used.
Loss on Drying L-Cystein Monohydrochloride is dried for 24 hours in a vacuum
desiccator (silica gel) and the weight loss should be within a range of 8∼12%.
Residue on Ignition When thermogravimetric analysis is done with L-Cystein
Monohydrochloride 1 g in a quartz or porcelain crucible, the amount of residues should
not be more than 0.1%.
Assay Dissolve 0.25 g of L-Cysteine Monohydrochloride, previously dried and accurately
weighed, in 20 mL of water, and add 4 g of potassium iodide to dissolve in this
solution. To this solution, add 5 mL of diluted hydrochloric acid and 25 mL of 0.1 N
iodine, and allow to stand in ice water for 20 minutes in a dark place. Titrate the
excess iodine with 0.1 N sodium thiosulfate solution (indicator: starch solution).
Separately, perform a blank test by the same procedure.
0.1 N iodine 1 mL = 15.76 mg of C3H7NO2S․HCI

280
 L-Cystine

Chemical Formula: C6H12N2O4S2 INS No.: 921

Molecular Weight: 240.30 CAS No.: 56-89-3

Compositional Specifications of L-Cystine

Content L-Cystine, when calculated on dried basis for 3 hours in a desiccator with
phosphorous pentoxide, should contain within a range of 98.0∼102.0% of L-Cystine
(C6H12N2O4S2).
Description L-Cystine is white crystal or crystalline powder having a characteristic odor.
It is no taste or has a characteristic taste.
Identification (1) To 5 mL of L-Cysteine saturated solution, add 1 mL of ninhydrin
solution(1→50), and heat for 3 minutes. A purple color develops.
(2) To 3mL of 2N hydrochloric acid (1→30), add 0.04 g of zinc powder and heat in a
water bath for 10 minutes. If there is need to cool, do cooling and filtering it. Add
10 mL of sodium hydroxide solution(1→20) and shake it to mix. When 1 drop of
sodium nitroprusside solution is added, a purple-red color develops.
Purity (1) Clarity and Color of Solution : When 1 g of L-Cystein is dissolved in 20 mL
of 1N hydrochloric acid, the solution should be colorless and clear.
(2) Acidity, and Alkalinity : pH of L-Cystine saturated solution should be within a
range of 5.0~6.5.
(3) Specific Rotation : 2 g of pre-dried L-Cystine is dissolved in 1 N hydrochloric
acid, where the total volume of the solution is 100 mL. Optical rotation of this solution
should be within a range of ＝ -215 ∼ -225°.
(4) Chloride: When 0.07 g of L-Cystine is tested by Chloride Limit Test, its content
should not be more than the amount that corresponds to 0.2 mL of 0.01 N
hydrochloric acid (Not more than 0.1%).
(5) Arsenic : It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(6) Lead : When 5.0 g of L-Cystine is tested by Atomic Absorption Spectrophotometry
or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content should not be more
than 5.0 ppm.
Loss on Drying When L-Cystine is dried for 3 hours at 105℃, the weight loss should
not be more than 0.2%.
Residue on Ignition When thermogravimetric analysis is done with 2 g of L-Cystine, the
amount of residue should not be more than 0.1%.
281
Assay After drying L-Cysteine, weigh precisely 300 mg. It is tested by nitrogen
determination method to obtain amount of nitrgen(N). And L-Cysteine is obtained below
formula.
Amount of L-Cystine in the sample (%) = N × 8.58

282
 5'-Cytidylic acid

Chemical Formula: C9H14N3O8P

Molecular Weight: 323.20 CAS No.: 63-37-6

Definition 5'-Cytidylic acid is obtained by enzymatically hydrolyzing and separating

hexane that is obtained by extracting yeast (Candida utilis, Kluyueromyces fragilis) with
hot water under a presence of salts. Its component is 5'-cytidylic acid.
Compositional Specifications of 5'-Cytidylic acid
Content If 5'-Cytidylic acid is converted to a dehydrated form, it should contain 98.0∼
102.0% 5'-cytidylic acid (C9H14N3O8P).
Description 5'-Cytidylic acid is white crystalline powder.
Identification (1) 0.2 g of 5'-Cytidylic acid is precisely weighted and dissolved in 10 mL
of 0.1 N sodium hydroxide solution, which is diluted to 200 mL with water. 2 mL of
this solution is diluted to 100 mL with 0.01 N hydrochloric acid. The resulting
solution has a maximum absorption band near 280 nm.
(2) 1 mL of hydrochloric acid and 1 mL of bromine solution are added to 3 mL
aqueous solution of 5'-Cytidylic acid (3→10,000), which is then heated for 30
minutes. Bromine is removed in a flowing air. 0.2 mL of orcin solution in alcohol (1→
10) is added to this solution. To the resulting solution, 3 mL of ammonium ferric
sulfate·hydrochloric acid solution (1→1,000) is added and heated for 20 minutes in a
water bath. The final solution turns green.
(3) 0.25 g of 5'-Cytidylic acid is precisely weighted and dissolved in 1 mL of sodium
hydroxide solution (1→25), which is diluted to 5 mL of water. When 2 mL of
magnesia solution is added to this solution, precipitates are not observed. To
resulting solution, 7 mL of nitric acid is added and boiled for 10 minutes in a water
bath. When the resulting solution is neutralized with sodium hydroxide solution (1→
25), it shows the reaction of (B) Phosphate Salts in Identification.
Purity (1) Arsenic : It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(2) Lead : When 5.0 g of 5'-Cytidylic acid is tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content
283
 should not be more than 10.0 ppm.
(3) Solution: 0.5g of 5'-Cytidylic acid is weighted and dissolved in 2mL of sodium
hydroxide solution, which is diluted to 20mL with water. the solution is nearly
colorless and clear.
(4) Other nucleic acid hydrolysates: 0.1g of 5'-Cytidylic acid is weighted and dissolved
in 0.5mL of sodium hydroxide solution, which is diluted to 20mL with water. When 1
㎕ of the test solution is tested with the mixed solution of acetone·ammonia
solution·n-propanol (2:5:6) by Thin Layer Chromatography, it should not show spots
except for one original spot. Supporting material of thin layer plate must be used as
dried one with silicagel(added fluorescent agent) for 1 hour at 110℃. When the
solvent is developed up to 10cm from the base line, stop the developing. After
drying with wind, the plates are observed under a UV light (about 250nm
wavelength). The control solution is not used.
(5) Absorption Ratio : 20 mg of 5'-Cytidylic acid is precisely weighted and dissolved in
hydrochloric acid (1→1,000) (total volume = 1,000 mL). Absorptions A1, A2, and A3
are measured at 250 nm, 260 nm, and 280 nm are measured. A1/A2 and A3/A2 should
be 0.40～0.52 and 1.85～2.20, respectively.
Loss on Drying When 5'-Cytidylic acid is dried for 4 hours at 120℃, the weight loss
should not be more than 6.0%.
Assay 0.2 g of 5'-Cytidylic acid is precisely weighted and dissolved in 10 mL of 0.1 N
sodium hydroxide solution, which is diluted to 200 mL with water. 2 mL of this
solution is further diluted to 100 mL with 0.01 N hydrochloric acid (Test Solution).
Absorption A of Test Solution is measured at 280 nm with 1cm path length using 0.01
N hydrochloric acid as a reference. The content of 5'-adenylic acid is obtained by the
following equation.
0.2 127.2 × A
Content(%) = × × 100
weight of the sample(g) 100 – loss on drying(%)

284
 Dammar Gum
Synonyms: Dammar resin CAS No.: 9000-16-2

Definition Dammar Gum is obtained by drying exudates of trees of Agathis, Hopea, or

Shorea genus. It consists of polysaccharides and acidic and neutral terpenoid
compounds.
Compositional Specifications of Dammar Gum
Description Dammar Gum is white, pale yellow～dark brown transparent or
semitransparent granular or solid resin.
Identification Weight 1g of this item precisely, and add 10 mL chloroform solution. it is
spotted on a pre-activated 0.2 mm silica gel (Merck F254 or its equivalent) for Thin Layer
Chromatography. It is then developed using a solution of ethyl ether and hexane (30 : 25).
Sulfuric acid is sprayed on the plate, which is then dried for 3 minutes at 180℃. Two dark
spots at Rf values of 0.8 and 0.7 are observed.
Purity (1) Lead ： When 5.0 g of Dammar Gum is tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content
should not be more than 2.0 ppm.
(2) Acid Value : Approximately 5 g of Dammar Gum Dissolve in 30 mL of toluene and
30 mL of neutralized ethyl alcohol. This is used as test solution. The test solution is
proceeded as directed under Acid value in Fats Test. The Acid value of the solution
should be 20~40.
(3) Iodine Value : Approximately 1 g of Dammar Gum is precisely weighted into a
500 mL Erlenmeyer flask with a stopper and 20 mL of glacial acetic
acid/cyclohexane, 1:1, v/v is added to dissolve the material. After adding 25 mL of
Weiss solution, a stopper is placed, shaken and let stand in the dark for 1 hour
where the iodine value is <150 and for 2 hours where the iodine value is ≥150. 20
mL of potassium iodide solution and 100 mL of water (previously boiled and cooled)
are added to the flask. Titrate the excess iodine with 0.1N sodium thiosulfate
solution, adding the titrant gradually and shaking constantly until the yellow colour of
the solution almost disappears. Add starch test solution, and continue the titration
until the blue colour disappears entirely. Toward the end of the titration, stopper the
container, shake it vigorously. Saperately, perform determination on blank in the same
manner. The iodine Value should be 10～40.

Iodine Value ＝ (A - B) × 1.269

C

A ： Consumed amount of 0.1 N sodium thiosulfate solution in the blank test (mL)
B ： Consumed amount of 0.1 N sodium thiosulfate solution in the test for sample (mL)
C ： Amount of sample(g)
285
 (4) Melting Point : Melting point should be in a temperature range of 90∼95℃.
(5) Softening Point : Softening point should be 86∼90℃.
(6) E. coli : Pasteurized saline solution is added to 25 g of Dammar Gum (total volume =
250 mL). It is tested by the (2) Allowed Qualitative test in Microbiological Methods for E.
coli in General Testing Methods in 「Standards and Specifications for Foods」. It should
be negative.
(7) Salmonella : Pasteurized saline solution is added to 25 g of Dammar Gum (total
volume = 250 mL). It is tested by the Microbiological Methods for Salmonella in
General Testing Methods in 「Standards and Specifications for Foods」. It should be
negative.
Ash When Dammar Gum tested by Ash and Acid-Insoluble Ash Limit, the amount of ash
should not be more than 0.5%.
Loss on Drying When Dammar Gum is dried for 18 hours at 105℃, the weight loss
should not be more than 6%.

286
 5'-Deaminase
Definition 5'-Deaminase is an enzyme obtained from cultures of Aspergillus melleus.
Dilutant or stabilizer can be added for the purpose of activity adjustment and quality
preservation.
Compositional Specifications of 5'-Deaminase
Description 5'-Deaminase is white ~ dark brown power, granular, pasty substances or
colorless ~ dark brown liquid.
Identification When 5'-Deaminase is proceeded as directed under Activity Test, it should
have the activity as 5'-Deaminase.
Purity (1) Arsenic ：It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(2) Lead ： When 5.0 g of 5'-Deaminase is tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content
should not be more than 5.0 ppm.
(3) Coliform Group ： 5'-Deaminase proceed as directed under Microbe Test Methods
in Coliform Group in General Test Methods in 「Standards and Specifications for
Foods」. It should contain not more than 30 colonies per 1 g of this product.
(4) Salmonella : When 5'-Deaminase is tested by Microbe Test Methods for Salmonella
in General Test Method 「Standards and Specifications for Foods」, it should be
negative (-).
(5) E. Coli : When 25 g of 5'-Deaminase is tested by Microbe Test Methods for E.
Coli in General Test Method 「Standards and Specifications for Foods」, it should be
negative (-).
Activity Test (activity)
Analysis principle : Activity test is based on measuring the absorbance of the mixture in
the following manner: react the 5'-Deaminase with adenosine 5'-monophosphate
disodium substrate to produce inosine 5'-monophosphate sodium, measure absorbance
of the rest of adenosine 5'-monophosphate disodium and inosine 5'-monophosphate
sodium at the most great difference of absorbance wavelength 265nm.
Preparation of Test Solution : When 5'-Deaminase is weighted, use water or phosphate
buffer solution so that 1 ㎕ of the final diluent solution contains 5~30 5'-Deaminase
unit.
Procedure : Take 3 mL of substrate solution into tube, keep it at 37±0.5℃ precisely for
5 minutes. Then add precisely 1 mL of test solution and immediately shake it to mix.
Keep this solution at 37±0.5℃ precisely for 15 minutes. Then add 4 mL of diluent
perchloric acid(1→30) and immediately shake it to mix. Take precisely 2 mL of this
solution and add water to make to 100 mL. Using water as a reference solution,
absorbance(AT) is measured at wavelength 265 nm. Separately, take 3 mL of substrate
solution and 4 mL of diluent perchloric acid(1→30) into tube and immediately shake it
to mix. And then add 1 mL of test solution and immediately shake it to mix. Take
precisely 2 mL of this solution and add water to make to 100 mL. Using water as a
reference solution, absorbance(AB) of blank enzyme test solution is measured at
287
 wavelength 265 nm.
Activity of an enzyme is calculated by the following equation.
5'-Deaminas
e = (AB-AT) ×
10 8 60 1
(units/g)
× × ×
0.001 2 15 W

AB : Absorbance of blank enzyme test solution

AT : Absorbance of test solution
10/0.001 : Unit Conversion Factor(When difference in absorption is 0.001, it
corresponds to 10 unit)
W : Weight of sample in 1 mL of test solution(g)
Definition of Activity ： 1 5'-Deaminase unit corresponds to the amount of enzyme which
decreases 0.001 of difference in absorption for 60 minutes under the conditions above.
Reagent
Substrate solution : Dry adenosine 5'-monophosphate disodium in advace at 105℃ for
4 hours. And calculate loss on drying. Weigh precisely 330.2 mg as the dried basis
and dissolve it in about 25 mL of water. Adjust pH to 6.0 with 4N sodium hydroxide
solution or 2N hydrochloric acid and add water to make to 100 mL. When using it, it is
used as the mixture solution. The mixing ratio of this solution and 1/15M Phosphate
buffer solution(pH 5.6) is 1:2.
1/15M phosphate buffer solution(pH 5.6) : Dissolve 9.07 g of potassium dihydrogen
phosphate in water to make to 1,000 mL(A solution) and dissolve 9.46 g of anhydrate
disodium hydrogen phosphate in water to make to 1,000 mL(B solution). The mixing
ratio of A solution and B solution is 14:1. Adjust pH to 5.6.
Storage Standard of 5'-Deaminase
5'-Deaminase should be stored in a hermetic container in a cold dark place.

288
 Decanal

Chemical Formula: C10H20O

Molecular Weight: 156.27

Synonyms: Decyl aldehyde CAS No.: 112-31-2

Compositional Specifications of Decanal

Content Decanal should contain not less than 92.0% of decanal (C10H20O).
Description Decanal occurs as transparent liquid of a colorless to light yellow. It has a
characteristic odor.
Identification To 1 mL of Decanal, add 3 mL of sodium hydrogen sulfite solution, and
shake. Immediately, the solution evolves and forms crystalline lumps.
Purity (1) Specific Gravity : Specific gravity of Decanal should be within a range of
0.823～0.832
(2) Refractive Index : Refractive Index of Decanal should be within a range of 1.426～
1.430
(3) Clarity and Color of Solution : When 2 mL of Decanal is dissolved in 2 mL of 80%
ethanol, the solution should be clear.
(4) Acid Value : Acid value of Decanal is tested by Acid Value in Flavoring Substance
Test. It should not be more than 10.
Assay Accurately weigh about 1 g of Decanal, and proceed as directed under Method 2
in Aldehyde and Ketone Content in Flavoring Substances Tests. In the procedure,
allow the mixture to stand for 15 minutes before titrating.
1 mL of 0.5 N hydrochloric acid = 78.13 mg of C10H20O

289
 Decanol

Chemical Formula: C10H22O

Molecular Weight: 158.28

Synonyms: Decyl alcohol CAS No.: 112-30-1

Compositional Specifications of Decanol

Contents Decanol should contain not less than 98.0% of decanol (C10H22O).
Description Decanol is a colorless～pale yellow, transparent liquid having a characteristic
odor.
Identification To 2～3 drops of Decanol, add 5 mL of potassium permanganate solution
(1→20) and 1 mL of diluted sulfuric acid, and shake. An odor of Decyl aldehyde is
evolved.
Purity (1) Solidification Temperature : Solidification Temperature of Decanol should not
be less than 5℃.
(2) Specific Gravity : Specific gravity of Decanol should be within a range of 0.826～
0.831.
(3) Refractive Index : Refractive Index of Decanol should be within a range of 1.435～
1.439.
(4) Clarity and Color of Solution : When 1mL of Decanol is dissolved in 3 mL of 60%
ethanol, the solution should be clear.
(5) Acid Value: Acid value of Decanol is tested by Acid Value in Flavoring Substance
Test. It should not be more than 1.
Assay Proceed as directed under Method 1 in Alcohol Content Measurement in Flavoring
Substance Test. In this case, approximately 1 g of acetylated oil is used.

290
 Dextran
Definition Dextran is obtained by separating from culture medium of gram positive
bacteria (Leuconostoc mesenteroides, Streptococcus bovis ORLA-JENSEN) and its main
ingredient is dextran.
Composition Specifications of Dextran
Description Dextran is a white ～ pale yellow powder or solid without smell.
Identification When 2 mL of anthrone is added to 1 mL of the aqueous solution (1→
3000) of Dextran, greenish blue appears, which becomes slowly to dark blue. Again 1
mL of sulfuric acid (1→2) or 1 mL of acetic acid is added, and then the color does not
change.
Purity (1) Arsenic : It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(2) Lead : When 5.0 g of Dextran is tested by Atomic Absorption Spectrophotometry
or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content should not be more
than 5.0 ppm.
(3) Total Viable Aerobic Count : When Dextran is tested by Microbe Test Methods for
Total Viable Aerobic Count (Number of General Germs) in General Test Method in
「Standards and Specifications for Foods」, it should not be more than 5,000 per 1 g
(4) E. Coli : When 25 g of Dextran is tested by Microbe Test Methods for E. Coli in
General Test Method 「Standards and Specifications for Foods」, it should be
negative (-).
(5) Total nitrogen : When 0.5 g of Dextran is precisely weighed, proceed as directed under
nitrogen determination method, the amount should not be more than 1.0%.
Residue on Ignition When Dextran proceed as directed under Residue on Ignition, the
amount should not be more than 2.0%.
Loss on Drying When Dextran is dried at 105℃ for 5 hours, the weight loss of Dextran
should not be more than 10.0%.

291
 Dextranase
1, 6-α-D-glucan 6-glucanohydrolase
Definition Dextranase is an enzyme obtained from a culture of Chaetomium gracile.
Dilutant or stabilizer can be added for the purpose of activity adjustment and quality
preservation.
Compositional Specifications of Dextranase
Description Dextranase is white～dark brown powder, particle, paste or colorless ~ dark
brown liquid.
Identification When Dextranase is proceeded as directed under Activity Test, it should
have the activity as Dextranase.
Purity (1) Arsenic : It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(2) Lead : When 5.0 g of Dextranase is tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content
should not be more than 5.0 ppm.
(3) Coliform Group ： When Dextranase proceed as directed under Microbiological
Methods for Coliform Group in General Testing Methods in 「Standards and
Specifications for Foods」, it should not contain more than 30 per 1 g of this
product.
(4) Salmonella ： When Dextranase proceed as directed under Microbiological Methods
for Salmonella in General Testing Methods in 「Standards and Specifications for
Foods」, it should be negative (-).
(5) E. Coli : When Dextranase is tested by Microbe Test Methods for E. Coli in
General Test Method 「Standards and Specifications for Foods」, it should be
negative (-).
Activity Test (activity) Analysis Principle : Activity test is based on hydrolysis of
dextran substrate at pH 5.1, 40℃ temperature.
∘Preparation of Test Solutions : An appropriate amount of sample is diluted with
phosphate buffer solution adjusting pH 7.0 so that 1 mL contains 8∼12 Unit.
∘Test Procedure : 2.0 mL of substrate solution placed in the test tube is isothermalized
for 10 minutes in a 40 ± 1℃ water bath. Exactly 1.0 mL of Test Solution is added to
this substrate solution and mixed well by shaking. After exactly 10 minutes, 0.5 mL of
2 N sulfuric acid is added to the solution, which is set aside for 10 minutes at room
temperature. 1 drop of phenolphthalein TS is added to the resulting solution, which is
then neutralized with sodium hydroxide solution. It is then well mixed with 0.5 mL of
water and 5 mL of alkaline copper solution. For enzyme blank test, 2.0 mL of substrate
solution and 0.5 mL of 2 N sulfuric acid are well mixed, where 1.0 mL of Test
Solution is added. The same procedure as the Test Solution is followed for enzyme
blank test. Separately, 1.0 mL and 2.0 mL of glucose standard solution are diluted to
5.0mL with water, where 5 mL each of alkaline copper solution is added. For a blank
test for glucose standard solution, a mixture of 5.0 mL each water and alkaline copper
solution is prepared. All the test tubes are boiled for 20 minutes in a boiling water
292
 bath. Cool the solution, and isothermalize the tubes in a 40 ± 1℃ water bath and set
aside until precipitates are formed at the bottom of the tubes. 2.0 mL of potassium
iodide solution and 10 mL of 2 N sulfuric acid are added to the test tubes. It is quickly
titrated with 0.005 N sodium thiosulfate solution until the color of Iodine disappears.
After adding 1.0 mL of starch solution, it is again titrated by drop-wise adding 0.005 N
sodium thiosulfate solution until the blue color disappears.
Enzyme activity is calculated by the following equation.
Dextranase unit/g F × (B - A) ×
1 × 2.775 ×
＝ weight of the sample(g) 103

B : Consumed amount of 0.005 N sodium thiosulfate for enzyme blank test (mL)
A : Consumed amount of 0.005 N sodium thiosulfate for the test (mL)
F : factor of reducing sugar
Linearity of the glucose standard solution is inspected as follows.
2 × (W - S1)
0.98 < < 1.02
W - S2
W : Consumed amount of 0.005 N sodium thiosulfate for blank test (mL)
S1 : Consumed amount of 0.005 N sodium thiosulfate per 1.0mL of glucose standard
solution (mL)
S2 : Consumed amount of 0.005 N sodium thiosulfate per 2.0mL of glucose standard
solution (mL)
If the measurement does not satisfy the above condition, it is discarded.
Definition of Activity : 1 Dextranase unit corresponds to an amount of enzyme that
generates reducing sugar that corresponds to 1 μmo1 of glucose per minute under the
above test conditions.
Solutions
∘0.1 M Acetate Buffer Solution : 0.1 M acetic acid is mixed with 0.1 M sodium acetate
solution and pH is adjusted to 5.1.
∘Phosphate Buffer Solution (pH 7.0) : 2.7 g of potassium phosphate, mono basic and 10.7 g
of sodium phosphate, dibasic (12 hydrates) are
dissolved in water (total volume = 500 mL). 100 mL
of this solution is added with water to 1,000 mL.
∘Potassium Iodide Solution : 2.5 g of potassium iodide is dissolve in water (total volume
= 100 mL).
∘Alkaline Copper Solution : 71 g of sodium phosphate, dibasic (12 hydrates) and 40 g of
potassium sodium tartrate are dissolved in 650 mL of water,
293
 where 100 mL of sodium hydroxide solution is added. While
stirring slowly, 80 mL of copper sulfate solution (10→100)
and 180 g of anhydrous sodium sulfate are added and
dissolved. 25 mL of potassium iodate solution (3.567→100) is
added to the resulting solution, which is diluted to 1,000 mL
with water.
∘0.005 N sodium thiosulfate solution : 0.1 N sodium thiosulfate solution is diluted to
twenty times a capacity with freshly boiled and
cooled water.
∘Substrate Solution : 2.5 g of dextran (Dextran T 2000, Pharmacia-Fine Chemical AB
Upsala Sweden, or its equivalent) is precisely weighted and
dissolved in 100 mL of 0.1 M acetate buffer solution.
Storage Standards of Dextranase
Dextranase is strongly hygroscopic. Store in a cold dark place and well-closed
containers.

294
 Diastase(Diastatic Power, DP)
Definition Diastase is an enzyme obtained form malt. Dilutant or stabilizer can be added
for the purpose of activity adjustment and quality preservation.
Compositional Specifications of Diastase
Description Diastase is white～deep brown power, particles, pastes or colorless～deep
brown liquid.
Identification When Diastase is proceeded as directed under Activity Test, it should have
the activity as Diastase.
Purity (1) Arsenic ： It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(2) Lead : When 5.0 g of Diastase is tested by Atomic Absorption Spectrophotometry
or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content should not be more
than 5.0 ppm.
(3) Coliform Group ： Diastase is tested by Microbe Test Methods for Coliform Group
in General Test Methods in 「Standards and Specifications for Foods」. It should
contain 30 colonies or less per 1 g of this product.
(4) Salmonella ： Diastase is tested by Microbe Test Methods for Salmonella in
General Test Methods in 「Standards and Specifications for Foods」. It should be
negative (-).
(5) E. Coli : When Diastase is tested by Microbe Test Methods for E. Coli in General
Test Method 「Standards and Specifications for Foods」,it should be negative (-).
Activity Test (Activity)
Analysis Principle ： This test is to measure the activity of amylase in malt and other
enzymes. Activity test is based on hydrolysis of starch substrate for 30 minutes at 2
0℃ and pH 4.6. Reducing sugar obtained by hydrolysis is tested by the titration with
alkaline ferricyanide.
Preparation of Test Solution
∘Malt sample ： 30 g of sample is finely ground with a mill. 25 g of the ground powder
is accurately weighed into a 1,000 mL Erlenmeyer flask, which is leached in 500 mL of
0.5% sodium chloride solution for 2.5 hours at 20 ± 0.2℃ while gently shaking in a 20
minute interval (note : The flask should not be turned up side down. The amount of
sample left on the inner wall of the flask should be minimized.) It is then filtered
through a Whatman No.1 filter paper or equivalent on a 32 cm diameter funnel. First
50 mL of the filtrate is added back to the funnel and filtered again. To prevent
evaporation during filtering, a watchglass is placed on top of the funnel and other
opening (necks and mouth of receiving container) is covered appropriately. Filtrate is
collected exactly for 30 minutes. 20 mL of the filtrate is diluted to 100 mL with 0.5%
sodium chloride solution (Test Solution).
∘Other Enzymes ： The final diluted solution is prepared so that it contains Diastatic
power(DP) value 2∼150℃ per 10 mL.
∘Test Procedure： 10 mL of Test Solution is accurately taken into a 250 mL volumetric
flask, where 200 mL of substrate solution (isothermalized for 30 minutes at 20 ± 0.2℃
295
 prior to use) and time is recorded. The flask is cooled for 30 minutes in a water bath
at 20℃. 20 mL of 0.5 N sodium hydroxide solution and water are added to bring the
volume to 250 mL. 5 mL of the resultant solution is taken into a 125 mL Erlenmeyer
flask, added 10 mL of alkaline ferricyanide solution, and mixed. This is heated exactly
for 20 minutes in a boiling water bath. After cooling to room temperature, 25 mL of
A.P.Z. solution, 1 mL of potassium iodide solution, and 2 mL of starch TS are added to
the flask, which is then titrated with 0.05 N sodium thiosulfate solution until the blue
color disappears completely (consumed amount in mL of sodium thiosulfate solution, S).
Separately, blank test solution is prepared in a 250 mL volumetric flask with 20 mL of
0.5 N sodium hydroxide solution, 10 mL of Test Solution, 200 mL substrate solution,
and water (total volume 250 mL) by following the same procedure. The consumed
amount in mL of sodium thiosulfate solution for blank test is B.
Activity of diastase as expressed as DP℃ is obtained using the following equations.

DP℃(as a base material) = (B—S) × 23 ×

F
100

DP℃(dried= form) DP° (as a base

material) ×
100
(100-M)
23 ： Conversion factor to a defined unit
M ： Water Content (%)
F ： Dilution Factor (Total Dilution/Weight of sample(g))
∘Definition of Activity ： 1 Diastase activity unit expressed as DP℃ (degrees of diastatic
power) corresponds to an amount of enzymes contained in 0.1 mL of 5% solution of
Test Solution which produces sufficient amount of reducing sugar that can reduce 5 mL
of Fehling solution when 100 mL of substrate is processed for 1 hour at 20℃.
Apparatus
Mill ： Laboratory mill is used.
Solutions
∘Acetate Buffer Solutions ： 68 g of sodium acetate is dissolved in 500 mL of 1N acetic
acid. Water is added to bring the total volume to 1,000 mL.
∘Starch ： A starch that is specified in α-amylase(non microbial) is used.
∘Substrate Solution ： 20 g of starch (as dried form) is dispersed in 50 mL of water, and
added slowly to 750 mL of boiling water. It is then boiled for 2 minutes. After
cooling, it is mixed with 20 mL of acetate buffer solution. The total volume is
brought up to 1,000 mL with water.
∘Acetic Acid-Potassium Chloride-Zinc Sulfate Solution (A.P.Z.) ： 70 g of potassium chloride
and 20 g of zinc sulfate (ZnSO4․7H2O) are dissolved in 700 mL of water, where 200 mL of
glacial acetic acid is added. The total volume is brought up to 1,000 mL with water.
296
∘0.05 N alkaline ferricyanide solution ： 16.5 g of potassium ferricyanide (K3Fe(CN)6) and
22 g of sodium carbonate are dissolved in 800 mL of water. Water is added to bring
the total volume to 1,000 mL.
∘Potassium iodide solution ： 50 g of potassium iodide is dissolved in 50 mL of water
and diluted to 100 mL, where 2 drops of 50% sodium hydroxide solution are added.
This solution should be colorless
Storage Standard of Diastase
Diastase should be stored in a hermetic container in a cold dark place.

297
 Diatomaceous Earth
Synonyms: Diatomite CAS No.: 61790-53-2
Definition Diatomaceous Earth is silicon dioxide originated from diatom. There are three
types, dried, calcined, and flux-calcined. These will be named as diatomaceous earth
(dried), diatomaceous earth (calcined), and diatomaceous earth (flux-calcined). Calcined
diatomaceous earth is calcined at 800∼1,200℃. Flux-calcined diatomaceous earth is
calcined at 800∼1,200℃ with a small amount of alkali carbonates. If flux-calcined
diatomaceous earth is washed with acid, specifications for calcined form are applied
(except for characteristics).
Compositional Specifications of Diatomaceous Earth
Description Dried material is milky white to pale gray powder, calcined material is
reddish∼pale brown powder, and flux-calcined material is white to pale reddish brown
powder.
Identification (1) 0.2 g of Diatomaceous Earth is dissolved in 5 mL of hydrofluoric acid
in a platinum crucible. When the solution is heated, almost all of it evaporates.
(2) When examined with 100x to 200x microscope, typical diatom shapes are observed.
Purity (1) Water Solubles substances and pH ： 10 g of Diatomaceous Earth is added to
100 mL of water. It is then boiled for 2 hours in a water bath, supplementing water
with occasionally shaking. After cooling, it is filtered with a suction-filtering
apparatus that is equipped with a 47 mm diameter membrane filter (pore size 0.45 μ
m). If the filtrate is turbid, it is filtered again through the same filter. The residue on
filter paper is washed with water and wash water is added to the previous filtrate.
The total volume is make to 100 mL with water. Using a glass electrode, pH of the
resulting filtrate is measured. pH should be 5.0∼10.0 for dried or calcined material
and 8.0∼11.0 for flux-calcined material. 50 mL of the filtrate is evaporated to
dryness and the residue is further dried for 2 hours at 105℃. The amount of water
solubles should not be more than 15 mg, 10 mg, and 25 mg for dried, calcined, and
flux-calcined material, respectively (should not be more than 0.3%, 0.2%, 0.5% for
dried, calcined, and flux-calcined material, respectively).
(2) Hydrochloric acid soluble substances ： 50 mL of diluted hydrochloric acid is added
to 5 g of Diatomaceous Earth, which is shaken for 15 minutes at 50℃. It is then
heated for 1 hour in a water bath, supplementing water with occasionally shaking.
After cooling, it is filtered. The residue on filter paper is washed with water and
wash water is added to the filtrate. The total volume is make to 100 mL with water
and use the Solution A. 1 mL of diluted sulfuric acid (1→20) is added to 10 mL of
Solution A, which is evaporated to dryness and further dried at 550℃ until the
weight becomes constant. The amount of residue should not be more than 15 mg
(should not be more than 3%).
(3) Arsenic ： It should be no more than 10.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test with 2
mL of A solution of Purity (2).
298
 (4) Lead ： When solution A as test solution in Purity (2) is tested by Atomic
Absorption Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy,
its content should not be more than 10.0 ppm.
Loss on Ignition When Diatomaceous Earth is dried at 105℃ for 2 hours and heat
treated at 1,000℃ for 30 minutes, the weight loss should not be more than 7.0% for
dried material and should not be more than 2.0% for calcined, and flux-calcined
material.
Hydrofluoric Acid Residue A platinum crucible is previously ignited for 30 minutes at
1,000℃. 0.2 g of Diatomaceous Earth is accurately weighed in a crucible, where 5 mL
of hydrofluoric acid and 2 drops of diluted sulfuric acid (1→2) are added, which is
evaporated to approximate dryness on a water bath. It is then heat treated for 1 hour
at 550℃ and gradually further heated to 1,000℃ kept temperature for 30 minutes. It is
then cooled in a desiccator and weighed accurately. The amount of residue should not
be more than 50 mg (not more than 25%).

299
 Dibenzoyl Thiamine

Chemical Formula: C26H26O4N4S

Molecular Weight: 490.59 CAS No.: 299-88-7

Compositional Specifications of Dibenzoyl Thiamine

Content Dibenzoyl Thiamine, when calculated on the dried basis, should contain not less
than 97.0% of dibenzoyl thiamine (C26H26N4O4S).
Description Dibenzoyl Thiamine is a white crystalline powder without scent.
Identification (1) To 5 mg of Dibenzoyl Thiamine, add 1 mL of methanol, and dissolve
while warming. Add 2 mL of water, 2 mL of cysteine hydrochloride solution (1→100),
and 2 mL of phosphate buffer (pH 7), and shake and allow to stand for 30 minutes.
Add 1 mL of freshly prepared potassium ferricyanide solution, 5 mL of 0.5 N sodium
hydroxide solution, and 5 mL of n-butyl alcohol, shake vigorously for 2 minutes, and
allow to stand to form two layers. Expose to ultraviolet light from above, and
observe the top of the upper-layer solution from a direction perpendicular to the
direction of irradiation. A blue-purple fluorescence is observed. This fluorescence
disappears when the solution is made acidic, and reappears when it is made alkaline.
(2) To 30 mg of Dibenzoyl Thiamine, add 7 mL of diluted 0.1 N hydrochloric acid, and
dissolve by heating in a water bath. Add 2 mL of mixture of hydroxylamine
hydrochloride solution (3→20) · sodium hydroxide solution (3→20)(1:1), and shake for
1 minute. 0.8 mL of hydrochloric acid and 0.5 mL of ferric chloride solution is added,
a purple color develops.
Purity (1) Melting Point : Melting point of Dibenzoyl Thiamine should be within a range
of 163～174℃.
(2) Chloride : Dissolve 0.4 g of Dibenzoyl Thiamine in 20 mL of methanol, add 6 mL of
diluted nitric acid, add water to make 50 mL, and add 1 mL of silver nitrate solution.
The turbidity of this solution should be lower than that of a solution prepared by the
following procedure. To 0.6 mL of 0.01 N hydrochloric acid, add 20 mL of methanol,
6 mL of diluted nitric acid and water to make 50 mL, where 1 mL of silver nitrate
solution in added.
(3) Lead : When 5.0 g of Dibenzoyl Thiamine is tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content
should not be more than 2.0 ppm.
Loss on Drying When Dibenzoyl Thiamine is dried for 2 hours at 105℃, the weight loss
300
 should not be more than 3%.
Residue on Ignition When thermogravimetric analysis is done with Dibenzoyl Thiamine,
the residue should not be more than 0.2%.
Assay Accurately weigh about 0.4 g of Dibenzoyl Thiamine, previously dried, dissolve in
40 mL of methanol and 40 mL of 0.1N hydrochloric acid, and add water to make
1,000 mL. Take 5 mL of this solution, add 0.1 N hydrochloric acid to make 250 mL.
Measure absorbance A of this solution at a wavelength of 237 nm. Separately, a blank
test is carried out by the same procedure and absorbance A0 is measured. The
content is calculated by the following equation:
A ­ A0 400
Content(%) = weight of the × × 100
0.452
sample(mg)

301
 Dibenzoyl Thiamine Hydrochloride

Chemical Formula: C26H26O4N4S‧HCl‧3H2O

Molecular Weight: 581.10 CAS No.: 35660-60-7

Compositional Specifications of Dibenzoyl Thiamine Hydrochloride

Content Dibenzoyl Thiamine Hydrochloride, when calculated on the dried basis, should
contain not less than 97.0% of dibenzoyl thiamine hydrochloride (C26H26O4N4S․HCl =
527.06).
Description Dibenzoyl Thiamine Hydrochloride occurs as a white crystalline powder. It is
odorless.
Identification (1) Dissolve 0.1 g of Dibenzoyl Thiamine Hydrochloride in 10 mL of
methanol, add 1 mL of dilute nitric acid and 1 mL of silver nitrate solution, white
precipitate is produced.
(2) Proceed as directed under Identification in 「Dibenzoyl Thiamine」.
Purity (1) Clarity and Color of Solution : When 1 g of Dibenzoyl Thiamine Hydrochloride
is dissolved in 10 mL of water by heating in a water bath, the solution should not be
more than almost clear.
(2) Lead : When 5.0 g of Dibenzoyl Thiamine Hydrochloride is tested by Atomic
Absorption Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy,
its content should not be more than 2.0 ppm.
Loss on Drying When Dibenzoyl Thiamine Hydrochloride is dried for 24 hours in a
vacuum desiccator (silica gel), the weight loss should not be more than 11%.
Residue on Ignition When thermogravimetric analysis is done with Dibenzoyl Thiamine
Hydrochloride, the amount of residue should not be more than 0.2%.
Assay 0.4 g of Dibenzoyl Thiamine Hydrochloride, previously dried and accurately
weigh, proceed as directed under Assay in 「Dibenzoyl Thiamine」.
A ­ A0 400
Content(%) = weight of the × × 100
sample(mg) 0.421

302
 Diluted Benzoyl Peroxide
Chemical Formula: C14H10O4
Molecular Weight: 242.23 INS No.: 928
Synonyms: Benzoyl superoxide CAS No.: 94-36-0

Definition Diluted Benzoyl Peroxide is benzoyl peroxide (C14H10O4) diluted with one or
more of the following : Aluminum Potassium Sulfate, calcium salts of phosphate,
Calcium Sulfate. Calcium Carbonate, Magnesium Carbonate, and starch.
Compositional Specifications of Diluted Benzoyl Peroxide
Content Diluted Benzoyl Peroxide should contain within a range of 19.0～22.0% of
Benzoyl peroxide (C14H10O4=242.23)
Description Diluted Benzoyl Peroxide occurs as a white powder.
Identification Transfer 0.2 g of Diluted Benzoyl Peroxide into test tube, add 7 mL of
chloroform and mix by shaking and settled. White insoluble substances are observed.
When 2 mL of 4,4′-diaminophenylamine solution is added, the solution and the insoluble
substances turn bluish green.
Purity (1) Fineness : Transfer 5 g of Diluted Benzoyl Peroxide into a dried 53 μ
standard sieve and sieved vigorously for 2 minutes, while occasionally tapping the
bottom of the receiving container. Fine particles are settled for 1 minute and the
residues on the screen is weighed. The amount of the residues should not be more
than 1 g.
(2) Spread of Fire : 1 g of Diluted Benzoyl Peroxide is packed (3 mm height and 10
mm width) on a glass plate and ignited from one end. It should not be ignited all the
way to the other end.
(3) Hydrochloric Acid Insoluble Substances : To 0.2 g of Diluted Benzoyl Peroxide, add
10 mL of dilute hydrochloric acid. It is well mixed by shaking, heated for
approximately for 1 minute, and cooled. Approximately 8 mL of ether is added and
shaken. When it is settled, both liquid layers should be clear. There should not be
any definite floating matters in the interface.
(4) pH : To 3 g of Diluted Benzoyl Peroxide, add 30 mL of water and shaking for 3
minutes. It is then filtered and the pH of the filtrate is measured. The pH should be
within a range of 6.0∼9.0.
(5) Ammonium Salt : When 0.2 g of Diluted Benzoyl Peroxide is boiled in 3 mL of
sodium hydroxide solution (2→5), the gas generated should not turn a red litmus
paper wetted with water blue .
(6) Arsenic : It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(7) Lead : When 5.0 g of Diluted Benzoyl Peroxide is tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content
should not be more than 2.0 ppm.
(8) Barium : 2 g of Diluted Benzoyl Peroxide is mixed with 15 mL of dilute nitric acid
by shaking, which is filtered. The residues are washed with water and the wash
303
 water is added to the filtrate. Water is added to the filtrate to bring the total volume
to 40 mL. pH of the resulting solution is adjusted to 2.4∼2.8 with ammonia solution,
where water is added to bring the total volume to 50 mL. When 1 mL of dilute
sulfuric acid is added to this solution and set aside for 10 minutes, it should not turn
turbid.
Assay Transfer about 1 g of Diluted Benzoyl Peroxide, accurately weigh, into a flask
with a ground-glass stopper, add 50 mL of chloroform-methanol mixture (1:1), and
shake. Add 0.5 mL of a solution of citric acid in methanol (1→10) and 2 mL of
potassium iodide solution (1→2), immediately stopper tightly, allow to stand in a dark
place for 20 minutes while shaking occasionally, and titrate the liberated iodine with
0.1 N sodium thiosulfate (indicator : starch TS). Separately, perform a blank test in
the same manner.
1 mL of 0.1 N sodium thiosulfate = 12.11 mg of C14H10O4

304
 Disodium 5'-Cytidylate

Chemical Formula: C9H12N3Na2O8P

Molecular Weight: 367.16 CAS No.: 6757-06-8

Compositional Specifications of Disodium 5'-Cytidylate

Content When Disodium 5'-Cytidylate, when calculated on the dried basis, should contain
within a range of 97.0～102.0% of disodium 5'-cytidylate (C9H12N3Na2O8P).
Description Disodium 5'-Cytidylate occurs as colorless to white crystals or as a white
crystalline powder, having a slight, characteristic taste.
Identification (1) Dissolve 20 mg of Disodium 5'-Cytidylate in 100 mL of 0.01N
hydrochloric acid (1→1,000) and 0.01 N hydrochloric is added to 10 mL of this
solution to make 100 mL. The solution exhibits an absorption maximum at a
wavelength of 279 ± 2 nm.
(2) To 3 mL of Disodium 5'-Cytidylate solution (3→10,000), add 1 mL of hydrochloric
acid and 1 mL of bromine solution, heat in a water bath for 30 minutes, remove the
bromine by blowing with air, add 0.2 mL of a solution of orcinol in ethanol (1→10),
then add 3 mL of a solution of ferric ammonium sulfate in diluted hydrochloric acid
(1→1,000), and heat in a water bath for 20 minutes. A green color becomes.
(3) To 5 mL of Disodium 5'-Cytidylate solution (1→20), add 2 mL of magnesia solution.
No precipitate is formed. Then, add 7 mL of nitric acid, boil for 10 minutes and
neutralize with sodium hydroxide solution (1→25). The solution responds to the test
for Phosphate (2).
(4) Disodium 5'-Cytidylate responds to test of Sodium Salts in Identification.
Purity (1) Clarity and Color of Solution : When 0.5 g of Disodium 5'-Cytidylateis
dissolved in 10 mL of water, the solution should be Colorless and almost clear.
(2) pH : pH of Disodium 5'-Cytidylate solution (1→20) should be within a range of 8.
0～9.5 as determined by glass electrode method.
(3) Arsenic : It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(4) Lead : Disodium 5'-Cytidylate is tested by Purity (2) for Sodium Metaphosphate(not
more than 2.0 ppm).
(5) Absorption Ratio : Measure absorbances A1, A2, and A3 of 0.01N hydrochloric acid
305
 solution of Disodium 5'-Cytidylate(1→50,000) at wavelengths of 250 nm, 260 nm, and
280 nm, respectively. A1/A2 is 0.40～0.52, and A3/A2 is 1.85～2.20.
(6) Other decomposed substances of ribonucleic acids : Proceed as directed under
Purity (6) for [5-Disodium Guanylate]
Water Content Water content of approximately 0.15 g of Disodium 5'-Cytidylate as
determined by water content determination method should not be more than 26.0%. In
this case, sample transfer into a dried titration flask, where 10 mL of Karl-Fisher
methyl alcohol is added. A certain amount of Karl-Fisher solution is added so that
there is an excess of approximately 10 mL. Then the flask is capped and shaken for
20 minutes. It is titrated with water-methyl alcohol standard solution. Separately, a
blank test is carried out by following the same procedure.
Assay Accurately weigh about 500 mg of Disodium 5'-Cytidylate, and dissolve in 0.01 N
hydrochloric acid to make exactly 1,000 mL. Measure 10 mL of this solution, and add
0.01 N hydrochloric acid to make exactly 250 mL. Use this solution as the test
solution. With reference solution, 0.01N hydrochloric acid, measure absorbance A of
the test solution at a wavelength of 280 nm, and calculate the content by the
following formula
Content of disodium 5'-cytidylate (C9H12N3Na2O8P) (%)
500 144.6 × A
＝ × × 100
weight of the sample(mg) 100—water content(%)

306
 Disodium Dihydrogen Pyrophosphate
Chemical Formula: Na2H2P2O7

Molecular Weight: 221.94 INS No.: 450(i)

Synonyms: Disodium dihydrogen
diphosphate; Disodium
CAS No.: 7758-16-9
diphosphate; Sodium acid
pyrophosphate

Compositional Specifications of Disodium Dihydrogen Pyrophosphate

Content Disodium Dihydrogen Pyrophosphate, when calculated on the dried basis, should
contain not less than 95.0% of disodium dihydrogen pyrophosphate (Na2H2P2O7).
Description Disodium Dihydrogen Pyrophosphate occurs as a white crystalline powder or
granular.
Identification (1) To 10 mL of Disodium Dihydrogen Pyrophosphate solution (1→100),
add 1 mL of silver nitrate solution. A white precipitate is formed.
(2) Disodium Dihydrogen Pyrophosphate responds to the test for Sodium Salt in
Identification.
Purity (1) Water Insoluble Substances : 5 g of Disodium Dihydrogen Pyrophosphate,
accurately weighed, dissolve in 100 mL of hot water. Insoluble substances are
separated by a glass filter (1G4) and washed with 30 mL of hot water. The glass
filter is dried for 2 hours at 105℃. The amount of insoluble substances should not
be more than 1.0%.
(2) pH : pH of Disodium Dihydrogen Pyrophosphate solution (1→100) should be within
a range of 3.7～5.0.
(3) Arsenic : It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(4) Lead : Disodium Dihydrogen Pyrophosphate is tested by purity (2) for 「Sodium
Metaphosphate」(not more than 4.0 ppm).
(5) Cadmium : Disodium Dihydrogen Pyrophosphate and is tested by purity (3) for
「Sodium Metaphosphate」(not more than 1.0 ppm).
(6) Mercury : When Disodium Dihydrogen Pyrophosphate is tested by Mercury Limit
Test, its content should not be more than 1.0 ppm.
(7) Fluoride : 1 g of Disodium Dihydrogen Pyrophosphate, precisely weighed, and is
tested by purity (8) for 「Calcium Citrate」(not more than 10 ppm).
Loss on Drying When Disodium Dihydrogen Pyrophosphate is dried for 4 hours at 110℃,
the weight loss should not be more than 5%.
Assay 400 mg of Disodium Dihydrogen Pyrophosphate, previously dried for 4 hours at
105℃ and accurately weighed, is dissolved in 100 mL of water. Its pH is adjusted 3.8,
using a pH meter with hydrochloric acid. To this solution, 50 mL of zinc sulfate
solution (1→8) [125 g of zinc sulfate (hepta hydrated) is dissolved in water to have a
total volume of 1,000 mL and its pH is adjusted to 3.8] is added. After 2 minutes,
free acid is titrated with 0.1 N sodium hydroxide solution until pH becomes 3.8. Near
307
the end point, the solution should be set-aside so that precipitated zinc hydroxide gets
dissolved again.
1 mL of 0.1 N sodium hydroxide solution = 11.10 mg Na2H2P2O7

308
 Disodium Ethylenediaminetetraacetate

Chemical Formula: C10H14N2Na2O8‧2H2O

Molecular Weight: 372.24 INS No.: 386

Synonyms: Disodium edetate; Disodium
EDTA CAS No.: 139-33-3

Compositional Specifications of Disodium Ethylenediaminetetraacetate

Content Disodium Ethylenediaminetetraacetate should contain not less than 99.0% of
disodium ethylenediamifletetraacetate (C10H14N2Na2O8․2H2O).
Description Disodium Ethylenediaminetetraacetate occurs as a whitish crystalline powder.
It is odorless.
Identification (1) Disodium Ethylenediaminetetraacetate solution (1→20) responds to the test
for Sodium Salt (B) of (1) in Identidication.
(2) To pink color solution which is prepared by adding 5mL of water, 2 drops of
ammonium thiocyanate solution, and 2 drops of ferric chloride solution to a test tube,
add approximately 50 mg of Disodium Ethylenediaminetetraacetate. Its red color
disappears.
Purity (1) pH : pH of Disodium Ethylenediaminetetraacetate solution(1→100) should be
within a range of 4.3～4.7.
(2) Arsenic : It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(3) Lead : When 5.0 g of Disodium Ethylenediaminetetraacetate is tested by Atomic
Absorption Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy,
its content should not be more than 2.0 ppm.
(4) Cyanide : Transfer 1 g of Disodium Ethylenediamineteaacetate into a round-bottom
flask, dissolve in 100 mL of water, add 10 mL of phosphoric acid, and distilled. Use
a 100 mL mass flask containing 15 mL of 0.5 N sodium hydroxide solution as the
receiver, immerse the end of the condenser in it, and distill until the total amount
becomes 100 mL. Use this solution as the test solution. 2 mL of test solution
transfer into a test tube with a ground glass stopper, which is neutralized with dilute
acetic acid using 1 drop of phenolphthalein solution. 5 mL of phosphate buffer
solution (pH 6.8) and 1 mL of chloramine solution (1→5) are added to the solution
and the stopper is placed. Mix gently, and allow to stand for 2～3 minutes. Add 5 mL
of pyridine․pyrazolone solution, mix thoroughly, and allow to stand at 20～30℃ for 50
minutes. The color of the solution should not be deeper than that of the reference
309
 solution. To prepare Reference solution, measure 1 mL of cyanide standard solution,
add 15 mL of 0.5 N sodium hydroxide solution and water to make 100 mL. The same
procedure is repeated with 2 mL of the resulting solution in a test tube with a
ground glass stopper.
Assay Accurately weigh about 0.4 g of Disodium Ethylenediaminetetraacetate, dissolve in
20 mL of water, add 10 mL of ammonia․ammonium chloride buffer (pH 10.7), and titrate
with 0.05 M zinc chloride (indicator : 2 drops of Eriochrome black T solution) until the
blue color of the solution changes to red.
1 mL of 0.05 M Zinc Chloride = 18.612 mg of C10H14N2Na2O8․2H2O

310
 Disodium Glycyrrhizinate

Chemical Formula: C42H60Na2O16

Molecular Weight: 866.92 CAS No.: 71277-79-7

Compositional Specifications of Disodium Glycyrrhizinate

Content Disodium Glycyrrhizinate, when calculated on the dried basis(anhydrous), should
contain within a range of 95.0～102.0% of disodium glycyrrhizinate (C42H60Na2O16).
Description Disodium Glycyrrhizinate occurs as a white～light yellow powder with an
extremely sweet taste.
Identification (1) To 0.5 g of Disodium Glycyrrhizinate, add 10 mL of 1 N hydrochloric
acid. It is boiled gently for 10 minutes and filtered. The residue on the filter paper
is washed with water thoroughly and dried at 105℃ for 1 hour. To 1 mL of a
solution of the dried substance in alcoholic solution (1→1,000), add 0.5 mL of a
dibutyl hydroxytoluene solution in ethanol (1→100) and 1 mL of sodium hydroxide
solution (1→5), which is then heated for 30 minutes in a water bath while
evaporating the ethanol. Reddish purple～purple flocculent substances are formed in
the residual solution.
(2) To 1 mL of the filtrate in (1), add 10 mg of naphthoresorcin and 5 drops of
hydrochloric acid, and boiled gently for 1 minute, and allowed to stand for 5 minutes, and
immediately cooled. To this solution, add 3 mL of ethyl ether and shake. The color of the
ethyl ether layer changes to reddish purple.
(3) The residue on ignition of Disodium Glycyrrhizinate responds to the test for Sodium
Salt in Identification.
Purity (1) Clarity and Color of Solution : Dissolve 0.5 g of Disodium Glycyrrhizinate in 5
mL of water, it should not be more than clear and its color should not be deeper than
that of the color standard solution I.
(2) pH : pH of Disodium Glycyrrhizinate solution (1→20) should be within a range of
5.5 ~ 6.5.
311
 (3) Chloride : To 0.5 g of Disodium Glycyrrhizinate, add 6 mL of diluted nitric acid (1
→10) and 10 mL of water, and boil gently for 10 minutes, and filter. Residues on the
filter paper are washed twice with a small amount of water and the washing water is
combined with the filtrate. If the filtrate is colored, 1 mL of hydrogen peroxideis
added and heated in a water bath for 10 minutes. After cooling, the precipitate is
filtered and washed twice with a small amount of water. The filtrate and wash water
is combined and tested by Chloride Limit Test. The content of chloride should not be
higher than the amount that corresponds to 0.2 mL of 0.01 N hydrochloric acid.
(4) Sulfate : To 0.5 g of Disodium Glycyrrhizinate, add 5 mL of diluted hydrochloric
acid (1→4) and 10 mL of water, and boil gently for 10 minutes and filter. The
residue on the filter paper is washed twice with a small amount of water and the
wash water is combined with the filtrate. The filtrate is neutralized with ammonia
solution. If the filtrate is colored, 1 mL of hydrogen peroxide is added and heated in
a water bath for 10 minutes. It is then cooled and filtered if necessary. The residue
on the filter paper is washed twice with a small amount of water and wash water is
combined with the filtrate, Test Solution. When Test Solution is tested by Sulfate
Limit Test, the content should not be higher than the amount that corresponds to 0.3
mL of 0.01 N sulfuric acid
(5) Arsenic : It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(6) Lead : Disodium Glycyrrhizinate is tested by Purity (2) for 「Sodium Metaphosphat
e」(not more than 2 ppm).
Water Content Accurately weigh about 0.2 g of Disodium Glycyrrhizinate, and tested by
the back titration method in water content determination (Karl-Fischer Method). The
water content should not be more than 13%.
Residue on Ignition When thermogravimetric analysis is done with 1 g of Disodium
Glycyrrhizinate, the amount of residue should be within a range of 15～18% (calculated
on the anhydrous basis).
Assay Accurately weigh about 100 mg of Disodium Glycyrrhizinate, and dissolve in
water to make 1,000 mL. Take 10 mL of this solution, add water to make 25 mL,
Test Solution. Separately, 50 mg of nicotinamide standard, previously dried in a
vacuum desiccator (sulfuric acid) for 4 hours, and dissolved in water to make 1,000
mL. Take 10 mL of this solution, add water to make 25 mL, standard reference
solution. Absorbance A of the test solution is measured at a wavelength of 259 nm,
using water as a reference. Absorbance As of the standard reference solution at a
wavelength of 261 nm is measured using water as a reference. The content of
disodium glycyrrhizinate is calculated by the following equation
2A Amount of nicotinamide(mg)
Content (%) ＝ As × 1.0928
× weight of the sample(mg) — water × 100
content(mg)

312
 Disodium 5'-Guanylate
Sodium 5'-Guanylate
Sodium Guanylate

Chemical Formula: C10H12O8N5PNa2

Molecular Weight: 407.20 INS No.: 627
Synonyms: Sodium 5'-Guanylate; Sodium
CAS No.: 5550-12-9
Guanylate

Compositional Specifications of Disodium 5'-Guanylate

Content Disodium 5'-Guanylate, when calculated on the dried basis, should contain within
a range of 97.0～102.0% of disodium 5'-guanylate (C10H12O8N5PNa2).
Description Disodium 5'-Guanylate occurs as colorless to white crystals, white
crystalline powder or powder, having a characteristic taste.
Identification (1) 20 mg of Disodium 5'-Guanylate is dissolved in 100 mL of 0.01 N
hydrochloric acid, 10 mL of which is diluted to 100 mL with 0.01 N hydrochloric
acid. The resulting solution shows a maximum absorption band at 256 ± 2 nm.
(2) To 3 mL of aqueous solution of Disodium 5'-Guanylate (3→10,000), add 0.2 mL of
alcoholic solution of (1→10) and 3 mL of ammonium ferrous sulfate (1→1,000), which
is heated for 10 minutes in a water bath. The solution turns green.
(3) When add 2 mL of magnesia solution to 5 mL of Disodium 5'-Guanylate solution (1
→100), precipitates are not formed. To the resulting solution, 7 mL of nitric acid is
added and boiled for 10 minutes. When this solution is neutralized with sodium
hydroxide solution, it responds to the test for of phosphate (B) in Identification.
(4) Disodium 5'-Guanylate responds to the test for of Sodium Salt in Identification.
Purity (1) Clarity and Color of Solution : When 0.1 g of Disodium 5'-Guanylate is
dissolved in 10 mL of water, the solution should be colorless and almost clear.
(2) pH : pH of Disodium 5'-Guanylate solution (1→20) should be within a range of 7.0
∼8.5 as determined by the glass electrode method.
(3) Arsenic : It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(4) Lead : When 5.0 g of Disodium 5'-Guanylate is tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content
should not be more than 1.0 ppm.
(5) Absorption Ratio : Absorption (A1, A2, and A3) of Disodium 5'-Guanylate in 0.01 N
313
 solution of hydrochloric acid (1→50,000) is measured at wavelengths of 250 nm, 260 nm,
and 280 nm. Absorption ratios, A1/A2 and A3/A2 are 0.95～1.03 and 0.63～0.71,
respectively.
(6) Other Decomposed Substances : When thin plate chromatography is carried out with
1 μl of aqueous solution of Disodium 5'-Guanylate (1→200) using a mixture of
acetone, ammonia solution, and n-propyl alcohol (2 : 5 : 6) as a developing solvent,
only one spot should be observed. In this case, silica gel for thin layer
chromatography (with phosphor) that is dried for 1 hour at 110℃ is used as a
support material of thin layer. It is developed until the solvent front reaches
approximately 10 cm from the starting point. It is then dried in air and observed
under UV light (wavelength : approximately 250 nm) in a dark place. Reference
solution is not used.
Loss on Drying When Disodium 5'-Guanylate is dried for 4 hours at 120℃, the weight
loss should not be more than 25%.
Assay Dissolve about 500 mg of Disodium 5'-Guanylate, accurately weighed, in 0.01 N
hydrochloric acid (Total volume = 1,000 mL). 10 mL of this solution is diluted to 250
mL with 0.01 N hydrochloric acid as Test Solution. Using 0.01 N hydrochloric acid as
a reference solution, absorption A is measured at 260 nm with a path length of 1 cm.
The content of Disodium 5'-Guanylate is obtained by the following equation

Content(%) A 250,000 100

= 289. × Weight of × 100drying(%)
- loss on × 100
8 sample(mg)

314
 Disodium 5’-Inosinate

Chemical Formula: C10H11O8N4PNa2‧nH2O

Molecular Weight: anhydrous 392.17 INS No.: 631

Synonyms: Sodium 5′-inosinate; Sodium CAS No.: 4691-65-0
inosinate

Compositional Specifications of Disodium 5'-Inosinate

Content Disodium 5'-Inosinate, when calculated on the anhydrous basis, should contain
within a range of 97.0～102.0% of disodium 5'-inosinate (C10H11O8N4PNa2)
Description Disodium 5'-Inosinate occurs as colorless to white crystals or as a white
crystalline powder, having a characteristic taste.
Identification (1) Dissolve 20 mg of Disodium 5'-Inosinate in 100 mL of 0.01 N
hydrochloric acid. The solution exhibits an absorption maximum at a wavelength of
250 ± 2 nm.
(2) To 3 mL of Disodium 5'-lnosinate solution (3→10,000), add 0.2 mL of a solution of
orcinol in alcohol(1→10), then add 3 mL of a solution of ferric ammonium sulfate in
hydrochloric acid (1→1,000), and heat in a water bath for 10 minutes. A green color
develops.
(3) To 5 mL of Disodium 5'-Inosinate solution (1→20), add 2 mL of magnesia solution.
No precipitate is formed. Then, add 7 mL of nitric acid, boil for 10 minutes. and
neutralize with sodium hydroxide solution. The solution responds to the test for
Phosphate (B) in Identification.
(4) Disodium 5'-Inosinate responds to the test for Sodium Salt in Identification.
Purity (1) Clarity and Color of Solution : 0.5 g of Disodium 5'-Inosinate is dissolved in 10
mL of water. This solution should be Colorless and should not be more than almost
clear.
(2) pH : pH of Disodium 5'-Inosinate solution (1→20) should be within a range of 7.0～8.5.
(3) Arsenic : It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(4) Lead : When 5.0 g of Disodium 5'-Inosinate is tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content
should not be more than 1.0 ppm.
315
 (5) Absorption Ratio : Disodium 5'-Inosinate is dissolved in 0.01 N hydrochloric acid (1
→50,000). Measure absorbances A1, A2, and A3 of this solution at wavelengths of
250 nm, 260 nm, and 280 nm, respectively. A1/A2 should be 1.55～1.65, and A3/A2
should be 0.20～0.30.
(6) Other Decomposed Substances of Nucleic Acid : Use Disodium 5'-Inosinate solution
(0.1→20), as the test solution. Measure 1μl of the test solution, perform Thin-Layer
Chromatography without a reference solution, using n-propanol- ammonia solution-
acetone mixture (6:5:2) as the developing solvent. Only one spot is observed. For the
thin-layer plate, use a plate prepared by applying silica gel for thin-layer
chromatography (fluorescent material coated) dried at 110℃ for 1 hour as the
support. Stop the development when the solvent front rises about 10 cm above the
original line, air-drying in a dark place, and observe under ultraviolet light
(wavelength : about 250 nm). Reference solution is not used.
Water Content When approximately 500 mg of Disodium 5'-Inosinate is tested for water
content, it should not be more than 28.5%. In this case, sample is transferred into a
dried titration flask, where 10 mL of Karl-Fischer methyl alcohol is added.
Additionally Karl-Fischer methyl alcohol is added to have excess of 10 mL. It is then
mixed by shaking with a cap for 20 minutes. It is titrated with water-ethyl alcohol
standard solution. Separately, a blank test is carried out. Perform a blank test in the
same manner.
Assay Accurately weigh about 500 mg of Disodium 5'-lnosinate, dissolve in 0.01 N
hydrochloric acid to make 1,000 mL. Take 10 mL of this solution, and add 0.01 N
hydrochloric acid to make 250 mL. Use this solution as the test solution. Use 0.01 N
hydrochloric acid as the reference solution. Measure absorbance A of the test solution
at a wavelength of 250 nm with 1 cm path length, and calculate the content by the
following formula:
A 250,000 100
Content(%) = 310 × weight of the ×
100 – water content(%)
× 100
sample(mg)

316
 Disodium 5'-Ribonucleotide
Synonyms: Sodium ribonucleotides INS No.: 635
Definition Disodium 5'-Ribonucleotide is a mixture of disodium 5'-inosinate, disodium
5'-guanylate, disodium 5'-cytidylate, and disodium 5'-uridylate or a mixture of
disodium 5'-inosinate and disodium 5'-guanylate.
Compositional Specifications of Disodium 5'-Ribonucleotide
Content Disodium 5'-Ribonucleotide. when calculated on the dried basis(anhydrous), should
contain within a range of 97.0～102.0% of disodium 5'-ribonucleotide, not less than
95.0% of the disodium 5'-ribonucleotide consists of disodium 5'-inosinate and disodium
5'-guanylate.
Description Disodium 5'-Ribonucleotide occurs as white to milky white crystals or
powder. It is odorless and has a characteristic taste.
Identification (1) To 1 mL of Disodium 5'-Ribonucleotide solution (1→2.000), add 0.2 mL
of a solution of orcinol in ethanol (1→10), then add 3 mL of a solution of ferric
ammonium sulfate in hydrochloric acid (1→1.000), and heat in a water bath for 10
minutes. A green color develops.
(2) To 5 mL of Disodium 5'-Ribonucleotide solution (1→20), add 2 mL of magnesia
solution. No precipitate is formed. Add 7 mL of nitric acid, boil for 10 minutes, and
neutralize with sodium hydroxide solution. The solution respond to the test for
Phosphate (B).
(3) To 1 mL of Disodium 5'-Ribonucleotide solution (1→1.000), add 2 mL of diluted
hydrochloric acid and 0.1 g of zinc dust, heat in a water bath for 10 minutes, filter,
and cool the filtrate in ice water. Add 1 mL of sodium nitrite solution (3→1.000),
shake, and allow to stand for 10 minutes. Add 1 mL of ammonium sulfamate solution
(1→200), shake well, and allow to stand for 5 minutes. Add 1 mL
N-1-naphtylethylene diamine dihydrochloride (1→500), a reddish purple color
develops.
(4) To 1 mL of Disodium 5'-Ribonucleotide solution (1→5,000), add 1 mL of diluted
hydrochloric acid, heat in a water bath for 10 minutes and cool. Add 0.5 mL of
Folin's solution and 2 mL of sodium carbonate saturated solution, a blue color
develops.
(5) 0.5 g of Disodium 5'-Ribonucleotide dissolve in 10 mL of the solution, which of 50
mL of hydroxylamine hydrochloride solution (7→50) adjusted to pH 6.5 by adding
sodium hydroxide solution, and heat for 2 hours in a water bath. Take 1 mL of the
solution is evaporated to dryness in a water bath. The residue is dissolved in 10 mL
of water, which is cooled in an ice bat. Add 2 mL of sulfanilic acid diluted with
hydrochloric acid (1→100) and mix by shaking, where 1 mL of sodium nitrite solution
(1→4) is drop-wise added and allowed to stand for 10 minutes. When 2 mL of
sodium hydroxide solution (2→5) is added to the solution, it becomes to orange red
color.
(6) Disodium 5'-Ribonucleotide solution (1→10) responds to the test for Sodium Salt in
317
 Indentification.
Purity (1) pH : A solution of Disodium 5'-Ribonucleotide (1→20) is tested by a glass
electrode method. It should be within a range of 7.0～8.5.
(2) Arsenic : It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(3) Lead : When 5.0 g of Disodium 5'-Ribonucleotide is tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content
should not be more than 1.0 ppm.
Water Content When 150 mg of Disodium 5'-Ribonucleotide, precisely weighed, is tested
by the back titration method in water content determination (Karl-Fischer Method),
the water content should not be more than 27%. However, titration is carried out by
the following procedure. Disodium 5'-Ribonucleotid is transferred into dried titration
flask, where 10 mL of methanol (for Karl-Fischer) is added and Karl-Fischer solution
(approximately 10 mL excess) is added. It is sealed and stir-mixed for 20 minutes. It
is titrated with water-methyl alcohol standard solution while stirring vigorously.
Separately, a blank test is carried out.
Assay The content of disodium 5'-ribonucleotide and that of disodium 5'-inosinate
(C10H11N4Na2O8P) and disodium 5'-guanylate (C10H11N4Na2O8P) calculate from the values
for I, G, and P obtained in (1), (2), and (3) below by the following formulas
Content of Disodium I + G + P
5'-Ribonucleotide(%) =
100 - water(%)
× 100

Content of Disodium I + G
5'-Inosinate(C 10H11N4Na2O8P)
and 5`-Disodium Guanylate = × 100
(C10H12N5Na2O8P)(%) 100 - water(%)

(1) Disodium 5'-Inosinate : Accurately weigh about 650 mg of Disodium

5'-Ribonucleotide, dissolve in water to make 500 mL, and this solution is referred to
as A solution. To 1 mL of A solution, add 4 mL of 6 N hydrochloric acid and water
to make 10 mL, heat in a water bath for 40 minutes, cool, add 0.4 g of zinc powder,
allow to stand for 50 minutes while vigorously shaking occasionally, add water to
make 20 mL, and filter. To 10 mL of the filtrate, add 1 mL of 6 N hydrochloric acid
(1→2), add 1 mL of sodium nitrite solution (3→1,000) while cooling in ice, shake
well, and allow to stand for 10 minutes. Add 1 mL of ammonium sulfamate solution (1
→200), shake well, and allow to stand for 5 minutes. To this solution, add 1 mL of
N-1-naphthylethylenediamine dihydrochloride solution (1→500), shake well, allow to
stand for 15 minutes, and add water to make 20 mL. Use this solution as the test
solution. Separately, prepare the reference solution in the same manner as the test
solution, using 1 mL of water in place of the A solution, and measure the absorbance
of the test solution at a wavelength of 515 nm using the reference solution.
Separately, accurately weigh each 3 mg of disodium 5'-inosinate and 3 mg of
disodium 5'-guanylate, dissolve in 100 mL of 0.01 N hydrochloric acid, reference
solution use 0.01 N hydrochloric acid, and measure the absorbances of both solutions.
318
 Determinate at a wavelength of 250 nm for disodium 5'-inosinate and a wavelength of
260 nm for disodium 5'-guanylate. Calculate the molecular extinction coefficients EI
and EG from the absorbances obtained, and calculate the contents of disodium
5'-inosinate and disodium 5'-guanylate, respectively, by the following formulas
Contents(C ofH disodium 5'-inosinate E
10 11N4Na2O8P)(%)
I
= × 100
12,160

Contents(C ofH5`-disodium guanylate E

10 12N5Na2O8P)(%)
G
= × 100
11,800
Based on the contents above, accurately weigh corresponding amount to about 50 mg
of each, combine them, and dissolve in water to make 200 mL. This is referred to as
B solution. Take 1 mL, 2 mL. and 3 mL of the B solution, add 4 mL of 6 N
hydrochloric acid and water to make 10 mL each, and prepare the standard solution
in the same manner as the sample solution. Using the same reference solution as in
the case of the test solution, measure the absorbance of each solution at a
wavelength of 515 nm, and prepare a calibration curve. From the calibration curve
and the absorbance of the test solution, calculate the content I (%) of disodium
5'-inosinate in the test solution.
(2) Disodium 5'-Guanylate : To 1 mL of the A solution in Assay (1), add 4 mL of 2N
hydrochloric acid and water to make 10 mL, heat in a water bath for 30 minutes,
cool, add 2 mL of Folin's solution and 5 mL of sodium carbonate solution (4→5),
allow to stand for 15 minutes, add water to make 50 mL, and centrifuge if necessary.
Use the supernatant as the test solution.
Separately, prepare the reference solution in the same manner as the test solution
using 1 mL of water in place of the sample solution, and determine the absorbance of
the test solution at a wavelength of 750 nm using the reference solution. Take 1 mL,
2 mL, and 3 mL of the B solution in Assay (1), add 4 mL of 2 N hydrochloric acid
and water to make 10 mL each, and prepare the standard solution, using these 3
solutions in the same manner as the A solution. Measure the respective absorbances
at a wavelength of 750 nm, using the same reference solution as for the test
solution, and prepare a calibration curve. From the calibration curve and absorbance
of the test solution, calculate the content G (%) of disodium 5'-guanylate
(C10H11N4Na2O8P) in the test solution.
(3) Disodium 5'-Cytidylate and Disodium 5'-Uridylate : Accurately weigh about 1.5 g of
Disodium 5-Ribonucleotide, add water to make exactly 50 mL, and this solution is
referred to as C solution. To 1 mL of the sample solution, add 2 mL of hydrazine
(hydrate), heat in a water bath for 1 hour, cool, add 1 N hydrochloric acid to make
the solution slightly acidic, and add 0.01 N hydrochloric acid to make exactly 100
mL. Measure exactly 10 mL of this solution, add 0.01 N hydrochloric acid to make
exactly 100 mL, and use this solution as the test solution. Prepare the reference
solution in the same manner as the test solution, using 1 mL of water in place of the
319
 C solution, and determine absorbances A260 and A280 of the test solution at
wavelengths of 260 nm and 280 nm, respectively.
To 1 mL of the sample solution, add 0.01 N hydrochloric acid to make 100 mL, and
measure 10 mL of this solution, and add 0.01 N hydrochloric acid to make 100 mL.
Determine absorbances A'260 and A'280 of this solution at wavelengths of 260 nm and
280 nm, respectively, and calculate the content P (%) of disodium 5'-cytidylate
(C9H12N3Na2O8P) and disodium 5'-uridylate (C9H11N2O8P) in the sample by the
following formula.
170.5 × (A'260 - A260) + 68.6 × (A'280 - A280)
P(%) =
weight of the sample(g)

320
 Disodium Succinate

Chemical Formula: C4H4O4Na2‧6H2O

Molecular Weight: 270.15 INS No.: 364(ii)
Synonyms: Butanedioic acid disodium salt CAS No.: 150-90-3
Compositional Specifications of Disodium Succinate
Content Disodium Succinate, when calculated on the dried basis, should contain within a
range of 98.0～101.0% of disodium succinate (C4H4O4Na2 = 162.08).
Description Disodium Succinate occurs as colorless to white crystals or as a white
crystalline powder. It is odorless and has a characteristic taste.
Identification (1) Disodium Succinate responds to the test for Succinic Acid salt in
Identification.
(2) Disodium Succinate responds to the test for Sodium Salt in Identification.
Purity (1) pH : pH of Disodium Succinate solution (1→20) should be within a range of
7.0～9.0.
(2) Sulfate : Weigh 1 g of Disodium Succinate, dissolve in 30 mL of water and
neutralize with 1 % hydrochloric acid. Add 1 mL of dilute hydrochloric acid, Test
Solution. The test Solution is tested by Sulfate Limit Test. Its content should not be
more than the amount that corresponds to 0.4 mL of 0.01 N sulfuric acid.
(3) Arsenic : It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(4) Lead : Disodium Succinate is tested by Purity (2) for 「Sodium Metaphosphate」(not
more than 2.0 ppm).
(5) Readily Oxidizable Substances : Weigh 2 g of Disodium Succinate, dissolve in 20
mL of water and 30 mL of diluted sulfuric acid, add 4 mL of 0.1 N potassium
permanganate, and keep 20℃. The color of the solution should not disappear within 3
minutes.
Loss on Drying When Disodium Succinate is dried for 2 hours at 120℃, the weigh loss
should be within a range of 37.0～41.0%.
Assay Accurately weigh about 0.15 g of Disodium Succinate, previously dried, dissolve
in 30 mL of acetic acid for nonaqueous titration, and titrate with 0.1 N perchloric acid
(indicator : 1 mL of crystal violet-acetic acid solution) until the color of the solution
changes from purple through blue to green. Separately, perform a blank test in the
same manner.
1 mL of 0.1 N perchloric acid = 8.103 mg of C4H4Na2O4

321
 Disodium DL-Tartrate

Chemical Formula: C4H4O6Na2

Molecular Weight: 194.06 CAS No.: 51307-92-7

Compositional Specifications of Disodium DL-Tartrate

Content Disodium DL-Tartrate, when calculated on the dried basis, should contain not
less than 98.5% of disodium DL-tartrate (C4H4O6Na2).
Description Disodium DL-Tartrate occurs as colorless crystals or as a white crystalline
powder.
Identification (1) Disodium DL-Tartrate solution (1→10) has no optical rotation.
(2) Proceed as directed under Identification for [L-Sodium Tartarate].
Purity (1) Clarity and Color of Solution, Acidity, and Alkalinity Sulfate : Proceed as
directed under Purity (1), (3), (4) in [L-Sodium Tartarate].
(2) Readily oxidizable substances : Weigh 2.0 g of Disodium DL-Tartrate, dissolve in
20 mL of water and 30 mL of diluted sulfuric acid (1→20), and add 4.0 mL of 0.1 N
potassium permanganate while keeping the temperature at 20℃. The pink color of the
solution does not disappear within 3 minutes.
(3) Arsenic : It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(4) Heavy Metals : 2 g of Disodium DL-Tartrate transfer into a quartz or porcelain
crucible and carbonize by heating mildly. After cooling, add 2 mL of nitric acid and 5
drops of sulfuric acid, it is heated until white smoke disappears, which is then
reduced to ash by further heating at 450~550℃. After cooling, 2 mL of hydrochloric
acid is added, which is then evaporated to dryness in a water bath. 3 drops of
hydrochloric acid and 10 mL of hot water are added to the resulting residue, which
is then heated for 2 minutes. After cooling, 1 drop of phenolphthalein indicator
solution is added, then ammonia solution is added until the color of the solution
becomes pale red. The resulting solution is transferred into a Nestler cylinder by
rinsing with water. 50 mL of test solution is prepared by adding 2 mL of diluted
acetic acid (1→20) and water. When this solution tested by Heavy Metal Limit Test,
the content should not be more than 20 ppm. Color standard solution is prepared by
the following procedure. 2 mL of nitric acid, 5 drops of sulfuric acid, and 2 mL of
hydrochloric acid are added and evaporated to dryness in a crucible that is made of
the same material used for test solution preparation. 3 drops of hydrochloric acid are
added to the residue, which is then transferred into another Nestler cylinder as
described above. Finally, 2 mL of lead standard solution, 2 mL of diluted acetic acid
322
 (1→20), and add water to make 50 mL.
Loss on Drying When Disodium DL-Tartrate is dried for 4 hours at 105℃, the loss
should not be more than 0.5%.
Assay Proceed as directed under Assay in [L-Sodium Tartarate].

323
 Disodium L-Tartrate
Disodium d-Tartrate

Chemical Formula: C4H4O6Na2‧2H2O

Molecular Weight: 230.09 INS No.: 335(ii)
Synonyms: Disodium
(+)-2,3-dihydroxybutanedioic acid CAS No.: 6106-24-7

Compositional Specifications of Disodium L-Tartrate

Content Disodium L-Tartrate, when calculated on the dried basis, should contain not less
than 99.0% of disodium L-tartrate (C4H4O6Na2 = 194.06).
Description Disodium L-Tartrate occurs as colorless crystals or as a white crystalline
powder.
Identification (1) An aqueous solution (1→10) is dextrorotatory.
(2) Disodium L-Tartrate responds to the tests for Sodium Salt and Tartrate.
Purity (1) Clarity and Color of Solution : 1.0 g of Disodium L-Tartrate is dissolved in
20 mL of water. This solution should be almost clear.
(2) Specific rotation : Approximately 5 g of Disodium L-Tartrate is precisely weighed
and dissolved in water to make 50 mL. Optical rotation of this solution is measured and it
should be within a range of, ＝ +25.0∼+27.5°
(3) pH : pH of Disodium L-Tartrate solution (1→20) should be within a range of 7.0～9.0.
(4) Sulfate : When 1 g of Disodium L-Tartrate is tested by Sulfate Limit Test, its
content should not be more than the amount that corresponds to 0.4 mL of 0.01 N
sulfuric acid.
(5) Oxalate : 1.0 g of Disodium L-Tartrate dissolve in 10 mL of water and add 2 mL
of calcium chloride solution (2→25). The solution should not turn turbid.
(6) Arsenic : It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(7) Lead : When 5.0 g of Disodium L-Tartrate is tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content
should not be more than 2.0 ppm.
(8) Mercury : When Disodium L-Tartrate is tested by Mercury Limit Test, its content
should not be more than 1.0 ppm.
Loss on Drying When Disodium L-Tartrate is dried for 3 hours at 150℃, the weigh loss
should be within a range of 14～17%.
Assay Accurately weigh about 0.2 g of Disodium L-Tartrate, previously dried, add 3 mL
of formic acid, dissolve by warming, add 50 mL of glacial acetic acid for nonaqueous
titration, and titrate with 0.1 N perchloric acid (indicator : 1 mL of crystal
324
violet-glacial acetic acid solution). The end point is until the color of the solution
changes from purple through blue to green. Perform a blank test in the same manner.
1 mL of 0.1 N perchloric acid = 9.703 mg of C4H4O6Na2O6

325
 Disodium 5'-Uridylate
Sodium 5'-Undylate

Chemical Formula: C9H11N2Na2O9P

Molecular Weight: 368.15 CAS No.: 3387-36-8

Compositional Specifications of Disodium 5'-Uridylate

Content When Disodium 5'-Uridylate, when calculated on the dried basis, should contain
within a range of 97.0～102.0% of disodium 5'-uridylate (C9H11N2Na2O9P).
Description Disodium 5'-Uridylate occurs as colorless to white crystals or as a white
crystalline powder, having a slight, characteristic taste.
Identification (1) Dissolve 20 mg of Disodium 5'-Uridylate in 100 mL of 0.01 N
hydrochloric acid and 0.01 N hydrochloric is added to 10 mL of this solution to
make 100 mL. The solution exhibits an absorption maximum at a wavelength of 262
± 2 nm.
(2) To 3 mL of Disodium 5'-Uridylate solution (3→10,000), add 1 mL of hydrochloric
acid and 1 mL of bromine solution, heat on a water bath for 30 minutes, remove the
bromine by blowing with air, and add 0.2 mL of a solution of orcinol in ethanol (1→
10). To this solution, add 3 mL of a solution of ferric ammonium sulfate in
hydrochloric acid (1→1,000), and heat in a water bath for 20 minutes. A green color
becomes.
(3) To 5 mL of Disodium 5'-Uridylate solution (1→20), add 2 mL of magnesia solution.
No precipitate is formed. Then add 7 mL of nitric acid, boil for 10 minutes, and
neutralize with sodium hydroxide solution (1→25). The solution responds to the test
for Phosphate (2).
(4) Disodium 5'-Uridylate responds to test of Sodium Salt in Identification.
Purity (1) Clarity and Color of Solution : When 0.5 g of Disodium 5'-Uridylate dissolved
in 10 mL of water, the solution should be Colorless and almost clear.
(2) pH : pH of Disodium 5'-Uridylate solution (1→20) should be within a range of
7.0~8.5 as determined by glass electrode method.
326
 (3) Arsenic : It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(4) Lead : Disodium 5'-Uridylate is tested by Purity (2) for Sodium Metaphosphate(not
more than 2.0 ppm).
(5) Absorption Ratio : Weigh 20 mg of Disodium 5'-Uridylate, and dissolve in diluted
hydrochloric acid (1→1,000) to make 1,000 mL. Measure absorbances A1, A2, and A3
of 0.01N hydrochloric acid solution of Disodium 5'-Cytidylate(1→50,000) at
wavelengths of 250 nm, 260 nm, and 280 nm, respectively. A1/A2 is 0.7～0.78, and
A3/A2 is 0.34～0.42.
(6) Other decomposed substances of ribonucleic acids : Measure 1 ㎕ of the solution of
Disodium 5'-Uridylate (0.1→10) as the test solution. Perform Thin-Layer
Chromatography, using an ethanol ethylene glycol monomethyl ether-diluted
hydrochloric acid (1→10) mixture (2:2:1) as the developing solvent. Only one spot is
observed. For the thin layer plate, use microcrystalline cellulose for thin-layer
chromatography dried at 60～80℃ for 20 minutes as the support. Stop the
development when the solvent front rises 10 cm above the original line, air-dry, and
observe under ultraviolet light (about 250 nm wavelength) in a dark place. However,
reference solution is not used.
Water Content Water content of approximately 0.15 g of Disodium 5'-Uridylate as
determined by water content determination method (Karl-Fischer Method) should not
be more than 26%. In this case, sample transfer into a dried titration flask, where 10
mL of Karl-Fisher methyl alcohol is added. A certain amount of Karl-Fisher solution
is added so that there is an excess of approximately 10 mL. Then the flask is capped
and shaken for 20 minutes. It is titrated with water-methyl alcohol standard solution.
Separately, a blank test is carried out by following the same procedure.
Assay Accurately weigh about 500 mg of Disodium 5'-Uridylate, dissolve in 0.01 N
hydrochloric acid to make 1,000 mL, measure 10 mL of this solution, and add 0.01 N
hydrochloric acid to make 250 mL. Use this solution as the test solution. Measure
absorbance A of the test solution at a wavelength of 260 nm, and calculate the
content by the following formula:
Content of disodium 5'-uridylate (C9H11N2Na2O9P)
500 185.9 × A
＝ × × 100
weight of the sample(mg) 100—water content(%)

327
 Dry Formed Vitamin A
Definition Dry Formed Vitamin A is powdered vitamin A oil.
Compositional Specifications of Dry Formed Vitamin A
Content Dry Formed Vitamin A should contain within a range of 90.0～120.0% of the
indicated amount of vitamin A. 150 mg of vitamin A corresponds to 500,000 units of
international standard.
Description Dry Formed Vitamin A occurs as a light yellow to light red-brown powder.
Identification Grind 0.5 g of Dry Formed Vitamin A in a mortar, add 10 mL of hot
water, stir thoroughly to make milky emulsion, add 10 mL of ethanol to break emulsion,
and transfer the mixture into a flask. Add 20 mL of hexane, shake well, and either
allow to stand or centrifuge to separate into two layers. Take the hexane layer, wash
with 20 mL of water by shaking well, separate the water layer, and evaporate the
hexane layer to dryness under reduced pressure. To residue, add 1 mL of chloroform,
and 5 mL of antimony trichloride solution. The color of the solution becomes to blue.
Purity (1) Decay : Dry Formed Vitamin A should not have unpleasant odor.
(2) Arsenic : It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(3) Lead : When 5.0 g of Dry Formed Vitamin A is tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content
should not be more than 2.0 ppm.
Loss on Drying When Dry Formed Vitamin A is dried for 4 hours in a vacuum
desiccator, the weight loss should be not more than 5%.
Residue on Ignition When thermogravimetric analsis is done with 2 g of Dry Formed
Vitamin A, the residue should be not more than 5%.
Assay Accurately weigh about 5 g of Dry Formed Vitamin A, add a small amount of hot
water, stir thoroughly to milky emulsion, transfer into a flask, and proceed as directed
under Assay in 「Vitamin A in Oil」.
Storage Standards of Dry Formed Vitamin A
Store in a light-shielded, hermetic container filled with nitrogen.

328
 Enzymatically Decomposed Apple Extract
Definition Enzymatically Decomposed Apple Extract is obtained by the following process.
Pulps are removed from juices of apples (Malus pumila MILLER) of rosaceae. The clear
supernatant is enzymatically treated, which is then purified. The effective components
are chlorogenic acid and catechins. Diluent, stabilizer, or solvents can be added for the
purpose of content adjustment and quality preservation.
Compositional Specifications of Enzymatically Decomposed Apple Extract
Content Enzymatically Decomposed Apple Extract contains 90～130% of the indicated
amount as chlorogenic acid and catechins.
Description This is a yellowish brown powder with a hint of apple scent.
Identification 10 g of Enzymatically Decomposed Apple Extract dissolve in 100 mL of
water. When 2 drops of ferric chloride solution are added to 5 mL of this solution, it
turns blackish blue. Upon settling, blackish blue precipitates are formed.
Purity (1) Arsenic ： It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(2) Lead : When 5.0 g of Enzymatically Decomposed Apple Extract is tested by Atomic
Absorption Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy,
its content should not be more than 2.0 ppm.
Assay Precisely 20 mg of Enzymatically Decomposed Apple Extract is mixed with a
mixture of 0.2M phosphate buffer solution (pH 3.0) ： methyl alcohol ： water (2：3：
15) (total volume = 25 mL). It is filtered through a 0.45 μm Millipore filter (Test
Solution). Separately, a mixed standard solution is prepared with a mixture of 0.2 M
phosphate buffer solution (pH 3.0) ： methyl alcohol ： water (2：3：15) so that the
final concentrations are epigallocatechin 360ppm, chlorogenic acid 55ppm, epicatechin
100ppm, epigallocatechin gallate 80ppm, and epicatechin gallate 70ppm. 20 μl each of
mixed standard solution and Test Solution is injected into liquid chromatography under
the following Operation Conditions. The contents of chlorogenic acid and catechins are
separately calculated by the following equations.
① chlorogenic acid
concentrate of chlorogenic acid Sa D 100
content(%) ＝ × × ×
stadard solution (ppm) St W 106

Sa ： Peak area of Test Solution

St ： Peak area of Standard Solution
W ： Weight of sample(g)
D ： Dilution factor of Test Solution
② catechins ： The content of catechins is a sum of the contents of epigallocatechin,
epicatechin, epigallocatechin gallate, and epicatechin gallate.
Content＝(%) concentration of corresponding
catechin standard × Sa × D × 100

329
 solution(ppm) St W 106
Sa ： Peak area corresponding catechin in Test Solution
St ： Peak area corresponding catechin in Standard Solution
W ： Weight of sample(g)
D ： Dilution factor of Test Solution
Operation Conditions
-Detector ： UV detector, 280 nm
-Column ： μ Bondapak C18 (3.9 × 300 mm, 10 μm) or its equivalent
-Column Temperature ： 40℃
-Mobile Phase ： acetonitrile ： acetic acid ： methyl alcohol ： water
(113：5：20：862)
-Flow Rate ： 1 mL/min
∘0.2 M Phosphate Buffer Solution (pH 3.0) ： 0.2 M potassium phosphate, monobasic
solution and 0.2 M phosphooric acid are well mixed. Its pH is adjusted to 3.0.

330
 Enzymatically Decomposed Lecithin
Definition Enzymatically Decomposed Lecithin is obtained by decomposing lecithin with
enzyme. Its major components are rhizolecithin and phosphatidic acid.
Compositional Specifications of Enzymatically Decomposed Lecithin
Description Enzymatically Decomposed Lecithin is white～brown powder or granule, or
pale yellow～dark brown viscous liquid with characteristic scent and taste.
Identification 1 g of Enzymatically Decomposed Lecithin is placed in a flask for
decomposition. Add 5 g of powdered potassium sulfate, 0.5 g of copper sulfate, and 20
mL of sulfuric acid. The flask is tilted to 45℃ angle and gently heated so that it
doesn't bubble. Then the temperature is raised to boil until the solution becomes
transparent blue. It is then heated for 1～2 hours and cooled and the same amount of
water is added. 10 mL of ammonium molybdate (1→5) is added to 5 mL of the
resulting solution. Upon heating yellow precipitates are formed.
Purity (1) Acid value : 2 g of Enzymatically Decomposed Lecithin is precisely weighted
and dissolved in 50 mL of toluene. After adding 50 mL of alcohol previously
neutralized with 0.1N potassium hydroxide solution while using phenolphthalein TS
as indicator, heat until the sample is dissolved. This mixture is used as the test
solution, and when it is proceeded as directed under Acid value in Fats Test, the
tvalue of the solution should not be more than 45.
(2) Toluene Insoluble substances ： Approximately 5 g of Enzymatically Decomposed
Lecithin is precisely weighted and dissolved in 100 mL toluene. Insoluble substances
are filtered through a glass filter (1G4) that is previously weighted. It is washed
several times with 25 mL of toluene. The residue along with the filter is dried for 1
hour at 105℃ and cooled in a desiccator and weighted. Or 5 g of Enzymatically
Decomposed Lecithin is precisely weighted and dissolved in 100 mL of toluene in a
Erlenmeyer flask. Transfer 50 mL of the solution into a centrifuge tube, which is
then centrifuged for 15 minutes at 3,000 rpm. The supernatant is removed. The
remaining 50 mL of the solution is centrifuged by the same method using the same
tube. The inner wall of the flask is washed with 50 mL of toluene into the same
tube, which is then centrifuged by the same method. The supernatant is discarded.
This is repeated twice. The insoluble substances are dried in the tube for 2 hours at
105℃, cooled in a desiccator, and weighted. The content should not be more than
0.3%.
(3) Acetone Insoluble substances
Preparation of sample : If Enzymatically Decomposed Lecithin contains moisture, it is
dehydrated and dried by heating at 80℃ and evaporating under vacuum. It is then
dissolved in toluene and the solution is filtered through a filter paper to remove
impurities. Toluene from the filtrate is removed by evaporation under a reduced
pressure in a round bottom flask. The residue is crude sample.
Test Procedure : 10 g of crude sample is precisely weighted into a 300 mL beaker,
and then 200 mL of acetone saturated with phospholipid that is cooled in ice water is
331
 added. It is thoroughly mixed and set aside for 30 minutes. Acetone insoluble
substances settle down at the bottom of the beaker and the solution becomes clear.
The supernatant is vacuum filtered with a glass filter, precisely weighted Acetone
insoluble substances are washed three times with 30 mL of acetone saturated with
phospholipid that is cooled in ice water. Acetone insoluble substances and wash
acetone are transferred into a glass filter, which is then vacuum filtered. Acetone
insoluble substances are dried for 1 hours under a reduced pressure. Or, 2.0 g of
crude sample is precisely weighted into a 50 mL graduated centrifuge tube with a
stopper (precisely weighted) and dissolved by heating in 5 mL of acetone saturated
with phospholipid that is cooled in ice water. The tube is then cooled for 15 minutes
in an ice bath (also a glass stirring rod is precisely weighted and cooled for 15
minutes in an ice bath). Then the tube is filled to 50 mL with acetone saturated with
phospholipid, which is stirred thoroughly while hitting. It is cooled for 15 minutes in
an ice bath and then stirred again. It is then centrifuged at 3,000 rpm for 15 minutes
and the supernatant is discarded. This procedure is repeated twice. Acetone insoluble
substances are dried along with the centrifuge tube for 2 hours at 105℃ and cooled
in a desiccator. The content of acetone insoluble substances is calculated by the
following equation and it should not be less than 56%.
Acetone insoluble
＝
substances(%) Insoluble stabstances(g)
× 100
weight of the sample(g)

Solutions
∘Acetone Saturated with Phospholipid : Acetone insoluble substances (phospholipid) are
obtained by treating crude sample with acetone (as described above). 1 g of the
insoluble substances is placed in a 1,000 mL flask with a stopper and dissolved in
acetone (total volume = 1,000 mL). The solution is cooled in an ice bath while
shaking occasionally. This acetone is saturated with phospholipid. The supernatant is
filtered before use.
(4) Peroxide Value ： 5 g of Enzymatically Decomposed Lecithin is precisely weighted
into a 250 mL of Erlenmeyer flask with a stopper. It is then dissolved to a clear
solution in 35 mL mixture of acetic acid and chloroform (3：2) by gently shaking.
Clean nitrogen is passed through to replace air in the flask. 1 mL of potassium
iodide solution is accurately added while nitrogen is passed through. A stopper is
placed immediately and the flask is shaken for 1 minute. It is then set aside for 5
minutes in a dark place. 75 mL of water is added and shaken vigorously with a
stopper. It is then titrated with 0.01 N sodium thiosulfate solution (indicator : starch
solution). Peroxide value is obtained from the following equation. It should not be
more than 10. Separately, a blank test is carried out for correction.
Peroxide
＝
Value Consumed amount of 0.01N sodium
thiosulfate solution(mL) × 10

332
 weight of the sample(g)
(5) Arsenic : It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(6) Lead : When 5.0 g of Enzymatically Decomposed Lecithin is tested by Atomic
Absorption Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy,
its content should not be more than 2.0 ppm.
(7) Mercury : When Enzymatically Decomposed Lecithin is tested by Mercury Limit
Test, its content should not be more than 1.0ppm.
Water Content Water content of Enzymatically Decomposed Lecithin is determined by
direct titration method in water determination (Karl-Fisher Titration) and should not be
more than 2.0%. However, chloroform : methyl alcohol mixture (4:1) is used instead of
methyl alcohol for Karl-Fisher titration.

333
 Enzymatically Modified Hesperidine
Definition Enzymatically Modified Hesperidine is obtained by adding glucose to
hesperidine using α-glucosyltransferase. Its component is α-glucosylhesperidine.
Compositional Specifications of Enzymatically Modified Hesperidine
Content Dried the mixture form should contain no less than 27% of Enzymatically
Modified Hesperidine as hesperetin glycoside and the mono form should contain no less
than 70% of Enzymatically Modified Hesperidine as α-monoglucosylhesperidine.
Description Enzymatically Modified Hesperidine occurs as a light yellow～yellowish
brown powder or crystalline powder with a slightly characteristic odor.
Identification (1) 5 mg of Enzymatically Modified Hesperidine dissolve in 10 mL of 50%
ethyl alcohol. When 1～2 drops of ferric chloride solution (1→500) are added to this
solution, it becomes brown in color.
(2) A solution of 10 mg of Enzymatically Modified Hesperidine in 500mL of water has
a maximum absorption band in the wavelength range of 280-286nm.
(3) Approximately 0.5g of Enzymatically Modified Hesperidine is completely dissolved in
100mL of water. Use this solution as the test solution. Aside from that,
approximately 0.2g of standard Hesperidine dissolve in 50 mL of sodium hydroxide
solution (1→500). Prepare 40 mL of the standard solution through applying the
mobile phase of the high performance liquid chromatography to 10 mL of the
previous solution. When performed the high performance liquid chromatography for
the test solution and the standard solution following the conditions listed below, peak
of Enzymatically Modified Hesperidine should be at the location with earlier retention
time compared to that of the Hesperidine, but it should display relatively similar UV
absorption spectrum.
Operating Conditions
Detector: Photodiode array detector (Measured wavelength 280nm, 200-400nm)
Packing material: chemically bonded Octadecylsilane
Column: inner diameter 3.9-4.6mm, length 150-300mm
Column temperature: 40℃
Mobile phase: water : acetonitrile (4:1)
Flow rate: 0.5mL/min
Injection volume: 10ul
Purity (1) Arsenic: It should be no more than 2.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(2) Lead : When 5.0 g of Enzymatically Modified Hesperidine is tested by Atomic
Absorption Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy,
its content should not be more than 10.0 ppm.
(3) Clarity and Color of Solution : When 0.5 g of Enzymatically Modified Hesperidine is
dissolved in 100 mL of water, the solution should be clear.
Loss on Drying When 1.0 g of Enzymatically Modified Hesperidine is dried for 3 hours
334
 at 105℃, the weight loss should not be more than 6%.
Assay 1.0g of Enzymatically Modified Hesperidine is precisely weighted and dissolved in
water to make 100 mL solution. 1 mL of this solution dissolve with 100 mL of distilled
water and use this solution as the test solution. Aside from this, dry the standard
Hesperidine compound in 135℃ for 2 hours and then dissolve 1.0g of dried standard
Hesperidine with 0.5N Sodium hydroxide solution and mark it up to 100mL. Dissolve
and mark up 1.0mL of this solution to 100mL with water which is considered as the
standard solution. Calculate the hesperetin glycoside (C) under the operation conditions
shown below based on the high performance liquid chromatography through the sum of
the monoglycosylhesperidine (A1), diglycosylhesperidine (A2), triglycosylhesperidine (A3),
tetraglycosylhesperidine (A4), pentaglycosylhesperidine (A5), and the quantity of
hesperidine (B). However, calculate only the monoglycosylhesperidine (A1) for the mono
formation.
An = As x at x F x 100
At x as
B= Bs x at x 100
At x bs
C = A1 + A 2 + A3 + A4 + A 5 + B
An: The specific quantity of glycosylhesperidine for selected from A1~A5 during the
examination
As: Each specific glycosylhesperidine peak area of the test solution
At: The hesperidine peak area of the standard hesperidine solution
as: The amount (g) collected in respect to the examination
at: The collected amount of the standard (purity correction) hesperidine (g)
F: The coefficient for the hesperidine conversion = M/610, M: molar mass of each
glycosylhesperidine type (M: 772 for monoglycosylhesperidine, 934 for
diglycosylhesperidine, 1096 for triglycosylhesperidine, 1258 for
tetraglycosylhesperidine, 1420 for pentaglycosylhesperidine)
B: The amount of hesperidine (%) during the examination
Bs: The hesperidine peak area of the test solution
bs: The amount collected (g) in respect to the examination
C: The amount of hesperetin glycoside during the examination (%)
Operating Condition
Detector: UV (Measured wavelength 280nm)
Column: Capcell pack C18 or its equivalent
Column temperature: 45℃
Mobile phase: Acetonitrile : water (20:80)
Flow rate: 0.5mL/min
Injection volume: 10 μl
335
 Enzymatically Modified Rutin
Definition Enzymatically Modified Rutin is obtained after removing rhamnose from rutin
by treating with partially hydrolyzing enzyme. Or it is obtained by treating rutin with
transaminase followed by reacting with glucose. Its component is α-glycorutin.
Compositional Specifications of Enzymatically Modified Rutin
Content Dried Enzymatically Modified Rutin should contain no less than 60.0% of
enzymatically modified rutin
Description Enzymatically Modified Rutin is yellow～yellowish brown powder with a
slight characteristic scent.
Identification (1) 5 mg of Enzymatically Modified Rutin dissolve in 10 mL of ethyl
alcohol. When 1～2 drops of ferric chloride solution (1→50) are added to this
solution, it becomes brown in color.
(2) When 5 mL of sodium hydroxide solution (1→1,000) is added to 5 mg of
Enzymatically Modified Rutin, the solution shows orange～yellow color.
(3) 5 mg of Enzymatically Modified Rutin dissolve in water, where 2 mL of
hydrochloric acid and 0.05 g of magnesium powder are added. The color of the
solution slowly changes to orange.
(4) 0.1 g of Enzymatically Modified Rutin dissolve in 100 mL of 1 N sulfuric acid.
When this solution is boiled for 2 hours and cooled, yellow precipitates are formed..
(5) A solution of 0.01 g of Enzymatically Modified Rutin in 500 mL of 0.085%
phosphoric acid solution has a maximum absorption band near 258 nm and 351 nm.
Purity (1) Arsenic : It should be no more than 2.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(2) Lead : When 5.0 g of Enzymatically Modified Rutin is tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content
should not be more than 10.0 ppm.
Assay Enzymatically Modified Rutin is precisely weighted and dissolved in 50 mL of
water so that the measured absorption lies within a range of 0.3∼0.7. If necessary, it
is filtered through a glass filter, which is washed with water. The filtrate and wash
water are combined so that the total volume is 100 mL. 1 mL of this solution is diluted
to 100 mL with 0.085% phosphoric acid (Test Solution). Separately, rutin standard is
dried for 2 hours at 135℃ and approximately 0.2g of it is precisely weighted and
dissolved in 80 mL of methyl alcohol by heating. Cool the solution, this solution is
diluted to 100 mL with methyl alcohol. 1 mL of this solution is further diluted to 100
mL with 0.085% phosphoric acid (Standard Solution). Using 0.085% phosphoric acid as
a reference, absorption near 351 nm is measured for Test (A1) and Standard (A2)
Solutions. The content of enzymatically modified rutin (the amount converted as rutin)
is obtained by the following equation. The amount converted as rutin is the content
enzymatically modified rutin.
A ＝ A1 × R × 100

336
 A2 × S
A : Content of enzymatically treated rutin (converted as rutin) (%)
A1 : Absorbance of Test Solution
A2 : Absorbance of Standard Solution
S : Amount of sample (mg)
R : Amount of rutin Standard (mg)

337
 Enzymatically Modified Stevia

Synonyms: Glucosyl stevia

Definition Enzymatically Modified Stevia is obtained by addition of glucose to stevia

extracts using α-glucosyltransferase. Its components are α-glucosylstevioside, etc.
Compositional Specifications of Enzymatically Modified Stevia
Content If Enzymatically Modified Stevia is converted to a dehydrated form, it should
contain no less than 80.0 % of steviolglycoside and not more than 15.0 % of unreacted
steviolglycoside.
Description Enzymatically Modified Stevia is white～pale yellow powder, flakes, or
granule with a cool, sweet taste. It have a slight characteristic scent.
Identification (1) 1.2 g of Enzymatically Modified Stevia dissolve in 100 mL of water,
where 100 mL of n-butyl alcohol is added and shaken. It is set aside to separate
two phases. N-butyl alcohol phase is taken and filtered if necessary. 5 mL of
anthrone solution is slowly added along the inner wall of a container with 5 mL of
this solution. The boundary area becomes blue～green in color.
(2) 40 mL of sulfuric acid (1→5) is added to 2.4 g of Enzymatically Modified Stevia in
a flask. A reflux condenser is attached to the flask, which is heated for 2 hours in a
water bath. Cool the solution, it is extracted twice with 50 mL each of ether. The
extracts are washed twice with water, dehydrated with anhydrous sodium sulfate, and
evaporated to dryness. The residue dissolve in 10 mL of methyl alcohol, where 10
mL of water is added. Formed precipitates are filtered. These precipitates are
washed with a small amount of 50% methyl alcohol and dried for 2 hours at 105˚.
The melting point of residue should be 226∼230˚.
(3) 2.4 g of Enzymatically Modified Stevia dissolve in 100 mL of water. The solution is
halved. One portion is tested by (3) Assay for Unreacted Steviolglycoside in Assay
and a group of peaks should be observed after the peak for Rebaudioside A. 500
GUN of glucoamylase per 1g of Enzymatically Modified Stevia is added to the other
portion of the solution, which is reacted for 24 hours at 55˚. It is then filtered
through a 0.45 ㎛ Millipore filter and the filtrate is analyzed by Assay for Unreacted
Steviolglycoside. The group of peaks observed after the peak of Rebaudioside A shall
increase, the area for the group of peaks before the peak of Rebaudioside A shall be
almost disappear.
Purity (1) Arsenic : It should be no more than 2.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(2) Lead : When 5.0 g of Enzymatically Modified Stevia is tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content
should not be more than 1.0 ppm.
Loss on Drying When 1 g of Enzymatically Modified Stevia is dried for 4 hours at 10
5℃, the weight loss should not be more than 6%.
338
Residue on Ignition When Residue on Ignition analysis is done with accurately weighted
1 g of Enzymatically Modified Stevia, the amount of Residue on Ignition should not be
more than 1%.
Assay (1) Steviolglycoside : The content of steviolglycoside is a sum of ① steviol
content and ② sugar content in glycoside.
① Assay for Steviol : Approximately 100 mg of Enzymatically Modified Stevia is
precisely weighted into a 30 mL Erlenmeyer flask, where 10 mL of 20% sulfuric acid
is added and a reflux condenser is attached. It is heated for 2 hours in a water bath
and cooled in a running water. The solution transfer into a separatory funnel using 10
mL of water. The flask is again washed three times with 30 mL each of ether, which
is added to the funnel. The funnel is well shaken and set aside. The aqueous layer is
discarded and the ether phase is washed twice with 20 mL each of water. The
aqueous layer is completely removed. The ether phase transfer into a separate flask.
The funnel is washed twice with 10 mL each of ether, which is added to the flask. 15g
of anhydrous sodium sulfate is added and mixed well by shaking. The ether phase is
decanted into another flask. The remaining anhydrous sodium sulfate washed twice 10
mL each of ether, which is added to the flask. After evaporate the ether, the residue
dissolve in 10 mL of ethyl acetate, where 3 mL of diazomethane ether solution is
added and a cap is placed. It is then set aside for 20 minutes while stirring
occasionally. 0.5 mL of acetic acid is well mixed with this solution, where 2 mL of an
internal standard solution of squalene in n-butyl alcohol (12.5 mg/mL) (Test Solution).
Separately, 50 mg of stevioside standard (previously dried for 2 hours at 105℃) is
precisely weighted and treated by the same procedure as Test Solution (Standard
Solution). Test and Standard Solutions are separately injected into gas chromatography
under the following Operation Conditions. The content of steviol is calculated by the
following equation.
Steviol Content (%) A
×
weight of stevioside standard(mg)
weight of the sample on the × 100 × K
= AS
anhydrous basis(mg)

A : Peak area ratio of iso-steviol methyl ester in Test Solution vs. sualene
As : Peak area ratio of iso-steviol methyl ester in Standard Solution vs. sualene
K : Conversion factor to steviol 318.46/804.88 = 0.3957
Operation Conditions
-Column : DB-17 (30 m × 0.25 ㎛ × 0.25 mm) or its equivalent
-Detector : Flame Ionization Detector(FID)
-Temperature at injection hole : 260˚C
-Column Temperature : 235˚C
-Detector Temperature : 260˚C
-Carrier Gas and Flow Rate : Nitrogen or helium, flow rate and column temperature
339
 are adjusted so that the peak of iso-steviol methyl ester appears in 7～15 minutes.
② Assay for Sugar in Glycoside
∘Preparation of Test Solutions : Approximately 1.0 g of Enzymatically Modified Stevia is
precisely weighted and dissolved in 50 mL of water. The solution transfer into a 2.5
cm (diameter) resin column that is made using 50 mL of adsorption resin (Amberlite
XAD-7) for enzymatically modified stevia. It is then drained out for 1 minute at a rate
of 3 mL/min or lower. The column is washed with 250 mL of water. Adsorbed matter
is eluted for 1 minute using 250 mL of 50% ethyl alcohol or 90% methyl alcohol at a
flow rate of 3 mL/min or lower. The eluted solution is concentrated and dried with a
vacuum evaporator. The residue dissolve in water (total volume = 500 mL). 1 mL of
this solution is diluted to 50 mL with water (Test Solution)
∘Test Procedure : 2 mL of Test Solution is placed in a test tube with a stopper. While
cooling in an ice bath, exactly 6 mL of anthrone solution is added to the test tube and
well mixed with Test Solution by shaking. It is then heated for exactly 16 minutes in
heating water bath and cooled in an ice bath. Absorption of this solution is measured
at 620 nm using water as a reference. Concentration of glucose (㎍/mL) in Test
Solution is obtained from a glucose standard curve. Standard Solutions are prepared
using glucose (dried for 2 hours at 105˚) so that each 1 mL solution contains 10 ㎍, 30
㎍, and 50 ㎍ of glucose. Glucose Standard Curve prepared by following the same
procedure as Test Solution with Standard Solutions. The content of sugar in
steviolglycoside is obtained by the following equation.

Amount of sugar in steviolglycoside(%) b × 0.9 × 50 × 500

× 100 =
2.25b
= Y × 1,000 × 1,000 Y

b : Glucose concentration in Test Solution from Standard Curve (㎍/mL)

Y : Amount of sample as a dehydrated form (g)
(2) Assay for Unreacted Steviolglycoside : Approximately 50∼100 mg of Enzymatically
Modified Stevia which is previously dried for 2 hours at 105℃ is precisely weighted
and dissolved in water:acetonitrile(7:3) mixture to make 50 mL, test solution.
Separately, Stevioside and Rebaudioside A standard are dried for 2 hours at 105℃.
50 mg of each standard dissolve in water:acetonitrile(7:3) mixture to make 50 mL,
Standard Solutions. Test and Standard Solutions are separately injected into liquid
chromatography under the following operation conditions and the total amount of
stevioglycoside is calculated. Peak areas and the retention time of dulcoside A,
rubusoside, rebaudioside A, rebaudioside B, rebaudioside C, rebaudioside D,
rebaudioside F, steviolvioside and stevioside in Test Solution are obtained. and
compare them for the identification. The amount of the 8 components except
340
 rebaudioside A, and the amount of rebaudioside are obtained by the following
formula. The sum of these amount is the amount of steviol glycoside.
X (%) = Ws Ax × fx
W × As × 100
Rebaudioside WR Ax
A% = × × 100
W AR
X : Each steviol glycoside
Ws : Amount of Stevioside in standard solution (mg)
Ws : Amount of Ribaudioside A in standard solution (mg)
W : Amount of Sample in test solution (mg)
As : Peak area of stevioside in standard solution
AR : Peak area of Rebaudioside A in standard solution
Ax : Peak area of X in test solution
fx : Ratio of molecular weight of X to stevioside
(stevioside 1.00, rebaudioside A 1.20, rebaudioside B 1.00, rebaudioside C 1.18,
rebaudioside D 1.40, Ribaudioside F 1.16, dulcoside A 0.98, rubusoside 0.80,
steviolvioside 0.80)
Operation Conditions
-Detector : UV 210 nm
-Column : Capcell pak C18 MG Ⅱ(4.6mm×250mm, 5μm) or its equivalent
-Column Temperature : 40℃
-Mobile Phase : Acetonitrile : 10 mM phosphoric acid buffer(pH 2.6) (32:68)
-Flow Rate : 1.0 mL/min
- The amount of Injection : 10 μL

341
 Erythorbic Acid

Chemical Formula: C6H 8O 6

Molecular Weight: 176.13 INS No.: 315

Synonyms: D-Araboascorbic acid;
Isoascorbic acid CAS No.: 89-65-6

Compositional Specifications of Erythorbic Acid

Content Erythorbic Acid, when calculated on the dried basis, should contain not less
than 99.0% of erythorbic acid (C6H8O6).
Description Erythorbic Acid occurs as white to yellowish white crystals or crystalline
powder. It is odorless and has an acid taste.
Identification (1) Dissolve 0.1 g of Erythorbic Acid in 100 mL of metaphosphoric acid
solution (1→50). To 5 mL of this solution, add drop wise iodine solution until a
slightly yellow color develops. To the solution, add 1 drop of cupric sulfate solution
(1→1,000) and 1 drop of pyrrole, and warm in a water bath at 50-60℃ for 5
minutes. A blue to blue-green color develops.
(2) To 10 mL of Erythorbic Acid solution (1→100), add 1 mL of potassium permanganate
solution. A pink color develops, and this color disappears immediately.
Purity (1) Specific Rotation : Approximately 1 g of Erythorbic Acid is accurately
weighed, which is dissolved in freshly boiled and cooled water so that the total volume
becomes 10 mL. Optical rotation of this solution should be within a range of ＝
-16.5∼-18.0°.
(2) Melting Point : Melting point of Erythorbic Acid should be within a range of 164～
171℃.
(3) Arsenic : It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(4) Lead : When 5.0 g of Erythorbic Acid is tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content
should not be more than 2.0 ppm.
Loss on Drying When Erythorbic Acid is dried for 3 hours in a vacuum desiccator (silica
gel), the weight loss should not be more than 0.4%.
Residue on Ignition When thermogravimetric analysis is done with Erythorbic Acid, the
residues should not be more than 0.3%.
Assay Dissolve 0.4 g of Erythorbic Acid, previously dried and accurately weighed, in
metaphosphoric acid solution (1→50) to make 100 mL, measure exactly 50 mL of this
342
solution, and titrate with 0.1 N iodine solution (indicator : starch solution).
1 mL of 0.1 N iodine solution = 8.806 mg of C6H8O6

343
 Erythritol
Erythrite
CH2OH
｜
H-C-OH
｜
H-C-OH
｜
CH2OH

Chemical Formula: C4H10O4

Molecular Weight: 122.12 INS No.: 968

Synonyms: Erythrite; Meso-erythritol CAS No.: 149-32-6

Definition Erythritol is obtained by filtering, purifying, crystallizing, and washing the

fermented liquid obtained from yeast such as Moniliella pollinis, Trichosporonoides
megachilensis or Candida lipolytica(Yarrowia lipolytica). Its component is erythritol.
Compositional Specifications of Erythritol
Content Dried Erythritol should contain no less than 99.0% of erythritol (C4H10O4).
Description Erythritol is scentless white crystalline powder with a sweet taste.
Identification (1) Erythritol is readily soluble in water, slightly soluble in alcohol, and
insoluble in ether.
(2) Melting point should be in a temperature range of 119∼123℃.
(3) When Erythritol is tested by Assay, the retention time of main peak of Test
Solution is identical to that of erythritol standard solution.
Purity (1) Reducing Sugar (as glucose) : 500 mg of Erythritol is precisely weighted and
dissolved in 2 mL of water and shaken, where 2 mL of Fehling solution is added. It
is then heated to boil and cooled (Test Solution). Separately, 2 mL of Fehling
solution is added to 2 mL of glucose solution (containing 0.75 mg of glucose per 1
mL), which is heated to boil and cooled (Standard Solution). When two solutions are
compared, precipitates in Test Solution should be less than the reddish brown
precipitates in Standard Solution (Not more than 0.3%).
(2) Ribitol and Glycerol : Erythritol is tested by Assay and the contents of ribitol and
glycerol are obtained by the following equations. The sum of the contents should not
be more than 0.1%. The relative retention times for erythritol, glycerol, and ribitol
are 1.0, 1.10, and 0.93, respectively.
peak area of ribitol
Ribitol(%) = sum of peak area of erythritol, glycerol, × 100
glycerol and ribitol
peak area of glycerol
Glycerol (%) = sum of peak area of erythritol, glycerol, × 100
glycerol and ribitol

344
 (3) Lead ： When 5.0 g of Erythritol is tested by Atomic Absorption Spectrophotometry
or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content should not be more
than 0.5 ppm.
Loss on Drying When Erythritol is dried for 4 hours at 105℃, the weight loss should
not be more than 0.2%.
Residue on Ignition When Residue on Ignition analysis is done with accurately weighted
2 g of Erythritol, the amount of Residue on Ignition should not be more than 0.1%.
Assay Approximately 2 g of dried Erythritol is precisely weighted and dissolved in
water (total volume = 50 mL) (Test Solution). Separately, 2 g of dried erythritol
standard is precisely weighted and dissolved in water (total volume = 50 mL) (Standard
Solution). 10 ㎕ each of Test and Standard Solutions are injected into liquid
chromatography under the following Operation Conditions and the content of erythritol
is obtained by the following equation.
Weight of the peak area of test
standard(g) solution
content(%) = × × 100
Weight of the peak area of standard
sample(g) solution

Operation Conditions
-Detector : RI detector
-Column : MCI-CKO8SH, Shodex KC811 or its equivalent
-Column Temperature : 60℃
-Mobile Phase : Water
-Flow Rate : 1.0 mL/min

345
 Ester Gum

INS No.: 445

Synonyms: Glycerol ester of wood rosin CAS No.: 8050-30-4

Definition Ester Gum is esters of rosin or derivatives of rosins, such as polymerizates.

Compositional Specifications of Ester Gum
Description Ester Gum occurs as light yellow to light brown glassy lumps, or as a clear,
viscous liquid. It is odorless or has a slightly characteristic odor.
Identification (1) To 1 g of Ester Gum, add 5 mL of sodium hydroxide solution and 5 mL
of water, and shake vigorously. Light yellow turbidity appears, and effervescence
persists.
(2) To 0.1 g of Ester Gum, add 10 mL of acetic Anhydrous, dissolve it by heating in a
water bath, cool, and add 1 drop of sulfuric acid. A reddish violet color develops.
Purity (1) Clarity and Color of Solution : Weigh 10 g of Ester Gum, add 10 mL of
toluene, dissolve it by warming to 70～75℃, filter while warming, and allow to stand
for 24 hours. It should be clear.
(2) Acid Value : 3 g of Ester Gum is precisely weighed and dissolved in 50 mL of a
2:1 mixture of toluene and alcohol (neutralized with 0.1 N alcoholic solution of
potassium hydroxide using phenolphthalein solution as an indicator). The solution is
titrated with 0.1 N alcoholic solution of potassium hydroxide. Acid value of Ester
Gum is proceeded under Acid Value in Fats Test and it should not be more than 8.
(3) Arsenic : It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(4) Lead : When 5.0 g of Ester Gum is tested by Atomic Absorption Spectrophotometry
or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content should not be more
than 2.0 ppm.
(5) Cadmium : When 5.0 g of Ester Gum is tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content
should not be more than 1.0 ppm.
(6) Mercury : When Ester Gum is tested by Mercury Limit Test, its content should not
be more than 1.0 ppm.
Residue on Ignition When thermogravimetric analysis is done with 1 g of Ester Gum, the
residues should not be more than 0.1%.

346
 Ethyl Acetate
CH3COOC2H5
Chemical Formula: C4H8O2
Molecular Weight: 88.11
Synonyms: Acetic acid ethyl ether; Ethyl CAS No.: 141-78-6
ethanoate

Compositional Specifications of Ethyl Acetate

Content Ethyl Acetate should be contain not less than 99.0% of ethyl acetate (C4H8O2).
Description Ethyl Acetate is a colorless, transparent liquid having a fruity odor.
Identification (1) To 1 mL of Ethyl Acetate, add 5 mL of sodium hydroxide solution (1→
4), and heat in a water bath while shaking. The fruity odor disappears. Acidify this
solution with diluted sulfuric acid, and heat again in a water bath while shaking. An
odor of acetic acid is evolved.
(2) To 1 mL of Ethyl Acetate, add 25 mL of sodium hydroxide solution, heat in a
water bath for 5 minutes. Cool, neutralize with diluted hydrochloric acid. and add 5
drops of ferric chloride solution. A deep red color develops.
Purity (1) Specific Gravity : Specific gravity of Ethyl Acetate should be within a range
of 0.897～0.906.
(2) Refractive Index : Refractive Index of Ethyl Acetate should be within a range of
1.370～1.375
(3) Acid value : Weigh 20 g of Ethyl Acetate, and proceed as directed under Acid
Value in Flavoring Substances Tests. The content should not be more than 0.1.
Assay Transfer 10 mL of ethanol into a 100-mL flask, and Accurately weigh. Add about
1 g of Ethyl Acetate to the above flask, and Accurately weigh again. Add 40 mL of
0.5 N alcoholic solution of potassium hydroxide, exactly measured, equip with a reflux
condenser, heat in a water bath at 80 ± 2℃ for 20 minutes. Cool, and titrate the
excess alkali with 0.5 N hydrochloric acid (indicator : 2～3 drops of phenolphthalein
solution). Perform a blank test in the same manner.
1 mL of 0.5 N alcoholic solution of potassium hydroxide = 44.06 mg of C4H802

347
 Ethyl Acetoacetate

CH3COCH2COOC2H5
Chemical Formula: C6H10O3

Molecular Weight: 130.14

Synonyms: Ethyl acetylacetate; CAS No.: 141-97-9
Acetoacetic ester

Compositional Specifications of Ethyl Acetoacetate

Content Ethyl Acetoacetate should contain not less than 97.5% of ethyl acetoacetate (C6H10O3).
Description Ethyl Acetoacetate is a colorless, transparent liquid having a characteristic
odor.
Identification (1) Dissolve 1 mL of Ethyl Acetoacetate in 3 mL of ethanol, and add 1
drop of ferric chloride solution. A purple-red color develops.
(2) To 0.5 mL of Ethyl Acetoacetate, add 5 mL of 10% alcoholic solution of potassium
hydroxide, warm in hot water for 5 minutes, and cool. To the solution, add 10 mL of
water and 2 mL of diluted hydrochloric acid. The solution responds to the test for
Acetate (C) in Identification.
Purity (1) Specific Gravity : Specific gravity should be within a range of 1.022∼1.027.
(2) Refractive Index : Refractive Index should be within a range of 1.418∼1.421.
(3) Clarity and Color of Solution : When 1 mL of Ethyl Acetoacetate is dissolved in 3
mL of 30% alcohol, the solution should be clear.
(4) Free Acid : Measure 15 mL of Ethyl Acetoacetate, add 15 mL of freshly boiled and
cooled water, shake for 2 minutes, and allow to stand. Measure 10 mL of the water
layer, and add 2 drops of phenolphthalein solution and 3.4 mL of 0.1 N potassium
hydroxide. A pink color develops.
Assay Accurately weigh about 0.8 g of Ethyl Acetoacetate, and proceed as directed
under Method 2 in Aldehyde and Ketone Content in Flavoring Substances Tests. In the
procedure, allow the mixture to stand for 15 minutes.
0.5 N hydrochloric acid 1 mL = 65.07 mg of C6H10O3

348
 Ethyl Butyrate
CH3CH2CH2COOC2H5

Chemical Formula: C6H12O2

Molecular Weight: 116.16

Synonyms: Ethyl butanoate CAS No.: 105-54-4

Compositional Specifications of Ethyl Butyrate

Content Ethyl Butyrate should contain not less than 98.0% of ethyl butyrate (C6H12O2).
Description Ethyl Butyrate is a colorless to light yellow, transparent liquid having a
fruity odor.
Identification To 1 mL of Ethyl Butyrate, add 5 mL of 10% alcoholic solution of
potassium hydroxide. When this solution is shaked and heated in a water bath, its
characteristic odor disappears. After cooling, this solution is acidified with dilute
sulfuric acid, and an odor of butyric acid is generated.
Purity (1) Specific Gravity : Specific gravity of Ethyl Butyrate should be within a range
of 0.870～0.877.
(2) Refractive Index : Refractive Index of Ethyl Butyrate should be within a range of
1.391～1.394.
(3) Clarity and Color of Solution : When 1 mL of Ethyl Butyrate is dissolved in 3 mL
of 60% ethanol, the solution should be clear.
(4) Acid Value : Acid value of Ethyl Butyrate is tested by Acid Value in Flavoring
Substance Test. It should not be more than 1.
Assay Accurately weigh about 1 g of Ethyl Butyrate, and test by Ester Value in
Flavoring Substances Test.
1 mL of 0.5 N alcoholic solution of potassium hydroxide ＝ 58.08 mg C6H12O2

349
 Ethyl Cellulose

INS No.: 462

Synonyms: Modified cellulose; Ethyl ether
of cellulose CAS No.: 9004-57-3

Compositional Specifications of Ethyl Cellulose

Content Ethyl Cellulose, when calculated on the dried basis, should contain within a
range of 44.0～50.0% of the ethoxyl functional (-OCH2CH3).
Description Ethyl Cellulose is a white to brown powder.
Identification (1) Ethyl Cellulose does not dissolved in propane-1,2-diol, and glycerol,
but does dissolved in various ratios of organic solvents according to the content of
ethoxyl functional. If the content of ethyl cellulose is not more than 46～48% of the
ethoxyl functional, Ethyl Cellulose dissolves in aromatic hydrocarbon ethanol
mixtures, methyl acetate, chloroform, or tetrahydrofuran. If the content is 46～48%
or not less than of the ethoxyl functional, Ethyl Cellulose dissolves in ethanol,
methanol, toluene, chloroform, or methyl acetate.
(2) If 5 g of Ethyl Cellulose is dissolved in 95 g of the toluene-ethanol mixture (80:20,
W/W), the solution is clear and a pale yellow liquid is generated. If a small amount of
this liquids taken and evaporated on a glass plate, a thick, infrangible, combustible,
transparent film remains.
Purity (1) Arsenic : It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(2) Lead: When 5.0 g of Ethyl Cellulose is tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content
should not be more than 2.0 ppm.
(3) Cadmium : When 5.0 g of Ethyl Cellulose is tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content
should not be more than 1.0 ppm.
(4) Mercury : When Ethyl Cellulose is tested by Mercury Limit Test, its content should
not be more than 1.0 ppm.
(5) Viscosity : Those where the viscosity is marked to be not more than 10 cps are
80.0～120.0% of the marked amount, and those is marked to be not less than 10 cps
are 90.0～110.0% of the marked amount. Ethyl cellulose that contains not more than
46～48% of the ethoxyl functional is prepared with the toluene-alcohol mixture
(60:40, w/w) and ethyl cellulose that contain not less than 46～48% of the ethoxyl
functional with the toluene-alcohol mixture (80:20, w/w) in the following test. 5.0 g
of Ethyl cellulose is taken and dried previously at 105℃ for 2 hours, and then the
weight is measured. It is put with 95±5 g of a proper solvent in a bottle, which is
shaken until it is completely dissolved. Its viscosity is measured at 25 ± 1℃.
Loss on Drying When Ethyl cellulose is dried at 105℃ for 2 hours, the weight loss
should not be more than 3%.
350
Residue on Ignition When 1 g of Ethyl cellulose is accurately weighed and strongly
heated at 800 ± 25℃, the weight loss should not be more than 0.4%.
Assay About 50 mg of Ethyl cellulose is weighed and put in a 5 mL-vial equipped with
a pressure tight septum closure, and 65 mg of adipic acid, 2.0 mL of the inner
standard solution, and 2.0 mL of hydrogen iodide are added, the vial is stoppered, and
its weight is then accurately measured. The bottle is shaken for 30 sec for mixing,
and heated at 150℃ for 20 minutes using a heater. Then the vials shaken for mixing
again and heated for 40 minutes and cooled for 45 minutes, and the weight is again
accurately measured. When the weight loss is not more than 10 mg, the supernatant is
use the test solution. Separately, 65 mg of adipic acid, 2.0 mL of the inner standard
solution, and 2.0 mL of hydrogen iodide are put in another pressure tight vial, which
is then stoppered, and the weight is measured accurately. 15 μl of ethyl iodide is
added and the weigh is measured again accurately. After the bottle is shaken for 30
sec, the supernatant is use the standard solution. 1 μl each of the test solutions and
standard solutions is injected to gas chromatograph and the content of the ethoxyl
functional is obtained using the following equation.
QTa WSa
content of the ethoxyl group (%) = × weight of the × 28.89
QSa sample(mg)

WSa : Amount (mg) of ethyl iodide in the standard solution

QSa : The ratio of the peak area of ethyl iodide to that of the inner standard
material in the standard solution
QTa : The ratio of the peak area of ethyl iodide to that of the inner standard
material in the test solution
Operation Conditions
-Column : diatomaceous earth (Chromosorb WHP or its equivalent) for gas
chromatography covered with 10% methyl silicon oil or its equivalent
-Detector : Thermal Conductivity Detector or Flame Ionization Detector
-Inlet Temperature : 200℃
-Column Temperature : 50℃
-Detector Temperature : 200℃
-Carrier Gas : Helium or nitrogen
∘Inner Standard Solution : 0.25 g of toluene is weighed accurately and o-xylene is added
to make 50 mL.

351
 Ethyl Cinnamate

Chemical Formula: C11H12O2

Molecular Weight: 176.21
Synonyms: Ethyl phenylacrylate CAS No.: 103-36-6

Compositional Specifications of Ethyl Cinnamate

Content Ethyl Cinnamate should contain not less than 99.0% of ethyl cinnamate(C11H12O2).
Description Ethyl Cinnamate is a colorless to light yellow liquid having a characteristic
odor.
Identification To 1 mL of Ethyl Cinnamate, add 10 mL of 10% alcoholic solution of
sodium hydroxide, and proceed as directed under Identification in 「Methyl Cinnamat
e」.
Purity (1) Specific Gravity : Specific gravity of Ethyl Cinnamate should be within a
range of 1.045～1.051
(2) Refractive Index : Refractive Index of Ethyl Cinnamate should be within a range of
1.558～1.560
(3) Clarity and Color of Solution : When 1mL of Ethyl Cinnamate is dissolved in 5 mL
of 70% ethanol, the solution should be clear.
(4) Acid Value : Acid value of Ethyl Cinnamate is tested by acid value in Flavoring
Substance Test. It should not be more than 1.
Assay Accurately weigh 1 g of Ethyl Cinnamate tested by Ester Value and Ester
Content in Flavoring Substances Test. In this case, 5 mL of water is added before
heating.
1mL of 0.5 N alcoholic solution of potassium hydroxide ＝ 88.11 mg C11H12O2

352
 Ethyl Decanoate
CH3(CH2)8COOC2H5
Chemical Formula: C12H24O2

Molecular Weight: 200.32

Synonyms: Ethyl caprate CAS No.: 110-38-3

Compositional Specifications of Ethyl Decanoate

Content Ethyl Decanoate should contain not less than 98.0% of ethyl decanoate (C12H24O2).
Description Ethyl Decanoate is a colorless, transparent liquid having a characteristic
scent.
Identification (1) To 1 mL of Ethyl Decanoate, add 5 mL of ethanolic 10% potassium
hydroxide solution, equip with a reflux condenser, and heat in a water bath for 1
hour. The characteristic scent disappears. After cooling, the solution is acidified with
diluted sulfuric acid and shaking in a warm water bath. A characteristic odor of
decanoic acid is evolved.
(2) Dissolve 1 mL of Ethyl Decanoate in 1 mL of ethanol, add 0.4 g of hydrazine
(hydrated), equip with a reflux condenser. and heat in a water bath for 3 hours. After
cooling, collect the deposited crystalline lumps, wash with a small amount of ethanol,
and recrystallize from ethanol. The melting point of Ethyl Decanoate should be
approximately 98℃
Purity (1) Specific Gravity : Specific gravity of Ethyl Decanoate should be within a
range of 0.863～0.868
(2) Refractive Index : Refractive Index of Ethyl Decanoate should be within a range of
1.424～1.427
(3) Clarity and Color of Solution : When 1 mL of Ethyl Decanoate is dissolved in 4 mL
of 80% ethanol, the solution should be clear.
(4) Acid Value : Acid value of Ethyl Decanoate is tested by Acid Value in Flavoring
Substance Test. It should not be more than 1.
Assay Accurately weigh about 1 g of Ethyl Decanoate and proceed as directed under
Ester Value and Ester Content in Flavoring Substance Test.
1 mL of 0.5 N alcoholic potassium hydroxide = 100.2 mg of C12H24O2

353
 Ethyl Heptanoate
CH3(CH2)5COOC2H5
Chemical Formula: C9H18O2
Molecular Weight: 158.24
Synonyms: Ethyl heptylate; Ethyl
oenanthate CAS No.: 106-30-9

Compositional Specifications of Ethyl Heptanoate

Content Ethyl Heptanoate contains no less than 98.0% of ethyl heptanoate (C9H1802).
Description Ethyl Heptanoate is a colorless to light yellow, transparent liquid having a
wine-like odor.
Identification To 1 mL of Ethyl Heptanoate, add 5 mL of ethanolic 10% potassium
hydroxide solution, and heat in a water bath while shaking. The wine-like odor
disappears. Cool, and acidify with diluted sulfuric acid (1→20). An odor of heptanoic
acid is evolved.
Purity (1) Specific Gravity : Specific gravity should be within a range of 0.869～0.874
(2) Refractive Index : Refractive Index should be within a range of 1.411～1.416
(3) Clarity and Color of Solution : 1 mL of Ethyl Heptanoate dissolved in 5 mL of 70% v/v
ethanol. This solution should be clear.
(4) Acid value : Acid value of Ethyl Heptanoate is tested by Acid Value in Flavoring
Substance Test. It should not be more than 1.0.
Assay Accurately weigh about 0.8 g of Ethyl Heptanoate, and proceed as directed under
Ester Value and Ester Content in Flavoring Substances Tests.
1 mL of 0.5 N alcoholic solution of potassium hydroxide = 79.12 mg of C9H18O2

354
 Ethyl Hexanoate
CH3(CH2)4COOC2H5
Chemical Formula: C8H16O2
Molecular Weight: 144.21
Synonyms: Ethyl caproate; Capronic ether CAS No.: 123-66-0
absolute

Compositional Specifications of Ethyl Hexanoate

Content Ethyl Hexanoate should contain not less than 98.0% of ethyl hexanoate
(C8H16O2).
Description Ethyl Hexanoate is a colorless to light yellow, transparent liquid having a
characteristic odor.
Identification To 1 mL of Ethyl Hexanoate, add 5 mL of 10% alcoholic potassium
hydroxide solution, and heat in a water bath while shaking. The characteristic odor
disappears. Cool, and acidify with diluted sulfuric acid. An odor of hexanoic acid is
evolved.
Purity (1) Specific Gravity : Specific gravity of Ethyl Hexanoate should be within a
range of 0.871～0.875.
(2) Refractive Index : Refractive Index of Ethyl Hexanoate should be within a range of
1.406～1.409.
(3) Clarity and Color of Solution : When 1 mL of Ethyl Hexanoate is dissolved in 3 mL
of 70% alcohol, the solution be clear.
(4) Acid value : Acid value of Ethyl Hexanoate is tested by Acid Value in Flavoring
Substance Test. It should not be more than 1.
Assay Accurately weigh about 0.7 g of Ethyl Hexanoate, and proceed as directed under
Ester Content in Flavoring Substances Tests.
1 mL of 0.5 N alcoholic solution of potassium hydroxide = 72.11 mg of C8H16O2

355
 Ethyl p -Hydroxybenzoate

Chemical Formula: C9H10O3

Molecular Weight: 166.18 INS No.: 214
Synonyms: Ethyl p-oxybenzoate; Ethylparaben CAS No.: 120-47-8

Compositional Specifications of Ethyl ρ-Hydroxybenzoate

Content Ethyl ρ-Hydroxybenzoate, when calculated on the dried basis, should contain
not less than 99.0% of ethyl ρ-Hydroxybenzoate (C9H10O3).
Description Ethyl ρ-Hydroxybenzoate occurs as colorless crystals or as a white
crystalline powder. It is odorless.
Identification (1) To 0.5 g of Ethyl ρ-Hydroxybenzoate, add 10 mL of sodium hydroxide,
boil about 30 minutes, evaporate to about 5 mL, and cool. Acidify this solution with
diluted sulfuric acid and wash formed precipitates with water. Dry it for 1 hour at
105℃, and the melting point is 213～217℃.
(2) To 0.05 g of Ethyl ρ-Hydroxybenzoate, add 2 drops of acetic acid and 5 drops of
sulfuric acid. After heating for 5 minutes, the solution generates a smell of ethyl
acetate.
Purity (1) Melting Point : Melting point of Ethyl ρ-Hydroxybenzoate should be within a
range of 115～118℃.
(2) Free Acids : To 0.75 g of Ethyl ρ-Hydroxybenzoate, add 15 mL of water and heat
for 1 minutes in effervescent water bath and cool. The filtrate is acidic or neutral.
To 10 mL of filtrate, 0.2 mL of 0.1N sodium hydroxide and 2 drops of methyl red
solution are added. A yellow color develops.
(3) Sulfate : To 1 g of Ethyl ρ-Hydroxybenzoate, add 100 mL of hot water, mix by
shaking, heat for 5 minutes and cool. Water is added to make 100 mL. To 40 mL of
filtrate, 1 mL of diluted hydrochloric acid is added, test solution. When this test
solution proceeds as directed under sulfate, its content should not be more than the
amount that corresponds to 0.2 mL of 0.01 N sulfuric acid.
(4) Arsenic : It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(5) Lead : When 5.0 g of Ethyl ρ-Hydroxybenzoate is tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content
should not be more than 2.0 ppm.
(6) Mercury : When Ethyl ρ-Hydroxybenzoate is tested by Mercury Limit Test, its
content should not be more than 1.0 ppm.
(7) ρ-Hydroxybenzoic Acid and Salicylic Acid : Accurately weigh 0.5g of Ethyl ρ
-Hydroxybenzoate and dissolve in 30mL of ether and add 20 mL of Sodium hydrogen
carbonate solution (1 in 100), shake and separate the water layer. Wash the water
layer with two 20 mL portions of add 5 mL of dilute sulfuric acid and 30 mL of
356
 ether, and shake. Separate the ether layer, and shake with about 10 mL of water.
Filter the ether layer, and wash the vessel and the filter with a small amount of
ether. Combine the washings and the filtrate, evaporate ether on a water bath, and
dry the residue over sulfuric acid to constant weight. The weight of sulfuric acid to
constant weight. The weight of the residue should not exceed 5mg. Dissolve any
residue in 25mL of water, heat to 70℃, filter, and add a few drops of dilute ferric
chloride TS. No violet to reddish violet colour should be produced.
Loss on Drying When Ethyl ρ-Hydroxybenzoate is dried for 2 hours at 80℃, the weight
loss should not be more than 0.5%.
Residue on Ignition When thermogravimetric analysis is done with approximately 5 g of
Ethyl ρ-Hydroxybenzoate, the amount of residues should not be more than 0.05%.
Assay To 2 g of Ethyl-p-Hydroxybenzoate, precisely weighed, add 40 mL of 1 N
sodium hydroxide solution and boil for 30 minutes and cool. Titrate the excess alkali
with 1 N sulfuric acid (indicator : 5 drops of bromthymol blue test solution). The
color of end point is the color which appears by adding same indicator to buffer
solution of pH 6.5. Separately, perform a blank test in the same manner.
1 mL of 1 N sodium hydroxide = 166.2 mg of C9H10O3

357
 Ethyl Isovalerate
(CH3)2CHCH2COOC2H5

Chemical Formula: C7H14O2

Molecular Weight: 130.19

Synonyms: Ethyl beta-methylbutyrate; CAS No.: 108-64-5
Ethyl isopentanoate
Compositional Specifications of Ethyl lsovalerate
Content Ethyl lsovalerate should contain not less than 98.0% of ethyl isovalerate
(C7H14O2).
Description Ethyl lsovalerate is a colorless to light yellow, transparent liquid having a
characteristic odor.
Identification To 1 mL of Ethyl Isovalerate, add 5 mL of 10% alcoholic solution of
potassium hydroxide, and heat in a water bath while shaking. The characteristic odor
disappears. Cool, and acidify with diluted sulfuric acid. An odor of isovaleric acid is
evolved.
Purity (1) Specific Gravity : Specific gravity of Ethyl lsovalerate should be within a
range of 0.862～0.866.
(2) Refractive Index : Refractive Index of Ethyl lsovalerate should be within a range of
1.395～1.399.
(3) Clarity and Color of Solution : When 2 mL of Ethyl Isovalerate is dissolved in 6 mL
of 70% alcohol solution, it should be Clear.
(4) Acid Value : Acid value of Ethyl Isovalerate is tested by Acid Value in Flavoring
Substance Test. It should not be more than 2.
Assay Accurately weigh 1.5 g of Ethyl Isovalerate, and proceed as directed under Ester
value and Ester Content in Flavoring Substances Tests.
1 mL of 0.5 N ethanolic potassium hydroxide = 65.09 mg of C7H14O2

358
 Ethyl Octanoate
Ethyl Caprylate
CH3(CH2)6COOC2H5
Chemical Formula: C10H20O2

Molecular Weight: 172.27

Synonyms: Ethyl caprylate CAS No.: 106-32-1

Compositional Specifications of Ethyl Octanoate

Content Ethyl Octanoate should contain not less than 98.0% of ethyl octanoate (C10H20O2).
Description Ethyl Octanoate is a colorless or slightly yellowish, transparent liquid having
a brandy-like odor.
Identification (1) To 1 mL of Ethyl Octanoate, add 5 mL of 10% alcoholic solution of
potassium hydroxide, equip with a reflux condenser, and heat in a water bath for 30
minutes. The brandy-like odor disappears. Cool, and acidify with diluted sulfuric acid.
An odor of octanoic acid is evolved.
(2) Dissolve 1 mL of Ethyl Octanoate in 1 mL of alcohol, add 0.4 g of hydrazine
(hydrate), equip with a reflux condenser, and heat in a water bath for 3 hours. Cool,
collect the deposited crystal lumps by filtration, wash with a small amount of alcohol,
and recrystallize from alcohol. The melting point is 88℃.
Purity (1) Specific Gravity : Specific gravity of Ethyl Octanoate should be within a range
of 0.865～0.869.
(2) Refractive Index : Refractive Index of Ethyl Octanoate should be within a range of
1.417 ～1.419
(3) Clarity and Color of Solution : When 1 mL of Ethyl Octanoate is dissolved in 4 mL
of 70% alcohol, the solution should be clear.
(4) Acid Value : Acid value of Ethyl Octanoate is tested by Acid Value in Flavoring
Substance Test. It should not be more than 1.
Assay Accurately weigh about 1 g of Ethyl Octanoate, and proceed as directed under
Ester Content in Flavoring Substances Tests.
1 mL of 0.5 N ethanolic potassium hydroxide = 86.13 mg of C10H20O2

359
 Ethyl Phenylacetate

Chemical Formula: C10H12O2

Molecular Weight: 164.20
Synonyms: Ethyl alpha-toluate CAS No.: 101-97-3

Compositional Specifications of Ethyl Phenylacetate

Content Ethyl phenylacetate should contain not less than 98.0% of ethyl phenylacetate
(C10H12O2).
Description Ethyl phenylacetate is a colorless, transparent liquid having a characteristic
odor.
Identification To 2 mL of Ethyl Phenylacetate, add 10 mL of 10% potassium hydroxide
solution, equip with a reflux condenser, and boil gently for 1 hour. The characteristic
odor disappears. Distill the solution, and remove about 4 mL of the initial distillate.
Acidify the residual solution with diluted hydrochloric acid and cool. Crystals are
deposited. Collect the crystals by filtration, wash with water, and recrystallize from
boiling water. The melting point is approximately 76℃.
Purity (1) Specific Gravity : Specific gravity of Ethyl Phenylacetate should be within a
range of 1.027～1.032.
(2) Refractive Index : Refractive Index of Ethyl Phenylacetate should be within a range
of 1.496～1.500.
(3) Clarity and Color of Solution : When 1 mL of Ethyl Phenylacetate is dissolved in 2 mL
of 70% alcohol, the solution should be clear.
(4) Acid Value : Acid value of Ethyl Phenylacetate is proceeded as directed under Acid
Value in Flavoring Substance Test. It should not be more than 1.
(5) Chlorinated Compounds : When Ethyl Phenylacetate is proceeded as directed under
Copper Mesh Test Method in Halogenated Compounds for Flavoring, it should be
appropriate.
Assay Accurately weigh about 1 g of Ethyl Phenylacetate, and proceed as directed
under Ester Value and Ester Content in Flavoring Substances Tests.
1 mL of 0.5 N alcoholic solution of potassium hydroxide = 82.10 mg of C10H12O2

360
 Ethyl Propionate
CH3CH2COOC2H5
Chemical Formula: C5H10O2
Molecular Weight: 102.13
Synonyms: Propionic ether CAS No.: 105-37-3

Compositional Specifications of Ethyl Propionate

Content Ethyl Propionate should contain not less than 97.0% of ethyl propionate
(C5H10O2).
Description Ethyl Propionate is a colorless, transparent liquid having a characteristic
odor.
Identification To 1 mL of Ethyl Propionate, add 5 mL of 10% ethanolic potassium
hydroxide solution, and heat in hot water. The characteristic odor disappears. Cool, and
acidify with diluted sulfuric acid. An odor of propionic acid is evolved.
Purity (1) Specific Gravity : Specific gravity of Ethyl Propionate should be within a
range of 0.890～0.893.
(2) Refractive Index : Refractive Index of Ethyl Propionate should be within a range of
1.383～1.385.
(3) Clarity and Color of Solution : 1 mL of Ethyl Propionate is dissolved in 3 mL of
50% ethanol. This solution should be Clear.
(4) Acid Value : Acid value of Ethyl Propionate is tested by Acid Value in Flavoring
Substance Test. It should not be more than 2.
Assay Accurately weigh about 1 g of Ethyl Propionate, and proceed as directed under
Ester Value and Ester Content in Flavoring Substances Tests.
1 mL of 0.5 N alcoholic solution of potassium hydroxide = 51.07 mg of C8H16O2

361
 Ethyl vanillin

Chemical Formula: C9H10O3

Molecular Weight: 166.18

other names: Bourbonal; Ethyl portal CAS No.: 121-32-4

Compositional Specifications of Ethyl vanillin

Content Ethyl vanillin should contain within a range of 98.0～101.0% of Ethyl
vanillin(C9H10O3).
Description Ethyl vanillin occurs as white to light yellow, flaky crystals or crystalline
powder, having a vanilla-like odor and taste.
Identification (1) To 0.1 g of Ethyl vanillin, add 1 mL of 25% hydrochloric acid, heat in
a water bath for 5 minutes, cool, add 1 mL of hydrogen peroxide solution, shake
well for 3 minutes, allow to stand until a precipitate is formed, add 2 mL of
chloroform, and shake. The color of the chloroform layer changes to deep blue.
(2) Proceed as directed under Identification (2) in 「Vanillin」.
Purity (1) Melting Point : Melting point of Ethyl vanillin should be within a range of 7
6～78℃.
(2) Clarity and Color of Solution : When 1g of Ethyl vanillin is dissolved in 10 mL of
60% alcohol, the solution should be clear.
(3) Arsenic : It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(4) Lead : When 5.0 g of Ethyl vanillin is tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content
should not be more than 2.0 ppm.
Loss on Drying Ethyl vanillin is dried for 4 hours in a vaccuum desicator(silica gel) and
the weight loss should not be more than 0.5%.
Residue on Ignition When thermogravimetric analysis is done with Ethyl vanillin, the
residues should not be more than 0.05%.
Assay Accurately weigh about 1 g of Ethyl vanillin, and proceed as directed under
Method 2 in Aldehyde and Ketone Content in Flavoring Substances Tests. In the
procedure, allow the mixture to stand for 15 minutes.
1 mL of 0.5 N hydrochloric acid = 83.09 mg of C9H10O3

362
 Eucalyptol

Chemical Formula: C H O
10 18

Molecular Weight: 154.25

Other names: 1,8-Cineol CAS No.: 470-82-6

Compositional Specifications of Eucalyptol

Content Eucalyptol should contain not less than 85.0% 1,8-cineol (C10H18O).
Description Eucalyptol is transparent colorless～pale yellow liquid with characteristic
scent and refreshing taste.
Identification To 3 g of Eucalyptol, add melted 2 g of o-cresol by heating and mix by
shaking. Then it turns into crystalline lump, which melts upon heating in a water bath.
Purity (1) Specific Gravity: Specific gravity of Eucalyptol should be within a range of
0.921∼0.924.
(2) Optical Rotation : Optical rotation of Eucalyptol should be within a range of = -0.5
∼+0.5℃.
(3) Refractive Index : Refractive Index, of Eucalyptol should be within a range of 1.455
∼1.460.
(4) Clarity and Color of Solution : Dissolve 1 mL of Eucalyptol in 5 mL of 60% alcohol.
This solution should be clear.
(5) Resorcin : 1 mL of Eucalyptol is well mixed with 5 mL of water and 1 drop of a
mixture (1 mL of mercury (II) nitrate and 3 mL of water). While shaking, the mixture
is heated for 2 minutes in a water bath. After cooling, 1 drop of dilute sulfuric acid
and 1 drop of sodium nitrite solution are added, which is then heated again for 2
hours in a water bath. The aqueous layer should not turn yellow～ yellowish brown.
(6) Phenanthrene : 2.5 mL of Eucalyptol is added to 5 mL of hexane. To this solution,
10 mL of sodium nitrite solution (1→20) is added and then 5 mL of glacial acetic
acid is slowly added. Solution should not show crystallization within 10 minutes.
Assay 3 g of Eucalyptol and 2.1 g of heat-melted o-cresol are added into a test tube
(A) with approximately 15 mm diameter and 80～160 mm length. A thermometer (B) is
fixed with a cork stopper so that the mercury filling is slightly lower than the center
of the liquid. While stirring the liquid with the thermometer, a temperature where
363
 crystallites start to form. A is heated so that the content is completely melted. A is
transferred to a bottle (D) with a cork stopper (C) and slowly cooled. When
crystallites start to form again or the first recorded temperature is reached, the
thermometer is vigorously rubbed against the inner wall of the tube, which lowers the
temperature slightly. Then the temperature becomes constant, the temperature is
recorded. This procedure is repeated and the highest temperature is taken and the
content of eucalyptol is calculated from the table below.

Content of Eucalyptol (%)

온도 0.0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9
80.4
82.5
47 80.0 80.2 84.6 80.6 80.8 81.1 81.3 81.5 81.7 81.9
48 82.1 82.3 82.7 82.9 83.2 83.4 83.6 83.8 84.0
49 84.2 84.4 86.8 84.8 85.0 85.3 85.5 85.7 85.9 86.0
5051 86.3
88.8 86.6
89.1 89.3 87.1
89.6 87.3
89.8 87.6
90.1 87.8
90.3 88.1
90.6 88.3
90.8 88.6
91.1
5253 91.3
93.8 91.6
94.1 92.1
94.6 92.3
94.8 92.6
95.1 92.8
95.3 93.1
95.6 93.3
95.8 93.6
96.1
54 96.3 96.6 91.8 97.2 97.5 97.8 98.1 98.4 98.7 99.0
55 99.3 99.7 94.3
96.9
100.
0

364
 Eugenol

Chemical Formula: C H O
10 12 2

Molecular Weight: 164.20

Other names: 4-Allylguaiacol CAS No.: 97-53-0

Compositional Specifications of Eugenol

Content Eugenol should contain not less than 100.0% of eugenol (C10H12O2).
Description Eugenol is a colorless to light yellow-brown. transparent liquid having a
characteristic odor.
Identification (1) 5 drops of Eugenol is dissolved in 10 mL of water. When 3 drops of
ferrous chloride solution are added to this solution, bluish green color appears.
(2) To 0.5 g of Eugenol, add 0.1 g of picric acid, 1 mL of acetone, and 9 mL of
petroleum ether and heated until crystals dissolve, the solution becomes orange
yellow.
Purity (1) Specific Gravity : Specific gravity of Eugenol should be within a range of
1.064～1.070.
(2) Refractive Index : Refractive Index of Eugenol should be within a range of 1.540～
1.542.
(3) Clarity and Color of Solution : When 2 mL of Eugenol is dissolved in 4 mL of 70%
alcohol, the solution should be clear.
Assay Proceed as directed under Phenol Content in Flavoring Substances Tests. Instead
of allowing to stand for 30 minutes, heat in a water bath for 30 minutes, and allow to
cool to room temperature.

365
 Exo-maltotetrahydrolase (G4 Producing Enzyme)
1,4-α-D-Glucan Maltotetrahydrolase
Definition Exomaltotetrahydrolase is an enzyme obtained from a culture of Pseudomonas
stutzeri. Dilutant or stabilizer can be added for the purpose of activity adjustment and
quality preservation.
Compositional Specifications of Exomaltotetrahydrolase (G4 Producing Enzyme)
Description Exomaltotetrahydrolase is white～dark brown powder, particle, paste or
colorless ~ dark brown liquid.
Identification When Exomaltotetrahydrolase is proceeded as directed under Activity Test,
it should have the activity as Exomaltotetrahydrolase.
Purity (1) Arsenic : It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(2) Lead : When 5.0 g of Exomaltotetrahydrolase is tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content
should not be more than 5.0 ppm.
(3) Coliform Group ： When Exomaltotetrahydrolase proceed as directed under
Microbiological Methods for Coliform Group in General Testing Methods in
「Standards and Specifications for Foods」, it should not contain more than 30 per 1
g of this product.
(4) Salmonella ： When Exomaltotetrahydrolase proceed as directed under
Microbiological Methods for Salmonella in General Testing Methods in 「Standards
and Specifications for Foods」, it should be negative (-).
(5) E. Coli : When Exomaltotetrahydrolase is tested by Microbe Test Methods for E.
Coli in General Test Method 「Standards and Specifications for Foods」, it should be
negative (-).
Activity Test (activity)
∘Preparation of Test Solution ： sample is diluted with calcium chloride acetic acid buffer
solution (pH 6.0) so that 1 mL of the solution contains 0.5∼0.9 Unit.
∘Test Procedure ： 0.5 mL of substrate solution and 0.4 mL of calcium chloride acetic
acid buffer solution (pH 6.0) are placed in a 25 mL volumetric flask, which is
isothermalized for 15 minutes in a 40 ± 0.1℃ water bath. Exactly 0.1 mL of Test
Solution is added to the solution, mixed well by shaking, and set aside in a water bath.
After exactly 15 minutes, 2 mL of alkaline copper solution is added to the solution,
which is sealed and heated for exactly 20 minutes in a boiling water bath. Cool the
solution immediately. 2 mL of arsenic·ammonium molybdate solution is added to this
solution and well mixed until red precipitates of copper suboxide are completely
dissolved. After setting aside for 20 minutes at room temperature, water is added to
bring the total volume to 25 mL. Using water as a reference, the absorption (As) is
measured at 520 nm with 1cm path length. Separately, perform a blank test by adding
0.5 mL of substrate solution, 0.4 mL of calcium chloride acetate buffer solution (pH
6.0), 2 mL of alkaline copper solution, and 0.1 mL of Test Solution and well mixing. Its
absorption (AB) is measured following the same procedure as the Test Solution.
366
 Standard Curve
Glucose is dried for 6 hours at 105℃. 1.0 g of dried glucose is precisely weighted
and dissolved in water (total volume = 100 mL). 1.0 mL, 2.0 mL, 3.0 mL, and 4.0 mL
each of this solution is diluted to 100 mL with water. 1 mL of the each resulting
solution contains 100 μg, 20v0 μg, 300 μg, and 400 μg of glucose. 1 mL of each
glucose standard solution is placed in a 25 mL volumetric flask, where 2 mL of
alkaline copper solution is added and well mixed. It is sealed, heated in a boiling water
bath for exactly 20 minutes, and cooled immediately. 2 mL of arsenic·ammonium
molybdate solution is added and well mixed until red precipitates of copper suboxide
are completely dissolved. After setting aside for 20 minutes at room temperature, water
is added to bring the total volume to 25 mL. Using water as a reference instead of the
standard solution, the absorption of each standard solution is measured at 520 nm with
1cm path length. A standard curve of absorption versus the amount of glucose (μg) is
prepared.
Enzyme activity is calculated by the following equation.
1 1.0 1 N
(G4 Producing
unit/g＝Enzyme) {(As -AB)} × F × × × ×
15 0.1 180 W

F ： Amount of glucose (μg) when the difference in absorption is 1.0 (obtained from
the standard curve).
15 ： Reaction time (minutes)
180 ： Molecular weight of glucose
N ： Dilution factor of test solution
W ： Weight of sample(g)
Definition of Activity：1G4 producing enzyme unit is an amount of enzyme that
produces reducing sugar that corresponds to 1 μmol of glucose per minute under the
conditions above.
Solutions
∘Substrate Solution ： 1.0 g of soluble starch (Lintner) is dispersed in 50 mL of water,
where 50 mL of boiling water is slowly added while stirring. It is
then boiled for 1～2 minutes. After cooling water is added to
bring the total volume to 10 mL.
∘Alkaline Copper Solution ： 24.0 g of anhydrous sodium carbonate and 12.0 g of
potassium sodium tartrate are dissolved in 200 mL of water.
Separately, 18.0 g of sodium carbonate and 150 mL of
water are added to a solution of 4.0 g copper sulfate in 50
mL of water and dissolved by heating. Cool the solution,
and this solution is mixed with the previous solution. The
367
 total volume is brought up to 1,000 mL with water. The
resulting solution is boiled for 10 minutes, which is set
aside for 1 week and filtered through a glass filter.
∘Arsenic · Ammonium Molybdate Solution ： 3 g of sodium arsenate, dibasic (7 hydrate)
is dissolved in 25 mL of water. 25 g of ammonium
molybdate (4 hydrate) is dissolved in 450 mL of water,
where 21 mL of sulfuric acid is added. Sodium
asrsenate, dibasic solution is slowly added to ammonium
molybdate solution while stirring. It is set aside for 24
hours at 37℃. It is stored in a brown bottle.
∘Calcium Chloride Acetate Buffer Solution (pH 6.0) ： Prepare 0.1 M acetic acid and 0.1
M sodium acetate solution contained separately 5 mM
calcium chloride. These two solutions are adjusted pH
6.0.

Storage Standards of Exomaltotetrahydrolase (G4 Producing Enzyme)

Exomaltotetrahydrolase is strongly hygroscopic. Store in a cold dark place and
well-closed containers.

368
 Ferric Ammonium Citrate
INS No.: 381
Synonyms: Ammonium iron citrate CAS No.: 1185-57-5

Compositional Specifications of Ferric Ammonium Citrate

Content Ferric Ammonium Citrate should contain within a range of 14.5～21.0% of iron
(Fe= 55.85).
Description Ferric Ammonium Citrate occurs as green, red-brown, deep red, brown, or
brownish yellow, transparent flaky crystals. powder, granules, or lumps. it is odorless
or has a slight odor of ammonia and a weak iron taste.
Identification (1) To 5 mL of ferric ammonium citrate solution (1→10), add 5 mL of
sodium hydroxide solution, and heat. An odor of ammonia is evoled, and a red-brown
precipitate is formed.
(2) To Ferric Ammonium Citrate solution (1→100), add an ammonia solution. A black
color develops, and no precipitate is formed.
(3) To 5 mL of Ferric Ammonium Citrate solution (1→100), add 0.3 mL of potassium
permanganate solution and 4 mL of mercury II sulfate solution, and boil. A white
precipitate is formed.
(4) To 10 mL of Ferric Ammonium Citrate solution (1→10), add 4 mL of potassium
hydroxide solution, and heat, and filter. Take 4 mL of filtrate, add acetic acid to
make it slightly acidic, and cool. 2 mL of calcium chloride solution is added to the
resulting solution, and boil. A white crystalline precipitate is slowly formed.
Purity (1) Sulfate : 0.4 g of Ferric Ammonium Citrate is dissolved in 50 mL of water,
and make to 100 mL with water. 10 mL of this solution is boiled with 1 mL of dilute
hydrochloric acid (1→4) and 0.1 g of hydroxylamine hydrochloride for 1 min. After
cooling, the solution make to 50 mL with water, Test Solution. This Test Solution is
tested by Sulfate Limit Test. Separately, a color standard solution is prepared by
adding 1 mL of hydrochloric acid (1→4) and water to 0.4 mL of 0.01 N sulfuric acid,
and make to 50 mL with water.
(2) Arsenic : It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(3) Lead : When 5.0 g of Ferric Ammonium Citrate is tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content
should not be more than 2.0 ppm.
(4) Mercury : When Ferric Ammonium Citrate is tested by Mercury Limit Test, its
content should not be more than 1.0 ppm.
(5) Ferric Citrate : When add 1 drop of potassium ferrocyanide solution to 10 mL of
Ferric Ammonium Citrate solution (1→ no blue precipitate is formed.
Assay Accurately weigh about 1 g of Ferric Ammonium Citrate, transfer into a flask
with a ground-glass stopper, dissolve in 25 mL of water, and add 5 mL of
hydrochloric acid and 4 g of potassium iodide. The flask with a ground-glass stopper
369
is placed on the flask, which is set-aside for 15 minutes in a dark place. 100 mL of
water is added to the solution and the free iodine is titrated with 0.1 N sodium
thiosulfate (indicator : starch solution). Separately, a blank test is carried out by the
same procedure.
1 mL of 0.1 N potassium thiosulfate = 5.585 mg of Fe

370
 Ferric Chloride
Chemical Formula: FeCl3․6H2O

Molecular Weight: 270.30 CAS No.: 7705-08-0

Compositional Specifications of Ferric Chloride

Content Ferric Chloride should contain within a range of 98.5～102.0% of Ferric
Chloride (FeCl3․6H2O).
Description Ferric Chloride occurs as yellowish brown crystals or lumps with
hygroscopic properties.
Identification Ferric Chloride responds to the tests by Chloride Limit Test and Ferric salts.
Purity (1) Clarity and Color of Solution: 1 g of Ferric Chloride is dissolved with 10 mL
of hydrochloric acid (1→100) through heating. The turbidity of resulting solution
should show slightly low level of turbid or better.
(2) Free acid: 2 g of Ferric Chloride is dissolve with 5 mL of water. There is no sign
of vapor when glass rod dipped with ammonia is brought near to this solution.
(3) Nitrate: 5 g of Ferric Chloride is dissolve in 25 mL of water and heated to boil.
Then 25 mL of ammonia is added. After cooling, mark this mixture to 100 mL with
water and filter. Consider the filtrate as the test solution. Add 5mL of water, 0.1 mL
of Indigocarmine, and 10mL of sulfuric acid to 5 mL of test solution. The solution
should remain blue more than 5 minutes.
(4) Sulfate: Add 3mL of anhydrous sodium carbonate solution (1→8) to 20mL of test
solution (3) and evaporate to dryness in the steam bath. Heat the content with a low
flame of burner until there is no sign of the white vapor. After cooling, add 10mL of
water and 3mL of hydrochloric acid (1→4) to the content and evaporate to dryness it
in the steam bath. Dissolve the content with 0.3mL of hydrochloric acid (1->4) and
water. Make 50mL of solution with water and tested by Sulfate Limit Test. Its
content should not be more than the amount that corresponds to 0.4 mL of 0.01 N
sulfuric acid.
(5) Lead : 1.0 g of Ferric Chloride is weighed and trasnferred into 50 mL flask. Add 10
mL of 9 N hydrochloric acid, 10 mL of water, 20 mL of ascorbic acid-sodium iodide
solution and 5 mL of trioctyl phosphine oxide solution and shake it to mix for 30
seconds. Add keep it to separate the layer and again add water so that organic layer
reaches to neck part of flask. After shaking to mix it, keep it to separate the layer.
This organic solvent layer is used as test solution. Separately, take 10 mL of lead
standard solution and make it precisely to 100 mL. Take 2 mL of this solution and
transfer into 50 mL flask. And operate under condition as test solution method, this
solution is used as reference solution. When it is tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy,
absorbance(luminous intensity) of test solution should not be more than
absorbance(luminous intensity) of reference solution.(not be more than 2.0 ppm.)
371
 Ascorbic acid-sodium iodide solution : 10 g of ascorbic acid and 19.3 g sodium
iodide are dissolved in water to make to 100 mL.
Trioctyl phosphine oxide solution : 5 g of trioctyl phosphine oxide is dissolved in
methyl isobutyl ketone to make to 100 mL.
(6) Zinc: 20 mL of the test solution prepared in (3) above is neutralized by
hydrochloric acid and then make 30mL with water. Add 3 mL of diluted hydrochloric
acid and 0.2 mL of potassium ferrocyanide (1→10), and allow to stand for 15
minutes. The solution should not be more turbid than the following reference solution.
To prepare reference solution, measure 3mL of zinc standard solution, and add water
to make 30mL. Add 3mL of diluted hydrochloric acid and 0.2 mL of potassium
ferrocyanide (1→10) to this solution, and allow to stand 15 minutes. (not more than
30 ppm as Zinc)
(7) Arsenic: It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(8) Free chloride: 2g of Ferric Chloride is dissolved in 5 mL of water. After heating,
the filter paper treated with the starch iodide zinc solution should not turn blue.
Assay 0.6 g of Ferric Chloride is precisely weighed and transferred into a flask with a
ground-glass stopper along with 50 mL of water as a solvent. 3 mL of hydrochloric
acid and 3g of potassium iodide are added. The stopper is placed on the flask, which
is set-aside for 15 minutes in a dark place. Then the contents are titrated with 0.1N
sodium thiosulfate solution (indicator: starch solution). Separately, a blank test is
carried out by the same procedure.
1 mL of 0.1 N sodium thiosulfate = 27.030mg FeCl3․6H2O

372
 Ferric Citrate
Chemical Formula: FeC6H5O7·xH2O
Molecular Weight: 244.95(anhydrous)
Compositional Specifications of Ferric Citrate
Content Ferric Citrate should contain within a range of 16.5～18.5 % of iron (Fe = 55.85).
Description Ferric Citrate occurs as transparent reddish crystalline platelets or as brown
powder.
Identification Ferric Citrate responds to the test for Citrate (A) and Ferric Salt in
Identification.
Purity (1) Clarity and Color of Solution : When 1 g of Ferric Citrate is dissolved in 20
mL of water by heating in a water bath, the solution should be almost clear.
(2) Ammonium Salt : When 1 g of Ferric Citrate is boiled in 10 mL of water and 5 mL
of calcium hydroxide solution, it should not generate an odor of ammonia.
(3) Sulfate : 0.4 g of Ferric Citrate is dissolved in 50 mL of water, and make to 100
mL with water. 10 mL of this solution is boiled with 1 mL of dilute hydrochloric acid
(1→4) and 0.1 g of hydroxylamine hydrochloride for 1 min. After cooling, the solution
make to 50 mL with water, Test Solution. This Test Solution is tested by Sulfate
Limit Test. Separately, a color standard solution is prepared by adding 1 mL of
hydrochloric acid (1→4) and water to 0.4 mL of 0.01 N sulfuric acid, and make to 50
mL with water.
(4) Arsenic : It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(5) Lead : When 5.0 g of Ferric Citrate is tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content
should not be more than 2.0 ppm.
Assay Transfer about 1 g of Ferric Citrate accurately weighed into a flask with a
ground-glass stopper, and 5 mL of hydrochloric acid and 30 mL of water are added. It
is dissolved by heating. After cooling, 4 g of potassium iodide is added. The flask with
a ground-glass stopper is placed on the flask, which is set-aside for 15 minutes in a
dark place. 100 mL of water is added to the solution and the free iodine is titrated
with 0.1 N sodium thiosulfate (indicator: starch solution). Separately, a blank test is
carried out by the same procedure.
1 mL of 0.1 N sodium thiosulfate = 5.585 mg of Fe

373
 Ferric Phosphate
Chemical Formula: FePO4‧nH2O

Molecular Weight: anhydrous 150.82 CAS No.: 10045-86-0

Compositional Specifications of Ferric Phosphate

Content Ferric Phosphate should contain within a range of 26.0∼32.0% of iron(Fe).
Description Ferric Phosphate is pale yellow powder and odorless.
Identification 1 g of Ferric Phosphate is dissolved in 5 mL of diluted hydrochloric acid
(1→2). Upon adding excess sodium hydroxide solution, reddish brown precipitates are
formed. This is then heated and filtered to separate iron. The filtrate is acidified with
hydrochloric acid and cooled, where the same volume of magnesia solution is added.
When slight excess amount of ammonia solution is added to the resulting solution,
white precipitates are formed. The precipitates are washed with water. Upon adding a
few drops of silver nitrate solution, the precipitates turn yellowish green.
Purity (1) Arsenic : It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(2) Lead : 1.0 g of Ferric Phosphate is weighed and trasnferred into 50 mL flask. Add
10 mL of 9 N hydrochloric acid, 10 mL of water, 20 mL of ascorbic acid-sodium
iodide solution and 5 mL of trioctyl phosphine oxide solution and shake it to mix for
30 seconds. Add keep it to separate the layer and again add water so that organic
layer reaches to neck part of flask. After shaking to mix it, keep it to separate the
layer. This organic solvent layer is used as test solution. Separately, take 10 mL of
lead standard solution and make it precisely to 100 mL. Take 2 mL of this solution
and transfer into 50 mL flask. And operate under condition as test solution method,
this solution is used as reference solution. When it is tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy,
absorbance(luminous intensity) of test solution should not be more than
absorbance(luminous intensity) of reference solution.(not be more than 2.0 ppm.)
Ascorbic acid-sodium iodide solution : 10 g of ascorbic acid and 19.3 g sodium
iodide are dissolved in water to make to 100 mL.
Trioctyl phosphine oxide solution : 5 g of trioctyl phosphine oxide is dissolved in
methyl isobutyl ketone to make to 100 mL.
(3) Mercury : Proceed as directed under Purity (4) in [Reduced Iron]. 3 mL of mercury
standard solution (for Reduced Iron) is tested by the same procedure as the test
solution. (Not more than 3 ppm)
Loss on Ignition When thermogravimetric analysis is done at 800℃ for 1 hour, weight
loss should not be more than 32.5%.
Assay 3.5 g of Ferric Phosphate is dissolved in 75 mL of diluted hydrochloric acid (1→
2), which is then boiled for 5 minutes. After cooling, the solution is diluted to 100 mL
with diluted hydrochloric acid (1→2). This is again boiled for 5 minutes. While stirring,
stannous chloride solution is drop-wise added to the resulting solution until iron is
374
reduced and yellow color disappears. 2 drops of stannous chloride solution and
approximately 50 mL of water are added. After cooling to room temperature, and add
15 mL of saturated mercury chloride solution and then stirring vigorously. This
solution allow to stand for 5 minutes and 15 mL of a mixture of sulfuric acid and
phosphoric acid (75 mL of sulfuric acid is slowly added to 300 mL of water. After
cooling, 75 mL of phosphoric acid and water to make 500 mL). After adding 0.5 mL of
barium diphenylamine sulfonate solution, the solution is titrated with 0.1 N potassium
bichromate solution until it turns reddish purple.
1 mL of 0.1 N Potassium bichromate ＝ 5.585 mg Fe

375
 Ferric Pyrophosphate
Chemical Formula: Fe4(P2O7)3‧nH2O
Molecular Weight: 745.22(anhydrous로서)
Synonyms: Iron pyrophosphate CAS No.: 10058-44-3

Compositional Specifications of Ferric Pyrophosphate

Content Ferric Pyrophosphate should contain within a range of 24.0～26.0% of iron(Fe).
Description Ferric Pyrophosphate occurs as a yellow to yellow-brown powder. It is
odorless.
Identification When an excess amount of sodium hydroxide solution is added to a
solution 0.5 g of Ferric Pyrophosphate in 5 mL of dilute hydrochloric acid (1→2),
reddish brown precipitates are formed. After settling for several minutes, it is filtered.
The first filtrate is discarded. 1 drop of bromine phenol blue solution is added to 5 mL
of clear solution. It is then titrated with 1 N hydrochloric acid until it becomes green.
When 10 mL of zinc sulfate solution (1→8) is added to the resulting solution and its
pH is adjusted to 3.8, white precipitates are formed.
Purity (1) Arsenic : It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(2) Lead : 1.0 g of Ferric Pyrophosphate is weighed and trasnferred into 50 mL flask.
Add 10 mL of 9 N hydrochloric acid, 10 mL of water, 20 mL of ascorbic acid-sodium
iodide solution and 5 mL of trioctyl phosphine oxide solution and shake it to mix for
30 seconds. Add keep it to separate the layer and again add water so that organic
layer reaches to neck part of flask. After shaking to mix it, keep it to separate the
layer. This organic solvent layer is used as test solution. Separately, take 10 mL of
lead standard solution and make it precisely to 100 mL. Take 2 mL of this solution
and transfer into 50 mL flask. And operate under condition as test solution method,
this solution is used as reference solution. When it is tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy,
absorbance(luminous intensity) of test solution should not be more than
absorbance(luminous intensity) of reference solution.(not be more than 2.0 ppm.)
Ascorbic acid-sodium iodide solution : 10 g of ascorbic acid and 19.3 g sodium
iodide are dissolved in water to make to 100 mL.
Trioctyl phosphine oxide solution : 5 g of trioctyl phosphine oxide is dissolved in
methyl isobutyl ketone to make to 100 mL.
(3) Mercury : Proceed as directed under Purity (4) in [Reducing Iron]. In this case, 3
mL of iron standard solution (for reducing iron) is used and the same procedure is
Test Solution is followed (Not more than 3 ppm).
Loss on Ignition When Ferric Pyrophosphate is heat treated for 1 hour at 800℃, the
weight loss should not be more than 20.0%.
Assay 3.5 g of Ferric Pyrophosphate is precisely weighed and dissolved in 75 mL of
dilute hydrochloric acid (1→2), which is then boiled for 5 minutes. After cooling, dilute
376
hydrochloric acid (1→2) is added to bring the total volume to 100 mL. And then 100
mL of dilute hydrochloric acid (1→2) is added 25 mL of resulting solution. This
solution is again boiled for 5 minutes. While boiling and stirring, stannous chloride
solution is drop-wise added until iron is reduced and yellow color disappears. 2 more
drops of stannous chloride solution are added to the solution, where approximately 50
mL of water is added. It is then cooled to room temperature. 15 mL of saturated
solution of mercury chloride is added while stirring vigorously. After setting aside for
5 minutes, add 15 mL of sulfuric acid · phosphoric acid mixture, which is prepared by
slowly adding 75 mL of sulfuric acid to 300 mL of water and cooled. 75 mL of
phosphoric acid is added, where water is added to bring the total volume to 500 mL.
After adding 0.5 mL of barium diphenylaminsulfonate solution, it is titrated with 0.1 N
potassium bichromate solution until it turns reddish violet.
1 mL of 0.1 N potassium bichromate solution = 5.585 mg of Fe

377
 Ferrous Fumarate

Chemical Formula: C4H2FeO4

Molecular Weight: 169.90
Synonyms: Iron(II) fumarate CAS No.: 141-01-5

Content Specifications of Ferrous Fumarate

Content Ferrous Fumarate should contain within a range of 97.0∼101.0% of ferrous
fumarate (C4H2FeO4 ).
Description Ferrous Fumarate is scentless, and a orange red～reddish brown powder.
Identification (1) To 1.5 g of Ferrous Fumarate, add 25 mL of hydrochloric acid(1→2)
and water to make 50 mL, and heat to dissolve the solid. After cooling, the solution
is filtered through a glass filter. The precipitates are washed with diluted
hydrochloric acid (3→100) and dried at 105℃. The filtrate is used in Identification
(2). 40 mg of the dried precipitate is dissolved in 3 mL of water and 7 mL of 1 N
sodium hydroxide solution. The solution is stirred until the solid is completely
dissolved. Diluted hydrochloric acid is added to the solution until it turns acidic as
determined with litmus paper. 1 g of p-nitrobenzyl bromide and 10 mL of alcohol are
added to the solution, which is then refluxed for 2 hours. After cooling, it is filtered
and the precipitates are washed with twice with small amount of alcohol and water
mixture (2:1) and again twice with small amount of water. It is recrystallized in hot
alcohol and dried at 105℃. The melting point should be approximately 152℃. (2)
Test solution above (1) responds to the test for Ferric Salt in Identification.
Purity (1) Arsenic : It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(2) Ferrous : 2 g of Ferrous Fumarate is transferred into a 250 mL Erlenmeyer flask
with a stopper and 25 mL of water and 4 mL of hydrochloric acid are added to the
flask, which is heated on a hot plate until the solid material dissolves completely. A
stopper is placed and the flask is set-aside to be cooled to room temperature. 3 g of
potassium iodide is added and the stopper is placed. The flask is set-aside for 5
minutes in a dark place. After adding 75 mL of water to the solution, which is then
titrated with 0.1 N sodium thiosulfate solution using starch solution as an indicator.
The consumption of sodium thiosulfate solution should not be more than 7.16 mL.
(3) Lead : 1.0 g of Ferrous Fumarate is weighed and transferred into 50 mL flask. Add
10 mL of 9 N hydrochloric acid, 10 mL of water, 20 mL of ascorbic acid-sodium
iodide solution and 5 mL of trioctyl phosphine oxide solution and shake it to mix for
30 seconds. Keep it to separate the layer and again add water so that organic layer
reaches to neck part of flask. After shaking to mix it, keep it to separate the layer.
This organic solvent layer is used as test solution. Separately, take 10 mL of lead
378
 standard solution and make it precisely to 100 mL. Take 2 mL of this solution and
transfer into 50 mL flask. And operate under condition as test solution method, this
solution is used as reference solution. When it is tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy,
absorbance(luminous intensity) of test solution should not be more than
absorbance(luminous intensity) of reference solution.(not more than 2.0 ppm.)
Ascorbic acid-sodium iodide solution : 10 g of ascorbic acid and 19.3 g sodium
iodide are dissolved in water to make to 100 mL.
Trioctyl phosphine oxide solution : 5 g of trioctyl phosphine oxide is dissolved in
methyl isobutyl ketone to make to 100 mL.
(4) Mercury : When Ferrous Fumarate is tested according to Mercury Test, its content
should not be more than 3.0 ppm.
(5) Sulfate: Transfer 1 g of Ferrous Fumarate into a 250 mL beaker and add water to
make 100 mL, and heat in a water bath. Hydrochloric acid (approximately 2 mL) is
added until the solid is completely dissolved. Filter the solution filter if necessary and
add water to make 100 mL. After the solution is heated to boil, 10 mL of barium
chloride solution is added, which is then heated for 2 hours in a water bath and
set-aside over night. The precipitates are filtered and washed with hot water. The
filter paper along with the precipitates is transferred into a crucible with a known
weight and reduced to ash at 600℃. The crucible is then weighed. The amount of
sulfate salts (as SO4) should not be more than 0.2%. 1 mg of the residue corresponds
to 0.412 mg of SO4.
Loss on Drying When Ferrous Fumarate is dried for 16 hours at 105℃, the loss should
not be more than 1%.
Assay Approximately 500 mg of Ferrous Fumarate is accurately weighed into a 500 mL
Erlenmeyer flask and 25 mL of diluted hydrochloric acid (2→5) is added, which is
heated to boil. A solution of 5.6 g stannous chloride in 50 mL of diluted hydrochloride
solution (3→10) is added. When yellow color appears, 2 mL more is added. After
cooling to room temperature, 8 mL of mercury chloride solution is added and the
solution is set-aside for 5 minutes. 200 mL of water and 25 mL of diluted sulfuric
acid (1→2), 4 mL phosphoric acid are added (Test Solution). After adding
o-phenanthroline solution, the Test Solution is titrated with 0.1 N cerium II sulfate.
1 mL of 0.1 N cerium II sulfate ＝ 16.99 mg C4H2FeO4

379
 Ferrous Gluconate

Chemical Formula: C12H22FeO14‧2H2O

Molecular Weight: 482.18 INS No.: 579

Synonyms: Iron(II) gluconate CAS No.: 299-29-6

Compositional Specifications of Ferrous Gluconate

Content Ferrous Gluconate, when calculated on the dried basis, should contain not less
than 95.0% of anhydrous ferrous gluconate (C12H22FeO14).
Description Ferrous Gluconate occurs as yellow-gray to green-yellow powder or
granules, having a slight, characteristic odor.
Identification (1) To 5 mL of warm Ferrous Gluconate solution (1→10), add 0.7 mL of
glacial acetic acid and 1 mL of freshly distilled phenylhydrazine. It is heated in a
water bath for 30 minutes and cooled. When the inner wall is rubbed with a glass
rod, crystals are precipitated. These crystals are collected and dissolved in 10 mL
of hot water, where activated carbon is added. After mixing by shaking, it is filtered.
After cooling, the inner wall is rubbed with a glass rod to precipitate crystals. The
melting point of the dried crystals should be within a range of 192∼202℃.
(2) Ferrous Gluconate solution (1→20) responds to the test for Ferrous Salt in
Identification.
Purity (1) Arsenic : It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(2) Ferric : 5 g of Ferrous Gluconate is transferred into a 250-mL Erlen Meyer flask
with a stopper, where 100 mL of water and 10 mL of hydrochloric acid are added. 3
g of potassium iodide is added to the solution and the stopper is placed on the flask,
which is then set aside for 5 minutes in a dark place. It is then titrated with 0.1N
sodium thiosulfate solution using starch solution as an indicator. The consumption of
the solution should not be more than 18 mL (not more than 2.0% as Fe3+).
(3) Lead : When 5.0 g of Ferrous Gluconate is tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content
should not be more than 2.0 ppm.
(4) Cadmium : When 5.0 g of Ferrous Gluconate is tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content
should not be more than 1.0 ppm.
(5) Mercury : When Ferrous Gluconate is tested by Mercury Limit Test, its content
should not be more than 1.0 ppm.
(6) Oxalate : Weigh 1 g of Ferrous Gluconate, dissolve in 10 mL of water and 2 mL of
hydrochloric acid, transfer into a separating funnel, and perform extraction twice with
50 mL and 20 mL of ether. Combine the extracts. add 10 mL of water, evaporate the
380
 ether on a water bath, and add 1 drop of 36% acetic acid and 1 mL of calcium
acetate solution (1→20). No turbidity appears within 5 minutes.
(7) Reducing Sugar : Weigh 0.5 g of Ferrous Gluconate, add 10 mL of water, dissolve
by warming, add 1 mL of ammonia solution, pass hydrogen sulfide through the
solution, allow to stand for 30 minutes, and filter. Wash the residue on the filter
paper twice with 5 mL of water each time, combine the filtrate and the washings,
neutralize with hydrochloric acid, and add 2 mL of diluted hydrochloric acid.
Concentrate the solution to about 10 mL. cool, add 5 mL of anhydrous sodium
carbonate solution and 20 mL of water, filter, and add water to the filtrate to make
100 mL. To 5 mL of this solution, add 2 mL of Fehling solution, and boil for 1
minute. A yellow to red precipitate should not be formed immediately.
Loss on Drying When Ferrous Gluconate is dried for 4 hours at 105℃, the weight loss
should be within a range of 6.5～10%.
Assay Accurately weigh about 1.5 g of Ferrous Gluconate, previously dried. dissolve in
75 mL of water and 15 mL of diluted sulfuric acid. and add 250 mg of zinc dust.
Allow to stand for 20 minutes, filter through a Gooch crucible with thin layer
previously prepared of zinc dust, wash the residue with 10 mL of diluted sulfuric acid
and then with 10 mL of water, combine the filtrate and the washings, add 2 drops of
o-phenanthroline solution, and titrate immediately with 0.1 N ceric sulfate. Separately,
perform a blank test in the same manner.
1 mL of 0.1 N ceric sulfate = 44.61 mg of C12H22FeO14

381
 Ferrous Lactate

Chemical Formula: C6H10O6Fe‧3H2O

Molecular Weight: 288.04 INS No.: 585

Synonyms: Iron(II) lactate; Iron(II) CAS No.: 5905-52-2
2-hydroxypropanoate

Compositional Specifications of Ferrous Lactate

Content Ferrous Lactate should contain within a range of 15.5∼20.0% of iron (Fe ＝ 55.85).
Description Ferrous Lactate is greenish white～yellow crystalline powder or lump with
characteristic scent and slightly sweet taste of iron
Identification (1) 0.5 g of Ferrous Lactate is heat-treated for 1 hour at 450∼550℃. The
resulting residue is dissolved in 3 mL of diluted hydrochloric acid (1→2). This
solution responds to test of ferric salt in Identification.
(2) Ferrous Lactate responds to test of Lactate Salt in Identification.
Purity (1) Clarity and Color of Solution : When of 1 g of Ferrous Lactate is dissolved in
20 mL of water by heating in a water bath, the solution almost clear.
(2) Chloride : When 0.1 g of Ferrous Lactate is tested by Chloride Limit Test, Its
content should not be more than the amount that corresponds to 0.2 mL of 0.01 N
hydrochloric acid.
(3) Sulfate : 0.2 g of Ferrous Lactate is dissolved in 5 mL of water. The total volume
is brought up to 10 mL with water. 2 mL of this solution is tested by Sulfate Limit
Test salt. The amount of sulfate salt should correspond to 0.4 mL of 0.01 N sulfuric acid
(4) Arsenic : It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(5) Lead : When 5.0 g of Ferrous Lactate is tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content
should not be more than 1.0 ppm.
(6) Cadmium : When 5.0 g of Ferrous Lactate is tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content
should not be more than 1.0 ppm.
(7) Mercury : When Ferrous Lactate is tested by Mercury Limit Test, its content
should not be more than 1.0 ppm.
(8) Ferric Iron: 5 g of Ferrous Lactate, accurately weighed, transfer into a 250 mL
glaze stoppered flask, dissolve in 100 mL of water and 10mL of hydrochloric acid.
Add 3 g of potassium iodide, shake well, and allow to stand in the dark for 5 min.
Titrate liberated iodine with 0.1N sodium thiosulfate, using starch TS as the indicator,
then the content should not be more than 0.6%.
382
 1mL of 0.1 N Sodium thiosulfate solution = 5.585mg Fe(III)
(9) Realdily Carbonizable Substances and Butyrate : 0.5 g powder of Ferrous Lactate is
mixed with 1 mL of sulfuric acid, it should not be colored immediately and should not
generate the odor of fatty acid.
Loss on Drying When Ferrous Lactate is dried using vacuum (approx. 700mmHg) at 10
0℃, the weight loss should not be more than 18%.
Assay Approximately 1 g of Ferrous Lactate is precisely weighed and carbonized by
slowly heating. 1 mL of nitric acid is added and evaporated to dryness, where care
must be taken to prevent splashing. After further heat treatment, 10 mL of diluted
hydrochloric acid (1→2) to the residue and the mixture is boiled until insoluble
substances almost disappear. To this solution, 20 mL of water is added and then
filtered. Insoluble residue is rinsed with water and the rinse water is added to the
filtrate. The total volume of the filtrate is then brought up to 100 mL by adding water.
25 mL of the resulting solution is transferred into a flask with a stopper. After adding
2 g potassium iodide to the flask, The flask is sealed and set-aside for 15 minutes at
a dark place. 100 mL of water is added and free iodine is titrated with 0.1 N sodium
thiosulfate (indicator: starch solution). A blank test is done following the same
procedure.
1 mL of 0.1 N sodium thiosulfate ＝ 5.585 mg Fe

383
 Ferrous Sulfate
Chemical Formula: FeSO4
CAS No.:
Molecular Weight: 151.91 7782-63-0(crystal)
7720-78-7(dry)

Definition Ferrous Sulfate occurs as crystals (heptahydrate) called Ferrous Sulfate

(crystal) and a dried substance (hydrated to sesquihydrate) called Ferrous Sulfate
(dried).
Compositional Specifications of Ferrous Sulfate
Content Ferrous Sulfate (crystal) should contain within a range of 99.5～104.5% of
ferrous sulfate heptahydrate (FeSO4ㆍ7H2O = 278.02) and Ferrous Sulfate (dried)
should contain within a range of 86.0～89.0% of ferrous sulfate (FeSO4 = 151.91).
Description Ferrous Sulfate (crystal) occurs as whitish green crystals or crystalline
powder. Ferrous Sulfate (dried) occurs as a gray～white powder.
Identification Ferrous Sulfate solution (1→100) responds to the tests for Ferrous Salt
and Sulfate in Identification.
Purity (1) pH : pH of a solution of 1 g of Ferrous Sulfate (crystal) in 10 mL of water
should be not less than 3.7.
(2) Arsenic : It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(3) Lead : Accurately weigh 1.0 g of Ferrous Sulfate and transfer into a 50 mL flask,
where 10 mL of 9N hydrochloric acid, 10 mL of water, 20 mL of ascorbic acid
-sodium iodide solution, and 5 mL of trioctylphosphineoxid solution are added. Shake
and mix it for 30 seconds, allow it to stand, and separate the layer. Again add water
to set organic layer to the neck of the flask. Shake, mix, and set aside to separate
the layer. The organic solvent layer is used as test solution. Separately, accurately
measure 10 mL of lead standard solution to 100 mL, Accurately measure 2 mL of this
solution into a 50 mL flask, and proceed in the same manner as test solution. When
the test solution and reference solution are tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content
should not be more than 2.0 ppm.
Ascorbic acid -sodium iodide solution: 10 g of ascorbic acid and 19.3g of sodium
iodide solution are dissolved in water to make 100 mL.
Trioctylphosphineoxid solution : 5g of trioctylphosphineoxid is dissolved in methyl
isobutyl ketone to make 100 mL.
(4) Mercury : When Ferrous Sulfate is tested by Mercury Limit Test, its content should
not be more than 1.0 ppm.
Assay Accurately weigh about 0.5 g of Ferrous Sulfate, dissolve in a mixture of 25 mL
of diluted sulfuric acid (1→25) and 25 mL of freshly boiled and cooled water, and
titrate with 0.1 N potassium permanganate.

384
∘Ferrous Sulfate(crystal): 1 mL of 0.1N potassium permanganate = 27.802 mg of FeSO4ㆍ7H2O
∘Ferrous Sulfate(dried): 1 mL of 0.1N potassium permanganate = 15.191 mg of FeSO4

385
 Ferulic Acid
Chemical Formula: C 10H 10O 4
Molecular Weight: 194.18 CAS No.: 1135-24-6
Definition Ferulic acid is obtained by the following procedure. Rice bran oil from rice
(Oryza sativa LINNE) of gramineae is fractioned with hydrated ethyl alcohol and hexane
at room temperature. γ-Oryzanol, which is obtained from the fraction of ethyl alcohol,
is hydrolyzed with hot sulfuric acid and purified. Its major component is ferulic acid.
Compositional Specifications of Ferulic Acid
Content If Ferulic acid is converted to a dehydrated form, it should contain not less
than 98.0% ferulic acid (C10H10O4 = 194.18).
Description Ferulic acid is white～pale yellowish brown crystalline powder with slight
characteristic or no scent.
Identification (1) A solution of Ferulic acid in ethyl alcohol (1→100,000) has maximum
absorption bands at 234∼238 nm and 320∼324 nm.
(2) When 0.01 g of Ferulic acid dissolve in 10 mL of 10% alcoholic solution of
potassium hydroxide by heating, it becomes yellow in color.
(3) 0.01 g of Ferulic acid dissolve in 2 mL of acetone. When 0.1 mL of a solution of
ferric chloride in ethyl alcohol (1→50) is added to this solution, it becomes reddish
brown in color.
Purity (1) Arsenic : It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(2) Lead : When 5.0 g of Ferulic acid is tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content
should not be more than 2.0 ppm.
Loss on Drying When 1 g of Ferulic acid is dried for 3 hours at 105℃, the weight loss
weight should not be more than 0.5%.
Residue on Ignition When Residue on Ignition analysis is done with accurately weighted
5 g of Ferulic acid, the amount of Residue on Ignition should not be more than 0.1%.
Assay Approximately 0.5 g of Ferulic acid is precisely weighted and dissolved in 50 mL
of 50 v/v% ethyl alcohol solution by heating in a water bath. Cool the solution, it is
titrated with 0.1 N sodium hydroxide solution. Separately, a blank test is carried out by
the same method.
0.1 N sodium hydroxide solution 1 mL = 19.418 mg C10H10O4

386
 Folic Acid

Chemical Formula: C19H19O6N7

Molecular Weight: 441.40

Synonyms: Pteroylglutamic acid;
N-[4-[[(2-Amino- 1,4-dihydro-
CAS No.: 59-30-3
4-oxo-6-pteridinyl) methyl]amino]
benzoyl]-L-glutamic acid

Compositional Specifications of Folic Acid

Content Folic Acid should contain within a range of 98.0%～102.0% of folic acid
(C19H19O6N7).
Description Folic Acid occurs as a yellow to orange-yellow crystalline powder. It is
odorless.
Identification Dissolve 1.5 mg of Folic Acid in sodium hydroxide solution (1→250) to
make 100 mL. The solution exhibits absorption maxima at wave-lengths of 255～257
nm, 281～285 nm, and 361～369 nm.
Purity (1) Free Amine : Accurately weigh about 0.05 g of p-Aminobenzoylglutamic Acid
Reference Standard, previously dried for 4 hours under reduced pressure in a
desiccator(silica-gel), dissolve in alcohol(2→5) to make 100 mL. Take 5 mL of this
solution, add water to make 1,000 mL. Take 4 mL of the solution and 5mL water
and designate the solutions obtained through the ways to prepare test solution from
B solution of each assay as S' solution and D solution. As setting D solution for the
control solution, measure the absorption ratio of S' solution at 550 nm wavelength,
obtaining the number as As'. Calculate the amount of free amine by the following
formula from As' and Ac obtained in the Assay. It should is not be more than 1%.
Amount of free amine (%) =
Ac Weight of ρ-aminobenzoylglutamic acid reference standard(g)
As' × 100 – Water content of the sample(%)
weight of the sample(g) ×
100

(2) Lead : When 5.0 g of Folic Acid is tested by Atomic Absorption

Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content
should not be more than 2.0 ppm.
Water Content Folic Acid is tested by the back titration method in water content
determination (Karl-Fischer Method). The water content should not be more than
387
 8.5%.
Residue on Ignition Residue on ignition of Folic Acid should not be more than 0.5%.
Assay 0.1 g of Folic Acid is precisely weighed and dissolved in 0.1 N sodium hydroxide
solution to make 200 mL by well shaking. Take 25 mL of this solution add 20 mL of
dilute hydrochloric acid and water to make 100 mL, Solution A. Take 60 mL of
Solution A add 0.5 g of zinc powder, which is set-aside for 20 minutes while shaking
occasionally. It is then filtered through a dry filter. Approximately 10 mL of the first
filtrate is discarded. 10 mL of the remaining filtrate is diluted to 100 mL with water,
Solution B. Take 5 mL of Solution B, add 1 mL of dilute hydrochloric acid and 1 mL
of sodium nitrite solution (1→1,000) and mix well and set-aside for 2 minutes. 1 mL
of ammonium sulfamate (1→200) is mixed well and set-aside for 2 minutes. To this
solution, 1 mL of N-(l-naphthyl)-N-diethyl-ethylenediamine oxalate solution (1→1,000)
is added, mixed, and set-aside for 10 minutes. This solution is diluted to 20 mL with
water, Test Solution. Solution C is prepared using Solution A by following the same
procedure to prepare Test Solution using Solution B. Standard Solution is prepared
with approximately 0.1 g (precisely weighed) of folic acid standard by following the
same procedure as sample. Separately, 5 mL of water is treated by the same
procedure as the sample, Reference Solution. Absorption at 550 nm is measured for
Test Solution, Solution C, and Standard Solution using Reference Solution as a
reference, A, Ac, and As. The content of folic acid is calculated from the following
equation. However, water contents in folic acid standard and sample are measured by
the specified method.
Content(%) Weight of Folic acid 100 - Waterstandard(%)
content of Folic acid
= standard (g) ×
100
A - 0.1Ac 100 100
× As × Weight of × 100content - Water
of
sample(g) sample(%)

388
 Food Blue No.1

Chemical Formula: C37H31O9N2S3Na2

Molecular Weight: 792.88 INS No.: 133

Synonyms: Brilliant blue FCF; CI food blue
CAS No.: 3844-45-9
2

Definition Food Blue No. 1 consists mainly of disodium 2-[bis[4-[N-ethyl-N-(3-

sulfonatophenylmethyl)amino]phenyl]methylio]benzenesulfonate
Compositional Specifications of Food Blue No.1
Content Food Blue No.1 should contain not less than 85.0% of disodium 3-[N-ethyl-N-
4-[[4-[N-ethyl-N-(3-sulfonatebenzyl)amino]phenyl](2-sulfonatephenyl)methylene]
-2,5-cyclohexadienyliden]ammoniomethyl]benzene sulfonate (C37H31O9N2S3Na2).
Description Food Blue No.1 occurs as blue ∼ purple powder or granules. It is odorless.
and has a metallic luster.
Identification (1) When 50 mg of Food Blue No.1 dissolved in 100 mL of water, the
solution becomes blue color.
(2) When 0.1 g of Food Blue No.1 dissolved in 200 mL of 0.02 N ammonium acetate
solution. To 1 mL of this solution, add 0.02 N ammonium acetate solution to make
100 mL. The solution exhibits absorption maximum at a wavelength of 630 ± 2 nm.
(3) To 5 mL of Food Blue No. 1 solution (1→1,000), add 1 mL of hydrochloric acid.
The color of the solution becomes dark yellow～green color.
(4) When 1 mL of sodium hydroxide solution (1→10) is added to 5 mL of Food Blue No.1
solution (1→1,000), precipitate is not formed and color does not change.
(5) When 1 g of Food Blue No.1 dissolved in 10 mL of sulfuric acid, the solution
becomes a dark orange color. When 5 mL of water is added to 2～3 drops of this
solution, it becomes green color.
Purity (1) Water-insoluble substances : When Food Blue No.1 is proceeded as directed
under Water-insoluble substance in Coloring matter Test, the content should not be
more than 0.2%
(2) Chloride and sulfate : When Food Blue No.1 is proceeded as directed under
Chloride and sulfate in Coloring matter Test, the total content should not be more
than 4%.
(3) Arsenic : It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(4) Chrome : When Food Blue No.1 is tested by Heavy Metals (2) in Coloring Matter
389
 Tests, its content should not be more than 50 ppm.
(5) Mangan : When Food Blue No.1 is tested by Heavy Metals (4) in Coloring Matter
Tests, its content should not be more than 50 ppm.
(6) Lead : When 5.0 g of Food Blue No.1 is tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content
should not be more than 2.0 ppm.
(7) Cadmium : When 5.0 g of Food Blue No.1 is tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content
should not be more than 1.0 ppm.
(8) Mercury : When Food Blue No.1 is tested by Mercury Limit Test, its content
should not be more than 1.0 ppm.
(9) Unsulfonated Primary Aromatic Amines : When G. Unsulfonated Primary Aromatic
Amines in Coloring Matter Tests is done, the content should not be more than 0.01%
as Aniline.
(10) Other Coloring Matters : Proceed as directed under Purity (9) in 「Food Green
No. 3」.
Loss on Drying When Food Blue No.1 is dried for 6 hours at 135℃, the weight loss
should not be more than 10%.
Assay Accurately weigh about 4.8 g of Food Blue No. 1, and dissolve it in water to
make exactly 250 mL. Measure exactly 50 mL of this solution, and use it as the test
solution. Proceed as directed under Titanium Trichloride Method (B) of Assay in
Coloring matter Tests.
1 mL of 0.1 N titanium trichloride = 39.64 mg of C37H34O9N2S3Na2

390
 Food Blue No.1 Aluminium Lake

Synonyms: Brilliant blue FCF aluminium

lake
Definition Food Blue No. 1 Aluminum Lake is prepared by reacting an aluminum salt
solution with alkali, making the reaction product adsorb Food Blue No. 1, filtering,
drying, and crushing.
Compositional Specifications of Food Blue No. 1 Aluminum Lake
Content Food Blue No.1 Aluminum Lake should contain not less than 10.0% of 3-[N-ethyl-N-
[4-[[4-[N-ethyl-N-(3-sulfobenzyl)amino]phenyl](2-sulfophenyl)methylene]-2,5-cyclohexadienyli
dene]ammoniomethyl]benzne sulfonic acid (C37H36O9N2S3=748.90).
Description Food Blue No.1 Aluminum Lake occurs as a fine blue powder. It is odorless.
Identification (1) To 0.1 g of Food Blue No. 1 Aluminum Lake, add 5 mL of diluted
sulfuric acid, shake well and add 0.02 N ammonium acetate solution to make 200 mL.
If the solution is not clear, it is centrifuged. Measure 1～10 mL of this solution so
that the absorbance to be measured will be within a range of 0.2～0.7, and add
ammonium acetate solution to make 100 mL. The solution exhibits absorption
maximum at a wavelength of 630 ± 2 nm.
(2) To 0.1 g of Food Blue No.1 Aluminum Lake, add 5 mL of diluted hydrochloric acid
and heat in a water bath for about 5 minutes while shaking occasionally. It dissolves
almost clearly, and becomes a green to dark green color. Cool. and neutralize with
ammonia solution. A blue color becomes and a gelatinous precipitate of the same
color is formed.
(3) To 0.1 g of Food Blue No.1 Aluminum Lake, add 5 mL of sodium hydroxide
solution (1→10). and heat in a water bath for about 5 minutes while shaking
occasionally. It dissolves almost clearly, and becomes a red purple color. After
cooling, it is neutralized with diluted hydrochloric acid. A blue to red purple color
occurs,and a gelatinous precipitate of the same color is formed.
(4) To 0.1 g of Food Blue No.1 Aluminum Lake, add 5 mL of sulfuric acid, and heat in
a water bath for about 5 minutes while shaking occasionally. A dark yellow to dark
gray-brown color occurs. After cooling, add 2～3 drops of the supernatant to 5 mL
of water. A blue to blue-green color occurs.
(5) To 0.1% of Food Blue No.1 Aluminum Lake, add 10 mL of diluted hydrochloric
acid, heat in a water bath until most of it dissolves, add 0.5 g of active carbon,
shake well, and filter. The colorless filtrate is neutralized with sodium hydroxide
solution (1→10). The solution responds to the test for Aluminum Salt in Identification.
Purity (1) Hydrochloric Acid and Ammonia Insolubles Substances : When Food Blue No.1
Aluminum Lake is proceeded as directed under Hydrochloric Acid and Ammonia
Insolubles Substances in Coloring Matter Aluminum Lake Test, the content should not
be more than 0.5%.
(2) Arsenic : It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
391
 (3) Lead : When 5.0 g of Food Blue No.1 Aluminum Lake is tested by Atomic
Absorption Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy,
its content should not be more than 5.0 ppm.
(4) Barium : When Food Blue No.1 Aluminum Lake is proceeded as directed under
Barium in Coloring matter Aluminum Lake Test, it should be appropriate (not more
than 500 ppm as Ba).
(5) Other Coloring matters : Proceed as directed under Purity (5) in 「Food Green
No.3 Aluminum Lake」.
Loss on Drying When Food Blue No.1 is dried for 6 hours at 135℃, the weight loss
should not be more than 30%.
Assay Accurately weigh Food Blue No.1 Aluminum Lake so that the volume of consumed
0.1 N titanium trichloride will be about 20 mL, and proceed as directed under Assay
(2) in Coloring Matter Aluminum Lake Test.
1 mL of 0.1 N titanium trichloride solution ＝ 37.44 mg C37H36O9N2S3

392
 Food Blue No.2

Chemical Formula: C16H8O8N2S2Na2

Molecular Weight: 466.37 INS No.: 132

Synonyms: Indigocarmine; Indigotine; CI
CAS No.: 860-22-0
food blue 1

Definition Food Blue No.2 consists principally of the disodium salt of

3,3'-dioxo-2,2’-biindolinylidene-5,5’-disulfonic acid.
Compositional Specifications of Food Blue No. 2
Content Food Blue No.2 should not be less than 85.0 % of the disodium salt of
3,3'-dioxo-2,2'-biindolinylidene-5,5'-disulfonic acid (C16H8O8N2S2Na2).
Description Food Blue No.2 occurs as dark purple-blue to dark purple-brown powder or
granules. It is odorless.
Identification (1) When 50 mg of Food Blue No.2 is dissolved in 10 mL of water, the
solution becomes purple-blue in color.
(2) 0.1 g of Food Blue No.2 is dissolved in 100 mL of 0.02 N ammonium acetate
solution. To 1 mL of this solution, add 0.02 N ammonium acetate solution to make
100 mL. The solution exhibits absorption maximum at a wave-length of 612 ± 2 nm.
(3) To 5 mL of Food Blue No.2 solution (1→1,000), add 1 mL of sodium hydroxide
solution (1→10). The color of the solution changes to yellow-green.
(4) When 0.1 g of Food Blue No.2 is dissolved in 10 mL of sulfuric acid, the solution
becomes deep purple in color. Add 2 to 3 drops of this solution to 5 mL of water,
the solution becomes purple-blue in color.
Purity (1) Water-insoluble substances : When Food Blue No.2 is proceeded as directed
under Water-insoluble substance in Coloring matter Test, the content should not be
more than 0.2%.
(2) Chloride and sulfate : When Food Blue No.2 is proceeded as directed under
Chloride and sulfate in Coloring matter Test, the total content should not be more
than 7%.
(3) Arsenic : It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(4) Iron : When Food Blue No.2 is proceeded as directed under Heavy Metals (3) in
Coloring matter Test, its content should not be more than 500 ppm.
(5) Lead : When 5.0 g of Food Blue No.2 is tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content
should not be more than 2.0 ppm.
(6) Cadmium : When 5.0 g of Food Blue No.2 is tested by Atomic Absorption
393
 Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content
should not be more than 1.0 ppm.
(7) Mercury : When Food Blue No.2 is tested by Mercury Limit Test, its content
should not be more than 1.0 ppm.
(8) Unsulfonated Primary Aromatic Amines : When G. Unsulfonated Primary Aromatic
Amines in Coloring Matter Tests is done, the content should not be more than 0.01%
as Aniline.
(9) Other Coloring Matters : Proceed as directed under Purity (9) in 「Food Green No.
3」. In this case, 0.1 g of sample is dissolved in water to make 100 mL solution.
Loss on Drying When Food Blue No.2 is dried for 6 hours at 135℃, the weight loss
should not be more than 10%.
Assay Accurately weigh about 2.7 g of Food Blue No.2, and dissolve it in water to
make exactly 500 mL. Measure exactly 100 mL of this solution, and use it as the test
solution. Proceed as directed under Titanium Trichloride Method (B) of Assay in
Coloring Matter Tests.
1 mL of 0.1 N titanium trichloride = 23.32 mg of C16H8O8N2S2Na2

394
 Food Blue No.2 Aluminium Lake

Synonyms: Indigocarmine aluminium lake

Definition Food Blue No.2 Aluminum Lake is prepared by reacting an aluminum salt
solution with alkali, making the reaction product adsorb Food Blue No.2, filtering,
drying, and crushing.
Compositional Specifications of Food Blue No.2 Aluminum Lake
Content Food Blue No.2 Aluminum Lake should not be less than 10.0% of 3,
3'-dioxo-2,2'-biindolinylidene-5,5'-disulfonic acid (C16H10N2O8S2 =422.40).
Description Food Blue No.2 Aluminum Lake occurs as a fine purplish-blue powder. It is
odorless.
Identification (1) To 0.1 g of Food Blue No.2 Aluminum Lake, add 5 mL of diluted
sulfuric acid, where 0.02 N ammonium acetate solution is added to make the total
volume to 100 mL. When this solution is not clear, it is centrifuged. 1～10 mL of
this solution is diluted to 100 mL with 0.02 N ammonium acetate solution so that the
absorbance to be measured will be within a range of 0.2～0.7. This solution exhibits
absorption maximum at a wavelength of 612 ± 2 nm.
(2) To 0.1 g of Food Blue No.2 Aluminum Lake, add 5 mL of sodium hydroxide
solution (1→10). While shaking occasionally, it is heated for 5 minutes in a water
bath. The solution becomes almost clear and becomes yellowish brown color. After
cooling, the solution is neutralized with diluted hydrochloric acid, it becomes blue
purple～light green color and gelatinous precipitate of the same color is formed.
(3) To 0.1g of Food Blue No.2 Aluminum Lake, add 5 mL of sulfuric acid. While
shaking occasionally, it is heated for 5 minutes in a water bath. The solution
becomes deep blue～purple color. After cooling, 2～3 drops of the supernatant are
added to 5 mL of water. This solution becomes blue～purple.
(4) To 0.1 g of Food Blue No.2 Aluminum Lake, add 10 mL of dilute hydrochloric
acid, which is heated in a water bath. Most of the solid material is dissolved. 0.5 g
of activated carbon is added and well mixed, which is then filtered. The colorless
filtrate is neutralized with sodium hydroxide solution (1→10). It responds to the test
for of aluminum salt in Identification.
Purity (1) Hydrochloric Acid and Ammonia Insolubles Substances : When Food Blue No.2
Aluminum Lake is proceeded as directed under Hydrochloric Acid and Ammonia
Insolubles Substances in Coloring Matter Aluminum Lake Test, the content should not
be more than 0.5%.
(2) Arsenic : It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(3) Iron : When Food Blue No.2 Aluminum Lake is proceeded as directed under Heavy
Metals (3) in Coloring matter Test, the content should not be more than 250 ppm.
(4) Lead : When 5.0 g of Food Blue No.2 Aluminum Lake is tested by Atomic
Absorption Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy,
395
 its content should not be more than 5.0 ppm.
(5) Barium : When Food Blue No.2 Aluminum Lake is proceeded as directed under
Barium in Coloring matter Aluminum Lake Test, it should be appropriate (not more
than 500 ppm as Ba).
(6) Other Coloring Matters : Proceed as directed under Purity (5) in 「Food Green
No.3 Aluminum Lake」. In this case, an amount of sample is used so that it contains
0.1 g as Color acid. Take a sample of Food Blue No. 2 Aluminum Lake to contain
0.1 g as color acid and use acetic acid(1→3) instead of acetic acid(1→20)
Loss on Drying When Food Blue No.2 Aluminum Lake is dried for 6 hours at 135℃, the
weight loss should not be more than 30%.
Assay Accurately weigh Food Blue No.2 Aluminum Lake so that the volume of consumed
0.1 N titanium trichloride will be about 20 mL, and proceed as directed under Assay
(2) in Coloring Matter Aluminum Lake Test.
1 mL of 0.1 N titanium trichloride = 21.12 mg of C16H10O8N2S2

396
 Food Green No.3

Chemical Formula: C37H34O10N2S3Na2

Molecular Weight: 808.88 INS No.: 143

Synonyms: Fast green FCF; CI food green
CAS No.: 2353-45-9
3

Definition Food Green No.3 consists principally of disodium 2-[bis[4-[N-ethyl-N-

(3-sulfonatophenylmethyl)mino]phenyl]methylio]-5-hydroxybenzenesulfonate
Compositional Specifications of Food Green No.3
Content Food Green No.3 should be contain not less than 85.0% of disodium 3-［bis［4-N-
ethyl-N-[4-[[4-[N-ethyl-N(3-sulfonatebenzyl)phenyl](4-hydroxy-2-sulfonatephenyl)
methylene]-2,5-cyclohexadieniriden]ammonio-methyl]benzenesulfonate (C37H34O10N2S3Na2).
Description Food Green No.3 occurs as dark green powder or granules. It is odorless
and has a metallic luster.
Identification (1) Dissolve 50 mg of Food Green No.3 in 100 mL of water. This solution
is bluish green in color.
(2) 0.1 g of Food Green No.3 is dissolved in 200 mL of 0.02 N ammonium acetate
solution. When 1 mL of this solution is diluted to 100 mL with 0.02 N ammonium
acetate solution, it shows a maximum absorption band at 628 ± 2 nm.
(3) When 1 mL of hydrochloric acid is added to 5 mL of an aqueous solution (1→
1,000) of Food Green No.3, the color of the solution changes to brown.
(4) When 1 mL of sodium hydroxide solution (1→10) is added to 5 mL of an aqueous
solution (1→1,000) of Food Green No.3, the color of the solution changes to bluish
purple.
(5) When 0.1 g of Food Green No.3 is dissolved in 10 mL of sulfuric acid, it shows an
orange color. When 2～3 drops of this solution are added to 5 mL of water, the color
becomes green.
Purity (1) Water Insoluble Matter : When Food Green No.3 proceeds as directed under
water insoluble matter in the Coloring Matter Test, the content should not be more
than 0.2%.
(2) Chlorides and Sulfates : When Food Green No.3 proceed as directed under
Chlorides and Sulfates in the Coloring Matter Test, the total content should not be
more than 5%.
397
 (3) Arsenic : It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(4) Chrome : When Food Green No.3 is tested by Heavy Metal Limit Test (2) in
Coloring Matter Tests, its content should not be more than 50 ppm.
(5) Mangan : When Food Green No.3 is tested by Heavy Metals (4) in Coloring Matter
Tests, its content should not be more than 50 ppm.
(6) Lead : When 5.0 g of Food Green No.3 is tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content
should not be more than 2.0 ppm.
(7) Mercury : When Food Green No.3 is tested by Mercury Limit Test, its content
should not be more than 1.0 ppm.
(8) Unsulfonated Primary Aromatic Amines : When G. Unsulfonated Primary Aromatic
Amines in Coloring Matter Tests is done, the content should not be more than 0.01%
as Aniline.
(9) Other coloring matters : 0.1 g of Food Green No.3 is dissolved in water to make
200 mL. 0.002 mL of this solution is used as a Test Solution. A mixture of n-butyl
alcohol, anhydrous alcohol, and 1% ammonia solution (6:2:3) is used as a developing
solution. When the test solution is tested by Method 1 in Paper Chromatography,
there should be only one spot. In this case, No.2 filter paper for chromatography is
used and developing is stopped when the developing solvent front reaches
approximately 15 cm. It is blow dried and observed under a natural light with a white
background from the top. A reference solution is not used.
Loss on Drying Food Green No.3 is dried for 6 hours at 135℃ and the weight loss
should not be more than 10%.
Assay Accurately weigh about 4.7 g of Food Green No. 3, and dissolve in water to
make exactly 250 mL. Measure exactly 50 mL of this solution, use it as the test
solution, and proceed as directed under Titanium Trichloride Method (B) of Assay in
Coloring Matter Tests.
1 mL of 0.1 N titanium trichloride = 40.44 mg of C37H34O10N2S3Na2

398
 Food Green No.3 Aluminium Lake

Synonyms: Fast green FCF aluminium lake

Definition Food Green No. 3 Aluminum Lake is prepared by reacting an aluminum salt
solution with alkali, making the reaction product adsorb Food Green No. 3, filtering,
drying, and crushing.
Compositional Specifications of Food Green No.3 Aluminum Lake
Content Food Green No.3 Aluminum Lake should be contain not less than 10.0% of
3-[N-ethyl-N-[4-[[4[N-ethyl-N-(3-sulfobenzil)amino]phenyl]]-(4-hydroxy-2
sulfophenyl)methylene]-2,5-cyclohexanedianiliden］ammoniomethyl] benzenesulfonic acid
(C37H36O10N2S3 = 764.90).
Description Food Green No. 3 Aluminum Lake occurs as a fine, dark green-blue powder.
It is odorless.
Identification (1) To 0.1 g of Food Green No. 3 Aluminum Lake, add 5 mL of dilute
sulfuric acid, where 0.02 N ammonium acetate solution is added to bring the total
volume to 200 mL. When this solution is not clear, it is centrifuged. 1～10 mL of
this solution is diluted to 100 mL with 0.02 N ammonium acetate solution so that the
measured absorbance falls in a range of 0.2～0.7. This solution has a maximum
absorption band at 626 ± 2 nm.
(2) To 0.1 g of Food Green No.3 Aluminum Lake, add 5 mL of dilute hydrochloric acid.
While shaking occasionally, it is heated for 5 minutes in a water bath. The solid
dissolves completely and the solution becomes clear and dark green. After cooling,
when the solution is neutralized with ammonia solution, it become bluish green and
gel-like precipitates with same color are produced.
(3) To 0.1 g of Food Green No.3 Aluminum Lake, add 5 mL of sodium hydroxide
solution (1→10). While shaking occasionally, it is heated for 5 minutes in a water
bath. The solid dissolves completely and the solution becomes clear and reddish
violet. After cooling, when the solution is neutralized with dilute hydrochloric acid, it
become bluish green and gel-like precipitates with same color are produced.
(4) To 0.1 g of Food Green No. 3 Aluminum Lake, add 5 mL of sulfuric acid. While
shaking occasionally, it is heated for 5 minutes in a water bath. The solution
becomes dark orange in color. After cooling, 2～3 drops of the supernatant are added
to 5 mL of water. This solution turns green.
(5) To 0.1 g of Food Green No.3 Aluminum Lake add 10 mL of dilute hydrochloric
acid, which is heated in a water bath. Most of the solid material is dissolved. 0.5 g
of activated carbon is added and well mixed, which is then filtered. The colorless
filtrate is neutralized with sodium hydroxide solution (1→10). It responds to test of
aluminum salt in Identification.
Purity (1) Hydrochloric Acid and Ammonia Insoluble Substances : When Food Green
No.3 Aluminum Lake is tested for Hydrochloric acid and ammonia insoluble
399
 substances in Coloring Matter Aluminum Lake Test, its content should not be more
than 0.5%.
(2) Arsenic : It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(3) Lead : When 5.0 g of Food Green No.3 Aluminum Lake is tested by Atomic
Absorption Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy,
its content should not be more than 5.0 ppm.
(4) Barium : When Food Green No.3 Aluminum Lake is tested by the procedure in
Barium Test for [Aluminum Lake], it should be appropriate (not more than 500 ppm
as Ba).
(5) Other Coloring Matters : 60 mL of dilute acetic acid (1→20) is added to an amount
of Food Green No. 3 Aluminum Lake containing 50 mg as a coloring acid. It is
heated to boil and cooled. To this solution, acetone is added to bring the total
volume to 100 mL. 0.002 mL of the supernatant is used as Test Solution. Using a
mixture of n-butyl alcohol, anhydrous alcohol, and 1% ammonia solution (6:2:3) as a
developing solvent. When the Test Solution is tested by Method 1 in Paper
Chromatography, there should be only one spot. In this case, No. 2 filter paper for
chromatography is used and developing is stopped when the developing solvent front
reaches approximately 15 cm. It is blow dried and observed under a natural light
with a white background from the top. A reference solution is not used.
Loss on Drying Food Green No.3 Aluminum Lake is dried for 6 hours at 135℃ and the
weight loss should not be more than 30%.
Assay Accurately weigh Food Green No. 3 Aluminum Lake, so that the volume of
consumed 0.1N titanium trichloride is approximately 20 mL, and proceed as directed
under H. Assay (2) in the Coloring Aluminum Lake Matter Test.
1 mL of 0.1 N titanium trichloride = 38.24 mg of C37H36O10N2S3

400
 Food Red No.102

Chemical Formula: C20H11N2Na3O10S3․1½H2O

Molecular Weight: 631.51 INS No.: 124

Synonyms: New coccine; Ponceau 4R CAS No.: 2611-82-7

Compositional Specifications of Food Red No.102

Content Food Red No.102 should contain not less than 85.0% of the trisodium salt of
7-hydroxy -8-(4-sulfonaphthylazo)-1,3-naphthalenedisulfonic acid, sesquihydrate
(C20H11N2Na3O10S3ㆍ1½H2O).
Description Food Red No.102 occurs as red to dark red powder or granules. It is
odorless.
Identification (1) A solution of 0.1 g of Food Red No.102 in 100 mL of water is red in color.
(2) A solution of 0.1 g of Food Red No.102 in 10 mL of sulfuric acid is reddish violet.
When 2～3 drops of this solution is added to 5 mL of water, a yellow～red color
develops.
(3) 0.1 g of Food Red No.102 is dissolved in 100 mL solution of ammonium acetate (3
→2,000). When 1 mL of this solution is diluted to 100 mL with ammonium acetate
solution (3→2,000), it shows a maximum absorption band at 508 ± 2 nm.
Purity (1) Water-insoluble substances : When Food Red No.102 proceed as directed
under Water Insoluble Substances in the Coloring Matter Test, the content should not
be more than 0.2%.
(2) Chloride and Sulfate : When Food Red N0.102 proceed as directed under Chlorides
and Sulfates in the Coloring Matter Test, the total content should not be more than 8.0%.
(3) Arsenic : It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(4) Lead : When 5.0 g of Food Red No.102 is tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content
should not be more than 2.0 ppm.
(5) Cadmium : When 5.0 g of Food Red No.102 is tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content
should not be more than 1.0 ppm.
(6) Mercury : When Food Red No.102 is tested by Mercury Limit Test, its content
should not be more than 1.0 ppm.
(7) Other coloring matters : Proceed as directed under Purity (9) in Food Green No.3.
401
 (8) Unreacted Raw Material and Reaction Intermediate : To 100 mg of Food Red
No.102 is dissolved in ammonium acetate solution (1.54→1000) to make 100 mL as
the Test Solution. Separately, 10 mg each of 4-aminobenzenesulfonic acid, 7-
hydroxy-1,3-naphthalenedisulfonic acid disodium salt, 3-hydroxy-2,7-naphthalene-
disulfonic acid disodium salt, 6-hydroxy-2-naphthalenedisulfonicacid monosodium salt,
6,6'-oxybis[2-naphthalenesulfonic acid disodium salt], and disodium salt of 4,4'-(Diaz
amino)-dibenzensulfonic acid (each was dried for 24 hours in a vacuum desiccator) is
dissolved in ammonium acetate solution (1.54→1000) to make 100 mL of Standard
Solution, respectively. By following the procedure in F. Unreacted Raw Material and
Reaction Intermediate in Coloring Matter Tests under the following operation
conditions, the contents of 4-amino-1-naphtahlenesulfonic acid monosodium salt,
7-hydroxy-1,3-naphthalenedisulfonic acid disodium salt, 3-hydroxy-2,7-
naphthalenedisulfonic acid disodium salt, 6-hydroxy-2-naphthalenesulfonic acid
monosodium salt, and 7-hydroxy-1,3,6-naphthalenetrisulfonic acid trisodium salt
should not be more than 0.5%.
Operation Conditions
-Detector: Visible Absorption Detector (wave length 238 nm)
-Carrier Phase : A - Ammonium acetate solution (1.54→1000)
B - Acetonitrile
-After keeping Solution A for 5 minutes,
Solution A : Solution B(100:0) → Solution A: Solution B (70:30) 50 minutes
(9) Unsulfonated Primary Aromatic Amines : When Food Red No.102 is tested by
following the procedure in G. Unsulfonated Primary Aromatic Amines in Coloring
Matter Tests, the content should not be more than 0.01%.
Loss on Drying When Food Red No.102 is dried for 6 hours at 135℃, the weight loss
should not be more than 10.0%.
Assay Accurately weigh about 1.7 g of Food Red No.102, and dissolve in water to make
250 mL. Measure exactly 50 mL of this solution, use it as the test solution, and
proceed as directed under Titanium Trichloride Method (A) of Assay in Coloring
Matter Tests.
1 mL of 0.1 N titanium trichloride = 15.788 mg of C20H11N2Na3O10S3ㆍ1½H2O

402
 Food Red No.2

Chemical Formula: C20H11O10N2S3Na3

Molecular Weight: 604.50 INS No.: 123

Synonyms: Amaranth; CI Food Red 9 CAS No.: 915-67-3

Definition Food Red No. 2 is obtained by coupling diazotized 4-amino-1-

naphthalenesulfonic acid with 3-hydroxy-2,7-naphthalenedisulfonic acid, salting out,
and refining. It consists principally of the trisodium salt of
3-hydroxy-4-(4-sulfonaphthylazo)-2,7-naphthalenedisulfonic acid.
Compositional Specifications of Food Red No. 2
Content Food Red No. 2 should contain not less than 85.0% of trisodium-2-
hydroxyazonaphthalene-3,4',6-sulfonate (C20H11O10N2S3Na3= 604.50).
Description Food Red No.2 occurs as reddish brown to dark reddish brown powder or
granule. It is odorless.
Identification (1) When 0.1 g of Food Red No.2 is dissolved in 100 mL of water, the
solution becomes purplish red color.
(2) When 0.1 g of Food Red No.2 is dissolved in 100 mL of 0.02 N ammonium acetate
solution. 1 mL of this solution is diluted to 100 mL with 0.02 N ammonium acetate
solution. The resulting solution exhibits absorption maximum at a wavelength of 520
± 2 nm.
(3) When 0.1 g of Food Red No. 2 is dissolved in 10 mL of sulfuric acid, the solution
becomes red color. When 5 mL of water is added to 2～3 drops of this solution, it
becomes purplish red color.
Purity (1) Water Insoluble Substances : When Food Red No.2 proceed as directed under
Water Insoluble Substances in the Coloring Matter Test, the content should not be
more than 0.2%.
(2) Chlorides and Sulfates : When Food Red No.2 proceed as directed under Chlorides
and Sulfates in the Coloring Matter Test, the total content should not be more than 5%.
(3) Arsenic : It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(4) Lead : When 5.0 g of Food Red No.2 is tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content
should not be more than 2.0 ppm.
(5) Cadmium : When 5.0 g of Food Red No.2 is tested by Atomic Absorption
403
 Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content
should not be more than 1.0 ppm.
(6) Mercury : When Food Red No.2 is tested by Mercury Limit Test, its content should
not be more than 1.0 ppm.
(7) Unsulfonated Primary Aromatic Amines : When G. Unsulfonated Primary Aromatic
Amines in Coloring Matter Tests is done, the content should not be more than 0.01%
as Aniline.
(8) Other Coloring Matters : Proceed as directed under Purity (9) in 「Food Green
No.3」. In this case, 0.1 g of sample is dissolved in water to make 100 mL solution.
Loss on Drying When Food Red No.2 is dried for 6 hours at 135℃, the weight loss
should not be more than 10%.
Assay Accurately weigh about 1.7 g of Food Red No.2, and dissolve in water to make
250 mL solution. Measured exactly 50 mL of the solution, and proceed as directed
under Assay (A) Titanium Trichloride in the Coloring Matter Test.
1 mL of 0.1 N titanium trichloride solution = 15.11 mg C20H11O10N2S3Na3

404
 Food Red No.2 Aluminium Lake

Synonyms: Amaranth aluminium lake

Definition Food Red No. 2 Aluminum Lake is prepared by reacting an aluminum salt
solution with alkali, making the reaction product adsorb Food Red No. 2, filtering,
drying, and crushing.
Compositional Specifications of Food Red No.2 Aluminum Lake
Content Food Red No.2 Aluminum Lake should contain not less than 10.0% of 2-
hydroxyazonaphthalene-3,4',6-trisulfonic acid (C20H14O10 N2S3= 538.54).
Description Food Red No.2 Aluminum Lake occurs as a fine, purplish red powder. It is
odorless.
Identification (1) To 0.1 g of Food Red No.2 Aluminum Lake, add 5 mL of diluted
sulfuric acid , where 0.02 N ammonium acetate solution is added to make the total
volume to 100 mL. When this solution is not clear, it is centrifuged. 1～10 mL of
this solution is diluted to 100 mL with 0.02 N ammonium acetate solution so that the
absorbance to be measured will be within a range of 0.2 to 0.7. This solution has a
maximum absorption band at 520 ± 2 nm.
(2) To 0.1 g of Food Red No.2 Aluminum Lake, add 5 mL of hydrochloric acid. While
shaking occasionally, it is heated for 5 minutes in a water bath. The solution
becomes violet color. After cooling, 2～3 drops of supernatant are added to 5 mL of
water, then it becomes purplish red color.
(3) To 0.1 g of Food Red No.2 Aluminum Lake, add 10 mL of diluted hydrochloric acid,
which is heated in a water bath. Most of the solid material is dissolved. 0.5 g of
activated carbon is added and well mixed, which is then filtered. The colorless
filtrate is neutralized with sodium hydroxide solution (1→10). It responds to the test
for of aluminum salt in Identification.
Purity (1) Hydrochloric Acid and Ammonia Insolubles Substances : When Food Red No.2
Aluminum Lake is proceeded as directed under Hydrochloric Acid and Ammonia
Insoluble Substances in the Coloring Matter Aluminum Lake, the content should not
be more than 0.5%.
(2) Arsenic : It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(3) Lead : When 5.0 g of Food Red No.2 Aluminum Lake is tested by Atomic
Absorption Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy,
its content should not be more than 5.0 ppm.
(4) Barium : When Food Red No.2 Aluminum Lake is proceeded as directed under
Barium Test in Coloring Matter Aluminum Lake, it should be appropriate (not more
than 500 ppm as Ba).
(5) Other coloring matters : Proceed as directed under Purity (6) in 「Food Green No.
3 Aluminum Lake」. In this case, sample is taken so that it contains 0.1 g of color
405
 acid.
Loss on Drying When Food Red No.2 Aluminum Lake is dried for 6 hours at 135℃, the
weight loss should not be more than 30%.
Assay Accurately weigh of Food Red No.2 Aluminum Lake so that the volume of
consumed 0.1 N titanium trichloride will be about 20 mL, and proceed as directed
under Assay (1) in the Coloring Matter Aluminum Lake Tests.
1 mL of 0.1 N titanium trichloride = 13.46 mg of C20H14O10N2S3

406
 Food Red No.3

Chemical Formula: C20H6O5I4Na2‧H2O

Molecular Weight: 897.91 INS No.: 127

Synonyms: Erythrosine; CI food red 14 CAS No.: 16423-68-0

Definition Food Red No. 3 consists principally of the disodium salt of

2',4',5',7'-tetraiodofluorocene mono hydrate.
Compositional Specifications of Food Red No.3
Content Food Red No.3 should contain not less than 85.0% of the disodium salt of
2',4',5',7'-tetraiodofluorocene mono hydrate (C20H6O5I4Na2․H2O).
Description Food Red No.3 occurs as red to brown powder or granules. It is odorless.
Identification (1) When 0.1 g of Food Red No.3 is dissolved in 100 mL of water, it
becomes bluish red color.
(2) 0.1 g of Food Red No.3 is dissolved in 500 mL of 0.02 N ammonium acetate
solution, 3 mL of which is diluted to 200 mL with 0.02 N ammonium acetate solution.
The resulting solution exhibits absorption maximum at a wavelength of 526 ± 2 nm.
(3) When 1 mL of hydrochloric acid is added to 5 mL of Food Red No.3 solution (1→
1,000), precipitates are formed.
(4) When 0.1 g of Food Red No.3 is dissolved in 10 mL of sulfuric acid, it becomes
yellowish brown color. When 2～3 drops of this solution is added to 5 mL of water,
orange red precipitates are formed.
Purity (1) Water-Insoluble Substances : When Food Red No.3 is proceeded as directed
under Water-Insoluble Substance in the Coloring Matter Test, the content should not
be more than 0.2%.
(2) pH : pH of Food Red No.3 solution (1→100) should be within a range of 6.5∼10.0.
(3) Chloride and sulfate : When Food Red No.3 is proceeded as directed under Chloride
and sulfate in the Coloring Matter Test, the total content should not be more than
2%.
(4) Arsenic : It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(5) Zinc : When Food Red No.3 is proceeded as directed under Heavy Metals (1) in the
Coloring Matter Test, the content should not be more than 50 ppm. In this case, 10
mL of test solution and blank test solution are taken.
(6) Lead : When 5.0 g of Food Red No.3 is tested by Atomic Absorption
407
 Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content
should not be more than 2.0 ppm.
(7) Cadmium : When 5.0 g of Food Red No.3 is tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content
should not be more than 1.0 ppm.
(8) Mercury : When Food Red No.3 is tested by Mercury Limit Test, its content should
not be more than 1.0 ppm.
(9) Other Coloring Matters : Proceed as directed under Purity (9) in 「Food Green
No.3」. In this case, a 1:1 mixture of 25% alcohol and 5% ammonia solution is used
as a developing solvent.
Loss on Drying Food Red No.3 is dried for 6 hours at 135℃ and the weight loss should
not be more than 12%.
Assay Accurately weigh about 1 g of Food Red No.3, and dissolve it in water to make
exactly 100 mL. Measure exactly 50 mL of this solution, use it as the test solution,
and proceed as directed under (2) Weight Method in the Assay in the Coloring Matter
Tests.
Content of Food Red Weight of the precipitate(g) × 2.148
No.3＝ weight of the sample(g)
× 100

408
 Food Red No.40
Allura Red

Chemical Formula: C18H14O8N2S2Na2

Molecular Weight: 496.43 INS No.: 129

Synonyms: Allura red; CI food red 17 CAS No.: 25956-17-6

Definition Food Red No.40 is obtained by coupling diazotized 4-amino-5-

methoxy-2-methylbenzenesulfonic acid with 6-hydroxy-2- naphthalenesulfonic acid,
salting out, and refining. It consists principally of the disodium salt of
6-hydroxy-5-(2-methoxy-5-methyl-4-sulfophenylazo)-2-naphthalenesulfonic acid.
Compositional Specifications of Food Red No.40
Content Food Red No.40 should contain not less than 85.0% of the disodium salt of
6-hydroxy-5-(2-methoxy-5-methyl-4-sulfophenyl)azo-2-naphthalenesulfonic acid
(C18H14O8N2S2Na2)
Description Food Red No.40 occurs as dark red power or granules. It is odorless.
Identification (1) When 0.1 g of Food Red No.40 is dissolved in 100 mL of water, the
resulting solution becomes red color.
(2) 0.1 g of Food Red No.40 is dissolved in 100 mL of 0.02 N ammonium acetate
solution, 1 mL of which is diluted to 100 mL with 0.02 N ammonium acetate solution.
The resulting solution exhibits absorption maximum at a wavelength of 497∼501 nm.
(3) When 0.1 g of Food Red No.40 is dissolved in 10 mL of sulfuric acid, it becomes
reddish violet color. When 2～3 drops of this solution are added to 5 mL of water, it
becomes red color.
Purity (1) Water Insoluble : When Food Red No.40 is proceeded as directed under
Water-Insoluble Substance in the Coloring Matter Test, the content should not be
more than 0.2%
(2) Chloride and Sulfate : When Food Red No.40 is proceeded as directed under
Chloride and Sulfate in the Coloring Matter Test, the content should not be more
than 5.0% as total amount
(3) Arsenic : It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(4) Lead : When 5.0 g of Food Red No.40 is tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content
should not be more than 2.0 ppm.
(5) Cadmium : When 5.0 g of Food Red No.40 is tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content
409
 should not be more than 1.0 ppm.
(6) Mercury : When Food Red No.40 is tested by Mercury Limit Test, its content
should not be more than 1.0 ppm.
(7) Lower Sulfonated Subsidiary Colors : 10.0 mg of Food Red No.40 is dissolved in
ammonium acetate solution (7.7→1000) to make 100 mL as the Test Solution.
Separately, cresidine sulfonic acid azo β-naphthol color
[4-(2-Hydroxy-1-naphthylazo)-5-methoxy-2-methyl-4-benzenesulfonic acid
monosodium salt] and cresidine azo Schaeffer's salt color [6-Hydroxy-5-
(2-methoxy-5-methylphenylazo)-2-naphthalenesulfonate monosodium salt] are dried
for 24 hours in a vacuum desiccator. 10 mg each of these colors is dissolved in
ammonium acetate solution (7.7→1,000) to make exactly 100 mL as the standard
stock solution. Using these solutions, when the content of each colors (cresidine
sulfonic acid azo β-naphthol colors and cresidine azo Schaeffer's salt colors) in the
Test Solution is proceeded as directed under E. Subsidiary Colors in the Tar Coloring
Matter Test, the content sum of two should not be more than 1.0 %.
(8) Higher Sulfonated Subsidiary Colors : Use 20 μl of the Test Solution in (7) Purity
as the Test Solution. Separately, cresidine sulfonic acid azo G colors
[7-Hydroxy-8-(2-methoxy-5-methyl-4-sulfonatephenylazo)-1,3-naphthalene-
disulfonic acid trisodium salt] and cresidine sulfonic acid azo R color
[3-Hydroxy-4-(2-methoxy-5-methyl-4-sulfonatephenylazo)-2,7-naphthalenedisulfonic
acid trisodium salt] are dried for 24 hours in a vacuum desiccator. 10 mg each of
these colors is dissolved in ammonium acetate solution (7.7→1,000) to make exactly
100 mL as the standard stock solution. Using these solutions, when the content of
each colors (cresidine sulfonic acid azo G and R colors) in Test Solution is proceeded
as directed under E. Subsidiary Colors in the Tar Coloring Matter Test, the content
sum of two should not be more than 1.0 %.
(9) Disodium salt 6-hydroxy(2-naphthalenesulfonate) : Use 20 μl of Test Solution in (7)
Purity as the Test Solution. Separately, Disodium 6-hydroxy(2-naphthalene-
sulfonate) is dried for 24 hours in a vacuum desiccator. 10.0 mg of dried material is
dissolved in ammonium acetate solution (7.7→1,000) to make 100 mL as the standard
stock solution. Using this solution, when the content of Disodium 6-hydroxy(2-
naphthalenesulfonate) in Test Solution is proceeded as directed under F. Unreacted
Raw Material and Reaction Intermediate in the Tar Coloring Matter, the content
should not be more than 0.3%.
(10) 4-Amino-5-methoxy-2-methyIbenzene sulfonic acid : Use 20 μl of Test Solution
in (7) Purity as the Test Solution. Separately, 10.0 mg of
4-Amino-5-methoxy-2-methyIbenzenesulfonic acid is dried for 24 hours in a vacuum
desiccator. 100 mg of dried material is dissolved in ammonium acetate solution (7.7→
1,000) to make 100 mL as the standard stock solution. Using this solution, when the
content of 4-Amino-5-methoxy-2- methylbenzenesulfonic acid in Test Solution is
proceeded as directed under F. Unreacted Raw Material and Reaction Intermediate in
the Tar Coloring Matter Test, the content should not be more than 0.2%.
410
 (11) Disodium salt 6,6'-oxybis(2-naphthalenesulfonate) : Use 20 μl of Test Solution in
(7) Purity as the Test Solution. Separately, Disodium 6,6'-oxybis(2-naphthalene-
sulfonate) is dried for 24 hours in a vacuum desiccator. 10.0 mg of dried material is
dissolved in ammonium acetate solution (7.7→1,000) to make 100 mL as the standard
solution. Using this solution, when the content of Disodium
6,6'-oxybis(2-naphthalenesulfonate) in Test Solution is proceeded as directed under
F. Unreacted Raw Material and Reaction Intermediate in the Tar Coloring Matter, the
content should not be more than 1.0%.
(12) Unsulfonated Primary Aromatic Amines : When Food Red No.4 is proceeded as
directed under G. Unsulfonated Primary Aromatic Amines in Coloring Matter Test, the
content should not be more than 0.01 % as aniline
Loss on Drying When Food Red No.40 is dried for 6 hours at 135℃, the weight loss
should not be more than 10 %.
Assay Accurately weigh about 1.7 g of Food Red No. 40, and dissolve it in water to
make exactly 250 mL. Measure 50 mL of this solution to use as the test solution, and
proceed as directed under Titanium Trichloride Method (A) of Assay in Coloring
Matter Tests.
1 mL of 0.1 N Titanium trichloride = 12.41 mg C18H14O8N2S2Na2

411
 Food Red No.40 Aluminium Lake

Synonyms: Allura red AC aluminium lake

Definition Food Red No.40 Aluminum Lake is prepared by reacting an aluminum salt
solution with alkali, making the reaction product adsorb food Red No.40, filtering,
drying, and crushing.
Compositional Specifications of Food Red No.40 Aluminum Lake
Content Food Red No.40 Aluminum Lake should contain not less than 10.0 % of
6-hydroxv-5-(2-methoxy-5-methyl-4-sulfophenylazo)-2-naphthalenesulfonic acid
(C18H16N2O8S2).
Description Food Red No.40 Aluminum Lake occurs as an orange red fine powder. It is
odorless.
Identification (1) To 0.1 g of Food Red No.40 Aluminum Lake, add 5 mL of sulfuric
acid. While shaking occasionally, it is heated for 5 minutes in a water bath. The
solution becomes dark reddish violet color. After cooling, 2～3 drops of the
supernatant are added to 5 mL of water. This solution becomes red color.
(2) To 0.1 g of Food Red No.40 Aluminum Lake, add 5 mL of diluted sulfuric acid
Where 0.02 N ammonium acetate solution is added to make the total volume to 100
mL. When this solution is not clear, it is centrifuged. 1～10 mL of this solution is
diluted to 100 mL with 0.02 N ammonium acetate solution so that the absorbance to
be measured will be within a range of 0.2 to 0.7. This solution exhibits absorption
maximum at a wavelength of 497～501 nm.
(3) To 0.1 g of Food Red No.40 Aluminum Lake, add 10 mL of diluted hydrochloric
acid, heat in a water bath until most of it dissolves, add 0.5 g of active carbon,
shake well. and filter. The colorless filtrate neutralize with sodium hydroxide solution
(1→10). The solution responds to the test for Aluminum Salt in Identification.
Purity (1) Hydrochloric Acid and Ammonia Insoluble Substances : When Food Red No.40
Aluminum Lake is proceeded as directed under Hydrochloric acid-and
ammonia-insoluble substances in the Coloring Matter Aluminum Lake Test, the
content should not be more than 0.5%.
(2) Arsenic : It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(3) Lead : When 5.0 g of Food Red No.40 Aluminum Lake is tested by Atomic
Absorption Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy,
its content should not be more than 5.0 ppm.
(4) Barium : When Food Red No.40 Aluminum Lake is proceeded as directed under
Barium in the Coloring Matter Aluminum Lake Test, it should be appropriate (not
more than 500 ppm as Ba).
(5) Lower Sulfonated Subsidiary Colors : 0.1 g of Food Red No 40 Aluminum Lake is
dissolved in 5 mL diluted sulfuric acid, where ammonium acetate solution (7.7→1000)
412
 is added to make 100 mL as the Test Solution. If the solution is not clear, it is
centrifuged. It is proceeded as directed under Purity (7) in 「Food Red No. 40」, and
the content should not be more than 1.0% (based on 85.0% content).
(6) Higher Sulfonated Subsidiary Colors : Use 20 μl of the test solution in (5) as the
Test Solution. Proceed as directed under Purity (8) in 「Food Red No.40」, and the
content should not be more than 1.0% (based on 85.0% content).
(7) Sodium Salt of 6-Hydroxy-2-Naphthalenesulfonic Acid : Use 20 μl of the test
solution in (5) as the Test Solution. Proceed as directed under Purity (9) in 「Food
Red No. 40」, and the content should not be more than 0.3% (based on 85.0%
content).
(8) 4-Amino-5-methoxy-2-methylbenzenesulfonic acid : Use 20 μl of the test solution
in (5) as the Test Solution. It is tested by the procedure in Purity (10) in 「Food Red
No.40」, and the content should not be more than 0.2% (based on 85.0 % content).
(9) Disodium salt of 6,6'-oxybis(2-naphthalenesulfonic acid) : Use 20 μl of the test
solution in (5) as the Test Solution. It is tested by the procedure in Purity (11) in
「Food Red No.40」, and the content should not be more than 1.0% (based on 85.0%
content).
(10) Unsulfonated primary aromatic amines : Weigh 5.0 g of Food Red No.40 Aluminum
Lake, add 70 mL of chloroform, set-aside for 1 hour while shaking occasionally.
Filter through a dried filter paper (5C) for quantitative analysis and place the filtrate
into a 200 mL round bottom flask. Wash three times the residue with 10 mL of
chloroform each, combine the filtrate with the washings, and add 5 mL of sulfuric
acid (0.15→1,000). Proceed as directed under Purity (12) in 「Food Red No.40」, and
the content should not be more than 0.01% as aniline (based on 85.0% content).
Loss on Drying
When Food Red No.40 Aluminum Lake is dried for 6 hours at 135℃, the weight loss
should not be more than 30%
Assay
Accurately weigh Food Red No.40 Aluminum Lake so that the volume of consumed 0.1
N titanium trichloride will be about 20 mL, and proceed as directed under Assay (1) in
the Coloring Matter Aluminum Lake Tests.
1 mL of 0.1 N titanium trichloride = 12.411 mg C18H14O8N2S2Na2

413
 Food Starch Modified
INS No.: 1404, 1410
1412, 1413, 1414,
Synonyms: Modified food starch 1420, 1422, 1440,
1442, 1450

Definition Food Starch Modified is a modification of starch, which derived from various
grains and rootstocks. Physical characteristics of starch are modified by chemical
modification (reaction between hydroxyl group in starch and reactant) or by
gelatinization. In this category, Oxidized Starch, Acetylated Distarch Adipate,
Acetylated Distarch Phosphate, Starch Sodium Octenyl Succinate, Distarch Phosphate,
Monostarch Phosphate, Phosphated Distarch Phosphate, Starch Acetate, Hydroxypropyl
Distarch Phosphate, and Hydroxypropyl Starch are included. Reaction of formation for
each material is as follows.
Oxidized Starch Oxidation reaction by sodium
hypochlorite
AcetylatedDistarch Adipate Esterification
anhydrousadipicreaction
acid byand anhydrous
acetic acid
Esterification reaction by phosphorous
Acetylated Distarch Phosphate trichloride
and anhydrousor sodium
acetic trimetaphosphate
acid or vinyl
acetate
Starch Sodium Octenyl Succinate Esterification
succinate
by anhydrous octenyl
Esterification reaction by phosphorous
Distarch Phosphate oxychloride
tribasic or sodium metaphophate,
Monostarch Phosphate Starch phosphate and distarch phosphate
reaction
Esterification reaction by sodium
Phosphated Distarch Phosphate tripolyphosphate and sodium
trimetaphosphate
Starch Acetate Esterification reaction by anhydrous
acetic acid or vinyl acetate
Hydroxypropyl Distarch Esterification reaction by phosphorous
Phosphate trichloride
or propylene or sodium
oxide trimetaphosphate
Hydroxypropyl Starch Esterification
oxide reaction by propylene
Compositional Specifications of Food Starch Modified
Description Food Starch Modified is white or almost white powder or granule.
Gelatinized form is crumb, amorphous powder, or coarse granule without scent and
414
 flavor.
Identification (1) 1 g of Food Starch Modified is suspended in 20 mL of water. Upon
adding a few drops of iodine solution, the suspension turns dark blue～red.
(2) 2.5 g of Modified Food Starch is transferred into a flask and then mixed with 10
mL of 3% hydrochloric acid and 70 mL of water by shaking. This is then heated for
3 hours in a water bath equipped with a cooling apparatus. When 0.5 mL of this
liquid (after cooling) is added to 5 mL of Fehling solution, significant amount of red
precipitates are formed.
(3) 50 mg of Food Starch Modified is suspended in 25 mL of 1% methylene blue
solution by stirring occasionally. Excess supernatant is discarded and the starch is
washed with water. When this is observed with optical microscope, it is colored (for
oxidized starch only).
(4) 10 g of Food Starch Modified is suspended in 25 mL of water and 20 mL of 0.4 N
sodium hydroxide solution 20 mL is added. After shaking for 1 hour, it is then
filtered and the filtrate is evaporated at 110℃ in a drier. The residue is dissolved in
a few drops of water, which is then transferred into a test tube. Calcium hydroxide is
added to the test tube, which is then heated. Acetone vapor evolves upon heating.
This vapor turns a filter paper, which is wetted with saturated ο-nitrobenzaldehyde
solution, blue. When a drop of diluted hydrochloric acid (1→10) is dropped on the
paper, yellow color of ο-nitrobenzaldehyde saturated solution disappears, which
makes the blue color more distinctive. (This is applicable only for acetylated distarch
adipate, acetylated distarch phosphate, and starch acetate)
Saturated ο-Nitrobenzaldehyde solution : ο-Nitrobenzaldehyde is dissolved in 2 N
sodium hydroxide solution to saturation. This is prepared freshly before use.
(5) Infrared absorption spectrum of Food Starch Modified is obtained using Infrared
Spectrophotometry (1) Potassium Bromide Disk Method. Absorption band for ester
group is located approximately at 1720 cm-1. Detection limit is approximately 0.5%
for acetyl, adipyl, and succinyl groups (This is applicable only for acetylated distarch
adipate, acetylated distarch phosphate, starch sodium octenyl succinate, and starch
acetate).
Purity (1) Arsenic : It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(2) Lead : When 5.0 g of Food Starch Modified is tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content
should not be more than 2.0 ppm.
(3) Sulfur Dioxide : 30 g of Modified Food Starch is tested according to Purity (9) for
「Caramel」. The content of sulfur dioxide is obtained by titrating with 0.01 N sodium
hydroxide solution using the following equation. The content should not be more than 50
ppm.
Content of Sulfur=
Dioxide (ppm) (S - B) × 32.02 × 10
weight of the sample(g)
(4) Adipic Group : When Modified Food Starch is tested for adipic group according the
415
 following test method, the amount of adipic group should not be more than 0.135%
(This applies only for acetylated starch adipate).
Total Adipate Salt : 1 g of Modified Food Starch is precisely weighed into a 250 mL
Erlenmeyer flask and 50 mL of water and 1 mL of 0.1% glutaric acid are added,
which is then shaken so that the starch is well dispersed. 50 mL of 4 N sodium
hydroxide solution is added to this suspension, which is shaken for 5 minutes. 20 mL
of 12 N hydrochloric acid is carefully added and the resulting mixture is cooled and
then transferred into a 250 mL separatory funnel with a stop cock. 100 mL of ethyl
acetate is extracted three times. The solvent layer is collected into a Erlenmeyer
flask, where 20 g of anhydrous sodium sulfate transfer into advance. This is then
shaken periodically for 10 minutes, which is then filtered through a Whatman No.1
filter paper. The Erlenmeyer flask and the residue are washed twice with 50 mL of
ethyl acetate. The resultant is vacuum dried (50 mmHg) as quickly as possible at a
temperature of 40℃ or lower. This needs to be carried out quickly since ethyl
acetate may be hydrolyzed. Hydrolyzed ethyl acetate may affect the analysis of the
adipate. After it is completely dried, 2 mL of pyridine and 1 mL of
N,N-bis-trimethyl-sillyl-trifluoro acetamideare added and stopper is placed. The
mixture is slowly shaken so that the content is completely wetted and settled for 1
hour. This liquid is transferred into a small vial and 4 μl of it is injected into a gas
chromatography.
Free Adipate : 5.0 g of Food Starch Modified is precisely weighed into a 250 mL
Erlenmeyer flask. 100 mL of water and 1.0 mL of 0.1% glutaric acid solution are
added and the resultant is transferred into a 250 mL separatory funnel with a stop
cock. The rest of the procedure is the same as in Total Adipate Salt. The content of
total acetate salt or free adipate is calculated from the following equation.
Content of total adipate
＝
or free adipate(%) A
weight of the sample(g) × 10

A : The amount of adipate in test solution(mg) obtained from standard calibration curve
The content of adipate(%) ＝ Content of total adipate(%) - Content of free adipate(%)
Standard Calibration Curve : Each 1.0 g of corn starch is transferred 4 Erlenmeyer
flasks and 0.1% of 1 mL glutaric acid are added to each flask, respectively. 0.25, 0.5,
0.75, and 1.0 mL of adipic acid standard solution are added to each flask,
respectively. Each flask is sufficiently shaken so that the starch is well dispersed.
The rest of the procedure is the same as in Total Adipate Salt. The areas of the
peaks for adipic acid and glutaric acid are measured. A standard reference curve is
obtained for the ratio of area (area of adipic acid peak / area of glutaric acid peak)
vs. the amount of adipic acid (mg).
416
 The standard solution of adipic acid : 1.00 g of adipic acid is dissolved in 900 mL of
warm water. After cooling, the total volume is brought up to 1,000 mL by adding
water.
Operation Conditions
-Column : A stainless tube with inner diameter of 1.83 mm and length of 2 m
-Column Filler : 80∼100 Mesh Chromosorb GAW-DMCS coated with 5% OV-17 or its
equivalent
-Detector : Hydrogen Flame Ionization Detector (FID)
-Temperature at injection hole : 280℃
-Column Temperature : 140℃
-Detector Temperature : 250℃
-Carrier gas and flow rate : Nitrogen, 30 mL per minute
(5) Acetyl Group : 5 g of Food Starch Modified is precisely weighed into a 200 mL
Erlenmeyer flask and dispersed with 50 mL of water. Using phenolphthalein solution
as an indicator, the suspension is titrated with 0.1 N sodium hydroxide solution until
pale red color persists. After adding 25 mL of 0.45 N sodium hydroxide solution, a
stopper is placed and the flask is shaken for 30 minutes at a temperature of 30℃ or
lower. The stopper and the flask are rinsed with water. Excess alkali inside the flask
is titrated with 0.2 N hydrochloric acid until the pale red color disappears. The
amount of 0.2 N hydrochloric acid consumed is S. A blank test is carried out with 25
mL of 0.45 N sodium hydroxide solution, where the amount of 0.2 N hydrochloric
acid consumed is B. The amount of acetyl group is calculated from the following
equation and it should not be more than 2.5% (This only applies to acetylated
distarch adipate, acetylated distarch phosphate, and starch acetate).
Content of acetyl group(%) (B—S) × F × 0.0086
× 100
＝ weight of the sample(g)

(6) Degree of Substitution of Starch Sodium Octenyl Succinate : 5 g of Food Starch

Modified is transferred into a 150 mL beaker and thoroughly wetted with a few mL
of isopropyl alcohol. Beaker wall is washed down with 25 mL of 2.5 N solution of
hydrochloric acid in isopropyl alcohol. It is well mixed for 30 mintues. It is then
mixed for 10 minutes with additional 100 mL of 90% isopropyl alcohol. The
suspension is filtered through a Buchner funnel. 1 mL of 1% silver nitrate solution is
added to the filtrate. The residue is washed with 90% isopropyl alcohol until turbidity
or precipitates do not persist over 1 minute. The residue is transferred into a 600
mL beaker and water is added to bring the total volume to 300 mL, which is then
heated for 10 minutes in a water bath while stirring. While still hot, it is titrated with
0.1 N sodium hydroxide solution using phenolphthalein as an indicator. The degree of
substitution is calculated using the following equation and it should not be more than
0.02 (This is applicable only for starch sodium octenyl succinate).
Degree of Substitution
＝
(DS)
0.162A

417
 1 - 0.210A

A : Milli-equivalent of sodium hydroxide required for 1 g of starch sodium octenyl

succinate
0.1N sodium hydroxide solution consumed(mL) × 0.1
A ＝
weight of the sample(g)

(7) Phosphate (as phosphorous) : 10 g of dried material as obtained from the

procedure below is transferred into a silica crucible. It is thoroughly wetted with 10
mL of zinc acetate solution, which is then evaporated to dryness on a hot plate and
carbonized by further heat treatment. It is then reduced to ash at 550℃. Ash is
wetted with 15 mL of water and the crucible wall is rinsed with 5 mL nitric acid.
The crucible is heated to boil and then cooled. The content is transferred to a 200
mL flask. The crucible is rinsed with 20 mL of water three times and the rinse water
is added to the flask. V (mL) of this solution, which should not be more than 1.5 mg
of phosphorus, is taken into a 100 mL flask. 50 mL of water is added to a 100 mL
flask for a blank test. To each flask, 10 mL of diluted nitric acid, 10 mL of
ammonium vanadate solution, and 10 mL of ammonium molybdate are added
sequentially and respectively. After mixing thoroughly, water is added to bring the
volume to 100 mL and the resulting solution is settled for 10 minutes. Using the
blank test solution as a reference, optical absorption is measured at 460nm with a 1
cm path length. The amount of phosphorus (%) is calculated using the following
equation using the content of phosphorus a (mg/100mL) from a standard calibration
curve. Specifications are as follows.
Monostarch
Phosphate Not more than 0.5%(Potato and wheat starch) Not more than
0.04%(Others)
Distarch Phosphate Not more than 0.14%( ″ ) Not more than 0.04%( ″ )
Phosphated Distarch Not more than 0.5%( ″ ) Not more than 0.4%( ″ )
Phosphate
Acetylated Distarch Not more than 0.14%( ″ ) Not more than 0.04%( ″ )
Phosphate
Hydroxypropyl Not more than 0.14%( ″ ) Not more than 0.04%( ″ )
Distarch Phosphate
Content of Phosphorus(%) a × 200 × 100
×
S
＝ weight of dried material(mg) × V W

Sample Preparation Procedure : 200 mL mixture of methyl alcohol and water (7:3) is
added to 20∼25 g(W) of Food Starch Modified and stirred mechanically for 15
minutes. This is vacuum filtered through a glass or Buchner funnel with a medium
disc (10∼15 μm). Precipitates are rinsed with 200 mL of methyl alcohol and water
mixture. Precipitates are dispersed again. Filtering and rinsing process is repeated.
The resulting precipitates are dried at a temperature 50℃ or lower. This is ground to
418
 20 mesh or finer, which is then vacuum dried for 5 hours at 120℃ and 100 mmHg or
below. The weight of dried material (S) is obtained. (This procedure is for the starch
that is insoluble in cold water. For gelatinized or other water soluble starch, it is
prepared s 1～2% aqueous paste. This transfer into a cellophane tube and dialyzed for
30～40 hours while replacing water. Starch is precipitated by stir-mixing in acetone
with a 4 times volume of dialyzed paste. This is vacuum filtered through a glass or
Buchner funnel with a medium disc (10∼15 μm) and rinsed with ethyl alcohol. The
amount of dried material is obtained following the procedure for insoluble starch as
described above.)
Standard Calibration Curve : 5, 10, and 15 mL of phosphorus standard solution is
added to each of three 100 mL volumetric flasks. To each flask and a blank 100 mL
volumetric flask, 10 mL of diluted nitric acid, 10 mL of ammonium vanadate solution,
and 10 mL of ammonium molybdate are added sequentially and respectively. After
mixing thoroughly, water is added to bring the volume to 100 mL and the resulting
solution is settled for 10 minutes. Using the blank test solution as a reference, optical
absorption is measured at 460 nm with a 1 cm path length. Standard calibration curve
is prepared with absorption vs. phosphorus concentration (mg/100mL).
Solutions
∘Ammonium MolybdateSolution (5%) : Ammonium molybdate (4 hydrate) is dissolved in
900 mL of warm water. After cooling, additional water is added to bring the total
volume to 1000 mL.
∘Ammonium Vanadate Solution (0.25%) : 2.5 g of ammonium meta vanadate is
dissolved in 600 mL of boiling water. The solution is then cooled to 60∼70℃and
20 mL of nitric acid is added. After cooling to normal temperature, water is added
to bring the total volume to 1,000 mL.
∘Zinc Acetate Solution (10%) : 120 g of zinc acetate (2 hydrate) is added in 880 mL
of water. Prior to use, the solution is filtered through a Whatman No.2 V filter
paper or its equivalent.
∘Diluted Nitric Acid (29%) : 300 mL of nitric acid (specific gravity 1.42) is added to
600 mL of water.
∘Phosphorus Standard Solution : 438.7 mg of mono potassium phosphate is dissolved
in water and the total volume is brought up to 1,000 mL. (100 μg P/mL).
(8) Vinyl Acetate : 30 g of Food Starch Modified is weighed and transferred into a 100
mL flask. The flask is tightly sealed with a septum. This solution and a standard
solution are kept in a 70℃ water bath for 30 minutes. 2.0 mL of gas is extracted
using gas-tight syringe from head-space of each flask and injected into gas
chromatography. The content of vinyl acetate is calculated using the following
equation and should not be more than 0.1 ppm. (This is applicable only for acetylated
distarch phosphate).
The content of vinyl
=
acetate(ppm) 150 × A × 1

419
 S weight of the
sample(g)
A : Peak area of test solution
S : Peak area of standard solution
150 : Amount of vinyl acetate in standard solution (μg)
Preparation of Standard Solution : Water is added to 150 mg of vinyl acetate to bring
the total volume to 100 mL. Water is added to 1 mL of this solution so that the total
volume becomes 10 mL (0.15 mg/mL). 1 mL of the resulting solution is added to 30 g
of unmodified starch from the same raw material. Then the container is tightly sealed
with a septum.
Operation Conditions
-Column : A glass tube with inner diameter of 2 mm and length of 2 m
-Column Filler : Porapak Q or its equivalent
-Detector : Hydrogen Flame Ionization Detector (FID)
-Temperature at injection hole: 200℃
-Column Temperature : 150℃
-Detector Temperature : 200℃
-Carrier gas and flow rate : Nitrogen, 20 mL per minute
(9) Carboxyl Group : Food Starch Modified is sieved through 20 mesh or finer screen.
0.25 meq (milliequivalent number) of Food Starch Modified (5 g for weakly oxidized,
0.15 g for strongly oxidized) is precisely weighed into a beaker. 25 mL of 0.1 N
hydrochloric acid added and stirred occasionally for 30 minutes. This is vacuum
filtered through a glass wool filter paper with a medium pore size (10∼20 μm). 1 mL
of 1% silver nitrate solution is added to 5 mL of the filtrate. It is then washed with
water (generally 300 mL) until turbidity or precipitates do not persist for 1 minutes.
The residue is transferred into a beaker and heated in a water bath until it is
gelatinized. It is further heated for 15 minutes to ensure that gelatinization is
complete. While hot, it is titrated with sodium hydroxide solution using
phenolphthalein solution as an indicator. The amount of 0.1 N sodium hydroxide
solution is S. A blank test is carried out with the same amount of sample. 10 mL of
water is added and stirred in 5 minute interval for 30 minutes, which is then vacuum
filtered. It is then rinsed with 200 mL of water. The residue is processed further
following the same procedure and the consumed amount of sodium hydroxide is
obtained. The content of carboxyl group is obtained using the following equation and
it should not be more than 1.1% (it is applicable only for oxidized starch).
Carboxyl =Group(%) (S - B) × 0.0045 × 100
weight of the sample(g)

For potato starch, the amount of Phosphate is subtracted using the amount of
phosphorus (P in %).
420
 2 × 45.02 × P
= 2.907 × P
30.97
(10) Propylenechlorohydrine : 50 g of Modified Food Starch is precisely weighed and
transferred into a pressurizing bottle. 125 mL of 2 N sulfuric acid is added and
stopper is placed. After mixing by shaking, it is heated for 10 minutes in a water
bath. It is then shaken again and heated for 15 minutes. After cooling, it is
neutralized to pH 7 with 25% sodium hydroxide solution, which is then filtered
through Whatman No.1 filter paper. The filter paper and the bottle is rinsed with 25
mL of water, which is added to the filtrate. 30 g of anhydrous sodium sulfate is
completely dissolved in the filtrate using a magnetic stir plate. The solution is
transferred to a 500 mL separatory funnel with a stop cock. The container is rinsed
with 25 mL of water and the rinse water is added to the funnel. This is then
extracted with 50 mL of ether for five times for 5 minutes. Extracts are concentrated
to 8 mL using a Kuderna-Danish concentrator in a 50∼55℃ water bath. Column tube
is filled with 10 g of florisil PR (60～100 mesh), which is previously heat-treated for
16 hours at 130℃, and 1g of anhydrous sodium sulfate is placed on top. The column
is wetted with 25 mL of ether. The concentrate is transferred into the column and 25
mL of ether is passed through the column three times. Collected solution is
concentrated to 5 mL (test solution). Separately, standard solutions are prepared as
follows. 50 g of unmodified corn starch transfer into 5 pressurizing bottles and 125
mL of 2N sulfuric acid is added to each bottle. To each bottle, 0, 0.5, 1, 2, and 5
mL of propylene chlorohydrine standard solution is added, respectively. Each is
processed following the same procedure as the test solution. Concentrations (as
starch) of these standard solutions correspond to 0, 0.5, 1, 2, 5 mg/kg(ppm). 2μl of
both test and standard solutions are injected into gas chromatography and
chromatograms (2 peaks per each) are obtained. Standard calibration curve is
obtained from the peak area (sum of two different materials) against the
concentration (ppm) of the standard solution. The content of propylene chlorohydrine
is obtained from the curve and it should not be more than 1 ppm(this is applicable
only for hydroxypropyl starch and hydroxypropyl distarch phosphate).
Operation Conditions
-Column : A 3 m × 3.2 mm stainless
-Column Filler : 80∼100 Mesh Gas chrom 2 coated with 10% carbowax 20 M or it
sequivalent
-Detector : Hydrogen Flame Ionization Detector (FID)
-Temperature at injection hole : 210℃
-Column Temperature : 110℃
-Detector Temperature : 240℃
-Carrier gas and flow rate : Helium, 25 mL per minute
Solution
∘Propylenechlorohydrine solution : 50 mg of propylenechlorohydrine
421
 (2-chloro-1-propanol which contains 25% of 1-chloro-2-propanol) is precisely
weighed and water is added to bring the volume to 100mL. 10mL of this solution is
transferred into a measuring flask and then water is added up to 100mL (1mL of
this solution contains 50 μg of mixed chlorohydrine).
(11) Hydroxypropyl Group : 50∼100 mg of Food Starch Modified is precisely weighed
and transferred into a 100 mL volumetric flask and 25 mL of 1 N sulfuric acid is
added. As a blank test, unmodified starch, that is derived from the same raw material
as the modified starch, is treated exactly the same as above. These two flasks are
heat-treated until the contents become solutions in a boiling water batch. After
cooling, water is added to bring the volume to 100 mL. Test solution is further
diluted, if necessary, so that the amount of hydroxypropyl group should not be more
than 4 mg. 1 mL of each solution is transferred into a 25 mL graduated test tube,
which is then immersed in cold water. 8 mL of sulfuric acid is added to each test
tube and stopper is placed, which is then well mixed and heated for 3 minutes in a
boiling water bath. Test tubes are immediately chilled in an ice bath. When the
solution is cold, 0.6 mL of ninhydrine solution is added to each test tube and well
shaken. Both tubes are set-aside for 100 minutes in a 25℃ water bath. Sulfuric acid
is added to each tube to bring the total volume to 25 mL. Each tube is turned upside
down a few times (but it is not to be shaken). Absorption is immediately measured at
590 nm with 1 cm path length using a blank test solution as a reference. The content
of hydroxypropyl group is calculated from the following equation and should not be
more than 7.0% (this is applicable only for hydroxypropyl starch and hydroxypropyl
distarch phosphate). Test solution is measured in 5 minutes after it is transferred into
a cell. Separately, 1 mL of each propylene glycol standard solution (10, 20, 30, 40,
and 50 μg/mL) is added to 25 mL graduated test tube and a standard calibration
curve is obtained following the same procedure as above.

Content of hydroxy
＝
propyl group(%) C × 0.7763 × 10 × D

weight of the sample(mg)

C : Amount of propylene glycol obtained from standard calibration curve (μg/mL)
D : Dilution factor
∘Inhydrine Solution : 3 g of ninhydrine is dissolved in 100 mL of 5% sodiumbisulfite
solution.

422
 Food Yellow No.4
Tartrazine

Chemical Formula: C16H9O9N4S2Na3

Molecular Weight: 534.38 INS No.: 102

Synonyms: Tartrazine; CI food yellow 4 CAS No.: 1934-21-0

Definition Food Yellow No.4 is obtained by coupling diazotized 4-aminobenzenesulfonic acid

with 5-hydroxy-1-(4-sulfophenyl)-3-pyrazolecarboxylic acid, followed by salting out, and
refining. It consists essentially of the trisodium salt of 5-hydroxy-1-(4-
sulfophenyl)-4-(4-sulfophenylazo)-3-pyrazolecarboxylic acid
Compositional Specifications of Food Yellow No.4
Content Food Yellow No.4 should contain not less than 85.0% of the trisodium salt of
3-carbonate-5-hydroxy-1-(4-sulfonatephenyl)-1H-pyrazol-4-azo-4'-(benzene sulfonate)
(C16H9O9N4S2Na3).
Description Food Yellow No.4 occurs as orange-yellow to orange powder or granules. It is
odorless.
Identification (1) When 0.1 g of Food Yellow No.4 is dissolved in 100 mL of water, the
solution becomes yellow color.
(2) 0.1 g of Food Yellow No.4 is dissolved in 100 mL of 0.02 N ammonium acetate
solution. To 1 mL of this solution, add 0.02 N ammonium acetate solution to make
100 mL. The resulting solution exhibits absorption maximum at a wavelength of 428
± 2 nm.
(3) To 0.1 g of Food Yellow No.4, add 10 mL of sulfuric acid. The solution becomes
yellow color. When add 2～3 drops of this solution to 5 mL of water, this solution
becomes yellow color.
Purity (1) Water-Insoluble Substances : When Food Yellow No.4 is proceeded as directed
under Water-insoluble substance in Coloring matter Test, the content should not be
more than 0.2%.
(2) Chloride and sulfate : When Food Yellow No.4 is proceeded as directed under
Chloride and sulfate in Coloring matter Test, the total content should not be more
than 6%.
(3) Arsenic : It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(4) Lead : When 5.0 g of Food Blue No.4 is tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content
should not be more than 2.0 ppm.
423
 (5) Cadmium : When 5.0 g of Food Blue No.4 is tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content
should not be more than 1.0 ppm.
(6) Mercury : When Food Blue No.4 is tested by Mercury Limit Test, its content
should not be more than 1.0 ppm.
(7) Unsulfonated Primary Aromatic Amines : When G. Unsulfonated Primary Aromatic
Amines in Coloring Matter Tests is done, the content should not be more than 0.01%
as Aniline.
(8) Other Coloring Matters : Proceed as directed under Purity (9) in 「Food Green
No.3」. In this case, 0.1 g of the sample is dissolved in water to make 100 mL
solution.
Loss on Drying When Food Yellow No.4 is dried for 6 hours at 135℃, the weight loss
should not be more than 10%.
Assay Accurately weigh about 1.5 g of Food Yellow No.4, and dissolve it in water to
make exactly 250 mL. Measure exactly 50 mL of this solution, use it as the test
solution, and proceed as directed under Titanium Trichloride Method (C) of Assay in
Coloring Matter Tests.
1 mL of 0.1 N titanium trichloride = 13.36 mg of C16H9O9N4S2Na3

424
 Food Yellow No.4 Aluminium Lake

Synonyms: Tartrazine aluminium lake

Definition Food Yellow No.4 Aluminum Lake is prepared by reacting an aluminum salt
solution with alkali, making the reaction product adsorb Food Yellow No.4, filtering,
drying, and crushing.
Compositional Specifications of Food Yellow No.4 Aluminum Lake
Content Food Yellow No.4 Aluminum Lake should contain not less than 10.0% of
3-carboxyl-5- hydroxyl-1-(4-sulfophenyl)1H-pyrazol-4-azo-(4'-benzenesulfonate)
(C16H12O9N4S2＝468.42).
Description Food Yellow No.4 Aluminum Lake occurs as a fine yellow powder. It is odorless.
Identification (1) To 0.1 g of Food Yellow No.4 Aluminum Lake, add 5 mL of diluted
sulfuric acid, where 0.02 N ammonium acetate solution is added to make the total
volume to 100 mL. When this solution is not clear, it is centrifuged. 1～10 mL of
this solution is diluted to 100 mL with 0.02 N ammonium acetate solution so that the
absorbance to be measured will be within a range of 0.2～0.7. This solution exhibits
absorption maximum at a wavelength of 428 ± 2 nm.
(2) To 0.1 g of Food Yellow No.4 Aluminum Lake, add 5 mL of sulfuric acid. While
shaking occasionally, it is heated for 5 minutes in a water bath, and it becomes
yellow. After cooling, 2～3 drops of supernatant are added to 5 mL of water. This
solution becomes yellow.
(3) To 0.1 g of Food Yellow No.4 Aluminum Lake is dissolved in 10 mL diluted
hydrochloric acid, which is heated in a water bath. Most of the solid material is
dissolved. 0.5 g of activated carbon is added and well mixed, which is then filtered.
The colorless filtrate is neutralized with sodium hydroxide solution (1→10). It
responds to test of aluminum salt in Identification.
Purity (1) Hydrochloric Acid and Ammonia Insoluble Substances: When Food Yellow No.4
Aluminum Lake is proceeded as directed under Hydrochloric Acid and Ammonia
Insoluble Substances in Coloring Matter Aluminum Lake Test, the content should not
be more than 0.5%
(2) Arsenic : It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(3) Lead : When 5.0 g of Food Yellow No.4 Aluminum Lake is tested by Atomic
Absorption Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy,
its content should not be more than 5.0 ppm.
(4) Barium : When Food Yellow No.4 Aluminum Lake is proceeded as directed under
Barium in Coloring Matter Aluminum Lake Test, it should be appropriate (not more
than 500 ppm as Ba).
(5) Other coloring matters : Proceed as directed under Purity (5) in 「Food Green No.
3」. In this case, an amount of sample is used so that it contains 0.1 g as color acid.
425
Loss on Drying When Food Yellow No.4 Aluminum Lake is dried for 6 hours at 135℃,
the weight loss should not be more than 30%.
Assay Accurately weigh Food Yellow No.4 Aluminum Lake so that the volume of
consumed 0.1N titanium trichloride will be about 20 mL, and proceed as directed
under Assay (3) in Coloring Matter Aluminum Lake Test.
1 mL of 0.1 N titanium trichloride solution ＝ 11.71 mg C16H12O9N4S2

426
 Food Yellow No.5

Chemical Formula: C16H10O7N2S2Na2

Molecular Weight: 452.39 INS No.: 110

Synonyms: Sunset yellow FCF; CI food
yellow 3 CAS No.: 2783-94-0

Definition Food Yellow No. 5 is obtained by coupling diazotized 4-aminobenzene sulfonic

acid with 6-hydroxy-2-naphthalenesulfonic acid, salting out, and refining. It consists
principally of the disodium salt of 6-hydroxy-5-(4-sulfophenylazo)-2-naphthalene
sulfonic acid.
Compositional Specifications of Food Yellow No. 5
Content Food Yellow No.5 should contain not less than 85.0% of the disodium salt of
2-(hydroxy-6-sulfonatenaphthalene)-1-azo-(4'-benzene sulfonate)(C16H10O7N2S2Na2).
Description Food Yellow No.5 occurs as orange-red powder or granules. It is odorless.
Identification (1) When 0.1 g of Food Yellow No.5 is dissolved in 100 mL of water, the
solution becomes orange color.
(2) 0.1 g of Food Yellow No.5 is dissolved in 100 mL of 0.02 N ammonium acetate
solution. To 1 mL of the solution, add 0.02 N ammonium acetate solution to make
100 mL. The solution exhibits absorption maximum at a wave-length of 483 ± 2 nm.
(3) When 0.1 g of Food Yellow No.5 is dissolved in 10 mL of sulfuric acid. the solution
becomes orange red color. When 2～3 drops of the solution is added to 5 mL of
water, it becomes orange yellow color.
Purity (1) Water-Insoluble Substances : When Food Yellow No.5 is proceeded as
directed under Water-insoluble substance in Coloring matter Test, the content should
not be more than 0.2%.
(2) Chloride and Sulfate : When Food Yellow No.5 is proceeded as directed under
Chloride and sulfate in Coloring matter Test, the total content should not be more
than 5%.
(3) Arsenic : It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(4) Lead : When 5.0 g of Food Yellow No.5 is tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content
should not be more than 2.0 ppm.
(5) Cadmium : When 5.0 g of Food Yellow No.5 is tested by Atomic Absorption
427
 Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content
should not be more than 1.0 ppm.
(6) Mercury : When Food Yellow No.5 is tested by Mercury Limit Test, its content
should not be more than 1.0 ppm.
(7) Sudan I(1-phenylazo -2-naphtol) : Accurately weigh 0.2 g of Food Yellow No.5 and
transfer it into a 10 mL volumetric flask. Dissolve it in 4 mL of water, add 5 mL of
methanol mix and cool. Then water is added to make 10 mL, Test Solution. the test
solution is filtered by 0.2μm membrane filter made by polytetrafluoro ethylene (PTFE)
and liquid chromatography is carried by following operation condition. Separately,
filter sudan standard solution with 0.2μm membrane filter made by PTFE. And then
inject the solution of standard and sample into liquid chromatograph respectively, and
prepare a calibration curve. Peak areas or heights acquired from test solution is
substituted to the calibration curve and the content of sudan I is determined. This
value should not be more than 1.0 ppm.
Operation Condition
-Detector : UV 485 nm
-Column packing materials : 5μm octadecyl silyl silicagel for liquid chromatography
-Column Tube : Stainless steal tube with 2.1 mm inner diameter, 15 cm length
-Mobile Phase : Solution A : 20 mM ammonium acetate solution
Solution B : methanol
Solution A : Solution B(50:50) 5 minutes → Solution A : Solution
B(0:100) 5 min → Solution A : Solution B(0:100) 5 minutes
-Flow Rate : 0.25 mL/min
-Standard solution : Accurately weigh Standard Sudan I and dissolve it in methanol to
make 10 ppm. Each 20, 50, 100, 150, 200 and 250μl of this soluton is transferred
into 10 mL volumetric flask, and dissolved in 5 mL of methanol. Then water is added
to make 10 mL, respectively. (1 mL of this solution contains 0.02, 0.05, 0.10, 0.15,
and 0.20 μg of Sudan I, respectively.)
(8) Subsidiary Colors : 100.0 mg of Food Yellow No.5 is weighed and dissolved in
ammonium acetate solution (1.54→1000, pH 8.0) to make 100 mL as the Test
Solution. Separately, sulfonic acid azo G salt color (1,3-naphthalenedisulfonic acid,
7-hydroxy-8-[4-sulfophenyl] azo, trisodium salt), sulfonic acid azo R salt color
(2,7-naphthaleindisulfonic acid, 3-hydroxy-4- [4-sulfophenyl]azo, trisodium salt),
sulfonic acid azo-naphthol color, (benzenesulfonic acid, 4-[4-hydroxy-1-
naphthalenyl]azo), monosodium salt), and aniline azo Schaeffer's salt color
(2-naphthalenesulfonic acid, 6-hydroxy- 5(phenylazo), monosodium salt) was dried for
24 hours in a vacuum desiccator. 10 mg each of dried material is dissolved in
ammonium acetate solution (1.54→1000, pH 8.0) to make 100 mL as Standard
Solution. Using this solution, when the content of sulfonic acid azo G salt color,
sulfonic acid azo R salt color, sulfonic acid azo-naphthol color, and aniline azo
Schaeffer's salt color in Test solution is proceeded as directed under Subsidiary
Colors in the Tar Coloring Matter test, the content should not be more than 5.0% as
428
 total mount. The content sum of colors (except sulfonic acid azo R salt color) should
not be more than 2.0%.
Operation Conditions
-Detector : Visible Absorption Detector (wave length 482 nm)
-Mobile Phase: A : Ammonium acetate solution (1.54→1000)
B : Acetonitrile
Solution A : Solution B (100:0) → Solution A : Solution B (60:40) 50
minutes
(9) Unreacted Raw Material and Reaction Intermediate : 100 mg of Food Yellow No. 5
is dissolved in ammonium acetate solution (1.54→1000, pH 8.0) to make precisely
100 mL. This solution is used as the Test Solution. Separately,
4-amino-benzene-sulfonic acid, 7-hydroxy-1,3- naphthalenedisulfonic acid disodium
salt, 3-hydroxy- 2,7-naphthalene-disulfonic acid disodium salt, 6-hydroxy-2-
naphthalenedisulfonic acid monosodium salt, 6,6'-oxybis[2- naphthalenesulfonic acid ],
and disodium salt of 4,4'-(Diazo amino)-dibenzensulfonic acid was dried for 24 hours
in a vacuum desiccator. 10.0 mg each of dried material is dissolved in ammonium
acetate solution (1.54→1,000) to make 100 mL as Standard Solution. Using this
solution, when the content of 4-aminobenzenesulfonic acid, 7-hydroxy-1,3-
naphthalenedisulfonic acid disodium salt, 3-hydroxy-2,7-naphthalene- disulfonic acid
disodium salt, 6-hydroxy-2-naphthalenesulfonicacid monosodium salt,
6,6'-oxybis[2-naphthalene-sulfonic acid disodium salt], and disodium salt of 4,4'-
(diazoamino)dibenzensulfonic acid in Test solution is proceeded as directed under
Unreacted Raw Material and Reaction Intermediate in the Coloring Matter Tests, the
content should not be more than 0.5% as total mount.
Operation Conditions
-Detector: Visible Absorption Detector (wave length 232 nm, but 358 nm for disodium
salt of 4,4'-(diazoamino)-dibenzensulfonic acid)
-Mobile Phase: A : Ammonium acetate solution (1.54→1000)
B : Acetonitrile
Solution A : Solution B (100:0) → Solution A: Solution B (60:40) 50
minutes
(10) Unsulfonated Primary Aromatic Amines : When Food Yellow No.5 is proceeded as
directed under Unsulfonated Primary Aromatic Amines in Coloring matter Test , the
content should not be more than 0.01% as aniline.
Loss on Drying When Food Yellow No.5 is dried for 6 hours at 135℃, the weight loss
should not be more than 10%.
Assay Accurately weigh about 1.3 g of Food Yellow No.5, and dissolve it in water to
make exactly 250 mL. Measure exactly 50 mL of this solution, use it as the test
solution, and proceed as directed under Titanium Trichloride Method (A) of Assay in
Coloring matter Test.
429
1 mL of 0.1 N titanium trichloride = 11.31 mg of C16H10O7N2S2Na2

430
 Food Yellow No.5 Aluminium Lake

Synonyms: Sunset yellow FCF aluminium

lake

Definition Food Yellow No. 5 Aluminum Lake is prepared by reacting an aluminum salt
solution with alkali, making the reaction product adsorb Food Yellow No. 5, filtering,
drying, and crushing.
Compositional Specifications of Food Yellow No.5 Aluminum Lake
Content Food Yellow No.5 Aluminum Lake should contain not less than 10.0% of
2-hydroxy- 6-sulfo naphthalene-1-azo-(4'-benzene sulfonic acid) (C16H12N2O7S2 =
408.41).
Description Food Yellow No.5 Aluminum Lake occurs as a fine, orange-yellow powder. It is
odorless.
Identification (1) To 0.1 g of Food Yellow No.5 Aluminum Lake, add 5 mL of diluted
sulfuric acid, where 0.02 N ammonium acetate solution is added to make 100 mL.
When this solution is not clear, it is centrifuged. 1～10 mL of this solution is diluted
to 100 mL with 0.02 N ammonium acetate solution so that the absorbance to be
measured will be within a range of 0.2 to 0.7. The resulting solution exhibits
absorption maximum at a wavelength of 482 ± 2 nm.
(2) To 0.1 g of Food Yellow No.5 Aluminum Lake, add 5 mL of sulfuric acid. While
shaking occasionally, it is heated for 5 minutes in a water bath. The solution becomes
orange red color. After cooling, 2～3 drops of the supernatant are added to 5 mL of
water. This solution becomes orange yellow.
(3) To 0.1 g of Food Yellow No.5 Aluminum Lake, add 10 mL of diluted hydrochloric
acid, which is heated in a water bath. Most of the solid material is dissolved. 0.5 g
of activated carbon is added and well mixed, which is then filtered. The colorless
filtrate is neutralized with sodium hydroxide solution (1→10). It responds to the test
for aluminum salt in Identification.
Purity (1) Hydrochloric Acid and Ammonia Insolubles Substances: When Yellow No.5
Aluminum Lake is proceeded as directed under Hydrochloric Acid and Ammonia
Insolubles Substances in Coloring Matter Aluminum Lake Test, the content should not
be more than 0.5%.
(2) Arsenic : It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(3) Lead : When 5.0 g of Yellow No.5 Aluminum Lake is tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content
should not be more than 5.0 ppm.
(4) Barium : When Yellow No.5 Aluminum Lake is proceeded as directed under Barium
in Coloring Matter Aluminum Lake Test, it should be appropriate (not more than 500
ppm as Ba).
(5) Other color matters : Proceed as directed under Purity (5) in 「Food Green No.3
431
 Aluminum Lake」. In this case, an amount of sample is used so that it contains 0.1 g
as color acid.
Loss on Drying When Yellow No.5 Aluminum Lake is dried for 6 hours at 135℃, the
weight loss should not be more than 30%.
Assay Accurately weigh Food Yellow No.5 Aluminum Lake so that the volume of
consumed 0.1 N titanium trichloride will be about 20 mL, and proceed as directed
under Assay (1) in Coloring Matter Aluminum Lake Test.
1 mL of 0.1 N titanium trichloride = 10.21 mg of C16H12O7N2S2

432
 Formic Acid

Chemical Formula: CH2O2

Molecular Weight: 46.03 INS No.: 236
Synonyms: Methanoic acid CAS No.: 64-18-6

Compositional Specifications of Formic Acid

Content Formic Acid should not contain less than 85.0% of formic acid (CH2O2).
Description Formic Acid is colorless corrosive liquid with characteristic pungent smell.
Identification To 5 mL of Formic Acid, add 2 mL of mercury chloride solution and heat.
White crystalline precipitates of mercurous chloride are formed.
Purity (1) Acetic Acid : To 1 mL (approximately 1.2 g) of Formic Acid, add water and
to make 100 mL. Take 50 mL of this solution, transfer into a 250 mL distillation
flask, and add 5 g of yellow mercury(II) oxide. A reflux condenser is attached and
the mixture is boiled for 2 hours while stirring. After cooling, the mixture is filtered
and the residue is washed with 25 mL of water. Wash water is added to the filtrate,
which is then titrated with 0.02 N sodium hydroxide solution using phenolphthalein
solution as an indicator. The consumed amount of sodium hydroxide solution should
not be more than 2.0 mL.
(2) Dilution Test : When 1 unit of Formic Acid is diluted with 3 units of water, it
should not become turbid within 1 hour.
(3) Sulfate: To 2.4 g of Formic Acid, add 10 mg of sodium carbonate, and evaporate
to dryness on water bath. The residue is tested by Sulfate Limit Test Salts. The
amount of sulfates should be equal to or less than the amount that corresponds to
0.2 mL of 0.01 N sulfuric acid.
(4) Lead : When 5.0 g of Formic Acid is tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content
should not be more than 2.0 ppm.
Assay 15 mL of water is added to a Erlenmeyer flask with a stopper, which is weighed.
1.5 mL of Formic Acid is added to the flask, which is then weighed again. This
solution is diluted to 50 mL with water. The resulting solution is titrated with 15 mL
of water 1 N sodium hydroxide solution (indicator : phenolphthalein solution).
1 mL of 1 N sodium hydroxide solution ＝ 46.03 mg CH2O2

433
 Fumaric Acid

Chemical Formula: C4H4O4

Molecular Weight: 116.07 INS No.: 297
Synonyms: (E)-Butenedioic acid; trans-1,2- CAS No.: 110-17-8
Ethylenedicarboxylic acid

Compositional Specifications of Fumaric Acid

Content Fumaric Acid should contain not less than 99.0% of fumaric acid (C4H4O4 ).
Description Fumaric Acid occurs as a white crystalline powder. It is odorless and has a
characteristic acid taste.
Identification (1) Heat Fumaric Acid. It sublimes.
(2) Place 50 mg of Fumaric Acid into a test tube, add 2～3 mg of resorcinol and 1 mL
of sulfuric acid. shake, heat at 120～130℃ for 5 hours, cool, and add water to make
5 mL. While cooling this solution, add drop wise sodium hydroxide solution (2→5) to
make it alkaline, and add water to make 10 mL. A green-blue fluorescence appears
under ultraviolet light.
(3) To 0.5 g of Fumaric Acid, add 10 mL of water, dissolve by boiling, and add 2～3
drops of bromine solution while hot. The color of the solution disappears.
(4) Dry Fumaric Acid at 105℃ for 3 hours. The melting point is 287～302℃.
Purity (1) Clarity and Color of Solution : 0.5 g of Fumaric Acid is dissolved in 10 mL of
sodium hydroxide solution. This solution should colorless and clear.
(2) Sulfate : Weigh 1 g of Fumaric Acid, add 30 mL of water, shake, add 1 drop of
phenolphthalein solution, add drop wise ammonia solution until the color of the
solution changes to a slightly pink color, and add 1 mL of dilute hydrochloric acid,
Test Solution. When the test solution is tested by Sulfate Limit Test, its content
should not be more than the amount corresponding to 0.2 mL of 0.01N sulphuric acid.
(3) Arsenic : It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(4) Lead : When 5.0 g of Fumaric Acid is tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content
should not be more than 2.0 ppm.
(5) Mercury : When Fumaric Acid is tested by Mercury Limit Test, its content should
not be more than 1.0 ppm.
Residue on Ignition When thermogravimetric analysis is done with Fumaric Acid, the
residue should not be more than 0.05%.
Assay Accurately weigh about 1 g of Fumaric Acid, and dissolve in water to make
exactly 250 mL. Measure exactly 25 mL of this solution, and titrate with 0.1 N sodium
hydroxide (indicator : 2 drops of phenolphthalein solution).
1 mL of 0.1 N sodium hydroxide = 5.804 mg of C4H4O4
434
 Furcelleran
Synonyms: Danish agar CAS No.: 9000-21-9

Definition Furcelleran is obtained by extracting leaves of Furcellaria fastigata HUD. (a

red algae) with water or alkaline aqueous solution, and then precipitating of
alcohol(ethanol, methanol, isopropyl alcohol), precipitating of potassium or freezing.
Main component of Furcelleran is a polysaccharide.
Compositional Specifications of Furcelleran
Description Furcellerane is scentless white～pale yellow powder with a slightly salty
taste.
Identification (1) 4 g of Furcelleran is stirred in 200 mL of water in approximately 80℃
water bath until a viscous liquid is obtained. When this viscous liquid is set aside and
cooled to room temperature, it forms a gel.
(2) 0.1 g of Furcelleran is dissolved in 20 mL water. To this solution, 3 mL of barium
chloride solution and 5 mL of hydrochloric acid (1→4) are added to form precipitates,
which is then filtered. When the filtrate is boiled for 5 minutes, white crystalline
precipitates are formed.
Purity (1) Sulfate(SO4) : Furcelleran is dried for 5 hours at 105℃. Approximately 1 g
of the dried material is precisely weighted into a 100 mL round bottom flask, and 50
mL of diluted hydrochloric acid (1→4) is added. A reflux condenser is attached, and
heated for 1 hour. 25 mL of hydrogen peroxide is added to the flask, which is then
heated again for approximately 5 hours. If necessary, the decomposed solution is
filtered. Transfer the filtrate into a beaker. While the filtrate is boiling, 10 mL of
barium chloride solution is slowly added to the beaker, which is heated for 2 hours
in a water bath. Cool the solution. It is filtered through a quantitative filter paper (5
type C). The residue is washed with warm water until the wash water doesn't show
the reaction of chlorides. The residue is dried along with the filter paper, which is
then heat treated in a porcelain crucible until the weight becomes constant. The
remaining residue is weighted as barium sulfate (B). The content of sulfate (SO4) is
calculated by the following equation. It should be 8.0～40.0%

Content of Sulfate (SO2) B × 0.4116 × 100

(%)(%) ＝ A
(2) Arsenic : It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(3) Lead : When 5.0 g of Furcelleran is tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content
should not be more than 5.0 ppm.
(4) Residual solvent : 2 g of Furcelleran is precisely weighed into a 300 mL round
bottom distilling flask, 200 mL of water is added, boiling chips and 1 mL of silicone
435
 resin are added and mixed well. A fractionating column is connected to flask, 4 mL
of internal standard solution is precisely weighed and added to it. While adjusting the
heat so that the foam does not enter the column, distill the solution at the rate of
2~3 mL per 1 minute until the milky liquid becomes about 90 mL, and water is
added to make 100 mL, test solution. However, tert-butyl alcohol (1→1,000) is used
as internal standard solution. Separately, 0.5 g each of methyl alcohol and isopropyl
alcohol is precisely measured and water is added to 500 mL. Again 2 mL of this
solution and 4 mL of internal standard solution is weighed, water is added to make
100 mL, mixed standard solution. 2μl of test solution and mixed standard solution is
taken respectively, and injected to gas chromatograph with the following operation
condition. Then, Ratio of methyl alcohol and isopropyl alcohol peak area against
tert-butyl alcohol peak area, QT1, QT2 and QS1, QS2, is measured respectively, and
measure the content of methyl alcohol and isopropyl alcohol under following equation,
it should be not more than 0.1% as individual or sum if used together.

Content of Weight of methyl

alcohol(g) QT1 2×100
methyl alcohol(%) = Weight of sample(g) × QS1 × 500×100 ×100
Content of Weight of isopropyl QT2 2×100
Isopropyl alcohol(%) alcohol(g) × × ×100
= Weight of sample(g) QS2 500×100
QT1 : Ratio of methyl alcohol peak area against tert-butyl alcohol peak area in Test
Solution
QT2 : Ratio of isopropyl alcohol peak area against tert-butyl alcohol peak area in Test
Solution
QS1 : Ratio of methyl alcohol peak area against tert-butyl alcohol peak area in mixed
standard Solution
QS2 : Ratio of isopropyl alcohol peak area against tert-butyl alcohol peak area in mixed
standard Solution
Column : PLOT Q or its equivalent
Detector : Hydrogen Flame Ionization Detector (FID)
Injection Port Temperature : 200℃
Column Temperature : 120℃
Detector Temperature : 300℃
Carrier gas : Nitrogen or Helium
Loss on Drying When Furcelleran is dried for 5 hours at 105℃, the weight loss should
not be more than 12%.
Ash When Furcelleran is tested by Ash and Acid-Insoluble Ash Limit, it should not be
more than 40%.

436
 -Galactosidase
α

Definition α-Galactosidase is the enzyme, which is obtained from the culture of

Aspergillus niger. Diluent or stabilizer can be added for the purpose of activity
adjustment and quality preservation.
Compositional Specifications of α-Galactosidase
Description Tannase is a white ～ pale yellow powder.
Identification When α-Galactosidase is proceeded as directed under Activity Test, it
should have the activity as α-Galactosidase.
Purity (1) Arsenic : It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(2) Lead : When 5.0 g of α-Galactosidase is tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content
should not be more than 5.0 ppm.
(3) Coliform Group: α-Galactosidase is tested by Microbiological Method for (Coliform
Group〕in General Testing Methods in 「Standards and Specifications for Foods」. It
should contain not more than 30 per 1g of this product.
(4) Salmonella : α-Galactosidase is tested by Microbiological Method for 〔Salmonella〕
in General Testing Methods in 「Standards and Specifications for Foods」. It should
be negative(-).
(5) E. Coli : When α-Galactosidase is tested by Microbe Test Methods for E. Coli in
General Test Method 「Standards and Specifications for Foods」, it should be
negative (-).
Activity Test (activity) Analysis Principle : The activity test is based on the hydrolysis of
p-nitrophenyl-α-D-galactopyranoside substrate for 15minutes at the temperature of 3
7℃, and pH 5.5.
Enzyme Test Solution : Sample dissolve in water, and 1mL of final diluent solution
should be contained 0.001～ 0.003 galactosidase unit to prepare Test Solution.
Test Procedure : 2.0 mL of substrate solution is added to a 20 × 150mm test tube
and isothermalized for 15 minutes in a 37 ± 0.2℃ water bath. In the same condition
with Substrate Solution, 1.0 mL of Enzyme Test Solution is precisely added to the test
tube, and mixed well. After 15minutes, 5.0 mL of sodium boric acid buffer(pH 9.7) is
added in each test tube, and mixed in each test tube. Control is water. Measure the
absorbance(As) at 405 nm. Separately, for Enzyme blank test, 1 mL of Enzyme Test
Solution is taken. Add 5 mL of sodium boric acid buffer, and mix. 2 mL of Substrate
Solution is placed in each test tube, and mixed, and conducted the same procedure as
Enzyme Test solution by measuring absorbance(AB) at 405nm. The activity of the
enzyme is calculated following the formula.
α-Galactosidase(Gal U/g) =
(A –A ) × F
S B

ε × T × M

AS : Absorbance of Test Solution

AB : Absorbance of Control Solution
437
F : Dilution factor of Test Solution
T : Reaction Time(min)
M : Weight of sample(g) contained 1mL of Test Solution.
ε : Absorbance coefficient measured with standard 4-nitrophenol solution

Definition of Activity : 1 α-Galactosidase unit corresponds to the amount of enzyme,

which isolated from 1μmol of ρ-nitrophenol per minutes under the above test
conditions
Solutions
Acetic acid buffer solution(pH 5.5)
A Solution : 11.55mL of glacial acetic acid dissolve in 1,000mL water.
B Solution : 16.4g of sodium acetate dissolve in 1,000mL water.
7.5mL of A Solution and 42.5mL of B Solution are mixed, and adjusted to pH 5.5 by
using A Solution and B Solution. Add water to make 1,000mL volume.
Substrate solution : 0.0383g of ρ-nitrophenyl-α-galactopyranoside is mixed to Acetic
acid buffer solution, and is diluted to make 100mL volume.
Sodium boric acid buffer solution : 47.63g of Sodium boric acid dissolve in warm water,
and cooled into room temperature. Add 20mL of 4N
sodium hydroxide. After adjusting until pH 9.7 by
using 4N sodium hydroxide, the solution is diluted
to 2,000mL.
4-nitrophenol Standard Stock Solution : 4-nitrophenol is dried advance. 68.83mg of
4-nitrophenol is precisely weighted, and
dissolved in water to make 1,000mL. 1mL of
this solution should contain 0.5μmol of
nitrophenol.
Standard 4-nitrophenol Solution : Pipet 4mL, 8mL and 16mL of 4-nitrophenol Standard
Stock Solution into each test tube, and add water to make 50mL volume. The
content of 4-nitrophenol in th diluted solution should be contained each 0.04,
0.08 and 0.16μmol per 1mL. After each solution is grouped with five test
tubes, and 2.0mL of Substrate Solution is placed in each five test tubes. 1mL
of Standard 4-nitrophenol Solution is added in each four test tubes, and
1.0mL of water is added to each fifth test tube instead of Standard
4-nitrophenol Solution. 5.0mL of Sodium boric acid buffer solution is added
into each test tube, and mixed. Control solution is water. Absorbance is
measured by 1cm of the liquid layer at 405nm, and the curve based on the
amount of 4-nitrophenol is prepared. The average absorbance coefficient of
Standard 4-nitrophenol Solution is calculated to divide the absorbance of each
438
 diluted solution into the concentrate of 4-nitrophenol(μmol/mL)
ε = AN/C

AN : The absorbance of Standard 4-nitrophenol Solution

C : The concentrate of 4-nitrophenol
The value of absorbance coefficient should be obtained as an approximation value,
18.3.
Stotage standard of α-Galactosidase
α-Galactosidase should be stored in a hermetic container in a cold dark place.

439
 Gallic Acid
Definition Gallic Acid is obtained by hydrolyzing tannin that is extracted from gallnut of
lacquer tree (Rhus javanica L.) of anacardiaceae or gall of fagaceae (Quercus infectoria
ol IV) with water, ethyl alcohol, or organic solvents. Its component is gallic acid.
Compositional Specifications of Gallic Acid
Description Gallic Acid is scentless white～whitish yellow needle-shaped crystalline
powder with an astringent and a slight acidic taste.
Identification 20 mL of water is added to 1 g of Gallic Acid, which is mixed by shaking
for 1 minute and filtered. When 2～3 drops of ferric chloride solution (1→10) are
added to the filtrate, bluish black precipitates are formed.
Purity (1) Clarity of Solution ： A solution of 1 g of Gallic Acid in 20 mL of water
should be pale yellow and almost clear (or better).
(2) Tannin Acid ： 20 mL of water is added to 1 g of Gallic Acid, which is mixed by
shaking and filtered. When 5～6 drops of 1% warm gelatin solution, it should not turn
turbid.
(3) Arsenic : It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(4) Lead : When 5.0 g of Gallic Acid is tested by Atomic Absorption Spectrophotometry
or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content should not be more
than 2.0 ppm.
Loss on Drying When Gallic Acid is dried for 2 hours at 105℃, the weight loss should
not be more than 10%.
Residue on Ignition
Residue on Ignition of Gallic Acid should not be more than 0.1%.

440
 Garden Balsam Extract
Definition Garden Balsam Extract is obtained by extracting root cortex of garden balsam
(Impatients balsamina LINNE) of Balsaminaceae with hydrated ethyl alcohol at room
temperature. Its major component is quercetin.
Compositional Specifications of Garden Balsam Extract
Content Garden Balsam Extract should contain more than the indicated amount of
qurcetin (C15H10O7).
Description Garden Balsam Extract is yellowish brown liquid with characteristic scent
and slightly bitter taste.
Identification 5 mg of Garden Balsam Extract dissolve in 10 mL of 50% alcohol (Test
Solution). Separately, 5 mg of quecetin standard dissolve in 10 mL of 50% alcohol
(Standard Solution). Spot aliquots 2 μl of each solution to a thin layer plate by using
silica gel (with phosphor) for thin layer chromatography. Using a mixture of n-butyl
alcohol : water : acetic acid (7 : 2 : 1) as a developing solvent, each plate is
developed and dried in air. When these plates are observed under UV light, the spot
for Test Solution should have the same color tone and position as the spot for
Standard Solution.
Purity (1) Arsenic : It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(2) Lead : When 5.0 g of Garden Balsam Extract is tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content
should not be more than 2.0 ppm.
Residue on Ignition when Residue on Ignition analysis is done with accurately weighted
1 g of Garden Balsam Extract , the amount of Residue on Ignition should not be more
than 1.0%.
Assay Approximately 0.4 g of Garden Balsam Extract is precisely weighted and
dissolved in methyl alcohol (total volume = 50 mL), which is filtered through a 0.5 ㎛
Millipore filter (Test Solution). Separately, 50 mg of quercetin standard is precisely
weighted and dissolved in methyl alcohol (total volume = 50 mL), which is filtered
through a 0.5 ㎛ Millipore filter (Standard Solution). 10 ㎕ each of Test and Standard
Solutions is injected into a high-performance liquid chromatography under the following
Operation Conditions. The content of quercetin is obtained by the following equation.
Weight of the peak area of test
standard(mg) solution
Content(%) = × × 100
peak area of standard
weight of the sample(mg)
solution

Operation Conditions
-Detector : UV 375 nm
-Column : μ-Bondanpak C18 (3.9 ㎜ × 300 ㎜) or its equivalent
-Column Temperature : room temperature
-Mobile Phase : methyl alcohol : water : acetic acid (15:3:1)
-Flow Rate : 1.0 ㎖/min
441
 Gardenia Blue
INS No.: 165

Definition Gardenia Blue is a pigment obtained by enzyme treating (with β-glucosidase,

an enzyme used for food) on a mixture of hydrolyzed matter and decomposed protein
from iridoid glycoside contained in fruit extract of gardeniae (Gardenia augusta Merrill
or Gardenia jasminoides Ellis) of rubiaceae. Dilutant, stabilizer, or solvent can be added
for the purpose of color value adjustment and quality preservation.
Compositional Specifications of Gardenia Blue
Content Color value ( ) of Gardenia Blue should be higher than the indicated value.
Description Gardenia Blue is deep blue liquid, lump, powder, or paste having a slight
characteristic odor.
Identification (1) Test Solution obtained in Color Value section shows blue color and a
absorption maximum at about 595 nm.
(2) The colour of test solution is blue. When Test Solution in (1) is alkalinized with a
few drops of 1N sodium hydroxide solution, its color almost doesn't change.
(3) When Test Solution in (1) is acidified with a few drops of 1N hydrochloric acid,
where 1～3 drops of sodium hypochlorite (effective chlorine should not be less than
4%), the solution decolorizes rapidly.
Purity (1) Arsenic : It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(2) Lead : When 5.0 g of Gardenia Blue is tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content
should not be more than 10.0 ppm.
(3) Residual Solvent ： When Gardenia Blue is tested by Purity (5) for 「Paprika
Extract Pigments」, residual methanol should not be more than 0.1% (based on the
product whose color value is 40).
Assay (Color Value)
Appropriate amount of Gardenia Blue is precisely weighed so that the absorbance is
within 0.3～0.7 and dissolved in citric acid dibasic sodium phosphate buffer solution
with pH 6.0 so that the total volume is 100 mL. 1 mL of this solution is diluted to 100
mL with citric acid dibasic sodium phosphate buffer solution with pH 6.0 (Test
Solution). If necessary, the solution is centrifuged and the supernatant is used. Using
citric acid-dibasic sodium phosphate buffer solution with pH 6.0 as a reference
solution, absorbance A is measured at 595 nm with 1cm cell. Color value is obtained
using the following equation.
Color value ( ) ＝ weight of the sample(g)
A × 1,000

∘Citric acid·dibasic sodium phosphate buffer solution (pH 6.0)

Solution 1 ： 0.1 M citric acid solution ： 1 L of solution containing 21.01 g of citric acid
(C6H8O7ㆍH2O).
442
Solution 2 ： 0.2 M dibasic sodium phosphate solution ： 1 L of solution containing 71.63 g
of dibasic sodium phosphate (Na2HPO4․12H2O).
Solution 1 and Solution 2 are mixed well (73.7:126.3) and its pH is adjusted to 6.0.

443
 Gardenia Red

Definition Gardenia Red is a pigment obtained by enzyme treating (with β-glucosidase,

an enzyme used for food) on a mixture of hydrolyzed matter and decomposed protein
from iridoid glycoside contained in fruit extract of gardeniae (Gardenia augusta Merrill
or Gardenia jasminoides Ellis) of rubiaceae. Dilutant, stabilizer, or solvent can be added
for the purpose of color value adjustment and quality preservation.
Compositional Specifications of Gardenia Red
Content Color value ( ) of Gardenia Red should be higher than the indicated value.
Description Gardenia Red is dark reddish violet liquid, lump, powder or paste having a
slight characteristic odor.
Identification (1) Test Solution obtained in Color Value section shows reddish violet
color and a absorbance maximum at about 535 nm.
(2) When pH of Test Solution in (1) is adjusted to 2.5 or less with dilute hydrochloric
acid, its color almost doesn't change.
(3) When pH of Test Solution in (1) is adjusted to 2.0 or less with dilute hydrochloric
acid, where 3 drops of sodium hypochlorite (effective chlorine should not be less
than 4%), the solution decolorizes rapidly but doesn't form precipitates.
Purity (1) Arsenic : It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(2) Lead : When 5.0 g of Gardenia Red is tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content
should not be more than 8.0 ppm.
Assay (Color Value) Appropriate amount of Gardenia Red is precisely weighed so that
the absorbance is within 0.3～0.7 and dissolved in citric acid-dibasic sodium phosphate
buffer solution with pH 4.0 so that the total volume is 100 mL. 1 mL of this solution is
diluted to 100 mL with citric acid·dibasic sodium phosphate buffer solution with pH of
4.0 (Test Solution). If necessary, the solution is centrifuged and the supernatant is
used. Using citric acid-dibasic sodium phosphate buffer solution with pH 4.0 as a
reference solution, absorbance A is measured at 535 nm wavelength with 1cm cell.
Color value is obtained using the following equation.
Color Value( ) ＝ weight Aof×the1,000 sample(g)

∘Citric acid·dibasic sodium phosphate buffer solution (pH 4.0)

Solution 1：0.1M citric acid solution：1ℓ of solution containing 21.01 g of citric acid
(C6H8O7․H2O).
Solution 2：0.2M dibasic sodium phosphate solution： 1ℓ of solution containing 71.63 g
of dibasic sodium phosphate (Na2HPO4․12H2O).
Solution 1 and Solution 2 are mixed well (123:77) and its pH is adjusted to 4.0.

444
 Gardenia Yellow
INS No.: 164

Definition Gardenia Yellow is a pigment obtained by extracting and hydrolyzing fruit of

gardeniae (Gardenia augusta Merrill or Gardenia jasminoides Ellis) of rubiaceae. Major
pigments are crocin and crocetin of carotinoids. Dilutant, stabilizer, or solvent can be
added for the purpose of color value adjustment and quality preservation.
Compositional Specifications of Gardenia Yellow
Content Color value ( ) of Gardenia Yellow should be higher than the indicated value.
Description Gardenia Yellow is yellow～orange yellowish red liquid, lump, powder or
paste having a slight characteristic odor.
Identification (1) Test Solution obtained in Color Value section shows yellow color and a
absorption maximum at about 440 nm or 420 nm.
(2) When 5 mL of sulfuric acid is added to 0.5 g of Gardenia Yellow (if necessary,
evaporated to dryness by heating in a water bath and then cooled prior to use), it
shows blue color, which changes to violet and then brown.
Purity (1) Arsenic : It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(2) Lead : When 5.0 g of Gardenia Yellow is tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content
should not be more than 10.0 ppm.
Assay (Color Value) Appropriate amount of Gardenia Yellow is precisely weighed so that
the absorbance is within 0.3～0.7 and dissolved in 50 v/v% alcohol (total volume 100
mL). 1 mL of this solution is diluted to 100 mL with 50 v/v% alcohol (Test Solution). If
necessary, the solution is centrifuged and the supernatant is used. Using 50v/v%
alcohol as a blank solution, absorbance A is measured at the absorption maximum at
about 440 nm or 420 nm with 1cm cell. Color value is obtained using the following
equation.
Color value ( )
A × 1,000
＝
weight of the sample(g)

445
 Gelatin

INS No.: 428

Synonyms: Edible gelatin CAS No.: 9000-70-8

Definition Gelatin is the product obtained from partial hydrolysis of collagen, the chief
protein component of the bones and skins of animal. If it is prepared by treating
collagen with acid processing, isoelectric point exhibited pH 7.0∼9.0. If it is prepared
by treating collagen with alkali processing, isoelectric point exhibited pH 4.6∼5.2. If it
is a mixture treated by both acid and alkali as well as Gelatin is porduced by
modification of the above mentioned process may exhibited isoelectric points outside
of the stated ranges.
Compositional Specifications of Gelatin
Description Gelatin is pale yellow~brown plate, piece, or rough or fine powder.
Identification (1) When chromium trioxide solution or picric acid solution is added to 5
mL of aqueous solution (1→100) of Gelatin, precipitates are formed.
(2) When tannic acid solution is added to 5 mL of aqueous solution (1→5,000) of
Gelatin, it becomes turbid.
Purity (1) Other odor and Insoluble substances : A hot solution (1→40) of Gelatin should
not generate unpleasant odor. The 2 cm liquid layer of this solution should be
colorless and transparent. Even if it is turbid, it should not be deeper than the color
of 50 mL of solution that is prepared by mixing 0.3 mL hydrochloric acid and 1 mL
nitric acid adding 1 mL of 0.1 N silver nitrate solution and water, and allow to stand
for 5 minutes.
(2) Sulfites : 20 g of Gelatin is dissolved in 150 mL of boiling water in a round bottom
flask. 5 mL of phosphoric acid and 1 g of sodium bicarbonate are added and a
condenser is attached. 50 mL of 0.1 N iodine solution is added to a collecting
container. The end of the condenser is immersed in the iodine solution. It is then
distilled and approximately 50 mL of distillate is collected. The distillate is acidified
with 2～3 drops of hydrochloric acid. 2 mL of barium chloride solution is added to
the distillate, which is then heated until it becomes colorless. The precipitates of
barium sulfate are filtered and washed with water. After heat treatment, the
remaining residue should not be more than 3 mg. Separately, a blank test is carried
out by the same procedure.
(3) Arsenic : It should be no more than 1.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(4) Chromium : 5 g of gelatin is placed in decomposition flask. 50 mL of water and 10
mL of nitric acid are added and mixed to the flask and the solution in the flask is
allowed to stand. The solution is mildly heated and it is cooled after stopping
vigorous reaction. Then, 5 mL of sulfuric acid is added to the solution and the
solution is mildly heated again. Add 2 ～ 3 mL of nitric acid to it when the content
446
 of the solution appears dark brown color. Heat continually it until the content of the
solution appear light yellow ～ colorless, which means to finish the decomposition of
the solution. After cooling the decomposition solution, add water to the solution and
make up 50 mL as a test solution. Make blank test solution to the same procedure.
Separately, take 20 mL of chrome standard stock solution(1000 ppm) and make up to
200 mL with 0.2 % of nitric acid solution. Then take again 20 mL in this solution
and make up to 200 mL with 0.2 % of nitric acid solution. The concentration of this
diluted solution is 10 ㎍/mL (10 ppm). Take each of 1 mL and 5 mL from the
diluted solution and each taken solution is made up to 10 mL with 0.2 % of nitric
acid solution(1, 5, 10ppm). The amount of test solution and each of standard solution
should not be more than 10 ppm when testing according to the saltless process of
automatic absorption spectrophotometry.
(5) Lead : When 5.0 g of Gelatin is tested by Atomic Absorption Spectrophotometry or
Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content should not be more
than 1.5 ppm.
(6) Total Viable Aerobic Count : When Gelatin is tested by Microbe Test Methods for
Total Viable Aerobic Count (Number of General Germs) in General Test Method in
「Standards and Specifications for Foods」, it should not be more than 1,000 colonies
per 1 g
(7) Salmonella ： Gelatin is tested by Microbe Test Methods for Salmonella in General
Test Methods in 「Standards and Specifications for Foods」. It should be negative
(-).
(8) E. Coli : When Gelatin is tested by Microbe Test Methods for E. Coli in General
Test Method 「Standards and Specifications for Foods」 it should be negative (-).
Residue on Ignition When Residue on Ignition analysis is done with 1 g of Gelatin, the
amount of residue should not be more than 2%.

447
 Gellan Gum

INS No.: 418

CAS No.: 71010-52-1

Definition Gellan Gum is a high molecular weight polysaccharide gum produced by pure
culture and fermentation of a carbohydrates by Pseudomonas elodea, purified by
recovery with isopropyl alcohol, dried, and milled. Heteropolysaccharide is principally
composed of rhamnose, gluconic acid, and glucose (1:1:2). It can also contain acyl
(glyceryl and acetyl) group as an O-glycosidically linked ester.
Compositional Specifications of Gellan Gum
Content Gellan Gum (on a dried basis) contains 3.3~6.8% of carbon dioxide (CO2).
Description Gellan Gum is off-white powder.
Identification (1) 1 g of Gellan Gum is hydrated with 99 mL of water (1% solution). It is
stirred for about 2 hours using a magnetic stirrer. Small amount of supernatant is
drawn into a wide mouth pipette and transferred into a 10% calcium chloride solution.
A tough worm-like gel will be formed immediately.
(2) 0.5 g of sodium chloride is added to 1% solution obtained in (1), which is heated to
80℃ with stirring, and hold at 80℃ for 1 minute. The solution is allowed to cool to
room temperature. A firm gel is formed.
Purity (1) Arsenic : It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(2) Lead : When 5.0 g of Gellan Gum is tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content
should not be more than 2.0 ppm.
(3) Cadmium : When 5.0 g of Gellan Gum is tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content
should not be more than 1.0 ppm.
(4) Mercury : When 0.1 g of Gellan Gum is tested by Mercury Test Method, its
content should not be more than 1.0ppm.
(5) Isopropyl alcohol : 5 g of Gellan Gum is precisely weighed into a 1,000 mL single
neck round bottom distilling flask with 24/40 ground joint, where 1 mL of anti
foaming agent (Dow-Corning G 10 or its equivalent) and 200 mL of water are added.
It is then stirred for 1 hour. A 400 mL reflux condenser, distilling head, and a
collector are attached. Approximately 95 mL of distillate is collected (care must be
taken so that bubbles does not enter into the collector. 4 mL of internal standard
solution is added to the collected distillate, where water is added to bring the total
volume to 100 mL, test solution. Test Solution and mixed standard solution are
analyzed with gas chromatography and the amount of isopropyl alcohol is obtained by
the following equation. The content should not be more than 750ppm. The response
factor (f) is calculated by the area ratio(AIPA/ATDA) between peak areas of isopropyl
alcohol and tert-butyl alcohol in the mixed standard solution.
448
 Content of isopropyl alcohol(ppm) AIPA × 4,000
= f × ATBA × weight of the sample(g)

aIPA : peak area of isopropyl alcohol in Test Solution

aTBA : peak area of tert-butyl alcohol in Test Solution
Operation Conditions
-Column : A stainless steel tube 3.2mm x 1.8m
-Column Filler : 80～100 Porapak QS (or its equivalent)
-Detector : (Hydrogen) Flame Ionization Detector (FID)
-Injection port temperature : 200℃
-Column Temperature : 165℃
-Detector Temperature : 200℃
-Carrier gas and flow rate : Nitrogen, Flow rate is controlled so that the retention
time of isopropyl alcohol and tert-butyl alcohol is about 2 minutes and 3 minutes,
respectively.
Solutions
∘Mixed Standard Solution : 4 mL each of IPA standard solution and TBA standard
solution is pipetted into a flask, and diluted to 100 mL with water. 1 mL of this
solution contains approximately 40 μg each of isopropyl alcohol and tert-butyl alcohol
per mL.
∘IPA Standard Solution : Approximately 500 mg of isopropyl alcohol (chromatographic
quality) is precisely weighed and diluted to 50 mL with water. 10 mL of this solution is
further diluted to 100 mL with water.
∘TBA Standard Solution : Approximately 500 mg of tert-butyl alcohol (chromatographic
quality) is precisely weighed and diluted to 50 mL with water. 10 mL of this solution is
further diluted to 100 mL with water.
(6) Nitrogen : When Gellan Gum is tested by nitrogen determination method, the amount
should be not more than 3.0%.
(7) Total Viable Aerobic Count : When Gellan Gum is tested by Microbe Test Methods
for Total Viable Aerobic Count (Number of General Germs) in General Test Method
in 「Standards and Specifications for Foods」, it should not be more than 10,000 cfu
per 1 g
(8) E. Coli : When Gellan Gum is tested by Microbe Test Methods for E. Coli in
General Test Method 「Standards and Specifications for Foods」, it should be
negative (-).
(9) Salmonella : When Gellan Gum is tested by Microbe Test Methods for Salmonella
in General Test Method 「Standards and Specifications for Foods」, it should be
negative (-).
(10) Number of Fungi : When Gellan Gum is tested by Microbe Test Methods for
449
 Number of Fungi in General Test Method in 「Standards and Specifications for
Foods」, it should not be more than 400 cfu per 1 g
Loss on Drying When Gellan Gum is dried for 2 hours and 30 minutes at 105℃, the
weight loss should not be more than 15%.
Ash 3 g of Gellan Gum is precisely weighed and dried for 4 hours at 105℃. It is then
reduced ash at 650℃ until the carbon is completely removed. The amount of remaining
ash should not be more than 4～12%.
Assay Approximately 1.2 g of Gellan Gum is precisely weighed and analyzed by Assay
of 「Xantan Gum」.
0.25 N NaOH 1 mL ＝ 5.5 mg CO2

450
 Geraniol

Chemical Formula: C10H18O

Molecular Weight: 154.25
Synonyms: 2,6-Dimethyl-2,6-octadien-8-ol CAS No.: 106-24-1

Compositional Specifications of Geraniol

Content Geraniol should contain not less than 88.0% of geraniol (C10H18O).
Description Geraniol is a colorless to light yellow, transparent liquid having a
characteristic odor.
Identification To 1 mL of Geraniol, add 1 mL of acetic acid, anhydrous and 1 drop of
phosphoric acid, keep at a slightly warm temperature for 10 minutes, add 1 mL of
water, shake in hot water for 5 minutes, cool, and make slightly alkaline with
anhydrous sodium carbonate solution. An odor of geranyl acetate is evolved.
Purity (1) Specific Gravity : Specific gravity of Geraniol should be within a range of
0.870～0.885
(2) Refractive Index : Refractive Index of Geraniol should be within a range of 1.469～
1.478.
(3) Clarity and Color of Solution : When 1 mL of the solution is dissolved in 3 mL of
70% ethanol, the solution should be clear.
(4) Acid Value : Acid value of Geraniol is tested by Acid Value in Flavoring Substance
Test. It should not be more than 1.
(5) Ester Value : Accurately weigh about 5 g Geraniol is tested by Ester Value and in
Flavoring Substance Test. It should not be more than 3.
(6) Aldehyde : Accurately weigh about 5 g of Geraniol, and proceed as directed under
Method 2 in aldehyde and ketone content in Flavoring Substances Tests. In the
procedure, allow the mixture to stand for 15 minutes before titrating. The volume of
consumed 0.5 N hydrochloric acid is not more than 0.65 mL.
Assay Proceed as directed under Method 1 in alcohol content in Flavoring Substances
Tests, using 1 g of acetylated oil.

451
 Geranyl Acetate

Chemical Formula: C12H20O2

Molecular Weight: 196.29
Synonyms: Geraniol acetate CAS No.: 105-87-3

Compositional Specifications of GeranyI Acetate

Content GeranyI Acetate should be contain not less than 90.0% of geranyl acetate
(C12H20O2).
Description GeranyI Acetate is a colorless to light yellow, transparent liquid a
characteristic odor.
Identification To 1 mL of Geranyl Acetate, add 5 mL of 10% alcoholic solution of
potassium solution, and heat in a water bath. The characteristic odor disappears, and
an odor of geraniol is evolved. Cool, and add 2 mL of diluted hydrochloric acid and 2
mL of water. The solution responds to the test for Acetate (C) in Identification.
Purity (1) Specific Gravity : Specific gravity of Geranyl Acetate should be within a
range of 0.900～0.914
(2) Refractive Index : Refractive Index of Geranyl Acetate should be within a range of
1.458～1.464
(3) Clarity and Color of Solution : When 1 mL of GeranyI Acetate is dissolved in 8 mL
of 70% alcohol, the solution should be clear.
(4) Acid Value : Acid value of GeranyI Acetate is tested by Acid Value in Flavoring
Substance Test. The content should not be more than 1.
Assay Accurately weigh about 1 g of Geranyl Acetate, and proceed as directed under
Ester Value and Ester Content in Flavoring Substances Tests.
1 mL of 0.5 N alcoholic solution of potassium hydroxide = 98.15 mg of C12H20O2

452
 Geranyl Formate

Chemical Formula: C11H18O2

Molecular Weight: 182.26
Synonyms: Geranyl methanoate CAS No.: 105-86-2

Compositional Specifications of Geranyl Formate

Content Geranyl Formate should contain not less than 85.0% of Geranyl Formate (C11H18O2).
Description Geranyl Formate is a colorless or slightly yellowish, transparent liquid
having a characteristic odor.
Identification (1) To 1 mL of Geranyl Formate, add 10 mL of 10% alcoholic solution of
potassium hydroxide, and heat in a water bath for 5 minutes while shaking. The
characteristic odor disappears, and an odor of geraniol is evolved.
(2) To 1 mL of Geranyl Formate, add 10 mL of sodium hydroxide solution, heat in a
water bath for 5 minutes while shaking, and allow to stand. To 1 mL of the solution
of the lower layer, add 1.5 mL of diluted hydrochloric acid, and add 20 mg of
magnesium dust divided into several portions. After effervescence ceases, add 3 mL
of diluted sulfuric acid (3→5) and 10 mg of chromotropic acid, shake and warm in a
hot water for 10 minutes. A pink-purple color develops.
Purity (1) Specific Gravity : Specific gravity of Geranyl Formate should be within a
range of 0.906～0.920
(2) Refractive Index : Refractive Index of Geranyl Formate should be within a range of
1.457～1.466
(3) Clarity and Color of Solution : When 1 mL of Geranyl Formate is dissolved in 3 mL
of 80% ethanol, the solution should be clear.
(4) Acid Value : Acid value of Geranyl Formate is tested by Acid Value in Flavoring
Substance Test. It should not be more than 3. In this case, titrate while cooling in
ice water, and continue the titration until a light pink color persists for 10 seconds.
Assay Accurately weigh about 1 g of Geranyl Formate, and test Saponification Value by
saponification value measuring method in Flavoring Substances Tests and Acid Value
by Purity (4). Calculate the content by the following formula:
Saponification value – Acid value
Content(%) ＝ × 182.26
561.1

453
 Gibberellic Acid
Chemical Formula: C19H22O6
Molecular Weight: 346.37 CAS No.: 77-06-5

Definition Gibberella fujikuroi is cultured, which is then filtered. The filtrate is

concentrated under a reduced pressure. The concentrate is extracted and crystallized.
Gibberellic Acid is obtained by purifying the crystallized precipitates.
Compositional Specifications of Gibberellic Acid
Content Gibberellic Acid should contain not less than 90.0% of gibberellic acid (C19H22O6
＝ 346.37).
Description Gibberellic Acid is odorless white～pale yellow crystalline powder.
Identification A solution that dissolved in 2 mL of sulfuric acid a few milligrams of
Gibberellic Acid is red color with green fluorescence.
Purity (1) Specific Rotation : Approximately 5 g of Gibberellic Acid is precisely weighed
and dissolved in alcohol to make 50 mL. (This solution should not be heated during
preparation.) The polarity of this solution should be ＝ +75.0∼+90.0°
(2) Arsenic : It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(3) Lead : When 5.0 g of Gibberellic Acid is tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content
should not be more than 5.0 ppm.
Loss on Drying When Gibberellic Acid is dried at 100℃ for 7 hours in vacuum of 20
mmHg, the weight loss should not be more than 3%.
Assay Approximately 40 mg is precisely weighed and dissolved in methyl alcohol (total
volume = 50 mL). 10 mL of this solution is diluted to 100 mL with methyl alcohol
(Test Solution). Separately, 25 mg of gibberellic acid standard is precisely weighed and
dissolved in methyl alcohol (total volume = 50 mL). 10 mL of this solution is diluted to
50 mL with methyl alcohol (Standard Solution). Each of 5 mL Test Solution, 4 mL and
5 mL portions of the Standard Solution is separately added into 3 test tubes. The test
tubes are evaporated to dryness and further dried at 90℃ for 10 minutes. The tubes
are allowed to cool to room temperature. The residue in each test tube is dissolved in
10 mL each of diluted sulfuric acid (8→10), which is then heated for 10 minutes in a
water bath and cooled for 5 minutes in 10℃ water bath. Absorbance of each solution
is determined at 535 nm with 1 cm cells using dilute sulfuric acid as the blank. The
content is measured using the following equation (Note the absorbance of the two
solutions prepared from the 4 mL and 5 mL aliquots of the Standard Solution and use
the nearest one to the solution prepared with the Sample solution, for the calculation).
V Au 100
Content(%) 500 × C × × As ×
5 weight of the sample(mg)

C : Concentration of the Standard Solution (mg/mL)

454
V : Amount of Standard Solution used
Au : Absorbance of the Sample Solution
As : Absorbance of Standard Solution used

455
 Potassium Aluminium Silicate-Based Pearlescent Pigments

Synonyms: Mica-based pearlescent INS No.: 176(i), 176(ii),

pigments 176(iii)

Definition It has type 1, type 2 and type 3. Definitions of each type are as follows.
Type 1 of Potassium Aluminium Silicate-Based Pearlescent Pigments: It is manufactured by
calcinating at high temperature after a pigmentating titanium dioxide to potassium aluminium
silicate or mica. It is composed of potassium aluminium silicate or mica that are coated with
titanium dioxide, and it is a colour that has pearly white. The pearly white varies depending
on the size of the particles and the thickness of titanium dioxide applied to the potassium
aluminium silicate or mica. There shall be no particles less than 100 nm, and average
particle size is generally between 3∼82 μm.
Type 2 of Potassium Aluminium Silicate-Based Pearlescent Pigments : It is manufactured
by calcinating at high temperature after a pigmentating iron oxide to potassium aluminium
silicate or mica. It is composed of potassium aluminium silicate or mica that are coated with
iron oxide, and it is a colour that has pearly white. The pearly white varies depending on
the size of the particles and the thickness of iron oxide applied to the potassium aluminium
silicate or mica. There shall be no particles less than 100 nm, and average particle size is
generally between 18∼25 μm.
Type 3 of Potassium Aluminium Silicate-Based Pearlescent Pigments : It is manufactured
by calcinating at high temperature after a pigmentating both titanium dioxide and iron oxide
to potassium aluminium silicate or mica. It is composed of potassium aluminium silicate or
mica that are coated with both titanium dioxide and iron oxide, and it is a colour that has
pearly white. The pearly white varies depending on the size of the particles and the
thickness of both titanium dioxide and iron oxide applied to the potassium aluminium silicate
or mica. There shall be no particles less than 100 nm, and average particle size is generally
between 7∼25 μm.
Content Specifications of Potassium Aluminium Silicate-Based Pearlescent Pigments
Content Type 1 has 10∼61% of titanium oxide and 39∼90% of potassium aluminium silicate
or mica. Type 2 has 32∼55% of iron oxide and 45∼68% of potassium aluminium silicate or
mica. Type 3 has 33∼52% of titanium oxide, 2∼12% of iron oxide and 36∼65% of potassium
aluminium silicate or mica.
Description Potassium Aluminium Silicate-Based Pearlescent Pigments is pearly white
powder.
Identification (1) Solubility : It is not soluble in water.
(2) Titanium shall be identified in type 1, iron shall be identified in type 2, and both
titanium and iron shall be identified in type 3, when tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy.
Purity Impurities dissolved in 0.5N hydrochloric acid : weigh approximate 20 g of this
additive precisely and put it into 250 mL flask. Add 100 mL of 0.5N hydrochloric
456
 acid. After attaching a reflux cooler, heat it for 30 minutes. After colling the soltion,
filter it with a 0.1μm membrane filter, and wash the residues on the filter with a hot
0.5N hydrochloric acid twice. Then add it with the rest. Add 0.5 hydrochloric acid to
it and make it to 200 mL as a test solution. Mercury is tested by the Mercury test
method, and Arsenic, lead, cadmium, antimony, barium, chromoium, cooper, nickel and
zinc are tested by the inductive coupling plasma luminous intensity method.
Arsenic : It should be no more than 3.0 ppm.
Lead : It should be no more than 4.0 ppm.
Cadmium : It should be no more than 1.0 ppm.
Mercury : It should be no more than 1.0 ppm.
Antimony : It should be no more than 3.0 ppm.
Barium : It should be no more than 25.0 ppm.
Chromoium : It should be no more than 100.0 ppm.
Cooper : It should be no more than 25.0 ppm.
Nickel : It should be no more than 50.0 ppm.
Zinc : It should be no more than 25.0 ppm.
Loss on Drying When Potassium Aluminium Silicate-Based Pearlescent Pigments is dried
for 2 hours at 105℃, the weight loss should not be more than 0.5 %.
Assay Weigh approximate 0.5 g of this additive precisely, and put it in a platinum or
nickel crucible. Add 5 g of potassium hydroxide and 2 g of boric acid. And completely
dissolve it using a torch burner and cool it to room temperature. Move to 250 mL
PTFE beaker, add 150 mL of hot distilled water and stir to dissolve. wash crucible
with a small amount of hot water and put the rest into the beaker. Add 50 mL of
hydrochloric acid. After moving it to the 250 mL mass flask, wash the beaker three
times with hot water and move the rest to the mass flask and make it as 250 mL.
Dilute it with 2% hydrochloric acid solution and use it as test solution. inject the test
solution into an inductive coupling plasma photometer and apply titanium line
wavelength (334.94nm), iron line wavelength (259.940nm) and aluminum line
wavelength (396.152nm). Each concentration of titanium, iron and aluminum(μg/mL) is
calculated from each standard curve. Calculate the content(%) of iron oxide and mica
according to the following formula:
the content of titanium dioxide 1.668 × CTi × 250 × DF
(TiO2, %) = × 100
W × 106

the content of iron oxide 1.43 × CFe × 250 × DF

(Fe2O3, %) = × 100
W × 106
4.92 × CAl × 250 × DF
the content of mica(%) = × 100
W × 106

CTi : Concentration of titanium in the test solution(μg/mL)

CFe : Concentration of iron in the test solution(μg/mL)
CAl : Concentration of aluminium in the test solution(μg/mL)

457
DF : Diluted drainage of the test solution
W : Weight of sample(g)

458
 Glacial Acetic Acid
Chemical Formula: CH3COOH

Molecular Weight: 60.05 INS No.: 260

Synonyms: Ethanoic acid CAS No.: 64-19-7

Content Specifications of Glacial Acetic Acid

Content Glacial Acetic Acid should contain not less than 99.0% of acetic acid (C2H4O2).
Description Glacial Acetic Acid is colorless transparent liquid or crystalline lump with
characteristic irritating odor.
Identification (1) Glacial Acetic Acid solution (1→3) is strongly acidic.
(2) Glacial Acetic Acid solution (1→3) responds to the test for acetate salts in
Identification.
Purity (1) Solidification Temperature : Solidification temperature of Glacial Acetic Acid
should not be less than 14.5℃.
(2) Arsenic : It should be no more than 1.3 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(3) Lead : When 5.0 g of Glacial Acetic Acid is tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content
should not be more than 0.5 ppm.
(4) Mercury : When Glacial Acetic Acid is tested by Mercury Limit Test, its content
should not be more than 1.0 ppm.
(5) Readily Oxidized Matters : 2 g of Glacial Acetic Acid is dissolved in 10 mL of
water, where 0.1 mL of 0.1 N potassium permanganate solution is added. The color
of the solution should not disappear within 30 minutes
(6) Residue on Evaporation : 10 g of Glacial Acetic Acid is evaporated and then dried
for 2 hours at 100℃. The residue should not be more than 1 mg.
Assay Accurately weigh about 1 g of Glacial Acetic Acid and dissolve in 40 mL of
water, which is titrated with 1 N sodium hydroxide solution (indicator : 2 drops of
phenolphthalein solution).
1 mL of 1 N sodium hydroxide solution ＝ 60.05 mg C2H4O2

459
 β -Glucanase
Definition β-Glucanase is an enzyme obtained from the culture of Aspergillus niger and
its variety, Bacillus subtilis and its variety, Humicola insolens and its variety, and
Trichoderma reesei, Talaromyces emersonii and its variety. Dilutant or stabilizer can
be added for the purpose of activity adjustment and quality preservation.
Compositional Specifications of β-Glucanase
Description β-Glucanase is white to dark brown powder, particles, pastes or colorless to
dark brown liquid.
Identification When β-Glucanase is proceeded as directed under Activity Test, it should
have the activity as β-Glucanase.
Purity (1) Arsenic ： It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(2) Lead : When 5.0 g of β-Glucanase is tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content
should not be more than 5.0 ppm.
(3) Coliform Group ： When β-Glucanase is proceeded as directed under Microbe Test
Methods for Coliform Group in General Test Methods in 「Standards and
Specifications for Foods」, it should contain not more than 30 colonies per 1 g of
this product.
(4) Salmonella ： When β-Glucanase is proceeded as directed under Microbe Test
Methods for Salmonella in General Test Methods in 「Standards and Specifications for
Foods」, it should be negative(-).
(5) E. Coli : When β-Glucanase is tested by Microbe Test Methods for E. Coli in
General Test Method 「Standards and Specifications for Foods」it should be negative
(-).
Activity Test (Activity)
Analysis Principle ： Activity test is based on hydrolysis of Lichenin substrate for 15
minutes at pH 6.5, temperature 40℃. The increase in reducing power due to generated
reducing matters is measured by Neocuproine method.
∘Preparation of Test Solution ： The final diluted solution is prepared so that it contains
0.01∼0.02 β-Glucanase units per 1 mL. Sample is taken into a volumetric flask,
dissolved and filled with phosphate buffer solution.
∘Procedure ： 2 mL each of substrate solution is added into four 25 mL volumetric
flasks, which are then isothermalized in a water bath at 40℃ for 10～15 minutes. 1 mL
of phosphate buffer solution are added to test tube 1, 1 mL of glucose standard
solution are added to test tube 2 (glucose standard), 4 mL of neocuproine solution A
and 1 mL of Test Solution are added to test tube 3 (enzyme blank test), 1 mL of Test
Solution added to test tube 4 (enzyme test), and 3 mL of phosphate buffer solution are
added to test tube 5 (phosphate buffer solution blank test). Test tubes are
isothermalized at 40℃ for exactly 15 minutes. 4 mL each of neocuproine solution A is
added to test tubes 1, 2, 4, and 5. After adding 4 mL each of neocuproine solution B
to all test tubes, a glass stopper is placed on each tube (rubber stopper should not be
460
 used). It is then colorized by heating vigorously in a water bath. After cooling to room
temperature, water is added to make the total volume to 25 mL. Using either parafilm
or appropriate stopper, the content of each tube is mixed well by turning upside down
a few times. Using phosphate buffer solution for blank test of test tube 5 as a
reference solution, absorbance of each solution is measured at 450 nm with 1cm path
length. Enzyme activity is obtained from the following equation.
(A4—A3) × 36 × 106 × F
BGU ＝
(A2—A1) × 180 × 15 × S
A4 ：Absorbance of enzyme test solution (test tube 4)
A3 : Absorbance of enzyme blank test solution (test tube 3)
A2 ：Absorbance of glucose standard solution (test tube 2)
A1 ：Absorbance of substrate blank test solution (test tube 1)
F ： Dilution factor of test solution
S ： Weight of sample(μg)
36 ： Content of glucose (μg) in glucose standard solution
106 : Conversion factor from μg to g
180 : Weight of 1μmol of glucose
15 ： Reaction time (minutes)
∘Definition of Activity ： 1 β-Glucanase unit (BGU) corresponds to the amount of
enzymes which produce 1 μmol of glucose per 1 minute as reducing sugar, under the
test conditions described above.
Solutions
Phosphate Buffer Solution ： 13.6 g of potassium phosphate, monobasic is added in
1,900 mL of water. pH is adjusted to 6.5 ± 0.05 with 70% sodium hydroxide
solution. The total volume of the solution is make to 2,000 mL with water.
Neocuproine Solution A ： 40 g of anhydrous sodium carbonate, 16 g of glycine, and
450 mg of copper sulfate (5 hydrate) are dissolved in approximately 600 mL of
water. The total volume is make to 1,000 mL with water.
Neocuproine Solution B ： 600 mg of neocuproine hydrochloride is dissolved in 400 mL
of water and the total volume is make to 500 mL. If the solution becomes yellow, it
is discarded.
Substrate Solution ： 150 mg of Lichenin is ground into fine powder using a mortar
and pestle, which is dissolved in 50 mL of water at approximately 85℃. When it is
dissolved completely (it takes 20～30 minutes), 90 mg of sodium borohydride is
added. It is then heated at boiling point for 1 hour. 15 g of Amberlite MB-20 or
equivalent ion exchange resin is added, which is then stirred continuously for 30
minutes. It is vacuum-filtered through Whatman No.1 filter or equivalent using a
Buchner funnel, which is then washed with 20 mL of water. 680 mg of potassium
461
 phosphate, monobasic is added to the filtrate, which is then filtered through a 0.22 μ
m Millipore filtration apparatus (or equivalent). The filtration apparatus is washed
with 10 mL of water. pH of the filtrate is adjusted to 6.5 ± 0.05 with 1N sodium
hydroxide solution or 1N hydrochloric acid. The total volume is then make to 100
mL with water. The solution should be kept at 2∼4℃ and used within 3 days.
Glucose Standard Solution：36.0 mg of anhydrous glucose is dissolved in 50 mL of
phosphate buffer solution. The total volume is make to 1,000 mL with water.
Storage Standard of β-Glucanase
β-Glucanase should be stored in a hermetic container in a cold dark place.

462
 Glucoamylase
Amyloglucosidase
Definition Glucoamylase is an enzyme obtained from a culture of Aspergillus niger and
its variety, Aspergillus oryzae and its variety, Rhizopus oryzae and its variety, and
Aspergillus niger inserted gene of glucoamylase. Dilutant or stabilizer can be added for
the purpose of activity adjustment and quality preservation.
Compositional Specifications of Glucoamylase
Description Glucoamylase. is white to dark brown power, particles, pastes or colorless
to dark brown liquid.
Identification When Glucoamylase is proceeded as directed under Activity Test, it should
have the activity as glucoamylase
Purity (1) Arsenic ： It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(2) Lead : When 5.0 g of Glucoamylase is tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content
should not be more than 5.0 ppm.
(3) Coliform Group ： Glucoamylase is proceeded as directed under Microbe Test
Methods in Coliform Group in General Test Methods in 「Standards and Specifications
for Foods」. It should contain not more than 30 colonies per 1 g of this product.
(4) Salmonella ： Glucoamylase is proceeded as directed under Microbe Test Methods
for Salmonella in General Test Methods in 「Standards and Specifications for Foods」.
It should be negative (-).
(5) E. Coli : When Glucoamylase is tested by Microbe Test Methods for E. Coli in
General Test Method 「Standards and Specifications for Foods」, it should be
negative (-).
Activity Test (activity)
Analysis Principle ： Activity test is carried out under a fixed set of conditions at time,
temperature, pH, and concentration and is measured as a reducing sugar generated by
decomposition of hydrolyzed solution of corn starch.
∘Preparation of Test Solution： Test Method described below is based on the use of
sample that contains 0.1～0.2 units of activity of glucoamylase. This corresponds to an
amount that produces 0.2～0.4 g of reducing sugar under the same test conditions. The
most appropriate results can be achieved within this range. Liquid, solid, and liquid
extract sample are prepared by the following table, where indicated amounts should be
used.
Liquid Sample
Enzyme in sample Dilution Factor Amount (mL) Dilution Factor(F)
(unit/mL) (mL)
Not more than 0.05 - 5.0 0.2
0.06～0.1 - 2.0 0.5
463
 0.11～0.25 - 0.80 1.25
0.3～0.5 - 0.40 2.5
0.6～1.0 - 0.20 5
1.1～2.0 - 0.10 10
2.1～4.0 5.0→100 1.00 20
4.1～5.0 4.0→100 1.00 25
5.1～7.0 3.0→100 1.00 33.3
7.1～10.0 2.0→100 1.00 50
Solid Sample and Liquid Extracts
Enzyme in sample Weight(g)※ Diluted to (mL) Amount (mL)
(unit/mL)
Not more than 4 10 1,000 5.0
5～10 4 1,000 5.0
11～25 1.6 1,000 5.0
26～50 1.4 1,000 3.0
51～75 1.25 1,000 2.0
76～100 1.00 1,000 2.0
101～150 1.25 1,000 1.0
151～200 1.00 1,000 1.0
201～250 1.50 2,000 1.0
251～300 1.00 2,000 1.0
※ Sample is accurately weighed and transferred into a 1,000 mL volumetric flask and
water is filled up to 2/3. It is then allow to stand for 30 minutes at room temperature,
while the flask is vigorously shaken at least 5 times. The flask is then filled with
water. The solution is filtered through a Whatman No.12 or equivalent, use the Test
Solution. Indicated amount is taken for the test.
Procedure
① Generation of Reducing Sugar ： 50 mL of hydrolyzed starch solution and 5 mL of
acetate buffer solution are added into a 100 mL volumetric flask, Test Solution. As a
reference, water is taken into a volumetric flask and the same procedure is followed.
These flasks are allow to stand for 10 minutes in water bath at 60℃.(Note：For
enzymes generated from Aspergillus oryzae and Rhizopus oryzae, it is carried out at 5
5℃). Indicated amount of Test Solution is taken into a flask for Test Solution and it is
timed simultaneously. (When multiple sample are tested, there can be an interval in
sampling time considering the time taken for neutralizing the solution after 120 minute
reaction time). The content is mixed completely by shaking and allow to stand for 120
minutes in a water bath. After 115～118 minutes of reaction time, 3 drops of
phenolphthalein TS are added. The flask is removed from water bath when the reaction
time reaches exactly 120 minutes. It is then quickly neutralized with 2% sodium
464
hydroxide solution (approximately 3～7 mL) using a quick drawing burette. It is then
cooled to room temperature in running water. The total volume is make to 10 mL with
water. 10 mL each of this solution and reference solution is taken and tested for
reducing sugar as follows
② Test for Reducing Sugar (Schoorl Method)
(Note：This test method is appropriate for measuring reducing sugar from protein free
soluble substances. Sample with considerable amount of proteins are tested after
treating with protein precipitating agent.). 10 mL each of Fehling solution A, B is taken
into a 250 mL Erlenmeyer flask, where exactly 10 mL of the solution obtained from
reducing sugar generation above. A reference solution is treated as same. (Note：When
multiple sample are tested, Test Solution is taken into a series of flasks, diluted to 30
mL with water, and Fehling solution A is added. Fehling solution B is added just before
heating). The total volume is make to 50 mL with water, which is mixed by gently
shaking. Two glass balls are added and a small funnel is placed on top of the flask as
a cover. It is then brought to boil within 3 minutes and heated for 2 more minutes. It
is then quickly cooled in a ice bath or running water. The funnel is washed with small
amount of water. 10 mL of 30% potassium iodide solution and 10 mL of 28% sulfuric
acid are added to the solution, which is quickly titrated with 0.1 N sodium thiosulfate
solution until the color of iodine disappears. 1 mL of starch TS is added to the
resultant solution, which is titrated by drop-wise adding 0.1 N sodium thiosulfate
solution until the blue color disappears. The consumed amount (mL) of 0.1N sodium
thiosulfate for Test Solution is S, while the consumption for the reference solution is
C. Blank test for reagent is carried out twice with 30 mL of water instead of sample.
The average amount of consumption mL is B. Using the titrant difference between B
and S (in mL), Ts is obtained. (Subtract S from B and indicate the sample in mL
consuming 0.1 N Sodium Thiosulfate to obtain the titration difference, taking it as
Ts)Using the titrant difference between B and C (in mL), titrant difference of reference
is obtained, Tc.
(Note ： Refer to the following Table).

465
Conversion Table for Reducing Sugar Content using titrant difference
Titrant
Difference 0.0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9
(mL)
Content of reducing sugar (as glucose) (mg)
0.0 0.0 0.3 0.7 1.0 1.3 1.6 1.9 2.2 2.5 2.8
1.0 3.2 3.5 3.8 4.1 4.4 4.7 5.0 5.3 5.6 5.9
2.0 6.4 6.6 6.9 7.2 7.5 7.8 8.1 8.5 8.8 9.1
3.0 9.4 9.8 10.1 10.4 10.7 11.0 11.4 11.7 12.0 12.3
4.0 12.6 13.0 13.3 13.6 14.0 14.3 14.6 15.0 15.3 15.6
5.0 15.9 16.3 16.6 16.9 17.2 17.6 17.9 18.2 18.5 18.9
6.0 19.2 19.5 19.8 20.1 20.5 20.8 21.1 21.4 21.8 22.1
7.0 22.4 22.7 23.0 23.3 23.7 24.0 24.3 24.6 24.9 25.2
8.0 25.6 25.9 26.2 26.6 26.9 27.3 27.6 28.0 28.3 28.6
9.0 28.9 29.3 29.3 30.0 30.3 30.6 31.0 31.3 31.6 31.9
10.0 32.3 32.7 33.0 33.3 33.7 34.0 34.3 34.6 35.0 35.3
11.0 35.7 36.0 36.3 36.7 37.0 37.3 37.6 38.0 38.3 38.7
12.0 39.0 39.3 39.6 40.0 40.3 40.6 41.0 41.3 41.7 42.0
13.0 42.4 42.8 43.1 43.4 43.7 44.1 44.4 44.8 45.2 45.5
14.0 45.8 46.2 46.5 46.9 47.2 47.6 47.3 48.3 48.6 48.9
15.0 49.3 49.6 49.9 50.3 50.7 51.1 51.4 51.7 52.1 52.4
16.0 52.8 53.2 53.2 53.9 54.2 54.5 54.9 55.3 55.6 56.0
17.0 56.3 56.7 57.0 57.3 57.7 58.1 58.4 58.8 59.1 59.5
18.0 59.8 60.1 60.5 60.9 61.2 61.5 61.9 62.3 62.6 63.0
19.0 63.3 63.6 64.0 64.3 64.7 65.0 65.4 65.8 66.1 66.5
20.0 66.9 67.2 67.6 68.0 68.4 68.8 69.1 69.5 69.9 70.3
21.0 70.7 71.7 71.5 71.9 72.2 72.6 73.0 73.4 73.7 74.1
22.0 74.5 74.9 75.3 75.7 76.1 76.5 76.9 77.3 77.7 78.1
23.0 78.5 78.9 79.3 79.7 80.1 80.35 80.9 81.3 81.7 82.1
24.0 82.6 83.0 83.4 83.8 84.2 84.6 85.0 85.4 85.8 86.2
25.0 86.6 87.0 87.4 87.8 88.2 88.6 89.0 89.4 89.8 90.2
26.0 90.7 91.1 91.5 91.9 92.3 92.7 93.1 93.5 93.9 94.3
27.0 94.8
ⓐ Use of this table is based on the assumption that two test results are
identical under the same test conditions. The risk of error can be avoided
by standardization
samples of 10～70 of range).
mg careful Therepetition
calibrationusingcurveknown puresugar
(reducing glucose (5
content
mg vs. titrant difference) is a slightly bent straight line. If a standardization
curve
sodium isthiosulfate
adopted, solution.
it is notBynecessary
using to obtain
0.065 N standardization
sodium thiosulfate for the
solution,
titration value for a blank test is increased to 44～45 mL, thus more
accurate result can be obtained.
③ Reducing Sugar Content ： By referring to the conversion table (titrant difference to
reducing sugar content), reducing sugar content (mg) corresponding to titrant difference
(Ts) of sample is obtained, Ws. By the same method, reducing sugar content (mg)
466
corresponding to titrant difference (Ts) of reference is obtained, Wc. The total reducing
sugar (glucose) content generated by the Test Solution used is obtained by the
following equation.
Ws × 100
Ds/g ＝
1,000 × 10
The total reducing sugar (glucose) content generated by the reference solution is
obtained by the following equation.
Ws × 100
Dc/g ＝
1,000 × 10
Calculation of activity of liquid enzyme : Activity of analyzed liquid enzyme is obtained
by the following equation.
F ： Dilution factor
적정
차 0.0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5
(mL)
환원당량(포도당으로) (mg)

0.0 0.0 0.3 0.7 1.0 1.3 1.6

1.0 3.2 3.5 3.8 4.1 4.4 4.7
2.0 6.4 6.6 6.9 7.2 7.5 7.8
3.0 9.4 9.8 10.1 10.4 10.7 11.0
4.0 12.6 13.0 13.3 13.6 14.0 14.3

5.0 15.9 16.3 16.6 16.9 17.2 17.6

6.0 19.2 19.5 19.8 20.1 20.5 20.8
7.0 22.4 22.7 23.0 23.3 23.7 24.0
8.0 25.6 25.9 26.2 26.6 26.9 27.3
9.0 28.9 29.3 29.6 30.0 30.3 30.6

10.0 32.3 32.7 33.0 33.3 33.7 34.0

11.0 35.7 36.0 36.3 36.7 37.0 37.3
12.0 39.0 39.3 39.6 40.0 40.3 40.6
13.0 42.4 42.8 43.1 43.4 43.7 44.1
14.0 45.8 46.2 46.5 46.9 47.2 47.6
15.0 49.3 49.6 49.9 50.3 50.7 51.1
16.0 52.8 53.2 53.5 53.9 54.2 54.5
17.0 56.3 56.7 57.0 57.3 57.7 58.1
18.0 59.8 60.1 60.5 60.9 61.2 61.5
19.0 63.3 63.6 64.0 64.3 64.7 65.0

20.0 66.9 67.2 67.6 68.0 68.4 68.8

21.0 70.7 71.1 71.5 71.9 72.2 72.6
22.0 74.5 74.9 75.3 75.7 76.1 76.5
23.0 78.5 78.9 79.3 79.7 80.1 80.5
24.0 82.6 83.0 83.4 83.8 84.2 84.6
25.0 86.6 87.0 87.4 87.8 88.2 88.6
26.0 90.7 91.1 91.5 91.9 92.3 92.7
27.0 94.8

467
 Use of this table is based on the assumption that two test results are identical under the same
repetition using curve
knownis pure glucose (5notsamples of 10～70 mg standardization
range). The calibration curve (reducin
ⓐ

standardization adopted, it is necessary to obtain for the sodium thiosulf

blank test is increased to 44～45 mL, thus more accurate result can be obtained.

activity(units/mL) ＝ (Ds-Dc) × 2hF

Calculation of activity of solid and liquid extract enzyme : Activity of analyzed solid,
liquid extract enzyme is obtained by the following equation.
activity(units/g) ＝ (G (Ds—Dc) × V
× A × 2h)
V ： Total volume of dilution (mL)
A ： Amount of Test Solution used for the test (mL)
(Should refer to the table for Solid sample and Liquid Extracts in Preparation of
Test Solution)
G ： Weight of sample (g)
Definition of Activity ： 1 Glucoamylase unit(GAU) corresponds to the amount of
enzyme which produces 1g of glucose as reducing sugar in 1 hour under the test
conditions above.

Solutions
Hydrolyzed Starch Solution (4%) ： An amount of solidified corn syrup with 15～20
dextrose equivalent, DE, which corresponds to 40 g of dried form, is dissolved in
water and the volume is make to 1,000 mL. This solution is freshly prepared before
use.
Acetate Buffer Solution ： 60 g of glacial acetic acid is diluted to 1,000 mL with
water. pH of this solution is adjusted to 4.2 with sodium acetate solution, which is
136 g of sodium acetate (NaC2H3O2․3H2O) is dissolved in water and the total volume
is make to 1,000 mL with water. (For enzymes produced by Aspergillus oryzae and
Rhizopus oryzae, pH is adjusted to 5.0)
Fehling solution A ： 34.66 g of copper sulfate (CuSO4․5H2O) is dissolved in water, and
the total volume is make to 500 mL. This solution is stored in a small container with
a cap.
Fehling solution B ： 173 g of potassium sodium tartrate (KNaC4H4O6․4H2O) is dissolved
in water, where 50 g of sodium hydroxide is added and the total volume is make to
500 mL with water. This solution is stored in a small container with a cap. Same
amount of solution A and B are mixed for use. The theoretical titrant consumption
468
 for blank test is 27.8 mL, but 27.5～29.5 mL is appropriate.
Storage Standard of Glucoamylase
Glucoamylase should be stored in a hermetic container in a cold dark place.

469
 Glucomannan
Synonyms: Konjac glucomannan INS No.: 425
Definition Glucomannan is a polysaccharide (that is purified with isopropyl alcohol and
crushed) contained in root stems of dendrobium and Konjac (Amorphophallus konja). It
is a mixture that consists of glucose and mannose.
Compositional Specifications of Glucomannan
Content Glucomannan (converted to a dried form) should contain not less than 90% of
glucomannan.
Description Glucomannan is white～pale yellow powder
Identification (1) 6 g of Glucomannan is added to a 500 mL beaker. It is wetted with
10 mL of isopropyl alcohol. While stirring immediately, 200 mL of water is added.
When it is set aside for 1 hour, it swells and becomes viscous solution.
(2) When 200 mL of 5% calcium hydroxide solution is added to viscous solution in (1),
which is well mixed and then set aside, a gel is formed.
Purity (1) Arsenic : It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(2) Lead : When 5.0 g of Glucomannan is tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content
should not be more than 2.0 ppm.
(3) Isopropyl alcohol : 5 g of Glucomannan is precisely weighted into a 1,000 mL
single neck round bottom flask with 24/40 ground joint, where 1 mL of anti foaming
agent (Dow Corning G-10 or its equivalent) and 200 mL of water are added. It is
then stirred for 1 hour. A 400 mL reflux condenser, distilling head, and a collector
are attached. Approximately 95 mL of distillate is collected (care must be taken so
that bubbles are not introduced into the collector). 4 mL of internal standard solution
is added to the collected distillate, where water is added to bring the total volume to
100 mL (Test Solution). Test Solution and mixed standard solution are analyzed with
gas chromatography and the amount of isopropyl alcohol is obtained by the following
equation. The content should not be more than 500ppm. The reaction factor (f) is
obtained by the ratio (AIPA／ATBA) of peak areas of isopropyl alcohol to tert-butyl
alcohol in the mixed standard solution.
Content of isopropyl AIPA × 4,000
= alcohol (ppm) f × ATBA × Weight of sample(g)
AIPA : Peak area of isopropyl alcohol in Test Solution
ATBA : Peak area of tert-butyl alcohol in Test Solution
Operation Conditions
-Column : A stainless steel tube 3.2 mm × 1.8 m
-Column Filler : Porapak QS of 80～100 mesh (or its equivalent)
-Detector : Flame Ionization Detector (FID)
-Temperature at injection hole : 200℃
-Column Temperature : 165℃
-Detector Temperature : 200℃
470
 -Carrier gas and flow rate : Nitrogen, Flow rate is controlled so that isopropyl alcohol
and tert-butyl alcohol is detected in 2 minutes and 3 minutes, respectively.
Solutions
∘Mixed Standard Solution : A mixture of 4 mL IPA standard solution and 4 mL TBA
standard solution is diluted to 100 mL with water. 1 mL of
this solution contains 40μg each of isopropyl alcohol and tert
butyl alcohol.
∘IPA Standard Solution : Approximately 500 mg of isopropyl alcohol (chromatography
grade) is precisely weighted and diluted to 50 mL with
water. 10 mL of this solution is further diluted to 100 mL
with water.
∘TBA Standard Solution : Approximately 500 mg of tert-butyl alcohol (chromatography
grade) is precisely weighted and diluted to 50 mL with
water. 10 mL of this solution is further diluted to 100 mL
with water.
(4) Viscosity ： Viscosity of 1% aqueous solution of Glucomannan is measured by 2.
Rotational Type Viscosity Measurement in Viscosity Measurement. It should be 500
cps or higher.
(5) Salmonella ： When Glucomannan proceed as directed under Microbiological
Methods for Salmonella in General Testing Methods in 「Standards and Specifications
for Foods」, it should be negative (-).
(6) E. coli : When Glucomannan proceed as directed under Microbiological Methods for
E. coli in General Testing Methods in 「Standards and Specifications for Foods」, it
should be negative (-).
Loss on Drying When Glucomannan is dried for 3 hours at 105℃, the weight loss should
not be more than 15%.
Ash When Glucomannan is tested for ash content, it should not be more than 4%.
Assay Same amount (0.5∼1.0 g) each of Glucomannan (remove fat with ether if
necessary) is placed separately in two 400 mL beakers. 50 mL each of phosphate
buffer solution (pH 6.0) is added. Check the pH of the solution, and pH is adjusted to
6.0 ± 0.2, if necessary. 0.1 mL of Termamyl solution is added to each beaker, which
is covered with aluminum foil and heated for 30 minutes in a boiling water bath
(shaken every 5 minutes). Using a thermometer, the temperature inside the beaker is
maintained at 85∼100℃ for 15 minutes. Cool, and 10 mL of 0.275 N sodium hydroxide
solution is added to each beaker and pH is adjusted to 7.5 ± 0.2. 5 mg of protease (or
0.1 mL solution containing 50 mg of protease in 1 mL water) is added to the resulting
solution. It is covered with aluminum foil and isothermalized for 30 minutes at 60℃
while shaking continuously. Cool the solution, and pH is adjusted to 4.0∼4.6 with 10
mL of 0.325 M hydrochloric acid and 0.3 mL of amylo glucosidase is added, which is
then covered with aluminum foil and isothermalized for 30 minutes at 60℃ while mixing
by shaking. 280 mL of 95% alcohol (heated to 60℃) is added to the beaker and well
471
 mixed by shaking. It is then set aside for 1 hour at normal temperature to settle down
glucomannan. A glass filter containing cellite (previously weighted) is wetted with 78%
alcohol so that cellite is evenly distributed. It is vacuum filtered to evenly distribute
the cellite. Test Solution (treated with enzyme) is then vacuum filtered through the
glass filter. The residue is washed 3 times with 20 mL each of 78% alcohol, twice with
20 mL each of 95% alcohol, and twice with 10 mL each of acetone, in sequence. If a
film is formed, it is broken with a reagent spoon to facilitate the filtration. Filtering
time can be shortened if filtration is stopped occasionally. The filter is dried over night
at 105 ± 5℃, cooled in a desiccator, and weighted. The weight of the residue is
obtained by subtracting the weight of glass filter. From the residue of one glass filter,
the amount of proteins is obtained (Protein Factor : 6.25). The residue from another
glass filter is ashed by heating for 5 hours at 525℃ and ash content is obtained.
Separately, a blank test is carried without sample. The content of glucomannan is
obtained by the following equation.
Blank Test Value B(mg) ＝ Average weight of residue for blank test (mg) - PB - AB
PB ： Amount of proteins for blank test (mg)
AB ： Amount of ash for blank test (mg)
Content (%) = Average weightAverage
of residue for blank test (mg) - P - A - B × 100
weight of sample (mg)
P ： Weight of proteins (mg)
A ： Weight of ash (mg)
B ： Blank test value (mg)

Reagents and Solutions

∘Phosphate Buffer Solution (pH 6.0) ： 1.4 g of sodium phosphate, dibasic (anhydrous)
and 9.68 g of sodium phosphate, monobasic (1 hydrate) are
dissolved in 700 mL of water, which is diluted to 1,000 mL
with water.
∘0.275 N sodium hydroxide solution ： 11 g of sodium hydroxide is dissolved in 700 mL
of water, which is diluted to 1,000 mL with water.
∘0.325 M hydrochloric acid ： 325 mL of 1 M hydrochloric acid is diluted to 1,000 mL with
water.
∘Termamyl (thermostable-alpha-amylase) solution ： No.120 L, Novo (refrigerated for
storage)
∘Protease ： No.P－3910, Sigma (refrigerated for storage)
∘Amylo glucosidase ： No. A－ 9913, Sigma (refrigerated for storage)
∘Cellite C－211(Fischer) ： washed with acid solution

472
 Gluconic Acid
Gluconic Acid Solution
Synonyms: D-Gluconic acid; Dextronic INS No.: 574
acid
Definition Gluconic Acid is gluconic acid and glucono-δ-lactone solution.
Compositional Specifications of Gluconic Acid
Content Gluconic Acid should contain within a range of the equivalent of 50.0～52.0% of
Gluconic Acid (C6H12O7 = 196.16).
Description Gluconic Acid is a colorless to light yellow, clear syrupy liquid. It is
odorless or has a slight odor, and has an acid taste.
Identification (1) When 1 drop of ferric chloride solution is added to 1 mL of Gluconic
Acid solution (1→25), a deep yellow color becomes.
(2) 4 mL of water is added to 1 mL of Gluconic Acid and proceed as directed under
Identification (3) in 「Glucono-δ-Lactone」.
Purity (1) Chloride : 0.5 g of Gluconic Acid proceed as directed under Chloride Limit
Test. It should not be more than amount that corresponds to 0.5 mL of 0.01 N
hydrochloric acid.
(2) Sulfate : 1 g of Gluconic Acid proceed as directed under Sulfate Limit Test. It
should not be more than amount that corresponds to 0.5 mL of 0.01 N hydrochloric acid.
(3) Arsenic : It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(4) Lead : When 5.0 g of Gluconic Acid is tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content
should not be more than 5.0 ppm.
(5) Mercury : When Gluconic Acid is tested by Mercury Limit Test, its content should
not be more than 1.0 ppm.
(6) Sucrose or Reducing Sugar : To 1 g of Gluconic acid, add 10 mL of water and 2 mL
of dilute hydrochloric acid and heat for 2 minutes. After cooling, 5 mL of sodium
carbonate solution is added to the resulting solution, and cooled. which is then heated
for 1 minutes in a water bath and cooled, immediately, orange yellow∼red
precipitates should not be formed.
Residue on Ignition When thermogravimetric analysis is done with 5 g of Gluconic Acid,
the residue should not be more than 0.10%.
Assay Accurately weigh about 1 g of Gluconic Acid, add 30 mL of water and 40 mL of
0.1 N sodium hydroxide, shake, allow to stand for 20 minutes, and titrate the excess
alkali with 0.1 N sulfuric acid (indicator : 3 drops of phenolphthalein solution).
Separately, a blank test is carried out by the same procedure.
1 mL of 0.1 N sodium hydroxide = 19.616 mg of C6H12O7

473
 Glucono-δ-Lactone

Chemical Formula: C6H10O6

Molecular Weight: 178.15 INS No.: 575
Synonyms: Gluconolactone; GDL; D-Gluconic
CAS No.: 90-80-2
acid delta-lactone

Compositional Specifications of Glucono-δ-Lactone

Content Glucono-δ-Lactone, when calculated on the dried basis, should contain not less
than 99.0% of glucono-δ-Iactone (C6H10O6).
Description Glucono-δ-Lactone occurs as white crystals or crystalline powder. It is
odorless or has a slight odor. It has a sweet taste at first and changes to a slight acid
taste.
Identification (1) The solution of Glucono-δ-Lactone (1→50) is acidic.
(2) To 1 mL of Glucono-δ-Lactone solution (1→10), add 1 drop of ferric chloride
solution, the solution appears a deep yellow color.
(3) To 5 mL of Glucono-δ-Lactone solution (1→10), add 0.7 mL of glacial acetic acid
and 1mL of freshly distilled phenylhydrazine, and heat in a water bath for 30 minutes
and cool. When the inner wall is rubbed with a glass rod, crystals are precipitated.
These crystals are collected and dissolved in 10 mL of hot water, where activated
carbon is added. After mixing by shaking, it is filtered. After cooling, the inner wall
is rubbed with a glass rod to precipitate crystals. The melting point of crystals,
previosly dried, should be within a range of 196∼202℃ (decomposition).
(4) 2.5 g of Glucono-δ-Lactone is dissolved in 25 mL of water. When optical rotation is
immediately measured, it should be = +60∼+67℃.
Purity (1) Clarity and Color of Solution : When 1 g of Glucono-δ-Lactone is dissolved in
10 mL of water, the solution should be colorless and not be more than almost clear.
(2) Chloride : When 0.5 g of Glucono-δ-Lactone is tested by Chloride Limit Test, its
content should not be more than the amount that corresponds to 0.5 mL of 0.01 N
hydrochloric acid.
(3) Sulfate : When 1 g of Glucono-δ-Lactone is tested by Sulfate Limit Test, its
content should not be more than the amount that corresponds to 0.5 mL of 0.01 N
sulfuric acid.
(4) Arsenic : It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(5) Lead : When 5.0 g of Glucono-δ-Lactone is tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content
474
 should not be more than 2.0 ppm.
(6) Sucrose or Reducing Sugar : To 0.5 g of Glucono-δ-Lactone, add 10 mL of water
and 2 mL of dilute hydrochloric acid, and boil for 2 minutes. After cooling, 5 mL of
sodium carbonate solution is added, which is set-aside for 4 minutes. The solution is
diluted to 20 mL with water, 5 mL of which is mixed with 2 mL of Fehling solution,
which is boiled for 1 minute. An orange-yellow～red precipitate should not be
formed immediately.
Loss on Drying When Glucono-δ-Lactone is dried for 2 hours at 105℃, the weight loss
should not be more than 1%.
Residue on Ignition When thermogravimetric analysis is done with Glucono-δ-Lactone,
the residue should not be more than 0.1%.
Assay Accurately weigh about 0.3 g of Glucono-δ-Lactone, precisely dried, and dissolve
in 30 mL of 0.1 N sodium hydroxide solution. After the solution is set-aside for 20
minutes, the excess alkali is titrated with 0.1N sulfuric acid (indicator : 3 drops of
phenolphthalein solution).
1 mL of 0.1 N sodium hydroxide solution = 17.82 mg of C6H10O6

475
 Glucosamine
Definition Glucosamine is obtained by one of the following processes. Chitin or chitosan
are extracted from shells of crustacea (crabs, shrimps, etc.) or bones of mollusca
(squid, cuttle fish, etc). Chitin or chitosan is hydrolyzed with hydrochloric acid. Or it
Dissolve in hydrochloric acid then hydrolyzed with chitosanase. Hydrolyzed material is
separated and purified.
Compositional Specifications of Glucosamine
Content Glucosamine should contain no less than 80.0% of glucosamine (C6H13NO5 =
179.17).
Description Glucosamine is white powder.
Identification When 0.2 g of Glucosamine in a mixture of 5 mL of anthrone solution and
1 mL of water is heated in a water bath, it shows blue～green in color.
Purity (1) Arsenic : It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(2) Lead : When 5.0 g of Glucosamine is tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content
should not be more than 10.0 ppm.
(3) Clarity and Color of Solution : When 1 g of Glucosamine is dissolved in 20 mL of
water, the solution should be clear.
(4) Acidity： pH of aqueous solution (10→100) of Glucosamine should be 3.0~5.0.
(5) Chloride : 0.1 g of Glucosamine is dissolved in 50 mL of methanol. Add 5 drops of
potassium chromate solution(1→20) and the end point is the point where the color
turns from yellow to reddish brown. When it is titrated by 0.1 N silver nitrate
solution, the content which is calculated on the dried basis should be 16~18%.
1 mL of 0.1 N silver nitrate solution = 3.545mg Cl
(6) Total Viable Aerobic Count : When Glucosamine is tested by Microbe Test Methods
for Total Viable Aerobic Count (Number of General Germs) in General Test Method
in 「Standards and Specifications for Foods」, it should not be more than 300 per 1 g
(7) Coliform Group ： When Glucosamine proceed as directed under Microbe Test
Methods for Coliform Group in General Test Methods in 「Standards and
Specifications for Foods」, it should be negative(-).
Loss on Drying When Glucosaminee is dried for 4 hours at 105℃, the weight loss
should not be more than 1.0%.
Residue on Ignition Residue on Ignition should not be more than 1.0%.
pH pH of aqueous solution (1→100) should be 4.0∼7.0 (measured by glass electrode).
Coliform Group Glucosamine is tested by Microbiological Methods for Coliform Group in
General Testing Methods in 「Standards and Specifications for Foods」. It should be
negative.
Assay 0.02 g of Glucosamine is precisely weighted and dissolved in 20 mL of water. It
is then diluted to 100 mL with water (Test Solution). 1 mL of Test Solution transfer
into a test tube with a stopper, where 2 mL of acetyl acetone is added. It is mixed
and heated for 1 hour at 96℃. It is cooled in running water. 20 mL of 96% alcohol is
476
 added to this solution, where 2 mL of ρ-Dimethylaminobenzaldehyde is added and
mixed. The resulting solution is set aside for 1 hour at room temperature. Absorption
(AT) at 535 nm is measured. Separately, a Standard Solution is prepared by dissolving
D-glucosamine standard in water so that it contains 100∼500 ㎍/㎖. Absorption (As) of
1 mL of Standard Solution is measured by the same procedure as Test Solution.
Contents= (%) C × 100
×
A T
×
100
Weight of the sample(g) AS 106

C : Concentration of Standard Solution as glucosamine (㎍/㎖)

Solutions
∘Acetyl acetone solution : 1.5 mL of acetyl acetone (purified by distillation, boiling point
: 138∼140℃) is mixed with 1.2 N sodium carbonate solution
(total volume = 50 mL).
∘ρ-Dimethylaminobenzaldehyde solution : 1.6 g of ρ-Dimethylaminobenzaldehyde dissolve
in 30 mL of hydrochloric acid, where 30 mL of
96% alcohol is added.

477
 α-Glucosidase
Definition α-Glucosidase is an enzyme obtained from cultures of Aspergillus niger.
Dilutant or stabilizer can be added for the purpose of activity adjustment and quality
preservation. α-Glucosidase cleaves the α-D-glycosidic bond between maltose or
oligosaccharide and at the same time produce non-fermentable sugars by transfer
reaction.
Compositional Specifications of α-Glucosidase
Description α-Glucosidase is white ~ dark brown power, granular, pasty substances or
colorless ~ dark brown liquid.
Identification When α-Glucosidase is proceeded as directed under Activity Test, it should
have the activity as α-Glucosidase.
Purity (1) Arsenic ： It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(2) Lead ： When 5.0 g of α-Glucosidase is tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content
should not be more than 5.0 ppm.
(3) Coliform Group ： α-Glucosidase proceed as directed under Microbe Test Methods
in Coliform Group in General Test Methods in 「Standards and Specifications for
Foods」. It should contain not more than 30 colonies per 1 g of this product.
(4) Salmonella : When α-Glucosidase is tested by Microbe Test Methods for Salmonella
in General Test Method 「Standards and Specifications for Foods」, it should be
negative (-).
(5) E. Coli : When 25 g of α-Glucosidase is tested by Microbe Test Methods for E.
Coli in General Test Method 「Standards and Specifications for Foods」, it should be
negative (-).
Activity Test (activity)
Analysis principle : 4-Nitrophenyl-a-D-glucopyranoside substrate to produce
p-nitrophenol by treating with α-Glucosidase at 40℃. Activity test is based on
measuring absorbance of p-nitrophenol.
Preparation of Test Solution : Take the sample and add water to 10 mL of 1N diluted
acetic acid ⦁sodium acetate buffer solution(pH 5.0) to make to 1,000mL. Make the
final diluent solution with using 1N diluted acetic acid ⦁sodium acetate buffer solution
to 0.5 mL. Test Solution is prepared so that the absorbance to be measured will be
within a range of 0.25～0.95 under the following test method. The solution is prepared
before use.
Procedure : Take 2 mL of substrate solution into tube, keep it at 40±0.5℃ precisely for
5 minutes. Then add 0.5 mL of test solution and shake it to mix. Keep this solution at
the constant temperature 40±0.5℃ precisely for 15 minutes. Add 0.5 mL of 10%
sodium carbonate solution to this solution and mix it. Cool it in ice bath for 5 minutes
and keep it in running water until measure the absorbance. Using water as a reference
solution, absorbance(A1) is measured at wavelength 420 nm. Separately, take 0.5 mL of
test solution for blank enzyme test into tube. After adding 0.5 mL of 10% sodium
478
 carbonate solution to this solution, mix it. Then add 2 mL of substrate solution and
cool it in ice bath for 5 minutes and keep it in running water until measure the
absorbance. Using water as a reference solution, absorbance(A2) of blank enzyme test
solution is measured at wavelength 420 nm.
Activity of an enzyme is calculated by the following equation.
α-Glucosidase(units/g) = (A1-A2) × F ×
3 1 1
× ×
0.5 10 W

A1 : Absorbance of enzyme reaction solution

A2 : Absorbance of blank enzyme test solution
F : Amount of p-nitrophenol(When difference in absorption is 1.0 from standard curve)
10 : Reaction time(min)
W : Weight of sample in 1 mL of test solution(g)
Preparation of standard curve : Weigh 0.1391 g of p-nitrophenol and dissolve it in
p-nitrophenol diluent solution, make to volume to 500 mL. Take precisely 0.5 mL, 1
mL, 1.5 mL, 2 mL, 2.5 mL of this solution. Then add p-nitrophenol diluent solution to
each solution to make to 100 mL. This solution is used as each standard solution. 1
mL of each solution contains p-nitrophenol of 0.01, 0.02, 0.03, 0.04 and 0.05 µ㏖/mL.
Using water as a reference solution, absorbance is measured at wavelength 420 nm.
The concentration of p-nitrophenol(µ㏖/mL) is plotted along the X axis and the
absorbance is plotted along the Y axis. Prepare standard curve of enzyme activity.
Definition of Activity ： 1 α-Glucosidase unit corresponds to the amount of enzyme
which separates 1 μmol of p-nitrophenol from the substrate under the conditions above.
Reagent
Substrate solution : Dissolve 0.113 g of 4-Nitrophenyl-α-D-glucopyranoside in 35 mL of
water. And add 5 mL of 1N acetic acid ⦁sodium acetate buffer solution(pH 5.0) to this
solution. Then add water to make to 50 mL. The solution is prepared before use.
1N acetic acid ⦁sodium acetate buffer solution(pH 5.0) : After mixing 600 mL of 1N
sodium acetate solution and 300mL of 1N acetic acid, adjust pH to 5.0 with 1N acetic
acid.
p-nitrophenol diluent solution : Add water to 82 mL of 1N acetic acid ⦁sodium acetate
buffer solution(pH 5.0) to make to 1,000mL. Then add 200 mL of 10% sodium
carbonate solution to this solution. The solution is prepared before use.
Storage Standard of α-Glucosidase
α-Glucosidase should be stored in a hermetic container in a cold dark place.

479
 Glucose Isomerase
Definition Glucose Isomerase is an enzyme obtained from a culture of Actinoplanes
missouriensis, Bacillus coagulans, Microbacterium arborescens, Streptomyces olivaceus,
Streptomyces olivochromogenes, Streptomyces rubiginosus, Streptomyces murinus.
Dilutant or stabilizer can be added for the purpose of activity adjustment and quality
preservation.
Compositional Specifications of Glucose Isomerase
Description Glucose Isomerase is white～dark brown power, particles, pastes or
colorless～dark brown liquid.
Identification When Glucose Isomerase is proceeded as directed under Activity Test, it
should have the activity as Glucose Isomerase..
Purity (1) Arsenic ： It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(2) Lead : When 5.0 g of Glucose Isomerase is tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content
should not be more than 5.0 ppm.
(3) Coliform Group ： When Glucose Isomerase is proceeded as directed under Microbe
Test Methods for Coliform Group in General Test Methods in 「Standards and
Specifications for Foods」, it should contain not more than 30 colonies per 1 g of
this product.
(4) Salmonella ： When Glucose Isomerase is proceeded as directed under Microbe
Test Methods for Salmonella in General Test Methods in 「Standards and
Specifications for Foods」, it should be negative (-).
(5) E. Coli : When Glucose Isomerase is tested by Microbe Test Methods for E. Coli in
General Test Method 「Standards and Specifications for Foods」, it should be
negative (-).
Activity Test (activity)
Analysis Principle ： Activity test is based on measuring conversion rate from glucose
to fructose in a layered reactor. Test Procedure can be explained as initial velocity
analysis method. Notable conditions are 45% w/w glucose extract, pH of inlet 7.0∼8.5
at room temperature, 60℃ temperature, and magnesium concentration of 4 × 10-3 M.
∘Preparation of Test Solution： Sample is accurately weighed (g or mL) and transferred
into a vacuum flask so that it contains 2,000∼8,000 Glucose isomerase unit (GIcU),
where 200 mL of substrate solution are added and mixed for 15 seconds. The mixture
is stirred in a 5 minute interval for 40 minutes. It is then degassed for 30 minutes in
vacuum. In case where the sample is liquid, it is adsorbed on resin prior to use as
follows. Strongly alkaline anion exchange resin (IRA 90) is washed with water for 4
hours and pH is adjusted to 7.0～9.0. This is taken 80 mL, packed into a glass column,
and added again 50 mL of water to the column. Sample, corresponding to 10,000 GIcU,
accurately weighed, and added. Finally, the column is washed with 10 mL of water.
The flow rate is adjusted to 2 mL/minute before the sample is added. Once the sample
is added, the effluent is re-entered into the top of the column and it is circulated for 8
480
 hours at room temperature so that the sample is adsorbed on the resin. 40 mL of
sample adsorbed on the resin is into a vacuum flask and proceed as directed under the
rest of the procedure described here.
∘Test Procedure： Based on the activity estimate of a sample, a substrate flow rate is
adjusted to 0.2～0.3 per 1 fractional transformation. Fractional transformation is
obtained from the value of specific rotation on the initial substrate and the effluent as
the following equations. Once the exact flow rate is determined, the column is run for
1 full day (at least for 16 hours) and pH of the substrate solution is monitored. If
necessary, flow rate is adjusted. Flow rate is measured and the effluent is collected,
which is covered and allow to stand for 30 minutes at room temperature. Fractional
transformation from glucose to fructose is obtained from the following equation. If the
transformation is not more than 0.2 or not less than 0.3, the flow rate is adjusted so
that it falls within this range .In case where flow rate needs to be adjusted, the column
is re-equilibrated for 2 hours or more, the additional effluent is collected and fractional
transformation is obtained. The flow rate is measured and the effluent is allowed to
stand for 30 minutes with a cover and fractional transformation is obtained.
∘Specific Rotation： Optical rotations for the effluent and the initial substrate are
measured at 25℃, and specific rotations are calculated from the following equation.
100a
[α] =
lpd

a ： Observed optical rotation

l ： Length of sample tube (dm)
p ： Concentration of Test Solution (g/100g solution)
d ： Specific gravity of the solution at 25℃
Fractional conversion：Fractional conversion X is calculated from the following
equation.
(αE - αS)
X =
(αF - αS)
αE ： Specific Rotation of the column effluent
αS ： Specific Rotation of glucose substrate
αF ： Specific Rotation of fructose (in this case, -94.54)

Activity of enzyme is obtained from the following equation.

GIcU/g or mL＝ FS
W
× X E× ln[
XE
XE—X
]

F ： Flow rate (mL/min)

S ： Concentration of glucose (μmol/mL)
X ： Fractional conversion
481
 XE： Fractional conversion at equilibrium or 0.51
W ： amount of sample(g, mL)
Definition of Activity ： Activity of an enzyme is expressed as Glucose isomerase unit
(GIcU, c indicates Column Treatment Test Method). 1 GIcU corresponds to the amount
of enzyme that isomerizes glucose into fructose under the above conditions at a lowest
ratio of 1 μmol per minute.
Apparatus : Column apparatus is depicted as below. A coarse glass filter is attached to
the bottom and warm water is circulated by a circulation pump through a double tube
(2.5cm inner diameter x 40cm length) that is connected to a water bath at 60℃. An
peristaltic pump with an inverter (maximum flow rate of 800 mL/h) is attached to the
column. An inner diameter of the tube, that is connected to the peristaltic pump
should be adjustable the flow rate as 60 to 150 mL/h. The connector of outlet of
column is connected to a collection container. (Note : all the connecting parts should
be made of glass or chemically inert plastic.)
Preparation of Column
Test Solution is transferred to the column using magnesium sulfate solution. The
solution is allowed to stand so that enzymes are settled down, upon which a porous
plate is placed. Air adsorbed on the plate should be removed. The top of the plate is
filled with cotton ball to a thickness of 1～2 cm. This acts as a filter that removes
bubbles generated from glucose substrate and keeps the solution temperature constant.
The tube, that is connected to the peristaltic pump with an inverter, is connected to
the column inlet and sealed connector to prevent to let air in. The connector to the
pump inlet is inserted into the substrate solution. The flow rate is adjusted to at least
80 mL per hour with a pump. This is maintained for 1 hour at room temperature.

Column apparatus for analysis of glucose isomerizing enzyme

482
 Solution
∘Substrate Solution ： 539 g of glucose and 1.0 g of magnesium sulfate (MgSO ·7H O) are dissolved
in 700 mL of water(50∼60℃). This solution is cooled to room temperature and the pH is
adjusted to 7.0～8.5. The total volume make to 1,000 mL with water, which is degassed
under a reduced pressure for 30 minutes.
∘Magnesium Sulfate Solution ： 1 g of magnesium sulfate is dissolved in water and pH is
adjusted to 7.5∼8.0 with 1 N sodium hydroxide solution. The total volume is
brought up to 1,000 mL with water.
Storage Standard of Glucose Isomerase
Glucose Isomerase should be stored in a hermetic container in a cold dark place.

483
 Glucose Oxidase
Definition Glucose oxidase is an enzyme obtained from a culture of Aspergillus niger,
Penicillium chrysogenum and its variety, respectively. Dilutant or stabilizer can be
added for the purpose of activity adjustment and quality preservation.
Compositional Specifications of Glucose Oxidase
Description Glucose oxidase is white to dark brown power, particles and pastes or
colorless to dark brown liquid.
Identification When Glucose oxidase is proceeded as directed under Activity Test, it
should have the activity as Glucose oxidase.
Purity (1) Arsenic ： It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(2) Lead : When 5.0 g of Glucose Oxidase is tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content
should not be more than 5.0 ppm.
(3) Coliform Group ： When Glucose oxidase is proceeded as directed under Microbe
Test Methods for Coliform Group in General Test Methods in 「Standards and
Specifications for Foods」, it should contain not more than 30 colonies per 1 g of
this product.
(4) Salmonella ： When Glucose oxidase is proceeded as directed under Microbe Test
Methods for Salmonella in General Test Methods in 「Standards and Specifications
for Foods」. it should be negative (-).
(5) E. Coli : When Glucose oxidase is tested by Microbe Test Methods for E. Coli in
General Test Method 「Standards and Specifications for Foods」. it should be
negative (-).
Activity Test (activity)
Analysis Principle ： Activity test is based on titration of gluconic acid which is
produced under the presence of excess amount of substrate and air.
∘Preparation of Test Solution ： Sample is diluted with chloride acetate buffer solution
(pH 5.1), so that 1 mL of the solution contains 5～7 GOTU.
∘Test Procedure ： 25 mL of substrate solution is added in a 32 × 200 mm test tube
and isothermalized for 20 minutes in a water bath at 35 ± 1℃. 3 mL of Test Solution
is added and mixed by shaking. A glass sparger, previously control air flow of 700～
750 mL per minute, is inserted into the test tube. If excess bubbles are generated, 3
drops of octadecanol solution are added. Glass sparger is removed exactly after 15
minutes and washed with water, which is added into the test tube. 10 mL of 0.1 N
sodium hydroxide solution and 3 drops of phenolphthalein TS are added immediately,
which is then stirred with a magnetic stir bar. It is then titrated 0.05 N hydrochloric
acid. The consumption of hydrochloric acid (mL) for test solution is S. Separately, a
blank test is carried out with 25 mL of chloride acetate buffer solution (pH 5.1) instead
of substrate solution and the consumption of hydrochloric acid (mL) is B. Activity of
the enzyme is obtained by the following equation.
484
 (B－S) × N × 180 × F
GOTU/g ＝
3 × W
N ： Normality of 0.05 N hydrochloric acid
F ： Dilution factor
W ： Weight of sample contained in 1 mL of Test Solution (g)
180 ： Molecular weight of glucose
3 ： Conversion factor to a defined unit
Definition of Activity ： 1 Glucose oxidase titrimetric unit(GOTU) corresponds to the
amount of enzyme which oxidizes 3 mg of glucose to gluconic acid under the test
condition above.
Solutions
∘Phenolphthalein TS ： 2 g of phenolphthalein is dissolved in 100 mL of methyl alcohol.
∘Octadecanol Solution ： Saturated octadecanol solution in methyl alcohol.
∘Chloride-acetate buffer solution (pH 5.1)： 2.92 g sodium chloride and 4.1 g sodium
acetate are dissolved in 900 mL of water. pH of the solution is adjusted to 5.1 with
diluted acetic acid or sodium hydroxide solution. The total volume is make to 1,000
mL with water
∘Substrate Solution ： 30 g of glucose (anhydrous) is dissolved in chloride-acetate buffer
solution (pH 5.1) so that the total volume is 1,000 mL.
Storage Standard of Glucose Oxidase
Glucose Oxidase should be stored in a hermetic container in a cold dark place.

485
 L-Glutamic Acid
HOOCCH2CH2CH(NH2)COOH
Chemical Formula: C5H9NO4

Molecular Weight: 147.13 INS No.: 620

Synonyms: Glutamic acid; L-α
CAS No.: 56-86-0
-Aminoglutaric acid

Compositional Specifications of L-Glutamic Acid

Content L-Glutamic Acid, when calculated on the dried basis(anhydrose), should contain
not less than 99.0% of L-glutamic acid (C5H9NO4).
Description L-Glutamic Acid occurs as colorless to white crystals or white crystalline
powder having a slightly characteristic taste and acid taste.
Identification (1) Dissolve 0.15 g of L-Glutamic Acid in a mixture of 4 mL of water and
1 mL of sodium hydroxide solution, and add 1 mL of ninhydrine solution (0.2→100).
and 0.1 g of sodium acetate. When it is heated for 10 minutes in a water bath, the
solution becomes dark bluish violet.
(2) 1 g of L-Glutamic Acid is suspended in 9 mL of water. When 5.6 mL of 1 N
hydrochloric acid or 6.8 mL of 1 N sodium hydroxide solution is added, it is
completely dissolved.
Purity (1) Specific Rotation : 10 g of L-Glutamic Acid, precisely dried and accurately
weighed, is dissolved in 2 N hydrochloric acid to make 100 mL and its optical rotation
should be within a range of ＝ +31.5∼+32.2°.
(2) Lead : When 5.0 g of L-Glutamic Acid is tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content
should not be more than 1.0 ppm.
(3) Arsenic : It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(4) Pyrrolidone Carboxylic Acid: Dessolve 0.5 g of L-glutamic acid in 100 mL water as
the Test Solution. Separately, dissolve both 0.5 g of L-glutamic acid and 2.5 mg of
pyrrolidone carboxylic acid in water as reference solution. Drop 2 μL of test solution
and 2 μL of reference solution on Thin Layer Plate of silica gel for thin-layer
chromatography and develop about 10cm by using n-butanol: glacial acetic acid :
water mixture (2:1:1) as developing solvent, and dry for 30 minutes at normal
temperature(15~25℃). Place a 50 mL beaker containing 3 g of sodium hypochlorite
into the development tank, slowly add 1 mL of hydrochloric acid to generate chlorine
gas, close the lid and leave for 30 seconds. Place the dried thin plate in this
developing tank, and close the lid and leave for 20 minutes. Take out the thin plate
and let it stand at normal temperature for 10 minutes and then spray ethanol evenly.
When uniformly sprayed iodine potassium starch solution after drying at room
temperature and then observed spots colored under natural light, the test solution
shall not show spots of pyridoncarboxylic acid in the same position as the contrast
486
 solution.
Potassium iodine starch solution: Weigh 0.5 g of starch, add about 50 mL of water,
and stir with heat until gelled. After cooling, add 0.5 g of potassium iodine and add
water to make 100 mL.
Loss on Drying When L-Glutamic Acid is dried for 3 hours at 80˚, the weight loss
should not be more than 0.2%.
Residue on Ignition When thermogravimetric analysis is done with L-Glutamic Acid, the
residue should not be more than 0.2%.
Assay Proceed as directed under Assay in 「L-Sodium Glutamate」.
1 mL of 0.1 N perchloric acid = 14.71 mg of C5H9N04

487
 Glutaminase
Definition Glutaminase is the enzyme, which is obtained from the culture of Bacillus
subtilis, Bacillus amyloliquefaciens, Aspergillu sp and Candida sp. Diluent or stabilizer
can be added for the purpose of activity adjustment and quality preservation.
Compositional Specifications of Glutaminase
Description Tannase is a white ～ pale yellow powder.
Identification When Glutaminase is proceeded as directed under Activity Test, it should
have the activity as Glutaminase.
Purity (1) Arsenic : It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(2) Lead : When 5.0 g of Glutaminase is tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content
should not be more than 5.0 ppm.
(3) Coliform Group: Glutaminase is tested by Microbiological Method for 〔Coliform
Group〕in General Testing Methods in 「Standards and Specifications for Foods」. It
should contain not more than 30 per 1g of this product.
(4) Salmonella : Glutaminase is tested by Microbiological Method for 〔Salmonella〕in
General Testing Methods in 「Standards and Specifications for Foods」. It should be
negative(-).
(5) E. Coli : When Glutaminase is tested by Microbe Test Methods for E. Coli in
General Test Method 「Standards and Specifications for Foods」, it should be
negative (-).
Activity Test (activity) Analysis Principle : The activity test is based on the hydrolysis
of L-γ-glutamyl-p-nitroanilide substrate for 10minutes at 37℃(pH 6.0). Produced
p-nitroaniline is measured by the Absorbance Test.
Preparation of Test Solution : Sample dissolve in diluted solution. Following below
method, Test Solution should be prepared in order that the difference of
Absorbance(As -Ab) is 0.3 ～ 1.0.
Standard Curve : Add 0.0414g of p-nitroaniline, 6g of acetic acid and 10mL of 1M
acetate․.sodium acetate buffer solution. Make up 100mL with water. 3μmol of
p-Nitroaniline per 1mL should be contained in the solution. Dilute to contain 0.025,
0.05, 0.075, 0.1 and 0.125μmol by using 1.1M acetate․sodium acetate buffer solution.
Control Solution is 1.1M acetate․sodium acetate buffer solution. The absorbance is
measured with 1cm of its liquid layer at 410nm. The concentrate of p-Nitroaniline(F, μ
mol/mL) is calculated by the difference 1.000.
Test Procedure : 4 mL of substrate solution is added to a 25 × 150mm test tube(for
enzyme test) and isothermalized for 5 minutes in a 37 ± 0.2℃ water bath. 0.5mL of
Test Solution is promptly taken in the test tube, and shaken. Set aside again the water
bath. After 10minutes, the reaction of the enzyme is stopped by 0.5mL of 10M acetic
acid. 0.5mL of 10M acetic acid is added in the test tube for Enzyme Blank Test. Shake
and add 0.5mL of Test Solution. Stir and isothermalize for 10minutes in the water bath.
Control Solution is Enzyme Blank Test Solution and the absorbance is measured with
488
 1cm of its liquid layer at 410nm. The enzyme activity is calculated following the
formula.
Glutaminase(GSU/g) = (As-Ab) × F × D
F : The concentrate of p-nitroaniline(μmol/mL), as the difference of absorbance
obtained from Standard curve is 1.000
D : The dilution factor of sample
Definition of Activity : 1 Glutaminase unit corresponds to the amount of enzyme, which
isolated from 1μmol of ρ-nitrophenol per minutes under the above test conditions
Solution
Substrate Solution : 0.0285g of L-γ-glutamyl-p-nitroanilide is weighted and dissolved
in 0.2mL of 2N hydrochloric acid. Add approximately 70mL of
water. 10mL of 1M acetate ․sodium acetate buffer solution(pH 6.0)
and 0.2mL of 2N sodium hydroxide are added in the solution.
Make up 100mL with water. This solution is prepared freshly
before use.
2N hydrochloric acid : 16.7 mL of hydrochloric acid dissolve with water to make up
100mL.
2N sodium hydroxide : 8g of sodium hydroxide dissolve with water to make up
100mL.
1M acetic acid : 60g of acetic acid dissolve in water to make 1,000 mL volume
1M sodium acetate solution : 136g of sodium acetate(three hydrous) dissolve in water
to make 1,000 mL volume
1M acetate ․sodium acetate buffer solution(pH 6.0) : 1M acetate is added in 1M
sodium acetate. Adjust to pH 6.0
1M acetate ․sodium acetate buffer solution : 60g of acetate and 100mL of 1M acetate ․
sodium acetate buffer solution(pH 6.0) are added in water
to make 1,000 mL volume.
10% TRITON X-100 solution : 10g of TRITON X-100 is added in 70mL of water.
issolve to heat. Cool the solution, add water to make
100mL volume.
Diluted solution : 5.84g of sodium chloride dissolve in water. Add 100mL of 1M
acetate ․sodium acetate buffer solution(pH 6.0) and 1mL of 10%
TRITON X-100 solution. Make 1000mL volume with water.
Stotage standard of Glutaminase
Glutaminase should be stored in a hermetic container in a cold dark place.

489
 L-Glutamine

H2NCOCH2CH2CH(NH2)COOH
Chemical Formula: C5H10N2O3

Molecular Weight: 146.15 CAS No.: 56-85-9

Compositional Specifications of L-Glutamine

Content L-glutamine, when calculated on the dried basis, should contain within a range
of 98.5～101.5% L-glutamine (C5H10N2O3).
Description L-glutamine is scentless white crystallite or crystalline powder with a slight
sweet taste.
Identification 1 mL of ninhydrine standard solution is added to 5 mL aqueous solution of
L-glutamine (1→1,000). Upon heating for 3 minutes in a water bath, this solution turns
violet.
Purity (1) Specific Rotation ： 4 g of pre-dried material is precisely weighed and
dissolved in water (total volume 100 mL). The polarity of this solution should be within a
range of ＝ +6.3∼+7.3°
(2) Lead : When 5.0 g of L-Glutamine is tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content
should not be more than 5 ppm.
(3) Arsenic : It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(4) Chloride: When 0.07 g of L-Glutamine is tested by Chloride Limit Test, its content
should not be more than the amount that corresponds to 0.2 mL of 0.01 N
hydrochloric acid.(Not be more than 0.1%)
Loss on Drying When L-glutamine is dried for 3 hours at 105℃, the loss should not be
more than 0.3%.
Residue on Ignition Residue after ignition should not be more than 0.1%.
Assay Accurately weighed about 0.5 g of L-glutamine, and proceed as directed under
Assay of [L-Sodium Glutamate].
1 mL of 0.1 N perchloric acid solution ＝ 14.62 mg C5H10N2O3

490
 Glycerin

Chemical Formula: C3H8O3

Molecular Weight: 92.09 INS No.: 422

Synonyms: Glycerol; Glycerine CAS No.: 56-81-5

Compositional Specifications of Glycerin

Content Glycerin, when calculated on the anhydrous basis, should contain not less than
99.0% of glycerin (C3H8O3).
Description Glycerin is a colorless and odorless liquid with sweet flavor.
Identification To 2～3 drops of Glycerin, add 0.5 g of potassium hydrogen sulfate and
heating, pungent odor of acrolein is generated.
Purity (1) Chloride : When 3.5 g of Glycerin tested by Chloride Limit Test, the content
should not be more than the amount that corresponds to 0.1 mL of 0.01 N
hydrochloric acid.
(2) Arsenic : It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(3) Lead : When 5.0 g of Glycerin is tested by Atomic Absorption Spectrophotometry
or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content should not be more
than 2.0 ppm.
(4) Cadmium : When 5.0 g of Glycerin is tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content
should not be more than 1.0 ppm.
(5) Mercury : When Glycerin is tested by Mercury Limit Test, its content should not be
more than 1.0 ppm.
Water Content Water content of Glycerin proceed as directed under Water Determination
(Karl-Fisher Titration) and should not be more than 5.0%.
Residue on Ignition To 10 g of Glycerin, add 1～2 drops of sulfuric acid and slowly
ignited by heating. The residue proceed as directed under Thermogravimetric Analysis,
its content should not be more than 0.01%
Assay To 0.5 g of Glycerin, quickly and accurately weighed, add water to make 500
mL. Take 50 mL of this solution, add about 200 mL of water. Then, the pH of this
solution is adjusted to 7.9 ± 0.1 using dilute sulfuric acid (3→1,000) or dilute sodium
hydroxide (1→250). Add 50 mL of sodium periodate solution for glycerin and mix,
which is then kept with a watch glass cover in a dark place for 30 minutes. Then 10
mL of 1:1 mixture of ethylene glycol and water is added and stir-mixed, which is
491
again kept in a dark place for 20 minutes. Add 5 mL of sodium formate solution (1→
15) and titrate with 0.1 N sodium hydroxide solution until reaches pH of 7.9 ± 0.2. A
blank test is done separately. Water used in this test is to be freshly boiled and
cooled prior to use.
1 mL of 0.1 N Sodium Hydroxide Solution ＝ 9.209 mg C3H8O3

492
 Glycerin Esters of Fatty Acids
Chemical Formula:
Synonyms: Glycerin fatty acid esters;
Mono- and di- glycerides of fatty acids;
Acetic and fatty acid esters of glycerol;
Lactic and fatty acid esters of glycerol;
Citric and fatty acid esters of glycerol; INS No.: 471, 472a, 472b,
472c, 472e, 475,
Diacetyltartaric and fatty acid esters of 476, 472g
glycerol; Polyglycerol esters of fatty
acids; Polyglycerol esters of
interesterified ricinoleic acid; Succinylated
monoglycerides

Definition Glycerin Esters of Fatty Acids are esters of fatty acids and glycerin or
polyglycerin and their derivatives. Glycerin Esters of Fatty Acids include glycerin fatty
acid ester, glycerin acetic acid fatty acid ester, glycerin lactic acid fatty acid ester,
glycerin citric acid fatty acid ester, glycerin succinic acid fatty acid ester, glycerin
diacetyl tartaric acid fatty acid ester, glycerin acetic acid ester, polyglycerin fatty acid
ester, and polyglycerin condensed ricinoleic acid ester.
Content Specifications of Glycerin Esters of Fatty Acids
Description Glycerin Esters of Fatty Acids occur as colorless to brown powders, flakes,
coarse powders, or granular or waxy lumps, or are a colorless to brown semi-fluids
or liquids. They are odorless or have a characteristic odor.
Identification (1) To approximately 5 g of Glycerin Ester of Fatty Acid (in case of
glycerol acetic acid ester, 1.5 g), add 50 mL of ethanolic potassium hydroxide
solution, equip with a reflux condenser, heat in a water bath for 1 hour, and
evaporate the ethanol to an almost dry state. Then, add 50 mL of diluted
hydrochloric acid (1→9), shake well, and separate the produced fatty acid by
extracting three times with 40 mL of petroleum ether․methyl ethyl ketone mixture (7
: 1) each time. Stir the water layer well, add sodium hydroxide solution (1→9) until
it is almost neutral, and concentrate under reduced pressure in a water bath. Add 20
mL of methanol at about 40℃, shake well, cool, filter, and evaporate the methanol of
the filtrate in a water bath. Perform Thin-Layer Chromatography on 5μl of the test
solution, using a solution (1→10) of the residue dissolved in methanol as the test
solution. methanol glycerin mixture (9:1) as the reference solution, and, n-butanol․
methanol․chloroform mixture (5:3:2) as the developing solvent. In cases of glycerin
esters, a white spot is observed at the same position as the reference solution and
in cases of polyglycerin ester, a white spot or a white band-shaped spot is observed
at a position not above that of the reference solution. For the thin layer plate. use
silica gel for thin-layer chromatography dried at 110℃ for 1 hour as the support.
Stop the development when the solvent front rises 15 cm above the original line.
Air-dry, heat at 110℃ for 10 minutes to remove the solvent, cool, spray the thymol․
sulfuric acid solution, and heat at 110℃ for 20 minutes to develop the color.
(2) Except in the case of glycerin acetic acid ester : Combine the petroleum ether․
493
 methyl ethyl ketone layers obtained by separation in (1) above, and evaporate the
solvent. An oily substance or a white to yellow-white solid remains. When add 5 mL
of ether to 0.1 g of the residue and shake, it is dissolves.
(3) Except in the cases of glycerin fatty acid ester and polyglycerin ester : Add 50 mL
of water to 5 mL of the test solution of (1) above, and shake. in cases of glycerin
acetic acid fatty acid ester and glycerin acetic acid ester, the solution responds to
the test for Acetate; in the case of glycerin lactic acid fatty acid ester, to that for
Lactate; in the case of glycerin citric acid fatty acid ester, to that for Citrate (B); in
the case of glycerin succinic acid fatty acid ester, to that for Succinate; and in the
case of glycerin diacetyl tartaric acid fatty acid ester, to those for Acetate and
Tartrate, respectively.
(4) In case of polyglycerin condensed ricinoleic acid ester: Combine the petroleum
ether-methyl ethyl ketone layers obtained by separation in (1) above. Wash this
solution twice with 50 mL of water each time, dehydrate with anhydrous sodium
sulfate, filter, and remove the solvent by warming under reduced pressure. When
accurately weigh about 1 g of the residue, put this into a 200mL round bottom-type
flask and proceed as directed under Hydroxyl Value in Fats and Related Substances,
the hydroxyl value is 150～170. For measuring acid value, use about 0.5 g of the
residue.
Purity (1) Acid Value : Dissolve about 6 g of Glycerin Esters of Fatty acid, accurately
weighed, in a mixture of ethanol and ester (1:1) and proceed as directed under Acid
Value in Fats and Related substances Tests. Glycerin fatty acid ester, Glycerin acetic
acid fatty acid ester, Glycerin lactic acid fatty acid ester, Glycerin acetic acid ester
should not be more than 6.0, Polyglycerin fatty acid ester, Polyglycerin condensed
ricinoleic acid ester should not be more than 12, Glycerol citric acid fatty acid ester
should not be more than 100, Glycerin succinic acid fatty acid ester, Glycerin
diacetyl tartaric acid ester should not be more than 60～120.
(2) Arsenic : It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(3) Lead : When 5.0 g of Glycerin Esters of Fatty acid is tested by Atomic
Absorption Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy,
its content should not be more than 2.0 ppm.
(4) Cadmium : When 5.0 g of Glycerin Esters of Fatty acid is tested by Atomic
Absorption Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy,
its content should not be more than 1.0 ppm.
(5) Mercury : When Glycerin Esters of Fatty acid is tested by Mercury Limit Test, its
content should not be more than 1.0 ppm.
(6) Polyoxyethylene : Weigh 1 g of Glycerin Esters of Fatty Acids, transfer into a 200
mL flask, add 25 mL of ethanolic potassium hydroxide solution, equip with a ground
reflux condenser, and boil on a water bath for 1 hour while shaking occasionally.
Evaporate the ethanol on a water bath or under reduced pressure until it becomes
almost dry, add 20 mL of diluted sulfuric acid (3→100), shake well while warming,
add 15 mL of ammonium thiocyanate cobalt nitrate solution, shake well, add 10 mL of
494
 chloroform, shake again, and allow to stand. The color of the chloroform layer does
not change to blue.
Residue on Ignition When 1 g of Glycerin Esters of Fatty Acids, accurately weighed, is
tested by thermogravimetric analysis at 800 ± 25℃, the amount of residue should not
be more than 0.5%.

495
 Glycine

Chemical Formula: C2H5O2N

Molecular Weight: 75.07 INS No.: 640

Synonyms: Aminoacetic acid CAS No.: 56-40-6

Compositional Specifications of Glycine

Content Glycine, when calculated on the dried basis, contains 98.5～101.5% of glycine
(C2H5O2N).
Description Glycine occurs as white crystals or crystalline powder, having a sweet taste.
Identification (1) To 5 mL of solution of Glycine (1→10), add 5 drops of dilute
hydrochloric acid and 1 mL of sodium nitrite solution, colorless gas is generated.
(2) Take 5 drops of the resulting solution above (1), transfer into small test tube and
boil for a while and evaporate to dryness in a drying oven at 120℃ and cool. To
dried residues, add 5～6 drops of chromotropic acid, which is then heated for 10
minutes in a water bath. The solution shows a deep violet color.
(3) To 5 mL of Monosodium L-Glutamate solution (1→1,000), add 1 mL of ninhydrin
solution (1→1,000), and heat for 3 minutes. A purple color develops.
Purity (1) Clarity and Color of Solution : When dissolve 1 g of Glycine in 10 mL of
water, it should be colorless and clear.
(2) pH : pH of Glycine solution (1→10) is within a range of 5.5～7.0.
(3) Chloride : When 0.5 g of Glycine is tested by Chloride Limit Test, the content
should not be more than the amount that corresponds to 0.3 mL of 0.01N
hydrochloric acid.
(4) Arsenic : It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(5) Lead : When 5.0 g of Glycine is tested by Atomic Absorption Spectrophotometry
or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content should not be more
than 5.0 ppm.
(6) Mercury : When Glycine is tested by Mercury Limit Test, its content should not be
more than 1.0 ppm.
Loss on Drying When Glycine is dried for 3 hours at 105℃, the weight loss should not
be more than 0.2%.
Residue on Ignition 1 g of Glycine proceed as directed under Residues on ignition, it
should not be more than 0.1%.
Assay Accurately weigh about 0.15 g of Glycine and dissolve in 3 mL of formic acid.
Add 50 mL of glacial acetic acid, and titrated with 0.1 N perchloric acid (indicator :
0.5 mL of α-naphtholbenzein solution). The end point is where the solution changes its
color from brown to green. Separately, a blank test is carried out by the same
496
method.
1 mL of 0.1 N perchloric acid = 7.507 mg of C2H5O2N

497
 β -Glycosidase
Definition β-Glycosidase is the enzyme, which is obtained from the culture of Penicillium
multicolor. Diluent or stabilizer can be added for the purpose of activity adjustment
and quality preservation.
Compositional Specifications of β-Glycosidase
Description Tannase is a white ～ pale yellow powder.
Identification When β-Glycosidase is proceeded as directed under Activity Test, it should
have the activity as β-Glycosidase.
Purity (1) Arsenic : It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(2) Lead : When 5.0 g of β-Glycosidase is tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content
should not be more than 5.0 ppm.
(3) Coliform Group: β-Glycosidase is tested by Microbiological Method for 〔Coliform
Group〕in General Testing Methods in 「Standards and Specifications for Foods」. It
should contain not more than 30 per 1g of this product.
(4) Salmonella : β-Glycosidase is tested by Microbiological Method for 〔Salmonella〕
in General Testing Methods in 「Standards and Specifications for Foods」. It should
be negative(-).
(5) E. Coli : When β-Glycosidase is tested by Microbe Test Methods for E. Coli in
General Test Method 「Standards and Specifications for Foods」, it should be
negative (-).
Activity Test (activity) Analysis Principle: The activity test is based on the hydrolysis of
4-Nitrophenyl-primeveroside substrate for 10minutes at 40℃(pH 5.5).
Preparation of Test Solution : Sample dissolve in 20mM of acetic acid buffer solution.
Following below method, Test Solution should be prepared in order that the range of
absorbance is 0.3 ～ 0.7.
Test Procedure : 2.0 mL of substrate solution is added to a 25 × 150mm test
tube(for enzyme test) and isothermalized for 5 minutes in a 40℃ water bath. 0.45mL
of Test Solution is added in the test tube, and shaken. Isothermalize again for 10
minutes in a 40℃ water bath, and add 2.5mL of 0.5M sodium carbonate. Separately,
2mL of Substrate Solution is added in the test tube for Enzyme Blank Test, and
isothermalized for 5 minutes in a 40℃ water bath. Add 2.5mL of 0.5M sodium
carbonate. Cover with appropriate stopper. Up side down several times and shake. Add
0.45mL of Test Solution and isothermalize again for 10 minutes in a 40℃ water bath.
Control Solution is Enzyme Blank Test Solution and the absorbance is measured with
1cm of its liquid layer at 412nm. The enzyme activity is calculated following the
formula.
β-Glycosidase(U/g) (S -B ) × V
A A
×
1
= f × 10 w

SA : Absorbance of Enzyme Test Solution

498
 BA : Absorbance of Enzyme Blank Test Solution
V : The amount of final reaction solution(mL)
f : Absorbance coefficient measured with standard 4-nitrophenol solution
10: Reaction time(minutes)
w : Weight of sample(g) contained final reaction solution
Definition of Activity : 1 β-Glycosidase unit corresponds to the amount of enzyme,
which isolated from 1μmol of ρ-nitrophenol per minute under the above test conditions
Solutions
20mM acetic acid solution : 1.6g of sodium acetic acid(anhydrous) dissolve in water to
make 1,000 mL volume
20mM acetic acid solution : 1.2 g of actic acid solution dissolvee in water to make
1,000 mL volume
20mM acetic acid buffer solution(pH 5.5) : Stir continually 20mM acetic acid solution
and add 20mM acetic acid solution to adjust
to pH 5.5
20mM substrate solution: 43.34mg of 4-Nitrophenyl-primeveroside(MW=433.4) dissolve
in 20mM acetic acid buffer solution, and make 50mL volume.
0.5M sodium carbonate solution : 5.3g of sodium carbonate dissolve and made up
100mL.
Standard 4-Nitrophenol solution : 4-nitrophenol is dried advance. 139.0 mg of
4-nitrophenol is precisely weighted, and dissolved in 20mM acetic acid buffer
solution to make 100mL. 1mL of this solution should contain 100μmol of
nitrophenol. Dilute with 20mM acetic acid buffer solution to contain each 40.
80, 120, 160 and 200μmol per 1mL of this solution. 8 mL of 4-Nitrophenol
solution of each concentrate is added to each test tube(five test tubes).
Isothermalize for 5 minutes in a 40℃ water bath. Add 10mL of 0.5M sodium
carbonate solution, and mix. Water is used as reference solution. Absorbance
is measured by 1cm of the liquid layer at 412nm, and the curve based on the
amount of p-nitrophenol is prepared. the curve should be passed zero point
and straight line. The average absorbance coefficient(f) of diluted solution is
calculated to divide the absorbance of each diluted solution into the
concentrate of p-nitrophenol(μmol/mL), and the absorbance is measured.
Stotage standard of β-Glycosidase
β-Glycosidase should be stored in a hermetic container in a cold dark place.

499
 Gold Leaf
INS No.: 175
Synonyms: Pigment metal 3; Aurum CAS No.: 7440-57-5

Definition Gold Leaf is a thin sheet of gold.

Compositional Specifications of Gold Leaf
Content Gold Leaf should contain no less than 94.4% of gold (Au).
Description Gold Leaf is yellow extremely thin and soft sheet.
Identification (1) Gold Leaf is insoluble in hydrochloric acid, nitric acid, and sulfuric acid
but soluble in aqua Regia.
(2) 0.01 g of Gold Leaf dissolve in 5 mL mixed solution of nitric acid : hydrochloric
acid : water (1：4：5) by heating. Cool the solution, 2 mL of hydrochloric acid is
added to this solution, which is then concentrated by heating in a water bath. This
process is repeated 4 times to remove nitric acid. 20 mL of water is added to the
resulting residue, where sodium hydroxide solution is added to adjust the acidity to
slightly acid. When 1 mL of 5-(p-dimethylamino- benzylidine)rhodanine solution in
ethyl alcohol (1→3,000) to the resulting solution, it shows reddish violet in color.
Purity (1) Arsenic： It should be no more than 5.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(2) Copper : Weight 0.2 g of Gold Leaf and add aqua regia to dissolve Gold Leaf by
heating. If the precipitate of silver chloride are produced, add hydrochloric acid until
the precipitate is completely dissolved. After cooling, add hydrochloric acid to make
10 mL(Test solution). When the test solution is carried by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content
should not be more than 50 ppm.
Aqua regia : Mix hydrochloric acid and nitric acid in the proportion of 3:1. Prepare
Aqua regia when using it.
Assay 20 mL of dilute nitric acid (1→2) is added to precisely weighted 0.5 g of Gold
Leaf, which is heated for 10 minutes at 50℃ or lower. It is then thermally decomposed
with 30 mL of aqua Regina, where water is added to bring the total volume to exactly
100 mL. 3 mL of the resulting solution is diluted to 200 mL with water. 5 mL of this
solution is further diluted to 100 mL (Test Solution). Separately, 5 mL of gold standard
solution (1 mL ＝ 1,000 μg Au) for atomic absorption spectrophotometer is diluted to
50 mL with water. 2, 4, 6, 8, and 10 mL each of this solution is further diluted to 100
mL with water (Standard Solutions). Test Solution and each Standard Solution are
analyzed with atomic absorption spectrophotometer by the following Operation
Conditions. The content of gold is obtained from a calibration curve prepared from
Standard Solutions.
Operation Conditions
500
-Gas ： flammable gas : acetylene or hydrogen
Retarding gas : air
-Lamp ： Gold, hallow cathode lamp
-Wavelength ： 242.8 nm

501
 Grape Juice Color
Definition Grape Juice Color is a pigment obtained after removing precipitates from
juice extracts of grapes (Vitis labrusca Linné or Vitis vinifera Linné) of vitaceae. It
major pigment component is malvidin-3-glycoside. Dilutant, stabilizer, or solvent can be
added for the purpose of color value adjustment and quality preservation.
Compositional Specifications of Grape Juice Color
Content Color value of Grape Juice Color should not be less than the labelled value.
Description Grape Juice Color is dark red liquid, paste, powder, or paste with a slight
characteristic scent.
Identification (1) A solution of Grape Juice Color in citrate buffer solution (pH 3.0, 1→
100) is red in color and has a maximum absorption band near 525 nm.
(2) When the solution in (1) is alkalinized with sodium hydroxide solution (1→25), its
color changes to dark green.
Purity (1) Arsenic : It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(2) Lead : When 5.0 g of Grape Juice Color is tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content
should not be more than 10.0 ppm.
Assay Appropriate amount of Grape Juice Color is precisely weighted so that the
absorption is within 0.3～0.7 and dissolved in citric acid buffer solution (pH 3.0) so that
the total volume is 100 mL (Test Solution). If necessary, the solution is centrifuged
and the supernatant is used. Using citric acid buffer solution (pH 3.0) as a reference
solution, absorption A is measured at the maximum absorption near 525 nm with 1cm
path length. Color value is obtained using the following equation.
Color Value( ) ＝ A × 10
Weight of the sample(g)

∘Citric acid buffer solution (pH 3.0)

Solution 1 ： 1 ℓ of solution containing 121g of citric acid (C6H8O7 H2O).
Solution 2 ： 1 ℓ of solution containing 71.6 g of dibasic sodium phosphate
(Na2HPO4 12H2O).
Solution 1 and Solution 2 are mixed well (159 : 41) and its pH is adjusted to 3.0.

502
 Grape Skin Extract
Synonyms: Grape skin color; Enociania INS No.: 163(ii)

Definition Grape Skin Extract is a pigment obtained from skins of grapes(Vitis labrusca
Linné or Vitis vinifera Linné) of vitaceae by water extracting. Its major pigment
component is anthocyanin. Dilutant, stabilizer, or solvent can be added for the purpose of
color value adjustment and quality preservation.
Compositional Specifications of Grape Skin Extract
Content Color value ( ) of Grape Skin Extract should not be less than the labelled value.
Description Grape Skin Extract is red～dark purple liquid, lump, powder, or paste having
a characteristic odor.
Identification (1) Test Solution obtained in Color Value section shows red color and a
maximum absorption is at about 525 nm.
(2) When Test Solution in (1) is alkalinized with sodium hydroxide solution, the color of
the solution becomes dark green.
Purity (1) Arsenic : It should not be more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(2) Lead : When 5.0 g of Grape Skin Extract is tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content
should not be more than 2.0 ppm.
(3) Sulfur Dioxide : Approximately 1 g of Grape Skin Extract is precisely weighed into
a distillation flask with the Wagner Tube as shown in the figure below. It is then
refluxed in 100 mL of water and 25 mL of phosphoric acid (2→7). 25 mL of lead
acetate solution (1→50) is placed in the collector. The condenser is arranged so that
its lower end is immersed in the lead acetate solution. It is distilled until the liquid in
the flask reaches about 100 mL. The end of the condenser is washed with a little
amount of water. Washings is added to the distillate, where 5 mL of hydrochloric
acid and 1 mL of starch solution. It is then titrated with 0.01 N iodine solution. The
content of sulfur dioxide should not be more than 0.005% of 1 Color value ( ) .
Separately, a blank test is carried out.
0.01 N iodine solution 1 mL ＝ 0.3203 mg SO2

503
 Wagner Tube
Assay (Color Value) An adequate amount of Grape Skin Extract so that the measured
absorbance is between 0.3 and 0.7 is accurately weighed and added pH 3.0 citric
acid-dibasic sodium phosphate buffer solution to make up a 100 mL solution. 1 mL of
this solution is diluted to 100 mL with pH 3.0 citric acid-dibasic sodium phosphate
buffer solution, the Test Solution. If necessary, the solution is centrifuged and the
supernatant is used. Using pH 3.0 citric acid-dibasic sodium phosphate buffer solution
as the blank, absorption A is measured at the wavelength of maximum absorption
around 525 nm with 1cm cell. Color value is obtained using the following equation.
Color Value( ) ＝ weight ofA the × 10
sample(g)

∘Citric acid·dibasic sodium phosphate buffer solution (pH 3.0)

Solution 1：0.1 M citric acid solution：1ℓ of solution containing 21.01 g of citric acid
(C6H8O7․H2O).
Solution 2：0.2 M dibasic sodium phosphate solution： 1ℓ of solution containing 71.63
g of dibasic sodium phosphate (Na2HPO4․12H2O).
Solution 1 and Solution 2 are mixed well (159:41) and its pH is adjusted to 3.0.

504
 Grape Seed Extract
Definition Grape Seed Extract is obtained from the seeds of the grapes(Vitis labrusca
LINNE, Vitis vinifera LINNE) of vitaceae. Its major component is proantocyanidin.
Compositional Specifications of Grape Seed Extract
Content Grape Seed Extract contains 90～130% of the labelled as proantocyanidin.
Description Grape Seed Extract is yellow～dark brown powder with slight characteristic
scent and slightly bitter taste.
Identification (1) 0.01 g of Grape Seed Extract dissolve in 10 mL of ethyl alcohol
solution (10→100). When 1～2 drops of ferric chloride solution are added to this
solution, it shows deep green～greenish brown color.
(2) 0.1 g of Grape Seed Extract dissolve in 10 mL of ethyl alcohol solution (10→100).
When 1 mL of hydrochloric acid is added to this solution and heated in a water bath,
it becomes red in color.
Purity (1) Arsenic : It should not be more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(2) Lead : When 5.0 g of Grape Seed Extract is tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content
should not be more than 10.0 ppm.
(3) E.coli : When Grape Seed Extract is tested by Microbe Test Methods for E.coli in
General Test Method of「Standards and Specifications for Foods」, it should be
negative (-).
Loss on Drying When 3 g of Grape Seed Extract is precisely weighted and dried for 3
hours at 105 ℃, the weight loss should not be more than 10 %.
Assay Grape Seed Extract is precisely weighted (so that the concentration of
proanthocyanidin is 10∼50 mg) and dissolved in methyl alcohol (total volume = 100
mL, Test Solution). 0.5 mL of Test Solution is placed in a brown test tube, where 3.0
mL of vanillin solution in methanol (4→100) is added. It is stirred for 10 seconds. After
adding exactly 1.5 mL of hydrochloric acid, it is capped immediately and set aside for
15 minutes at 18∼22℃. Using water as a reference, absorption at 500 nm is
measured. The content of (＋) catechin equivalent is obtained from a standard curve.
This is the content of proanthocyanidin. To correct for anthocyanidin present in the
sample, the same procedure as Test Solution is followed with 3 mL of methanol
instead of vanillin solution in methanol. Absorption is measured at 500 nm using water
as a reference. This absorption value is subtracted from that of Test Solution. The
content of (＋) catechin equivalent in test solution is obtained from a standard curve.
This is the content of proanthocyanidin.
Standard Curve : Methyl alcohol is added to precisely weighted 100 mg of (＋)
catechin standard (total volume = 100 mL). 1, 2, 3, 5 mL of this solution is diluted to
10 mL with methyl alcohol (Standard Solutions). 0.5 mL each of Standard Solution is
placed in a brown test tube, where 3.0 mL of vanillin solution in methanol (4→100) is
added. It is stirred for 10 seconds. After adding exactly 1.5 mL of hydrochloric acid,
it is capped immediately and set aside for 15 minutes at 18∼22℃. Using water as a
505
 reference, absorption of each Standard Solution at 500nm is measured. A standard
curve of absorption vs. concentration of Standard Solution (mg/mL) is prepared.
Separately, a blank test is carried out by following the same procedure as Test
Solution with 0.5 mL of water instead of catechin standard solution.
The content of proanthocyanidin is obtained by the following equation.

Content(%) = A
Weight of the sample(mg)
×
dilution
rate × 100

A : Amount of (＋) catechin equivalent in Test Solution obtained from the standard
curve (mg)

506
 Guar Gum
INS No.: 412
Synonyms: Gum cyamopsis; Guar flour CAS No.: 9000-30-0

Definition Guar gum is obtained by crushing endosperms of guar (Cyamopsis

tetragonolobus TAUB.) seed of leguminosae or extracting by warm water, hot water,
isopropyl alcohol. The major component is polysaccharides.
Compositional Specifications of Guar Gum
Description Guar gum is white～pale yellowish brown powder or particles. It is almost
odorless or has a slight odor.
Identification (1) 2 g of Guar gum is placed in a 400 mL beaker and wetted completely
with 4 mL isopropyl alcohol. While stirring vigorously, 200 mL of water is added and
homogenized. It becomes milky white viscous liquid.
(2) When 100 mL of Test Solution in Identification (1) is boiled for 10 minutes in a
water bath and cooled, the viscosity does not increase.
(3) When small amount of borax is added to 100 mL of Test Solution in Identification
(1), it forms gel.
Purity (1) Arsenic ： It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(2) Lead : When 5.0 g of Guar gum is tested by Atomic Absorption Spectrophotometry
or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content should not be more
than 2.0 ppm.
(3) Cadmium : When 5.0 g of Guar gum is tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content
should not be more than 1.0 ppm.
(4) Mercury : When 0.1 g of Guar gum is tested by Mercury Test Method, its content
should not be more than 1.0ppm.
(5) Starch ： 0.1 g of Guar gum is dissolved in 10 mL of water by boiling for 1
minute, which is then cooled. When 2 drops of iodine solution are added, it should
not show blue.
(6) Isopropyl alcohol : 0.2 g of Guar gum is accurately weighed and transferred into a
300 mL round bottom flask, 200 mL of water is added, boiling chips and 1 mL of
silicone resin are added and mixed well. Distillation column is connected to this, 4
mL of internal standard solution is accurately weighed and added to a 100 mL flask.
While caring for the bubbles not to overflow, distill the solution at the rate of 2~3
mL per 1 minute until the milky liquid becomes about 90 mL, and water is added to
make 100 mL, test solution. However, tert-butyl alcohol (1→1,000) is used as
internal standard solution. Separately, 0.5 g of isopropyl alcohol is accurately
weighed and water is added to make 500 mL, 2 mL of this solution and 4 mL of
507
 internal standard solution is weighed again, water is added to make 100 mL, standard
solution. 2μl of test solution and standard solution is taken respectively, and injected
to gas chromatograph with the following operation condition. Then, ratio of isopropyl
alcohol peak against tert-butyl alcohol peak in test Solution and standard solution,
QT and QS, is calculated separately, and the content of isopropyl alcohol is
calculated by following formula, the content should not be more than 1.0%.
Content of Weightalcohol(g)
of isopropyl QT 2×100
Isopropyl= alcohol(%) × × ×100
Weight of sample(g) QS 500×100
QT : Ratio of isopropyl alcohol peak against tert-butyl alcohol peak in Test Solution
QS : Ratio of isopropyl alcohol peak against tert-butyl alcohol peak in standard solution
Operation Conditions
Column : PLOT Q or equivalent
Detector : Hydrogen Flame Ionization Detector (FID)
Injection temperature : 200℃
Column Temperature : 120℃
Detector temperature : 300℃
Carrier gas : Nitrogen or Helium
(7) Borates : 1 g of Guar Gum is accurately weighed and water is added to make 100
mL (Gel should not be formed). When 10 mL of diluted hydrochloric acid is added
and mixed and 1 drop of this solution is added to turmeric paper(Advantec 07810074
or its equivalent), it should not turn reddish brown.
(8) Total Viable Aerobic Count : When Guar Gum is tested by Microbe Test Methods
for Total Viable Aerobic Count (Number of General Germs) in General Test Method
in 「Standards and Specifications for Foods」, it should not be more than 5,000 CPU
per 1 g
(9) E. Coli : When Guar Gum is tested by Microbe Test Methods for E. Coli in General
Test Method 「Standards and Specifications for Foods」, it should be negative (-).
(10) Salmonella : When Guar Gum is tested by Microbe Test Methods for Salmonella in
General Test Method 「Standards and Specifications for Foods」, it should be
negative (-).
(11) Number of Fungi : When Guar Gum is tested by Microbe Test Methods for
Number of Fungi in General Test Method in 「Standards and Specifications for Food
s」, it should not be more than 500 CFU per 1 g
Acid Insoluble substances 1.5 g of Guar gum is accurately weighed and dissolved it in a
beaker containing 150 mL of water and 1.5 mL sulfuric acid, which is covered with a
watch glass and heated for 6 hours in a water bath. Occasionally, it is stirred with a
glass rod and water is added to supplement the loss. After heating is complete, it is
filtered through a glass filter with constant weight, containing 500 mg of appropriate
508
 filtering aid, accurately weighed. The residue is washed thoroughly with hot water and
dried for 3 hours at 105℃. The weight of the filtering aid is subtracted from the
weight of the residue, which should not be more than 7.0%.
Total Ash When 3 g of Guar gum is accurately weighed and reduced to ash at 600℃,
the content should not be more than 1.5%.
Loss on Drying When 3 g of Guar gum is dried for 5 hours at 105℃, the weight loss
should not be more than 15%.
Protein When Guar gum is proceeded as directed under nitrogen determination method, the
amount should not be more than 10%. (Protein Factor：6.25).

509
 Gum Ghatti
INS No.: 419
Synonyms: Indian gum; Ghatti gum CAS No.: 9000-28-6

Definition Gum Ghatti is a polysaccharide obtained by drying sap that is leached from
stems of Anogeissus latifolia WALL. or plants of the same genus.
Compositional Specifications of Gum Ghatti
Description Gum Ghatti is powder or granule with gray～reddish gray, or pale brown～
dark brown amorphous solid. Gum Ghatti is almost scentless.
Identification (1) When 1 g of Gum Ghatti is dissolved in 5 mL of water, it becomes a
viscous liquid.
(2) To 5 mL of the filtrate which aqueous solution of Gum Ghatt (1→100) is filtered
with diatomite, 0.2 mL of diluted alkaline lead acetate solution(1→5) is added, then
precipitate is not formed or slight precipitate is formed. When 0.5 mL of ammonia
solution is added to this solution, opaque wool shaped precipitate is formed.
(3) The filtrate which aqueous solution of Gum Ghatt(1→50) is filtered with diatomite is
levorotatory.
Purity (1) Arsenic : It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(2) Lead : When 5.0 g of Gum Ghatti is tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content
should not be more than 2.0 ppm.
(3) Acid Insoluble Ash : When Gum Ghatti proceed as directed under Ash and
Acid-Insoluble Ash Limit, the content should not be more than 1.75 %.
(4) Salmonella ： When Gum Ghatti proceed as directed under Microbiological Methods
for Salmonella in General Testing Methods in 「Standards and Specifications for
Foods」, it should be negative (-).
(5) E. coli : When Gum Ghatti proceed as directed under Microbiological Methods for
E. coli in General Testing Methods in 「Standards and Specifications for Foods」, it
should be negative (-).
Loss on Drying When Gum Ghatti is dried for 5 hours at 105℃, the weight loss should
not be more than 14%.
Ash When Gum Ghatti is tested for ash content, it should not be more than 6%

510
 Heme Iron
Definition Heme Irone is obtained by separating hemoglobin enzymatically. Its component
is Heme iron.
Compositional Specifications of Heme Iron
Content Dried Heme Iron contains 9.0∼27.0% of protoheme (C34H32FeN4O4 ＝ 616.48)
and 1.0∼2.6% of iron (Fe ＝ 55.85).
Description Heme Iron is blackish brown powder or granule. It can be scentless or have
a slight characteristic scent.
Identification (1) 100 mg of Heme Iron is dissolve in 500 mL of pyridine sodium
hydroxide solution. When 15 mg of sodium hyposulfite is added to 5 mL of this
solution, it becomes red.
(2) 10 mg of Heme Iron is added to a 100 mL flask for decomposition, where 5 mL of
nitric acid is added. When it is heat treated, it becomes yellow. Cool and alkalinize it
with ammonia water. The color becomes orange yellow.
Purity (1) Arsenic : It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(2) Lead : When 5.0 g of Heme Iron is tested by Atomic Absorption Spectrophotometry
or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content should not be more
than 2.0 ppm.
Loss on Drying When Heme Iron is dried for 3 hours at 105℃, the weight loss should
not be more than 6%.
Residue on Ignition When thermogravimetric analysis is done with precisely weighted 2
g of Heme Iron, the amount of Residue on Ignition should not be more than 8%.
Assay (1) Protoheme ： 100 mg of Heme Iron is precisely weighted into a 250 mL flask
and dissolved in pyridine sodium hydroxide solution so that the total volume is exactly
250 mL (Test Solution). 1 mL of Test Solution is accurately sodium hyposulfite
transferred into a test tube, where 2 mL of pyridine sodium hydroxide solution is
added and 3 mg of sodium hyposulfite is added immediately. Absorption of the resulting
solution is measured at 557 nm using pyridine sodium hydroxide solution as a
reference. Separately, 1 mL of each hematin Standard Solution is added to a test tube,
where 2 mL of pyridine sodium hydroxide solution is added and 3 mg of sodium
hyposulfite is added immediately. Absorption of each solution is measured by following
the same procedure as Test Solution and a calibration curve is prepared. The content
of protoheme is obtained from the calibration curve and the absorption of Test
Solution.
(2) Iron ： 20∼50 mg of this additive is precisely weighted into a 100 mL flask for
decomposition, where 5～10 mL of nitric acid is added. It is gently heated until the
evolution brown nitrogen oxide gas subsides. Cool the flask to room temperature, add
2 mL of perchloric acid to the flask, which is heated gently and then strongly until the
solution becomes colorless and white smoke subsides. Cool and transfer the reaction
mixture into a flask(Recovery). The flask for decomposition is washed with water,
which is added to this flask. pH of the solution is adjusted to 3～8 with ammonia
511
 solution. Dilute the resulting solution to exactly 100 mL with water (Test Solution). 10
mL of Test Solution is added to a 100 mL flask and diluted to approximately 50 mL
with water. To this solution, 1 mL of hydroxylamine hydrochloride solution (1→4), 5
mL of ο-phenanthroline solution in hydrochloric acid (0.12→100), and 20 mL of acetate
buffer solution (pH 4.2) are added. The total volume is brought up to 100 mL with
water. Set it aside for 1 hour at room temperature, measure absorption at 510nm.
Separately, 0.5, 1, 5, 10, 20 mL each of iron standard solution is placed in 100 mL
flask, where 3 mL hydrochloric acid (1→4) and water are added to bring the total
volume to approximately 50 mL. The same procedure as Test Solution is followed with
these standard solutions. Absorption is measured to prepare a calibration curve. The
content of iron is obtained from the calibration curve and the absorption of the Test
Solution.
Solutions
∘Pyridine Sodium Hydroxide Solution ： 100 mL of pyridine and 30 mL of 1 N sodium
hydroxide solution are mixed and the total
volume is brought up to exactly 300 mL with
water.
∘Acetate Buffer Solution (pH 4.2) ： 250 g of ammonium acetate is dissolve in 120 mL
of water and 700 mL of acetic acid. The solution is
diluted with water to 1,000 mL.
∘Hematin Standard Solution ： Hematin is dried for 3 hours at 100℃. 100 mg is precisely
weighted and dissolved in pyridine sodium hydroxide
solution so that the total volume is exactly 100 mL
(hematin standard solution, undiluted). 1, 5, 10, and 20
mL. each of undiluted standard solution is diluted to 100
mL with pyridine sodium hydroxide solution. It is further
diluted so that 1 mL of the final dilution contains 1, 5, 10,
and 20 μg of hematin (Hematin Standard Solution).
∘Iron Standard Solution (for heme iron) ： 7.0213 g of ferrous ammonium sulfate
(Fe(NH4)2(SO4)2․6H2O) is precisely weighted and dissolved in a
small amount of water. 3 mL of dilute hydrochloric acid (1→4)
and water are added to bring the total volume to exactly 1,000
mL (Iron Standard Solution). From this solution, 10 mL is taken
and made 100 mL by adding water. This is the standard
solution (1 mL of this solution contains 100 ㎍ of Fe).

512
 Hemicellulase
Definition Hemicellulase is an enzyme obtained from cultures of Aspergillus niger and its
variety. Diluent or stabilizer can be added for the purpose of activity adjustment and
quality preservation.
Compositional Specifications of Hemicellulase
Description Hemicellulase is white～dark brown powder, particle, paste or colorless ~
dark brown liquid.
Identification When Hemicellulase is proceeded as directed under Activity Test, it should
have the activity as Hemicellulase.
Purity (1) Arsenic : It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(2) Lead : When 5.0 g of Hemicellulase is tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content
should not be more than 5.0 ppm.
(3) Coliform Group ： When Hemicellulase proceed as directed under Microbiological
Methods for Coliform Group in General Testing Methods in 「Standards and
Specifications for Foods」, it should not contain more than 30 per 1 g of this
product.
(4) Salmonella ： When Hemicellulase proceed as directed under Microbiological
Methods for Salmonella in General Testing Methods in 「Standards and Specifications
for Foods」, it should be negative (-).
(5) E. Coli : When Hemicellulase is tested by Microbe Test Methods for E. Coli in
General Test Method 「Standards and Specifications for Foods」, it should be
negative (-).
Activity Test (Activity)
∘Application and Principle : Activity test is based on enzymatic hydrolysis of Glycosidic
bonding within locust bean gum substrate at pH 4.5, 40℃ temperature. The decrease in
viscosity of the substrate is measured by a viscometer with its scale corrected.
∘Preparation of Test Solution : Test Solution is prepared by dilution so that 1 mL of the
final solution shows variation in relative fluidity of 0.18～0.22 under the conditions
below in 5 minutes. Certain amount of sample is ground in a glass mortar and water is
added. It is diluted in a suitable volumetric flask. Filter the solution through a Whatman
No.1 filter paper or its equivalent prior to use.
∘Test Procedure : A viscometer (scale is previously corrected) is cleanly washed in
water with sufficient detergent. It is then set up vertically in a glass water bath at 40
± 0.1℃. 20 mL of substrate solution and 4 mL of acetate buffer solution are added
into a 50 mL Erlenmeyer flask with a stopper. Prepare 2 for enzyme test and 1 for
substrate blank test per sample. An enzyme test flask is plugged with a stopper and
isothermalized for 15 minutes in a water bath, where accurately 1 mL of Test Solution
is added and well mixed measuring the time. Immediately, 10 mL of the mixed solution
is added to the big branch of the viscometer. Approximately in 2 minutes, the reaction
mixture is sucked in through the thin branch of the viscometer up to the upper scale
513
 using a rubber bulb. Time taken to reach the upper scale is measured in minutes (TR).
Again time taken to reach the lower scale (starting from the upper scale) is measured
in seconds (TT). By repeating the same procedure, TR and TT are measured again.
This is repeated 4 times. Separately, a mixture of 20 mL substrate solution, 4 mL
acetate buffer solution and 1 mL water is added to the big branch of the viscometer.
The time taken to reach the lower scale from the upper scale is measured five times
and an average value is obtained TS(seconds). A blank water test is carried out with
10 mL of water that is isothermalized at 40±0.1℃ by following the same procedure. An
average value of 5 measurements is obtained, TW(seconds). Using the following
equation, relative fluidity and TN values are obtained for each of 4 measurements of
effluent time (TT) and reaction time (TR).
TS - TW
FR =
TT - TW
1 TT
TN = (TT/60sec/min) + TR = + TR
2 120

FR : Relative fluidity for each reaction time

TS : Average effluent time for blank substrate test (seconds)
TW : Average effluent time for blank water test (seconds)
TT : Effluent time for enzyme reaction solution (seconds)
TR : Reaction time (minutes) (time taken from "adding the Test Solution" to "before the
measurement of effluent time (TT)")
TN : Reaction time (TR) (minutes) + one half of effluent time for Test Solution (TT) (minutes)
HCU/g = 1,000(FR10 W
- FR5)
A standard curve is prepared using the 4 relative fluidity (FR) values for the 4 reaction
times (TN). This should be a straight line. The slope corresponds to the change in
relative fluidity per minute and is proportional to the amount of enzyme. The optimum
slope of a series of measurements is a better basis for the enzyme activity than a
single value of relative fluidity. FR values at 10 and 5 minutes are measured from the
standard curve. The difference in fluidity should be 0.18～0.22. The enzyme activity is
obtained from the following equation.
FR10 : Relative fluidity at reaction time of 10 minutes
FR5 : Relative fluidity at reaction time of 5 minutes
1,000 : Conversion activity (g to mg)
W : Weight of sample in 1 mL of Test Solution (mg)
Definition of Activity : 1 hemicellulase unit (HCU) is the activity which generate a
change of 1 in relative fluidity for 5 minutes under the above test conditions within a
locust bean gum substrate.
514
Apparatus
-Viscometer : Cannon Fenske Type Viscometer with size 100 corrected scale or its
equivalent.
-Glass water bath : Isothermal glass water bath at 40±0.1℃ or its equivalent.
Agents and Solutions
∘Acetate Buffer Solution (pH 4.5) : pH of 400 mL of 0.２ N acetic acid is adjusted to 4.5
± 0.05 by adding 0.２ N of sodium acetate solution
while stirring continuously.
∘Locust Bean Gum : Quality of powdered locust bean gum varies with substrate lots.
Therefore, when a different lot is used, its quality should be
checked. If each viscosity difference is more than ± 5%, it
cannot be used for the same test.
∘Substrate Solution : 12.5 mL of 0.2 N hydrochloric acid and 250 mL of warm water (70
∼75℃) are added in a mixing container and the mixer is set at a
low speed. 2 g of dried locust bean gum is carefully added so that
it does not splash, and scatter in the container slowly. Using a
rubber police, container wall is scraped down with warm water.
The container is then covered and the solution is mixed for 5
minutes at a high speed. It is then transferred into a 1,000 mL
beaker and cooled to normal temperature. pH of the solution is
adjusted to 6.0 with 0.2 N sodium hydroxide solution. Transfer the
resulting solution into a 1,000 mL volumetric flask and diluted to
1,000 mL with water. It is filtered through a gauze before use.
Storage Standards of Hemicellulase
Hemicellulase is strongly hygroscopic. Store in a cold dark place and well-closed
containers.

515
 Hesperidin
Definition Hesperidin is obtained by purifying the extracts of peels, juices, or seeds of
tangerine (Citrus paradisi MACF.) of rutaceae with water, ethyl alcohol or organic
solvents. Its component is hesperidin.
Compositional Specifications of Hesperidin
Content When Hesperidin is dried, it should contain no less than 95.0% of hesperidin
(C28H34O15 ＝ 610.57).
Description Hesperidin is almost scentless and tasteless white～pale yellow crystallite or
crystalline powder.
Identification (1) When Hesperidin is dissolved in sodium hydroxide solution (1→20) or
heated anhydrous sodium carbonate solution (1→100), it is orange yellow～reddish
yellow in color.
(2) 5 mL of ethyl alcohol and 1 mL of sodium hydroxide solution (1→20) are added to
0.1 g of Hesperidin. When the mixture is boiled for 2～3 minutes and cooled, the
filtrate is yellow in color.
(3) 5 mL of ethyl alcohol is added to 0.1 g of Hesperidin, which is heated, cooled, and
filtered. When 1 mL of hydrochloric acid and 0.01g of magnesium powder are added
to 4 mL of the filtrate, the liquid shows red in color.
(4) 10 mL of hydrochloric acid (1→9) is added to 0.1 g of Hesperidin, which is boiled
for 5 minutes. Cool the solution, it is filtered. The filtrate is neutralized with sodium
hydroxide solution (1→4). When 3 mL of Fehling solution is added to the resulting
solution, red precipitates are formed.
Purity (1) Clarity of Solution ： A solution of 1 g of Hesperidin in 10 mL of sodium
hydroxide solution (4.3→100) should be orange yellow～yellowish brown and almost
clear (or less).
(2) Arsenic : It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(3) Lead : When 5.0 g of Hesperidin is tested by Atomic Absorption Spectrophotometry
or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content should not be more
than 10.0 ppm.
Loss on Drying When 1 g of Hesperidin is dried for 3 hours at 105℃, the weight loss
should not be more than 5%.
Residue on Ignition When thermogravimetric analysis is done with 1 g of Hesperidin, the
amount of residue should not be more than 0.3%.
Assay After drying for 3 hours at 105℃, 50 mg of Hesperidin is precisely weighted and
dissolved in 0.01 N sodium hydroxide solution (total volume = 100 mL). 2 mL of this
solution is diluted to 50 mL with 0.01 N potassium hydroxide solution (Test Solution).
Absorption A of the Test Solution is measured at 286 nm and the content (%) of
Hesperidin is obtained from the following equation.
Content
＝
of hesperidin (C28H34O15)(%) A × 25,000 × 100

516
251.7 Weight of the
sample(mg)

517
 Hexane
Chemical Formula: C6H14
Molecular Weight: 86.18
Synonyms: Mixed paraffinic hydrocarbons CAS No.: 110-54-3

Definition Hexane is obtained near the boiling point of n-hexane, which is petroleum
ingredient, by distillation.
Compositional Specifications of Hexane
Description Hexane is colorless, transparent, volatile liquid with a characteristic scent.
Purity (1) Specific Gravity : Specific gravity of Hexane should be 0.665∼0.687.
(2) Refractive Index : Refractive Index of Hexane should be 1.374∼1.386.
(3) Sulfur Compounds : 5 mL of Hexane and 5 mL of silver nitrate ammonia solution
are well mixed by shaking. When the mixture heated for 5 minutes at 60℃ in
protected from light, it should not becomes brown.
(4) Readily carbonizable substances : 5 mL of Hexane is mixed with 5 mL of 94.5∼
95.5% sulfuric aid by shaking vigorously in a Nestler tube. The color of the sulfuric
acid phase should not be deeper than that of the color standard solution B.
(5) Benzene : 50 mL of Hexane is mixed with 50 mL of internal standard solution, and
use it as the Test Solution. Separately, 50 mL of benzene standard solution is mixed
with 50 mL of internal standard solution, and use it as the Standard Solution. When
these solutions are analyzed with gas chromatography, H/Hs should not be greater
than H'/Hs', where H, Hs, H', and Hs' are indicated peak heights of Test Solution,
internal standard (mixed with Test Solution), Standard Solution, and internal standard
(mixed with Standard Solution), respectively. Internal standard solution is prepared by
diluting 0.5 mL of methyl isobutyl ketone to 100 mL with n-hexane (UV absorption
spectrum measurement grade). Benzene standard solution is prepared by diluting 0.05
mL to 100 mL with n-hexane (UV absorption spectrum measurement grade).
Operation Conditions
-Column : A glass or stainless tube with inner diameter of 3～4 mm and length of 2～3 m
-Column Filler : 177∼250 μ porous support material. It is treated with chloroform
solution that contains polyethylene glycol 6,000 of 10% in weight of
the support material. After removing chloroform, it is dried for use
-Column Temperature : a constant temperature in a range of 50～70℃
-Detector : Flame Ionization Detector (FID)
-Carrier gas and flow rate : Nitrogen, Flow rate is adjusted so that benzene is detected
in approximately 5 minutes.
(6) Distillation Test : When Hexane proceed as directed under Method 2 in Boiling
Point and Amount of Distillate, 95% or more should be extracted at 64∼70℃.
(7) Residue on Evaporation : 150 mL of Hexane is carefully evaporated by heating in a
518
 water bath. When the residue is dried for 30 minutes at 105℃, it's amount should
not be more than 2 mg.
(8) Lead : When 5.0 g of Hexane is tested by Atomic Absorption Spectrophotometry or
Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content should not be more
than 1.0 ppm.
(9) Polycyclic aromatic hydrocarbons : 25 mL of Polycyclic aromatic hydrocarbons is
taken and transferred into a 125 mL separatory funnel. Add 25 mL of n-hexane and
well mixed by shaking. 5 mL of dimethyl sulfoxide is added to the solution, which is
mixed by shaking vigorously for 1 minute and settled until the phase is separated.
Transfer the lower phase into a separatory funnel, where 2 mL of n-hexane is
added, shaken vigorously for 2 minutes, and settled until the phase is separated. The
lower phase is taken and used it as test solution. 5 mL of dimethyl sulfoxide and 25
mL of hexane are weighted, respectively. Shake and mix for 1 minutes, set aside,
and the low phase is used as blank test solution. Absorption of the Test Solution is
measured in a wavelength range of 260～420nm. Separately, 7.0 mg of naphthalene is
accurately weighted. Dissolve in 1,000 mL of isooctane, then this solution is blank
test solution. Absorption of the reference Solution is measured at 275nm wavelength.
When the absorption of test solution is measured at a wavelength range of 260～
420nm, the absorption should not exceed 1/3 of absorption of reference solution
measured at 275 nm wavelength.

519
 Hibiscus Color
Definition Hibiscus Color is a pigment obtained by extracting flowers of rose of Sharon
(Hibiscus sabdariffa Linné) of malvaceae with water. Its major pigment component is
delphinidin-3-sambubioside. Dilutant, stabilizer, or solvent can be added for the purpose
of color value adjustment and quality preservation.
Compositional Specifications of Hibiscus Color
Content Color value of Hibiscus Color should be more than the indicated value.
Description Hibiscus Color is dark red liquid, powder or paste with a slight
characteristic scent.
Identification (1) A solution (1→100) of Hibiscus Color in citric acid buffer solution (pH
3.0) is red in color and has a maximum absorption band near 520 nm.
(2) When the solution in (1) is alkalinized with sodium hydroxide solution (1→25), its
color becomes dark green.
Purity (1) Arsenic : It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(2) Lead : When 5.0 g of Hibiscus Color is tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content
should not be more than 10.0 ppm.
Assay (Color Value) Appropriate amount of Hibiscus Color is precisely weighted so that
the absorption is within 0.3～0.7 and dissolved citrate buffer solution with pH 3.0 so
that the total volume is 100 mL (Test Solution). If necessary, the solution is
centrifuged and the supernatant is used. Using citrate buffer solution with pH 3.0 as a
reference solution, absorption A is measured at 520 nm wavelength with 1cm path
length. Color value is obtained using the following equation.
Color Value ＝
A × 10
weight of the sample(g)

∘Citrate buffer solution (pH 3.0)

Solution 1 ：1ℓ of solution containing 121 g of citric acid (C6H8O7 H2O).
Solution 2： 1ℓ of solution containing 71.6 g of dibasic sodium phosphate (Na2HPO4
12H2O).
Solution 1 and Solution 2 are mixed well (159:41) and its pH is adjusted to 3.0.

520
 L-Histidine

Chemical Formula: C6H9N3O2

Molecular Weight: 155.16 CAS No.: 71-00-1

Compositional Specifications of L-Histidine

Content L-Histidine, when calculated on the dried basis, should contain within a range
of 98.5∼101.5% of L-histidine (C6H9N3O2).
Description L-Histidine is scentless white crystallite or crystalline powder with a slightly
bitter taste.
Identification When 2 mL of bromine solution is added to 5 mL of an aqueous solution
(1→100) of L-Histidine, the color of the solution turns yellow. Upon heating gently, the
solution becomes colorless then reddish brown. Finally, dark gray precipitates are
formed.
Purity (1) Specific Rotation : 11 g of pre-dried material is precisely weighed and
dissolved in 6 N hydrochloric acid so that the total volume becomes 100 mL. The polarity
of this solution should be within a range of ＝ +12.0∼+14.0°
(2) Lead : When 5.0 g of L-Histidine is tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content
should not be more than 5 ppm.
(3) Arsenic : It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(4) Chloride: When 0.07 g of L-Histidine is tested by Chloride Limit Test, its content
should not be more than the amount that corresponds to 0.2 mL of 0.01 N
hydrochloric acid.(Not be more than 0.1%)
Loss on Drying When L-Histidine is dried for 3 hours at 105℃, the loss should not be
more than 0.2%.
Residue on Ignition Residue on ignition of L-Histidineshould not be more than 0.2%.
Assay Dissolve about 0.15 g of L-histidine, previously dried and accurately weighed in
3 mL of formic acid and 50 mL of glacial acetic acid. This solution is titrated with 0.1
N perchloric acid solution (indicator : 2 drops of crystal violet solution in glacial acetic
acid). At the end point, the color of the solution turns from purple to blue. Separately,
a blank experiment is done following the same procedure.
1 mL of 0.1 N perchloric acid solution ＝ 15.52 mg C6H13NO2

521
 L-Histidine Monohydrochloride

Chemical Formula: C6H9O2N3‧HCl‧H2O

Molecular Weight: 209.64 CAS No.: 5934-29-2

Compositional Specifications of L-Histidine Monohydrochloride

Content L-Histidine Monohydrochloride, when calculated on the dried basis, should
contain within a range of 98.0～101.0% of L-histidine monohydrochloride (C6H9O2N3․HC
l․H2O).
Description L-Histidine Monohydrochloride occurs as white crystals or crystalline
powder. It is odorless and has a bitter and slightly acid taste.
Identification (1) Make L-Histidine Monohydrochloride solution (1→10) alkaline with
sodium hydroxide solution(1→4). The solution is levorotatory. Acidify with
hydrochloric acid. It turns dextrorotatory.
(2) To 5 mL of L-Histidine Monohydrochloride solution (1→1,000), add 1 mL of
ninhydrin solution (1→1,000), and heat for 3 minutes. A purple color develops.
(3) L-Histidine Monohydrochloride responds to the test by Chloride Limit Test (2) in
Identification.
(4) To 5 mL of L-Histidine Monohydrochloride solution (1→100), add 2 mL of bromine
solution. The color of the solution changes to yellow. Heat gently. The solution
becomes colorless, then changes to red-brown in color, and finally a blackish
precipitate is formed.
Purity (1) Clarity and Color of Solution : When 1 g of L-Histidine Monohydrochloride is
dissolved in 10 mL of water, the solution should be colorless and should not be more
than almost clear.
(2) pH : pH of L-Histidine Monohydrochloride solution (1→10) should be within a range
of 3.5～4.5.
(3) Specific Rotation : Approximately 5.5 g, previously dried for 3 hours at 98～100℃
and precisely weighed, is dissolved in 6 N hydrochloric acid to make 50 mL. Optical
rotation of this solution should be within a range of ＝ +8.5∼+10.5°.
(4) Arsenic : It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(5) Lead : When 5.0 g of L-Histidine Monohydrochloride is tested by Atomic
Absorption Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy,
its content should not be more than 5.0 ppm.
Loss on Drying When L-Histidine Monohydrochloride is dried for 3 hours at 98～100℃,
the weight loss should not be more than 0.3%.
522
Residue on Ignition When thermogravimetric analysis is done with L-Histidine
Monohydrochloride, the residue should not be more than 0.1%.
Assay Accurately weigh about 0.2 g of L-Histidine Monohydrochloride, previously dried,
and test by Assay for 「L-lysine Monohydrochloride」.
1 mL of 0.1 N perchloric acid = 10.48 mg of C6H9O2N3․HCl․H2O

523
 Hyaluronic Acid
Definition Hyaluronic Acid is obtained by culturing and refining a cockscomb or
Streptococcus zooepidemicus, its component is Hyaluronic acid which has bonding
structure of N- acetylglucosamine and D-glucuronic acid.
Compositional Specifications of Hyaluronic Acid
Content When hyaluronic acid is converted to a dehydrated form, it contains more than
90 % of hyaluronic acid.
Description Hyaluronic acid is hygroscopic white∼pale yellow powder or granules with
slightly characteristic odor.
Identification (1) 0.1 g of hyaluronic acid dissolve in 100 mL of water, 10 mL of the
solution is accurately taken into a test tube, and 2∼3 drops of cetylpyridinium
chloride solution(1→20) are added, then white suspension or precipitates are formed.
(2) 0.1 g of hyaluronic acid dissolve in 100 mL of water, 1 mL of the solution is
accurately taken into a test tube, and 6 mL of sulfuric acid is added. It is heated in
a water bath for 10 minutes, cooled, 0.2 mL of carbazole-ethanol TS is added, and
allow to stand, the solution becomes red∼reddish violet.
Purity (1) Acidity : 100 mL of water is added to 0.1 g of hyaluronic acid, shaken well
and dissolved, then the pH of the solution should be 2.5～3.5.
(2) Arsenic : It should be no more than 2.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(3) Lead : When 5.0 g of hyaluronic acid is tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content
should not be more than 2.0 ppm.
(4) Other acidic mucopolysaccharides : 20 mg of hyaluronic acid is taken, 20 mL of 1N
hydrochloric acid is added, and boiled for 30 minutes in a water bath and cooled. 5
mL of this solution is pipetted, 1.0 mL of 1N barium chloride solution is added, and
allow to stand for 15 minutes, then the turbidity should increase not more than
reference solution. Here, 1 mL of water is added and used as reference solution
instead of 1N barium chloride solution.
(5) Total Viable Aerobic Count : When Hyaluronic acid is tested by Microbe Test
Methods for Total Viable Aerobic Count (Number of General Germs) in General Test
Method in 「Standards and Specifications for Foods」, it should not be more than 1,000
per 1 g.
(6) E. Coli : When 25 g of Hyaluronic acid is tested by Microbe Test Methods for E.
Coli in General Test Method 「Standards and Specifications for Foods」, it should be
negative (-).
Loss on Drying When 1 g of hyaluronic acid is dried for 4 hours at 105℃, the weight
loss should not be more than 10%.
Residue on Ignition When Residue on Ignition analysis is done with accurately weighted
1 g of hyaluronic acid, the content of residue should not be more than 5%.
Assay 0.1 g of hyaluronic acid precisely dried, is accurately weighted, sodium chloride
TS is added, shaken well for 3 hours, and mixed to make exactly 100 mL. 5 mL of
524
 this solution is accurately taken and sodium chloride TS is added to make exactly 100
mL, test solution. Separately, about 0.1 g of glucuronolactone is accurately weighted,
sodium chloride TS is added, and dissolved to make exactly 100 mL. 3 mL of this
solution is taken, sodium choloride TS is added to make exactly 100 mL,
glucuronolactone standard solution. Pipette 5 mL of borax․sulfuric acid solution(0.95→
100) into the test tube with stopper and cool down iced water, 1 mL each of test
solution and glucuronolactone standard solution is added, maintain the temperature of
these solutions become not more than room temperature, first slowly shaken and
mixed, and next, vigorously shaken and mixed. Then it is boiled in a boiling water bath
for 10 minutes, immediately cool down with ice water to room temperature, 0.2 mL of
carbazole-ethanol solution(0.125→100) is added, shaken well and mixed. Again, it is
boiled in a boiling water bath for 15 minutes and immediately cool down with ice water
to room temperature. The solution, which is prepared with 1 mL of sodium chloride
solution in the same manner above, is used as reference solution. The absorbance AT
and AS of test solution and glucuronolactone standard solution at a 530nm wavelength
determine and calculate the content of hyaluronic acid with following equation.

Content(%) = Content of glucuronolactone(mg)×AT × 3 × ×

Weight of sample(mg)×As 5 2.148 100
2= . 1 4 8 Molecular
(378.3)
weight of hyaluronic acid 1 unit
Molecular weight of glucuronolactone (176.12)
AT : Absorbance of test solurion
AS : Absorbance of glucuronolactone standard solution
3/5 : dilution factor

525
 Hydrochloric Acid
Chemical Formula: HCl

Molecular Weight: 36.46 INS No.: 507

Synonyms: Muriatic acid; Hydrogen
chloride CAS No.: 7647-01-0

Compositional Specifications of Hydrochloric Acid

Content Hydrochloric Acid should contain within a range of 90.0～120.0% of the
declared content of hydrogen chloride (HCl = 36.46).
Description Hydrochloric Acid is a colorless to light yellow liquid having a pungent odor.
Identification (1) Hydrochloric Acid solution (1→100) is strongly acidic.
(2) Hydrochloric Acid responds to test of Chloride in Identification.
Purity (1) Sulfate : To 1 mL of Hydrochloric Acid, add water to make 100 mL. Take 5
mL of this solution, add 20 mL of water, and neutralize with ammonia solution. This
solution is tested by Sulfate Limit Test. The amount should be not more than the
amount corresponding to 0.5 mL of 0.01 N sulfuric acid.
(2) Arsenic : It should be no more than 2.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(3) Lead : Accurately weigh 5.0 g of Hydrochloric Acid and add water to make 25 mL,
test solution. When the test solution is tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content
should not be more than 1.0 ppm.
(4) Mercury : When Hydrochloric Acid is tested by Mercury Limit Test, its content
should not be more than 1.0 ppm.
(5) Iron : When 5.0 g of Hydrochloric Acid is precisely weighed and water is added to
make 25 mL, test solution. When the test solution is tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content
should not be more than 5.0 ppm.
(6) Oxidizing substances : Transfer 1 mL of Hydrochloric Acid into a 30 mL test tube,
dilute to 20 mL with freshly boiled and cooled water, and add 1 mL of potassium
iodide solution and 1 mL of starch solution. Stopper the test tube and mix thoroughly,
test solution. The intensity of any blue colour developed does not exceed that
produced in a control prepared similarly but containing 1 mL of 0.001N iodide
(instead of potassium iodide solution) and 1 mL of reagent grade concentrated
hydrochloric acid (instead of sample) (Not more than 30 ppm as chlorine).
(7) Reducing substances : Transfer 1 mL of Hydrochloric Acid into a 30 mL test tube,
dilute to 20 mL with freshly boiled and cooled water, and add 1 mL of potassium
iodide solution, 1 mL of starch solution and 2 mL of 0.001N iodide solution. Stopper
the test tube and mix thoroughly. The blue colour produced is not discharged by 1
mL of the sample. (Not more than 70 ppm as sulfur dioxide).
(8) Residue on Evaporation : Transfer 10 g of Hydrochloric Acid into a tared glass
dish, evaporate to dryness on a steam bath, dry at 105℃ for 30 min, cool in a
526
 desiccator and weigh. The weight of the residue does not exceed 50 mg (not more
than 0.5%).
Residue on Ignition To 100 g of Hydrochloric Acid, add 1 drop of sulfuric acid, and
evaporate to dryness in a water bath. It is then heat treated until the weight becomes
constant. The amount of residue should not be more than 0.02%.
Assay Transfer 20 mL of water into a flask with a ground-glass stopper, accurately
weigh, add about 3 mL of Hydrochloric Acid, and accurately weigh again. Add 25 mL
of water, and titrate with 1 N sodium hydroxide (indicator : 3～5 drops of
bromothymol blue solution).
1 mL of 1 N sodium hydroxide = 36.46 mg of HCl

527
 Hydrogen
Chemical Formula: H2 INS No.: 949

Molecular Weight: 2.00 CAS No.: 1333-74-0

Compositional Specifications of Hydrogen

Content Hydrogen contains no less than 99.9 %(V/V) of indicated activity as
hydrogen(H2)
Description Hydrogen is a colorless, tasteless and scentless gas.
Purity (1) Oxygen : Oxygen analysis of electric chemical type(Galvanic cell) which has
the range of detector, 0～100 ㎕/mL is used in this test. The amount of oxygen in
hydrogen gas should be less 50 ppm when hydrogen gas is passed by operating the
oxygen analysis(Galvanic cell).
(2) Carbon monoxide(CO), carbon oxide(CO2) and methan(CH4) : Carbon monoxide(CO),
carbon oxide(CO2) and methan(CH4) are purged by using nitrogen gas. The injection
amount for appropriate height of the standard gases is adjusted at the chromatograph
which is obtained by inserting standard gases(CO, CO2 and CH4) verified correct
concentration value. Next, standard gases(CO, CO2 and CH4) and sample are inserted
into gas chromatograph. Then, each peak ares should less than 50 ppm when the
peak areas of the sample and standard gases are compared each other.
Operation Condition
Column : Porapak Q or its equivalent
Detector : Flame Ionization Detector(FID)
Thermal Conductivity Detector(TCD)
The amount of injection : Loop injection (1 ～ 2 mL)
Temperature of injection inlet : 120℃
Temperature of detector : 250℃
Temperature of column : Held at 35℃ for 3 minutes and temperature is raised to 25
0℃ at a rate of 35℃ per minute.
Temperature of methanizer : 375℃
Carrier gas and flow rate : helium of more than 99.9995% and 25 ～ 30 mL per
minute
Assay The content of hydrogen gas is calculated by one point standard quantity of the
peak area(or height) obtained from chromatogram by inserting sample and standard gas
verified(99.9% and more than) to gas chromatograph with the following the operation
condition.
Operating Condition
Column : Molecular sieve or its equivalent
Detector : Thermal Conductivity Detector(TCD)
528
The amount of injection : Loop injection (1 ～ 2 mL)
Temperature of injection inlet : 120℃
Temperature of detector : 250℃
Temperature of column : Temperature is raised from 50℃ to 250℃ at a rate of 50℃
per minute.
Carrier gas and flow rate : Argon and nitrogen and 25 ～ 30 mL per minute

529
 Hydrogen Peroxide
Chemical Formula: H2O2
Molecular Weight: 34.01
Synonyms: Dihydrogen dioxide CAS No.: 7722-84-1

Compositional Specifications of Hydrogen Peroxide

Content Hydrogen Peroxide should contain 30.0%∼50.0% of hydrogen peroxide (H2O2=
34.01).
Description Hydrogen Peroxide is a colorless, clear liquid. It is odorless or has a slight
odor.
Identification (1) Hydrogen Peroxide is acidic.
(2) When 5 mL of dilute sulfuric acid and 1 mL of potassium permanganate solution are
added to Hydrogen Peroxide solution (1→10), bubbles are formed and the color of
the solution disappears.
(3) Hydrogen Peroxide responds to the test for peroxide in Identification.
Purity (1) Free Acid : 3 mL of Hydrogen Peroxide is diluted to 50 mL with freshly
boiled and cooled water. When 1 mL of 0.02 N sodium hydroxide solution and 3
drops of phenolphthalein solution are added, the solution should turn red.
(2) Arsenic : It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(3) Lead : To 5.0 g of Hydrogen Peroxide, add 10 mL of water. Add this solution in
small portions to a beaker in a water bath. Gently heat this solution until bubbling
stops. Then, the test solution, 25 mL of 0.5 N nitric acid solution, is tested by
Atomic Absorption Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission
Spectroscopy and its content should not be more than 4.0 ppm.
(4) Tin : To 5.0 g of Hydrogen Peroxide, add 10 mL of water. Add this solution is
added in small portions to a beaker in a water bath. Gently heat the solution until
bubbling stops. Then the volume of the solution becomes 25 mL with 1 N
hydrochloric acid. Use this as test solution. When the test solution is tested by
Atomic Absorption Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission
Spectroscopy and its content should not be more than 10 ppm.
(5) Iron : To 5.0 g of Hydrogen Peroxide, add 10 mL of water. This solution is added
in small portions to a beaker in a water bath. It is gently heated until bubbling
subsides. Then the test solution, 0.5 N nitric acid make to 25 mL, is tested by
Atomic Absorption Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission
Spectroscopy and its content should not be more than 0.5 ppm.
(6) Residue on Evaporation : Accurately weigh 50 g of Hydrogen Peroxide is added in
small portions to a platinum crucible. It is gently heated and evaporated to dryness in
a water bath and cooled. The residues are dried for 1 hour at 105℃ and the amount
should not be more than 3 mg.
(7) Phosphate : To 8 mL of Hydrogen Peroxide, add 10 mL of water and 3 mL of
hydrochloric acid. It is then evaporated to dryness by gently heating in a water bath.
530
 Approximately 30 mL of warm water is added to dissolve the residues, which is then
cooled. Water is added to the solution to bring the total volume to 50 mL, Test
Solution. 5 mL of Test Solution is transferred into a Nestler tube, where 4 mL of
dilute sulfuric acid (1→6) and 1 mL of ammonium molybdate solution (1→20) are
added. It is then well mixed by shaking and set-aside for 3 minutes, where 1 mL of
1-amino-2-naphthol-4- sulfonate solution is added. It is heated for 30 minutes in a
water bath at 60℃ and cooled in running water. The resulting blue color should not
be deeper than that of the solution prepared by the same procedure with 5 mL of
Phosphate standard solution.
Assay Dissolve about 1 g of Hydrogen Peroxide, accurately weigh, in water make to
250 mL. 25 mL of the solution is mixed with 10 mL of dilute sulfuric acid. It is then
titrated with 0.1 N potassium permanganate solution.
1 mL of 0.1 N potassium permanganate solution ＝ 1.701 mg H2O2

531
 Trisodium Citrate
Sodium Citrate

Chemical Formula: C6H5Na3O7‧nH2O(n＝0, 2,

5)
Molecular Weight: 5hydrates 348.15
2hydrates 294.10 INS No.: 331(iii)
anhydrous 258.07
CAS No.:
Synonyms: Tribasic sodium citrate; Sodium 68-04-2(anhydrous)
citrate
6132-04-3(2hydrates)

Definition Trisodium citrate occurs as crystals (dihydrate, pentahydrate) called trisodium

citrate (crystal) and as anhydrous material called trisodium citrate (anhydrous).
Compositional Specifications of Trisodium Citrate
Content Trisodium Citrate, when calculated on the dried basis, should contain within a
range of 99.0～101.0% of trisodium citrate (C6H5Na3O7 = 258.07).
Description Trisodium Citrate occurs as colorless crystals or as white powder. It is
odorless and has a fresh, salty taste.
Identification (1) Trisodium Citrate responds to the test for Citrate and Sodium Salt in
Identification.
Purity (1) Clarity and Color of Solution : When Trisodium Citrate 1 g is dissolved in 20
mL of water, the solution should be colorless and almost clear.
(2) pH : pH of Trisodium Citrate solution (1→20) should be within a range of 7.6～9.0
(3) Sulfate : When 1 g of Trisodium Citrate is tested by Sulfate Limit Test in
Identification, its content should not be more than the amount that corresponds to 0.5
mL of 0.01 N sulfuric acid.
(4) Arsenic : It should be no more than 1.3 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(5) Lead : When 5.0 g of Trisodium Citrate is tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content
should not be more than 1.0 ppm.
(6) Mercury : When Trisodium Citrate is tested by Mercury Limit Test, its content
should not be more than 1.0 ppm.
Loss on Drying When Trisodium Citrate is dried at 180℃ for 4 hours, the weight loss
should be 30.3 % or less for pentahydrate, 13.5 % or less for dihydrate, and 1.0% or
less for anhydrous form.
Assay Dissolve 0.2 g trisodium Citrate, preivously dried at 180℃ for 2 hours and
accurately weighed, in 30 mL of glacial acetic acid (for non-aqueous titration) by
heating. After cooling, the solution is titrated with 0.1 N perchloric acid (indicator : 1
532
mL of crystal violet-acetic acid solution). The end point is where the violet color of
the solution changes to blue and then green. Separately, a blank test is carried out by
the same procedure.
1 mL of 0.1 N perchloric acid = 8.602 mg of C6H5O7Na3

533
 Hydroxycitronellal

Chemical Formula: C10H20O2

Molecular Weight: 172.27 CAS No.: 107-75-5

Compositional Specifications of Hydroxycitronellal

Content Hydroxycitronellal should contain not less than 95.0% of hydroycitronellal
(C10H20O2).
Description Hydroxycitronellal is a colorless to light yellow, transparent liquid having a
characteristic odor.
Identification To 1 mL of Hydroxycitronellal, add 5 mL of sodium hydrogen sulfite
solution, and shake. It evolves heat and dissolves. After cooling, it becomes crystalline
lumps.
Purity (1) Specific Gravity : Specific gravity of Hydroxycitronellal should be within a
range of 0.918～0.923.
(2) Refractive Index : Refractive Index of Hydroxycitronellal should be within a range of
1.447～1.450.
(3) Clarity and Color of Solution : When 1 mL of Hydroxycitronellal is dissolved in 1 mL
of 50% alcohol, the solution should be clear.
(4) Acid Value : Acid value of Hydroxycitronellal is tested by Acid Value in Flavoring
Substance Test. It should not be more than 5.
Assay Accurately weigh about 1 g of Hydroxycitronellal and proceed as directed under
Method 2 in Aldehyde and Ketone Content in Flavoring Substances Tests. In the
procedure, allow the mixture to stand for 1 hour.
1 mL of 0.5 N hydrochloric acid = 86.13 mg of C10H20O2

534
 Hydroxycitronellal Dimethylacetal

Chemical Formula: C12H26O3

Molecular Weight: 218.34 CAS No.: 107-75-5

Compositional Specifications of Hydroxycitronellal Dimethylacetal

Content Hydroxycitronellal Dimethylacetal should contain not less than 95.0% of
hydroxycitronellal dimethylacetal (C12H26O3).
Description Hydroxycitronellal Dimethylacetal is a colorless or slightly yellowish,
transparent liquid having a characteristic odor.
Identification To 1 mL of Hydroxycitronellal Dimethylacetal, add 1 mL of alcohol and 1
mL of 0.5 N sulfuric acid, and heat in a water bath for about 3 minutes while shaking.
An odor of hydroxycitronellal is evolved.
Purity (1) Specific Gravity : Specific gravity of Hydroxycitronellal Dimethylacetal should
be within a range of 0.925～0.930.
(2) Refractive Index : Refractive Index of Hydroxycitronellal Dimethylacetal should be
within a range of 1.441～1.444.
(3) Clarity and Color of Solution : When 1 mL of Hydroxycitronellal Dimethylacetal is
dissolved in 2 mL of 50% alcohol, the solution should be clear.
(4) Acid Value : Acid value of Hydroxycitronellal Dimethylacetal is tested by Acid
Value in Flavoring Substance Test. It should not be more than 1.
(5) Hydroxycitronellal : Accurately weigh about 5 g of Hydroxycitronellal
Dimethylacetal, and proceed as directed under Method 2 in Aldehyde and Ketone
Content in Flavoring Substances Tests. The volume of consumed 0.5 N hydrochloric
acid per 1 g of the sample should not be more than 3 %. In the procedure. allow the
mixture to stand for 1 hour.
Assay Accurately weigh about 1.5 g of Hydroxycitronellal Dimethylacetal and proceed as
directed under Method 1 in Aldehyde and Ketone Content in favoring Substances
Tests. In the procedure, boil the mixture for 5 minutes. Calculate the content by the
following formula:
(a - b) × 109.17
Content (%) ＝ × 100
1,000
a : Volume (mL) of consumed 0.5 N alcoholic solution of potassium hydroxide per 1 g
535
 of the sample,
b : Volume (mL) of consumed 0.5N hydrochloric acid per 1 g of the sample obtained
in Purity (5).

536
 Hydroxypropyl cellulose

INS No.: 463

Synonyms: Cellulose hydroxypropyl ether CAS No.: 9004-64-2

Compositional Specifications of Hydroxypropyl cellulose

Content Hydroxypropyl cellulose, when calculated on the dried basis, should contain not
more than 80.5% of hydroxypropoxyl group (-OC3H6OH).
Description Hydroxypropyl cellulose is scentless white～yellowish fibrous powder or
granule.
Identification (1) When Hydroxypropyl cellulose solution (1→1000) is shaken vigorously,
it generates layer of foams.
(2) When 5 mL of Hydroxypropyl cellulose solution (1→200) is added to 5 mL of 5%
copper sulfate or aluminum sulfate solution, it should not be form precipitates.
Purity (1) pH : pH of Hydroxypropyl cellulose solution (1→100) should be within a
range of 5.0~8.0.
(2) Propylenechlorohydrine : When it is tested by Purify (2) in
「Hydroxypropylmethylcellulose」, the content should not be more than 0.1 ppm.
(3) Lead : Accurately weigh bout 5 g of Hydroxypropyl cellulose and transfer into a
platinum or quartz crucible. Add minute amounts of sulfuric acid and wet, slowly heat
the solution and pre-ash at the temperature as low as possible. Again add 1 mL of
sulfuric acid, slowly heat, ignite until it is ashed at 450～550℃. After completing
ashing, add minute amounts of nitric acid(1→150) to the residue, and dissolved. Add
Nitric acid(1→150) again to make 10 mL, test solution. When 5 g of the test solution
is tested by Atomic Absorption Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma
Emission Spectroscopy, its content should not be more than 2.0 ppm.
Loss on Drying When Hydroxypropyl cellulose is dried for 4 hours at 105℃, the weight
loss should not be more than 10.0%.
Residue on Ignition Residue on ignition of Hydroxypropyl cellulose should not be more
than 0.5%.
Assay About 0.065 g of Hydroxypropyl cellulose, previously dried and accurately
weighed, is transferred into a 5 mL-vial equipped with a pressure tight septum
closure, and 0.065 g of adipic acid, 2.0 mL of the inner standard solution, and 2.0 mL
of hydrogen iodide are added, the vial is stoppered, and its weight is then accurately
measured. However, Octane․o-xylene solution(1→25) is used as the inner standard
solution. The bottle is shaken for 30 sec for mixing, and heated at 150℃ for 30
minutes while shaking and mixing every 5 minute. Then the vial is heated for 30
minutes, cooled and the weight is again accurately measured. When the weight loss is
not more than 0.01 g, the supernatant is used as the test solution. Separately, 0.065 g
of adipic acid, 2.0 mL of the inner standard solution, and 2.0 mL of hydrogen iodide
are put in another pressure tight vial, which is then stoppered, and the weight is
537
 measured accurately. 50 μl of isopropyl iodide is added and the weigh is measured
again accurately. After the bottle is shaken for 30 sec, the supernatant is used as the
standard solution. 1 μl each of the test solutions and standard solutions is injected to
gas chromatograph and the content(%) of the hydroxypropoxyl group is obtained using
the following equation.
the content(%) of the hydroxypropoxyl group Qt Ws ×
(%)= Qs × Weight of 44.17
sample(g)
Ws : Amount (mg) of isopropyl iodide in the standard solution(g)
Qt : The ratio of the peak area of isopropyl iodide to that of octane in the standard
solution
Qs : The ratio of the peak area of isopropyl iodide to that of octane in the test
solution
Pressure tight vial : 5 mL of internal pressure bottle with stopper made of glass.
Inner part of the bottom is cone shaped, 20 mm external diameter, 50mm height
and the capacity to 30 mm is 2 mL. thermal resistance resin, fluoroplastic are
used for a stopper and inner stopper, respectively. However, when heating
before use, check if the content does not leak.
Heater : Metal aluminum block with 60～80mm height, having a hole with a diameter
of 20.6mm, 32mm height. Heater be used which the inner temperature of block
should be controlled at the range of 1℃.
Operation Condition
Capillary Column : DB-5 or its equivalent
Detector : Hydrogen Flame Ionization Detector (FID)
Column Temperature : maintain at 50℃ for 3 minutes, raise up to 100℃ at a rate of 10℃
per minute, then raise up to 250℃ at a rate of 35℃ per minute,
then maintain there at 8 minutes.
Carrier gas : Helium
Injection temperature : 250℃
Detector temperature : 280℃
Flow rate : Adjust to make the peak of octane appear at about 8∼10 minutes
Selection of Column : 1μl of standard solution is weighed and operated under
following operation condition, it is spilled in order of isopropyl iodide, octane.
The column that each peak is completely separated should be used.

538
 Hydroxypropylmethylcellulose

INS No.: 464

CAS No.: 9004-65-3

Compositional Specifications of Hydroxypropylmethylcellulose

Content Hydroxypropylmethylcellulose, when calculated on the dried basis, should contain
within a range of 19.0～30.0% methoxyl group (-OCH3 : 31.04) and 3.0∼12.0%
hydroxypropoxyl group (-OCH2CHOHCH2 : 75.09).
Description Hydroxypropylmethylcellulose is scentless white～yellow fibrous powder or
granule.
Identification (1) When an aqueous solution (0.1→100) of Hydroxypropylmethylcellulose is
shaken vigorously, it generates layer of foams.
(2) When 5 mL of an aqueous solution (0.5→100) of Hydroxypropylmethyl cellulose is
added to 5 mL of 5% copper sulfate or aluminum sulfate solution, it should not be
form precipitates.
Purity (1) pH : Approximately 1 g of Hydroxypropylmethylcellulose is dissolved in water
so that volume to make 100 mL. It should be within a range of 5.0∼8.0.
(2) Propylenechlorohydrine : Weigh 1g of the sample into a centrifue tube and record
weight to the nearest 0.18. Quantitatively add 5.0mL diethyl ether to the sample and
sonicates for 10minutes. Centrifuge the smaple to separate the mixture. Remove a
portion of the diethyl ether extract for CTC analysis. Separately, accurately weigh
0.1 g of propylene chlorohydrin(Aldrich 292087, the mixture of 70% 1-Chloro-2-
propanol and 25% 2-Chloro-1- propanol), bring to a final volume of 100mL with
diethyl ether. Perform serial dilutions (in diethyl ether) of stack standard to achieve a
working calibration rane of 6-25 ng /mL. Inject 1μl of both test and standard
solutions into gas chromatography with following operation condition. Standard
calibration curve is obtained from the peak area against the concentration (ng/mL) of
the each standard solution. Measure peak area of Propylenechlorohydrine in test
solution, calculate the content of Propylenechlorohydrine from prepared calibration
curve, and its content should not be more than 0.1 ppm.
Operation Condition
Capillary Column : DB-WAX(30m×0.53mm, 1μm) or its equivalent
Detector : Electron Capture Detector(ECD)
Temperature at injection hole : 200℃
Column Temperature : held at 35℃ for 7 minutes, raised to 200℃ at a rate of 8℃
per minute and held at 200℃ for 5 minutes.
Detector Temperature : 230℃
Carrier gas : Nitrogen or helium
Flow rate : Adjust retention time about 11.7 minutes for 1-chloro-2-propanol, and
about 12.5 minutes for 2-chloro-1-propanol
539
 (3) Lead : When 5.0 g of Hydroxypropylmethylcellulose is tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content
should not be more than 2.0 ppm.
(4) Cadmium : When 5.0 g of Hydroxypropylmethylcellulose is tested by Atomic
Absorption Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy,
its content should not be more than 1.0 ppm.
(5) Mercury : When Hydroxypropylmethylcellulose is tested by Mercury Limit Test, its
content should not be more than 1.0 ppm.
Loss on Drying When Hydroxypropylmethylcellulose is dried for 3 hours at 105℃, the
loss should not be more than 10%.
Residue on Ignition Residue after ignition should not be more than 1.5% when viscosity
is 50 cps or higher and not more than 3.0% when viscosity is 50 cps or less.
Viscosity is measured according to Purity (1) of「Methylcellulose」.
Assay Approximately 65 mg of Hydroxypropylmethylcellulose is precisely weighed into a
bottle for decomposition (5 mL glass bottle that has a stopper with pressure lining).
65 mg of adipic acid, 2.0 mL of internal standard solution, and 2.0 mL of hydroiodic
acid (must be handled carefully) are added to the bottle and a stopper is placed,
which is precisely weighed. The bottle is shaken for 30 seconds, heated for 20
minutes at 150℃, carefully shaken, and heated for 40 minutes again. After cooling for
45 minutes, the weight is precisely weighed. If the weight loss is less than 10 mg, the
supernatant is used as Test Solution. Separately, 65 mg of adipic acid, 2.0 mL of
internal standard solution, and 2 mL of hydroiodic acid are added to a bottle for
decomposition. After placing a stopper, it is weighed precisely. 15 μl of isopropyl
iodide is added and weighed precisely. Using the same procedure, 45 μl of methyl
iodide is added and weighed. After shaking the bottle for 30 seconds, the supernatant
is used as Standard Solution. 1μl of each solution is injected into a gas
chromatography and the contents (%) of methoxyl group and hydroxypropoxyl group
are obtained using the following equation.
Content of methoxyl group(%) Q × weightW of the
Ta Sa
× 21.86
= QSa sample(mg)

QTb WSb
Content of hydroxypropoxyl group(%) = × weight of the × 44.17
QSb sample(mg)
WSa : The amount of methyl idodide in Standard Solution (mg)
WSb : The amount of isopropyl idodide in Standard Solution (mg)
QSa, QSb : Peak area ratios of methyl idodide and isopropyl iodide vs. internal standard
in Standard Solution
QTa, QTb : Peak area ratios of methyl idodide and isopropyl iodide vs. internal standard
in Test Solution
Operation Conditions
-Column : Diatomite for gas chromatography (Chromosorb WHP or its equivalent)
540
 coated with 10% methyl silicone oil or its equivalent
-Detector : Thermal Conductivity Detector (TCD) or (Hydrogen) Flame Ionization
Detector (FID)
-Temperature at injection hole: 200℃
-Column Temperature : 50℃
-Detector Temperature : 200℃
-Carrier gas : Nitrogen or Helium
-Retention Time : In the order of methyl iodide, isopropyl iodide, and toluene
∘Internal Standard Solution : 0.25 g of toluene is precisely weighed and dissolved in
o-xylene (total volume 50 mL)

541
 Hypochlorous Acid Water
Definition Hypochlorous Acid Water is obtained by electrolysis of hydrochloric acid or
saline solution and main ingredient is Hypochlorous Acid. Strongly acidic hypochlorous
acid water (aqueous solution obtained from both poles by electrolyzing sodium chloride
(not more than 0.2%) in an electrolytic bath with septum composed of anode and
cathode, which are separated by septum), moderately acidic hypochlorous acid water
(aqueous solution obtained from both poles by electrolyzing an valid concentration of
sodium chloride in an electrolytic bath with septum composed of anode and cathode,
which are separated by septum or solution that collect under the anodes added
solution that collect under the cathode) and slightly acidic hypochlorous acid water
(aqueous solution, which is adjusted with valid concentration after adding sodium
chloride to the hypochlorous acid water, in an aseptate electrolytic bath without
septum) are included in this material.
Compositional Specifications of Hypochlorous Acid Water
Content When Hypochlorous Acid Water is quantified, strongly acidic Hypochlorous Acid
Water should contain 20~60 ppm of active chlorine, moderately acidic Hypochlorus Acid
Water should contain 10~60 ppm of active chlorine and slightly acidic Hypochlorous
Acid Water should contain 10~80 ppm of active chlorine.
Description Hypochlorous Acid Water is colorless, odorless or with slight odor of chlorine.
Identification (1) To 5 mL of Hypochlorous Acid Water, 1 mL of sodium hydroxide(1→
2,500) and 0.2 mL of potassium iodide are added, then yellow color develops. When 0.5
mL of starch solution is added to this solution, blue color develops.
(2) To 5 mL of Hypochlorous Acid Water, 0.1 mL of potassium permanganate solution(1
→300) and 1 mL of sulfuric acid(1→20) is added, then red violet color doesn't fade.
(3) To 90 mL of Hypochlorous Acid Water, 100 mL of sodium hydroxide(1→5) is
added, then the solution exhibits an absorption maximum at a wavelength of 290~294
nm.
Purity (1) pH : When pH is determined by glass electrode method, not more than 2.7
for strongly acidic Hypochlorous Acid Water, 2.7~5.0 for moderately acidic
Hypochlorous Acid Water and 5.0~6.5 for slightly acidic Hypochlorous Acid Water.
(2) Residue on Evaporation : When 20.0g of Hypochlorous Acid Water is dried for 2
hours at 110℃ after water is evaporated, the residue should not be more than 0.25%.
Assay 200 g of Hypochlorous Acid Water is precisely weighed, 2 g of potassium iodide and
10 mL of acetic acid(1→4) are added, seal it immediately, and set aside in a dark place
for 15 minutes. Titrate the liberated iodine with 0.01 N sodium thiosulfate (indicator :
starch solution). The endpoint is sometimes when the color of the liquid disappears.
Separately, a blank experiment is done in the same manner.
1 mL of 0.01N sodium thiosulfate solution = 0.3545 mg Cl

542
 Inositol

Chemical Formula: C6H12O6

Molecular Weight: 180.16

Synonyms: 1,2,3,5/4,6-Cyclohexanehexol; CAS No.: 87-89-8
meso-Inositol

Definition Inositol is obtained from decomposition of phytic acid or by separating nectar

or molasses of beet (Beta vulgaris LINNE var. rapa DUMORTIER) of chenopodiaceae.
Its major component is inositol.
Compositional Specifications of Inositol
Content After drying, Inositol should contain not less than 97.0% of inositol (C6H12O6).
Description Inositol is fine, white crystal or crystalline powder with odorless and sweet
taste.
Identification (1) 6 mL of nitric acid is added to 1 mL of aqueous solution (1→50),
which is then evaporated to dryness in a water bath. The residues are dissolved in 1
mL of water, where 0.5 mL of strontium acetate solution (1→10) is added. When this
solution is again evaporated to dryness in a water bath, the resultant residue shows
red color.
(2) Melting point of hexaacetyl inositol obtained in Assay is 212∼216℃.
Purity (1) Melting Point : Melting point should be in a temperature range of 224∼22
7℃.
(2) Chlorides : When 2 g of Inositol is tested for chlorides, the content should not be
more than the amount that corresponds to 0.3 mL of 0.01 N hydrochloric acid.
(3) Sulfates : When 4 g of Inositol is tested for sulfates, the content should not be
more than the amount that corresponds to 0.5 mL of 0.01 N sulfuric acid.
(4) Calcium : 1 g of Inositol is dissolved in 10 mL of water and 1 mL of ammonium
hydroxide solution is added. The resultant solution remains clear for at least 1
minute.
(5) Arsenic : It should be no more than 2.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(6) Lead : When 5.0 g of Inositol is tested by Atomic Absorption Spectrophotometry or
Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content should not be more
than 4.0 ppm.
Loss on Drying When Inositol is dried for 4 hours at 105℃, the weight loss should not
be more than 0.5%.
543
Residue on Ignition After drying at 105℃ for 4 hours, it is tested by Residue on
Ignition, the amount of residue should not be more than 0.1%.
Assay Inositol is dried for 4 hours at 105℃. Approximately 0.2 g of Inositol is precisely
weighed into a 250 mL beaker, where a mixture of 1 mL dilute sulfuric acid and 50
mL anhydrous acetic acid is added. The beaker is covered with a watch glass and
heated for 20 minutes in a water bath. It is then chilled in a ice bath. 100 mL of water
is added to the beaker, which is boiled for 20 minutes. After cooling, the solution is
transferred into a separatory funnel. The beaker is washed with a small amount of
water, which is added to the funnel. The beaker is washed with six successive 30 mL,
25 mL, 20 mL, 15 mL, 10 mL, and 5 mL of chloroform, then extracted, combined all
chloroform extracts, and washed with 10 mL of water. The extract is then filtered
through a pledget of cotton, which is washed with 10 mL of chloroform. The filtrate
and the washings are combined and evaporated to dryness in a water bath. The
residue is dried of 4 hours at 105℃. After cooling, the residue is weighed to obtain
the amount of hexaacetyl inositol (C18H24O12). The content of inositol is calculated by
the following equation.
Weight of Inositol (C6H12O6) (mg) ＝ Weight of Hexaacetyl Inositol (C18H24O12) (mg) × 0.4167

544
 Invertase
β-Fructofuranosidase

Definition Invertase is an enzyme obtained from the culture of Aspergillus aculeatus and
its variety, Aspergillus awamori and its variety, Aspergillus niger and its variety,
Arthrobacter genus, Bacillus genus, Kluyveromyces lactis and its variety,
Saccharomyces cerevisiae and its variety. Dilutant or stabilizer can be added for the
purpose of activity adjustment and quality preservation.
Compositional Specifications of Invertase
Description Invertase is white～deep brown powder, particle, paste or colorless～deep
brown liquid.
Identification When Invertase is proceeded as directed under Activity Test, it should have
the activity as Invertase.
Purity (1) Arsenic : It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(2) Lead ： When 5.0 g of Invertase is tested by Atomic Absorption Spectrophotometry
or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content should not be more
than 5.0 ppm.
(3) Cadmium : When 5.0 g of Invertase is tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content
should not be more than 0.5 ppm.
(4) Coliform Group ： Invertase is tested by Microbe Test Methods for Coliform Group
in General Test Methods in 「Standards and Specifications for Foods」. It should
contain 30 colonies or less per 1g of this product.
(5) Salmonella ： Invertase is tested by Microbe Test Methods for Salmonella in
General Test Methods in 「Standards and Specifications for Foods」. It should be
negative (-).
(6) Total Viable Aerobic Count : When Invertase is tested by Microbe Test Methods
for Total Viable Aerobic Count (Number of General Germs) in General Test Method
in 「Standards and Specifications for Foods」, it should not be more than 50,000
colonies per 1 g.
(7) E. Coli : When Invertase is tested by Microbe Test Methods for E. Coli in General
Test Method 「Standards and Specifications for Foods」, it should be negative (-).
Activity Test (Activity)
∘Analysis Principle : Activity test is based on hydrolysis of sucrose (30 minutes, pH 4.5,
20℃). The degree of hydrolysis is measured by optical rotation of the solution using a
polarimeter.
∘Preparation of Test Solution : The test solution is prepared to obtain the 10 mL of final
diluted solution for which the measured specific rotation using 2 dm cell will fall within
0∼+20. When the sample is solid, it is ground in a mortar adding 5 times or more
amount of water. This is transferred into a volumetric flask, which is then diluted to a
545
 proper concentration. Liquid sample is directly diluted with water.
∘Test Procedure : 100 mL of substrate solution in placed in a 100∼110 mL flask and
equilibrated at 20 ± 0.1℃ for 15minutes in a water bath. Precisely 10 mL of Test
Solution is added to the flask, which is turned upside down 5～6 times to ensure
thorough mix and allowed to stand for 30 minutes in a water bath. If there are
significant amount of insoluble substances, the flask is shaken every 10 minutes and
mixed. When the time is up, approximately 2 g of sodium carbonate (1 hydrate) is
added and dissolved by shaking. If the solution is not alkaline, sodium carbonate is
added to alkalinize the solution. 5 mL of this solution is transferred into a 100 mL
volumetric flask, where 6 drops of neutral lead acetate solution are added and water is
added to bring the total volume to 100 mL. 3 g of filtering aid such as cellulose type
agglomeration agent is added to the solution, which is then filtered through Whatman
No.1 filter paper. First 3 mL of filtrate is discarded. The filtrate should be completely
clear. A blank test is carried out with 100 mL of water containing 10 mL of Test
Solution by processing as the same as the enzyme digesting solution. Polarimeter tube
is washed 3 times with the Test Solution and filled with Test Solution. It is then set
up in the polarimeter and a thermometer (10∼30℃ range with 0.1℃ scale) is inserted.
It is then allowed to be equilibrated at 20℃. Each of solution is measured 5 times and
measured value is averaged. The complete sample value is obtained by subtracting
black value from sample value. Polarimeter tube should be used Path length of 2dm. If
1 dm path length is used, it should be corrected. A standard curve is prepared by
using the values of activity and specific rotation (in Ventzke degree : °Ventzeke).
(note : specific rotation ＝ °Ventzke × 0.346).
Activity Polarization Reading

0.960 0
0.735 +5
0.570 +10
0.420 +15
0.300 +20
0.190 +25
0.090 +30

Activity (A) of Test Solution is obtained from standard curve by interpolation. When the
Test Solution is measured at 20℃ or higher, 0.004 is subtracted from the activity per
1℃. When the Test Solution is measured at 20℃ or lower, 0.004 is added to the
activity per 1℃.
The activity of the enzyme is calculated using the following equation.
IA, units/g＝ A × 2 × 1,000

546
 W
2 : dilution factor
1,000 : conversion factor (mg to g)
W : Weight of sample in 10 mL of Test Solution (mg)
Definition of activity : 1 invertase unit corresponds to the amount of enzyme that
hydrolyzes 77% of sucrose used in the above test conditions.
Solutions
∘Phosphate Buffer Solutions : 115 g of sodium phosphate, monobasic (NaH2PO4ㆍH2O) is
dissolved in water and make 500 mL.
∘Substrate Solution : 100 g of sucrose is dissolved in 300 mL of water, where 20 mL of
phosphate buffer solution is added. The total volume of the solution is brought up to
1,000 mL with water.
∘Neutral Lead Acetate Solution : 31 g of lead acetate (C4H6PbO4ㆍ3H2O) is dissolved in
50 mL of water. pH of the solution is adjusted to 7.0 with sodium hydroxide solution
and the total volume is brought up to 80 mL with water. The solution is filtered
through a Whatman No.1 filter paper or its equivalent. The filtrate is stored in a
container with a stopper.
Storage Standard of Invertase
Invertase should be stored sealing tightly in a cold dark place.

547
 Ion Exchange Resins
Definition Ion Exchange Resins occur as granules, powders, and suspensions called Ion
Exchange Resin (granule), Ion Exchange Resin (powder), and Ion Exchange Resin
(suspension), respectively.
A. Content Specifications of Ion Exchange Resins (Granular Form)
Description Ion Exchange Resin (granule) occurs as a black, brown, light red-brown, or
white, spherical. mass, or granular substance. It is almost odorless.
Identification (1) Cation Exchange Resin : Make a resin column pouring 5 mL of Ion
Exchange Resin (granule) with water into a glass tube for chromatography (internal
diameter: about 1 cm). Flow 25 mL of diluted hydrochloric acid (1→10) at a rate of
about 5 mL per minute. and wash by flowing 100 mL of water at the same rate.
Flow 25 mL of potassium hydroxide solution (1→15) at the same rate, and wash
again by flowing 75 mL of water at the same rate. To 5 mL of the last washings,
add 2 mL of diluted acetic acid (1→20), and add 3 drops of sodium cobalt nitrite
solution. No yellow turbidity appears. Transfer 2 mL of the resin of the resin column
into a test tube, add 5 mL of diluted hydrochloric acid (1→9), shake well for 5
minutes, and filter. Wash the resin on the filter paper with water, and combine the
filtrate and the washings to make about 5 mL. Add 4 mL of sodium hydroxide
solution (1→25) to the solution, shake, add 2 mL of diluted acetic acid (1→20), and
add 3 drops of sodium cobalt nitrite solution. A yellow precipitate is formed.
(2) Anion Exchange Resin : Make a resin column pouring 5 mL of Ion Exchange Resin
(granule) with water into a glass tube for chromatography (internal diameter : about 1
cm). Flow 25 mL of diluted hydrochloric acid (1→10) at a rate of about 5 mL per
minute, and wash by flowing 100 mL of water at the same rate. To 5 mL of the last
washings, add 1 mL of diluted nitric acid (1→9), and add 3 drops of silver nitrate
solution (1→50). No white turbidity appears. Transfer 1 mL of the resin of the resin
column into a test tube, add 3 mL of sodium hydroxide solution (1→25), shake well
for 5 minutes, and filter. Wash the resin on the filter paper with water, and combine
the filtrate and the washings to make about 5 mL. Add 3 mL of diluted nitric acid (1
→9) to the solution, and add 3 drops of silver nitrate solution (1→50). A white
precipitate is formed.
Purity Prepare the sample of the cation exchange resin or the anion exchange resin by
① or ② as appropriate, given below, immerse thoroughly in water, and blot the
adhering water with a filter paper, and use as sample.
① Cation Exchange Resin : Measure 25 mL of Ion Exchange Resin (granule), transfer
into a glass tube for chromatography (internal diameter : about 3 cm), flow 1,000
mL of 10% hydrochloric acid at a rate of 15～20 mL per minute, and wash by
flowing water at the same rate. Measure 10 mL of the washings, and perform the
test by Chloride Limit Test. Wash with water until the amount is not more than the
amount corresponding to 0.3 mL of 0.01 N hydrochloric acid and then prepared the
548
 sample (H form).
② Anion Exchange Resin : Measure 25 mL of Ion Exchange Resin (granule), transfer
into a glass tube for chromatography (internal diameter : about 3 cm), flow 1,000
mL of 4% sodium hydroxide solution at a rate of 15～20 mL per minute, and wash
by flowing water at the same rate. Wash with water until the washings become
neutral with phenolphthalein solution. and then prepare the sample (OH form)
(1) Solids : Weigh 10 g of Ion Exchange Resins. In the case of the cation exchange
resin, dry at 100℃ for 12 hours, and weigh again; in the case of the anion exchange
resin, dry at 40℃ for 12 hours in a vacuum desiccator at 30 mmHg, and weigh again.
The amount of residue should not be less than 2.5 mg.
(2) Water-Soluble Substances : Weigh 10 g of Ion Exchange Resins, transfer into a
cylindrical filter (internal diameter : 28 mm, length : 100 mm), suspend in 1,000 mL
of water, and extract for 5 hours while shaking occasionally. Measure 50 mL of the
extract, evaporate carefully, and dry at 110℃ for 3 hours. Weigh the amount of the
residue should not be more than 2.5 mg. Perform a blank test in the same manner.
(3) Arsenic : It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(4) Lead : When 5.0 g of Ion Exchange Resins is tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content
should not be more than 2.0 ppm.
Total Ion Exchange Capacity
① Cation Exchange Resin : Accurately weigh about 5 g of Ion Exchange Resins
prepared in Purity. Add 500 mL of 0.2 N sodium hydroxide, exactly measured, and
allow to stand for 12 hours while shaking occasionally. Measure exactly 10 mL of
the supernatant, and titrate with 0.1 N sulfuric acid (indicator : 3 drops of methyl
orange solution). Perform a blank test in the same manner, and calculate the total
ion exchange capacity by the following formula : Not less than 1.0 milliequivalent/g.
Total ion exchange capacity =
Volume of 0.1N sulfuric acid Volume of 0.1N sulfuric
consumed in the blank
test(mL)
— acid consumed in this
test(mL) × 5(milliequivalen/g)
Solid(%)
weight of the sample(g) ×
100

② Anion Exchange Resin : Accurately weigh about 5 g of sample A prepared in

Purity. Add 500 mL of 0.2 N hydrochloric acid, exactly measured, and allow to
stand for 12 hours while shaking occasionally. Measure exactly 10 mL of the
supernatant, and titrate with 0.1 N sodium hydroxide (indicator: 3 drops of
phenolphthalein solution). Perform a blank test in the same manner, and calculate
the total ion exchange capacity by he following formula : Not less than 1.0
milliequivalent/g.
549
 Total ion exchange capacity =
Volume of 0.1N sodium Volume of 0.1N sodium
hydroxide consumed in the
blank test(mL)
— hydroxide consumed in
this test(mL) × 5( milliequivalen/g)
Solid(%)
weight of the sample(g) ×
100

B. Content Specifications of Ion Exchange Resins (Powder Form)

Description Ion Exchange Resin (powder) occurs as a black, brown, light brown, or
white, powder. It is almost odorless.
Identification (1) Cation Exchange Resin : Make a layer of resin, pouring 2 g of Ion
Exchange Resin (powder) with water into a pressure filter with membrane filter
(internal Diameter: about 7.5 cm, pore size : 1 μm). Flow 25 mL of diluted
hydrochloric acid (1→9) at a rate of about 5 mL per minute. and wash by flowing
100 mL of water at the same rate. Flow 25 mL of potassium hydroxide solution (1→
15) at the same rate, and wash again by flowing 75 mL of water at the same rate.
To 5 mL of the last washings, add 2 mL of diluted acetic acid (1→20), and add 3
drops of sodium cobalt nitrite solution. Not yellow turbidity appears. Transfer 0.5 g
of the resin of the pressure filter into a test tube, add 5 mL of diluted hydrochloric
acid (1→9), shake well for 5 minutes, and filter. Wash the resin on the filter paper
with water, and combine the filtrate and the washings to make about 5 mL. Add 4
mL of sodium hydroxide solution (1→25) to the solution, shake, add 2 mL of diluted
acetic acid (1→20), and add 3 drops of sodium cobalt nitrite solution. A yellow
precipitate is formed.
(2) Anion Exchange Resin : Make a layer of resin, pouring 2 g of Ion Exchange Resin
(powder) with water into a pressure filter with membrane filter (internal Diameter :
about 7.5 cm, pore size : 1 μm). Flow 25 mL of diluted hydrochloric acid (1→9) at a
rate of about 5 mL per minute, and wash by flowing 100 mL of water at the same
rate. To 5 mL of the last washings, add 1 mL of diluted nitric acid (1→9), and add 3
drops of silver nitrate solution (1→50). Not white turbidity appears. Transfer 0.5 g of
the resin of the resin column into a test tube, add 3 mL of sodium hydroxide solution
(1→25), shake well for 5 minutes, and filter. Wash the resin on the filter paper with
water, and combine the filtrate and the washings to make about 5 mL. Add 3 mL of
diluted nitric acid (1→9) to the solution, and add 3 drops of silver nitrate solution (1
→50). A white precipitate is formed.
Purity Prepare the sample of the cation exchange resin or the anion exchange resin by
① or ② as appropriate, given below, immerse thoroughly in water, and blot the
adhering water with a filter paper, and use as sample.
① Cation Exchange Resin : Make a layer of resin, add 10 g of Ion Exchange Resin
(powder) into a vaccum filter with membrane filter (internal diameter : about 7.5
550
 cm, pore size : 1 μm), flow 1,000 mL of diluted hydrochloric acid (1→10) at a
rate of 15～20 mL per minute, and wash by flowing water at the same rate.
Measure 10 mL of the washings, and perform the test by Chloride Limit Test.
Wash with water until the amount is not more than the amount corresponding to
0.3 mL of 0.01 N hydrochloric acid, and then prepared the sample (H form)
② Anion Exchange Resin : Make a layer of resin, add 10 g of Ion Exchange Resin
(powder) into a vaccum filter with membrane filter (internal diameter : about 7.5
cm, pore size : 1 μm), flow 1,000 mL of sodium hydroxide solution (1→25) at a
rate of 15∼20 mL per minute, and wash by flowing water at the same rate. Wash
with water until the washings become neutral with phenolphthalein solution, and
then prepare the sample (OH form).
(1) Solids : Proceed as directed underPurity (1) in 「Ion exchange Resin (Granule)」.
(2) Water Solubles : 10 g of Ion Exchange Resin (powder) is suspended in 1,000 mL of
water. It is then extracted for 5 hours while stirring occasionally. The suspension is
pressure filtered through a 7.5 cm membrane filter (1 μm pore size). 50 mL of the
filtrate is carefully evaporated and further dried for 3 hours at 110℃. The residue
should not be more than 2.5 mg.
(3) Arsenic : Proceed as directed underPurity (3) in 「Ion exchange Resin (Granule)」.
(4) Lead : When 5.0 g of Ion exchange Resin (Granule) is tested by Atomic
Absorption Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy,
its content should not be more than 2.0 ppm.
Total Ion Exchange Capacity
① Cation Exchange Resin : Accurately weigh about 5 g of sample prepared in Purity.
Add 500 mL of 0.2 N sodium hydroxide, exactly measured, and allow to stand for 12
hours while shaking occasionally. The suspension is pressure-filtered through a 7.5
cm membrane filter (1 μm pore size). Measure exactly 10 mL of the supernatant, and
titrate with 0.1 N sulfuric acid (indicator : 3 drops of methyl orange solution).
Perform a blank test in the same manner, and calculate the total ion exchange
capacity by the following formula : Not less than 1.0 milliequivalent/g.
Total ion exchange capacity =
Volume of 0.1N sulfuric acid Volume of 0.1N sulfuric
consumed in the blank
test(mL)
— acid consumed in this
test(mL) × 5( milliequivalen/g)
Solid(%)
weight of the sample(g) ×
100

② Anion Exchange Resin : Accurately weigh about 5 g of sample prepared in Purity.

Add 500 mL of 0.2 N hydrochloric acid, exactly measured, and allow to stand for 12
hours while shaking occasionally. The suspension is pressure-filtered through a 7.5
cm membrane filter (1 μm pore size). Measure exactly 10 mL of the supernatant, and
titrate with 0.1 N sodium hydroxide (indicator : 3 drops of phenolphthalein solution).
551
 Separately, a blank test is carried out by the same procedure and total ion exchange
capacity is obtained by the following equation. It should not be less than 1.0
milliequivalent/g.
Total ion exchange capacity =
Volume of 0.1N sodium Volume of 0.1N sodium
hydroxide consumed in the
blank test(mL)
— hydroxide consumed in
this test(mL) × 5(milliequivalen/g)
Solid(%)
weight of the sample(g) ×
100

C. Content Specifications of Ion Exchange Resins (Suspension)

Description Ion Exchange Resins (Suspension) is brown, pale reddish brown, or white
suspension. It is almost odorless.
Identification (1) Cation Exchange Resin : 0.5 mL of Ion Exchange Resins (Suspension)
is mixed with 5 mL of water and 1 mL of strongly acidic cation exchange resin,
which is reacted for 1 hour while shaking. It is filtered through gauze. 0.3 g of
sodium chloride is added and mixed for 3 minutes, where 1 drop of methyl red
solution is added. The liquid turns red.
(2) Anion Exchange Resin : 0.5 mL of Ion Exchange Resins (Suspension) is mixed with
5 mL of water and 1 mL of strongly alkaline anion exchange resin, which is reacted
for 1 hour while shaking. It is filtered through gauze. 0.3 g of sodium chloride is
added and mixed for 3 minutes, where 1 drop of phenolphthalein solution is added.
The liquid turns pink.
Purity (1) Solids : 1 g of Ion Exchange Resins (Suspension) is precisely weighed and
dried for 5 hours at 105℃ and weighed. It should not be less than 40 mg.
(2) Water Solubles : 100 mL of Ion Exchange Resins (Suspension) is pressure-filtered
through a 7.5 cm membrane filter (1 μm pore size). 10 mL of the filtrate is carefully
evaporated and then dried for 3 hours at 105℃. The residue should not be more than
50 mg.
(3) Arsenic : It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(4) Lead : When 5.0 g of Ion Exchange Resin (Suspension) is tested by Atomic
Absorption Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy,
its content should not be more than 2.0 ppm.
Total Ion Exchange Capacity
① Cation Exchange Resin : An equivalent amount of 0.2 g of solid is precisely weighed
and eluded through a chromatography glass tube (inner diameter : 1cm) at a flow
rate of approximately 2 mL per minute. This glass tube is filled with 10 mL of
strongly acidic cation exchange resin. Again, approximately 80 mL of water is eluded
at a flow rate of approximately 15～20 mL per minute. The effluent and rinse water
are combined, where approximately 1 g of sodium chloride is added. It is then
552
 titrated with 0.1 N sodium hydroxide solution using a pH meter until the pH of the
solution becomes 7.0. Separately, a blank test is carried out and the total ion
exchange capacity is obtained by the following equation. It should not be less than
1.0 milliequivalent/g.
Total ion exchange capacity =
Volume of 0.1N sodium Volume of 0.1N sodium
hydroxide consumed in the
blank test(mL)
— hydroxide consumed in
this test(mL) × 5(milliequivalen/g)
Solid(%)
weight of the sample(g) ×
100

② Anion Exchange Resin : An equivalent amount of 0.2 g of solid is precisely weighed

and eluded through a chromatography glass tube (inner diameter : 1cm) at a flow
rate of approximately 2 mL per minute. This glass tube is filled 10 mL of strongly
alkaline anion exchange resin. Again, approximately 80 mL of water is eluded at a
flow rate of approximately 15～20 mL per minute. The effluent and rinse water are
combined, where approximately 1 g of sodium chloride is added. It is then titrated
with 0.1 N hydrochloric acid using a pH meter until the pH of the solution becomes
7.0. Separately, a blank test is carried out and the total ion exchange capacity is
obtained by the following equation. It should not be less than 1.0 milliequivalent/g.

Total ion exchange capacity =

Volume of 0.1N hydrochloric Volume of 0.1N
acid consumed in the blank —
test(mL)
hydrochloric acid
consumed in this test(mL) × 5(milliequivalen/g)
Solid(%)
weight of the sample(g) ×
100

553
 α -Ionone

Chemical Formula: C13H20O

Molecular Weight: 192.30

이명: 4-(2,6,6-Trimethyl-2-cyclohexenyl)-
CAS No.: 127-41-3
3-butene-2-one

Compositional Specifications of α-Ionone

Content α-Ionone should contain not less than 90.0% of α-Ionone (C13H20O).
Description α-Ionone is a colorless to light yellow transparent liquid having a
characteristic odor.
Identification (1) To 1 drop of α-Ionone, add 1 mL of water, shake well, add 2 drops of
sodium nitroprusside solution, add 2 drops of sodium hydroxide solution (3→10), and
shake. An orange-red color develops. Add 5 drops of acetic acid (1→3). A light
purple color develops.
(2) To 1～2 drops of α-Ionone, add 2 mL of hydrochloric acid, and shake. The color of
the solution becomes to a yellow color. Add 3 drops of chloral hydrate solution (1→
20), and heat in a water bath. A red-purple color develops.
Purity (1) Specific Gravity : Specific gravity of α-Ionone should be within a range of
0.927～0.933.
(2) Refractive Index : Refractive Index of α-Ionone should be within a range of 1.497～
1.502.
(3) Clarity and Color of Solution : When 1g of α-Ionone is dissolved in 10 mL of 60%
ethanol, it should be clear.
Residues on Ignition When thermogravimetric analysis is done with α-Ionone, the amount
of residues should not be more than 0.05%.
Assay Accurately weigh about 1.3 g of α-Ionone, and proceed as directed under hydroxyl
amine Method 2 in Aldehyde and Ketone Content in Flavoring Substances Tests. In the
procedure, boil the mixture for 1 hour.
1 mL of 0.5 N hydrochloric acid ＝ 96.15 mg C13H20O

554
 β-Ionone

Chemical Formula: C13H20O

Molecular Weight: 192.30

이명: 4-(2,6,6-Trimethyl-1-cyclohexenyl)-
CAS No.: 14901-07-6
3-butene-2one

Compositional Specifications of β-Ionone

Content β-Ionone should contain not less than 90.0% of β-ionone (C13H20O).
Description β-Ionone is colorless～pale yellow transparent liquid with a characteristic
scent.
Identification (1) To 1 drop of β-Ionone, add 1 mL of water shake well, add 2 drops of
sodium nitroprusside solution, add 2 drops of sodium hydroxide solution (3→10), and
shake. A orange-red color develops. Add 5 drops of acetic acid. The color of the
solution becomes light purple.
(2) To 1～2 drops of β-Ionone, add 2 mL of hydrochloric acid shake well, color
becomes yellow, add 3 drops of hydrated chroral solution (1→20), heat in a water
bath, color becomes reddish purple.
Purity (1) Specific Gravity : Specific gravity of β-Ionone should be within a range of
0.940∼0.947.
(2) Refractive Index : Refractive Index β-Ionone of should be within a range of 1.517∼
1.522.
(3) Clarity and Color of Solution : When 1 mL of β-Ionone is dissolved in 4 mL of
70% alcohol, it should be clear.
Residue on Ignition When thermogravimetric analysis is done with β-Ionone, the amount
of residues should not be more than 0.05%.
Assay Approximately 1.3 g of β-Ionone is tested by the procedure in Hydroxylamine
Method 2 in Aldehyde and Ketone Content Measurement for Flavorings. In this case, it
is heated for 1 hour.
1 mL of 0.5 N hydrochloricacid ＝ 96.15 mg C13H20O

555
 Iron Sesquioxide
Chemical Formula: Fe2O3

Molecular Weight: 159.69 INS No.: 172(ii)

Synonyms: Iron oxide red CAS No.: 1309-37-1

Compositional Specifications of Iron Sesquioxide

Content Iron Sesquioxide should contain not less than 98.0% of iron sesquioxide (Fe203).
Description Iron Sesquioxide occurs as a red to yellow-brown powder.
Identification To 1 g of Iron Sesquioxide, add 3 mL of diluted hydrochloric acid (1→2), and
dissolve by heating. The solution responds to the test for Ferric Salt in Identification.
Purity (1) Water Soluble Substances : To 5 g of Iron Sesquioxide, add 200 mL of water,
and boil for 5 minutes. After cooling, add water to make 250 mL, and filter. Discard
50 mL of the initial filtrate, measure exactly 100 mL of the subsequent titrate, and
evaporate to dryness on a water bath. Dry the residue at 105～110℃ for 2 hours.
The content should not be more than 15 mg.
(2) Arsenic : It should be no more than 2.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(3) Lead : 0.2 g of Iron Sesquioxide is weighed and trasnferred into 50 mL flask. Add
10 mL of 9 N hydrochloric acid, 10 mL of water, which is then dissolved by heating
and cooled. Add 20 mL of ascorbic acid-sodium iodide solution and 5 mL of trioctyl
phosphine oxide solution, and shake it to mix for 30 seconds. Keep it to separate the
layer and add water again so that organic layer reaches to neck part of flask. After
shaking to mix it, keep it to separate the layer. This organic solvent layer is used as
test solution. Separately, take 10 mL of lead standard solution and make it precisely
to 100 mL. Accurately take 2 mL of this solution, transfer into 50 mL flask, and
operate under condition as test solution method. This solution is used as reference
solution. When the test solution and reference solution are tested by Atomic
Absorption Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy,
the contents should not be more than 10 ppm.
Ascorbic acid-sodium iodide solution : 10 g of ascorbic acid and 19.3 g sodium
iodide are dissolved in water to make to 100 mL.
Trioctyl phosphine oxide solution : 5 g of trioctyl phosphine oxide is dissolved in
methyl isobutyl ketone to make to 100 mL.
(4) Cadmium : When Iron Sesquioxide is tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content
should not be more than 1.0 ppm.
(5) Mercury : When Iron Sesquioxide is tested by Mercury Limit Test, its content
should not be more than 1.0 ppm.
Assay Accurately weigh about 1 g of Iron Sesquioxide, add 30 mL of hydrochloric acid,
heat until the insoluble substance becomes almost white, and add water to make about
50 mL. Filter the solution, and wash the residue on the filter paper with about 50 mL
of water. Combine the filtrate and the washings, and add water to make exactly 250
556
mL. Measure exactly 25 mL of this solution, and evaporate to about 10 mL. Add 5%
stannous chloride solution while heating until the solution becomes colorless, add 1～2
drops of 5% stannous chloride solution, and cool rapidly. Add 10 mL of mercuric
chloride saturated solution all at once, add 25～30 mL of manganese sulfate solution
and about 100 mL of water, and titrate with 0.1 N potassium permanganate. Perform a
blank test in the same manner, and make any necessary correction.
1 mL of 0.1 N potassium permanganate = 7.985 mg of Fe2O3

557
 Iron, Electrolytic
Compositional Specifications of Electrolytic Iron
Content Electrolytic Iron should contain not less than 97.0% of Iron (Fe).
Description Electrolytic Iron is grayish black powder without gloss.
Identification A solution of Electrolytic Iron in dilute sulfuric acid responds to test of
ferrous salt in Identification.
Purity (1) Acid Insoluble Substances : When Electrolytic Iron is tested according to
Purity (1) for [Reduced Iron], the amount should not be more than 2 mg.
(2) Arsenic : It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(3) Lead : 1.0 g of Electrolytic Iron is weighed and trasnferred into 50 mL flask. Add
10 mL of 9 N hydrochloric acid, 10 mL of water, 20 mL of ascorbic acid-sodium
iodide solution and 5 mL of trioctyl phosphine oxide solution and shake it to mix for
30 seconds. Add keep it to separate the layer and again add water so that organic
layer reaches to neck part of flask. After shaking to mix it, keep it to separate the
layer. This organic solvent layer is used as test solution. Separately, take 10 mL of
lead standard solution and make it precisely to 100 mL. Take 2 mL of this solution
and transfer into 50 mL flask. And operate under condition as test solution method,
this solution is used as reference solution. When it is tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy,
absorbance(luminous intensity) of test solution should not be more than
absorbance(luminous intensity) of reference solution.(not be more than 2.0 ppm.)
Ascorbic acid-sodium iodide solution : 10 g of ascorbic acid and 19.3 g sodium
iodide are dissolved in water to make to 100 mL.
Trioctyl phosphine oxide solution : 5 g of trioctyl phosphine oxide is dissolved in
methyl isobutyl ketone to make to 100 mL.
(4) Mercury : Proceed as directed under Purity (4) in [Reduced Iron]. 2 mL of mercury
standard solution(for reduced iron) is taken and processed by the same procedure as
the test sample (Not more than 2 ppm).
Assay Proceed as directed under Assay in [Reduced Iron].

558
 Iron, Reduced
[Content Specifications of Reduced Iron
Content Iron, Reduced should contain not less than 96.0% of Iron (Fe).
Description Iron, Reduced is scentless black gray powder without gloss.
Identification A solution of Iron, Reduced in dilute sulfuric acid responds to the test for
ferrous reaction in Identification.
Purity (1) Acid Insoluble Substances : 1 g of Iron, Reduced is dissolved in 25 mL of
dilute sulfuric acid, which is heated until the evolution of hydrogen gas stops. It is
then filtered and the residue is washed with water until the reaction of sulfate salts
stops. The residue is heated at 105℃ until the weight becomes constant. The amount
of the residue should not be more than 12.5 mg.
(2) Arsenic : It should be no more than 8.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(3) Lead : 1.0 g of Iron, Reduced is weighed and transferred into 50 mL flask. Add 10
mL of 9 N hydrochloric acid, 10 mL of water, 20 mL of ascorbic acid-sodium iodide
solution and 5 mL of trioctyl phosphine oxide solution and shake it to mix for 30
seconds. Keep it to separate the layer and again add water so that organic layer
reaches to neck part of flask. After shaking to mix it, keep it to separate the layer.
This organic solvent layer is used as test solution. Separately, take 10 mL of lead
standard solution and make it precisely to 100 mL. Take 2 mL of this solution and
transfer into 50 mL flask. And operate under condition as test solution method, this
solution is used as reference solution. When it is tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy,
absorbance(luminous intensity) of test solution should not be more than
absorbance(luminous intensity) of reference solution.(not be more than 10 ppm.)
Ascorbic acid-sodium iodide solution : 10 g of ascorbic acid and 19.3 g sodium
iodide are dissolved in water to make to 100 mL.
Trioctyl phosphine oxide solution : 5 g of trioctyl phosphine oxide is dissolved in
methyl isobutyl ketone to make to 100 mL.
(4) Mercury : 1 g of Iron, Reduced is dissolved in 30 mL of dilute sulfuric acid and
1mL of potassium permanganate solution (3→50) is added (Test Solution).
Hydroxylamine hydrochloride solution (1→5) is added until the purple color of
potassium permanganate in the Test Solution disappears and manganese dioxide
precipitates disappear. Then water is added to bring the total volume to 100 mL
(Test Solution). When the test solution is tested by Hydride Generation-Atomic
Absorption Spectrophotometry, its content should not be more than 5.0 ppm.
Assay Approximately 0.2 g of Iron, Reduced, precisely weighed, is transferred into a
300 mL Erlenmeyer flask, and 50 mL of diluted sulfuric acid is added. A Bunsen valve
stopper is placed and iron is completely dissolved by heating in a water bath. After
cooling, 50 mL of water (freshly boiled and cooled) and 2 drops of o-phenanthroline
solution are added, which is then titrated with 0.1 N cerium II sulfate solution until
pale blue color appears. Separately, a blank test is carried out following the same
559
procedure.
1 mL of 0.1 N cerium II sulfate ＝ 5.585 mg Fe

560
 Isoamyl Acetate

CH3COOCH2CH2CH CH
CH33
Chemical Formula: C7H14O2
Molecular Weight: 130.19
Synonyms: Isopentyl acetate; β-Methyl butyl CAS No.:
acetate 123-92-2

Compositional Specifications of Isoamyl Acetate

Content Isoamyl Acetate should be contain not less than 95.0% of isoamyl acetate
(C7H14O2).
Description Isoamyl Acetate is a colorless, transparent liquid having a characteristic odor.
Identification To 1 mL of Isoamyl Acetate, add 5 mL of 10% alcoholic solution of
potassium hydroxide. and heat in a water bath while shaking. The characteristic odor
disappears, and an odor of isoamyl alcohol is evolved. Cool, and add 10 mL of water
and 0.5 mL of diluted hydrochloric acid. The solution responds to the test for Acetate
(C) in Identification.
Purity (1) Specific Gravity : Specific gravity of Isoamyl Acetate should be within a range
of 0.868～0.878.
(2) Refractive Index : Refractive Index of Isoamyl Acetate should be within a range of
1.400～1.404.
(3) Clarity and Color of Solution : When 1 mL of Isoamyl Acetate is dissolved in 3 mL
of 60% alcohol, the solution should be clear.
(4) Acid value : Acid value of Isoamyl Acetate is tested by Acid Value in Flavoring
Substance Test. The content should not be more than 1.
Assay Accurately weigh about 0.5 g of Isoamyl Acetate, and proceed as directed under
Ester Content in Flavoring Substances Tests.
1 mL of 0.5 N alcoholic solution of potassium hydroxide = 65.09 mg of C7H14O2

561
 Isoamyl Butyrate

Chemical Formula: C9H18O2

Molecular Weight: 158.24

Synonyms: 3-Methylbutyl butyrate CAS No.: 106-27-4

Compositional Specifications of lsoamyl Butyrate

Content lsoamyl Butyrate should contain not less than 98.0% of isoamyl butyrate
(C9H18O2).
Description lsoamyl Butyrate is a colorless to light yellow, transparent liquid having a
fruity odor.
Identification To 1 mL of Isoamyl Butyrate, add 5 mL of 10% alcoholic solution of
potassium hydroxide. When this solution is shaked and heated in a water bath, its
characteristic odor disappears. After cooling, this solution is acidified with dilute
sulfuric acid, and an odor of butyric acid is generated.
Purity (1) Specific Gravity : Specific gravity of Isoamyl Butyrate should be within a
range of 0.860～0.864
(2) Refractive Index : Refractive Index of Isoamyl Butyrate should be within a range of
1.409～1.414
(3) Clarity and Color of Solution : When 1 mL of lsoamyl Butyrate is dissolved in 4 mL
of 70% ethanol, the solution should be clear.
(4) Acid Value : Acid value of lsoamyl Butyrate is tested by Acid Value in Flavoring
Substance Test. It should not be more than 1.
Assay Accurately weigh about 0.8 g of Isoamyl Butyrate, and test by Ester Value in
Flavoring Substances Test.
1 mL of 0.5 N alcoholic potassium hydroxide = 79.12 mg of C9H18O2

562
 Isoamyl Formate

Chemical Formula: C6H12O2

Molecular Weight: 116.16
Synonyms: 3-methylbutyl formate CAS No.: 110-45-2

Compositional Specifications of Isoamyl Formate

Content Isoamyl Formate should contain not less than 92.0% of isoamyl formate (C6H12O2).
Description Isoamyl Formate is a colorless, transparent liquid having a characteristic
odor.
Identification (1) To 1 mL of Isoamyl Formate, add 10 mL of sodium hydroxide solution,
and heat in a water bath for 5 minutes while shaking. The characteristic odor
disappears, and the oil phase of the upper layer is evolved an odor of isoamyl
alcohol.
(2) To 1 mL of the solution the lower layer obtained in (1) above, add 1.5 mL of
diluted hydrochloric acid. and add 20 mg of magnesium dust divided into several
portions. After effervescence ceases, add 3 mL of diluted sulfuric acid (3→5) and 10
mg of chromotropic acid, shake, and warm in hot water for 10 minutes. A red-purple
color develops.
Purity (1) Specific Gravity : Specific gravity of Isoamyl Formate should be within a
range of 0.878～0.885
(2) Refractive Index : Refractive Index of Isoamyl Formate should be within a range of
1.396～1.400
(3) Clarity and Color of Solution : When 1 mL of the solution is dissolved in 4 mL of
70% ethanol, The solution should be clear.
(4) Acid Value : Acid value of Isoamyl Formate is tested by Acid Value in Flavoring
Substance Test. It should not be more than 1. In this case, titrate in ice water while
cooling, and continue until the light pink color persists for 10 seconds.
Assay Accurately weigh about 1 g of Isoamyl Formate, and test Saponification Value by
saponification value measuring method in Flavoring Substances Tests and Acid Value
by Purity (4). Calculate the content by the following formula :
Saponification value – Acid value
Content(%) ＝ × 116.16
561.1

563
 Isoamyl Isovalerate

Chemical Formula: C10H20O2

Molecular Weight: 172.27

Synonyms: 3-Methylbutyl CAS No.: 659-70-1
3-methylbutyrate

Compositional Specifications of lsoamyl Isovalerate

Content lsoamyl Isovalerate should contain not less than 98.0% of isoamyl isovalerate
(C10H20O2).
Description lsoamyl Isovalerate is a colorless to light yellow, transparent liquid, It has a
chractersitic odor.
Identification To 1 mL of Isoamyl Isovalerate, add 5 mL of 10% alcoholic potassium
hydroxide solution, and heat in a water bath while shaking. The characteristic odor
disappears, and an odor of isoamyl alcohol is evolved. After cooling, acidify with
diluted sulfuric acid. An odor of isovaleric acid is evolved.
Purity (1) Specific Gravity : Specific Gravity of lsoamyl Isovalerate should be within a
range of 0.851～0.857.
(2) Refractive Index : Refractive Index of lsoamyl Isovalerate should be within a range
of 1.411～1.414.
(3) Clarity and Color of Solution : When 1 mL of lsoamyl Isovalerate is dissolved in 8
mL of 70% alcohol solution, it should be clear.
(4) Acid value : Acid value of lsoamyl Isovalerate is tested by Acid Value in Flavoring
Substance Test. It should not be more than 2.
Assay Accurately weigh about 1.5 g of Isoamyl Isovalerate and proceed as directed
under Ester Content in Flavoring Substances Tests.
1 mL of 0.5 N ethanolic potassium hydroxide = 86.13 mg of C10H20O2.

564
 Isoamyl Propionate

Chemical Formula: C8H16O2

Molecular Weight: 144.22
Synonyms: 3-Methylbutyl propionate;
Isopentyl propionate; Isoamyl CAS No.: 105-68-0
propanoate

Compositional Specifications of Isoamyl Propionate

Conten Isoamyl Propionate should contain not less than 98.0% of isoamyl
propionate(C8H16O2).
Description Isoamyl Propionate is a colorless to light yellow, transparent liquid having a
characteristic odor.
Identification To 1 mL of Isoamyl Propionate, add 5 mL of ethanolic 10% potassium
hydroxide solution, and heat in a water bath while shaking. The characteristic odor
disappears, and an odor of isoamyl alcohol is evolved. Cool, and acidify with diluted
sulfuric acid. An odor of propionic acid is evolved.
Purity (1) Specific Gravity : Specific gravity of Isoamyl Propionate should be within a
range of 0.868～0.872.
(2) Refractive Index : Refractive Index of Isoamyl Propionate should be within a range
of 1.404～1.408.
(3) Clarity and Color of Solution : 1 mL of Isoamyl Propionate is dissolved in 4 mL of
70% ethanol. This solution should be Clear.
(4) Acid value : Acid value of Isoamyl Propionate is tested by Acid Value in Flavoring
Substance Test. It should not be more than 1.
Assay Accurately weigh about 0.7 g of Isoamyl Propionate, and proceed as directed
under Ester Content in Flavoring Substances Tests.
1 mL of 0.5 N alcoholic solution of potassium hydroxide = 72.11 mg of C8H16O2

565
 Isobutyl Phenylacetate

Chemical Formula: C12H16O2

Molecular Weight: 192.23
Synonyms: Isobutyl alpha-toluate CAS No.: 102-13-6

Compositional Specifications of lsobutyl Phenylacetate

Content Isobutyl phenylacetate should contain not less than 98.0% of isobutyl
phenylacetate (C12H16O2).
Description Isobutyl phenylacetate is a colorless, transparent liquid having a
characteristic odor.
Identification (1) To 2 mL of Isobutyl Phenylacetate, add 10 mL of 10% alcoholic
solution of potassium hydroxide, equip with a reflux condenser, and boil gently in a
water bath for 1 hour. Add 10 mL of water, distill, and take about 1.5 mL of the
initial distillate. The solution is clear, and an odor of isobutanol is generated.
(2) Acidify the residual solution in (1) with diluted hydrochloric acid. Crystals are
deposited. Collect the crystals by filtration, wash with water, and recrystallize from
boiling water. The melting point is 76℃.
Purity (1) Specific Gravity : Specific gravity of Isobutyl Phenylacetate should be within a
range of 0.984～0.988.
(2) Refractive Index : Refractive Index of Isobutyl Phenylacetate should be within a
range of 1.486～1.488.
(3) Clarity and Color of Solution : When 1 mL of Isobutyl Phenylacetate is dissolved in
3 mL of 80% alcohol, the solution should be clear.
(4) Acid Value : Acid value of Isobutyl Phenylacetate is proceeded as directed under
Acid Value in Flavoring Substance Test. It should not be more than 1.
(5) Chlorinated Compounds : When Isobutyl Phenylacetate is proceeded as directed
under Copper Mesh Test Method in Halogenated Compounds for Flavoring, it should
be appropriate.
Assay Accurately weigh about 1.5 g of Isobutyl Phenylacetate and proceed as directed
under Ester Content in Flavoring Substances Tests.
1 mL of 0.5 N alcoholic solution of potassium hydroxide = 96.13 mg of C12H16O2

566
 Isoeugenol

Chemical Formula: C H O
10 12 2

Molecular Weight: 164.20

Other names: 2-Methoxy-4-propnylphenol CAS No.: 97-54-1

Compositional Specifications of Isoeugenol

Content Isoeugenol should contain not less than 99.0% of isoeugenol (C10H12O2).
Description Isoeugenol is a colorless to light yellow-brown, transparent liquid having a
characteristic odor.
Identification (1) 5 drops of Isoeugenol is dissolved in 10 mL of alcohol. When 3 drops
of ferrous chloride solution are added to this solution, a green color appears.
(2) To 0.5 g of Isoeugenol, add 0.1 g of picric acid, 1 mL of acetone, and 9 mL of
petroleum ether. When it is heated in a water bath until crystals dissolve, the
solution becomes reddish brown.
Purity (1) Specific Gravity : Specific gravity of Isoeugenol should be within a range of
1.079～1.08.
(2) Refractive Index : Refractive Index of Isoeugenol should be within a range of 1.57
2～1.577.
(3) Clarity and Color of Solution : When 1 mL of Isoeugenol is dissolved in 5 mL of
50% alcohol, it should be clear.
Assay Proceed as directed under Phenol Content in Flavoring Substances Tests. Instead
of allowing to stand for 30 minutes, heat in a water bath for 30 minutes, and allow to
cool to room temperature.

567
 L-lsoleucine

Chemical Formula: C6H13O2N

Molecular Weight: 131.17

Synonyms: L-2-Amino-3-methylvaleric
acid CAS No.: 73-32-5

Compositional Specifications of L-lsoleucine

Content L-Isoleucine, when calculated on the dried basis, should contain within a range
of 98.0～102.0% of L-isoleucine (C6H13NO2).
Description L-lsoleucine occurs as white crystals or as a crystalline powder. It is
odorless and has a lightly bitter taste.
Identification (1) A solution of L-lsoleucine in 6 N hydrochloric acid (1→25) is
dextrorotatory (D-form).
(2) To 5 mL of L-Isoleucine solution (1→1,000), add 1 mL of ninhydrin solution, and
heat for 3 minutes. The color becomes reddish purple ~ bluish purple.
Purity (1) Clarity and Color of Solution : 0.5 g of L-Isoleucine is dissolved in 20 mL of
water. It is colorless and should not be more than almost clear.
(2) pH : pH of L-Isoleucine solution(1→100), measured should be within a range of 5.
5～7.0.
(3) Specific Rotation : Dissolve 2 g of L-Isoleucine, precisely weighed and accurately
dried, in 50 mL of 6 N hydrochloric acid. Optical rotation of this solution should be within
a range of = +39.5∼+41.5° .
(4) Arsenic : It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(5) Lead : When 5.0 g of L-lsoleucine is tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content
should not be more than 5.0 ppm.
(6) Chloride : When 0.5 g of L-Isoleucine is tested by Chloride Limit Test, its content
should not be more than the amount that corresponds to 0.3 mL of 0.01 N
hydrochloric acid.
Loss on Drying When L-Isoleucine is dried for 3 hours at 105℃, the weight loss should
not be more than 0.3%.
Residue on Ignition Residue on ignition of L-Isoleucine should not be more than 0.1%.
Assay Approximately 0.3 g of L-Isoleucine is dissolved in 50 mL of glacial acetic acid
by heating. After cooling, the solution is titrated with 0.1 N perchloric acid solution
(indicator : 10 drops of α-naphtholbenzein solution). End point is where the brown
568
color of the solution changes to green.
1 mL of 0.1 N perchloric acid = 13.12 mg of C6H13NO2

569
 Isomalt
Hydrogenated palatinose : Isomaltitol

Chemical Formula: GPS C12H24O11

GPM C12H24O11‧2H2O
Molecular Weight: GPS 344.32
INS No.: 953
GPM 380.32
Synonyms: Hydrogenated palatinose;
CAS No.: 64519-82-0
Isomaltitol

Compositional Specifications of Isomalt

Content Isomalt should contain not less than 98.0% as anhydrous isomalt. The sum of
contents (α-D-Glucopyranosyl-1,6-D-Sorbitol (GPS, C12H24O11) and α
-D-Glucopyranosyl-1,1-D-Mannitol 2 hydrate[GPM, C12H24O11․2H2O]) should not be
less than 86.0%.
Description Isomalt is slightly hygroscopic scentless white crystallite with sweet taste.
Identification (1) Isomalt is soluble in water but insoluble in alcohol.
(2) 500 mg of Isomalt is dissolved in 100 mL of water to make the test solution. 0.3 μl
of test solution and 0.3 μl of the reference solution are tested using thin layer
chromatography. However, in the thin layer, silica gel is used as the carrier. When the
elution solution reaches about 10 cm up, elution is stopped and the layer is dried with
wind and then chromagen 1 is sprayed on the layer. To dry, the layer transfer into air for
15 mins and again chromagen 2 is sprayed for comparative observation, spots(GPS, GPM)
should appear almost in the same locations, colors, and sizes as in the reference solution.
∘Reference solution : 500 mg of sorbitol, mannitol, lactitol, maltitol, GPS, GPM are
respectively dissolved in 100 mL of water.
∘Developing solvent
① Isopropanol : n-Butanol : Boric Acid (2.5→100) : Acetic Acid : Propionic Acid
(50 : 30 : 20 : 2 : 16)
② Ethylacetate : Pyridin : Water : Acetic Acid : Propionic Acid
(50 : 50 : 10 : 5 : 5)

570
 ∘Chromagen
① 0.1% sodium metaperiodate
② Ethyl Alcohol: Sulfuric Acid: Anisaldehyde: Acetic Acid (90: 5: 1: 1)
Purity (1) Reducing Material ： Transfer 7 g (converted to a dehydrated form) of
Isomalt transfer into a 400 mL beaker, add 35 mL of water and shake. 50 mL of
Fehling solution is added and the beaker is covered with a watch glass. The mixture
is heated so that it boils within 4 minutes. After boiling exactly for 2 minutes,
precipitated cupric oxide (Cu2O) is filtered through a glass filter. Precipitates are
sequentially rinsed with hot water, alcohol, and ether. It is then dried for 30 minutes
at 100℃. Cupric oxide on the filter is again washed thoroughly with 10 mL of hot
water, 10 mL of alcohol, and 10 mL of ether. After drying for 1 hour at 100℃, the
weight of cupric oxide should not be more than 50 mg.
(2) D-Mannitol : 10 g of Isomalt is precisely weighed and quantitatively tested for
D-mannitol. The amount of D-mannitol should not be more than 3.0 %. Standard
solution is prepared by dissolving precisely weighed 50 mg of standard D-mannitol in
water to make 100 mL.
(3) D-Sorbitol : 10 g of Isomalt is precisely weighed and quantitatively tested for
D-mannitol. The amount of D-mannitol should not be more than 6.0%. Standard
solution is prepared by dissolving precisely weighed 50 mg of standard D-sorbitol in
water to make 100 mL.
(4) Arsenic : It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(5) Lead : When 5.0 g of Isomalt is tested by Atomic Absorption Spectrophotometry or
Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content should not be more
than 1.0 ppm.
(6) Nickel : 10 g of Isomalt is weighed and transferred into a flask for decomposition.
50～70 mL of water and 30 mL of nitric acid are added to the flask and set-aside. It
is then gently heated until the violent reaction is completed. After cooling the flask,
10 mL of sulfuric acid is added and the flask is gently heated again. When the
content darkens, 2～3 mL of nitric acid is added at a time while continuously heating.
The decomposition is complete when the content is pale yellow～colorless. After
cooling the liquid, 30 mL of water and 15 mL of saturated ammonium hydroxide
solution are added to the flask, which is then heated until white smoke of sulfuric
acid is generated. This is then cooled and water is added to bring the total volume
to 100 mL. Use this solution as the test solution. 10 mL of test solution is
transferred into an extraction bottle. At the same time, a blank test is carried out
with the Test Solution. Separately, 1 mL of nickel standard solution (2 ppm) transfer
into an extraction bottle and a blank test is carried out with this Standard Solution.
10 mL of 25% ammonium citrate solution and 2 drops bromothymol blue solution are
added to each Test Solution and Standard Solution. The resulting solution is titrated
with ammonium solution until the color of the solution turn green from yellow. Then
10 mL of 40% ammonium sulfate solution and water is added to bring the total
volume to 100 mL. 10 mL of sodium diethyldithiocarbamate solution is added, shaken
571
 vigorously, and set-aside for few minutes. 10 mL of methyl isobutylketone is added
to this Test Solution as well as its blank test solution, standard solution, and its
blank test solution, respectively. Each is shaken vigorously. After settling, ethyl
isobutyl ketone layer is separated out from each bottle and analyzed with atomic
absorption spectrometry or inductively coupled plasma method. The absorption (or
peak height) of Test Solution should not be higher than that of the Standard Solution
(not more than 2 ppm).
Water Content Isomalt is well ground with a mortar and a pestle, which is then sieved.
It is then analyzed for water content (Karl-Fisher Method). The content of water
should not be more than 7%.
Residue on Ignition When thermogravimetric analysis is done with precisely weighed 5 g
of Isomalt, the amount of residue should not be more than 0.05%.
Assay 1 g of Isomalt is dissolved in 100 mL water. Use this solution as the test
solution. Separately, 100 mL solution each containing 0.8 g of GMP standard and 0.883
g of GPS standard is prepared, respectively (Standard Solution). 25 μl of each
Standard Solution and Test Solution is injected into liquid chromatography equipment
following the operation conditions below. The contents of GMP and GPS are calculated
using the following equations.
Peak area of test weight of the
solution standard(GPM)
GPM(%) = × × 100
Peak area of standard weight of the sample(g)
solution
Peak area of test weight of the
solution standard(GPS)
GPS(%) = × × 100
Peak area of standard weight of the sample(g)
solution

Operation Conditions
-Detector : Differential refractometer (RI Detector)
-Column : Aminex HPX 87C or its equivalent, 7.8mm × 300 mm stainless steal tube
-Column Temperature : 60℃
-Mobile Phase : Water
-Flow Rate : 0.6 mL/min

572
 Isopropyl Alcohol
2-Propanol
Isopropanol
Chemical Formula: C3H8O

Molecular Weight: 60.10

Synonyms: 2-Propanol; Isopropanol CAS No.: 67-63-0

Compositional Specifications of Isopropyl Alcohol

Content Isopropyl Alcohol should contain not less than 99.7% of isopropyl alcohol
(C3H8O).
Description Isopropyl Alcohol is colorless transparent flammable liquid with a
characteristic scent and slightly bitter taste.
Identification 3 mL of water and 1 mL of mercury (II) sulfate solution are added to 2
mL of Isopropyl Alcohol. When the solution is warmed, white～yellow precipitates are
formed.
Purity (1) Solubility ： 10 mL of Isopropyl Alcohol is mixed with 40 mL of water. This
solution should be as clear as the same amount of water after 1 hour.
(2) Acid Value (as acetic acid) ： 2 drops of phenolphthalein is added to 100 mL of
water, where 0.01 N sodium hydroxide solution is added until pale red color persists
for 30 seconds. Then 50 mL (approximately 39 g) of Isopropyl Alcohol is added and
mixed with the above solution. The resulting solution is titrated with 0.01 N sodium
hydroxide solution until pale red color reappears. The consumption of 0.01 N sodium
hydroxide solution should not be more than 0.7 mL.
(3) Lead : When 5.0 g of Isopropyl Alcohol is tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content
should not be more than 1 ppm.
(4) Distillation Range ： When Isopropyl Alcohol is tested for boiling point and amount
of distillate, 95%(v/v) or more should be extracted at 81.3∼83.3℃.
(5) Residue on Evaporations : 125 mL (approximately 100 g) of Isopropyl Alcohol is
dried in a water bath and is further dried for 30 minutes at 105℃. The weight of the
residue after cooling should not be more than 10 ppm.
(6) Matters that reduce permanganates ： 50 mL of Isopropyl Alcohol transfer into a
50 mL cylinder with a stopper. After adding 0.25 mL of 0.1 N potassium
permanganate solution, it is set aside for 10 minutes. Pale red color should not
disappear completely.
(7) Specific Gravity : Specific gravity of Isopropyl Alcohol should be within a range of
0.784~0.788
(8) Refractive Index : Refractive Index of Isopropyl Alcohol should be within a range of
1.374~1.380
Water Content Water content of Isopropyl Alcohol is determined by water determination
573
 (Karl-Fisher Method) and should not be more than 0.2%.
Assay Approximately 500 mg of Isopropyl Alcohol is precisely weighed and 50 mL of
water is added. 10 mL of this solution is diluted to 100 mL with water (Test Stock
Solution). Separately, 500 mg of isopropyl alcohol standard is precisely weighed and
diluted as the Test Solution (Standard Stock Solution). 4 mL each of Test Stock
Solution and Standard Stock Solution is taken into 100 mL volumetric flask. 4 mL of
internal standard solution (Approximately 500 mg of tert-butyl alcohol is precisely
weighed and water is added to bring the total volume to 50 mL. 10 mL of this
solution is further diluted to 100 mL with water.) is added to each flask. Then the
volume of each flask is brought up to 100 mL with water (Test Solution and Standard
Solution). 1 ㎕ of each Test Solution and Standard Solution is injected into gas
chromatography, and the content (%) of isopropyl alcohol is obtained from the
following equation.
Ws × Ru
Content of isopropyl alcohol(%) ＝ × 100
Wu × Rs

Ws：Weight of isopropyl alcohol standard (mg)

Wu：Weight of sample (mg)
Ru：Ratio of isopropyl alcohol peak against tert-butyl alcohol peak in Test Solution
Rs：Ratio of isopropyl alcohol peak against tert-butyl alcohol peak in Standard Solution
Operation Conditions
-Column : A glass or stainless tube with inner diameter of 2 mm and length of 2 m
-Column Filler : Chromosorb W-HP coated with 3% OV - 225
-Detector : Hydrogen Flame Ionization Detector (FID)
-Temperature at injection hole: 250℃
-Column Temperature : 200℃
-Detector Temperature : 250℃
-Carrier gas and flow rate : Nitrogen, 30 mL per minute

574
 Itaconic Acid
Compositional Specifications of Itaconic Acid
Content Itaconic Acid, when calculated on the dried basis, should contain not less than
98.0% of itaconic acid (C5H6O4 ＝ 130.10).
Description Itaconic Acid is scentless colorless transparent crystal, granule, lump, or
white crystalline powder or powder. It has an acidic taste.
Identification (1) Itaconic Acid solution (1→20) is acidic.
(2) To 0.05 g of Itaconic Acid add 0.01 N of sulfuric acid to make 100 mL. Separately,
100 mL of Standard Solution is prepared by adding 0.05 g of itaconic acid in 0.01 N
of sulfuric acid. Liquid chromatography is carried out with both solutions under the
following operation conditions. Retention time of the main peak of Test Solution
should be identical to that of Standard Solution.
Operation Conditions
-Detector : UV absorption photometer (measured at wavelength 210 nm) -Column
Filler : Sulfonated polyestylene gel with 6 μm particle diameter
-Column Tube : Stainless steal tube (SUS316) with 8 mm inner diameter, 30 cm
length
-Column Temperature : 60℃
-Mobile Phase : 0.01 N Sulfuric acid
-Flow Rate : 1 mL/min
-Amount of solution injected : 20 ㎕
Purity (1) Chloride : 0.5 g of Itaconic Acid is tested by Chloride Limit Test. The
content should not be more than the amount that correspond to 0.1 mL of 0.01 N
hydrochloric acid.
(2) Sulfate : 0.5 g of Itaconic Acid is dissolved in 30 mL of water and 2 mL of dilute
hydrochloric acid by boiling for 1 minute. After cooling, the solution is tested by
Sulfate Limit Test. The content should not be more than amount that correspond to
0.1 mL of 0.01 N hydrochloric acid.
(3) Arsenic : It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(4) Lead : When 5.0 g of Itaconic Acid is tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content
should not be more than 2.0 ppm.
Loss on Drying When 2 g of Itaconic Acid is dried for 2 hours at 100℃, the loss should
not be more than 0.5%.
Residue on Ignition When thermogravimetric analysis is done with 2 g of Itaconic Acid,
the amount of residue should not be more than 0.1%.
Assay 2 g of Itaconic Acid, precisely weighed, add water to make 250 mL. Take 25 mL
of this solution and titrate with 0.1 N sodium hydroxide solution (indicator : 2～3
drops of phenolphthalein).
1 mL of 0.1 N sodium hydroxide solution＝ 6.505 mg C5H6O4
575
 Kaoliang Color
Definition Kaoliang Color is obtained by extracting kaoliang grains of rice family
(Sorghum nervosum BESS.) with water or ethyl alcohol. Major colorant is apigenin and
luteolinidine. Dilutant, stabilizer, or solvent can be added for the purpose of color value
adjustment and quality preservation.
Compositional Specifications of Kaoliang Color
Content Color value of Kaoliang Color ( ) should be more than the indicated value.
Description Kaoliang Color is brown liquid, lump, powder, or paste with a slight
characteristic scent.
Identification (1) Test Solution obtained in Color Value of Kaoliang Color shows
yellowish brown～reddish brown color. Visible absorption spectrum shows a gentle
descending slope from short wavelength to long wavelength.
(2) When Test Solution in Identification (1) is acidified with hydrochloric acid, brown
precipitates are formed.
(3) When ferric chloride TS is added to Test Solution in Identification (1), milky white
precipitates are formed.
Purity (1) Arsenic ： It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(2) Lead : When 5.0 g of Persimmon Color is tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content
should not be more than 10.0 ppm.
Assay(Color value) Appropriate amount of Kaoliang Color is accurately weighed so that
the absorbance to be measured will be within a range of 0.3～0.7 and dissolved in 30
mL of sodium carbonate solution (1→100). Citric acid-dibasic sodium phosphate buffer
solution with pH 7.0 is added so that the total volume is to make 100 mL. Take 1 mL
of this solution, add citric acid-dibasic sodium phosphate buffer solution with pH 7.0,
and make to volume 100 mL and this is used as the Test Solution. If necessary, the
solution is centrifuged and the supernatant is used. Using citric acid-dibasic sodium
phosphate buffer solution with pH 7.0 as a reference solution, absorption A is
measured at 500 nm wavelength with 1cm path length. Color value is obtained using
the following equation.
A × 1,000
Color Value( ) ＝
weight of the sample(g)

Citric acid·dibasic sodium phosphate buffer solution (pH 7.0)

∘Solution 1 ： 0.1 M citric acid solution：1L of solution containing 21.01 g of citric acid
(C6H8O7․H2O).
∘Solution 2 ： 0.2 M dibasic sodium phosphate solution： 1 L of solution containing 71.63
g of dibasic sodium phosphate (Na2HPO4․12H2O).
Solution 1 and Solution 2 are mixed well (35:165) and its pH is adjusted to 7.0.
576
 Kaolin

INS No.: 559

CAS No.: 1332-58-7

Definition Kaolin is obtained from kaolin and its major constituent is hydrated aluminum
silicate.
Compositional Specifications of Kaolin
Description Kaolin is white or milky white powder.
Identification (1) 0.2 g of Kaolin is mixed with 0.5 g of mixture(1:1) of anhydrous
sodium carbonate and anhydrous potassium carbonate. It is then heated until it melts
completely in a platinum or nickel crucible. After cooling, 5 mL of water is added
and allow to stand for 3 minutes. The bottom of the crucible is gently heated and
then the solidified matter is transferred into a beaker together with water.
Hydrochloric acid is slowly added until foaming stops. After adding 10 mL more of
hydrochloric acid, it is evaporated to dryness in a water bath. 200 mL of water is
added to the residue, which is boiled and filtered. Gel phase residue is transferred
into a platinum crucible. When 5 mL of hydrofluoric acid is added, it is dissolved.
Upon heating, it almost completely evaporated.
(2) The filtrate obtained by (1) responds to all tests for Aluminum Salt in the
Identification.
(3) 5 mL of water is added to 8 g of Kaolin, and mix well. It becomes plastic.
Purity (1) Water Solubles and pH ： 10 g of Kaolin is added to 100 mL of water. It is
then boiled for 30 minutes while supplementing water for the loss. After cooling,
water is added to bring the total volume to 100 mL, which is filtered using a glass
filter (3G4). pH of the filtrate should be 6.0∼8.0. 50 mL of the filtrate is evaporated
to dryness, which is then dried for 1 hour at 105℃. The resultant residue should not
be more than 15 mg.
(2) Acid Solubles ： 20 mL of diluted sulfuric acid (1→15) is added to 1 g of Kaolin,
is mixed with shaking for 15 minutes, which is then filtered. 10 mL of the filtrate is
evaporated to dryness and is ignited to constant weight. The residue should not be
more than 10 mg .
(3) Arsenic ： It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(4) Lead : When 5.0 g of Kaolin is tested by Atomic Absorption Spectrophotometry or
Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content should not be more
than 10.0 ppm.
(5) Foreign matter ： 5 g of Kaolin is mixed in 300 mL of water by stirring, which is
allowed to stand for 30 seconds. Most of the solution containing the fine particles is
discarded by decantation the container. When the portion remaining at the bottom of
the container is pressed using a glass rod with a flat end, there is no audible sound
577
 produced by the sand.
Loss on Ignition When the Loss on Ignition analysis is done, the weight loss should not
be more than 15%.

578
 Karaya Gum
Sterculia Gum
INS No.: 416
Synonyms: Sterculia gum; Katilo; Kadaya; CAS No.: 9000-36-6
Kullo; Kuterra

Definition Karaya Gum is obtained by drying gummy secretion of Sterculia urens

Roxburgh, Sterculia(Fam. Sterculiaceae) and its variety, Cochlospermum Gossypium A. P.
De Condolle, or Cochlosperum Kunth (Fam. Bixaceae). It is a polysaccharide consisting
mainly of galactose, rhamnose, and galacturonic acid.
Compositional Specifications of Karaya Gum
Description Karaya Gum is orange yellow～pale reddish brown lump or gray～pale
reddish brown gray powder having a little odor of acetic acid.
Identification (1) When 2 g powder of Karaya Gum is mixed well with 50 mL of water,
it becomes gluey and weakly acidic.
(2) When 0.4 g powder of Karaya Gum is mixed well with 10 mL of 60% alcohol, it
swells.
(3) 1 g of Karaya Gum is added to 20 mL of water. Homogeneous mucilage is obtained
by heating. After adding 5 mL of hydrochloric acid is added to the glue, it is boiled
for 5 minutes. The resulting liquid becomes permanent pale red～pale reddish brown.
Purity (1) Arsenic : It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(2) Lead : When 5.0 g of Karaya Gum is tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content
should not be more than 2.0 ppm.
(3) Cadmium : When 5.0 g of Karaya Gum is tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content
should not be more than 1.0 ppm.
(4) Mercury : When 0.1 g of Karaya Gum is tested by Mercury Test Method, its
content should not be more than 1.0ppm.
(5) Acid Insoluble Ash : 3 g of Karaya Gum is carbonized at 550∼600℃ and reduced
to ash by further heating. The resulting ash are boiled for 5 minutes in 25 mL of
dilute hydrochloric acid, which is filtered through an ashless filter paper. The residue
on the filter paper is washed with a small amount of hot water. It is then carbonized
to ash along with the filter paper in a crucible (previously weighed). The content of
ash should not be more than 1%.
(6) Insoluble matter : 5 g of Karaya Gum is precisely weighed into a 250 mL
Erlenmeyer flask, where a 1:1 mixture of dilute hydrochloric acid and water. It is
covered with a watch glass and boiled until the liquid is no longer viscous. The
resulting liquid is filtered through a glass filter (previously weighed), which is washed
with hot water until the washings are free from acid(pH paper). It is then heated at
105℃ and weighed. The content of residues should not be more than 3%.
579
 (7) Starch ： 0.1 g of Karaya Gum is dissolved in 100 mL of water by boiling, which is
then cooled. When 2～3 drops of iodine solution are added, it should produced turn
blue.
(8) Other Gums : Karaya Gum swells in 60% alcohol.
(9) Volatile Acidityity : 1g of Karaya Gum is precisely weighed into a flask, 100 mL of
freshly boiled and cooled water and 5 mL of phosphoric acid are added, and allowed
to stand for several times until the gum is completely swollen. Under a refulx
condenser, boil for 2 hours, steam-distilled until 800 mL of distillate. Use 20 mL of
this solution as an indicator, titrate with 0.1N sodium hydroxide, the amount required
for neutralizing should not less than 0.42 mL. (not less than 10% as acetic acid).
Separately, perform a blank test.
(10) E. Coli : When Karaya Gum is tested by Microbe Test Methods for E. Coli in
General Test Method 「Standards and Specifications for Foods」, it should be
negative (-).
(11) Salmonella : When Karaya Gum is tested by Microbe Test Methods for Salmonella
in General Test Method 「Standards and Specifications for Foods」, it should be
negative (-).
Loss on Drying Powder of Karaya Gum is sieved through a No.40 mesh screen. 3 g of
sieved powder is dried for 5 hours at 105℃. The weight loss on drying should not be
more than 20%.
Viscosity 4 g of Karaya Gum, fine powder, is placed in a container for stirrer. 10 mL
of alcohol is added to wet the powder uniformLy. After adding 390 mL of water, it is
stirred for 7 minutes at 1,000 rpm. The suspension is transferred into a 500 mL bottle
and maintained for 12 hours in a water bath at 25℃. Viscosity is measured using LVF
Brookfield viscometer with an appropriate set of conditions such as spindle, rpm,
factor, etc. The viscosity should be higher than the indicated value or fall within the
indicated range of values.

580
 Koji
Definition There are mold bran(nuruk), granular koji, coenzyme, and purified enzyme.
mold bran(nuruk) contains enzymes produced by naturally breeding fungus, yeast, and
other microbes of Aspergillus genus and Rhizopus genus in food-grade raw grains.
Granular koji contains enzymes produced by breeding fungus of Aspergillus genus and
Rhizopus genus on steamed food-grade grains. Coenzymes are obtained from cultures
of enzyme (germs, which produces 'saccharifying enzyme') in steamed or pasteurized
material that contains food-grade cortex or starch. Purified enzyme is purified enzyme
(by separation) obtained by culturing in solid or liquid culture medium used edible
carbohydrate. Dilutant or stabilizer can be added for the purpose of activity adjustment
and quality preservation.
Compositional Specifications of Koji
Content When Koji is analyzed quantitatively, as saccharogenic power(SP), nuruk,
granular koji, coenzyme, liquid phase purified enzyme (liquid), and purified enzyme
(powder) contains 300 SP, 60 SP, 600 SP, 10,000 SP, 15,000 SP, respectively.
Description Koji is yellow～yellowish gray or white～pale yellow～brown liquid, lump, or
powder with a slight characteristic scent.
Purity (1) Arsenic：It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(2) Lead : When 5.0 g of Koji is tested by Atomic Absorption Spectrophotometry or
Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content should not be more
than 2.0 ppm.
(3) Various Germs (Penicillium Genus)：0.15∼0.2 g of Koji is placed in a
pre-pasteurized culture medium (55 mL of water, 0.025 g of potassium phosphate,
monobasic, and 1 g of dextrin are added in a 300 mL Erlenmeyer flask, which is
then plugged with cotton and pasteurized for 20 minutes under 15 psi) and cultured
for 5 days at 30℃ in a thermostat. When it is observed with a microscope, it should
be negative for various germs (penicillium genus). For the confirm on Penicillium
genus, after culturing for 5 days in a 30℃ in a thermostat, if Penicillia are observed,
it is positive. If Penicillia are not observed, it cultured for another 24 hours. If
Penicillia are observed, it is positive. If not, it is negative. (In the case, this applies
to granular koji only.)
(4) Acid value：20 g of Koji is leached in 100 mL of water for 3 hours at 30℃, which
is then filtered. 2～3 drops of mixed indicator are added to 10 mL of the filtrate,
which is titrated with 0.1 N sodium hydroxide solution until the solution becomes
from pink to pale blue. Acid value is calculated by the following equation and should
be more than 5.0. (In the case, this applies to granular koji only).
Acid value ＝ a × f
a ： Consumption of 0.1 N sodium hydroxide solution (mL)
f ： Factor of 0.1 N sodium hydroxide solution
581
Mixed indicator ： 0.2 g of bromothymol blue and 0.1g of neutral red are dissolved in
300 mL of alcohol.
Loss on Drying When 10 g of Koji is dried for 4 hours at 105℃, the weight loss should
not be more than 12% for nuruk, should not be more than 30% for granular koji,
should not be more than 10% for coenzyme, and should not be more than 8% for
purified enzyme (not applicable for liquid phase).
Assay (Saccharogenic Power)
Analysis Principle ： This test method is based on measuring the amount of reducing
sugar produced by decomposition of soluble starch under a set of conditions of time,
temperature, pH, and concentration.
Preparation of Test Solution
∘Nuruk, granular koji, coenzyme ： Test Solution is prepared so that 1 mL of the final
dilution contains 1∼2SP. Sample is accurately weighed into a Erlenmeyer flask (for
nuruk, it is ground to 80∼100mesh before weighing), which is isothermalized at 30℃.
200 mL of 1% sodium chloride solution is added to the flask, which is leached for 3
hours at 30℃ while stirring gently in a 20 minute interval. It is then filtered and used
as Test Solution.
∘Purified enzyme：Test Solution is prepared so that 1 mL of the final dilution contains 1
∼2 SP.
Test Procedure
① Production of Reducing Sugar：50 mL of substrate solution and 30 mL of acetate
buffer solution(pH 5.0) are placed in a 100 mL volumetric flask, which is allow to stand
for 10 minutes in a 55℃ water bath. 10 mL of Test Solution is added to this solution
and it is timed. The content is well mixed by shaking and it is allow to stand in the
water bath. After exactly 60 minutes, the reaction is stopped by adding 10 mL of 0.5
N sodium hydroxide solution. It is then cooled to room temperature in running water.
Water is added to make the total volume to 100 mL. 10 mL each of this solution and
the reference is tested for the amount of reducing sugar. Reference solution is
prepared by following the same procedure as Test Solution with 10 mL of water
instead of 10 mL of Test Solution.
② Measurement of Reducing Sugar：10 mL of fehling solution is added to a 250 mL
Erlenmeyer flask, where 40 mL of water, 10 mL of the above solution obtained by
production of reducing sugar, and 10 mL of glucose standard solution are added. The
mixture is mixed with shaking gently. It is then boiled for 1 minute. While continuously
boiling, it is titrated with glucose standard solution. If the blue color of copper sulfate
almost disappears, 4～5 drops of methylene blue TS are added and the titration is
continued. The end point is where the color of methylene blue disappears and the
consumed amount of glucose standard solution is S (mL). Separately, a blank test is
carried out with 10 mL of Fehling solution, 40 mL of water, 10 mL of reference
solution, and 10 mL of glucose standard solution. The consumed amount (mL) of
glucose standard solution is B (approximately 25 mL is consumed for a blank test).
582
 ③ Calculation of Saccharogenic Power
(B-S) × 2
SP ＝
W × 1
2 ： Factor of 20/10, which comes from the concentration of glucose standard solution
(2 mg/mL) and used amount of standard solution (10 mL).
W ： Weight of sample contained in 10 mL of Test Solution (g)
1 ： Reaction time (hour)
Definition of Saccharogenic Power ： 1 Saccharogenic power(SP) corresponds to
production of 10 mg of glucose by 1 g of an enzyme in 1 hour under the test
conditions above.
Solution
∘0.2 M Acetate Buffer Solution (pH 5.0) ： 0.2 M sodium acetate solution is added to 0.2
M acetic acid with stirring continuously, where pH is adjusted to
5.0 ± 0.05.
∘Starch ： Soluble starch (Lintner) or equivalent is used.
∘Substrate Solution ： 10 g of starch (as dried form) is dispersed in 100 mL of cold
water, where 300 mL of boiling water is slowly added. It is then
boiled for 1～2 minutes with stirring. After cooling, it is then
transferred into a 500 mL volumetric flask, which is then filled
with water to make 500 mL.
∘Glucose Standard Solution ： 2.0 g of glucose (anhydrous) is accurately weighed and
dissolved in water, to make total volume 1,000 mL.
∘Methylene Blue Solution ： 1 g of methylene blue is dissolved in water to make total
volume 100 mL.

583
 Lac Color
Definition Lac Color is extracted by water from the resinoid secreted by larvae of
coccidium (Laccifer lacca KERR, Coccidae). The major component of this color is
laccaic acid one of anthraquinones. Dilutant, stabilizer, or solvent can be added for the
purpose of color value adjustment and quality preservation.
Compositional Specifications of Lac Color
Content Color value ( ) of Lac Color should not be less than the indicated value.
Description Lac Color is red～dark reddish brown liquid, lump, powder or paste with a
slight characteristic scent.
Identification (1) Test Solution obtained in Color Value section for Lac Color is reddish
violet. It has a maximum absorption near 490 nm.
(2) When adding 1 mL of hydrochloric acid to 10 mL of Test Solution in (1), it changes
orange～orange red.
Purity (1) Arsenic ： It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(2) Lead : When 5.0 g of Lac Color is tested by Atomic Absorption Spectrophotometry
or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content should not be more
than 8.0 ppm.
Assay (Color Value) Appropriate amount of Lac Color is accurately weighed so that the
absorbance is within 0.3～0.7 and dissolved in 20 mL of sodium carbonate solution (1→
200). Water is added so that the total volume is 100 mL. 1 mL of this solution is
diluted to 100 mL with 0.1 N hydrochloric acid, Test Solution. If necessary, the
solution is centrifuged and the supernatant is used. Using 0.1 N hydrochloric acid as a
reference solution, absorbance A of the test solution is measured at the maximum
absorption wavelength near 490 nm with 1 cm path length. Color value is obtained
using the following equation.
A × 1,000
Color Value( ) ＝ weight of the sample(g)

584
 Lactase
β-Galactosidase

Definition Lactase is an enzyme obtained from a culture of Aspergillus niger and its
variety, Aspergillus oryzae and its variety, Bacillus circulans, Saccharomyces genus,
and Bacillus licheniformis where the lactase gene of Bifidobacterium bifidum is inserted.
Dilutant or stabilizer, and etc can be added for the purpose of activity adjustment and
quality preservation and etc.
Compositional Specifications of Lactase
Description Lactase is white～deep brown power, particles, pastes or colorless ～deep
brown liquid.
Identification When Lactase is proceeded as directed under Activity Test, it should have
the activity as Lactase.
Purity (1) Arsenic ： It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(2) Lead ：When 5.0 g of Lactase is tested by Atomic Absorption Spectrophotometry or
Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content should not be more
than 5.0 ppm.
(3) Coliform Group ： Lactase is tested by Microbe Test Methods for Coliform Group
in General Test Methods in 「Standards and Specifications for Foods」. It should
contain 30 colonies or less per 1 g of this product.
(4) Salmonella ： Lactase is tested by Microbe Test Methods for Salmonella in General
Test Methods in 「Standards and Specifications for Foods」. It should be negative
(-).
(5) E. Coli : When Lactase is tested by Microbe Test Methods for E. Coli in General
Test Method 「Standards and Specifications for Foods」, it should be negative (-).
Activity Test (activity)
Analysis Principle ： Activity test is based on hydrolysis of ο-Nitrophenyl-β
-D-Galactopyranoside (ONPG) substrate for 15 minutes at 37℃ and specified pH (4.5
for Aspergillus niger and its variety, Aspergillus oryzae and its variety, 6.0 for
Bacillus circulans, 6.5 for Saccharomyces genus).
∘Preparation of Test Solution ： A Test Solution is prepared so that 1 mL contains 0.15
∼0.65 lactase unit. Sample is accurately weighed into a mortar, added an appropriate
buffer solution, and ground, which is then transferred to a volumetric flask and filled
with a buffer solution.
Test Procedure ： 4 mL of substrate solution is placed in a 20×150 mm test tube with
a stopper, which is then isothermalized in a water bath at 37 ± 0.1℃. 1 mL of Test
Solution is mixed by shaking. After exactly 15 minutes, 1 mL of the mixed solution is
added to a test tube with 1 mL of 10% sodium carbonate solution, which is then
diluted to 10 mL with water. Separately, a reference solution is prepared by following
the same procedure with 1 mL of water. Absorbance at 420 nm is measured with 1 cm
of path length. Activity of enzyme is calculated by the following equation.
585
 LacU/g ＝ Aε ×× 155 ×× 10W
A ： Average absorbance of Test Solution
5 ： Amount of enzyme reaction mixture (mL)
10 ： Final amount of diluted enzyme reaction mixture solution (mL)
ε ： Extinction coefficient measured with standard ο-nitrophenol solution
15 ： Time for isothermalization (minute)
W ： Amount of sample contained in 1 mL of Test Solution (g)
Definition of Activity：1 Lactase unit (LacU) is an amount of enzyme that extricates 1 μ
mol of o-nitrophenol per 1 minute under the above conditions.
Test Solution
∘Acetate Buffer Solution (for Aspergillus niger and its variety, Aspergillus oryzae and its
variety) ： 800 mL of water is added to 50 mL of 2 N acetic acid and pH is
adjusted to 4.5 ± 0.05 with 2 N sodium hydroxide solution (pH 6.0 ± 0.05 for
Bacillus circulans). Then the solution is diluted to 1,000 mL with water.
∘P-E-M Buffer Solution (for Saccharomyces genus)： 27.2 g of monobasic potassium
phosphate, 37.2 mg of EDTA (2 hydrate), and 20.3 mg of magnesium chloride (MgCl
· 6H O) are dissolved in 800 mL of water. pH is adjusted to 6.5 ± 0.05 with 2 N
sodium hydroxide solution. Then the solution is diluted to 1,000 mL with water
∘Standard ο-Nitrophenol Solution ： 139.0 mg of ο-Nitrophenol is dissolved in 10 mL of
95% alcohol in a 1,000 mL volumetric flask , which is then filled with water to mark.
2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12 and 14 mL each of this solution is placed in a 100 mL volumetric
flask, which is then filled with 1% sodium carbonate solution. 1 mL of each diluted
solution contains 0.02, 0.04, 0.06, 0.08, 0.10, 0.12, and 0.14 μmol of o-nitrophenol,
respectively. Using water as a reference solution, absorption at 420 nm with 1cm
path length is measured and a calibration curve of absorption vs. μmol/mL of
o-nitrophenol is obtained. Calibration curve is a straight line through zero point.
Extinction coefficient obtained that absorbance of each diluted solution divided
o-nitrophenol μmol/mL. Extinction coefficient (ε) should be approximately 4.65
∘Substrate Solution for Saccharomyces ： 250.0 mg of ο-Nitrophenyl-β-D-
galactopyranoside is dissolved in approximately 75 mL of PEM buffer solution in a
100 mL volumetric flask, which is then filled to 100 mL.
Storage Standard of Lactase
Lactase should be stored in a hermetic container in a cold dark place.

586
 Lactic Acid

Chemical Formula: C3H6O3

Molecular Weight: 90.08 INS No.: 270

Synonyms: 2-Hydroxypropanoic acid CAS No.: 50-21-5
Definition Lactic Acid is a mixture of lactic acid and anhydrous lactic acid.
Compositional Specifications of Lactic Acid
Content Lactic Acid should contain not less than the 40.0% of lactic acid (C3H6O3 =
90.08) and 95～105% of the indicate content.
Description Lactic Acid occurs as a white to light yellow solid or is a colorless to light
yellow, clear syrupy liquid. It is odorless or has a slight or no unpleasant odor. It has
an acid taste.
Identification (1) Lactic Acid solution (1→10) is acidic.
(2) Lactic Acid responds to the test for Lactate in identification.
Purity (1) Clarity and Color of Solution : Concentrate the Lactic Acid to 80%
concentration. Take 10 g of the solution, add 12 mL of ether, and mix. The solution
is clear, or passes the following test. Filter the solution mixed with ether through a
glass filter (1G3), wash the residue three times with 10 mL of ether each time, then
once with 10 mL of acetone, dry the residue together with the filter under reduced
pressure at 50℃ for 14 hours. The amount of the residue is not more than 0.07 g.
(2) Citric Acid, Oxalic Acid, Tartaric Acid, and Phosphoric Acid : When Lactic Acid
(corresponding to 0.8 g of Lactic Acid) is dissolved in 10 mL of water, where 40 mL
of potassium hydroxide solution is added and boiled for 2 minutes, it should not turn
turbid
(3) Sulfate : When Lactic Acid (correspond in to 0.8 g of Lactic Acid) is tested by
Sulfate Limit Test, its content should not be more than the amount that corresponds
to 0.2 mL of 0.01 N sulfuric acid.
(4) Cyanide : Weigh Lactic Acid (corresponding to 0.8 g of Lactic Acid), and dissolve
in water to make 100 mL. Take 10 mL of this solution. transfer into a Nestler tube,
add 1 drop of phenolphthalein solution, and add sodium hydroxide solution (1→10)
until the color of the solution changes to pink. Add 1.5 mL of sodium hydroxide
solution (1→10) and water to make 20 mL, and heat in a water bath for 10 minutes.
Cool, neutralize with diluted acetic acid (1→20), and after the pink color of the
solution disappears, add 1 drop. Add 10 mL of phosphate buffer (pH 6.8) and 0.25
mL of chloroamine T, stopper tightly, shake gently, allow to stand for 3～5 minutes,
add 15 mL of pyridine-pyrazolone solution and water to make 50 mL, and allow to
stand at about 25℃ for 30 minutes. The color of the solution does not change to
587
 blue.
(5) Arsenic : It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(6) Lead : When 5.0 g of Lactic Acid is tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content
should not be more than 2.0 ppm.
(7) Mercury : When Lactic Acid is tested by Mercury Limit Test, its content should not
be more than 1.0 ppm.
(8) Iron : Lactic Acid (corresponding to 0.8 g of lactic acid) transfer into a Nestler
Tube, and dissolve in 6 mL of dilute nitric acid (1→10) and 10 mL of water, add
water to make 25 mL. Use this solution as the test Solution. 50 mg of ammonium
persulfate and 5 mL of ammonium thiocyanate solution (2→25) are added to Test
Solution. The resulting color should not be deeper than that of a solution prepared by
treating 1 mL of iron standard solution by the same procedure as the Test Solution.
(9) Chlorides : Accurately weigh a portion of sample equivalent to about 5 g of lactic
acid, dissolve in 50mL of water, and neutralize to litmus with sodium hydroxide
solution. (1 in 4). Add 2 mL of potassium chromate TS and titrate with 0.1N silver
nitrate to the first appearance tf a red tinge, its content should not be more than 0.2%.
1 mL of 0.1N silver nitrate solution = 3.545mg Cl
(10) Realdily Carbonizable Substances : Weigh Lactic Acid (corresponding to 2 g of
lactic acid) adjust to 15℃, gradually superimpose on top of 5 mL sulfuric acid
pre-adjusted to 15℃, and keep at 15℃. Even if a band is formed at the interface
within 15 minutes, its color should not change to dark gray.
(11) Volatile Fatty Acid : Lactic Acid (corresponding to 2 g of lactic acid), where water
is added to bring the volume to 5 mL, if necessary, is heated in a water bath, it
should not generate an odor of lactic acid.
(12) Methanol : To Lactic Acid (corresponding to 4 g of lactic acid), add 8 mL of
water and 5 g of calcium carbonate, distill the solution, take about 5 mL of the initial
distillate, and add water to make 100 mL. Use this solution as the test solution.
Measure 1.0 mL of the test solution, add 0.1 mL of phosphoric acid (1→20) and 0.2
mL of potassium permanganate solution (1→300), allow to stand for 10 minutes, add
0.4 mL of anhydrous sodium sulfite solution (1→5) and 3 mL of sulfuric acid, then
add 0.2 mL of chromotropic acid solution. The color of the solution is not darker
than that of the following reference solution. Measure 1.0 mL of methanol. add water
to make 100 mL, measure 1.0 mL of this solution, and add water to make 100 mL.
Use this solution as the solution.
Residue on Ignition When thermogravimetric analysis is done with Lactic Acid, the
residues should not be more than 0.1%.
Assay Accurately weigh 3 g of Lactic Acid, add 40 mL of 1 N sodium hydroxide
solution, heat in a water bath for 10 minutes, and titrate the excess alkali with 1 N
sulfuric acid while hot (indicator : 1～2 drops of phenolphthalein solution). Perform a
blank test in the same manner.
588
1 mL of 1 N sodium hydroxide = 90.08 mg of C3H603

589
 Lactitol
Lactit

Chemical Formula: C12H24O11

Molecular Weight: 344.32 INS No.: 966

Synonyms: Lactit; Lactobiosit CAS No.: 585-86-4

Compositional Specifications of Lactitol

Content Lactitol, when calculated on the dried basis(anhydrous), should contain within a
range of 95.0∼102.0% of lactitol (C12H24O11).
Description Lactitol occurs as crystalline powder or colorless liquid. It is odorless and
has a sweet taste.
Identification (1) Lactitol is readily soluble in water.
(2) When Lactitol is quantitatively analyzed, it shows the peaks at the identical
positions as the lactitol standards.
Purity (1) Specific Rotation : Approximately 10 g of Lactitol is precisely weighed and
dissolved in water so that the total volume becomes 100 mL. When Optical rotation
of this solution is measured and converted to a dehydrated form, it should be within a
range of ＝ +13∼+15°.
(2) Chloride : When 10 g (amount that is converted to dehydrated form) of Lactitol is
tested by Chloride Limit Test, the content should not be more than the amount that
corresponds to 3.0 mL of 0.01 N hydrochloric acid.
(3) Sulfate : When 10 g (amount that is converted to dehydrated form) of Lactitol is
tested by Sulfate Limit Test, the content should not be more than the amount that
corresponds to 4.0 mL of 0.01 N sulfuric acid.
(4) Arsenic : It should be no more than 2.6 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(5) Lead : When 5.0 g of Lactitol is tested by Atomic Absorption Spectrophotometry or
Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content should not be more
than 1.0 ppm.
(6) Nickel : When 10 g (amount that is converted to dehydrated form) of Lactitol is
tested according to Purity (6) for 「D-Maltitol」, the content should not be more than
2 ppm.
(7) Reduced Sugars : 15 g of Lactitol (amount that is converted to dehydrated form) is
590
 dissolved in 25 mL of water in an Erlenmeyer flask. Then 25 mL of copper solution
is added. The solution is heated so that it boils within 2 minutes. It is then boiled for
exactly 10 minutes and cooled immediately in running water. After 5 minutes, 3 g of
potassium iodide is added and the solution is acidified by 20 mL of 25% hydrochloric
acid. The flask is shaken until bubbling stops. Remaining bubbles are removed by
adding 2～3 drops of ether. 1 mL of starch solution is added to the above solution,
which is then titrated with 0.1 N sodium thiosulfate solution. The consumed amount
(mL) of 0.1 N sodium thiosulfate solution is S. Separately, a blank test is carried out
with 25 mL of copper solution and 25 mL of water following the same procedure.
The consumed amount (mL) of 0.1 N sodium thiosulfate solution is B. Using the
difference in consumption (B-S), a reduction equivalent as lactic acid can be obtained
from the following table. It should not be more than 0.2%.
0.1 N sodium thiosulfate solution (mL) Lactic Acid (mg)
1 3.6
2 7.3
3 11.0
4 14.7
5 18.4
6 22.1
7 25.8
8 29.5
9 33.2
10 37.0
11 40.8
12 44.6
13 48.4
14 52.2
15 56.0
16 59.9
17 63.8
18 67.7
19 71.7
20 75.7
21 79.8
22 83.9

23 88.0

∘Copper Solution : 338 g of sodium carbonate (10 hydrated) is dissolved in 300～400 mL

of warm water. Then a solution of 50 g of citric acid in 500 mL water is added.
Again a solution of 25 g of iron free cupric sulfate (5 hydrate) in 100 mL water is
added. Water is added to bring the total volume to 1l. This solution is set-aside for
2～3 days and the clear supernatant is collected for use by tilting the container.
The solution is sealed and stored.
591
 (8) Other polyvalence alcohols : 40 g of Lactitol is precisely weighed and quantitatively
analyzed. The content of polyvalence alcohols (as converted to dehydrated form)
should not be more than 2.5%. The content of by-products in sample such as
galactitol, mannitol, sorbitol, ribitol, erythritol, and other poly alcohols is obtained as
follows. The areas of peaks from lactitol to sorbitol are added up and the content is
calculated as lactitol.
Content of other polyvalence alcohols(%) W × R × 100
S U

＝ WU × Rs

Ws : Amount of lactitol standard (g)

Wu : Amount of sample(g)
Ru ： Sum of peak areas of polyvalence alcohols in Test Solution
Rs ： Peak area of lactitol in Standard Solution
Water Content Water content of Lactitol is determined by water determination
(Karl-Fisher Method) and should not be more than 10.5% for crystalline powder, not
more than 31 % for liquid form.
Residue on Ignition When thermogravimetric analysis is done with precisely weighed 2 g
of Lactitol (amount that is converted dehydrated form), the amount of residue should
not be more than 0.1%.
Assay 40 g of Lactitol, precisely weighed, is dissolved in water to make 100 mL (Test
Solution). Separately, 40 g of lactitol standard, 400 mg each of sorbitol standard, and
mannitol standard are precisely weighed and dissolved in water. The total volume is
brought up to 100 mL with water (Standard Solution). 10 μl of each Test Solution and
Standard Solution is injected into liquid chromatography using the following operation
conditions. The content (%) of lactitol is calculated by the following equation. The
order of peak detection on the chromatogram is lactitol, ribitol, erythritol, mannitol,
galactitol, and sorbitol.
weight of the lactitol peak area of test
standard(g) solution
Content of lactitol(%) ＝ × × 100
weight of the lactitol peak area of
sample(g) standard solution

Operation Conditions
-Detector : Differential refractometer (RI Detector)
-Column : Aminex HPX 87C (calcium form) or its equivalent
-Column Temperature : 85℃
-Mobile Phase : Water
-Flow Rate : 0.6 mL/min

592
 Lactoferrin Concentrates
Definition This is obtained by concentrating milk that is previously defatted and purified
by separation. The major component is lactoferrin.
Compositional Specifications of Lactoferrin Concentrates
Content Lactoferrin Concentrates should contain not less than 90.0% of lactoferrin.
Description Lactoferrin Concentrates is pale orange red～pale reddish brown powder and
scentless.
Identification When Lactoferrin Concentrates is quantitatively analyzed, a lactoferrin peak
is observed at 280 nm.
Purity (1) Arsenic ： It should be no more than 2.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(2) Lead : When 5.0 g of Lactoferrin Concentrates is tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content
should not be more than 2.0 ppm.
(3) pH ： pH of Lactoferrin Concentrates solution (2→100) should be 5.2∼7.2.
(4) Coliform Group ： Lactoferrin Concentrates is tested by Microbe Test Methods for
Coliform Group in General Test Methods in 「Standards and Specifications for Food
s」. It should contain 30 or less per 1 g of this product.
Residue on Ignition When Residue on Ignition analysis is done with 1 g of Lactoferrin
Concentrates, the amount of residue should not be more than 1.3%.
Assay Approximately 20 mg of Lactoferrin Concentrates is accurately weighed and
dissolved in 0.5 M of sodium chloride solution and to make volume 10 mL. The
solution is filtered through a 0.45 μm Millipore filter, Test Solution. Separately, a
Standard Solution is prepared with 20 mg of lactoferrin standard following the same
procedure. 20 μl each of Standard Solution and Test Solution is injected into liquid
chromatograph and the content of lactoferrin is obtained from the following equation.
Au × Ws
Content(%) ＝ × 100
As × Wu

Au ：Peak area of test solution

As ：Peak area of standard solution
Ws ：Amount of standard material (mg)
Wu ：Amount of sample (mg)

Operation Conditions
-Detector ： UV 280 nm
-Column ： Ashaipak C4P 50( 4.6 mm × 150 mm) or equivalent
-Column Temperature ： Room temperature
-Mobile Phase ： Solution A：Solution B (30：70)
Solution A : acetonitrile：0.5M sodium chloride solution (1：9)
593
 Solution B : acetonitrile：0.5M sodium chloride solution (5：5)
Solutions A, B contains 0.03% of Trifluoroacetic acid.
-Flow rate：0.8 mL/min

594
 Lauric Acid
Decanoic acid
Chemical Formula: C 12H 24O 2

Molecular Weight: 200.32 INS No.: 570

Synonyms: Dodecanoic acid CAS No.: 143-07-7

Definition Lauric Acid is a solid fatty acid obtained from coconut oil and other vegetable
oils. Its major component is lauric acid (C12H24O2).
Compositional Specifications of Lauric Acid
Description Lauric Acid is white～pale yellow crystalline solid or powder.
Purity (1) Acid Value : When 0.5 g of Lauric Acid is precisely weighted, and proceeded
as directed under Acid value in Fats Test, the Acid value should be 252∼287.
(2) Solidification point : Solidification point of Lauric Acid should be 26.0∼44.0.
(3) Lead :When 5.0 g of Lauric Acid is tested by Atomic Absorption Spectrophotometry
or Inductively Coupled Plasm a Emission Spectroscopy, its content should not be
more than 1.0 ppm.
(4) Arsenic : It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(5) Mercury : When Lauric Acid is tested by Mercury Limit Test, its content should not
be more than 1.0ppm.
(6) Iodine Value : Approximately 8.3 g of Lauric Acid is precisely weighted into a 500
mL Erlenmeyer flask with a stopper which contains 20 mL of 1 : 1 mixture of glacial
acetic acid : cyclohexane and 25 mL of Weiss solution. A stopper is placed on the
flask which is vigorously shaken and set aside for 1 hour in a dark place. 20 mL of
potassium iodide solution and 100 mL of water(previously boiled and cooled) are
added to the flask. The excess iodine is titrated with 0.1 N sodium thiosulfate
solution. 0.1 N sodium thiosulfate solution is added drop wise until yellow color
disappears. Starch solution is added and the titration is continued until the blue color
disappears completely. Near the end point, the flask is vigorously shaken with a
stopper. Separately, a blank test is carried out by the same procedure. Iodine value
is obtained by the following equation and it should not be more than 3.0.

Iodine Value = (B-S) × 1.269

weight of the sample(g)

B : Consumed amount of 0.1 N sodium thiosulfate solution in the blank test (mL)
S : Consumed amount of 0.1 N sodium thiosulfate solution in the test for sample (mL)
(7) Saponification Value : 3 g of Lauric Acid is precisely weighted into a 250 mL flask,
where 50 mL of 0.5 N alcoholic solution of potassium hydroxide is added. This
solution is used as test solution. When test solution is proceeded as directed under
595
 Acid value in Fats Test, the Acid value should be 253∼287.
(8) Unsaponifiable matter : 5 g of Lauric Acid is precisely weighted into a 250 mL
flask, where 2g of potassium hydroxide and 40 mL of alcohol are added and gently
refluxed for 1 hour with a reflux condenser. The solution transfer into a separatory
funnel (3.5 cm diameter x 30 cm length with 40 mL, 80 mL, and 130 mL scale
marks) with a stopcock. The flask is washed with sufficient amount of alcohol, which
is added to the funnel (total volume = 40 mL). The flask is washed with warm and
cold water, which is added to the funnel (total volume = 80 mL). Finally, the flask is
washed with a few mL of petroleum ether, which is added to the funnel. Cool the
solution, 50 mL of petroleum ether is added to the funnel. The funnel is shaken
vigorously for 1 minute and then settled to separate two phases completely. The
supernatant ether layer is collected in a 500 mL separatory funnel with a stopcock.
The aqueous layer is again extracted 6 times with 50 mL each of ether. These
extracts are added to the first extract. The combined extracts are washed with 25
mL of 10% alcohol. This procedure is repeated until the aqueous layer doesn't get
colorized by phenolphthalein TS. When this is accomplished, aqueous phase is
discarded and the ether extract transfer into a pre-weighted beaker. With 10 mL of
ether, the funnel is washed, which is added to the beaker. Ether layer is evaporated
to dryness in a water bath, which is then dried at 100℃ for 30 minutes until the
weight becomes constant. Then the residue is cooled in a desiccator and weighted.
The residue dissolve in 50 mL of warm alcohol (neutralized with sodium hydroxide
using phenolphthalein as an indicator). The resulting solution is titrated with 0.02 N
sodium hydroxide solution until a pale red color persists. The amount of oleic acid is
obtained by multiplying the consumed amount of sodium hydroxide solution with
5.659(mg). The exact amount of unsaponifiables is obtained by subtracting the amount
of fatty acid (as oleic acid) from the amount of residues. The content of
unsaponifiable matter is calculated by the following equation and it should not be
more than 0.3%.
Unsaponifiable
matter(%) =
content of residue(mg) - content as oleic acid(mg)
×
100
weight of the sample(g) 1,000

Water Content Water content of Lauric Acid is determined by water determination

(Karl-Fisher Titration) and should not be more than 0.2%
Residue on Ignition When Residue on Ignition analysis is done with accurately weighted
10 g of Lauric Acid, the amount of residue should not be more than 0.1%.

596
 Laver Color
Definition Laver Color is a pigment obtained by extracting fronds of laver (Porpyhra
tenera KJELLM.) of bangiaceae (a red algae) with water or faintly acidic aqueous
solution at room temperature. It's major pigment component is phycoerythrin. Diluent or
stabilizer can be added for the purpose of activity adjustment and quality preservation.
Compositional Specifications of Laver Color
Content Color value ( )of Laver Color should be more than the indicated value.
Description Laver Color is orange～red paste or liquid with a characteristic scent.
Identification (1) A solution of Laver Color in citric acid buffer solution with pH 6.0 (1→
100) is pink～red in color.
(2) When 4.0 g of ammonium sulfate is dissolved in 10 mL of the solution in (1) and
set aside, red precipitates are formed.
(3) A solution of Laver Color in citric acid buffer solution with pH 6.0 has maximum
absorption bands near 565 nm, 540 nm, and 490 nm.
Purity (1) Arsenic : It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(2) Lead : When 5.0 g of Laver Color is tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content
should not be more than 10.0 ppm.
Assay(color value) Appropriate amount of Laver Color is precisely weighted so that the
absorption is within 0.3～0.7 and dissolved in citric acid buffer solution (pH 6.0) so that
the total volume is 100 mL (Test Solution). If necessary, the solution is centrifuged
and the supernatant is used. Using citric acid buffer solution (pH 6.0) as a reference
solution, absorption A is measured at the maximum absorption near 565 nm with 1 cm
path length. Color value is obtained using the following equation.

Color Value( ) ＝ weight ofA the × 10

sample(g)
∘Citric acid·dibasic sodium phosphate buffer solution (pH 6.0)
Solution 1 ： 0.1 M citric acid solution：1L of solution containing 21.01 g of citric acid
(C6H8O7․H2O).
Solution 2 ： 0.2 M dibasic sodium phosphate solution： 1L of solution containing 71.63
g of dibasic sodium phosphate (Na2HPO4․12H2O).
Solution 1 and Solution 2 are mixed well (73.7:126.3) and its pH is adjusted to 6.0.

597
 Lecithin
INS No.: 322(i)
Synonyms: Phosphatides; Phospholipids CAS No.: 8002-43-5

Definition Lecithin is prepared from oil seeds or yolk of egg. Its major component is
phospholipid.
Compositional Specifications of Lecithin
Description Lecithin is transparent or semi transparent pale yellow～dark brown viscous
liquid, semi-solid, lump, powder or granule with slight characteristic scent and taste.
Identification (1) 1 g of Lecithin is dissolved in 5 mL of petroleum ether. Upon adding
15 mL of acetone, white～pale yellow precipitates are formed.
(2) 1 g of Lecithin is placed in a flask for decomposition, where 5 g of powdered
potassium sulfate, 0.5 g of copper sulfate, and 20 mL of sulfuric acid are added. The
flask is sloped to 45℃ angle and gently heated so that it doesn't bubble. Then the
temperature is raised to boil until the solution becomes transparent blue. It is then
heated for 1～2 hours and cooled and the same amount of water is added. 10 mL of
ammonium molybdate (1→5) is added to 5 mL of the resultant solution. Upon heating
yellow precipitates are formed.
(3) 5 mL of diluted hydrochloric acid (1→2) is added to 0.5 g of Lecithin, which is
then heated for 2 hours in a water bath and filtered, Test Solution. 0.01 mL of Test
Solution is tested by Method 1 in Paper Chromatography using a mixed solution of n
butyl alcohol, acetic acid, and water (4：1：2) as a developing solution. An orange
red spot corresponds to the spot obtained from the control solution is observed. For
the filter paper, No.2 filter paper for chromatography is used. Development is
stopped when the developing solvent rises about 25 cm, which is then dried in air.
Colour is developed by spraying Dragendorf TS and observed in daylight. 0.01 mL of
the reference solution is prepared by dissolving 0.1 g of choline chloride in water
(total volume 20 mL).
Purity (1) Acid Value ： About 2 g of Lecithin is accurately weighed and dissolved in
50 mL of petroleum ether. Then add 50 mL of alcohol, Test Solution. When it tested
as Acid Value in Oil and Fat Test, the value should not be more than 36.
(2) Toluene Insoluble matter ： About 10 g of Lecithin is accurately weighed and
dissolved in 100 mL toluene by shaking in a 250 mL Erlenmeyer flask. Insoluble
matter are filtered through a crucible type G3 glass filter (pore size 16～40 ㎛),
previously weighed, and washed with 25 mL of toluene several times. It is then dried
for 1 hour at 105℃ and cooled in a desiccator and weighed. The content should not
be more than 0.3%.
(3) Acetone Soluble Substances ： Approximately 2 g of Lecithin is accurately weighed
into a 50 mL graduated centrifuge tube with a stopper, where 3 mL of petroleum
ether and 15 mL of acetone. It is then well mixed by stirring and placed in an ice
bath for 15 minutes. 50 mL of acetone, previously chilled to 0∼5℃, is added to the
598
 solution, which is well mixed by stirring and placed in an ice bath for 15 minutes. It
is then centrifuged for 10 minutes to 3,000rpm by the following procedure. The
supernatant is taken into a previously weighed flask. Again, 0～5℃ acetone is added
to make 50mL, and cooled in an ice bath while stirring and mixing. It is then
centrifuged under the following manner. The supernatant is transferred into a flask
and distilled. The residue is dried for 1 hour at 105℃. The amount of the residue
should not be more than 40%.
(4) Peroxide Value ： 5 g of Lecithin is accurately weighed into a 250 mL of
Erlenmeyer flask with a stopper. It is then dissolved to a clear solution in 35 mL of
a 3：2 mixture of glacial acetic acid and chloroform. Clean nitrogen is passed
through to replace air in the flask. 1 mL of potassium iodide TS is added while
nitrogen is bubbled through. A stopper is placed immediately and the flask is shaken
for 1 minute. It is then allow to stand for 5 minutes in a dark place. 75 mL of water
is added and shaken vigorously with a stopper. It is then titrated with 0.01 N sodium
thiosulfate solution (indicator : starch TS). Peroxide value is obtained from the
following equation. It should not be more than 10. Separately, a blank test is carried
out for correction.

Peroxide= Value consumed amount of 0.01N sodium thiosulfate solution

(mL) × 10
weight of sample (g)

(5) Arsenic ： It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(6) Lead : When 5.0 g of Lecithin is tested by Atomic Absorption Spectrophotometry or
Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content should not be more
than 2.0 ppm.
(7) Mercury : When 0.1 g of Lecithin is accurately weighed and tested by Mercury
Test Method, its content should not be more than 1.0ppm.
Loss on Drying When Lecithin is dried for 1 hours at 105℃, the weight loss should not
be more than 2.0%.

599
 L-Leucine
CH3－CHCH2CH－COOH
｜
CH3 ｜NH2

Chemical Formula: C6H13NO2

Molecular Weight: 131.17 INS No.: 641

Synonyms: L-2-Amino-4methylvaleric acid CAS No.: 61-90-5

Compositional Specifications of L-Leucine

Content L-Leucine should contain within a range of 98.5～101.5% L-leusine (C6H13NO2)
after dried.
Description L-Leucine occurs as white crystals or crystalline powder. It is odorless or
has a characteristic odor and has a slightly bitter taste.
Identification L-Leucine sublimes at 150℃.
Purity (1) Specific Rotation ： 4 g of L-Leucine is precisely weighed and dissolved in 6
N hydrochloric acid. The total volume is brought up to 100 mL. Optical rotation of
this solution is measured. When it is converted into a dehydrated form, it should be
within a range of ＝ +14.5∼+16.5°
(2) Lead : When 5.0 g of L-Leucine is tested by Atomic Absorption Spectrophotometry
or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content should not be more
than 5.0 ppm.
(3) Arsenic : It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
Loss on Drying When L-Leucine is dried for 3 hours at 105℃, the weight loss should
not be more than 0.2%.
Residue on Ignition Residue on ignition of L-Leusine should not be more than 0.1%.
Assay Dissolve 0.4 g of L-Leusine, precisely dried and accurately weighed, in 3 mL of
formic acid and 50 mL of glacial acetic acid. This solution is titrated with 0.1 N
perchloric acid solution (indicator : 2 drops of crystal violet buffered in glacial acetic
acid). At the end point, the solution turns bluish green. Separately, a blank experiment
is done following the same procedure.
1 mL of 0.1 N perchloric acid solution ＝ 13.12 mg C6H13NO2

600
 Licorice Extract
Definition Licorice Extract is an extract from the roots and root stocks of licorice of
leguminosae (Glycyrrhiza inflata BATALIN, Glycyrrhiza uralensis FISCHER, Glycyrrhiza
glabra LINNE) or the same genus, which is extracted with hot water or is extracted
and purified with alkalic solution in room or slightly tepid temperature. Its major
component is glycyrrhizinic acid. Licorice Extract includes purified licorice, and crude
licorice.
Compositional Specifications of Licorice Extract
Content Purified Licorice should contain more than 50.0% and crude licorice less than
50.0% as glycyrrhizinic acid, respectively.
Description Purified licorice is white～yellow crystal or powder and crude licorice is
yellow～brown powder, thin platelet, granule, lump, liquid, or paste.
Identification 5∼10 mg of Licorice Extract is dissolved in 10 mL of 50% alcohol, Test
Solution. Separately, 5 mg of glycyrrhizinic acid standard is dissolved in 10 mL of 50%
alcohol, Standard Solution. Each of the solution is proceeded as directed under thin
layer chromatography. 2 μl of each solution drop-wise is added on to a thin layer
plate, which is prepared by using silica gel (with phosphor) for thin layer
chromatography. Using a mixture of n-butyl alcohol : water : acetic acid (7:2:1) as a
developing solvent, each plate is developed up to 10 cm, and then dried in air. When
these plates are observed under UV light (major wavelength at 254 nm), one of the
spots for test solution should have the same color tone and Rf against the dark violet
spot for standard solution (glycyrrhizinic acid).
Purity (1) Arsenic ： It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(2) Lead : When 5.0 g of Licorice Extract is tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content
should not be more than 2.0 ppm.
Residue on Ignition 1 g of Licorice Extract is dried in a water bath, if necessary. When
Residue on Ignition analysis is done, the amount of residue should not be more than 15.0%.
Assay Licorice Extract which corresponds to approximately 20 mg as glycyrrhizinic acid
is accurately weighed, dissolved in 50% alcohol, and the total volume is make to 100
mL, Test Solution. Separately, 20 mg of glycyrrhizinic acid standard is accurately
weighed, dissolved in 50% alcohol, and the total volume is make to 100 mL, Standard
Solution. 20 μl of each solution is injected into liquid chromatography as the following
operation conditions. The content of licorice extract is obtained from the following
equation.
Content(%) ＝ TG × W
SG × W
s
× 100

SG ： Peak area of standard solution

TG ： Peak area of test solution
601
 Ws ： Weight of standard (mg) (converted into a anhydrous form)
W ： Weight of sample (mg) (converted into a anhydrous form)
Operation Conditions
-Detector ： UV 254 nm
-Column ： μ-Bondapak C18 (inner diameter 4∼6 mm, length 15∼30 cm) or its
equivalent
-Column Temperature ： 40℃
-Mobile Phase ： 2% acetic acid ： acetonitrile (20：11)
-Flow Rate ： It is adjusted so that the retention time of glycyrrhizinic acid is
approximately 10 minutes.

602
 Linalool

Chemical Formula: C10H18O

Molecular Weight: 154.25

Synonyms: Linalol; Licareol CAS No.: 78-70-6

Compositional Specifications of Linalool

Content Linalool should contain not less than 92.0% of linalool (C10H18O).
Description Linalool is a colorless, transparent liquid having a characteristic odor.
Identification To 1 mL of Linalool, add 1 mL of anhydrous acetic acid and 1 drop of
phosphoric acid, keep at a slight warm temperature for 10 minutes, add 1 mL of
water, shake in warm water for 5 minutes, cool, and add sodium carbonate solution
to weakly alkalinize the solution. An odor of sodium acetate is evolved.
Purity (1) Specific Gravity : Specific gravity of Linalool should be within a range of
0.858～0.867.
(2) Refractive Index : Refractive Index of Linalool should be within a range of 1.461～
1.465
(3) Clarity and Color of Solution : When 1 mL of Linalool is dissolved in 4 mL of 60%
ethanol, the solution should be clear.
(4) Chlorides : When Linalool is tested by Copper Mesh Test Method in Halogenated
Compounds for Flavoring substance test, it should be appropriate.
(5) Acid Value : Acid value of Linalool is tested by Acid Value in Flavoring Substance
Test. It should not be more than 1.
(6) Ester Value : When about 5 g of Linalool, precisely weighed, is tested by Ester
Value in Flavoring Substance Test. It should not be more than 2.
Assay Transfer 10 mL of Linalool into a flask, allow to stand in ice for 10 minutes, add
20 mL of dimethylaniline, and shake well. Add 10 mL of acetyl chloride(for linalool
Assay) and 5 mL of anhydrous acetic acid. With a air condenser, shake well, allow to
stand in cold water for 5 minutes, and allow to stand for 30 minutes at room
temperature. Heat in a water bath at 50℃ for 4 hours, cool, transfer the contents to a
separatory funnel, and wash 3 times with 75 mL of ice water each time. Wash the oily
layer with 25 mL of dilute sulfuric acid. Add sodium hydroxide solution to alkalinize
the washings until it does not become turbid. Wash with 10 mL of sodium carbonate
solution until washing become alkaline. Wash with 25 mL of sodium chloride solution
until the washings become neutral. Oily phase is transferred into a dried flask. Add 2
603
g of anhydrous sodium sulfate, shake and allow to stay for 30 minutes, and filter.
Take 1 g of filterate, precisely weighed, test by Ester Value in Flavoring Substances
Test. Separately, a blank test is carried out by the same method.
(a ­ b) × 77.12
Content(%) = × 100
[s - (a - b) × 0.02102] × 1,000
a : Consumed amount of 0.5 N hydrochloric acid in blank test (mL)
b : Consumed amount of 0.5 N hydrochloric acid of the Test Solution (mL)
s : Amount of filtrate used (g)

604
 Linalyl Acetate

Chemical Formula: C12H20O2

Molecular Weight: 196.29
Synonyms: Bergamol; Licareol acetate CAS No.: 115-95-7

Compositional Specifications of Linalyl Acetate

Content Linalyl Acetate should be contain not less than 90.0% of linalyl acetate
(C12H20O2).
Description Linalyl Acetate is a colorless to light yellow, transparent liquid having a
characteristic odor.
Identification To 1 mL of Linalyl Acetate, add 5 mL of 10% alcoholic solution of
potassium hydroxide solution, and heat in a water bath. The characteristic odor
disappears, and an odor of linalool is evolved. Cool, and add 12 mL of water and 2 mL
of diluted hydrochloric acid (1→3). The solution responds to the test for Acetate (3) in
Identification.
Purity (1) Specific Gravity : Specific gravity of Linalyl Acetate should be within a range
of 0.895～0.914
(2) Refractive Index : Refractive Index of Linalyl Acetate should be within a range of
1.449～1.457
(3) Clarity and Color of Solution : When 1 mL of Linalyl Acetate is dissolved in 5 mL
of 70% alcohol, the solution should be clear.
(4) Acid Value : Acid value of Linalyl Acetate is tested by Acid Value in Flavoring
Substance Test. The content should not be more than 1.
Assay Accurately weigh about 1 g of Linalyl Acetate, and proceed as directed under
Ester Value and Ester Content in Flavoring Substances Tests.
1 mL of 0.5 N alcoholic solution of potassium hydroxide = 98.14 mg of C12H20O2

605
 Lipase
Definition Lipase is an enzyme obtained from a culture of Aspergillus niger and its
variety, Aspergillus oryzae and its variety, Candida rugosa, Rhizopus oryzae, and
Aspergillus oryzae where the lipase gene of Rhizomucor miehei, Aspergillus niger
where the lipase gene of Thermomyces lanquinosus, Aspergillus oryzae where the
lipase gene of Fusarium oxyporum, Aspergillus oryzae where the lipase gene of
Thermonyces languinosus, Aspergillus niger where the lipase gene of Candida
antarctica is inserted, and animal pancreas tissue or forestomach of animal. Dilutant or
stabilizer can be added for the purpose of activity adjustment and quality preservation.
Compositional Specifications of Lipase
Description Lipase is white～dark brown power, granule, paste or colorless～dark brown
liquid.
Identification When Lipase is proceeded as directed under Activity Test, it should have
the activity as Lipase.
Purity (1) Arsenic ： It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(2) Lead : When 5.0 g of Lipase is tested by Atomic Absorption Spectrophotometry or
Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content should not be more
than 5.0 ppm.
(3) Coliform Group ： Lipase is tested by Microbe Test Methods for Coliform Group in
General Test Methods 「Standards and Specifications for Foods」. It should contain
30 or less per 1 g of this product.
(4) Salmonella ： Lipase is tested by Microbe Test Methods for Salmonella in General
Test Methods 「Standards and Specifications for Foods」. It should be negative (-).
(5) E. Coli : When Lipase is tested by Microbe Test Methods for E. Coli in General
Test Method 「Standards and Specifications for Foods」, it should be negative (-).
Activity Test (activity)
∘Analysis Principle ： Activity test is based on measuring the ratio of increasing
hydrolysis rate of Tributyrin by potentiometric titration.
∘Preparation of Test Solution ： Sample is diluted with glycine so that 1 mL of the
solution contains 2,000∼5,000 Lipase units. The resultant solution is further diluted
with water so that 1 mL of the resulting Test Solution contains 0.5∼1.5 Lipase units.
Test Procedure ： The burette of the titrator is filled with 0.05 N sodium hydroxide
solution and the scale mark is adjusted. Temperature and pH are set to 30℃ and 7.0,
respectively. 15.0 mL of substrate emulsifying solution is transferred into a reaction
vessel of the titrator and a magnetic stir bar is placed. The reaction vessel is attached
to the titrator and 1.0 mL of Test Solution is added. Then the titrator is switched on.
The reaction is maintained while adjusting the pH at 7.0 with 0.05 N sodium hydroxide
solution. A calibration curve is prepared vs. the consumed amount of 0.05 N sodium
hydroxide solution per minute.
(Note : Reaction rate shown in the recorder for 5 minutes should be a straight line.)
606
 Activity of the enzyme is obtained by the following equation.

LU/g = R × N W× 1,000
R : Consumed amount of titrant per minute in the straight line region (mL/min)
N : Normality of sodium hydroxide solution
1,000 : Conversion factor from mol to μmol
W : Weight of sample in 1 mL of Test Solution (g)
Definition of Activity ： 1 Lipase unit (LU) corresponds to the amount of enzyme which
separates 1 μmol of butyric acid per minute from the substrate under the conditions
above.
Solutions
∘Emulsifying Solution : 17.9 g of sodium chloride and 0.41 g of mono potassium
phosphate are added in 400 mL of water, where 540 mL of glycerol is
added. 6.0 g of gum Arabic (Sigma, or its equivalent) is added to the above
solution, which is then shaken vigorously until it dissolves. Water is added
to bring the total volume to 1,000 mL.
∘Glycine Buffer Solution (0.1 M) : 7.5 g of glycine and 3.8 g of sodium hydroxide are
dissolved in 900 mL of water. After adjusting the pH to 10.8, water is added
to bring the total volume to 1,000 mL.
∘Substrate Emulsifying Solution : 15.9 mL of Tributyrin (Sigma, or equivalent) placed in a
homogenizer, where 50 mL of emulsifier and 235 mL of water are added. It
is then homogenized for 15 minutes at a high speed. Solutions are
isothermalized at 30℃ for at least 15 minutes in a water bath prior to use.
This solution should be used within 4 hours.
Storage Standard of Lipase
Lipase should be stored in a hermetic container in a cold dark place.

607
 Liquid Paraffin

INS No.: 905a

Synonyms: Food grade mineral oil; White CAS No.: 8012-95-1
mineral oil

Definition Liquid Paraffin is a mixture of hydrocarbons derived from petroleum.

Compositional Specifications of Liquid Paraffin
Description Liquid Paraffin is colorless, clear, and viscous liquid having almost no
fluorescence. It is odorless and tasteless.
Identification (1) Liquid Paraffin is placed in a porcelain dish. When ignited, it burns with
a bright flame, which generates a characteristic odor of paraffin vapor.
(2) Approximately 0.5 g of Liquid Paraffin is mixed with the same amount of sulfur.
When the mixture is heated, an odor of hydrogen sulfide is generated.
Purity (1) Free acid and free alkali : Approximately 10 mL of hot water and 1 drop of
phenolphthalein are added to 10 mL of Liquid Paraffin. When the mixture is
vigorously shaken, it should not develop red. When 0.2 mL of 0.02N sodium
hydroxide solution is added and mixed by shaking, it should develop red.
(2) Arsenic : It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(3) Lead : When 5.0 g of Liquid Paraffin is tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content
should not be more than 1.0 ppm.
(4) Polynuclear aromatic hydrocarbons : 25 mL of Liquid Paraffin is precisely taken in
a 25 mL measuring cylinder and transferred into a 100 mL separatory funnel, where
25 mL of n-hexane is added and well mixed by shaking. 5 mL of dimethyl sulfoxide
is added to the solution, which is mixed by shaking vigorously for 2 minutes and
settled for 15 minutes. The lower layer is transferred into a 50 mL separating
funnel, where 2 mL of n-hexane is added, shaken vigorously for 2 minutes, and
settled for 2 minutes. The lower layer is transferred into a centrifuge tube with a
stopper and centrifuged at 2,500～3,000 rpm for about 10 minutes. The clear
supernatant is transferred into a cell with a tight stopper (Test Solution). Separately,
25 mL of n-hexane is taken into a 50 mL separating funnel, where 5 mL of dimethyl
sulfoxide is added, mixed by shaking vigorously for 2 minutes and settled for 2
minutes. The lower phase is centrifuged in a 10 mL centrifuge tube with a stopper
at 2,500～3,000 rpm for 10 minutes. The clear supernatant is transferred into a cell
with a tight stopper (Reference Solution). Absorption of the Test Solution is
immediately measured with 1cm path length using the Reference Solution as a
reference. The absorbance should not exceed 0.1 in at a wavelength range of 260～
350 nm. N-hexane and dimethyl sulfoxide should be for UV absorption
spectrophotometry.
(5) Readily Carbonizable Substances : 5 mL of Liquid Paraffin is taken into a Nestler
tube, where 5 mL of 94.5∼94.9% sulfuric acid. It is then heated for 2 minutes in a
608
water bath. It is immediately taken out of the water bath and shaken (up and down)
vigorously for 5 seconds. When this procedure is repeated 4 times, the color of the
fluidal paraffin layer does not change color. The color of the layer of sulfuric acid
should not be deeper than that of a solution that is prepared by mixing 3 mL of
ferric chloride color standard solution, 1.5 mL of cobalt I chloride color standard
solution, and 0.5 mL of copper sulfate color standard solution in a Nestler tube by
shaking.

609
 Locust Bean Gum
Carob Bean Gum

INS No.: 410

Synonyms: Carob bean gum; Algaroba gum CAS No.: 9000-40-2

Definition Locust Bean Gum is obtained by crushing endosperm of legumes and locust
bean (Ceratonia). Crushed endosperms are dissolved in hot water and filtered. By
adding isopropyl alcohol, precipitates are formed. Major component is polysaccharide.
Compositional Specifications of Locust Bean Gum
Description Locust Bean Gum is white～pale yellowish brown powder or granule. It is
odorless or has a characteristic odor.
Identification (1) 2 g of Locust Bean Gum is placed into a 400 mL beaker. It is then
wetted with 4 mL of isopropyl alcohol. 200 mL of cold water is added with
vigorously stirring. When the solution is homogenized by stirring continuously, it
becomes white sticky solution.
(2) 100 mL of Test Solution in (1) is placed into a 400 mL beaker. When it is boiled
for 10 minutes in a water bath, the viscosity increases significantly.
Purity (1) Arsenic ： It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(2) Lead : When 5.0 g of Locust Bean Gum is tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content
should not be more than 2.0 ppm.
(3) Cadmium : When 5.0 g of Locust Bean Gum is tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content
should not be more than 1.0 ppm.
(4) Mercury : When 0.1 g of Locust Bean Gum proceeded by Mercury Test Method, its
content should not be more than 1.0ppm.
(5) Starch ： 1 g of Locust Bean Gum is dissolved in 10 mL of water and is boiled,
which is then cooled. When 2 drops of iodine TS are added, it should not turn blue.
(6) Isopropyl alcohol : 0.2 g of Locust Bean Gum is accurately weighed into a 300 mL
round bottom flask, 200 mL of water is added, boiling chips and 1 mL of silicone
resin are added and mixed well. Distillation column is connected to this, 4 mL of
internal standard solution is taken into a 100 mL flask. While caring for the bubbles
not to overflow, distill the solution at the rate of 2~3 mL per 1 minute until the
milky liquid becomes about 90 mL, and water is added to make 100 mL, Test
Solution. However, tert-butyl alcohol (1→1,000) is used as internal standard solution.
Separately, 0.5 g of isopropyl alcohol is accurately weighed and water is added to
make 500 mL, 2 mL of this solution and 4 mL of internal standard solution is taken
again, water is added to make 100 mL, Standard Solution. 2μl of each of test solution
and standard solution is taken respectively, and injected to gas chromatograph with
610
 the following operation condition. Then, ratio of isopropyl alcohol peak against
tert-butyl alcohol peak in test Solution and standard solution, QT and QS, is
calculated separately, and the content of isopropyl alcohol is calculated by following
formula, the content should not be more than 1.0%.
Content of Weightalcohol(g)
of isopropyl QT 2×100
Isopropyl= alcohol(%) × × ×100
Weight of sample(g) QS 500×100
QT : Ratio of isopropyl alcohol peak against tert-butyl alcohol peak in Test Solution
QS : Ratio of isopropyl alcohol peak against tert-butyl alcohol peak in standard solution
Operation Conditions
Column : PLOT Q or equivalent
Detector : Hydrogen Flame Ionization Detector (FID)
Injection Temperature : 200℃
Column Temperature : 120℃
Detector temperature : 300℃
Carrier gas : Nitrogen or Helium
(7) Total Viable Aerobic Count : When Locust Bean Gum is tested by Microbe Test
Methods for Total Viable Aerobic Count (Number of General Germs) in General Test
Method in 「Standards and Specifications for Foods」, it should not be more than
5,000 per 1 g.
(8) E. Coli : When Locust Bean Gum is tested by Microbe Test Methods for E. Coli in
General Test Method 「Standards and Specifications for Foods」, it should be
negative (-).
(9) Salmonella : When Locust Bean Gum is tested by Microbe Test Methods for
Salmonella in General Test Method 「Standards and Specifications for Foods」, it
should be negative (-).
(10) Number of Fungi : When Locust Bean Gum is tested by Microbe Test Methods for
Number of Fungi in General Test Method in 「Standards and Specifications for Food
s」, it should not be more than 500 per 1 g
Ash When it is tested for ash, the content should not be more than 1.2%.
Loss on Drying 3 g of Locust Bean Gum is dried for 5 hours at 105℃. The weight loss
should not be more than 15%.
Protein When Locust Bean Gum is tested by Kjeldahl Method in Nitrogen Determination,
the amount should not be more than 8%. (Protein Factor ： 6.25).
Acid Insoluble substances 1.5 g of Locust Bean Gum is accurately weighed and
dissolved in 150 mL of water and 1.5 mL sulfuric acid into a beaker, which is covered
with a watch glass and heated for 6 hours in a water bath. Beaker wall is washed with
water so that the residue doesn't remain on the wall. After heating is complete, it is
filtered through a glass filter (Glass filter is accurately weighed. 500 mg of appropriate
filtering aid is added to the filter, which is then heated until the weight becomes
611
constant.). The residue is washed thoroughly with hot water and dried for 3 hours at
105℃. The weight of the filtering aid is subtracted from the weight of the residue,
which should not be more than 5%.

612
 L-Lysine

Chemical Formula: C6H14N2O2

Molecular Weight: 146.19 CAS No.: 56-87-1

Compositional Specifications of L-Lysine

Content L-Lysine, when calculated on the dried basis(anhydrous), should contain within a
range of 97.0∼103.0% of L-lysine (C6H14N2O2).
Description L-Lysine is white crystallite or crystalline powder with characteristic scent
and taste.
Identification (1) 1 mL of ninhydrine solution (1→50) is added to 5 mL aqueous solution
of L-Lysine (1→1,000). Upon heating for 3 minutes in a water bath, this solution
turns reddish violet.
(2) L-Lysine solution is alkaline.
Purity (1) Clarity and Color of Solution : A solution of 1.0 g of L-Lysine in 40 mL of 1
N hydrochloric acid should be colorless and almost clear (or better).
(2) Specific Rotation : Precisely weighed 2 g of L-Lysine is dissolved in 6 N
hydrochloric acid, where the total volume of the solution is 100 mL. Optical rotation of the
solution is measured. When it is translated to dried material, specific rotation ＝＋
23.3∼＋29.3°
(3) Chlorides : When 0.07 g of L-Lysine is tested by Chloride Limit Test, the detected
amount should not be more than the amount that corresponds to 0.2 mL of 0.01 N
hydrochloric acid.
(4) Arsenic : It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(5) Lead : When 5.0 g of L-Lysine is tested by Atomic Absorption Spectrophotometry
or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content should not be more
than 5.0 ppm.
Water Content Water content in precisely weighed 0.2 g of L-Lysine is determined by
back titration method in water determination (Karl-Fisher Titration) and should not be
more than 8.0%.
Residue on Ignition When thermogravimetric analysis is done, the amount of residue
should not be more than 0.2%.
Assay Approximately 0.2 g is precisely weighed and dissolved in 3 mL of formic acid,
where 50 mL of glacial acetic acid (for non-aqueous titration) is added. This solution
613
is titrated with 0.1 N perchloric acid solution (indicator : 1 mL of crystal violet
buffered in glacial acetic acid). At the end point, the solution turns from violet to blue,
then to green. Separately, a blank experiment is done following the same procedure.
1 mL of 0.1 N perchloric acid solution ＝ 7.310 mg C6H14N2O2

614
 L-Lysine Monohydrochloride

Chemical Formula: C6H14O2N2‧HCl

Molecular Weight: 182.65 CAS No.: 657-27-2

Compositional Specifications of L-Lysine Monohydrochloride

Content L-Lysine Monohydrochloride, when calculated on the dried basis, should contain
not less than 98.0% of L-lysine monohydrochloride (C6H14O2N2․HCl).
Description L-Lysine Monohydrochloride occurs as a white powder. It is odorless or has
a light, characteristic odor and taste.
Identification (1) To 5 mL of a solution of L-Lysine Monohydrochloride (1→100), add 1
mL of ninhydrin solution, and heat for 3 minutes. The color of this solution becomes
reddish purple.
(2) L-Lysine Monohydrochloride responds to the test for chloride in Identification.
Purity (1) Clarity and Color of Solution : When 0.5 g of L-Lysine Monohydrochloride is
dissolved in 10 mL of water, the solution should be colorless and should not more than
almost clear.
(2) Specific Rotation : Accurately weigh about 4 g of L-Lysine Monohydrochloride,
precisely dried, and dissolve in 6N hydrochloric acid to make 50 mL. Optical rotation of this
solution is measured and it should be ＝ +19.0 ∼ +21.5°.
(3) Arsenic : It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(4) Lead : When 5.0 g of L-Lysine Monohydrochloride is tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content
should not be more than 5.0 ppm.
Loss on Drying When L-Lysine Monohydrochloride is dried for 3 hours at 105℃, the
weight loss should not be more than 1%.
Residue on Ignition When thermogravimetric analysis is done with L-Lysine
Monohydrochloride, the residue should not be more than 0.2%.
Assay Dissolve about 0.2 g of L-Lysine Monohydrochloride, previously dried and
accurately weigh, in 3 mL of formic acid, add 50 mL of glacial acetic acid and 5 mL
of mercury II acetate-glacial acetic acid solution (3→50), and titrated with 1N
perchloric acid (indicator : 0.5 mL of α-naphthol benzene). The end point is where the
solution changes its color from brown to green. Separately, a blank test is carried out
by the same method.

615
1 mL of 0.1 N perchloric acid ＝ 9.133 mg C6H14O2N2․HCl

616
 Lysozyme

INS No.: 1105

Synonyms: Lysozyme hydrochloride; CAS No.: 12650-88-3
Muramidase

Definition Lysozyme is a thing obtained by treated white egg with alkalic solution and
saline solution and refined resin, or an enzyme obtained by refined column or
recrystallized after added salt. Dilutant or stabilizer can be added for the purpose of
activity adjustment and quality preservation.
Compositional Specifications of Lysozyme
Description Lysozyme is white~dark brown powder, granule, paste or colorless~dark
brown liquid.
Identification (1) 50 mg of Lysozyme is dissolved in 100 mL of phosphate buffer
solution (pH 6.2). 2 mL of this solution is diluted 100 mL with phosphate buffer
solution (pH 6.2). 2 mL of this solution is diluted 50 mL with phosphate buffer
solution (pH 6.2), Test Solution. 3 mL each of substrate solution is taken into 2 test
tubes, which are heated for 3 minutes at 35℃. Separately, Test Solution and
phosphate buffer solution (pH 6.2) are heated for 3 minutes at 35℃. 3 mL of each is
added to the previous test tubes, which is then allow to stand for 10 minutes at 3
5℃. Turbidity of the solution with Test Solution should less than that with phosphate
buffer solution (pH 6.2).
(2) A solution (1→10,000) of Lysozyme dissolved in acetic acid·sodium acetate buffer
solution (pH 5.4) shows a maximum absorption at 279～281 nm..
(3) When Lysozyme is proceeded as directed under Activity Test, it should have the
activity as Lysozyme.
Purity (1) Clarity of Solution ： 5 mL of an aqueous solution (1→100) of Lysozyme is
taken. pH is adjusted to 3.0 with dilute hydrochloric acid if necessary. The
transmittance of the resultant solution at 660 nm should be more than 80.0%.
(2) Arsenic ： It should be no more than 1.3 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(3) Lead : When 5.0 g of Lysozyme is tested by Atomic Absorption Spectrophotometry
or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content should not be more
than 2.0 ppm.
(4) Mercury : When 0.1 g of Lysozyme is tested by Mercury Test Method, its content
should not be more than 1.0 ppm.
(5) Chloride ： Approximately 0.5 g of Lysozyme is accurately weighed and dissolved
in 50 mL of water, where 0.1 mL of 10% potassium chromate solution is added. It is
then titrated with 0.1 N silver nitrate solution. The content of chlorides (as chlorine)
should not be more than 3.0%.
1 mL of 0.1 N silver nitrate solution ＝ 3.545 mg C1
(6) Nitrogen : When Lysozyme is tested by nitrogen determination method, the amount
should be between 16.8 and 17.8%.
617
 (7) Total Viable Aerobic Count : When Lysozyme is tested by Microbe Test Methods
for Total Viable Aerobic Count (Number of General Germs) in General Test Method
in 「Standards and Specifications for Foods」, it should not be more than 5,000 per 1
g.
(8) E. Coli : When Lysozyme is tested by Microbe Test Methods for E. Coli in General
Test Method 「Standards and Specifications for Foods」, it should be negative (-).
(9) Salmonella : When Lysozyme is tested by Microbe Test Methods for Salmonella in
General Test Method 「Standards and Specifications for Foods」, it should be
negative (-).
(10) Staphylococcus aureus : When Lysozyme is tested by Microbe Test Methods for
Staphylococcus aureus in General Test Method 「Standards and Specifications for
Foods」, it should be negative (-).
Water Content Water content of Lysozyme is determined by direct titration in water
determination (Karl-Fisher Titration) and should not be more than 6.0%.
Residue on Ignition When Lysozyme is done with Residue on Ignition, the amount of
residue should not be more than 1.5%.
Activity Test (Activity)
∘Preparation of Test Solution ： 50 mg (activity) of Lysozyme is accurately weighed and
dissolved in phosphate buffer solution (pH 6.2) (total volume 100 mL). 2 mL of this
solution is diluted to 100 mL with in phosphate buffer solution (pH 6.2). 2 mL of the
diluted solution is further diluted to 50 mL with in phosphate buffer solution (pH 6.2).
∘Preparation of Standard Solution ： Amount of being equivalent to 50 mg (activity)
lysozyme standard (drying loss is previously measured by the same method as the
sample) is accurately weighed and dissolved in phosphate buffer solution (pH 6.2) to
make volume 100 mL. 2 mL of this solution is diluted to 100 mL with in phosphate
buffer solution (pH 6.2). 2 mL of the diluted solution is further diluted to 50 mL with
in phosphate buffer solution (pH 6.2).
Test Procedure ： 3 mL each of substrate solution is placed in three test tubes, which
are heated for 3 minutes at 35℃. Separately, Standard Solution, Test Solution, and
phosphate buffer solution are heated for 3 minutes at 35℃. Each solution is added to
the previous 3 test tubes, which are then reacted for 10 ± 0.1 minutes at 35℃. Using
water as a reference, absorbance at 640 nm is measured immediately (AS = Standard
Solution, AT = Test Solution, and AO = phosphate buffer solution). The test is
repeated three times and an average value is obtained. Activity of lysozyme is
calculated from the following equation.
Activity of lysozyme mg(activity)/mg, as a dehydrated form
weight of the standard[dried
Ao—AT
Activity[mg(activity)/mg, form, mg(activity)]
＝ ×
as dried form] weight of the sample[dried
Ao—As
form(mg)]

618
Solutions
∘Phosphate Buffer Solution (pH 6.2)
Solution 1 ： 10.4 g of sodium phosphate, monobasic is dissolved in water (total
volume = 1,000 mL).
Solution 2 ： 9.465 g of sodium phosphate, dibasic (anhydrous) is dissolved in water
(total volume = 1,000 mL).
Solution 1 and Solution 2 (815 : 185) are mixed and pH is adjusted to pH 6.2.
∘Acetic Acid Sodium Acetate Buffer Solution (pH 5.4)
Solution 1： 13.6 g of sodium acetate is dissolved in water (total volume = 1,000 mL).
Solution 2 ： 6 mL of glacial acetic acid is diluted to 1,000 mL with water.
Solution 1 and Solution 2 (800:100) are mixed and pH is adjusted to 5.4.
∘Substrate Solution ： Appropriate amount of dried biomass of Micrococcus luteus
(Micrococcus lysodeikticus) is suspended in phosphate buffer solution (pH 6.2) by
homogenizer. More phosphate buffer solution is added so that the transmittance at 640
nm becomes 10%. If there is a lot change in substrate, a calibration curve for the
standard material is prepared and an optimum concentration in a straight line region is
used. Usually, a straight line is observed in 0.2∼0.6 μg(activity)/mL range.

Storage Standard of Lysozyme

Lysozyme should be stored in a hermetic container in a cold dark place.

619
 Magnesium Carbonate

INS No.: 504(i)

Other names: Hydromagnesite CAS No.: 546-93-0
Compositional Specifications of Magnesium Carbonate
Content Magnesium Carbonate should contain within a range of the equivalent of 40.0～
44.0% of magnesium oxide (MgO = 40.32).
Description Magnesium Carbonate occurs as white, bulky powder or brittle lumps.
Identification To 0.2 g of Magnesium Carbonate, add gradually 3 mL of diluted
hydrochloric acid. It dissolves while effervescence occurs. Add ammonia solution to
make the solution alkaline. The solution responds to the test for Magnesium Salt.
Purity (1) Clarity and Color of Solution : 1 g of Magnesium Carbonate is dissolved in 10
mL of diluted hydrochloric acid (2→3), and add 10 mL of water. The solution should
not be more than slightly turbid.
(2) Water Soluble Substances : To 2 g of Magnesium Carbonate, add 100 mL of freshly
boiled and cooled water, boil, stirring, cool, filter, measure 50 mL of this solution
evaporate to dryness in water bath, and dry the residue at 120℃ for 3 hours. The
amount should not be more than 10 mg.
(3) Arsenic : It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(4) Lead : Magnesium Carbonate is tested by purity (2) for 「Sodium Metaphosphate」
(not more than 2.0 ppm).
(5) Acid Insoluble substances : 5 g of Magnesium Carbonate is mixed with 75 mL of
water, stirred, and dissolved by adding hydrochloric acid in small portion until it is
not dissolved anymore. Boil for 5 minutes. The residue is filtered, washed with water
until Chloride Ion is not detected, and ignited. The amount of the residue should not
be more than 0.05%.
(6) Calcium Oxide : Approximately 0.6 g of Magnesium Carbonate is precisely weighed
and dissolved in 35 mL of water and 6 mL of diluted hydrochloric acid (1→4), where
250 mL of water and 5 mL of tartaric acid solution (1→5). To this solution, 10 mL of
triethanol amine solution (3→10) and 10 mL of potassium hydroxide solution (1→2)
are added, which is then set-aside for 5 minutes. It is then titrated with 0.01 M EDTA
solution(indicator : 0.1 g of 2-oxy-1-(2'-oxy-4'-sulfo-1'-naphthylazo)-3-naphthoic acid).
The content of calcium oxide should not be more than 0.6%. End point is where the
red color of the solution completely disappears and changes to blue. Separately a
blank test is carried out.
1 mL of 0.01 M EDTA solution ＝0.56 mg CaO
Assay Accurately weigh about 0.4 g of Magnesium Carbonate, dissolve in 10 mL of
water and 3.5 mL of diluted hydrochloric acid (1→4), and add water to make exactly
500 mL. Measure exactly 25 mL of this solution, add 50 mL of water and 5 mL of
620
ammonia ammonium chloride buffer (pH 10.7), and titrate with 0.01 M EDTA (indicator
: 0.04 g of a homogeneously ground mixture of 0.1 g of Eriochrome black T and 10 g
of sodium chloride). Separately, perform a blank test in the same manner, make any
necessary correction, and calculate the consumed volume as a mL. Take the consumed
volume of 0.01 M EDTA obtained in Purity (6) as b mL, and calculate the amount by
the following formula
Amount of Magnesium
=
Oxide(MgO)(%) (a – 0.033b) × 0.8061
weight of the sample(g)

621
 Magnesium Chloride
Chemical Formula: MgCl2‧6H2O

Molecular Weight: 203.30 INS No.: 511

Synonyms: Magnesium chloride
hexahydrate CAS No.: 7786-30-3

Compositional Specifications of Magnesium Chloride

Content Magnesium Chloride should contain not less than 99.0% of magnesium chloride
(MgCl2․6H2O).
Description Magnesium Chloride occurs as colorless to white crystals, powder,
fragments, granules, or crystalline lumps.
Identification Magnesium Chloride responds to the tests for Magnesium Salt and Chloride
in Identification.
Purity (1) Clarity and Color of Solution : 1 g of Magnesium Chloride is dissolved in 10
mL of water. The turbidity of resulting solution should show slightly low level of
turbid or better.
(2) Arsenic : It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(3) Lead : Magnesium Chloride is tested by purity (2) for 「Sodium Metaphosphate」
(not more than 2.0 ppm).
(4) Mercury : When Magnesium Chloride is tested by Mercury Limit Test, its content
should not be more than 1.0 ppm.
(5) Zinc : Weigh 4 g of Magnesium Chloride, dissolve in water to make 40 mL, and use
it as the test solution. Measure 30 mL of the test solution, add 5 drops of glacial
acetic acid and 2 mL of potassium ferrocyanide solution (1→20), shake, and allow to
stand for 10 minutes. The turbidity of this solution should not be more than the
reference solution which is prepared by following method. Measure 14 mL of Zinc
Standard Solution, and add 10 mL of the test solution and water to make 30 mL. Add
5 drops of acetic acid and 2 mL of potassium ferrocyanide solution (1→20), shake,
and allow to stand for 10 minutes.
(6) Calcium : Weigh 0.5 g of Magnesium Chloride, and dissolve in water to make 50
mL. Take 5 mL of this solution, add 1 mL of ammonium oxalate solution, and allow
to stand for 5 minutes. The solution should be is very slightly turbid or better.
(7) Ammonium ion : Dissolve 1 g of Magnesium Chloride in 90 mL water, and slowly
add 10 mL of a freshly boiled and cooled solution of sodium hydroxide (1→10). Allow
to settle, then decant 20 mL of the supernatant liquid into a Nessler tube, and dilute
to 50 mL with water, Test Solution. Separately, transfer 48mL of ammonium standard
solution into Nessler tube and add 2 mL of the sodium hydroxide solution(1→10),
Reference Solution. Add 2 mL of Nessler's TS to each test solution and reference
solution and compare these colors. The color of test solution should not deeper than
that of reference solution (not more than 50 ppm).
Standard solution : 0.618 g of ammonium chloride is precisely weighed and dissolved in
622
 water to make 1,000 mL. 1 mL of this solution is weighed again, and water is added
to make 1, 000 mL. (48 mL of this solution contains 10μg of Ammonium ion)
Assay Accurately weigh about 0.3 g of Magnesium Chloride, and dissolve in water to
make exactly 100 mL. Take 20 mL of this solution, add 50 mL of water and 5 mL of
ammonia-ammonium chloride buffer (pH 10.7). and titrate with 0.01 M EDTA (indicator
: 2 drops of Eriochrome black T solution) until the red color of the solution changes
to blue. Calculate the content by the following formula:

Consumed amount of 0.01M EDTA solution (mL) × 1.017

weight of the sample(g)

Content of Magnesium Chloride (MgCl2․6H2O)(%) =

623
 Magnesium Gluconate
Chemical Formula: MgCl2‧6H2O

Molecular Weight: 203.30 INS No.: 511

Synonyms: Magnesium chloride
hexahydrate CAS No.: 7786-30-3

Definition Magnesium Gluconate occurs as anhydrous, the dihydrate, or a mixture of

both.
Compositional Specifications of Magnesium Gluconate
Content Magnesium Gluconate, when calculated on the dried basis(anhydrous), should contain
within a range of 98.0～102.0% of Magnesium Gluconate (C12H22MgO14)
Description Magnesium Gluconate occurs as a white to gray powder or granule. It is
odorless.
Identification (1) Magnesium Gluconate solution (1→20) responds to the test for
Magnesium Salt.
(2) Magnesium Gluconate is dissolved in water, heating in a water bath at 60℃ if
necessary, to obtain a test solution containing 10 mg/mL. 5 μl each of test solution
and reference solution are applied on thin layer chromatographic plate coated with a
0.25 mm layer of silica gel. Develop the chromatogram in a solvent system until the
solvent front has moved three-fourths of the length of the plate. Remove the plate
from the developing bath, dry it at 110℃ for 20 min, and allow to cool. After
spraying with colorizing reagent, the plate is heated at 110℃ for 10 min. The
principal spot obtained from the test solution should correspond in Rf value, color,
and size to that obtained from the reference solution.
Reference Solution: Prepare 10 mg/mL of Magnesium Gluconate standard as described
for the test solution.
Developing Solvent: Ethyl alcohol: water: ammonium hydroxide: ethyl acetate
(50:30:10:10)
Colorizing reagent: Dissolve 2.5 g of ammonium molybdate in about 50 mL of 2N
sulfuric acid, add 1.0 g of ceric sulfate, swirl to dissolve, and dilute
with 2N sulfuric acid to make 100 mL.
Purity (1) Lead : Transfer 10 g of Magnesium Gluconate, precisely weighed, into a
crucible or a platinum dish. Add 5 mL of 25% sulfuric acid cautiously and mix well,
which is then evaporated to dryness on a steam bath. Place the dish on a heating
plate, preash slowly until most of sulfuric acid disappears, and then ash at 450∼550℃.
Repeat the above mentioned procedure when ashing is insufficient. Prepare sample
blank by ashing 5 mL of 25% sulfuric acid under the same method. After ashing, add
5 mL of 1N hydrochloric acid and dry it on a steam bath. Add 1 mL of 3N
hydrochloric acid and approximately 5 mL of distilled water and dissolve any residue
on a steam bath. Transfer each solution quantitatively to a 10 mL volumetric flask,
dilute to volume with distilled water, and mix. Dilute it if necessary. This solution is
624
 used for test solution. When the test solution is tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content
should not be more than 2.0 ppm.
(2) Reducing Substances : Transfer 1 g of Magnesium Gluconate, accurately weighed,
into a 250 mL Erlenmeyer flask, dissolve it in 10 mL of water, add 25 mL of alkaline
cupric citrate solution, and cover the flask with a small beaker. Boil gently for
exactly 5 min and cool rapidly to room temperature. Add 25 mL of diluted acetic acid
(1→10), 10 mL of 0.1N iodine solution, 10 mL of dilute hydrochloric acid, and 3 mL
of starch solution, and titrate with 0.1N sodium thiosulfate solution until the blue
color disappears. The content of reducing substances should not be more than 1.0%.

Content(asof glucose)
reducing(%)substances
=
(V1N1 - V2N2) × 27
× 100
weight of the sample(mg)

V1 : Volume of 0.1N iodine solution (mL)

N1 : Normality of 0.1N iodine solution
V2 : Volume of 0.1N sodium thiosulfate solution (mL)
N2 : Normality of 0.1N sodium thiosulfate solution
27 : An empirically determined equivalence factor for D-glucose
(3) Water Content : Water content of Magnesium Gluconate is determined by water
determination (Karl-Fischer Method) and should not be more than 3.0∼12.0%. Test
solution should be kept for 30 minutes to dissolve prior to titration.
Assay Dissolve 0.8 g of Magnesium Gluconate, precisely weighed, in 20 mL of water,
add 5 mL of ammonia-ammonium chloride buffer and 0.1 mL of eriochrome black, and
titrate with 0.05M disodium EDTA to a blue endpoint.
1 mL of 0.05 M disodium EDTA = 20.73 mg of C12H22MgO14

625
 Magnesium Hydroxide
Chemical Formula: Mg(OH)2 INS No.: 528

Molecular Weight: 58.32 CAS No.: 1309-42-8

Compositional Specifications of Magnesium Hydroxide

Content Magnesium Hydroxide, when calculated on the dried basis, should contain within
a range of 95.0～100.5% magnesium hydroxide [Mg(OH)2].
Description Magnesium Hydroxide is voluminous white powder.
Identification Dilute hydrochloric acid is added to an aqueous solution (1→20) of
Magnesium Hydroxide. The resulting solution responds to the test for magnesium salts
in Identification.
Purity (1) Free Alkali and Soluble Salts : 2 g of Magnesium Hydroxide is added to 100
mL of water, which is heated for 5 minutes in a water bath and immediately filtered.
After cooling, 50 mL of the filtrate is titrated with 0.1 N sulfuric acid . The
consumed amount of 0.1 N sulfuric acid should not exceed 2 mL (indicator : methyl
red solution). 25 mL of the filtrate is evaporated to dryness in a water bath and
dried for 3 hours at 105℃. The amount of the residue should not be more than 10 mg.
(2) Lead : Magnesium Hydroxide is tested by purity (2) for 「Sodium Metaphosphate」
(not more than 2.0 ppm).
(3) Arsenic : It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(4) Calcium Oxide : Approximately 0.5 g of Magnesium Hydroxide is precisely weighed
and dissolved in a mixture of 3 mL sulfuric acid and 22 mL water. After adding 50
mL of alcohol, the solution is set-aside over night. If necessary, the solution is
heated to 50℃ to dissolve magnesium sulfate crystals. A glass filter is previously
washed with dilute sulfuric acid, water, and alcohol, heated to dry, and weighed. The
solution is then filtered through the glass filter, which is washed with a mixture of 2
N sulfuric acidㆍalcohol (1:2). The glass filter is heated at 450 ± 25℃ until the
weight becomes constant. It is then cooled in a desiccator and weighed. The amount
of calcium sulfate is obtained and the content is calculated from the following
equation. The content should not be more than 1%.
weight of calcium sulfate(mg) × 0.4119
Content of calcium oxide(%) ＝
weight of the sample(mg)
Loss on Drying
When Magnesium Hydroxide is dried for 2 hours at 105℃, the weight loss should not
be more than 2.0%.
Loss on Ignition 0.5 g of Magnesium Hydroxide is slowly heat-treated to 800 ± 25℃ in
a platinum crucible until the weight becomes constant, the weight loss should be within
a range of 30.0～33.0%.
Assay Magnesium Hydroxide is dried for 2 hours at 105℃ prior to use. 0.4 g of
626
Magnesium Hydroxide is precisely weighed and dissolved in 25 mL of 1 N sulfuric
acid. After adding methyl red solution, the excess acid is titrated with 1 N sodium
hydroxide solution. The amount of consumed sulfuric acid is subtracted by the amount
of sulfuric acid corresponding to calcium oxide in the sample. This value is the
amount of magnesium hydroxide.
1 mL of 1 N sulfuric acid ＝ 28.04 mg CaO
1 mL of 1 N sulfuric acid = 29.16 mg Mg(OH)2

627
 Magnesium L-Lactate
Magnesium di-L-lactate

Chemical Formula: Mg(C 3H 5O 3)2․2H 2O

Molecular Weight: 238.48 INS No.: 329

Synonyms: Magnesium di-L-lactate CAS No.: 18917-93-6

Compositional Specifications of Magnesium L-Lactate

Content Magnesium L-Lactate, when calculated on the dried basis, should contain within
a range of 97.5～101.5% of Magnesium L-Lactate(Mg(C3H5O3)2).
Description Magnesium L-Lactate occurs as white crystalline powder.
Identification (1) Magnesium L-Lactate is soluble in water when shaking for more than
30 min but insoluble in ethanol.
(2) Magnesium L-Lactate responds to the test for Magnesium Salt and Lactate in
identification.
Purity (1) Specific Rotation : After drying, approximately 5 g of Magnesium L-Lactate is
precisely weighed, which is dissolved in water to bring the total volume to 100 mL. Optical
rotation of this solution should be within a range of ＝ -7.5∼-8.8° .
(2) Chloride : After drying, when 1 g of Magnesium L-Lactate is tested by Chloride
Limit Test, its amount should not be more than the amount that corresponds to 0.3 mL
of 0.01N hydrochloric acid.
(3) Arsenic: It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(4) Lead : When 5.0 g of Magnesium L-Lactate is tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content
should not be more than 2.0 ppm.
(5) Total Viable Aerobic Count : When Magnesium L-Lactate is tested by Microbe Test
Methods for Total Viable Aerobic Count (Number of General Germs) in General Test
Method in 「Standards and Specifications for Foods」, it should not be more than
1,000 per 1 g
(6) E. coli : When Magnesium L-Lactate is tested by Microbe Test Methods for E. coli
in General Test Method 「Standards and Specifications for Foods」, it should be
negative (-).
(7) Fungi : When Magnesium L-Lactate is tested by Microbe Test Methods for Fungi in
General Test Method in 「Standards and Specifications for Foods」, it should not be
more than 100 per 1 g.
Loss on Drying When Magnesium L-Lactate is dried at 120℃ for 24 hr, the weigh loss
should be within a range of 14.0∼17.0%.
628
Assay Dissolve about 0.5g of Magnesium L-Lactate, preciously dried and accuately
weighed, in 25mL of water. Add 5mL of ammonia-ammonium chloride buffer and
0.1mL of eriochrome black, and titrate with 0.05M EDTA solution until the solution is
blue in color.
1 mL of 0.05M EDTA solution = 10.12 mg Mg(C3H5O3)2

629
 Magnesium Oxide
Chemical Formula: MgO INS No.: 530

Molecular Weight: 40.30 CAS No.: 1309-48-4

Compositional Specifications of Magnesium Oxide

Content Magnesium Oxide, when calculated on the dried basis by igniting, should contain
not less than 96.0% of magnesium oxide (MgO).
Description Magnesium Oxide occurs as a white or whitish, bulky powder. Identification
Dissolve 1 g of Magnesium Oxide in 25 mL of diluted hydrochloric acid (1→3). The
solution responds to the test for Magnesium Salt.
Purity (1) Water-Soluble Substances : To 2.0 g of Magnesium Oxide, add 100 mL of
water, heat in a water bath for 5 minutes. and immediately filter. Cool, measure 25 mL
of the filtrate, evaporate to dryness in a water bath, and dry at 105℃ for 1 hour.
Weigh the residue. its content should not be more than 2.0%.
(2) Free Alkali : Take 50 mL of the filtrate of (1), add 2 drops of methyl red solution,
and add 2.0 mL of 0.1 N sulfuric acid. This solution appears red color.
(3) Arsenic : It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(4) Lead : Magnesium Oxide is tested by purity (2) for 「Sodium Metaphosphate」(not
more than 2.0 ppm).
(5) Calcium Oxide : Take 50 mL of solution A prepared in Assay below, and add water
to make 300 mL. Add 0.6 mL of tartaric acid (1→5), then 10 mL of triethanol amine
(3→10) and 10 mL of potassium hydroxide solution (1→2). Allow to stand for 1
minute, titrate with 0.01 M EDTA, using a micro-burette ( indicator: 0.1 g of
2-oxy-1-(2'-oxy-4'-sulfo-1'-naphthylazo)-3-naphthoesan solution), and express the
consumed volume as B mL. The end point is observed when the red-purple color of
the solution completely disappears and the solution becomes blue. (Not more than 1.5%)
B(mL) × 0.5608
Content of calcium oxide(CaO)(%) =
weight of the sample(g)
Loss on Drying When Magnesium Oxide is dried at 800 ~ 825℃ until the weight
becomes constant, the weight loss should not be more than 5%.
Assay Accurately weigh about 0.5 g of Magnesium Oxide, previously ignited, add 5 mL
of water, 10 mL of hydrochloric acid and 10 mL of perchloric acid, cover with a
watch glass, and heat gradually. After thick white fumes are evolved, heat for another
10 minutes. Cool, add about 50 mL of hot water and 5 mL of diluted hydrochloric acid (1
→2), heat slightly, and immediately filter through a filter paper for quantitative
analysis, and add water to the filtrate to make exactly 500 mL. Take this solution as
solution A. Measure exactly 10 mL of solution A, add water to make 100 mL, add 5
mL of ammonia-ammonium chloride buffer and 2 drops of Eriochrome black T solution,
immediately titrate with 0.01 M EDTA until the red color of the solution changes to
blue, and determine the consumed volume as A mL. Using B mL of the consumed volume
630
obtained in Purity (5), calculate the content by the following formular.
Content of magnesium oxide (MgO) (%) = weight (A - 0.2B) × 2.0152
of the sample(g)

631
 Magnesium Phosphate, Dibasic
Dimagnesium Phosphate
Chemical Formula: MgHPO4‧3H2O

Molecular Weight: 174.33 INS No.: 343(ii)

Synonyms: Dimagnesium phosphate;
CAS No.: 7782-75-4
Magnesium hydrogen phosphate

Compositional Specifications of Magnesium Phosphate, Dibasic

Content Dimagnesium Phosphate is heat-treated and analyzed quantitatively. It should
contain not less than 96.0% of magnesium pyrophosphate (Mg2P2O7).
Description Dimagnesium Phosphate is scentless white crystalline powder.
Identification Proceed as directed under Identification for [Magnesium Phosphate,
Tribasic].
Purity (1) Fluoride : 1 g of Dimagnesium Phosphate is precisely weighed and is tested
by purity (8) for 「Calcium Citrate」, its content should not be more than 10 ppm.
(2) Arsenic : It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(3) Lead : Dimagnesium Phosphate is precisely weighed and is tested by purity (2) for
「Sodium Metaphosphate」, its content should not be more than 2.0 ppm.
(4) Cadmium : Dimagnesium Phosphate is precisely weighed and is tested by purity (3)
for 「Sodium Metaphosphate」, its content should not be more than 1.0 ppm.
(5) Mercury : When Dimagnesium Phosphate is tested by Mercury Limit Test, its
content should not be more than 1.0 ppm.
Loss on Ignition When Dimagnesium Phosphate is heat-treated at 775∼825℃ until the
weight becomes constant, the weight loss should be within a range of 15.0∼36.0%.
Assay After heat-treating, 0.5 g of Dimagnesium Phosphate is precisely weighed and
dissolved in a mixture of 50 mL water and 2 mL hydrochloric acid by heating. After
cooling, the solution is diluted to 100 mL with water. 50 mL of the resulting solution
is transferred into a 400 mL beaker and 100 mL of water is added, which is heated at
55∼60℃. 15 mL of 0.1M EDTA solution is added and pH of the solution is adjusted
to 10. After adding 10 mL of ammonia·ammonium chloride buffer solution, it is titrated
with 0.1 M EDTA solution. The end point is where the color of the solution becomes
to bluish violet from red. (Indicator : 12 drops of Eriochrome black solution).
2 × 11.13 × V
Content(%) =
weight of the sample(g)

V : Consumed amount of 0.1 M EDTA solution (mL)

632
 Magnesium Phosphate, Tribasic
Trimagnesium Phosphate
Chemical Formula: Mg3(PO4)2‧nH2O(n=0,4,5
or 8)
Molecular Weight: 8hydrates 406.86
5hydrates 352.86
4hydrates 334.86 INS No.: 343(iii)
anhydrous 262.86
CAS No.:
Synonyms: Trimagnesium phosphate
7757-87-1(anhydrous)

Definition Magnesium phosphate, tribasic exists as crystals(8 hydrate, 5 hydrate and 4

hydrate) and anhydrous.
Compositional Specifications of Magnesium Phosphate, Tribasic
Content Trimagnesium Phosphate which is converted to a heat-treated material should
contain not less than 98.0% tribasic magnesium phosphate [Mg3(PO4)O2].
Description Trimagnesium Phosphate is scentless tasteless white crystalline powder.
Identification (1) 0.2 g of Trimagnesium Phosphate is dissolved in 10 mL of dilute nitric
acid. The solution should show the reaction (B) in Identification for Phosphates.
(2) 0.1 g of Trimagnesium Phosphate is dissolved in 0.7 mL of dilute acetic acid and
20 mL of water. 1 mL of ferric chloride solution is added to the solution, which is
settled for 5 minutes and filtered. The filtrate responds to test of magnesium salts in
Identification.
Purity (1) Fluoride : 1 g of Trimagnesium Phosphate is precisely weighed and is tested
by purity (8) for 「Calcium Citrate」, its content should not be more than 5 ppm.
(2) Arsenic : It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(3) Lead : Trimagnesium Phosphate is precisely weighed and is tested by purity (2) for
「Sodium Metaphosphate」, its content should not be more than 2.0 ppm.
Loss on Ignition 1 g of Trimagnesium Phosphate is heat-treated at 425℃ until the
weight becomes constant, the weight loss should be within a range of 15.0∼23.0%,
20.0∼27.0%, and 30.0∼37.0% for 4 hydrate, 5 hydrate, and 8 hydrate.
Assay Approximately 0.2 g of Trimagnesium Phosphate is precisely weighed and
dissolved in a mixture of 25 mL water and 10 mL dilute nitric acid. While keeping the
solution at 50℃, 75 mL of ammonium molybdate solution is added while stirring
occasionally and kept for 30 minutes. The resulting solution is set-aside for 16 hours
or over night at room temperature. The resulting precipitates are washed 1～2 times
with water(30～40 mL) and filtered. The precipitates and filter paper are washed with
potassium nitrate solution (1→100) until the filtrate does not show acidity as
determined with a litmus paper. The precipitates are dissolved completely in 50 mL of
1 N sodium hydroxide solution by stirring. After adding 3 drops of phenolphthalein
solution to the resulting solution, it is titrated with excess amount of 1 N sodium
hydroxide solution.
633
1 mL of 1 N sodium hydroxide solution ＝ 5.714 mg Mg3(PO4)2

634
 Magnesium Silicate
Synthetic Magnesium Silicate
INS No.: 553(i)
Synonyms: Synthetic magnesium silicate CAS No.: 1343-88-0

Definition
Magnesium Silicate is a compound magnesium silicate of MgO：SiO2 with a approximate
mole ratio of 2：5.
Compositional Specifications of Magnesium Silicate
Content When Magnesium Silicate is converted to a heat treated material, it should
contain not less than 15% of magnesium oxide (MgO) and not less than 67% of silicon
dioxide (SiO2).
Description Magnesium Silicate is scentless tasteless white fine powder.
Identification (1) 500 mg of Magnesium Silicate is dissolved in 10 mL of 2.7 N
hydrochloric acid, which is then filtered. The filtrate is neutralized with 6 N
ammonium hydroxide solution as determined by litmus paper. The resulting solution
responds to test of magnesium salt in Identification
(2) Small amount of ammonium sodium phosphate is heated and melted to a bead on a
platinum ring with a burner. This hot transparent bead is mixed with Magnesium
Silicate and melted again. During cooling, opaque bead with a network structure
appears and anhydrous silicate swells.
Purity (1) pH : pH of Magnesium Silicate solution should be within a range of 7.0～10.8.
(2) Fluoride ： 1 g of Magnesium Silicate is precisely weighed into a beaker and
dissolved by adding 10 mL of 1 N hydrochloric acid. It is then boiled for 1 minute.
The solution is transferred into a PE beaker and quickly cooled. 15 mL of sodium
citrate solution(1→4) and 10 mL of EDTA solution(1→40) are added, shaken, and
mixed. pH of the solution is adjusted to 5.4～5.6 by adding hydrochloric acid(1→10)
or sodium hydroxide solution(2→5). The total volume of the solution is brought up to
100 mL by adding water (Test Solution). 50 mL of the Test Solution is transferred
into a PE beaker. Electric potential is measured using fluorine electrode . Fluoride
concentration (μg/100mL) is measured from a standard curve and it should not be
more than 10 ppm.
Standard Solution : 2.210 g of sodium fluoride, which is previously dried for 4 hours at
200℃, is accurately weighed into a PE beaker and dissolved in 200 mL of water.
Then add water to bring the total volume to 1,000mL and preserve it in a PE beaker.
Measure exactly 5 mL of this solution into a measuring flask, and add water to bring
the total volume to 1,000 mL. (1 mL of this solution contains 5µg of fluorine.)
Calibration Curve Preparation : Separately, 1, 2, 3, 5, 10, and 15 mL of standard
solution is weighed into a PE beaker, and 15 mL of Trisodium Citrate Solution (1→4)
and 10 mL of Disodium Ethylenediaminetetraacetate solution (1→40) are added and
635
 mixed. To this solution, Hydrochloric acid (1→10) or Sodium Hydroxide Solution (2→5)
are added to bring the pH 5.4∼5.6, where water is added to bring the total volume
to 100mL, separately. Each of 50 mL of the solution transfer into a PE beaker. Then
measure electric potential by using fluorine electrode and prepare calibration curve
with the log of fluorine concentration.
(3) Soluble Salts： 150 mL of water is added to 10 g of Magnesium Silicate, which is
heated for 15 minutes in a water bath. After cooling, water is added to bring the
total volume to 150 mL. This mixture is settled for 15 minutes and filtered. 25 mL of
water is added to 75 mL of the filtrate. 50 mL of the resulting solution is evaporated
to dryness in a water bath. The residue is heat treated until the weight becomes
constant. The residue should not exceed 75 mg (Not more than 3.0%).
(4) Free Alkali ： When 2 drops of phenolphthalein solution is added to 20 mL of the
filtrate in (3), it turns pale red. This solution is titrated with 0.1 N hydrochloric acid,
the consumed amount of hydrochloric acid should not exceed 2.5 mL (Not more than
1% as NaOH).
(5) Arsenic ： It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(6) Lead ： The test solution in (5) Purity is tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content
should not be more than 5.0 ppm.
(7) Mercury : When Magnesium Silicate is tested by Mercury Limit Test, its content
should not be more than 1.0 ppm
Loss on Drying When Magnesium Silicate is dried for 2 hours at 105℃, the loss should
not be more than 15%, but applies to the anticaking agent only.
Loss on Ignition Magnesium Silicate Magnesium Silicate is dried for 2 hours at 105℃
and precisely weighed 1 g is analyzed by thermogravimetry at 900∼1,000℃ for 2 hours.
Weight loss should not be more than 15%.
Assay (1) Magnesium Oxide： Approximately 1.5 g of Magnesium Silicate is precisely
weighed into a 250 mL Erlenmeyer flask. 50 mL of 1 N sulfuric acid is added to
the flask, which is heated for 1 hour in a water bath. After cooling, methyl orange
solution is added and the excess amount of acid is titrated with 1 N sodium
hydroxide solution.
1 mL of 1 N sulfuric acid ＝ 20.15 mg MgO
(2) Silicon Dioxide ： Approximately 700 mg of Magnesium Silicate is precisely
weighed into a 150 mL beaker. 20 mL of 1 N sulfuric acid is added to the beaker,
which is then heated for 1 hour 30 minutes in a water bath. After cooling, the
supernatant is filtered through a ash-free filter paper, which is washed slowly three
times with hot water. 25 mL of water is added to the residue, which is heated for 15
minutes in a water bath. This is filtered and washed sufficiently with hot water. The
filter paper with residue transfer into a platinum crucible and carbonized. It is then
heat treated for 30 minutes. After cooling, the residue is weighed. The residue is
wetted with small amount of water. After adding 6 mL of hydrofluoric acid and 3 drops of
636
sulfuric acid, it is then evaporated to dryness. The resulting residue is heat treated
for 5 minutes. After cooling, the remaining residue is weighed.

637
 Magnesium Stearate

INS No.: 470(iii)

CAS No.: 557-04-0

Definition Magnesium Stearate is a mixture of magnesium stearate and palmitate.

Compositional Specifications of Magnesium Stearate
Content Quantitatively, Magnesium Stearate, when calculated, should contain within a
range of 6.8∼8.3% of magnesium oxide (MgO).
Description Magnesium Stearate is light powder with white color. It is odorless or has a
unique slight scent.
Identification (1) To 1 g of Magnesium Stearate, add Hydrochloric acid (1→6), heat, and
cool. After settling, liquid is separated into two layers. Upper layer is fatty acid and
lower aqueous layer responds to test of Magnesium Salts in Identification.
(2) To 25 g of Magnesium Stearate, add 200 mL of hot water and 60 mL of dilute
sulfuric acid and heat by stirring until clear supernatant is separated. Sulfate ions are
completely washed away from this supernatant with water. This is heated in a water
bath until water is separated so that the fatty acid becomes clear. After settling,
aqueous layer is discarded. Fatty acid is melted by heating, which is then filtered. It
is then dried for 20 minutes at 105℃. Solidification temperature of the fatty acid
should not be less than 54℃.
Purity (1) Lead : When 5.0 g of Magnesium Stearate is tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content
should not be more than 5.0 ppm.
(2) Chloride: Transfer Magnesium Stearate into round bottom flask, add 50 mL of
diethyl ether which is not contain peroxide, 20 mL of dilute nitric acid, and 20 mL of
water, attach a reflux condenser, and heat until it is dissolved completely. After
cooling, transfer the content of flask into separating funnel, and mix by shaking. After
settling, aqueous layer is separated. Titrate diethyl ether layer twice with 4 mL of
water, combine the extracts, wash with 15 mL of diethyl ether, and add water to
make 50 mL, Test Solution. When 10 mL of the test solution is tested by Chloride
Limit Test, its content should not be more than the amount that corresponds to 1.4
mL of 0.02 N hydrochloric acid (not more than 0.10%).
(3) Sulfate : When 10 mL of test solution for purity(2) is tested by Sulfate Limit Test,
its content should not be more than the amount that corresponds to 10.2 mL of 0.02
N sulfuric acid (not more than 1.0 %).
Loss on Drying 3 g of Magnesium Stearate is dried for 2 hours at 105℃ until the
weight becomes constant. Loss on drying should not be more than 4%.
Assay Accurately weigh about 1 g of Magnesium Stearate, add 50 mL of 0.1 N
hydrochloric acid and boil for 30 minutes. Occasionally, water is added to maintain the
liquid level. After cooling, the solution is filtered. Filtrate is thoroughly washed with
638
water until it is no longer acidic. This water is added to the filtrate, which is then
titrated with 1 N sodium hydroxide solution. 30 mL of 0.05 M EDTA solution, 5 mL of
Ammonia․Ammonium Chloride buffer solution, and 0.15 mL of Eriochrome Black T
(EBT) indicator solution are added to this test solution, which is then titrated with
0.05 M EDTA until it turns blue.
1 mL of 0.05 M EDTA Solution ＝ 2.015 mg MgO

639
 Magnesium Sulfate
Chemical Formula: MgSO4․nH2O(n=7 or 3)
Molecular Weight: 7hydrates 246.48
3hydrates 174.41 INS No.: 518

Synonyms: Epsom salt (heptahydrate) CAS No.: 7487-88-9

Definition Magnesium Sulfate occurs as crystals (heptahydrated) called Magnesium

Sulfate (crystal) and a dried substance (trihydrated) called Magnesium Sulfate
(anhydrous).
Compositional Specifications of Magnesium Sulfate
Content Magnesium Sulfate, when calculated on the dried basis by igniting, should
contain not less than 99.0% of magnesium sulfate (MgSO4 = 120.39).
Description Heptahydrate of Magnesium Sulfate is a colorless, column-shaped or
needle-shaped crystal with a salty and bitter taste, and trihydrate is a white powder
with salty and bitter taste.
Identification Magnesium Sulfate responds to the tests for Magnesium Salt and Sulfate in
Identification.
Purity (1) Clarity and Color of Solution : When 1 g of Magnesium Sulfate is dissolved in
10 mL of water, the heptahydrate is colorless and should not be more than almost
clear, and the trihydrate is colorless and should be slightly turbid or less.
(2) Chloride : When 1 g of Magnesium Sulfate is tested by Chloride Limit Test, its
content should not be more than the amount that corresponds to 0.4 mL of 0.01 N
hydrochloric acid.
(3) Arsenic : It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(4) Lead : Magnesium Sulfate is tested by purity (2) for 「Sodium Metaphosphate」(not
more than 2.0 ppm).
(5) Selenium : 0.2 g of Magnesium Sulfate is precisely weighed and is tested by purity
(6) for 「Sulfuric acid」(not mer than 30 ppm).
(6) Iron : When the test solution in (4) Purity is tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content
should not be more than 20 ppm.
Loss on Ignition When Magnesium Sulfate is dried for 2 hours at 100℃ and ignite at
300～400℃ to constant weight, the weigh loss should be within a range of 40.0～
52.0% for heptahydrate and 25.0∼35.0% for trihydrate.
Assay Accurately weigh about 0.6 g of Magnesium Sulfate, previously ignited, and
dissolve in 2 mL of diluted hydrochloric acid (1→4) and water to make exactly 100
mL. Measure exactly 25 mL of this solution, add 50 mL of water and 5 mL of
ammonia-ammonium chloride buffer (pH 10.7), and titrate with 0.05 M EDTA solution
(indicator : 5 drops of Eriochrome black T solution) until the red-purple color of the
solution changes to blue. Separately, perform a blank test in the same manner.
640
1 mL of 0.05 M EDTA solution = 6.018 mg of MgSO4

641
 Maize Morado Color
Purple Corn Color

Synonyms: Purple corn color INS No.: 163(iv)

Definition Maize Morado Color is a pigment obtained by extracting seeds of corn (Zea
mays Linné of gramineae with water or ethyl alcohol. Its major pigment component is
anthocyanin. Dilutant, stabilizer, or solvent can be added for the purpose of color value
adjustment and quality preservation.
Compositional Specifications of Maize Morado Color
Content Color value of Maize Morado Color should be more than the indicated value.
Description Maize Morado Color is dark red powder, paste, or liquid with a slight
characteristic scent.
Identification (1) Test Solution obtained in Color Value section shows red color and a
maximum absorption band near 515 nm.
(2) When Test Solution in (1) is alkalinized with sodium hydroxide solution (1→25), it
becomes dark green.
Purity (1) Arsenic : It should be no more than 2.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(2) Lead : When 5.0 g of Maize Morado Color is tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content
should not be more than 8.0 ppm.
(3) FumonisinB1: Weigh precisely 5 g which is converted to 30 of color value from
indicated value of Maize Morado Color. Mix 80 mL solution of methanol·water(3:1)
and add sodium hydroxide solution (1→10) to adjust pH 8~9. Add mixed solution of
methanol·water(3:1) to make to 100 mL. Fill 2 g of trimethylaminopropylated silicagel
in approximately 15 mm of glass or polypropylene column and wash the column the
methanol and mixed solution of methanol·water(3:1) step by step. Add 10 mL of this
solution in column and discard effluent. And wash the column with 20 mL of
methanol·water(3:1) and 10 mL of methanol step by step. Elute with 20 mL mixed
solution of methanol·acetic acid(99:1). Effluent is dried by reduced-pressurized drying
below 40℃ and dissolve in 0.2 mL of water·acetonitrile(1:1). After mixing
respectively 0.1mL of test solution and standard solution with 0.1 mL of
phthalaldehyde solution, in 1 minute test liquid chromatography under operation
condition. Measure amount of FumonisinB1 from calbration curve, it should not more
than 0.3 ppm.
Standard solution: Weigh precisely 0.01 g of FumonisinB1 and then dissolve in mixed
solution of water·acetonitrile(1:1) to make to 100 mL. And respectively 1, 5, 10 mL
of this solution with mixed solution of water·acetonitrile(1:1) make precisely to 200
mL to use as standard solution.
Preparation of calibration curve: Proceed liquid chromatography with 3 standard
solutions under operation conditions below and prepare calibration curve.
642
 Operation condition
Detector: Fluorescence detector (excitation wavelength 335 nm, fluorescence
wavelength 440 nm)
Column filler: 5 ㎛ of octadecylsilylated silicagel for liquid chromatography
Column tube: inner diameter 4.6 mm, length 15 cm stainless tube
Mobile phase: A solution: B solution = 3:7
A solution: phosphate buffer(Dissolve 12 g of sodium phosphate in water and make
to 1,000 mL. Then adjust pH to 3.3 with phosphoric acid)
B solution: methanol
Assay (Color Value) Appropriate amount of Maize Morado Color is precisely weighted so
that the absorption is within 0.3～0.7 and dissolved in acetic acid · sodium acetate
buffer solution with pH 3.0 so that total volume is 100 mL (Test Solution). If
necessary, the solution is centrifuged and the supernatant is used. Using acetic acid
sodium acetate buffer solution with pH 3.0 as a reference solution, absorption A is
measured at the maximum absorption near 515 nm with 1cm path length. Color value is
obtained using the following equation.
Color Value ＝
A × 10
weight of the sample(g)

∘Citric acid · dibasic sodium phosphate buffer solution (pH 3.0)

Solution 1：0.1M citric acid solution：1ℓ of solution containing 21.01 g of citric acid
(C6H8O7․H2O).
Solution 2：0.2M dibasic sodium phosphate solution： 1ℓ of solution containing 71.63g
of dibasic sodium phosphate (Na2HPO4․12H2O).
Solution 1 and Solution 2 are mixed well (159:41) and its pH is adjusted to 3.0.

643
 DL-Malic Acid
dl- Malic Acid

Chemical Formula: C4H6O5

Molecular Weight: 134.09 INS No.: 296

Synonyms: 2-Hydroxybutanedioic acid CAS No.: 6915-15-7

Compositional Specifications of DL-Malic Acid

Content DL-Malic Acid should contain not less than 99.0% of DL-malic acid (C4H6O5).
Description DL-Malic Acid occurs as white crystals or crystalline powder. It is odorless
or has a light, characteristic odor, and a characteristic acid taste.
Identification (1) Place 1 mL of DL-Malic Acid solution (1→20) into a test tube, add 2～
3 mg of resorcinol and I mL of sulfuric acid, shake, heat at 120～132℃ for 5
minutes, cool, and add water to make 5 mL. Make the solution alkaline by adding
drop wise sodium hydroxide solution (2→5) while cooling, and add water to make 10
mL. A light blue fluorescence is observed under ultraviolet light.
(2) Place DL-Malic Acid solution (1→20) into a porcelain dish, neutralize with ammonia
solution, add 10 mg of sulfanilic acid, and heat in a water bath for several minutes.
Add 5 mL of sodium nitrite solution (1→5), warm slightly, and make alkaline with
sodium hydroxide solution. It becomes to red.
Purity (1) Melting Point : Melting point of DL-Malic Acid should be within a range of
127～132℃.
(2) Clarity and Color of Solution : When 1 g of DL-Malic Acid is dissolved in 20 mL of
water, it should be clear.
(3) Chloride : When 1 g of DL-Malic Acid is tested by Chloride Limit Test, its content
should not be more than the amount that corresponds to 0.1 mL of 0.01 N
hydrochloric acid.
(4) Arsenic : It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(5) Lead : When 5.0 g of DL-Malic Acid is tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content
should not be more than 2.0 ppm.
(6) Mercury : When DL-Malic Acid is tested by Mercury Limit Test, its content should
not be more than 1.0 ppm.
(7) Readily Oxidized Matters : Weigh 0.1 g of DL-Malic Acid, dissolve in 25 mL of
water and 25 mL of diluted sulfuric acid (1→20), keep at 20℃, and add 1 mL of 0.1
N potassium permanganate. The pink color of the solution should not disappear within
3 minutes.
644
Residue on Ignition When thermogravimetric analysis is done with DL-Malic Acid, the
residue should not be more than 0.05%.
Assay Accurately weigh about 1.5 g of DL-Malic Acid, and dissolve in water to make
250 mL. Take 25 mL of this solution, and titrate with 0.1 N sodium hydroxide
(indicator : 2 drops of phenolphthalein solution).
1 mL of 0.1 N sodium hydroxide = 6.704 mg of C4H6O5

645
 D-Maltitol
Hydrogenated Maltose

Chemical Formula: C12H24O11

Molecular Weight: 344.31 INS No.: 965(i)

Synonyms: Hydrogenated maltose CAS No.: 585-88-6

Content Specifications of D-Maltitol

Content D-Maltitol should not contain less than 98.0% of D-Maltitol (C12H24O11)
Description D-Maltitol is white crystallite with sweet taste.
Identification (1) D-Maltitol is readily soluble in water and lightly soluble in ethanol.
(2) Melting point of D-Maltitol should be in a range of 148～151℃.
(3) Accurately weigh about 5 g of D-Maltitol, and dissolve in water to make 100 mL.
Optical rotation of this solution is measured and it should be within a range of ＝
+105.5∼+108.5℃.
(4) 50 mg of D-Maltitol is dissolved in 20 mL of water, Test Solution. Each 2 μl of
Test solution and Reference solution is tested by thin layer chromatography. In this
case, silica gel is used as a porous support material and development is stopped
when the solvent front reaches approximately 17 cm. It is dried in air, where
colorizing solution 1 is sprayed. It is set-aside in air for 15 minutes. Colorizing
solution 2 is sprayed upon. The colorized spots are compared. Positions, colors, and
sizes of the major spots from Test Solution should match those of reference solution.
Reference Solution : 50 mg of maltitol standard is dissolved in 20 mL of water.
Developing Solvent : propyl alcohol : ethyl acetate : water (70 : 20 : 10)
Colorizing Solution : 1. 0.2% sodium periodate
2. 2 g of tetramethylaminophenylmethane is dissolved in a
mixture of glacial acetic acid · acetone (20:80) to make
100mL.
Purity
(1) Reducing Sugars : 7 g of D-Maltitol transfer into a 400 mL of beaker, add 35 mL
of water, shake and add 50 mL of Fehling solution, which is then covered with a
watch glass. It is heated so that the content boils within 4 minutes and is boiled for
646
 2 minutes. Deposited cupric oxide (Cu2O) is filtered through a glass filter (previously
weighed). It is then washed with hot water, ethanol and then ether. It is dried for 30
minutes at 100℃. It is again thoroughly washed with 10 mL of hot water, 10 mL of
ethanol and then 10 mL of ether. It is dried for 1 hour at 100℃. The amount of
cupric oxide should not be more than 20 mg.
(2) Chloride : When 10 g of D-Maltitol is tested by Chloride Limit Test, its content
should not be more than the amount that corresponds to 1.5 mL of 0.01 N
hydrochloric acid.
(3) Sulfate : When 10 g of D-Maltitol is tested by Sulfate Limit Test, its content
should not be more than the amount that corresponds to 2 mL of 0.01 N sulfuric
acid.
(4) Arsenic : It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(5) Lead : When 5.0 g of D-Maltitol is tested by Atomic Absorption Spectrophotometry
or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content should not be more
than 1.0 ppm.
(6) Nickel : When 5.0 g of D-Maltitol is tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content
should not be more than 2.0 ppm.
Water Content When D-Maltitol is tested by Water Content Determination Method
(Karl-Fischer Method), its content should not be more than 1%.
Residue on Ignition When thermogravimetric analysis is done with 2 g of D-Maltitol, the
residue should not be more than 0.1%.
Assay Accurately weigh 1.5 g of D-Maltitol, transfer into a 100 mL volumetric flask,
where water is added to completely dissolve the solid by stirring at a constant rate
for 1 hour. Add water to make 100 mL in flask. The solution is filtered through a
0.45 μm Millipore Filter, and the filtrate is used as the Test Solution. Separately, 0.5
g, 1.0 g, 1.5 g, and 2.0 g each of maltitol(quantitative analysis grade), precisely
weighed, transfer into 100 mL volumetric flasks (for dissolving completely, stir at a
constant rate for 1 hour). The solution is filtered through a 0.45 μm Millipore Filter,
and the filtrate is used as the Standard Solution. Liquid chromatography is carried out
with 20 μl of standard solutions under the following operation conditions and a
calibration curve is prepared. The A of concentration (g/100 mL) of maltitol in Test
Solution is obtained from the calibration curve, previously prepared from heights or
areas of the peaks which are gained with 20 μl of Test Solution. The content is
calculated from the following equation.
Content of Maltitol(%) = weight ofA ×the100sample(g)
Operation Conditions
-Detector : Differential refractometer
-Column : AMINEX HPX 87C or its equivalent 30 cm x 8 mm
-Column Temperature : 85℃
647
-Mobile carrier Phase : water
-Flow Rate : 0.5 mL/min

648
 Maltitol Syrup
Hydrogenated Glucose Syrup
Synonyms: Hydrogenated glucose syrup INS No.: 965(ii)

Definition Maltitol Syrup is a maltitol mixture which contains sorbitol, hydrogenated

oligosaccharide, and polysaccharide.
Compositional Specifications of Maltitol Syrup
Content Maltitol Syrup, when calculated on the dried basis(anhydrous), should contain
not less than 99.0% of hydrogenated sugars, and more than 50.0% of maltitol.
Description Maltitol Syrup is colorless transparent gluey liquid or white crystalline lump.
Maltitol Syrup has no scent but sweet taste.
Identification (1) Maltitol Syrup is readily soluble in water and slightly soluble in alcohol.
(2) 25∼50 mg of Maltitol Syrup is dissolved in 20 mL of water (Test Solution). Test
Solution is tested by the procedure Test (4) for 「D-Maltitol」 in Identification.
Purity (1) Reduced Sugars : Approximately 7 g of Maltitol Syrup is precisely weighed
and tested by Purity (1) for 「D-Maltitol」. The content of cupric acid should not be
more than 50 mg.
(2) Chloride : When 10 g of Maltitol Syrup is tested by Chloride Limit Test, the
content should not be more than the amount that corresponds to 1.5 mL of 0.01 N
hydrochloric acid.
(3) Sulfate : When 10 g of Maltitol Syrup is tested by Sulfate Limit Test, the content
should not be more than the amount that corresponds to 2 mL of 0.01 N sulfuric acid.
(4) Lead : When 5 g of Maltitol Syrup is tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content
should not be more than 1.0 ppm.
(5) Nickel : When 5.0 g of Maltitol Syrup is tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content
should not be more than 2.0 ppm.
Water Content Water content of Maltitol Syrup is determined by water determination
(Karl-Fisher Method) and should not be more than 31%.
Residue on Ignition When thermogravimetric analysis is done with 3 g of Maltitol Syrup,
the amount of residue should not be more than 0.1%.
Assay (1) Content of total the hydrogenated saccharides (%)
100 - [Water(%) + Residue on Ignition (%) + Reduced
= sacchraide(%)] × 100
100 - water(%)
※ Reduced saccharide Weight of dried copper oxides(mg)
× 100
= weight of the sample(mg)

(2) Maltitol : About 1 g of Maltitol Syrup is accurately weighed, to which water is

added to make 50 mL. This solution is filtered with 0.45 ㎛ paper to make the test
solution. 20 μl each of the standard and test solutions are injected in liquid
649
 chromatography and the content of maltitol is determined by the following formula.
Sample weight of the
standard(calculated on the Peak area of the test
solution
dried basis(anhydrous))(g)
Content of Maltitol(%) = × × 100
Sample weight of the test
Peak area of the
body(calculated on the standard solution
dried basis(anhydrous))(g)

Operation condition
-Column : Aminex HPX 87 (calcium type) or its equivalent
-Detector: Differential Refractometer (RI detector)
-Column temperature : 85℃
-Moving phase : water
-Flow speed : 0.5 mL/min
∘Solution : 0.5 g of the maltitol standard is weighed accurately to put in 50 mL
volumetric flask and water is added to make 50 mL (10 mg/mL).

650
 Maltogenic Amylase
Definition Maltogenic Amylase is an enzyme obtained from a culture of Bacillus subtilis
that contains amylase genes Bacillus stearothemophilus. Dilutant or stabilizer can be
added for the purpose of activity adjustment and quality preservation.
Compositional Specifications of Maltogenic Amylase
Description Maltogenic Amylase is white～dark brown powder, particle, paste or
colorless ~ dark brown liquid.
Identification When Maltogenic Amylase is proceeded as directed under Activity Test, it
should have the activity as Maltogenic Amylase.
Purity (1) Arsenic : It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(2) Lead ： When 5.0 g of Maltogenic Amylase is tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content
should not be more than 5.0 ppm.
(3) Coliform Group ： When Maltogenic Amylase proceed as directed under
Microbiological Methods for Coliform Group in General Testing Methods in
「Standards and Specifications for Foods」, it should not contain more than 30 per 1
g of this product.
(4) Salmonella ： When Maltogenic Amylase proceed as directed under Microbiological
Methods for Salmonella in General Testing Methods in 「Standards and Specifications
for Foods」, it should be negative (-).
(5) E. Coli : When Maltogenic Amylase is tested by Microbe Test Methods for E. Coli
in General Test Method 「Standards and Specifications for Foods」, it should be
negative (-).
Activity Test (activity)
∘Analysis Principle : Activity test is based on hydrolysis of maltoriose substrate at 37℃.
Generated glucose is measured by using a mixture of Glucose dehydrogenase and NAD.
∘Preparation of Test Solution : Sample is diluted with water so that 1 mL contains 0.015
∼0.075 MANU. Final diluted solution is prepared so that it contains 1% 1 M sodium
chloride solution.
∘Test Procedure : 0.5 mL of substrate solution is placed in a test tube, which is
isothermalized in a 37 ± 1℃ water bath. Exactly 0.5 mL of Test Solution is added to
the test tube, which is mixed by shaking and set aside in a water bat. After exactly 30
minutes, the tube is taken out and the reaction is stopped by adding 1 mL of 0.06 N
sodium hydroxide solution. 3 mL of GluDH solution is added to this solution, which is
set aside for exactly 30 minutes at normal temperature. To this solution, 0.5 mL of
substrate solution, 1 mL of 0.06 N sodium hydroxide solution, 0.5 mL of Test Solution
are sequentially added. The resulting solution is set aside for 30 minutes (enzyme
blank test solution). Using enzyme blank test solution as a reference solution,
absorption of the test solution at 342 nm with 1 cm path length is measured and the
concentration of glucose standard solution (μmol/L) is obtained from the standard curve.
Standard Curve
651
 1.6 g of glucose is accurately weighted and dissolved in water (total volume = 1,000
mL). Using this solution, glucose standard solutions are prepared so that they contain
88.8 μmol/l, 177.6 μmol/l, 266.4 μmol/l, 355.2 μmol/l, 444.0 μmol/l, and 532.9 μmol/l of
glucose. 2 mL of each standard solution is placed in a test tube, where 3 mL of GluDH
solution is added. Set it aside for 30 minutes at room temperature. Absorption of each
resulting solution is measured at 340 nm with 1cm path length using water as a
reference. A standard curve of absorption versus concentration (μmol/l) of glucose
standard solution is prepared.
Enzyme activity is obtained from the following equation.

MANU/g ＝ A × 4 × F
30 × W × 1,000
A : Concentration of glucose standard solution (μmol/l) in Test Solution obtained from
the standard curve
F : Dilution factor of test solution
4 : Ratio of the amount of glucose standard solution (2 mL) vs. the amount of Test
Solution (0.5 mL) used in the test
30 : Reaction time (minutes)
W : Weight of sample (g)
1,000 : Conversion factor from ℓ to ㎖
Definition of Activity : 1 Maltogenic Amylase Novo Unit(MANU) corresponds to an
amount of enzyme that decomposes 1 μmol of maltoriose under the test conditions
above.
Solutions
∘Citric Acid Buffer Solution : 0.225 g of citric acid is added in 20 mL of water. pH of
this solution is adjusted to 5.0 with 4 N or 1 N sodium
hydroxide solution. It is then diluted to 250 mL with
water.
∘Substrate Solution : 1 g of Maltotriose is added in citric acid buffer solution (total
volume = 50 mL).
∘1 M Sodium Chloride Solution : 29.22 g of sodium chloride is added in water (total
volume = 500 mL).
∘0.06 N sodium hydroxide solution : 30 mL of 1N sodium hydroxide solutionis is diluted
to 500 mL with water.
∘GluDH Solution : Use a mixed solution (Thermo Fisher Scientific Code. 981304, 981779 or
its equivalent) contained Glucose dehydrogenase.
Storage Standards of Maltogenic Amylase
Maltogenic Amylase is strongly hygroscopic. Store in a cold dark place and well-closed
containers.
652
 Maltol

Chemical Formula: C6H6O3

Molecular Weight: 126.11 INS No.: 636

Synonyms: 3-Hydroxy-2-methyl-4-pyrone CAS No.: 118-71-8

Compositional Specifications of Maltol

Content Maltol should contain not less than 99.0% of maltol (C6H603).
Description Maltol occurs as white to lightly yellowish needles or crystalline powder,
having a sweet odor.
Identification (1) Dissolve 0.1 g of Maltol in 10 mL of ethanol, and add 3 drops of ferric
chloride solution. The color becomes to red-purple.
(2) To 0.5 g of Maltol, add 10 mL of sodium hydroxide solution, and shake. It
dissolves clearly. When pass carbon dioxide through the solution, white crystals are
produced. Collect the crystals and recrystallize using 50% ethanol. The melting point
should be within a range of l60～163℃.
(3) Dissolve 0.1 g of Maltol in 5 mL of dioxane, add 1 mL of sodium hydroxide
solution, add iodine-potassium iodide solution while shaking until the color of iodine
disappears, and heat in hot water for 5 minutes. Yellow crystals are deposited.
Purity (1) Melting Point : Melting point of Maltol should be within a range of 160～16
4℃
(2) Clarity and Color of Solution : When 0.1 g of Maltol is dissolved in 5 mL of 70%
ethanol, the solution should be clear.
(3) Arsenic : It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(4) Lead : When 5.0 g of Maltol is tested by Atomic Absorption Spectrophotometry or
Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content should not be more
than 2.0 ppm.
Loss on Drying When Maltol is dried for 4 hours in a vacuum desiccator (silica gel), the
weight loss should not be more than 0.5%.
Residue on Ignition When thermogravimetric analysis is done with Maltol, the amount of
residue should not be more than 0.2 %.
Assay Accurately weigh about 50 mg of Maltol, and dissolve in 0.1 N hydrochloric acid
to make 250 mL. Take 5 mL of this solution, and add 0.1 N hydrochloric acid to make
100 mL, Test Solution. Separately, a standard solution is prepared by following the
same procedure with standard of maltol. Measure the absorbances of the test solution
653
and the standard solution (express as Au and As, respectively) at a wavelength of 274
nm, using 0.1 N hydrochloric acid as the reference solution. Calculate the content by
the following formulas:
Content of Maltol (C6H6O3)(%) C × Au × 1
= As 2 × weight of the sample(g)
C : Concentration of maltol in standard solution (μg/mL)

654
 Maltotriohydrolase
G3 Producing Enzyme
Definition Maltotriohydrolase is an enzyme obtained from a culture of Microbacterium
imperiale. Dilutant or stabilizer can be added for the purpose of activity adjustment and
quality preservation.
Compositional Specifications of Maltotriohydrolase
Description Maltotriohydrolase is white～dark brown powder, particle paste or colorless
~ dark brown liquid.
Identification When Maltotriohydrolase is proceeded as directed under Activity Test, it
should have the activity as Maltotriohydrolase.
Purity (1) Arsenic: It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(2) Lead : When 5.0 g of Maltotriohydrolase is tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content
should not be more than 5.0 ppm.
(3) Coliform group: Maltotriohydrolase is tested by Microbiological Methods for
Coliform Group in section General Testing Methods in「Standards and Specifications
for Foods」. It should contain no more than 30 per 1g of this product.
(4) Salmonella: Maltotriohydrolase is tested by Microbiological Methods for Salmonella
in section General Testing Methods in 「Standards and Specifications for Foods」. It
should be negative (-).
(5) E. Coli : When Maltotriohydrolase is tested by Microbe Test Methods for E. Coli in
General Test Method 「Standards and Specifications for Foods」, it should be
negative (-).
Activity Test (activity)
Preparation of Test Solution ：Sample is diluted with calcium chloride․acetic acid buffer
solution (pH 6.0) so that 1 mL of the solution contains 0.2∼0.85 Unit.
Test Procedure ： 0.5 mL of substrate solution and 0.4 mL of calcium chloride․acetic
acid buffer solution (pH 6.0) are placed in a 50 mL volumetric flask, which is
isothermalized in a 40 ± 0.5℃ water bath for 10 minutes. Exactly 0.1 mL of Test
Solution is added to the solution, mixed well by shaking, and set aside in a water bath.
After exactly 15 minutes, 1 mL of alkaline copper solution is added to the solution,
which is sealed and heated for exactly 20 minutes in a boiling water bath. Cool the
solution, 1 mL of arsenic·ammonium molybdate solution is added and well mixed until
red precipitates of cuprous oxide are completely dissolved. After setting aside for 20
minutes at room temperature, water is added to bring the total volume to 25 mL. Using
water as a reference, the absorption (AS) is measured at 520 nm with 1cm path length.
Separately, as an enzyme blank test, 0.5 mL of substrate solution, 0.4 mL of calcium
chloride acetate buffer solution (pH 6.0), 1 mL of alkaline copper solution, and 0.1 mL
of Test Solution are well mixed and its absorption (AB) is measured following the same
procedure as the Test Solution.
655
Standard curve: Glucose is dried for 6 hours at 105℃. 1.0 g of dried glucose is
precisely weighted and dissolved in water (total volume = 100 mL). 1.0 mL, 2.0 mL,
3.0 mL, 4.0 mL, and 5.0 mL each of this solution is diluted to 100 mL with water. 1
mL of the each resulting solution contains 0.1 mg, 0.2 mg, 0.3 mg, 0.4 mg, and 0.5 mg
each of glucose. 1 mL of each glucose standard solution is placed in a 50 mL Nestler
cylinder, where 1 mL of alkaline copper solution is added and well mixed. It is sealed,
heated in a boiling water bath for exactly 20 minutes, and cooled immediately. 1 mL of
arsenic·ammonium molybdate solution is added and well mixed until red precipitates of
copper suboxide are completely dissolved. After setting aside for 20 minutes at room
temperature, water is added to bring the total volume to 25 mL. Using water as a
reference, the absorbance of each standard solution is measured at 520 nm with 1cm
path length. A standard curve of absorbance vs. the amount of glucose (mg) is
prepared.
Enzyme activity is calculated by the following equation.
M a l t o t r i o h y d r o l a s e (A - A ) × F × 1 × 1.0 1 N
(unit/g)= S B
15 0.1
×
0.180
×
W

F ： Amount of glucose (mg) when the difference in absorption is 1.0 (obtained from
the standard curve).
15 ： Reaction time (minutes)
0.1: Volume of Test Solution (mL)
0.180 ：Coefficient of glucose/1 μmole (glucose 1 μmole = 0.180 mg)
N ： Dilution volume of Test Solution
W ： Weight of sample(g)
Definition of Activity: Maltotriohydrolase unit is an amount of enzyme that produces
reducing sugar that corresponds to 1 μmol of glucose per minute under the conditions
above.
Solutions
Substrate Solution ： 1.0 g of soluble starch is dispersed in 10 mL of water, where 50
mL of boiling water is slowly added while stirring. It is then
boiled for 5 minutes. After cooling water is added to bring the
total volume to 100 mL.
Calcium Chloride․ Acetic acid Buffer Solution (pH 6.0) ： Two solutions of 5 mM
anhydrous calcium chloride in 0.1 M acetic acid and 0.1 M sodium
acetate solution are prepared. These solutions are mixed and
adjusted pH 6.0.
Alkaline Solution ： 200 g of anhydrous sodium sulfate, 25 g of anhydrous sodium
656
 carbonate, 20 g of sodium bicarbonate, and 25 g of potassium
sodium tartrate are dissolved in water to make 1,000 mL solution.
Copper Solution: 30 g of copper sulfate dissolve in 150 mL of water and apply 4 drops
of sulfuric acid. Mark up the volume of the content to 200 mL with
water.
Alkaline Copper Solution: 25 mL of alkaline solution is mixed with 1 mL of copper
solution. The solution is prepared before use.
Arsenic · Ammonium Molybdate Solution： 3 g of sodium arsenate, dibasic (7 hydrate)
dissolve in 25 mL of water. 25 g of ammonium molybdate (4
hydrate) dissolve in 450 mL of water, where 21 mL of sulfuric
acid is added. Sodium asrsenate, dibasic solution is slowly added
to ammonium molybdate solution while stirring. It is set aside for
24 hours at 37℃. It is stored in a brown bottle.
Storage standards of Maltotriohydrolase
Maltotriohydrolase is strongly hygroscopic, hence should be stored in a hermetic
container in a cold dark place.

657
 Manganese Chloride
Chemical Formula: MnCl2․4H2O

Molecular Weight: 197.91

Synonyms: Manganese chloride
tetrahydrate CAS No.: 7773-01-5

Compositional Specifications of Manganese Chloride

Content Manganese Chloride should contain within a range of 98.0～102.0% of
Manganese Chloride (MnCl2․4H2O).
Description Manganese Chloride occurs as a pink translucent crystal having an irregular
form.
Identification (1) Manganese Chloride solution (1→20) yield with ammonium sulfide
solution a salmon-colored precipitate that is dissolved in acetic acid.
(2) Manganese Chloride solution (1→20) responds to the test by Chloride Limit Test.
Purity (1) pH: pH of Manganese Chloride solution (1→20), measured by glass electrode
method, should be within a range of 4.0～6.0.
(2) Insoluble Matter: Approximately 20 g of Manganese Chloride is precisely weighed,
dissolved in 200mL of water, and allowed to stand on a steam bath. This solution is
filtered through a tared sintered-glass crucible, washed thoroughly with hot water,
and dried at 105℃ for 1 hour. The weight should not be more than 0.005%.
(3) Substances Not Precipitated by Sulfide: 2 g of Manganese Chloride is dissolved in
about 90 mL of water. After 4 mL of ammonium hydroxide is added, this solution is
heated to 80℃ and passed through hydrogen sulfide to completely precipitate the
manganese. This solution is diluted to 100 mL, mixed, and allowed the precipitate to
settle. The supernatant liquid is filtered, and 50 mL of the filtrate is evaporated to
dryness in a tared platinum dish. 0.5 mL of sulfuric acid is added and ignited to
constant weight. The weight should not be more than 0.2 %.
(4) Iron: 2 g of Manganese Chloride is dissolved in 20 mL of water. 1 mL of
hydrochloric acid is added and diluted to 50 mL with water. 40 mg of ammonium
persulfate and 3 mL of ammonium thiocyanate solution is added. Any red or pink
color does not exceed that produced by 1 mL of iron standard solution (10 μg Fe) in
an equal volume of a solution containing the quantities of the reagents used in the
test (not more than 5 ppm).
(5) Sulfate Salts: 10 g of Manganese Chloride is dissolved in 100 mL of water. 1 mL
of 2.7 N hydrochloric acid is added and filtered. After the solution is heated to boil, 10
mL of barium chloride solution is added, which is allowed to stand overnight. The
precipitates are filtered, placed in a tared crucible, ignited at 600℃, and weighed.
The amount of sulfate salts (as SO4) should not be more than 0.005%. 1 mg of the
residue corresponds to 0.412 mg of SO4.
(6) Lead : When 5.0 g of Manganese Chloride is tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content
658
 should not be more than 4.0 ppm.
Assay Approximately 4 g of Manganese Chloride is precisely weighed and dissolved in
water to make 250 mL solution. 25 mL of this solution is mixed with 10 mL of
hydroxyamine hydrochloride (1→10), 25 mL of 0.05 M disodium EDTA, 25 mL of
ammonia-ammonium chroride buffer solution, and 5 drops of eriochrome black solution.
Heat This solution is heated to 55～65℃ and titrated from the buret to a blue end
point with 0.05 M disodium EDTA.
1 mL of 0.05 M disodium EDTA = 9.896 mg of MnCl2․4H2O

659
 Manganese Citrate
Chemical Formula: C12H10Mn3O14․10H2O
Molecular Weight: 723.17

Compositional Specifications of Manganese Citrate

Content Manganese Citrate, when calculated on the dried basis, should contain within a
range of 96.5～104.8% of Manganese Citrate (C12H10Mn3O14․10H2O).
Description Manganese Citrate occurs as a white to pale pink granule or powder.
Identification (1) Manganese Citrate solution (1→20) yield with ammonium sulfide
solution a salmon-colored precipitate that is dissolved in acetic acid.
(2) Manganese Citrate solution responds to the test for citrate.
Purity (1) Sulfate : 10 g of Manganese Citrate is dissolved in 200 mL of water. Excess
amount of hydrochloric acid is added and acidified (indicator: Methyl Red). After the
solution is heated to boil, 10 mL of barium chloride solution is added, which is
allowed to stand on a steam bath for 2 hour. The precipitates are filtered through a
tared glass crucible, ignited at 600℃, and weighed. The amount of sulfate salts (as
SO4) should not be more than 0.02%. 1 mg of the residue corresponds to 0.412 mg
(2) Lead : Manganese Citrate is precisely weighed and is tested by purity
(3) Arsenic : It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
Loss on Drying When Manganese Citrate is dried for 16 hour at 105℃ under vacuum,
the loss should be within a range of 23～26%.
Assay Approximately 0.35 g of Manganese Citrate is precisely weighed and dissolved in
100 mL of water and 1 mL of dilute hydrochloric acid, followed by heating at 75～8
0℃. 25 mL of 0.5 M disodium EDTA is added to this solution. pH, if necessary, is
adjusted to 10.0±0.2, and 10 mL of ammonia-ammonium chloride buffer solution and 8
drops of eriochrome black solution are added. This solution is titrated with 0.05 M
disodium EDTA until a blue end point is persisted for 3 minutes.
1 mL of 0.05 M disodium EDTA = 9.05 mg of C12H10Mn3O14

660
 Manganese Gluconate
[CH2OH(CHOH)4COO]2Mn nH2O

Chemical Formula: C12H22MnO14‧nH2O(n＝2

or 0)
Molecular Weight: 481.27(2hydrates) CAS No.: 6485-39-8
445.24(anhydrous)

Compositional Specifications of Manganese Gluconate

Content Manganese Gluconate, when calculated on the dried basis(anhydrose), should
contain within a range of 98.0∼102.0% of manganese gluconate (C12H22MnO14).
Description Manganese Gluconate is pale red powder.
Identification (1) When ammonium sulfate solution is added to Manganese Gluconate
solution (1→20), orange precipitates are formed. These precipitates is dissolved in
acetic acid.
(2) Proceed as directed under Identification (2) for 「Sodium Gluconate」.
Purity (1) Lead : When 5.0 g of Manganese Gluconate is tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content
should not be more than 2.0 ppm.
(2) Arsenic : It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(3) Reduced Materials : Approximately 1 g of Manganese Gluconate is weighed into a
250 mL Erlenmeyer flask. 10 mL of water is added to dissolve the solid and 25 mL
of alkaline copper citrate solution. A small beaker is placed on top of the flask,
which is heated for precisely 5 minutes. It is then rapidly cooled to room
temperature. To this solution, 25 mL of dilute acetic acid (1→10), 10 mL of 0.1 N
iodine solution, 10 mL of dilute hydrochloric acid, and 3 mL of starch solution are
added. The resulting solution is titrated with 0.1 N sodium thiosulfate solution until
the blue color disappears. The content of reduced materials should not be more than
1.0%.
Content of Reduced Materials(as glucose)(%) 1 (V N - V N ) × 27
1 2 2
× 100
= weight of the sample(mg)
V1 : Consumed amount of 0.1 N iodine solution (mL)
N1 : Normality of 0.1 N iodine solution
V2 : Consumed amount of 0.1 N sodium thiosulfate solution (mL)
N2 : Normality of 0.1 N sodium thiosulfate solution
27 : Experimental corresponding amount for D-glucose
Water Content Water content of Manganese Gluconate is determined by water
determination (Karl-Fisher Method) and should not be more than 3.0∼9.0% and 6.0∼
9.0% for anhydrous and dihydrated, respectively. Test Solution should be kept for 30
minutes at 50℃ prior to titration.
661
Assay Dissolve approximately 0.7 g of Manganese Gluconate, accurately weighed, in 50 mL
of water and add 1 g of ascorbic acid, 10 mL of ammonia ammonium chloride buffer
solution, and 5 drops of Eriochrom black solution, which is titrated with 0.05 M EDTA
solution until the color becomes deep blue.
1 mL of 0.05 M EDTA solution ＝ 22.26 mg C12H22MnO4

662
 Manganese Sulfate
Chemical Formula: MnSO4‧H2O

Molecular Weight: 169.01 CAS No.: 7785-87-7

Compositional Specifications of Manganese Sulfate
Content Manganese Sulfate should contain within a range of 98.0～102.0% of manganese
sulfate (MnSO4ㆍH2O).
Description Manganese Sulfate is odorless pale red granule or powder.
Identification (1) When ammonium sulfide solution is added to Manganese Sulfate solution
(1→10), orange red precipitates are formed. When acetic acid is added, the
precipitates redissolve.
(2) Manganese Sulfate solution (1→10) respond to the test for sulfate reaction in
Identification.
Purity (1) Arsenic : It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(2) Lead : Manganese Sulfate is tested by purity (2) for 「Sodium Metaphosphate」, it
should be appropriate (not more than 4.0 ppm).
(3) Selenium : Dissolve 1 g of Manganese Sulfate in 100 mL of water (Test Solution).
It is then tested by Cold Vapor Type of Atomic Absorption Spectrophotometry. The
absorbance should not be bigger than that of Standard Solution, which is prepared by
diluting 3 mL of selenium standard solution to 100 mL with water. (Not more than 30
ppm)
Loss on Ignition When Manganese Sulfate is heat treated at 400～500˚ until the weight
becomes constant, the weigh loss should be within a range of 10～13%.
Assay 4 g of Manganese Sulfate is precisely weighed and dissolved in water to make
250 mL. 10 mL of hydrochloric acid hydroxylamine solution (1→10), 25 mL of 0.05 M
EDTA solution, 25 mL of ammonia·ammonium chloride buffer solution, and 5 drops of
eriochrome T black solution are added to 25 mL of this solution. While heating at 5
5～65℃, the solution is titrated with 0.05 M EDTA solution until it turns blue.
1 mL of 0.05 M EDTA = 8.450 mg of MnSO4ㆍH2O

663
 D-Mannitol
D-Mannite

Chemical Formula: C6H14O6

Molecular Weight: 182.2 INS No.: 421

Synonyms: D-Mannite CAS No.: 69-65-8

Compositional Specifications of D-Mannitol

Content D-Mannitol , when calculated on the dried basis, should contain within a range
of 96.0～102.0% of D-mannitol (C6H14O6).
Description D-Mannitol occurs as white crystalline powder. It is odorless and has a
sweet taste.
Identification (1) D-Mannitol is soluble in water, slightly soluble in alcohol, and insoluble
in chloroform and ether.
(2) Melting point of D-Mannitol should be within a range of 165～169℃.
(3) When D-Mannitol is tested by Assay, it should show the peak at the same position
as mannitol standard.
(4) 1 mL of ferric chloride solution is transferred into a Nestler tube, where 5 drops of
saturated solution of D-Mannitol, Test Solution. Separately, a reference solution is
prepared using 5 drops of water instead of the saturated solution. When 5 drops each
of 5 N sodium hydroxide solution are added to both solutions, Test Solution yields a
yellow precipitate while Reference Solution yields a brown precipitate. When both
tubes are shaken vigorously, Test Solution becomes transparent but the brown color
in Reference Solution persists. When more 5 N sodium hydroxide solution is added,
no precipitate is observed in Test Solution but more precipitates are formed for
Reference Solution.
Purity (1) Specific Rotation : Approximately 2.0 g of D-Mannitol and approximately 2.6
g of sodium borate are dissolved in 20 mL of water which is preheated to 30℃. It is
then continuously stirred for 15～30 minutes without heating. When the solution
becomes transparent, water is added to bring the volume to 25 mL. Optical rotation of the
resulting solution should be within a range of ＝ +23∼+25°
(2) pH : To 10 mL of D-Mannitol solution (1→10), 0.5 mL of saturated potassium
chloride solution is added. pH of the resulting solution should be within a range of
664
 5.0～8.0.
(3) Chloride : 10 g of D-Mannitol is tested by Chloride Limit Test. The content should
not be more than the amount that corresponds to 2.0 mL of 0.01 N hydrochloric acid.
(4) Arsenic : It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(5) Sulfate : When 10 g of D-Mannitol is tested by Sulfate Limit Test, the amount
should not be more than that corresponds to 2 mL of sulfuric acid.
(6) Lead : When 5.0 g of D-Mannitol is tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content
should not be more than 1.0 ppm.
(7) Nickel : When 5.0 g of D-Mannitol is tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content
should not be more than 2.0 ppm.
(8) Reducing Sugar : Approximately 7 g of D-Mannitol is precisely weighed and tested
by following the procedure in Purity (1) for 「D-Maltitol」. The content of cupric
acid should not be more than 50 mg.
(9) Total Sugar : 2.1 g of D-Mannitol is precisely weighed and transferred into a round
bottom flask, where 40 mL of 0.1 N hydrochloric acid is added. A reflux condenser
is attached to the flask. It is then heated for 4 hours in a water bath and cooled.
The resulting solution is transferred into a 400 mL beaker. The round bottom flask is
washed with 10 mL of water, which is added to the beaker. The solution is then
neutralized with 6 N sodium hydroxide solution, where 50 mL of Fehling solution.
The produced cupric oxide is filtered using a glass filter which is previously weighed.
The precipitate is washed with hot water, alcohol, and ether. It is then dried for 30
minutes at 100℃. It is again washed with 10 mL each of hot water, alcohol, and
ether. It is again dried for 1 hour at 100℃. The weight of cupric oxide should not be
more than 50 mg.
Loss on Drying When D-Mannitol is dried for 4 hours at 105℃, the weight loss should
not be more than 0.3%.
Residue on Ignition When thermogravimetric analysis is done with 2 g of D-Mannitol,
the residue should not be more than 0.1%.
Assay 1.5 g of D-Mannitol is accurately weighed, to which water is added to make 100
mL. This solution is filtered with 0.45 ㎛ paper to make the test solution. Separately,
0.5, 1.0, 1.5 g and 2.0 g of mannitol standard is weighed, to which water is added to
make 100 mL and filtered with 0.45 ㎛ paper to make the standard solution.
Test operation : inject the test solution and 20 ㎕ standard solutions, each to liquid
chromatography to calculate peak areas. Prepare standard curve with each peak area
of 4 concentration of standard solutions(g/100mL), and calculate the concentration of
Mannitol(g/100mL) in test solution from standard curve. Then calculate the content of
Mannitol by the following equation.
Content of D-mannitol
＝
(C 6H14O6) (%) A × 100
weight of the

665
 sample(g)
A: concentrate of mannitol in test solution calculated calibration procedure(g/100mL)
Operating conditions
-Column : Aminex HPX 87C(calcium form) or its equivalent
-Detector : Differential refractometer. (RI Detector)
-Column temperature : 85℃
-Mobile phase : Water.
-Flow rate : 0.5 ㎖/min.

666
 Masticatory Substancses, Natural
Definition There are Sorva (Couma macrocarpa BARB. RODR.), Sorvinha (Couma utilis
MUELL.), Jelutong (Dyera costulata Hook. F. and Dyera lowiil Hook. F.), Chicle
(Manikara zapotilla Gilly and Manikara chicle Gilly), and Natural rubber (Hevea
brasiliensis).
Compositional Specifications of Masticatory Substances, Natural
Description Masticatory Substance(Natural) is white～gray, pale brown～dark brown solid
or viscoelastic solid with a slight characteristic scent.
Purity (1) Arsenic : It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(2) Lead : When 5.0 g of General Provisions is tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content
should not be more than 3.0 ppm.

667
 dl -Menthol

Chemical Formula: C10H20O

Molecular Weight: 156.27 CAS No.: 1490-04-6

Compositional Specifications of dl -Menthol

Content dl-Menthol should contain not less than 98.0% of dl-menthol (C10H20O).
Description dl-Menthol occurs as colorless prisms or needles or as a white crystalline
powder, having a scent like peppermint.
Identification (1) dl-Menthol is mixed with an equal quantity of camphor or thymol, it
becomes a liquid form.
(2) To 1 g of dl-Menthol, add 20 mL of sulfuric acid, and shake. Yellowish red
turbidity appears. After 24 hours, a transparent oily layer having no scent of menthol
is separated.
Purity (1) Solidification Temperature : Solidification Temperature of dl-Menthol should
be within a range of 27～28℃.
(2) Thymol : To 0.2 g of dl-Menthol, add to a cold mixture of 2 mL of acetic acid, 6
drops of sulfuric acid, and 2 drops of nitric acid. No color should develop.
(3) Specific Rotation : Approximately 2.5 g of dl-Menthol is precisely weighed and
dissolved in ethanol to make 25 mL. When Optical rotation of this solution is measured, it
should be = -2∼+ 2°.
(4) Arsenic : It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(5) Lead : When 5.0 g of dl-Menthol is tested by Atomic Absorption Spectrophotometry
or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content should not be more
than 2.0 ppm.
Assay Accurately weigh about 1 g of dl-Menthol and test by Alcohol Content
Measurement Method 2 in Flavoring Substances Test.
1 mL of 0.5 N alcoholic potassium hydroxide solution ＝ 78.13 mg C10H20O

668
 l -Menthol

Chemical Formula: C10H20O

Molecular Weight: 156.27 CAS No.: 89-78-1

Compositional Specifications of l -Menthol

Content l-Menthol should contain not less than 98.0% of l-menthol (C10H20O).
Description l-Menthol occurs as colorless prisms or needles or as a white crystalline
powder, having a peppermint like scent and a refreshing taste.
Identification (1) A solution of l-Menthol in ethanol (1→10) is levorotatory.
(2) Proceed as directed under Identification (1) and (2) in 「dl-Menthol」.
Purity (1) Melting Point : Melting point of l-Menthol should be within a range of 42～4
3℃.
(2) Specific Rotation : Approximately 2.5 g of l-Menthol, precisely weighed, is
dissolved in ethanol to make 25 mL. When Optical rotation of this solution is measured, it
should be = -45∼-51°.
(3) Thymol : To 0.2 g of l-Menthol, add a cold mixture of 2 mL of glacial acetic acid,
6 drops of sulfuric acid, and 2 drops of nitric acid. No color should develop.
(4) Arsenic : It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(5) Lead : When 5.0 g of l-Menthol is tested by Atomic Absorption Spectrophotometry
or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content should not be more
than 2.0 ppm.
Assay Accurately weigh about 1 g of l-Menthol and test by Alcohol Content
Measurement Method 2 in Flavoring Substances Test.
1 mL of 0.5 N alcoholic potassium hydroxide solution ＝ 78.13 mg C10H20O

669
 DL-Methionine

Chemical Formula: C5H11O2NS

Molecular Weight: 149.21 CAS No.: 59-51-8

Compositional Specifications of DL-Methionine

Content DL-Methionine, when calculated on the dried basis, should contain within a
range of 98.5～101.0% of DL-methionine (C5H11O2NS).
Description DL-Methionine occurs as white flaked crystal or crystalline powder, and has
a characteristic odor and a slightly sweet taste.
Identification (1) To 5 mL of DL-Methionine solution (1→1,000), add 1 mL of ninhydrin
solution (1→1,000), and heat for 3 minutes. The color becomes purple.
(2) DL-Methionine solution (1→100) exhibits no optical activity.
(3) To 25 mg of DL-Methionine, add 1 mL of anhydrous cupric sulfate saturated
sulfuric acid. The color becomes yellow.
(4) To 2 mL of DL-Methionine solution (1→100), add 2 mL of sodium hydroxide
solution (1→25), and shake. Add 0.3 mL of sodium nitroprusside solution, and shake
again. Allow to stand for 1-2 minutes, and add 4 mL of diluted hydrochloric acid (1→
10). The color becomes reddish purple.
Purity (1) Clarity and Color of Solution : When 2 g of DL-Methionine is dissolved in
100 mL of water, the solution should be colorless and should not be more than
almost clear.
(2) pH : pH of DL-Methionine solution (1→100) should be within a range of 5.6～6.1.
(3) Chloride : To 20 mL of the solution of (1) in Purity, add 6 mL of dilute nitric acid,
Test Solution. When the test solution is tested by Chloride Limit Test, its content
should not be more than the amount that corresponds to 0.4 mL of 0.01 N
hydrochloric acid.
(4) Arsenic : It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(5) Lead : When 5.0 g of DL-Methionine is tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content
should not be more than 5.0 ppm.
Loss on Drying When DL-Methionine is dried for 4 hours at 105℃, the weight loss
should not be more than 0.5%.
Residue on Ignition When thermogravimetric analysis is done with DL-Methionine, the
residue should not be more than 0.1%.
Assay Dissolve 0.6 g of DL-Methionine, previously dried and accurately weighed, in
water to make 100 mL. Transfer about 50 mL of the solution into a flask with a
670
ground glass stopper, add 5 mL water, 5 g of dipotassium phosphate, 2 g of
monopotassium phosphate, and 2 g of potassium iodide, and dissolve while shaking. To
this solution, add 50 mL of 0.1 N iodine, seal tightly, shake well, allow to stand in a
dark place for 30 minutes, and titrate the excess iodine with 0.1 N sodium thiosulfate
solution (indicator : starch solution). Perform a blank test in the same manner.
1 mL of 0.1 N iodine = 7.461 mg of C5H11O2NS

671
 L-Methionine

Chemical Formula: C5H11O2NS

Molecular Weight: 149.21 CAS No.: 63-68-3

Compositional Specifications of L-Methionine

Content L-Methionine, when calculated on the dried basis, should contain within a range
of 98.5～101.0% of L-methionine (C5H11O2NS).
Description L-Methionine occurs as white flaked crystal or crystalline powder, having a
characteristic odor and a slight bitter taste.
Identification (1) L-Methionine solution(1→100) is L-form. When it is acidified with
hydrochloric acid, it becomes D-from.
(2) To 5 mL of L-Methionine solution (1→1,000), add 1 mL of ninhydrin solution (1→1,000),
and heat for 3 minutes. The color becomes purple.
(3) To 25 mg of L-Methionine, add 1 mL of anhydrous cupric sulfate saturated sulfuric
acid. The color becomes yellow.
(4) To 2 mL of L-Methionine solution (1→100), add 2 mL of sodium hydroxide solution
(1→25), and shake. Add 0.3 mL of sodium nitroprusside solution, and shake again.
Allow to stand for 1-2 minutes, and add 4 mL of diluted hydrochloric acid (1→10).
The color becomes reddish purple.
Purity (1) Clarity and Color of Solution : 0.5 g of L-Methionine is dissolved in 20 mL of
water. The solution should be colorless and should not be more than clear.
(2) pH : pH of L-Methionine solution (1→100) should be within a range of 5.6～6.1.
(3) Specific rotation : Dissolve 1 g of L-Methionine, previously dried for 4 hours and
accurately weighed, in 6 N hydrochloric acid to make 50 mL. When Optical rotation of this
solution is measured, it should be = +21 ∼ +25°.
(4) Chloride : To 20 mL of the solution(2 g of L-Methionine dissolved in 100 mL of
water), add 6 mL of dilute nitric acid, Test Solution. When the test solution is tested by
Chloride Limit Test, its content should not be more than the amount that corresponds to
0.4 mL of 0.01 N hydrochloric acid.
(5) Arsenic : It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(6) Lead : When 5.0 g of L-Methionine is tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content
should not be more than 5.0 ppm.
Loss on Drying When L-Methionine is dried for 4 hours at 105℃, the weight loss
672
 should not be more than 0.5%.
Residue on Ignition When thermogravimetric analysis is done with L-Methionine, the
residue should not be more than 0.1%.
Assay Proceed as directed under Assay in 「DL-Methionine」.

673
 p -Methyl Acetophenone

Chemical Formula: C9H10O

Molecular Weight: 134.18
Synonyms: Methyl p-tolyl ketone;
1-Methyl-4-acetyl benzene CAS No.: 122-00-9

Compositional Specifications of p -Methyl Acetophenone

Content p-Methyl acetophenone should contain not less than 98.0% p-Methyl
acetophenone (C9H10O).
Description p-Methyl acetophenone is transparent white～pale yellow liquid with a
characteristic scent.
Identification p-Methyl acetophenone is proceed as directed under Liquid Film Method
(4) in Infrared Spectrophotometry. There should be absorption bands at 1,680 cm-1,
1,605cm-1, 1,358cm-1, 1,268cm-1, and 815cm-1.
Purity (1) Specific Gravity : Specific gravity of p-Methyl acetophenone should be within
a range of 1.001∼1.004.
(2) Refractive Index : Refractive Index of p-Methyl acetophenone should be within a
range of 1.532∼1.535.
(3) Clarity and Color of Solution : When 1 mL p-Methyl acetophenone is dissolved in
10 mL of 50% alcohol, the solution should be clear.
(4) Chloride : When p-Methyl acetophenone is proceed as directed under Copper
Screen Method in Halogenated Compounds in Flavoring Substances Test, it should be
appropriate.
Assay Approximately 1 g of p-Methyl acetophenone is precisely weighed and proceed
as directed under Method 2, Hydroxylamine Method, Determination of Aldehydes and
Ketones in Flavoring Substances Test. However, heat treatment is done for 1 hour.
1 mL of 0.5 N hydrochloric acid ＝ 67.07 mg C9H10O

674
 Methyl Alcohol
Methanol
Chemical Formula: CH3OH

Molecular Weight: 32.04

Synonyms: Methanol; Carbinol CAS No.: 67-56-1

Compositional Specifications of Methyl Alcohol

Content Methyl Alcohol should not be less than 99.85% of Methyl Alcohol (CH3OH).
Description Methyl Alcohol is colorless, transparent, flammable liquid with a characteristic
odor.
Purity (1) Solubility : 15 mL of Methyl Alcohol is mixed with 45 nl of water, this
solution should be clear as the same amount of water after 1 hour.
(2) Acid Value (as formic acid) ： To the mixture of 10 mL of ethyl alcohol and 25 mL
of water, 0.5 mL of phenolphthalein solution is added, 0.02 N sodium hydroxide is
added for at least 30 seconds until pale red persists. Then 19 mL (corresponds to 15 g)
of Methyl Alcohol is added and mixed. It is titrated with 0.02N sodium hydroxide until
pale red develops again, and the consumed amount should not be more than 0.25 mL.
(indicator : 0.1 mL of phenolphthalein solution)
(3) Alkali Value(as ammonia) : 1 drop of Methyl red solution is added to 25 mL of
water and 0.02 N sulfuric acid is added until red color develops. 29 mL of Methyl
Alcohol(corresponds to about 22.5g) is added, titrated until the red color develops
again, the consumption should not be more than 0.2 mL.
(4) Acetone and Aldehydes : To 1.25 mL of Methyl Alcohol (corresponds to about 1 g),
3. 75 mL of water and 5.0 mL of Meyer solution are added, the turbidity of test
solution should not be deeper than turbidity of standard solution containing 30㎍ of
acetone (not more than 0.003%).
(5) Matters that reduce permanganates：20 mL of Methyl Alcohol is cooled to 15℃,
and transferred to a cylinder with a stopper. After adding 0.1 mL of 0.1 N potassium
permanganate solution, it is set aside for 5 minutes. Pale red color should not
disappear completely.
(6) Lead : When 5.0 g of Methyl Alcohol is tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content
should not be more than 2.0 ppm.
(7) Distillation test : When Methyl Alcohol is tested for boiling point and amount of
distillate, 95%(v/v) or more should be extracted at 63.6～65.6℃.
(8) Carbonized substances : To 25 mL of Methyl Alcohol, 25 mL of sulfuric acid
solution to make 10℃ is added and mixed, and the color of the solution should not
be deeper than that of the solution, which is made by adding water to 3.5 mL of
platinum-cobalt solution to make 50 mL.
Platinum-cobalt solution : To 1.246 g of Potassium chloroplatinate(K2PtCl6) and 1.00 g
675
 of cobalt chloride(COCl2․6H2O), 200 mL of water and 100 mL of hydrochloric acid are
added, dissolved, and water is added to make 1,000 mL.
(9) Residue on Evaporation : 125 mL (approximately 100 g) of Methyl Alcohol is dried
in a water bath, further dried for 30 minutes at 105℃ and cooled. The weight of
the residue should not be more than 10 ppm.
Water Content Water content of Methyl Alcohol is determined by water determination
(Karl-Fischer Method) and should not be more than 0.1%.
Assay The content of Methyl Alcohol is tested by determination of specific gravity. It
should not be more than 0.7928 as specific gravity.

676
 Methyl Anthranilate

Chemical Formula: C8H9NO2

Molecular Weight: 151.16

Synonyms: Methyl o-aminobenzoate CAS No.: 134-20-3

Compositional Specifications of Methyl Anthranilate

Content Methyl Anthranilate should contain not less than 98.0% of methyl anthranilate
(C8H9NO2).
Description Methyl Anthranilate occurs as colorless to light yellow lumps or liquid. It
has a characteristic odor. The liquid shows a characteristic fluorescent blue-purple
color.
Identification (1) Dissolve 0.1 g of Methyl Anthranilate in hydrochloric acid (1→10). Add
1 mL of sodium nitrite solution and 2 mL of the solution prepared by dissolving 0.1
g of β-naphthol in 5 mL of sodium hydroxide solution. An orange-red precipitate is
formed.
(2) To 1 g of Methyl Anthranilate, add 5 mL of 10% alcoholic solution of potassium
hydroxide, and heat in a water bath. Add 5 mL of water while hot. After cooling, add
4 mL of diluted hydrochloric acid. A white to gray~white precipitate is formed.
Purity (1) Solidification Point : Solidification Point of Methyl Anthranilate should not be
less than 23.8℃.
(2) Clarity and Color of Solution : 1 mL of Methyl Anthranilate is melted at 30℃ by
warming, and dissolved in 6 mL of 60% ethanol. This solution should be clear.
(3) Refractive Index : Refractive Index of Methyl Anthranilate should be within a range
of 1.582～1.584.
(4) Acid Value : Acid value of Methyl Anthranilate is tested by Acid Value in Flavoring
Substance Test. It should not be more than 1.
Assay Accurately weigh about 0.5 g of Methyl Anthranilate, and proceed as directed
under Ester Value and Ester Content in Flavoring Substances Tests.
1 mL of 0.5 N ethanolic potassium hydroxide = 75.58 mg of C8H9NO2

677
 Methyl Cellulose

INS No.: 461

Synonyms: Cellulose methyl ether CAS No.: 9004-67-5

Compositional Specifications of Methyl Cellulose

Content Methyl Cellulose, when calculated on the dried basis, should contain within a
range of 25.0～33.0% of methoxyl group (-OCH3 = 31.04).
Description Methyl Cellulose occurs as a white to whitish powder or fibrous substance. It
is odorless.
Identification To 1 g of Methyl Cellulose, add 100 mL of water at about 70℃. Stir well,
cool while shaking, and allow to stand in a cold place until it becomes a uniformLy
pasty solution. Use this solution as the test solution.
(1) Heat 10 mL of the test solution in a water bath. White turbidity appears or a white
precipitate is formed. After cooling, the white turbidity or precipitate dissolves and
becomes a uniformLy pasty solution again.
(2) Transfer 2 mL of the test solution into test tube, superimpose 1 mL of anthrone
solution gently along the tube wall. The color of the junction changes to a blue to
green color.
Purity (1) Viscosity : When the viscosity is expressed, perform the following test. The
viscosity is 80～120% of the expressed amount when the expressed amount is not
more than 100 centistokes, and 75-140% when it exceeds 100 centistokes.
Accurately weigh the amount of Methyl Cellulose corresponding to 2 g calculated on
the dried basis, add 50 mL of water at 85℃ and stir for 10 minutes, using a stirrer.
Add 40 mL of water, dissolve the sample in ice water while stirring for 40 minutes,
add water to make exactly 100 mL, remove the effervescence by centrifuging if
necessary, and measure the viscosity at 20 ± 0.1℃.
(2) Chloride : 0.5 g of Methyl Cellulose transfer into a beaker. add 30 mL of hot
water, stir well, and filter while hot with an insulated funnel. Wash the beaker and
the residue on filter paper, using 15 mL of hot water each time, 3 times, combine
the filtrate and the washings, and add water to make 100 mL. Use this solution as
the Solution A. Add 6 mL of dilute nitric acid to 5 mL of Solution A, as the Test
Solution. Test this solution by Chloride Limit Tests. Its content should not be more
than the amount that corresponds to 0.4 mL of 0.01 N hydrochloric acid.
(3) Sulfate : To 40 mL of Solution A in (2) above, add 1 mL of dilute hydrochloric
acid. which is then tested by Sulfate Limit Test. Its content should not be more than
the amount that corresponds to 0.4 mL of 0.01 N sulfuric acid.
(4) Arsenic : It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(5) Lead : When 5.0 g of Methyl Cellulose is tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content
should not be more than 2.0 ppm.
678
 (6) Cadmium : When 5.0 g of Methyl Cellulose is tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content
should not be more than 1.0 ppm.
(7) Mercury : When Methyl Cellulose is tested by Mercury Limit Test, its content
should not be more than 1.0 ppm.
Loss on Drying When Methyl Cellulose is dried for 4 hours at 105℃, the weight loss
should not be more than 5%.
Residue on Ignition When thermogravimetric analysis is done with 1 g of Methyl
Cellulose, previously dried for 4 hours at 105℃, the residue should not be more than
1.5%.
Assay Accurately weigh about 25 mg of Methyl Cellulose, previously dried, and proceed
as directed under Methoxyl Determination.
Weight of 0.1N sodium thiosulfate solution (mL) × 0.5172
Content(%)＝ × 100
weight of the sample(mg)

679
 Methyl Cinnamate

Chemical Formula: C10H10O2

Molecular Weight: 162.19
Synonyms: Methyl 3-phenylpropenoate CAS No.: 103-26-4

Compositional Specifications of Methyl Cinnamate

Content Methyl Cinnamate should contain not less than 98.0% of methyl cinnamate (C10H10O2)
Description Methyl Cinnamate occurs as a white to light yellow solid having a matsutake like
odor.
Identification To 1 g of Methyl Cinnamate, add 10 mL of 10% alcoholic solution of
potassium hydroxide, and heat in a water bath. Methyl Cinnamate dissolves, a white
precipitate is formed, and the matsutake like odor disappears. Add 10 mL of water
while warm. The precipitate dissolves. Acidify with diluted sulfuric acid. A white
crystalline precipitate is formed.
Purity
(1) Solidification Temperature : Solidification temperature should not be less than 33.
8℃.
(2) Clarity and Color of Solution : When 1 g of Methyl Cinnamate is dissolved in 4 mL
of 80% ethanol by heating at 40℃, the solution should be almost clear.
(3) Acid Value : Acid value of Methyl Cinnamate is tested by Acid Value in Flavoring
Substance Test. It should not be more than 2.
Assay Accurately weigh 1 g of Methyl Cinnamate tested by Ester Value in Flavoring
Substances Test. In this case, 5 mL of water is added before heating.
1mL of 0.5 N alcoholic solution of potassium hydroxide ＝ 81.10 mg C10H10O2

680
 Methyl Hesperidin
Compositional Specifications of Methyl Hesperidin
Content Methyl Hesperidin when calculated on the dried basis, should contain not less
than 90.0% of methyl hesperidin.
Description Methyl Hesperidin occurs as a yellow to orange-yellow powder. It is
odorless or has a slight odor.
Identification (1) To 10 mg of Methyl Hesperidin. add 2 mL of sulfuric acid. A red color
develops. Add 1～2 drops of hydrogen peroxide solution. A dark red color develops.
(2) To 0.1 g of Methyl Hesperidin, add 5 mL of ethanol and 1 mL of sodium hydroxide
solution, boil for 3 minutes, cool, and filter. The color of the filtrate changes to
yellow to orange-yellow. To the filtrate, add 1 mL of hydrochloric acid and about 10
mg of magnesium dust, and allow to stand. A pink color develops.
(3) To 0.1 g of Methyl Hesperidin, add 10 mL of diluted hydrochloric acid, boil for 5
minutes, cool, and filter. Neutralize the filtrate with sodium hydroxide solution (1→5),
add 2 mL of Fehling's solution, and heat. A red precipitate is formed.
Purity (1) Clarity and Color of Solution : When 1 g of Methyl Hesperidin is dissolved in
10 mL of water, the solution should not be more than almost clear.
(2) Sulfate : When 0.5 g of Methyl Hesperidin is tested by Sulfate Limit Test, the
content should not be more than the amount corresponding to 0.2 mL of 0.01 N
sulfuric acid.
(3) Lead : When 5.0 g of Methyl Hesperidin is tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content
should not be more than 2.0 ppm.
Loss on Drying When Methyl Hesperidin is dried for 24 hours in a vacuum desiccator
(silica gel), the weight loss should not be more than 3%.
Residue on Ignition Residue on ignition of Methyl Hesperidin should not be more than
0.5%.
Assay Accurately weigh about 0.3 g of Methyl Hesperidin, previously dried, dissolve in
water to make 1,000 mL. Take 10 mL of this solution, add water to make 100 mL,
measure absorbance A at a wave-length of 300 nm with 1 cm path length, and
calculate the content of methyl hesperidin by the following formula.
753.7A
Content(%) = × 100
weight of the sample(mg)

681
 Methyl ρ-Hydroxybenzoate
Chemical Formula: C8H8O3
Molecular Weight: 152.15 INS No.: 218
Synonyms: Methyl p-oxybenzoate; CAS No.: 99-76-3
Methylparaben

Compositional Specifications of Methyl ρ-Hydroxybenzoate

Content Methyl ρ-Hydroxybenzoate, when calculated on the dried basis, should be
contain not less than 99.0% methyl ρ-hydroxybenzoate (C6H8O3).
Description Methyl ρ-Hydroxybenzoate is colorless crystal or white crystalline powder
with slight or no scent
Identification To 0.5 g of Methyl ρ-Hydroxybenzoate, add 10 mL of sodium hydroxide,
boil about 30 minutes, evaporate to about 5 mL, and cool. Acidify this solution with
diluted sulfuric acid and wash formed precipitates with water. Dry it for 1 hour at 105℃,
and the melting point is 213～217℃.
Purity (1) Melting Point : Melting point of Methyl ρ-Hydroxybenzoate should be within a
range of 125∼128℃.
(2) Free Acid : 15 mL of water is added to 0.75 g of Methyl ρ-Hydroxybenzoate and
heated for 1 minutes in effervescent water bath and cooled. The filtrate is acidic or
neutral. To 10 mL of filtrate, 0.2 mL of 0.1N sodium hydroxide and 2 drops of methyl
red solution are added. A yellow color develops.
(3) Arsenic : It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(4) Lead : When 5.0 g of Methyl ρ-Hydroxybenzoate is tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content
should not be more than 2.0 ppm.
(5) p-Hydroxybenzoate and salicylic acid : 0.5g of Methyl p-Hydroxybenzoate is
dissolved in 30mL of ether, and 20 mL of Sodium Bicabonate(1→100) is added and
mixed. Separate the water layer. The water layer is washed with 20 mL each of
ether twice, and 5mL of diluted sulfuric acid and 30 mL of ether are added. Separate
the ether layer and wash with 10 mL of water. Filter ether layer, wash the container
of the solution and mix it in the solution. Evaporate the ether of the solution to
dryness in a water bath. Dry the residue in sulfuric desicater until the weight
becomes constant. Then the content should be 5 mg or less. The constant residues
are dissolved in water, heated to 70℃, and filtered. When diluted Ferric Chloride
Solution is added to the solution, it should not be appeared red ~ dark red color.
Loss on Drying When Methyl ρ-Hydroxybenzoate dried for 5 hours in a desiccator
(silica gel), the loss should not be more than 0.5%.
Residue on Ignition When thermogravimetric analysis is done with precisely weighed 2 g
of Methyl ρ-Hydroxybenzoate , the amount of residue should not be more than 0.05%.
Assay 40 mL of 1 N sodium hydroxide solution is added to precisely weighed 2 g of
682
Methyl p-Hydroxybenzoate, boiled for 30 minutes and cooled. Titrate the excess alkali
with 1 N sulfuric acid (indicator : 5 drops of bromthymol blue solution). The color of
end point is the color which appears by adding same indicator to buffer solution of pH
6.5. Separately, perform a blank test in the same manner.
1 mL of 1 N sodium hydroxide solution = 152.2 mg C8H8O3

683
 Methyl N -Methylanthranilate

Chemical Formula: C9H11NO2

Molecular Weight: 165.19 CAS No.: 85-91-6

Compositional Specifications of Methyl N -Methylanthranilate

Content Methyl N -Methylanthranilate should contain within a range of 98.0～101.3% of
methyl N-methylanthranilate (C9H11NO2).
Description Methyl N -Methylanthranilate occurs as colorless to light yellow, transparent
crystalline lumps or liquid. It has a grape-like scent. The solution shows a bluish
purple fluorescence.
Identification To 1 mL of Methyl N -Methylanthranilate, add 5 mL of 10% alcoholic
potassium hydroxide solution, equip with a reflux condenser, and heat for 1 hour. Its
characteristic scent disappears. Cool, and acidify with diluted hydrochloric acid.
Crystals are formed. Collect the crystals, and recrystallize from 50% ethanol. The
melting point should be within a range of 164～174℃
Purity (1) Specific Gravity : Specific gravity of Methyl N -Methylanthranilate should be
within a range of 1.126～1.132.
(2) Refractive Index : Refractive Index of Methyl N -Methylanthranilate should be within
a range of 1.578～1.581
(3) Solidification Temperature : Solidification temperature of Methyl
N -Methylanthranilate should not be less than 14℃.
(4) Clarity and Color of Solution : When 1 g of Methyl N -Methylanthranilate is
dissolved in 3 mL of 80% ethanol, the solution should be clear.
(5) Acid Value : Acid value of Methyl N -Methylanthranilate is tested by Acid Value in
Flavoring Substance Test. It should not be more than 1.
Assay
Approximately 1 g of Methyl N -Methylanthranilate is precisely weighed and tested by
Ester Value and Ester content in Flavoring Substances Test.
1 mL of 0.5 N alcoholic potassium hydroxide solution ＝ 82.60 mg C9H11NO262.

684
 Methyl β-Naphthyl Ketone

Chemical Formula: C12H10O

Molecular Weight: 170.21

Synonyms: 2-Acetonaphthone CAS No.: 93-08-3

Compositional Specifications of Methyl β-Naphthyl Ketone

Content Methyl β-Naphthyl Ketone should contain not less than 99.0% of Methyl β
-Naphthyl Ketone (C12H10O).
Description Methyl β-Naphthyl Ketone occurs as white to light yellow crystals or
crystalline powder, having a characteristic odor.
Identification (1) To 0.1 g of Methyl β-Naphthyl Ketone, add 3 g of zinc powder, mix
well, and ignite directly on a burner while shaking. The mixture has odor of
naphthalene.
(2) To 1 mL of solution of Methyl β-Naphthyl Ketone in ethanol (1→100), add 2 drops
of sodium nitroprusside solution, add 6 drops of sodium hydroxide solution, and
shake. The color becomes red-purple, and add 3 drops of acetic acid. The color
becomes blue.
Purity (1) Melting Point : Melting point of Methyl β-Naphthyl Ketone should not be less
than 53℃.
(2) Clarity and Color of Solution : When 1 g of Methyl β-Naphthyl Ketone is dissolved in
5 mL of 95% ethanol by heating at 30℃, the solution should be clear.
(3) Chlorinated compounds : When Methyl β-Naphthyl Ketone is tested by Copper
Mesh Test Method for Halogens in Test Methods for Flavorings, it should be
appropriate.
(4) Arsenic : It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(5) Lead : When 5.0 g of Methyl β-Naphthyl Ketone is tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content
should not be more than 2.0 ppm.
Loss on Drying When Methyl β-Naphthyl Ketone is dried for 4 hours in a vacuum
desiccator(silica gel), the weight loss should not be more than 0.5%.
Residue on Ignition When thermogravimetric analysis is done with Methyl β-Naphthyl
Ketone, the residue should not be more than 0.05%.
Assay Accurately weigh about 1 g of Methyl β-Naphthyl Ketone, and proceed as
directed under hydroxylamine Method 2 in Aldehyde and Ketone Content in Flavoring
Substances Tests. In the procedure, boil the mixture for 1 hour before titrating.
685
1 mL of 0.5 N hydrochloric acid = 85.11 mg of C12H10O

686
 Methyl Salicylate

Chemical Formula: C8H8O3

Molecular Weight: 152.15 CAS No.: 119-36-8

Compositional Specifications of Methyl Salicylate

Content Methyl Salicylate should contain not less than 98.0% of methyl salicylate (C8H8O3).
Description Methyl Salicylate is a colorless to light yellow liquid, and has a
characteristic odor.
Identification 25 mL of 10% alcoholic solution of potassium hydroxide is added to 1 mL
of Methyl Salicylate. When it is heated in a water bath with a reflux condenser, a
characteristic scent disappears. It is heated again in a water bath and cooled, where 75
mL of water is added. The resulting solution responds to the test for salicylate salt (B)
in Identification.
Purity (1) Specific Gravity : Specific gravity of Methyl Salicylate should be within a
range of 1.180～1.185
(2) Refractive Index : Refractive index of Methyl Salicylate should be within a range of
1.535～1.538
(3) Clarity and Color of Solution : When 1 mL of Methyl Salicylate is dissolved in 7
mL of 70% alcohol, the solution should be clear.
(4) Acid Value : Acid value of Methyl Salicylate is tested by Ester Value and Ester
Contents in Flavoring Substance Test. It should not be more than 1. In this case,
phenol red solution is used as an indicator.
Assay Accurately weigh about 0.9 g of Methyl Salicylate, and proceed as directed under
Ester Content in Flavoring Substances Tests, using phenol red solution as the
indicator.
1 mL of 0.05 N ethanolic potassium hydroxide = 76.08 mg of C8H8O3

687
 Methylethylcellulose
INS No.: 465
Synonyms: Ethyl methyl cellulose; Methyl
ethyl ether of cellulose; MEC CAS No. : 9004-69-7

Compositional Specifications of Methylethylcellulose

Content Methylethylcellulose, when calculated on the dried basis, should contains 3.5∼
6.5% methoxyl group (-OCH3 : 31.04) and 14.5∼19.0% ethoxyl group (-OCH2CH3 :
45.06)
Description Methylethylcellulose is scentless hygroscopic white～ivory white fibrous solid
or powder.
Identification (1) When an aqueous solution (0.1→100) of Methylethylcellulose is shaken
vigorously, a foamy layer is formed.
(2) When 5 mL of 5% copper sulfate solution or aluminum sulfate solution is added to
5 mL of aqueous solution (0.5→100), it should not be form white precipitates.
Purity (1) Arsenic : It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(2) Lead : When 5.0 g of Methylethylcellulose is tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content
should not be more than 2.0 ppm.
(3) Cadmium : When 5.0 g of Methylethylcellulose is tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content
should not be more than 1.0 ppm.
(4) Mercury : When Methylethylcellulose is tested by Mercury Limit Test, its content
should not be more than 1.0 ppm.
Loss on Drying When Methylethylcellulose is dried at 105℃, weight loss should not be
more than 15% for fibrous phase and 10% or less for powder phase.
Residue on Ignition Residue after ignition should not be more than 0.6%.
Assay Approximately 65 mg of Methylethylcellulose is precisely weighed into a bottle
for decomposition (5 mL glass bottle with pressure stopper). 65 mg of adipic acid, 2.0
mL of internal standard solution, and 2.0 mL of hydroiodic acid (must be handled
carefully) are added to the bottle, which is precisely weighed. The bottle is shaken for
30 seconds, heated for 20 minutes at 150℃, carefully shaken, and heated for 40
minutes again. After cooling for 45 minutes, the weight is precisely weighed. If the
weight loss is less than 10 mg, the supernatant is used as Test Solution. Separately,
65 mg of adipic acid, 2.0 mL of internal standard solution, 2 mL of hydroiodic acid are
added to a bottle for decomposition. After placing a stopper, it is weighed precisely.
15 μl of ethyl iodide is added and weighed precisely. Using the same procedure, 45 μl
of methyl iodide is added and weighed. After shaking the bottle for 30 seconds, the
supernatant is used as Standard Solution. 1μl of each solution is injected into a gas
chromatography and the contents (%) of methoxyl group and hydroxypropoxyl group
688
 are obtained using the following equation.
QTa WSa
Content of methoxyl group (%) = × weight of the × 21.86
QSa
sample(mg)
QTb WSb
Content of ethoxyl group(%) = × weight of the × 28.89
QSb
sample(mg)

WSa : The amount of methyl idodide in Standard Solution (mg)

WSb : The amount of ethyl idodide in Standard Solution (mg)
QSa, QSb : Peak area ratios of methyl idodide and ethyl iodide vs. internal standard in
Standard Solution
QTa, QTb : Peak area ratios of methyl idodide and ethyl iodide vs. internal standard in
Test Solution
Operation Conditions
-Column : Diatomite for gas chromatography (Chromosorb WHP or its equivalent)
coated with 10% methyl silicone oil or its equivalent
-Detector : Thermal Conductivity Detector (TCD) or (Hydrogen) Flame Ionization
Detector (FID)
-Temperature at injection hole: 200℃
-Column Temperature : 50℃
-Detector Temperature : 200℃
-Carrier gas : Helium or Nitrogen
-Internal Standard Solution : 0.25 g of toluene is precisely weighed and dissolved in
o-xylene (total volume 50 mL).

689
 (6S)-5-Methyltetrahydrofolic Acid, Glucosamine Salt
Chemical Formula : C32H51N9O16

Molecular Weight : 817.80

Synonyms : 5-MTHF-glucosamine CAS No.: 1181972-37-1

Compositional Specifications of (6S)-5-Methyltetrahydrofolic Acid, Glucosamine Salt

Content Glucosamine(converted to a dried form) should contain within a range of 34∼
46%, and (6S)-5-Methyltetrahydrofolic Acid(converted to a dried form) should contain
within a range of 54∼59%.
Description (6S)-5-Methyltetrahydrofolic Acid, glucosamine salt is light yellow∼brown
powder.
Identification (1) When (6S)-5-Methyltetrahydrofolic Acid, glucosamine salt is tested
according to (1) potassium bromide disk method in Infrared Spectrophotometry, the
same spectrum should be appear as a standard.
Purity (1) When the test solution is tested by Arsenic Limit Test, it should be no more
than 2.6 ppm.
(2) Lead : When 5.0 g of (6S)-5-Methyltetrahydrofolic Acid, glucosamine salt is tested
by Atomic Absorption Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission
Spectroscopy, its content should not be more than 2.0 ppm.
(3) Mercury : When (6S)-5-Methyltetrahydrofolic Acid, glucosamine salt is tested by
Mercury Limit Test, its content should not be more than 0.1 ppm.
(4) Cadmium : When 5.0 g of (6S)-5-Methyltetrahydrofolic Acid, glucosamine salt is
tested by Atomic Absorption Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma
Emission Spectroscopy, its content should not be more than 1.0 ppm.
(5) Boron : 2 g of (6S)-5-Methyltetrahydrofolic Acid, glucosamine salt is transferred
into a 500 mL flask for decomposition. 20 mL of water and 30 mL of nitric acid are
added to the flask and mixed well, which is then heated gently. After cooling, 10 mL
of sulfuric acid is added. By adding 2～3 mL of nitric acid at a time, the solution is
heated until the liquid becomes colorless～pale yellow. This liquid is then cooled and
75 mL of water and 25 mL of saturated ammonium hydroxide solution are added. It
is heated until white smoke appears. It is cooled and water is added so that the total
volume is brought up to 50 mL (Test Solution). Separately, a blank test carried out
following the same procedure to correct the Test Solution. The content of boron in
boron standard solution, Test Solution, and blank test solution are obtained by ICP
method in Test Method of Harmful Metals in General Test Methods in 「Food Code
s」. The content of boron in Test Solution should not be more than 10 ppm (limited
to cases where (6S)-5-Methyltetrahydrofolic Acid, glucosamine salt is reduced by
sodium boron hydride).
(6) (6S)-5-Methyltetrahydrofolic Acid, glucosamine salt : 35 mg of
(6S)-5-Methyltetrahydrofolic Acid, glucosamine salt is precisely weighed and add 90
690
 mL of water and mix well. After ultrasonic extraction for 1 minute at 20℃, add
water to make 100 mL. Take 5 mL of this solution to the 10 mL flask and add
mobile phase to titrate to 10 mL. And filtering by 0.45μm filtration and use it as
test solution. Separately, Add 90 mL of water to 25 mg of
(6R,S)-5-Methyltetrahydrofolic acid calcium salt and mix well. After ultrasonic
extraction for 1 minute at 20℃, add water to make 100 mL. Take 5 mL of this
solution to the 10 mL flask and add mobile phase to titrate to 10 mL. And filtering
by 0.45μm filtration and use it as standard solution. Liquid chromatography is carried
out with each test and standard solutions under the following operation conditions.
The contents of (6S)-5-Methyltetrahydrofolic acid should be more than 99% by
following calculating formula.
Peak Area of (6S)-5-Methyltetrahydrofolic
acid
(6S)-5-Methyltetrahydrofolic acid(%)
× 100
= Sum of Peak Area of
(6S)-5-Methyltetrahydrofolic acid and
(6R)-5-Methyltetrahydrofolic acid

Operation Conditions
-Detector : UV absorption photometer (measured at wavelength 225 nm)
-Column : Chiral HSA(Chromtech, 4.0mm×100mm, 5μm) or equivalent
-Column Temperature : 30℃
-Mobile Phase : Adjust 100mL HaH2PO4 to pH 7.0 with 10% NaOH. Mix 940 mL of
this solution and 60 mL of 2-propanol as a mobile phase.
-Flow Rate : 0.7 mL/min
(7) Total Viable Aerobic Count : When (6S)-5-Methyltetrahydrofolic Acid, glucosamine salt
is tested by Microbe Test Methods for Total Viable Aerobic Count (Number of General
Germs) in General Test Method in 「Standards and Specifications for Foods」, it should
not be more than 100 per 1 g
(8) E. Coli : When 6S)-5-Methyltetrahydrofolic Acid, glucosamine salt is tested by
Microbe Test Methods for E. Coli in General Test Method 「Standards and
Specifications for Foods」, it should be negative (-).
Water Content Water content in (6S)-5-Methyltetrahydrofolic Acid, glucosamine salt is
determined by water determination (Karl-Fisher Titration) and should not be more than
8.0%.
Assay (1) Glucosamine : 0.5 g of glucosamine is precisely weighed and dissolved in 50
mL of acetonitrile · water mixture (75:25), and put same solution to make the total
volume of the solution 100 mL. This solution is filtered through a 0.45 um filter (Test
Solution). Separately, 0.5 g of D-glucosamine hydrochloride standard is precisely
weighed and dissolved in 50 mL of acetonitrile·water mixture (75:25), and put same
solution to make the total volume of the solution 100 mL. This solution is filtered
through a 0.45 um filter (Standard Solution). Each Standard Solution and Test Solution
691
 is injected into liquid chromatography using the following operation conditions. The
content (%) of glucosamine is obtained from the following equation.
Content of (%) = At × P T% × 100
glucosamine
std

Astd × Pc × (100 – m)

Ac : Peak area of Test Solution

Pstd : Weight of Standard (mg)
Astd : Peak area of Standard Solution
Pc : Weight of the sample (mg)
T% : Glucosamine ratio of reference material(%)
m : Water Content(%)
Operation Conditions
-Detector : UV 190 nm
-Column : Shodex Asahipak NH2P-50 4E(4.6mm × 250mm, 5μm) or its equivalent
-Column Temperature : 35 ℃
-Mobile Phase : acetonitrile·water mixture (75:25)
-Flow Rate : 1.0 mL/min
(2) (6S)-5-Methyltetrahydrofolic acid : 70 mg of (6S)-5-Methyltetrahydrofolic Acid,
glucosamine salt is precisely weighed and dissolved in water, and make the total volume
of the solution 100 mL. This solution is filtered through a 0.45 um filter (Test Solution).
Separately, take the amount equivalent to 40 mg with (6S)-5-Methyltetrahydrofolic acid
calcium as (6S)-5-Methyltetrahydrofolic acid and dissolve in water with 100mL flask and
make the total volume of the solution 100mL(Standard Solution). Each Standard Solution
and Test Solution is injected into liquid chromatography using the following operation
conditions. The content (%) of (6S)-5-Methyltetrahydrofolic Acid, glucosamine salt is
obtained from the following equation.
Content of
(6S)-5-Methyltetra At × P T% × 100
std

hydrofolic acid Astd × Pc × (100 – m)

(%) =

Ac : Peak area of Test Solution

Pstd : Weight of Standard(mg)
Astd : Peak area of Standard Solution
Pc : Weight of the sample (mg)
T% : (6S)-5-Methyltetrahydrofolic acid ratio of reference material(%)
m : Water Content(%)
Operation Conditions
-Detector : UV 280 nm
-Column : Gemini phenomenex(4.6mm×250mm, 5μm) or its equivalent
692
-Column Temperature : 25 ℃
-Mobile Phase : A solution : Dissolve 6.8 g of KH2PO4 in 350 mL of water. Adjust it
to pH 6.5 with 20% KOH, and make it to 1,000 mL with
water.
B solution : Dissolve 4.08 g of KH2PO4 in 650 mL of water. Mix with
350 mL of Acetonitrile. Adjust to pH 8.0 with 20% KOH.
Time(min.) A(%) B(%)
0 100 0
15 60 40
17 30 70
22 30 70
31 100 0
-Flow Rate : 1.0 mL/min

693
 Microfibrillated Cellulose
Definition Microfibrillated Cellulose is microfibrillated cellulose obtained by homogenizing
fibers such as pulps.
Compositional Specifications of Microfibrillated Cellulose
Description Microfibrillated Cellulose is white and wet fiber.
Identification (1) When 30 g of Microfibrillated Cellulose (converted to a dried form) is
dispersed in water (total weight = 300 g) and homogenized at 3,000∼5,000 rpm for 5
minutes, it becomes a suspension without fluidity. Suspension is maintained in 3
hours without separation.
(2) 1 mL of phosphoric acid is added to 1 mg (converted to a dried form) of
Microfibrillated Cellulose, which is heated for 30 minutes in a water bath. When 4
mL of catechol phosphate solution (1→500) is added to this solution and heated for
30 minutes, it becomes red.
(3) When 2 mL of iodine solution (1→5) is added to 0.05 g (converted to a dried form)
and set aside for 5 minutes, the color of the solution is maintained. The supernatant
is discarded by leaning. When 1 drop of diluted sulfuric acid (1→2) is added to the
residue, the color becomes bluish violet.
Purity (1) Acidity ： 2 g (converted to a dried form) of Microfibrillated Cellulose is
dispersed in 100 mL of water (freshly boiled and cooled). pH of this suspension
should be 5.0～8.0 (using glass electrode).
(2) Arsenic : It should be no more than 2.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(3) Lead : When 5.0 g of Microfibrillated Cellulose is tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content
should not be more than 2.0 ppm.
(4) Starch ： The suspension in Purity (1) is filtered. When 2～3 drops of 0.1 N iodine
solution is added to 20 mL of this filtrate, it is not appeared blue～bluish violet in
color.
(5) Water Solubles ： 100 mL of water is added to 10 g (converted to a dried form) of
Microfibrillated Cellulose, which is heated (with a reflux condenser) for 30 minutes in
an oil bath. Cool the solution. It is vacuum filtered through a glass filter(G4). 50 mL
of the filtrate is evaporated to dryness. The residue is dried for 1 hour at 105℃.
The amount of residue should not be more than 50 mg.
(6) Total Viable Aerobic Count : When Microfibrillated Cellulose is tested by Microbe
Test Methods for Total Viable Aerobic Count (Number of General Germs) in General
Test Method in 「Standards and Specifications for Foods」, it should not be more
than 5,000 per 1 g
(7) E. Coli : When Microfibrillated Cellulose is tested by Microbe Test Methods for E.
Coli in General Test Method 「Standards and Specifications for Foods」, it should be
negative (-).
Loss on Drying When Microfibrillated Cellulose is dried for 3 hours at 100℃, the weight
loss should not be more than 80%.
694
Residue on Ignition When Residue on Ignition is done with precisely weighted material,
the amount of residue should not be more than 0.3%.

695
 Milk Clotting Enzyme
RENNET
Chymosin
Definition Milk Clotting Enzyme is an enzyme obtained from the stomach of cow, sheep and
etc., or from the cultures of Kluyveromyces lactis, Rhizomucor miehei, Rhizomucor pusillus,
Mucor sp., Irpex lacteus, Bacillus cereus, Crypnohectria parasitica, Eshericha coli and an
enzyme obtained from Aspergillus awamori in which chymosin gene of calf is inserted.
Dilutant or stabilizer can be added for the purpose of activity adjustment and quality
preservation.
Compositional Specifications of Milk Clotting Enzyme
Description Milk Clotting Enzyme is white～dark brown powder, particle, paste or
colorless～deep brown liquid.
Identification When Milk Clotting Enzyme is proceeded as directed under Activity Test, it
should have the activity as Milk Clotting Enzyme.
Purity (1) Arsenic : It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(2) Lead : When 5.0 g of Milk Clotting Enzyme is tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content
should not be more than 5.0 ppm.
(3) Coliform Group ： Milk Clotting Enzyme is tested by Microbe Test Methods for
Coliform Group in General Test Methods in 「Standards and Specifications for Food
s」. It should contain 30 colonies or less per 1 g of this product.
(4) Salmonella ： Milk Clotting Enzyme is tested by Microbe Test Methods for
Salmonella in General Test Methods in 「Standards and Specifications for Foods」.
It should be negative (-).
(5) E. Coli : When Milk Clotting Enzyme is tested by Microbe Test Methods for E. Coli
in General Test Method 「Standards and Specifications for Foods」, it should be
negative (-).
Activity Test (Activity)
Analysis Principle : Activity test is based on clotting time of reaction mixture of rennet
standard and enzyme using defatted dried milk at pH 6.5.
∘Preparation of Test Solution : Test Solution is prepared using acetate buffer solution so
that the clotting time falls within ± 40 seconds of mixed standard solution.
∘Test Procedure : 25 mL each of substrate solution is placed in 2 flasks, which are set
up in a rotational apparatus. The flasks are hung in a 32 ± 0.2℃ water bath and tilted
at an appropriate angle. While rotating, substrate solution is isothermalized for at least
12 minutes (maximum 20 minutes). 0.5 mL each of Test Solution and Standard Solution
is added to each flask, which is then rotated and clotting time is measured. Clotting
time is the time when fine particles are adsorbed on the inner wall of the flask.
Activity is obtained by the following equation.

696
 IMCU/g＝or mL 1,000 × Ts × Ds
Tc Dc
1,000 : activity of milk clotting enzyme standard
Ts : clotting time of mixed standard solution (seconds)
Tc : clotting time of test solution
Ds : concentration of mixed standard solution (g/mL)
Dc : concentration of test solution (g/mL)
Agents and Solutions
∘Calf rennet standard (1,000 IMCU, IDF standard) : Should contain not less than 98% of
chymosin and not more than 2% of bovine pepsin.
∘Adult bovine rennet standard (1,000 IMCU, IDF standard) : Should contain not more than
1% of chymosin and no less than 99% of bovine pepsin.
∘Substrate Solution : 110 g of defatted milk, dried at low temperature, is placed in a
2,000 mL beaker, where 100 mL of 0.05% calcium chloride solution
is added and homogenized. 900 mL of 0.05% calcium chloride
solution is added and stirred for 30 minutes (care must be taken to
prevent excessive foaming). The resultant solution is allowed to
stand for 30 minutes in a dark place. When pH is measured, it
should be approximately 6.5 (pH should not be adjusted). This
solution should be used within 4 hours.
∘Mixed Standard Solution : Mixed standard solution is prepared by obtaining a mixture
ratio of calf rennet standard solution and adult bovine rennet
standard solution, and mixing . Mixing ratio of calf rennet
standard solution and adult bovine rennet standard solution is
obtained by applying chymosin content(%) to Fig 1 in
content of chymosin and pepsin in sample.
∘Calf rennet Standard Solution : 2.5 g of calf rennet standard is precisely weighed and
dissolved in 15～20 mL of acetate buffer solution in a
50 mL flask. The total volume is brought up to 50 mL
with acetate buffer solution. 3 mL of this solution is
further diluted to 50 mL with acetate buffer solution.
∘Adult bovine rennet Standard Solution : It is prepared by the same method as calf
rennet standard solution using adult bovine
rennet standard.
∘Acetate buffer solution (pH 5.5) : 10 mL of 1 M acetic acid and 10 g of sodium acetate
(3 hydrate) 10 g are mixed and water is added to
bring the total volume to 1,000 mL. pH of this
solution should be 5.5 and is adjusted if necessary.

697
 Fig. 1 Mixing ratio of calf rennet and adult bovine rennet standards against chymosin
content (%) in the sample for mixed standard solution preparation
Storage Standard of Milk Clotting Enzyme
Milk Clotting Enzyme should be stored in a hermetic container in a cold dark place.

698
 Milt Protein
Definition Milt Protein is obtained by the following procedure. Hexane and alkaline
proteins in testicles of salmon (Oncorhynchus keta WALBAUM) of salmonidae or
skipjack tuna (Katsuwonus pelamis LINNAEUS) of scombridae are decomposed by acid,
which is then neutralized. Its component is alkaline protein (protamine, histone).
Compositional Specifications of Milt Protein
Content If Milt Protein is converted to a dehydrated form, it should contain no less than
50% protamine.
Description Milt Protein is white～pale yellow powder with characteristic taste.
Identification (1) 1 mg of Milt Protein is dissolved in 2 mL of water. 5 drops of a
solution containing 0.1 g of α-naphthol solution in 100 mL diluted ethyl alcohol (7→
10) and 5 drops of sodium hypochlorite solution (4∼6%) are added to this solution.
When this solution is alkalinized with sodium hydroxide solution, it becomes clear
red.
(2) 5 mg of Milt Protein is dissolved in 1 mL of water by heating. When 1 drop of
sodium hydroxide solution (1→10) and 2 drops of copper sulfate solution (1→7) are
added, it becomes reddish violet.
Purity (1) Clarity of Solution ： When 0.5 g of Milt Protein is mixed with 50 mL of
water for 5 minutes, its color is colorless～pale yellow and its turbidity should be
low or better.
(2) Arsenic : It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(3) Lead : When 5.0 g of Milt Protein is tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content
should not be more than 5.0 ppm.
Loss on Drying When Milt Protein is dried for 3 hours at 100℃, the weight loss should
not be more than 7.0%.
Ash When Milt Protein tested by Ash and Acid-Insoluble Ash Limit, the amount of ash
should not be more than 12%.
Assay Approximately 150 mg of Milt Protein is precisely weighted and tested by nitrogen
determination method. The content is calculated by the following equation.
1 mL of 0.1 N sulfuric acid ＝ 1.401 mg N
content of nitrogen(mg) × 3.19
Content ( % ) Weight of the
100 – loss on × 100
＝ drying(%)
sample(g) ×
100

699
 Modified Hop Extract
Definition Fruits of mulberry hop(Humulus lupulus L.) are ground and extracted with
hexane or carbon dioxide. The extract is isomerized, reduced by adding hydrogen or
sodium borohydride, and purified.
Compositional Specifications of Modified Hop Extract
Description Modified Hop Extract is yellow～yellowish green～yellowish brown liquid or
paste. Or it is yellowish brown～reddish brown liquid containing reddish brown～dark
brown paste with characteristic scent.
Identification Modified Hop Extract is dissolved in 0.012 N alkaline solution of methyl
alcohol. The concentration is adjusted so that absorption at 253 nm is 0.6～0.9.
Modified Hop Extract has the maximum absorption band near 253 nm and no absorption
band at 325～330 nm.
∘0.012 N alkaline solution of methyl alcohol : 12 mL of 1 N sodium hydroxide solution
is diluted to with methyl alcohol to 1 L.
Purity (1) Arsenic : It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(2) Lead : When 5.0 g of Modified Hop Extract is tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content
should not be more than 10 ppm.
(3) Boron : 2 g of Modified Hop Extract is transferred into a 500 mL flask for
decomposition. 20 mL of water and 30 mL of nitric acid are added to the flask and
mixed well, which is then heated gently. After cooling, 10 mL of sulfuric acid is
added. By adding 2～3 mL of nitric acid at a time, the solution is heated until the
liquid becomes colorless～pale yellow. This liquid is then cooled and 75 mL of water
and 25 mL of saturated ammonium hydroxide solution are added. It is heated until
white smoke appears. It is cooled and water is added so that the total volume is
brought up to 50 mL (Test Solution). Separately, a blank test carried out following
the same procedure to correct the Test Solution. The content of boron in boron
standard solution, Test Solution, and blank test solution are obtained by ICP method
in Test Method of Harmful Metals in General Test Methods in 「Food Codes」. The
content of boron in Test Solution should not be more than 310 ppm (limited to cases
where Modified Hop Extract is reduced by sodium boron hydride).
(4) Hexane : Modified Hop Extract is tested by Purity (5) for 「Paprika Extract
Pigments」. The content of hexane should not be more than 25 ppm (limited to cases
where hexane is used as extraction solvent).

700
 Monascus Color
Definition Monascus Color is a pigment obtained by extracting the cultures of Monascus
anka(Monascus purpures) with ethyl alcohol. Its major component is Monascorvbirin and
Ankaflavin and so on. Dilutant, stabilizer, or solvent can be added for the purpose of
color value adjustment and quality preservation.
Compositional Specifications of Monascus Color
Content Color value ( ) of Monascus Color should not be more than the indicated
content.
Description Monascus Color is red～dark red liquid, solid, powder or paste with a slight
characteristic scent.
Identification (1) 50 v/v% alcoholic solution of Monascus Color becomes red color and
has a maximum absorption band near 500 nm.
(2) Add 2 mL of ammonia water and 1 mL of acetone to 1 mL of Test Solution
obtained in Color Value section of Monascus Color. When the solution is heated for 1
minute in an approximately 50℃ water bath, it becomes yellowish green.
(3) When 3 mL of nitric acid is added to 0.1 mL of Test Solution obtained in Color
Value section, it becomes yellow and then changes to yellowish green.
Purity (1) Arsenic : It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(2) Lead : When 5.0 g of Monascus Color is tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content
should not be more than 10.0 ppm.
(3) Citrinin : Wash methanol. Pack resin of acrylesters or stylene-divinylbenznes to make
10cm of height in the glass column with 1cm of inside diameter. 1g of Monascus
Color (converted to color value 50) is accurately taken and packed in the upper layer
of glass column. Developing solvent of mixture solution of methanol - water(7:3) in
the column is flowed with speed of 2 -3 mL/min. 20 mL of initial eluted solution is
splitted. Check the absorbed resin to know whether citrinin is splitted in the 20 mL
of initial eluted solution. Filter the solution with membrane filter of no more than 0.5
㎛ pore size. The solution is used for Test Solution. Separately, 10.0 mg of Citrinin
is precisely weighted. Volume up with methanol to make 100 mL. Add 1 mL of this
solution to mixture of methanol-water(7 : 3) to make 100 mL. 10.0 mL, 5.0 mL and
1.0 mL are taken in this solution. These solutions are volumed up to make 100 mL
with mixture solution of methanol-water(7 : 3). 5㎕ of Test Solution and Standard
Solution are taken, respectively. When the solutions are conducted by Liquid
Chromatography according to following operation, the level should not be more than
0.2㎍/g(Color value is converted to 50). Calculate the area of Citrinin in each peak.
Draw standard curve. The level of Citrinin should be applied according to Curve line
which is calculated by the area of tailed peak in order that the area of Citrinin in the
Test Solution influence on tailing of other peaks

701
Operation Condition
Detector and wave length : Fluorescence Detector
(Excitation Wave : 330nm,
Fluoresecence Wave: 500nm)
Column : The column which is packed with octadecylsilyled silicagel
(ODS Column, 5㎛, 4.6 mm × 250mm or its equivalent)
Mobile phase: Acetonitryl : water : Acetate tri-fluorine(TFA) Solution(100 : 100 : 1)
Flow rate : 1㎖/min
Assay (Color Value) Appropriate amount of Monascus Color is precisely weighted to be
measured the absorbance within a range of 0.3～0.7, and dissolve in 50 v/v% alcohol
so that the total volume is 100 mL. Use the Test Solution. If necessary, the solution is
centrifuged and the supernatant is used. Using 50 v/v% alcohol as a reference solution,
absorption A is measured at the maximum absorption near 500 nm in 1cm path length.
Color value is obtained using the following equation.
A × 10
Color Value ( ) ＝ weight of the sample(g)

702
 Monascus Yellow
Definition Monascus Yellow is a pigment obtained by drying, milling, and extracting the
cultures of monascus (Monascus pilosus or Monascus purpureus) with acidic
(hydrochloric acid) ethyl alcohol. Its major component is Xanthomonasins. Dilutant,
stabilizer, or solvent can be added for the purpose of color value adjustment and
quality preservation.
Compositional Specifications of Monascus Yellow
Content Color value( ) of Monascus Yellow should not be less than the indicated value.
Description Monascus Yellow is red～yellowish brown liquid, solid, powder or paste with
a slight characteristic scent.
Identification (1) 50 v/v% alcoholic solution of Monascus Yellow shows yellow color and
fluorescent-green, which has a maximum absorption band near 460 nm.
(2) When an aqueous solution (1→5) of Monascus Yellow is alkalinized with sodium
hydroxide solution(1→25), its color changes to red～reddish brown.
(3) When 1～2 drops of sulfuric acid are added to an aqueous solution (1→5) of
Monascus Yellow, yellow～yellowish brown precipitates are formed.
Purity (1) Arsenic : It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(2) Lead : When 5.0 g of Monascus Yellow is tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content
should not be more than 10.0 ppm.
Assay (Color Value) Appropriate amount of Monascus Yellow is precisely weighted to be
measured the absorbance within a range of 0.3～0.7, and dissolve in 50 v/v% alcohol
so that the total volume is 100 mL. Use the Test Solution. If necessary, the solution is
centrifuged and the supernatant is used. Using 50 v/v% alcohol as a reference solution,
absorption A is measured at the maximum absorption near 460 nm in 1cm path length.
Color value is obtained using the following equation.
A × 10
Color Value ( ) ＝ weight of the sample(g)

703
 Monoammonium L-Glutamate
Monoammonium Glutamate

HOOCCHCH
｜ 2CH2COONH4․H2O
NH2
Chemical Formula: C5H12N2O4‧H2O

Molecular Weight: 182.18 INS No.: 624

Synonyms: Ammonium glutamate;
Monoammonium L-glutamate CAS No.: 7558-63-6
monohydrate

[Content Specifications of Monoammonium L-Glutamate

Content Monoammonium L-Glutamate, when calculated on the dried basis, should contain
not less than 99% of L-ammonium glutamate (C5H12N2O4·H2O).
Description Monoammonium L-Glutamate occurs as colorless to white crystals or white
crystalline powder. It is scentless.
Identification (1) To 1 mL Monoammonium L-Glutamate solution (1→30), add 1 mL of
ninhydrine solution (0.2→100) and 0.1 g sodium acetate. Upon heating for 10 minutes
in a water bath, this solution becomes deep bluish violet.
(2) To 10 mL of Monoammonium L-Glutamate solution (1→10) add 5.6 mL of 1 N
hydrochloric acid, white crystalline precipitates of glutamic acid are formed. The
precipitates are dissolved when 6 mL of 1 N hydrochloric acid is added and stirred.
(3) An aqueous solution (1→10) of Monoammonium L-Glutamate responds to the test
for of Ammonium Salts in Identification.
Purity (1) Specific Rotation : 10 g of Monoammonium L-Glutamate, precisely weighed,
is dissolved in 2 N hydrochloric acid to make 100 mL. Optical rotation of this
solution is measured. When it is converted into a dehydrated form, it should be within a
range of ＝ +25.4∼+26.4°.
(2) Lead : When 5.0 g of Monoammonium L-Glutamate is tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content
should not be more than 1.0 ppm.
(3) Pyrrolidone Carboxylic Acid: Dessolve 0.5 g of L-glutamic acid in 100 mL water as
the Test Solution. Separately, dissolve both 0.5 g of L-glutamic acid and 2.5 mg of
pyrrolidone carboxylic acid in water as reference solution. Drop 2 μL of test solution
and 2 μL of reference solution on Thin Layer Plate of silica gel for thin-layer
chromatography and develop about 10cm by using n-butanol: glacial acetic acid :
water mixture (2:1:1) as developing solvent, and dry for 30 minutes at normal
temperature(15~25℃). Place a 50 mL beaker containing 3 g of sodium hypochlorite
into the development tank, slowly add 1 mL of hydrochloric acid to generate chlorine
gas, close the lid and leave for 30 seconds. Place the dried thin plate in this
704
 developing tank, and close the lid and leave for 20 minutes. Take out the thin plate
and let it stand at normal temperature for 10 minutes and then spray ethanol evenly.
When uniformly sprayed iodine potassium starch solution after drying at room
temperature and then observed spots colored under natural light, the test solution
shall not show spots of pyridoncarboxylic acid in the same position as the contrast
solution.
Potassium iodine starch solution: Weigh 0.5 g of starch, add about 50 mL of water,
and stir with heat until gelled. After cooling, add 0.5 g of potassium iodine and add
water to make 100 mL.
Loss on Drying When Monoammonium L-Glutamate is dried for 4 hours at 50℃, the
weight loss should not be more than 0.5%.
Residue on Ignition When thermogravimetric analysis is done with 1 g of
Monoammonium L-Glutamate, the amount of residue should not be more than 0.1%.
Assay Proceed as directed under Assay in 「L-Sodium Glutamate」.
1 mL of 0.1 N perchloric acid solution ＝ 9.109 mg C5H12N2O4 · H2O

705
 Monopotassium L-Glutamate
Monopotassium Glutamate
HOOCCHCH2CH2COOK․H2O
｜
NH2
Chemical Formula: C5H8KNO4‧H2O

Molecular Weight: 203.24 INS No.: 622

Synonyms: Potassium glutamate CAS No.: 19473-49-5

Compositional Specifications of Monopotassium L-Glutamate

Content Monopotassium L-Glutamate, when calculated on the dried basis, should not
contain less than 99.0% of Monopotassium L-Glutamate (C5H8KNO4 · H2O).
Description Monopotassium L-Glutamate occurs as colorless to white column-shaped
crystals or white crystalline powder having a characteristic taste.
Identification (1) Proceed as directed under Identification (1) in 「L-Monoammonium
Glutamate」.
(2) Proceed as directed under Identification (2) in 「L-Monoammonium Glutamate」.
(3) Monopotassium L-Glutamate solution (1→10) responds to the test for Potassium
Salts in Identification
Purity (1) Specific Rotation : Approximately 10 g of Monopotassium L-Glutamate is
dissolved in 2N hydrochloric acid to make 100 mL. Optical rotation of the solution is
measured. When it is translated to dried material, it should be ＝+22.5∼+24.0°.
(2) Lead : When 5.0 g of Monopotassium L-Glutamate is tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content
should not be more than 1.0 ppm.
(3) pH : pH of Monopotassium L-Glutamate solution (1→50) should be within a range
of 6.7～7.3.
(4) Chloride : When 0.07 g of Monopotassium L-Glutamate is tested by Chloride Limit
Test, the amount should correspond to 0.4 mL of 0.01 N hydrochloric acid.
(5) Pyrrolidone Carboxylic Acid: Dessolve 0.5 g of L-glutamic acid in 100 mL water as
the Test Solution. Separately, dissolve both 0.5 g of L-glutamic acid and 2.5 mg of
pyrrolidone carboxylic acid in water as reference solution. Drop 2 μL of test solution
and 2 μL of reference solution on Thin Layer Plate of silica gel for thin-layer
chromatography and develop about 10cm by using n-butanol: glacial acetic acid :
water mixture (2:1:1) as developing solvent, and dry for 30 minutes at normal
temperature(15~25℃). Place a 50 mL beaker containing 3 g of sodium hypochlorite
into the development tank, slowly add 1 mL of hydrochloric acid to generate chlorine
gas, close the lid and leave for 30 seconds. Place the dried thin plate in this
developing tank, and close the lid and leave for 20 minutes. Take out the thin plate
and let it stand at normal temperature for 10 minutes and then spray ethanol evenly.
706
 When uniformly sprayed iodine potassium starch solution after drying at room
temperature and then observed spots colored under natural light, the test solution
shall not show spots of pyridoncarboxylic acid in the same position as the contrast
solution.
Potassium iodine starch solution: Weigh 0.5 g of starch, add about 50 mL of water,
and stir with heat until gelled. After cooling, add 0.5 g of potassium iodine and add
water to make 100 mL.
Loss on Drying When Monopotassium L-Glutamate is dried for 5 hours at 80℃under
reduced pressure, the weight loss should not be more than 0.2%.
Assay Proceed as directed under Assay in 「L-Sodium Glutamate」.
1 mL of 0.1 N perchloric acid = 10.16 mg of C5H8NKO4ㆍH2O

707
 Monosodium Fumarate

CC HO
Oa N

∥
HO OC
CH
Chemical Formula: C4H3O4Na
INS No.:
Molecular Weight: 138.06
365
CAS No.:
Synonyms: Sodium fumarate; Monosodium trans
1-2-ethylenedicarboxylate 7704-73-
6

Compositional Specifications of Fumarate

Content Monosodium Fumarate when calculated on the dried basis, should contain within
a range of 98.0～102.0% of monosodium fumarate (C4H3O4Na)
Description Monosodium Fumarate occurs as a white crystalline powder. It is odorless
and has a characteristic acid taste.
Identification (1) Proceed as directed under Identification (2) and (3) in Fumaric Acid.
(2) Monosodium Fumarate responds to the test for Sodium Salt in Identification.
Purity (1) Clarity and Color of Solution : Weigh 0.5 g of Monosodium Fumarate, add 10
mL of water, and shake to dissolve while warming at 40℃ for 10 minutes. It should
be colorless and clear.
(2) pH : PH of Monosodium Fumarate solution (1→30) should be within a range of 3.0
∼4.0.
(3) Sulfate : Proceed as directed under Purity (2) in 「Fumaric Acid」.
(4) Arsenic : It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(5) Lead : Monosodium Fumarate is tested by Purity (2) for 「Sodium Metaphosphate」
(not more than 2.0 ppm).
Loss on Drying When Monosodium Fumarate is dried for 4 hours at 120℃, the weight
loss should not be more than 0.5%.
Residue on Ignition Monosodium Fumarate, previously dried, proceed as directed under
thermogravimetric analysis, the residue should be within a range of 50.5～52.5%.
Assay Accurately weigh about 0.3 g of Monosodium Fumarate, previously dried, dissolve
in 30 mL of water, and titrate with 0.1 N sodium hydroxide (indicators : 2 drops of
phenolphthalein solution).
1 mL of 0.1 N sodium hydroxide = 13.81 mg of C4H3O4Na

708
 Monosodium L-Glutamate

Chemical Formula: C5H8NNaO4․H2O

Molecular Weight: 187.13 INS No.: 621

Synonyms: Sodium glutamate CAS No.: 6106-04-3

Compositional Specifications of Monosodium L-Glutamate

Content Monosodium L-Glutamate, when calculated on the dried basis, should contain
not less than 99.0% of monosodium L-glutamate (C5H8NNaO4·H2O).
Description Monosodium L-Glutamate occurs as colorless～white prismatic crystallites or
as white crystalline powder with a characteristic taste.
Identification (1) To 5 mL of Monosodium L-Glutamate solution (1→1,000), add 1 mL of
ninhydrin solution (1→1,000), and heat for 3 minutes. A purple color develops.
(2) Monosodium L-Glutamate responds to the test for Sodium Salt in Identification
Purity (1) Clarity and Color of Solution : When 1 g of Monosodium L-Glutamate is
dissolved in 10 mL of water, the solution should be colorless and clear.
(2) pH : pH of Monosodium L-Glutamate solution (1→10) should be within a range of
6.7～7.2.
(3) Specific Rotation : Dissolve about 10 g of Monosodium L-Glutamate, accurately
weighed, in hydrochloric acid (1→4) and make to 100 mL. When optical rotation of
Monosodium L-Glutamate is measured and converted to a value of a dried form, it should
be ＝ +24.8∼+25.3°.
(4) Chloride : When 0.3 g of Monosodium L-Glutamate is tested by Chloride Limit
Test, its content should not be more than the amount that corresponds to 0.35 mL of
0.01 N hydrochloric acid.
(5) Arsenic : It should be no more than 2.5 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(6) Lead : When 5.0 g of Monosodium L-Glutamate is tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content
should not be more than 1.0 ppm.
(7) Pyrrolidone Carboxylic Acid : Weigh 0.5 g of Monosodium L-Glutamate. Dissolve in
100 mL of water, and use it as a test solution. Separately, weigh 0.5 g of
monosodium L-glutamate and 2.5 g of pyrrolidone carboxylic acid and dissolve in
water, and use these as reference solutions. Drop 2 μL of the test solution and
reference solutions on silica gel thin layer plate and develop about 10 cm by using
n-butanol · glacial acetic acid · water mixture (2:1:1) as developing solvent. Dry thin
layer plate at normal temperature for 30 minutes. Place a 50 mL beaker containing
3g of sodium hypochlorite in the chamber, slowly add 1 mL of hydrochloric acid into
709
 the beaker to generate chlorine gas. Put on the lid and allow to stand for 30 sec to
fill the chamber with chlorine. Place the dried plate in this chamber, put on the liad
and allow to stand for 20 minutes. Take out the plate, keep for 10 minute in air and
spray with ethanol. After drying, spray with potassium iodide-starch solution and
observe the plate under natural light immediately after the standard spot has
appeared. No spot corresponding to pyrrolidone carboxylic acid standard is detected
is detected in the sample.
Potassium iodide-starch solution : Stir and heat 0.5 g of starch in about 50 mL of
water until it gelatinizes. After cooling, add 0.5g of potassium iodide and water to
make up to 100 mL.
Loss on Drying When Monosodium L-Glutamate is dried for 5 hours at 98℃, the weight
loss should not be more than 0.5%.
Assay Dissolve about 0.15 g of Monosodium L-Glutamate, accurately weighed, in 3 mL
of formic acid and add 50 mL of glacial acetic acid, and titrate with 0.1 N perchloric
acid (indicator : 0.5 mL of α-naphthol benzene). The end point is where the solution
changes its color from brown to green. Separately, a blank test is carried out by the
same method.
1 mL of 0.1 N perchloric acid ＝ 9.356 mg C5H8NNaO4·H2O

710
 Morpholine Salts of Fatty Acids
Compositional Specifications of Morpholine Salts of Fatty Acids
Description Morpholine Salts of Fatty Acids occurs as a light yellow to yellow-brown
waxy or oily substance.
Identification (1) To 10 g of Morpholine Salts of Fatty Acids, add 20 mL of hydrochloric
acid (3→5), heat in a water bath for 10 minutes while shaking occasionally, and
allow to cool. Remove separately oily or solid deposited portions. make the rest of
the solution alkaline with sodium hydroxide solution. and perform the fractional
distillation at l02～104℃. To 5 mL of the distillate, add 10 mL of picric acid
saturated benzene, and shake. A yellow precipitate is formed. Recrystallize this
precipitate, using benzene as the solvent. The melting point should be within a range
of l44～147℃.
(2) To 1 g of Morpholine Salts of Fatty Acids, add 2 mL of ethanol, dissolve by
heating, add 5 mL of diluted sulfuric acid, heat in a water bath for 30 minutes, and
cool. Oil drops or white to yellow-white solids are precipitated. Separate the oil
drops or solids, add 5 mL of ether, and shake. The oil drops or solids dissolve.
Purity (1) Arsenic : It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(2) Lead : When 5.0 g of Morpholine Salts of Fatty Acids is tested by Atomic
Absorption Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy,
its content should not be more than 2.0 ppm.
Residue on Ignition When thermogravimetric analysis is done with Morpholine Salts of
Fatty Acids, the residue should not be more than 1%.

711
 Mucin
Definition Mucin is glycoprotein obtained by precipitating (with ethyl alcohol) the water
soluble extracts from pig stomach.
Compositional Specifications of Mucin
Content Mucin (converted to a dried form) contains 73∼90% of Mucin.
Description Mucin is grayish white or pale yellow powder.
Purity (1) Acidity： pH of aqueous solution (2→100) of Mucin should be 3.7∼6.5
(measured with glass electrode).
(2) Arsenic : It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(3) Lead : When 5.0 g of Mucin is tested by Atomic Absorption Spectrophotometry or
Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content should not be more
than 2.0 ppm.
(4) Nitrogen in Mucin ： Extract with 70% alcohol based on Assay, and dry-mill the
residue. The content should be 7～9% under Nitrogen Determination.
Total Nitrogen 250 mg of Mucin is precisely weighted and tested by nitrogen
determination method. The content should not be less than 8.0%.
Ash 2 g of Mucin precisely weighted and tested by Ash and Acid-Insoluble Ash Limit,
the amount of ash should not be more than 6.5%.
Loss on Drying When Mucin is dried for 5 hours at 105℃, the weight loss should not
be more than 6%.
Assay 10 g of Mucin is precisely weighted into a 200 mL Erlenmeyer flask. It is
extracted for 30 minutes with 100 mL of 70% alcohol and only the supernatant is
decanted. This is repeated 5 times. All the extracts are mixed together and the total
volume is brought up to 600 mL. It is then filtered. Transfer 50 mL of the filtrate into
a beaker (previously weighted) and evaporated to dryness in a water bath. It is further
dried for 5 hours at 105℃. The weight of the residue (S) is obtained and the content
of mucin is calculated by the following equation.

Content (%) = Weight ofWeight

sample (g) - S (g) × 600/50 ×
of sample (g) 100

712
 Myristic Acid
Tetradecanoic acid
Chemical Formula: C 14H 28O 2

Molecular Weight: 228.38 INS No.: 570

Synonyms: Tetradecanoic acid CAS No.: 544-63-8

Definition Myristic Acid is a solid fatty acid obtained from coconut oil and other fats. Its
major component is myristic acid (C14H28O2).
Compositional Specifications of Myristic Acid
Description Myristic Acid is white～pale yellow crystalline solid or powder.
Purity (1) Acid Value : When 0.5 g of Myristic Acid is precisely weighted, and
proceeded as directed under Acid value in Fats Test, the Acid value should be 242∼
249.
(2) Solidification point : Solidification point of Myristic Acid should be 48.0∼55.5.
(3) Lead : When 5.0 g of Myristic Acid is tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content
should not be more than 1.0 ppm.
(4) Arsenic : It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(5) Mercury : When Myristic Acid is tested by Mercury Limit Test, its content should
not be more than 1.0ppm.
(6) Iodine Value : Approximately 25 g of Myristic Acid is precisely weighted into a 500
mL Erlenmeyer flask with a stopper which contains 20 mL of 1 : 1 mixture of glacial
acetic acid : cyclohexane and 25 mL of Weiss solution. A stopper is placed on the
flask which is vigorously shaken and set aside for 1 hour in a dark place. 20 mL of
potassium iodide solution and 100 mL of water(previously boiled and cooled) are
added to the flask. The excess iodine is titrated with 0.1 N sodium thiosulfate
solution. 0.1 N sodium thiosulfate solution is added drop wise until yellow color
disappears. Starch solution is added and the titration is continued until the blue color
disappears completely. Near the end point, the flask is vigorously shaken with a
stopper. Separately, a blank test is carried out by the same procedure. Iodine value
is obtained by the following equation and it should not be more than 1.0.

Iodine Value = weight (B-S) × 1.269

of the sample(g)
B : Consumed amount of 0.1 N sodium thiosulfate solution in the blank test (mL)
S : Consumed amount of 0. 1N sodium thiosulfate solution in the test for sample (mL)
(7) Saponification Value : 3 g of Myristic Acid is precisely weighted into a 250 mL
flask. After adding 50 mL of 0.5 N alcoholic solution of potassium hydroxide, a reflux
condenser is attached and quietly saponified for 30 minutes～1 hour. This solution is
used as test solution, tested under Saponification value in Fats Test, boiled (red
713
 color appears again) and titrated again until the red color disappears. Saponification
value should be 242~251.
(8) Unsaponifiable matter : 5 g of Myristic Acid is precisely weighted into a 250 mL
flask, where 2 g of potassium hydroxide and 40 mL of alcohol are added. After
attaching a reflux condenser, gently refluxed for 1 hour. The solution transfer into a
separatory funnel (3.5 cm diameter x 30 cm length with 40 mL, 80 mL, and 130 mL
scale marks) with a stopcock. The flask is washed with sufficient amount of alcohol,
which is added to the funnel (total volume= 40 mL). The flask is washed with warm
and cold water, which is added to the funnel (total volume = 80 mL). Finally, the
flask is washed with a few mL of petroleum ether, which is added to the funnel.
Cool the solution, 50 mL of petroleum ether is added to the funnel. The funnel is
shaken vigorously for 1 minute and then settled to separate two phases completely.
The supernatant ether layer is collected in a 500 mL separatory funnel with a
stopcock. The aqueous layer is again extracted 6 times with 50 mL each of ether.
These extracts are added to the first extract. The combined extracts are washed
with 25 mL of 10% alcohol. This procedure is repeated until the aqueous layer
doesn't get colorized by phenolphthalein TS. When this is accomplished, aqueous
phase is discarded and the ether extract transfer into a pre-weighted beaker. With
10 mL of ether, the funnel is washed, which is added to the beaker. Ether layer is
evaporated to dryness in a water bath, which is then dried at 100℃ for 30 minutes
until the weight becomes constant. Then the residue is cooled in a desiccator and
weighted. The residue dissolve in 50 mL of warm alcohol (neutralized with sodium
hydroxide using phenolphthalein as an indicator). The resulting solution is titrated
with 0.02 N sodium hydroxide solution until a pale red color persists. The amount of
oleic acid is obtained by multiplying the consumed amount of sodium hydroxide
solution with 5.659 (mg). The exact amount of unsaponifiables is obtained by
subtracting the amount of fatty acid (as oleic acid) from the amount of residues. The
content of unsaponifiable matter is calculated by the following equation and it should
be 1%.
Unsaponifiable
matter(%) =
content of residue(mg) - content as oleic acid(mg)
×
100
weight of the sample(g) 1,000

Water Content Water content of Myristic Acid proceed as directed under water
determination (Karl-Fisher Titration) and the content should not be more than 0.2%.
Residue on Ignition When Residue on Ignition analysis is done with accurately weighted
2 g of Myristic Acid, the amount of Residue on Ignition should not be more than 0.1%.

714
 Naringin
Chemical Formula: C28H32O14

Molecular Weight: 580.53 CAS No.: 10236-47-2

Definition Naringin is obtained by purifying the extracts of peels, juices, or seeds of

tangerine (Citrus paradisi MACF.) of rutaceae with water, ethyl alcohol or methyl
alcohol at room temperature. Its component is naringin
Compositional Specifications of Naringin
Content When Naringin is dried, it should contain 90～110% of the Naringin (C28H32O14 =
580.53).
Description Naringin occurs as colorless～pale yellow crystal with strong bitter taste.
Identification (1) 5 mg of Naringin dissolve in 10mL of 50% ethyl alcohol. When 1～2
drops of ferric chloride solution (1→500) are added to this solution, it becomes
brown in color.
(2) When 5mg of Naringin dissolve in 5mL of Sodium hydroxide solution, the solution
shows orange yellow～yellow color.
(3) A solution of 10 mg of Naringin in 500mL of water has a maximum absorption band
in the wavelength range of 280～285nm.
Purity (1) Arsenic: It should be no more than 2.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(2) Lead : When 5.0 g of Naringin is tested by Atomic Absorption Spectrophotometry
or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content should not be more
than 5.0 ppm.
(3) Residual Solvents : When Naringin is tested by Purity (5) for Oleoresin Paprika, the
content of methyl alcohol should not be more than 50 ppm.
Assay After drying for 3 hours at 105℃, approximately 0.2 g of Naringin is precisely
weighted and dissolved in 50% ethyl alcohol (total volume = 100 mL). This solution is
filtered through 0.45 μm filter. 1 mL of this solution is diluted to 100 mL with water
(Test Solution). Using water as a reference, the absorbance is measured at 280 nm and
the content of Naringin is obtained from the following equation.
Content of Naringin
＝
(%) A
×
10,000
× 100
28.0 weight of the sample(mg)

A: Absorbance of the test solution

715
 Natamycin
Pimaricin

Chemical Formula: C33H47NO13

Molecular Weight: 665.73 INS No.: 235

Synonyms: Pimaricin CAS No.: 7681-93-8

Content The content should be more than 95.0% of Natamycin (C33H47NO13, calculated on
the anhydrous basis).
Description Natamycin is white to creamy white, crystalline powder.
Identification (1) On adding 1㎎ of Natamycin, on a spot plate, to 1㎖ of concentrated
hydrochloric acid, a blue colour develops.
(2) A solution of 5㎎ of Natamycin in 0.1% glacial acetic acid in metanol has absorption
maxima at about 290 nm, 303 nm and 318 nm.
Purity (1) Specific Rotation : 1 g of Natamycin(converted to a dehydrated form)
dissolve in 100 mL of glacial acetic acid, measure the specific rotation, it should be
αD20= +250 ～ +295°.
(2) Acidity : pH of suspension (1→100) should be 5.0∼7.5. (measured by glass
electrode).
(3) Lead : When 5.0 g of Natamycin is tested by Atomic Absorption Spectrophotometry
or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content should not be more
than 2.0 ppm.
(4) Arsenic : It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(5) Mercury : When Natamycin is tested by Mercury Limit Test, its content should not
be more than 1.0ppm.
(6) Total viable aerobic count : When Natamycin is tested by Microbiological Methods
for Total viable aerobic count in General Test Method in 「Standards and
Specifications for Foods」, it should not be more than 100 per 1 g
Water Content Water content of accurately weighted 0.03 g of Natamycin is determined
by direct titration method in water determination (Karl-Fisher Method) and should not
be more than 9.0%.
Residue on Ignition When Residue on Ignition analysis is done with accurately weighted
2 g of Natamycin, Residue on Ignition should not be more than 0.5%.
Assay Transfer about 0.02 g of Natamycin Reference and the sample, accurately
weighted, to a 100-mL volumetric flask. Add 5.0 mL of tetrahydrofuran, and sonicate
716
 for 10 min. Add 60 mL of methanol, and swirl to dissolve. Add 25 mL of water, and
mix. Allow to cool to room temperature. Dilute with water to volume, mix, and filter
through a membrane filter of 5-㎛ or finer porosity. Separately inject about 20 ㎕for
each of the "standard" and "the sample" into the chromatograph, and record the peak
areas of the major peaks. Calculate the content of Natamycin following equation with
obtained height or area of peak. Preparation is done with using a light resistant
container to block out direct sunlight.
Content of Natamycin(C33H47NO13) (%) =
Weight of Natamycin reference Peak area of the sample
standard
(g) converted into an anhydride solution
× × 100
Weight of the sample converted into Peak area of reference
an anhydride (g) standard solution
Operation Condition
Detector : UV 303nm
Column packing materials : 5～10 um octadecylsilanized silica for liquid
chromatography
Column : stainless steel tube 4∼6 mm × 25 cm
Column temperature : room temperature
Mobile Phase : Dissolve 3.0 g of ammonium acetate and 1.0 g of ammonium
chloride in 760 mL of water, and mix, and filter through a 0.5-㎛ or finer porosity
filter.
Flow rate : 2mL/min
Storage Standard of Natamycin
Natamycin should be stored in a light resistant container in a cold place.

717
 Neotame

Chemical Formula: C20H30N2O5

Molecular Weight: 378.47 INS No.: 961

Synonyms: Methyl N-(3,3-dimethylbutyl)-L-α
CAS No.: 165450-17-9
-aspartyl- L-phenylalanine

Compositional Specifications of Neotame

Content Neotame should contain 97.0-102.0% of Neotame(C20H30N2O5) on the anhydrous
basis.
Description Neotame occurs as white to off-white powder.
Identification (1) Neotame is sparingly soluble in water, very soluble in ethanol.
(2) The infrared absorption spectrum of neotame is obtained using Infrared
Spectrophotometry (1) Potassium Bromide Disk Method. The spectrum should
correspond to the standard infrared spectrum as below.

Purity (1) pH : The pH of a solution of neotame (1→200) should be within a range of

5.0～7.0 when measured with glass electrode.
(2) Melting range : The melting range of neotame should be within a range of 81～84℃.
(3) Optical specific rotation : Weight 0.25g of neotame and add water and dissolve it to
make 50mL. Optical rotation of this solution is measured and it should be ＝ -40.0 ∼
-43.3° calculated on the anhydrous basis.
(4) Lead : When 5.0 g of neotame is tested by Atomic Absorption Spectrophotometry
or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content should not be more
than 1.0 ppm.
(5) Arsenic : It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
718
 (6) N-[N-(3,3-Dimethylbutyl)-α-aspartyl]-L-phenylalanine : Use the test solution
in Assay as the test solution. Accurately weight 0.03g of N-[N-(3,3-Dimethylbutyl)-α
-aspartyl]-L-phenylalanine(measure content of water in advance), dissolve it in
mobile phase solution to make 50mL. Take 10mL of this solution and dissolve it in
mobile phase to make 100mL(Standard stock solution). Take 2, 10, 25, 50mL of the
standard stock solution and add respectively mobile phase solution to make
100mL(Standard solution). Separately, Analyze 25μl portions of the test solution,
standard solution, and standard stock solution by liquid chromatography using the
operating conditions(The retention time of N-[N-(3,3-Dimethylbutyl)-α
-aspartyl]-L-phenylalanine is about 4 minutes). Calculate the content by the formula.
The content should be not more than 1.5% :
Content of N-[N-(3,3-Dimethylbutyl)-α = W
-aspartyl] -L-phenylalanine(%) Weight of the sample on the × 100
anhydrous basis(g)
W: Content of N-[N-(3,3-Dimethylbutyl)-α-aspartyl]-L-phenylalanine in test solution
calculated from calibration curve(g)
(7) Other related substances : Analyze the test solution in Assay by liquid
chromatography using the operating conditions(Analytical time is 1.5 times higher than
the retention time of neotame). Calculate the content by the formula. The content of
other related substances should be 2.0%:
Content of other related A
substances(%) = × 100
A+B
A: The sum of the peak areas of other than the test solution of neotame,
N-[N-(3,3-Dimethylbutyl)-α-aspartyl]-L-phenylalanine and solvent
B: The sum of the peak areas of the test solution of neotame and
N-[N-(3,3-Dimethylbutyl)-α-aspartyl]-L-phenylalanine
Water content Accurately weight about 0.25g of neotame and analyze it by direct titration
of Water Determination(Karl Fischer Method). The content should be not more than
5.0%.
Loss on Ignition Precisely weight 0.2g of neotame and dissolve it in mobile phase
solution to make 100mL(the test solution). Separately, weight accurately about 0.1g of
neotame standard(measure content of water in advance), dissolve it in mobile phase
solution to make 100mL(Standard solution). Analyze the test solution and standard
solution by liquid chromatography using the operating conditions. Calculate the content
by the formula:
Content
Neotame(%) of = Weight on theof anhydrous
the neotamebasis(g)
standard × AT × 100
719
 Weight of the sample AS
on the anhydrous basis(g)
AT : Peak area of neotame in the test solution
AS : Peak area of neotame in the standard solution
Operation Conditions
-Detector : Visible Absorption Detector (wave length 210 nm)
-Column : C18(4.6mm×100mm, 3∼5μL) or its equivalent
-Column Temperature : 45℃
-Injection: 25μL
-Mobile Phase : Dissolve 3.0 of sodium 1-heptanesulfonate in 740mL of water and
add 3.8mL of triethylamine. Adjust the resulting solution with phosphoric acid to a
pH of 3.5, and dilute with water to 750mL. Add 250mL of acetonitrile, adjust with
phosphoric acid to an apparent pH of 3.7.
-Flow Rate : 1.5 mL/min(adjust the flow rate so that the retention time of neotame is
about 12 minutes after injection)

Nickel

Chemical Formula: Ni

Molecular Weight: 58.69

Synonyms: Nickel catalysts CAS No.: 7440-02-0

720
Definition As Nickel catalysts, it is obtained by activation with hydrogen and heat
treatment. However, silica, processed fats and oils and etc. are able to be added for
the quality preservation and etc.
Compositional Specifications of Nickel
Content It should contain 10.0～30.0% of Nickel(Ni).
Description Nickel occurs as a dark gray powder, flake, or small drop shape.
Identification Add a few drops of boromine solution to 5 mL of a test solution which is
obtained by the assay method of this additive, and add ammonium hydroxide to make
it weakly alkaline. Then as adding 2∼3 mL of dimethyl glycol solution, the color of
the test solution indicates a deep red color and forms sediments.
Assay Weigh 2 g of this additive precisely and put it into 100 mL porcelain crucible
which is half-filled with a quantitative filter paper pulp. Heat it slowly to 650℃ so
that the fats and oils on the surface to easily absorbed by the filter paper pulp. Then
burn it gradually and heat it for 2 hours at 650℃ then incinerate. After cooling down,
add 20 mL of hydrochloric acid. After moving it to the 400 mL beaker, evaporate to
dryness in bath. After cooling down again, add 20 mL of hydrochloric acid and warm
it to dissolve well. After moving it to 500 mL massflask, calibrate and mix it. stay it
for a while until insoluble matters settle down. Take 50 mL of upper side solution and
add water to make 250 mL(If there is residue in the beaker, filter with the
medium-speed filter paper). After adding 2 g of trtaric acid, heat it at 80℃ and add
30 mL of dimethyl glyoxime solution. Add ammonium hydroxide until the test solution
become weakly alkaline, and stay it for a 20 minutes in the bath. Filter the sediment
by the glass filter, wash it with hot water until the cleaning fluid of the sediment
show no chloride reaction. Dry the sediment at 120℃ for 2 hours and then measure
its weight bydrying it in the desiccator unil it reaches the mass, and calculate the
percetage of nickel content according to the follwing formula.

Nickel content(%) =
10 × (amount of sediment(g) × 20.32)

Amount of samples taken(g)

20.32 : % of Nickel in sediment
Storage Standards of Nickel
Store in a sealed container in a dry and cool place.

721
 Nicotinamide
Niacinamide

Chemical Formula: C6H6N2O

Molecular Weight: 122.13

Synonyms: Niacinamide CAS No.: 98-92-0

Compositional Specifications of Nicotinamide

Content Nicotinamide, when calculated on the dried basis, should contain within a range
of 98.5～101.0% of nicotinamide (C6H6N2O).
Description Nicotinamide occurs as a white crystalline powder. it is odorless and has a
bitter taste.
Identification (1) A solution of Nicotinamide (1→10) is neutral.
(2) When 10 mg of Nicotinamide is burned on a platinum plate, an odor of pyridine is
generated.
(3) When add 5 mL of sodium hydroxide solution to 20 mL of Nicotinamide and gently
boil, an odor of ammonia is evolved.
Purity (1) Melting Point : Melting point of Nicotinamide should be within a range of 12
8～131℃.
(2) pH : Weight 1 g of Nicotinamide, dissolved in 20 mL water. pH of this solution
should be within a range of 6.0～7.5.
(3) Lead : When 5.0 g of Nicotinamide is tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content
should not be more than 2.0 ppm.
(4) Readily Carbonizable Substances : 0.2 g of Nicotinamide is tested by Readily
Carbonized Substances. The color of the solution should not be deeper than that of a
color standard A.
Loss on Drying When Nicotinamide is dried for 4 hours in a vacuum desiccator (silica
gel), the content of loss should not be more than 0.5%.
Residue on Ignition When thermogravimetric analysis is done with Nicotinamide, the
amount of residue should not be more than 0.1%.
Assay Accurately weigh about 0.2 g of Nicotinamide, and dissolve in 30 mL of glacial
acetic acid (for non-aqueous titration) by heating, if necessary. After cooling, add 100
mL of benzene, which is titrated with 0.1 N perchloric acid (indicator : 2 drops of
crystal violet-acetic acid solution). The end point is where the violet color of the
solution changes to blue and then green. Separately, a blank test is carried out by the
722
same procedure.
1 mL of 0.1 N perchloric acid = 12.21 mg of C6H6N2O

723
 Nicotinic Acid
Niacin

Chemical Formula: C6H 5O 2N

Molecular Weight: 123.11

Synonyms: Niacin CAS No.: 59-67-6

Compositional Specifications of Nicotinic Acid

Content Nicotinic Acid, when calculated on the dried basis, should contain within a range
of 99.5～101.0% of nicotinic acid (C6H5O2N).
Description Nicotinic Acid occurs as white crystals or crystalline powder. It is odorless
and has a slightly acid taste.
Identification (1) 10 mg of mixture of Nicotinic Acid:2,4-dinitrochlorobenzene(1:2) transfer
into a test tube, heat to melt the content for a few seconds, and cool. When 3 mL of
alcoholic potassium hydroxide is added, it turns red～reddish purple
(2) 50 mg of Nicotinic Acid is dissolved in 20 mL of water, which is neutralized with
0.1 N sodium hydroxide solution. When 3 mL of cupric sulfate solution is added, a
blue precipitate is gradually formed.
Purity (1) Melting Point : Melting point of Nicotinic Acid should be within a range of 23
4～238℃.
(2) Chloride : When 0.5 g of Nicotinic Acid is tested by Chloride Limit Test, its
content should not be more than the amount that corresponds to 0.3 mL of 0.01 N
hydrochloric acid.
(3) Sulfate : When 0.5 g of Nicotinic Acid is tested by Sulfate Limit Test, its content
should not be more than the amount that corresponds to 0.2 mL of 0.01 N sulfuric
acid.
(4) Lead : When 5.0 g of Nicotinic Acid is tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content
should not be more than 2.0 ppm.
Loss on Drying When Nicotinic Acid is dried for 1 hour at 105℃, the weight loss should
not be more than 1%.
Residue on Ignition When thermogravimetric analysis is done, the amount of residue
should not be more than 0.1%.
Assay Accurately weigh about 0.3 g of Nicotinic Acid, dissolve in 50 mL of water, and
titrate with 0.1 N sodium hydroxide (indicator : 5 drops of phenolphthalein solution).
724
1 mL of 0.1 N sodium hydroxide= 12.31 mg of C6H5O2N

725
 Nisin
Dha Ala Leu
Ile Leu Gly Met
S
H Ile Dhb Ala Ala Abu Ala Lys Abu Gly
(D) S
Pro Gly S Ala

Asn

Met
S
His Ala Abu Lys
HO Lys Dha Val His Ile Ser Ala Abu Ala
(D) S

Abu = alpha-aminobutylic acid

Dha = dehydroalanine
Dhb = dehydrobutyrine
Molecular Weight 3354.12
Chemical Formula: C143H230N42O37S7

Molecular Weight: 3354.12 INS No.: 234

Synonyms: Nicin preparation CAS No.: 1414-45-5

Definition Nisin is a mixture of polypeptide produced by Lactococcus lactis

(Streptocossuc lactis), Lancefield group N and sodium chloride.
Compositional Specifications of Nisin
Content Nisin contains no less than 900 IU/mg of nisin (C143H230N42O37S7).
Description Nisin occurs as a white, micronized powder.
Identification (1) Stability to acid : Suspend 100mg of Nisin in 0.02N hydrochloric acid
as described in the preparation of the Nisin standard solutions under the Assay. After
boiling this solution for 5 min, determine the Nisin concentration using test method
under the Assay. No significant loss of activity is noted following this heat treatment.
The Nisin concentration of the boiled Nisin is 100±5%. After adjusting the pH of the
Nisin solution to 11 by adding 5N sodium hydroxide, heat the solution at 65℃ for 30
min, and then cool. After adjusting the pH to 2.0 by adding hydrochloric acid,
determine the Nisin concentration using Assay. Confirm complete loss of antimicrobial
activity of Nisin following this treatment.
(2) Tolerance of Lactococcus lactis to high concentrations of Nisin: Prepare cultures of
Lactococcus lactis (ATCC 11454, NCIMB 8586) in sterile skim milk by incubating for
18 hr at 30℃. Prepare one or more flasks containing 100 mL of litmus milk, and
sterilize at 121℃ for 15 min. Suspend 0.1 g of sample in the sterilized litmus milk,
and allow to stand at room temperature for 2 hr. Add 0.1 mL of the L. lactis culture,
and incubate at 30℃ for 24 hr. L. lactis will grow in this concentration of sample
(about 1000 IU/mL).
726
Purity (1) Lead : When 5.0 g of Nisin is tested by Atomic Absorption Spectrophotometry
or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content should not be more
than 1.0 ppm.
(2) Arsenic : It should be no more than 1.3 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(3) Mercury : When Nisin is tested by Mercury Limit Test, its content should not be
more than 1.0 ppm.
(4) Total viable aerobic count : When Nisin is tested by Microbiological Methods for
Total viable aerobic count in General Testing Methods in 「Standards and
Specifications for Foods」, it should not be more than 10 CFU/g.
(5) E. coli: When Nisin is tested by Microbiological Methods for E. coli in General
Testing Methods in 「Standards and Specifications for Foods」, it should be negative
in 25 g.
(6) Salmonella : When Nisin is tested by Microbiological Methods for Salmonella in
General Testing Methods in 「Standards and Specifications for Foods」, it should be
negative in 25 g.
(7) Coliform Group ： Taurine is tested by Microbiological Methods for Coliform Group
in General Testing Methods in 「Standards and Specifications for Foods」. It should
be contain not more than 30 per 1 g of this product.
Sodium Chloride Approximately 20mg of Nisin, precisely weighted, dissolve in 50 mL of
water contained in a glass-stoppered flask. Add, while agitating, 3 mL of nitric acid, 5
mL of nitrobenzene, 50 mL of 0.1N silver nitrate, and 2 mL of ferric ammonium
sulfate. Shake well, and titrate the excess silver nitrate with 0.2N ammonium
thiocyanate. The titration endpoint is indicated by the appearance of a red color.
Perform a blank test using water, and calculate the content of sodium chloride in the
sample by the formula. The content of sodium chloride should not be less than 50.0%.
The content of sodium chloride (%)= (2×5.844)(A-B)/S×100
A : The volume of 0.2N ammonium thiocyanate consumed by the blank test(mL)
B : The volume of 0.2N ammonium thiocyanate consumed by the sample test (mL)
S : Weight of sample (mg)
Assay
Medium : Dissolve 10 g of Bacteriological Peptone, 3 g of Beef Extract, 3 g of Sodium
Chloride, 1.5 g of Autolyzed Yeast (Yeast Extract), 1 g of Brown Sugar, and 15 g of
Agar in distilled water to a final volume of 1000 mL. Sterilize in an autoclave at 121℃
for 15 min. The medium can be stored in a covered container at room temperature
until use. At the time of use, melt the medium, and cool to approximately 50℃. Add
2% of a 1:1 mixture of Tween 20 (polyoxyethylene sorbitan monolaurate) and distilled
water, previously held for 20∼30 min at 48℃.
Assay Organism: Maintain Micrococcus luteus (ATCC 10240, NCIMB 8166) by
subculturing on agar slants of the medium and incubating at 30℃ for 48 hours.
727
 Prepared slants may be stored for a maximum of 14 days at 4℃ until required. When
required for use, the growth on the slant cultures is suspended in 7 mL of sterilized
normal saline solution.
Nisin Standard Stock Solution: Suspend 100 mg of Nisin Standard (1,000 IU/mg),
precisely weighted, in 80 mL of 0.02N hydrochloric acid. Set aside at room
temperature for 2 hr. Dilute the suspension to a final volume of 100 mL with 0.02N
hydrochloric acid (1,000 IU/mL). The standard stock solution can be stored for up to 7
days at 4℃.
Nisin Standard Solution: Weigh 0.5, 1.0, 2.5, 5.0 and 10.0 mL of Standard Stock
Solution accurately into separate 1000 mL volumetric flasks. Dilute each flask to
volume with 0.02N hydrochloric acid to make 1000 mL. (0.5, 1.0, 2.5, 5.0, 10.0 IU/mL).
Each standard solution is prepared freshly on the day of use.
Preparation of the Standard Curve: Dilute the suspension of the assay organism to 1:10
using normal saline solution, and then mix thoroughly. Add 2 mL of this solution to
each 100 mL of melted medium held at 48℃. Pour the inoculated medium to a depth of
3∼4 mm (approximately 15 mL) into five Petri dishes, and allow to solidify. Invert the
plates, and store at 4℃ for 1 hr. Bore four 8∼9 mm (in diameter) holes on 30 mm
centers in each plate of the agar medium. Besides, absorbing disc can be used.
Transfer 0.2 mL each of Nisin standard solutions of 0.5, 1.0, 2.5, 5.0, and 10.0 IU/mL
into the holes, one concentration to a plate. Cover the plates, and incubate them
overnight at 30℃. Measure the zones of inhibition to the nearest 0.1 mm by means of
calipers or other appropriate devices. Plot the Nisin concentration against the zone
diameters, and draw the best straight line through the plotted points.
Procedure: Suspend 100 mg of sample in 80 mL of 0.02N hydrochloric acid in a 100
mL volumetric flask, and set aside at room temperature for 2 hr. Dilute the solution to
volume by adding 0.02N hydrochloric acid. Dilute to a 1:200 solution with 0.02N
hydrochloric acid. Proceed as described above for the standard curve, transferring in
quadruplicate a measured volume of this solution(0.2mL) into the holes of four agar
discs. Cover the plates, and incubate them overnight at 30℃. After incubation, measure
the zones of inhibition. From the standard curve, determine the Nisin concentrations,
and average the results.
Loss on Drying When 2 g of Nisin is dried for 2 hr at 105℃, the weight loss should
not be more than 3.0%.
Storage Standards of Nisin
Nisin should be stored in well-closed containers at temperatures not exceeding 22℃

728
 Nitrogen
Chemical Formula: N2 INS No.: 941
Molecular Weight: 28.00 CAS No.: 7727-37-9

Composition Specifications of Nitrogen

Content Nitrogen should not contain less than 99.0% of nitrogen.
Description Nitrogen is a colorless, odorless gas or liquid.
Identification The flame of burning wood splinter is extinguished in an atmosphere of
nitrogen.
Purity (1) Oxygen : The oxygen detector whose scale is in the range of 0～100 μ/L and
which is attached with electrochemical cell is used. The oxygen in a sample
generates electronic signals in the detector, proportional to the oxygen content. With
an appropriate pressure adjustor, a metal pipe that does not pass air through, and a
prescribed flow speed, the detector is controlled according to the instruction of the
manufacturer to pass the gas through until a fixed value is measured. When nitrogen
passes the cell containing potassium hydroxide, the content of oxygen should not be
more than 1%(v/v).
(2) Carbon Monoxide : Both ends of the carbon monoxide detection pipe, and one end
is connected to the container of Nitrogen and the other end to an appropriate flow
meter. When about 1050 ± 50 mL of Nitrogen is passed through the detection pipe
in a proper flow speed, the amount should not be more than 10 μl/L.
Assay Gas chromatography is performed with the following operating conditions. The
amount of the control gas (a) injected and the operation conditions are controlled so
that the height of the nitrogen peak in the chromatogram obtained by injecting the
control gas is 35% of the recorder of full scale. Also, the oxygen and nitrogen peaks
should be distinctively separated in the chromatogram. The peak area obtained in the
chromatogram of the sample gas should not be less than 99.0% of the peak area of the
control gas (b), by injecting the control gas (b) and the sample gas that is to be
tested.
Operation Condition
-Column : Stainless Steel 2 mm × 2 m
-Packing material : Adsorption materials that can distinguish molecules of diameters 0.5
㎛ or less or those whose separation power is equivalent to them
-Carrier Gas : Helium 99.995% (v/v)
-Flow Speed : 40 mL/min
-Detector : Thermal Conductivity Detector
-Injector : Loop injector
-Column Temperature : 50℃
-Detector Temperature : 130℃
-Control Gas (a) : air
729
-Control Gas (b) : Nitrogen N2 99.999% (v/v) or more, CO 1ppm or less, O2 5ppm or
less

730
 Nitrous Oxide
Nitrogen Oxide
Dinitrogen Monoxide
Chemical Formula: N2O

Molecular Weight: 44.01 INS No.: 942

Synonyms: Nitrogen oxide; Dinitrogen CAS No.: 10024-97-2
monooxide
Compositional Specifications of Nitrous Oxide
Content Nitrous Oxide should be contain not less than 97.0% of Nitrous Oxide.
Description Nitrous Oxide is colorless, tasteless, and scentless gas.
Identification Upon contact with extinguished piece of wood, it creates a violent flame.
Purity Weigh of sample should be converted into a volume at 20℃ and 760 mmHg.
(1) Carbon Monoxide : When 1050 ± 50 mL of Nitrous Oxide is passed through a CO
detection tube at a specified flow rate, the change in the tube should be nor more
than 10 ppm per volume.
(2) Nitrogen Oxide : When 550 ± 50 mL of Nitrous Oxide is passed through a NO-NO2
detection tube at a specified flow rate, the change in the tube should not be more
than 1 ppm per volume.
(3) Nitrogen Dioxide : While preventing frosts formation on the tube to ensure
complete vaporization, 550 ± 50 mL of Nitrous Oxide is passed through a NO-NO2
detection tube at a specified flow rate. The change in the tube should not be more
than 1 ppm per volume.
(4) Halogen : When 1050 ± 50 mL of Nitrous Oxide is passed through a Cl detection
tube at a specified flow rate, the change in the tube should not be more than 1 ppm
per volume.
(5) Arsenic and Phosphorus : Using a porous gas distributing head(pore size 60～100μm)
with a glass tube (packed with cotton, which is wetted with lead acetate solution)
10L of Nitrous Oxide is bubbled through 5 mL of a mixed solution of
diethylthiocarbamate silver quinoline solution at the rate of 1.0L per minute. The
color of the solution should not be change.
∘Diethylthiocarbamate silver quinoline solution : 50 mg of finely powdered silver
nitrate is dissolved in 100 mL of quinoline, where 0.2 g of diethylthiocarbamate
is added. This solution is prepared just before use.
Assay Nitrous Oxide is drawn into a syringe from a polyvinyl chloride tubes from a gas
with drawing valve. It is then injected into a gas chromatography and tested. By
comparing with air-helium gas standard, the amount of air reduced from 100, which is
obtained as volume should not be less than 97.0%.
Operation Condition
- Column : a glass or stainless tube with inner diameter of 4 mm and length 6 m
- Column Filler : porous glass which can separate nitrogen and oxygen from NO or
its equivalent
731
- Detector : thermal conductivity detector (TCD)
- Carrier gas : helium

732
 γ -Nonalactone

Chemical Formula: C9H16O2

Molecular Weight: 156.23

Synonyms: Nonano-1,4-lactone; CAS No.: 104-61-0
Gamma-Amyl butyrolactone

Compositional Specifications of γ-Nonalactone

Content γ-Nonalactone should contain not less than 98.0% of γ-nonalactone (C9H16O2).
Description γ-Nonalactone is a colorless to light yellow, transparent liquid having a
sweet coconut-like odor.
Identification To 1 mL of γ-Nonalactone, add 7 mL of sodium hydroxide solution. and
shaking and heating in water bath, γ-nonalactone almost dissolves, and its
characteristic odor disappears. When the solution is acidified with dilute sulfuric acid,
and shaking and heating in water bath, fat is separated and a characteristic odor is
generated.
Purity (1) Specific Gravity : Specific gravity of γ-Nonalactone should be within a range
of 0.958～0.966
(2) Refractive Index : Refractive Index of γ-Nonalactone should be within a range of
1.446～1.450
(3) Clarity and Color of Solution : When 1 mL of γ-Nonalactone is dissolved in 5 mL
of 60% ethanol, the solution should be clear.
(4) Acid Value : Acid value of γ-Nonalactone is tested by Acid Value in Flavoring
Substance Test. It should not be more than 2.
Assay Accurately weigh about 1 g of γ-Nonalactone, and test by Ester Value in
Flavoring Substances Test.
1 mL of 0.5 N alcoholic potassium hydroxide = 78.11 mg of C9H16O2

733
 Octyl Aldehyde
n-Octanal

Chemical Formula: C8H16O

Molecular Weight: 128.22

Synonyms: n-Octanal; Caprylic aldehyde CAS No.: 124-13-0

Compositional Specifications of Octyl Aldehyde

Content Octyl Aldehyde should contain not less than 92.0% of octyl aldehyde (C8H16O).
Description Octyl Aldehyde is a colorless or slightly yellowish, transparent liquid having
a characteristic odor.
Identification (1) To 1 mL of Octyl Aldehyde, add 4 mL of sodium hydrogen sulfite
solution, and shake. The solution evolves heat immediately, and crystalline lumps are
formed.
(2) To 1 mL of Octyl Aldehyde, add 1 g of hydroxylamine hydrochloride, 5 mL of
ethanol, and 5 mL of pyridine. Equip with a reflux condenser, and heat for 30
minutes in a water bath while shaking occasionally, evaporate the solvent, and cool.
Crystals are deposited. Add 10 mL of water, shake, collect the crystals by filtration,
and recrystallize, using 60% alcohol. The melting point is approximately 60℃
Purity (1) Specific Gravity : Specific gravity of Octyl Aldehyde should be within a range
of 0.810～0.830.
(2) Refractive Index : Refractive Index of Octyl Aldehyde should be within a range of
1.417～1.425.
(3) Clarity and Color of Solution : When 1 mL of Octyl Aldehyde is dissolved in 3 mL
of 70% alcohol, the solution be clear.
(4) Acid Value : Acid value of Octyl Aldehyde is tested by Acid Value in Flavoring
Substance Test. It should not be more than 10.
Assay Accurately weigh about 1 g of Octyl Aldehyde, and proceed as directed under
Method 1 in Aldehyde and Ketone Content in Flavoring Substances Tests. In this
procedure, allow the mixture to stand for 15 minutes.
1 mL of 0.5 N alcoholic solution of potassium hydroxide = 64.11 mg of C8H16O

734
 Oleic Acid
(z)-9-Ocatadecanoic acid
Chemical Formula: C 18H 34O 2

Molecular Weight: 282.47 INS No.: 570

Synonyms: (Z)-9-Octadecenoic acid CAS No.: 112-80-1

Definition Oleic Acid is a unsaturated fatty acid obtained from fats. Its major component
is oleic acid (C18H34O2).
Compositional Specifications of Oleic Acid
Description Oleic Acid is colorless～pale yellow oily liquid.
Purity (1) Acid Value : When 0.5 g of Oleic Acid is precisely weighted, and proceeded
as directed under Acid value in Fats Test, the Acid value should be 196∼204.
(2) Solidification point : Solidification point of Oleic Acid should not be more than 10℃.
(3) Lead : When 5.0 g of Oleic Acid is tested by Atomic Absorption Spectrophotometry
or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content should not be more
than 1.0 ppm.
(4) Arsenic : It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(5) Mercury : When Oleic Acid is tested by Mercury Limit Test, its content should not
be more than 1.0ppm.
(6) Iodine Value : Approximately 0.3 g of Oleic Acid is precisely weighted into a 500
mL Erlenmeyer flask with a stopper which contains 20 mL of 1 : 1 mixture of glacial
acetic acid : cyclohexane and 25 mL of Weiss solution. A stopper is placed on the
flask which is vigorously shaken and set aside for 1 hour in a dark place. 20 mL of
potassium iodide solution and 100 mL of water(previously boiled and cooled) are
added to the flask. The excess iodine is titrated with 0.1 N sodium thiosulfate
solution. 0.1 N sodium thiosulfate solution is added drop wise until yellow color
disappears. Starch solution is added and the titration is continued until the blue color
disappears completely. Near the end point, the flask is vigorously shaken with a
stopper. Separately, a blank test is carried out by the same procedure. Iodine value
is obtained by the following equation and it should be 83～103.

Iodine Value= (B-S) × 1.269

weight of the sample(g)

B : Consumed amount of 0.1 N sodium thiosulfate solution in the blank test (mL)
S : Consumed amount of 0.1 N sodium thiosulfate solution in the test for sample (mL)
(7) Saponification Value : 3 g of Oleic Acid is precisely weighted into a 250 mL flask,
735
 where 50 mL of 0.5 N alcoholic solution of potassium hydroxide is added. After
attaching a reflux condenser, the solution is saponified for 30～60 minutes. This
solution is used as test solution, tested under Saponification value in Fats Test,
boiled (red color appears again) and titrated again until the red color disappears.
Saponification value should be 196~206.
(8) Unsaponifiable matter : 5 g of Oleic Acid is precisely weighted into a 250 mL flask,
where 2 g of potassium hydroxide and 40 mL of alcohol are added and gently
refluxed for 1 hour with a reflux condenser. The solution transfer into a separatory
funnel (3.5 cm diameter × 30 cm length with 40 mL, 80 mL, and 130 mL scale
marks) with a stopcock. The flask is washed with sufficient amount of alcohol, which
is added to the funnel (total volume = 40 mL). The flask is washed with warm and
cold water, which is added to the funnel (total volume = 80 mL). Finally, the flask is
washed with a few mL of petroleumether, which is added to the funnel. Cool the
solution, 50 mL of petroleum ether is added to the funnel. The funnel is shaken
vigorously for 1 minute and then settled to separate two phases completely. The
supernatant ether layer is collected in a 500 mL separatory funnel with a stopcock.
The aqueous layer is again extracted 6 times with 50 mL each of ether. These
extracts are added to the first extract. The combined extracts are washed with 25
mL of 10% alcohol. This procedure is repeated until the aqueous layer doesn't get
colorized by phenolphthalein TS. When this is accomplished, aqueous phase is
discarded and the ether extract transfer into a pre-weighted beaker. With 10 mL of
ether, the funnel is washed, which is added to the beaker. Ether layer is evaporated
to dryness in a water bath, which is then dried at 100℃ for 30 minutes until the
weight becomes constant. Then the residue is cooled in a desiccator and weighted.
The residue dissolve in 50 mL of warm alcohol (neutralized with sodium hydroxide
using phenolphthalein as an indicator). The resulting solution is titrated with 0.02 N
sodium hydroxide solution until a pale red color persists. The amount of oleic acid is
obtained by multiplying the consumed amount of sodium hydroxide solution with
5.659 (mg). The exact amount of unsaponifiables is obtained by subtracting the
amount of fatty acid (as oleic acid) from the amount of residues. The content of
unsaponifiable matter is calculated by the following equation and it should not be
more than 2.0%.
Unsaponifiable
matter(%) =
content of residue(mg) - content as oleic acid(mg)
×
100
weight of the sample(g) 1,000

Water Content Water content of Oleic Acid proceed as directed under water
determination (Karl-Fisher Titration) and should not be more than 0.2%..
Residue on Ignition When Residue on Ignition analysis is done with accurately weighted
10 g of Oleic Acid, the amount of residue on Ignition should not be more than 0.01%.

736
 Oleoresin Paprika
INS No.: 160c
Synonyms: Paprika oleoresin; Paprika extract CAS No.: 68917-78-2

Definition Paprika Extract colorant is a carotinoid colorant that is obtained by extracting

fruits of paprika (Capsicum annum L.) of solanaceae with organic solvents (extracting
solvent for spices such as oleoresin). Its major colorant component is capsanthin.
Dilutant, antioxidant, or other food additives (emulsifier, thickening agent, etc) can be
added for the purpose of color value adjustment and quality preservation.
Compositional Specifications of Paprika Extract colorant
Content Color Value (ASTA) of Paprika Extract colorant should be higher than the
labeled value.
Description Paprika Extract colorant is orange～dark brown liquid, paste, or powder with
a slight characteristic odor.
Identification (1) Test Solution obtained in Color Value section shows the maximum
absorption at about 453 nm or 470 nm.
(2) When 2 mL of sulfuric acid is added to 0.5 g of Paprika Extract colorant, the color
of the liquid changes from orange to blue.
(3) When antimony trichloride solution is added to Paprika Extract colorant, it
developed a blue.
Purity (1) Arsenic : It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(2) Lead : When 5.0 g of Paprika Extract colorant is tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content
should not be more than 2.0 ppm.
(3) Cadmium : When 5.0 g of Paprika Extract colorant is tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content
should not be more than 1.0 ppm.
(4) Mercury : When 0.1 g of Paprika Extract colorant is tested by Mercury Test
Method, its content should not be more than 1.0ppm.
(5) Residual Solvents : When Paprika Extract colorant is tested by the following test
method, it should contain,
Methylene chloride, trichloroethylene Notsum moreif than
used 30ppm (individual or
together)
Acetone Not more than 30ppm
Isopropyl
Methyl alcohol
alcohol Not
Not more than 50ppm
Hexane Not more than 50ppm
more than 25ppm
Test Method
① Distilling head : A clevenger trap, that is designed to used for oils (heavier than
water), is used.

737
 (a) For oils heavier than water (b) For oils lighter than water
Distilling head : Clevenger Traps (Units : mm)
② Agents
∘Toluene : The purity of toluene for this test should be such that it does not contain any
solvents that are measured in this test as determined by gas chromatography according to
the test condition ⑤.
∘cyclohexane : It should not contain any interfering impurities. Its purity is measured by the
same method as toluene.
∘Detergent & antifoam : It should not contain a volatile matter. If it does, an aqueous
solution of the material should be heated until a volatile matter is removed.
∘Reference Solution A : Toluene containing 2,500ppm of cyclohexane is prepared. If the
toluene contains cyclohexane as the only impurity, the concentration should be adjusted so
that it contains 2,500ppm of cyclohexane as determined by gas chromatography.
∘Reference Solution B : A solution containing 0.63% v/w of acetone in water is prepared.
③ Preparation of Standard Solution
∘ Test Standard solution A(for solvents except methyl alcohol): make toluene solvent
contains the solvent 50 ∼2,500 ppm and Internal Standard Solution, cyclohexane 2,500
ppm
∘ Test Standard solution B(for methyl alcohol only): make aqueous solution contains
methanol 100 ∼5,000 ppm and Internal Standard Solution, acetone 6,300 ppm
④ Preparation of Test Solution
∘Test Solution A (for solvents except methyl alcohol) : Small amount of detergent &
antifoam, 50 mL of water, 10 g of anhydrous sodium sulfate, 1 mL of Reference
Solution A, and 50 g of sample are added in a 250 mL single neck round bottom
flask with a 24/40 ground joint. 400 mm reflux condenser, distilling head, and a
738
 collector is connected to the flask and 15 mL of distillate is collected. 15 g of
anhydrous potassium carbonate is added to the distillate. It is then cooled while
shaking. It is allowed to stand until layer is separated. The toluene layer contains all
the solvents except methyl alcohol and is used in the following Test Procedure. The
aqueous layer is used as Test Solution B.
∘Test Solution B (for methyl alcohol only) : 50 mL of aqueous layer obtained in Test
Solution A is transferred into a round bottom flask, where 2～3 glass balls and 1 mL
of Reference Solution B are added. Approximately 1 mL of distillate is collected. This
distillate contains acetone as internal standard substance and methyl alcohol in the
sample. It is used in the following Test Procedure.
⑤ Test Procedure : Use gas chromatography equipped with hydrogen ionization detector.
Operation condition of gas chromatography
Column : DB-624(30m × 0.25mm x 1.4μm) or its equivalent
Detector : (Hydrogen) Flame Ionization Detector (FID)
Column Temperature : Test solution A(for solvents except methyl alcohol) : held at 38℃
for 3.8 minutes and is raised to 120℃ at a rate of 40℃ per
minute, then maintain for 1 minute.
Test solution B(for methyl alcohol) : maintain at 60℃ for 4
minutes.
Injector Temperature : 220℃
Detector Temperature : 220℃
Carrier gas and flow rate : Nitrogen, 1 μL/min
Injection mode : split ratio(10:1)
⑥ Preparation of Calibration Curve : A mixture of cyclohexane and solvent, previously known
concentration, in toluene is injected into gas chromatography. The response of the detector
for the previously known ratios of solvents is measured. The peak(area or height) of
cyclohexane and the solvents in toluene shall be the same as those of the sample. Peaks
areas for the solvents are calculated according to cyclohexane and the weighing factor F
is calculated as follows.
F(solvent) wt% solvent peak area of cyclohexane
×
＝ wt% cyclohexane peak area of solvent

When it is compared with cyclohexane(Internal Standard) recovery rate, the recovery rates
of hexane, acetone, isopropyl alcohol, methylene chloride, trichloroethene except methyl
alcohol from the oleoresin sample shall be 80∼120%.
Also, comepare with acetone(Internal Standard) recovery rate, the recovery rates of methyl
alcohol from the oleoresin sample shall be 80∼120%.

739
⑦ Calculation : The concentration of residual solvents (except for methyl alcohol) is calculated
by the following equation.
Residual Solvent ＝ 50 × F(solvent) × 100 × peak area of solvent
(except methyl
alcohol) solvent recovery rate % peak area of cyclohexane

50 is the concentration(ppm) of internal standard cyclohexane related to 50 g of oleoresin

sample used in the test.
Methyl alcohol
*
100 × F(methyl alcohol)x100 peak area of methyl alcohol
methyl alcohol recovery rate ×
＝ peak area of acetone
%

* 100 is the concentration(ppm) of internal standard acetone related and 50 g of oleoresin

sample used in the test.
(6) Spicy Taste : 400 mg of oleoresin paprika is weighed into a 100 mL volumetric
flask, which is filled with alcohol. It is then mixed by shaking and settled to
precipitate. 60 mL of 10% sugar solution in water is added to 0.15 mL of the
supernatant. When 5 people consume 5 mL each of the resulting solution, should not
be more than 3 people who feel the spicy taste.
Assay (Color Value) Appropriate amount of oleoresin paprika, the absorbance to be
measured will be within a range of 0.2 to 0.7, is precisely weighed into a 100 mL
volumetric flask and dissolved in acetone to make total volume 100 mL. (If it is water
soluble, water is used instead of acetone). After settling for 2 minutes, 1 mL of this
solution is diluted to 100 mL with acetone (For water soluble sample, diluting with
acetone may cause severe turbidity. In this case, 1 mL of alkaline lead acetate solution
(1→50) is added to the solution and then diluted to 100 mL with acetone. It is then
centrifuged and the supernatant is used.). Use it as a test solution. Absorbance(As) of the
resulting solution is measured at 460 nm with 1 cm cell using acetone as a reference.

Color Value(ASTA) As × 164 × F × 10

= W
W : Weight of sample(g)
ASTA : American Spice Trade Association
F : AN is the reference absorbent value(0.6) of the standard color solution , AF is the actual
absorbent value of the standard color solution. Therefore, F is an activity for correcting of
the instrument.
* If colorimetric glass plate is not available, a color standard solution is used.
∘Color standard Solution : CoSO4(NH4)2SO4․6H2O is dried for 1 week in a desiccator with
dried silica gel. 0.3005 g of K2Cr2O7 and 34.960 g of dried CoSO4(NH4)2SO4 are
dissolved in 1.8 M sulfuric acid to make 1,000 mL. The absorbance of this solution at
460 nm with 1 cm cell is 0.600.
740
 Onion Color
Definition Onion Color is a pigment obtained by extracting bulbs of Onions (Allium cepa
L.) of liliaceae with ethyl alcohol. Its major pigment component is Quercetin (C15H10O7＝
302.23) of flavonoids. Dilutant, stabilizer, or solvent can be added for the purpose of
color value adjustment and quality preservation.
Compositional Specifications of Onion Color
Content Color value of Onion Color should be more than the indicated value.
Description Onion Color is brown liquid, paste, powder, or paste with a slight
characteristic scent.
Identification (1) Citrate buffer (pH 7.0) solution (1→100) of Onion Color is yellowish～
reddish brown in color.
(2) When the solution in (1) is acidified with hydrochloric acid, the pigment becomes
insoluble and brown precipitates are formed.
(3) When ferric chloride solution is added to the solution in (1), milky white
precipitates are formed.
Purity (1) Arsenic : It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(2) Lead : When 5.0 g of Onion Color is tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content
should not be more than 10.0 ppm.
Assay (Color Value) Appropriate amount of Onion Color is precisely weighted so that
the measuring absorption of Onion Color is within 0.3～0.7 and dissolved in 5 mL of
sodium carbonate (anhydrous) solution (1→200). Citrate buffer solution with pH 7.0 is
added so that the total volume is 100 mL accurately. 5 mL of this solution is diluted to
100 mL with Citrate buffer solution with pH 7.0 (Test Solution). If necessary, the
solution is centrifuged and the supernatant is used. Using Citrate buffer solution with
pH 7.0 as a reference solution, absorption A is measured at 500 nm wavelength with
1cm path length. Color value is obtained using the following equation.

Color Value ＝
A × 200
weight of the sample(g)

∘Citrate buffer solution (pH 7.0)

Solution 1： 1 ℓ of solution containing 21 g of citric acid (C6H8O7 H2O)
Solution 2： 1 ℓ of solution containing 71.6 g of dibasic sodium phosphate (Na2HPO4
12H2O)
Solution 1 and Solution 2 are mixed well (35 : 165) and its pH is adjusted to 7.0.

741
 γ -Oryzanol
Definition γ-Oryzanol is obtained by the following procedure. Rice bran or embryo bud
oil is distributed with hydrous ethyl alcohol and hexane or acetone at room
temperature. It is then obtained from the fraction of hydrated ethyl alcohol or by
treating with resin and purified. Its component is γ-Oryzanol.
Compositional Specifications of γ-Oryzanol
Content The content (mg) of Oryzanol A (C40H58O4) of γ-Oryzanol should be more than
the indicated amount.
Description γ-Oryzanol is pale yellow～yellow crystalline powder. It can be scentless or
have a slight characteristic scent.
Identification (1) When 0.01 g of γ-Oryzanol is dissolved in 10 mL of alcoholic
potassium hydroxide solution, this solution is yellow color.
(2) When 0.01 g of γ-Oryzanol is dissolved in 5 mL of chloroform, where 4 drops of
sulfuric acid is added and mixed by shaking, the solution becomes yellow. When 10
drops of anhydrous acetic acid are added, the color of the solution changes to
reddish violet then slowly to green.
(3) When 0.01 g of γ-Oryzanol is dissolved in 5 mL of chloroform, where 5 drops of
sulfuric acid is added and mixed by shaking and then settled, chloroform layer is
pale yellow and aqueous layer is orange in color.
(4) A solution of material in n-heptane (1→100,000) shows maximum absorptions at
229∼233 nm, 289∼293 nm, 313∼317 nm.
Purity (1) Arsenic : It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(2) Lead : When 5.0 g of γ-Oryzanol is tested by Atomic Absorption Spectrophotometry
or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content should not be more
than 2.0 ppm.
Loss on Drying When γ-Oryzanol is dried for 3 hours at 105℃, the weight loss should
not be more than 0.5%.
Residue on Ignition When Residue on Ignition is done with precisely weighted material,
the amount of residue should not be more than 0.1%.
Assay Dry γ-Oryzanol, weight precisely 0.05 g of γ-Oryzanol, and dissolve the sample
in 70 mL of n-heptane by heating at 70∼80℃. N-heptane is added to bring the total
volume to 100 mL accurately. 2 mL of this solution is further diluted to 100 mL with
n-heptane (Test Solution). Using n-heptane as a reference, absorption A of Test
Solution is measured at the maximum absorption band near 315 nm with a path length
of 1cm. The content of oryzanol A is obtained by the following equation.
Content of Oryzanol
＝
A (mg)
A × 5,000
Weight of the
sample(g) × 359

742
 Oxalic Acid

Chemical Formula: C2H2O4‧2H2O

Molecular Weight: 126.07 CAS No.: 6153-56-6

Compositional Specifications of Oxalic Acid
Content Oxalic acid should contain within a range of 99.5～101.0% of oxalic acid (C2H2O4․2H2O).
Description Oxalic acid occurs as colorless crystals. It is odorless.
Identification (1) Oxalic Acid is sublimed by heating.
(2) To 1 mL of Oxalic Acid solution (1→10), add 2 drops of sulfuric acid and 1 mL of
potassium permanganate solution, and heat. The color of the solution disappears.
(3) Make Oxalic Acid solution (1→10) alkaline with ammonia solution and add 1 mL of
calcium chloride solution. A white precipitate is formed.
Purity (1) Clarity and Color of Solution : When 1 g of Oxalic Acid is dissolved in 20 mL
of water by boiling, the solution should be colorless and should not be more than
almost clear.
(2) Sulfate : To 1 g of Oxalic Acid, add 20 mL of water and 1 mL of sodium carbonate
solution, evaporate to dryness in a water bath, heat gradually, and heat treated to
600∼700℃. To the residue, add 10 mL of water and 0.5 mL of nitric acid, boil, add
2 mL of hydrochloric acid, and evaporate to dryness in a water bath. Add water to
the residue to make 100 mL, and filter. Measure 25 mL of the filtrate, add 1 mL
diluted hydrochloric acid, and use as the test solution. When the test solutin is tested
by Sulfate Limit Test content, its content should not be more than the amount
correspond to 0.4 mL of 0.01 N sulfuric acid.
(3) Arsenic : It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(4) Lead : When 5.0 g of Oxalic Acid is tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content
should not be more than 2.0 ppm.
Residue on Ignition When thermogravimetric analysis is done with 1 g of Oxalic Acid,
the residue should not be more than 0.3%.
Assay Accurately weigh about 1 g of Oxalic Acid, dissolve in water to make 250 mL,
measure accurately 50 mL, add 3 mL of sulfuric acid, warm to about 80℃, and titrate
with 0.1 N potassium permanganate while hot.
1 mL of 0.1 N potassium permanganate = 6.304 mg of C2H2O4․H2O

743
 Oxygen
Chemical Formula: O2 INS No.: 948

Molecular Weight: 16.00 CAS No.: 7782-44-7

Compositional Specifications of Oxygen
Content Oxygen should contain no less than 99.0% of oxygen (O2).
Description Oxygen is colorless scentless gas.
Identification Upon contact with a piece of wood of which the flame is extinguished, a
violent flame is generated.
Purity When the volume of Oxygen is measured, it should be converted to the volume
at 20˚ and under 760 mmHg.
(1) Carbon Dioxide : Both ends of a carbon dioxide detecting tube are broken off. One
end is connected to an oxygen cylinder and the other to an appropriate flow meter.
When approximately 1050 ± 50 mL of oxygen is passed through at an appropriate
flow rate for the tube, the content of carbon dioxide should not be more than 300 μl/l.
(2) Carbon Monoxide : Both ends of a carbon monoxide detecting tube are broken off.
One end is connected to an oxygen cylinder and the other to an appropriate flow
meter. When approximately 1050 ± 50 mL of oxygen is passed through at an
appropriate flow rate for the tube, the content of carbon monoxide should not be
more than 10 μl/l.
(3) Scent : When the valve of an oxygen cylinder is gently opened and the scent of
oxygen is smelled (care must be taken to avoid direct facial contact), there should
not be any noticeable scent.
Assay
Apparatus
A is a 100 mL gas burette with a two-way stopcock. Scale marks for b∼c, d∼e, and
e∼f are at 0.1 mL, while those for c～d are at 2 mL. A is connected to a alidade B
and a thick rubber hose. Approximately 50% volume of A and B is filled with
ammonium chloride · ammonia solution. An inlet g of gas pipette C is filled (up to its
top) with a finely coiled copper wire (diameter : Not more than 2 mm), filled with 125
mL of ammonium chloride · ammonia solution, plugged with a rubber stopper i, and
connected to A with a think rubber tube.
Procedure : a is opened and B is lowered. The solution in g is sucked up to the
stopcock of a and stopcock a is closed. sample inlet h of a is opened and B is raised
so that A and h are filled with ammonium chloride·ammonia solution. Then a is closed
and the sample cylinder is connected to h. Again, a is opened and B is lowered and
approximately 100 mL of sample is introduced. The opening to c in a is opened and B
is raised so that the sample is flown into g then a is closed. c is gently shaken back
and forth. Unadsorbed gas is flown back to A by opening a and lowering B and its
volume is measured. This operation is repeated until the volume of unadsorbed gas
becomes constant. The volume at this point is measured V (mL). The oxygen content
is obtained by the following equation. When ammonium chloride·ammonia solution is
744
freshly replaced, the above Procedure are repeated 4 times and the average is taken.
V and the volume of the sample are converted to volumes at 20˚ and under 760
mmHg.
converted volume of sample(mL) -
converted V(mL)
Oxygen(O2)
= × 100
content(%)
converted volume of sample(mL)

745
 Oxystearin

INS No.: 387

CAS No.: 8028-45-3

Definition Oxystearin is a mixture of partially oxidized stearic acid and glyceride of

other fatty acids.
Compositional Specifications of Oxystearin
Description Oxystearin is yellowish brown～pale brownfatty or waxy material.
Purity (1) Acid value : Approximately 8 g of Oxystearin is precisely weighed is
dissolved in 125 mL mixture of iso-propyl alcohol and toluene (1:1), which is heated
if necessary. After adding 2 mL of phenolphthalein solution, the solution is titrated
with 0.1 N potassium hydroxide solution. Acid value is calculated by the following
equation and it should not be more than 15.
(2) Lead : When 5.0 g of Oxystearin is tested by Atomic Absorption Spectrophotometry
or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content should not be more
than 2 ppm.
(3) Hydroxyl Value : Approximately 3 g of Oxystearin is accurately weighed into a 250
mL flask with a stopper. Add 5 mL of pyridine·anhydrous acetic acid mixture (3:1), a
reflux condenser is attached. It is then heated for 1 hour in a water bath. 10 mL of
water is added through the condenser and it is heated again for 10 minutes. After
cooling, 15 mL of n-butyl alcohol is added through the condenser, the condenser is
removed, and inner wall of the flask is washed with 10 mL of n-butyl alcohol. 1 mL
of phenolphthalein solution is added to the flask and the solution is titrated with 0.5
N alcoholic solution of potassium hydroxide. The consumed amount of alcoholic
solution is S. Separately, 5 mL of pyridine·anhydrous acetic acid is treated as same as
the test solution and the consumed amount of alcoholic solution is B. To correct for
free acid, approximately 10 g of Polysorbate 20 is accurately weighed and dissolved
in 10 mL of pyridine. After adding 1 mL of phenolphthalein solution, the solution is
titrated with 0.5 N alcoholic solution of potassium hydroxide. The consumed amount
of alcoholic solution is A. Hydroxyl value, that is calculated by the following equation,
should be within a range of 96～108.
[B + (WA / C) - S) × 28.05
Hydroxyl Value =
W

W : Amount of sample used in acetylation (g)

C : Amount of sample used for quantitative analysis of free acid (g)
(4) Iodine Value : Approximately 0.3 g of Oxystearin is accurately weighed into a 500
mL Erlenmeyer flask with a stopper and 20 mL of glacial acetic acid/cyclohexane,
1:1, v/v is added to dissolve the material. After adding 25 mL of Weiss solution, a
746
 stopper is placed and let stand in the dark for 1 hour where the iodine value is <150
and for 2 hours where the iodine value is ≥150. 20 mL of potassium iodide solution
and 100 mL (previously boiled and cooled) are added to the flask. The excess iodine
is titrated with 0.1 N sodium thiosulfate solution. Sodium thiosulfate solution is added
drop wise until yellow color disappears. Starch solution is added and the titration is
continued until the blue color disappears completely. Near the end point, the flask is
vigorously shaken with a stopper. Separately, a blank test is carried out by the same
procedure.
(B - S) × 1.269
Iodine Value =
weight of the sample(g)
B : Consumed amount of 0.1 N sodium thiosulfate solution in the blank test (mL)
S : Consumed amount of 0.1 N sodium thiosulfate solution in the test for sample(mL)
(5) Refractive Index : Refractive Index should be within a range of 1.465∼1.467.
(6) Saponification Value : 3 g of Oxystearin is precisely weighed into a flask, where 25
mL of 0.5 N alcoholic solution of potassium hydroxide is added. After attaching a
reflux condenser, the solution is saponified for 1 hour, test solution. The test solution
is proceeded as directed under saponification value in Fats Test. The saponification
value of the solution should be within a range of 225 - 240.
(7) Unsaponifiables : Oxystearin is tested by Purity (8) for [Carnauba Wax]. The
content should not be more than 0.8%.

747
 Ozone Water
Definition Ozone water is obtained by dissolving ozone gas generated from an ozone
apparatus and main ingredient is ozone.
Compositional Specifications of Ozone water
Content When Ozone water is quantified, it should not be less than Ozone (O3) 1.0mg/l.
Description Ozone water is colorless liquid with characteristic scent.
Identification 20 mL each of alizarin solution is taken to 200 mL of two flasks
respectively. To the first flask, water without ozone is taken to make 200 mL, blank
test solution. To another flask, a sample is taken from the below of alizarin solution
using pipette or long-neck funnel to prevent the loss of ozone and the total becomes
200 mL, test solution. Immediately, measure absorbances of each solution at
wavelengths of 548 nm, respectively, using 1 cm cell for analysis. When the absorption
of test solution is lower than the absorption of blank test solution, ozone exists in
sample.
Alizarin solution : 124.5mg of alizarin violet 3R is precisely weighed into a 1,000mL
flask, 500mL of water is added and dissolved. Set aside for 24 hours. Then 20mg of
sodium hexametaphosphate, 48.5g of ammonium chloride, 6.2mL of ammonium hydroxide
(corresponds to 1.6 g of NH3) are weighed, water is added to make 1,000 mL and set
aside for 24 hours. The absorption of ten times diluted solution of this solution at
548nm is 0.155, and the pH is 8.1～8.5
Assay 10 mL each of indigo solution is taken to 50 mL of two flasks respectively. To
the first flask, water without ozone is taken to make 15 mL, blank test solution. To
another flask, a 5 mL sample is gradually taken along the inner wall of flask using
pipette or long-neck funnel to prevent the loss of ozone and the total becomes 15
mL, test solution. Immediately, measure absorbances of each solution at wavelengths
of 600 nm, respectively, using 1 cm cell. Measure the concentration of ozone in
sample under following equation.(However, when chlorine exists, 1 mL of malonic acid
is added before taking samples to each flask and proceed test in the same manner to
correct the influence by interference).
content of ozone (mg/l) = 15mL × D/(f×b×V)
D: Absorbance difference between test solution and blank test solution
b: Path length (cm)
V: Weight of sample(5mL)
f: 0.42(extinction coefficent of ozone)
Indigo undiluted standard solution : 0.770 g of potassium indigotrisulfonate) is weighed
and dissolved in 500 mL of water, 1 mL of
phosphate is added, mixed and make 1,000 mL with
water.
Indigo test solution : 100mL of Indigo undiluted standard solution, 10 g of sodium
748
 phosphate, monobasic, 7mL of phosphate, water are added to make
1,000 mL and mixed.
Malonic acid solution : Water is added to 5 g of malonic acid to make 100 mL.

749
 Palmitic Acid
Hexadecanoic acid
Chemical Formula: C 16H 32O 2
Molecular Weight: 256.43 INS No.: 570
Synonyms: Hexadecanoic acid CAS No.: 57-10-3

Definition Palmitic Acid is a solid fatty acid obtained from fats. It consists of a mixture
of palmitic acid (C16H32O2) and stearic acid (C18H36O2). Its major component is palmitic
acid (C16H32O2).
Compositional Specifications of Palmitic Acid
Description Palmitic Acid is white～pale yellow crystalline solid or powder.
Purity (1) Acid Value : When 0.5 g of Palmitic Acid is precisely weighted, and
proceeded as directed under Acid value in Fats Test, the Acid value should be
204~220.
(2) Solidification point : Solidification point of Palmitic Acid should be 53.3∼62.0.
(3) Lead : When 5.0 g of Palmitic Acid is tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content
should not be more than 1.0 ppm.
(4) Arsenic : It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(5) Mercury : When Palmitic Acid is tested by Mercury Limit Test, its content should
not be more than 1.0ppm.
(6) Iodine Value : Approximately 12.5 g of Palmitic Acid is precisely weighted into a
500 mL Erlenmeyer flask with a stopper which contains 20 mL of 1 : 1 mixture of
glacial acetic acid : cyclohexane and 25 mL of Weiss solution. A stopper is placed on
the flask which is vigorously shaken and set aside for 1 hour in a dark place. 20 mL
of potassium iodide solution and 100 mL of water (previously boiled and cooled) are
added to the flask. The excess iodine is titrated with 0.1 N sodium thiosulfate
solution. 0.1 N sodium thiosulfate solution is added drop wise until yellow color
disappears. Starch solution is added and the titration is continued until the blue color
disappears completely. Near the end point, the flask is vigorously shaken with a
stopper. Separately, a blank test is carried out by the same procedure. Iodine value
is obtained by the following equation and it should not be more than 2.0.

Iodine Value= weight(B-S) × 1.269

of the sample(g)
B : Consumed amount of 0.1 N sodium thiosulfate solution in the blank test (mL)
S : Consumed amount of 0.1 N sodium thiosulfate solution in the test for sample (mL)
(7) Saponification Value : 3 g of Palmitic Acid is precisely weighted into a 250 mL
flask, where 50 mL of 0.5 N alcoholic solution of potassium hydroxide is added.
After attaching a reflux condenser, the solution is saponified for 30～60 minutes.
750
 This solution is used as test solution, tested under Saponification value in Fats Test,
boiled (red color appears again) and titrated again until the red color disappears.
Saponification value should be 205~221.
(8) Unsaponifiable matter : 5 g of Palmitic Acid is precisely weighted into a 250 mL
flask, where 2 g of potassium hydroxide and 40 mL of alcohol are added and gently
refluxed for 1 hour with a reflux condenser. The solution transfer into a separatory
funnel (3.5 cm diameter x 30 cm length with 40 mL, 80 mL, and 130 mL scale
marks) with a stopcock. The flask is washed with sufficient amount of alcohol, which
is added to the funnel (total volume = 40 mL). The flask is washed with warm and
cold water, which is added to the funnel (total volume = 80 mL). Finally, the flask is
washed with a few mL of petroleumether, which is added to the funnel. Cool the
solution, 50 mL of petroleum ether is added to the funnel. The funnel is shaken
vigorously for 1 minute and then settled to separate two phases completely. The
supernatant ether layer is collected in a 500 mL separatory funnel with a stopcock.
The aqueous layer is again extracted 6 times with 50 mL each of ether. These
extracts are added to the first extract. The combined extracts are washed with 25
mL of 10% alcohol. This procedure is repeated until the aqueous layer doesn't get
colorized by phenolphthalein TS. When this is accomplished, aqueous phase is
discarded and the ether extract Transfer into a pre-weighted beaker. With 10 mL of
ether, the funnel is washed, which is added to the beaker. Ether layer is evaporated
to dryness in a water bath, which is then dried at 100℃ for 30 minutes until the
weight becomes constant. Then the residue is cooled in a desiccator and weighted.
The residue dissolve in 50 mL of warm alcohol (neutralized with sodium hydroxide
using phenolphthalein as an indicator). The resulting solution is titrated with 0.02N
sodium hydroxide solution until a pale red color persists. The amount of oleic acid is
obtained by multiplying the consumed amount of sodium hydroxide solution with
5.659 mg. The exact amount of unsaponifiables is obtained by subtracting the amount
of fatty acid (as oleic acid) from the amount of residues. The content of
unsaponifiable matter is calculated by the following equation and it should not be
more than 1.5%.
Unsaponifiable content of residue(mg) - content as oleic acid(mg) 100
matter(%) = weight of the sample(g)
×
1,000

Water Content Water content of Palmitic Acid is determined by water determination

(Karl-Fisher Titration) and should not be more than 0.2%.
Residue on Ignition When Residue on Ignition analysis is done with accurately weighted
2 g of Palmitic Acid, the amount of residue should not be more than 0.1%.

751
 Pancreatin
Definition Pancreatin is obtained by extracting pancreas of cows or pigs. It is an
enzyme that can decompose starches, fats, and proteins. Diluent or stabilizer can be
added for the purpose of activity adjustment and quality preservation.
Compositional Specifications of Pancreatin
Description Pancreatin is white～pale yellow powder with a characteristic scent.
Identification When Pancreatin is proceeded as directed under Activity Test, it should
have the activity as Pancreatin.
Purity (1) Arsenic : It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(2) Lead : When 5.0 g of Pancreatin is tested by Atomic Absorption Spectrophotometry
or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content should not be more
than 5.0 ppm.
(3) Coliform Group ： Pancreatin is tested by Microbiological Methods for Coliform
Group in General Testing Methods in 「Standards and Specifications for Foods」. It
should contain 30 or less per 1g of this product.
(4) Salmonella ： Pancreatin is tested by Microbiological Methods for Salmonella in
General Testing Methods in 「Standards and Specifications for Foods」. It should be
negative (-).
(5) E. Coli : When Pancreatin is tested by Microbe Test Methods for E. Coli in General
Test Method 「Standards and Specifications for Foods」, it should be negative (-).
Activity Test (Activity)
(1) Activity of Amylase
∘Preparation of Test Solution : When the amylase activity of Pancreatin is same as that
of USP pancreatin standard, 40 mg of this additive is precisely weighted into a mortar,
where 3 mL of phosphate buffer solution (pH 6.8) is added. It is then ground for 5～10
minutes and diluted to 100 mL with phosphate buffer solution (pH 6.8) (Test Solution).
When the amylase activities are different, Test Solution is prepared (following the same
procedure) so that 1 mL of the final dilution contains the same activity as 1 mL of
Standard Solution.
∘Test Procedure : Four 250 mL round bottom flasks with stoppers are labeled as S, U,
BS, and BU, respectively. To each flask, 25 mL of substrate solution, 10 mL of
phosphate buffer solution (pH 6.8), and 1 mL of sodium chloride solution (11.7→1,000)
are added. A stopper is placed on each flask, which is then mixed and set aside in a
25 ± 0.1℃ until it is isothermalized. 2 mL each of 1 N hydrochloric acid is added to
BU & BS, which are well mixed and placed in the water bath. 1 mL each of Test
Solution is added to U & BU and 1 mL each of Standard Solution is added to S & BS,
which are well mixed and placed in the water bath. After exactly 10 minutes, 2 mL
each of 1N hydrochloric acid is added to S & U. While stirring continuously, 10mL
each of 0.1N iodine solution is added to each flask, where 45 mL each of 0.1 N
sodium hydroxide solution is immediately added. The flasks are set aside for 15
minutes at 15～25℃ in a dark place. After adding 4 mL each of 2 N sulfuric acid to
752
 each flask, it is titrated with 0.1 N sodium thiosulfate solution until blue color
disappears. The consumed amounts of 0.1 N sodium thiosulfate solution for U, S, BU,
and BS are VU, VS, VBU, and VBS, respectively.
Amylase activity of an enzyme is obtained by the following equation.
Cs (VBU - VU)
USP Units/m = × × 100
Wu (VBS - VS)
Cs : Amylase activity of Standard Solution (USP units/mL)
Wu : Amount of sample (mg)
Solutions
∘Standard Solution : 20 mg of USP pancreatin standard is precisely weighted into a
mortar, where 30 mL of phosphate buffer solution (pH 6.8) is
added. It is ground for 5～10 minutes and diluted to 50 mL with
phosphate buffer solution (pH 6.8) (Standard Solution). USP Units of
amylase per 1 mL of this solution is calculated.
∘Phosphate Buffer Solution (pH 6.8)
Solution 1 : 13.6 g of potassium phosphate, monobasic dissolve in 500 mL of water.
Solution 2 : 14.2 g of sodium phosphate, dibasic dissolve in 500 mL of water. 51 mL
of Solution 1 and 49 mL of Solution 2 are well mixed. pH is adjusted to
6.8, if necessary.
∘Substrate Solution : 10 mL of water is added to purified soluble starch (2.0 g as a dried
form) and stirred. 160 mL of water is added to this mixture, which
is continuously stirred and heated to boil. Cool the solution, water
is added to bring the volume to 200 mL. This solution is freshly
prepared before use.
(2) Activity of Lipase
∘Preparation of Test Solution : 200 mg of Pancreatin is precisely weighted into a mortar.
It is ground for 10 minutes with 3 mL of water. It is diluted with cold water so that 1
mL of the final dilution contains 8～16 USP units of lipase. This suspension is mixed
prior to use maintaining at 4℃ . 5～10 mL of this cold suspension is warmed to 20℃
just before use (test solution).
∘Test Procedure : 10.0 mL of substrate solution, 8.0 mL of tris buffer solution, 2.0 mL
of sodium tauro-cholate solution, and 9 mL of water are added to a 50 mL receiving
container with a cap and mixed. It is capped and continuously stirred in a water bath
with a temperature controller. The mixture is isothermalized at 37 ± 0.1℃ in the water
bath. pH of the mixture is adjusted to 9.2 with 0.1 N sodium hydroxide solution. 1.0
mL of Test Solution is added to the mixture, which is titrated with 0.1 N
sodium-hydroxide solution for 5 minutes to keep pH 9.0 and consumed amount of 0.1
N sodium hydroxide solution (mL) per minute is recorded. Separately, the same
procedure is carried out with Standard Solution and 0.1N sodium hydroxide solution
753
 consumption rate (mL/min) for Standard and Test Solution is calculated.
Activity of lipase is obtained by the following equation.
USP Units/mg = VA × C S × A
VS × CA
A : Activity of lipase of USP Standard Product (USP Units/mg)
VS : 0.1N sodium hydroxide solution consumption rate (mL/min) for Standard Solution
VA : 0.1N sodium hydroxide solution consumption rate (mL/min) for Test Solution
CA : Concentration of Test Solution (mg/mL)
CS : Concentration of Standard Solution (mg/mL)
Solutions
∘Standard Solution : 200 mg of USP pancreatin standard is precisely weighted into a
mortar. It is ground for 10 minutes with 3 mL of water. It is diluted
with cold water so that 1 mL of the final dilution contains 8～16
UPS units of lipase (Standard Solution). This suspension is
maintained at 4℃ and mixed prior use. 5～15 mL of this cold
suspension is warmed to 20℃ just before use to for accurate
measurement of volume.
∘Arabic gum Solution : Arabic gum solution (1→10) is centrifuged until it becomes clear.
Only the clear solution is used.
∘Substrate Solution : 165 mL of Arabic gum solution, 20 mL of olive oil, and 15 g of ice
are mixed using a homogenizer. The mixture is cooled to 5℃ in an
ice bath. It is then homogenized for 15 minutes at over 8,000 rpm .
∘Tris Buffer Solution : 60 mg of tris(hydroxymethyl)aminomethane and 234 mg of sodium
chloride dissolve in water (total volume = 100mL).
∘Sodium tauro-cholate Solution : A solution is prepared so that it contains 80.0 mg of
USP sodium tauro-cholate standard per 1 mL.
(3) Activity of Protease
∘Preparation of Test Solution : 100 mg of Pancreatin is precisely weighted into a mortar.
It is ground for 5～10 minutes with 3 mL of phosphate buffer solution (pH 7.5). It is
diluted so that 1 mL of the final dilution contains 2.5 UPS units of lipase (Test
Solution).
∘Test Procedure : Test tubes are labeled as S1, S2, and S3 for standards and U for
enzyme test. 2.0, 1.5, 1.5, 1.0 mL of phosphate buffer solution (pH 7.5) are added to
S1, S2, U, and S3, respectively. 5.0 mL each of trichloro acetic acid solutions added to
each test tube, which is labeled as S1B, S2B, S3B and UB, respectively. Separately, for a
blank test, 5 mL of trichloro acetic acid solution and 3mL of phosphate buffer solution
(pH 7.5) are mixed in a test tube (labeled as B). All the test tubes (with stirring glass
rods) are isothermalized in a 40℃ water bath. 2.0 mL each of substrate solution
(isothermalized at 40℃) is added to each test tube at a regular time interval. After
754
 60minutes, the reaction is stopped by adding 5.0 mL each of trichloro acetic acid
solution to S1, S2, S3, and U. All the test tubes are removed from the water bath. They
are set aside for 10 minutes at room temperature until proteins are settled down and
filtered. Absorption of the completely clear supernatant of each solution is measured at
280 nm with 1cm path length using blank test solution B as a reference. Absorption
values are corrected by respectively subtracting absorptions of S1B, S2B, and S3B
filtrates from those of S1, S2, and S3 filtrates. A standard curve is prepared for the
corrected absorption of each standard solution vs. its concentration. A concentration of
corrected Test Solution (U-UB) is obtained from corrected standard curve.
Enzyme activity of protease is obtained by the following equation.

Activity of Protease (USP units/mg) = V A × CS

V S × CA
× A

USP Units/mg = 10
A × C × W
A : Activity of protease of standard material (USP Units/mg)
C : Concentration of standard material corresponding to enzyme Test Solution obtained
from the standard curve (mg/mL)
W : Amount of sample in 1.5 mL of Test Solution (mg)
Solutions
∘Standard Solution : 100 mg of USP pancreatin standard is precisely weighted and
dissolved in phosphate buffer solution (pH 7.5) so that the total
volume is 100mL, which is set aside for 25 minutes at room
temperature. This solution is diluted with phosphate buffer solution
(pH 7.5) so that 1 mL of the final dilution contains 2.5 UPS Units
of protease activity (Standard Solution).
∘Phosphate Buffer Solution (pH 7.5) : 6.8 g of potassium phosphate monobasic, and 1.8g
of sodium hydroxide are dissolved in 950 mL of water. pH of this
solution is adjusted to pH 7.5 ± 0.2 with 0.2 N sodium hydroxide
solution. It is then further diluted to 1,000 mL. This solution is stored
in a refrigerator.
∘Substrate Solution : 1.25 g of casein is well dispersed in 5 mL of water, where 10 mL
of 0.1 N sodium hydroxide solution is added. After shaking for 1
minute, 50 mL of water is added and the resulting solution is
shaken for approximately 1 hour. pH of this solution is adjusted to
8.0 ± 0.1 using 1 N sodium hydroxide solution or 1 N hydrochloric
acid. It is then diluted to 100 mL with water. This solution is
freshly prepared before use.
∘Trichloroacetic acid solution : 50 g of trichloroacetic acid dissolve in water to make
total volume = 1,000 mL. This solution is stored at room
755
 temperature.
-Filter Paper : 5 mL of trichloroacetic acid solution is filtered through a filter paper.
Absorption of the filtrate is measured at 280 nm with 1cm path length using unfiltered
trichloroacetic acid solution as a reference. The absorption should not be more not
more than 0.04. If it is higher, the filter paper is washed with trichloroacetic acid
solution until it becomes should not be more than 0.04.
Stotage standard of Pancreatin
Pancreatin should be stored in a hermetic container in a cold dark place.

756
 Pecan Nut Color
Definition Pecan Nut Color is a pigment obtained by extracting outer peel and inner peel
of pecans (Carya Pecan ENGL. Et GRAEBN.) of Juglandacea with ethyl alcohol. It major
pigment component is flavonoid. Diluent, stabilizer, or solvent can be added for the
purpose of color value adjustment and quality preservation.
Compositional Specifications of Pecan Nut Color
Content The color value of Pecan Nut Color should be more than the indicated value.
Description Pecan Nut Color is brown liquid or powder with a slight characteristic scent.
Identification (1) An aqueous solution (1→500) of Pecan Nut Color is brown in color.
(2) When the solution in (1) is acidified with 10 mL of hydrochloric acid, brown
precipitates are formed.
(3) When ferric chloride solution (1→10) is added to the solution in (1), milky white
precipitates are formed.
Purity (1) Arsenic : It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(2) Lead : When 5.0 g of Pecan Nut Color is tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content
should not be more than 10.0 ppm.
Assay (Color Value) Appropriate amount of Pecan Nut Color is precisely weighted so
that the absorption is within 0.3～0.7 and dissolved in citric acid buffer solution (pH
7.0) so that the total volume is 100 mL. 1 mL of this solution is diluted to 100 mL
with citric acid buffer solution (pH 7.0) (Test Solution). If necessary, the solution is
centrifuged and the supernatant is used. Using citric acid buffer solution (pH 7.0) as a
reference solution, absorption A is measured at the maximum absorption near 500 nm
with 1cm path length. Color value is obtained using the following equation.
Color Value( ) ＝ A × 1,000
Weight of the sample(g)

∘Citric acid buffer solution (pH 7.0)

Solution 1 ： 1 ℓ of solution containing 21 g of citric acid (C6H8O7․H2O).
Solution 2 ： 1 ℓ of solution containing 71.6 g of dibasic sodium phosphate (Na2HPO4․
12H2O).
Solution 1 and Solution 2 are mixed well (35:165) and its pH is adjusted to 7.0.

757
 Pectin
INS No.: 440
CAS No.: 9000-69-5

Definition
Pectin is a purified polymer of carbohydrates obtained by extracting with boiling water
and acid aqueous solution citrus fruits or apple . The essential part of pectin chains
consists of α-1, 4 bonding of D-galaturonic acid unit. A portion of carboxyl groups are
methyl-esterified and the rest exist as free acid or salts of ammonium, potassium, and
sodium. Depending on the usage, sugars can be added to standardize its characteristics
or food additives, that are used as buffers to adjust acidity, can be added.
Compositional Specifications of Pectin
Description Pectin is odorless, yellowish white fine or coarse powder with mucus taste.
Identification (1) When 1% aqueous solution is mixed with a same volume of alcohol,
transparent gelatinous precipitates are formed (distinguished from other gums).
(2) 1 mL of sodium hydroxide solution is added to 5 mL of 1% aqueous solution of
pectin. After allowing to stand for 15 minutes at room temperature, a gel is formed
(distinguished from tragacanth or other gums).
(3) The gel obtained in (2) is acidified by 1 mL of hydrochloric acid. When it is well
shaken, colorless gelatinous voluminous precipitates are formed. Upon heating, white
agglomerates are formed.
Purity (1) Arsenic : It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(2) Lead : When 5.0 g of Pectin is tested by Atomic Absorption Spectrophotometry or
Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content should not be more
than 5.0 ppm.
(3) Cadmium : When 5.0 g of Pectin is tested by Atomic Absorption Spectrophotometry
or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content should not be more
than 1.0 ppm.
(4) Mercury : When 0.1 g of Pectin is tested by Mercury Test Method, its content
should not be more than 1.0ppm.
(5) Residual solvent : 0.1g of pectin is precisely weighed, 10 mL of diluted internal
standard solution(1→25) is added, a stopper is place, and stirred until a homogeneous
dispersion is obtained. This solution is filtered by 0.45 ㎛ filter, and the filtrate is
used as test solution. However, tert-butyl alcohol (1→1,000) is used as internal
standard solution. Separately, 0.1 g each of methyl alcohol and isopropyl alcohol is
precisely measured and water is added to make 100 mL. Again 10 mL of this
solution and 4 mL of internal standard solution is weighed, water is added to make
100 mL, mixed standard solution. 2µl of test solution and mixed standard solution is
taken respectively, and injected to gas chromatograph with the following operation
condition. Then, ratio of peak area of methyl alcohol and isopropyl alcohol peak
758
 against tert-butyl alcohol peak, QT1, QT2 and QS1, QS2, is measured respectively,
and measure the content of methyl alcohol and isopropyl alcohol under following
equation, it should be not more than 1.0% as individual or sum if used together.
Content Weight of methyl alcohol(g) × QT1
(%)= of methyl alcohol Weight of sample(g) QS1
Content of isopropyl alcohol Weight of isopropyl alcohol(g) × QT2
(%)= Weight of sample(g) QS2
QT1 : Ratio of methyl alcohol peak against tert-butyl alcohol peak in Test Solution
QT2 : Ratio of isopropyl alcohol peak against tert-butyl alcohol peak in Test Solution
QS1 : Ratio of methyl alcohol peak against tert-butyl alcohol peak in mixed standard
Solution
QS2 : Ratio of isopropyl alcohol peak against tert-butyl alcohol peak in mixed standard
Solution
Column : PLOT Q or its equivalent
Detector : Hydrogen Flame Ionization Detector (FID)
Temperature at injection port : 200℃
Column Temperature : 120℃
Detector Temperature : 300℃
Carrier gas : Nitrogen or Helium
(6) Galaturonic acid unit : 5 g of Pectin is precisely weighed into a beaker, 5 mL of
hydrochloric acid and 100 mL of 60% ethyl alcohol are added, stirred for 10 minutes,
filtered with a glass filter(1G3 or its equivalent). 60% of residue on a glass filter is
washed with 15 mL each of 60% mixture of ethyl alcohol: hydrochloric acid(20:1) six
times, washed solution is washed with 60% ethyl alcohol until it doesn't react for
chloride, and washed with 20 mL of ethyl alcohol again. It is dried for 2.5 hours at
105℃, cooled in a desiccator, and weighed. The amount which corresponds to 1/10
of the weight of the dried substance is precisely weighed. Then the weight is W(mg).
To this solution, 2 mL of ethyl alcohol is added and wetted, 100 mL of freshly boiled
and cooled water is added, shaken, and mixed. 5 drops of phenolphthalein solution,
titrated with 0.1N sodium hydroxide solution, and the consumed amount of the
solution is V1(mL). 20 mL of 0.5N sodium hydroxide solution is precisely weighed,
added, shaken well, mixed, and let stand for 15 minutes. Again, 20 mL of 0.5N
hydrochloric acid is precisely weighed, added, titrated with 0.1N sodium hydroxide
solution after shaking it well until the red color disappears, and the consumed amount
of this solution is V2(mL). However, the final point is when the color of solution
becomes slightly red after shaking vigorously. Titrated solution is transferred to 500
mL flask for decomposition, which is apparatus of Total Kjeldahl Nitrogen Test
(nitrogen determination method). After distilling apparatus is attached, 20 mL of 0.1N
759
 hydrochloric acid and 150 mL of freshly boiled and cooled water are into flask for
absorption. Tip of the condenser is submerged in the solution, 20 mL of sodium
hydroxide(1→20) is transferred into a flask for decomposition, heated while caring
generating bubbles, and 80~120 mL of distillate is obtained. It is titrated with 0.1N
sodium hydroxide solution (indicator : Methyl red solution), the consumed amount of
the solution is S(mL). Separately, perform the blank test, and the consumed amount
of 0.1N sodium hydroxide is B(mL). When measure the content of Galaturonic acid
with following equation, it should not be less than 65%.
Content of Galaturonic acid(%)= 19.41×V1W +V2+(B-S) ×100
(7) Sulfur dioxide : When Pectin is tested by Assay of sulfurous acid, hyposulfurous
acid, and salts Test in General Test Method in 「Standards and Specifications for
Foods」, its content should not be more than 50ppm.
(8) Acid Insoluble Ash : When 3 g of Pectin proceed as directed under Ash Test, the
content should not be more than 1.0%.
Loss on Drying When 3 g of Pectin is dried for 2 hours at 105℃, the weight loss
should not be more than 12%.

760
 Pectinase
Definition Pectinase is an enzyme obtained from cultures of Aspergillus niger, cultures
of Aspergillus oryzae where pectinase gene of Aspergillus aculeatus is inserted and
cultures of Aspergillus aculeatus to decompose pectin and pectin acid.
Polygalacturonase, pectinesterase, and pectin lyase are included. Dilutant or stabilizer
can be added for the purpose of activity adjustment and quality preservation.
Compositional Specifications of Pectinase
Description Pectinase is white～dark brown powder, particle, paste or colorless ~ dark
brown liquid.
Identification When Pectinase is proceeded as directed under Activity Test, it should have
the activity as Pectinase.
Purity (1) Lead : Accurately weigh 2 g of Pectinase and place it in a platinum or quartz
crucible. Add minute amount of sulfuric acid, wet, gradually heat and preliminarily
heat-treated at the temperature as low as possible. Again add 1 mL of sulfuric acid ,
gradually heat, ignite until it is heat-treated at 450～550℃. After heat-treating, add
minute amount of nitric acid(1→150) to the residue, again, add nitric acid(1→150) to
make 10 mL, test solution. Separately, weigh 1 mL of lead standard solution, add
nitric acid(1→150) to make 10 mL, reference solution. When test solution and
reference solution are tested by flame Atomic Absorption Spectrophotometry under
following operation condition, the absorbance of test solution should not be higher
than that of reference solution (not more than 5.0 ppm).
(2) Coliform Group ： When Pectinase proceed as directed under Microbe Test
Methods for Coliform Group in General Test Methods 「Standards and Specifications
for Foods」 it should not contain more than 30 cfu per 1 g of this product.
(3) Salmonella ： When Pectinase proceed as directed under Microbe Test Methods for
Salmonella in General Test Methods 「Standards and Specifications for Foods」 it
should be negative (-).
(4) E. Coli : When 25 g of Pectinase is tested by Microbe Test Methods for E. Coli in
General Test Method 「Standards and Specifications for Foods」, it should be
negative (-).
Activity Test (activity) Each of method 1, 2, and 3 is applied to polygalacturonase,
pectinesterase, and pectin lyase, respectively.

Method 1
Principle : This test is to measure the amount of reducing sugar of Galacturonic acid
generated by hydrolysis of pectic acid at pH 4.0, temperature 40℃.
Preparation of Test Solution : Test Solution is prepared by dilution a certain amount of
sample with citric acid buffer solution (pH 4.0) so that 1 mL contains 40∼60
Pectinase units.
Test Procedure : 10 mL of substrate solution is maintained in a 100 mL Erlenmeyer
761
 flask in a water bath for 5 minutes at 40℃. 1 mL of Test Solution is added to the
substrate solution, which is immediately shaken and mixed, allowed to stand for
exactly 30 minutes at 40℃, 3mL of anhydrous sodium carbonate solution(106→1,000)
is added, and reaction is stopped. 6 mL of 0.1 N iodine solution is added, which is
then shaken, mixed, and allowed to stand for 30 minutes in a dark place. After
adding 6 mL of 8 N sulfuric acid and the solution is quickly titrated with 0.02 N
sodium thiosulfate solution until the color of iodine almost disappear. Again 1 mL of
starch solution is added, 0.02 N sodium thiosulfate solution is drop-wise added,
titrated until the blue color disappear(AmL). Separately, a blank test is carried out
with 3 mL of anhydrous sodium carbonate solution(106→1,000) is transferred into a
100 mL erlenmeyer flask and 1 mL of test solution is added, shaken, and mixed. 10
mL of substrate solution is added, 6 mL of 0.1N iodine solution is added, shaken,
mixed, allowed to stand for 30 minutes in a dark place, and titrated same as test
solution. (BmL).
The enzyme activity is obtained by the following equation.
2 × 60 × 1
U/g= (B-A)×513× 100 30 W

513 : Amount of 1mmol iodine corresponding to 513μmol of galacturonic acid

W : Weight of sample contained in 1 mL Test Solution (g)
Definition of Activity : 1 Polygalacturonase unit corresponds to an amount of enzyme
that generates 1 μmol of galacturonic acid for 1 hour under the above conditions.
Solutions
∘Substrate Solutions : 1.0g of pectic acids(Sigma P3889 or its equivalent) is precisely
weighed, dried for 3 hours at 105℃, and measure the weight loss. Pectic acid
corresponding to 0.55 g of anhydrous is precisely weighed, dissolved in 80 mL of
citric acid buffer solution(pH 4.0). After dissolving, pH is adjusted to 4.0 with
trisodium citrate solution(29.4→100) or hydrochloric acid(9→100), citric acid buffer
solution(pH 4.0) is added to make 100mL.
∘Citric acid Buffer Solution (pH 4.0)
Solution A : 0.1N Hydrochloric acid
Solution B : 14.7 g of trisodium citrate is dissolved, and make to 1,000 mL with water.
pH of Solution B is adjusted to 4.0 with using solution A.
Method 2
Principle : This test is to measure the initial reaction rate from alkali consumption rate
by titrating with alkali, which is generated by liberating of ester group in pectic acid
at pH 4.8, temperature 30℃.
762
 Preparation of Test Solution : Test Solution is prepared by dilution a certain amount of
sample with water so that 1 mL contains 0.0007～0.006 unit.
Test Procedure : 20 mL of substrate solution is precisely weighed into a beaker, and
maintained in water bath at 30℃. 0.05N of sodium hydroxide solution is added to
substrate solution to bring pH 4.8, and 1 mL of test solution is added. While
adjusting to pH 4.8 for 2 minutes, observe the reaction, and the consumed amount
(mL) of 0.05N sodium hydroxide solution is A. Separately, for a blank test, 0.05N of
sodium hydroxide solution is added to substrate solution to bring pH 4.8, and 1 mL
of water is added. While adjusting to pH 4.8 for 2 minutes, the consumed amount
(mL) of 0.05N sodium hydroxide solution is B. The enzyme activity is obtained by
the following equation.
A-B
U/g = 20 × 2 ×
W
20 : Titrated amount(μl) of 0.05N sodium hydroxide corresponding to 1μmol
carboxyl group
2 : Reaction time (minute)
W : Weight of sample contained 1 mL of test solution (g)
Definition of Activity : 1 Pectinesterase unit is an amount of enzyme that liberates 1 μ
mol of carboxyl group from pectin for 1 minutes under the above conditions.
Solutions
Substrate Solutions : 5 g of Esterification pectinFluka 76282(pectin from apple, not
less than 70% methoxylated) or equivalent is precisely weighed, gently mixed with
800 mL of water maintained to 40℃, and suspended. It is dissolved thoroughly at the
temperature not more than 60℃ and cooled to room temperature. To this, 2.03g of
magnesium chloride is added, pH is adjusted to 4.8 with sodium hydroxide solution,
water is added to make 1,000 mL.
Method 3
Principle : This test is to measure the amount of unsaturated Galacturonic acid, which
is generated from decomposition of pectin at pH 5.8, temperature 30℃, by
absorbance.
Preparation of Test Solution : 0.5 g of Pectinase is dissolved in citric acid buffer
solution(pH 5.8) to make 100 mL, 3 mL of this solution is diluted with citric acid
buffer solution(pH 5.8) to make 25 mL, test solution.
Test Procedure: To 3 mL of substrate solution is maintained in a water bath at 30℃
for 5 minutes, 0.1 mL of test Solution is added and shortly shaken. Using water as a
reference solution, absorbance curve per minute of the test solution is prepared by
measuring absorbance every 1 minute, for 10 minutes, at 235 nm with 1cm cell.
763
 Repeat the same procedure three times. Linear section should be maintained at least
for 5 minutes (6 points). The change of absorbance should not be more than 0.03
per minute, the range of 0.02～0.03 is optimum.
The enzyme activity is obtained by the following equation.
ΔA235/Δt
U/mg = 0.01 × 3.1 ×
C
3.1 : Final reaction solution (mL)
C : Concentration of final test solution (mg/mL)
Definition of Activity : 1 Pectin lyase unit is the amount of enzyme increasing
absorbance 0.01 per minute under the above conditions.
Solutions
Substrate Solutions : 0.5 g of Pectin(Copenhagen Pectin X 2955, Sigma P9135 or its
equivalent) is transferred into a beaker, stirred with 2 mL of ethanol, 80 mL of
citric acid buffer solution(pH 5.8) is added with using magnetic stick, and stirred
while caring bubbles are not generated. pH of the solution is adjusted to 5.8 with
using solution A or solution B, and make 100mL with citric acid buffer solution(pH
5.8). This solution is allowed to settle in refrigerator for 1 night, next day,
centrifuged for 10 minutes at 12,000×g, filtered, and used.
Citric acid buffer solution(pH 5.8)
Solution A : 35.6g of Disodium hydrogen phosphate (2 hydrates) is dissolved with
water, and make to 1,000 mL.
Solution B : 21g of citric acid (1hydrate) is dissolved with water, and make to 1,000
mL.
57mL of Solution A and 43mL of Solution B are mixed well, and adjust to pH 5.8
with Solution A or Solution B.
Storage Standard of Pectinase
Pectinase is strongly hygroscopic, so should be stored in a cold dark place with
sealing tightly.

764
 Pepsin
Definition Pepsin is an enzyme obtained from extracts of the stomach and intestines of
pigs or other animals. Dilutant or stabilizer can be added for the purpose of activity
adjustment and quality preservation.
Compositional Specifications of Pepsin
Description Pepsin is white～deep brown powder, granule, paste or colorless~deep
brown liquid.
Identification When Pepsin is proceeded as directed under Activity Test, it should have
the activity as Pepsin.
Purity (1) Arsenic : It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(2) Lead ： When 5.0 g of Pepsin is tested by Atomic Absorption Spectrophotometry or
Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content should not be more
than 5.0 ppm.
(3) Coliform Group ： When Pepsin proceed as directed under Microbe Test Methods
for Coliform Group in General Test Methods in Food Code, it should not contain
more than 30 per 1 g of this product.
(4) Salmonella ： When Pepsin proceed as directed under Microbe Test Methods for
Salmonella in General Test Methods in Food Code, it should be negative (-).
(5) E. Coli : When Pepsin is tested by Microbe Test Methods for E. Coli in General
Test Method 「Standards and Specifications for Foods」, it should be negative (-).
Activity Test (activity)
∘Preparation of Test Solution : 100 mg of the sample or a certain amount of enzyme that
contains activity slightly higher than or similar to the Standard Solution is dissolved in
150 mL of hydrochloric acid solution. This solution should be used within 1 hour after
preparation.
∘Test Procedure : 5.0 mL each of Standard Solution is placed in two bottles containing
substrate solution. In two or more bottles, Test Solution is added so that one bottle
contains the same amount of pepsin as 5.0 mL of Standard Solution and other bottles
contain decrementally smaller amount of pepsin (for example, 5.0 mL, 4.9 mL, and 4.8
mL, etc.). When the amount of Test Solution should be not more than 5.0 mL, the
difference is supplemented with hydrochloric acid solution. The bottles are capped and
shaken upside down three times. The bottles are maintained in a water bath at 52 ±
0.5℃ for 2 hours and 30 minutes, agitating the contents equally every 10 minutes by
inverting the bottles once. Remove the bottles from the bath, the contents in the
bottles are transferred into each test container. Undigested albumin attached on the
inner walls of the bottles are washed with 50 mL of water and added to the test
containers. The contents in the container are well mixed and allowed to stand for 30
minutes. The volume of undigested albumin is measured. The average volume of the
precipitates in the two standard containers is obtained. The volume of the residues
from the Test Solution, that is closest to this average value, is marked as V (mL).
The enzyme activity is calculated by the following equation.
765
 Pepsin units/mg ＝ 3,000 ×
S
U
×
5.0
V

S : Weight of pepsin used in Standard Solution (mg)

U : Weight of sample(mg)
V : volume of the residues in Test Solution
Definition of Activity : 1 Pepsin unit corresponds to an amount of enzyme that digests
the coagulated egg albumin that is 3,000 times the weight of enzyme under the above
conditions.
Apparatus
Test Container : 100 mL conical container, that fits the following criteria, is used.
(1) Diameter for the bottom part should not be more than 1 cm.
(2) Appropriate for water and precipitate tube in ASTM standard method D 96-68.
(3) There should be 0.05 mL scale marks in a range of 0∼0.5 mL, 0.1 mL scale
marks in a range of 2∼3 mL, 0.2 mL scale marks in a range of 3∼5 mL, 1 mL scale
marks in a range of 5∼10mL, 5 mL scale marks in a range of 10∼25 mL, and scale
marks at 50 mL, 75 mL, and 100 mL. (note : Any container with similar shape and
scale marks can be used provided that the volume of residues can be measured with
similar accuracy.)
Solutions
∘Hydrochloric Acid Solution : 35 mL of 1 N hydrochloric acid is mixed with 385 mL of
water.
∘Substrate : 1～2 eggs are boiled for 15 minutes and rapidly cooled in cold water. Shells
and yolks of the eggs are removed completely. Egg whites are sieved
through No.40 mesh screen. First portion that passes through the sieve is
discarded.
∘Substrate Solution : 10.0 g of substrate is placed in a 100 mL wide mouth bottle (as
many as needed for the test), where 35 mL of hydrochloric acid
solution is added immediately. Egg white grains are finely ground
by an appropriate method. It is isothermalized at 52℃ before
testing.
∘Standard Solution : 100.0 mg of pepsin standard is precisely weighed and dissolved in
150 mL of hydrochloric acid solution. This solution is used within
1 hour after preparation.
Storage Standard of Pepsin
Pepsin is strongly hygroscopic, so should be stored in a cold dark place with sealing
tightly.
766
 Perilla Color
Definition Perilla Color is a pigment obtained by extracting leaves of perilla (Perilla
frutescens BRITT. Var. acuta KUDO.) of labiatae with ethyl alcohol. It major pigment
component is shisonin, malonyl shisonin. Dilutant, stabilizer, or solvent can be added
for the purpose of color value adjustment and quality preservation.
Compositional Specifications of Perilla Color
Content Color value of Perilla Color should be more than the indicated value.
Description Perilla Color is dark red liquid, paste, powder, or paste with a slight
characteristic scent.
Identification (1) A solution (1→100) of Perilla Color in citrate buffer solution (pH 3.0)
is red color and has a maximum absorption band near 520 nm.
(2) When the solution in (1) is alkalinized with sodium hydroxide solution (1→25), its
color changes to dark red.
Purity (1) Arsenic : It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(2) Lead : When 5.0 g of Perilla Color is tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content
should not be more than 10.0 ppm.
Assay (Color Value) Appropriate amount of Perilla Color is precisely weighted so that
the absorption is within 0.3～0.7 and dissolved in citrate buffer solution (pH 3.0) so
that the total volume is 100 mL (Test Solution). If necessary, the solution is
centrifuged and the supernatant is used. Using citrate buffer solution (pH 3.0) as a
reference solution, absorption A is measured at the maximum absorption near 520 nm
with 1cm path length. Color value is obtained using the following equation.
Color Value ＝
A × 10
Weight of the sample(g)

∘Citrate buffer solution (pH 3.0)

Solution 1： 1 ℓ of solution containing 121g of citric acid (C6H8O7․H2O).
Solution 2： 1 ℓ of solution containing 71.6g of dibasic sodium phosphate (Na2HPO4․
12H2O).
Solution 1 and Solution 2 are mixed well (159 : 41) and its pH is adjusted to 3.0.

767
 Perlite
Synonyms: Expanded perlite CAS No.: 130885-09-5

Definition Perlite is prepared by calcining mineral silicon dioxide at 800∼1,200℃.

Compositional Specifications of Perlite
Description Perlite is white or light gray powder.
Identification Proceed as directed under in Identification (1) for Diatomaceous Earth.
Purity (1) Water Solubles and pH : When Perlite proceed as directed under Purity (1) in
Diatomaceous Aarth, pH should be 5.0∼9.0, and the residues should not be more
than 10 mg.
(2) Hydrochloric Acid Solubles : When Perlite proceed as directed under Purity in
Diatomaceous Aarth, the content should not be more than 15 mg.
(3) Arsenic : It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(4) Lead : Proceed as directed under Purity (5) in Diatomaceous Earth and the
content should not be more than 10.0 ppm.
Hydrofluoric Acid Residue When Perlite proceed as directed under Hydrofluoric Acid
Residue in Diatomaceous Aarth, the content should not be more than 75 mg.
Loss on Ignition When Loss on Ignition is done at 1,000℃ for 30 minutes, weight loss
should not be more than 3%.

768
 Peroxyacetic Acid
Chemical Formula: C2H4O3
Molecular Weight: 76.05 CAS No.: 79-21-0

Definition Peroxyacetic acid is obtained by reacting both hydrogen peroxide and acetic
acid which contains peroxyacetic acid, hydrogen peroxide and acetic acid as active
ingredient, or by reacting peroxyacetic acid, acetic acid and caprylic acid(synonym :
octanoic acid) which contains peroxyacetic acid, peroxyoctanoic acid, hydrogen peroxide,
caprylic acid and acetic acid. However, 1-hydroxytiliden-1,1-dipophonic acid is able to
added for dilution or quality stability, etc.
Compositional Specifications of Peroxyacetic Acid
Content Peroxyacetic acid contains 5∼18% of peroxyacetic acid(C2H4O3), 15∼60% of
acetic acid(C2H4O2), 4∼25% of hydrogen peroxide(H2O2), not more than 1.0% of
1-hydroxytiliden-1,1-dipophonic acid, and not more than 10% of caprylic acid.
Description Peroxyacetic acid is a colorless, clear liquid. It has a peculiar stimulating
odor.
Assay (1) peroxyacetic acid and acetic acid: Weigh approximate 1 g of peroxyacetic
acid precisely, and add to 100 mL water, and use it as a test solution. Inject 5 mL of
methanol to an Octadexylicized silica gel mini-column(500mg), then pour 10mL of
water, and discard the spill. To this column, inject 10 mL of the test solution and take
the spill out into the 100 mL beaker. Then, pour 10mL of water and add the spillage
to the same beaker, add about 30 mL of water, and titrate it with a 0.1 mol/L sodium
hydroxide solution using a potentiometer. Use a glass electrode for the telltale and an
AgCl electrode for the reference electrode. Obtain the consumption a(mL) and b(mL)
of a 0.1mol/L sodium hydroxide solution at the 1st and 2nd inflection points, and
calculate the content of peroxyacetic acid and acetic acid according to the following
formula.
Cotent of Peroxyacetic acid(C2H4O3)(%) = (b-a) × 0.1 × 76.05
Sample (g)
Content of Acetic acid(C2H4O2)(%) = a × 0.1 × 60.05
Sample(g)
Column
Octadexylicized silica gel mini-column(500 mg): This column is filled with 0.5 g of
octadexylicized silica gel in a polyethylene tube that is 10∼25 mm diameter, or a
column that has an equivalent separation characteristic.
(2) Hydrogen peroxide: Weigh approximate 1 g of hydrogen peroxide and add water to
make 100 mL. Take exact 10 mL of this solution and put it into a 250 mL triangle
flask, and add 75 mL of 0.5 mol/L sulfuric acid, which is cooled down, to use as
test solution. Add 2 drops of ferroin solution to this test solution and titrate it with
769
 0.1 mol/L cesium sulfate(IV) solution. The end point of titration is the moment when
the orange color changes to a colorless color after a light red color. Amount of
hydrogen peroxide is calculated by the following formula.
Content = Consumption of 0.1 mol/L cesium sulfate(IV)0.1mol/L × 0.1 × 17.00
(%) Sample(g)
Test solution
Ferroin solution : Dissolve 0.7 g of ferrous sulfate(seven hydrate) and 1.78 g of
o-phenanthrolinate(one hydrate) in water to make 100 mL.
(3) Caprylic acid : Weigh approximate 0.7 g of caprylic acid and add mixture of
water/acetonitrile(1:1) to make exact 50 mL. Take 5 mL of this solution, and add
mixture of water/acetonitrile(1:1) to make exact 20 mL to use it as a test solution.
Weigh approximate 0.2 g of caprylic acid for quantitative and add mixture of
water/acetonitrile(1:1) to make exact 100 mL for use it as a standard solution. Take
exact 0.5 mL, 1mL 2.5 mL, 5 mL and 10 mL of the standard solution and add
mixture of water/acetonitrile(1:1) to make exact 20 mL as standard solution. Use 20
μL of each standard solutions and 20 μL of the test solution for the Liquid
Chromatography analysis. Draw a calibration curve by the peak area of caprylic acid
from each standard solutions. Substitute the peak area of caprylic acid from the test
solution to the calibration curve, and calculate the concentration(μg/mL) of caprylic
acid. Amount of caprylic acid is calculated by the following formula.
Concentration of solution(
Carprylicμg/mL)
acid in the test
Content(%) = Sample(g) × 50

Operating Conditions
Detector : Ultraviolet absorption spectrometer(210 nm wave)
Packing materials : 5μm of octadexylicized silica gel for Liquid Chromatography
Column tube : 4.6mm internal diameter, 25 cm length of stainless tube
Column temperature : 30 ℃
mobile phase : Dissolve 0.12 g of acetic acid in 350 mL of water, and add 650 mL of
acetonitrile
flaw rate : 1.0 mL/min.

770
 Persimmon Color
Definition Persimmon Color is obtained by fermenting and heat treating fruits of
persimmon of persimmon family (Diospyros kaki THUNB.). Major colorant is flavonoid.
Dilutant, stabilizer, or solvent can be added for the purpose of color value adjustment
and quality preservation.
Compositional Specifications of Persimmon Color
Content Color value of Persimmon Color should be higher than that is indicated
value.
Description Persimmon Color is reddish brown～blackish brown liquid, lump, powder, or
paste with a slight characteristic scent.
Identification (1) Test Solution obtained in Color Value for Persimmon Color becomes
reddish brown.
(2) Take 0.5 g of the sample, into 100 mL volumetric flask, add water to volume.
When 10 mL of this solution is acidified with 1 mL of hydrochloric acid, reddish
brown～blackish brown precipitates are formed.
(3) Water is added to 0.5 g of Persimmon Color so that the total volume is 100 mL.
When 2 mL of 2% ferric chloride solution(1→10) is added to 10 mL of this solution,
blackish brown precipitates are formed.
Purity (1) Arsenic ： It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(2) Lead : When 5.0 g of Persimmon Color is tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content
should not be more than 10.0 ppm.
Assay(Color value) Appropriate amount of Persimmon Color is weighed so that the
absorbance to be measured will within a range of 0.3～0.7. Citric acid-dibasic sodium
phosphate buffer solution with pH 7.0 is added so that the total volume is 100 mL,
and this is used as the Test Solution. If necessary, the solution is centrifuged and the
supernatant is used. Using citric acid-dibasic sodium phosphate buffer solution with pH
7.0 as a reference solution, absorption A is measured at 500 nm wavelength with 1cm
path length. Color value is obtained using the following equation.
Color Value(
A × 10
) ＝
weight of the sample(g)

Citric acid·dibasic sodium phosphate buffer solution (pH 7.0)

∘Solution 1 ： 0.1 M citric acid solution：1 L of solution containing 21.01g of citric acid
(C6H8O7․H2O).
∘Solution 2 ： 0.2 M dibasic sodium phosphate solution： 1 L of solution containing 71.63
g of dibasic sodium phosphate (Na2HPO4․12H2O).
Solution 1 and Solution 2 are mixed well (35:165) and its pH is adjusted to 7.0.

771
 Petroleum Wax
Refined Paraffin Wax : Microcrystalline Wax
INS No.: 905c(i), 905c(ii)
Synonyms: Refined paraffin wax;
Microcrystalline wax CAS No.: 63231-60-7

Definition Petroleum Wax is prepared by removing with propanol lake, lead, and oil
from vacuum distillation residue oil of crude oil, in the cold. Or it can be prepared by
treating with furfural, in the hot, and followed by removal of furfural. It consists of
branched hydrocarbons (C30～C60).
Compositional Specifications of Petroleum Wax
Description Petroleum Wax is translucent, tasteless, and odorless wax.
Identification Infrared spectra of Petroleum Wax (observed by IR spectrophotometry)
shows the following pattern. Petroleum Wax is melted and determined using potassium
bromide plate.
(1) Purified Petroleum Wax

(2) Microcrystalline Wax

Purity (1) Arsenic : It should be no more than 2.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(2) Lead : When 5.0 g of Petroleum Wax is tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content
should not be more than 3.0 ppm.
(3) Melting Point : When Petroleum Wax determined it by melting point method, it
should be within the indicated range (48∼93℃).
Residue on Ignition When Residue on Ignition is done with aPetroleum Wax, the amount
of residue should not be more than 0.1%.
772
 Phaffia Color
Definition Phaffia Color is a pigment obtained by extracting the cultures of an enzyme
(Phaffia rhodozyma MILLER) with ethyl alcohol. It major pigment component is
Astaxanthin of carotinoids. Diluent, stabilizer, or solvent can be added for the purpose
of color value adjustment and quality preservation.
Compositional Specifications of Phaffia Color
Content Color value ( )of Phaffia Color should be more than the indicated value.
Description Phaffia Color is reddish brown～brown with a slight characteristic scent..
Identification A solution of Phaffia Color in petroleum ether (1→500) is orange in color
and has a maximum absorption band near 474 nm.
Purity (1) Arsenic ： It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(2) Lead : When 5.0 g of Phaffia Color is tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content
should not be more than 10.0 ppm.
(3) Residual Solvents : When Phaffia Color is tested by Purity (5) for Paprika Extract
Pigments, the content of residual solvents should be,
Acetone Not more than 30ppm
Hexane Not more than 25ppm
Assay(Color Value) An appropriate amount of Phaffia Color is precisely weighted and
mixed with 10mL of Dimethylsulfoxide (pre-heated to 55℃) so that the measured
absorption lies within a range of 0.3～0.7. It is then reacted for 8 minutes in a 55℃
water bath. To this reaction mixture, 3 mL of phosphate buffer solution (pH 7.0) and
30 mL of petroleum ether are added. It is well mixed and set aside to separate phases.
Petroleum ether phase is collected. The lower aqueous phase is extracted twice with
30 mL each of petroleum ether, which is added to the previous petroleum ether phase.
The total volume is brought up to 100 mL with petroleum ether (Test Solution). If
necessary, the supernatant is centrifuged for use. Color value is obtained using the
following equation. Using petroleum ether as a reference, absorption A of the Test
Solution is measured at a maximum absorption band near 474 nm with 1cm path length.
Color value is obtained by the following equation.
A × 10
Color value( ) ＝
Weight of the sample(g)

∘Phosphate Buffer Solution (pH 7.0)

Solution 1 ： 53.7 g of sodium phosphate, dibasic (Na2HPO4․12H2O) dissolve in water
(total volume = 1,000 mL).
Solution 2 ： 20.4 g of potassium phosphate, monobasic(KH2PO4) dissolve in water(total
volume = 1,000 mL).
Solutions 1 & 2 are well mixed in a volume ratio of 80 : 45 and the pH is adjusted to 7.0.

773
 DL-Phenylalanine
C6H5CH2CH(NH2)COOH
Chemical Formula: C9H11NO2
Molecular Weight: 165.19
Synonyms: DL-α-Amino-β-phenylpropionic CAS No.: 150-30-1
acid

Compositional Specifications of DL-Phenylalanine

Content DL-Phenylalanin, when calculated on the dried basis, should contain within a
range of 98.5∼101.5% of DL-Phenylalanine (C9H11NO2).
Description DL-Phenylalanin is white crystalline platelet. It is odorless.
Identification (1) To 5 mL of DL-Phenylalanin solution (1→1,000), add 1 mL of
ninhydrine standard solution and heat it. This solution becomes violet.
(2) To 5 mL of DL-Phenylalanin solution (1→1,000), add a few drops of potassium
bichromate solution and heat. Then a characteristic scent is generated.
(3) To 10 mg of DL-Phenylalanin, add 0.5 g of potassium nitrate and 2 mL of sulfuric
acid, and heat for 20 minutes in a water bath. After cooling, 2 mL of hydroxylamine
solution is added and the solution is kept for 10 minutes in an ice bath. 10 mL of
sodium hydroxide solution is added immediately and the solution is set-aside. The
solution becomes violet.
Purity (1) Lead : When 5.0 g of DL-Phenylalanine is tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content
should not be more than 5.0 ppm.
Loss on Drying When DL-Phenylalanin is dried for 2 hours at 105℃, the weight loss
should not be more than 0.2%.
Residue on Ignition When thermogravimetric analysis is done with 1 g of
DL-Phenylalanin, the amount of residue should not be more than 0.3%.
Assay Approximately 0.5 g of DL-Phenylalanin, previously dried for 2 hours at 105℃, is
precisely weighed, is dissolved in 70 mL of formic acid (for non-aqueous titration).
This solution is titrated with 0.1 N perchloric acid solution (indicator : 2 drops of
crystal violet buffered in glacial acetic acid). At the end point, the solution becomes
from violet to blue, then to green. Separately, a blank test is carried out by the same
procedure.
1 mL of 0.1 N perchloric acid solution ＝ 16.52 mg C9H11NO2

774
 L-Phenylalanine

Chemical Formula: C9H 11O 2N

Molecular Weight: 165.19
Synonyms: L-α-Amino-β-phenylpropionic acid CAS No.: 63-91-2

Compositional Specifications of L-Phenylalanine

Content L-Phenylalanine. when calculated on the dried basis, should contain within a
range of 98.5～102.0% of L-phenylalanine (C9H11O2N).
Description L-Phenylalanine occurs as white crystals or crystalline powder and has a
slightly bitter taste.
Identification (1) To 5 mL of L-Phenylalanine solution (1→1000), add 1 mL of potassium
dichromate solution (1→1000). Upon heating the solution, characteristic scent is
generated.
(2) To 5 mL of L-Phenylalanine solution (1→1.000), add 1 mL of ninhydrin solution (1
→1,000), and heat for 3 minutes. A red-purple to blue-purple color becomes.
(3) To 10 mg of L-Phenylalanine, add 0.5 g of potassium nitrate and 2 mL of sulfuric
acid, heat in a water bath for 20 minutes. After cooling, add 5 mL of hydroxylamine
hydrochloride solution (1→10), set aside in ice water for 10 minutes. Add 8 mL of
40% sodium hydroxide solution , and set aside. A red-purple color becomes.
Purity (1) Clarity and Color of Solution : When 1 g of L-Phenylalanine is dissolved in
100 mL of water, the solution should be colorless and almost clear.
(2) pH : pH of L-Phenylalanine solution (1→100) should be within a range of 5.4~6.0.
(3) Specific Rotation : Approximately 1 g of L-Phenylalanineis, previously dried for 3
hours at 105℃ and precisely weighed, is dissolved in 50 mL of water. Optical rotation of
this solution should be within a range of ＝-33.0∼-35.2°.
(4) Arsenic : It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(5) Lead : When 5.0 g of L-Phenylalanine is tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content
should not be more than 5.0 ppm.
(6) Chloride : When 0.5 g of L-Phenylalanine is proceeded as directed under chloride,
its content should not be more than the amount that corresponds to 0.3 mL of 0.01
N hydrochloric acid.
Loss on Drying When L-Phenylalanine is dried for 3 hours at 105℃, the weight loss
should not be more than 0.3%.
Residue on Ignition When thermogravimetric analysis is done with L-Phenylalanine, the
775
 residue should not be more than 0.1%.
Assay 0.3 g of L-Phenylalanine, previously dried and accurately weighed, is proceeded
as directed under Assay in 「Glycine」.
1 mL of 0.l N perchloric acid = 16.52 mg of C9H11O2N

776
 Phenylethyl Acetate
Phenylethyl Acetate

Chemical Formula: C10H12O2

Molecular Weight: 164.20
Synonyms: 2-Phenylethyl acetate; Benzyl
CAS No.: 103-45-7
carbinyl acetate

Compositional Specifications of Phenethyl Acetate

Content Phenylethyl Acetate should contain not less than 98.0% of Phenylethyl acetate
(C10H12O2).
Description Phenylethyl Acetate is a colorless, transparent liquid having a characteristic
odor.
Identification To 1 mL of Phenylethyl Acetate, add 5 mL of 10% alcoholic solution of
potassium hydroxide, equip with a reflux condenser, and heat in a water bath for 20
minutes. The characteristic odor disappears. Cool, and add 8 mL of water and 1 mL of
diluted hydrochloric acid. The solution responds to the test for Acetate (C) in
Identification.
Purity (1) Specific Gravity : Specific gravity of Phenylethyl Acetate should be within a
range of 1.030～1.034.
(2) Refractive Index : Refractive Index of Phenylethyl Acetate should be within a range
of 1.497～1.501.
(3) Clarity and Color of Solution : When 1 mL of Phenylethyl Acetate is dissolved in 2
mL of 70% alcohol, the solution should be clear.
(4) Acid Value : Acid value of Phenylethyl Acetate is tested by Acid Value in Flavoring
Substance Test. It should not be more than 1.
Assay Accurately weigh about 1 g of Phenylethyl Acetate, and proceed as directed
under Ester Value and Ester Content in Flavoring Substances Tests.
1 mL of 0.5 N alcoholic solution of potassium hydroxide = 82.10 mg of C10H12O2

777
 Phosphodiesterase
Definition Phosphodiesterase is an enzyme obtained from cultures of Penicillium citrinum.
Dilutant or stabilizer can be added for the purpose of activity adjustment and quality
preservation.
Compositional Specifications of Phosphodiesterase
Description Phosphodiesterase is white ~ dark brown power, granular, pasty substances
or colorless ~ dark brown liquid.
Identification When Phosphodiesterase is proceeded as directed under Activity Test, it
should have the activity as Phosphodiesterase.
Purity (1) Arsenic ： It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(2) Lead ： When 5.0 g of Phosphodiesterase is tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content
should not be more than 5.0 ppm.
(3) Coliform Group ： Phosphodiesterase proceed as directed under Microbe Test
Methods in Coliform Group in General Test Methods in 「Standards and Specifications
for Foods」. It should contain not more than 30 colonies per 1 g of this product.
(4) Salmonella : When Phosphodiesterase is tested by Microbe Test Methods for
Salmonella in General Test Method 「Standards and Specifications for Foods」, it
should be negative (-).
(5) E. Coli : When 25 g of Phosphodiesterase is tested by Microbe Test Methods for
E. Coli in General Test Method 「Standards and Specifications for Foods」, it should
be negative (-).
Activity Test (activity)
Analysis principle : Adenosine 3'-monophosphate sodium salt substrate by treating with
Phosphodiesterase produce phosphoric acid Change it to phosphomolybdic acid under
acidic condition of perchloric acid. Reduce it with amidol solution and it produces
molybdenum blue. Activity test is based on colorimetry of the blue color of
molybdenum blue.
Preparation of Test Solution : When Phosphodiesterase is weighted, use water so that 1
mL of the final diluent solution contains 0.09~0.43 Phosphodiesterase unit.
Preparation of standard curve : Weigh 0.142 g of disodium hydrogen phosphate(anhydrous
form) and make to volume to 100 mL(10µ㏖/mL.). Take precisely 1 mL, 5 mL, 10 mL,
15 mL, 20 mL of this solution. Then add water to each solution to make to 100 mL.
This solution is used as each standard solution. Take 0.5 mL of this solution and add 4
mL of 6% perchloric acid solution to each solution. Then immediately shake it to mix.
Add 0.4 mL of amidol solution and shake it to mix. Add precisely 0.2 mL of ammonium
molybdate solution(8.3→100) and shake it to mix. Using water as a reference solution,
absorbance(A1, A2, A3, A4 and A5) of each solution is measured at wavelength 750 nm.
Separately, take 0.5 mL of water and add 4 mL of 6% perchloric acid solution and
shake it to mix. And then add 0.4 mL of amidol solution and shake it to mix. Add
precisely 0.2 mL of ammonium molybdate solution(8.3→100) and shake it to mix. Using
778
 water as a reference solution, absorbance(A0) is measured at wavelength 750 nm. The
concentration(µ㏖/mL) of phosphoric acid of each solution is plotted along the X axis
and the absorbance(An-A0) is plotted along the Y axis. Prepare standard curve of
phosphoric acid. And extinction coefficient of phosphoric acid is calculated by standard
curve.
Procedure : Take 0.4 mL of substrate solution into tube, keep it at 70±0.5℃ precisely
for 5 minutes. Then add 0.1 mL of test solution and shake it to mix. Keep this solution
at 70±0.5℃ precisely for 15 minutes to react. Add 4 mL of 6% perchloric acid solution
and shake it to mix. And then add 0.4 mL of amidol solution and shake it to mix. Add
precisely 0.2 mL of ammonium molybdate solution(8.3→100) and shake it to mix. Keep
it in running water for 15 minutes and using water as a reference solution.
Absorbance(AT) of enzyme reaction solution is measured at wavelength 750 nm.
Separately, take 0.4 mL of substrate solution and add 4 mL of 6% perchloric acid
solution and shake it to mix. And then add 0.1 mL of test solution and shake it to mix.
And then add 0.4 mL of amidol solution and shake it to mix. Add 0.2 mL of ammonium
molybdate solution(8.3→100) and shake it to mix. Keep it in running water for 15
minutes and using water as a reference solution. Absorbance(AB) of blank enzyme test
solution is measured at wavelength 750 nm.
Activity of an enzyme is calculated by the following equation.
Phosphodiesteras
e = (AT-AB) ×
1 5.1 1 1
(units/g)
× × ×
E 0.1 15 W

AT : Absorbance of enzyme reaction solution

AB : Absorbance of blank enzyme test solution
E : Extinction coefficient(absorbance of concentration(µ㏖/mL) of phosphoric acid in 5.1
mL of amount of the total reaction solution)
15 : Reaction time(min)
W : Weight of sample in 1 mL of test solution(g)
Definition of Activity ： 1 Phosphodiesterase unit corresponds to the amount of enzyme
which separates 1 μmol of phosphoric acid per minute from the substrate under the
conditions above.
Reagent
Substrate solution : Dissolve 0.113 g of 4-Nitrophenyl-α-D-glucopyranoside in 35 mL of
water. And add 5 mL of 1N acetic acid ⦁sodium acetate buffer solution(pH 5.0) to this
solution. Then add water to make to 50 mL. The solution is prepared before use.
Substrate solution : Dry 0.1 g of adenosine 3'-monophosphate sodium salt in advace at
105℃ for 4 hours. And calculate loss on drying. Weigh precisely adenosine
3'-monophosphate sodium salt as the dried basis corresponding to 0.0183 g. And
dissolve it in 10mL of barbital sodium⦁ hydrochloric acid buffer solution(pH 5.0). Then
filter it with membrane filter(0.45㎛). The solution is prepared before use.
Amidol solution : Weigh 0.5 g of amidol and 10 g of sodium sulfite. Dissolve them in
779
 water to make to 50 mL and filter this solution. The solution is prepared before use.
6% perchloric acid solution : Dilute 20 mL of 60% perchloric acid with water to make to
200 mL.
Barbital sodium⦁ hydrochloric acid buffer solution(pH 5.0) : Take 100 mL of barbital
sodium⦁ sodium acetate buffer solution(1/7mol/L) and 40 mL of sodium chloride
solution(8.5→100). Add 100 mL of water to this solution and adjust pH to 5.0 with 1N
hydrochloric acid. Then add water to make to 500 mL.
Barbital sodium⦁ sodium acetate buffer solution(1/7mol/L) : Weigh 5.88g of barbital
sodium and 2.34g of sodium acetic anhydride. And add water to make to 200 mL.
Storage Standard of Phosphodiesterase
Phosphodiesterase should be stored in a hermetic container in a cold dark place.

780
 Phospholipase
Definition Phospholipase includes Phospholipase A2, Phospholipase D, and Phospholipase
B. Phospholipase A2 is an enzyme obtained from an extract of pig pancreas tissues.
However, dilutant or stabilizer can be added for the purpose of activity adjustment and
quality preservation. Phospholipase D is obtained from the culture of Streptomyces
griseus. However, dilutant or stabilizer can be added for the purpose of activity
adjustment and quality preservation. Phospholipase B is an enzyme obtained from the
culture of Aspergillus niger.
Compositional Specifications of Phospholipase
Description Phospholipase is white～dark brown powder, particle, paste or colorless ~
dark brown liquid.
Identification When Phospholipase is proceeded as directed under Activity Test, it should
have the activity as Phospholipase.
Purity (1) Arsenic : It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(2) Lead : When 5.0 g of Phospholipase is tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content
should not be more than 5.0 ppm.
(3) Coliform Group ： When Phospholipase proceed as directed under Microbiological
Methods for Coliform Group in General Testing Methods in 「Standards and
Specifications for Foods」, it should not contain more than 30 per 1 g of this
product.
(4) Salmonella ： When Phospholipase proceed as directed under Microbiological
Methods for Salmonella in General Testing Methods in 「Standards and Specifications
for Foods」, it should be negative (-).
(5) E. coli : When Phospholipase proceed as directed under Microbiological Methods for
E. coli in General Testing Methods in 「Standards and Specifications for Foods」, it
should be negative (-).
Activity Test (activity) Phospholipase A2 is done by Method 1, and Phospholipase D is
done by Method 2. Phopholipase B is applied by Method 3.

Method 1
∘Analysis Principle ： Activity test is based on hydrolysis of the substrate at 40℃ for 5
minutes and pH 8.0.
∘Preparation of Test Solution： A suitable amount of sample is diluted with water so that
the solution contains 3～5 IU per 0.5 mL.
∘Test Procedure： 25 mL of substrate solution is added to a beaker, which is maintained
in a 40℃ water bath for 10 minutes to equilibrate. 0.5 mL of Test Solution is added to
the 40℃ substrate solution. After exactly 5 minutes, 10 mL of modified alcohol is
added and stirred immediately to stop the reaction. It is then taken out of the water
bath and titrated with 0.02 N sodium hydroxide solution to pH 8.0. The consumed
781
 amount is S (mL). Separately, 25 mL of substrate solution, 10 mL of modified alcohol,
and 0.5 mL of Test Solution is sequentially mixed. This solution is tested by the Test
Procedure above and the consumed amount of 0.02 N sodium hydroxide solution is B
(mL).
Activity of an enzyme(phospholipase A2) is calculated by the following equation.
The phospholipase A 2 Activity (U/g) (S - B) × N×10 ×F
3
= 5 W
N ： Normality of sodium hydroxide solution
103 ： Conversion factor from ｍmol to μmol for acid
W ： Weight of sample(g)
5 ： Reaction time(minutes)
F : Dilution factor of test solution
Definition of Activity：1 Phospholipase A2 Unit(U) corresponds to an amount of
enzyme that frees 1μmo1 of acid (H+) from substrate per minute under the test
conditions above.
Solutions
∘0.016 M Sodium Deoxy Cholate Solution ： 6.7 g of sodium deoxy cholate
(C24H39NaO4) is dissolve in water (total volume = 1,000 mL).
∘0.32M Calcium Chloride Solution ： 4.7 g of calcium chloride (CaCl2․2H2O) is dissolve
in water (total volume = 100 mL).
∘Substrate Suspension ： One egg yolk is homogenized in 100 mL of water, which is
filtered through a twofold gauze. 5 mL of 0.32 M calcium
chloride solution is added to the filtrate.
∘Substrate Solution ： 100 mL of substrate suspension and 50 mL of 0.016 N sodium
deoxy cholate solution are mixed, where water is added to bring
the total volume to 250 mL. pH of the mixture is adjusted to 8.0
with 0.5 N sodium hydroxide solution.
Method 2
∘Analysis Principle ： Activity test is based on hydrolysis of Lecithin at 37℃, pH 5.5.
∘Preparation of Test Solution： A suitable amount of sample is diluted with Tris-maleic
acid buffer so that the solution contains 0.1～0.2 Units per 1 mL.
∘Test Procedure：Weight accurately 0.1 mL of substrate solution, 0.1 mL of Tris-maleic
acid buffer, 0.05 mL of 0.1 M Calcium Chloride, 0.15 mL of 7.5% Triton X-100
solution, and mix well. Equilibrate the mixture at 37℃ for 5 minutes. Add accurately
0.1 mL of test solution to this solution, and shake immediately. Set it aside at 37℃ for
10 minutes precisely, and add 0.2 mL of Tris-EDTA solution accuratly. Mix this
solution, and heat for 5 minutes in a boiling water bath precisely. After cooling, add 4
mL of colorizing solution accurately and shake. It is set aside for 20 minutes at 37℃.
782
 Absorption of the this solution is measured at 500 nm using water as a reference.
Separately, absorption (AB) is measured using water instead of test solution under same
procedure. Separately, absorption (As) is measured using 0.1 mL of Choline Chloride
standard solution instead of test solution by proceeding same procedure.
Activity of an enzyme(phospholipase D) is calculated by the following equation.
the
= phospholipase D Activity (U/g) As-A × 10 × W
A-A
B 1.43 1
B

A : Absorbance of enzyme test solution

AB : Absorbance of enzyme blank test solutio
AS : Absorbance of Choline Chloride standard solution
1.43 : Content of Choline Chloride standard solution(mmol/L)
10 : Reaction time(minutes)
Definition of Activity：1 Phospholipase D Unit(U) corresponds to an amount of enzyme
that 1μmo1 of Choline from substrate per minute under the test conditions above.
Solutions
∘Standard Solution：Dissolve 0.2 g of choline chloride exactly in water to make 1,000
mL(1.43mM).
∘Substrate Solution：Dissolve 0.5 g of Lecithin(Epikuron 200 of Cargill Inc., or its
equivalent) in 9.5 mL of water. Set it aside for a day.
∘Tris-maleic acid Buffer(pH 5.5) : Weight separately 1.12 g of Tris(hydroxy
ethyl)aminomethane and 1.16 g of Maleic acid, and
dissolve each samples in water to make 1,000 mL.
Measure 25 mL of the solution, and add 0.1N Sodium
Hydroxide solution to adjust pH 5.5. Add water to
make 100 mL.
∘0.1M Calcium Chloride Solution : Weight 1.47 g of Calcium Chloride in water to make
100 mL.
∘Triton X-100 Solution : Weight 7.5 g of Triton- 100polyoxyethylene(10) octyl phenyl
ether in water to make 100 mL.
∘Tris-EDTA solution : Dissolve 22.6 g of Ethylenediaminetetraacetic acid in Tris-Chloride
Buffer Solution(pH 8.0) to make 1,000 mL.
∘Tris-Chloride Buffer Solution : Dissolve 12.1 g of Tris in water to make 100 mL, and
add 32 mL of 2M Hydrochloric acid and 800 mL of
water. If necessary, adjust pH 8.0 by adding Sodium
Hydroxide solution or Hydrochloric acid, and make 1,000
mL with water.
∘Colorizing solution : Dissolve 3 Unit of choline oxidase, 6 Unit of peroxidase, 0.001 g of
phenol, 0.0006 g of 4-aminoantipyrine in 4 mL of HEPES Buffer
Solution(pH 7.4).
783
∘HEPES Buffer Solution(pH 7.4) : Weight 11.9 g of N -2-hydroxy ethylpiperazine
-N '-2-ethanesulfonic acid and dissolve it in water to make
600 mL. Adjust pH 7.4 with 0.05 N Sodium Hydroxide
solution, and make 1,000 mL with water.
Method 3
∘Analysis Principle：This activity test is based on measurement of violet-colored product
that is obtained by acylating non-esterified fatty acids, obtained by hydrolysis of
lisophosphatidic choline at 55℃, pH 4.5, with coenzyme A and acyl coenzyme A
synthetase and then activating by oxidase and peroxidase using spectroscopic method
at 550nm.
∘Preparation of Test Solution： Phospholipase B is dissolved with distilled water so that
the solution contains 0.4～0.9 Units per 1mL.
∘Test Procedure : Place 0.5mL of substrate solution into test tube for enzyme test and
allow to stand for 5 minutes at 55±0.1℃. Separately, 0.5mL of colorizing solution A is
transferred into test tube for colorizing solution and isothermalized at 37±0.1℃. Pipette
50μl of test solution into test tube for enzyme test and react for 10 minutes. 50μl of
reacting solution is transferred into test tube for colorizing solution isothermalized at
37℃. After having a reaction for 10 minutes, add 1mL of colorizing solution B and
react for 10 minutes. Then, shake each test tube to mix well. Using distilled water as
a reference, absorbance of each solution is measured at 550nm. For substrate blank
test, add 50μl of distilled water, instead of test solution. Process in the same manner
with enzyme test.
∘Preparation of calibration curve : 1.0 μmol/mL oleic acid in NEFA C kit is diluted to
each concentration to 0.25, 0.5, 0.75, and 1.0 μmol/mL. These solutions is used as
standard solution. Transfer 50μl of each of the standard solution into 0.5mL of
colorizing solution A which is previously isothermalized at 37℃. React for 10 minutes
and add 1.0mL of colorizing solution B. After having a reaction, shake each test tube
to mix well. Using distilled water as a reference, absorbance of each solution is
measured at 550nm and prepare calibration curve. The activity of the enzyme
preparation is calculated by the following equation.
The activity (Units/g) = W P× T
P : Amount of fatty acid that is produced by enzyme reaction(μmole) =
Volume of enzyme reaction
solution(0.55mL)
× Amount of the produced fatty acid*
Volume of colorizing reaction
solution(0.05mL)

W : Amount of enzyme in enzyme test solution =

Weight of the sample(g)
× Amount of enzyme test solution(0.05mL)
Volume of diluted solution(mL)

784
* : The amount of the produced fatty acid is the value of the absorbance of the sample
less that of the blank test solution
T : Reaction time(minutes)
Definition of Activity : 1 unit of phospholipase B is the amount of enzyme that
decompose 1μmole of fatty acids from the substrate per minute under the test condition
as above.
Solutions
Substrate solution : 0.05g of L-α-lysophosphatidyl choline(Sigma L-4129 or its
equivalent) is dissolved in 5mL of buffer solution and is diluted with water to make
10mL of substrate solution.
0.05M Acetic acid buffer solution(pH 4.5) : 6.1mL of 0.5M acetic acid and 3.9mL of
0.5M sodium acetate(4.1g of sodium acetate anhydrous is dissolved in water to 100mL)
are mixed, and adjusted to pH 4.5 by using 0.5M acetic acid. Then dilute the solution
with water to make volume of 100mL.
Colorizing solution A, B : Use the solution A and B in NEFA kit(Wako chemical, Wako
Diagnostics).
Standard solution : Use oleic acid standard solution in NEFA kit.
Storage Standards of Phospholipase
Phospholipase should be stored in cold and dark container.

785
 Phosphoric Acid
Chemical Formula: H3PO4

Molecular Weight: 98.00 INS No.: 338

Synonyms: Orthophosphoric acid;
Monophosphoric acid CAS No.: 7664-38-2

Compositional Specifications of Phosphoric Acid

Content Phosphoric Acid should contain not less than 75.0% of phosphoric acid (H3PO4).
Description Phosphoric Acid is a colorless, transparent syrupy liquid. It is odorless.
Identification (1) Phosphoric Acid solution (1→20) is acidic.
(2) To Phosphoric Acid solution (1→20), add 2～3 drops of phenolphthalein solution,
and neutralize with sodium hydroxide solution. The solution responds to the test for
Phosphate.
Purity (1) Chloride : 1.78 g of Phosphoric Acid is tested by Chloride Limit Test, and its
content should not be more than 200 ppm.
(2) Sulfate : When 0.2 g of Phosphoric Acid is dissolved in water to make 50 mL of
solution and tested by Sulfate Limit Test, its content should not be more than the
amount that corresponds to 0.6 mL of 0.01 N sulfuric acid.
(3) Nitrate : 3.48 g of Phosphoric Acid is dissolved in 10 mL of water, where 5 mg
of sodium chloride is added. When 0.1 mL of indigocarmin solution and 10 mL of
sulfuric acid are added to this solution, the blue color of the solution should not
disappear in 5 minutes (Not more than 5 ppm).
∘Indigocarmin solution : 0.18 g of indigocarmin is dissolved in water to make 100 mL
solution.
(4) Arsenic : It should be no more than 2.6 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(5) Lead : When 5.0 g of Phosphoric Acid is tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content
should not be more than 4.0 ppm.
(6) Cadmium : When 5.0 g of Phosphoric Acid is tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content
should not be more than 1.0 ppm.
(7) Mercury : When Phosphoric Acid is tested by Mercury Limit Test, its content
should not be more than 1.0 ppm.
(8) Volatile Acid : 60.05 g of Phosphoric Acid is dissolved in 75 mL of freshly and
cooled water, which is distilled to 50 mL. It is titrated with 0.1 N sodium hydroxide
solution. The consumed amount of titrant should not exceed 0.1 mL.
Indicator : Phenolphthalein solution (Not more than 10 ppm as acetic acid)
(9) Fluoride : 1 g of Phosphoric Acid is precisely weighed and is tested by purity (8)
for 「Calcium Citrate」, its content should not be more than 10 ppm.
Assay Accurately weigh about 1.5 g of Phosphoric Acid, dissolve in 25 mL of water,
786
keep the temperature at about 15℃, and titrate with 1 N sodium hydroxide (indicator :
5 drops of thymol phthalein solution) until the color of the solution changes to light
blue.
1 mL of 1 N sodium hydroxide = 49.00 mg of H3PO4

787
 Phytic Acid

Chemical Formula: C6H18O24P6 INS No.: 391

Molecular Weight: 660.04 CAS No.: 83-86-3

Definition Phytic Acid is obtained by extracting with water or acidic aqueous solution
from rice (Oryza sativa LINNE) bran or corn (Zea mays LINNE) seeds of gramineae,
followed by purification. It's major component is Inositol hexaphosphoric acid.
Compositional Specifications of Phytic Acid
Content Phytic Acid contains 48.0∼52.0% of phytic acid (C6H18O24P6 ＝ 660.08).
Description Phytic Acid is clear scentless pale yellow syrup-phase liquid with a strongly
acidic taste.
Identification (1) 3 drops of phenolphthalein TS is added to an aqueous solution (1→10)
of this additive, which is neutralized by sodium hydroxide solution. When silver
nitrate solution (1→100) is added to this solution, white colloidal precipitation is
established.
(2) 3 mL of sulfuric acid is added to 1 mL of Phytic Acid, which is hydrolyzed by
heating for 3 hours in a Kjeldahl flask. Add phenolphthalein TS, and neutralize the
solution with sodium hydroxide solution. The neutralized solution shows the reaction
(2) of Phosphates in Identification.
(3) Add 7 mL of 30% sulfuric acid, and hydrolyze by heating for 5 hours at 130℃ in a
sealed tube. Neutralize it with sodium hydroxide solution, and add some water to the
50 mL. After adding 0.5 g of activated carbon, it is stirred for 10 minutes and 30 mL
of filtered solution is taken. 6 mL of nitric acid is added to 5 mL of this filtrate,
which is evaporated to dryness in a water bath. 0.5 mL of barium chloride solution
(1→10) is added to a small portion of the residue. When this is evaporated to
dryness in a water bath, the residue becomes red color.
Purity (1) Chloride : 0.4 g of Phytic Acid is diluted to 10 mL with water. This solution
is used as the test solution. The content should not be more than that amount
788
 corresponds to 0.45 mL of 0.01 N hydrochloric acid under Chloride Test.
(2) Sulfate : 0.4 g of Phytic Acid is diluted to 10 mL with water. This solution is used
as the test solution. The content should not be more than that amount corresponds
to 0.6 mL of 0.01 N sulfuric acid under Sulfate Limit Test.
(3) Arsenic : It should be no more than 3.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(4) Lead : When 5.0 g of Phytic Acid is tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content
should not be more than 2.0 ppm.
(5) Free Inorganic Phosphorus : Dissolve 1.0 g of Phytic Acid in 500 mL of water, add
5 mL of ascorbic acid solution (1→100) to 3 mL of this solution. Dilute the resulting
solution to 50 mL with acetic acid·sodium acetate buffer solution (pH 4.0), which is
set aside for 15 minutes ,use the Test Solution. Determine the absorbance of the
Test Solution at 750 nm. Separately, dilute 5 mL of potassium phosphate monobasic
standard solution to 1,000 mL with water. Add 5 mL each of ascorbic acid solution
(1→100) to 5.0 mL, 10.0 mL, and 20.0 mL of this solution, respectively. A calibration
curve is prepared by following the same procedure as as described test solution. A
reference solution is prepared by mixing 5 mL of ascorbic acid solution (1→100) and
5 mL of molybdate solution, which is 1 g ammonium molybdate in 100 mL of 0.05 N
sulfuric acid, and dilute to 50 mL with acetic acid·sodium acetate buffer solution (pH
4.0). The content of free inorganic phosphorus in the absorption of Test Solution and
the calibration curve should not be more than 1.0%.
Assay (1) Total Phosphorus : 1.5 g of Phytic Acid is precisely weighted into a 200 mL
Kjeldahl flask, Add 10 mL of sulfuric acid and 2.5 mL of nitric acid. This is
hydrolyzed by heating until the liquid becomes transparent. Cool the solution, and
dilute the resulting solution to 500 mL with water. Transfer 3 mL of this solution
into a 100 mL volumetric flask, and neutralize with ammonia water (1→4), and
weakly acidify with diluted nitric acid (1→10). 20 mL of metavanadate · molybdate
solution are added to the resulting solution, which is diluted to 100 mL with water,
mixed by shaking, and set aside for 30 minutes. This solution is used as the test
solution. Measure the absorbance at 420 nm. Separately, dilute 5 mL of potassium
phosphate monobasic standard solution to 1,000 mL with water. To determine the
calibration curve, place 5.0 mL, 10.0 mL, and 20.0 mL of this solution into a 100 mL
volumetric flasks , respectively, and Proceed as directed under Test Solution.
Calculate the content(%) of total phosphorus by using the absorption of Test Solution
and the calibration curve.
(2) Bonded Phosphorus : Calculate the content of bonded phosphorus from the
difference between free inorganic phosphorus and total phosphorus, and calculate the
content of phytic acid by the formula;
Content of phytic acid (%) = Content of bonded phosphorus(%) × 3.552
Solutions
789
∘Metavanadate·molybdate solution : Dissolve 1.12 g of ammonium metavanadate in excess
amount of water, where 250 mL of nitric acid is
added. Dissolve 27 g of ammonium molybdate in an
appropriate amount of water. Two solutions are mixed
so that the total volume is 1,000 mL. Store in
light-resistant containers.

790
 Piperonal

Chemical Formula: C8H6O3

Molecular Weight: 150.13
S y n o n y m s :
3,4-(Methylenedioxy)-benzaldehyde; CAS No.: 120-57-0
Heliotropine; Piperonyl aldehyde

Compositional Specifications of Piperonal

Content Piperonal, when calculated on the dried basis, should contain not less than
99.0% of piperonal (C8H6O3).
Description Piperonal occurs as white crystals or lumps, having a characteristic odor.
Identification (1) Dissolve 0.1 g of Piperonal in 2 mL of sulfuric acid. and add 2 drops
of a solution of resorcin in alcohol (1→20). A dark red color develops.
(2) Melt 1 g of Piperonal while warming, add 5 mL of sodium hydrogen sulfite solution,
and heat in a water bath while shaking. White crystalline lumps are formed.
Purity (1) Melting Point : Melting point of Piperonal should be within a range of 36.0～
37.5℃.
(2) Clarity and Color of Solution : 1 g of Piperonal is dissolved in 4 mL of 70%ethanol.
This solution should be Clear.
(3) Arsenic : It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(4) Lead : When 5.0 g of Piperonal is tested by Atomic Absorption Spectrophotometry
or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content should not be more
than 10 ppm.
Loss on Drying When Piperonal is dried for 4 hours in a vacuum desiccator(silica gel), the
weight loss should not be more than 0.5%.
Residue on Ignition When thermogravimetric analysis is done with Piperonal, the residue
should not be more than 0.05%.
Assay Accurately weigh about 1 g of Piperonal, previously dried, and proceed as
directed under Method 2 in Aldehyde and Ketone Content in Flavoring Substances
Tests. In the procedure, allow the mixture to stand for 15 minutes.
1 mL of 0.5 N hydrochloric acid = 75.07 mg of C8H6O3

791
 Polybutene
Compositional Specifications of Polybutene
Description Polybutene is a colorless to pale yellow, viscous liquid. It is odorless or has
a slight, characteristic odor, and tasteless.
Identification (1) Approximately 1 g of polybutene is dissolved in 5 mL of n-hexane. 2～
3 drops of this solution are applied to a window plate on an area of 2.5×1cm
proceed as directed under Thin Film Method in Infrared Spectroscopy. A
characteristic absorption band at wavelengths (± 0.5%) shown in the following
Figure.

(2) 0.5 g of polybutene is dissolved in 5 mL of n-hexane. When 2 drops of bromine

solution are added to this solution, the color of the solution immediately disappears.
(3) When polybutene is slowly heated, an odor of burning pine resin is generated.
Purity (1) Clarity and Color of Solution : When 0.4 g of polybutene is dissolved in 5 mL
n-hexane, the solution should be clear.
(2) Chlorinated compounds : 0.5 g of polybutene is transferred into a platinum
porcelain, where 0.7 g of calcium carbonate is mixed. The content is reduced to ash
by gently heating. After cooling, the residue is dissolved in 20 mL of diluted nitric
acid, which is then filtered. Filtrate is proceeded as directed under Purity (2) in
「Benzoic Acid」.
(3) Arsenic : It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(4) Lead : When 5.0 g of Polybutene is tested by Atomic Absorption Spectrophotometry
or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content should not be more
than 2.0 ppm.
(5) Low Molecular Weight Polymer : Accurately weigh about 10 g of Polybutene and
add 10 mL of methanol. Equip with a reflux condenser. Heat in a water bath for 1 hour
while shaking occasionally, and allow to stand in a dark place for 1 hour. Transfer
the supernatant to an evaporating dish, which is weighed prior to use, dry almost
completely at about 50℃, and dry in a vacuum desiccator (sulfuric acid) for 15～20
hours, the content should not be more than 0.4%
Residue on Ignition When thermogravimetric analysis is done with 5 g of Polybutene, the
residue should not be more than 0.05%.
792
 Polydextrose
INS No.: 1200
Synonyms: Modified polydextroses CAS No.: 68424-04-4

Definition RandomLy bonded condensation polymer of glucose with some sorbitol

end-groups, and with citric acid or phosphoric acid residues attached to the polymer
by mono diester bonds. Polydextrose may be neutralized with alkali and decolorized
and deionized for further purification. It may be partly reduced by hydrogenation. In
the case of liquid, it should contains 70~80% of polydextrose .
Compositional Specifications of Polydextrose
Content Polydextrose, when calculated on the dried basis(excluded ash), should contain
not less than 90.0% of the polymer.
Description Polydextrose is white～pale brown amorphous powder or liquid.
Identification (1) To Polydextrose solution (1→10), add 4 drops of 5% phenol solution
and 15 drops of sulfuric acid. The solution becomes dark yellow～orange color.
(2) To 10 mL of Polydextrose solution (1→10), add 1.0 mL of acetone and stir
vigorously, it should stay clear.
(3) To the Test Solution (2), add 2.0 mL of acetone and vigorously stir. The solution
shows severe milky turbidity.
(4) To 1 mL of Polydextrose solution (1→50), and 4 mL of alkaline cupric citrate .
After boiling vigorously for 2～4 minutes, it is settled and cooled, then supernatant
becomes blue-green color.
Purity (1) pH : When Polydextrose proceed as directed under glass electrode method,
pH of Poyldextrose solution (1→10) should not be less than 2.5. In the case of
liquid, pH of Poyldextrose solution (1.4→10) is measured .
(2) Monomer : 20 mg of Polydextrose(an equivalent amount of 20 mg of solid in the
case of liquid) is precisely weighed into a vial with a cap. 1 mL of octadecane
solution, 1 mL of pyridine, and 0.5 mL of N-trimethyl silyl imidazole are added to the
vial, which is then capped. The vial is sonicated for 60 minutes at 70℃ use the Test
Solution. Separately, 1 mL of standard solution, 1 mL of octadecane, 0.5 mL of
N-trimethyl silyl imidazole are processed with the same procedure as the Test
Solution use the Reaction Standard Solution. Same amounts of the Reaction Standard
Solution and the Test Solution are injected into gas chromatography. The content of
each monomer is calculated from the following equation. The content of
1,6-anhydro-D-glucose should not be more than 4.0% and the content of sorbitol and
D-glucose combined should not be more than 6.0%. An average value should be
obtained by injecting the Reaction Standard Solution twice.

793
 R × Ws
Content(%) ＝
Rs × W
W : Weight of the sample (mg) (as a dehydrated form without ash)
Ws : Weight of each standard material (mg)
R : Peak area ratio of each monomer vs. octadecane in Test Solution
Rs : Average peak area ratio of each monomer vs. octadecane in Reaction Standard
Solution
Operation Conditions
-Column : A glass or stainless tube with inner diameter of 2 mm and length of 2.5 m
-Column Filler : 100∼120 mesh Gas Chrom Q coated with 3% OV-1
-Detector : (Hydrogen) Flame Ionization Detector (FID)
-Temperature at injection hole: 210℃
-Column Temperature : 175℃
-Detector Temperature : 230℃
-Carrier gas and flow rate : Nitrogen, 30 mL per minute
The elution order of the monomers is 1,6-anhydro-D-glucose(levoglucosan),
n-octadecane α-D-glucose, D-sorbitol, and β-D-glucose.
Solution
∘Standard Solution : 100 mL pyridine solution of each (precisely weighed) 50 mg α
-D-glucose, 50 mg β-D-glucose, 40 mg anhydrous-D-sorbitol, 35mg
1,6-anhydro-D-glucose 35mg.
∘Octadecane solution : 100 mL pyridine solution of precisely weighed 50 mg of
octecane.
(3) 5-Hydroxy Methylfurfural (HMF) : 1 g of Polydextrose(an equivalent amount of 1 g
of solid in the case of liquid) is precisely weighed into a 100 mL volumetric flask,
which is filled with water use the Test Solution. Using water as a reference,
absorbance at 283 nm with 1 cm path length is measure. The content of 5-hydroxy
methylfurfural is calculated using the following equation. The content (as a
dehydrated form excluding ash) should not be more than 0.1%. However, the
neutralized form should not be more than 0.05%.
5-hydroxy methylfurfural(%)
0.749 × A
＝ C

A : Absorbance of Test Solution

C : Concentration of Test Solution (mg/mL) (as a dehydrated form excluding ash)
(4) Arsenic : It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(5) Molecular Weight Limit : 4 g of Polydextrose(an equivalent amount of 4 g of solid
in the case of liquid) is dissolved in 0.2 M phosphate buffer solution (pH 6.8) to make
100 mL. 4 g of each dextran standard T 70 (molecular weight 74,300), T 40
(molecular weight 40,600) and T 10 (molecular weight 9,400) is dissolved in 0.2 M
794
 phosphate buffer solution (pH 6.8) and the total volume is make to 100 mL,
respectively, use the Standard Solutions. A calibration curve is prepared with 50 μl of
each standard solution following the operation conditions below. From the calibration
curve, an elution time (t) for a molecular weight of 22,000 is obtained. Separately, 50 μl
of Test Solution is injected and eluted. Under t, the height of any peak should not
exceed 2% of the height of the major peak.
Peration Conditions
-Detector : Differential refractometer (RI Detector)
-Column : TSK-GEL-G 3000 PW, 7.5 mm × 600 mm stainless steal tube
-Column Temperature : Room temperature
-Mobile Phase : 0.2 M Phosphate buffer solution (pH 6.8)
-Flow Rate : 1.0 mL/min
-Measurement : 2×10 5 RIUFS
Solution
∘0.2 M phosphate buffer solution (pH 6.8)
∘Solution 1 : 27.218 g of potassium phosphate, monobasic is dissolved in water and to
make total volume 1 l.
∘Solution 2 : 71.6 g of potassium phosphate, monobasic is dissolved in water and to
make total volume 1 l.
Solution 1 is added to Solution 2 while mixing until pH becomes 6.8.
(6) Lead : When 5 g of Polydextrose(an equivalent amount of 5 g of solid in the case
of liquid) is tested by Atomic Absorption Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled
Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content should not be more than 0.5 ppm.
(7) Nickel : When 5.0 g of Polydextrose(an equivalent amount of 5 g of solid in the
case of liquid) is tested by Atomic Absorption Spectrophotometry or Inductively
Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content should not be more than 2.0 ppm.
(limited to the form under hydrogen reduction)
Residue on Ignition When thermogravimetric analysis is done with 2 g of
Polydextrose(an equivalent amount of 2 g of solid in the case of liquid), the amount of
residue should not be more than 0.3%. However, the neutralized form should not be
more than 2.0%.
Water Content Water content of Polydextrose proceed as directed under back titration
method in water determination (Karl-Fisher Titration) and should not be more than
4.0%. In the case of liquid, it should be 27.5~32.5%.
Assay 250 mg of Polydextrose(an equivalent amount of 250 mg of solid in the case of
liquid) transfer into a 250 mL volumetric flask and the flask is filled. 10 mL of the
solution is diluted to 250 mL. 2 mL each of the resulting solution is taken into three 8
mL vials. 0.12 mL of phenol solution (8→10) is added to each vial and gently mixed.
Then 5 mL of sulfuric acid is quickly added and shaken vigorously with a cap in place
(should ware rubber gloves and use safety shield). Each vial is set-aside for 45
minutes at normal temperature and absorption is measured at 490 nm with 1 cm path
length. Separately, a calibration curve is prepared by following the same procedure as
795
 above with 2 mL each of glucose standard solution and prepare a standard curve of
concentration. The content of polymer (P) is calculated from the following equation.
Separately, a reference solution is prepared by following the same procedure as the
test solution with 2 mL of water, 0.12 mL of phenol solution (8→10), and 5 mL of
sulfuric acid.
[100 (A - Y)
P = 1.05 × ] - Pg - 1.11P1
× S × C
A : Average absorption of the Test Solution
Y : Intercept (y axis) in the standard curve
S : Slope of absorption vs. glucose concentration (g/mL) in the standard curve(S is
approximately 0.02)
C : Concentration of the test solution (g/mL) (converted to dehydrated form excluding
ash.)
Pg, P1 : Contents of glucose and 1,6-anhydro-D-glucos as measured by monomer test.
Solution
∘Glucose Standard Solution : 100 mg of α-D-glucose is precisely weighed, dissolved
in water, and diluted to 500 mL (200 μg/mL). This is further diluted to 50 μg/mL,
40 μg/mL, 20 μg/mL, 10 μg/mL, and 5 μg/mL.

796
 Polyethylene Glycol
PEG
Chemical Formula: (C2H4O)n+1H2O
Molecular Weight: 200∼9500 INS No.: 1521
Synonyms: Macrogol; PEG CAS No.: 25322-68-3

Compositional Specifications of Polyethylene Glycol

Definition Polyethylene glycol is a polymer of ethylene oxide and water. The molecular
weight is 200 to 9,500.
Description Polyethylene glycol having molecular weight less than 700 are colorless,
transparent or semi-transparent, and slight hygroscopic liquids with a characteristic
smell. Polyethylene glycol having molecular weight between 700 and 900 is semisolid.
Polyethylene glycol having molecular weight more than 1000 is almost white mass,
thin slice or powder.
Identification
(1) Polyethylene glycol is soluble in water, insoluble in ether.
(2) Polyethylene glycol having molecular weight under 1000 is between 95.0%~105.0% of
the declared value. Polyethylene glycol having molecular weight between 1000 and
7000 is not less than 90.0% and not more than 110.0% of the declared value.
Polyethylene glycol having molecular weight over 7000 is not less than 87.5% and
note more than 112.5% of the declared value. First, sample bottle is maintained in a
water bath heated at 98±2℃ for 30~60 minutes. After cooling down to room
temperature, add 5 drops of phenolphthalein solution in pyridine(1→100) and titrate
with 0.5N sodium hydroxide. When the pink color of the solution maintains for about
15 seconds, it is regarded as the end point. Separately, a blank test is carried out by
the same method. The molecular weigh is calculated by the following equation.
2000W
Average Molecular weight =
(B-S) N
W = weight of the sample(g)
B = consumed volume of 0.5N NaOH by the blank test(mL)
S = consumed volume of 0.5N NaOH by the test with sample(mL)
N = Normality of NaOH solution
Phthalic anhydride solution : Put 49g of phthalic anhydride in an amber bottle and
dissolve it in 300mL of pyridine freshly distilled. Shake the bottle vigorously until the
reaction occurs in the solution and then allow to stand overnight before use.
Liquid polyethylene glycol : Place 25mL of phthalic anhydride solution into container
which is resistant to heat and pressure. The amount of the sample equivalent to the
declared molecular weight divided by 160 is accurately weighed(e.g. a sample of
about 1.3g would be applied for PEG 200, about 3.8g for PEG 600). Close the bottle
with stopper and carefully cover the bottle in a fabric bag.
797
 Solid polyethylene glycol : Place 25mL of phthalic anhydride solution into container
which is resistant to heat and pressure. The amount of the sample equivalent to the
declared molecular weight divided by 160 is accurately weighed and added to the
same bottle. Add 25mL of pyridine that is freshly distilled by phthalic anhydride and
mix well until the start of the reaction. Close the bottle with stopper and carefully
cover the bottle in a fabric bag.
Purity
(1) pH of polyethylene glycol's aqueous solution(1→20) should be within a range of
4.5~7.5.
(2) Acid value(as acetic acid) : 2 drops of phenolphthalein and 50mL of neutral ethanol are
added to 6g of polyethylene glycol. Titrate with 0.1N ethanolic potassium hydroxide
until pale red color persists for 15 seconds. The consumed amount should be not more
than 0.5mL.
(3) Viscosity : When the viscosity is measured by Method 1 Capillary Viscosity
Measurement in Viscosity at 100±0.3℃, the viscosity of the sample by molecular
weight is as follows:
Average MW Viscosity range(cSt) Average MW Viscosity range(cSt)
200 4.1-4.8 2400 49.0-65.0
300 5.4-6.4 2500 51.0-70.0
400 6.8-8.0 2600 54.0-74.0
500 8.3-9.6 2700 57.0-78.0
600 9.9-11.3 2800 60.0-83.0
700 11.5-13.0 2900 64.0-88.0
800 12.5-14.5 3000 67.0-93.0
900 15.0-17.0 3250 73.0-105.0
1000 16.9-19.0 3350 76.0-110.0
1100 18.0-22.0 3500 87.0-123.0
1200 20.0-24.5 3750 99.0-140.0
1300 22.0-27.0 4000 110.0-158.0
1400 24.0-30.0 4250 123.0-177.0
1450 25.0-32.0 4500 140.0-200.0
1500 26.0-33.0 4750 150.0-228.0
1600 28.0-36.0 5000 170.0-250.0
1700 31.0-39.0 5500 206.0-315.0
1800 33.0-42.0 6000 250.0-390.0
1900 35.0-45.0 6500 295.0-480.0
2000 38.0-49.0 7000 350.0-590.0
2100 40.0-53.0 7500 405.0-735.0
2200 43.0-56.0 8000 470.0-900.0
2300 46.0-60.0
※ For viscosity range not listed in the above table, calculate the value using the
interpolation method.
(4) 1,4-Dioxane : To 0.5g of polyethylene glycol and 0.1g of defoamer(containing silicone),
add 10mL of water and diffuse with ultrasonic waves for 10 minutes, test solution.
Transfer this solution into 25mL of frit sparger, hold the temperature of container at
50℃, and analyze with Purge and Trap Gas chromatograph. Separately, to the solution,
798
 which 5μg of 1,4-dioxane is contained in 10mL of water, add 0.1g of defoamer,
standard solution. Analyze the standard solution in the same manner as the sample(not
more than 10ppm).
Operation Condition
Purge and Trap
Trap : Vorcarb 3000 or its equivalent
Purge time : 11 minutes
Desorption temperature and time : 250℃, 4 minutes
Cryo focus temperature : -150℃
Bake temperature and time : 260℃, 10 minutes
Gas chromatography
Column : HP-FFAP(60m × 0.32μm) or its equivalent
Detector : (Hydrogen) Flame Ionization Detector (FID)
Column Temperature : held at 70℃ for 5 minutes and is raised to 180℃ at a rate
of 5℃ per minute
Injector Temperature : 220℃
Detector Temperature : 250℃
Carrier gas and flow rate : Nitrogen, 0.9 mL/min
(5) Ethylene oxide : 25g of Polyethylene glycol(W1), accurately weighed is transferred to
the container which is resistant to heat and pressure with 50mL of morpholine solution.
Shake the mixture to be completely dissolved. Close the bottle with stopper and
carefully cover the bottle in a fabric bag. Place them in water bath at 98±2℃ for 30
minutes and take the bottles from the bath, and cool at room temperature. Loosen the
fabric bag, and open cautiously the stopper to release pressure inside the bottle. Add
slowly 20mL of acetic anhydride to the bottle, shake to dissolve completely. Cool this
solution at room temperature and then add 4~6 drops of mixed indicator solution.
Titrate with standard methanolic hydrochloric acid to be the end point, a clear blue
color(A). Separately, place 50mL of morpholine solution into the heat and
pressure-resistant container. Add 4~6 drops of mixed indicator solution. Titrate with
standard methanolic hydrochloric acid to be the end point, a clear blue color(B).
Transfer 50mL of anhydrous methanol into 250mL-flask and add 4~6 drops of mixed
indicator solution. Titrate with standard methanolic hydrochloric acid to be the end
point, a clear blue color. Add 25g of Polyethylene glycol(W2) and shake the mixture to
be completely dissolved. Titrate with standard methanolic hydrochloric acid to be the
end point, a clear blue color(C). Calculate the content of ethylene oxide according to
the following equation. It should be below 0.02%.
(A-B)
The percentage of ethylene oxide (%) = 4.41 × N × C
W1 -
W2

799
 N = the normality of the standard methanolic hydrochloric acid solution (mol/L)
W1 = weight of the sample(g)
W2 = weight of the sample for the blank test(g)
A = consumed volume of methanolic hydrochloric acid solution used for titration of test
solution(mL)
B = consumed volume of methanolic hydrochloric acid solution used for titration of
indicator's blank test(mL)
C = consumed volume of methanolic hydrochloric acid solution used for titration of
sample's blank test(mL)
Test solution
Morpholine solution : Dilute redistilled morpholine with anhydrous methanol soluiton(1→9).
Mixed indicator solution : Accurately weigh 0.05g of 4,4'bis-(amino-1-naphthylazo-
2,2'-stilbenedisulfonic acid) and 0.01g of briliiant yellow into 60mL-glass bottle. Add
1.5mL of 0.1M sodium hydroxide and mix well. Add 3.5mL of distilled water and
transfer the mixture to the bottle for storage. Rinse the bottle with 45mL of
methanol and transfer it to storage bottle and mix.
Standard methanolic hydrochloric acid : Mix 8.5mL of hydrochloric acid and 1000mL
of anhydrous methanol and standardize by titrating 9mL with 0.1N sodium hydroxide
solution to end-point of phenolphthalein indicator. If this solution is used more than
48 hours after standardization, the solution needs to be re-standardized.
(6) Ethylene glycol and diethylene glycol : The test of ethylene glycol and diethylene
glycol should be conducted by depending on molecular weight as follows:
a. Polyethylene glycol having molecular weight less than 450 : Accurately weigh about
4.0 g of the sample and add water to make 10mL(Test solution). Separately, 0.1~0.6g
of ethylene glycol and diethylene glycol standard is accurately weighed and added to
water to 100mL so that each concentration of glycol is within a range of
1~6mg/mL(Standard solution). Inject 2μl of Test solution and Standard solution into the
gas chromatograph and test by the following condition, its content should be less than
0.25% as the total amount of ethylene glycol and diethylene glycol.
Hta Esa
The amount of ethylene glycol (%) = × × 100
weight of the
Hsa sample(g)
Htb Esb
The amount of diethylene glycol (%) = × × 100
weight of the
Hsb sample(g)
Esa : Amount of ethylene glycol in 1mL of standard solution (mg)
Esb : Amount of diethylene glycol in 1mL of standard solution (mg)
Hsa : Peak height of ethylene glycol in standard solution (mm)
Hsb : Peak height of diethylene glycol in standard solution (mm)
Hta : Peak height of ethylene glycol in test solution (mm)
800
Htb : Peak height of diethylene glycol in test solution (mm)
Operation conditions
- Detector : Hydrogen flame ionization detector(FID)
- Column : Stainless steel tube (length : 1.5m, internal diameter : 3mm)
- Column filler : 60~800 Mesh Chromosorb W(or its equivalent) for Gas chromotagraphy
coated with 12% sorbitol
- Carrier gas and flow rate : Nitrogen, 70mL/min
- Column temperature : 165℃
- Injector temperature : 260℃
b. Polyethylene glycol having molecular weight more than 450 : Accurately weigh 50.0g
of the sample and transfer it into 250mL distillation flask. Add 75mL of diphenyl ether
and dissolve. A distilled solution is slowly obtained in 1~2mmHg of Mercury using
mecury vapor apparatus. Add 25mL of water and mix well, then set aside to make a
separate layer. Cool down in an ice bath to solidify diphenyl ether and help remove it.
The water layer is filtered with filter paper into 50mL glass-stoppered graduated
cylinder. Filtrate is added to its same amount of freshly distilled acetonitrile(Test
solution). Separately, accurately weigh 50mg of diethylene glycol standard to 25mL
volumetric flask. Add freshly distilled acetonitrile to be 25mL of acetonitrile : water
(1:1) (Standard solution). Add 10mL of each of the test solution and the standard
solution into 50mL flask containing 15mL of ceric ammonium nitrate test solution, and
mix. Within 2~5 min, measure the absorbance at wavelength of 450mm. Separately,
blank test solution is the mixture of 15mL of ceric ammonium nitrate and 10mL of
acetonitrile : water (1:1). measure the absorbance at wavelength of 450mm. The
absorbance of test solution should not exceed that of standard solution.
Ceric ammonium nitrate test solution : accurately weigh 6.25g of ceric ammonium
nitrate[(NH4)2Ce(NO3)6] and dissolve in 0.25N of nitrate solution to 100mL.
(7) Lead : When 5.0g of polyethylene glycol is tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry of Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content
should not be more than 1.0ppm.
Residue on Ignition When thermogravimetric analysis is done with 5g of polyethylene
glycol, the amount of residue should not be more than 0.1%.

801
 Polyglycitol Syrup
Hydrogenated starch hydrolysate, Polyglucitol
Synonyms: Hydrogenated starch hydrolysate;
INS No.: 964
Polyglucitol

Definition Polyglycitol Syrup is a mixture of sorbitol, maltitol, maltotritol, and

hydrogenated saccharide
Compositional Specifications of Polyglycitol Syrup
Content In Polyglycitol Syrup, sorbitol occupies not less than 95% of the peak area of
sorbitol and glucose, maltitol does not less than 95% of the peak area of maltitol and
maltose. Sorbitol and maltitol contain not more than respectively 50% of the total
content.
Description Polyglycitol Syrup is a colorless, odorless, transparent, viscous liquid or
white crystalline lump.
Identification (1) Polyglycitol Syrup dissolved well in water and slightly in alcohol.
(2) 50 mg of Polyglycitol Syrup is dissolved in 20 mL of water to make the test
solution. Proceed as directed under (4) Identification in [D-maltitol]
(3) To 5 g of Polyglycitol Syrup, add 7 mL of methanol, 1 mL of benzaldehyde and 1
mL of hydrochloric acid and mix them with agitation until crystals appear. The
crystals are filtered and then dissolved in 20 mL of boiling water containing 1 g of
sodium bicarbonate, and filtered. The resulting solution is cooled until crystals
appear. They are filtered again and washed with 5 mL of 50% methanol. The melting
point of the dried crystal should be within a range of 173～179℃.
Purity (1) Reduced saccharides : About 7 g of Polyglycitol Syrup is weighed accurately
and proceed as directed under purity (1) in [D-maltitol], the weight of copper oxide
should not be more than 50 mg.
(2) Chloride : When 10 g of Polyglycitol Syrup the chloride proceed as directed under
chloride, it is content should not be more than the amount that corresponds to 1.5
mL of 0.01 N hydrochloric acid.
(3) Sulfates : When 10 g of Polyglycitol Syrup the chloride proceed as directed under
Sulfate, it is content should not be more than the amount that corresponds to 2.0 mL
of 0.01 N hydrochloric acid.
(4) Lead : When 5.0 g of Polyglycitol Syrup is tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content
should not be more than 1 ppm.
(5) Nickel : When proceed as directed under purity (1) in [D-maltitol] with 10 g of
Polyglycitol Syrup, the content should not be more than 2 ppm.
Loss on Drying When Polyglycitol Syrup is dried at 105℃ for 4 hours, the reduction of
a dried sample should not be more than 15% and that of a liquid sample should not be
more than 50%.
Residue on Ignition When proceed as directed under Residue on Ignition with 3 g of
802
 Polyglycitol Syrup, the content should not be more than 0.1%.
Assay 0.1 g of Polyglycitol Syrup is accurately weighed and water is added to make
100 mL. The resulting solution is filtered with 0.45 μm paper to make the test
solution. Separately, 0.1 g each of the sorbitol standard, the dextrose standard, the
maltitol standard and the maltose standard are weighed accurately, water is added to
make 100 mL, use the standard solution. 20 μl each of the standard and test solutions
are injected in liquid chromatography in the following conditions, and according to the
following formulae, the contents of sorbitol, dextrose, maltitol, and maltose are
obtained using the following equation.
Contents (%) of Sorbitol, Dextrose, Maltitol, and Maltose
Weight of the standard(g) Peak area of test solution
= × × 100
weight of the sample(g) Peak area of standard solution

Operation Condition
-Column : Phenomenex Rezex or its equivalent
-Detector : Differential Refractometer (RI detector)
-Column temperature : 80℃
-Moving phase : water
-Flow speed : 0.5 mL/min

803
 Polyisobutylene
Other name: Butyl rubber CAS No.: 9003-27-4

Definition Polyisobutylene is a polymer of isobutylene. It may contain not more than 2%

of total polymer unit derived from isoprene.
Compositional Specifications of Polyisobutylene
Description Polyisobutylene occurs as a colorless to light yellow elastic rubbery
semi-solid or viscous substance. It is odorless or has a slight, characteristic odor, and
is tasteless.
Identification Dissolve about 1 g of polyisobutylene in 5 mL of n-hexane and proceed as
directed under the Thin Film Method in Infrared Spectrophotometry. Absorptions are
observed at about 1,393 cm-1, 1,230 cm-1, 950 cm-1, 920 cm-1.
Purity (1) Clarity and Color of Solution : Weigh 0.5 g of Polyisobutylene, add 5 mL of
n-hexane, and dissolve while heating in a water bath at 80℃. It should not be more
than slightly turbid.
(2) Chlorinated Compounds : 0.5 g of Polyisobutylene is transferred into a porcelain
crucible, where 0.7 g of calcium carbonate. It is reduced to ash by gently heating.
After cooling, the residue is dissolved in 20 mL of dilute nitric acid and filtered. The
filtrate is tested by Purity (2) for 「Benzoic Acid」.
(3) Arsenic : It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(4) Lead : 0.5 g of Polyisobutylene is tested by Atomic Absorption Spectrophotometry
or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content should not be more
than 3.0 ppm.
(5) Low Molecular Weight Polymer : Accurately weigh about 10 g of Polyisobutylene,
add 40 mL of ethyl ether, equip with a reflux condenser, and dissolve while heating
on a water bath and shaking occasionally. Cool, add 40 mL of methanol, shake well,
and allow to stand in a cold place for 1 hour. Transfer the supernatant to a flask,
distill under reduced pressure at about 50℃ and dry in a vacuum desiccator for 15～
20 hours. Weigh the residue. It should not be more than 1.2%.
(6) Total Unsaturated Substances : Accurately weigh 0.5 g of Polyisobutylene, add 100
mL of cyclohexane, stopper tightly the flask, and allow to stand overnight to dissolve
completely. If insoluble substances remain, shake for about 1 hour to dissolve them
completely. Transfer in a 500 mL flask, wash the flask with a small amount of cyclo
hexane, and add the washings to the 500 mL flask. Add exactly 15 mL of Wijs test
solution, and mix well. If the solution is not clear, add cyclohexane until it becomes
clear. Stopper the flask, and allow to stand for 30 minutes at 20∼30℃, protected
from light, with occasional shaking. Add 20 mL of potassium iodine(1→10) and 100
mL of water, and shake. Titrate the liberated iodine with 0.1 N sodium
thiosulfate(indicator: starch test solution), adding the titrant gradually and shaking
804
 constantly until the yellow colour of the solution almost disappears. Add starch test
solution, and continue the titration until the blue colour disappears entirely. Perform a
blank test in the same manner. Calculate the total amount of unsaturated substances
by the following formula. The amount should not be more than 2.0 %.
Total amount of unsaturated = Weight
1.87 × (a - b) × N
substances(%) of the sample(g)

a : volume (mL) of 0.1 N sodium thiosulfate consumed in the blank test,

b : volume (mL) of 0.1 N sodium thiosulfate in this test.
N : normality of 0.1 N sodium thiosulfate solution
Residue on Ignition When thermogravimetric analysis is done with 2 g of
Polyisobutylene, the residue should not be more than 0.1 %.

805
 Poly-γ-glutamic acid
Definition Poly -γ-glutamic acid is obtained by separating and refining the cultured
residue solution after culturing Bacillus subtilis and Bacillus subtilis chungkookjang. Its
compound is Poly -γ-glutamic acid.
Compositional Specifications of Poly-γ-glutamic acid
Contnet When Poly-γ-glutamic acid is weighted Dried it should contain no less than
95.0% as a Poly-γ-glutamic acid.
Description Poly-γ-glutamic acid is strong hygroscopic property, white powder,
scentless and tasteless.
Identification (1) When Thin Layer Chromatography is tested after taking 0.1g of Poly -
γ-glutamic acid, red spot should be identified at the same place as L-Glutamic acid.
Test solution is made like that 0.1g of Poly -γ-glutamic acid is taken, and dissolve
in 9.5mL of water, and then 0.5mL of 6N hydrochloric acid is added in the solution,
and is hydrolyzed at 110℃ for 24 hours. It can be filtered if it is necessary.
Prepared test solution is conducted under the following condition.
Condition of Thin Layer Chromatography
Developing solvent : n-butyl alcohol : glacial acetic acid : water(2 : 1 : 1)
Thin layer plate: Silicagel
Developing distance: 10 ～15cm
Color regent : 0.2g of Ninhydrin dissolve in unsaturated n-butyl alcohol to make
100mL.
(2) When 1g of Poly -γ-glutamic acid is taken, and measured by Potassium Bromide
Disk Method of Infrared Spectrophotometry, Carboxyl group(1,735cm-1), amin
group(1554cm-1) and carboxyl group connected amin group(1650cm-1) should be
identified.
Purity (1) Arsenic : It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(2) Lead : When 5.0 g of Poly-γ-glutamic acid is tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content
should not be more than 10.0 ppm.
(3) Total Viable Aerobic Count : When Poly-γ-glutamic acid is tested by Microbe Test
Methods for Total Viable Aerobic Count (Number of General Germs) in General Test
Method in 「Standards and Specifications for Foods」, it should not be more than
10,000 per 1 g
(4) E. Coli : When Poly-γ-glutamic acid is tested by Microbe Test Methods for E. Coli
in General Test Method 「Standards and Specifications for Foods」, it should be
negative (-).
Loss on Drying When 3 g of Poly-γ-glutamic acid is dried for 3 hours at 105℃, the
weight loss should not be more than 4%.
Residue on Ignition When Residue on Ignition analysis is done with accurately weighted
1 g of Poly-γ-glutamic acid, the amount of residue should not be more than 1.0%.
Assay Poly-γ-glutamic acid is dried and 100mg of Poly -γ-glutamic acid is weighted,
806
 and dissolved in 10mL water. It is called A solution. 0.5mL of A solution is taken. Add
10mL of 6N hydrochloric acid. Hydrolyze for 24 hours at 110℃ to make Test Solution.
Calculate the content of glutamic acid by using Amino Acid Analyzer following below
condition after taking the appropriate amount of Test Solution. Separately, the
appropriate amount of A solution, which is not hydrolyzed, is taken. Calculate the
content of free glutamic acid by using Amino Acid Analyzer. Calculate the content of
Poly-γ-glutamic acid following the formula.

The content of free glutamic acid (%) = The weight of glutamic acid(g)
Weiht of sample(g) × 100

The content of Poly- The acid(g)

weight of glutamic 0.8 10 the content of
× 8 × 0 - free glutamic
γ-glutamic acid(%) = acid
Weiht of sample(g)

0.88 129(the molecular weight of glutamicacid acid) residue in the Poly -γ-glutamic
= 147(the molecular weight of glutamic acid)
Operation condition of Amino Acid Analyzer
Column : HR Na column(4.6mm × 200mm) or equivalent
Column Temperature : 78℃
Detector and wave length : Spectrophotometer(570nm)
Mobile phase and mobile flow rate
- Buffer solution : Flow Lithium citrate buffer(pH 2.8) with flowing speed of 20mL/h.
- Reaction solution : Flow Ninhydrin solution with flowing speed of 25mL/h.
- Reaction Temperature : 135℃
- The amount of injection : 40㎕
Solutions
∘ Ninhydrin solution : 18 g of Ninhydrin and 0.7 g of hydrindantin is precisely weighed
and dissolved in 675 mL of dimethylsulfoxide. 225 mL of acetic
lithium solution (pH 5.2) is added to the above solution.

807
 ε-Polylysine
Definition ε-Polylysine is obtained by adsorption (with an ion exchange resin),
separation, and purification of culture solution of Streptomyces albulus (a kind of
actinomycetes). Its component is ε-Polylysine.
Compositional Specifications of ε-Polylysine
Content Dried ε-Polylysine should contain no less than 87% of ε-Polylysine.
Description ε-Polylysine is highly hygroscopic pale yellow powder with a slightly bitter
taste.
Identification (1) When 1 mL of Dragendorf solution is added to an aqueous solution of ε
-Polylysine (0.1→100), reddish brown precipitates are formed.
(2) 0.1 g of ε-Polylysine is dissolved in 100 mL of phosphate buffer solution (pH 6.8).
When 1 mL of methyl orange solution is added to 1 mL of this solution, reddish
brown precipitates are formed.
Purity (1) Arsenic : It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(2) Lead : When 5.0 g of ε-Polylysine is tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content
should not be more than 10.0 ppm.
Loss on Drying When ε-Polylysine is dried for 3 hours at 105℃, the weight loss should
not be more than 20%.
Residue on Ignition When thermogravimetric analysis is done with accurately weighted 1 g of
ε-Polylysine, the amount of residue should not be more than 1.0%.
Assay (Color Value) Approximately 100 mg of dried ε-Polylysine is precisely weighted and
tested by nitrogen determination method. The content of ε-Polylysine is obtained by the
following equation.
1 mL of 0.1 N sulfuric acid ＝ 1.401 mg N
content of nitrogen(mg) × 5.24
× 100
Content(%) ＝ 100 - B
A ×
100

A ： Amount of sample (mg)

B ： Loss on Drying (%)

808
 Polysorbate 20
Polyoxyethylene(20) Sorbitan Monolaurate
INS No.: 432
Synonyms: Polyoxyethylene(20) sorbitan
monolaurate; Sorbitan CAS No.: 9005-64-5
monododecanoate

Definition Polysorbate 20 is a partial ester mixture of sorbitol and anhydrous sorbitol

with lauric acid, where approximately 20 M of ethylene oxide is bonded to 1 M each
of sorbitol, mono or dihydrated form of sorbitol via condensation reaction.
Compositional Specifications of Polysorbate 20
Content Polysorbate 20, when calculated on the dried basis(anhydrous), should contain
70.0∼74.0% oxyethylene (C2H4O), which corresponds 97.3∼103.0% polysorbate 20.
Description Polysorbate 20 is colorless to orange-yellow oily liquid having a slightly
characteristic odor.
Identification To 5 mL of Polysorbate 20(1→20), add 5 mL of sodium hydroxide solution
and boil for several minutes and cool. When the solution is acidified with dilute acid, it
turns white and turbid.
Purity (1) Acid Value : Approximately 10 g of Polysorbate 20 is accurately weighed and
dissolved in 125 mL of toluene · isopropyl alcohol mixture (1:1), which is neutralized
until it becomes pink with 2 mL of phenolphthalein solution prior to use (heated if
necessary). Acid value is calculated from the following equation and should not be
more than 2.
(2) Arsenic : It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(3) Lead : When 5.0 g of Polysorbate 20 is tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content
should not be more than 2.0 ppm.
(4) Cadmium : When 5.0 g of Polysorbate 20 is tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content
should not be more than 1.0 ppm.
(5) Mercury : When Polysorbate 20 is tested by Mercury Limit Test, its content should
not be more than 1.0 ppm.
(6) 1,4-Dioxane : To 0.5 g of Polysorbate 20 and 0.1 g of defoamer(containing
silicone), add 10 mL of water and diffuse with ultrasonic waves, test solution.
Transfer this solution into 25 mL of frit sparger, hold the temperature of container at
50℃, and analyze with Purge and Trap and Gas chromatograph. Separately, to the
solution, which 2.5μg of 1,4-Dioxane is contained in 10 mL of water, add 0.1 g of
defoamer, standard solution. Analyze the standard solutin in the same manner as the
sample (not more than 5.0 ppm).
Operation Condition
Purge and Trap
809
 Trap : Vorcarb 3000 or its equivalent
Purge time : 11 minutes
Desorption temperature and time : 250℃, 4 minutes
Cryo focus temperature : -150℃
Bake temperature and time : 260℃, 10 minutes
Gas chromatography
Column : HP-FFAP(60m × 0.32μm) or its equivalent
Detector : (Hydrogen) Flame Ionization Detector (FID)
Column Temperature : held at 70℃ for 5 minutes and is raised to 180℃ at a
rate of 5℃ per minute
Temperature at injection hole : 200℃
Detector Temperature : 250℃
Carrier gas and flow rate : Nitrogen, 0.9 m per minute
(7) Hydroxyl Value : Approximately 3 g of Polysorbate 20 is accurately weighed and
transferred into a 250 mL flask with a stopper. Add 5 mL of pyridine·anhydrous
acetic acid mixture (3:1), a reflux condenser is attached. It is then heated for 1 hour
in a water bath. 10 mL of water is added through the condenser and it is heated
again for 10 minutes. After cooling, 15 mL of n-butyl alcohol is added through the
condenser, the condenser is removed, and inner wall of the flask is washed with 10
mL of n-butyl alcohol. 1 mL of phenolphthalein solution is added to the flask and the
solution is titrated with 0.5 N alcoholic solution of potassium hydroxide. The
consumed amount of alcoholic solution is S. Separately, 5 mL of pyridine·anhydrous
acetic acid is treated as same as the test solution and the consumed amount of
alcoholic solution is B. To correct for free acid, approximately 10 g of Polysorbate 20
is accurately weighed and dissolved in 10 mL of pyridine. After adding 1 mL of
phenolphthalein solution, the solution is titrated with 0.5 N alcoholic solution of
potassium hydroxide. The consumed amount of alcoholic solution is A. Hydroxyl
value, that is calculated by the following equation, should be within a range of 96～108.
[B ＋ (WA / C) — S] × 28.05
Hydroxyl Value ＝
W
W : Amount of sample used in acetylation (g)
C : Amount of sample used for quantitative analysis of free acid (g)
(8) Saponification Value : Transfer accurately weighed 8 g of Polysorbate 20 into a
250 mL flask and add 50 mL of 0.5 N alcoholic solution of potassium hydroxide. This
solution is used as Test solution. When this test solution is proceeded as directed
under Saponification Value in Fats Test. The solution is heated to boil and red color
reappears. It is titrated again until the color disappears. Saponification value is
calculated by the following equation and should be within a range of 40～50.
(9) Lauric Acid : Approximately 25 g of Polysorbate 20 is accurately weighed and
transferred into a 500 mL flask with a stopper and 250 mL of alcohol and 7.5 g of
810
 potassium hydroxide are added. A condenser is attached and the solution is refluxed
for 1～2 hours in a water bath. The resulting solution is transferred into a 800 mL
beaker. The flask is washed with 100 mL of water and the wash water is added to
the beaker. Alcohol is completely removed by evaporating in a water bath while
water is added to supplement the alcohol that is removed. The solution is neutralized
with diluted sulfuric acid (1→2) and 10% of the consumed amount is added. The
resulting solution is heated while stirring until the fatty acid layer is separated. The
fatty acid layer is transferred into a 500 mL separatory funnel with a stopcock. This
was washed 3～4 times with 20 mL of hot water. Wash water is added to the
previous aqueous saponified solution. This aqueous solution is extracted 3 times with
approximately 50 mL of petroleum ether. Extracted phase is added to the fatty acid
layer. This is evaporated to dryness in a container that is previously weighed. The
amount of lauric acid should be within a range of 15～17%. The acid value of lauric
acid is tested by the Acid Value in Flavoring Substances Test and should be within a
range of 250∼275.
Water Content Water content of Polysorbate 20 is determined by back titration method
in water determination (Karl-Fisher Titration) and should not be more than 3%.
Residue on Ignition When thermogravimetric analysis is done with 5 g of Polysorbate
20, the amount of residue should not be more than 0.25%.
Assay Experimental apparatus is described below.

(1) Experiment Apparatus

A : Distillation flask with a stem through which CO2 is passed.
B : A trap connected to air condenser (with red phosphorous suspension)
C : Absorption tube (with silver nitrate solution to absorb ethyl iodide)
D : Absorption tube (a spiral glass tube with a diameter of 1.75 mm. 8.5 mm height
per 1 revolution. A stopcock is attached at the bottom.)
E : Trap(with potassium iodide to capture bromine that is pushed out by CO2)
(2) Solution
Hydroiodic Acid : Hydrogen iodide with the highest purity is dissolved in alkoxyl.
811
 Silver nitrate solution : 15 g of silver nitrate is dissolved in 50 mL of water and 400 mL
alcohol and a few drops of nitric acid are added.
(3) Experimental Method : 60 mg of red phosphorous is suspended in 100 mL. Trap
(B) is filled with enough red phosphorous suspension so that the insertion tube is
immersed in the suspension. 10 mL of silver nitrate solution, 15 mL of
bromine·bromide solution, 10 mL of potassium iodide solution (1→10) are added to
absorption tube (C), absorption tube (D), and trap (E). Approximately 65 mg of
Polysorbate 20 is accurately weighed into a reaction flask (A) and 10 mL of
hydroiodic acid and glass balls. A condenser is connected and CO2 is bubbled through
at a rate of 1 bubble per second. The flask is heated at 140∼145℃ in an oil bath at
least for 40 minutes. The flask is heated until the reflux in the condenser becomes
clear and the supernatant in the tube with silver nitrate solution becomes clear.
Before the reaction is complete, olefin is removed by heating the absorption tube (C)
50∼60℃ for 5 minutes in a water bath. After the reaction is complete, the absorption
tubes (D) and (C) are removed in this order and CO2 connection tube and oil bath are
removed. 150 mL of water and 10 mL of potassium iodide solution (1→10) are added
to a 500 mL flask, which is then connected to the absorption tube (D). Bromine ·
bromide solution in the absorption tube (D) is flowed into the flask and the tube and
the spiral tube are washed with water. Potassium iodide solution in the trap (E) is
transferred into the flask and the tube is washed with water. A stopper is placed on
the flask, which is set-aside for 5 minutes. 5 mL of dilute sulfuric acid is added to
the flask and the solution is immediately titrated with 0.05 N sodium thiosulfate
solution (indicator : starch solution). Separately, a blank test is carried out and the
content of oxyethylene as ethylene is calculated by the following equation.
(B - S) × N × 2.203
Content of oxyethylene(%) ＝
Weight of the sample(g)
B : Consumed amount of 0.05 N sodium thiosulfate solution in blank test (mL)
S : Consumed amount of 0.05 N sodium thiosulfate solution in test with sample (mL)
N : Normality of sodium thiosulfate solution
Content of oxyethylene group(%) (B' - S') × N' × 4.405
＝ Weight of the sample(g)
Silver nitrate solution in the absorption tube (C) is transferred into another flask and
the tube is washed with water. 150 mL of water is added to the solution, which is then
boiled. After cooling, the solution is titrated with 0.05 N ammonium thiocynate
(indicator : 3 mL of ferric ammonium sulfate solution). Separately, a blank test is
carried out in the same manner and the content (%) of oxyethylene (— CH2CH2O—)as
ethylene iodide (C2H5I) is calculated by the following equation.
B´ : Consumed amount of 0.05 N ammonium thiocynate solution in blank test (mL)
S´ : Consumed amount of 0.05 N ammonium thiocynate solution in test with sample
N´ : Normality of ammonium thiocynate solution
812
The sum of these values is the content of oxyethylene group in the sample.

813
 Polysorbate 60
Polyoxyethylene(20) Sorbitan Monostearate
INS No.: 435
Synonyms: Polyoxyethylene(20) sorbitan
monostearate; Sorbitan CAS No.: 9005-67-8
monooctadecanoate

Definition Polysorbate 60 is a partial ester mixture of sorbitol and anhydrous sorbitol

with stearic acid and palmitic acid, where approximately 20 M of ethylene oxide is
bonded to 1 M each of sorbitol, mono or dihydrated form of sorbitol via condensation
reaction.
Compositional Specifications of Polysorbate 60
Content Polysorbate 60, when calculated on the dried basis(anhydrous), should contain
65.0∼69.5% oxyethylene (C2H4O), which corresponds 97.3∼103.0% polysorbate 60.
Description Polysorbate 60 is colorless to yellow-orange oily liquid or half-gel having
a slightly characteristic odor.
Identification (1) to 5 mL of Polysorbate 60 solution (1→20), add 5 mL of sodium
hydroxide solution and boil for several minutes and cool. When the solution is
acidified with dilute hydrochloric acid, it turns turbid with white color.
(2) A mixture of Polysorbate 60 : water (60:40) forms gel at temperature of 25℃ or
lower.
Purity (1) Acid value : Acid value of Polysorbate 60 is proceed as directed under Purity
(1) for 「Polysorbate 20」. It should not be more than 2.
(2) Arsenic : It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(3) Lead : When 5.0 g of Polysorbate 60 is tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content
should not be more than 2.0 ppm.
(4) Cadmium : When 5.0 g of Polysorbate 60 is tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content
should not be more than 1.0 ppm.
(5) Mercury : When Polysorbate 60 is tested by Mercury Limit Test, its content should
not be more than 1.0 ppm.
(6) 1,4-Dioxan : Proceed as directed under Purity (6) in 「Polysorbate 20」, and its
content should not be more than 5.0 ppm.
(7) Hydroxyl Value : Hydroxyl value is obtained by following the Purity (7) for
「Polysorbate 20」 and should be within a range of 81～96.
(8) Saponification Value : Saponification value is obtained by following the Purity (8)
for 「Polysorbate 20」 and should be within a range of 44～55.
(9) Stearic Acid and Palmitic Acid : The content is obtained by following the Purity (9)
for 「Polysorbate 20」 and should be within a range of 21.5∼26.0%. The acid value
of stearic acid and palmitic acid, as obtained by the Acid Value Test in Flavoring
814
 Substances Test, should be within a range of 200～212. Solidification Temperature
should not be less than 52℃.
Water Content Water content of Polysorbate 60 is determined by back titration method
in water determination (Karl-Fisher Titration) and should not be more than 3%.
Residue on Ignition When thermogravimetric analysis is done with 5 g of Polysorbate
60, the amount of residue should not be more than 0.25%.
Assay Proceed as directed under Assay of 「Polysorbate 20」.

815
 Polysorbate 65
Polyoxyethylene (20) Sorbitan Tristearate
INS No.: 436
Synonyms: Polyoxyethylene(20) sorbitan CAS No.: 9005-71-4
tristearate

Definition Polysorbate 65 is a partial ester mixture of sorbitol and anhydrous sorbitol

with stearic acid and palmitic acid, where approximately 20 M of ethylene oxide is
bonded to 1 M each of sorbitol, mono or dihydrated form of sorbitol via condensation
reaction.
Compositional Specifications of Polysorbate 65
Content Polysorbate 65, when calculated on the dried basis(anhydrous), should contain
46.0∼50.0% oxyethylene (C2H4O), which corresponds 96.0∼104.0% polysorbate 65.
Description Polysorbate 65 is white∼yellowish brown solid with slight characteristic
scent.
Identification To 5 mL of Polysorbate 65 solution (1→20), add 5 mL of sodium
hydroxide solution and boil for several minutes and cool. When the solution is acidified
with dilute hydrochloric acid, it turns turbid with white color.
Purity (1) Acid Value : Acid value of Polysorbate 65 is proceed as directed under Purity
(1) in 「Polysorbate 20」. It should not be more than 2.
(2) Arsenic : It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(3) Lead : When 5.0 g of Polysorbate 65 is tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content
should not be more than 2.0 ppm.
(4) Cadmium : When 5.0 g of Polysorbate 65 is tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content
should not be more than 1.0 ppm.
(5) Mercury : When Polysorbate 65 is tested by Mercury Limit Test, its content should
not be more than 1.0 ppm.
(6) 1,4-Dioxan : Proceed as directed under Purity (6) in 「Polysorbate 20」, and its
content should not be more than 5.0 ppm.
(7) Hydroxyl Value : Hydroxyl value of Polysorbate 65 is proceed as directed under
Purity (7) for 「Polysorbate 20」 and should be within a range of 40∼60.
(8) Saponification Value : Saponification value of Polysorbate 65 is proceed as directed
under Purity (8) in 「Polysorbate 20」 and should be within a range of 88∼98.
(9) Stearic Acid and Palmitic Acid : Proceed as directed under Purity (9) for
「Polysorbate 20」. It should be within a range of 42∼44%. The acid value of stearic
acid and palmitic acid, as obtained by the Acid Value Test in Flavoring Substances
Test, should be within a range of 200～212. The Solidification Temperature should
not less than 52℃.
Water Content Water content of Polysorbate 65 is determined by back titration method
816
 in water determination (Karl-Fisher Titration) and should not be more than 3%.
Residue on Ignition When thermogravimetric analysis is done with 5 g of Polysorbate
65, the amount of residue should not be more than 0.25%.
Assay Proceed as directed under Assay in 「Polysorbate 20」.

817
 Polysorbate 80
Polyoxyethylene(20) Sorbitan Monooleate
INS No.: 433
Synonyms: Polyoxyethylene(20) sorbitan monooleate; CAS No.: 9005-65-6
Sorbitan mono-9-octadecenoate

Definition Polysorbate 80 is a partial ester mixture of sorbitol and anhydrous sorbitol

with oleic acid, where approximately 20 M of ethylene oxide is bonded to 1 M each of
sorbitol, mono or dihydrated form of sorbitol via condensation reaction.
Compositional Specifications of Polysorbate 80
Content Polysorbate 80, when calculated on the dried basis(anhydrous), should contain
65.0∼69.5% oxyethylene (C2H4O), which corresponds 96.5∼103.5% polysorbate 80.
Description Polysorbate 80 is white∼orange yellow oily liquid having a slightly
characteristic odor.
Identification (1) To 5 mL of Polysorbate 80 solution (1→20), add 5 mL of sodium
hydroxide solution and boil for several minutes and cool. When the solution is
acidified with dilute hydrochloric acid, it turns turbid with white color.
(2) To 5 mL of Polysorbate 80 solution (1→20), add bromine solution, then bromine'
color disappears.
(3) A mixture of Polysorbate 80 : water (60:40) forms gel at temperature of 25℃ or
lower.
Purity (1) Acid Value : Acid value of Polysorbate 80 is proceed as directed under Purity
(1) in 「Polysorbate 20」 and should not be more than 2.
(2) Arsenic : It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(3) Lead : When 5.0 g of Polysorbate 80 is tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content
should not be more than 2.0 ppm.
(4) Cadmium : When 5.0 g of Polysorbate 80 is tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content
should not be more than 1.0 ppm.
(5) Mercury : When Polysorbate 80 is tested by Mercury Limit Test, its content should
not be more than 1.0 ppm.
(6) 1,4-Dioxan : Proceed as directed under Purity (6) in 「Polysorbate 20」, and its
content should not be more than 5.0 ppm.
(7) Hydroxyl Value : Hydroxyl value of Polysorbate 80 is proceed as directed under
Purity (7) in 「Polysorbate 20」 and should be within a range of 65∼80.
(8) Saponification Value : Saponification value of Polysorbate 80 is proceed as directed
under Purity (8) in 「Polysorbate 20」 and should be within a range of 45∼55.
(9) Oleic Acid : Proceed as directed under Purity (9) for 「Polysorbate 20」. It should
be within a range of 22∼24%. The acid value of oleic acid, as obtained by the Acid
Value Test in Flavoring Substances Test, should be within a range of 196～206.
818
 Iodine value, as obtained by the following method, should be within a range of 80∼92.
Iodine Value : Approximately 0.3 g of Polysorbate 80 is accurately weighed and
transferred into a 500 mL Erlenmeyer flask with a stopper and 20 mL of glacial acetic
acid/cyclohexane, 1:1, v/v is added to dissolve the material. After adding 25 mL of
Weiss solution, a stopper is placed and let stand in the dark for 1 hour where the
iodine value is <150 and for 2 hours where the iodine value is ≥150. 20 mL of
potassium iodide solution and 100 mL (previously boiled and cooled) are added to the
flask. The excess iodine is titrated with 0.1 N sodium thiosulfate solution. Sodium
thiosulfate solution is added drop wise until yellow color disappears. Starch solution is
added and the titration is continued until the blue color disappears completely. Near
the end point, the flask is vigorously shaken with a stopper. Separately, a blank test is
carried out by the same procedure.
(B - S) × 1.269
Iodine Value=
Weight of the sample(g)
B : Consumed amount of 0.1 N sodium thiosulfate solution in the blank test (mL)
S : Consumed amount of 0.1 N sodium thiosulfate solution in the test for sample
(mL)
Water Content Water content of Polysorbate 80 is determined by back titration method
in water determination (Karl-Fisher Titration) and should not be more than 3%.
Residue on Ignition When thermogravimetric analysis is done with 5 g of Polysorbate 80,
the amount of residue should not be more than 0.25%.
Assay Proceed as directed under Assay of 「Polysorbate 20」.

819
 Polyvinyl Acetate

Other names: Poly(vinyl acetate) CAS No.: 9003-20-7

Definition Polyvinyl Acetate is a polymer of vinyl acetate.
Compositional Specifications of Polyvinyl Acetate
Description Polyvinyl Acetate occurs as colorless to light yellow granules or glassy
lumps.
Identification Dissolve 1 g of Polyvinyl Acetate in 5 mL of ethyl acetate, and proceed as
directed under (5) Thin Film Method in Infrared Spectrophotometry. The solution
exhibits absorbances at about 1,725 cm-1, 1,230 cm-1, 1,015 cm-1, 937 cm-1. and 785
cm-1.
Purity (1) Free Acids : Accurately weigh about 2 g of Polyvinyl Acetate, add 50 mL of
methanol, and dissolve by shaking occasionally. Add 10 mL of water, and titrate with
0.1 N sodium hydroxide (indicator : 4～5 drops of phenolphthalein solution). Perform
a blank test, and make any necessary correction. Calculate the amount of free acids
as acetic acid (CH3COOH) by the following formula. The content should not be more
than 0.05%.
Content of free acids (%) =
volume of 0.1N sodium hydroxide consumed(mL) × 60 × 100
weight of the sample(g) × 10 × 1,000

(2) Arsenic : It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(3) Lead : When 5.0 g of Polyvinyl Acetate is tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content
should not be more than 3.0 ppm.
(4) Polyvinyl Acetate : Finely crush the sample. Accurately weigh 2.5 g of the sample,
transfer into 25mL volumetric flask, and dissolve in toluene to make 25 mL, test
solution. The test solution is proceeded gas chromatography under operation
conditions below and measure the amount of polyvinyl acetate from calibration curve.
Its content should not be more than 5 ppm.
Standard solution : Accurately weigh 0.05 g of polyvinyl acetate, transfer into a
50mL volumetric flask and dilute to 50 mL with toluene. Accurately pipette 0.01,
0.03, 0.1, 0.3, and 1mL of this stock solution into each flask to make 100 mL,
standard solution.
Standard Curve Preparation : Standard solutions of 5 different concentration is
proceeded gas chromatography under operation conditions below and prepare
standard curve.
Operation Condition
Column : HP-1(30m×0.32mm, 0.25µm) or its equivalent
820
 Detector : Hydrogen Flame Ionization Detector (FID)
Temperature at injection hole: 150℃
Amount of injection : 1µl
Column Temperature : Keeping at 100℃ for 8 minutes, it is raised as the rate of
20℃/minutes by 250℃, keep at 250℃ for 5 minutes
Carrier gas : helium
Loss on Drying When Polyvinyl Acetate is dried at 80℃ for 3 hours under a reduced
pressure, the weight loss should not be more than 1%.
Residue on Ignition When thermogravimetric analysis is done with 2 g of Polyvinyl
Acetate, the residues should not be more than 0.05%.

821
 Polyvinyl Alcohol
INS No.: 1203
Synonyms: Ethenol homopolymer; PVOH;
CAS No.: 9002-89-5
Vinyl alcohol polymer

Definition Polyvinyl Alcohol is polymer(ester of polyvinyl is partly hydrolyzed).

Compositional Specifications of Polyvinyl Alcohol
Description Polyvinyl Alcohol is odorless as a white~pale yellow powder or granule.
Identification
(1) Polyvinyl Alcohol is soluble in water and Polyvinyl Alcohol is insoluble in ethanol.
(2) pH of Polyvinyl Alcohol solution(1→25) should be 5.0~6.5.
(3) When Polyvinyl Alcohol is proceeded as directed under (1) potassium bromide disk
method in Infrared Spectrophotometry, the maximum absorption should appear at the
same wavelength as a Polyvinyl Alcohol standard.
(4) After dissolving 0.01 g of Polyvinyl Alcohol in 100 mL of water, heat and cool it at
room temperature. Add 1 drop of iodine solution and a few drops of boric acid to 5
mL of this solution and wait. And then the color shows blue.
(5) After dissolving 0.5 g of Polyvinyl Alcohol in 10 mL of water, heat and cool it at
room temperature. Add 1 drop of iodine solution to 5 mL of this solution and wait. And
then the color shows dark red~blue.
(6) When add 10 mL of ethanol to 5 mL of the rest solution (5), a white precipitation
is generated.
Purity (1) Water Insoluble Substances : 10 g of Polyvinyl Alcohol, accurately weighed, is
dissolved in 100 mL of hot water. Insoluble substances are separated by a glass
filter (100 mesh screen) and washed with 30 mL of hot water. The glass filter is
dried for 2 hours at 105℃. The amount of insoluble substances should not be more
than 0.1%.
(2) Particles Size : Take 100 g of Polyvinyl Alcohol and measure amount of passing
through sieve of 100 mesh. The amount should be more than 99.0%.
(3) Lead : When 5.0 g of Polyvinyl Alcohol is tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content
should not be more than 2.0 ppm.
(4) Methanol and Methyl acetate : 2.0 g of Polyvinyl Alcohol is accurately weighed into
a 100 mL glass bottle with stopper, 98mL of water and 30㎕ of acetone are added.
After the stopper is placed to bottle, mix it continually with boiling in water bath.
When the solution is clear, take it out of the water bath and cool it at room
temperature. This solution is used as test solution. Separately, make each
concentration of methanol and methyl acetate to 1.2%(v/v). Take 2 mL of this
solution and add 98mL of water and 30㎕ of acetone. Make solution by the above
same method on making test solution. This solution is used as standard solution(1 mL
of this solution contains 0.24㎕ of methanol and 0.24㎕ of methyl acetate). Inject
822
 respectively each 0.4㎕ of methanol and methyl acetate to gas chromatography under
below operation conditions. The content of methanol and methyl acetate are
calculated by following formula, the content should not be more than 1.0%
respectively.

Content of QT2 QS1 100

× × 0.024 × Weight
Methanol(%) = QT1 QS2 sample(g)of
Content of QT2 QS1 100
Methyl acetate(%) = QT1 QS2 × × 0.024 × Weight of
sample(g)
QT1 : Peak area of acetone of test solution
QT2 : Peak area of methanol of test solution
QT2 : Peak area of methyl acetate of test solution
QS1 : Peak area of acetone of standard solution
QS2 : Peak area of methanol of standard solution
QS2 : Peak area of methyl acetate of standard solution
Operation Conditions
Column : PLOT Q or its equivalent
Detector : Hydrogen Flame Ionization Detector (FID)
Temperature at injection hole: 160℃
Column Temperature : 160℃
Detector Temperature : 160℃
Carrier gas and flow rate : Nitrogen
(5) Acid value ： 3 g of Polyvinyl Alcohol is precisely weighted and taken into round
bottom flask and dissolved in 250 mL of water. Put a magnetic bar into flask and
attach a reflux condenser. Boil it in water bate for 30 minutes with mixing and
cool it. 50 mL of this solution is used as test solution. When test solution is tested
by Acid Value Test Methods in Flavoring Substances Test, the value should be not
more than 3.
(6) Ester value : 1 g of Polyvinyl Alcohol is precisely weighted and 25mL of 0.5 N
alcoholic potassium hydroxide and 25 mL of water are added into 250 mL round
bottom flask. A reflux condenser is attached and the solution is heated for 30
minutes in a water bath. Cool it and add 1 mL of phenolphthalein solution. Excess
alkali is titrated with 0.5 N hydrochloric acid and ester value is calculated by the
following equation. Ester value should be 125～153. Separately, a blank test is
carried out.
(a—b) × 28.05
Saponification Value = Weight
sample(g)of
a ： Consumed amount of 0.5 N hydrochloric acid for blank test (mL)
b ： Consumed amount of 0.5 N hydrochloric acid for Test Solution (mL)
(7) Degree of Hydrolysis : Saponification Value(Sd) of the above (6) is calculated on
823
 the dried basis. And calculate degree of hydrolysis is calculated by following
formula, the value should be 86.5~89.0%.
Saponification Value
(calculated onSthe) dried basis, = Saponification Value × 100
Weight of sample(g)
d
7.84 × Sd
Degree of Hydrolysis (%) = 10 0 - 100-(0.075 ×
Sd)
(8) Viscosity : After drying Polyvinyl Alcohol, take precisely 6.0 g. Put it into 250
mL flask and add water of 140 mL and mix it with using a magnetic bar. When the
solution is completely saturated, increase speed of stirring. After removing the
effervescence, heat it by 90℃ and keep it 5 minutes. And then stop heating and
stir it for 1 hour. After adding a little water to make precisely 150 g, stir it to
make this solution homogeneous. And cool it until the temperature of solution is
about 15℃. When the viscosity is measured by Method 1 Capillary Viscosity
Measurement in Viscosity at 20±0.1℃, it should be 4.8～5.8cps.
Loss on Drying When Polyvinyl Alcohol is dried for 3 hours at 150℃, the weight loss
should not be more than 5.0%.
Residue on Ignition When thermogravimetric analysis is done with Polyvinyl Alcohol,
the residue should not be more than 0.1%.

824
 Polyvinyl Polypyrrolidone
INS No.: 1202
Synonyms: Insoluble polyvinylpolypyrrolidone;
CAS No.: 25249-54-1
Crospovidone; Cross linked polyvidone

Compositional Specifications of Polyvinyl Polypyrrolidone

Description Polyvinyl Polypyrrolidone is white～pale yellow-white powder. It is odorless.
Identification When to 1 g of Polyvinyl Polypyrrolidone, add 10 mL of water and 0.1 mL
of iodine solution and shake for 30 seconds, the suspension decolorizes. When add 1
mL of starch solution and shake, the suspension should not become blue.
Purity (1) pH : When 1 g of Polyvinyl Polypyrrolidone, add water to make 100 mL, pH
of the solution should be within a range of 5.0∼11.0.
(2) Water Solubles : Approximately 25.0 g of Polyvinyl Polypyrrolidone is precisely
weighed and transferred into a distillation flask. 225 mL of water is added and a
reflux condenser is attached to the flask. While mixing with a stirrer, the flask is
hated for 20 hours. After cooling, the suspension is transferred into a 250 mL
volumetric flask, set-aside for 15 minutes and the supernatant is centrifuged for 1
hour at 12,000 rpm. The resulting supernatant is filtered through a membrane filter
with 0.45 μm pore size. 50 mL of filtrate is precisely taken onto a glass evaporation
dish, which is weighed prior to use. Then the filtrate is evaporated to dryness and
further dried for 3 hours at 90℃. It is then cooled in a desiccator and precisely
weighed. The content of residue should not be more than 1.5%.
(3) Nitrogen : Transfer 100 mg of Polyvinyl Polypyrrolidone into a flask for
decomposition. Add 1 g of potassium sulfate and copper sulfate mixture (10:1), inner
wall of the flask, and wash with small amount of water. Add 7 mL of sulfuric acid
and shake, and slowly add 1 mL of 30% hydrogen peroxide. Then the content is
decomposed by heating until it becomes transparent and blue. After the decomposition
is over, the liquid is cooled, where 20 mL of water is added use the Test Solution.
The Test Solution is quantitatively analyzed for nitrogen. The content of nitrogen
should be within a range of 11.0～12.8%.
(4) Lead : When 5.0 g of Polyvinyl Polypyrrolidone is tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content
should not be more than 2.0 ppm.
(5) Zinc : When 5.0 g of Polyvinyl Polypyrrolidone is tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content
should not be more than 25 ppm.
(6) N-Vinyl Pyrrolidone : Accurately weigh 4 g of the sample, add 30 mL of water,
and stir it for 15 minutes. Transfer the solution into a centrifuge tube and wash the
residue with 20 mL of water. Combine the washings and the filtrate, and centrifuge
it. Filter supernatant with glass filter (1G4 or its equivalent), wash the residue 50 mL
of water and, combine it to the filtrate. Add 0.5 g of sodium acetate, mix and begin
825
 titrating with 0.1N iodine. When the iodine colour no longer fades, add additional 3
mL of the titrate, and allow the solution to stand for 10 minutes. Titrate the excess
iodine with 0.1 N sodium thiosulfate solution, and the consumed amount of 0.1N
iodine solution should not access 0.72 mL. Separately, a blank test is carried out (not
more than 0.1%).
1 mL of 0.1 N iodine solution = 5.56mg of N-vinyl pyrrolidone
(7) Unsaturated Matter : To 4 g of Polyvinyl Polypyrrolidone, add 30 mL of water and
stirrer for 15 minutes. This is filtered through a glass filter into a 250 mL
Erlenmeyer flask. Residue on the filter is washed with 100 mL of water and the rinse
water is added to the filtrate. 0.5 g of sodium acetate is added to the resulting
solution, which is then titrated with 0.1 N iodine solution until the color doesn't get
lighter. After adding 3 mL of 0.1 N iodine solution is added, the solution is set-aside
for 10 minutes. Excess iodine is titrated with 0.1 N sodium thiosulfate solution
(indicator : starch solution). Separately, a blank test is carried out following the same
procedure and the content is calculated by the following equation. The content of
unsaturated matter should not be more than 0.1%.
Content of unsaturated
＝
matter(%) (b - a) × N × 0.0555
× 100
weight of the sample(g)

a : Consumed amount of 0.1 N sodium thiosulfate for the test solution (mL)
b : Consumed amount of 0.1 N sodium thiosulfate for the blank test (mL)
N : Normality of 0.1 N sodium thiosulfate solution
Water Content Water content of Polyvinyl Polypyrrolidone is determined by water
determination (Karl-Fisher Titration) and should not be more than 6%.
Residue on Ignition Residue on ignition of Polyvinyl Polypyrrolidone should not be more
than 0.4%.

826
 Polyvinyl Pyrrolidone
Povidone
INS No.: 1201
Synonyms: Soluble polyvinylpyrrolidone; CAS No.: 9003-39-8
Povidone; PVP

Compositional Specifications of Polyvinyl Pyrrolidone

Description Polyvinyl Pyrrolidone is white～yellowish brown powder.
Identification (1) When 20 mL of 1 N hydrochloric acid and 5 mL potassium bichromate
solution are added to 10 mL of an aqueous solution (1→50) of Polyvinyl Pyrrolidone,
orange colored precipitates are formed.
(2) 75 mg of cobalt nitrate and 0.3 g of ammonium thiocynate are dissolved in 2 mL of
water, which is mixed with 5 mL aqueous solution (1→50) of Polyvinyl Pyrrolidone.
When the resulting solution is acidified with dilute hydrochloric acid, pale blue
precipitates are formed.
Purity (1) pH : A suspension of 5 g of Polyvinyl Pyrrolidone in 100 mL of water should
have a pH range of 3.0∼5.0
(2) Lead : When 5.0 g of Polyvinyl Pyrrolidone is tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content
should not be more than 2.0 ppm.
(3) Aldehyde : 10 g of Polyvinyl Pyrrolidone is precisely weighed and dissolved in 300 mL
of water, where 80 mL of 25% sulfuric acid is added. The solution is transferred into
a 1000 mL round bottom flask. It is then extracted for 45 minutes with a reflux
condenser. It is then distilled 100 mL with 20 mL of 1 N hydroxylamine chloride salt
solution whose pH is adjusted to 3.1. It is then titrated with 0.1 N sodium hydroxide
solution to pH 3.1 using a pH meter. Separately, a blank test is carried out.
1 mL of 0.1 N of sodium hydroxide solution = 4.405 mg C2H4O
(4) Hydrazine : 2.5 g of Polyvinyl Pyrrolidone transfer into a 50 mL centrifuge tube
and dissolved in 25 mL of water, where 500 μl of salicylaldehyde solution in
methanol (1→20) and shaken. The tube is heated for 15 minutes at 60℃ in a water
bath. After cooling, 2.0 mL of toluene is added to the tube, which is shaken
vigorously for 2 minutes and then centrifuged. The supernatant is collected (Test
Solution). 10 μl of each of Test Solution and previously prepared salicyl aldazine
standard solution is spotted on thin layer chromatography plate. The plate is
absorbed with silica gel that is silanized with dimethylsilane. Using a mixture of
methanol : water (2:1) as a Mobile Phase, it is developed to 3/4 position and dried in
air, which is then observed under 365 nm UV light. The spot of Test Solution should
not be darker than that of Standard Solution (not more than 1 ppm).
∘Salicyl Aldazine Standard Solution : 300 mg of hydrazine sulfate is dissolved in 5 mL of
827
 water, where 1 mL of anhydrous acetic acid and freshly prepared 20% salicyl
aldehyde solution in isopropyl alcohol. It is then set aside until yellow precipitates
are formed. This is then extracted with 15 mL of methyl chloride. Methylene chloride
is completely removed by evaporation. A mixture of warm toluene and methanol
(60:40) is added to the precipitates, which is then cooled to recrystallize. It is then
filtered and dried under vacuum. Melting point should be within a range of 213～21
9℃ and the difference in temperature between beginning and end of melting should
not be exceed 1℃. The Standard Solution contains 9.38 μg/mL of toluene.
(5) Relative Viscosity : Approximately 1 g of dried material is precisely weighed and
dissolved in 50 mL of water and the total volume is brought to 100 mL with water.
After settling for 1 hour, it is filtered (Test Solution). An Abbe viscometer is
previously cleaned, dried and maintained at 25 ± 0.2℃ in a water bath. 10 mL of the
Test Solution transfer into the viscometer, heated for 10 minutes in a water bath.
The upper layer of the Test Solution is gently sucked into the capillary exactly
above the upper scale mark. After relieving suction, when the meniscus of the Test
Solution reaches the upper scale mark, the flow time through the capillary is clocked.
Time taken for the Solution to travel from the upper scale mark to the lower scale
mark is measured. This procedure is repeated three times and an average value (to
one decimal point) is calculated. If the range of time measured exceeds 0.3 second,
the viscometer is cleanly washed and the experiment is repeated with 10 mL of Test
Solution. A blank test is carried out with water. Relative viscosity is calculated by
dividing the time for Test Solution by the time for blank test [1.188∼1.325
(molecular weight about 40,000), 3.225∼5.662 (molecular weight about 360,000)].
(6) Monomer : Approximately 4 g is precisely weighed into a flask with a stopper and
dissolved in 30 mL of water. While mixing with 0.5 g of sodium acetate, the solution
is titrated with 0.1 N iodine solution. When the color of the iodine doesn't change,
3.0 mL of iodine solution is added. After setting aside for 5～10 minutes, the excess
iodine is titrated with 0.1 N sodium thiosulfate solution (indicator : starch solution). A
blank test is carried out with the same amount of 0.1 N iodine solution.
1 mL of Iiodine solution 0.1 N = 5.56 mg C6H9NO
(7) Nitrogen : 0.1 g of Polyvinyl Pyrrolidone is added to a flask for decomposition.
After adding 1 g of potassium sulfate and copper sulfate mixture (1:1), inner wall of
the flask is washed with small amount of water. 7 mL of sulfuric acid is added. While
shaking, 1 mL of 30% hydrogen peroxide is slowly added. Then the content is
decomposed by heating until it becomes transparent blue liquid. After the
decomposition is over, the liquid is cooled, where 20 mL of water is added (Test
Solution). The Test Solution is quantitatively analyzed for nitrogen. The content of
nitrogen should be within a range of 12.2 ～ 13.0%.
Water Content Water content of Polyvinyl Pyrrolidone is determined by water
determination (Karl-Fisher Titration) and should not be more than 5.0%.
828
 Potassium Alginate

Chemical Formula: (C6H7O6K)n

Equiv wt, actual(avg.): 238.00 INS No.: 402

Synonyms: Potassium salt of alginate CAS No.: 9005-36-1

Compositional Specifications of Potassium Alginate

Content If Potassium Alginate, when calculated on the dried basis, should contain 16.5∼
19.5% carbon dioxide (CO2), which corresponds to 89.2∼105.5% potassium alginate.
Description Potassium Alginate occurs as white～pale yellow fiber, granule, or powder.
Identification (1) Proceed as directed under Identification (1) for 「Ammonium Alginate」.
(2) Proceed as directed under Identification (2) for 「Ammonium Alginate」.
(3) Proceed as directed under Identification (3) for 「Alginic Acid」.
Purity (1) Arsenic : It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(2) Lead : When 5.0 g of Potassium Alginate is tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content
should not be more than 5.0 ppm.
(3) Cadmium : When 5.0 g of Potassium Alginate is tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content
should not be more than 1.0 ppm.
(4) Mercury : When Potassium Alginate is tested by Mercury Limit Test, its content
should not be more than 1.0 ppm.
(5) Total Viable Aerobic Count : When Potassium Alginate is tested by Microbe Test
Methods for Total Viable Aerobic Count (Number of General Germs) in General Test
Method in 「Standards and Specifications for Foods」, it should not be more than
5,000 per 1 g
(6) E. coli : When Potassium Alginate is tested by Microbe Test Methods for E. coli in
General Test Method 「Standards and Specifications for Foods」, it should be
negative (-).
(7) Salmonella : When Potassium Alginate is tested by Microbe Test Methods for
Salmonella in General Test Method 「Standards and Specifications for Foods」, it
should be negative (-).
(8) Fungi : When Potassium Alginate is tested by Microbe Test Methods for Fungi in
General Test Method in 「Standards and Specifications for Foods」, it should not be
more than 500 per 1 g
Loss on Drying When 3 g of Potassium Alginate is dried for 4 hours at 105℃, the loss
should not be more than 15.0%.
Assay Approximately 0.25 g of Potassium Alginate is precisely weighed and analyzed by
the procedure in Content Analysis for [Xanthan Gum].
829
1 mL of 0.25 N sodium hydroxide solution ＝ 28.75 mg Potassium alginate
(Equivalent Value : 238.00)

830
 Potassium Benzoate

Chemical Formula: C7H5KO2․3H2O

Molecular Weight: 214.27 INS No.: 212

Synonyms: Potassium salt of
benzenecarboxylic acid CAS No.: 582-25-2

Compositional Specifications of Potassium Benzoate

Content Potassium Benzoate, when calculated on the dried basis, should contain not less
than 99.0% of potassium benzoate (C7H5KO2).
Description Potassium Benzoate is scentless white grain, crumb, or crystalline powder.
Identification Potassium Benzoate responds to test of Benzoate or Potassium Salts in
Identification.
Purity (1) Melting Point : 2% aqueous solution of Potassium Benzoate is acidified with
dilute hydrochloric acid. Precipitates are filtered, washed with water, and dried for 4
hours at 105℃. The melting point should be within a range of 121.5∼123.5℃.
(2) Free Acid and Free Alkali : 2 g of Potassium Benzoate is precisely weighed and
dissolved in 20 mL of hot water. After adding 2～3 drops of phenolphthalein solution,
the solution is titrated with 0.1 N sodium hydroxide solution or 0.1 N of hydrochloric
acid. The consumed amount of the solution should not exceed 0.5 mL.
(3) Chlorinated Compounds : 0.25 g of potassium benzoate is dissolved in 10 mL of
water, which is acidified with nitric acid. The precipitates are filtered, mixed with 0.5
g potassium carbonate, and dried. The mixture is then heat treated for approximately
10 minutes at 600℃. After cooling, the residue is dissolved in 20 mL of dilute nitric
acid and filtered. 0.5 mL of 0.1 N silver nitrate is added to the filtrate (Test
Solution). Separately, water is added to a mixture of 0.5 mL of 0.1 N silver nitrate
solution and 0.5 mL of 0.01 N hydrochloric acid so that the concentration is the
same as in Test Solution. This solution as the reference solution. Turbidity of the
Test Solution should be equal to or less than that of the Reference Solution.
(4) Arsenic : It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(5) Lead : When 5.0 g of potassium benzoate is tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content
should not be more than 2.0 ppm.
(6) Mercury : When potassium benzoate is tested by Mercury Limit Test, its content
should not be more than 1.0 ppm.
831
 (7) Readily Oxidizable Matters : Add 1.5 mL of sulfuric acid to 100 mL of water, add
drop wise 0.1 N potassium benzoate while boiling until the pink color persists for 30
seconds. Weigh 1 g of Sodium Benzoate, and dissolve in the solution. Titrate with 0.1
N potassium permanganate at about 70℃ until the pink color persists for 15 seconds.
The amount should not be more than 0.5 mL.
(8) Realdily Carbonizable Substances : When 0.5 g of potassium benzoate is tested for
Realdily Carbonizable Substances, it color should not be darker than the color
standard solution Q.
Loss on Drying When Potassium Benzoate is dried for 4 hours at 105℃, the loss should
not be more than 26.5%.
Assay 2.5～3 g of Potassium Benzoate, precisely dried at 105℃ until the weight
becomes constant. and accurately weighed, dissolve in 50 mL of water. The solution is
neutralized with 0.1 N hydrochloric acid (using phenolphthalein solution as an indicator,
if necessary). 50 mL of ether and 3～5 drops of bromophenol blue solution are added.
While shaking so that ether layer and aqueous layer are well mixed, the mixture is
titrated with 0.5 N hydrochloric acid. The aqueous layer is separated out and the
ether layer is washed with 10 mL of water. Wash water is added the previous
aqueous layer. With 20 mL of ether, the aqueous phase is titrated again by the same
procedure.
1 mL of 0.5 N hydrochloric acid = 80.11 mg C7H5KO2

832
 Potassium Bicarbonate
Chemical Formula: KHCO3
Molecular Weight: 100.12 INS No.: 501(ii)
Synonyms: Potassium hydrogen carbonate; CAS No.: 298-14-6
Acid potassium carbonate

Compositional Specifications of Potassium Bicarbonate

Content Potassium Bicarbonate, when calculated on the dried basis, should contain within
a range of 99.0∼101.5% of potassium bicarbonate (KHCO3).
Description Potassium Bicarbonate is colorless transparent crystalline or white platelet
powder.
Identification Potassium Bicarbonate solution (1→10) responds to test of potassium salts
and bicarbonates in Identification.
Purity (1) Lead : Potassium Bicarbonate is precisely weighed and is tested by purity (2)
for 「Sodium Metaphosphate」, its content should not be more than 2.0 ppm.
(2) Arsenic : It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(3) Mercury : When Potassium Bicarbonate is tested by Mercury Limit Test, its content
should not be more than 1.0 ppm.
(4) Carbonates : 1 g of Potassium Bicarbonate is dissolved in 20 mL of water at
temperature of 5℃ or lower without shaking. After adding 2 mL of 0.1 N
hydrochloric acid and 2 drops of phenolphthalein solution, the color of the solution
should not be deeper than pale red.
Loss on Drying When Potassium Bicarbonate is dried for 4 hours in a desiccator (silica
gel), the loss should not be more than 0.25%.
Assay Approximately 4 g of Potassium Bicarbonate is precisely weighed and dissolved
in 100 mL of water. After adding 2 drops of methyl red solution, the solution is
titrated with 1 N hydrochloric acid while stirring until the color turns pale red. Near
the end point, the solution is boiled and then cooled. Titration is continued until the
color of the solution doesn't become pale.
1 mL of 1 N hydrochloric acid ＝ 100.1 mg KHCO3

833
 Potassium DL-Bitartrate
Potassium Hydrogen DL-Tartrate
CO
O
K⃒
CH
OH
⃒
C
H
OH
⃒
CO
O
H
Chemical Formula: C4H5O6K
Molecular Weight: 188.18

Compositional Specifications of Potassium DL-Bitartrate

Content Potassium DL-Bitartrate, when calculated on the dried basis, should contain
within a range of 99.0～101.0% of potassium DL-bitartrate (C4H5O6K).
Description Potassium DL-Bitartrate occurs as colorless crystals or as a white
crystalline powder, having a cool, acid taste.
Identification (1) Dissolve 1 g of Potassium DL-Bitartrate in 10 mL of ammonia solution.
The solution has no optical activity.
(2) Proceed as directed under Identification (2) and (3) in Potassium L-Bitarate.
Purity (1) Clarity and Color of Solution, Sulfate, Ammonium salt : Proceed as directed
under Purity (1), (3), and (4) for [Potassium L-Bitartarate].
(2) Arsenic : It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(3) Heavy Metals : Proceed as directed under Purity (6) for [Potassium L-Bitartarate].
(4) Readily Oxidizable Substances : Weigh 2.0 g of Potassium DL-Bitartrate, dissolve in
20 mL of water and 30 mL of diluted sulfuric acid. keep the temperature at 20℃, and
add 4.0 mL of 0.1 N potassium permanganate. The pink color of the solution does
not disappear within 3 minutes.
Loss on Drying When Potassium DL-Bitartrate is dried for 3 hours at 105℃, the weight
loss should not be more than 0.5%.
Assay Proceed as directed under Assay for [Potassium L-Bitartarate].

834
 Potassium L-Bitartrate
COOK
H▶ ⃒C⃒ ◀OH
HO▶ C⃒ ◀H
COOH
Chemical Formula: C4H5O6K
Molecular Weight: 188.18 INS No.: 336(i)
Synonyms: Monobasic potassium tartrate CAS No.: 868-14-4

Compositional Specifications of Potassium L-Bitartrate

Content Potassium L-Bitartrate, when calculated on the dried basis, should contain
within a range of 99.0～101.0% of potassium L-bitartrate (C4H5O6K).
Description Potassium L-Bitartrate occurs as colorless crystals or as a white crystalline
powder, having a cool, acid taste.
Identification (1) Dissolve 1 g of Potassium L-Bitartrate in 10 mL of ammonia solution.
The solution is dextrorotatory.
(2) Heat gradually 0.5 g of Potassium L-Bitartrate. A burning sucrose-like odor is
evolved, and carbonization occurs. To the residue, add 5 mL of water, and stir well.
The solution is alkaline. Neutralize the solution with diluted hydrochloric acid, and filter.
The solution responds to the test for Potassium Salt.
(3) Potassium L-Bitartrate responds to the test for Tartrate in Identification.
Purity (1) Clarity and Color of Solution : 0.5 g of Potassium L-Bitartrate is dissolved. 3
mL of ammonia solution. It is Colorless and almost clear.
(2) Specific Rotation : After drying for 3 hours at 105℃, approximately 5g of
Potassium L-Bitartrate is precisely weighed, which is dissolved in 10 mL of ammonia
solution and water so that the total volume becomes 50 mL. Optical rotation of this
solution should be within a range of ＝ +32.5∼+35.5°
(3) Sulfate : 0.5 g of Potassium L-Bitartrate is dissolved in a warm mixture of 2 mL
hydrochloric acid and 30 mL of water. After cooling, the solution is tested by Sulfate
Limit Test, its content should not be more than the amount that corresponds to 2 mL
of 0.01 N sulfuric acid.
(4) Ammonium Salt : Weigh 0.5 g of Potassium L-Bitartrate, add 5 mL of sodium
hydroxide solution, and heat. No odor of ammonia is evolved.
(5) Arsenic : It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(6) Lead : When 5.0 g of Cinnamic Acid is tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content
should not be more than 2.0 ppm.
(7) Insoluble materials: Weight 1 g of Potassium L-Bitartrate, and dissolve in 3 mL of
ammonia water. Insoluble materials should not be left in this solution.
835
Loss on Drying When Potassium L-Bitartrate is dried for 3 hours at 105℃, the loss
should not be more than 0.5%.
Assay Dissolve 0.4 g of Potassium L-Bitartrate, previously dried and accurately weighed
in 20 mL of hot water, and titrate with 0.1 N sodium hydroxide while hot (indicator :
2～3 drops of phenolphthalein solution).
1 mL of 0.1 N sodium hydroxide = 18.82 mg of C4H5O6K

836
 Potassium Carbonate, Anhydrous
Chemical Formula: K2CO3 INS No.: 501(i)
Molecular Weight: 138.21 CAS No.: 584-08-7

Compositional Specifications of Potassium Carbonate

Content Potassium Carbonate (Anhydrous), when calculated on the dried basis, should be
contain not less than 99.0% of potassium carbonate (K2CO3).
Description Potassium Carbonate (Anhydrous) occurs as white powder or granules.
Identification Potassium Carbonate solution (1→10) responds to the tests for Potassium
salt and Carbonate in Identification.
Purity (1) Clarity and Color of Solution : When 1 g of Potassium Carbonate (Anhydrous)
is dissolved in 20 mL of water, the solution should be colorless and almost clear.
(2) Chloride : Weigh 0.2 g of Potassium Carbonate (Anhydrous), add 6 mL of diluted
nitric acid, boil, cool and add 6 mL of diluted nitric acid, Test Solution. This Test
Solution is tested by Chloride Limit Test and its content should not be more than the
amount that corresponds to 0.3 mL of 0.01 N hydrochloric acid.
(3) Arsenic : It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(4) Lead : Potassium Carbonate (Anhydrous) is tested by purity (2) for 「Sodium
Metaphosphate」(not more than 2.0 ppm).
(5) Mercury : When Potassium Carbonate (Anhydrous) is tested by Mercury Limit Test,
its content should not be more than 1.0 ppm.
Loss on Drying When Potassium Carbonate, Anhydrous is dried for ４ hours at 180℃,
the weight loss should not be more than 1%.
Assay Accurately weigh about 1 g of Potassium Carbonate Anhydrous, previously dried,
dissolved in 25 mL of water, and titrate with 0.5 N sulfuric acid (indicator: 3 drops of
bromophenol blue solution). Boil near the end point to expel carbon dioxide, cool, and
continue the titration.
1 mL of 0.5 N sulfuric acid = 34.55 mg of K2CO3

837
 Potassium Chloride
Chemical Formula: KCl

Molecular Weight: 74.56 INS No.: 508

Synonyms: Sylvine; Sylvite CAS No.: 7447-40-7

Compositional Specifications of Potassium Chloride

Content Potassium Chloride, when calculated on the dried basis, should contain not less
than 99.0% of potassium chloride (KCl).
Description Potassium Chloride occurs as colorless crystals or as a white powder. It is
odorless and has a salty taste.
Identification Potassium Chloride solution(1→20) responds to the tests for Potassium Salt
and Chloride in Identification.
Purity (1) Free Acid and Free Alkali : Weigh 5 g of Potassium Chloride, dissolve in 50
mL of freshly boiled and cooled water, and add 3 drops of phenolphthalein solution.
The color of the solution does not change to pink. Add 0.3 mL of 0.02 N sodium
hydroxide. The color of the solution changes to pink.
(2) Arsenic : It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(3) Lead : Potassium Chloride is tested by purity (2) for 「Sodium Metaphosphate」(not
more than 2.0 ppm).
(4) Cadmium : Potassium Chloride is tested by purity (3) for 「Sodium Metaphosphate」
(not more than 1.0 ppm).
(5) Mercury : When Potassium Chloride is tested by Mercury Limit Test, its content
should not be more than 1.0 ppm.
(6) Bromide : Weigh 1 g of Potassium Chloride, and dissolve in water to make 100 mL.
Take 5 mL of this solution, add 3 drops ofhydrochloric acid (1→4) and 1 mL of
chloroform, and add 3 drops of chloramine T solution (1.25 g of chloramines T in
100 mL of water, prepared before use) while shaking. The color of the chloroform
layer does not change to yellow to yellow～red.
(7) Iodide : Weigh 0.5 g of Potassium Chloride, dissolve in 10 mL of water, add 3
drops of ferric chloride solution (1→10) and 1 mL of chloroform, shake, allow to
stand for 30 minutes, and shake again. The color of the chloroform layer does not
change to red-purple to purple.
(8) Sodium : When Flame Coloration Test is conducted with Potassium Chloride solution
(1→20), it should not show yellow or bright flame.
(9) Calcium or Magnesium : Weigh 0.2 g of Potassium Chloride, dissolve in 20 mL of
water, add 2 mL of ammonia solution, 2 mL of ammonium oxalate solution (1→30),
and 2 mL of disodium phosphate solution (1→8), and allow to stand for 5 minutes.
The solution should not become turbid.
Loss on Drying When Potassium Chloride is dried for 4 hours at 105℃, the weight loss
838
 should be more than 1.0%.
Assay Transfer 0.25 g of Potassium Chloride, previously dried and accurately weighed,
into a flask with a ground-glass stopper, dissolve in 50 mL of water, add 50 mL of
0.1 N silver nitrate and 5 mL of nitric acid and 5 mL of nitrobenzene while shaking,
and shake vigorously. Add 2 mL of ferric ammonium sulfate solution, and titrate the
excess silver nitrate with 0.1 N ammonium thiocyanate.
1 mL of 0.1 N silver nitrate = 7.456 mg of KCI

839
 Potassium Citrate
CH2(COOK)C(OH)(COOK)CH2COOK‧H2O
Chemical Formula: C6H5K3O7․H2O
Molecular Weight: 324.41 INS No.: 332(ii)
Synonyms: Tripotassium citrate; Tribasic
CAS No.: 6100-05-6
potassium citrate

Compositional Specifications of Potassium Citrate

Content Potassium Citrate, when calculated on the dried basis, should contain not less
than 99.0% of potassium citrate (C6H5K3O7).
Description Potassium Citrate occurs as colorless crystals or as a white crystalline
powder, and is odorless.
Identification Potassium Citrate solution (1→20) responds to the test for Citrate and
Potassium Salt in Identification.
Purity (1) Arsenic : It should be no more than 1.3 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(2) Lead : When 5.0 g of Potassium Citrate is tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content
should not be more than 1.0 ppm.
(3) Mercury : When Potassium Citrate is tested by Mercury Limit Test, its content
should not be more than 1.0 ppm.
(4) Alkalinity : Potassium Citrate solution(1→20) is alkaline as tested with a litmus
paper.
Loss on Drying When Potassium Citrate is dried for 4 hours at 180℃, the weight loss
should be within a range of 3～6%.
Assay 250 mg of Potassium Citrate, precisely dried and accurately weighed, is dissolved
in 40 mL of glacial acetic acid by heating. After cooling to room temperature, the
solution is titrated with 0.1 N perchloric acid (indicator : 2 drops of crystal violet ·
glacial acetic acid solution). Separately, a blank test is carried out by the same
procedure.
1 mL of 0.1 N perchloric acid = 10.213 mg C6H5K3O7

840
 Potassium Copper Chlorophyllin

Synonyms: Potassium chlorophyllin INS No.: 141(ii)

[Content Specifications of Potassium Copper Chlorophyllin

Content Potassium Copper Chlorophyllin, when calculated on the dried basis at 100℃ for
1 hour, should contain not less than 95.0% of total copper chlorophyllin.
Description Potassium Copper Chlorophyllin is dark green～blue, black powder or dark
green liquid.
Identification (1) The residue after thermogravimetric analysis using 1 g of Potassium
Copper Chlorophyllin is dissolved in 10 mL of dilute hydrochloric acid by heating in
a water bath. If the solution is not clear, it is filtered. 10 mL of water is added
(Test Solution). The following tests are carried out with the Test Solution.
(A) When 5 mL of the Test Solution turns alkaline by adding ammonia solution, it
shows blue color.
(B) When 0.5 mL of diethyldithio sodium carbamate solution (1→1,000) is added to 5 mL
of the Test Solution, it forms brown precipitates.
(2) Test Solution in (1) responds to test of potassium salts in Identification.
(3) Approximately 0.1 g of Potassium Copper Chlorophyllin add water to make 1,000
mL. Take 10 mL of this solution is further diluted to 100 mL with phosphate buffer
solution (pH 7.5). Using this solution, absorption is measured and the maximum absorption
(converted to anhydrous form) near 405 nm should not be less than ＝ 540.
Purity (1) Arsenic : It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(2) Lead : When 5.0 g of Potassium Copper Chlorophyllin is tested by Atomic
Absorption Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy,
its content should not be more than 5.0 ppm.
(3) Cadmium : When 5.0 g of Potassium Copper Chlorophyllin is tested by Atomic
Absorption Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy,
its content should not be more than 1.0 ppm.
(4) Mercury : When Potassium Copper Chlorophyllin is tested by Mercury Limit Test,
its content should not be more than 1.0 ppm.
(5) Inorganic Copper Salts : Proceed as directed under Purity (8) for 「Sodium Copper
Chlorophyllin」. However, Test Solution is prepared with 1 g of Potassium Copper
Chlorophyllin in 60 mL water (Not more than 200 μg/g as Cu).
(6) Total Copper : 0.1 g of Potassium Copper Chlorophyllin, precisely weighed, is
transferred into a porcelain crucible. It is then heat-treated at a temperature below
500℃ until carbon is removed. 1～2 drops of sulfuric acid is added to the residue,
which is then reduced to ash. 5 mL of 10%(w/w) hydrochloric acid is added to the
residue three times to the ash. It is then heated to dissolve the ash and filtered
through a filter paper. The filtrate is cooled and the total volume is brought up to
100 mL with water (Test Solution). Test Solution is analyzed with atomic absorption
841
 spectrophotometer to obtain total copper. The content should not be more than 8% of
the total Copper Chlorophyllin.
(7) Alkaline Pigments : 5 mL of 0.5% aqueous solution of Potassium Copper
Chlorophyllin is transferred into a test tube. Add 1 mL of 1 N hydrochloric acid and
5 mL of ether, and well mixed, and set-aside. The ether layer should not be darker
than pale green.
(8) Residual Solvent : When Potassium Copper Chlorophyllin is tested by Purity (5) for
「Paprika Extract Pigments」,
Acetone
Methyl alcohol
Ethyl alcohol Not more than 50 ppm(individual or
total if combined)
Isopropyl alcohol
Hexane
Methylene Chloride Not more than 10 ppm
Assay Dissolve 1 g of Potassium Copper Chlorophyllin, previously dried at 100℃ for 1
hour and accurately weighed in 20 mL of phosphate buffer solution (pH 7.5), which is
diluted to 1,000 mL with water. 10 mL of this solution is further diluted to 100 mL
with phosphate buffer solution (pH 7.5) (Test Solution). The content is calculated from
the following equation using absorption A of the Test Solution at the maximum
absorption near 403～406 nm wavelength with 1 cm path length.
A × 104
Content(%) ＝
565 × weight of the sample(g)

565 : Specific Optical Density of Potassium Copper Chlorophyllin ( )

842
 Potassium Ferrocyanide
Chemical Formula: K4Fe(CN)6․３H2O
Molecular Weight: 422.39 INS No.: 536
Synonyms: Hexacyanoferrate of potassium; CAS No.: 3943-58-3
Yellow prussiate of potash

Compositional Specifications of Potassium Ferrocyanide

Content When Potassium ferrocyanide is quantified, it should contain not less than 99.0%
of potassium ferrocyanide (K4Fe(CN)6․3H2O)
Description Potassium ferrocyanide is a white crystal or crystalline powder.
Identification (1) When 1 mL of ferric chloride is added to 10 mL of Potassium
ferrocyanide (1→100), a dark blue precipitate is formed.
(2) Potassium ferrocyanide responds to test of potassium salt in the identification
method.
Purity (1) Cyanide : 10 mg of copper sulfate is dissolved in 8 mL of water and 2 mL of
ammonium solution. A filtering paper is dipped into this solution, to which hydrogen
sulfide is then added. When 1 drop of the aqueous solution of Potassium ferrocyanide
(1→100) is dropped on the filtering paper that turned brown, white rings should not
appear.
(2) Ferrocyanide : 10 mg of Potassium ferrocyanide is dissolved in 10 mL of water and
added 1 drop of this solution. When a few drops of 2 N acetic acid and that is
saturated with benzidine and 1 drop of 1% lead nitrate are added, blue precipitates or
color should not formed.
(3) Lead : Accurately weigh 5.0 g of Potassium ferrocyanide into a 150 mL beaker,
add 30 mL of water. Add Hydrochloric acid in small portion to the solution until the
solid is dissolved throughly and add 1 mL of hydrochloric acid. Heat this solution for
approximately 5 minutes and cool down. Add water to bring the total volume to 100
mL. Add Sodium Hydroxide Solution(1→4) or Hydrochloric acid(1→4) so that pH
becomes 2～4. Transfer this solution into 250 mL separatory funnel, where water is
added to make 200 mL. Then add 2 mL of 2% APDC solution and shake to mix.
Extract the solution 2 times with 20 mL each of chloroform, which is evaporated to
dryness in a water bath. Add 3 mL of Nitric Acid to the residue and heat it until
nearly evaporated. To this solution, add 0.5 mL of Nitric Acid and 10 mL of water,
concentrate it until the final solution becomes 3~5 mL, and add water to make 10
mL, test solution. When the test solution is tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content
should not be more than 5.0 ppm.
2% APDC Solution : 2.0 g of Ammonium Pyrolidine Dithiocarbamate is dissolved in
water to make 100 mL. Filter it when using.
(4) Chloride : When 0.11 g of Potassium ferrocyanide is tested by Chloride Limit Test,
the detected amount should not be more than the amount that corresponds to 0.6 mL
843
 of 0.01 N hydrochloric acid.(not more than 0.2%)
(2) (5) Sulfate : When 0.2 g of Potassium ferrocyanide is tested by Sulfate Limit Test, the
detected amount should not be more than the amount that corresponds to 0.4 mL of 0.01 N
hydrochloric acid. (not more than 0.1%)
Water Content Water content of Potassium ferrocyanide is determined by water
determination (Karl-Fisher Titration) and should not be more than 1.0%.
Assay About 1.0 mg of Potassium ferrocyanide is weighed accurately, dissolved in 200
mL of water, and 10 mL of sulfuric acid is added. Then the solution is titrated with
0.02 N potassium permanganate until the red color lasts for 30 secs.
0.02 N potassium permanganate 1 mL = 42.24 mg of K4Fe(CN)6․3H2O

844
 Potassium Gluconate

Chemical Formula: C6H11KO7

C6H11KO7․H2O
Molecular Weight: 234.25(anhydrous)
252.26(1hydrate) INS No.: 577
CAS No.:
Synonyms: Potassium salt of D-gluconic 299-27-4(anhydrous)
acid; Potassium D-gluconate
35398-15-3(1hydrate)
Compositional Specifications of Potassium Gluconate
Content When Potassium Gluconate, when calculated on the dried basis(anhydrous), should
contain within a range of 97.0∼103.0% of potassium gluconate (C6H11KO7).
Description Potassium Gluconate is scentless white～yellowish white granule or
crystalline powder.
Identification (1) Potassium Gluconate solution (1→20) responds to test of potassium
salts in Identification.
(2) 5 mL of Potassium Gluconate solution (1→10) is tested by (3) Identification for
[glucono-δ-lactone].
Purity (1) pH : pH of Potassium Gluconate solution (1→10) is measured by glass
electrode method and should be within a range of 7.3∼8.5.
(2) Arsenic : It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(3) Lead : When 5.0 g of Potassium Gluconate is tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content
should not be more than 2.0 ppm.
(4) Reducing Matter : Approximately 1 g of Potassium Gluconate is weighed into a 250
mL Erlenmeyer flask. 10 mL of water is added to dissolve the solid and 25 mL of
alkaline copper citrate solution. A small beaker is placed on top of the flask, which is
heated for precisely 5 minutes. It is then rapidly cooled to room temperature. To this
solution, 25 mL of diluted acetic acid (1→10), 10 mL of 0.1 N iodine solution, 10 mL
of dilute hydrochloric acid, and 3 mL of starch solution are added. The resulting
solution is titrated with 0.1 N sodium thiosulfate solution until the blue color
disappears. The content of reduced materials should not be more than 0.5%.
Reducing Matter Content (as (V N - V N ) × 27
glucose)(%)
1 1 2 2
=
Weight of sample(mg) ×100
V1 : Consumed amount of 0.1 N iodine solution (mL)
N1 : Normality of 0.1 N iodine solution
V2 : Consumed amount of 0.1 N sodium thiosulfate solution (mL)
N2 : Normality of 0.1 N sodium thiosulfate solution
27 : Experimental corresponding amount for D-glucose
845
Loss on Drying When Potassium Gluconate is dried for 5 hours at 105℃, the loss
should not be more than 3.0% and 6.0～7.5% for a dehydrated form and hydrate,
respectively.
Assay Proceed as directed under Assay of 「Sodium Gluconate.
1 mL of 0.1 N perchloric acid solution = 23.24 mg C6H11KO7

846
 Potassium Glycerophosphate
Chemical Formula: C3H7K2O6P‧3H2O

Molecular Weight: 302.30 CAS No.: 1319-70-6

Compositional Specifications of Potassium Glycerophosphate

Content Potassium Glycerophosphate (trihydrate) should not contain less than 80.0% of
potassium glycerophophate (C3H7K2O6P) and Potassium Glycerophosphate solution (50～
75% concentration) should contain within a range of 95.0～105.0% of the specified
content of potassium glycerolphosphate (C3H7K2O6P).
Description Potassium Glycerophosphate (trihydrate) is gluey liquid with pale yellow
color. Solution of 50～75% concentration is gluey liquid with colorless～pale yellow
color.
Identification (1) Potassium Glycerophosphate solution (1→10) responds to the test for
Potassium Salts in Identification.
(2) When 0.1 g of Potassium Glycerophosphate is heated with 0.5 g of potassium
hydrogen sulfate, pungent vapor of aclorein is generated.
Purity (1) Lead : When 5.0 g of Potassium Glycerophosphate is tested by Atomic
Absorption Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy,
its content should not be more than 4.0 ppm.
Assay Potassium Glycerophosphate is precisely weighed so that the amount corresponds
to 4 g of potassium glycerophosphate (C3H7K2O6P). It is then dissolved in 30 mL of
water and titrated with 0.5 N hydrochloric acid (indicator : methyl orange indicator
solution).
1 mL of 0.5 N hydrochloric acid solution = 124.13 mg C3H7K2O6P

847
 Potassium Hydroxide
Chemical Formula: KOH

Molecular Weight: 56.11 INS No.: 525

Synonyms: Caustic potash CAS No.: 1310-58-3

Compositional Specifications of Potassium Hydroxide

Content Potassium Hydroxide should contain not less than 85.0% of Potassium
Hydroxide (KOH).
Description Potassium Hydroxide occurs as white having various shapes including small
spheres, pellets, rods, lumps or powder.
Identification (1) Potassium Hydroxide solution in water (1→50) is strongly alkaline.
(2) Potassium Hydroxide solution in water (1→25) responds to Potassium Salt in
Identification.
Purity (1) Clarity and Color of Solution : When 1 g of Potassium Hydroxide is dissolved
in 20 mL of water, the solution should be colorless and clear.
(2) Potassium Carbonate : The content of potassium Carbonate (K2CO3) obtained in
Assay is not more than 3.5%.
(3) Arsenic : It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(4) Lead : Potassium Hydroxide is tested by purity (2) for 「Sodium Metaphosphate」
(not more than 2.0 ppm).
(5) Mercury : Dissolve 2 g of Potassium Hydroxide in 10 mL of water, add 1 mL of
the potassium permanganate solution (3→50) and about 30 mL of water, and shake
well. Neutralize by gradually adding purified hydrochloric acid, add 5 mL of diluted
sulfuric acid (1→2), and cool. Use this solution as the test solution. Add
hydroxylamine hydrochloride solution (1→5) until the purple color of the
permanganate in the test solution disappears and the precipitate of the manganese
dioxide dissolves, add water to make 100 mL, and transfer into the gas washing
bottle of an atomic absorption spectrophotometer. Add 10 mL of stannous chloride
solution, immediately connect with the atomic absorption spectrophotometer, and start
the diaphragm pump to circulate the air. When the recorder reading increases rapidly
and then it indicates a constant value, measure the absorbance. The absorbance of
test solution should not be higher than that of the following solution: Take 2.0 mL of
Mercury Standard Solution, add 1 mL of potassium permanganate solution (3→50), 30
mL of water, and the same amount of purified hydrochloric acid as that used for
preparing the test solution, and process in the same manner as the test solution not
more than 0.1 ppm.
Assay Accurately weigh about 50 g of Potassium Hydroxide, and dissolve in freshly
boiled and cooled water to make 1,000 mL. Use this solution as the test solution.
Take 25 mL of the test solution, add 10 mL of freshly boiled and cooled water, and
titrate with 1 N hydrochloric acid (indicator : 1 mL of bromophenol blue solution).
848
After neutralizing, add about 1 mL of 1 N hydrochloric acid, and boil for about 5
minutes. After cooling, titrate the excess acid with 0.1 N sodium hydroxide, and
determine the volume (A mL) of consumed 1 N hydrochloric acid. Separately, measure
exactly 25 mL of the test solution, transfer into a flask with a ground stopper, and
add 25 mL of freshly boiled and cooled water. To the solution, add 10 mL of the
barium chloride solution, stopper, shake gently, and titrate with 1 N hydrochloric acid
(indicator : 1 mL of phenolphthalein solution). Let (B mL) be the consumed volume.
Content of potassium＝ hydroxide(KOH)(%) 0.0561(g) × B × 40
× 100
weight of the sample(g)
Content of potassium carbonate(K CO )＝
2 3 0.0691(g) × (A—B) × 40
(Apply to Purity test(2) Potassium × 100
carbonate) weight of the sample(g)

849
 Potassium Iodate
Chemical Formula: KIO3 INS No.: 917

Molecular Weight: 214.00 CAS No.: 7758-05-6

Compositional Specifications of Potassium Iodate

Content Potassium Iodate, when calculated on the dried basis, should contain within a
range of 99.0~101% of Potassium Iodate(KIO3).
Description Potassium Iodate occurs as white crystalline powder and is odorless.
Identification
(1) Potassium Iodate is soluble in water but insoluble in ethanol.
(2) Potassium Iodate responds to the test for Potassium Salt reactions.
(3) When Potassium Iodate solution (1→20) is added 1 drop of starch solution and a few
drops of 20% hypophosphorous acid solution, the color of solution temporarily turns to
blue.
Purity
(1) Free acid and Free Alkali : 5 g of Potassium Iodate is weighed and dissolved in 40
mL of water (previously boiled and cooled) and is added to 3 drops of phenolphthalein
solution. Then the following test is performed.
① If the solution is colorless, add 1.2 mL of 0.01 N sodium hydroxide. A red color
develops.
② If the solution is red, add 0.4 mL of 0.01 N hydrochloric acid. The color
disappears.
(2) Lead : Potassium Iodate is tested by purity (2) for 「Sodium Metaphosphate」(not
more than 2.0 ppm).
Loss on Drying When Potassium Iodate is dried at 150℃ for 3 hours, the weight loss
should not be more than 0.5%.
Assay Dissolve 0.1 g of Potassium Iodate, previously dried at 105℃ for 3hours and
accurately weighed, in 50 mL of water on the Erlenmeyer flask. 3 mL of hydrochloric
acid and 3g of potassium iodide are added and the stopper is placed on the flask,
which is set-aside for 5 minutes. Saperated Iodine formed by adding 100 mL of cold
water is titrated with 0.1N sodium thiosulfate solution (indicator: starch solution).
Separately, a blank test is done following the same procedure.
1 mL of 0.1 N sodium thiosulfate solution ＝ 3.567 mg KIO3

850
 Potassium Lactate

Chemical Formula: C3H5KO3

Molecular Weight: 128.17 INS No.: 326

Synonyms: Potassium lactate (solution); CAS No.: 996-31-6
Potassium 2-hydroxypropanoate

Compositional Specifications of Potassium Lactate

Content Potassium Lactate contains 60.0% of potassium lactate (C3H5KO3) and 95.0～
110.0% of its indicated content.
Description Potassium Lactate is colorless clear syrup-like liquid. It may or may not
have slight characteristic scent.
Identification (1) Potassium Lactate responds to test of potassium salt in Identification.
(2) Ash of Potassium Lactate is alkaline. When acid is added, it foams.
(3) When 5 mL of catechol solution in sulfuric acid (1→100) is added to 2 mL of
Potassium Lactate, the contact area turns deep red.
Purity (1) Lead : When 5.0 g of Potassium Lactate is tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content
should not be more than 2.0 ppm.
(2) Mercury : When Potassium Lactate is tested by Mercury Limit Test, its content
should not be more than 1.0 ppm.
(3) Arsenic : It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(4) Acid value : An amount, that corresponds to 0.6 g calcium lactate, of Potassium
Lactate is dissolved in 20 mL of water. 3 drops of phenolphthalein solution is added
to this solution, which is titrated with 0.1 N sodium hydroxide solution. The
consumed amount should not be more than 0.2 mL.
(5) Reducing Matter : When Potassium Lactate is added to Fehling solution, the solution
should not be under go any changes.
Assay An amount, that corresponds to 0.6 g calcium lactate, of Potassium Lactate is
precisely weighed into a flask. 60 mL of anhydrous acetic acid and glacial acetic acid
mixture (1:4) is added to the flask and mixed. After settling for 20 minutes, it is
titrated with 0.1 N perchloric acid solution (indicator : 1 mL of crystal violet·glacial
acetic acid). At the end point, the color of the solution changes from blue to green.
Separately, a blank test is carried out following the same procedure
1 mL of 0.1 N perchloric acid solution = 12.82 mg C3H5KO3
851
 Potassium Metabisulfite
Potassium pyrosulfite
Chemical Formula: K2S2O5

Molecular Weight: 222.33 INS No.: 224

Synonyms: Potassium pyrosulfite CAS No.: 16731-55-8

Compositional Specifications of Potassium Metabisulfite

Content Potassium metabisulfite should contain not less than 93.0% of potassium
metabisulfite (K2S2O5).
Description Potassium metabisulfite occurs as white crystals or crystalline powder
having an odor of sulfur dioxide.
Identification (1) To Potassium metabisulfite, add dilute hydrochloric acid, then sulfur
dioxide is generated.
(2) To 5 mL of a solution of Potassium metabisulfite (1→10), add 1 mL of dilute acetic
acid. When iodine · potassium iodine solution is drop-wise added to this solution, the
color of the solution disappears.
(3) Potassium metabisulfite responds to the test for Potassium Salt in Identification.
Purity (1) Clarity and Color of Solution : When 1 g of Potassium metabisulfite is
dissolved in 10 mL of water, the solution should be almost clear.
(2) Arsenic : It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(3) Lead : Potassium metabisulfite is tested by purity (2) for 「Sodium Metaphosphate」
(not more than 2.0 ppm).
(4) Iron : When the test solution of (3) in Purity is tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content
should not be more than 10 ppm.
(5) Selenium : Accurately weigh 2.0 g of Potassium metabisulfite transfer into a 50 mL
beaker, add 10 mL of water and 5 mL of hydrochloric acid, and boil to remove sulfur
dioxide, Test Solution. Accurately weigh 1.0 g of Potassium metabisulfite, transfer into
another beaker, and add 0.5 mL of selenium standard solution. Then prepare a
reference solution by the same manner as for test solution. Add 2 g of hydrazin sulfate
transfer into each beaker, heat and dissolve. Transfer the resulting solution into a
Nestler cylinder with adding water to make 50 mL. When comparing both colors, the
red color of test solution should not be darker than that of reference solution (Not
more than 5 ppm).
(6) Mercury : When Potassium metabisulfite is tested by Mercury Limit Test, its
content should not be more than 1.0 ppm.
(7) Thiosulphate : When 10% solution of potassium metabisulfite is acidified with
sulfuric Acid or hydrochloric acid, it should be transparent (not more than 0.1%).
Assay Accurately weigh about 0.2 g of Potassium metabisulfite transfer into a flask with
a ground glass stopper, add 50 mL of 0.1 N iodine solution. It is set-aside for 5
852
minutes, where 2 mL of diluted hydrochloric acid (2→3) is added. The excess iodine
is titrated with 0.1N sodium thiosulfate solution (indicator : starch solution).
1 mL of 0.1 N iodine solution ＝ 5.558 mg K2S2O5

853
 Potassium Metaphosphate

INS No.: 452(ii)

Synonyms: Potassium polyphosphates; CAS No.: 7790-53-6
Potassium polymetaphosphate

Compositional Specifications of Potassium Metaphosphate

Content Potassium Metaphosphate, when calculated on the dried basis, should contain
within a range of 53.0～80.0% of phosphorus pentaoxide (P2O5 = 141.95).
Description Potassium Metaphosphate occurs as colorless to white glassy flakes or
lumps, or as white fibrous crystals or powder.
Identification (1) When Potassium Metaphosphate is tested by Flame Coloration Test, it
shows light violet color.
(2) To 0.1 g of Potassium Metaphosphate, add 0.4 g of sodium acetate, dissolve in 10
mL of water, make slightly acidic with diluted acetic acid or sodium hydroxide
solution, and add 5 mL of egg white solution. A white precipitate is formed.
Purity (1) Clarity and Color of Solution : To 1 g of Potassium Metaphosphate, add 50
mL of water, and heat in a water bath. Sodium acetate solution is prepared by
dissolving 4 g of sodium acetate in 50 mL of water and heating in a water bath. The
resulting solution should be colorless and slightly turbid or better.
(2) Chloride : When 0.1 g of Potassium Metaphosphate is tested by Chloride Limit
Test, its content should not be more than the amount that corresponds to 0.3 mL of
0.01 N sulfuric acid.
(3) Sulfate : 0.1 g of Potassium Metaphosphate is dissolved in 30 mL of water and 2
mL of dilute hydrochloric acid by boiling for 1 minute. After cooling, the solution is
tested by Sulfate Limit Test and its content should not be more than the amount that
corresponds to 0.2 mL of 0.01 N sulfuric acid.
(4) Orthophosphate : To 1 g of Potassium Metaphosphate, add 2～3 drops of silver
nitrate solution. No brilliant yellow color develops.
(5) Arsenic : It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(6) Lead : Potassium Metaphosphate is tested by purity (2) for 「Sodium Metaphosphat
e」(not more than 4.0 ppm).
(7) Cadmium : Potassium Metaphosphate is tested by purity (3) for 「Sodium
Metaphosphate」(not more than 1.0 ppm).
(8) Mercury : When Potassium Metaphosphate is tested by Mercury Limit Test, its
content should not be more than 1.0 ppm.
(9) Fluoride : 1 g of Potassium Metaphosphate is precisely weighed and is tested by
purity (8) for 「Calcium Citrate」(not more than 10 ppm).
Loss on Drying When Potassium Metaphosphate is dried for 4 hours at 110℃, the
weight loss should not be more than 5%.
Loss on Ignition When Potassium Metaphosphate is dried for 4 hours at 105℃ and
heated for 30 minutes at 550℃, the weight loss should not be more than 2.0%.
854
Assay Proceed as directed under Assay in 「Sodium Metaphosphate」.

855
 Potassium Nitrate
Chemical Formula: KNO3
Molecular Weight: 101.11 INS No.: 252
Synonyms: Nitre; Saltpetre CAS No.: 7757-79-1

Compositional Specifications of Potassium Nitrate

Content Potassium Nitrate, when calculated on the dried basis, should contain not less
than 99.0% of potassium nitrate (KNO3).
Description Potassium Nitrate occurs as colorless and pillared crystals or as a white
crystalline powder. It is odorless and has a salty and refreshing taste.
Identification Potassium Nitrate responds to the tests for Potassium Salt and Nitrate in
Identification.
Purity (1) Clarity and Color of Solution : 1 g of Potassium Nitrate is dissolved 10 mL of
water. It is colorless and clear.
(2) Chloride : When 0.5 g of Potassium Nitrate is tested by Chloride Limit Test, its
content should not be more than the amount that corresponds to 0.3 mL of 0.01 N
sulfuric acid.
(3) Arsenic : It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(4) Lead : Accurately weigh 5.0 g of Potassium Nitrate into a 150 mL beaker, add 30
mL of water. Add Hydrochloric acid in small portion to the solution until the solid is
dissolved throughly and add 1 mL of hydrochloric acid. Heat this solution for
approximately 5 minutes and cool down. Add water to bring the total volume to 100
mL. Add Sodium Hydroxide Solution(1→4) or Hydrochloric acid(1→4) so that pH
becomes 2～4. Transfer this solution into 250 mL separatory funnel, where water is
added to make 200 mL. Then add 2 mL of 2% APDC solution and shake to mix.
Extract the solution 2 times with 20 mL each of chloroform, which is evaporated to
dryness in a water bath. Add 3 mL of Nitric Acid to the residue and heat it until
nearly evaporated. To this solution, add 0.5 mL of Nitric Acid and 10 mL of water,
concentrate it until the final solution becomes 3~5 mL, and add water to make 10
mL, test solution. When the test solution is tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content
should not be more than 2.0 ppm.
2% APDC Solution : 2.0 g of Ammonium Pyrolidine Dithiocarbamate is dissolved in
water to make 100 mL. Filter it when using.
(5) Mercury : When Potassium Nitrate is tested by Mercury Limit Test, its content
should not be more than 1.0 ppm.
(6) Nitrite : 1 g of Potassium Nitrate, precisely weighed, dissolve in water to make 100
mL. Take 20 mL of this solution, transfer into a 100 mL flask and add water to make
80 mL. Add 10 mL of sulfanilamide solution and mix. After 3 minutes, 1 mL of
coupling solution is added, water is added to make 100 mL, and mixed well. Allow
856
 the solution to stand for 15 minutes and measure absorbance at a wavelength of 540
nm. Calculate the content of Nitrite by calibration curve and following formula and it
should not be more than 20 ppm.
Nitrite(ppm) = A×5
W
A : content of nitrite calculated from calibration curve (μg)
W : weight of sample(g)
Calibration Curve Preparation : 0, 5, 10, 20, and 50 mL (0, 2.5, 5, 10, and 25μg as
nitrite) of standard solution is weighed into a 100 mL flask respectively, water is
added to make 80 mL for each. 10 mL of sulfanilamide solution is added and mixed.
After 3 minutes, 1 mL of coupling solution is added for each, water is added to make
100 mL, and mixed well. Allow the solution to stand for 15 minutes, measure
absorbance at a wavelength of 540 nm, and prepare calibration.
Sulfanilamide solution : 2 g of Sulfanilamide is dissolved in diluted hychloric
acid to make 1000 mL.
Coupling soultion : 0.2 g of N-1-naphthylethylenediamine dihydrochloride is
dissolved in water to make 100 mL.
Standard solution : 0.75 g of sodium nitrite 0.75g is precisely weighed and dissolved
in water to make 1000 mL. 10 mL of this solution is measured to
bring 100 mL, and again 10 mL of this solution is measured to
bring 1000 mL.
Loss on Drying When Potassium Nitrate is dried for 4 hours at 105℃, the loss should
not be more than 1%.
Assay Accurately weigh about 0.4 g of Potassium Nitrate, previously dried, transfer into
a 500 mL round-bottom flask and dissolve in about 300 mL of water. Add 3 g of
powdered Devarda's alloy and 15 mL of sodium hydroxide solution (2→5). Connect the
flask immediately with the distilling apparatus, which is previously equipped with a
splash preventing device and a condenser and is connected with the receiver
containing 50 mL of 0.1 N sulfuric acid, exactly measured. Allow to stand for 2 hours,
and distill until about 250 mL of the distillate is produced. Titrate the excess acid
with 0.1 N sodium hydroxide (indicator : 3 drops of methyl red-methylene blue
mixture solution). Perform a blank test in the same manner.
1 mL of 0.1 N sulfuric acid = 10.11 mg of KNO3

857
 Potassium Phosphate, Dibasic
Chemical Formula: K2HPO4

Molecular Weight: 174.18 INS No.: 340(ii)

Synonyms: Dipotassium hydrogen
phosphate; Dipotassium acid CAS No.: 7758-11-4
phosphate

Compositional Specifications of Potassium Phosphate, Dibasic

Content Potassium Phosphate, Dibasic, when calculated on the dried basis, should
contain not less than 98.0% of dibasic potassium phosphate (K2HPO4).
Description Potassium Phosphate, Dibasic is white powder, crystal, or lump.
Identification (1) Potassium Phosphate, Dibasic, solution (1→20) adding 1 drop of
phenolphthalein solution turns red.
(2) Potassium Phosphate, Dibasic solution (1→20) responds to test of potassium salts
and Phosphate in Identification.
Purity (1) Water Insoluble Substances : 10 g of Potassium Phosphate, Dibasic is tested
for water insoluble substances by Purity (1) for 「Sodium Acid Pyrophosphate」. The
content of water insoluble substances should not be more than 0.2%.
(2) pH : An aqueous solution (1→100) of Potassium Phosphate, Dibasic should have pH
of 8.7∼9.3.
(3) Arsenic : It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(4) Lead :Potassium Phosphate, Dibasic is precisely weighed and is tested by purity (2)
for 「Sodium Metaphosphate」, its content should not be more than 4.0 ppm.
(5) Cadmium : Potassium Phosphate, Dibasic is precisely weighed and is tested by
purity (3) for 「Sodium Metaphosphate」, its content should not be more than 1.0 ppm.
(6) Mercury : When Potassium Phosphate, Dibasic is tested by Mercury Limit Test, its
content should not be more than 1.0 ppm.
(7) Fluoride : 1 g of Potassium Phosphate, Dibasic is precisely weighed and is tested
by purity (8) for 「Calcium Citrate」, its content should not be more than 10 ppm.
Loss on Drying When Potassium Phosphate, Dibasic is dried for 4 hours at 105℃, the
loss should not be more than 2.0%.
Assay Dissolve 3 g of Potassium Phosphate, Dibasic, previously dried and accurately
weighed, in 50 mL of water. The solution is kept at 15℃ and titrated with 1 N
hydrochloric acid (indicator : 3～4 drops of Methyl Orange․Xylene Cyanol FF solution).
1 mL of 1 N hydrochloric acid ＝ 174.2 mg K2HPO4

858
 Potassium Phosphate, Monobasic
Chemical Formula: KH2PO4

Molecular Weight: 136.09 INS No.: 340(i)

Synonyms: Potassium dihydrogen
phosphate; Monopotassium CAS No.: 7778-77-0
monophosphate; Potassium acid
phosphate

Compositional Specifications of Potassium Phosphate, Monobasic

Content Potassium Phosphate, Monobasic, when calculated on the dried basis, should
contain not less than 98.0% of monobasic potassium phosphate (KH2PO4).
Description Potassium Phosphate, Monobasic is colorless crystallite or white granule or
crystalline powder.
Identification (1) Potassium Phosphate, Monobasic solution (1→20) is acidic.
(2) Potassium Phosphate, Monobasic solution (1→20) responds to test of of Potassium
Salt and Phosphate in Identification.
Purity (1) Water Insoluble Substances : 10 g of Potassium Phosphate, Monobasic is tested
by Purity (1) for 「Sodium Acid Pyrophosphate」. The content of water insoluble
substances should not be more than 0.2%.
(2) pH : pH of Potassium Phosphate, Monobasic solution (1→100) should be within a
range of 4.2∼4.7.
(3) Arsenic : It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(4) Lead : Potassium Phosphate, Monobasic is precisely weighed and is tested by purity
(2) for 「Sodium Metaphosphate」, its content should not be more than 4.0 ppm.
(5) Cadmium : Potassium Phosphate, Monobasic is precisely weighed and is tested by
purity (3) for 「Sodium Metaphosphate」, its content should not be more than 1.0 ppm.
(6) Mercury : When Potassium Phosphate, Monobasic is tested by Mercury Limit Test,
its content should not be more than 1.0 ppm.
(7) Fluoride : 1 g of Potassium Phosphate, Monobasic is precisely weighed and is
tested by purity (8) for 「Calcium Citrate」, its content should not be more than 10 ppm.
Loss on Drying When Potassium Phosphate, Monobasic is dried for 4 hours at 105℃,
the loss should not be more than 2.0%.
Assay Dissolve 3 g of Potassium Phosphate, Monobasic, previously dried and accurately
weighed, in 30 mL of water. 5 g of sodium chloride is added, which is dissolved by
shaking. While the solution is kept at 15℃, it is titrated with 1 N sodium hydroxide
solution (Indicator : 3～4 drops of thymol blue solution)
1 mL of 1 N sodium hydroxide solution＝ 136.1 mg KH2PO4

859
 Potassium Phosphate, Tribasic
Chemical Formula: K3PO4‧nH2O(n=0 or 3)
Molecular Weight: 3hydrates 266.31
anhydrous 212.27 INS No.: 340(iii)

Synonyms: Tripotassium phosphate CAS No.: 7778-53-2

Compositional Specifications of Potassium Phosphate, Tribasic

Content When Tribasic Potassium Phosphate is heat-treated and analyzed quantitatively
analyzed, should contain not less than 97.0% Tribasic potassium phosphate (K3PO4 ＝
212.28).
Description Tribasic Potassium Phosphate is colorless～white crystallite or lump, or
white powder.
Identification (1) Potassium Phosphate, Tribasic solution (1→20) is alkaline.
(2) Potassium Phosphate, Tribasic solution (1→20) responds to test of potassium salts
and Phosphate in Identification.
Purity (1) Water Insoluble substances : Potassium Phosphate, Tribasic proceed as
directed under Purity (1) in 「Trisodium Phosphate」. The content of water insoluble
substances should not be more than 0.2%.
(2) pH : 1 g of Potassium Phosphate, Tribasic is dissolved in 100 mL of water. pH of
this solution should be within a range of 11.5∼12.5.
(3) Arsenic : It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(4) Lead : Potassium Phosphate, Tribasic is precisely weighed and is tested by purity
(2) for 「Sodium Metaphosphate」, its content should not be more than 4.0 ppm.
(5) Cadmium : Potassium Phosphate, Tribasic is precisely weighed and is tested by
purity (3) for 「Sodium Metaphosphate」, its content should not be more than 1.0 ppm.
(6) Mercury : When Potassium Phosphate, Tribasic is tested by Mercury Limit Test, its
content should not be more than 1.0 ppm.
(7) Fluoride : 1 g of Potassium Phosphate, Tribasic is precisely weighed and is tested
by purity (8) for 「Calcium Citrate」, its content should not be more than 10 ppm.
Loss on Ignition When Potassium Phosphate, Tribasic is first dried at 120℃ and further
heat-treated at 300∼400℃ for 1 hour, weight loss should not be more than 23%.
Assay Approximately 2 g of Potassium Phosphate, Tribasic, previously heat treatment
and accurately weighed, dissolve in 50 mL of water. The solution is kept at 15℃ and
titrated with 1N hydrochloric acid (Indicator : 3～4 drops of Methyl Orange․Xylene
Cyanol FF solution).
1 mL of 1 N hydrochloric acid ＝ 106.13 mg K3PO4

860
 Potassium Polyphosphate
Chemical Formula: (KPO3)n INS No.: 451(ii), 452(ii)
Synonyms: Potassium metaphosphate;
CAS No.: 68956-75-2
Potassium polymetaphosphate; 7790-53-6
Kurrol salt

Compositional Specifications of Potassium Polyphosphate

Content Potassium Polyphosphate when calculated on the dried basis, should contain
within a range of 43.0～76.0% of phosphorus pentaoxide (P2O5= 141.95).
Description Potassium Polyphosphate occurs as white fibrous crystals or powder, or as
colorless to white glassy flakes or lumps.
Identification (1) Potassium Polyphosphate responds to yields pale violet by the test for
Flame Coloring Test.
(2) Dissolve 0.1 g of Potassium Polyphosphate and 0.4 g of sodium acetate in 10 mL
of water, add diluted acetic acid to make slightly acidic, and add 3 mL of silver
nitrate solution. A white precipitate is formed.
Purity (1) Clarity and Color of Solution : To 1 g of Potassium Polyphosphate, add 4 g
of sodium acetate, dissolved in 100 mL water. This solution should be colorless and
slightly turbid.
(2) Chloride : When 0.1 g of Potassium Polyphosphate is tested by Sulfate Limit Test,
its content should not be more than the amount that corresponds to 0.3 mL of 0.01
N hydrochloric acid.
(3) Sulfate : Weigh 0.1 g of Potassium Polyphosphate, and add 30 mL of water and 2
mL of diluted hydrochloric acid. Dissolve while boiling for 1 minute, cool, and add
water to make 50 mL. This solution is tested by Chloride Limit Test, its content
should not be more than the amount that corresponds to 0.2 mL of 0.01 N sulfuric
acid.
(4) Orthophosphate : Weigh 1 g of Potassium Polyphosphate, and add 2～3 drops of
silver nitrate solution. No brilliant yellow color develops.
(5) Arsenic : It should be no more than 2.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(6) Lead : Potassium Polyphosphate is tested by purity (2) for 「Sodium Metaphosphat
e」(not more than 4.0 ppm).
(7) Cadmium : Potassium Polyphosphate is tested by Purity (3) for 「Sodium
Metaphosphate」(not more than 1.0 ppm).
(8) Mercury : When Potassium Polyphosphate is tested by Mercury Limit Test, its
content should not be more than 1.0 ppm.
(9) Fluoride : 1 g of Potassium Polyphosphate is tested by purity (8) for 「Calcium
Citrate」(not more than 10 ppm).
Loss on Drying When Potassium Polyphosphate is dried for 4 hours at 110℃, the weight
loss should not be more than 5%.
Assay To 0.5 g of Potassium Polyphosphate, previously dried and accurately weighed,
861
add 25 mL of nitric acid and 60 mL of water, boiled for 30 minutes and cooled, and
water is added to make 100 mL solution. 20 mL of this solution is mixed with 15 mL
of magnesia solution, which is neutralized with ammonia water. Additional 15 mL of
ammonia water is added and the solution is set-aside for 4 hours. Precipitate is
filtered and washed with ammonia (1→4) until the filtrate does not show a reaction of
chloride. It is then heat-treated until the weight becomes constant. It is then weighed
as Mg2P2O7.
weight of Mg2P2O7(mg) × 0.6379 × 5
Content of P2O5(%) ＝ × 100
Weight of the sample(mg)

862
 Potassium Pyrophosphate
Chemical Formula: K4P2O7
Molecular Weight: 330.35 INS No.: 450(v)
Synonyms: Tetrapotassium pyrophosphate; CAS No.: 7320-34-5
Tetrapotassium diphosphate

Compositional Specifications of Potassium Pyrophosphate

Content Potassium Pyrophosphate, when calculated on the dried basis, should contains
not less than 95.0% of potassium pyrophosphate (K4P2O7).
Description Potassium Pyrophosphate occurs as colorless to white crystalline powder or
lumps, or as a white powder.
Identification (1) Dissolve 0.1 g of Potassium Pyrophosphate in 10 mL of water and 2∼3
drops of nitric acid, and add 1 mL of silver nitrate solution. A white precipitate is
formed.
(2) 1 g of Potassium Pyrophosphate is dissolved in 20 mL of water and filtered. The
filtrate responds to the test for potassium salt.
Purity (1) Water Insoluble substances : 10 g of Potassium Pyrophosphate is tested by
Purity (1) for 「Acidic Sodium Pyrophosphate」and its content should not be more
than 0.2% .
(2) Clarity and Color of Solution : 1 g of Potassium Pyrophosphate is dissolved in 100 mL
of water. pH of this solution is pH 10.0∼10.7.
(3) Arsenic : It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(4) Lead : Potassium Pyrophosphate is precisely weighed and is tested by purity (2)
for 「Sodium Metaphosphate」(not more than 4.0 ppm).
(5) Cadmium : Potassium Pyrophosphate is precisely weighed and is tested by purity
(3) for 「Sodium Metaphosphate」(not more than 1.0 ppm).
(6) Mercury : When Potassium Pyrophosphate is tested by Mercury Limit Test, its
content should not be more than 1.0 ppm.
(7) Fluoride : 1 g of Potassium Pyrophosphate is tested by purity (8) for 「Calcium
Citrate」(not more than 10 ppm).
Loss on Drying When Potassium Pyrophosphate is dried for 4 hours at 105℃ and
strongly heated for 30 minutes at 550℃, the weight loss should not be more than
2.0%.
Assay Approximately 600 mg of Potassium Pyrophosphate is dissolved in 100 mL of
water. pH of the solution is adjusted to 3.8 with hydrochloric acid, where 50 mL of
zinc sulfate solution [125 g of 7-hydrated zinc sulfate is dissolved in water to bring
the total volume to 1,000 mL. It is filtered and its pH is adjusted to 3.8] is added.
After 2 minutes, pH is adjusted to 3.8 by titrating free acids with 0.1 N sodium
hydroxide solution. However, near the end point, precipitated zinc hydroxide should be
redissolved after adding sodium hydroxide solution.

863
1 mL of 0.1 N sodium hydroxide solution = 16.52 mg K4P2O7

864
 Potassium Sodium L-Tartrate

Chemical Formula: C4H4KNaO6․4H2O

Molecular Weight: 282.23 INS No.: 337
Synonyms: Sodium potassium tartrate;
Rochelle salt; Seignette salt CAS No.: 304-59-6

Compositional Specifications of Potassium Sodium L-Tartrate

Content Potassium Sodium L-Tartrate, when calculated on the dried basis, should
contain not less than 99.0% of Potassium Sodium L-Tartrate(C4H4KNaO6).
Description Potassium Sodium L-Tartrate occurs as colorless crystals or as a white
crystal, crystalline powder.
Identification (1) 1 g of Potassium Sodium L-Tartrate is soluble in 1 mL of water but
insoluble in ethanol.
(2) Potassium Sodium L-Tartrate responds to the test for Sodium Salt, Potassium Salt,
and Tartrate in Identification.
Purity (1) pH: When Potassium Sodium L-Tartrate proceeds as directed under glass
electrode method, pH of Potassium Sodium solution (1→10) should be within a range
of 6.5∼7.5.
(2) Oxalic acid : When 2 mL of calcium chloride solution and several drops of dilute
acetic acid are added to 10 mL of an aqueous solution (1→10) of Potassium Sodium
L-Tartrate, the solution should be clear within 1 hour.
(3) Arsenic: It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(4) Lead : When 5.0 g of Potassium Sodium L-Tartrate is tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content
should not be more than 2.0 ppm.
(5) Mercury : When Potassium Sodium L-Tartrate is tested by Mercury Limit Test, its
content should not be more than 1.0 ppm.
Loss on Drying When Potassium Sodium L-Tartrate is dried for 3 hr at 150℃, the
weigh loss should be within a range of 21.0∼26.0%.
Assay Dissolve 0.5g of Potassium Sodium L-Tartrate, previously dried and accurately
weighed, in 50 mL of glacial acetic acid, 30 mL of 96% formic acid, and 45 mL of
anhydrous acetic acid by warming until the solution is dissolved completely. Titrate
with 0.1N perchloric acid solution until the solution is green in color(Indicator: crystal
violet-glacial acetic acid solution). Perform blank test with the same method
865
separately.
1 mL of 0.1N perchloric acid solution = 14.11 mg C4H4KNaO6·4H2O

866
 Potassium Sorbate
CH3CH=CHCH=CHCOOK
Chemical Formula: C6H7O2K INS No.: 202

Molecular Weight: 150.22 CAS No.: 24634-61-5

Compositional Specifications of Potassium Sorbate

Content Potassium Sorbate, when calculated on the dried basis, should contain within a
range of 98.0～101.0% of Potassium Sorbate (C6H7O2K).
Description Potassium Sorbate occurs as white to light yellow-brown flaky crystals,
crystalline powder or granules. It is odorless or has a slight odor.
Identification (1) To 1 mL of Potassium Sorbate solution (1→100), add 1 mL of acetone.
Add drop wise diluted hydrochloric acid to make the solution slightly acidic, add 2
drops of bromine solution, and shake. The color of the solution disappears immediately.
(2) Potassium Sorbate responds to the test of Potassium Salt in Identification.
Purity (1) Clarity and Color of Solution : When 0.2 g of Potassium Sorbate is dissolved
in 5 mL of water, the color of the solution should not be darker than the Color
Standard Solution F.
(2) Free Alkali : Dissolve 1 g of Potassium Sorbate in 20 mL of freshly boiled and
cooled water, and add 2 drops of phenolphthalein solution. Even if a red color
develops, the color disappears on addition of 0.4 mL of 0.1 N sulfuric acid.
(3) Chloride : Dissolve 1 g of Potassium Sorbate in about 30 mL of water, and add 11
mL of diluted nitric acid while shaking well. Filter, wash with water, and combine the
filtrate and the washings. Its content should not be more than the amount that
correspond to 0.5 mL of 0.01 N hydrochloric acid.
(4) Sulfate : Dissolve 0.5 g of Potassium Sorbate in about 30 mL of water, and add 3
mL of diluted hydrochloric acid while shaking well. Filter, wash with water, and
combine the filtrate and the washings. Its content should not be more than the
amount that correspond to 0.4 mL of 0.01 N surfuric aicd.
(5) Arsenic : It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(6) Lead : When 5.0 g of Potassium Sorbate is tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content
should not be more than 2.0 ppm.
(7) Mercury : When Potassium Sorbate is tested by Mercury Limit Test, its content
should not be more than 1.0 ppm.
(8) Aldehyde : To 3.0g of Potassium Sorbate, add 450 mL of water, adjust pH of this
solution to 4 using hydrochloric acid(1→12). Then water is added to make 500 mL
and filtered, Test Solution. Separately, water is added to 2.5mL of 40% formaldehyde
solution to make 1,000mL. 3 mL of this solution is precisely measured and water is
added to make 500 mL, Reference Solution. To 5 mL of each of test solution and
867
 reference solution, 2.5 mL of puccine sulfite solution is added. Then set aside the
solution for 15~30 minutes. The color of test solution should not be deeper than that
of reference solution. (not more than 0.1% as formaldehyde).
Loss on Drying When Potassium Sorbate is dried for 3 hours at 105℃, the weight loss
should not be more than 1%.
Assay Accurately weigh about 0.3 g of Potassium Sorbate, previously dried, add 50 mL
of acetic acid for nonaqueous titration, and titrate with 0.1 N perchloric acid (indicator:
10 drops of α-naphtholbenzein solution) until the brown color of the solution changes
to green.
1 mL of 0.1 N perchloric acid = 15.02 mg of C6H7O2K

868
 Potassium Sulfate
Chemical Formula: K2SO4 INS No.: 515(i)

Molecular Weight: 174.26 CAS No.: 7778-80-5

Compositional Specifications of Potassium Sulfate

Content Potassium Sulfate should contain within a range of 99.0～100.5% of potassium
sulfate (K2SO4).
Description Potassium Sulfate is colorless～white crystallite or crystalline powder with
bitter taste.
Identification Potassium Sulfate solution (1→10) responds to test of potassium salts in
Identification.
Purity (1) Lead : Potassium Sulfate is precisely weighed and is tested by purity (2) for
「Sodium Metaphosphate」, its content should not be more than 2.0 ppm.
(2) Arsenic : It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(3) Mercury : When Potassium Sulfate is tested by Mercury Limit Test, its content
should not be more than 1.0 ppm.
(4) Selenium : 1 g of Potassium Sulfate is dissolved in 100 mL (Test Solution). The
Test Solution is analyzed with Cold Vapor Type of atomic absorption
spectrophotometer. The absorption should not be higher than that of the Standard
Solution (Not more than 30 ppm). The Standard Solution is prepared by diluting 3 mL
of selenium standard solution to 100 mL with water.
Assay Approximately 0.5 g of Potassium Sulfate is precisely weighed and dissolved in
200 mL of water. After adding 1 mL of hydrochloric acid, the solution is boiled. While
stirring continuously, 8～9 mL of barium chloride solution is slowly added. The
resulting solution is heated for 1 hour in a water bath. After cooling, the solution is
filtered through a quantitative filter paper. The precipitates are washed until the
filtrate doesn't show the reaction of chlorides. The precipitates are then carbonized
carefully and heat-treated at 800 ± 25℃ until the weight becomes constant. It is then
weighed as barium sulfate.
weight of barium sulfate(g) × 0.7466
Content(%) ＝ × 100
weight of the sample(g)

869
 L-Proline

Chemical Formula: C5H9NO2

Molecular Weight: 115.13
Synonyms: L-2-Pyrrolidinecarboxylic acid CAS No.: 147-85-3

Compositional Specifications of L-Proline

Content L-Proline, when calculate on the dried basis, the content should contain within
a range of 98.5∼101.5% of L-proline (C5H9NO2).
Description L-Proline is scentless white crystallite or crystalline powder with a slightly
sweet taste.
Identification When 1 mL of ninhydrine solution (0.2→100) is added to 5 mL of
L-Proline solution (1→1,000), this solution becomes yellow.
Purity (1) Specific Rotation : 4 g of pre-dried L-Proline is precisely weighed and
dissolved in water so that the total volume becomes 100 mL. The polarity of this solution
should be within a range of ＝ -84.0∼-86.3°
(2) Lead : When 5.0 g of L-Proline is tested by Atomic Absorption Spectrophotometry
or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content should not be more
than 5ppm.
(3) Arsenic : It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(4) Chloride: When 0.07 g of L-Proline is tested by Chloride Limit Test, its content
should not be more than the amount that corresponds to 0.2 mL of 0.01 N
hydrochloric acid.(Not be more than 0.1%)
Loss on Drying After drying for 3 hours at 105℃, the loss weight should not be more
than 0.3%.
Residue on Ignition Residue after ignition should not be more than 0.1%.
Assay Dissolve about 0.22 g of L-Proline, previously dried and accurately weighed in 3
mL of formic acid and 50 mL of glacial acetic acid. The solution is titrated with 0.1 N
perchloric acid solution (indicator : 2 drops of crystal violet solution in glacial acetic
acid). The end point is where the color of the solution turns bluish green. Separately,
a blank test is carried out by following the same procedure.
1 mL of 0.1 N perchloric acid solution ＝ 11.51 mg C5H9NO2

870
 Propionic Acid
Chemical Formula: C3H6O2
Molecular Weight: 74.08 INS No.: 280
Synonyms: Ethylformic acid; Methylacetic CAS No.: 79-09-4
acid; Propanoic acid

Compositional Specifications of Propionic Acid

Content Propionic Acid, when calculated on the dried basis, should contain within a
range of 99.5～100.5% of propionic acid (C3H6O2).
Description Propionic Acid is an oily, clear liquid having a characteristic odor.
Purity (1) Specific Gravity : Specific gravity should be within a range of 0.993～0.997
(2) Distillation Range ： When Propionic Acid is tested for boiling point and amount of
distillate, 95%(v/v) or more should be extracted at 138.5∼142.5℃.
(3) Lead : When 5.0 g of Propionic Acid is tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content
should not be more than 2.0 ppm.
(4) Arsenic : It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(5) Mercury : When Propionic Acid is tested by Mercury Limit Test, its content should
not be more than 1.0 ppm.
(6) Aldehyde (as propionic aldehyde) : 10 mL of Propionic Acid is transferred into a
Erlenmeyer flask with a ground-glass stopper, containing 50 mL of water and 10 mL
of sodium hydrogen sulfite solution (1→80). Shake vigorously, allow to stand for 30
minutes and titrate with 0.1 N iodine until the color of the solution becomes to
yellow-brown. The consumed volume is not more than 1.75 mL. Separately, perform
a blank test in the same manner.
(7) Readily Oxidizable substances (as formic acid) : 15 g of sodium hydroxide is
dissolved in 50 mL of water and cooled. 6 mL of Bromine is added while stirring and
water is added to make 2,000 mL. 25 mL of this solution is transferred into the
Erlenmeyer flask with a stopper with 100 mL of water. 10 mL of sodium acetate
solution(1→5) and 10 mL of hydrochloric acid are added and allow to stand for 15
minutes. 5 mL of potassium iodide solution(1→4) and 10 mL of hydrochloric acid are
added to this solution, and titrated with 0.1N sodium thiosulfate solution until the
brown color immediately disappear. The consumed amount should not be more than
2.2 mL. Separately, perform a blank test in the same manner.
(8) Residue on Evaporation : 0.01% and lower after evaporating the 100 mL propionic
acid and drying it at 105℃ for half an hour or until being weighted.
Water Content When Propionic Acid is tested by Water Determination Method
(Karl-Fischer Method), the content should not be more than 0.15%.
Assay Accurately weigh about 1.5 g of Propionic Acid, dissolve in 100 mL of freshly
boiled and cooled water, and titrate with 0.5 N sodium hydroxide (indicator : 2 drops
of phenolphthalein solution).
871
1 mL of 1 N sodium hydroxide = 37.04 mg of C3H6O2

872
 Propyl Gallate
Gallic Acid, Propyl Ester

Chemical Formula: C10H12O5

Molecular Weight: 212.21 INS No.: 310

Synonyms: Gallic acid, propyl ester CAS No.: 121-79-9

Compositional Specifications of Propyl Gallate

Content Propyl Gallate, when calculated on the dried basis, should contain within a
range of 98.0～102.0% of propyl gallate (C10H12O5).
Description Propyl Gallate occurs as a white to light brown-yellow crystalline powder. It
is odorless and has a light bitter taste.
Identification (1) Dissolve 0.5 g of Propyl Gallate in 10 mL of sodium hydroxide
solution, distill, and take about 4 mL of the initial distillate. The distillate is clear. An
scent of propyl alcohol is evolved upon heating.
(2) Dissolve 0.1 g of Propyl Gallate in ethanol to make 5 mL. Add 1 drop of dilute
ferric chloride solution. The color becomes purple.
Purity (1) Melting Point : Melting point of Propyl Gallate, previously dried for 2 hours at
105℃, should be within a range of 146～150℃.
(2) Clarity and Color of Solution : Dissolve 0.5 g of Propyl Gallate in 10 mL of
ethanol. The color of the solution should not be deeper than that of Color standard
Solution C.
(3) Chloride : Toh 1.5 g of Propyl Gallate, add 75 mL of water, warm for 5 minutes to
about 70℃, cool to about 20℃, and filter. To 25 mL of the filtrate, add 6 mL of
dilute nitric acid, which is then tested by Chloride Limit Test. The content of the
solution should not be more than the almost corresponds to 0.4 mL of 0.01 N sulfuric
acid.
(4) Sulfate : To 25 mL of the filtrate in (3) above, add 1 mL of dilute hydrochloric
acid, which is then tested by Sulfate Limit Test. Its content should not be more than
the amount that corresponds to 0.4 mL of 0.01 N sulfuric acid.
(5) Arsenic : It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(6) Lead : When 5.0 g of Propyl Gallate is tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content
should not be more than 2.0 ppm.
873
 (7) Mercury : When Propyl Gallate is tested by Mercury Limit Test, its content should
not be more than 1.0 ppm.
Loss on Drying When Propyl Gallate is dried for 2 hours at 105℃, the weight loss
should not be more than 1.5%.
Residues on Ignition When thermogravimetric analysis is done with 1 g of Propyl
Gallate, the residue should not be more than 0.1%.
Assay Dry a glass filter (1G4) at 110℃ for 30 minutes. allow to cool in a vacuum
desiccator, and cool and accurately weigh. Accurately weigh about 0.2 g of Propyl
Gallate, previously dried. add 150 mL of water, and boil. Add 50 mL of bismuth nitrate
solution while stirring forcefully, stir for several minutes more, filter the precipitate
through the above glass filter, wash twice with 5 mL of diluted nitric acid (1→300)
cooled in ice water, and wash with ice water until the blue litmus paper does not
change to red. Dry at 110℃ for 3 hours, allow to cool in a vacuum desiccator,
Accurately weigh, and calculate the content by the following formula
Content of propyl Weight of the
precipitate(g) ×0.486
5 ×10
gallate(C10H12O5)(%)= Weight of the sample(g) 0

874
 Propylene Glycol
Chemical Formula: C3H8O2 INS No.: 1520
Molecular Weight: 76.10
Synonyms: Methyl glycol; Propanediol;
Propane-1,2-diol CAS No.: 57-55-6

Compositional Specifications of Propylene Glycol

Content Propylene Glycol should contain not less than 98.0% of propylene glycol
(C3H8O2).
Description Propylene Glycol is a colorless, clear, viscous liquid. It is odorless and has
a slightly bitter and sweet taste.
Identification (1) When thin plate chromatography is carried out with 5 μl of a solution
of Propylene Glycol in methyl alcohol (1→10) using a mixture of methyl alcohol and
propylene glycol (10:1) as a reference solution and n-butyl alcohol methyl alcohol
chloroform (5:3:2) as a developing solvent. A yellow spot is observed at the position
as the reference. In this case, silica gel for thin layer chromatography (with
phosphor) that is dried for 1 hour at 110℃ is used as a porous support material. It
is developed until the solvent front reaches approximately 15 cm from the starting
point. It is then dried in air, heated for 10 minutes to remove solvent, and colorized
by spraying thymol sulfuric acid solution and drying for 20 minutes at 110℃.
(2) To 1 mL of Propylene Glycol, add 0.5 g of potassium hydrogen sulfate, and heat. A
fruity odor is evolved.
Purity (1) Specific Gravity : Specific gravity of Propylene Glycol should be within a
range of 1.036～1.040.
(2) Boiling Point : Boiling Point of Propylene Glycol should be within a range at 185～l89℃.
(3) Free Acid : To 50 mL of water, add 1 mL of phenolphthalein solution, add sodium
hydroxide solution (1→2,500) until the pink color of the solution persists for 30
seconds, add 10 mL of Propylene Glycol, mix, and add 0.20 mL of 0.1 N sodium
hydroxide. A pink color persists for not less than 30 seconds.
(4) Arsenic : It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(5) Lead : When 5.0 g of Propylene Glycol is tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content
should not be more than 2.0 ppm.
Water Content Water content of Propylene Glycol as determined by water content
determination method (Karl-Fischer Method) should not be more than 0.2%.
Residue on Ignition When thermogravimetric analysis is done with 10 g of Propylene
Glycol, the residue should not be more than 0.07%.
Assay Accurately weigh about 1 g of Propylene Glycol. and add water to make exactly
250 mL. Take 10 mL of this solution, transfer into a flask with a ground-class
stopper. add 10 mL of sodium metaperiodate solution (1→40), accurately measured.
875
add 4 mL of diluted sulfuric acid (1→2). shake well, and allow to stand for 40
minutes. Weigh 5 g of potassium iodide to the solution. add, immediately stopper
tightly, shake well, allow to stand in a dark place for 5 minutes, and titrate with 0.1 N
sodium thiosulfate (indicator : starch solution). Perform a blank test in the same
manner.
1 mL of 0.1 N sodium thiosulfate solution ＝ 3.8048 mg C3H8O2

876
 Propylene Glycol Alginate
Chemical Formula: (C9H14O7)n (esterified)

Equiv wt, actual(avg.) : 234.21 INS No.: 405

Synonyms: Hydroxypropyl alginate CAS No.: 9005-37-2

Compositional Specifications of Propylene Glycol Alginate

Description Propylene Glycol Alginate occurs as a white to yellowish～white coarse or
fine powder. It is odorless.
Identification To 1 g of Propylene Glycol Alginate, add 100 mL of water to produce a
pasty solution. Proceed the following tests using this solution as test solution.
(1) To 5 mL of the test solution, add 5 mL of lead acetate solution. It immediately
solidifies into a gelatinous state.
(2) To 10 mL of the test solution, add 1 mL of sodium hydroxide solution, heat in a
water bath for 5～6 minutes, cool, and add 1 mL of diluted sulfuric acid. It
immediately solidifies to a gelatinous state.
(3) To 1mL of the test solution, add 4 mL of water, and shake vigorously.
Effervescence persists.
Purity (1) Arsenic : It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(2) Lead : When 5.0 g of Propylene Glycol Alginate is tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content
should not be more than 5.0 ppm.
(3) Cadmium : When 5.0 g of Propylene Glycol Alginate is tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content
should not be more than 1.0 ppm.
(4) Mercury : When Propylene Glycol Alginate is tested by Mercury Limit Test, its
content should not be more than 1.0 ppm.
(5) Total Propylene Glycol : Transfer 1 g of Propylene Glycol Alginate, precisely dried
and accurately weighed, into a 400 mL beaker, and dissolve in 100 mL distilled
water. Add 50 mL of 0.1N sodium hydroxide solution and stir for 30 min. At the end
of this period, neutralize with 0.1N hydrochloric acid and precipitate the gum with 25
mL of a 5% calcium chloride solution. Filter the mixture using filter paper collecting
the filtrate in a 250 mL volumetric flask. Wash the precipitate with several small
portions of distilled water combining the washing with the filtrate and dilute to 250
mL with distilled water, test solution. Pipette a 25 mL aliquot of the test solution and
25 mL of the periodic acid solution into a 250mL conical flask, swirl and let stand
for 30 min. At the end of this period, add 2 g of potassium iodide and titrate with
0.1N sodium thiosulfate using 1% starch solution as an indicator. Perform a blank
determination using 50 mL of distilled water and 25 mL of the periodic acid solution.
The content of total Propylene Glycol calculated by the following equation. Its contest
should be within a range of 15~45%.

877
Propylene Glycol(%) = 3.8 × W (A - B)

A : 0.1 N sodium thiosulfate consumed used for a blank (mL)

B : 0.1 N sodium thiosulfate consumed used for test solution (mL)
W : Weight of the sample (g)
Periodic Acid Solution : To 5.5 g of iodic acid, add 200 mL of water add glacial acetic
acid to make 1,000mL.
(6) Free Propylene Glycol : Accurately weigh 2 g of Propylene Glycol Alginate,
previously dried, transfer it into flask and add 80 mL of isopropyl alcohol, attach a
reflux condenser, heat for 3 hours in a water bath. Allow the solution to cool to
room temperature, then determine the quantity of free propylene glycol as described
under the procedure for (5) Purity. This content of total Propylene glycol should not
be more than 15 %.
(7) Degree of Esterification : Degree of Esterification of Propylene Glycol Alginate is
calculated by the following equation and its value should not be less than 75%.
Degree of Esterification (%) ＝ 100 - (a＋b＋c)
a, b, and c are obtained from ①, ②, and (8).
a : content of free alginic acid (%)
b : content of sodium alginate (%)
c : content of insoluble ash (%)
① Free Alginic Acid : Accurately weigh about 0.5 g of Propylene Glycol Alginate,
previously dried for 4 hours at 105℃, dissolve it in 200 mL of freshly boiled and
cooled water, add 2 drops of phenolphthalein solution, and titrate with 0.02 N
sodium hydroxide until the pink color persists for about 20 seconds. Calculate the
content by the following formula.
Content of free alginic acid(%) ＝
Volume of 0.02N sodium hydroxide consumed(mL) × 0.00352
× 100
weight of the sample(g)

② Sodium Alginate : Accurately weigh about 1 g of Propylene Glycol Alginate

Alginate, previously dried for 4 hours at 105℃, proceed as directed under Assay in
Alkaline Salt of Organic Acid. In this case, 20 mL of 0.1 N sulfuric acid and 0.1 N
sodium hydroxide solution are used instead of 50 mL of 0.5 N sulfuric acid and 0.5
N sodium hydroxide solution. The content of sodium alginate is calculated by the
following formula (indicator : 3 drops of methyl red solution).
Content of sodium alginate (%)=

878
 Volume of 0.1N sulfuric acid consumed(mL) × 0.0198
× 100
weight of the sample(g)
(8) Insoluble ash : Dry the residue on the filter paper obtained in above ②. Ignite to
constant weight, cool, and accurately weigh. The content of Insoluble ash should not
be more than 1.5%.
(9) Total Viable Aerobic Count : When Propylene Glycol is tested by Microbe Test
Methods for Total Viable Aerobic Count (Number of General Germs) in General Test
Method in 「Standards and Specifications for Foods」, it should not be more than
5,000 per 1 g.
(10) E. coli : When Propylene Glycol is tested by Microbe Test Methods for E. coli in
General Test Method 「Standards and Specifications for Foods」, it should be
negative (-).
(11) Salmonella : When Propylene Glycol is tested by Microbe Test Methods for
Salmonella in General Test Method 「Standards and Specifications for Foods」, it
should be negative (-).
(12) Fungi : When Propylene Glycol is tested by Microbe Test Methods for Fungi in
General Test Method in 「Standards and Specifications for Foods」, it should not be
more than 500 per 1 g
Loss on Drying When Propylene Glycol Alginate is dried for 4 hours at 105℃, the
weight loss should not be more than 20%.

879
 Propylene Glycol Esters of Fatty Acids
Synonyms: Propane-1,2-diol esters of fatty
acids INS No.: 477

Compositional Specifications of Propylene Glycol Esters of Fatty Acids

Description Propylene Glycol Esters of Fatty Acids occur as white to light yellow-brown
powders, flakes, granules, waxy lumps or viscous liquids. They are odorless or have a
slight, characteristic odor.
Identification (1) 100 mL of alcoholic solution of KOH is added to 10 g of Propylene
Glycol Esters of Fatty Acids, which is heated for 1 hour in a water bath with a
reflux condenser. Most of alcohol is then distilled out. After cooling, 50 mL of dilute
hydrochloric acid is added to precipitate fatty acids. Fatty acids are removed by
extracting twice with 50 mL each of petroleum ether. The solution is extracted 10
times with 30 mL each of ether. Extracts are combined and dehydrated with
anhydrous sodium sulfate. Ether is evaporated out in a water bath. 0.3 g of the
residue is again distilled in 3 mL of pyridine and 2.1 g of triphenylchloromethane in
a water bath using a reflux condenser. After cooling, 60 mL of warm acetone is
added to dissolve solid. 0.06 g of activated carbon is added and mixed, which is
filtered. Filtrate is concentrated to one half of the initial volume in a water bath. It
is then stored in a refrigerator. Crystals formed are collected and dried for 3 hours
at 105℃. The melting point is 173∼179℃.
(2) To 0.1 g of Propylene Glycol Esters of Fatty Acids, add 2 mL of ethanol, dissolve
while warming, add 5 mL of diluted sulfuric acid, heat in a water bath for 30
minutes, and cool. Oil drops or white to yellow-white solids are formed. Separate the
oil drops or solids, add 3 mL of ether, and shake. They dissolve.
Purity (1) Acid Value : Approximately 5 g of Propylene Glycol Esters of Fatty Acids is
precisely weighed and heated and dissolved in 100 mL of alcohol, test solution.
When this test solution is proceeded as directed under Acid Value in Fats Test, the
value should not be more than 4.
(2) Arsenic : It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(3) Polyoxyethylene : To 1 g of Propylene Glycol Esters of Fatty Acids, add 20 mL of
water, heat, mix well, and cool it down. Add 10 mL of ammonium thiocynate nitric
acid cobalt test solution, shake, and mix it well. Again, add 10 mL of chloroform, mix
well, and allow to stand. Then the chloroform layer should not turn blue.
(4) Lead : When 5.0 g of Propylene Glycol Esters of Fatty Acids is tested by Atomic
Absorption Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy,
its content should not be more than 2.0 ppm.
(5) Cadmium : When 5.0 g of Propylene Glycol Esters of Fatty Acids is tested by
Atomic Absorption Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission
Spectroscopy, its content should not be more than 1.0 ppm.
(6) Mercury : When Propylene Glycol Esters is tested by Mercury Limit Test, its
880
 content should not be more than 1.0 ppm.
Residue on Ignition When thermogravimetric analysis is done with 1 g of Propylene Glycol
Esters of Fatty Acids, the residue should not be more than 1.5%.

881
 Protease
Definition Protease(Fungal), protease(Bacterial) and protease(Plant) are included in this
Protease. Definition of each protease is as follows.
Protease(Fungal) is an enzyme obtained from cultures of Aspergillus niger and its
variety, Aspergillus oryzae and its variety, and Aspergillus melleus and its variety.
Dilutant or stabilizer can be added for the purpose of activity adjustment and quality
preservation.
Protease(Bacterial) is an enzyme obtained from cultures of Bacillus subtilis and its
variety, Bacillus licheniformis and its variety and Bacillus stearothermophilus and its
variety, and Bacillus amyloliquefaciens and its variety. Dilutant or stabilizer can be
added for the purpose of activity adjustment and quality preservation.
Protease(Plant) is an enzyme obtained from plants such as papain, ficin, and bromelain
etc., Dilutant or stabilizer can be added for the purpose of activity adjustment and
quality preservation.
Ⅰ. Protease(Fungal)
Compositional Specifications of Protease(Fungal)
Description Protease, Fungal, is white～dark brown powder, particle, paste or colorless
~ dark brown liquid.
Identification When Protease, Fungal is proceeded as directed under Activity Test, it
should have the activity as Protease, Fungal.
Purity (1) Arsenic : It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(2) Lead : When 5.0 g of Protease, Fungal, is tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content
should not be more than 5.0 ppm.
(3) Coliform Group ： When Protease, Fungal, proceed as directed under Microbe Test
Methods for Coliform Group in General Test Methods「Standards and Specifications
for Foods」, it should not contain more than 30 cfu per 1 g of this product.
(4) Salmonella ： When Protease, Fungal, proceed as directed under Microbe Test
Methods for Salmonella in General Test Methods 「Standards and Specifications for
Foods」, it should be negative (-).
(5) E. Coli ： When Protease, Fungal, proceed as directed under Microbe Test Methods
for E. Coli in General Test Methods 「Standards and Specifications for Foods」, it
should be negative (-).
Activity Test (Activity) The method is to measure the amount of Protease, and tested as
directed under Method 1 SAP(Spectrometric acid protease unit) and Method 2
HUT(Hemoglobin unit on the throsine basis). However, protease obtained from
Aspergillus melleus should be examined by the Method 2.
Method 1 SAP(Spectrometric acid protease unit)
∘Analysis Principle : This test is to measure the activity of protease (expressed as SAP:
Spectrophotometric acid protease units). Activity test is based on hydrolysis of casein
882
 substrate for 30 minutes, at pH 3.0, 37℃. Unhydrolyzed substrate is precipitated with
trichloroacetic acid and removed by filtration. The amount of casein dissolved in the
filtrate is determined by the absorption measurement.
∘Preparation of Test Solution : Test Solution is prepared so that the corrected absorption
at 275 nm of isothermalized enzyme filtrate (defined as △A in this test) will be within
a range of 0.200～0.500 using 2 mL of the final dilution with glycine hydrochloric acid
buffer solution. Sample is precisely weighed and ground in a glass mortar with glycine
hydrochloric acid buffer solution. It is then transferred into a volumetric flask and filled
with glycine hydrochloric acid buffer solution.
∘Test Procedure : 10 mL each of substrate solution is added to a 25×150 mm test tube,
per 1 sample, test tubes for enzyme test should not be more than 2 , 1 for enzyme
blank test, and 1 for substrate blank test. Each test tube is capped and maintained for
15 minutes in a water bath at 37 ± 0.1℃. Precisely 2 mL of Test Solution is added
to the test tube, well mixed, and allowed to settle in a water bath (note: Test Tube
should be capped while isothermalizing.). For substrate blank test, 2 mL glycine
hydrochloric acid buffer solution is added instead of Test Solution. After exactly 30
minutes, the reaction of enzyme is stopped by adding 10 mL of trichloroacetic acid
solution. For enzyme blank test, 10 mL of substrate solution, 10 mL of trichloroacetic
acid, and 2 mL of Test Solution are sequentially added. Protein is completely
coagulated by heating all the test tubes in a water bath at 37 ± 0.1℃. The test tubes
are cooled for 5 minutes in an ice bath. The contents are filtered through Whatman
No.42 filter paper or its equivalent. The filtrate should be completely clear. Absorbance
of the filtrate is measured at 275 nm with 1 cm cell using the filtrate in the substrate
blank test as a reference. Absorbance of enzyme Test Solution is corrected by
subtracting the absorbance of enzyme blank test solution from the absorbance of
enzyme test solution.
Standard Curve
181.2 mg of L-tyrosine (previously dried until the weight becomes constant) is
precisely weighed and completely dissolved in 60 mL of 0.1 N hydrochloric acid. This
solution is diluted to 1,000 mL with water. 1 mL of the resulting solution contains 1 μ
mol of tyrosine. Using this solution, diluted solutions that contain 0.10, 0.20, 0.30, 0.40,
and 0.50 μmol each per 1 mL are prepared. Using water as a reference, absorbance of
each solution is measured at 275 nm with 1 cm cell. An absorbance calibration curve
for the amount(μmol) of tyrosine per mL is prepared. This should be a straight line.
The slope and intercept are obtained for the following calculation. It should be near
1.38. The slope and intercept is obtained by least square method as follows below.
Slope(S) ＝ n∑(MA)-∑(M)∑(A)
2
n∑(M )-(∑M) 2

Intercept
＝
(I)
2
∑(A)∑(M )-∑(M)∑(MA)
n∑(M2)-(∑M)2

n : Number of data points on the standard curve

883
 M : Amount(μmol) of tyrosine per mL for each data point
A : Absorbance for each concentration of Standard Solution
Enzyme activity is calculated by the following equation.
SAP/g ＝ (ΔA-Ⅰ) × S × 3022× W
△A : Corrected absorbance of isothermalized enzyme filtrate
I : Intercept of the standard curve
22 : Amount of final reaction liquid (mL)
S : Slope of the standard curve
30 : Reaction time (minutes)
W : Weight of sample contained in 2 mL of Test Solution (g)
Definition of Activity : 1 Spectrophotometric acid protease unit(SAP) corresponds to the
activity that frees 1 μmol of tyrosine per minute under the above test conditions.
Solutions
∘Casein : Casein (Hammarsten) is used.
∘Glycine Hydrochloric Acid Buffer Solution (0.05 M) : 3.75 g of glycine is dissolved in
about 800 mL of water, where pH is adjusted to 3.0 with 1 N
hydrochloric acid. It is diluted to 1,000 mL with water.
∘Trichloro Acetic Acid Solution : 18.0 g of trichloroacetic acid and 11.45 g of sodium
acetate are dissolved in 800 mL of water, where 21.0
mL of glacial acetic acid is added. It is diluted to 1,000
mL with water.
∘Substrate Solution : 8 mL of 1 N hydrochloric acid is added to 500 mL of water, where
7.0 g of casein (dried basis) is dispersed by stirring continuously.
It is then heated for 30 minutes in a boiling water bath while
stirring occasionally. After cooling to room temperature, 3.75 g of
glycine is added to the solution. pH of the resulting is adjusted to
3.0 with 0.1 N hydrochloric acid. It is diluted to 1,000 mL with
water.
Method 2 HUT(Hemoglobin units on the tyrosine basis)
∘Analysis Principle : This test is to measure the activity of protease (expressed as HUT:
Hemoglobin units on the tyrosine basis). Activity test is based on hydrolysis of
Hemoglobin substrate for 30 minutes, pH４.7 at 40℃. Unhydrolyzed substrate is
precipitated with trichloroacetic acid and removed by filtration. The amount of
Hemoglobin dissolved in the filtrate is determined by the absorbance measurement.
∘Preparation of Test Solution : Test Solution is prepared by dissolving the sample in
acetate buffer solution so that 1 mL of the final dilution contains 9～22 HUT
884
 (absorbance as measured by the Test Procedure will be within a range of 0.2～0.5).
∘Test Procedure : 10 mL each of substrate solution is added to a 25 × 150 mm test
tube for enzyme test and for substrate blank test. Each test tube is heated for 5
minutes in water bath at 40℃. 2 mL of Test Solution is added to the test tube for
enzyme test and 2 mL of acetate buffer solution is added to the test tube for substrate
blank test. It is placed the stopper on the test tube and diluted by tapping for 30
seconds on the palm. After heating for exactly 30 minutes in a water bath at 40℃, 10
mL of trichloroacetic acid solution is added to each tube (note : it should not be
sucked in with mouth). Both tubes are capped and vigorously shaken for 40 seconds in
every 10～12 minutes, which is repeated for 1 hour so that the tubes are cooled to
room temperature. For enzyme blank test, 10 mL of substrate solution and about 5 mL
of Test Solution are placed separately in two test tubes, which are heated for 30
minutes in a water bath. 10 mL of trichloroacetic acid solution is added to the test
tube with 10 mL substrate solution, which is shaken for 40 seconds. To this solution,
precisely 2 mL of the heated Test Solution is added. It is then shaken for 40 minutes
in every 10～12 minutes. This is repeated for 1 hour so that the solution is cooled to
room temperature. The 3 test tubes above are vigorously shaken and filtered through
Whatman No.42 filter paper or its equivalent. First 3 mL of the filtrate is discarded.
Absorbance of the filtrate is measured at 275 nm with 1 cm cell using the solution for
the substrate blank test as a reference. Au is subtracted the absorbance of enzyme
blank test solution from the absorbance of enzyme test solution (if Au does not will be
within a range of this range, it is tested again with adjusted weight of sample).
Standard Curve
100.0 mg of L-tyrosine (previously dried until the weight becomes constant) is
precisely weighed and completely dissolved in 60 mL of 0.1N hydrochloric acid. This
solution is diluted to 1,000 mL with water. 1 mL of the resulting solution contains 1000
μg of tyrosine. Using this solution, diluted solutions that contain 75.0, 50.0, and 25.0 μg
each per 1 mL are prepared. Using 0.006 N hydrochloric acid as a reference,
absorbance of 4 each solution is measured at 275 nm with 1 cm cell. The slope of a
curve is measured by plotting absorbance per 1 μg of tyrosine. As is obtained by
multiplying the slope with 1.10. This value should be approximately 0.0084.
Enzyme activity is calculated by the following equation.
ＨＵＴ/g =
Au
As
×
22
30W

22 : Amount of final reaction liquid (mL)

30 : Reaction time (minutes)
W : Weight of sample contained in 2 mL of Test Solution (g)
(Note : Under standardized conditions, As is obtained 0.0084. This value is used in
885
 usual tests instead of the value obtained from the standard curve. However, if an
accuracy is an issue and there are any doubts, the value obtained from the standard
curve should be used.)
Definition of Activity : 1 HUT unit corresponds to the amount of an enzyme that
generates enzyme-decomposed matter in 1 minute that shows a similar absorbance
(with 1 cm cell at 275 nm) as a solution containing 1.10 μg of tyrosine per 1 mL of
0.006 N hydrochloric acid under the above test conditions.
Solutions
∘Hemoglobin : Hemoglobin substrate powder or its equivalent, that is completely soluble
in water, is used.
∘Acetate Buffer Solution : 136 g of sodium acetate (NaC2H3O2․3H2O) is dissolved in
plenty of water, which is then diluted to 500 mL with water.
25 mL of this solution and 50 mL of 1 M acetic acid are
mixed and the total volume is make to 1,000 mL. pH of this
solution should be 4.7 ± 0.02.
∘Substrate Solution : 4.0 g of Hemoglobin is dissolved in 100 mL of water by stirring for
10 minutes in a 250 mL beaker. pH of the solution is adjusted to
1.7 with 0.3 N hydrochloric acid while stirring (the electrode of the
pH meter is immersed in the solution). After 10 minutes, pH is
adjusted to 4.7 with 0.5M sodium acetate solution. The total
volume is make to 200 mL with water. If this solution is stored in
a refrigerator, it is effective for 5 days.
∘Trichloroacetic acid solution : 140 g of trichloroacetic acid is dissolved in 75 mL of
water, which is then diluted to 1,000 mL with water.
Storage Standard of Protease, Fungal (HUT)
Protease, Fungal (HUT) is stored in a cold dark place with sealing tightly.

886
Ⅱ. Protease, Bacterial(PC)
Compositional Specifications of Protease, Bacterial(PC)
Description Protease, Bacterial (PC) is white～dark brown powder, particle, paste or
colorless ~ dark brown liquid.
Identification When Protease, Bacterial (PC) is proceeded as directed under Activity Test,
it should have the activity as Protease, Bacterial (PC).
Purity (1) Arsenic : It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(2) Lead : When 5.0 g of Protease, Bacterial, is tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content
should not be more than 5.0 ppm.
(3) Coliform Group ： When Protease, Bacterial(PC) proceed as directed under Microbe
Test Methods for Coliform Group in General Test Methods 「Standards and
Specifications for Foods」, it should not contain more than 30 cfu per 1 g of this
product.
(4) Salmonella ： When Protease, Bacterial(PC) proceed as directed under Microbe Test
Methods for Salmonella in General Test Methods 「Standards and Specifications for
Foods」, it should be negative (-).
(5) E. Coli ： When Protease, Bacterial, proceed as directed under Microbe Test
Methods for E. Coli in General Test Methods 「Standards and Specifications for
Foods」, it should be negative (-).
Activity Test (activity)
∘Principle : This test is to measure the activity of protease (expressed as PC unit).
Activity test is based on hydrolysis of casein substrate for 30 minutes, at pH 7.0, 37℃.
Unhydrolyzed casein is removed by filtration. The amount of casein dissolved in the
filtrate is determined by the absorbance measurement.
∘Preparation of Test Solution : Test Solution is prepared using Tris buffer solution so
that 2 mL of the final dilution contains 10～44 PC units.
∘Test Procedure : 10 mL each of substrate solution is added to a 25 × 150 mm test
tube for enzyme test, enzyme blank test, and substrate blank test. These tubes are
maintained for 15 minutes in a water bath at 37 ± 0.1℃. For enzyme test, 2 mL of
Test Solution is quickly added and shaken, which is then allowed to settle in the water
bath. For substrate blank test, 2 mL of Tris buffer solution, instead of Test Solution, is
added. After 10 minutes, 10 mL each of trichloroacetic acid solution is added to each
test tube to stop the reaction. For enzyme blank test, 10 mL each of substrate solution
and trichloroacetic acid solution are added, and mixed by shaking for 40 seconds,
where 2 mL of Test Solution is then added (note : trichloroacetic acid should not be
sucked in with mouth). These tubes are further heated for 30 minutes in a water bath
to coagulate proteins completely. At the end point, the tubes are shaken vigorously and
filtered through a Whatman No.42 filter paper. Initial 3 mL of the filtrate is discarded.
Absorbance of the filtrate is measured at 275 nm with 1 cm path length using the
solution for the substrate blank test as a reference. Au is the value subtracted the
absorbance of enzyme blank test solution from the absorbance of enzyme test solution.
887
 Standard Curve
100.0 mg of L－tyrosine (previously dried until the weight becomes constant) is
precisely weighed and completely dissolved in 60 mL of 0.1 N hydrochloric acid. This
solution is diluted to 1,000 mL with water. 1 mL of the resulting solution contains 100
μg of tyrosine. Using this solution, diluted solutions that contain 75.0, 50.0, and 25.0 μg
each per 1 mL are prepared. Using 0.006 N hydrochloric acid as a reference,
absorbance of 4 each solution is measured at 275 nm with 1 cm cell. A standard curve
is prepared using absorbance of tyrosine concentration. Absorbance of a solution that
contains 60 μg of tyrosine per 1 mL is obtained by interpolation from the standard
curve. This absorbance value is divided by 40, so that it represents an absorbance of a
solution that contains 1.5 μg per 1 mL, As (which is approximately 0.0115.)
Enzyme activity is obtained by the following equation.
PC/g = Au As
×
22
30W

22 : Amount of final reaction liquid (mL)

30 : Reaction time (minutes)
W : Weight of sample contained in 2 mL of Test Solution (g)
Definition of Activity : 1 Bacterial protease unit(PC) corresponds to the amount of an
enzyme that generates 1.5 μg/mL of L-tyrosine per minute under the test conditions
above.
Solutions
∘Casein : Casein (Hammarsten) is used.
∘Tris Buffer Solution (pH 7.0) : 12.1 g of Tris(Hydroxymethyl)aminomethane for enzyme
test is dissolved in 800 mL of water. pH is adjusted to
7.0 with 1 N hydrochloric acid. Water is added to
make the total volume to 1,000 mL.
∘Trichloroacetic Acid Solution : 18 g of trichloroacetic acid and 19 g of sodium acetate
(3 hydrate) are dissolved in 800 mL of water, where 20
mL of glacial acetic acid is added. It is diluted to 1,000
mL with water.
∘Substrate Solution : 6.05 g of Tris(Hydroxymethyl)aminomethane for enzyme test is
dissolved in 500 mL of water, where 8 mL of 1 N hydrochloric
acid is mixed. 7 g of casein is added to this solution, which is
heated for 30 minutes in a boiling water bath while shaking
occasionally. After cooling to room temperature, pH is adjusted to
7.0 by slowly adding 0.2 N hydrochloric acid while shaking to
prevent precipitation. The resulting solution is diluted to 1,000 mL
with water.
Storage Standard of Protease, Bacterial(PC)
888
Protease, Bacterial(PC) is stored in a cold dark place with sealing tightly.

889
Ⅲ. Plant Protease(PU)
Compositional Specifications of Plant Protease(PU)
Description Plant Protease (PU) is white～dark brown powder, particle, paste or
colorless ~ dark brown liquid.
Identification When Plant Protease(PU) is proceeded as directed under Activity Test, it
should have the activity as Plant Protease(PU).
Purity (1) Arsenic : It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(2) Lead : When 5.0 g of Plant Protease, is tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content
should not be more than 5.0 ppm.
(3) Coliform Group ： When Plant Protease (PU) proceed as directed under Microbe
Test Methods for Coliform Group in General Test Methods 「Standards and
Specifications for Foods」, it should not contain more than 30 cfu per 1 g of this
product.
(4) Salmonella ： When Plant Protease (PU) proceed as directed under Microbe Test
Methods for Salmonella in General Test Methods 「Standards and Specifications for
Foods」, it should be negative (-).
(5) E. Coli ： When Plant Protease proceed as directed under Microbe Test Methods
for E. Coli in General Test Methods 「Standards and Specifications for Foods」, it
should be negative (-).
Activity Test (activity)
∘Application and Principle : Activity test is based on protein hydrolysis of casein
substrate for 60 minutes, at pH 6.0, 40℃. Unhydrolyzed substrate is precipitated with
trichloroacetic acid and removed by filtration. The amount of casein dissolved in the
filtrate is determined by the absorbance measurement.
∘Preparation of Test Solution : The concentration of ２ｍl of final diluted solution is
adjusted so that the absorbance (measured as described in Test Procedure) to be
measured will be within a range of 0.2 to 0.5. Sample is ground in a mortar with
phosphate cysteine EDTA buffer solution. It is then transferred into a volumetric flask
and filled with the same buffer solution.
∘Test Procedure : 5 mL each of casein substrate solution is added to a 25 × 150 mm
test tube, 3 for enzyme test and 6 for papain standard curve). Tubes are maintained
for 15 minutes in a water bath at 40 ± 0.1℃. 2 mL of test solution and 2 mL of
standard solution are added to each tube, which is mixed by shaking and again
maintained for 60 minutes in a water bath. 3 mL of trichloroacetic acid solution is
added to each solution. Separately, 5 mL of substrate solution and 3 mL of
trichloroacetic acid solution are mixed in 9 test tubes for enzyme blank test. 2 mL of
test solution and 2 mL of corresponding standard solution are added to each test tube.
All the tubes are again maintained for 30 minutes in a water bath to coagulate the
precipitated protein completely. It is then filtered through a Whatman No.42 filter paper
or its equivalent. First 3 mL of the filtrate is discarded. Absorbance of the clear
filtrate is measured at 280 nm with 1 cm cell using each blank test solution as a
890
 reference. A standard curve of absorbance of the filtrate vs. concentration of standard
solution (mg/mL) is prepared. The concentration of the filtrate from test solution is
obtained by interpolation on the standard curve. Enzyme activity is calculated from the
following equation.
PU/mg = A x C x 10/W
A : Activity of USP papain standard (PU/mg)
C : Concentration of enzyme test solution obtained from standard curve (mg/mL)
W : Weight of sample contained in 2 mL of Test Solution (mg)
Definition of Activity : 1 Papain unit(PU) is an amount of enzyme that frees 1 μg
equivalent of tyrosine in 1 hour under the above test conditions.
Solutions
∘Sodium Phosphate Solution (0.05 M) : 7.1 g of sodium phosphate, dibasic (anhydrous) is
dissolved in 500 mL of water, which is diluted
to 1,000 mL with water. 1 drop of toluene is
added as a preservative.
∘Citric Acid (0.05 M) : 10.5 g of citric acid (1 hydrate) is dissolved in 500 mL of water,
which is diluted to 1,000 mL with water. 1 drop of toluene is
added as a preservative.
∘Phosphate Cysteine EDTA Buffer Solution : 7.1 g of sodium phosphate is dissolved in
about 800 mL of water, where 14.0 g of
EDTA (2 hydrate) and 6.1 g of cysteine
hydrochloride (1 hydrate) are added and
dissolved. pH of the resulting solution is
adjusted to 6.0 ± 0.1 with 1 N
hydrochloric acid or 1 N sodium
hydroxide solution. The total volume of
the solution is make to 1,000 mL with
water.
∘Trichloroacetic Acid : 30 g of trichloroacetic acid is dissolved in water to make total
volume to 100 mL.
∘Substrate Solution : 1 g of casein (Hammarsten) as a dried basis is dissolved in 50 mL
of sodium phosphate solution, which is heated for 30 minutes in a
boiling water bath while shaking occasionally. It is then cooled
while continuously shaking and its pH is adjusted to 6.0 ± 0.1 with
citric acid solution (note : if the solution is shaken continuously and
rapidly, precipitates are not formed.). The resulting solution is
diluted to 100 mL with water.
∘Standard Solution, Stock : 100 mg of USP papain standard is dissolved in phosphate
891
 cysteine EDTA buffer solution to make total volume to 100
mL.
∘Standard Solution : 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, and 7 mL each of Standard Solution(Stock) is placed in
100 mL volumetric flask. Each of the flask is filled with phosphate
cysteine EDTA buffer solution.
Storage Standard of Plant Protease(PU)
Plant Protease(PU) is stored in cold dark place with sealing tightly.

892
 Psyllium Seed Gum
Definition Psyllium Seed Gum is a polysaccharide obtained by crushing the outer shells
of seeds of psyllium plant (Plantago ovata FORSK.) of plantaginaceae or its same
species.
Compositional Specifications of Psyllium Seed Gum
Description Psyllium Seed Gum is pale light gray∼yellowish brown powder with a slight
characteristic scent.
Identification (1) Psyllium Seed Gum is wetted with cresol and observed under a
microscope. Polygonal pillar cells surrounded by cell walls (4～6 sides) are observed.
(2) Psyllium Seed Gum is wetted with ethyl alcohol and observed under a microscope.
When a few drops of water is drop-wise added, polygonal pillar cells swell quickly
and mucilage migrates into the solution.
Purity (1) Arsenic : It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(2) Lead : When 5.0 g of Psyllium Seed Gum is tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content
should not be more than 10.0 ppm.
(3) Total Viable Aerobic Count : When Psyllium Seed Gum is tested by Microbe Test
Methods for Total Viable Aerobic Count (Number of General Germs) in General Test
Method in 「Standards and Specifications for Foods」, it should not be more than
10,000 per 1 g
(4) E. Coli : When Psyllium Seed Gum is tested by Microbe Test Methods for E. Coli
in General Test Method 「Standards and Specifications for Foods」, it should be
negative (-).
(5) Protein : When 3 g of Psyllium Seed Gum is precisely weighed, proceed as directed
under nitrogen determination method, the amount should not be more than 2.0%.
1 mL of 0.01 N sulfuric acid = 0.8754 mg protein
Loss on Drying When Psyllium Seed Gum is dried for 6 hours at 105℃, the weight loss
should not be more than 12%.
Ash When Psyllium Seed Gum is tested by Ash and Acid-Insoluble Ash Limit, the
amount of ash should not be more than 4.0%.

893
 Pullulan
INS No.: 1204
Chemical Formula: (C6H10O5)n CAS No.: 9057-02-7

Definition Pullulane is obtained by separation and purification of polysaccharides

produced by black yeast (Aureobasidium pullulans (DE BARY) ARN.). Its major
component is neutral polysaccharides.
Compositional Specifications of Pullulan
Description Pullulane is white～pale yellowish white powder. It may be scentless or may
have a slight characteristic scent.
Identification (1) When 10 g of Pullulane is slowly mixed (in small portions at a time)
into 100 mL while stirring, it becomes a viscous solution.
(2) When 0.1 mL of pullulanase solution is added to and mixed with 10 mL of the
solution obtained in (1) and set aside, viscosity disappears.
(3) When 2 mL of polyethylene glycol 600 is added to 10 mL of an aqueous solution of
Pullulane (1→50), white precipitates are formed immediately.
Purity (1) Viscosity ： Approximately 10 g of dried Pullulane is precisely weighted and
dissolved in water (total weight = 100 g). Viscosity of this solution is measured at
30 ± 0.1℃ by 1. Capillary Viscosity Measurement in Viscosity Measurement. It
should be 15～180cps.
(2) Arsenic : It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(3) Lead : When 5.0 g of Pullulane is tested by Atomic Absorption Spectrophotometry
or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content should not be more
than 1.0 ppm.
(4) Protein ： When approximately 3 g of Pullulane is precisely weighted and tested by
nitrogen determination method. By multiplying the amount of nitrogen with a nitrogen
coefficient 6.25, the amount of protein is obtained. The content should not be more than
0.3%. However, the amount of sulfuric acid used for decomposition is 12 mL and the
amount of sodium hydroxide solution (2→5) is 40 mL.
1 mL of 0.01 N sulfuric acid ＝ 0.140 mg N
(5) Monosaccharides, disaccharides, and oligosaccharide : 0.8 g of ε-Polylysine is
precisely weighted and water is added to make 100 mL. Transfer 1 mL of this
solution into a centrifuged tube, 0.1 mL of saturated solution of potassium chloride
and 3 mL of methyl alcohol are added, vigorously shaken for 20 seconds, mixed, and
centrifuged at 11,000rpm for 10 minutes. 5 mL of anthrone solution is added to 0.2
mL of supernatant, immediately mixed, heated for 15 minutes in a water bath, test
solution. Absorption is measured at 620nm wavelength. Separately, 5 mL each of
anthrone solution is added to 0.2 mL of standard solution and for blank test, 0.2 mL
894
 of water respectively, proceed under same procedure as test solution, and each
absorption is measured. The content of monosaccharides, disaccharides, and
oligosaccharide should not be more than 10% (as glucose) by the following equation.
content of monosaccharides, disaccharides, and (At-Ab)×0.41×G×1 00
oligosaccharide(%) = (As-Ab)×W
At : Absorption of test solution
Ab : Absorption of blank test solution
As : Absorption of standard solution
G : Weight of glucose
W : Weight of sample
Standard solution : 0.2g of glucose is precisely weighted and dissolved in water to
make 1,000 mL.
Anthrone solution : 0.2 g of anthrone is dissolved in 100 g of 75%(v/v) sulfuric acid.
This is prepared freshly before use.
(6) Coliform Group ： When Pullulane is tested by Microbiological Methods for Coliform
Group in General Testing Methods in「Standards and Specifications for Foods」, it
should be negative (-).
(7) Salmonella : When Pullulane is tested by Microbiological Methods for Salmonella in
General Testing Methods 「Standards and Specifications for Foods」, it should be
negative (-).
(8) The number of Fungi : When Pullulane is tested by Microbiological Methods for
The number of Fungi in General Testing Methods in 「Standards and Specifications
for Foods」, it should not be more than 100 per 1 g.
Loss on Drying When Pullulane is vacuum dried for 6 hours at 90℃, the weight loss
should not be more than 8.0%.
Residue on Ignition Residue on Ignition of Pullulane should not be more than 5.0%.

895
 Pullulanase
Definition Pullulanase is an enzyme obtained from cultures of Bacillus acidopullulyticus,
Klebsiella aerogenes, culture of Bacillus licheniformis, Bacillus subtilis which contains a
gene coding for pullulanase from Pullulanibacillus naganoensis and Bacillus
acidopullyticus, Bacillus subtilis where the pullulanase gene of Bacillus deramificans is
inserted, and Bacillus licheniformis where the pullulanase gene of Bacillus deramificans
is inserted. Dilutant or stabilizer can be added for the purpose of activity adjustment
and quality preservation.
Compositional Specifications of Pullulanase
Description Pullulanase is white～dark brown powder, particle, paste or colorless ~ deep
brown liquid.
Identification When Pullulanase is proceeded as directed under Activity Test, it should
have the activity as Pullulanase.
Purity (1) Arsenic : It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(2) Lead : When 5.0 g of Pullulanase is tested by Atomic Absorption Spectrophotometry
or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content should not be more
than 5.0 ppm.
(3) Coliform Group ： When Pullulanase proceed as directed under Microbe Test
Methods for Coliform Group in General Test Methods in 「Standards and
Specifications for Foods」, it should not contain more than 30 cfu per 1 g of this
product.
(4) Salmonella ： When Pullulanase proceed as directed under Microbe Test Methods
for Salmonella in General Test Methods in 「Standards and Specifications for Food
s」, it should be negative (-).
(5) E. Coli : When Pullulanase is tested by Microbe Test Methods for E. Coli in
General Test Method 「Standards and Specifications for Foods」, it should be
negative (-).
Activity Test (activity)
∘Analysis Principle : Activity test is based on absorbance measurement of reaction
mixture of dinitrosalicylic acid and maltotriose which is a reducing sugar obtained by
hydrolyzing α-1,6-glycosidic bond of pullulan at pH 5.0, temperature 50℃.
∘Preparation of Test Solution : Test Solution is prepared so that the absorbance to be
measured will be within a range of 0.2～0.5 under the following test method.
∘Test Procedure : 1 mL of substrate solution is placed in a 17 × 1.5 cm test tube for
enzyme test. It is allowed to stand for 5 minutes in a water bath at 50℃. 1 mL of
Test Solution is added to the test tube and the mixture is reacted for 10 minutes. The
reaction is stopped by adding 2 mL of 3,5-dinitrosalicylic acid solution. Separately, 1
mL of substrate solution and 2 mL of 3,5-dinitrosalicylic acid solution are added in a
test tube for enzyme blank test, and 1 mL of Test Solution is added. Both test tubes
are boiled for 5 minutes in a boiling water bath and cooled rapidly. 10 mL each of
896
 water is added to each test tube, which is then shaken. Using the blank enzyme test
solution as a reference, absorbance of enzyme Test Solution is measured at 540 nm
with 1 cm cell.
Standard Curve
1 g of maltose (standard) is precisely weighed and dissolved in water to make total
volume to 100 mL. 1.0, 1.2, 1.4, 1.6, 1.8, and 2.0 mL each of this solutions diluted to
20 mL with water, use the Standard Solutions. Instead of 1 mL of Test Solution, with 1
mL of standard solution and 1 mL of water, the same procedure as the Test Solutions
repeated. Using water as a reference, standard curve is prepared by plotting
absorbance of each standard solution vs. concentration of standard solution (mg/mL)
Enzyme activity is calculated by the following equation
Activity Pullulanase(units/mL) C × Concentration 1,000
of Test
＝
solution(mg/mL) × 10
C : maltose concentration in enzyme Test Solution obtained from standard curve (mg/mL)
10 : reaction time
Definition of Activity : 1 Pullulanase unit is an activity which generates reducing sugar
corresponding to 1 mg of anhydrous maltose per minute under the above conditions.
Solutions
∘Substrate : 70 mL of water is added to 1 g of Pullulan standard, which is heated for 5
minutes and cooled. 10 mL of 1 M acetic acid sodium acetate buffer
solution is added to the solution, which is then diluted to 100 mL with
water
∘1 M acetic acid sodium acetate buffer solution (pH 5.0)
Solution A : 60 g of acetic acid is diluted to 500 mL with water.
Solution B : 82 g of anhydrous sodium acetate is dissolved in water to make the total
volume 500 mL.
148 mL of Solution A and 352 mL of Solution B are mixed. pH of the mixture is
adjusted to 5.0 using Solution A or Solution B. The total volume is make to 1,000 mL
with water.
∘3,5-Dinitrosalicylic acid, DNS Solution : 1 g of DNS is dissolved in 16 mL of 10%
sodium hydroxide solution. 30 g of potassium
sodium tartrate(4 hydrate) and 50 mL of water
are added to the solution, which is heated and
diluted to 100 mL with water. This solution
should be stored at 5℃ used within 5 days after
preparation.

897
Storage Standard of Pullulanase
Pullulanasee is strongly hygroscopic, so should be stored in a cold dark place with
sealing tightly.

898
 Purple Sweet Potato Color

INS No.: 163

Definition Purple Sweet Potato Color is a pigment obtained by extracting tuberous roots
of sweet potato (Ipomoes batatas POIR. and its variety) of convolvulaceae with water.
Its major pigment component is anthocyanin. Dilutant, stabilizer, or solvent can be
added for the purpose of color value adjustment and quality preservation.
Compositional Specifications of Purple Sweet Potato Color
Content Color value of Purple Sweet Potato Color should be more than the indicated
value.
Description Purple Sweet Potato Color is dark red liquid, paste, powder, or paste with a
slight characteristic scent.
Identification (1) A solution (1→100) of Purple Sweet Potato Color in citrate buffer
solution (pH 3.0) is red color and has a maximum absorption band near 530 nm.
(2) When the solution in (1) is alkalized with sodium hydroxide solution (1→25), the
color changes to dark green.
Purity (1) Arsenic : It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(2) Lead : When 5.0 g of Purple Sweet Potato Color is tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content
should not be more than 8.0 ppm.
Assay (Color Value) Appropriate amount of Purple Sweet Potato Color is precisely
weighted so that the absorption is within 0.3～0.7 and dissolved in citrate buffer
solution with pH 3.0 so that the total volume is 100 mL (Test Solution). If necessary,
the solution is centrifuged and the supernatant is used. Using citrate buffer solution
with pH 3.0 as a reference solution, absorption A is measured at the maximum
absorption near 530 nm with 1cm path length. Color value is obtained using the
following equation.
Color Value ＝
A × 10
Weight of the sample(g)

∘Citrate buffer solution (pH 3.0)

Solution 1 ： 1 ℓ of solution containing 121g of citric acid (C6H8O7․H2O)
Solution 2 ： 1 ℓ of solution containing 71.6g of dibasic sodium phosphate (Na2HPO4․
12H2O)
Solution 1 and Solution 2 are mixed well (159:41) and its pH is adjusted to 3.0.

899
 Purple Yam Color

INS No.: 163

Definition Purple yarm color is a pigment obtained by extracting tuberous roots of yam
(Dioscorea alata Linné) of dioscoreaceae with water. Its major pigment component is
cyanidin acylglucoside. Dilutant, stabilizer, or solvent can be added for the purpose of
color value adjustment and quality preservation.
Compositional Specifications of Purple Yam Color
Content Color value ( ) of Purple yarm color should be more than the indicated value.
Description Purple yarm color is dark red liquid, paste, powder, or paste with a slight
characteristic scent.
Identification (1) A solution (1→100) of Purple yarm color in citrate buffer solution (pH
3.0) is red color and has a maximum absorption band near 530 nm..
(2) When the solution in (1) is alkalinized with sodium hydroxide solution (1→25), its
color changes to dark green.
Purity (1) Arsenic : It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(2) Lead : When 5.0 g of Purple Yarm Color is tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content
should not be more than 10.0 ppm.
Assay (Color Value) Appropriate amount of Purple yarm color is precisely weighted so
that the absorption is within 0.3～0.7 and dissolved in citrate buffer solution (pH 3.0)
so that the total volume is 100 mL (Test Solution). If necessary, the solution is
centrifuged and the supernatant is used. Using citrate buffer solution (pH 3.0) as a
reference solution, absorption A is measured at the maximum absorption near 530 nm
with 1cm path length. Color value is obtained using the following equation.
Color Value ＝
A × 10
Weight of the sample(g)

∘Citrate buffer solution (pH 3.0)

Solution 1： 1ℓ of solution containing 121g of citric acid (C6H8O7 H2O).
Solution 2： 1ℓ of solution containing 71.6g of dibasic sodium phosphate (Na2HPO4
12H2O).
Solution 1 and Solution 2 are mixed well (159 : 41) and its pH is adjusted to 3.0.

900
 Quercetin
Definition Quercetin is obtained by hydrolyzing rutin with acidic aqueous solution or
enzyme. Its major component is quercetin.
Compositional Specifications of Quercetin
Content If Quercetin is converted to a dehydrated form, it should contain no less than
95.0% quercetin (C15H10O7).
Description Quercetin is yellow crystalline powder with slight characteristic scent.
Identification (1) 5 mg of Quercetin dissolve in 10 mL of alcohol. When 1～2 drops of
ferric chloride solution (1→50) are added to this solution, a greenish brown band
appears.
(2) When 5 mg of Quercetin dissolve in 5mL of sodium hydroxide solution (1→100), it
shows yellow～orange in color.
(3) 5 mg of Quercetin dissolve in 5 mL of alcohol. When 2 mL of hydrochloric acid and
0.05 g of magnesium are added, the solution slowly turns red.
(4) A solution of 10 mg of Quercetin in 500 mL alcohol has maximum absorption bands
near 255 nm and 370 nm.
Purity (1) Arsenic : It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(2) Lead : When 5.0 g of Quercetin is tested by Atomic Absorption Spectrophotometry
or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content should not be more
than 2.0 ppm.
Loss on Drying When Quercetin is dried for 2 hours at 135℃, the weight loss should
not be more than 13.0%.
Assay Approximately 50 mg of Quercetin is precisely weighted and dissolved in methyl
alcohol (total volume = 50 mL), which is filtered through a 0.5 ㎛ Millipore filter (Test
Solution). Separately, quercetin (C15H10O7 · 2H2O)standard is precisely weighted so that
it contains 50 mg as quercetin and dissolved in methyl alcohol (total volume = 50 mL),
which is filtered through a 0.5 ㎛ Millipore filter (Test Solution). 10 ㎕ each of Test
and Standard Solutions are injected into a high speed liquid chromatography under the
following Operation Conditions and the content of quercetin is obtained by the following
equation.
weight of the standard peak area of test
(as quercetin)(mg) solution
Content(%) = × × 100
weight of the sample on the peak area of
anhydrous basis(mg) standard solution

Operation Conditions
-Detector : UV 375 nm
-Column : μ-Bondapak C18 (3.9 mm × 300 mm) or its equivalent
-Column Temperature : room temperature
-Mobile Phase : methyl alcohol : water : acetic acid (15 : 3 : 1)
901
-Flow Rate : 1.0 mL/min

902
 Quillaia Extract
Synonyms: Panama bark extract; Quillay bark
extract INS No.: 999

Definition Quillaia Extract is obtained by extracting barks of quilaia (Quillaia saponaria

MOLINA) of rosaceae with water followed by purification. Its major component is
saponin. Dilutant or other food additives can be added for the purpose of quality
preservation, etc.
Compositional Specifications of Quillaia Extract
Content When Quillaia Extract is quantitatively analyzed, it should contain not less than
(as a partially hydrolyzed sponin) the indicated amount.
Description Quillaia Extract is pale yellow～brown powder or liquid with a characteristic
taste.
Identification (1) 0.5 g of Quillaia Extract is dissolve in 10 mL of water. 2 μl of this
solution is spotted at 2 cm position from the bottom of thin plate of silica gel 60
(Kiesel gel 60, Merck) and dried. It is then developed up to 3cm from the plate top
using a mixture of chloroform : methyl alcohol : water : acetic acid (15:10:3:1) as a
developing solvent. It is then air-dried and sprayed with anisaldehyde · sulfuric acid
solution, which is heated for 10 minutes at 110℃. Brown spots (with violet tint) are
observed at Rf values of 0.22, 0.26, 0.29, and 0.30. The largest spot is at Rf value of
0.29.
∘Anisaldehyde · sulfuric acid ： 9 mL of alcohol is stir-mixed with 0.5 mL of ρ
-anisaldehyde and 0.5 mL of sulfuric acid.
(2) 2 g of Quillaia Extract is added to a 100 mL flask, where 25 mL of 1% potassium
hydroxide solution is added, a reflux condenser is attached, and heated for 2 hours.
Cool and transfer the content into a beaker and neutralize to pH 5 with hydrochloric
acid (1→4). It is then diluted to 50 mL with water (Test Solution). Separately, 10 mg
of partially hydrolyzed saponin used in Assay is dissolved in 5 mL of water (Standard
Solution). 2 μl of each solution is tested using Thin Plate Chromatography following
the procedure under Identification (1). One of the spots from the Test Solution has
the same color and Rf value from the bluish gray spot of the Standard Solution.
Purity (1) Acidity ： An aqueous solution (1→100) of Quillaia Extract should have a pH
of 4.5∼5.5 (for powder only).
(2) Arsenic : It should be no more than 2.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(3) Lead : When 5.0 g of Quillaia Extract is tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content
should not be more than 2.0 ppm.
(4) Mercury : When Quillaia Extract is tested by Mercury Limit Test, its content should
not be more than 1.0ppm
Water Content Water content of Quillaia Extract as determined by water content
determination method (Karl-Fischer Method) should not be more than 6%(for powder
903
 form only).
Loss on Drying When 2 g of Quillaia Extract is dried for 5 hours at 105℃, the weight
loss should be 50∼80% (for liquid form only).
Residue on Ignition Residue on Ignition of Quillaia Extract should not be more than 10%.
Assay Approximately 2 g (approximately 5 g for liquid) is added to a 100 mL volumetric
flask, which is filled with water. Precisely 10 mL of this solution is taken into a 100
mL volumetric flask, where 10 mL of 2% potassium hydroxide solution is added, a
reflux condenser is attached, and heated for 2 hours in a water bath. Cool and transfer
the content into a 50 mL volumetric flask using 25 mL of ethyl alcohol. Add 0.5 mL of
phosphoric acid and dilute the solution to 50 mL with water (Test Solution). Separately,
20 mg of partially hydrolyzed saponin standard is precisely weighted into a 50 mL
volumetric flask and dissolved in 50v/v% ethyl alcohol. The total volume is brought up
to 50 mL with 50 v/v% ethyl alcohol (Standard Solution). Inject each 20 μl of test
solution and standard solution to high speed liquid chromatography under the following
operation conditions. The content of partially hydrolyzed saponin is obtained by the
following equation.
Content(%) = AB × (S1+SST2)×10 × 100
A ： Amount of sample(mg)
B ： Amount of standard(mg)
St ： Peak area of partially hydrolyzed saponin in Standard Solution
S1 ： Peak area of partially hydrolyzed saponin in Test Solution
S2 ： Peak area of saponin-like matters appeared before peak of partially hydrolyzed
saponin in Test Solution
Operation Conditions
-Detector ： UV 210 nm
-Column ： stainless steel tube with 4∼6 mm inner diameter and 15∼30 cm length,
which is filled with 5∼10 μm silylated silica gel with octadecyl group (for
liquid chromatography)
-Column Temperature ： 40℃
-Mobile Phase ： 0.1% phosphoric acid ： acetonitrile (65：35)
-Flow Rate ： Adjusted so that the retention time of partially hydrolyzed saponin is
approximately 10 minutes

904
 Red Cabbage Color

INS No.: 163(v)

Definition Red Cabbage Color is a pigment obtained by extracting red cabbage leaves
(Brassica oleracea Linné) with slightly acidic solution. The major component is cyanidin
acylglycoside. Dilutant, stabilizer, or solvent can be added for the purpose of color
value adjustment and quality preservation.
Compositional Specifications of Red Cabbage Color
Content Color value ( ) of Red Cabbage Color should not be less than the indicated
value.
Description Red Cabbage Color is deep red liquid, powder, or paste having a slight
characteristic odor.
Identification (1) The Test Solution obtained in Color Value section shows red color and
a absorption maximum at about 536 nm.
(2) When Test Solution in (1) is alkalinized by adding sodium hydroxide solution, colour
changed deep green.
Purity (1) Arsenic : It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(2) Lead : When 5.0 g of Red Cabbage Color is tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content
should not be more than 8.0 ppm.
Assay (Color Value) Appropriate amount of Red Cabbage Color is precisely weighed so
that the absorbance will fall within 0.3～0.7 and dissolved citric acidㆍdibasic sodium
phosphate buffer solution with pH 3.0 to make 100 mL (Test Solution). If necessary,
the solution is centrifuged and the supernatant is used. Using citric acidㆍdibasic
sodium phosphate buffer solution with pH 3.0 as a reference solution, absorbance
maximum A is measured at 536 nm with 1cm cell. Color value is obtained using the
following equation.
Color Value ( ) ＝ weight ofA the × 10
sample(g)

∘Citric acid·dibasic sodium phosphate buffer solution (pH 3.0)

Solution 1：0.1M citric acid solution：1 L of solution containing 21.01g of citric acid
(C6H8O7 H2O).
Solution 2：0.2M dibasic sodium phosphate solution： 1 L of solution containing 71.63 g
of dibasic sodium phosphate (Na2HPO4․12H2O).
Solution 1 and Solution 2 are mixed well (159:41) and its pH is adjusted to 3.0.

905
 Red Radish Color

INS No.: 163

Definition Red Radish Color is a pigment obtained by extracting reddish violet roots of
radish (Raphanus sativus LINNE) of cruciferae with water or hydrated ethyl alcohol at
room temperature. Its major pigment component is Pelargonidin acylglucoside of
anthocyanins. Diluent and stabilizer can be added for the purpose of color value
adjustment and quality preservation.
Compositional Specifications of Red Radish Color
Content Color value ( )of Red Radish Color should be more than the indicated value.
Description Red Radish Color is dark red powder with a slight characteristic scent.
Identification (1) Test Solution obtained in Color Value section shows red color and a
maximum absorption band near 515 nm.
Purity (1) Arsenic : It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(2) Lead : When 5.0 g of Red Radish Color is tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content
should not be more than 10.0 ppm.
Assay(Color Value) Appropriate amount of Red Radish Color is precisely weighted so
that the absorption is within 0.3～0.7 and dissolved in citric acid·dibasic sodium
phosphate buffer solution with pH 3.0 (total volume 100 mL). 1 mL of this solution is
diluted to 100 mL with citric acid·dibasic sodium phosphate buffer solution with pH 3.0
(Test Solution). If necessary, the solution is centrifuged and the supernatant is used.
Using citric acid·dibasic sodium phosphate buffer solution with pH 3.0 as a reference
solution, absorption A is measured at the maximum absorption near 515 nm with 1cm
path length. Color value is obtained using the following equation.
Color Value( ) ＝ weight Aof×the1,000 sample(g)

∘Citric acid·dibasic sodium phosphate buffer solution (pH 3.0)

Solution 1 ： 0.1 M citric acid solution ： 1 L of solution containing 21.01 g of citric
acid (C6H8O7․H2O).
Solution 2 ： 0.2 M dibasic sodium phosphate solution ： 1 L of solution containing
71.63 g of dibasic sodium phosphate (Na2HPO4․12H2O).
Solution 1 and Solution 2 are mixed well (159:41) and its pH is adjusted to 3.0.

906
 D-Ribose
Definition D-Ribose is obtained by the following process. Glucose is fermented by
Bacillus (Bacillus pumilus). The resulting material is separated and purified. Its
component is D-Ribose.
Compositional Specifications of D-Ribose
Content D-Ribose (converted to an anhydrous form) contains 90.0∼102.0% of D-ribose
(C5H10O5 = 150.13).
Description D-Ribose is white～pale brown crystalline powder. It may be scentless or
have a slight characteristic scent.
Identification (1) When 2～3 drops of an aqueous solution (1→20) of D-Ribose is added
to 5 mL of warm Fehling solution, red precipitates are formed.
(2) An aqueous solution of D-Ribose (1→25) is levorotatory.
Purity (1) Arsenic ： It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(2) Lead : When 5.0 g of D-Ribose is tested by Atomic Absorption Spectrophotometry
or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content should not be more
than 10.0 ppm.
(3) Other Saccharide : Liquid chromatography is carried out according to Assay. All the
peaks until a double tretention time of D-ribose are observed. Peak area Apart from
peak area of D-ribose in Test Solution, peak area should not be more than 10% of
the sum of areas of all the peak.
Water Content Water content of D-Ribose is determined by direct titration method in
Water Determination (Karl Fisher Method) and should not be more than 5.0%.
Residue on Ignition When thermogravimetric analysis is done with 1 g of D-Ribose, the
amount of the amount of Residue on Ignition should not be more than 1.0%.
Assay Weight accurately 1.0 g of D-Ribose and 1.0 g of D-ribose standard. Dissolve
each samples in water, and dilute to 50 mL with water (Test Solution and Standard
Solution). 10 μl of each solution is injected into liquid chromatography under the
following Operation Conditions and the content of D-ribose is obtained by the following
equation.
weight of the standard on the AT
Content (%) = anhydrous basis(g)
weight of the sample on the
×
AS
× 100
anhydrous basis(g)

AT : peak area of Test Solution

AS : peak area of Standard Solution
Operation Conditions
-Detector : Differential refractometer (RI detector)
-Column : Shodex SUGAR SC1011(8 × 300 mm) or its equivalent
-Column Temperature : 80℃
-Mobile Phase : Water
907
-Flow Rate : 1.0 mL/min

908
 Rice Bran Wax
INS No.: 908
CAS No.: 8016-60-2

Definition Rice Bran Wax is obtained by separating and purifying rice bran oil of rice
(Oryza sativa L.) of gramineae, and major component is myricyl lignocerate.
Compositional Specifications of Rice Bran Wax
Description Rice Bran Wax is pale yellow∼pale brown flakes or solid with a slight
characteristic scent.
Identification (1) 1∼2 mg of Rice Bran Wax is analyzed by Potassium Bromide fining
process in Infrared Spectrophotometry (1). Its spectrum is shown below.

Purity (1) Melting Point ： Melting point of rice bran oil should be within 70∼83℃.
(2) Free Fatty Acid ： Approximately 7 g of is precisely weighted into a 250 mL of
Erlenmeyer flask, where 75 mL of warm neutralized ethanol and 2 mL of
phenolphthalein TS are added. It is titrated with 0.25 N sodium hydroxide solution
until the red color persists for 30 seconds. The amount of free fatty acid (as oleic
acid) is obtained by the following equation and it should not be more than 10%.
Free fatty acid (as
＝
oleic acid) V × N × 28.2
W
V ： Consumed amount of 0.25 N sodium hydroxide solution (mL)
N ： Normality of 0.25 N sodium hydroxide solution
W： Amount of sample (g)
(3) Saponification Value ： 3 g of Rice Bran Wax is precisely weighted into a flask and
dissolved in 25 mL of xylene by shaking until the solution becomes clear or slightly
turbid, where 50 mL of ethyl alcohol and 25 mL of 0.5 N alcoholic solution of
potassium hydroxide are added. Attach a reflux condenser. The solution is saponified
for 2 hour in a water bath. Saponification value should be 70～160 under
Saponification Value in Oils Test.
(4) Iodine Value : Approximately 1 g of Rice Bran Wax is precisely weighted into a
909
 500 mL Erlenmeyer flask, and 30 mL of cyclohexane is added to dissolve the
sample. Add 25 mL of Weiss solution, and shake with stopper. The flask is set aside
for 30 minutes in a dark place. 20 mL of potassium iodide solution and 100 mL of
water (previously boiled and cooled) are added to the flask. The excess iodine is
titrated with 0.1 N sodium thiosulfate solution (indicator : 1 mL of starch solution),
adding the titrant gradually and shaking constantly until the yellow colour of the
solution almost disappears. Add starch test solution, and continue the titration with
0.1N sodium thiosulfate solution until the blue colour disappears entirely. Calculate
the iodine value by the following formula. The content should not be more than 20.
Separately, a blank test is carried out by the same procedure.
Iodine Value ＝ (A - B) ×C1.269 × f
A ： Consumed amount of 0.1 N sodium thiosulfate solution in the blank test (mL)
B ： Consumed amount of 0.1 N sodium thiosulfate solution in the test for sample (mL)
f ： Activity of 0.1 N sodium thiosulfate solution in this test
C ： Amount of sample(g)
(5) Arsenic : It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(6) Lead : When 5.0 g of Rice Bran Wax is tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content
should not be more than 10.0 ppm.
Residue on Ignition Residue on Ignition of Rice Bran Wax should not be more than 0.3%.

910
 Rosin
Definition Rosin is obtained by filtering and purifying secretion from barks of pine trees
(Pinus sp.) of pinacea.
Compositional Specifications of Rosin
Description Rosin is pale yellow powder or solid..
Identification (1) 0.1 g of Rosin is dissolve in 10 mL of anhydrous acetic acid by
heating in water bath. Cool the solution. When sulfuric acid is added to this solution,
the color of the solution becomes reddish violet.
Purity (1) Acid Value ： Approximately 1 g of Rosin is precisely weighted and dissolved
in approximately 50 mL of a mixture(1:1) of alcohol and ether (neutralized with 0.1 N
potassium hydroxide solution using phenolphthalein TS) to use test solution. The test
solution is proceeded as directed under Acid value method in Fats and Related
substances tests, and the value should be 170~190.
(2) Arsenic : It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(3) Lead : When 5.0 g of Rosin is tested by Atomic Absorption Spectrophotometry or
Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content should not be more
than 2.0 ppm.
Residue on Ignition When thermogravimetric analysis is done with accurately weighted 1
g of Rosin, the amount of residue should not be more than 0.1%.

911
 Rutin
Definition Rutin is an extract (with water or ethyl alcohol) from flower or flower bud of
Japanese pagoda tree (Sophora japonica L.) of leguminosae, or root cortex of buck
wheat (Fagopyrum esculentum MOENCH.) of polygonaceae, or root cortex of red bean
of (Phaseolus angularis CW. WIGHT.). Its major component is rutin (C27H30O16 ＝
610.51) of flavonoids. Dilutant, stabilizer, or solvent can be added for the purpose of
color value adjustment and quality preservation.
Compositional Specifications of Rutin
Content Color value of Rutin should be more than the indicated value.
Description Rutin is yellow～pale yellowish green liquid or powder with a slight
characteristic scent.
Identification (1) Rutin is dissolve in 10 mL of ethyl alcohol. When 1～2 drops of ferric
chloride solution (1→50) are added, the solution becomes greenish brown.
(2) Rutin is dissolve in 5 mL of ethyl alcohol by heating. When 2 mL of hydrochloric
acid and 0.05 g of magnesium powder are added, the solution slowly becomes red.
(3) Add 500 mL of ethyl alcohol to Rutin. This solution has maximum absorption bands
near 255 nm and 375 nm.
(4) 5 mL of the solution in (3) is neutralized with sodium hydroxide solution, where 3
mL of Fehling solution is added. When the resulting solution is heated for 10 minutes
in a water bath, red precipitates are formed.
Purity (1) Arsenic : It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(2) Lead : When 5.0 g of Rutin is tested by Atomic Absorption Spectrophotometry or
Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content should not be more
than 2.0 ppm.
Assay (Color Value) Appropriate amount of Rutin is precisely weighted so that the
absorption is within 0.3～0.7 and dissolved in 10 mL of ethyl alcohol by heating. If
necessary, this solution is filtered through a glass filter, which is washed with hot
ethyl alcohol. The filtrate and the wash are mixed and diluted to 200 mL with ethyl
alcohol. To 10 mL of this solution, 1 mL of acetic acid solution in ethyl alcohol (1.2→
1,000) is added and the total volume is brought up to 100 mL with ethyl alcohol (Test
Solution). A reference solution is prepared by diluting 1 mL of acetic acid solution in
ethyl alcohol (1.2→1,000) to 100 mL with ethyl alcohol. Absorption A for Test
Solution is measured at 375 nm with 1cm path length. Color value is obtained by the
following equation.
A × 200
Color Value ＝
weight of the sample(g)

912
 Saffron Color
Definition Saffron Color is a pigment obtained by extracting dried stigma of flower of
saffron (Crocus sativus) of iridaceae with ethyl alcohol. Its major pigment component is
Crocin and Crocetin of carotenoids. Dilutant, stabilizer, or solvent can be added for
the purpose of color value adjustment and quality preservation.
Compositional Specifications of Saffron Color
Content Color value of Saffron Color should be more than the indicated value.
Description Saffron Color is yellow～venetian red liquid, solid, powder, or paste with a
slight characteristic scent.
Identification (1) 50 v/v% ethyl alcohol solution (1→500) of this additive shows yellow
color and a maximum absorption band near 430 nm.
(2) When 5 mL of sulfuric acid is added to 0.5 g of Saffron Color (if necessary,
evaporated to dryness in a water bath and then cooled), it becomes deep green
color, which changes to violet then to brown.
Purity (1) Arsenic : It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(2) Lead : When 5.0 g of Saffron Color is tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content
should not be more than 2.0 ppm.
(3) Nitrogen : When Saffron Color is tested by nitrogen determination method, the amount
should not be more than 2.0%.
(4) Water Insoluble substances : 3 g of Saffron Color is placed into an Erlenmeyer
flask, which is added with approximately 100 mL of water in advance. 10 mL of
dilute hydrochloric acid is added to the flask, which is then gently boiled for 15
minutes, and filtered through a glass filter (previously dried until the weight does not
change). The residue on the glass filter is fully washed with hot water. The residue
is dried for 2 hours at 105℃, cooled in a desiccator, and measure the content of
insoluble substance. The content of water insoluble substances should not be more
than 45%.
(5) Acid Insoluble Ash : When Saffron Color is tested for ash by acid insoluble ash
methods in Ash and Acid-Insoluble Ash Limit, it should not be more than 1.0%.
Loss on Drying When Saffron Color is dried for 4 hours at 105℃, the weight loss
should not be more than 14%.
Ash When Saffron Color is tested by total ash in Ash and Acid-Insoluble Ash Limit, the
amount of ash should not be more than 8.0%.
Assay (Color Value) Appropriate amount of Saffron Color is precisely weighted so that
the absorption is within 0.3～0.7 and dissolved in 50 v/v% ethyl alcohol (total volume
100 mL). 1 mL of this solution is diluted to 100 mL with 50 v/v% ethyl alcohol (Test
Solution). If necessary, the solution is centrifuged and the supernatant is used. Using
50 v/v% ethyl alcohol as a reference solution, absorption A is measured at the
maximum absorption near 430 nm with 1cm path length. Color value is obtained using
913
the following equation.
A × 1,000
Color Value ＝
weight of the sample(g)

914
 Sandalwood Red

INS No.: 166

CAS No.: 1397-70-2

Definition Sandalwood Red is a pigment obtained by extracting tree of sandalwood

(Pterocarpus santalinus .Linné) of salilcaceae with water. Its major pigment component
is Santalin of flavonoids. Dilutant, stabilizer, or solvent can be added for the purpose of
color value adjustment and quality preservation.
Compositional Specifications of Sandalwood Red
Content Color value of Sandalwood Red should be more than the indicated value.
Description Sandalwood Red is dark red～reddish violet liquid or powder with a slight
characteristic scent.
Identification (1) When 0.1 g of Sandalwood Red is mixed with 100 mL, it is turbid.
When the mixture is alkalinized with sodium hydroxide solution, it becomes clear
reddish violet solution.
(2) When 10 mL of ammonium chloride solution (1→50) is added to a solution of
Sandalwood Red (0.1 g dissolved in 100 mL of 80 v/v% ethyl alcohol), it becomes
turbid and venetian red color.
(3) When 1 mL of ferric sulfate solution (1→10) is added to a solution of Sandalwood
Red(0.1 g dissolved in 100 mL of 80 v/v% ethyl alcohol), it becomes brown with
bluish tint and precipitates are formed.
(4) A solution of Sandalwood Red in 80 v/v% ethyl alcohol (pH 6.0) shows maximum
absorption bands at 475 nm and 503 nm.
Purity (1) Arsenic : It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(2) Lead : When 5.0 g of Sandalwood Red is tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content
should not be more than 10.0 ppm.
Assay (Color Value) Appropriate amount of Sandalwood Red is precisely weighted so
that the absorption is within 0.3～0.7 and dissolved in 80 v/v% ethyl alcohol so that
the total volume is 100 mL (Test Solution). If necessary, the solution is centrifuged
and the supernatant is used. Using 80 v/v% ethyl alcohol as a reference solution,
absorption A is measured at the maximum absorption near 500 nm with 1cm path
length. Color value is obtained using the following equation.
Color Value ＝
A × 10
weight of the sample(g)

915
 Seed Malt
Definition There are crude seed malt and powdered seed malt. Crude seed malt is
obtained from a culture where starter of Aspergillus kawachii, Aspergillus oryzae,
Aspergillus usamii, Aspergillus shirousamii, Aspergillus awamori or Rhizopus genus are
separately or mixedly inoculated so that spores are inserted into a pasteurized raw
material containing food-grade starch. Powdered seed malt is obtained by collecting
pure spawn spores by a special method.
Compositional Specifications of Seed Malt
Description Seed Malt is yellow～blackish brown or yellow～green powder or granule
having a slight characteristic odor.
Purity (1) Arsenic : It should be no more than 2.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(2) Lead : When 5.0 g of Seed Malt is tested by Atomic Absorption Spectrophotometry
or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content should not be more
than 2.0 ppm.
(3) Number of Spores : 1∼2 g of Seed Malt is precisely weighed and mixed with 10
mL of 5% Tween 80 solution and 2～3 drops of 1% methylene blue solution, which
is analyzed 5 times with blood cell counter and microscope. An average value of 5
times measurements is A, and the number of spores is calculated from the following
equation. For crude seed malt, there should be 40×108, 20×108, 10×108, 10×108, and
10×108 or more starters per g for Aspergillus kawachii, Aspergillus oryzae,
Aspergillus usamii, Aspergillus shirousamii, and Aspergillus awamori, respectively (0
for Rhizopus genus). For powdered seed malt, there should be 200×108, 100×108,
50×108, 50×108, and 50×108 or more starters per g for Aspergillus kawachii,
Aspergillus oryzae, Aspergillus usamii, Aspergillus shirousamii, and Aspergillus
awamori, respectively (0 for Rhizopus genus).

Number of Spores = A × dilution factor

weight of the sample(g)
(4) Various Germs (Penicillium Genus) : 0.15∼0.2 g of Seed Malt is cultured in
pre-pasteurized liquid culture medium (55 mL of water, 0.025 g of mono potassium
phosphate, and 1 g of dextrin are added to a 300 mL Erlenmeyer flask, which is
plugged with cotton and pasteurized for 20 minutes under high pressure of 15 psi)
for 5 days in a 30℃ thermostat. When it is observed under microscope, test result
for various germs (Penicillium genus) should be negative. If various germs(Penicillium
genus) is observed (cultured for 5 hours as described above), it is positive. If not, it
is cultured for additional 24 hours. If penicillium is observed, it is positive. If not, it
is negative.
Loss on Drying When 5 g of Seed Malt is dried for 4 hours at 105℃, the weight loss
should not be more than 10% for crude seed malt and more than 8% for powdered
seed malt.
916
 Sepia Color
Definition Sepia Color is a pigment obtained from the contents of ink sac of cuttlefish
(Sepia officinalis Linnaeus). Its major component is Eumelanin. Dilutant, stabilizer, or
solvent can be added for the purpose of color value adjustment and quality
preservation.
Compositional Specifications of Sepia Color
Description Sepia Color is blackish brown～black powder or dispersion with a
characteristic scent.
Identification When 0.1 g of Sepia Color is added to 10 mL of mixture (1:1) of sulfuric
acid and nitric acid, it becomes yellowish brown.
Purity (1) Arsenic : It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(2) Lead : When 5.0 g of Sepia Color is tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content
should not be more than 10.0 ppm.

917
 L-Serine

Chemical Formula: C3H7NO3

Molecular Weight: 105.09 CAS No.: 56-45-1

Compositional Specifications of L-Serine

Content L-Serine, when calculated on the dried basis, should contain within a range of
98.5∼101.5% of L-serine (C3H7NO3).
Description L-Serine is scentless white crystalline powder with sweet taste.
Identification (1) After 1 mL of ninhydrine solution (0.2→100) is added to 5 mL of L-Serine
solution (1→1,000), heat it for 3 min. in the water bath, the solution becomes reddish
violet～violet.
(2) Approximately 0.5 g of L-Serine is dissolved in 10 mL of water, where 0.2 g of
periodic acid is added. Upon heating, an odor of formaldehyde is generated.
Purity (1) Specific Rotation : 10 g of pre-dried L-Serine is precisely weighed, which is
dissolved in 2 N hydrochloric acid so that the total volume becomes 100 mL. Optical
rotation of the solution should be within a range of ＝ +13.6∼+16.0°.
(2) Lead : When 5.0 g of L-Serine is tested by Atomic Absorption Spectrophotometry
or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content should not be more
than 5.0 ppm.
(3) Arsenic : It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(4) Chloride: When 0.07 g of L-Serine is tested by Chloride Limit Test, its content
should not be more than the amount that corresponds to 0.2 mL of 0.01 N
hydrochloric acid (Not be more than 0.1%).
Loss on Drying When L-Serine is dried at 105℃ for 3 hours, the weight loss should not
be more than 0.3%.
Residue on Ignition Residue after ignition should not be more than 0.1%.
Assay Approximately 0.2 g is precisely weighed and dissolved in 3 mL of formic acid
and 50 mL of glacial acetic acid. This solution is titrated with 0.1 N perchloric acid
solution (indicator : 2 drops of crystal violet buffered in glacial acetic acid). At the
end point, the solution turns to greenish blue. Separately, a blank test is done
following the same procedure.
1 mL of 0.1 N perchloric acid solution ＝ 10.51 mg C3H7NO3

918
 Sesame Seed Oil Unsaponified Matter
Definition Sesame Seed Oil Unsaponified Matter is obtained by extracting seeds (or
residues after extracting oil) of sesame (Sesamum indicum LINNE) of pedalidaceae with
alcohol. Its components are sesamin, sesamolin, and sesamol.
Compositional Specifications of Sesame Seed Oil Unsaponified Matter
Content Sesame Seed Oil Unsaponified Matter (as sesamin) should contain more than the
indicated content.
Description Sesame Seed Oil Unsaponified Matter is white～yellow crystallite or
crystalline powder.
Identification (1) When Sesame Seed Oil Unsaponified Matter is tested by Assay, a
sesamin peak at 285 nm is observed.
(2) A solution of 5 mg of Sesame Seed Oil Unsaponified Matter in 10 mL of methyl
alcohol has maximum absorption bands at 237 nm and 287 nm.
(3) 5 mg of Sesame Seed Oil Unsaponified Matter dissolve in 10 mL of methyl alcohol
(Test Solution). Separately, 1 mg of sesamin standard dissolve in 10 mL of methyl
alcohol (Standard Solution). 10 μl each of Test and Standard Solutions is spotted on a
silica 60F (60F254 Silica plate) for thin layer chromatography. It is developed using a
mixture of chloroform : ethylether (9 : 1) as a developing solvent and blow-dried.
When silica plates are observed under UV lamp, the distance from the starting line to
the center of the spot (Rf) of Test Solution should be same as Rf of Standard
Solution.
Purity (1) Arsenic ： It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(2) Lead : When 5.0 g of Sesame Seed Oil Unsaponified Matter is tested by Atomic
Absorption Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy,
its content should not be more than 2.0 ppm.
Loss on Drying ： When 1 g of Sesame Seed Oil Unsaponified Matter is dried for 3
hours at 105℃, the weight loss should not be more than 10.0%.
Assay Approximately 5 mg of Sesame Seed Oil Unsaponified Matter is precisely
weighted and dissolved in a small amount of chloroform, which is diluted to 10mL with
methyl alcohol. It is then filtered through a 0.45 μm Millipore filter (Test Solution).
Separately, approximately 5 mg of sesamin standard is precisely weighted and
dissolved in a small amount of chloroform, which is diluted to 10 mL with methyl
alcohol. It is then filtered through a 0.45 μm Millipore filter (Standard Solution). 10 μl
each of Standard and Test Solutions is injected into liquid chromatography under the
following Operation Conditions. The content of sesamin is obtained by the following
equation.
Content(%) Sa × weight of sesamin standard(mg) × 100
= St × Weight of the sample(mg)

Sa ： peak area of Test Solution

St ： peak area of Standard Solution
919
Operation Conditions
-Detector ： UV detector, 285 nm
-Column ： ODS Hypersil (4.6 × 200 mm, 5 μm) or its equivalent
-Column Temperature ： room temperature
-Mobile Phase ： methyl alcohol ： water (80：20)
-Flow Rate ： 0.7 mL/min

920
 Shea Nut Color
Definition Shea Nut Color is a pigment obtained by extracting (with water) fruits or
spermoderms of Butylospermum parkii KOTSCHY. Its major pigment component is
flavonoid. Dilutant, stabilizer, or solvent can be added for the purpose of color value
adjustment and quality preservation.
Compositional Specifications of Shea Nut Color
Content Color value of Shea Nut Color should be more than the indicated value.
Description Shea Nut Color is brown～dark brown liquid, paste, powder, or paste with a
slight characteristic scent.
Identification (1) Citrate buffer(pH 7.0) solution(1→100) of Shea Nut Color is brown
color.
(2) When the solution in (1) is acidified by hydrochloric acid, the pigment becomes
insoluble and yellowish brown precipitates are formed.
Purity (1) Arsenic : It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(2) Lead : When 5.0 g of Shea Nut Color is tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content
should not be more than 10.0 ppm.
Assay (Color Value) Appropriate amount of Shea Nut Color is precisely weighted so that
the absorption is within 0.3～0.7, and dissolved in 30 mL of anhydrous sodium
carbonate solution (1→200). Citric acid-dibasic sodium phosphate buffer solution with
pH 7.0 is added so that the total volume is 100 mL (Test Solution). 1 mL of this
solution is diluted to 100 mL with citric acid-dibasic sodium phosphate buffer solution
with pH 7.0. If necessary, the solution is centrifuged and the supernatant is used.
Using a mixture of 30 mL anhydrous sodium carbonate solution (1→200) and 100 mL
citric acid-dibasic sodium phosphate buffer solution with pH 7.0 as a reference
solution, absorption A is measured at 490 nm wavelength with 1cm path length. Color
value is obtained using the following equation.
Color Value ＝
A × 1,000
weight of the sample(g)

921
 Shellac
INS No.: 904
Synonyms: Shellac, Bleached CAS No.: 9000-59-3

Definition Shell is obtained from lac, the resinous secretion of the insect
Laccifer(Tachardia), Lacca Keer (Coccidae). White Shellac(White Shellac, Bleached
Shellac, or Regular Bleached Shellac) is obtained by dissolving the lac in sodium
carbonate solution, followed by bleaching with sodium hypochlorite, precipitation with
dilute sulfuric acid solution, and drying; wax-free bleached shellac(refined bleached
shellac, wax-free bleached shellac) is prepared by further treatment whereby is
removed by filtration.
Compositional Specifications of Shellac
Description Shellac is grayish white～ light yellow, granular or fine particule, and
odorless or having a slight characteristic odor.
Identification When a few drops of ammonium molybdate solution (1 g in 3 mL sulfuric
acid) are added to 50 mg of Shellac, green color is produced. When this solution is
neutralized with ammonia solution, it changed to lilac.
Purity (1) Arsenic : It should be no more than 2.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(2) Lead : When 5.0 g of Shellac is tested by Atomic Absorption Spectrophotometry or
Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content should not be more
than 2.0 ppm.
(3) Rosin : 2 g of Shellac is dissolved in 10 mL of dehydrated ethanol, where 50 mL
of hexane is slowly added with shaking. The solution is transferred into a separatory
funnel and washed two 50 mL portion of water. Take supernatant and filter it, and
evaporate to dryness remaining solution on waterbath. Add 5 mL of acetic anhydride
to residue, when it is necessary dissolve in water bath by heating. 20 mL of this
solution is taken into bottle for colorimetry. When it is added 1 drop of sulfuric acid,
it should not produce from reddish purple and purple to yellow ocher color.
(4) Wax : 10 g of Shellac is completely dissolved in 150 mL of hot water and 2.5 g of
sodium carbonate into a beaker. It is then heated for 3 hours and cooled with cold
water. If wax floats to the surface, it is filtered through a filter paper and washed
with water. Then the wax is washed with 5～10 mL to accelerate drying. Filter paper
is loosely folded and the top is bound with a piece of fine wire, which is then dried
gently with the aid of gentle heat. It is then extracted with chloroform using a fat
extracting soxhlet apparatus for 2 hours. After evaporating the solvent in the
collector, the extract is dried for 2 hours at 105℃ and weighed. The content of wax
should not be more than 5.5% for white shellac and not be more than 0.2% for
refined bleached shellac.
(5) Acid Value : Approximately 2 g of dried fine powder of Shellac is precisely
weighed and dissolved in 50 mL of alcohol (neutralized with sodium hydroxide
solution), test solution. When the sample is tested as directed under Acid Value in
922
 Oils Method, acid value should be 73～89 for while shellac and 75～91 for refined
bleached shellac.
Loss on Drying When 3 g of fine powder of Shellac is dried for 4 hours at 40℃ and
then 15 hours in a vacuum desiccator (silica gel), the weight loss should not be more
than 6% .

923
 Silicon Dioxide
Chemical Formula: SiO2

Molecular Weight: 60.08 INS No.: 551

Synonyms: Synthetic amorphous silica;
Silica CAS No.: 7631-86-9

Definition Silicon dioxide is noncrystalline amorphous material as observed by X-ray

difractometer. Fumed silica is prepared by vapor phase hydrolysis. sedimentation silica,
silica gel, colloidal silica or hydrolyzed silica are prepared by wet chemistry.
Compositional Specifications of Silicon Dioxide
Content Silicon dioxide, when calculated on dried at 105℃ for 2 hours and treated at
900∼1,000℃ for 1 hour, should contain not less than 99.0% silicon dioxide (SiO2 ＝
60.08) for colloidal silica and not less than 94.0% of silicon dioxide for precipitated
silica, silica gel, and hydrolyzed silica.
Description Silicon dioxide is white powder, particle, or colloidal liquid. It is odorless.
Identification (1) 5 mg of Silicon dioxide is transferred into a platinum crucible and 200
mg of anhydrous potassium carbonate added. The crucible is calcined with red flame
of a burner for 10 minutes. After cooling, the resulting material is dissolved in 2 mL
of freshly distilled water. If necessary, the solution is heated and 2 mL of ammonium
molybdate solution is slowly added. The resulting solution becomes dark yellow.
(2) 1 drop of the solution in Identification (1) is dropped on a filter paper. After liquid
is removed, 1 drop of o-tolidine saturated glacial acetic acid solution is dropped.
After the paper is exposed to ammonia gas, a greenish blue spot is formed.
Purity (1) Arsenic : It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(2) Lead : Transfer 10.0 g of Silicon dioxide, previously dried and accurately weighed,
into a beaker, and add 50mL of 0.5 N hydrochloric acid. Cover it with a watch glass,
boil for 15 minutes, and cool it down. Transfer it into 100~150 mL centrifuge tube
and centrifuge it for 10~15 minutes until the insoluble substances are settled. Filter
the supernatant through a filter paper(a Whatman No.4 filter paper or its equivalent)
and transfer the filtrate to a 100 mL flask. To the residue, add 10~15 mL of hot
water, mix, and centrifuge it. Filter the supernatant and add it to the filtrate. Repeat
this preparation twice and add the solution to filtrate, dilute to 100 mL with water,
test solution. When this test solution is tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content
should not be more than 5.0 ppm.
(3) Mercury : Silicon dioxide, previously dried, is tested by Mercury Limit Test, its
content should not be more than 1.0 ppm.
(4) Soluble Ionized Salts : After drying for 2 hours at 105℃, 5 g of Silicon dioxide is
precisely weighed and 150 mL of water is added. This is mixed for 5 minutes using
a homogenizer. The resulting mixture is vacuum filtered. The filtering apparatus and
the residue are rinsed with 100 mL water and the rinse water is added to the
924
 filtrate, where water is added to make 250 mL. Use this solution as the test solution.
The resulting test solution is tested for conductivity using an appropriate equipment.
The conductivity of the test solution should not be higher than that of a solution of
250 mg anhydrous sodium nitrite in 250 mL water.
Loss on Drying When Silicon dioxide is dried for 2 hours at 105℃, the weight loss
should be no more than 2.5% for Fumed silica, no more than 7% for sedimentation
silica and silica gel, no more than 70% for hydrolyzed silica, and no more than 85%
for colloidal silica.
Loss on Ignition When 1 g of Silicon dioxide, previously dried at 105℃ for 2 hours and
accurately weighed, heat-treated at 900～1,000℃ for 1 hour, the residues should not
be more than 2% for colloidal silica, 8.5% for precipitated silica, silica gel and
hydrolyzed silica.
Assay Approximately 1 g of Silicon dioxide is transferred into a previously weighed
platinum crucible, which is then dried for 2 hours at 105℃. It is further heat-treated
for 1 hour at 900∼1,000℃. After cooling in a desiccator, the weight of the sample is
weighed (W1). The resulting residue is wetted with 3～4 drops of alcohol and 2 drops
of sulfuric acid are added. Hydrofluoric acid is added so that the residue is immersed.
It is then evaporated at 95∼105℃ on a hot plate. With 5 mL of hydrofluoric acid, the
crucible wall is washed and it is evaporated again. The crucible is then heated with a
burner until the residue turns red. After cooling in a desiccator, the weight of the final
residue is weighed (W2). The content of silcon dioxide is calculated from the following
equation.
Content of Silicon Dioxide(%) = W W- W × 100
1

1
2

925
 Silicone Resin
INS No.: 900a
Synonyms: Dimethylpolysiloxane; Silicone
CAS No.: 9006-65-9
fluid; Silicone oil; Dimethyl silicone

Compositional Specifications of Silicone Resin

Description Silicone Resin is a colorless～light grey, transparent or translucent, viscous
liquid or pasty substances with almost no odor.
Identification Transfer 100 mg of Silicone Resin into platinum crucible, and add a few
drops of sulfuric acid and nitric acid and heat, it burns with white smoke. A cold glass
plate is placed over the white smoke to collect particles. Collected powder is
transferred into a platinum crucible, where 3 g of sodium hydroxide is added. It is
melted by heating. After cooling, the residues is dissolved in 50 mL of water, which is
then filtered. On a filter paper, 1 drop of the resulting solution, 1 drop of ammonium
molybdate solution, and 1 drop of benzidine solution are dropped. When the paper is
exposed to ammonia vapor, a blue color appears.
Purity (1) Specific Gravity : Specific gravity of Silicone Resin should be within a range
of 0.96～1.02.
(2) Refractive Index : Weigh accurately 20 g of Silicone Resin, and add 100 mL of
hexane. Vibrate back and forth at a rate of 200 a minute for 3hours and centrifuge it
at 10,000rpm for 30 minutes. Take the supernatant into a centrifuge tube, add 50 mL
of hexane, disperse well to precipitate and centrifuge. Combine the supernatant and
evaporate the hexane by warming on a water bath at 50∼60 ℃ under reduced
pressure. Dry it for 1 hour at 105℃ and use it as a test solution. Measure the
refractive index and the refractive index of extracted silicone oil should be within a
range of 1.400～1.410.
(3) Viscosity : When the test solution obtained from (2) refractive index is measured
by Method 1 Capillary Viscosity Measurement in Viscosity, the viscosity should be
100∼1,100 mm2/s.
(4) Silicon Dioxide : When the extraction residue above (2) is dried for 1 hour at
approximately 100℃, the content should not be more than 2.25 g (not more than 15
%).
(5) Arsenic : It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(6) Lead : When 5.0 g of Silicone Resin is tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content
should not be more than 5.0 ppm.
(7) Mercury : When Silicone Resin is tested by Mercury Limit Test, its content should
not be more than 1.0 ppm.
Loss on Drying When Silicone Resin is dried for 4 hours at 150℃, the weight loss
should not be more than 0.5%.

926
 Smoke Flavours
Synonyms: Wood smoke flavours; Pyroligneous acid;
Smoke condensates

Definition Smoke Flavors is a mixture obtained by thermally decomposing hard segments

of unprocessed trees under the condition where the amount of air is limited or
controlled, by distilling them in dry condition at 200～800℃, or by treating them with
strong heating vapor at 300～500℃. The main compositions are carboxylic acid,
compounds having the carboxyl functional, and phenol compounds. However, for quality
conservation, water, plant oil, propylene glycol, and emulsifier can be added.
Compositional Specifications of Smoke Flavors
Description Smoke Flavors is black viscous semi solid～pale brown liquid with
smoke-like pungent taste.
Purity (1) Acid value : 1 mL of Smoke Flavors is precisely weighted into a 250 mL
beaker, where 100 mL of water is added. Stirred and filtered this solution . 0.1 N
sodium hydroxide solution is added to the filtrate until the pH reaches 8.15 and the
consumed amount is recorded. Acid value of smoke flavours is obtained by the
following equation and it should be 2～20%.
Acid value(%) a × f × 6.005
×
100
＝ Weight of the sample(g) 1,000

a : consumed amount of 0.1 N sodium hydroxide solution (mL)

F : coefficient of 0.1 N sodium hydroxide solution
6.005 : Weight of acetic acid (mg) corresponding to 1 mL of 0.1 N sodium hydroxide
solution
(2) Benzo(a)pyrene
Test Solution : Depending on the description of the sample, it is treated by the
procedure in ① or ②.
① Liquid sample : 200 g of well mixed smoke Flavors is precisely weighted and
transferred into a 1,000 mL separatory funnel with a stopcock using 100 mL of
iso-octane, where 450 mL of 5.6% potassium hydroxide solution is added. It is well
mixed and settled to separate phases. Iso-octane phase is collected. The aqueous
layer is extracted twice with 100 mL each of iso-octane, which is added to the
previous iso-octane phase. Again, the extracts are washed twice with 50 mL each of
5.6% potassium hydroxide solution, twice with 50 mL each of water, three times with
50 mL each of phosphoric acid, and three times with 100 mL each of water.
② Viscous liquid with solid precipitates or semi-solid : Approximately 25 g of well
mixed smoke Flavors is precisely weighted into a 150 mL beaker. It dissolve by
adding small amount of 20% potassium hydroxide solution. The resulting solution
927
 transfer into a 2,000 mL separatory funnel with a stopcock using 250 mL of 20%
potassium hydroxide solution .The beaker is washed 4 times with 50 mL each of
ethyl alcohol, which is added to the separatory funnel. 400 mL of ethyl alcohol is
added to the funnel and mixed well. 250mL of iso-octane is added to the funnel and
mixed. It is then set aside to separate the phases. The upper iso-octane phase is
collected and the lower aqueous phase transfer into another separatory funnel with a
stopcock. It is then extracted twice with 200 mL each of iso-octane, which is added
to the previous iso-octane phase. The extracts are washed three times with 200 mL
each of 5.6% potassium hydroxide solution, three times with 200 mL each of water,
three times with 200 mL each of phosphoric acid, and three times with 200 mL each
of water.
Test Procedure : Iso-octane solution in (① or ②) is passed through a column (230 ×
38 mm ID, filled with 60 g of Florisil at the bottom and 50 g anhydrous sodium
sulfate on top) that is pre-wetted with iso-octane. The separatory funnel is washed
twice with 50 mL each of hexane, which is also passed through the column. The
eluted solutions are collected. Additional 75 mL of hexane is eluted through the
column and added to the previous solution. It is concentrated to approximately 5 mL
to remove solvent by heating in a water bath under nitrogen atmosphere. The
concentrate transfer to a 50 mL flask with a glass stopcock using hexane. It is then
carefully concentrated to 0.2～0.3 mL in a water bath under nitrogen atmosphere.
The residue transfer into a 125 mL beaker and washed 4 times with 5～10 mL each
of hot methyl alcohol. It is then vacuum filtered into a 50 mL flask. The filtrate is
concentrated to 3～5 mL at 40℃ using a rotary evaporator. The concentrate transfer
into a 15 mL test tube and washed 3 times with 1 mL of iso-octane. It is then
evaporated to dryness under nitrogen atmosphere. The residue dissolve in a mixture
of acetonitrile: methyl alcohol: water (2 : 2 : 1), where the total volume is 0.25 mL
(Test Solution). Separately, a Standard Solution is prepared so that 1 mL of the
solution contains 0.5∼4.0 ㎍ of benzo-pyrene. 20 μl each of Test and Standard
Solutions are injected into a liquid chromatography under the following operation
conditions and the content of benzo-pyrene is obtained by the following equation.
The content should not be more than 0.002ppm.
Amount of Au × dilution rate
benzo-pyrene(ppm)
concentrate of the
standard solution ×
＝ (μg/mL) As × Wu

Au : peak area of Test Solution

As : peak area of Standard Solution
Wu : Weight of sample(g)
Operation Conditions
-Detector : UV 289 nm
-Column : ODS (250 × 4.6 mm) or its equivalent
928
-Mobile Phase : Liquid A : water
Liquid B : methyl alcohol : acetonitrile (50 : 50)
-Concentration Gradient : After a linear concentration gradient between Solution A :
Solution B (20 : 80 → 0 : 100) is carried out in 20
minutes, the column is maintained for 20 minutes with 100%
of Solution B. After analysis, for the purpose of column
stability, a concentration change of Solution A : Solution B
(0 : 100 → 20 : 80) is applied in 5 minutes to the column
and then the column is maintained for 20 minutes with 80%
Solution B.
-Flow Rate : 1.0 mL/min
(3) Diethyl ether : Exactly 10 g of Smoke Flavors is extracted with 1 mL of toluene in
a separatory funnel with a stopcock. Mixed by shaking and then settled. Toluene
phase is collected and dehydrated by adding a small amount of anhydrous sodium
sulfate (Test Solution). A solution of diethyl ether in toluene with a concentration of
250 μg/mL is prepared (Standard Solution). Same amount each of both solutions is
injected into gas chromatography. The content of diethyl ether is obtained by the
following equation and it should not be more than 20ppm.

Amount of diethyl
ether(ppm) ＝
concentrate of the
standard solution ×
Au × dilution rate

(μg/mL) As × Wu
Au : peak area of Test Solution
As : peak area of Standard Solution
Wu : Weight of sample(g)
Operation Conditions
-Column : HP-FFAP (50 m × 320 μm × 0.5 μm) or its equivalent
-Detector : Flame Ionization Detector (FID)
-Temperature at injection hole : 150℃
-Column Temperature : 40℃
-Detector Temperature: 230℃
(4) Methyl Alcohol : 50 g of Smoke Flavors is tested by the Test Solution B of Purity
(5) for 80. Paprika Extract Pigments in Food Additive Codes. The content of methyl
alcohol should not be more than 50ppm.
(5) Phenol : Exactly 5 mL of 0.2% aqueous solution of Smoke Flavors is placed in a
test tube. For a blank test, 5 mL of water is placed in another test tube. To each
test tube, 1 mL of 0.05% copper sulfate (CuSO4․5H2O) solution, 5 mL of sodium borate
buffer solution(pH 9.8), and 4 drops of 2,6-Dibromo-N-chloro-ρ-benzoquinoneimine
solution are added. With a cap in place, each tube is vigorously shaken and set aside for
929
 exactly 10 minutes in a dark place for colorization. 10 mL each of n-butyl alcohol is
added to each tube, which is then turned upside down 6～8 times without shaking. It is
then centrifuged for 5 minutes at 700 rpm. Absorption of the supernatant is measured at
610 nm using the blank test solution as a reference. The content of phenol (as
2,6-dimethoxyphenol) is obtained from a standard curve and it should not be more than
16%.
Standard Curve
20 mg of 2,6-Dimethoxyphenol standard is precisely weighted and dissolved in water
(total volume = 1,000 mL). Using this solution, a series of standard solutions are
prepared so that each contain 1∼20 μg/mL of the phenol. By following the same
procedure as the Test Solution, absorptions at each concentration is measured at 610
nm and a standard curve is prepared.
Solutions
∘Sodium Borate Buffer Solution : 24.8 g of sodium borate (Na2B4O7․10H2O) dissolve in
900 mL of water, where pH is adjusted to 9.8 with
sodium hydroxide solution. The total volume is
brought up to 1,000 mL with water.
∘2,6-Dibromo-N-chloro-ρ-benzoquinoneimine Solution : 40 mg of 2,6-Dibromo-
N-chloro-ρ-benzoquinoneimine dissolve in 10 mL of methanol.
This solution is prepared just before use.
(6) Carbonyls : 1 mL of Smoke Flavors is diluted to 50 mL of carbonyl-removed
alcohol. 5 mL of this solution is further diluted to 100 mL with a mixture of
carbonyl-removed ethyl alcohol and toluene (1 : 9) (Test Solution). 1 mL each of
Test Solution and toluene (for blank test) is placed in a flask, respectively, where 1
mL of toluene, 2 mL of saturated 2,4-DNPH solution, and 2 mL of TCA solution are
added. Each test tube is covered with a glass stopper, heated for 30 minutes at 6
0℃, and cooled in an ice bath. 5 mL of potassium hydroxide solution and 25 mL of
carbonyl-removed alcohol are added to each test tube, which is then colorized for
exactly 10 minutes. Absorption is measured at 430 nm using the blank test solution
as a reference. The content of carbonyl (as heptanal) is obtained from a standard
curve and it should be 2∼25 %.
Standard Curve
Benzene is added to precisely weighted 30 mg of heptanal standard so that the total
volume is 1,000 mL. Using this solution, a series of standard solutions are prepared
so that the concentrations lie within a range of 1∼30 μg/mL (Standard Solutions). By
following the same procedure as the Test Solution, absorptions at each concentration
is measured at 430 nm and a standard curve is prepared.
Solutions
∘Saturated 2,4-DNPH Solution : 0.05% 2,4-Dinitrophenylhydrazine solution in toluene is
prepared. After shaking for 1 hour, it is set aside for
over night. It is filtered prior to use. It should be used
930
 within 1 week.
∘TCA Solution : 4% (w/v) solution of trichloroacetic acid in toluene is prepared.
∘Potassium Hydroxide Solution : 4% (w/v) solution of potassium hydroxide solution in
carbonyl-removed alcohol is prepared. This solution is
freshly prepared before use.
(7) Solid Content : 0.5 g (0.5 mL for liquid) of Smoke Flavors is precisely weighted
and dried for 16 hours at 105℃. The total solid content should not be more than
18%.
(8) Lead : When 5.0 g of Smoke Flavors is tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content
should not be more than 2.0 ppm.

931
 Sodium Acetate

Chemical Formula: C2H3NaO2‧nH2O(n ＝ 3 or 0) INS No.: 262(i)

CAS No.:
Molecular Weight: 3hydrates 136.08 6131-60-4(3hydrates)
anhydrous 82.03
127-09-3(anhydrous)

Definition Sodium Acetate occurs as crystals (trihydrate) called Sodium Acetate (crystal)
and Anhydrous called Sodium Acetate (Anhydrous).
Compositional Specifications of Sodium Acetate
Content Sodium Acetate, when calculated on the dried basis, should contain not less
than 98.5% of sodium acetate (C2H3NaO2 = 82.03).
Description Sodium Acetate (crystal) occurs as colorless, transparent crystals or as a
white crystalline powder. Sodium Acetate (Anhydrous) occurs as white crystalline
powder or lumps. They are odorless.
Identification (1) Heat the Sodium Acetate gradually. It fuses, then decomposes. and an
odor of acetone is evolved. The aqueous solution of the residue is alkaline.
(2) Sodium Acetate responds to the tests for Sodium Salt and Acetate in Identification.
Purity (1) Clarity and Color of Solution : When 1 g of Sodium Acetate is dissolved in 20
mL of water, the solution should be colorless and clear.
(2) Free Acid and Free Alkali : Weigh 2 g of Sodium Acetate (crystal) or 1.2 g of
Sodium Acetate (Anhydrous). and dissolve in 20 mL of freshly boiled and cooled
water. Add 2 drops of phenolphthalein solution, keep the solution at 10℃, and
perform the following test
① If the solution is colorless, add 0.1 mL of 0.1 N sodium hydroxide. A red color
develops.
② If the solution is red, add 0.1 mL of 0.1 N hydrochloric acid. The color
disappears.
(3) Arsenic : It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(4) Lead : When 5.0 g of Sodium Acetate is tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content
should not be more than 2.0 ppm.
(5) Mercury : When Sodium Acetate is tested by Mercury Limit Test, its content should
not be more than 1.0 ppm.
Loss on Drying When Sodium Acetate is dried for 4 hours at 120℃, the weigh loss
should be within a range of 36～42% and 2% or lower for crystalline form and
anhydrous form, respectively.
Assay Accurately weigh about 0.2 g of Sodium Acetate, previously dried, dissolve in 40
mL of acetic acid, and titrate with 0.1 N perchloric acid. The end point is usually
confirmed by using a potentiometer. When an indicator (indicator : 1 mL of crystal
violet acetic acid solution) is used, titrate until the color of the solution changes from
932
purple through blue to green. Perform a blank test in the same manner, and make any
necessary correction.
1 mL of 0.1 N perchloric acid = 8.203 mg of C2H3NaO2

933
 Sodium Alginate

INS No.: 401

Synonyms: Sodium salt of alginate CAS No.: 9005-38-3

Compositional Specifications of Sodium Alginate

Content Sodium Alginate, when calculated on the dried basis, should contain not less
than 90.0% of sodium alginate.
Description Sodium Alginate occurs as a white to yellowish-white powder. It is almost
odorless.
Identification (1) To 0.5 g of Sodium Alginate, add 50 mL of water in small portions
while stirring, warm at 60～70℃ for 20 minutes while stirring occasionally to make
the solution homogeneous, and cool. Use this solution as the test solution.
(ⅰ) To 5 mL of the test solution, add 1 mL of calcium chloride solution. A gelatinous
precipitate is formed immediately.
(ⅱ) To 10 mL of the test solution, add 1 mL of diluted sulfuric acid (1→20). A
gelatinous precipitate is formed immediately.
(ⅲ) To 1 mL of the test solution, add 1 mL of ammonium sulfate saturated solution.
No precipitate is formed.
(2) The residue on ignition of Sodium Alginate responds to the test for Sodium Salt in
Identification.
Purity (1) pH : Weigh 0.5 g of Sodium Alginate, add in small portions to 50 mL of
water while stirring, warm at 60～70℃ for 20 minutes while stirring occasionally to
make the solution homogeneous, cool and measure under glass electrode method. pH
of the solution should be within a range of 6.0∼8.0.
(2) Sulfate : To 0.1 g of Sodium Alginate, add 20 mL of water to make it pasty, add 1
mL of hydrochloric acid, shake well, heat in a water bath for several minutes, cool,
and filter. Wash a beaker three times with 10 mL of water each time, filter the
washings through the filter paper used above, combine the filtrates, and add water to
make 50 mL. Measure 10 mL of this solution, and add water to make 50 mL, Test
Solution. The test solution is tested by Sulfate Limit Test. To prepare Reference
solution, to 0.4 mL of 0.01 N sulfuric acid, add 1 mL of hydrochloric acid (1→4) and
water to make 50 mL.
(3) Arsenic : It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(4) Lead : When 5.0 g of Sodium Alginate is tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content
should not be more than 5.0 ppm.
(5) Cadmium : When 5.0 g of Sodium Alginate is tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content
should not be more than 1.0 ppm.
(6) Mercury : When Sodium Alginate is tested by Mercury Limit Test, its content
934
 should not be more than 1.0 ppm.
(7) Phosphate : To 0.1 g of Sodium Alginate, add in small portions to 20 mL of water
while stirring, and warm at 60～70℃ for 20 minutes while stirring occasionally to
make the solution homogeneous. Cool, add 5 mL of diluted nitric acid (1→4) and 20
mL of ammonium molybdate solution, and warm. No yellow precipitates are formed.
(8) Total Viable Aerobic Count : When Sodium Alginate is tested by Microbe Test
Methods for Total Viable Aerobic Count (Number of General Germs) in General Test
Method in 「Standards and Specifications for Foods」, it should not be more than
5,000 per 1 g
(9) E. coli : When sodium alginate is tested by Microbe Test Methods for E. coli in
General Test Method 「Standards and Specifications for Foods」, it should be
negative (-).
(10) Salmonella : When Sodium Alginate is tested by Microbe Test Methods for
Salmonella in General Test Method 「Standards and Specifications for Foods」, it
should be negative (-).
(11) Fungi : When Sodium Alginate is tested by Microbe Test Methods for Fungi in
General Test Method in 「Standards and Specifications for Foods」, it should not be
more than 500 per 1 g
Loss on Drying When Sodium Alginate is dried for 4 hours at 105℃, the weight loss
should not be more than 15%.
Residue on Ignition Sodium Alginate is dried for 4 hours at 105℃. When
thermogravimetric analysis is done with approximately 1 g of Sodium Alginate, the
residues should be within a range of 33～37%.
Assay Glass filter (1G4) is dried for 30 minutes at 80℃ under vacuum, cooled in a
desiccator, and weighed accurately. Approximately 0.5 g of Sodium Alginate, previously
dried and accurately weighed, is dissolved in 10 mL of sodium hydroxide solution (1→
25), 90 mL of water is added. It is filtered, if necessary. To this solution, 15 mL of
hydrochloric acid (1→3) and 100 mL of 90% alcohol are added, which is well shaken
and set-aside for 2 hours. It is centrifuged and the supernatant is discarded. 10 mL of
90% alcohol is added to the residues, which is well shaken and centrifuged. The
supernatant is discarded. This is repeated until the supernatant does not show a
reaction of chlorides. The resulting residues are filtered through the glass filter using
90% alcohol. The residue is washed with acetone, which is dried for 1 hour at 80℃
under vacuum. It is set-aside in a desiccator and accurately weighed. The content is
calculated by the following equation.
Content of Sodium
＝
Alginate(%) 1.125 × weight of residue(g) × 100
weight of the sample(g)

935
 Sodium Aluminium Phosphate, Acidic
SALP
Chemical Formula: NaAl3H14(PO4)8․4H2O
N a 3 A l 2 H 1 5 ( P O 4 ) 8
Molecular Weight: 948.88 INS No.: 541(i)
897.82
Synonyms: SALP CAS No.: 7785-88-8

Compositional Specifications of Sodium Aluminum Phosphate, Acidic

Content Sodium Aluminum Phosphate, Acidic should be contain not less than 95.0% of
sodium aluminum phosphate, acidic〔NaAl3H14(PO4)8 · nH2O or Na3Al2H15(PO4)8〕.
Description Sodium Aluminum Phosphate, Acidic is scentless white powder.
Identification (1) Sodium Aluminum Phosphate, Acidic is insoluble in water but soluble in
hydrochloric acid.
(2) Sodium Aluminum Phosphate solution, Acidic (1→10) is acidic as determined with a
litmus paper.
(3) A solution of 1 g of Sodium Aluminum Phosphate, Acidic in 10 mL of diluted
hydrochloric acid (1→2) responds to test ofs of aluminum, sodium, and Phosphate in
Identification.
Purity (1) Fluoride : 1 g of Sodium Aluminum Phosphate, Acidic is precisely weighed
and is tested by purity (8) for 「Calcium Citrate」, its content should not be more
than 30 ppm.
(2) Arsenic : It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(3) Lead : Sodium Aluminum Phosphate, Acidic is precisely weighed and is tested by
purity (2) for 「Sodium Metaphosphate」, its content should not be more than 4.0 ppm.
(4) Cadmium : Sodium Aluminum Phosphate, Acidic is precisely weighed and is tested
by purity (3) for 「Sodium Metaphosphate」, its content should not be more than 1.0
ppm.
(5) Mercury : When Sodium Aluminum Phosphate, Acidic is tested by Mercury Limit
Test, its content should not be more than 1.0 ppm.
Loss on Ignition When Sodium Aluminum Phosphate, Acidic is heat treated at 700∼800℃
for 2 hours, the weight loss should be within a range of 19.5∼21.0% for
NaAl3H14(PO4)8·4H2O and 15.0∼16.0% for Na3Al2H15(PO4)8.
Assay Approximately 2.5 g of Sodium Aluminum Phosphate, Acidic is precisely weighed
and dissolved in 15 mL of hydrochloric acid, which is boiled for 5 minutes in a water
bath. After cooling, the total volume of the solution is brought up to 250 mL with
water. After adding phenolphthalein solution to 10 mL of the resulting solution, it is
neutralized with ammonia solution. Diluted hydrochloric acid (1→2) is added until the
precipitates dissolve. The total volume is brought up to 100 mL with water, which is
heated to 70～80℃. 10 mL of 8-hydroxyquinoline solution and sufficient ammonium
acetate solution are added until yellow precipitates are formed, where additional 30
mL of ammonium acetate solution is added. The precipitates are again boiled for 30
936
minutes at 70℃ in a water bath. It is then filtered through a glass filter that is
previously weighed. The precipitates on the filter are washed hot water, then dried for
2 hours at 105℃, and weighed. 1 mg of precipitates corresponds to NaAl3H14(PO4)8 ·
4H2O 0.689 mg and Na3Al2H15(PO4)8 0.977 mg.
∘8-hydroxyquinoline solution : 5 g of 8-hydroxyquinoline is dissolved in ethyl
alcohol (total volume 100 mL)

937
 Sodium Aluminum Phosphate, Basic
Kasal

INS No.: 541(ii)

Synonyms: Kasal CAS No.: 7785-88-8

Compositional Specifications of Basic Sodium Aluminum Phosphate

Content When Basic Sodium Aluminum Phosphate is converted into a heat treated form, it
should contain within a range of 9.5～12.5% aluminum oxide (Al2O3).
Description Basic Sodium Aluminum Phosphate is scentless white powder.
Identification (1) Basic Sodium Aluminum Phosphate dissolves in hydrochloric acid.
(2) A solution of 1 g of Basic Sodium Aluminum Phosphate in 10 mL diluted
hydrochloric acid (1→2) responds to test ofs of aluminum salt and phosphate in
Identification.
Purity (1) Fluoride : 1 g of Basic Sodium Aluminum Phosphate is precisely weighed and
is tested by purity (8) for 「Calcium Citrate」, its content should not be more than
30 ppm.
(2) Arsenic : It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(3) Lead : Basic Sodium Aluminum Phosphate is precisely weighed and is tested by
purity (2) for 「Sodium Metaphosphate」, its content should not be more than 4.0 ppm.
Loss on Ignition When thermogravimetric analysis is done at 700∼800℃ for 2 hours,
weight loss should not be more than 9.0%.
Assay Approximately 2.5 g of Basic Sodium Aluminum Phosphate is precisely weighed
and dissolved in 15 mL of hydrochloric acid, which is boiled for 5 minutes in a water bath.
After cooling, the total volume of the solution is brought up to 250 mL with water. After
adding phenolphthalein solution to 10 mL of the resulting solution, it is neutralized
with ammonia solution. Diluted hydrochloric acid (1→2) is added until the precipitates
dissolve. The total volume is brought up to 100 mL with water, which is heated to 70～80℃.
10 mL of 8-hydroxyquinoline solution and sufficient ammonium acetate solution are
added until yellow precipitates are formed, where additional 30 mL of ammonium
acetate solution is added. The precipitates are again boiled for 30 minutes at 70℃ in a
water bath. It is then filtered through a glass filter that is previously weighed. The
precipitates on the filter are washed hot water, then dried for 2 hours at 105℃, and
weighed. 1 mg of precipitates corresponds to aluminum oxide (Al2O3) 0.111 mg.
∘8-hydroxyquinoline solution : 5 g of 8-hydroxyquinoline is dissolved in ethyl alcohol
to make 100 mL.

938
 Sodium L-Ascorbate

Chemical Formula: C 6 H 7 NaO 6

Molecular Weight: 198.11 INS No.: 301

Synonyms: L-Ascorbic acid monosodium
salt CAS No.: 134-03-2

Compositional Specifications of Sodium L-Ascorbate

Content Sodium L-Ascorbate when calculated on the dried basis, should contain not less
than 99.0% of Sodium L-Ascorbate (C6H 7NaO6).
Description Sodium L-Ascorbate occurs as white to yellowish white crystalline powder,
granules or fine granules. It is odorless and has a slightly salty taste.
Identification (1) 0.1 g of Sodium L-Ascorbate is dissolved in 100 mL of metaphosphoric
acid solution (1→50) 100 mL. To 5 mL of this solution, iodine solution is drop-wise
added until the solution turns pale yellow. 1 drop of cupric sulfate solution (1→
1,000) and 1 drop of pyrol are added to the resulting solution, which is heated for 5
minutes 50∼60℃. The solution becomes blue∼bluish green.
(2) When 1∼2 drops of sodium 2,6-dichloroindohenol solution (0.1→100) are added to
10 mL of aqueous solution of Sodium L-Ascorbate (1→100), blue color of the
solution disappears.
(3) Sodium L-Ascorbate responds to the test for Sodium Salt in Identification.
Purity (1) Specific Rotation : Approximately 1 g of Sodium L-Ascorbate is accurately
weighed, which is dissolved in freshly boiled and cooled water so that the total
volume becomes 10 mL. Optical rotation of the solution is measured. When it is translated
to dried material, it should be ＝ +103.0∼+108.0°.
(2) pH : When Sodium L-Ascorbate is proceeded as directed under glass electrode
method, pH of an aqueous solution (1→50) should be within a range of 6.5∼8.0.
(3) Arsenic : It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(4) Lead : When 5.0 g of Sodium L-Ascorbate is tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content
should not be more than 2.0 ppm.
(5) Mercury : When Sodium L-Ascorbate is tested by Mercury Limit Test, its content
should not be more than 1.0 ppm.
Loss on Drying When Sodium L-Ascorbate is dried for 24 hours in a vacuum desiccator,
939
the weight loss should not be more than 0.25%.
Assay Accurately weigh about 0.2 g of Sodium L-Ascorbate. accurately dried, dissolve
in 50 mL of metaphosphoric acid solution (1→50). and titrate with 0.1 N iodine (indicator:
starch solution).
0.1 N iodine 1 mL = 9.906 mg of C6H7NaO6

940
 Sodium Benzoate

Chemical Formula: C7H5NaO2

Molecular Weight: 144.11 INS No.: 211

Synonyms: Sodium salt of
CAS No.: 532-32-1
benzenecarboxylic acid

Compositional Specifications of Sodium Benzoate

Content Sodium Benzoate, when calculated on the dried basis, should contain not less
than 99.0% of sodium benzoate (C7H5NaO2).
Description Sodium Benzoate occurs as white crystalline powder or granules. It is odorless.
Identification Sodium Benzoate responds to Sodium Salt and Benzoate in Identification.
Purity (1) Clarity and Color of Solution : When 1 g of Sodium Benzoate is dissolved in
5 mL of water, the solution should be colorless and clear.
(2) Free Acid and Free Alkali : Weigh 2 g of Sodium Benzoate, dissolve it in 20 mL of
boiling water, and add 2 drops of phenolphthalein solution and 0.2 mL of 0.1 N
sulfuric acid. The solution is colorless. To this solution, add 0.4 mL of 0.1 N sodium
hydroxide. The color of the solution should become red.
(3) Chlorinated Compounds : Weigh 0.5 g of Sodium Benzoate and 0.8 g of calcium
carbonate which is transferred into a porcelain crucible, add 2.5 mL of diluted nitric
acid, and mix thoroughly. Dry at l00℃, follow the procedure in Purity (2) for
「Benzoic Acid」. To prepare a reference solution, use 0.8 g of calcium carbonate
and 22.5 mL of diluted nitric acid.
(4) Sulfate : Weigh 0.2 g of Sodium Benzoate, dissolve in water to make 100 mL,
measure 40 mL of this solution, and add drop wise 2.5 mL of diluted hydrochloric
acid while shaking well. Filter, wash with water, and combine the filtrate and the
washings, Test Solution. When the test solution is tested by Sulfate Limit Test, the
content should not be more than the amount corresponding to 0.5 mL of 0.01 N
sulfuric acid.
(5) Phthalate : Proceed as directed under Purity (3) in 「Benzoic Acid」
(6) Arsenic : It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(7) Lead : When 5.0 g of Sodium Benzoate is tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content
should not be more than 2.0 ppm.
(8) Mercury : When Sodium Benzoate is tested by Mercury Limit Test, its content
should not be more than 1.0 ppm.
(9) Readily Carbonizable Substances : When 0.5 g of Sodium Benzoate is tested for
Readily Carbonizable Substances, its color should not be darker than the Color
941
 Standard Solution Q.
(10) Readily Oxidizable Substances : Add 1.5mL of sulfuric acid to 100 mL of water,
heat to boiling and add 0.1N potassium permanganate, dropwise, until the pink colour
persists for 30 seconds. Dissolve 1 g of Sodium Benzoate, in the heated solution, and
titrate with 0.1N potassium permanganate to a pink color that persists for 15 seconds
at 70 ℃. The content should not be more than 0.5 mL.
Loss on Drying When Sodium Benzoate is dried for 4 hours at 110℃, the weight loss
should not be more than 1%.
Assay About 1.5 g of Sodium Benzoate, previously dried and accurately weighed, is
transferred into a 300 mL flask with a ground-glass stopper, dissolve in 25 mL of water
adding 75 mL of ether and 5 drops of methyl orange reagent, and titrate with 0.5 N
hydrochloric acid. Perform the titration while mixing the water and ether layers well by
shaking. At the end point, a light green color persists in the water layer.
1 mL of 0.5 N hydrochloric acid = 72.06 mg of C7H5NaO2

942
 Sodium Bicarbonate
Sodium Hydrogen Carbonate
Bicarbonate Soda
Chemical Formula: NaHCO3
Molecular Weight: 84.01 INS No.: 500(ii)
Synonyms: Sodium hydrogen carbonate;
Bicarbonate of soda; Sodium acid CAS No.: 144-55-8
carbonate

Compositional Specifications of Sodium Bicarbonate

Content Sodium Bicarbonate, when calculated on the dried basis, should be contain not
less than 99.0% of sodium bicarbonate (NaHCO3).
Description Sodium Bicarbonate occurs as white crystalline powder or crystalline lumps.
Identification Sodium Bicarbonate responds to the tests for Sodium Salt and Bicarbonate
in Identification.
Purity (1) Clarity and Color of Solution : When 1 g of Sodium Bicarbonate is dissolved
in 20 mL of water, the solution should be clear.
(2) Carbonate : To 1 g of Sodium Bicarbonate, add carefully 20 mL of freshly boiled
and cooled water, and dissolve while shaking horizontally at 15℃ or below. Add 2.0
mL of 0.1 N hydrochloric acid, and add 2 drops of phenolphthalein solution. No pink
color develops immediately.
(3) Ammonium Salt : When 1 g of Sodium Bicarbonate is heated, no odor of ammonia
is evolved.
(4) Arsenic : It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(5) Lead : Sodium Bicarbonate is tested by purity (2) for 「Sodium Metaphosphate」(not
more than 2.0 ppm).
(6) Mercury : When Sodium Bicarbonate is tested by Mercury Limit Test, its content
should not be more than 1.0 ppm.
(7) Chloride : Weigh 0.5 g of Sodium Bicarbonate, add 5 mL of diluted nitric acid, boil,
cool and add 6 mL of diluted nitric acid, Test Solution. This Test Solution is tested
by Chloride Limit Test and its content should not be more than the amount that
corresponds to 0.3 mL of 0.01 N hydrochloric acid.
Loss on Drying When Sodium Bicarbonate is dried for 4 hours in a vacuum desiccator
(silica gel), the loss should not be more than 0.25%.
Assay Accurately weigh about 3 g of Sodium Bicarbonate, previously dried, dissolve in
25 mL of water, and titrate with 1 N sulfuric acid (indicator : 3 drops of bromophenol
blue solution). Near the end point, boil to expel carbon dioxide, cool, and continue the
titration.
1 mL of 1 N sulfuric acid = 84.01 mg of NaHCO3

943
 Sodium Bisulfite

INS No.: 222

Synonyms: Sodium hydrogen sulfite CAS No.: 7681-57-4

Definition Sodium Bisulfite is mixture of sodium bisulfite (NaHSO3 ＝ 104.06) and sodium
pyrosulfite (Na2S2O5 ＝ 190.11).
Compositional Specifications of Sodium Bisulfite
Content Sodium Bisulfite should contain within a range of 58.5～67.4% as sulfur
dioxide(SO2).
Description Sodium Bisulfite is white powder. It has a odor of sulfur dioxide.
Identification Sodium Bisulfite responds to the test for Bisulfite Salts and Sodium Salts in
Identification.
Purity (1) Clarity and Color of Solution : When 0.5 g of Sodium Bisulfite is dissolved in
10 mL of water, the turbidity of the solution should be very low or less.
(2) Arsenic : It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(3) Lead : Sodium Bisulfite is tested by purity (2) for 「Sodium Metaphosphate」(not
more than 2.0 ppm).
(4) Selenium : 2.0 g of Sodium Bisulfite, accurately weighed, transfer into a 50 mL
beaker, add 10 mL of water and 5 mL of hydrochloric acid and boil to remove sulfur
dioxide, Test Solution. Separately, transfer 1.0 g of Sodium Bisulfite and 0.5 mL of
selenium standard solution into a beaker, and proceed in the same manner as for test
solution, Reference solution. 2 g of hydrazin sulfate is added into each beaker, heated and
dissolved. After setting for 5 minutes, the resulting solution is transferred into a Nestler
cylinder with adding water to make 50 mL. The red color of this test solution should not
be deeper than that of reference solution (Not more than 5 ppm).
(5) Iron : When the test solution in (3) Purity is tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content
should not be more than 10 ppm.
(6) Mercury : When Sodium Bisulfite is tested by Mercury Limit Test, its content
should not be more than 1.0 ppm.
Assay Dissolve 0.2 g of Sodium Bisulfite, accurately weighed, in 50 mL of 0.1 N iodine
solution into an Erlenmeyer flask with a stopper. Proceed as directed under Assay in
「Sodium Sulfite」.

1 mL of 0.1 N iodine solution ＝ 3.203 mg SO2

944
 Sodium Carbonate
Crystal : Carbonate Soda
Anhydrous : Soda Ash
Chemical Formula: Na2CO3․nH2O(n = 10, 1 or
0)

1anhydrous
hydrate 124.00
Molecular Weight: 10hydrates 286.14

105.99
INS No.: 500(i)

Synonyms: Soda ash; Sodium salt of carbonic CAS No.: 497-19-8

acid 5968-11-6

Na2CO3․nH2O(n=0, 1 or 10) 286.14 Molecular Weight decahydrate

hydrate 124.00
Anhydrous
105.99
Definition Sodium Carbonate occurs as crystals (hydrate, decahydrate), and anhydrous
called Sodium Carbonate (crystal) or as Anhydrous called Sodium Carbonate
(Anhydrous).
Compositional Specifications of Sodium Carbonate
Content
Sodium Carbonate, when calculated on the dried basis, should be contain not less than
99.0% of sodium carbonate (Na2CO3 ＝ 105.99).
Description Sodium Carbonate (crystal) occurs as a white crystalline power or as
colorless to white crystalline lumps. Sodium Carbonate (Anhydrous) occurs as white
powder or granules.
Identification Sodium Carbonate responds to the tests for Sodium Salt and Carbonate in
Identification.
Purity Dry Sodium Carbonate at 70℃, gradually raise the temperature to 250～300℃,
and dry it until the weight becomes constant. Then test Sodium Carbonate.
(1) Clarity and Color of Solution : 1 g of Sodium Carbonate is dissolved in 20 mL of
water This is very slightly turbid.
(2) Arsenic : It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(3) Lead : Sodium Carbonate is tested by purity (2) for 「Sodium Metaphosphate」(not
more than 2 ppm).
(4) Mercury : When Sodium Carbonate is tested by Mercury Limit Test, its content
should not be more than 1.0 ppm.
(5) Chloride : To 0.5 g of Sodium Carbonate, 6 mL of diluted nitric acid is added. It is
then boiled and cooled, where water is added to bring the total volume to 100 mL.
10 mL of the resulting solution is mixed with 6 mL of nitric acid, Test Solution.
When the test solution is tested by Chloride Limit Test, its content should not be
more than the amount that corresponds to 0.5 mL of 0.01 N hydrochloric acid.
Loss on Drying Dry Sodium Carbonate at 70℃, gradually raise the temperature to 250～
300℃, and dry it until the weight becomes constant. The loss on drying should be
2.0% or less, 15% or less, and 55∼65% for anhydrous, monohydrate and decahydrate
form, respectively.
945
Assay Accurately weigh about 0.6 g of Sodium Carbonate, previously dried, dissolve in
50 mL of water, and titrate with 0.5 N hydrochloric acid (indicator : 3 drops of
bromophenol blue solution). Near the end point, boil to expel carbon dioxide, cool, and
continue the titration.
1 mL of 0.5 N hydrochloric acid = 26.497 mg of Na2CO3

946
 Sodium Carboxymethyl Starch
Compositional Specifications of Sodium Carboxymethyl Starch
Description Sodium Carboxymethyl Starch occurs as a white powder. It is odorless.
Identification (1) To 5 mL of Sodium Carboxymethyl Starch solution (1→1,000), add 5
drops of diluted hydrochloric acid (1→3) and 1 drop of iodine solution, and shake.
The color of the solution changes to a blue to red-purple color.
(2) To 1 mL of Sodium Carboxymethyl Starch solution (1→500). add 5 mL of
chromotropic acid solution, and heat in a water bath for 10 minutes. The color of the
solution changes to a purple to purple-pink color.
(3) To 5 mL of Sodium Carboxymethyl Starch solution (1→500). add 1 mL of cupric
sulfate solution (1→20), and shake. A light blue precipitate is formed.
(4) Ignite 1 g of Sodium Carboxymethyl Starch. The residue responds to the test for
Sodium Salt in Identification.
Purity (1) pH : Sodium Carboxymethyl Starch solution(1→50) as test solution, is
proceeded as directed under pH Determination. It should be within a range of 6.0～8.5.
(2) Chloride : To 0.1 g of Sodium Carboxymethyl Starch, add 10 mL of water and 1
mL of nitric acid, heat in a water bath for 10 minutes, cool, and filter if necessary.
Wash the residue with a small amount of water, combine the filtrate and the
washings. and add water to make 100 mL. Take 25 mL of this solution and 6 mL of
diluted nitric acid is added, test solution. When Sodium Carboxymethyl Starch is
tested by Chloride Limit Test, its content should not be more than the amount that
corresponds to 0.3 mL of 0.01 N hydrochloric acid.
(3) Sulfate : To 0.1 g of Sodium Carboxymethyl Starch, add 10 mL of water and 1 mL
of hydrochloric acid, heat in a water bath for 10 minutes, cool, and filter if
necessary. Wash the residue with a small amount of water, combine the filtrate and
the washings, and add water to make 50 mL. Measure exactly 10 mL of this solution
and 1 mL of diluted nitric acid is added, test solution. When Sodium Carboxymethyl
Starch is tested by Sulfate Limit Test, its content should not be more than the
amount that corresponds to 0.4 mL of 0.01 N sulfuric acid.
(4) Arsenic : It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(5) Lead : Sodium Carboxymethyl Starch is tested by Purity (2) for Sodium
Metaphosphate (not more than 2 ppm).
Loss on Drying When Sodium Carboxymethyl Starch is dried for 4 hours at 105℃, the
loss should not be more than 10%.

947
 Sodium Carboxymethylcellulose
Cellulose Gum
Carboxymethylcellulose
CMC
Sodium CMC
INS No.: 466
Synonyms: Cellulose gum; Carboxymethyl CAS No.: 9004-32-4
cellulose; CMC; Sodium CMC

Compositional Specifications of Sodium Carboxymethylcellulose

Description Sodium Carboxymethylcellulose occurs as a white to light yellow powder, or
granular or fibrous substance. It is odorless.
Identification (1) To 100 mL of water, add 1 g of Sodium Carboxymethylcellulose in small
portions while stirring and allow to stand until it becomes a uniformLy pasty solution.
① Test solution is diluted by a factor of 5 with water. 1 drop of the resulting
solution is mixed with 0.5 mL of chromtropic acid solution, which is then heated
for 10 minutes in a water bath. A pink-purple color develops.
② To 5 mL of the test solution, add 10 mL of acetone, and shake well. A white
flocculent precipitate is formed.
③ To 5 mL of the test solution, add 5 mL of cupric sulfate solution (1→20) and
shake. A pale blue flocculent precipitate is formed.
(2) Ignite 1 g of Sodium Carboxymethylcellulose at 550～600℃ for 3 hours. The
residue responds to the test for Sodium Salt in Identification.
Purity (1) pH : To 0.5 g of Sodium Carboxymethylcellulose, add small portion in 50 mL
of water while stirring. Occasionally stir and heat it for 20 minutes at 60∼70℃. Cool
it down and use the supernatant as test solution. Test for pH and pH should be
within a range of 6.0～8.5.
(2) Chloride : Weigh 0.1 g of Sodium Carboxymethylcellulose, add 20 mL of water and
0.5 mL of hydrogen peroxide, and heat in a water bath 30 minutes. Cool. add water
to make 100 mL, and filter through a dry filter paper. measure exactly 25 mL of the
filtrate as the test solution. Test by Chloride Limit Test, content should not be more
than the amount that corresponds to 0.45 mL of 0.01 N sulfuric acid.
(3) Sulfate : 20 mL of the filtrate obtained in Purity (2) is tested by Sulfate Limit Test.
Test by Sulfate Limit Test content should not be more than amount that correspond
to 0.4 mL of 0.01 N sulfuric acid.
(4) Arsenic : It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(5) Lead : When 5.0 g of Sodium Carboxymethylcellulose is tested by Atomic
Absorption Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy,
its content should not be more than 2.0 ppm.
(6) Cadmium : When 5.0 g of Sodium Carboxymethylcellulose is tested by Atomic
Absorption Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy,
948
 its content should not be more than 1.0 ppm.
(7) Mercury : When Sodium Carboxymethylcellulose is tested by Mercury Limit Test,
its content should not be more than 1.0 ppm.
Loss on Drying When Sodium Carboxymethylcellulose is dried for 4 hours at 105℃, the
weight loss should not be more than 12%.

949
 Sodium Caseinate
Synonyms: Casein-sodium CAS No.: 9005-46-3

Compositional Specifications of Sodium Caseinate

Content Sodium Caseinate, when calculated on the dried basis, should contain within a
range of 14.5～15.8% of nitrogen (N = 14.01).
Description Sodium Caseinate occurs as white to pale yellow powder, granules, or
flakes. It is odorless and tasteless or has a slight, characteristic odor and taste.
Identification (1) Proceed as directed under Identification (1), (2), and (3) in 「Casein」.
(2) The residue on ignition of Sodium Caseinate responds to the test for Sodium Salt in
Identification.
Purity (1) Clarity and Color of Solution : Proceed as directed under Purity (1) in
「Casein」.
(2) pH : Sodium Caseinate solution(1→50) should be within a range of pH 6.0～7.5
(3) Fat : Proceed as directed under Purity (4) in 「Casein」.
(4) Arsenic : It should be no more than 2.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(5) Lead : When 5.0 g of Sodium Caseinate is tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content
should not be more than 2.0 ppm.
Loss on Drying When Sodium Caseinate is dried for 3 hours at 100℃, the weight loss
should not be more than 15%.
Residue on Ignition When thermogravimetric analysis is done with approximately 1 g of
dried Sodium Caseinate, the amount of residues should not be more than 6%.
Assay Accurately weigh about 0.15 g of Sodium Caseinate, previously dried, and assay by
nitrogen determination method.
1 mL of 0.1 N sulfuric acid = 1.401 mg of N

950
 Potassium Caseinate
Synonyms: Casein-potassium CAS No.: 68131-54-4

Compositional Specifications of Potassium Caseinate

Content Potassium Caseinate, when calculated on the dried basis, should contain within a
range of 13.9～15.8% of nitrogen (N = 14.01).
Description Potassium Caseinate occurs as white to pale yellow powder, granules, or
flakes. It is odorless and tasteless or has a slight, characteristic odor and taste.
Identification (1) Proceed as directed under Identification (1), (2), and (3) in 「Casein」.
(2) The residue on ignition of Potassium Caseinate responds to the test for Potassium
Salt in Identification.
Purity (1) Clarity and Color of Solution : Proceed as directed under Purity (1) in
「Casein」. The resulting solution should be colorless and should not be more than
turbid.
(2) pH : Potassium Caseinate solution(1→50) should be within a range of pH 6.0～7.5
(3) Fat : Proceed as directed under Purity (4) in 「Casein」. The amount should not be
more than 1.5 %.
(4) Arsenic : It should be no more than 2.0 ppm according to the Arsenic Limit Test.
(5) Lead : When 5.0 g of Sodium Caseinate is tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, it should
not be more than 1.0 ppm.
(6) Lactose: Put 1 g of this food additive in a 150 mL beaker and add 25mL of water.
Dissolve it at 60 to 70°C and cool it down to room temperature. Add 15 mL of
water, 8 mL of 0.1N hydrochloric acid and 1 mL of 10% acetic acid, and shake for
mixing. After 5 minutes, add 1 mL of 1M sodium acetic acid and mix them well.
When the sediment subsides, filter it out of the first 5mL of the filtrate, take 2 mL
of the remaining filtrate, transfer it to the test tube. Then add 0.2 mL of the phenol
solution, mix it well, and add 5 mL of sulfuric acid to mix it within 1 to 2 seconds.
After checking that the solution is well blended, let it stand for 15 minutes and then
cool it down in a bath of 20°C for 5 minutes, and use it as test solution. Pour 1, 2,
3 and 4 mL of a lactose stock solution(2 mg/mL) into each 500mL mass flask, and
add water to 500mL to make lactose concentration of 20, 40, 60, and 80μg/mL. Add
2 mL of water to the five test tubes first, then add 3 mL of a standard solution,
0.2mL of a phenol solution and mix. Then add 5 mL of sulfuric acid amd mix them
within 1 to 2 seconds. After verifying that the solution is completely mixed, let it
stand for 15 minutes and then cool it down in a bath of 20°C for 5 minutes. And use
it as a standard solution. Prepare a calibration curve by measuring the absorbency of
the standard solution at 1cm liquid layer and 490nm wavelength with water as a
control solution. Measure absorbance A of the test solution and the content of the
calculatino should not be more than 2.0 % acccording to the following formula.
951
 The lactose content(%) ＝ A × 0.00475
a×m
A = Absorption of the test solution
a = Absorption factor of the standard lactose solution (slope of the calibration curve)
m = weight of sample(g)
Phenol solution: Heat mixture of 8 g of phenol and 2 g of water to dissolve until
crystals are removed.
Loss on Drying When Potassium Caseinate is dried for 3 hours at 100℃, the weight
loss should not be more than 15.0%.
Assay Accurately weigh about 0.15 g of Potassium Caseinate, previously dried, and
proceed as directed under Kjeldahl Method in Nitrogen Determination.
1 mL of 0.1 N sulfuric acid = 1.401 mg of N

952
 Sodium Copper Chlorophyllin

Synonyms: Sodium chlorophyllin INS No.: 141(ii)

Compositional Specifications of Sodium Copper Chlorophyllin

Description Sodium Copper Chlorophyllin occurs as a blue-black to green-black powder.
It is odorless or has a slight, characteristic odor.
Identification (1) Residues on ignition of Sodium Copper Chlorophyllin is dissolved in 10
mL of dilute hydrochloric acid by heating in a water bath. If the solution is not clear,
it is filtered. Add water to make 10 mL, Test Solution. Following tests are carried
out with this Test Solution.
(A) The test solution is tested by Perform Flame Coloration Test. The color of the
flame is first green and then changes to yellow.
(B) To 5 mL of the test solution, add 0.5 mL of sodium diethyldithiocarbamate
solution (1→1,000), a brown precipitate is formed.
(2) To 1 mL of Sodium Copper Chlorophyllin solution (1→1,000), add phosphate buffer
solution (pH 7.5) to make 100 mL, and measure the absorbance. The solution exhibits
maximum absorption bands at wavelengths of 403～407 nm and 627～633 nm. When
the absorbances at these absorption maxima are A1 and A2, the absorbance ratio
A1/A2 is should not be more than 4.0.
Purity (1) pH : pH of this solution of Sodium Copper Chlorophyllin (1→100) should be
within a range 9.5～11.0
(2) Specific Absorbance : Dissolve 0.1 g of Sodium Copper Chlorophyllin, accurately
weighed, in water to make 1,000 mL. Take 10 mL of this solution, add phosphate
buffer solution (pH 7.5) to make 100 mL. When the absorbance at the maximum
absorption band near 405 nm and its value is converted into that of a dried form, ＝
508 or higher. In this case, a light-shielded container should be used to avoid direct light.
(3) Arsenic : It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(4) Lead : When 5.0 g of Sodium Copper Chlorophyllin is tested by Atomic
Absorption Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy,
its content should not be more than 5.0 ppm.
(5) Cadmium : When 5.0 g of Sodium Copper Chlorophyllin is tested by Atomic
Absorption Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy,
its content should not be more than 1.0 ppm.
(6) Mercury : When Sodium Copper Chlorophyllin is tested by Mercury Limit Test, its
content should not be more than 1.0 ppm.
(7) Residue Solvent : When Sodium Copper Chlorophyllin is tested by Purity (5) for
「Oleoresin Paprika」,

Acetone not more than 50 ppm(separate or

Methyl Alcohol total in case of use in combination)
953
Isopropyl Alcohol
Hexane
Methylene Chloride should not be more than 10 ppm
(8) Inorganic Copper Salt : 1 g of Sodium Copper Chlorophyllin is dissolved in 60 mL
of water. 1 μl of this solution is tested by Thin-Layer Chromatography without using
a reference solution. Mixture of n-butanol:water:acetic acid (4:2:1) is used as a
developing solvent. No light brown spots should be observed. For the thin-layer
plate, silica gel for thin-layer chromatography is dried at 110℃ for 1 hour. The
development is stopped when the solvent front reaches approximately 10 cm. It is
then air dried and sodium diethyldithiocarbamate solution (1→1,000) is sprayed upon
the plate (not more than 300μg/g as Cu).
Loss on Drying When Sodium Copper Chlorophyllin is dried for 2 hours at 105℃, the
weight loss should not be more than 5%.

954
 Sodium Dehydroacetate

Chemical Formula: C8H7O4Na‧H2O

Molecular Weight: 208.15 INS No.: 266

Synonyms: Sodium
3-(1-hydroxyethylidene)-
6-methyl-1,2-pyran-2,4(3H)-dio CAS No.: 4418-26-2
ne

Compositional Specifications of Sodum Dehydroacetate

Content Sodium Dehydroacetate, when calculated on the dried basis, should contain not
less than 98.0% of sodium dehydroacetate (C8H7O4Na․H2O = 190.13).
Description Sodium Dehydroacetate occurs as a white crystalline powder. It is odorless
or has a slight odor.
Identification (1) To 2 mL of an solution of Sodium Dehydroacetate (1→100), add 3 drops
of potassium sodium tartarate solution and 2 drops of strong cupric acetate solution,
and shake, a purple precipitate with white tint is produced.
(2) To 0.1 g of Dehydroacetic Acid, add 1 mL of water and 3～5 drops of
salicylaldehyde solution and 0.1 mL of sodium hydroxide solution (1→2), and heat in
water bath, it turns red.
(3) Sodium Dehydroacetate responds to the test for Sodium Salt in Identification.
(4) Dissolve 0.5 g of Sodium Dehydroacetate in 100 mL of water, add 1 mL of diluted
hydrochloric acid, filter the resulting precipitate, and wash thoroughly with water.
After drying at 75~80℃ for 4 hours, the melting point should be within a range of
109～112℃.
Purity (1) Clarity and Color of Solution : Dissolve 0.5 g of Sodium Dehydroacetate in 10
mL of water, it should be colorless.
(2) Free Alkali : Dissolve 1 g of Sodium Dehydroacetate in 20 mL of freshly boiled and
cooled water, add 2 drops of phenolphthalein solution. Even if a pink color develops,
it should disappear upon addition of 0.3 mL of 0.1 N sulfuric acid.
(3) Chloride : Dissolve 1 g of Sodium Dehydroacetate in 30 mL of water, and shaking
and add 9.5 mL of dilute nitric acid, and filtering. The residue is washed with water
and the wash water is added to the filtrate. The filtrate is tested by Chloride Limit
Test, its content should not be more than the amount that corresponds to 0.3 mL of
0.01 N hydrochloric acid.
(4) Sulfate : Dissovle 1 g of Sodium Dehydroacetate in 30 mL of water, and shaking,
955
 add 3 mL of dilute hydrochloric acid and filter. The residue is washed with water and
the wash water is added to the filtrate. The filtrate is tested by Sulfate Limit Test,
its content should not be more than the amount that corresponds to 0.3 mL of 0.01
N sulfuric acid.
(5) Arsenic : It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(6) Lead : When 5.0 g of Nicotinic Acid is tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content
should not be more than 2.0 ppm.
(7) Readily Carbonizable Substances : To 0.3 g of Sodium Dehydroacetate, test by
Readily carbonizable substances. Its color should not be deeper than that of a Color
Standard Solution C.
Water Content Accurately weigh 0.3 g of Sodium Dehydroacetate and test by the back
titration method in Water Content Determination (Karl-Fischer Method). The water
content should be within a range of 8.3～10.0%.
Residues on Ignition When thermogravimetric analysis is done with 1 g of Sodium
Dehydroacetate, the residue should be within a range of 33.3～34.6%.
Assay Accurately weigh about 0.4 g of Sodium Dehydroacetate, add 50 mL of glacial
acetic acid(for nonaqueous titration), and titrate with 0.1 N perchloric acid (indicator:
10 drops of α-naphtholbenzein solution) The end point is until the brown color of the
solution changes to green.
1 mL of 0.1 N perchloric acid = 19.01 mg of C8H7O4Na

956
 Sodium Diacetate
CH3COONa‧CH3COOH‧nH2O

Chemical Formula: C4H7NaO4‧nH2O

Molecular Weight: anhydrous 142.09 INS No.: 262(ii)

Synonyms: Sodium hydrogen diacetate CAS No.: 126-96-5

Compositional Specifications of Sodium Diacetate

Content Sodium Diacetate, when calculated on the dried basis(anhydrous), should contain
39.0∼41.0% of free acetic acid and 58.0∼60.0% of sodium acetate.
Description Sodium Diacetate is white hygroscopic crystalline solid with a scent of
acetic acid.
Identification Sodium Diacetate solution (1→10) responds to test of acetates and sodium
salts in Identification.
Purity (1) Lead : When 5.0 g of Sodium Diacetate is tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content
should not be more than 2.0 ppm.
(2) Arsenic : It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(3) Mercury : When Sodium Diacetate is tested by Mercury Limit Test, its content
should not be more than 1.0 ppm.
(4) Readily Oxidizable Matters (as formic acid) : 1 g of Sodium Diacetate is dissolved
in 50 mL of water. After adding 10 mL of dilute sulfuric acid, it is then heated at 80
∼90℃. This hot solution is titrated with 0.1 N potassium permanganate solution until
the pale red color persists for at least 15 seconds. The content of readily oxidizables
should not be more than 0.2%.
1 mL of 0.1 N potassium permanganate solution ＝ 2.301 mg CH2O2
Water Content Water content of Sodium Diacetate is determined by water determination
(Karl-Fisher Method) and should not be more than 2.0%.
Assay (1) Free Acetic Acid : Approximately 4 g of Sodium Diacetate is precisely
weighed and dissolved in 50 mL of water. After adding phenolphthalein solution, it is
titrated with 1 N sodium hydroxide solution.
1 mL of 1 N sodium hydroxide solution ＝ 60.05 mg CH3COOH
(2) Sodium Acetate : Approximately 0.5 g is precisely weighed and dissolved in 50 mL
of glacial acetic acid. This solution is titrated with 0.1 N perchloric acid solution
(indicator : 1 mL of crystal violet solution in glacial acetic acid). At the end point,
the solution turns from violet to blue, then to green. Separately, perform a blank test
957
in the same manner.
1 mL of 0.1 N perchloric acid ＝ 8.203 mg CH3COONa

958
 Sodium Erythorbate

Chemical Formula: C6H 7O 6Na‧H 2O

Molecular Weight: 216.13 INS No.: 316

Synonyms: Sodium isoascorbate CAS No.: 6381-77-7

Compositional Specifications of Sodium Erythorbate

Content Sodium Erythorbate, when calculated on the dried basis, should contain not less
than 98.0% of sodium erythorbate (C6H7O6Na․H2O).
Description Sodium Erythorbate occurs as white to yellowish white crystalline powder,
or granules. It is odorless and has a slightly salty taste.
Identification (1) Dissolve 0.1 g of Sodium Erythorbate in 100 mL of metaphosphoric
acid solution (1→50). To 5 mL of this solution. add drop wise iodine solution until a
slightly yellow color develops. To this solution, add 1 drop of cupric sulfate solution
(1→1,000) and 1 drop of pyrrole, and warm in a water bath at 50～60℃ for 5
minutes. A blue to blue-green color develops.
(2) To 10 mL of Sodium Erythorbate (1→100). add 1 mL of potassium permanganate
solution. A pink color develops, and this color disappears immediately.
(3) Sodium Erythorbate responds to the test for Sodium Salt in Identification.
Purity
(1) Specific Rotation : Approximately 1 g of Sodium Erythorbate is precisely weighed,
which is dissolved in freshly boiled and cooled water so that the total volume becomes 10
mL. Optical rotation of this solution should be within a range of ＝ +95.5∼+98.0°
(2) Clarity and Color of Solution : Weigh 1 g of Sodium Erythorbate, and dissolve it in
10 mL of water. This solution is clear, and its color is not darker than that of color
standard solution J.
(3) pH : pH of Sodium Erythorbate solution (1→20) should be within a range of 5.5～8.0.
(4) Arsenic : It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(5) Lead : When 5.0 g of Sodium Erythorbate is tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content
should not be more than 2.0 ppm.
(6) Mercury : When Sodium Erythorbate is tested by Mercury Limit Test, its content
should not be more than 1.0 ppm.
Loss on Drying Sodium Erythorbate is dried for 24 hours in a vacuum desiccator (silica
gel) and the weight loss should not be more than 0.3%.
959
Assay Accurately weigh about 1 g of Sodium Erythorbate, previously dried, and dissolve
it in metaphosphoric acid solution (1→50) to make exactly 250 mL. Measure exactly
50 mL of this solution, and titrate with 0.1 N iodine (indicator : starch solution).
1 mL of 0.1 N iodine = 10.81 mg of C6H7O6Na․H2O

960
 Sodium Ferric Pyrophosphate
Sodium Iron Pyrophosphate
Chemical Formula: Na8Fe4(P2O7)5‧nH2O
Molecular Weight: 1277.02(as anhydrous)
Synonyms: Sodium iron pyrophosphate CAS No.: 10045-87-1

Compositional Specifications of Sodium Ferric Pyrophosphate

Content Sodium Ferric Pyrophosphate should contain within a range of 14.5～16.0% of
iron (Fe).
Description Sodium Ferric Pyrophosphate is scentless white～yellowish brown powder.
Identification 0.5 g of Sodium Ferric Pyrophosphate is dissolved in 5 mL of dilute
hydrochloric acid (1→2). When excess sodium hydroxide solution is added, reddish
brown precipitates are formed. This is stirred for several minutes and filtered. The
small amount of the initial filtrate is discarded. 1 drop of bromophenol blue solutions
added to 5 mL of the clear filtrate. When 1 N hydrochloric acid is added drop-wise,
the filtrated turns green, where 10 mL of zinc sulfate solution (1→8) is added. Upon
adjusting pH to 3.8, white precipitates are formed.
Purity (1) Fluoride : 1 g of Sodium Ferric Pyrophosphate is precisely weighed and
tested by Purity (3) for [Calcium Oxide]. The total consumed amount of sodium
fluoride should not exceed 2.5 mL (Not more than 0.005%).
(2) Lead : 1.0 g of Sodium Ferric Pyrophosphate is weighed and trasnferred into 50
mL flask. Add 10 mL of 9 N hydrochloric acid, 10 mL of water, 20 mL of ascorbic
acid-sodium iodide solution and 5 mL of trioctyl phosphine oxide solution and shake
it to mix for 30 seconds. Add keep it to separate the layer and again add water so
that organic layer reaches to neck part of flask. After shaking to mix it, keep it to
separate the layer. This organic solvent layer is used as test solution. Separately,
take 10 mL of lead standard solution and make it precisely to 100 mL. Take 2 mL of
this solution and transfer into 50 mL flask. And operate under condition as test
solution method, this solution is used as reference solution. When it is tested by
Atomic Absorption Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission
Spectroscopy, absorbance(luminous intensity) of test solution should not be more than
absorbance(luminous intensity) of reference solution.(not be more than 2.0 ppm.)
Ascorbic acid-sodium iodide solution : 10 g of ascorbic acid and 19.3 g sodium
iodide are dissolved in water to make to 100 mL.
Trioctyl phosphine oxide solution : 5 g of trioctyl phosphine oxide is dissolved in
methyl isobutyl ketone to make to 100 mL.
(3) Mercury : Proceed as directed under Purity (4) for [Reduced Iron]. However, the
same procedure is followed with 3 mL of mercury standard solution (for reduced
solution) (Not more than 3 ppm).
961
Loss on Ignition When thermogravimetric analysis is done at 800℃ for 1 hour, loss
weight should not be more than 8.0%.
Assay Proceed as directed under Assay of [Ferric Pyrophosphate].

962
 Sodium Ferrocyanide
Chemical Formula: Na4Fe(CN)6․10H2O
Molecular Weight: 484.06 INS No.: 535
Synonyms: Hexacyanoferrate of sodium; CAS No.: 13601-19-9
Yellow prussiate of soda

Compositional Specifications of Sodium Ferrocyanide

Content When Sodium ferrocyanide is quantified, it should contain not less than 99.0%
of sodium ferrocyanide (Na4Fe(CN)6․10H2O).
Description Sodium ferrocyanide is a yellow crystal or crystalline powder.
Identification (1) When 1 mL of ferric chloride is added to 10 mL of sodium
ferrocyanide (1→100), a dark blue precipitate are formed.
(2) Sodium ferrocyanide responds to test of sodium salt in the identification method.
Purity (1) Cyanide : 10 mg of copper sulfate is dissolved in 8 mL of water and 2 mL of
ammonium solution. A filtering paper is dipped into this solution, to which hydrogen
sulfide is then added. When 1 drop of the aqueous solution of this additive (1→100)
is dropped on the filtering paper that turned brown, white rings should not appear.
(2) Ferrocyanide : 10 mg of sodium ferrocyanide is dissolved in 10 mL of water. When
a few drops of 2 N acetic acid that is saturated with benzidine and 1 drop of 1%
lead nitrate are added to 1 drop of this solution, blue precipitates or color should not
formed.
(3) Lead : Accurately weigh 5.0 g of sodium ferrocyanide into a 150 mL beaker, add
30 mL of water. Add Hydrochloric acid in small portion to the solution until the solid
is dissolved throughly and add 1 mL of hydrochloric acid. Heat this solution for
approximately 5 minutes and cool down. Add water to bring the total volume to 100 mL.
Add Sodium Hydroxide Solution(1→4) or Hydrochloric acid(1→4) so that pH becomes
2～4. Transfer this solution into 250 mL separatory funnel, where water is added to
make 200 mL. Then add 2 mL of 2% APDC solution and shake to mix. Extract the
solution 2 times with 20 mL each of chloroform, which is evaporated to dryness in a
water bath. Add 3 mL of Nitric Acid to the residue and heat it until nearly
evaporated. To this solution, add 0.5 mL of Nitric Acid and 10 mL of water,
concentrate it until the final solution becomes 3~5 mL, and add water to make 10
mL, test solution. When the test solution is tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content
should not be more than 5.0 ppm.
2% APDC Solution : 2.0 g of Ammonium Pyrolidine Dithiocarbamate is dissolved in
water to make 100 mL. Filter it when using.
(4) Chloride : When 0.11 g of sodium ferrocyanide is tested by Chloride Limit Test,
the detected amount should not be more than the amount that corresponds to 0.6 mL
of 0.01 N hydrochloric acid.(not more than 0.2%)
(3) (5) Sulfate : When 0.2 g of sodium ferrocyanide is tested by Sulfate Limit Test, the
963
 detected amount should not be more than the amount that corresponds to 0.4 mL of 0.01 N
hydrochloric acid. (not more than 0.1%)
Water Content Water content of sodium ferrocyanide is determined by water
determination (Karl-Fisher Titration) and should not be more than 1.0%.
Assay About 1.0 mg of sodium ferrocyanide is weighed accurately, dissolved in 200 mL
of water, and 10 mL of sulfuric acid is added. Then the solution is titrated with 0.02
N potassium permanganate until the red color lasts for 30 secs.
1 mL of 0.02 N potassium permanganate = 48.41 mg of Na4Fe(CN)6․10H2O

964
 Sodium ferrous citrate
Chemical Formula: Na4FeC12H10O14
Molecular Weight: 526.01
Synonyms: Iron(II) sodium salt of
2-hydroxypropane- 1,2,3-tricarboxylic
acid

Compositional Specifications of Sodium ferrous citrate

Content Sodium ferrous citrate should contain 10.0-11.0% of Ferrous(Fe=55.85).
Description Sodium ferrous citrate occurs as light green to greenish yellow powder. It is
odorless.
Identification (1) To 5 mL of Sodium ferrous citrate solution(1→100), add 1mL of
hydrochloric acid(1→4) and 0.5mL of freshly prepared potassium ferrocyanide solution(1
→10). A blue color appears.
(2) To 5mL of Sodium ferrous citrate solution(1→100), add 2mL of ammonia water. A
red-brown color develops, but precipitate is not formed.
(3) Ignite 3g of Sodium ferrous citrate at 500-600℃ for 3 hours. The residue responds
to the test for sodium salts in Identification.
(4) To 0.5g of Sodium ferrous citrate, add 5mL of water and 10mL of potassium
hydroxide solution(1→25), heat in a water bath for 10 minutes while stirring well,
cool and filter. Take a portion of the filtrate, nutralize with acetic acid(1→2), then
add an execess of calcium chloride dihydrtate solution(3→40) and boil. A white
precipitate is formed. After colleting the precipitate, add sodium hydroxide solution(1
→25) to a part of it. The precipitate does not dissolve. Add hydrochloric acid(1→4)
to the other part of the precipitate, then it dissolves.
Purity (1) Sulfate : Weigh 0.4g of Sodium ferrous citrate, add 50mL of water and
dissolve it. Then add 100mL of water again. Take 10mL of this solution, then add
1mil of hydrochloric acid(1→4) and 0.1g of hydroxylamine chloride. boil for 1 minute,
then cool and add water to make 50mL. Reference solution is prepared by mixing
0.45mL of 0.001N sulfuir acid, 1mL of hydrochloric acid(1→4) and water to make
50mL. When it is tested by Sulfate Limt Test, its content should be not more then
0.48% as SO4.
(2) Ferric salt : Weigh 2.0g of Sodium ferrous citrate, transfer into a flask with a
ground-glass stopper, dissolve in 5mL of hydrochloric acid and 30mL of water, add
4g of potassium iodide, close a flask with a stopper, and allow to stand in a dark
place for 15 minutes. Then, add 2mL of starch TS, and shake well. Even if a color
develops, the color disappears on addition of 1.0mL of 0.1mol/l sodium thiosulfate to
the solution.
(3) Lead : When 5.0 g of Sodium ferrous citrate is tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content
should not be more than 1.0 ppm.
(4) Arsenic : It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
965
 (5) Tartrate : Weigh 1.0g of Sodium ferrous citrate, add 5mL of water and 10mL of
potassium hydroxide solution(1→15), heat in a water bath for 10 minutes stirring
well. Cool and filter. Measure 5mL of the filtrate, add diluted acetic acid(1→4) to
make it weakly acidic, then add 2mL of acetic acid, and allow stand for 24 hours. No
white, crystalline precipitate is formed.
Assay Accurately weigh about 1g of Sodium ferrous citrate, transfer into a flask with a
ground-glass stopper, add 25mL of diluted sulfuric acid(1→20) and 2mL of nitric acid,
and boil for 10 minutes. After cooling, add 20mL of water and 4g of potassium iodide,
immediately close a flask with stopper tightly, allow to stand in a dark place for 15
minutes, add 100 mL of water and titrate the liberated iodine with 0.1 mol/l sodium
thiosulfate(indicator: starch TS). Perform a blank test in the same manner.
1mL of 0.1 mol/l sodium thiosulfate = 5.585 mg of Fe

966
 Sodium Fluoride
Chemical Formula: NaF

Molecular Weight: 41.99

Synonyms: Florocid CAS No.: 7681-49-4

Content Sodium Fluoride, when calculated on the dried basis, should contain within a
range of 98.0~102% of Sodium Fluoride(NaF).
Description Sodium Fluoride occurs as white powder and is odorless.
Identification
(1) Sodium Fluoride is soluble in water but insoluble in ethanol.
(2) 1 mg of Sodium Fluoride is transferred into a platinum crucible and 15 mL of sulfuric
acid added. After covering with a glass plate, it is gently heated in a water bath. When
the glass plate wash by flowing water, the dried surface of glass plate is corroded.
(3) Sodium Fluoride solution(1→25) responds to the test for Sodium Salt reactions.
Purity
(1) Free acid and Free Alkali : 2.0 g of Sodium Fluoride is weighed and transferred into
a platinum dish. It is dissolved in 40 mL of water and then is added to 10 mL of a
saturated solution of potassium nitrate. After cooling down it at 0℃, 3 drops of
phenolphthalein solution is added and the following test is performed.
① If the solution is colorless, add 2.0 mL of 0.1 N sodium hydroxide solution. A light
red color develops.
② If the solution is light red, add 0.5 mL of 0.1 N sulfuric acid. The color disappears.
(2) Fluorinated silicate : Heat the test solution prepared in (1) Purity above until the
solution boils. When the solution is hot, it is titrated with 0.1 N sodium hydroxide
solution until its color is a light red. The consumed amount of sodium hydroxide
solution should not be more than 1.5 mL.
(3) Chloride : 0.3 g of Sodium Fluoride is dissolved in 20 mL of water. Add 0.2 g of
boric acid and 1mL of nitrate in the above solution to make test solution. The test
solution is proceed as directed under Chloride Limit Test. It should not be more than
amount that corresponds to 1 mL of 0.001 N hydrochloric acid.
(4) Lead : Sodium Fluoride is tested by purity (2) for 「Sodium Metaphosphate」(not
more than 2.0 ppm).
Loss on Drying When Sodium Fluoride is dried at 150℃ for 4 hours, the weight loss
should not be more than 1%.
Assay 0.08 g of Sodium Fluoride is precisely weighed and dissolved in 25 mL of a
mixture of acetic anhydride·glacial acetic acid(1:4). After cooling down it, it is titrated
with 0.1 N perchloric acid solution (indicator : 1 mL of crystal violet buffered in
glacial acetic acid). At the end point, the color of solution turns to green. Separately,
a blank test is done following the same procedure.

967
1 mL of 0.1 N perchloric acid solution ＝ 4.199 mg NaF

968
 Sodium Gluconate
Chemical Formula: C6H11NaO7
Molecular Weight: 218.14 INS No.: 576
Synonyms: Sodium salt of D-gluconic acid CAS No.: 527-07-1

[Content Specifications of Sodium Gluconate

Content Sodium Gluconate should contain within a range of 98.0∼102.0% of sodium
gluconate (C6H11NaO7).
Description Sodium Gluconate is white～yellowish brown platelet or powder.
Identification (1) Sodium Gluconate solution (1→20) responds to the test for Sodium
Salts in Identification.
(2) 0.7 mL of glacial acetic acid and 1 mL of freshly distilled phenyl hydrazine are
added to 5 mL of warm Sodium Gluconate solution (1→10), which is then heated for
30 minutes in a water bath and cooled. When inner wall is scraped with a glass rod,
crystallites are precipitated.
Purity (1) Lead : When 5.0 g of Sodium Gluconate is tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content
should not be more than 2.0 ppm.
(2) Reduced Materials : Approximately 1 g of Sodium Gluconate is weighed and
transferred into a 250 mL Erlenmeyer flask. 10 mL of water is added to dissolve the
solid and 25 mL of alkaline copper citrate solution. A small beaker is placed on top
of the flask, which is heated for precisely 5 minutes. It is then rapidly cooled to
room temperature. To this solution, 25 mL of diluted acetic acid (1→10), 10 mL of
0.1N iodine solution, 10 mL of dilute hydrochloric acid, and 3 mL of starch solution
are added. The resulting solution is titrated with 0.1 N sodium thiosulfate solution
until the blue color disappears. The content of reduced materials should not be more
than 0.5%.
Content of Reduced Materials (as glucose)(%) (V Nweight
1 - V N ) × 27
1 2 2
of the × 100
=
sample(mg)

V1 : Consumed amount of 0.1 N iodine solution (mL)

N1 : Normality of 0.1 N iodine solution
V2 : Consumed amount of 0.1 N sodium thiosulfate solution (mL)
N2 : Normality of 0.1 N sodium thiosulfate solution
27 : Experimental corresponding amount for D-glucose
Assay Approximately 150 mg of Sodium Gluconate is weighed and dissolved in 75 mL of
glacial acetic acid by heating. After cooling, quinaldine red solution is added. The
resulting solution is titrated with 0.1 N perchloric acid solution. The end point is
where the color of the liquid disappears.

969
 1 mL of 0.1 N perchloric acid solution ＝ 21.81 mg C6H11NaO7
∘Quinaldine red solution ： 100 mg of quinaldine red (C21H23IN2 = 430.33) is dissolved in
glacial acetic acid. Total volume of the solution is brought up to 100 mL with glacial
acetic acid.

970
 Sodium Hydrosulfite
Chemical Formula: Na2S2O4
Molecular Weight: 174.11 CAS No.: 7775-14-6

Compositional Specifications of Sodium Hydrosulfite

Content Sodium Hydrosulfite should be contain not less than 85.0% of sodium
hydrosulfite (Na2S2O4).
Description Sodium Hydrosulfite occurs as a white to gray-white crystalline powder. It
is odorless or has a slight odor of sulfur dioxide.
Identification (1) To 10 mL of Sodium Hydrosulfite solution (1→100), add 1 mL of cupric
sulfate solution. A gray-black color develops.
(2) To 10 mL of Sodium Hydrosulfite solution (1→100), add 1 mL of potassium
permanganate solution. The color of the solution disappears.
(3) Sodium Hydrosulfite responds to the test for Sodium Salt (A) and (B) in
Identification.
Purity (1) Clarity and Color of Solution : To 10 mL of formalin, add 10 mL of water, and
neutralize with sodium hydroxide solution. Take 10 mL of the solution, weigh 0.5 g of
Sodium Hydrosulfite, dissolve in the solution, and allow to stand for 5 minutes. The
solution should not be more than slightly turbid.
(2) Arsenic : It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(3) Lead : Sodium Hydrosulfite is tested by Purity (2) for Sodium Metaphosphate(not
more than 2 ppm).
(4) Zinc : Take 5 mL of the solution A prepared in (3) above, add 0.1 mL of ammonia
solution, filter, add water to make 20 mL, add 5 mL of diluted hydrochloric acid and
0.1 mL of freshly prepared potassium ferrocyanide solution, and allow to stand for 15
minutes. The solution is not more turbid than the following reference solution. To
prepare reference solution, measure 8 mL of Zinc Standard Solution, transfer into a
Nestler tube, add water to make 20 mL. add 5 mL of diluted hydrochloric acid and
0.1 mL of freshly prepared potassium ferrocyanide solution, add water, and allow to
stand for 15 minutes.
(5) Disodium Ethylenediaminetetraacetate : Weigh 0.5 g of Sodium Hydrosulfite, dissolve
in 5 mL of water, add 2 mL of 0.5% potassium chromate solution and 2 mL of
arsenic trioxide solution. and heat in a water bath for 2 minutes. No purple color
develops.
(6) Formic acid : To 10 mL of Sodium Hydrosulfite solution(1→1,000), add 5 mL of
diluted hydrochloric acid (1→2), and add about 0.3 g of magnesium dustin small
portions. After effervescence is almost no longer evolved, cover with a watch glass,
and allow to stand for 2 hours. Measure 1 mL of this solution, add 2 mL of sulfuric
acid and 0.5 mL of chromotropic acid solution, and heat in a water bath for 10
minutes. The color of the solution is not darker than that of the following reference
971
 solution. The reference solution is acquired by separately measuring 1 mL of diluted
formaldehyde standard solution instead of sample and preparing in the same manner
as sample.
Assay Add 10 mL of water to 10 mL of formalin, and neutralize with sodium hydroxide
solution. To this solution, add about 2 g of Sodium Hydrosulfite, accurately weighed,
and dissolve in water to make exactly 500 mL. Take 25 mL of this solution, adjust the
pH to 1.1～1.5 with diluted hydrochloric acid (1→10), and titrate with 0.1 N iodine
solution for sodium hydrosulfite (indicator : starch solution).
1 mL of 0.1 N iodine solution = 4.353 mg of Na2S2O4

972
 Sodium Hydroxide
Chemical Formula: NaOH

Molecular Weight: 40.00 INS No.: 524

Synonyms: Caustic soda; Lye CAS No.: 1310-73-2

Definition Sodium Hydroxide occurs as crystals called Sodium Hydroxide (crystal) and as
Anhydrous called Sodium Hydroxide (Anhydrous). Sodium Hydroxide (crystal) is a mixture
of sodium hydroxide (NaOH, Anhydrous) and sodium hydroxide hydrated (NaOHㆍH2O,
Mono hydrated).
Compositional Specifications of Sodium Hydroxide
Content Sodium Hydroxide (crystal) should contain within a range of 70.0～75.0% of
sodium hydroxide (NaOH). Sodium Hydroxide (Anhydrous) should contain not less than
95.0% of sodium hydroxide (NaOH).
Description Sodium Hydroxide (crystal) occurs as white crystalline powder or granules.
Sodium Hydroxide (Anhydrous) occurs as white lumps having various shapes including
pellets, flakes, and rods, or as a white powder.
Identification (1) Sodium Hydroxide solution (1→50) is strongly alkaline.
(2) Sodium Hydroxide solution (1→25) responds to the test for Sodium Salt in
Identification.
Purity (1) Clarity and Color of Solution : Dissolve 50 g of Sodium Hydroxide in freshly
boiled and cooled water to make 250 mL, Test Solution. When 5 mL of this test
solution is mixed with 20 mL of water, the solution should be colorless and should
not be more than almost clear.
(2) Sodium Carbonate : The content of Sodium Carbonate (Na2CO3) obtained in Assay is
not more than 2%.
(3) Arsenic : It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(4) Lead : Sodium Hydroxide is tested by purity (2) for 「Sodium Metaphosphate」(not
more than 0.5 ppm).
(5) Mercury : Take 10 mL of the test solution prepared in (1) above, add 1mL of
potassium permanganate solution (3→50) and about 30 mL of water, and shake.
Neutralize by gradually adding purified hydrochloric acid, add 5 mL of diluted sulfuric
acid (1→2). and cool, Test Solution. Add hydroxylamine hydrochloride solution (1→5)
until the purple color of the potassium permanganate in the test solution disappears
and the precipitate of manganese dioxide dissolves, add water to make 100 mL, and
transfer into the gas washing bottle of an atomic absorption spectrophotometer. Add
10 mL of stannous chloride solution, immediately connect with the atomic absorption
spectrophotometer, and start the diaphragm pump to circulate the air. When the
recorder reading increases rapidly and then it indicates a constant value, measure the
absorbance. The absorbance is not more than that of the following solution. Measure
2 mL of Mercury Standard Solution, add 1 mL of potassium permanganate solution (3
973
 →50), 30 mL of water, and the same amount of purified hydrochloric acid as that
used for preparing the test solution, and proceed in the same manner as the test
solution. The content should not be more than 0.1 ppm as Hg.
Assay Accurately weigh about 50 g of Sodium Hydroxide, add freshly boiled and cooled
water to make 1,000 mL. Use this solution as the test solution. Take 25 mL of the
test solution, add 10 mL of freshly boiled and cooled water, and titrate with 1 N
hydrochloric acid (indicator : 1 mL of bromophenol blue solution). After neutralizing,
add about 1 mL of 1 N hydrochloric acid, and boil for about 5 minutes. After cooling,
titrate the excess acid with 0.1 N sodium hydroxide, and determine the volume (A mL)
of consumed 1 N hydrochloric acid. Separately, measure exactly 25 mL of the test
solution, transfer into a flask with a ground-glass stopper, and add 25 mL of freshly
boiled and cooled water. To the solution. add 10 mL of barium chloride solution.
stopper, shake gently, and titrate with 1 N hydrochloric acid (indicator: 1 mL of
phenolphthalein solution). Let (B mL) be the consumed volume.
Content of sodium hydroxide(NaOH)(%) 0.0400(g) × B × 40
× 100
＝ weight of the sample(g)

Content of sodium carbonate(Na CO )

2 3 (%)＝ 0.0530(g) × (A—B) × 40 ×
(Apply to Purity test(2) Sodium carbonate) weight of the sample(g) 100

974
 Sodium Hydroxide Solution
Compositional Specifications of Sodium Hydroxide Solution
Content Sodium Hydroxide Solution should contain within a range of 95.0～120% of the
declared content of sodium hydroxide (NaOH = 40.00).
Description Sodium Hydroxide Solution is a colorless or slightly colored liquid.
Identification (1) Sodium Hydroxide Solution (1→50) is strongly alkaline.
(2) Sodium Hydroxide Solution (4% as NaOH calculated from the declared content)
responds to the test for Sodium Salt in Identification.
Purity (1) Clarity and Color of Solution : To Sodium Hydroxide Solution, add freshly
boiled and cooled water to prepare 20% solution as Sodium Hydroxide which is
calculated from the declared content, Test Solution. When 5 mL of this test solution
is mixed with 20 mL of water, the solution should be colorless and should not be
more than almost clear.
(2) Sodium Carbonate : The content of Sodium Carbonate (Na2CO3) obtained in Assay is
not more than 2.0%.
(3) Arsenic : It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(4) Lead : Sodium Hydroxide Solution is tested by purity (2) for 「Sodium
Metaphosphate」(not more than 2.0 ppm).
(5) Mercury : When Sodium Hydroxide Solution is tested by Mercury Limit Test, its
content should not be more than 0.1 ppm.
Assay Accurately weigh about Sodium Hydroxide Solution corresponding to about 5 g of
sodium hydroxide (NaOH). Add freshly boiled and cooled water to make exactly 100
mL, and use this solution as the test solution. Take 25 mL of the test solution, and
proceed as directed under Assay in 「Sodium Hydroxide」. However, the number 40 in
the equation is replaced with 4.

975
 Sodium Hypochlorite
Chemical Formula: NaClO
Molecular Weight: 74.45 CAS No.: 7681-52-9

Definition The major component of this item is sodium hypochlorite. it includes acquiring
saline solution by electrolysis.
Compositional Specifications of Sodium Hypochlorite
Content Sodium Hypochlorite should be contain not less than 4.0% of available chlorine.
Acquirin saline solution by electrolysis should contain not less than 100ppm.
Description Sodium Hypochlorite is a colorless to light green-yellow liquid having an
odor of chlorine.
Identification (1) When Sodium Hypochlorite is tested by Flame Coloration Test, it shows
yellow.
(2) When diluted hydrochloric acid is added to Sodium Hypochlorite, gas is generated.
(3) Dip a red litmus paper in Sodium Hypochlorite. The color of the litmus paper
changes to blue, and then fades.
Assay Accurately weigh about 3 g of Sodium Hypochlorite, add 50 mL of water, 2 g of
potassium iodine and 10 mL of diluted acetic acid(1→4), and seal it immediately and set
aside in a dark place for 15 minutes. Titrate the liberated iodine with 0.1 N sodium
thiosulfate (indicator : starch solution). Separately, perform a blank test in the same
manner. However, pipette 10 mL of sodium hypochlorite water into a beaker, which is
prepared by preparation equipment of sodium hypochlorite. Add 50 mL of water, 1 g of
potassium iodide and 5 mL of acetic acid(1→4). Titrate free iodine with 0.01 N sodium
thiosulfate. The endpoint is sometime when the color of the liquid disappears.

1 mL of 0.1 N sodium thiosulfate = 3.545 mg of Cl

976
 Sodium Iron Chlorophyllin
Compositional Specifications of Sodium Iron Chlorophyllin
Description Sodium Iron Chlorophyllin occurs as a green-black powder. It is odorless or
has a slight, characteristic odor.
Identification (1) Add 5 mL of diluted hydrochloric acid to ignition residue, dissolve in a
water bath, add water to make 10 mL, make it weakly alkaline with ammonia
solution. add 10 mL of hydrogen sulfide solution, allow to stand for 30 minutes, and
filter. Perform the following tests for the filtrate and the residue on the filter paper.
① To the filtrate, add 1 mL of diluted hydrochloric acid. and perform Flame
Coloration Test. The color of the flame is yellow.
② Dissolve the residue on the filter paper with 2 mL of diluted nitric acid. add water
to make 5 mL, and add 2～3 drops of ammonium thiocyanate solution. A red color
develops.
(2) 0.1 g of Sodium Iron Chlorophyllin, add water to make 1000 mL. Take 10 mL of
this solution, add phosphate buffer (pH 7.5) to make 100 mL, and measure the
absorbance. The solution exhibits absorption maxima at wavelengths of 397～399 nm
and 654～656 nm. When the absorbances at the absorption maxima are expressed as
A1 and A2, respectively, A1/A2 should not be more than 9.5.
Purity (1) pH : 1 g of Sodium Iron Chlorophyllin, dissolved in 100 mL of water. pH of
this solution is 9.5～11.0.
(2) Specific Absorbance : Accurately weigh about 0.1 g of Sodium Iron Chlorophyllin,
dissolve in water to make exactly 1000 mL. Take 1 mL of this solution add
phosphate buffer (pH 7.5) to make exactly 100 mL, measure the absorbance quickly
at the absorption maximum near a wavelength of 398 nm, and calculate on the dried
basis.
= Not less than 400
Avoid direct sunlight during the procedure. and use light-resistant containers.
(3) Arsenic : It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
Loss on Drying When Sodium Iron Chlorophyllin is dried for 2 hours at 105℃, the loss
should not be more than 5.0%.

977
 Sodium Lactate
Sodium Lactate Solution

Chemical Formula: C3H5NaO3

Molecular Weight: 112.06 INS No.: 325

Synonyms: Sodium 2-hydroxypropanoate CAS No.: 72-17-3

Compositional Specifications of Sodium Lactate

Content Sodium Lactate should contain not less than 50.0% of sodium lactate (C3H5NaO3)
and 98.0～102.0% of the declared content.
Description Sodium Lactate is a colorless, clear, syrupy liquid. It is odorless or has a
slight, characteristic odor.
Identification Sodium Lactate responds to the tests for Sodium Salt and Lactate in
Identification.
Purity (1) pH : pH of Sodium Lactate should be within a range of 5.0～9.0.
(2) Citric acid, Oxalic acid, Tartaric acid, and Phosphoric acid : 5 mL of Sodium
Lactate is diluted to 50 mL with freshly boiled and cooled water. pH of 4 mL of this
solution is adjusted to 7.3～7.7 with 6 N ammonium hydroxide solution or 3 N
hydrochloric acid, if necessary. When 1 mL of calcium chloride solution is added and
boiled for 5 minutes in a water bath, it should not turn turbid.
(3) Sulfate : Weigh the amount of Sodium Lactate corresponding to 4.0 g of sodium
lactate and the content should not be more than amount that corresponds to 0.5 mL
of 0.01 N sulfuric acid.
(4) Cyanide : Weigh the amount of Sodium Lactate corresponding to 20 g of Sodium
Lactate and transfer into a 100 mL of flask, where water is added to bring the total
volume to 100 mL (Test Solution). Separately, 10 mL of sodium hydroxide solution
transfer into a 100 mL flask, where 100 mg of potassium cyanide is added. 0.1 N
sodium hydroxide solution is added to bring the total volume to 100 mL. Precisely 10 mL
of this solution transfer into a 1,000 mL flask, which is then filled to 1,000 mL with
0.1 N sodium hydroxide solution (cyanide standard solution, which contains 10 μg per
1 mL.). 10 mL of Test Solution transfer into a 50 mL beaker, while 0.1 mL of
cyanide standard solution and 10 mL of water are placed in another 50 mL beaker.
These beakers are placed in an ice bath and pH of the solutions are adjusted to 9～
10 with 20% sodium hydroxide solution. To avoid over heating, 20% sodium
hydroxide solution is slowly added while stirring. After settling for 3 minutes, pH of
the solutions are adjusted to 5～6 with 10% phosphoric acid using a pH meter. These
solutions are transferred into 100 mL separatory funnels containing 25 mL of cold
978
 water. Beakers and electrodes of pH meter are washed with a few mL of cold water
into the separatory funnels. 2 mL of bromine solution is added and the funnel is
capped with a stopper and then mixed. 2 mL of 2% sodium arsenic solution is added
and then the funnel is capped and then mixed. 10 mL each of n-butyl alcohol is
added to each transparent solution, a stopper is placed, and the solution is mixed.
Finally, 5 mL mixture of p-phenylenediamine·pyridine is added, mixed, and set aside
for 15 minutes. Aqueous phase is removed and alcoholic phase is filtered through a
filter paper. When absorbance of each Test and Standard solution is measured at 480
nm using 1 cm path length. Absorbance of Test Solution should not be bigger than
that of Standard Solution.
Solutions
∘p-phenylenediamine·pyridine mixed solution : 200 mg of p-phenylenediamine
hydrochloric acid is completely dissolved in 100 mL of water by heating. After
cooling, the solution is settled to precipitate. The supernatant is used to prepare
mixed solution. 128 mL of pyridine is dissolved in 365 mL of water, where 10 mL
of hydrochloric acid is added and mixed. 30 mL of p-phenylenediamine solution is
added to the resulting solution, which is settled for 24 hours before use. When this
mixed solution is stored in a brown bottle, it is stable for 3 weeks.
(5) Arsenic : It should be no more than 1.3 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(6) Lead : When 5.0 g of Sodium Lactate is tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content
should not be more than 2.0 ppm.
(7) Mercury : When Sodium Lactate is tested by Mercury Limit Test, its content should
not be more than 1.0 ppm.
(8) Chloride : Weigh the amount of Sodium Lactate corresponding to 0.5 g of Sodium
Lactate and the content should not be more than amount that corresponds to 0.7 mL
of 0.01 N hydrochloric acid.
(9) Methanol and Methyl ester : 40 g of Sodium Lactate is transferred into a round bottom
flask, where 10 mL of water is added followed by carefully adding 30 mL of 5 N
potassium hydroxide solution. It is then distilled with a condenser. 10 mL of alcohol is
previously added to the collecting vessel of the condenser. It is distilled until
approximately 95 mL is collected. Water is added to bring the total volume to 100 mL
(Test Solution). Separately, a standard solution is prepared so that it contains 10 mg of
methyl alcohol in 100 mL of diluted alcohol (1→10). 10 mL each of Test and Standard
Solution is transferred into a 25 mL flask, respectively. 5 mL each of potassium
permanganate·phosphoric acid solution is added, mixed, and set aside for 15 minutes,
where 2 mL each of oxalic acid·sulfuric acid solution is added and stirred with a glass
rod until it becomes clear. 5 mL of puccine sulfite solution is added and water is added to
bring the total volume to 25 mL. After 2 hours, absorbances of Test and Standard
Solutions near the maximum absorption band near 575 nm are measured using water as a
reference and 1cm path length. The absorbance of Test Solution should not be bigger
than that of Standard Solution.
979
 Solutions
∘Potassium permanganate·Phosphoric acid solution : 3 g of potassium permanganate is
added to a mixture of 15 mL of phosphoric acid and 70 mL of water. Water is
added to bring the total volume to 100 mL.
∘Oxalic acid·Sulfuric acid solution : 50 mL of sulfuric acid is carefully added to 50 mL
of water. After cooling, 5 g of oxalic acid is added and mixed until it dissolves.
(10) Sugars : When 5 drops of Sodium Lactate is added to 10 mL of hot Fehling's
solution, red precipitates should not be formed.
Assay Weigh precisely the amount of Sodium Lactate corresponding to 0.3 g of Sodium
Lactate and place in a flask. Add 60 mL of mixture of anhydrous acetic acid·glacial
acetic acid (1:4) and mix that. After settling for 20 mintues, it is titrated with 0.1 N
perchloric acid solution (indicator : 1 mL of crystal violet · glacial acetic acid
solution). The end point is where the color of the solution changes from blue to
green. Separately, a blank test is carried out in the same manner.
1 mL of 0.1 N perchloric acid solution 1 mL = 11.21 mg C3H5NaO3

980
 Sodium Lauryl Sulfate

INS No.: 487

Synonyms: Sodium dodecyl sulfate CAS No.: 151-21-3
Definition Sodium Lauryl Sulfate is a mixture of sodium alkylsulfates consisting chiefly
of sodium lauryl sulfate [CH3(CH2)10CH2OSO3Na].
Compositional Specifications of Sodium Lauryl Sulfate
Content Sodium Lauryl Sulfate should contain no less than 59.0% of total alcohols.
Description Sodium Lauryl Sulfate occurs as white or light yellow crystals having a
slightly characteristic odor.
Identification (1) Sodium Lauryl Sulfate solution (1→10) responds to the test for Sodium
Salt.
(2) Sodium Lauryl Sulfate solution (1→10) responds to the test by Sulfate Limit Test
after acidification with hydrochloric acid and boiling gently for 20 min.
Purity (1) Alkalinity: 1.0 g of Sodium Lauryl Sulfate is dissolved in 100 mL of water,
where phenol red solution is added. This solution is titrated with 0.1 N hydrochloric
acid. The consumption should not be more than 0.5 mL.
(2) The content of Sodium Chloride and Sodium Sulfate : When the test proceed as
directly under Sodium Chloride and Sodium Sulfate, the content of Combined Sodium
Chloride and Sodium Sulfate should not be more than 8.0% when tested by following
tests.
① Sodium chloride: Dissolve about 5 g, precisely weighed, in 50 mL of water. If
necessary, neutralize the solution with dilute nitric acid, add 2 mL of potassium
chromate solution, and titrate with 0.1 N silver nitrate. Perform blank test with the
same method.
1 mL of 0.1 N silver nitrate = 5.844 mg of NaCl
② Sodium sulfate: Dissolve about 1 g, accurately weighed, in 10 mL of water, heat
the mixture, and stir until completely dissolved. Add 100 mL of alcohol to the hot
solution and digest at a temperature just below the boiling point for 2 h. Filter
while hot through a sintered-glass filter crucible (G4), and wash the precipitate
with 100 mL of hot alcohol. Dissolve the precipitate in the crucible by washing
with about 150 mL of water, collecting the washing in a beaker. Acidify with 10 mL
of hydrochloric acid, heat to boiling, add 25 mL of barium chloride solution, and
allow to stand overnight. Collect the precipitate of barium sulfate on a suitable
tared, porous-bottom porcelain filter crucible, wash until free from chloride, dry,
and ignite to constant weight at 800℃
Weight of sodium sulfate (%) = The weight of barium sulfate (g) x 0.6086/weight of
981
 sample (g) x 100
(3) Unsulfated alcohols: Dissolve approximately 10 g of Sodium Lauryl Sulfate,
precisely weighed, in 100 mL of water, and add 100 mL of alcohol. Transfer the
solution to a separator, and extract with three 50 mL portions of solvent hexane. If
an emulsion forms, add sodium chloride to promote separation of the two layers.
Wash the combined solvent hexane extracts with three 50 mL portions of water, and
dry with anhydrous sodium sulfate. Evaporate hexane on a steam bath until odor is
no longer perceptible, when calculated on the dried basis at 105℃ for 30 minutes
and weighed, the amount should not be more than 4.0 %.
(4) Lead : When 5.0 g of Sodium Lauryl Sulfate is tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content
should not be more than 5 ppm.
Assay 150 mL of water and 50 mL of hydrochloric acid are added to 5 g of precisely
weighed Sodium Lauryl Sulfate, which is boiled for approximately 4 hours with a
reflux condenser. After cooling, it is extracted twice with 75 mL each of ether. Ether
extracts are combined and washed with water. Ether is removed by evaporation in a
water bath. The residue is dried at 105℃ for 30 minutes and weighed. The residue
represents the total alcohols.

982
 Sodium DL-Malate
Sodium dl-Malic Acid

Chemical Formula: C4H4O5Na2‧nH2O(n ＝ 3 or 1/2)

Molecular Weight: 232.10(3 hydrates)
187.06(1/2 hydrates) INS No.: 350(ii)

Synonyms: Malic acid sodium salt CAS No.: 676-46-0

Definition Sodium DL-Malate occurs as trihydrate and hemihydrate.

Compositional Specifications of Sodium DL-Malate
Content Sodium DL-Malate, when calculated on the dried basis, should contain within a
range of 98.0～102.0% of Sodium DL-Malate (C4H4O5Na2= 178.07).
Description Sodium DL-Malate occurs as white crystalline powder or lumps. It is
odorless and has a salty taste.
Identification (1) Proceed as directed under Identification (1) in 「DL-Malic Acid」.
(2) Place Sodium DL-Malate solution (1→20) into a porcelain dish, add 10 mg of
sulfanilic acid, and proceed as directed under Identification (1) in 「DL-Malic Acid」.
(3) Sodium DL-Malate responds to the test for Sodium Salt in Indentification.
Purity (1) Clarity and Color of Solution : When 1 g of Sodium DL-Malate is dissolved in
10 mL of water, the solution should be colorless and clear.
(2) Free Alkali : Weigh 1 g of Sodium DL-Malate, dissolve in 20 mL of freshly boiled
and cooled water, and add 2 drops of phenolphthalein solution. Even if become to
pink color, the color disappears on addition of 0.4 mL of 0.1 N sulfuric acid.
(3) Chloride : When 1 g of Sodium DL-Malate is tested by Chloride Limit Test, its
content should not be more than the amount that corresponds to 0.3 mL of 0.01 N
hydrochloric acid.
(4) Arsenic : It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(5) Lead : When 5.0 g of Sodium DL-Malate is tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content
should not be more than 2.0 ppm.
(6) Mercury : When Sodium DL-Malate is tested by Mercury Limit Test, its content
should not be more than 1.0 ppm.
(7) Readily Oxidized Matters : Weigh 0.1 g of Sodium DL-Malate, dissolve in 25 mL of
water and 25 mL of diluted sulfuric acid (1→20), and maintain at 20℃. Add 1.0 mL
of 0.1 N potassium permanganate and the pink color of the solution should not
disappear within 3 minutes.
983
Loss on Drying When Sodium DL-Malate is dried for 4 hours at 130℃, the weight loss
of trihydrate hydrate should be within a range of 20.5～23.5% and the weight loss of
hemihydrate should not more than 7%.
Residue on Ignition Sodium DL-Malate is dried for 4 hours at 130℃. When
thermogravimetric analysis is done with dried material, the residue should be within a
range of 78.2～84.4%.
Assay Dissolve 0.15 g of Sodium DL-Malate, precisely dried and accurately weighed, in
30 mL of acetic acid (for non-aqueous titration). Then it is titrated with 0.1 N
perchlorate solution. Potentiometer is used to confirm the end point. When the
indicator (1 mL of crystal violet·acetic acid) is used, the end point is the point where
the color turns from red through blue and to green. Separately in the same method,
the blank test is performed.
1 mL of 0.1 N perchlorate solution = 8.903 C4H4Na2O5.

984
 Sodium Metabisulfite
Sodium Pyrosulfite
Chemical Formula: Na2S2O5

Molecular Weight: 190.11 INS No.: 223

Synonyms: Sodium pyrosulfite CAS No.: 7681-57-4

Compositional Specifications of Sodium Metabisulfite

Content Sodium Metabisulfite should contain not less than 95.0% of sodium metabisulfite
(Na2S2O5).
Description Sodium Metabisulfite is white crystallite or crystalline powder with odor of
sulfur dioxide.
Identification Sodium Metabisulfite responds to the test for of bisulfite and sodium salts
in Identification.
Purity (1) Clarity and Color of Solution : When 1 g of Sodium Metabisulfite is dissolved
in 10 mL of water, the turbidity of the solution should be slightly turbid or better.
(2) pH : pH of Sodium Metabisulfite solution (1→10) should be within a range of 4.0～4.5.
(3) Thiosulfate : When 10% of Sodium Metabisulfite solution is acidified with sulfuric
acid or hydrochloric acid, the solution should be transparent.
(4) Arsenic : It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(5) Lead : Sodium Metabisulfite is tested by purity (2) for 「Sodium Metaphosphate」
(not more than 2.0 ppm).
(6) Mercury : When Sodium Metabisulfite is tested by Mercury Limit Test, its content
should not be more than 1.0 ppm.
(7) Iron : When 5.0 g of Sodium Metabisulfite is tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content
should not be more than 10 ppm.
(8) Selenium : Transfer 2.0 g of Sodium Metabisulfite, precisely weighed, into a 50 mL
beaker, add 10 mL of water and 5 mL of hydrochloric acid and boil to remove sulfur
dioxide, Test Solution. Separately, 1.0 g of Sodium Metabisulfite is precisely weighed
into a beaker, where 0.5 mL of selenium standard solution is added. Then a
reference solution is prepared by the same manner as for test solution. 2 g of
hydrazin sulfate is added into each beaker, heated and dissolved. After setting for 5
minutes, the resulting solution is transferred into a Nestler cylinder with adding water
to make 50 mL. The red color of this test solution should not be deeper than that of
reference solution. (Not more than 5 ppm)
Assay Approximately 0.2 g of Sodium Metabisulfite, precisely weighed, is transferred
into a flask with a stopper filled with 50 mL of 0.1 N iodine solution. It is then
dissolved. The stopper is placed and the flask is set-aside for 5 minutes. After 1 mL
of hydrochloric acid is added, the excess iodine is titrated with 0.1 N sodium
thiosulfate solution (indicator : starch solution).
985
1 mL of 0.1 N iodine solution = 4.753 mg of Na2S2O5

986
 Sodium Metaphosphate

INS No.: 452(i)

Synonyms: Graham's salt; Sodium hexametaphosphate; CAS No.: 10361-03-2
Sodium tetrapolyphosphate

Compositional Specifications of Sodium Metaphosphate

Content Sodium Metaphosphate, when calculated on the dried basis, should contain within
a range of 60.0～83.0% of phosphorus pentaoxide (P2O5 = 141.95).
Description Sodium Metaphosphate occurs as colorless～white glassy lump, flakes, or
white fibrous crystals or powder.
Identification (1) Sodium Metaphosphate solution (1→40) weakly acidic with diluted
acetic acid or sodium hydroxide solution, add 5 mL of egg white solution. A white
precipitate is formed.
(2) A solution of Sodium Metaphosphate (1→20) responds to the test for Sodium Salt in
Identification.
Purity (1) Arsenic : It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(2) Lead : Accurately weigh 5.0 g of Sodium Metaphosphate, transfer into a 150 mL
beaker, add 30 mL of water, hydrochloric acid in small portion to the solution until
the solid is dissolved throughly, and then add 1 mL of hydrochloric acid again. Heat
this solution for about 5 minutes and cool down. Add water to make 100 mL, and
adjust within a range of pH of 2~4 with sodium hydroxide solution(1→4) or
hydrochloric acid(1→4). Transfer this solution into 250 mL separatory funnel, where
water is added to make 200 mL. Then add 2 mL of 2% APDC solution and shake to
mix. Extract the solution 2 times with 20 mL each of chloroform, which is evaporated
to dryness in a water bath. Add 3 mL of Nitric Acid to the residue and heat it until
nearly evaporated. To this solution, add 0.5 mL of Nitric Acid and 10 mL of water,
concentrate it until the final solution becomes 3～5 mL, and add water to make 10
mL, Test Solution. When the test solution is tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content
should not be more than 4.0 ppm.
(3) Cadmium : When the test solution of (2) in Purity is tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content
should not be more than 1.0 ppm.
(4) Mercury : When Sodium Metaphosphate is tested by Mercury Limit Test, its content
should not be more than 1.0 ppm.
(5) Fluoride : 1 g of Sodium Metaphosphate is precisely weighed and is tested by purity (8)
for 「Calcium Citrate」(not more than 10 ppm).
Loss on Drying When Sodium Metaphosphate is dried for 4 hours at 110℃, the weight
loss should not be more than 5%.
Assay To about 0.2 g of Sodium Metaphosphate, previously dried and accurately
weighed, add 5 mL of nitric acid and 25 mL of water. It is then boiled for 30 minutes
987
 while adding water to supplement evaporating water. After cooling, add water to make
500 mL. It is used as the Test Solution which is filtered through a dried filter paper,
if necessary. Take 5 mL of Test Solution, and add 20 mL of vanadate · molybdate
solution and water to make 100 mL. It is mixed well by shaking and set-aside for 30
minutes. Absorbance of this solution is measured at 400 nm with 1cm path length. A
reference solution is prepared by the same procedure with 5 mL of water instead of
Test Solution. Separately, 10 mL of potassium phosphate, monobasic standard solution
is mixed with 20 mL of diluted nitric acid (1→25) and water to make 250 mL. With 10
mL, 15 mL, and 20 mL each of this solution, same procedure is followed to measure
absorbances, from which a calibration curve is prepared. From the calibration curve
and the absorbance of Test Solution, the amount of Phosphorus(g) in 5 mL of Test
Solution is obtained. The content of P2O5 is calculated from the following equation.
Weight of P(g) in 5mL of Test Solution × 2.291 ×
100
Content of P2O5(%) ＝ × 100
weight of the sample(g)

988
 Sodium Metasilicate
Chemical Formula: Na2O․SiO2․nH2O (n = 5 or
INS No.: 550(ii)
0)
Molecular Weight: 212.06(5hydrates)
CAS No.: 6834-92-0
122.06(anhydrous)

Definition Sodium Metasilicate is an anhydrous or hydrous (pentahydrate) silicate having

a 1:1 molar ratio of Na2O to SiO2.
Compositional Specifications of Sodium Metasilicate
Content Sodium Metasilicate should contain within a range of 90.0 ～ 110.0% as
indicated the percent, each, of SiO2 and Na2O.
Description Sodium Meatsilicate occurs as a white granular material.
Identification (1) Place a drop of Sodium Meatsilicate solution (2→100) on a spot plate.
Add to this 1 drop of 4 M sodium hydroxide and 1 drop of a solution prepared by
dissolving 0.5 g of ammonium molybdate in 10 mL of water, followed by the addition
of 3 mL of sulfuric acid. A deep-yellow color indicates the presence of silicate.
(2) Dip a clean nichrome wire into Sodium Meatsilicate solution (2→100) and place the
wire in the flame of a Bunsen burner. A bright-yellow color indicates the presence of
sodium.
Purity (1) Heavy metals: Transfer 10 g of Sodium Metasilicate to a 250-mL beaker, add
50 mL of 0.5 N hydrochloric acid, cover with a watch glass, and heat slowly to
boiling. Boil gently for 15 min, cool, and let the undissolved material settle. Decant
the supernatant liquid through Whatman No. 4 (or an equivalent) filter paper. Wash
the slurry and beaker with four 10-mL portions of hot water, decanting each washing
through the filter into the flask. Cool the filtrate, dilute with water to 100 mL, and mix
to obtain the sample solution. Take 20 mL of the sample solution, add 1 drop of
phenolphthalein solution, neutralize with ammonia solution and add 2 mL of dilute
acetic acid. When performed heavy metal test with this solution, the quantity should
not be more than 10 ppm.
Loss on Drying Dry at 105℃ for 2 hour. It should not be more than 2.0% for the
anhydrous and 42.0% for the pentahydrate.
Loss on Ignition Dry at 105℃ for 2 hour and ignite about 1 g, precisely weighed, at
1000℃ for 2 hour. It should not be more than 0.5% for the anhydrous and be between
40.5% and 42.5% for the pentahydrate.
Assay (1) Silicon Dioxide: In a beaker, acidify 1 g of Sodium Metasilicate, precisely
weighed, with 5 mL of hydrochloric acid, and evaporate to dryness on a steam bath.
Repeat the treatment with an additional 5 mL of hydrochloric acid, mix the residue
with 1 mL of hydrochloric acid and 20 mL of water, and heat for 1.5 hr on a steam
bath. Cool, filter through an ashless filter paper, and wash the paper and the
residue thoroughly with hot water. Transfer the filter paper to a platinum crucible
and dry at 105℃ for 2 hr. Gradually increase the heat to burn away the paper,
ignite the crucible and its contents to constant weight at 1000℃, cool in a
989
 desiccator, and weigh. Moisten the ignited residue with few drops of water, add 15 mL
of hydrofluoric acid and 5 drops of sulfuric acid (1:3), and heat the crucible
gradually until all of the acid is driven off. Ignite the residue to constant weight at
1000℃, cool the crucible in a desiccator, and weigh. The loss in weight is
equivalent to the weight of SiO2 in the sample taken.
(2) Sodium Oxide: Disperse 500 mg of Sodium Metasilicate, precisely weighed, in 150 mL
of water, and heat on a steam bath. Cool and add 2 to 3 drops of phenolphthalein
solution and 100 mL of 0.1 N sulfuric acid. Titrate an excess acid with 0.1 N sodium
hydroxide. Subtract the volume of 0.1 N sodium hydroxide from the volume of 0.1 N
sulfuric acid.
1 mL of 0.1 N sulfuric acid = 3.099 mg Na2O

990
 Sodium Methoxide
Chemical Formula: CH3ONa

Molecular Weight: 54.02 CAS No.: 124-41-4

Compositional Specifications of Sodium Methoxide

Content Sodium Methoxide should contain not less than 95.0% of sodium methoxide
(CH3ONa).
Description Sodium Methoxide occurs as a white, hygroscopic, fine power.
Identification (1) Sodium Methoxide solution (1→100) is alkaline.
(2) To 1 drop of Sodium Methoxide solution (1→100), add 0.1 mL of diluted sulfuric
acid (1→20) and 0.2 mL of potassium permanganate solution (1→300), and allow to
stand for 5 minutes. Add 0.2 mL of anhydrous sodium sulfite solution (1→4) and 3
mL of sulfuric acid, and then add 0.2 mL of chromotropic acid solution. A red-purple
to purple color develops.
(3) Sodium Methoxide responds to the test for Sodium Salt in Identification.
Purity (1) Clarity and Color of Solution : Weigh 5 g of Sodium Methoxide, and dissolve
in freshly boiled and cooled water to make 100 mL. Test Solution Measure 20 mL of
the sample solution, add 30 mL of freshly boiled and cooled water, the turbidity of
the solution should be slightly turbid or better.
(2) Arsenic : It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(3) Lead : When 5.0 g of Sodium Methoxide is tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content
should not be more than 5.0 ppm.
(4) Mercury : When Sodium Methoxide is tested by Mercury Limit Test, its content
should not be more than 1.0 ppm.
(5) Sodium Carbonate : Proceed as directed under Assay (3) (Not more than 0.5% as
Na2CO3).
(6) Sodium Hydroxide : Proceed as directed under Assay (4) (Not more than 2.0% as NaOH).
Assay (1) Weigh quickly and accurately about 0.5 g of Sodium Methoxide, using a
titration flask for Karl Fischer method, immediately add 10 mL of salicylic acid
methanol solution, stopper tightly, dissolve, cool, and proceed as directed un (1)
Direct Titration in Water Determination (Karl Fischer Method). Perform a blank test
on 10 mL of salicylic acid methanol solution in the same manner, and cal the sum
(A) of the contents of sodium hydroxide and sodium carbonate as sodium hydroxide
(NaOH) by the following formula :
(a - b) × f × 2.222
A(%) ＝ × 100
weight of the sample(g) × 1,000
a = Volume (mL) of Karl Fischer solution consumed in this test,
b = Volume (mL) of Karl Fischer solution consumed in the blank test,
991
 f = Weight (mg) of water corresponding to 1 mL of Karl Fischer solution.
Salicylic acid methanol solution : 10 g of salicylic acid is dissolved in 100 mL of
methanol solution for Karl Fischer. Prepare prior to use.
(2) Weigh quickly and accurately about 2 g of Sodium Methoxide, using an Erlenmeyer
flask with a ground-glass stopper, immediately and gently dissolve in about 50 mL of
freshly boiled and cooled water. add 10 mL of barium chloride solution (3→25),
stopper, allow to stand for 5 minutes, and titrate with 1 N hydrochloric acid
(indicator : 2 drops of phenolphthalein solution). Calculate the sum (B) of the
contents of sodium methoxide and sodium hydroxide as sodium me(CH3ONa) by the
following formula:
0.054 × comsumption of 1N hydrochlric acid(mL)
B(%) ＝ × 100
weight of the sample(g)
(3) Add 1 mL of 1N hydrochloric acid to the solution after titration in (2) above, boil
gently for about 5 minutes. cool, and titrate the excess acid with 0.1N sodium
hydroxide. Calculate the content (C) of sodium carbonate (Na2CO3) by the following
formula
0.053[1-comsumption of 0.1N sodium hydroxide(mL)] × 0.1
C(%) ＝ × 100
weight of the sample(g)
(4) Calculate the content (D) of sodium hydroxide (NaOH) by the following formula
D(%) ＝ A—(C × 0.377)
(5) Calculate the content (E) of sodium methoxide (CH3ONa) by the following formula
E(%) ＝ B—(D × 1.350)
Storage Standards of Sodium Methoxide
Store in a hermetic container.

992
 Sodium Molybdate
Chemical Formula: Na2MnO4․2H2O

Molecular Weight: 241.95 CAS No.: 7631-95-0

Compositional Specifications of Sodium Molybdate

Content Sodium Molybdate should contain more than 99.0% of Sodium
Molybdate(Na2MnO4·2H2O).
Description Sodium Molybdate occurs as colorless~ white crystals or crystalline powder.
Identification
(1) When Sodium Molybdate is tested by the test for Flame Coloring Test. It appears
yellow color.
(2) When Sodium Phosphate(Dibasic) is added to nitric acid acidic solution of Sodium
Molybdate, yellow color precipitates are formed. When ammonia solution is added, the
precipitates dissolve.
Purity (1) pH : pH of Sodium Molybdate solution(1→20) should not be more than 10.0.
(2) Clarity and Color of Solution : Weigh 1.0 g of Sodium Molybdate, add 20 mL of
water, and dissolve it. The turbidity of the solution should not be more than almost
clear.
(3) Ammonium : Approximately 1.0 g of Sodium Molybdate is precisely weighed and
transferred into a distillation flask. 140 mL of water and 2 g of magnesium oxide is
added and a distilling plant is attached to the flask. Add 20 mL of boric acid
solution(1→200) as solution for absorption to 100 mL flask. Immerse the end of the
distilling plant condenser to solution for absorption and adjust the temperature for
heating to flow by 5~7 mL per minute so that the distilled solution is made to 60
mL. Wash the end of the condenser with a little of water and add water to make to 100
mL. This solution is used as test solution. Separately, a reference solution, 1.0 mL of
ammonium standard solution(1 mL of this solution contains 0.01 mL of ammonium) is
taken into a flask for distilling. And 60 mL of distilled solution is made by the same
method of test solution. Wash the end of the condenser with a little of water and
add water to make to 100 mL. This solution is used as reference solution. Each 30
mL of test solution and 30 mL of reference solution is separately taken into Nessler
tube and add 6 mL of phenol-sodium nitroprusside solution. After shaking it to mix,
add 4 mL of sodium hypochlorite⦁sodium hydroxide solution and water to make to
50 mL and shake it. And then allow the solution to stand for 60 minutes. The color
of test solution should not be more intense than that of reference solution. (not more
than 0.001%).
Reagent
Phenol-sodium nitroprusside solution : Add water to 5 g of phenol and 25 mg of
sodium nitroprusside to make to 500 mL. The solution should be stored in a cold
dark place.
993
 Sodium hypochlorite⦁sodium hydroxide solution : Add water to 1.05 g of sodium
hypochlorite and 15 g of sodium hydroxide to make to 1000 mL. The solution is
prepared before use.
(4) Chloride : When 1.0 g of Sodium Molybdate is dissolved in 10 mL of dilute nitric
acid by heating, which is tested by Chloride Limit Test, its content should not be
more than the amount that corresponds to 0.14 mL of 0.01 N hydrochloric acid.
(5) Nitrate : Dissolve 1.0 g of Sodium Molybdate in 10 mL of water. When adding 0.05
mL of Indigo Carmine and 10 mL of Sulfuric acid, the blue color appears. This blue
color should not disappear completely in 5 minutes (not more than 0.003%).
(6) Sulfate : Dissolve 1.0 g of Sodium Molybdate in 5 mL of hot water. Add 5 mL of
nitric acid to evaporate to dryness in water bath. After adding 1 mL of hydrochloric
acid(1→4) and 10 mL of water to precipitate, add water to make to 50 mL. Filtered
solution is used as test solution. When it is tested by Sulfate Limit Test, its content
should not be more than the amount that corresponds to 0.1 mL of 0.01 N sulfuric
acid.
(7) Phosphate : 2.5 g of Sodium Molybdate is taken into beaker of polyethylene
material(PE). Dissolve it in 70 mL of water and adjust pH 4~5 with hydrochloric
acid(1→10). And then add 2 mL of bromine solution and again adjust pH 1.7~1.9 with
hydrochloric acid(1→10). Transfer this solution into glass beaker and heat it until it
starts to boil. After cooling at about 20 ℃, add water to make to 90 mL and transfer
it into a separatory funnel. Add 10 mL of hydrochloric acid and 20 mL of ether and
shake strongly it to mix for 3 minutes. Take water layer and it is used as A solution.
Wash ether layer with each 10 mL of hydrochloric acid 4 times. Add 0.2 mL of tin
chloride solution(This solution is made with 2 g of tin chloride by adding hydrochloric
acid to make to 100 mL) and shake it to mix for 30 seconds. And then add 25 mL of
ether to this solution. The color of this solution should not be more intense than that
of reference solution. Separately, 2.5 g of Sodium Molybdate is taken into beaker of
polyethylene material(PE). Dissolve it in 1 mL of phosphate standard solution(0.01
mg/mL) and 10 mL of silicate standard solution(0.01 mg/mL) and 60 mL of water
adjust pH 4~5 with hydrochloric acid(1→10). And then add 2 mL of bromine solution
and again adjust pH 1.7~1.9 with hydrochloric acid(1→10). Transfer this solution into
glass beaker and heat it until it starts to boil. After cooling at about 20 ℃, add water
to make to 90 mL and transfer it into a separatory funnel. Add 10 mL of
hydrochloric acid and 20 mL of ether and shake strongly it to mix for 3 minutes.
Take water layer and it is used as B solution. Wash ether layer with each 10 mL of
hydrochloric acid 4 times. Add 0.2 mL of tin chloride solution(This solution is made
with 2 g of tin chloride by adding hydrochloric acid to make to 100 mL) and shake it
to mix for 30 seconds. And then add 25 mL of ether to this solution. This solution is
used as reference solution (not more than 0.0005%).
(8) Silicate : Add water to A solution of purity (7) to make to 100 mL. Transfer it into
200 mL separatory funnel. After adding 10 mL of hydrochloric acid and 50 mL of
n-butanol, shake strongly it to mix for 5 minutes. Discard water layer and wash
994
 n-butanol with each 10mL of hydrochloric acid(1→10) 4 times. Add 0.5 mL of tin
chloride of purity (7) to n-butanol layer for 30 minutes and shake it to mix. And then
add n-butanol to make to 50 mL solution. The color of this solution should not be
more intense than that of reference solution. Separately, add water to B solution of
purity (7) to make to 100 mL. Transfer it into 200 mL separatory funnel. After
adding 10 mL of hydrochloric acid and 50 mL of n-butanol, shake strongly it to mix
for 5 minutes. Discard water layer and wash n-butanol with each 10mL of
hydrochloric acid(1→10) 4 times. Add 0.5 mL of tin chloride of purity (7) to
n-butanol layer for 30 minutes and shake it to mix. And then add n-butanol to make
to 50 mL solution. This blue solution is used as reference solution (not more than
0.005%).
(9) Lead : When 5.0 g of Sodium Molybdate is tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content
should not be more than 2.0 ppm.
(10) Iron : Add water to 0.4 g of Sodium Molybdate to make 40 mL solution. And then
add 5 mL of 10% Sodium hydroxide solution and boil it for 5 minutes. After cooling
it, add 30 mL of 10% tartaric acid solution, transfer it into a separatory funnel. Add
20mL of hydroxylamine hydrochloride⦁ammonium perchlorate and 3 mL of ammonia
water(2→5). After adjusting pH to pH 4, add 2 mL of 0.2% o-phenanthroline solution.
Keep it at 20~35℃ for 15 minutes and extract it by shaking strongly it with 10 mL
of each chloroform 2 times for 30 seconds. Collect the chloroform layer and add
chloroform to make to 25 mL. The color of this solution should not be more intense
than that of reference solution. Separately, add water to 0.8 mL of Iron standard
solution(0.01 mg/mL) to make 40 mL solution. And then add 5 mL of 10% Sodium
hydroxide solution and boil it for 5 minutes. After cooling it, add 30 mL of 10%
tartaric acid solution, transfer it into a separatory funnel. Add 20mL of hydroxylamine
hydrochloride⦁ammonium perchlorate and 3 mL of ammonia water(2→5). After
adjusting pH to pH 4, add 2 mL of 0.2% o-phenanthroline solution. Keep it at 20~3
5℃ for 15 minutes and extract it by shaking strongly it with 10 mL of each
chloroform 2 times for 30 seconds. Collect the chloroform layer and add chloroform
to make to 25 mL. This dark reddish brown solution is used as reference solution
(not more than 0.002%).
Reagent
Hydroxylamine hydrochloride⦁ammonium perchlorate solution : Add water to 25 g of
hydroxylamine hydrochloride and 4.3 mL of 60% perchlorate solution and 200 mL of
water and 46 mL of ammonia water. Adjust pH to pH 4 and add water to make to
500 mL.
Assay 0.6 g of Sodium Molybdate is precisely weighed and dissolved in 50 mL of water.
After adding 2 mL of acetic acid(1→3) and water to make to 200 mL, heat it until it
starts to boil. Then boil it with lead acetate solution for 5 minutes and keep it to
precipitate it. After filtering it, wash it until reaction of lead ion is disappeared. After
ashing it at 560~625℃, weigh of lead molybdate.
995
 Lead Molybdate 1 mg = 0.6590 mg Na2MnO4·2H2O
Reagent
Lead acetate solution : After adding water to 1.5 g of lead acetate to make to 20
mL, add 5 drops of acetic acid.

996
 Sodium Nitrate
Chemical Formula: NaNO3
Molecular Weight: 85.00 INS No.: 251
Synonyms: Chile saltpetre; Cubic or soda CAS No.: 7631-99-4
nitre

Compositional Specifications of Sodium Nitrate

Content Sodium Nitrate, when calculated on the dried basis, should contain not less than
99.0% of sodium nitrate (NaNO3).
Description Sodium Nitrate occurs as colorless crystals or as a white crystalline powder.
It is odorless and has a slightly salty taste.
Identification Sodium Nitrate responds to the tests for Sodium Salt and Nitrate in
Identifiation.
Purity (1) Clarity and Color of Solution : Proceed as directed under Purity (1) for
[Potassium Nitrate].
(2) Arsenic : It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(3) Lead : Accurately weigh 5.0 g of Sodium Nitrate into a 150 mL beaker, add 30 mL
of water. Add hydrochloric acid in small portion to the solution until the solid is
dissolved throughly and add 1 mL of hydrochloric acid. Heat this solution for
approximately 5 minutes and cool down. Add water to bring the total volume to 100
mL. Add sodium hydroxide solution(1→4) or hydrochloric acid(1→4) so that pH
becomes 2～4. Transfer this solution into 250 mL separatory funnel, where water is
added to make 200 mL. Then add 2 mL of 2% APDC solution and shake to mix.
Extract the solution 2 times with 20 mL each of chloroform, which is evaporated to
dryness in a water bath. Add 3 mL of nitric acid to the residue and heat it until
nearly evaporated. To this solution, add 0.5 mL of nitric acid and 10 mL of water,
concentrate it until the final solution becomes 3~5 mL, and add water to make 10
mL, test solution. When the test solution is tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content
should not be more than 2.0 ppm.
2% APDC Solution : 2.0 g of Ammonium Pyrolidine Dithiocarbamate is dissolved in
water to make 100 mL. Filter it when using.
(4) Mercury : When Sodium Nitrate is tested by Mercury Limit Test, its content should
not be more than 1.0 ppm.
(5) Nitrite : Accurately weigh about 1 g of Sodium Nitrate, dissolve in water to make
100 mL. Take 20mL of this solution into a 100mL volumetric flask and add water to
make 80 mL and add 10mL of sulfanilamide solution and mix. After 3 min add 1mL of
coupling reaent, dilute to mark with water, mix and let stand for 15min. Measure the
absorbance of the solution against water of 540nm using 10mm cuvettes. Read on the
standard curve the amount of nitrite corresponding to the actual absorbance. Then
997
 the content should not be more than 30 ppm.
Nitrite(ppm) = A W× 5
A : content of nitrite calculated from calibration curve (μg)
W : weight of sample(g)
Calibration Curve Preparation : Pipette into 100mL volumetric flasks 0,5,10,20 and
50mL of nitrite standard (corresponding to 0,2.5,5,10 and 25μg of nitrite) and dilute to
about 80mL with water. Add to each of the flask. 10mL of sulfanilamide solution and
mix. After 3 min add 1mL of coupling reagent, dilute to mark with water, mix and let
stand for 15 min. Measure the absorbance of the solution against water at 540 nm
using 10mm cuvettes. Draw a standard curve with absorbance as function of amount
of nitrite.
Sulfanilamide solution : Dissolve 2 g of sulfanilamide in 1000 mL dilute
hydrochloric acid TS
Coupling reagent : Dissolve 0.2 g of N-1-naphthylethylenediamine dihydrochloride in
water and dilute to make 100 mL.
Standard solution : Accurately weigh 0.75 g of sodium nitrite and dissolve in water and
dilute to make 1000 mL. Dilute 10 mL of this solution to 100 mL with water. Finally
dilute 10 mL of this preparation to 1000 mL with water.
(6) Chloride : When 0.1 g of Sodium Nitrate is tested by Chloride Limit Test, its
content should not be more than the amount that corresponds to 0.6 mL of 0.01 N
hydrochloric acid.
Loss on Drying When Sodium Nitrate is dried for 4 hours at 105℃, the loss should not
be more than 1%.
Assay Proceed as directed under Assay for [Potassium Nitrate].
1 mL of 0.1 N sulfuric acid = 8.500 mg of NaNO3.

998
 Sodium Nitrite
Chemical Formula: NaNO 2 INS No.: 250

Molecular Weight: 69.00 CAS No.: 7632-00-0

Compositional Specifications of Sodium Nitrite

Content Sodium Nitrite, when calculated on the dried basis, should contain not less than
97.0% of sodium nitrite (NaNO2).
Description Sodium Nitrite occurs as white to light yellow crystalline powder or granular
or rod-shaped lumps.
Identification Sodium Nitrite responds to the tests for Sodium Salt and Nitrite in
Identification.
Purity (1) Clarity and Color of Solution : When 1 g of Sodium Nitrite is dissolved in 20
mL of water, the solution should not be more than almost clear.
(2) Chloride : 1 g of Sodium Nitrite is dissolved in water to make 500 mL. Take 10
mL of this solution, add 3 mL of diluted acetic acid. and warm gradually. After the
gas is no longer evolved, add 6 mL of diluted nitric acid. When Chloride Limit Test
limit test is carried out with this test solution, it content should not be more than the
amount that corresponds to 0.4 mL of 0.01 N hydrochloric acid.
(3) Sulfate: 1 g of Sodium Nitrite is dissolved in water to make 100 mL. Take 10 mL
of this solution, add 1 mL of hydrochloric acid. 1 mL of diluted hydrochloric acid and
20 mL water is are added to the residue, Test Solution. When the test solution is
tested by Sulfate Limit Test, the content should not be more than the amount that
corresponds to 0.5 mL of 0.01 N sulfuric acid.
(4) Arsenic : It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(5) Lead : Sodium Nitrite is tested by purity (2) for 「Sodium Metaphosphate」(not
more than 2.0 ppm).
(6) Mercury : When Sodium Nitrite is tested by Mercury Limit Test, its content should
not be more than 1.0 ppm.
Loss on Drying When Sodium Nitrite is dried for 5 hours at 100℃, the weight loss should
not be more than 3%.
Assay 1 g of Sodium Nitrite, previously dried and accurately weighed, is dissolved in water
to make 100 mL, and use this solution as solution A. Weigh exactly 50 mL of 0.1 N
potassium permanganate, transfer into an erlenmeyer flask, and add 100 mL of water and 5
mL of sulfuric acid. Take 10 mL of solution A while keeping the tip of the pipette below
the surface of the liquid in an erlenmeyer flask. Allow to stand for 5 minutes, add 25 mL
of 0.1 N oxalic acid, exactly measured, warm to about 80℃, and titrate the excess oxalic
acid with 0.1 N potassium permanganate while hot. Perform a blank test in the same
manner.
1 mL of 0.1 N potassium permanganate = 3.450 mg of NaNO2
999
 Sodium Oleate
CH3(CH2)7 (CH2)7COONa
C=C
H H

Chemical Formula: C18H33NaO2

Molecular Weight: 304.45 INS No.: 470(ii)

Synonyms: Sodium salts of oleic acid CAS No.: 143-19-1

Description Sodium Oleate occurs as a white ～ yellow powder or a pale yellowish

brown chunk or lump with characteristic odor and taste.
Identification (1) Thoroughly, mix 50 mL of Sodium Oleate (2->50) in an aqueous
solution with 5mL of sulfuric acid (1->2) and filter this mixture with pre-water
wetted filter paper. Continue wash the residue until there is no acid indicated by the
methyl orange indicator. Filter the remaining residue with a dry filter paper. Place
2-3 drops of the filtrate and 1mL of sulfuric acid in a small test tube. Brown lining
is expected to show on the contact surface of both. Dissolve 1-3 drops of the
filtrate with 3-4mL of acetic acid (1->4) and add 1 drop of chromium trioxide
acetate solution (1->10) then slowly add 10~30 drops of sulfuric acid which would
show a dark purple color.
(2) The residue on ignition of Sodium Oleate responds to the test for Sodium Salt.
Purity (1) Clarity and Color of Solution: When 0.5g of Sodium Oleate is dissolved in
20mL of water, the solution should be almost clear.
(2) Free Alkali: Precisely weigh 5g of Sodium Oleate powder and add 100mL of
neutralized alcohol then heat this solution to dissolve. Filter insoluble substances and
rinse the residue until it has no color with 40℃ neutralized alcohol. Collect the
filtrate and rinse solution. After cooling, titrate the solution with 0.05N sulfuric acid
and its consumed amount is regarded as the a mL. Rinse the residue 5 times with
10mL of hot water and collect all the solutions in a beaker. Add 3 drops of
Bromophenol blue solution and titrate it with 0.05N sulfuric acid. The consumed
amount of 0.05N sulfuric acid is regarded as the b mL. When calculated by the
following equation, the content of free alkali should not be more than 0.5%
Content of Free Alkali (%) = [0.0040 * a + 0.0053 * b] /Weight of sample (g) * 100
(3) Arsenic: It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(4) Lead : Sodium Oleate is tested by Purity (2) for 「Sodium Metaphosphate」(not
more than 2.0 ppm).
Residue on Ignition Residue on ignition of Sodium Oleate should be within a range of 2
1000
2～25%.

1001
 Sodium Pantothenate

Chemical Formula: C9H16O5NNa

Molecular Weight: 241.22 CAS No.: 867-81-2
Compositional Specifications of Sodium Pantothenate
Content Sodium Pantothenate, when calculated on the dried basis, should contain within
a range of 5.6∼6.0% of nitrogen (N＝14.01) and 9.3∼9.7% of sodium (Na＝ 22.94).
Description Sodium Pantothenate is odorless white crystalline powder or powder with
slightly sour taste.
Identification (1) Proceed as directed under Identification (1) and (2) in 「Calcium
Pantothenate」.
(2) Sodium Pantothenate solution (1→20) responds to the test for Sodium Salt in
Identification.
Purity (1) pH : pH of Sodium Pantothenate solution (2→10) should be within a range of
9.0∼10.0.
(2) Specific Rotation : Approximately 1.25 g of Sodium Pantothenate, previously dried
for 24 hours in a vacuum desiccator (silica gel) and weighed, is dissolved in 25 mL of
water. Optical rotation of Sodium Pantothenate should be within a range of ＝ +25∼
+28.5°.
(3) Arsenic : It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(4) Lead : Sodium Pantothenate is tested by Purity (2) for 「Sodium Metaphosphate」
(not more than 2.0 ppm).
(5) Calcium : 1 g of Sodium Pantothenate is dissolved in 10 mL of water, where 0.5 mL
of diluted acetic acid and 0.5 mL of ammonium oxalate solution are added, precipitate
should not be formed.
(6) Alkaloid : Proceed as directed under Purity (5) in 「Calcium Pantothenate」.
Loss on Drying When Sodium Pantothenate is dried for 24 hours in a vacuum desiccator
(silica gel), the weight loss should not be more than 5%.
Assay (1) Nitrogen : 50 mg of Sodium Pantothenate, precisely dried and accurately weighed, is
proceeded as directed under nitrogen determination method.
(2) Sodium : Dissolve 0.6 g of Sodium Pantothenate, precisely dried and accurately
weighed, in 50 mL of acetic acid. It is then titrated with 0.1 N perchloric acid
(indicator : 1 mL Crystal violet glacial acetic acid solution). End point is where the
violet color of the solution becomes through blue then to green. Separately, a blank
test is carried out by the same procedure.
1 mL of 0.1 N Perchloric acid ＝ 2.30 mg Na
1002
 Sodium Phosphate, Dibasic
Chemical Formula: Na2HPO4

Molecular Weight: 141.96 INS No.: 339(ii)

Synonyms: Disodium phosphate; Disodium
acid phosphate CAS No.: 7758-79-4

Definition Sodium Phosphate, Dibasic has two forms, crystalline (2～12 hydrated) and
anhydrous, which is named dibasic sodium phosphate (crystalline) and dibasic sodium
phosphate (anhydrous), respectively.
Compositional Specifications of Sodium Phosphate, Dibasic
Content Sodium Phosphate, Dibasic, when calculated on the dried basis, should contain
not less than 98.0% of dibasic sodium phosphate (Na2HPO4 ＝ 141.96).
Description Crystalline form of Sodium Phosphate, Dibasic is colorless～white crystallite
or crystalline lump. Anhydrous form is white powder or granule.
Identification Sodium Phosphate, Dibasic solution (1→20) responds to test of sodium
salts(A), (B) and Phosphate in Identification.
Purity Crystalline form is dried for 3 hours at 40℃ and 4 hours at 120℃ prior to test.
(1) Water Insoluble substances : Sodium Phosphate, Dibasic is tested by Purity (1)
[Sodium Phosphate, Tribasic] and the content of water insoluble substances should
not be more than 0.2%.
(2) pH : pH of Sodium Phosphate, Dibasic solution (1→100) is measured using a glass
electrode and should be within a range of 9.0～9.6.
(3) Arsenic : It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(4) Lead : Sodium Phosphate, Dibasic is precisely weighed and is tested by purity (2)
for 「Sodium Metaphosphate」, its content should not be more than 4.0 ppm.
(5) Cadmium : Sodium Phosphate, Dibasic is precisely weighed and is tested by purity
(3) for 「Sodium Metaphosphate」, its content should not be more than 1.0 ppm.
(6) Mercury : When Sodium Phosphate, Dibasic is tested by Mercury Limit Test, its
content should not be more than 1.0 ppm.
(7) Fluoride : 1 g of Sodium Phosphate, Dibasic is precisely weighed and is tested by
purity (8) for 「Calcium Citrate」, its content should not be more than 10 ppm.
Loss on Drying When crystalline form of Sodium Phosphate, Dibasic is dried for 3 hours
at 40℃ and further dried for 4 hours at 120℃, the loss should not be more than
61.0%. When anhydrous form is dried for 4 hours at 120℃, the loss should not be
more than 2%.
Assay Dissolve 3 g of Sodium Phosphate, Dibasic, previously dried and accurately
weighed, in 50 mL of water. The solution is kept at 15℃ and titrated with 1 N
hydrochloric acid (indicator : 3～4 drops of Methyl Orange․Xylene Cyanol FF solution).
1 mL of 1 N hydrochloric acid ＝ 141.96 mg Na2HPO4
1003
 Sodium Phosphate, Monobasic
Chemical Formula: NaH2PO4‧nH2O(n = 2, 1, or
0)
Molecular Weight: 119.98(anhydrous) INS No.: 339(i)
Synonyms: Sodium dihydrogen phosphate;
Monosodium monophosphate; Sodium CAS No.: 7758-80-7
acid phosphate

Definition Sodium Phosphate, Monobasic has two forms, crystalline (hydrate, dihydrate)
and anhydrous, which is named monobasic sodium phosphate (crystalline) and
monobasic sodium phosphate (anhydrous).
Compositional Specifications of Sodium Phosphate, Monobasic
Content Sodium Phosphate, Monobasic should contain not less than 97.0% of monobasic
sodium phosphate (NaH2PO4 ＝ 119.98) , when calculated on the dried basis,
Description Crystalline form of Monobasic Sodium Phosphate is colorless～white
crystallite or crystalline powder. Anhydrous form of Monobasic Sodium Phosphate is
white powder or granule.
Identification Sodium Phosphate, Monobasic solution (1→20) responds to test of sodium
salt and Phosphate in Identification.
Purity Crystalline form is dried for 16 hours at 40℃ and 4 hours at 120℃ prior to test.
(1) pH : pH of Sodium Phosphate, Monobasic solution (1→100) should be within a
range of 4.2～4.6 by glass electrode method.
(2) Arsenic : It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(3) Lead : Sodium Phosphate, Monobasic is precisely weighed and is tested by purity
(2) for 「Sodium Metaphosphate」, its content should not be more than 4.0 ppm.
(4) Cadmium : Sodium Phosphate, Monobasic is precisely weighed and is tested by
purity (3) for 「Sodium Metaphosphate」, its content should not be more than 1.0 ppm.
(5) Mercury : When Sodium Phosphate, Monobasic is tested by Mercury Limit Test, its
content should not be more than 1.0 ppm.
(6) Fluoride : 1 g of Sodium Phosphate, Monobasic is precisely weighed and is tested
by purity (8) for 「Calcium Citrate」, its content should not be more than 10 ppm.
(7) Free Acid and Sodium Phosphate, Dibasic : 2 g of Sodium Phosphate, Monobasic is
dissolved in 40 mL of water. When the solution is neutralized with 1 N sodium
hydroxide solution or 1 N sulfuric acid, the consumed amount should not be more
than 0.3 mL. (Indicator : Methyl Orange Indicator Solution).
Loss on Drying Sodium Phosphate, Monobasic is dried for 1 hour at 60℃ and further
dried for 4 hours at 105˚. Loss on drying should be 2.0%, 15.0%, and 25.0% or less
for anhydrous, 1 hydrated, and 2 hydrated form, respectively.
Assay Dissolve 3 g of Sodium Phosphate, Monobasic, previously dried and accurately
weighed, in 30 mL of water. 5g of sodium chloride is added, which is dissolved by
shaking. While the solution is kept at 15℃, it is titrated with 1 N sodium hydroxide
solution (Indicator : 3～4 drops of thymol blue solution)
1004
1 mL of 1 N sodium hydroxide solution ＝ 119.98 mg NaH2PO4

1005
 Sodium Phosphate, Tribasic
Chemical Formula: Na3PO4

Molecular Weight: 163.94 INS No.: 339(iii)

Synonyms: Trisodium phosphate CAS No.: 7601-54-9

Definition Tribasic Sodium Phosphate has two forms, crystalline and anhydrous, which is
named tribasic sodium phosphate (crystalline) and tribasic sodium phosphate
(anhydrous), respectively.
Compositional Specifications of Sodium Phosphate, Tribasic
Content Tribasic Sodium Phosphate, when calculated on the dried basis, should contain within
a range of 97.0～103.0% of tribasic sodium phosphate (Na3PO4 ＝ 163.94).
Description Crystalline form of Tribasic Sodium Phosphate is colorless～white crystallite
or crystalline powder. Anhydrous form of Tribasic Sodium Phosphate is white powder
or granule.
Identification Tribasic Sodium Phosphate solution (1→20) responds to test of Sodium Salt
reactions (A), (B) and Phosphate reaction in Identification.
Purity Crystalline form is dried for 2 hours at 120℃ and 5 hours at 200℃ prior to the
following tests.
(1) Water Insoluble Substances : 10 g of Tribasic Sodium Phosphate is tested according
to Purity (1) for 「Sodium Acid Pyrophosphate」, the content should not be more
than 0.2%.
(2) pH : pH of an aqueous solution (1→100) of Tribasic Sodium Phosphate is measured
using a glass electrode method. Its should be within a range of 11.5～12.5.
(3) Arsenic : It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(4) Lead : Tribasic Sodium Phosphate is precisely weighed and is tested by purity (2)
for 「Sodium Metaphosphate」, its content should not be more than 4.0 ppm.
(5) Cadmium : Tribasic Sodium Phosphate is precisely weighed and is tested by purity
(3) for 「Sodium Metaphosphate」, its content should not be more than 1.0 ppm.
(6) Mercury : When Tribasic Sodium Phosphate is tested by Mercury Limit Test, its
content should not be more than 1.0 ppm.
(7) Fluoride : 1 g of Tribasic Sodium Phosphate is precisely weighed and is tested by
purity (8) for 「Calcium Citrate」, its content should not be more than 10 ppm.
Loss on Drying When crystalline form of Tribasic Sodium Phosphate is dried for 2 hours
at 120℃ and further dried for 5 hours at 200℃, the loss should not be more than
58.0%. When anhydrous form is dried for 5 hours at 200℃, the loss should not be
more than 5%.
Assay Dissolve 2 g of Tribasic Sodium Phosphate, previously dried and accurately
weighed, in 50 mL of water. The solution is kept at 15℃ and titrated with 1 N
hydrochloric acid (Indicator : 3～4 drops of Methyl Orange․Xylene Cyanol FF solution).
1006
1 mL of 1 N hydrochloric acid ＝ 81.97 mg Na3PO4

1007
 Sodium Polyacrylate
Compositional Specifications of Sodium Polyacrylate
Description Sodium Polyacrylate occurs as a white powder. It is odorless.
Identification To 0.2 g of Sodium Polyacrylate, add 100 mL of water by shaking, Test
Solution. This solution is tested as follows.
(1) To 10 mL of Test Solution, add 1 mL of calcium chloride solution, and shake. A
white precipitate is formed immediately.
(2) To 10 mL of Test Solution, add 1mL of magnesium sulfate solution, and shake. A
white precipitate is formed.
(3) To 10 mL of Test Solution, add 1 mL of cobalt chloride solution (1→25) and then
add 2～3 drops of ammonium chloride solution. Pale red precipitate is generated.
When the precipitate is dried, it turns violet.
(4) The residue on ignition of Sodium Polyacrylate responds to the test for Sodium Salt
in Identification.
Purity (1) Free Alkali : To 0.2 g of Sodium Polyacrylate, add 60 mL of water and
dissolve while shaking well, add 3 mL of calcium chloride solution and heat in a
water bath for about 20 minutes, cool, and filter. Wash the residue on the filter
paper with water, combine the filtrate and the washings, and add water to make 100
mL. Use this solution as solution A. Measure 50 mL of solution A, and add 2 drops
of phenolphthalein solution. No pink color develops.
(2) Sulfate : When 1 mL of dilute hydrochloric acid is added to 20 mL of Purity in (1),
which is tested by Sulfate Limit Test, its content should not be more than the amount
that corresponds to 0.4 mL of 0.01 N sulfuric acid.
(3) Arsenic : It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(4) Lead : Sodium Polyacrylate is tested by Purity (2) for Sodium Metaphosphate (not
more than 2.0 ppm).
(5) Residual Monomers : Accurately weigh about 1 g of Sodium Polyacrylate, transfer
into a 300 mL iodine bottle, add 100 mL of water, and dissolve by allowing to stand
for about 24 hours while shaking occasionally. Add 10 mL of potassium bromate
potassium bromide solution, accurately measured, shake well, add quickly about 10
mL of hydrochloric acid, immediately stopper tightly, shake well, transfer about 20
mL of potassium iodide solution into the top of the iodine bottle, and allow to stand
in a dark place for 20 minutes. Loosen the stopper to allow the potassium iodide
solution to flow into the solution, immediately stopper tightly, shake well, and titrate
with 0.1 N sodium thiosulfate (indicator : starch solution). Perform a blank test in the
same manner, and calculate the content by the following formula. It should not be
more than 1%.

1008
 0.0047 × (a - b)
Content of residual monomer(%) ＝ × 100
Weight of the sample(g)
a = volume (mL) of 0.1 N sodium thiosulfate consumed in the blank test,
b = volume (mL) of 0.1 N sodium thiosulfate consumed in this test.
(6) Low Molecular Weight Polymers : Accurately weigh about 2 g of Sodium
Polyacrylate, add 200 mL of water, and dissolve by setting it aside for 24 hours
while shaking occasionally. Add 50 mL of hydrochloric acid while stirring, warm in a
water bath at 40℃ for 30 minutes while stirring, and allow to stand for 24 hours.
Filter the solution, add 1 drop of phenolphthalein solution to the filtrate, add so
hydroxide solution (2→5) until the color of the filtrate changes to a slightly pink
color, and add drop wise diluted hydrochloric acid (1→30) until the pink color
disappears. Add 200 mL of water, add drop wise 25 mL of calcium chloride solution
while stirring, and warm in a water bath at about 40℃ for 30 minutes while stirring.
Filter this solution with suction through the above glass filter, wash the residue 3
times with about 10 mL of water each time, dry at 105℃ for 3 hours, allow to cool
in a desiccator, Accurately weigh, and calculate the content by the following formula.
It should not be more than 5%.
Weight of the residue(g) × 1.0324
Content of low molecular = × 100
weight polymers(%)
Weight of the sample(g)
Loss on Drying When Sodium Polyacrylate is dried for 4 hours at 105℃, the weight loss
should not be more than 10%.
Residue on Ignition Sodium Polyacrylate is dried for 4 hours at 105℃. When
thermogravimetric analysis is done with 1 g of Sodium Polyacrylate, the amount of
residues should not be more than 76%

1009
 Sodium Polyphosphate
INS No.: 451(i)
Synonyms: Sodium tripolyphosphate, CAS No.: 7758-29-4
Pentasodium triphosphate 15091-98-2

Compositional Specifications of Sodium Polyphosphate

Content Sodium Polyphosphate, when calculated on the dried basis, should contain within
a range of the equivalent of 53.0～80.0% of phosphorus pentaoxide (P2O5＝ 141.95).
Description Sodium Polyphosphate occurs as a white powder or as colorless to white
glassy fragments or lumps.
Identification (1) Dissolve 0.1 g of Sodium Polyphosphate solution in 10 mL of water,
add diluted acetic acid to make weakly acidic, and add 1 mL of silver nitrate
solution. A white precipitate is formed.
(2) Sodium Polyphosphate solution (1→20) responds to the test for Sodium Salt in
Indentification.
Purity (1) Clarity and Color of Solution : Weigh 1 g of powdered Sodium Polyphosphate,
add 20 mL of water, heat, and dissolve. It should be colorless and have a very
slightly turbid.
(2) Chloride : When 0.1 g of Sodium Polyphosphate is tested by Chloride Limit Test,
its content should not be more than the amount that corresponds to 0.6 mL of 0.01
N hydrochloric acid.
(3) Sulfate : Weigh 0.5 g of powdered Sodium Polyphosphate, add 30 mL of water and 2
mL of diluted hydrochloric acid, dissolve while boiling for 1 minute, cool. This solution
is tested by Sulfate Limit Test, its content should not be more than the amount that
corresponds to 0.5 mL of 0.01 N sulfuric acid.
(4) Orthophosphate : Weigh 1 g of powdered Sodium Polyphosphate, and add 2～3
drops of silver nitrate solution. No brilliant yellow color develops.
(5) Arsenic : It should be no more than 2.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(6) Lead : Sodium Polyphosphate is tested by purity (2) for 「Sodium Metaphosphate」
(not more than 4.0 ppm).
(7) Cadmium : Sodium Polyphosphate is tested by purity (3) for 「Sodium
Metaphosphate」(not more than 1.0 ppm).
(8) Mercury : When Sodium Polyphosphate is tested by Mercury Limit Test, its content
should not be more than 1.0 ppm.
(9) Fluoride : 1 g of Sodium Polyphosphate is tested by purity (8) for 「Calcium Citrat
e」(not more than 10 ppm).
Loss on Drying When Sodium Polyphosphate is dried for 4 hours at 110℃, the weight
loss should not be more than 5%.
Assay Proceed as directed under Assay for 「Sodium Metaphosphate」.

1010
 Sodium Propionate
CH3CH2COONa
Chemical Formula: C3H5O2Na
Molecular Weight: 96.06 INS No.: 281
Synonyms: Sodium propanoate CAS No.: 137-40-6

Compositional Specifications of Sodium Propionate

Content Sodium Propionate, when calculated on the dried basis, should contain not less
than 99.0% of sodium propionate (C3H5O2Na).
Description Sodium Propionate occurs as white crystals. crystalline powder, or granules.
It is odorless or has a slight, characteristic odor.
Identification (1) Proceed as directed under Identification (1) in 「Calcium Propionate」.
(2) Sodium Propionate responds to the test for Sodium Salt in Identification.
Purity (1) Clarity and Color of Solution : 1 g of Sodium Propionate, dissolved in 20 mL
of water. This solution should be colorless and slightly turbid.
(2) Free Acid and Free Alkali : 2 g of Sodium Propionate is dissolved in 20 mL of
freshly boiled and cooled water. When 2 drops of phenolphthalein solution and 0.3 mL
of 0.1 N hydrochloric acid are added, it becomes colorless. When 0.6 mL of 0.1 N
sodium hydroxide solution is added to the solution, it becomes red.
(3) Arsenic : It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(4) Lead : When 5.0 g of Sodium Propionate is tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content
should not be more than 5.0 ppm.
(5) Iron : When 5.0 g of Sodium Propionate is tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content
should not be more than 50 ppm.
(6) Mercury : When Sodium Propionate is tested by Mercury Limit Test, its content
should not be more than 1.0 ppm.
Loss on Drying When Sodium Propionate is dried for 1 hour at 105℃, the weight loss
should not be more than 5%.
Assay Accurately weigh about 200 mg of Sodium Propionate, previously dried, dissolve
in 50 mL of acetic acid for nonaqueous titration, and warm if necessary. Titrate with
0.1 N perchloric acid (indicator : 1 drop of crystal violet-acetic acid solution). Perform
a blank test in the same manner, and make any necessary correction.
1 mL of 0.1 N perchloric acid = 9.606 mg of C3H5O2Na

1011
 Sodium Pyrophosphate
Chemical Formula: Na4P2O7․nH2O (n= 10 or 0)
Molecular Weight: 10hydrates 446.09
INS No.: 450(iii)
anhydrous 265.90
Synonyms: Tetrasodium pyrophosphate;
Tetrasodium diphosphate; Tetrasodium CAS No.: 7722-88-5
phosphate
Definition Sodium Pyrophosphate occurs as crystals (decahydrate) called Sodium
Pyrophosphate (crystal) and as anhydrous called Sodium Pyrophosphate (anhydrous).
Compositional Specifications of Sodium Pyrophosphate
Content Sodium Pyrophosphate, when calculated on the dried basis, should contain not
less than 95.0% of sodium pyrophosphate ( Na4P2O7＝ 265.90).
Description Sodium Pyrophosphate (crystal) occurs as colorless∼white or white crystals
or as a white crystalline powder. Sodium Pyrophosphate (anhydrous) occurs as white
powder, granules or lumps.
Identification (1) 0.1 g of Sodium Pyrophosphate is dissolved in 10 mL of water, which
is weakly acidified with dilute acetic acid. When silver nitrate solution is added to
this solution, white precipitates are formed.
(2) Sodium Pyrophosphate solution (1→20) responds to test of Sodium Salt in
Identification.
Purity Perform the test of Sodium Pyrophosphate, previously dried at 105℃ for 4 hours
(1) Water Insoluble Substances : 10 g of Sodium Pyrophosphate is tested by Purity (1)
for 「Acidic Sodium Pyrophosphate」, its content should not be more than 0.2%.
(2) pH : When Sodium Pyrophosphate solution(1→100) should be within a range of 9.9～10.7.
(3) Arsenic : It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(4) Lead : Sodium Pyrophosphate is tested by purity (2) for 「Sodium Metaphosphate」
(not more than 4.0 ppm).
(5) Cadmium : Sodium Pyrophosphate is tested by purity (3) for 「Sodium
Metaphosphate」(not more than 1.0 ppm).
(6) Mercury : When Sodium Pyrophosphate is tested by Mercury Limit Test, its content
should not be more than 1.0 ppm.
(7) Fluoride : 1 g of Sodium Pyrophosphate is precisely weighed and is tested by
purity (8) for 「Calcium Citrate」(not more than 10 ppm).
Loss on Drying Sodium Pyrophosphate is dried for 4 hours at 105℃. It is then heat
treated for 30 minutes at 550℃. The weight loss should not be more than 0.5% for
anhydrous form and 38.0～42.0% for decahydrate form.
Assay After heat treatment, transfer approximately 500 mg of Sodium Pyrophosphate
into a 400 mL beaker, and add 100 mL of water. pH of the solution is adjusted to 3.8
using a pH meter. 50 mL of zinc sulfate solution (1→8) [125 g of ZnSO4․7H2O 125 g is
dissolved in water to make 1,000 mL solution. pH is adjusted to 3.8] is mixed. After 2
minutes, Free acid is titrated with 0.1 N sodium hydroxide until pH become 3.8 again.
However, after sodium hydroxide solution is added, the precipitated zinc hydroxide
1012
should be placed quietly to allow for melting again around the end point.
1 mL of 0.1 N sodium hydroxide solution = 13.30 mg Na4P2O7

1013
 Sodium Saccharin

Chemical Formula: C7H4O3NSNa‧2H2O

Molecular Weight: 241.21 INS No.: 954(iv)

Synonyms: Soluble saccharin CAS No.: 6155-57-3

Compositional Specifications of Sodium Saccharin

Content Sodium Saccharin, when calculated on the dried basis, should contain within a
range of 98.0～101.0% of soluble saccharin (C7H4O3NSNa ＝ 205.17).
Description Sodium Saccharin occurs as colorless to white crystals or crystalline
powder. It has strong sweet taste in Sodium Saccharin solution.
Identification (1) Dissolve 0.5 g of Sodium Saccharin in 10 mL of water, add 1 mL of
diluted hydrochloric acid, allow to stand for 1 hour, filter the white crystalline
precipitate formed, wash the residue on the filter paper thoroughly with water, dry at
105℃ for 2 hours, and measure the melting point. It should be within a range of 22
6～230℃.
(2) To 20 mg of Sodium Saccharin, add 40 mg of resorcinol and 10 drops of sulfuric
acid, and heat gently until the color of the mixture changes to dark green. After
cooling, dissolve in 10 mL of water and 10 mL of sodium hydroxide solution. The
solution becomes to green fluorescence.
(3) Dissolve 0.1 g of Sodium Saccharin in 5 mL of sodium hydroxide solution,
evaporate to dryness while gently heating. Careful to avoid being carbonized, and
continue heating until the odor of ammonia no longer develops. After cooling, dissolve
in about 20 mL of water, neutralize with diluted hydrochloric acid, filter. and then add
1 drop of ferric chloride solution to the filtrate. The color of this solution appears
purple to reddish-purple.
(4) Sodium Saccharin solution (1→10) responds to the test for Sodium Salt in
Identification.
Purity (1) Clarity and Color of Solution : When dissolve each 1 g of Sodium Saccharin,
previously powdered, in 1.5 mL of water and 70 mL of 95% alcohol, respectively,
both solutions should be colorless and clear.
(2) Free Acid and Free Alkali : Weigh 1 g of Sodium Saccharin, dissolve in 10 mL of
freshly boiled and cooled water, and add 1 drop of phenolphthalein solution. The
color of the solution should not become to pink. When add 1 drop of 0.1 N sodium
1014
 hydroxide again, the color of the solution should become to pink.
(3) Benzoate and Salicylate : Weigh 0.5 g of Sodium Saccharin, dissolve in 10 mL of
water, and add 5 drops of acetic acid and 3 drops of ferric chloride solution. No
precipitate is formed, and no purple to reddish-purple color develops.
(4) Arsenic : It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(5) Lead : When 5.0 g of Sodium Saccharin is tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content
should not be more than 1.0 ppm.
(6) o-Toluenesulfonamide : Weigh 40 g of Sodium Saccharin, dissolve in 200 mL of
water, extract 3 times with 30 mL of ethyl acetate each time, combine all the ethyl
acetate layers, wash with 30 mL of 25% sodium chloride solution, dehydrate to
anhydrous sodium sulfate, and then evaporate the ethyl acetate. Dissolve the residue
in 5 mL of solution of caffeine in ethyl acetate, Test Solution. Separately, measure
1.0 mL of a solution of o-toluenesultonamide in ethyl acetate (1→1,000), remove the
ethyl acetate while heating on a water bath, and dissolve the residue in 5 mL of a
solution of caffeine in ethyl acetate (1→5,000), Standard Solution.
Procedure Perform Gas Chromatography on the test solution and the standard
solution under the conditions given below. The ratio H/HS of the peak height of
o-toluenesulfonamide (H) of the test solution to the peak height of caffeine (HS)
does not more than the ratio H'/HS' of the peak height of o-toluenesulfonamide (H')
of the standard solution to the peak height of caffeine (HS'). Specially, caffeine·ethyl
acetate solution(1→5,000) is used as solution of internal standard.
Operation Conditions
- Column : Glass or stainless steel tube (length : 1 m, internal diameter: 3～4 mm)
- Column filler : To 177-250" diatomite for gas chromatography, add chloroform
containing 3% succinic acid diethylene glycol polyester and evaporate
it
- Detector : Hydrogen flame ionization detector(FID)
- Column temperature : Constant temperature of l95～205℃
- Carrier gas and flow rate : N2 and Adjust the column temperature and the flow rate
of the carrier gas so that the caffeine peak appears after
about 6 minutes.
(7) Selenium : 1 g of Sodium Saccharin is dissolved in 100 mL of water, and tested by
Cold Vapor Type in Atomic Spectrophotometry. The absorbance should not be more
than that of selenium standard solution (3 mL → 100 mL) (Not more than 30 ppm).
Loss on Drying When Sodium Saccharin is dried for 4 hours at 120℃, the weight loss
should not be more than 15%.
Assay Dissolve 0.3 g of Sodium Saccharin, precisely dried and accurately weighed, in 20
mL of acetic acid (For non-aqueous titration), and titrate with 0.1 N perchloric acid
(indicator: 2 drops of crystal violet-glacial acetic acid solution) until the color of the
solution changes from purple through blue to green. Perform a blank test in the same
manner.
1015
1 mL of 0.1 N perchloric acid = 20.52 mg of C7H4O3NSNa

1016
 Sodium Selenate
Chemical Formula: Na2SeO4

Molecular Weight: 188.94 CAS No.: 13410-01-0

Compositional Specifications of Sodium Selenate

Content Sodium Selenate should contain more than 98% of Sodium Selenate(Na2SeO4).
Description Sodium Selenate is white~ light gray, minute powder.
Identification
(1) Sodium Selenate responds to the test for Sodium Salt in Identification.
(2) When Sodium Selenate is quantitatively analyzed, it shows an absorption maximum
at a wavelength of the Sodium Selenate standards solution.
Purity (1) Clarity and Color of Solution : Dissolve 10 g of Sodium Selenate in 100 mL
of water. This solution should be clear.
(2) Grain : When observe the solution of Purity (1) under the bright light, there is no
the colored particle or even though there is it, it has a little colored particle.
Assay Sodium Selenate that corresponds to about 100 mg of Selenium, is precisely
weighed and is put into a flask for decomposition. Dissolve completely in 12mL of
nitric acid by shaking and mixing it and boil it gradually for 15 minutes. After cooling
it to room temperature, boil it with adding 80 mL of perchloric acid until smoke
disappears. It is transferred into 50 mL flask and wash a flask for decomposition with
ammonium chloride(4→200). Add washed solution and ammonium chloride(4→200) to
make to 50mL, this solution is used as test solution. Test solution and each standard
solution are tested by Atomic Absorption Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled
Plasma Emission Spectroscopy under below operation condition using the mixed
solution of ammonium chloride(4→200)·perchloric acid(20:1) as a reference. Prepare
the calibration curve and obtain concentration C (mg/mL) of selenium of test solution.
The content of Sodium Selenate is calculated using the following equation.
C × 2.3929 100
Content of Sodium Selenate(%)= Weight of sample × 1,000
(g)
Standard solution : 1.0 g of selenium is precisely weighted and is dissolved in
maximum volume of nitric acid. After expelling it, add 2 mL of water to evaporate to
dryness. Repeat this procedure 3 times and add 3 N hydrochloric acid to make to 1 L,
this solution is used as standard solution. Again take precisely 10 mL of this solution
and add water to make to 100 mL. Take 5, 10 and 25 mL of this solution and transfer
each solution into flask. And add 5mL of perchloric acid into each flask and boil it
slightly for 15 minutes. After cooling to room temperature, add ammonium chloride
solution(4→200) to make to 100 mL. 1 mL of each solution contains 5.0, 10.0 and 25.0
mg of selenium.
1017
Operation Condition
Fluorescent Lamp Selenium hollow cathode lamp
Analysis line wevelength 196 nm
Combustible support gas Air
Combustible gas Acetylene

1018
 Sodium Selenite
Chemical Formula: Na2SeO3

Molecular Weight: 172.94 CAS No.: 10102-18-8

Compositional Specifications of Sodium Selenite

Content Sodium Selenite should contain within a range of 98～101% of Sodium
Selenite(Na2SeO3).
Description Sodium Selenite is white~pale light grey, odorless crystalline powder.
Identification To 50 mg of Sodium Selenite, 5 mL of 0.1N hydrochloric acid is added
and dissolved, and 50 mg of stannous chloride is added. Then yellowish brown~orange
colored precipitates are generated.
Purity (1) Carbonate : 0.5g of Sodium Selenite is added to 1 mL of water and 2 mL of
diluted hydrochloric acid, bubbles should not be generated.
(2) Chloride : When 0.5g of Sodium Selenite is tested by Chloride Limit Test, the
content of chlorine should not be more than 0.05 mg (not more than 0.01%).
(3) Nitrate : 0.2 g of Sodium Selenite is dissolved in 3 mL of water, and brucine in
sulfuric acid solution is added to make 50mL, test solution. To 2 mL of nitrate
standard solution and 0.2 g of Sodium Selenite, brucine in sulfuric acid solution is
added to make 50 mL, reference solution. 50 mL of brucine in sulfuric acid solution
is blank test solution. Test solution, reference solution, and blank test solution are
heated in a water bath for 10 minutes, rapidly cooled at room temperature. Set the
spectrophotometer to zero with blank test solution, measure the absorbance at
wavelength 410 nm, the absorbance of test solution should not be higher than that of
reference solution (not more than 0.01%).
Solutions
Brucine in sulfuric acid solution : 600mg of brucine in sulfuric acid is dissolved in
600 mL of sulfuric acid solution(2→3) which is previously prepared, to make 1000
mL.
Nitrate standard solution : 163 mg of potassium nitrate is dissolved in water to make
100 mL, 10 mL of this solution is diluted to 1000 mL (0.01mg NO3/mL).
(4) Selenate and Sulphate : To 0.5 g of Sodium Selenite, 20 mg of sodium carbonate
and 10 mL of hydrochloric acid are added, mixed, and slowly evaporated in a hood.
The residue is washed with 1 mL of hydrochloric acid, evaporated again, and dried.
To dried residue, 15 mL of hot water and 1 mL of hydrochloric acid are added and
tested by Sulfate Limit Test, it should not be more than the turbidity generated by
0.15 mg of sulfuric acid (not more than 0.03%).
Assay Sodium Selenite that corresponds to about 100 mg of Selenium, is precisely
weighed and is put into a flask for decomposition. Dissolve completely in 12mL of
nitric acid by shaking and mixing it and boil it gradually for 15 minutes. After cooling
it to room temperature, boil it with adding 80 mL of perchloric acid until smoke
1019
 disappears. It is transferred into 50 mL flask and wash a flask for decomposition with
ammonium chloride(4→200). Add washed solution and ammonium chloride(4→200) to
make to 50mL, this solution is used as test solution. Test solution and each standard
solution are tested by Atomic Absorption Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled
Plasma Emission Spectroscopy under below operation condition using the mixed
solution of ammonium chloride(4→200)·perchloric acid(20:1) as a reference. Prepare
the calibration curve and obtain concentration C (mg/mL) of selenium of test solution.
The content of Sodium Selenite is calculated using the following equation.
C × 2.1902 100
Content of Sodium Selenite(%)= Weight of sample × 1,000
(g)
Standard solution : 1.0 g of selenium is precisely weighted and is dissolved in
maximum volume of nitric acid. After expelling it, add 2 mL of water to evaporate to
dryness. Repeat this procedure 3 times and add 3 N hydrochloric acid to make to 1 L,
this solution is used as standard solution. Again take precisely 10 mL of this solution
and add water to make to 100 mL. Take 5, 10 and 25 mL of this solution and transfer
each solution into flask. And add 5mL of perchloric acid into each flask and boil it
slightly for 15 minutes. After cooling to room temperature, add ammonium chloride
solution(4→200) to make to 100 mL. 1 mL of each solution contains 5.0, 10.0 and 25.0
mg of selenium.
Operation Condition
Fluorescent Lamp Selenium hollow cathode lamp
Analysis line wevelength 196 nm
Combustible support gas Air
Combustible gas Acetylene

1020
 Sodium Sesquicarbonate
Chemical Formula: Na2CO3‧NaHCO3‧2H2O

Molecular Weight: 226.03 INS No.: 500(iii)

Synonyms: Sodium monohydrogen
dicarbonate CAS No.: 533-96-0

Compositional Specifications of Sodium Sesquicarbonate

Content Sodium Sesquicarbonate should contain within a range of 35.0∼38.6% of sodium
hydrogencarbonate (NaHCO3) and 46.4∼50.0% of sodium carbonate (Na2CO3).
Description Sodium Sesquicarbonate is white crystallite, crumb, or crystalline powder.
Identification Sodium Sesquicarbonate solution (1→10) responds to the tests for
Carbonate Salts and Sodium Salts in Identification.
Purity (1) Lead : Sodium Sesquicarbonate is tested by Purity (2) for 「Sodium
Metaphosphate」(not more than 2.0 ppm).
(2) Arsenic : It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(3) Mercury : When Sodium Sesquicarbonate is tested by Mercury Limit Test, its
content should not be more than 1.0 ppm.
(4) Iron : 0.5 g of Sodium Sesquicarbonate is dissolved in 10 mL of dilute hydrochloric
acid. Water is added to this solution to bring the total volume to 50 mL. 40 mg of
ammonium persulfate and 10 mL of ammonium thiocyanate solution (2→25) are added
to the solution. The resulting color should not be deeper than the reference color
(Not more than 0.002%).
(5) Sodium Chloride : Approximately 10 g of Sodium Sesquicarbonate is precisely
weighed and dissolved in 50 mL of water. The solution is acidified slightly by adding
nitric acid. 1 mL of ferric ammonium sulfate solution (8→100) and 1 mL of 0.05 N
ammonium thiocynate solution are added to the solution, which is titrated with 0.05 N
silver nitrate solution until the red color disappears. The solution is back titrated with
0.05 N ammonium thiocynate solution until it turns pale red. The total consumed
amount of 0.05 N ammonium thiocynate solution is subtracted from the consumed
amount of 0.05 N silver nitrate solution (Not more than 0.5%).
1 mL of 0.05 N silver nitrate solution ＝ 2.922 mg sodium chloride
Water Content Water content is calculated by subtracting the contents of sodium
hydrogen carbonate(%), sodium carbonate(%), and sodium chloride(%) from 100%.
Water content should be within a range of 13.8∼16.7%.
Assay (1) Sodium Hydrogen carbonate : Approximately 3 g of Sodium Sesquicarbonate is
precisely weighed and transferred into a 600 mL beaker with 50 mL of 0.5 N sodium
hydroxide solution. It is then dissolved in 150 mL of carbon dioxide free water. 200 mL
of 0.48 M barium chloride (pH 8.0) is added to the beaker while stirring. The solution
1021
 is titrated with 0.5 N hydrochloric acid until pH is maintained at 8.8 for 1 minute.
Separately, a blank test is carried out with 2.1 g of first grade sodium carbonate
standard.
(B — S) × 42.00
Content(%) ＝ weight of the × 100
sample(mg)
S ：Consumed amount of 0.5 N hydrochloric acid for Test Solution (mL)
B ：Consumed amount of 0.5 N hydrochloric acid for blank test with 2.1 g of first
grade sodium carbonate standard (mL)
(2) Sodium Carbonate : Total alkalinity (as sodium oxide, Na2O) of the sample is
measured. Approximately 4.2 g of Sodium Sesquicarbonate is precisely weighed and
dissolved in 100 mL of water. Methyl orange solution is added and the solution is
shaken vigorously. The solution is then titrated with 1N sulfuric acid. The consumed
amount (mL) of sulfuric acid is S.
S × 30.99
Content of sodium oxide(%) ＝ weight of the × 100
sample(mg)

Content of Sodium Oxide(%) ＝ [Content of Sodium oxide(%) — (content of sodium hydrogen

carbonate(%) × 0.3689)] × 1.7099
1.7099 : Conversion factor of sodium oxide to sodium carbonate

1022
 Sodium Silicoaluminate

INS No.: 554

Synonyms: Sodium aluminosilicate CAS No.: 1344-00-9

Definition Sodium Silicoaluminate is a kind of sodium aluminum silicate which contains

Na2O : Al2O3 : SiO2 with a molar ration of 1:1:13.2.
Compositional Specifications of Sodium Silicoaluminate
Content Sodium Silicoaluminate, when calculated on the dried basis at 105℃ for 2 hours,
should contain within a range of 66.0～71.0% of silica (SiO2), 9.0～13.0% of alumina
(Al2O3), and 4.0～7.0% of sodium oxide (Na2O).
Description Sodium Silicoaluminate is fine amorphous white powder or particle.
Purity (1) Arsenic : It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(2) Lead : Sodium Silicoaluminate is tested by purity (2) for 「Sodium Metaphosphate」
(not more than 5.0 ppm).
(3) Mercury : When Sodium Silicoaluminate is tested by Mercury Limit Test, its content
should not be more than 1.0 ppm.
Loss on Drying When Sodium Silicoaluminate is dried for 2 hours at 105℃, the weight
loss should not be more than 8.0%.
Loss on Ignition Sodium Silicoaluminate is dried for 2 hours at 150℃. When
thermogravimetric analysis is done with 5 g of the dried material at 900℃ until the
weight becomes constant, the weight loss should be within a range of 8.0~13.0%.
Assay (1) Silicon Oxide : Sodium Silicoaluminate is dried for 2 hours at 105℃. Transfer
500 mg of it ,accurately weighed, into a 250 mL beaker (inner wall of the beaker is
washed with a small amount of water), where 30 mL of sulfuric acid and 15 mL of
hydrochloric acid are added. It is then heated until thick white smoke is generated.
After cooling, 15 mL of hydrochloric acid is added again and it is then heated until
thick white smoke is generated. After cooling, 70 mL of water is added to the
solution, which is filtered through a Whatman No. 40 filter paper or its equivalent.
The residue and the filter paper are washed with hot water until perchloric acid is
removed. The residues along with that filter paper are transferred into a platinum
crucible with a known weight. The content in the platinum crucible is carbonized and
then heat-treated at 900℃ until the weight becomes constant. It is then cooled and
weighed. The residue is wetted with small amount of water, where 15 mL of
hydrofluoric acid and 8 drops of sulfuric acid are added and heated on a hot plate
until sulfite gas evolves. After cooling, 5 mL of water, 10 mL of hydrofluoric acid,
and 3 drops of sulfuric acid are added and evaporated to dryness on a hot plate. It
is heated carefully until sulfite gas subsides. It is further heated at 900℃ until the
weight becomes constant. It is then cooled and weighed. The loss in weight is the
weight of silicon dioxide.
(2) Aluminum Oxide : Sodium Silicoaluminate is dried for 2 hours at 105℃. 500 mg of
1023
 Sodium Silicoaluminate is transferred into a platinum dish, accurately weighed, and it
is wetted with 8~10 drops of water. 25 mL of 70% perchloric acid and 10 mL of
hydrofluoric acid are added and it is then heated until thick white smoke is
generated. After cooling, 10mL of hydrofluoric acid is added again and it is then
heated until thick white smoke is generated. After cooling, the residues are dissolved
in water to make 250 mL, Test Sock Solution. 10 mL of this solution is diluted to
100 mL, Test Solution. In this case, the test solution, which is not used, is collected
in a 250 mL Erlenmeyer flask for quantitative analysis of sodium oxide. Adjust
absorbance or water at a wavelength 309.3 nm to 0 by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometer, prepare a calibration curve between the absorption and the
aluminium concentration of Standard Solution(Standard : Aluminum chloride) which
contain each 5, 10, 20 and 50 ㎍ of aluminum per 1 mL. The concentration(C) of
aluminum in 1 mL of test solution is measured from the spectrophotometer. The
amount of sodium oxide is calculated from the following equation.
Amount of aluminum oxide (mg) = (250C × 10 × 1.8895)/1,000
(3) Sodium Oxide : The stock solution, obtained Aluminum Oxide Test, is used as Test
Soluton. Adjust absorbance or water at a wavelength 589.0 nm to 0 by Atomic
Absorption Spectrophotometer, and transmission of sodium chloride standard
solution(1 mL of this solution contains 200 ㎍ of sodium) to 100%. Read
%transmittancy from three of standard solutions(1 mL of each solution contains 50,
100 and 150 ㎍) and prepare a calibration curve between the transmission and the
sodium concentration. The concentration(C) of sodium in 1 mL of test solution is
measured from the spectrophotometer. The amount of sodium oxide is calculated from
the following equation.
Amount of sodium oxide (mg) = (250C × 1,348/1,000) - F
F is obtained by the following method and corresponds the amount of sodium sulfate
that is included in the sample. Sodium Silicoaluminate is dried for 2 hours at 105℃,
12.5 g of which is precisely weighed and mixed with 240 mL of water in a high
speed blender for longer than 5 minutes. This mixture is transferred into a 250 mL
volumetric flask and water is added to fill the flask, Test Solution. A stopper is placed
and it is shaken to thoroughly mix the sample. Electrical conductivity is measured
using an appropriate tester. Separately, a calibration curve is prepared using a set of
standard solutions containing 50, 200, 500 mg of sodium sulfate per 100 mL. The
concentration of sodium sulfate (C') is obtained in terms of mg from the calibration
curve. F is obtained by the following equation
F ＝ 0.437(2.5C' × w/W)
w : amount of sample used in quantitative test of sodium oxide
W : amount of sample used to prepare test solution
1024
 Sodium Stearoyl Lactylate
INS No.: 481(i)
Synonyms: Sodium stearoyl lactate CAS No.: 25383-99-7

Definition Sodium Stearoyl Lactylate is a mixture of sodium stearoyl lactylate (major

component) and its related acids and sodium salts.
Compositional Specifications of Sodium Stearoyl Lactylate
Description Sodium Stearoyl Lactylate is white～yellow powder, thin platelet, or lump
with unique scent.
Identification (1) 2 g of Sodium Stearoyl Lactylate is well mixed with 10 mL of dilute
hydrochloric acid, which is then heated in a water bath for 5 minutes and filtered
while hot. Filtrate is neutralized with ammonia standard solution. This test solution
responds to the test for Sodium Salt in Identification.
(2) The filtrate in (1) responds to the test for Lactate Salt in Identification.
(3) To the filter residue in (1), add 30 mL of sodium hydroxide, which is then heated
for 30 minutes in a water bath. After cooling, 20 mL of dilute hydrochloric acid is
added, which is then extracted twice with 30 mL of ether. Ether extracts are added
and washed with 20 mL of water, which is then dehydrated with anhydrous sodium
sulfate. Ether is evaporated in a water bath. The melting point of the residue is in a
temperature range of 54∼69℃.
(4) 1 g of Sodium Stearoyl Lactylate dissolves instantaneously in 20 mL of benzene.
Purity (1) Acid Value : Approximately 0.5 g of Sodium Stearoyl Lactylate is accurately
weighed, 20 mL mixture of alcohol and ether(1:1) is added, (heated and dissolved if
necessary) test solution, and proceeded as directed under Acid Value in Fats Test.
The acid value should be within a range of 60～80.
(2) Ester Value : Approximately 1 g of Sodium Stearoyl Lactylate is precisely weighed
and dissolved in 25 mL of 0.5 N alcoholic potassium hydroxide and 40 mL of
toluene, Test Solution. It is proceeded as directed under Saponification Value and
Esther value in Fats Test, and the ester value should be within a range of 150∼190.
(3) Arsenic : It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(4) Lead : When 5.0 g of Sodium Stearoyl Lactylate is tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content
should not be more than 2.0 ppm.
(5) Cadmium : When 5.0g of Sodium Stearoyl Lactylate is tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content
should not be more than 1.0 ppm.
(6) Mercury : When Sodium Stearoyl Lactylate is tested by Mercury Limit Test, its
content should not be more than 1.0 ppm.
(7) Total lactates
∘Test Solution : Approximately 200 mg of Sodium Stearoyl Lactylate is accurately
weighed, where 10 mL of 0.5 N alcoholic solution of potassium hydroxide and 10 mL
1025
 of water. Air condenser is attached and the solution is gently boiled for 45 minutes.
Inner walls of the condenser and the flask are washed with 40 mL of water. The
solution is then heated in a water bath until the scent of alcohol disappears. 6 mL of
sulfuric acid (1→2) is added to the solution, which is then heated until fatty acid
dissolves. The solution is then cooled to 60℃, and 25 mL of petroleum ether is
added and stir mixed. This mixture is carefully transferred into a separatory funnel
with a stop cock and settled until aqueous phase is separated. The aqueous phase is
separated out into a 100 mL volumetric flask. Petroleum phase is washed several
times with 20 mL of water each time. This water is added to the volumetric flask
and the total volume is brought up to 100 mL. Test solution is prepared by adding
water to 1 mL of this solution and bringing up the total solution to 100 mL.
∘Test procedure : 1 mL of test solution and 1 mL of water as a reference are placed in
test tubes. 1 drop of copper sulfate standard solution is added to each test tube and
well mixed by shaking. 9 mL of sulfuric acid is quickly added using a burette. Stop
cock is loosely placed on the test tube that is then heated at 90℃ for exactly 5
minutes in a water bath. The tube is then cooled below 20℃ in an ice bath for
exactly 5 minutes. 3 drops of p-phenyl phenol agent are added. While shaking, the
tube is heated for 30 minutes at 30℃ in a water bath. The tube is then heated for
90 seconds at 90℃ then cooled to room temperature with ice water. Optical density
is measure using an 1 cm path length cell at a wavelength of 570 nm. Using a
calibration curve, that is prepared separately, the amount of total lactates (mg) in the
test solution is obtained. The amount of total lactates from Sodium Stearoyl Lactylate
should be within a range of 31∼34%.
∘Calibration curve : Lithium lactate is dried at 105℃ for 4 hours. Precisely weighed
1.067 g of dried lithium lactate is dissolved in water so that the total volume is 1000
mL. 10 mL of this solution is further diluted to 100 mL. 1, 2, 4, 6, and 8 mL of this
solution is diluted to 100 mL, respectively. Each contains 1, 2, 4, 6, and 8 μg of
lactic acid, respectively. 1 mL of each of this solution is taken. By following the
procedure described after [1 drop of copper sulfate standard solution is added] in
Test Procedure section, optical density is measured and a calibration curve is
prepared.
(8) Sodium: Transfer 250 mg of Sodium Stearoyl Lactylate, accurately weighed, to a
beaker, dissolve by heating in 10 mL of alcohol and quantitatively transfer the
solution into a 25 mL of volumetric flask. Wash the beaker twice with 5 mL portions
of alcohol, combine the washings to the flask, and add alcohol to make 25 mL.
Transfer 0.25 mL of this solution, precisely weighed, to a second 25 mL volumetric
flask, and add 2.5mL of lanthanum standard stock solution and water to make 25mL,
Test Solution. Measure Atomic absorbance by the use of spectrophotometer by
following operation condition. Separately, measure absorbance values of sodium
standard solution and prepare a calibration curve. Absorbance of the test solution is
substituted to the calibration curve, and the concentration of sodium C(μg/mL) is
1026
 obtained. The content should be within a range of 3.5～5.0%.
∘Standard Solution : Transfer 0.2, 0.4 and 0.5 mL of the sodium standard stock
solution into each of 100 mL volumetric flasks, and add 10 mL of lanthanum solution,
respectively and water to make 100 mL. (1 mL of the solution contains 2.0, 4.0, and
5.0μg of sodium, respectively.)
2.5 × C
Sodium(%)= × 100
weight of the sample(mg)

Operation Conditions
-Gas used : Combustible gas (acetylene or hydrogen)
Combustible support gas (air)
-Lamp : Cadmium hollow cathode lamp
-Wavelength : 589 nm

1027
 Sodium Sulfate
Chemical Formula: Na2SO4‧nH2O(n＝0 or 10)
Molecular Weight: 10hydrates 322.19
anhydrous 142.04 INS No.: 514(i)
CAS No.:
7757-82-6(anhydrous)
Synonyms: Glauber's salt
7727-73-3(10hydrates)

Definition Sodium Sulfate occurs anhydrous or contains 10 molecules of water of

crystallization, each call sodium sulfate (crystal) and Sodium Sulfate (anhydrous).
Compositional Specifications of Sodium Sulfate
Content Sodium Sulfate, when calculated on the dried basis, should contain not less than
99.0% of sodium sulfate (Na2SO4 = 142.05).
Description Sodium Sulfate occurs as colorless crystals or as a white crystalline powder.
Identification Sodium Sulfate responds to the tests for Sodium Salt and Sulfate in
Identification.
Purity Perform tests of Sodium Sulfate, previously dried for 4 hours at 105℃.
(1) Clarity and Color of Solution : When 1 g of Sodium Sulfate is dissolved in 10 mL
of water, the solution should be colorless and should not be more than almost clear.
(2) Chloride : When 1 g of Sodium Sulfate is dissolved in 100 mL of water and to 10 mL
of the resulting solution, 6 mL of diluted nitric acid is added, Test Solution. When the
test solution is tested by Chloride Limit Test, its content should not be more than
the amount that corresponds to 0.3 mL of 0.01 N hydrochloric acid.
(3) Arsenic : It should be no more than 3.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(4) Lead : Sodium Sulfateis tested by purity (2) for 「Sodium Metaphosphate」(not
more than 2.0 ppm).
(5) Mercury : When Sodium Sulfate is tested by Mercury Limit Test, its content should
not be more than 1.0 ppm.
(6) Selenium : 0.2 g of Sodium Sulfate is precisely weighed and is tested by purity (6)
for 「Sulfuric acid」(not more than 30 ppm).
Loss on Drying When Sodium Sulfate is dried for 4 hours at 105℃, the weigh loss of
crystal should be within a range of 51～57%, and that of anhydrous should not be
more than 1.0%.
Assay Accurately weigh about 0.4 g of Sodium Sulfate, previously dried, dissolve in 200
mL of water, add 1 mL of hydrochloric acid, boil, and add gradually 30 mL of barium
chloride solution. Heat this solution in a water bath for 1 hour, cool, and filter through
a filter paper for quantitative analysis. Wash the residue on the filter paper with warm
water until the washings do not respond to the test by Chloride Limit Test. Dry the
residue with the filter paper. ignite to constant weight, and Accurately weigh as
Barium Sulfate.
Content of sodium sulfate(%) ＝ weight of BaSO4(g) × 0.6086 × 100

1028
weight of the sample (g)

1029
 Sodium Sulfite
Chemical Formula: Na2SO3

Molecular Weight: 126.04 INS No.:221

CAS No.: 7757-83-7(anhydrous)
Synonyms: Disodium sulfite 10102-15-5(7hydrates)

Definition Sodium Sulfite occurs as crystals(7hydrates) called Sodium Sulfite(crystal) or as

anhydrous called Sodium Sulfite(anhydrous).
Compositional Specifications of Sodium Sulfite
Content Sodium Sulfite, when calculated on the anhydrous basis, should contain not less
than 95.0% of sodium sulfite (Na2SO3).
Description Sodium Sulfite occurs as colorless to white crystals or as a white powder.
Identification Sodium Sulfite responds to the tests for Sodium Salt (A) & (B) and Sulfite in
Identification.
Purity In the case of Sodium Sulfite (crystal), weigh two times as much as the quantity
of the sample prescribed in Purity, and perform the test.
(1) Clarity and Color of Solution : When 0.5 g of Sodium Sulfite is dissolved in 10 mL
of water, the solution should be almost clear.
(2) Arsenic : It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(3) Lead : Sodium Sulfite is tested by purity (2) for 「Sodium Metaphosphate」(not
more than 2.0 ppm).
(4) Selenium : Transfer 2.0 g of Sodium Sulfite, precisely weighed, into a 50 mL
beaker, add 10 mL of water and 5 mL of hydrochloric acid and boil to remove sulfur
dioxide, Test Solution. Separately, transfer 1.0 g of Sodium sulfite ,precisely weighed, into
a beaker, where 0.5 mL of selenium standard solution is added. Then a reference solution
is prepared by the same manner as for test solution. 2 g of hydrazin sulfate is added to
each beaker, heated and dissolved. After setting for 5 minutes, the resulting solution is
transferred into a Nestler cylinder with adding water to make 50 mL. The red color of
this test solution should not be deeper than that of reference solution. (Not more than 5
ppm)
(5) Iron : When 5.0 g of Sodium Sulfite is tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content
should not be more than 10 ppm.
(6) Mercury : When Sodium Sulfite is tested by Mercury Limit Test, its content should
not be more than 1.0 ppm.
(7) Thiosulphate : When the 10% aqueous solution of Sodium Sulfite is acidified with
Sulfuric Acid or hydrochloric acid, it should be transparent (not more than 0.1%).
Assay Transfer a quantity of Sodium Sulfite corresponding to approximately 0.25 g of
Sodium Sulfite (anhydrous) into a flask with a stopper, and dissolve it in 50 mL of 0.1
N iodine solution. After settling for 5 minutes with a stopper, 2 mL of dilute
hydrochloric acid (2→3) is added. An excess amount of iodine is titrated with 0.1 N
1030
sodium thiosulfate solution. (indicator: starch solution)
1 mL of 0.1 N iodine solution ＝ 6.302 mg Na2SO3

Content of sodium sulfite(Na SO )(%) ＝

2 3 a ×
6.302 × (50 — V)
weight of the sample(g) × 10

a Crystals∶2
Anhydrous∶1

V : 0.1 N amount of sodium thiosulfate solution (mL)

1031
 Sorbic Acid
CH3CH=CHCH=CHCOOH
Chemical Formula: C6H8O2 INS No.: 200

Molecular Weight: 112.13 CAS No.: 110-44-1

Compositional Specifications of Sorbic Acid

Content Sorbic Acid, when calculated on the dried basis, should contain within a range
of 99.0～101.0% of sorbic acid (C6H8O2).
Description Sorbic Acid occurs as colorless needles or as a white crystalline powder. It
is odorless or has a slight, characteristic odor.
Identification (1) To 0.1 g of Sorbic Acid, 10 mL of water is added. The suspension solution
is acidic.
(2) To 1 mL solution of Sorbic Acid in acetone (1→100), add 1 mL of water and 2
drops of bromine solution and mix. The color of the solution disappears immediately.
Purity (1) Melting Point : Melting point of Sorbic Acid should be within a range of 132～13
5℃.
(2) Clarity and Color of Solution : When 0.2 g of Sorbic Acid is dissolved in 5 mL of
acetone, the color of the solution should not be deeper than that of Color Standard
Solution C.
(3) Chloride : Weigh 1.5 g of Sorbic Acid, add 120 mL of water, and dissolve while
boiling. After cooling, add water to make 120 mL, and filter. Measure 40 mL of the
filtrate, and add 6 mL diluted nitric acid, Test Solution. When the test solution is
tested by Chloride Limit Test, its content should not be more than the amount that
corresponds to 0.2 mL of 0.01 N hydrochloric acid.
(4) Sulfate : To 40 mL of the filtrate prepared in (3) above, add 1 mL of diluted
hydrochloric acid, Test Solution. When the test solution is tested by Sulfate Limit
Test, its content should not be more than the amount that corresponds to 5 mL of
0.01 N sulfuric acid.
(5) Arsenic : It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(6) Lead : When 5.0 g of Sorbic Acid is tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content
should not be more than 2.0 ppm.
(7) Mercury : When Sorbic Acid is tested by Mercury Limit Test, its content should
not be more than 1.0 ppm.
(8) Aldehyde : To 3.0g of Sorbic Acid, add 450 mL of water, and adjust the pH of this
solution to 4 using Hydrochloric acid(1→12). Add water to make 500 mL and filter it,
Test Solution. Separately, add water to 2.5mL of 40% formaldehyde solution to make
1,000mL. Accurately pipet 3 mL of this solution and add water to make 500 mL,
Reference Solution. To 5 mL of each of test solution and reference solution, add 2.5
1032
 mL of fuchsin sulfurous acid test solution. Then allow the solution to stand for 15∼
30 minutes. The color of test solution should not be more intense than that of
reference solution. (not more than 0.1% as formaldehyde).
Water Content 2 g of Sorbic Acid is tested by Water Content Determination Method
(Karl-Fischer Method). The water content should not be more than 0.5%.
Residue on Ignition When thermogravimetric analysis is done with 2 g of Sorbic Acid,
the residue should not be more than 0.2%.
Assay Accurately weigh about 1 g of Sorbic Acid, dissolve in neutralized ethanol to
make 100 mL, measure 25 mL of this solution, and titrate with 0.1 N sodium
hydroxide (indicator : 2～3 drops of phenolphthalein solution).
1 mL of 0.1 N sodium hydroxide = 11.21 mg of C6H8O2

1033
 Sorbitan Esters of Fatty Acids
INS No.: 491, 492, 493, 494,
495, 496
Synonyms: Sorbitan monostearate;
Sorbitan tristearate; Sorbitan monolaurate; CAS No.:
1338-41-6; 1338-39-2;
Sorbitan monooleate; Sorbitan 1338-43-8; 26266-57-9
monopalmitate; Sorbitan trioleate

Compositional Specifications of Sorbitan Esters of Fatty Acids

Description Sorbitan Esters of Fatty Acids is white～yellowish brown powders, flakes,
granular, waxy lumps or liquid.
Identification (1) Dissolve 0.5 g of Sorbitan Esters of Fatty Acids in 5 mL of anhydrous
ethanol while heating, add 5 mL of diluted sulfuric acid, heat in a water bath for 30
minutes, and cool. Oil drops or a white to yellowish white solid is deposited. Separate
the oil drops or the solid, add 5 mL of ether, and shake. It dissolves.
(2) Take 2 mL of the remaining solution after the separation of the oil drops or the solid
in (1) above, add 2 mL of freshly prepared catechol solution (1→20), shake, add 5 mL
of sulfuric acid, and shake. A pink to red-brown color develops.
Purity (1) Acid Value : Approximately 5 g of Sorbitan Esters of Fatty Acids is precisely
weighed and dissolved in 100 mL of 1:1 mixture of alcohol and ether by heating for
the test solution. This test solution is proceeded as directed under Acid Value in
Fats Test. The acid value should not be more than 10.
(2) Arsenic : It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(3) Lead : When 5.0 g of Sorbitan Esters of Fatty Acids is tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content
should not be more than 2.0 ppm.
(4) Polyoxyethylene : Weigh 1 g of Sorbitan Esters of Fatty Acids, add 20 mL of water,
shake well while warming, and cool. Add 10 mL of ammonium thiocyanate-cobalt nitrate
solution, shake well, add 10 mL of chloroform, shake again, and allow to stand. The color
of the chloroform layer should not change to blue.
Residue on Ignition When thermogravimetric analysis is done with 2 g of Sorbitan Esters
of Fatty Acids, the residue should not be more than 1.5%.

1034
 D-Sorbitol

Chemical Formula: C6H14O6

Molecular Weight: 182.18 INS No.: 420(i)

Synonyms: D-Glucitol; Sorbit CAS No.: 50-70-4

Compositional Specifications of D-Sorbitol

Content D-Sorbitol, when calculated on the dried basis, should contain within a range of
97.0～101.0% of D-sorbitol (C6H14O6).
Description D-Sorbitol occurs as white granules, powder, or crystalline solid. It is
odorless and has a fresh, sweet taste.
Identification (1) pH : To 1 mL of D-Sorbitol solution (7→10), add 2 mL of ferrous
sulfate solution and 1 mL of sodium hydroxide solution (1→5). The color of the
solution changes to blue-green, but no turbidity appears.
(2) To 1 mL of D-Sorbitol solution (1→100), add 1 mL of freshly prepared catechol
solution (1→10), shake well, add 2 mL of sulfuric acid, and shake. A red color
develops immediately.
Purity (1) Free acid : 5 g of D-Sorbitol dissolve in 50 mL of freshly boiled and cooled
water, add 1 drop of phenolphthalein solution and 0.5 mL of 0.01 N sodium
hydroxide, and shake. The color of the solution changes to red color that persists
for not less than 30 seconds.
(2) Arsenic : It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(3) Lead : When 5.0 g of D-Sorbitol is tested by Atomic Absorption Spectrophotometry
or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content should not be more
than 1.0 ppm.
(4) Nickel : When 5.0 g of D-Sorbitol is tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content
should not be more than 2.0 ppm.
(5) Chloride : When 10 g of D-Sorbitol and proceed as directed under chloride, its
content should not be more than the amount that corresponds to 1.5 mL of 0.01 N
hydrochloric acid. (not more than 0.005%).
(6) Sulphate : When 10 g of D-Sorbitol is tested for sulphate, its content should not be
more than the amount that corresponds to 2.0 mL of 0.01 N sulfuric acid (not more
than 0.01%).
1035
 (7) Saccharide : 10 g of D-Sorbitol dissolve in 25 mL of water, add 8 mL of dilute
hydrochloric acid, attach a reflux condenser, heat for 3 hours in a water bath, and
cool. The solution is neutralized with sodium hydroxide using methyl orange as an
indicator. Bring the total volume of the solution to 100 mL with water, add 10 mL of
water and 40 mL of Fehling's solution to 10 mL of the solution, boil gently for 3
minutes, allow to stand to form a precipitate of cuprous oxide, and filter the
supernatant through a glass filter. Add immediately hot water to the precipitate in the
flask, wash, filter through the above glass filter, and discard the washings. Repeat the
procedure until the washings are no longer alkaline. Immediately dissolve the
precipitate in the flask in 20 mL of ferric sulfate solution, filter through the above
glass filter, wash with water, combine the filtrate and the washings, heat to 80℃ and
add 20 mL of 0.1 N potassium permanganate. The color of the solution should not
disappear immediately.
(8) Reducing sugar : 1 g of D-Sorbitol dissolve in 25 mL of water, add 40 mL of
Fehling's solution, boil gently for 3 minutes, follow the procedure in (7) Purity. In this
case, 2 mL of 0.1 N potassium permanganate solution is used.
Loss on Drying When D-Sorbitol is dried for 3 hours at 80℃ under a reduced pressure,
the weight loss should not be more than 3%.
Residue on Ignition When thermogravimetric analysis is done with 5 g of D-Sorbitol, the
residue should not be more than 0.02%.
Assay Dissolve 1 g of D-Sorbitol, precisely dried and accurately weighed, in water and
then add water to make 500 mL. To 10 mL of this solution, add 50 mL of 0.3%
potassium periodate solution and 1 mL of sulfuric acid, and then heat for 15 minutes
in a water bath. After cooling, 2.5 g of potassium iodide is added to the solution,
which is set-aside in a cold dark place for 5 minutes. Isolated iodine is titrated with
0.1 N sodium thiosulfate solution (indicator : starch solution). Separately, perform a
blank test by the same procedure.
1 mL of 0.1 N Sodium thiosulfate solution ＝ 1.822 mg C6H11O6

1036
 D-Sorbitol Solution
Compositional Specifications of D-Sorbitol Solution
Content D-Sorbitol Solution should contain 50.0% or more of D-Sorbitol (C6H14O6 ＝ 182.18).
Description D-Sorbitol Solution is colorless transparent syrup-like liquid. Upon cooling, it
may precipitate colorless crystals. It is scentless and has a sweet taste.
Identification Proceed as directed under Identification in 「D-Sorbitol」.
Purity (1) Specific Gravity : Specific gravity of D-Sorbitol Solution should not be less
than 1.285.
(2) Free Acid : Dissolve 5 g of D-Sorbitol Solution in 50 mL of freshly boiled and
cooled water, add 1 drop of phenolphthalein solution and 0.5 mL of 0.01 N sodium
hydroxide, and shake. The color of the solution changes to red color that persists for
not less than 30 seconds.
(3) Arsenic : It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(4) Lead : When 5.0 g of D-Sorbitol Solution is tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content
should not be more than 1.0 ppm.
(5) Nickel : When 5.0 g of D-Sorbitol Solution is tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content
should not be more than 2.0 ppm.
(6) Saccharide : Dissolve 10 g of D-Sorbitol Solution in 25 mL of water, add 8 mL of
dilute hydrochloric acid, attach a reflux condenser, heat for 3 hours in a water bath,
and cool. The solution is neutralized with sodium hydroxide using methyl orange as
an indicator. Add water to make 100 mL. Take 10 mL of this solution, add 10 mL
water and 40 mL of Fehling's solution, boil gently for 3 minutes, allow to stand to
form a precipitate of cuprous oxide, and filter the supernatant through a glass filter.
Add immediately hot water to the precipitate in the flask, wash, filter through the
above glass filter, and discard the washings. Repeat the procedure until the washings
are no longer alkaline. Dissolve the precipitate in the flask in 20 mL of ferric sulfate
solution, filter through the above glass filter, wash with water, combine the filtrate
and the washings, heat to 80℃ and add 20 mL of 0.1 N potassium permanganate.
The color of the solution should not disappear immediately.
(7) Reducing Sugar : Dissolve 1 g of D-Sorbitol Solution in 25 mL of water, add 40
mL of Fehling's solution, boil gently for 3 minutes, follow the procedure in (6) Purity
Saccharide. In this case, 2 mL of 0.1 N potassium permanganate solution is used.
Residue on Ignition To 5 g of D-Sorbitol Solution, 2～3 drops of sulfuric acid is added
and slowly boiled by heating and ignited to ash. After thermogravimetric analysis with
the residue, the amount of the final residue should not be more than 1 mg.
Assay Accurately weigh about 1 g of D-Sorbitol Solution, and dissolve in water to make
500 mL. Proceed as directed under Assay in 「D-Sorbitol」.

1037
 Spice Oleoresins
Definition Spice oleoresins are prepared by one of the following processes.
(1) Spice oleoresins is obtained by extracting each raw materials of spice with an
appropriate solvent or a combination of solvents such as ethyl alcohol, methyl alcohol,
trichloroethylene, acetone, isopropyl alcohol, methylene chloride, and hexane. Solvents
should be removed according to the specifications in Residual Solvents.
(2) Spice oleoresins is a mixture of volatiles and non-volatiles from a spice. Volatiles
in each raw materials of spice are fractionally distilled. Non-volatiles are extracted by
the solvents listed in (1) and solvents are removed. In oleoresins, there are Oleoresin
Thyme (origin : dried root cortex of Thymus vulgaris L.), Oleoresin Dill seed (origin :
dried seeds of Anethum graveolems L.), Oleoresin Laurel Leaf (origin : dried leaves of
Laurus nobilis L.), Oleoresin Marjoram (origin : dried root cortex of Majorana hortensis
Moench), Oleoresin Basil, (origin : dried root cortex of Ocimum basilicum L.), Oleoresin
Black and Oleoresin White Pepper (origin : dried fruits of Piper nigrum Ｌ．),
Oleoresin Celery (origin : dried seeds of Apium graveolens L.), Oleoresin Anise (origin
: dried fruits of Pimpinella anisum L.), Oleoresin Angelica Seed (origin : dried seeds of
Angelica archangelica L.), Oleoresin Origanum (origin : dried leaves of Origanum),
Oleoresin Ginger (origin : dried rootstocks of Zingiber officinale L.), Oleoresin
Cardamom (origin : dried seeds of Elettaria cardamomum Maton), Oleoresin Caraway
(origin : dried seeds of Carum carvi L.), Oleoresin Coriander (origin : dried seeds of
Coriandrum sativum L.), Oleoresin Cumin (origin : dried seeds of Cuminum cyminum L.),
Oleoresin Cubeb (origin : dried seeds of Piper cubeba L.), Oleoresin Parsley Leaf
(origin : dried root cortex of Petroselinum crispum L.), oresin Parsley Seed (origin :
dried seeds of Petroselinum crispum L.), Oleoresin Fennel (origin : dried leaves of
Foeniculum vulgare P. Miller), Oleoresin Pimenta Berries (origin : dried fruits of
Pimenta officinalis Lindl), Oleoresin Garlic (origin : bulbs or leaves of Allium sativum
L.), Oleoresin Nutmeg (origin : seed kernel of dried mature seeds of Myristica
fragrangs Houttuyn), Oleoresin Rosemary (origin : juvenile leaves of Rosmarinus
officinalis L.), Oleoresin Mace (origin : dried ｓpornioderm of dried mature seeds of
Myristica fragrans Houtt.), Oleoresin Sage (origin : dried leaves of Salvia officinalis L.),
Oleoresin Cinnamon (origin : dried inner barks of Cinnamomum zeylanicum nees),
Oleoresin Onion (origin : bulbs of Allium cepa L.), Oleoresin Cassia (origin : dried
barks of Cinnamomum cassia Blume), Oleoresin Capsicum (origin : dried fruits of
Capsicum annum L. or Capsicum frutescens L.),
Oleoresin Clove (origin : dried flower buds of Eugenia caryophyllata Thunberg), and
Oleoresin Tarragon (origin : leaves, stems, and flowers of Artemisia dracunculus L.).
Dilutant, antioxidant, or other food additives (emulsifier, etc.) can be added for quality
preservation.
Compositional Specifications of Spice Oleoresins
Description Spice oleoresins is liquid, viscous liquid, or semi solid material. It has
characteristic scent and taste of the corresponding spice (and its raw material).
1038
Identification (1) Dissolve 50 mg of Spice oleoresins in 10 mL of ethyl-alcohol. If
necessary, Centrifuge and use Test Solution. Separately, dissolve 1 mg of capsaisin
with 10 mL of ethyl-alcohol to be used as a standard solution. Apply 10 mL of Test
Solution and Sandard Solution, separately, to silica gel plate for Thin Layer
Chromatography. After developing the plate about 12 cm in the Developing solvent
with a mixture of Ether : Ethylalcohol (19:1), and air-dry. Spray equally the plate
with 2,6-Dibromoquinone-chloride solution. and set aside in ammonia gas. The spot
of test solution should be same in the aspects of the color, developing distance
comparing the blue spot of the standard solution(only apply for Oleoresin Capsicum).
(2) Spice oleoresins is refined by Test Procedure in Purity (4) for Volatile Oil. It is
tested by (2) Solution Method in Infrared Spectrophotometry and it shows the
following characteristic spectrum, except Oleoresin Capsicum.
(1) Thyme Oil

(2) Dill Seed Oil

① Dill Seed Oil, European Type

② Dill Seed Oil, Indian Type

1039
(3) Laurel Leaf Oil

(4) Marjoram Oil

① Marjoram Oil, Spanish Type

② Marjoram Oil, Sweet

(5) Basil Oil

① Basil Oil, Comoros Type

1040
 ② Basil Oil, European Type

(6) Black and White Pepper Oil

(7) Celery Seed Oil

(8) Anise Oil

1041
(9) Angelica Seed Oil

(10) Origanum Oil, Spanish Type

(11) Ginger Oil

(12) Cardamom Oil

1042
(13) Caraway Oil

(14) Coriander Oil

(15) Cumin Oil

(16) Cubeb Oil

1043
(17) Parsley Herb Oil

(18) Parsley Seed Oil

(19) Fennel Oil

(20) Pimenta Oil

1044
(21) Garlic Oil

(22) Nutmeg Oil

(23) Rosemary Oil

(24) Mace Oil

1045
(25) Sage Oil
① Sage Oil, Dalmatian Type

② Sage Oil, Spanish Type

(26) Cinnamon Bark Oil

① Cinnamon Bark Oil, Ceylon Type

② Cinnamon Leaf Oil

1046
(27) Onion Oil

(28) Cassia Oil

(29) Clove Leaf Oil

① Clove Leaf Oil

② Clove Oil

1047
 ③ Clove Stem Oil

(30) Tarragon Oil

Purity (1) Arsenic : It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(2) Lead : When 5.0 g of Spice oleoresins is tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content
should not be more than 5.0 ppm.
(3) Residual Solvents : When Spice oleoresins is tested by Purity (5) for Paprika
Extract Pigments,the content of residual solvents should be,

Methylene chloride, trichloroethylene Not more than

(individual or 30ppm
total if combined))
Acetone Not more than 30ppm
Isopropyl alcohol Not more than 50ppm
Methyl
Hexane alcohol Not
Not more
more than
than 50ppm
25ppm
(4) Volatile Oil : When Spice oleoresins is tested for the amount of volatile distillate by
the following Test Procedure, it should be appropriate for the following
1048
 specifications. Test Procedure. When it is diluted with an emulsifier (a spice
oleoresin type), the mixing ratio of the oleoresins is taken into account in the
specifications.
Oleoresin Thyme ： 5∼12 (v/w)%
Oleoresin Dill Seed ： 10∼20 (v/w)%
Oleoresin Laurel Leaf ： 5∼25 (v/w)%
Oleoresin Marjoram ： 10∼20 (v/w)%
Oleoresin Basil ： 4∼17 (v/w)%
Oleoresin Black Pepper and oleoresin White Pepper ： 15∼35 (v/w)%
Oleoresin Celery Seed ： 7∼20 (v/w)%
Oleoresin Anise ： 9∼22 (v/w)%
Oleoresin Angelica Seed ： 2∼7 (v/w)%
Oleoresin Origanum Oil ： 20∼45 (v/w)%
Oleoresin Ginger ： 18∼35 (v/w)%
Oleoresin Cardamom ： 50∼80 (v/w)%
Oleoresin Caraway ： 10∼20 (v/w)%
Oleoresin Coriander ： 2∼12 (v/w)%
Oleoresin Cumin ： 10∼30 (v/w)%
Oleoresin Cubeb ： 50∼80 (v/w)%
Oleoresin Parsley Herb ： 2∼10 (v/w)%
Oleoresin Parsley Seed ： 2∼7 (v/w)%
Oleoresin Fennel ： 3∼20 (v/w)%
Oleoresin Pimenta Berries ： 20∼50 (v/w)%
Test Procedure ： Sufficient amount of sample is precisely weighted (so that 2∼5 mL
of volatile oil can be collected) into a 1,000～2000 mL round bottom flask with a
24/40 ground joint neck, where a magnetic bar and 500 mL of water are added. A
distilling head and reflux condenser are attached as shown in the figure. The flask is
heated while stirring until the amount of the oil does not change. It is cooled to
room temperature and set aside until the oil becomes clear. The volume of collected
oil is measured (down to 0.02 mL) and its content is calculated by the formula;
Content of volatile
＝
oil(V/W)% amount of collected oil(mL)
× 100
weight of the sample(g)

1049
 (a) for oils heavier than water (b) for oils lighter than water
Distilling head：Clevenger Traps (unit：mm)
(5) Piperin (only for oleoresin black pepper and oleoresin white pepper) : Preparation
of Undiluted Standard Solution : Piperin is purified by recrystallization in isopropyl
alcohol so that its melting point is 129∼130℃. 100 mg of purified piperin as a
crystal form is precisely weighted into a 100 mL flask and dissolved in
dichloroethylene. Dilute it to 100 mL, and then 10 mL of this solution is rediluted to
100 mL with dichloroethylene (Undiluted Standard Solution).
∘Preparation of Standard Solution : 1.0, 3.0, 5.0, and 10.0 mL (contains 0.1, 0.3, 0.5, and
1.0 mg of piperin) of undiluted Standard Solution is diluted to 100 mL with
dichloroethylene (Standard Solutions).
∘Preparation of Test Solution : Spice oleoresins is heated and stirred with glass rod in a
100℃ steam bath or oven (hot plate should not be used). Approximately 100 mg is
precisely weighted into a 100 mL flask and dissolved in dichloroethylene (total
volume = 100 mL). 1 mL of this solution is further diluted to 100 mL with
dichloroethylene (Test Solution).
Test Procedure : Absorptions of Test and Standard Solutions are measured at 342 nm
with 1 cm path length using dichloroethylene as a standard. A standard curve of
absorptions of 4 standard solutions using their concentrations (mg/100 mL) is
obtained. Piperin concentration C (mg/100 mL) in the sample is obtained from the
standard curve. The content of piperin in oleoresin black pepper and oleoresin white
pepper is obtained by the following equation. It should not be less than 36%.

Content of piperin(%) ＝ 100 ×

100C
weight of the sample(mg)

1050
 (6) Hot taste (only apply for Oleoresin Capsicum)
The hot taste of Spice oleoresins should be more than indicated contents whithin
100,000 through 2,000,000 tested by the following procedure.
ScovilleUnits Heat Test(mSolution Sugar(mSolution
L) L)

360,000 20 10
480,000 20 20
600,000 20 30
720,000
840,000 20
20 40
50
960,000
1,080,000 20
20 60
70
1,200,000 20 80
1,320,000
1,440,000 20
20 90
100
1,560,000 20 110
1,680,000 20 120
1,800,000
1,920,000 20
20 130
140
2,040,000 20 150

∘ test method : Transfer 200 mg of Spice oleoresins into a 50 mL volumetric flask, and
dilute to volume with alcohol. Shake the mixture and set aside to use test solution.
Dissolve 0.15 g of test solution in 140 mL of sugar solution (10w/v%), and mix. This
test solution is tested by following procedure. 240,000 as Scoville Heat Units is the
level that three or more people sense spicy tastes when separately 5 people eat 5 mL
of test solution. Dilute the test solution according to a below table in case that the unit
is higher than this level.
Make the test solution by taking the test solution according to a below table in case
that the Heat Units is less than 240,000.
ScovilleUnits Heat Test(mSolution
L) Sugar(mSolution
L)
100,000 0.15 60
117,500
170,000 0.15
0.15 70
100
205,000 0.15 120

1051
 Spirulina Color
Definition Spirulina Color is a pigment obtained by extracting Spirulina Platensis (NORD.)
GEITLER, which is a blue-green algae. The major pigment is Phycocyanin. Dilutant,
stabilizer, or solvent can be added for the purpose of color value adjustment and
quality preservation.
Compositional Specifications of Spirulina Color
Content Color value ( ) of Spirulina Color should be higher than the indicated value.
Description Spirulina Color is blue powder having a slight characteristic odor.
Identification (1) The Test Solution obtained in Color Value section is blue and has a
maximum absorption at about 618 nm.
(2) The Test Solution in (1) shows red fluorescence, which disappears after heating for
30 minutes at 90℃.
(3) When 3.9 g of ammonium sulfate is dissolved in 10 mL of the Test Solution in (1)
and the solution is allowed to stand, blue precipitates are formed.
(4) When 1 mL of ferric chloride is added to 5 mL of the Test Solution in (1) and
allow to stand for 20 minutes, the solution turns dark violet.
(5) When 0.1 mL of sodium hypochlorite solution (effective chlorine should not be less
than 4%) is added to 5 mL of the Test Solution, the solution changes light yellow.
Purity (1) Arsenic : It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(2) Lead : When 5.0 g of Spirulina Color is tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content
should not be more than 8.0 ppm.
Assay (Color Value) Appropriate amount of Spirulina Color is precisely weighed so that
the absorbance is within 0.3～0.7 and dissolved in citric acid dibasic sodium phosphate
buffer solution with pH 6.0 so that the total volume is 100 mL (Test Solution). If
necessary, the solution is centrifuged and the supernatant is used. Using citric acid
dibasic sodium phosphate buffer solution with pH 6.0 as a reference solution,
absorption A is measured at the maximum absorption at about 618 nm with 1 cm path
length. Color value is obtained using the following formula.
A × 10
Color Value( ) ＝
weight of the sample(g)

∘Citric acid·dibasic sodium phosphate buffer solution (pH 6.0)

Solution 1 ： 0.1 M citric acid solution：1 l of solution containing 21.01 g of citric acid
(C6H8O7․H2O).
Solution 2 ： 0.2 M dibasic sodium phosphate solution： 1 l of solution containing 71.63 g
of dibasic sodium phosphate (Na2HPO4 ․ 12H2O).
73.7 volume of Solution 1 and 126.3 volume of Solution 2 are mixed well and its pH is
adjusted to 6.0.
1052
 Stearic Acid
Octadecanoic acid
Chemical Formula: C 18H 36O 2

Molecular Weight: 284.18 INS No.: 570

Synonyms: Octadecanoic acid CAS No.: 57-11-4

Definition Stearic Acid is a solid fatty acid obtained from fats. It consists of a mixture
of stearic acid (C18H36O2) and palmitic acid (C16H32O2). Its major component is stearic
acid (C18H36O2).
Compositional Specifications of Stearic Acid
Description Stearic Acid is white～pale yellow crystalline solid or powder.
Purity (1) Acid Value : When 0.5 g of Stearic Acid is precisely weighted, and proceeded
as directed under Acid value in Fats Test, the Acid value should be 196~211.
(2) Solidification point : Solidification point of Stearic Acid should be 54.5∼69.0.
(3) Lead : When 5.0 g of Stearic Acid is tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content
should not be more than 1.0 ppm.
(4) Arsenic : It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(5) Mercury : When Stearic Acid is tested by Mercury Limit Test, its content should
not be more than 1.0 ppm.
(6) Iodine Value : Approximately 3.6 g of Stearic Acid is precisely weighted into a 500
mL Erlenmeyer flask with a stopper which contains 20 mL of 1 : 1 mixture of glacial
acetic acid : cyclohexane and 25 mL of Weiss solution. A stopper is placed on the
flask which is vigorously shaken and set aside for 1 hour in a dark place. 20 mL of
potassium iodide solution and 100 mL of water (previously boiled and cooled) are
added to the flask. The excess iodine is titrated with 0.1 N sodium thiosulfate
solution. Sodium thiosulfate solution is added drop wise until yellow color disappears.
Starch solution is added and the titration is continued until the blue color disappears
completely. Near the end point, the flask is vigorously shaken with a stopper.
Separately, a blank test is carried out by the same procedure. Iodine value is
obtained by the following equation and it should not be more than 7.0.

Iodine Value= weight(B-S) × 1.269

of the sample(g)
B : Consumed amount of 0.1 N sodium thiosulfate solution in the blank test (mL)
S : Consumed amount of 0.1 N sodium thiosulfate solution in the test for sample (mL)
(7) Saponification Value : 3 g of Stearic Acid is precisely weighted into a 250 mL
flask, where 50 mL of 0.5 N alcoholic solution of potassium hydroxide is added.
After attaching a reflux condenser, the solution is saponified for 30～60 minutes.
Cool the solution, the condenser is washed with small amount of water and removed.
1053
 1 mL of phenolphthalein TS is added. The resulting solution is then titrated with 0.5
N hydrochloric acid. The solution is boiled (red color appears again) and titrated
again until the red color disappears. Saponification value is calculated using the
following equation and should be 197～212.
(8) Unsaponifiable matter : 5 g of Stearic Acid is precisely weighted into a 250 mL
flask, where 2 g of potassium hydroxide and 40 mL of alcohol are added and gently
refluxed for 1 hour with a reflux condenser. The solution transfer into a separatory
funnel (3.5 cm diameter x 30 cm length with 40 mL, 80 mL, and 130 mL scale
marks) with a stopcock. The flask is washed with sufficient amount of alcohol, which
is added to the funnel (total volume = 40 mL). The flask is washed with warm and
cold water, which is added to the funnel (total volume = 80 mL). Finally, the flask is
washed with a few mL of petroleumether, which is added to the funnel. Cool the
solution, 50 mL of petroleum ether is added to the funnel. The funnel is shaken
vigorously for 1 minute and then settled to separate two phases completely. The
supernatant ether layer is collected in a 500 mL separatory funnel with a stopcock.
The aqueous layer is again extracted 6 times with 50 mL each of ether. These
extracts are added to the first extract. The combined extracts are washed with 25
mL of 10% alcohol. This procedure is repeated until the aqueous layer doesn't get
colorized by phenolphthalein TS. When this is accomplished, aqueous phase is
discarded and the ether extract transfer into a pre-weighted beaker. With 10 mL of
ether, the funnel is washed, which is added to the beaker. Ether layer is evaporated
to dryness in a water bath, which is then dried at 100℃ for 30 minutes until the
weight becomes constant. Then the residue is cooled in a desiccator and weighted.
The residue dissolve in 50 mL of warm alcohol (neutralized with sodium hydroxide
using phenolphthalein as an indicator). The resulting solution is titrated with 0.02 N
sodium hydroxide solution until a pale red color persists. The amount of oleic acid is
obtained by multiplying the consumed amount of sodium hydroxide solution with
5.659(gm). The exact amount of unsaponifiables is obtained by subtracting the amount
of fatty acid (as oleic acid) from the amount of residues. The content of
unsaponifiable matter is calculated by the following equation and it should not be
more than 1.5%.
Unsaponifiable content of residue(mg) - content as oleic acid(mg) × 100
matter(%) = weight of the sample(g) 1,000
Water Content Water content of Stearic Acid is determined by water determination
(Karl-Fisher Titration) and should not be more than 0.2%
Residue on Ignition When Residue on Ignition analysis is done with accurately weighted
2 g of Stearic Acid, the amount of Residue on Ignition should not be more than 0.1%.

1054
 Steviol Glycoside

INS No.: 960

CAS No.: 57817-89-7
Synonyms: Stevioside; Rebaudioside A 58543-16-1

Definition Steviol glycoside is obtained from Stevia rebaudiana Bertoni. The leaves are
extracted with hot leaves and the aqueous extract is passed through an absorption
resin and concentrate it. The product is recrystallized from methyl alcohol or ethyl
alcohol and dried. Its major component is Steviol glucoside.
Compositional Specifications of Steviol Glycoside
Content When Steviol glycoside is dried and weighed, it should contain not less than
95.0% of whole Steviol glycoside.
Description Steviol glycoside is white to light yellow powder, flakes, or granules with
strong sweet taste. It is odorless or having a slight characteristic odor.
Identification 0.5 g of Steviol glycoside is dissolved in 100 mL of water, test solution. 5
mg each of Stevioside for quantitative and Rebaudioside A is weighed and dissolved in
10 mL of water, standard solution. Liquid chromatography is carried out with test
solution and standard solution under the operation conditions of assay. Retention time
of the main peak of Test Solution is identical to the retention time of both peak of
Stevioside and Rebaudioside or one peak of Standard Solution.
Purity (1) pH : pH of this aqueous solution (1→100) of Steviol glycoside should be
4.5~7.0 as determined by glass electrode method.
(2) Arsenic : It should be no more than 1.3 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(3) Lead : Accurately weigh 10 g of Steviol glycoside and place in a platinum or quartz
crucible. Add minute amount of sulfuric acid, wet, gradually heat and preliminarily
heat-treat the solution at the temperature as low as possible. Again add 1 mL of
sulfuric acid, gradually heat, ignite until it is heat-treated at 450～550℃. After
heat-treating, add minute amount of nitric acid(1→150) to the residue, again, add
nitric acid(1→150) to make 10 mL, test solution. When the test solution is tested by
Atomic Absorption Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission
Spectroscopy, its content should not be more than 1.0 ppm.
(4) Residual solvent : 2 g of Steviol glycoside is precisely weighed into a 300 mL
round bottom flask, 200 mL of water is added, boiling chips and 1 mL of silicone
resin are added and mixed well. Receiver containing is connected to this, 4 mL of
internal standard solution is precisely weighed and added to a 100 mL flask. While
caring for the bubbles not to overflow, distill the solution at the rate of 2~3 mL per
1 minute until the milky liquid becomes about 90 mL, and water is added to make
100 mL, test solution. However, tert-butyl alcohol (1→1,000) is used as internal
standard solution. Separately, 0.5 g of methyl alcohol is precisely weighed and water
is added to make 500 mL, again 2 mL of this solution and 4 mL of internal standard
1055
 solution is weighed, water is added to make 100 mL, standard solution. 2μl of test
solution and standard solution is taken respectively, and injected to gas
chromatograph with the following operation condition. Then, ratio of methyl alcohol
peak against tert-butyl alcohol peak in test Solution and standard solution, QT and
QS, is calculated separately, and the content of methyl alcohol is calculated by
following formula, the content should not be more than 200ppm.

Content of Weight of methyl QT 2×100

alcohol(g)
methyl alcohol(%) = Weight of sample(g) × QS × 500×100 ×100
QT : Ratio of methyl alcohol peak against tert-butyl alcohol peak in Test Solution
QS : Ratio of methyl alcohol peak against tert-butyl alcohol peak in standard solution
Operation Conditions
Column : PLOT Q or its equivalent
Detector : Hydrogen Flame Ionization Detector (FID)
Temperature at injection hole : 200℃℃
Column Temperature : 120℃℃
Detector temperature : 300℃℃
Carrier gas : Nitrogen or Helium
Ash When 1 g of Steviol glycoside is tested by Ash Limit Test, it should not be more
than 1%.
Loss on Drying When 2 g of Steviol glycoside is dried for 2 hours at 105℃, the weight
loss should not be more than 6%.
Assay Steviol glycoside is dried for 2 hours at 105℃, 50～100 mg of steviosdie is
precisely weighed, dissolved in water:acetonitrile(7:3) to make 50 mL, test solution.
Separately, stevioside and rebaudioside A standard are dried for 2 hours at 105℃, 50
mg of each is precisely weighed, dissolved in water:acetonitrile(7:3) to make 50 mL,
standard solution. Test and Standard Solutions are separately injected into liquid
chromatography under the following operation conditions and the total amount of
stevioglycoside is calculated. Peak areas and the retention time of dulcoside A,
rubusoside, rebaudioside A, rebaudioside B, rebaudioside C, rebaudioside D,
rebaudioside F, steviolvioside and stevioside in Test Solution are obtained. and compare
them for the identification. The sequence of detection of the above 9 components is
rebaudioside D, rebaudioside A, stevioside, rebaudioside F, rebaudioside C, dulcoside A,
rubusoside, rebaudioside B, steviolvioside. The amount of the 8 components except
rebaudioside A, and the amount of rebaudioside are obtained by the following formula. The
sum of these amount is the amount of steviol glycoside.

X (%) = Ws
W × Ax × fx × 100
As
1056
 Rebaudioside WR Ax
= × × 100
A% W AR
X : Each steviol glycoside
Ws : Amount of Stevioside in standard solution (mg)
Ws : Amount of Ribaudioside A in standard solution (mg)
W : Amount of Sample in test solution (mg)
As : Peak area of stevioside in standard solution
AR : Peak area of Rebaudioside A in standard solution
Ax : Peak area of X in test solution
fx : Ratio of molecular weight of X to stevioside
(stevioside 1.00, rebaudioside A 1.20, rebaudioside B 1.00, rebaudioside C 1.18,
rebaudioside D 1.40, Ribaudioside F 1.16, dulcoside A 0.98, rubusoside 0.80,
steviolvioside 0.80)
Operation Conditions
-Detector : UV 210 nm
-Column : Capcell pak C18 MG Ⅱ(4.6mm×250mm, 5μm) or its equivalent
-Column Temperature : 40℃
-Mobile Phase : Acetonitrile : 10 mM phosphoric acid buffer(pH 2.6) (32:68)
-Flow Rate : 1.0 mL/min
- The amount of Injection : 10 μL
Solutions
10 mM phosphoric acid buffer(pH 2.6)
Dissolve 1.1998 g of sodium phosphate, monobasic in water to make 1,000 mL. Add
phosphoric acid(1→10) to adjust pH to 2.6.

1057
 Succinic Acid
C
H
2
CO


O
H⃒
C
H
2
CO


O
H
Chemical Formula: C4H6O4
INS No.:
Molecular Weight: 118.09
363
CAS No.:
Synonyms: Butanedioic acid
110-15-6

Compositional Specifications of Succinic Acid

Content Succinic Acid should contain not less than 99.0% of succinic acid (C4H6O4).
Description Succinic Acid occurs as colorless to white crystals or as a white crystalline
powder. It is odorless and has a characteristic acid taste.
Identification Succinic Acid responds to the test for Succinic Acid salt in Identification.
Purity (1) Melting Point : Melting point of Succinic Acid should be within a range of 18
5～l90℃.
(2) Lead : When 5.0 g of Succinic Acid is tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content
should not be more than 5.0 ppm.
(3) Mercury : When Succinic Acid is tested by Mercury Limit Test, its content should
not be more than 1.0 ppm.
(4) Readily Oxidizable Substances : Weigh 1 g of Succinic Acid, dissolve in 25 mL of
water and 25 mL of diluted sulfuric acid. Add 4 mL of 0.1 N potassium
permanganate, and keep 20℃. The color of the solution should not disappear within 3
minutes.
(5) Arsenic : It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
Residue on Ignition When thermogravimetric analysis is done with Succinic Acid, the
residue should not be more than 0.025%.
Assay Accurately weigh about 1 g of Succinic Acid, and dissolve in water to make
exactly 250 mL. Take 25 mL of this solution, and titrate with 0.1 N sodium hydroxide
(indicator : 2～3 drops of phenolphthalein solution)
1 mL of 0.1 N sodium hydroxide = 5.904 mg of C4H6O4
1058
 Sucralose
Chemical Formula: C12H19Cl3O8

Molecular Weight: 397.64 INS No.: 955

Synonyms: 4,1',6'-Trichlorogalactosucrose CAS No.: 56038-13-2

Compositional Specifications of Sucralose

Content Sucralose, when calculated on the dried basis(anhydrous), should contain within
a range of 98.0∼102.0% of sucralose (C12H19Cl3O8).
Description Sucralose is scentless white～pale grayish white crystalline powder with
strong sweet taste. It is readily soluble in water, methyl alcohol, and ethyl alcohol but
hardly soluble in ethyl acetate.
Identification (1) When Sucralose is tested according to (1) potassium bromide disk
method in Infrared Spectrophotometry, the maximum absorption should be appear at
the same wavelength as a sucralose standard.
(2) 1.0 g of Sucralose is dissolved in 10 mL of methyl alcohol (Test Solution). Using
sodium chloride solution (1→20) · acetonitrile mixture (7:3) as a developing solution,
5 μl of the Test Solution is analyzed with thin layer chromatography. A spot appears
at ratio of front (Rf) of 0.4～0.6. Here, silylated silica gel with octadecyl group is
used as porous support material for the thin layer plate. Developing is stopped when
the solvent front reaches approximately 15 cm and the solvent is evaporated with
wind. Then, 15% sulfuric acid·methyl alcohol solution is sprayed. The spot is
colorized by heating for 10 minutes at 125℃.
Purity (1) Specific Rotation : 1.0 g of Sucralose is precisely weighed and dissolved in
water (total volume 10 mL). Optical rotation of the solution is measured. When it is
translated to a dehydrated form, = +84.0∼+87.5°
(2) Lead : When 5.0 g of Sucralose is tested by Atomic Absorption Spectrophotometry
or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content should not be more
than 1.0 ppm.
(3) Arsenic : It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(4) Chlorinated Disaccharides : 1.0 g of Sucralose is dissolved in 10 mL of methyl
alcohol (Test Solution). Dissolve 1.0 g of standard in 10mL of methyl alcohol(Control
solution A). Measure 0.5mL of the control solution A, and add methyl alcohol to make
100mL(Control solution B). Analyze a 5ul portion each of the test solution, control
solution A, and control solution B by thin layer chromatography following
Identification (2). The main spot from the test solution corresponds to the spot from
the control solution A. Even if any other spot is observed, it does not have a darker
color than the spot from the control solution B(0.5%).
(5) Chlorinated Monosaccharides : 2.5 g of Sucralose is dissolved in methyl alcohol so
that the total volume is precisely 10 mL (Test Solution). Separately, 10 g of
1059
 D-mannitol is precisely weighed and dissolved in water so that the total volume is
100 mL (Reference Solution (A)). 10 g of D-mannitol and 40 mg of fructose are
precisely weighed and dissolved in water so that the total volume is 100 mL
(Reference Solution (B)). 1 μl of each solution is drop-wise added and dried on to a
silica gel thin layer plate. This operation is repeated 4 times. After spraying
p-anisidinephthalic acid solution, the thin layer plate is heated for 10 minutes at 98～
102℃ to colorize the spots. Spots for Test Solution should not be darker than those
for Reference Solution (B) (not more than 0.16%). If there are any spots in Reference
Solution (A), this procedure is repeated.
Solution
∘p-anisidinephthalic acid solution : 1.23 g p-anisidine and 1.66 g phthalic acid are
dissolved in methyl alcohol (total volume 100 mL). The solution is stored in a
Light-resistant container in a cool place.
(6) Triphenyl Phosphine Oxide : Approximately 100 mg of Sucralose is precisely
weighed and dissolved in acetonitrile·water mixture (67:33) so that the total volume
is 10 mL (Test Solution). Separately, 100 mg of triphenyl phosphine oxide is
precisely weighed and dissolved in acetonitrile·water mixture (67:33) so that the total
volume is 10 mL. 1 mL of this solution is diluted to 100 mL with acetonitrile· water
mixture (67:33) (Standard Solution). 25 μl of each solution is injected into a liquid
chromatography using the following operation conditions and the content of
triphenylphosphineoxide (mg/kg) is obtained. The content should not be more than
150 mg/kg.
Content of triphenyl phosphine
=
oxide (C18H15OP) (mg/kg) At × 10,000
As W
At : Peak area in Test Solution
As : Peak area in Standard Solution
W : Weight of the sample (mg)
Operation Conditions
-Detector : UV 220 nm
-Column : Rad Pak C18(inner diameter 8 mm, length 15 cm) or its equivalent
-Column Temperature : 40℃
-Mobile Phase : Acetonitrile·water mixture(67 : 33)
-Flow Rate : 1.5 mL/min
(7) Methyl Alcohol : Approximately 2.0 g of Sucralose is precisely weighed and
dissolved in water so that the total volume is 10 mL (Test Solution). Separately, 2 mL
of methyl alcohol is precisely weighed and dissolved in water so that the total
volume is 100 mL. 1 mL of this solution is diluted to 100 mL with water (Standard
Solution). 1 μl of each solution is injected into a gas chromatography using the
following operation conditions and the content of methyl alcohol (%) is obtained. The
content should not be more than 0.1%.
Content of Methyl Alcohol (%) = St × Cs × Vt
1060
 As × Wt
St : Peak area of Test Solution
Cs : Concentration of methyl alcohol in Standard Solution (%)
Vt : Used amount of Test Solution for the test (mL)
As : Peak area of Standard Solution
W : Weight of the sample (g)
Operation Conditions
-Column : A glass tube with inner diameter of 2～4 mm and length of 2 m
-Column Filler : 80～100 mesh coated with Porapak P.S. or its equivalent
-Detector : (Hydrogen) Flame Ionization Detector (FID)
-Temperature at injection hole : 200℃
-Column Temperature : constant temperature in a range of 140～160℃
-Detector Temperature : 250℃
-Carrier gas and flow rate : Nitrogen or Helium, 20 mL/min
Water Content Water content in approximately 1 g of Sucralose is determined by water
determination (Karl-Fisher Titration) and should not be more than 2.0%.
Residue on Ignition When thermogravimetric analysis is done, the amount of residue
should not be more than 0.7%.
Assay Approximately 1 g of Sucralose is precisely weighed and dissolved in acetonitrile
· water mixture (15:85) so that the total volume of the solution is 100 mL. This
solution is filtered through a 0.45 um filter (Test Solution). Separately, approximately
1,000 mg of sucralose standard is precisely weighed and dissolved in acetonitrile·water
mixture (15:85) so that the total volume of the solution is 100 mL (Standard Solution).
20 μl of each Standard Solution and Test Solution is injected into liquid
chromatography using the following operation conditions. The content (%) of sucralose
is obtained from the following equation.
Content of sucralose(%) = At × Ws
As × Wt
× 100

At : Peak area of Test Solution

As : Peak area of Standard Solution
Wt : Weight of the sample (mg)
Ws : Weight of standard (mg)
Operation Conditions
-Detector : UV 190 nm or Differential refractometer (RI Detector)
-Column : Rad Pak C18(inner diameter 8 mm, length 10 cm) or its equivalent
-Column Temperature : room temperature
-Mobile Phase : acetonitrile·water mixture (15:85)
-Flow Rate : 1.5 mL/min

1061
 Sucrose Esters of Fatty Acids
Synonyms: Sucrose fatty acid esters, INS No.: 473, 444
Sucrose acetate isobutyrate

Compositional Specifications of Sucrose Esters of Fatty Acids

Definition Sucrose Esters of Fatty Acids are esters of fatty acids and sucrose and
sucrose acetate isobutylate.
Description Sucrose Esters of Fatty Acids occur as white to yellow～brown powder or
mass substances, or as colorless to light brown, viscous resinous or liquid substances.
They are odorless or have a slight, characteristic odor.
Identification (1) To 1 g of Sucrose Esters of Fatty Acids, add 25 mL of 0.5 N alcoholic
potassium hydroxide solution, equip with a reflux condenser, and heat in a water
bath for 1 hour. Add 50 mL of water to the solution, and distill until the residual
solution becomes about 30 mL. After cooling, add 5 mL of diluted hydrochloric acid
to the residual solution, shake well, add sodium chloride to make a saturated
solution, and extract twice with 30 mL of ether each time. Combine the ether layers,
wash with 20 mL of water. Evaporate the ether and cool the residue to 5℃. Either
colorless to light yellow solids are deposited or a liquid with an odor of acetic acid
and isobutyric acid remains.
(2) Place 2 mL of the water layer separated from the ether layer in (1) above in a test
tube. warm in a water bath until the odor of ether disappears. cool, and superimpose
gently 1 mL of anthrone solution along the tube wall. The color of the interface
changes to a blue to green color.
Purity (1) Acid Value : Accurately weigh about 3 g of Sucrose Esters of Fatty Acids, and
dissolve in 40 mL of isopropyl alcohol and 20 mL of water and test by Acid Value in
Flavoring Substance Test. It should not be more than 6.
(2) Arsenic : It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(3) Lead : When 5.0 g of Sucrose Esters of Fatty Acids is tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content
should not be more than 2.0 ppm.
(4) Cadmium : When 5.0 g of Sucrose Esters of Fatty Acids is tested by Atomic
Absorption Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy,
its content should not be more than 1.0 ppm.
(5) Mercury : When Sucrose Esters of Fatty Acids is tested by Mercury Limit Test, its
content should not be more than 1.0 ppm.
(6) Other solvent(sucrose acetate isobutylate is excluded) : When Sucrose Esters of
Fatty Acids proceed under following (A) and (B),
Isopropyl Alcohol not more inthan case
350 ofppm(separate
Ethyl acetate or total use in
Propylene glycol combination)
1062
Isobutyl alcohol not more than 10 ppm
Methyl Alcohol not more than 10 ppm
Methyl ethyl ketone should not be more than 10 ppm
(A) Isopropyl Alcohol, Ethyl Acetate, Isobutyl alcohol, Methyl Alcohol and Methyl Ethyl
Ketone : Accurately weigh 1 g of sample into each of four sample vials. To one vial,
add 5 mL of water, to the second, third, and fourth, add, respectively, standard
solution A, B, and C, and seal them quickly with a septum. Place the sample vials in
a headspace sampler and analyze by gas chromatography with a head space sampler
usin the following conditions. Measure peak area of each solvent in test solution and
standard solution (Isopropyl Alcohol, Ethyl acetate, Isobutyl alcohol, Methyl Alcohol
and Methyl ethyl ketone). Following standard addition method, plot the relationship
between addition weight of solvent of each standard solution on a horizontal axis,
and each peak area on a vertical axis. Calculate weight of each solvent of sample by
the distance between the node of correlation line and horizontal axis, and the starting
point.
Standard solution A, B, and C : Prepare standard solution A of methanol isopropanol,
isobutanol, ethyl acetate and methyl ethyl ketone by weighing accurately 0.2g of each
solvent into a 50mL volumetric flask containing approx 20 mL of water, then adding
water to volume. Pipette accurately 5 mL and 10 mL of standard solution, dilute to 20
mL with water respectively, and each of them is standard solution B and C.
Operation Condition
Column : HP-1 or its equivalent
Detector : Hydrogen Flame Ionization Detector (FID)
Temperature at injection hole: 110℃
Column Temperature : 40℃
Carrier gas : Nitrogen
Headspace sampler condition
Heat temperature : 80℃
Heat time : 40 minutes
(B) Propylene Glycol : Accurately weigh 1 g of sample into a 10 mL volumetric flask,
and add 0.1 mL of internal standard solution. Dissolve and make to volume with
pyridine. Take 0.5 mL of sample in a centrifugation tube, and add 0.25 mL of
hexamethyldisilazane and 0.1 mL of trimethylchlorosilane. After sealing the tube,
shake it vigorously, let stand for 30 min at room temperature, then centrifuge. The
supernatant is used as test Solution. The test solution proceed as gas
chromatography with operation conditions below and calculate the concentration of
Propylene Glycol from calibration curve by internal standard method
Internal standard solution : Weigh 0.025 g of ethylene glycol and add pyridine to make
50mL.
Standard solution : Accurately weigh 0.025 g of Propylene Glycol and add pyridine to
make 50 mL. Take 40, 200, 500, and 1,000μl of this solution into 10 mL volumetric
1063
 flask respectively. Add 0.1 mL of internal standard solution to each volumetric flask
and make exactly 10 mL with pyridine. Prepare each standard solution in the same
manner as test solution.
Calibration Curve Preparation : Standard solutions of 4 different concentration proceed
by gas chromatography under operation conditions below and prepare calibration
curve.
Operation Condition
Column : HP-1(30m×0.32mm, 0.25μm) or its equivalent
Detector : Hydrogen Flame Ionization Detector (FID)
Temperature at injection hole: 230℃
Amount of injection : 1μl
Type of injection : splitless
Column Temperature : Hold for 5 min at 60℃ and then 40℃ to 250℃ at 20℃/min,
and hold for 5 min at 250℃.
Carrier gas : helium
Flow rate : Adjust flow rate so that Propylene Glycol derivatives is kept about 8
minutes
(7) Dimethyl Sulfoxide(sucrose acetate isobutylate is excluded) : 5 g of Sucrose Esters
of Fatty Acids is precisely weighed and dissolved in tetrahydrofuran to make 25mL,
test solution. Test solution proceeds gas chromatography under operation conditions
below and measure the content of Dimethyl sulfoxide from calibration curve., its
content should not be more than 2.0 ppm.
Standard solution : 0.1g of Dimethyl sulfoxide is precisely weighed and dissolved in
tetrahydrofuran to make exactly 100 mL, undiluted standard solution. Each of 0.5, 1,
2, and 5 mL of undiluted standard solution is respectively measured and make exactly
50 mL with tetrahydrofuran, standard solution.
Calibration Curve Preparation : Different concentration of 4 standard solutions proceed
gas chromatography under operation conditions below and prepare calibration curve.
Operation Condition
Column : HP-FFAP or its equivalent
Detector : Flame Photometric Detector (FPD)
Temperature at injection hole: 210℃
Amount of injection : 3μl
Type of injection : splitless
Column Temperature : 150～170℃
Carrier gas : Nitrogen
Flow rate : flow rate is adjusted so that Propylene Glycol derivatives is kept
about 8 minutes
(8) Free Sucrose : Accurately weigh about 2 g of Sucrose Esters of Fatty Acids, add
40 mL of n-butanol, dissolve while warming on a water bath, extract twice with 20
1064
 mL of sodium chloride solution (1→20) each time, combine the extracts. add 2 mL of
diluted hydrochloric acid, and heat in a water bath for 30 minutes. Cool, add 2～3
drops of phenolphthalein solution, neutralize with 1 N sodium hydroxide solution, and
add water to make 100 mL. Use this solution as the sample solution. Take 20 mL of
this solution, add 20 mL of Bertrand's solution A and 20 mL of Bertrand's solution B,
boil gently for 3 minutes, and allow to stand to precipitate cuprous oxide (at this
time, the color of the supernatant changes to deep blue). Filter the supernatant
through a glass filter, wash the precipitate in the flask with hot water until the
washings are no longer alkaline, and filter the washings through the glass filter
(taking care not to allow cuprous oxide to be exposed to air). Dissolve the
precipitate in the glass filter in 20 mL of Bertrand's solution C into Erlen mayer flask
or other suitable containers. Filter the solution through the above glass filter, wash
with water, combine the filtrate and the washings, and titrate with Bertrand's solution
D. Calculate the amount of copper from the consumed volume, determine the amount
of invert sugar from Bertrand's Table, and calculate the content of free sucrose by
the following formula. Its content should not be more than 5%.
Content of free weight of the invert sugar(mg) × 0.95 × 5
sucrose(%)＝ weight of the sample(mg)
× 100

Quantitative Table for Sugars

equivalent weight for eQach equivalent weight for eQach
sugar (mg) sugar (mg)
sugar
(mg) sugar
(mg)
invert glucose galactos maltose lactose invert glucose galactos maltose lactose
sugar e sugar e
10
11 20.6
22.6 20.4 19.3 11.2 14.4 2627 51.7 51.5 48.9 28.9 36.6
12 24.6 24.3 23.0 13.4 17.2 28 55.5 55.3 52.5 31.3 38.0
22.4 21.2 12.3 15.8 53.6 53.4 50.7 30.0 39.4
13
14 26.5
28.5 26.3 24.9 14.5 18.6 29 57.4 57.2 54.4 32.2 40.7
15 30.5 30.2 28.6 16.7 21.4 31 61.1 60.9 58.0 34.4 42.1
28.3 26.7 15.6 20.0 30 59.3 59.1 56.2 33.3 43.4
1065
16 32.5 32.2 30.5 17.8 22.8 3233 63.0 62.8 59.0 35.5 44.8
17
18 34.5
36.4 34.2
36.2 32.3
34.2 18.9
20.0 24.2
25.6 34 64.8
66.7 64.6
66.5 61.5
63.3 36.5
37.6 46.1
47.4
19 38.4 38.1 36.0 21.1 27.0 3536 68.5 68.3 65.0 38.7 48.7
20 40.4 40.1 37.0 22.2 28.4 70.3 70.1 66.8 39.8 50.1
21 42.3 42.0 39.7 23.3 29.8 37 72.2 72.0 68.6 40.9 51.4
22 44.2 43.9 41.6 24.4 31.1 3839 74.0 73.8 70.4 41.9 52.7
23 46.1 45.8 43.4 25.5 32.5 75.9 75.7 72.1 43.0 54.1
24 48.0 47.7 45.2 26.6 33.9 40 77.7 77.5 73.9 44.1 55.4
25 49.8 49.6 47.0 27.7 35.2 41 79.5 79.3 75.6 45.2 56.7

1066
 equivalentsugar
weight for eQach equivalentsugar
weight for eQach
sugar (mg) (mg)
(mg) invert glucose galactos maltose lactose sugar
(mg) invert glucose galactos maltose lactose
sugar e sugar e

42
43 81.2
83.0 81.1
82.9 77.4
79.1 46.3
47.4 58.0
59.3 72
73 132.4
134.0 133.1
134.7 128.3
130.0 78.6
79.7 96.9
98.0
44
45 84.8
86.5 84.7
86.4 80.8
82.5 48.5
49.5 60.6
61.9 74
75 135.6
137.2 136.3
137.9 131.5
133.1 80.8
81.8 99.1
100.4
46 88.3 88.2 84.3 50.6 63.3 76 138.9 139.6 134.8 82.9 101.7
47 90.1 90.0 86.0 51.7 64.6 77 140.5 141.2 136.4 84.0 102.9
48
49 91.9
93.6 91.8
93.6 87.7
89.5 52.8
53.9 65.9
67.2 78
79 142.1
143.7 142.8
144.5 138.0
139.7 85.1
86.1 104.2
105.4
50
51 95.4
97.1 95.4
97.1 91.2
92.6 55.0
56.1 68.5
69.8 80 145.3 146.1 141.3 87.2 106.7
52 98.9 98.9 94.6 57.1 71.1 81
82 146.9
148.5 147.7
149.3 142.9
144.6 88.3
89.4 107.9
109.2
53
54 100.6
102.2 100.6
102.3 96.3
98.0 58.2
59.3 72.4
73.7 83
84 150.0
151.6 150.9
152.5 146.2
147.8 90.4
91.5 110.4
111.7
55 104.0 104.1 99.7 60.3 74.9 85 153.2 154.0 149.4 92.6 112.9
56 105.7 105.8 101.5 61.4 76.2 86 154.8 155.6 151.1 93.7 114.1
57
58 107.4
109.2 107.6
109.3 103.2
104.9 62.5
63.5 77.5
78.8 87
88 156.4
157.9 157.2
158.8 152.7
154.3 94.8
95.8 115.4
116.6
59
60 110.9
112.6 111.1
112.8 106.6
108.3 64.6
65.7 80.1
81.4 89
90 159.5
161.1 160.4
162.0 156.0
157.6 96.9
98.0 117.9
119.1
61 114.3 114.5 110.0 66.8 82.7 91 162.6 163.6 159.2 99.0 120.3
62 115.9 116.2 111.6 67.9 83.9 92 164.2 165.2 160.8 100.1 121.6
63
64 117.6
119.2 117.9
119.6 113.3
115.0 68.9
70.0 85.2
86.5 93
94 165.7
167.3 166.7
168.3 162.4
164.0 101.1
102.0 122.8
124.0
65
66 120.9
122.6 121.3
123.0 116.6
118.3 71.1
72.2 87.7
89.0 95
96 168.8
170.3 169.9
171.5 165.6
167.2 103.2
104.2 125.1
126.5
67 124.2 124.7 120.0 73.3 90.3 97 171.9 173.1 168.8 105.3 127.7
68
69 125.9
127.5 126.4
128.1 121.7
123.3 74.3
75.4 91.6
92.8 98
99 173.4
175.0 174.6
176.2 170.4
172.0 106.3
107.4 128.9
130.2
70 129.2 129.8 125.0 76.5 94.1 100 176.5 177.8 173.6 108.4 131.4
71 130.8 131.4 126.6 77.6 95.4

1067
 (9) Dimethylformamide : 2 g of Sucrose Esters of Fatty Acids dissolve in
tetrahydrofuran to make exactly 20mL. Test solution proceeds by gas chromatography
under operation conditions below and calculate the concentration of
Dimethylformamide from calibration curve. The concentration should not be more than
1.0 ppm.
Standard solution : Accurately weigh 0.1g of dimethylformamide dissolve in
tetrahydrofuran to make 100 mL. Accurately pipette 1 mL of this solution and make
100 mL with tetrahydrofuran, stock standard solution. Take each of 0.5, 1, and 2 mL
of stock standard solution respectively and make exactly 100 mL with tetrahydrofuran,
standard solution.
Calibration Curve Preparation : 3 standard solutions proceed gas chromatography under
operation conditions below and prepare calibration curve.
Operation Condition
Column : HP-FFAP or its equivalent
Detector : Nitrogen Phosphours Detector (NPD)
Temperature at injection hole: 180℃
Amount of injection : 1μl
Type of injection : splitless
Column Temperature : Keeping at 40℃ for 2 minutes, it is raised as the rate of 20℃
/minutes by 160℃, keep at 160℃ for 2 minutes
Carrier gas : Helium
Water Content Approximately 500 mg of Sucrose Esters of Fatty Acids is precisely
weighed and tested by the back titration method in water content determination
(Karl-Fischer Method). The water content should not be more than 4%. However,
Sucrose Esters of Fatty Acids transfer into a dried titration flask, where 10 mL of
Karl-Fischer methyl alcohol is added and Karl-Fischer solution (approximately 10 mL
excess) is added. It is sealed and stir-mixed for 20 minutes. It is titrated with
water-methyl alcohol standard solution while stirring vigorously. Separately, a blank
test is carried out.
Residue on Ignition When thermogravimetric analysis is done with 1 g of Sucrose Esters
of Fatty Acids, the amount of residues should not be more than 2%.

1068
 Sulfur Dioxide
Chemical Formula SO2
Molecular Weight 64.06

1069
 Sulfuric Acid
Chemical Formula: H2SO4

Molecular Weight: 98.08 INS No.: 513

Synonyms: Dihydrogen sulfate CAS No.: 7664-93-9

Compositional Specifications of Sulfuric Acid

Content Sulfuric Acid should contain not less than 94.0% of sulfuric acid (H2SO4).
Description Sulfuric Acid is a colorless or slightly brownish. transparent or almost
transparent, viscous liquid.
Identification (1) Sulfuric Acid solution (1→100) is strongly acidic.
(2) Sulfuric Acid solution (1→100) responds to the test for Sulfate Limit Test in
Identification.
Purity (1) Chloride : When 2 g of Sulfuric Acid is tested by Chloride Limit Test, its
content should not be more than the amount that corresponds to 0.3 mL of 0.01 N
hydrochloric acid.
(2) Nitrate : Weigh 5 g of Sulfuric Acid, add gradually to 8 mL of water, add 1 mL of
a solution of brucine in sulfuric acid (1→500) and sulfuric acid to make 25 mL. shake
well, and warm at about 80℃ for 10 minutes. This solution is used as the test
solution. Measure 0.5 mL of Nitrate Standard Solution, add 8 mL of water, add 5 mL of
sulfuric acid gradually, add 1 mL of a solution of brucine in sulfuric acid (1→500)
and sulfuric acid to make 25 mL. shake well, and warm at about 80℃ for 10 minutes.
This solution is used as the reference solution. The color of the test solution is not
darker than that of the reference solution.
(3) Arsenic : It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(4) Lead : Accurately weigh 5.0 g of Sulfuric Acid, where water is added to make 25 mL,
is tested by Atomic Absorption Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma
Emission Spectroscopy, its content should not be more than 2.0 ppm.
(5) Mercury : When Sulfuric Acid is tested by Mercury Limit Test, its content should
not be more than 1.0 ppm.
(6) Selenium : 0.3 g of Sulfuric Acid, precisely weighed, is carefully transferred into a
150 mL beaker, where 25 mL of 4 N hydrochloric acid is previously added, and it is
mixed and heated until it boils. Heat this solution for 15 minutes in a water bath, add
25 mL of water, and cool, Test Solution. For reference solution, 2 mL of standard
solution is weighed, transferred into a beaker and titrated with 50 mL of 2N
hydrochloric acid. 50 mL of 2N hydrochloric acid is used for blank test solution. 5
mL of ammonica water is carefully added to test solution, reference solution, and
blank test solution. After cooling, adjust pH of each solution 1.8～2.2 with using
ammonia water(1→2). To each solution, 0.2 g of Hydroxylamine Hydrochloride is
added, carefully shaken, and dissolved. Then 2,3-Diamino Naphthalene solution is
added, mixed, set aside for 100 minutes. Transfer each solution to separatory funnel,
1070
 wash with 10 mL of water, add, and extract with 5 mL of cyclohexene. The aqueous
layer is discarded, cyclohexene layer is centrifuged to remove slight amount of
water. When absorption is analyzed at a wavelength of 380nm, the absorption of
Test Solution should not be higher than that of the Standard Solution (Not more than 20
ppm).
Standard solution : Dilute Selenium standard solution or selling standard solution
to 3 ppm with water.
2,3-Diamino naphthalene solution : Dissolve 0.1 g of 2,3-Diamino naphthalene solution
and 0.5 g of hydroxylamine hydrochloride in 0.1N
hydrochloric acid to make 100 mL.
나) (7) Iron : To 5.0 g of Sulfuric acid, add water to make 25 mL, test solution. When the
solution is tested by Atomic Absorption Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled
Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content should not be more than 20 ppm.
(8) Readily Oxidizable Substances : Weigh 8 g of Sulfuric Acid, add to 10 mL of water
while coolin,. and add 0.1 mL of 0.1 N potassium permanganate. The pink color of
the solution should not disappear within 5 minutes.
(9) Reducing substances : Weigh 8 g of Sulfuric Acid, add to 50 mL of iced water and
carefully titrate. Add 0.1 mL of 0.1 N potassium permanganate. The pink color of the
solution should not disappear within 5 minutes. (not more than 40 ppm as sulfur
dioxide)
Residue on Ignition The residue should not be more than 1 mg when placing 5 g
sulfuric acid on platinum or quartz dish, evaporating it under water and igniting it at
450～550℃ until being same weight.
Assay Accurately weigh about 2 g of Sulfuric Acid, and add to 50 mL of water. After
cooling, add water to make exactly 100 mL. Take 25 mL of this solution, and titrate
with 0.5 N sodium hydroxide (indicator : 1～2 drops of bromothymol blue solution).
1 mL of 0.5 N sodium hydroxide = 24.52 mg of H2SO4

1071
 Tagetes Extract

INS No.: 161b(ii)

Definition Tagetes Extract is a pigment that is obtained by extracting flowers of

marigold of chrysanthemum family (Tagetes erecta WILLD.) with hexane. Its major
colouring component is lutein of carotinoids and lutein dipalmitate. Dilutant, stabilizer,
or solvent can be added for the purpose of color value adjustment and quality
preservation.
Compositional Specifications of Tagetes Extract
Content Color value ( ) of Tagetes Extract should not be less than declared value.
Description Tagetes Extract is orange yellow～yellowish brown liquid, lump, or paste
with characteristic scent.
Identification (1) The solution, which Ethyl alcohol : n-Hexan (1:1) is added and
dissolved in tagetes extract, exhibits maximum absorption at 469～475 nm and 441～
447 nm. It exhibits maximum absorption at 420～426 nm in some cases.
(2) The solution, which tagetes extract is dissolved in acetone, becomes colorless when
5% sodium nitrite and 0.5M sulfuric acid solution are added in order.
Purity (1) Arsenic ： It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(2) Lead : When 5.0 g of tagetes extract is tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content
should not be more than 2.0 ppm.
(3) Residual Solvent ： When Tagetes Extract is tested by Purity (4) for 「Paprika
Extract Pigments」, residual hexane should not be more than 25 ppm.
Assay(color value) Appropriate amount of Tagetes Extract is accurately weighed so that
the absorbance is within 0.3～0.7 and dissolved in hexane (total volume 100 mL). 1 mL
of this solution is diluted to 100 mL with hexane (Test Solution). If necessary, the
solution is centrifuged and the supernatant is used. Using ethanol : hexane(1:1) as a
reference solution, absorbance A is measured at the maximum absorption at 441~447
nm with 1 cm path length. Color value is obtained using the following equation.
Color Value ( ) ＝ weight Aof×the1,000 sample(g)

1072
 Talc
INS No.: 553(iii)
Synonyms: Talcum CAS No.: 14807-96-6

Definition Talc is purified from natural hydrated magnesium silicate. It may contain small
amount of aluminum silicate.
Compositional Specifications of Talc
Description Talc is odorless and white～greyish white crystalline powder with a slippery
touch.
Identification 0.2 g of Talc is mixed with 0.9 g anhydrous sodium carbonate and 1.3 g
of anhydrous potassium carbonate. It is then heated until it melts completely in a
platinum or nickel crucible. After cooling, it is transferred into a beaker with
approximately 5 mL of hot water. Hydrochloric acid is slowly added until foaming
stops. After adding 10 mL of hydrochloric acid, it is evaporated to dryness. After
cooling, 20 mL of water is added to the residue, which is boiled and filtered. Gel
phase residue on the filter paper. When the filtrate shows the reaction of Magnesium
Salts in Identification.
Purity (1) Water-soluble substances and pH ： 10 g of Talc is added to 100 mL of
water. It is then heated for 2 hours while adding water to supplement the loss and
shaking occasionally. After cooling, it is filtered using a Millipore filter. If the filtrate
is turbid, it is filtered again through the same filter. The beaker and the filter is
washed with water, which is added to the filtrate. The total volume of the filtrate is
brought up to 100 mL with water. Use this solution as the test solution. pH of the
test solution should be 7.5∼9.5. 50 mL of the test solution is evaporated to dryness,
which is then dried for 2 hours at 105℃. The weight of residue does not exceed 10
mg.
(2) Hydrochloric acid soluble substances ： 1 g of Talc is mixed with 20 mL of diluted
hydrochloric acid, which is stir-mixed and heated for 15 minutes at 50℃. After
cooling, it is filtered. The beaker and the residue on the filter is washed with water,
which is added to the filtrate. The total volume of the filtrate is brought up to 20 mL
with water. 1 mL of diluted sulfuric acid is added to 10 mL of the filtrate, which is
evaporated to dryness and heat treated at 550℃ until the weight becomes constant.
The residue does not exceed 10mg.
(3) Arsenic ： It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(4) Water-soluble iron : 20 mL of test solution in (1) is slightly acidified with
hydrochloric acid. When 1 drop of potassium ferrocyanide solution is added to this
solution, the solution does not turn blue.
(5) Lead : Accurately weigh 5 g of Talc, add 40 mL of diluted hydrochloric acid and
50 mL of water, mix well, mildly heat, cool, then filter. Wash the residue on the
filter paper, combine the rinsings to the filtrate, then make up to 250 mL with water.
Take 125 mL of this solution, evaporate to dry in the water bath, add 10 mL of
1073
 diluted hydrochloric acid(1→10) to the residue, and make up to 10 mL, test solution.
Separately, pipette 1 mL of lead standard solution, add diluted hydrochloric acid(1→
10), then make up to 20 mL, reference solution. When test solution and reference
solution are tested by flame Atomic Absorption Spectrophotometry under following
operation condition, the absorbance of test solution should not be higher than that of
reference solution (not more than 2.0ppm).
Operation Condition
Light source lamp : lead cathode lamp
Analysis curve wavelength : 283.3nm
Combustible support gas : air
Combustible gas : acetylene
(6) A sbestos : Proceed test as directly under following (A) or （B), asbestos should
not be detected. When asbestos is detected in the test by following (A) or (B),
additionally test by (C), and asbestos should not be detected.
(A) Asbestos is measured by Potassium Bromide Disk Method in Infrared
Spectrophotometry, absorption is identified at 600～650cm-1(serpentine) or 757～
759cm-1(amphibole) of wave number. When absorption peak is at wave number 75
7～759cm-1, a certain amount of sample is ignited for 30 minutes at 850℃, cooled,
again proceed under Infrared Spectrophotometry, and identify the absorption peak
at wave number 757～759cm-1 which indicates tremolite in amphibole.
(B) When powder diffraction of Talc is measured with Powder X-Ray Diffractometer
under following operation condition, the angle of diffraction 2θidentifies diffraction
peak of 10.4～10.6°(amphibole), 24.2～24.4°, and 12.0～12.2°(serpentine).
Operation condition
X-lay light source : Cu Kα monochromator
Tube current and tube voltage : 24～30mA, 40kV
Incidence angle : 1°
measurement angle : 0.2°
Scanning speed : 0.1°/minute
Scanning range (angle of diffraction 2θ) : 10～13°, 24～26°
(C) Observe form and color of asbestos with optical microscope, asbestos is
confirmed if the following criteria are met:
① The ratio of length and width of fiber is in the range of 20:1 to 100:1 or when
the length of fiber is longer than 5 μm, the ratio of length and width is not
less than 100:1.
② It can be split into very thin microfibers.
③ if 2 or more of the following 4 criteria are met:
ⓐ parallel fibers occurring in bundles
ⓑ fiber bundles displaying worn or frayed ends
1074
 ⓒ fibers in the form of thin needles
ⓓ matted masses of individual fibres and/or fibres showing curvature
Loss on Drying When Talc is dried for 1 hour at 105℃, the weight loss should not be
more than 0.5%.
Loss on Ignition When loss on Ignition is done, weight loss should not be more than 6%.

1075
 Tamarind Color
Definition Tamarind Color is obtained by roasting and extracting with water from
tamarind seeds (Tamarindus indica L. of leguminosae, a bean family). Its major pigment
component is flavonoid. Dilutant, stabilizer, or solvent can be added for the purpose of
color value adjustment and quality preservation.
Compositional Specifications of Tamarind Color
Content Color value ( ) of Tamarind Color should be higher than the indicated value.
Description Tamarind Color is reddish brown～blackish brown liquid, lump, powder, or
paste with a slight characteristic odor.
Identification (1) Test Solution obtained in Color Value section of Tamarind Color shows
reddish brown.
(2) 0.5 g of Tamarind Color is dissolved in 100 mL of water. When 10 mL of this
solution is acidified with 1 mL of hydrochloric acid, reddish brown precipitate is
formed.
(3) 0.5 g of Tamarind Color is dissolved in 100 mL of water. When 2 mL of ferric
chloride solution (1→50) is added to 10 mL of this solution, blackish brown
precipitate is formed.
Purity (1) Arsenic : It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(2) Lead : When 5.0 g of Tamarind Color is tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content
should not be more than 10.0 ppm.
Assay (Color Value) Appropriate amount of Tamarind Color is precisely weighed so that
the absorbance is within 0.3～0.7 and dissolved in acetic acid․sodium acetate buffer
solution with pH 7.0 so that total volume is 100 mL (Test Solution). If necessary, the
solution is centrifuged and the supernatant is used. Using acetic acid․sodium acetate
buffer solution with pH 7.0 as a reference solution, absorption A is measured at the
maximum absorbance at 500 nm with 1 cm cell. Color value is obtained using the
following equation.
Color Value( ) ＝ weight ofA the × 10
sample(g)

∘Citric acid․dibasic sodium phosphate buffer solution (pH 7.0)

Solution 1 ： 0.1M citric acid solution：1L of solution containing 21.01 g of citric acid
(C6H8O7․H2O).
Solution 2 ： 0.2M dibasic sodium phosphate solution： 1L of solution containing 71.63
g of dibasic sodium phosphate (Na2HPO4․12H2O).
Solution 1 and Solution 2 are mixed well (35:165) and its pH is adjusted to 7.0.

1076
 Tamarind Gum
Synonyms: Tamarind seed polysaccharide CAS No.: 39386-78-2

Definition Tamarind Gum is obtained from tamarind (Tamarindus indica LINNE) seeds
and major component is polysaccharide. Dilutant can be added for the purpose of
quality preservation.
Compositional Specifications of Tamarind Gum
Description Tamarind Gum is brownish gray- white powder having a slight odor.
Identification (1) 1 g of Tamarind Gum is dissolved in 100 mL of water at 80℃ by
stirring vigorously. When it is cooled to room temperature, it becomes slightly turbid
and viscous neutral liquid. When 3 mL of saturated sodium sulfate solution is added
to 5 mL of this liquid, it becomes a jelly phase.
(2) 1 g of Tamarind Gum is slowly added and dissolved in 100 mL of 50% sugar
solution at 80℃ by stirring vigorously. After boiling carefully for 5 minutes, and then
allowed to stand. It becomes solid of jelly phase.
Purity (1) Arsenic : It should be no more than 2.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(2) Lead : When 5.0 g of Tamarind Gum is tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content
should not be more than 10.0 ppm.
(3) Starch： 0.1 g of Tamarind Gum is dissolved in 10 mL of water, which is heated
and then cooled. When 2 drops of iodine solution are added, it should not turn blue.
(4) Protein : When approximately 0.5 g of Tamarind Gum is tested under nitrogen
determination method, the amount should not be more than 3%. (Protein Factor ： 5.7).
(5) Crude Fat : 10 g of Tamarind Gum is precisely weighed into a cylindrical filter
paper (Thimble Filter) and dried for 3 hours at 105℃. It is then extracted for 20
hours using a soxhlet extractor in a water bath. Then remove ether from the extract,
and dried for 2 hours at 105℃. The content of crude fat should not be more than
1%.
Loss on Drying When 3 g of Tamarind Gum is dried for 3 hours at 100℃, the weight
loss should not be more than 7%.
Ash 1 g of Tamarind Gum is tested for ash. The amount should not be more than 5%.

1077
 Tannase
Definition Tannase is the enzyme, which is obtained from the culture of Aspergillus
oryzae. Diluent or stabilizer can be added for the purpose of activity adjustment and
quality preservation.
Compositional Specifications of Tannase
Description Tannase is a white ～ pale brown powder, granule, paste or colorless ～
pale brown liquid with a characteristic scentless or a characteristic scent.
Identification When Tannase is proceeded as directed under Activity Test, it should have
the activity as Tannase.
Purity (1) Arsenic : It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(2) Lead : When 5.0 g of Tannase is tested by Atomic Absorption Spectrophotometry or
Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content should not be more
than 5.0 ppm.
(3) Coliform Group: Tannase is tested by Microbiological Method for 〔Coliform Grou
p〕in General Testing Methods in 「Standards and Specifications for Foods」. It
should contain not more than 30 per 1g of this product.
(4) Salmonella : Tannase is tested by Microbiological Method for Salmonella〕in
General Testing Methods in 「Standards and Specifications for Foods」. It should be
negative(-).
(5) E. Coli : When Tannase is tested by Microbe Test Methods for E. Coli in General
Test Method 「Standards and Specifications for Foods」, it should be negative (-).
Activity Test (activity) Analysis Principle: The activity test is based on the hydrolysis of
depside bond of tannin acid substrate at 30℃. Absorbance difference is measured by
using spectrophotometer at 310nm.
The preparation of Test Solution : When Tannase is weighted, 1 mL of the final diluent
solution contains 1 Tannase unit. 50mM of citric acid buffer solution(pH 5.5) of the low
temperature(5±3℃) is added to prepare Test solution.
Test Procedure : 4mL of substrate solution is added to a 25 × 150mm test tube and
isothermalized for 10 minutes in a 30℃ water bath. Precisely 1mL of Test solution is
added to the test tube, and mixed well, and the reaction of the solution is conducted in
a water bath(Reaction start). The test tube is separated with reaction solution A and B.
After 10minutes from reaction start, 1mL of the reaction solution is taken in test tube
A, and 9mL of 80% ethyl alcohol solution is added in the solution. Next, shake strongly
and stop the reaction. This reaction solution is called as Solution A. After 20minutes
from reaction start, 1mL of the reaction solution is taken in test tube B, and 9mL of
80% ethyl alcohol solution is added in the solution. Next, mix and stop the reaction.
This reaction solution is called as Solution B. Solution A and B is diluted 10times by
80% ethyl alcohol, and these solutions are called as Enzyme test solution A and B. As
control solution is 80% ethyl alcohol, each 1cm liquid layer of Enzyme test solution A
and B, absorbance a and b, is measured at 310nm. The activity of the enzyme is
calculated following the formula.
1078
 Tannase unit/g = (a 10- b)× ×0.7120.3× ×C 4
20.3 : μmol of tannic acid contained 1.0mL of substrate solution
4: Substrate solution for reaction(mL)
10: The difference between final and initial reaction time(min)
0.71: Absorbance change in the completed hydrolysis of tannic acid 20.3μmol under
above condition.
C: Sample amount containing in 1mL of the Test Solution(g)
a: Absorbance of Enzyme test solution A
b: Absorbance of Enzyme test solution B
Only, the value of (a-b) should be 0.09～0.11
Definition of Activity : 1 Tannase unit corresponds to the amount of enzyme, which
hydrolyze 1μmol of tannic acid per minutes under the above test conditions
Solutions
50mM citric acid buffer solution(pH 5.5)
Solution A : 10.5g of citric acid dissolve in 1000mL water.
Solution B : 14.7g of sodium citrate(2 hydrorate) dissolve in 1000mL water.
A solution and B solution are mixed (138mL :500mL) and adjust pH to 5.5 with using
both solutions.
Substrate solution : 0.32g of tannic acid (Sigma USP Grade) is weighted, and added in
10mL of 50mM citric acid(pH 5.5). Dissolve with warming and shaking. Add 50mM
citric acid(pH 5.5) to make 100mL volume.
Stotage standard of Tannase
Tannase should be stored in a hermetic container in a cold dark place.

1079
 Tannic Acid
INS No.: 181
Synonyms: Gallotannic acid; Tannins CAS No.: 1401-55-4

Definition Tannic Acid is usually obtained from gallnut.

Compositional Specifications of Tannic Acid
Description Tannic Acid is yellowish white～pale brown amorphous powder, glistening
scale shaped or spongy mass, odorless or with a faint, characteristic odor and
astringent taste.
Identification (1) 1 g of Tannic Acid is dissolved 10 mL of water. When a small amount
of ferric chloride solution is added, a bluish black colour or precipitate is formed.
(2) When a test solution made in accordance with (1) is melted by adding alkaloidal salt,
albumin, or gelatin, precipitate is formed.
Purity (1) Arsenic : It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(2) Lead : When 5.0 g of Tannic Acid is tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content
should not be more than 2.0 ppm.
(3) Residual Solvent : 1g of Tannic Acid is precisely weighed into a sample vial, 5μl of
water is added, and seal it quickly with a septum, test solution. Proceed
headspace-gas chromatography under operation conditions below and measure each
amount of acetone and ethyl acetate from each calibration curve, it should be not
more than 25ppm as individual or sum if used together
Operation Condition
Column : HP-1 or its equivalent
Detector : Hydrogen Flame Ionization Detector (FID)
Injection Port Temperature : 110℃
Column Temperature : 40℃
Detector Temperature : 110℃
Carrier gas : Nitrogen or helium
Head space sampler
Heating temperature : 80℃
Heating time : 40 minutes
Sample gas injection : 0.4mL
Mixed standard solution : 1 g of acetone and 1 g of ethyl acetate is precisely weighed
into each flask, water is added to make 100 mL. 2, 20, 40 mL each of this solution
is taken, water is added to make 100 mL, each mixed standard solution. (1 mL of
each mixed standard solution contains 200, 2,000, 4,000μg of acetone and ethyl
acetate, respectively).
Preparation of calibration curve : 1 g of tannic acid, free of acetone and ethyl acetate,
1080
 is precisely weighed into a vial, 5μl each of 200, 2,000, 4,000ppm of mixed standard
solution is added respectively, and seal it quickly with a septum. Proceed
headspace-gas chromatography under operation conditions below and measure the
peak area of acetone and ethyl acetate. From the peak area, prepare each calibration
curve.
(4) Gums or Dextrins : 1 g of Tannic Acid is dissolved in 5 mL of water, which is
then filtered. When 10 mL of alcohol is added to the filtrate, no turbid is produced
within 15 minutes.
(5) Resinous substances : 1 g of Tannic Acid is dissolved in 5 mL of water, which is
then filtered. When the filtrate is diluted to 15 mL with water, no turbid is produced
Loss on Drying When 3 g of Tannic Acid is dried for 2 hours at 105℃, the weight loss
should not be more than 12%.
Residue on Ignition When Residue on Ignition is done with 1 g of Tannic Acid, the
amount of residue should not be more than 1%.

1081
 Tara Gum
INS No.: 417
Synonyms: Peruvian carob CAS No.: 39300-88-4

Definition Tara Gum is a polysaccharide obtained by grinding endosperm of tara

(Caesalpinia spinosa Kuntze) seeds of actinidiaceae.
Compositional Specifications of Tara Gum
Description Tara Gum is nearly odorless, white～pale yellow powder.
Identification (1) When a small amount of sodium borate is added to an aqueous solution
of Tara Gum, a gel is formed.
(2) 2 g of Tara Gum is placed in a 400 mL beaker. It is then moisten throughly with
about 4 mL of isopropyl alcohol. With vigorous stirring, 200 mL of water is added
and further stirred until the gum is completely and uniformLy dispersed. 100 mL of
this solution is transferred into another 400 mL beaker, which is heated for 10
minutes in a water bath. When it is cooled to room temperature, the solution shows a
marked increase in viscosity.
Purity (1) Arsenic : It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(2) Lead : When 5.0 g of Tara Gum is tested by Atomic Absorption Spectrophotometry
or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content should not be more
than 2.0 ppm.
(3) Cadmium : When 5.0 g of Tara Gum is tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content
should not be more than 1.0 ppm.
(4) Mercury : When 0.1 g of Tara Gum is tested by Mercury Test Method, its content
should not be more than 1.0ppm.
(5) Starch ： 0.1 g of Tara Gum is dissolved in 10 mL of water, which is heated and
then cooled. When 2 drops of iodine solution are added, it should not produce blue.
(6) Protein : When 0.2 g of Tara Gum is precisely weighed and tested as directed in
Kjeldahl Method under Nitrogen Determination, the amount should not be more than
3.5%. (Protein Factor ： 6.25).
(7) Acid Insoluble substances : 0.5 g of Tara Gum is precisely weighed and dissolved
in 150 mL of water and 1.5 mL sulfuric acid in a beaker, which is covered with a
watch glass and heated for 6 hours in a water bath. Beaker wall is washed with
water so that sample is not left on the wall. 500 mg of appropriate filtering aid is
added to the filter, previously make a constant weight . The residue is washed
thoroughly with hot water and dried for 3 hours at 105℃. It is subtracted the weight
of the filtering aid from the weight of the residue, the amount should not be more
than 2%.
Loss on Drying When Tara Gum is dried for 5 hours at 105℃, the weight loss should
not be more than 15%.
1082
Ash When Tara Gum is tested as indicated under ash, the amount should not be more
than 1.5%.

1083
 DL-Tartaric Acid
dl-Tartaric Acid

Chemical Formula: C4H6O6

Molecular Weight: 150.09

Synonyms: 2,3-Dihydroxysuccinic acid CAS No.: 133-37-9

Compositional Specifications of DL-Tartaric Acid

Content DL-Tartaric Acid, when calculated on the dried basis, should contain not less
than 99.5% of DL-tartaric acid (C4H6O6).
Description DL-Tartaric Acid occurs as colorless crystals or white crystalline powder. It
is odorless and has an acid taste.
Identification (1) DL-Tartaric Acid solution (1→10) has no optical rotation.
(2) Proceed as directed under Identification (2), (3), and (4) in L-Tartaric acid.
Purity (1) Melting Point : Melting point of DL-Tartaric Acid should be within a range of
200～206℃
(2) Sulfate : Proceed as directed under Purity (2) in [L-Tartaric Acid].
(3) Arsenic : It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(4) Lead : When 5.0 g of DL-Tartaric Acid is tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content
should not be more than 2.0 ppm.
(5) Readily Oxidizable Substances : Dissolve 1.0 g of DL-Tartaric Acid in 25 mL of
water and 25 mL of diluted sulfuric acid. Add 4.0 mL of 0.1 N potassium
permanganate, keeping the solution at 20℃. The pink color of the solution does not
disappear within 3 minutes.
Loss on Drying When DL-Tartaric Acid is dried for 3 hours in a vacuum desiccator
(silica gel), the loss should not be more than 0.5%.
Residue on Ignition Proceed as directed under Residues on Ignition in [L-Tartaric Acid].
Assay Proceed as directed under Assay in [L-Tartaric Acid].

1084
 L-Tartaric Acid
d-Tartaric Acid

Chemical Formula: C4H6O6

Molecular Weight: 150.09 INS No.: 334

Synonyms: L-2,3-Dihydroxysuccinic acid CAS No.: 87-69-4

Compositional Specifications of L-Tartaric Acid
Content L-Tartaric Acid, when calculated on the dried basis, should contain not less
than 99.7% of L-tartaric acid (C4H6O6).
Description L-Tartaric Acid occurs as colorless and transparency crystals or as a white,
fine crystalline powder. It is odorless and has an acid taste.
Identification (1) L-Tartaric Acid solution (1→10) is dextrorotatory.
(2) When L-Tartaric Acid is slowly heated, an odor that is similar to burning sucrose
is generated.
(3) L-Tartaric Acid solution (1→10) is acidic.
(4) L-Tartaric Acid responds to the test for Tartrate in Identification.
Purity (1) Specific Rotation : Dissolve 2 g of L-Tartaric Acid, previously dried and
accurately weighed in water to make 10 mL. Optical rotation of this solution should be
within a range of ＝ +12.0∼+13.0°
(2) Sulfate : When 0.5 g of L-Tartaric Acid is tested by Sulfate Limit Test, its content
should not be more than the amount that corresponds to 0.5 mL of 0.01 N sulfuric
acid.
(3) Oxalate : Dissolve 1.0 g of L-Tartaric Acid in 10 mL of water, and add 2 mL of
calcium chloride solution. No turbidity appears.
(4) Arsenic : It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(5) Lead : When 5.0 g of L-Tartaric Acid is tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content
should not be more than 2.0 ppm.
(6) Mercury : When L-Tartaric Acid is tested by Mercury Limit Test, its content
should not be more than 1.0 ppm
Loss on Drying When L-Tartaric Acid is dried in a desiccator (silica gel) for 3 hours,
the loss should not be more than 0.5%.
Residue on Ignition When thermogravimetric analysis is done with 2 g of L-Tartaric
Acid, the amount of residues should not be more than 0.1%.
Assay Dissolve about 1.5 g of L-Tartaric Acid, previously dried and accurately weighed
in water to make exactly 250 mL. Take 25 mL of this solution, and titrate with 0.1 N
sodium hydroxide (indicator : 2～3 drops of phenolphthalein solution).
1085
1 mL of 0.1 N sodium hydroxide = 7.504 mg of C4H6O6

1086
 Taurine
Chemical Formula: C2H7NO3S
Molecular Weight: 125.14 CAS No.: 107-35-7

Compositional Specifications of Taurine

Content Dried material should be contain not less than 99.0% of Taurine(C2H7NO3S＝ 125.14).
Description Taurine is white crystalline powder. It is odorless.
Identification (1) When 5 drops of diluted hydrochloric acid and 5 drops of sodium
nitrite solution are added to 5 mL of Taurine solution (1→20), bubbles are formed
and colorless gas is generated.
(2) 7.5 mL of Sodium hydroxide solution is added to 0.5 g of Taurine, which is slowly
heated to evaporate and then decomposed for 2 hours at 500℃. 5 mL of water is
added to the residue, where 1 drop of nitroprusside sodium solution. Then the
solution becomes violet red.
Purity (1) Clarity and Color of Solution : When 0.5 g of Taurine is dissolved in 20 mL
of water, the solution is colorless.
(2) Chloride : When 1.0 g of Taurine is tested by Chloride Limit Test, its content
should not be more than the amount that corresponds to 0.3 mL of 0.01 N
hydrochloric acid.
(3) Sulfate : When 1.5 g of Taurine is tested by Sulfate Limit Test, its content should
not be more than the amount that corresponds to 0.45 mL of 0.01 N sulfuric acid.
(4) Ammonia : 0.1 g of Taurine is dissolved in 70 mL of water in a flask, where 1 g
of magnesium oxide is added and a distillation apparatus is attached. To a receiving
flask, 2 mL of 0.1 N hydrochloric acid is added. Tip of the condenser is submerged
in the solution. It is distilled until collected the distillate up to 40 mL. 5 mL of
sodium hydroxide and water are added to make 50 mL solution. When 0.5 mL of
Nestle solution is added, its color should not be deeper than the color standard (Use
2 mL of ammonia standard solution, with 5 mL of sodium hydroxide solution and
water to make 50 mL, and 0.5 mL of nestle solution is added. Standard solution is
prepared by the same procedure).
(5) Arsenic : It should be no more than 1.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(6) Lead : When 5.0 g of Taurine is tested by Atomic Absorption Spectrophotometry
or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content should not be more
than 2 ppm.
(7) Realdily Carbonizable Substances : When 0.1 g of Taurine is tested by Realdily
Carbonizable Substances Test, the color should not be deeper than that of color
standard S.
(8) Coliform Group ： Taurine is tested by Microbe Test Methods for [Coliform Group]
in General Test Methods in Food Code. It should be not more than 30 per 1 g of this
product.
1087
 (9) Number of General Germs : When Taurine is tested by Total Viable Aerobic Count
in General Test Method in Food Code, it should not be more than 1,000 per 1 g.
Loss on Drying When Taurine is dried for 2 hours at 105℃, the weight loss should not
be more than 0.2%.
Residue on Ignition When thermogravimetric analysis is done with 1 g of Taurine, the
amount of residues should not be more than 0.1%.
Assay Dissolve 0.2 g of Taurine, precisely dried and accurately weighed, in 50 mL of
water, add 5 mL of formalin. It is then titrated with 0.1 N sodium hydroxide solution
(indicator : 3 drops phenolphthalein solution). Separately, a blank test is carried out by
the same method.
12.514 × (a-b)
Content(%) = × 100
weight of the sample(mg)

a : Consumed amount of 0.1 N sodium hydroxide solution for the test (mL)
b : Consumed amount of 0.1 N sodium hydroxide solution for the blank test (mL)

1088
 Tea Catechin
Definition Tea Catechin is obtained by extracting from leaves or stems of Camellia
sinensis O. KZE with water or ethyl alcohol and then purifying, or by extracting them
with hot water and then separating with methanol or ethyl acetate, and its main
ingredient is catechin.
Composition Specifications of Tea Catechin
Content Tea Catechin, when calculated on the anhydrous basis, should be 70∼110% as
catechin.
Description Tea Catechin is a white, pale yellow～dark brown powder, paste, or liquid
with characteristic smell.
Identification (1) When 0.1 g of Tea Catechin dissolve in 10 mL of 50% ethyl alcohol
and 2～3 drops of ferric chloride (1→50) are added, the solution becomes greenish
purple～dark purple.
(2) The aqueous solution of Tea Catechin exhibits absorption maximum at a wavelength
of 265～280 nm.
Purity (1) Arsenic : It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(2) Lead : When 5.0 g of Tea Catechin is tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content
should not be more than 10.0 ppm.
(3) Residual Solvent : 1g of Tea Catechin is precisely weighed into a sample vial, 5μl
of water is added, and seal it quickly with a septum, test solution. Proceed
headspace-gas chromatography under operation conditions below and measure each
amount of acetone and ethyl acetate from each calibration curve, it should be not
more than 50ppm as individual or sum if used together
Operation Condition
Column : HP-1 or its equivalent
Detector : Hydrogen Flame Ionization Detector (FID)
Injection Port Temperature : 110℃
Column Temperature : 40℃
Detector Temperature : 110℃
Carrier gas : Nitrogen or helium
Head space sampler
Heating temperature : 80℃
Heating time : 40 minutes
Sample gas injection : 0.4mL
Mixed standard solution : 1 g of acetone and 1 g of ethyl acetate is precisely weighed
into each flask, water is added to make 100 mL. 2, 20, 40 mL each of this solution
is taken, water is added to make 100 mL, each mixed standard solution. (1 mL of
each mixed standard solution contains 200, 2,000, 4,000μg of acetone and ethyl
acetate, respectively).
1089
 Preparation of calibration curve : 1 g of tannic acid, free of acetone and ethyl acetate,
is precisely weighed into a vial, 5μl each of 200, 2,000, 4,000ppm of mixed standard
solution is added respectively, and seal it quickly with a septum. Proceed
headspace-gas chromatography under operation conditions below and measure the
peak area of acetone and ethyl acetate. From the peak area, prepare each calibration
curve.
Loss on Drying When Tea Catechin is dried at 100℃ for 2 hours, the weight loss
should not be more than 5%. (However, this applies only to powder products).
Assay 0.5 g of sample is precisely weighted and water content(W%) is measured. The
amount that corresponds to about 30 mg of catechin of Tea Catechin is weighted, to
which water is added. If necessary, it is heated for dissolution. The volume is made
precisely 100 mL by adding water. To 5 mL of this solution, 5 mL of ferrous tartarate
solution is added and then phosphate buffer (pH 7.5) is added to make precisely 25 mL
for the test solution. With water as reference solution, absorbance is measure at 540
nm. Separately, the standard solution containing 5, 10, 15, 20, 25 mg of ethyl gallate
(standard) are made. Using 5 mL of each of these standard solution and water, the
same procedure as the test solution is performed to generate color. Then at 540 nm,
absorbance is measured to determine the standard curve. From the absorbance of the
test solution and the standard curve, the content (mg) of catechin in 100 mL of the
test solution is determined, according to the following formula.
Catechin Content(%) ＝ Weight of theC ×sample(mg)
1.5 × 100
× (100 - W)
× 100

C : Concentration (mg/100 mL) of ethyl gallate in the test solution obtained from the
standard solution
1.5 : Absorption of Ethyl Gallate 1mg corresponds to the absorption of tea catechin
1.5 mg.
W : Water content (%)

1090
 Tea Extract
Definition Tea Extract is obtained by extracting tea leaves of Camellia sinensis O. KZE.
of Theaceae with water or ethyl alcohol and its major component is catechin.
Compositional Specifications of Tea Extract
Content Tea Extract (converted to anhydrous) are more than 20% as catechin, and
should be 90～120% of the marked amount.
Description Tea Extract is pale yellow to dark brown power, paste, or liquid with a
slight characteristic scent.
Identification (1) 0.1 g of Tea Extract in 10 mL of 50% ethyl alcohol. When 2～3 drops
of ferric chloride(1→50) are added to the solution, it becomes greenish purple～
darkish purple appear.
(2) The aqueous solution of Tea Extract show a maximum absorption peak at 265～280
nm.
Purity (1) Arsenic : It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(2) Lead : When 5.0 g of Tea Extract is tested by Atomic Absorption Spectrophotometry
or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content should not be more
than 10.0 ppm.
Loss on Drying When Tea Extract is dried for 2 hours at 100℃, the weight loss should
not be more than 5%. (For powder only).
Assay 0.5 g of the sample is previously weighted and the amount of water (W%) is
measured beforehand.
(1) Green tea extract : The amount that corresponds to about 30 mg of catechin of
Tea Extract is accurately weighted, to which water is added. If necessary, it is heated
for dissolution. The volume is made precisely 100 mL by adding water. To 5 mL of
this solution, 5 mL of ferrous tartarate is added and then phosphate buffer (pH 7.5) is
added to make precisely 25 mL for the test solution. With the control solution being
water, absorbance is measure at 540 nm. Separately, the standard solution containing 5,
10, 15, 20, 25 mg of ethyl gallate (standard) per 100 mL are made. Using 5 mL of
each of these standard solution, the same procedure as the test solution is performed
to generate color. Then at 540 nm, absorbance is measured to determine the standard
curve. From the absorbance of the test solution and the standard curve, calculate the
content (mg) of catechin in 100 mL of the test solution by the following formula.
Catechin Content(%) ＝ weight of theC sample(mg)
× 1.5 × 100
× (100 - W)
× 100

C : Concentration of ethyl gallate in the test solution obtained from the standard
solution (mg/100mL)
1.5 : The absorbance of 1 mg of ethyl gallate corresponds to that of 1.5 mg of tea
catechin.
W : Water content (%)
1091
 (2) Woorong tea and red tea extracts : The amount of Tea Extract that corresponds to
about 10 mg of catechin is weighted accurately and dissolved in 1 mL of 50%
ethanol, and made precisely 100 mL by adding water. This is the test solution.
Separately, about 25 mg of (+) catechin (for assay) that is dried at 100 for 1 hour
is accurately weighted and dissolved in 1 mL of 50% ethanol, and made precisely
100 mL by adding water. 5, 7.5, 10, 12.5, and 15 mL of this solution are
respectively taken and diluted precisely to 25 mL by adding water. These are the
standard solutions. To 0.15 mL of each standard solution and the test solution, 1.35
mL of water and 0.5 mL of Folin-Denis'solution are added and mixed. As for the
control solution of the test solution, 0.5 mL of water is used. After 3 mins, 1 mL of
sodium carbonate (1→10) is added. Place in a thermostatic water bath of 30℃ for 1
hour and measure the absorbance at 700 nm. The standard curve is made from the
measured values of the standard solutions of (+) catechin. Calculate the content of
catechin in 100 mL of the test solution. The content of catechin is determined by the
following formula.
Catechin Content(%) C × 100
× 100
＝ weight of the sample(mg) × (100 - W)

C : Concentration (mg/100 mL) ethyl gallate in the test solution obtained from the
standard curve
W : Water content (%)
Solutions
∘Folin-Denis's solution : Add 180 mL of water to 25 g of sodium tungstate, 5 g of
phosphomolybdic acid, and 15.5 mL of phosphoric acid. Attach a
reflux condenser, heat the solution gently for 2 hours. Cool the
solution and add water to make 1,000 mL.

1092
 Thaumatin
INS No.: 957
CAS No.: 53850-34-3

Definition Thaumatin is obtained by purifying the water extracts of seeds of

Thaumatococcus daniellii Benth. Its component is Thaumatin.
Compositional Specifications of Thaumatin
Content When Thaumatin is quantitatively analyzed, it should contain more than the
amount indicated as thaumatin.
Description Thaumatin is scentless whitish～grayish brown powder, flakes, or solid with
a cool and strong sweet taste.
Identification (1) Dissolve 0.1 g of Thaumatin in 10 mL of sodium hydroxide solution by
heating and cooled. When 0.5 mL of cupper sulfate solution (1→100) is added to this
solution, it becomes reddish violet～bluish green in color.
(2) 2 mL of buffer solution (ninhydrine/acetic acid) and 2 mL of hydrazine sulfate
solution (0.26→500) are added to 2 mL aqueous solution of Thaumatin (1→100).
Upon heating a water bath, this solution turns bluish violet.
Standard Solution
∘Ninhydrine/Acetic acid buffer solution ： Dissolve 2 g of ninhydrine in 50 mL of water,
where 25 mL of acetic acid buffer and water are added to bring up the total volume
to 100 mL.
∘Acetic acid buffer ： Dissolve 82 g of anhydrous sodium acetate in 140 mL of water. 25
mL of acetic acid and water are added to bring up the total volume to 250 mL. By
adding acetic acid or sodium acetate solution (2→15), pH of this solution is adjusted
to pH 5.51 ± 0.03.
(3) The solution obtained in Assay has a maximum absorption band near 277 nm.
Purity (1) Arsenic : It should be no more than 2.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(2) Lead : When 5.0 g of Thaumatin is tested by Atomic Absorption Spectrophotometry
or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content should not be more
than 3.0 ppm.
(3) Aluminium : When 5.0 g of Thaumatin is tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content
should not be more than 100 ppm.
(4) Carbohydrate : 0.2 g of Thaumatin is precisely weighted, dissolved in water to
make 100 mL, test solution. 0.2 mL of test solution is taken into a test tube made of
glass, cooled in an ice water bath, 1.2 mL of Cysteine․sulfuric acid solution which is
previously cooled in an ice water bath is added, with a stopper, shaken vigorously,
and mixed. Test tube is set aside in an ice water bath for 2 minutes, at room
temperature for 3 minutes, and heated for 3 minutes in boiling water. It is
1093
 immediately immersed in an ice water bath and set aside for 5 minutes. The
absorption is measured at 412 nm wavelength with 1cm path length. Then the
concentration of carbohydrate(as glucose) in test solution is calculated from
calibration curve. The content of carbohydrate should not be more than 3.0%.
Content of Carbohydrate(%)＝
concentration
g/mL) of carbohydrate in test solution(as glucose, μ × 1006 × 100
Weight of sample(g) × 1-(loss on drying(%)/100) 10
Preparation of calibration curve : Dissolve standard of glucose in water to prepare the
concentration to 10～100 μg/mL. Calibration curve is prepared from the absorption
measured by same procedure of test solution.
Solution
L-Cysteine Solution : Dissolve 3 g of Cysteine hydrochloric acid hydrate in water to
make 100 mL.
Cysteine․sulfuric acid : Mix 0.5 mL of L-Cysteine solution and 25 mL of 86% sulfuric
acid. This is prepared freshly before use.
(5) Total viable aerobic count : When Thaumatin proceed as directed under Total
viable aerobic count for Coliform in General Testing Methods in 「Standards and
Specifications for Foods」, it should not be more than 1,000 per 1 g.
(6) E. coli : When Thaumatin proceed as directed under Microbiological Methods for E.
coli in General Testing Methods in 「Standards and Specifications for Foods」, it
should be negative (-).
Loss on Drying When Thaumatin is dried for 5 hours at 105℃, the weight loss should
not be more than 9%.
Ash After carbonizing at 500℃, Thaumatin tested by Ash and Acid-Insoluble Ash Limit.
The amount of ash should not be more than 1.0%.
Residue on Ignition When Residue on Ignition is done with precisely weighed 5 g of
Thaumatin, the amount of residue should not be more than 0.05%.
Assay Approximately 1 g of Thaumatin is precisely weighted and dissolved in water
(total volume = 100 mL), which is then filtered through a filter paper. 5 mL of this
solution is diluted 100 mL with water (Test Solution). Absorption A of Test Solution is
measured at the maximum absorption near 277 nm with 1cm path length using water as
a reference. The content is obtained by the following equation.
A × 100
Content(%) ＝
0.567 × S

S : Weight of sample (g)

1094
 L-Theanine

Chemical Formula: C7H14N2O3

Molecular Weight: 174.20 CAS No.: 3081-61-6

Compositional Specifications of L-Theanine

Content L-Theanine. when calculated on the dried basis, should contain within a range
of 98.0～102.0% of L-theanine (C7H14N2O3).
Description L-Theanine occurs as a white crystalline powder. It is odorless and has a
slightly characteristic and sweet taste.
Identification (1) To 5 mL of L-Theanine solution (1→1.000). add 1 mL of ninhydrin
solution (1→1.000), and heat for 3 minutes. A purple color develops.
(2) Dissolve about I g of L-Theanine in 10 mL of diluted hydrochloric acid (1→2).
equip with a reflux condenser, heat on a water bath for 6 hours, and add water to
make 20 mL. Transfer 5 mL of this solution into a test tube, and add 2 g of sodium
hydroxide. Suspend a red litmus paper moistened with water in the test tube, cover
the mouth of the test tube, and heat in a water bath for 5 minutes. The color of the
litmus paper changes to blue.
Purity (1) Clarity and Color of Solution : When 1 g of L-Theanine (Anhydrous) is
dissolved in 20 mL of water, the solution should be colorless and almost clear.
(2) Specific rotation : Approximately 2.5 g of L-Theanine is precisely weighed, which
is dissolved in water so that the total volume to make 50 mL. Optical rotation of the
solution is measured. When it is translated to dried material, = +7.7∼+8.5°
(3) pH : Approximately 1 g of L-Theanine is dissolved in water so that volume to
make 100 mL. It should be within a range of 5.0∼6.0.
(4) Chloride : When 0.5 g of L-Theanine is tested by Chloride Limit Test, the detected
amount should not be more than the amount that corresponds to 0.30 mL of 0.01 N
hydrochloric acid.
(5) Arsenic : It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(6) Lead : When 5.0 g of L-Theanine is tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content
should not be more than 2.0 ppm.
Loss on Drying When L-Theanine is dried 3 hours at 105℃, the weight loss should not
be more than 0.5%.
Residue on Ignition When thermogravimetric analysis is done with L-Theanine, the
1095
 residue should not be more than 0.2%.
Assay Approximately 0.35 g is precisely weighed and dissolved in 3 mL of formic acid,
where 50 mL of glacial acetic acid (for non-aqueous titration) is added. This solution
is titrated with 0.1 N perchloric acid solution (indicator : 1 mL of crystal violet
buffered in glacial acetic acid). At the end point, the solution turns from violet to blue,
then to green. Separately, a blank experiment is done following the same procedure.
1 mL of 0.1 N perchloric acid = 17.420 mg of C7H14N2O3

1096
 DL-Threonine
CH3
C— H
CHC
OH O
⃒
⃒
OH
NH2
Chemical Formula: C4H9O3N
Molecular Weight: 119.12
CAS No.:
Synonyms: DL-2-Amino-3-hydroxybutyric acid
80-68-2

Compositional Specifications of DL-Threonine

Content DL-Threonine, when calculated on the dried basis, should contain within a
range of 98.0～102.0% of DL-threonine (C4H9O3N).
Description DL-Threonine occurs as white crystals or crystalline powder. It is odorless
and has a slightly sweet taste.
Identification (1) DL-Threonine solution (1→25) has no optical rotation.
(2) To 5 mL of DL-Threonine solution (1→10), add 5 mL of potassium periodate and
heat. A gas with an odor of ammonia is evolved, and it becomes the color of a red
litmus paper wetted with water to blue.
(3) To 5 mL of DL-Threonine solution (1→1000), add 1 mL of ninhydrin solution. and
heat for 3 minutes. A purple to red-purple color becomes.
Purity (1) Clarity and Color of Solution : When 1 g of DL-Threonine dissolved in 20 mL
of water, the solution should be colorless and should not be more than almost clear.
(2) pH : pH of DL-Threonin solution (1→20) should be within a range of 5.0∼6.5.
(3) Arsenic : It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(4) Lead : When 5.0 g of DL-Threonine is tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content
should not be more than 5.0 ppm.
(5) Allothreonine and Other Amino Acids : Weigh 0.1 g of DL-Threomne, and dissolve
in water to make 50 mL. Use this solution as the test solution. Measure 0.005 mL of
the test solution and proceed as directed under Paper Chromatography Method 1,
using n-butanol, methyl ethyl ketone, ammonia solution, water mixture (5:3:1:1) as
the developing solvent. Only one spot is observed. In the case, for the filter paper.
use a No.2 filter paper for chromatography and stop the development when the
developing solvent rises about 30 cm. Air-dry the filter paper and then dry at 100℃
1097
 for 20 minutes, spray with a solution of 0.2% ninhydrin n-butanol, dry at 100℃ for 5
minutes, and observe in daylight. Without using a reference solution.
(6) Chloride : When 0.5 g of DL-Threomne is proceeded as directed under chloride, its
content should not be more than the amount that corresponds to 0.3 mL of 0.01 N
hydrochloric acid.
Loss on Drying When DL-Threomne is dried for 3 hours at 105℃, the weight loss
should not be more than 0.2%.
Residue on Ignition When thermogravimetric analysis is done with DL-Threomne, the
amount of residues should not be more than 0.1%.
Assay Proceed as directed under Assay in 「Glycine」.
1 mL of 0.1 N perchloric acid = 11.91 mg of C4H9NO3

1098
 L-Threonine

OH H

⋮⋮
H— 3 CC
— C
—
COO
H
⋮⋮
H
NH2
Chemical Formula: C4H9O3N
Molecular Weight: 119.12
CAS No.:
Synonyms: L-2-Amino-3-hydroxybutyric acid
72-19-5

Compositional Specifications of L-Threonine

Content L-Threonine, when calculated on the dried basis, should contain within a range
of 98.0～102.0% of L-threonine (C4H9O3N).
Description L-Threonine occurs as white crystals or crystalline powder. It is odorless
and has a slightly sweet taste.
Identification (1) L-Threonine solution (1→25) has levorotatory.
(2) Proceed as directed under Identification and (2) and (3) in 「DL-Threonine」.
Purity (1) Clarity and Color of Solution : When 1 g of L-Threonine is dissolved in 20
mL of water, the solution should be colorless and should not be more than almost
clear.
(2) pH : pH of L-Threonine solution (1→20) should be within a range of 5.0∼6.5.
(3) Specific rotation : After drying for 3 hours at 105℃, approximately 3 g of
L-Threonine is precisely weighed, which is dissolved in water to make 50 mL. Optical
rotation of this solution should be within a range of ＝ -26∼-29°
(4) Arsenic : It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(5) Lead : When 5.0 g of L-Threonine is tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content
should not be more than 5.0 ppm.
(6) Allothreonine and other Amino Acids : Proceed as directed under Purity (5) in
「DL- Threonine」.
(7) Chloride : Proceed as directed under Purity (6) in 「DL- Threonine」.
1099
Loss on Drying When DL- Threonine is dried for 3 hours at 105℃, the weight loss
should not be more than 0.2%.
Residue on Ignition When thermogravimetric analysis is done with DL-Threonine, the
amount of residues should not be more than 0.1%.
Assay Proceed as directed under Assay in 「DL- Threonine」.
1 mL of 0.1 N Perchloric acid = 11.91 mg of C4H9NO3

1100
 Titanium Dioxide
Chemical Formula: TiO2

Molecular Weight: 79.90 INS No.: 171

Synonyms: CI pigment white 6; Titania CAS No.: 13463-67-7

Compositional Specifications of Titanium Dioxide

Content Titanium Dioxide, when calculated on the dried basis, should contain not less
than 99.0% of Titanium Dioxide (TiO2).
Description Titanium Dioxide occurs as a white powder. It is odorless and tasteless.
Identification To 0.5 g of Titanium Dioxide, add 5 mL of sulfuric acid, and heat gently
until fumes of sulfuric acid are evolved. Cool, add water gradually to make about 100
mL, filter, and add 2～3 drops hydrogen peroxide solution to 5 mL of the filtrate. The
color becomes orange-red color.
Purity (1) Water-Soluble Substances : To 4 g of Titanium Dioxide, add 50 mL of water,
shake, and allow to stand 24 hours, transfer into a 100 mL volumetric flask, add 2
mL of ammonium chloride solution, and shake. If a precipitate of titanium dioxide is
not formed, add another 2 mL of ammonium chloride solution, and allow to stand.
After the precipitate is formed, add water to make 200 mL, and filter while shaking.
Discard 10 mL of the initial filtrate, transfer 100 mL of the subsequent filtrate into a
platinum crucible previously weighed, evaporate to dryness, ignite to constant weight,
and weigh the residue. The residue should not be more than 5 mg. (Not more than
0.25%)
(2) Hydrochloric Acid-Soluble Substances : Weigh 5 g of Titanium Dioxide, add 100 mL
of diluted hydrochloric acid (1→20), shake, heat in a water bath for 30 minutes while
stirring occasionally, and filter. Wash the residue three times with 10 mL of diluted
hydrochloric acid (1→20) each time, combine the filtrate and the washings, evaporate
to dryness, ignite to constant weight, and weigh the residue. The residue should mot
be more than 25 mg. (Not more than 0.5%)
(3) Arsenic : It should be no more than 1.3 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(4) Lead : Transfer 10.0 g of Titanium Dioxide, previously dried and accurately
weighed, into a beaker, and add 50 mL of 0.5 N hydrochloric acid. Cover it with a
watch glass, boil for 15 minutes, and cool it down. Transfer it to 100~150 mL
centrifuge tube and centrifuge it for 10~15 minutes until the insoluble substances are
settled. Filter the supernatant through a filter paper(a Whatman No.4 filter paper or
its equivalent) and transfer the filtrate to a 100 mL flask. To the residue, add 10~15
mL of hot water, mix, and centrifuge it. Filter the supernatant and add it to the
filtrate. Repeat this preparation twice and add the solution is to filtrate, dilute to 100
mL with water, test solution. When this test solution is tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content
should not be more than 10 ppm.
1101
(5) Cadmium : When the test solution of (4) Purity is tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content
should not be more than 1.0 ppm.
(6) Antimony : When the test solution of (4) Purity is tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content
should not be more than 2.0 ppm.
(7) Zinc : When the test solution of (4) Purity is tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content
should not be more than 50 ppm.
(8) Mercury : When Titanium Dioxide is tested by Mercury Limit Test, its content
should not be more than 1.0 ppm.
(9) Aluminum Oxide and Silicon Dioxide : The total content of aluminum oxide and
silicon dioxide determined by the following methods is not more than 2.0%.
(i) Aluminum Oxide : Weigh 1 g of Titanium Dioxide and 10 g of sodium hydrogen
sulfate, transfer into a quartz Erlenmeyer flask, and heat gently until completely
fused. Cool, add 25 mL of diluted sulfuric acid (1→2). and heat carefully until the
precipitate dissolves. Cool, and add water to make 120 mL. To the solution, add 65
mL of sodium hydroxide solution (1→4) while stirring, transfer gradually into a
500-mL volumetric flask containing 135 mL of sodium hydroxide solution (1→4)
while stirring, and add water to make 500 mL. Allow to stand or centrifuge for 5
minutes. and filter. Transfer 100 mL of the filtrate into a 500-mL Erlenmeyer
flask, add 1 drop of methyl orange solution, acidify with diluted hydrochloric acid
(1→2), add 3 mL of diluted hydrochloric acid (1→2). And add 25 mL of 0.02 M
EDTA exactly measured. Add drop wise ammonia solution until the color of the
solution changes from red to orange-yellow, and add 10 mL of ammonium acetate
buffer (77 g of ammonium acetate, add 10 mL of glacial acetic acid and add water
to make 1,000 mL) and 10 mL of diammonium phosphate buffer (150 g of
diammonium phosphate, add 700 mL of water and adjust to pH 5.5 with diluted
hydrochloric acid (1→20) and add water to make 1,000 mL). It is boiled for 5
minutes and then cool rapidly in flow water. Add 3 drops of xylenol orange
solution, and mixed. If the color of the solution changes to purple, yellow-brown,
or pink, adjust the pH to 5.3～5.7 with acetic acid. if no pink color develops, use
this solution as the test solution. if a pink color develops. repeat the above
procedure with another 100-mL portion of the filtrate, using 50 mL of 0.02 M
EDTA exactly measured. Use the resulting solution as the test solution. Add
titrated 0.01 M zinc sulfate to the sample solution until the yellow-brown color of
the solution becomes reddish (This persists for 5～10 seconds).
(Note: This titration should be carried out quickly. Near the end point, it is added
by 0.2 mL until the color appears first. Even the color disappears in 5～10
seconds, it is regarded as the end point. If the observation of the first color
change fails, it becomes an inaccurate titration. The consumption for the first color
1102
 change should not be more than 8 mL. To be accurate, it should be 10～15 mL).
Add 2 g of sodium fluoride, boil for 2～5 minutes, cool rapidly in flow water,
titrate the liberated EDTA with 0.01 M zinc sulfate until the yellow-brown color of
the solution becomes reddish, and calculate the content by the following formula:
Content of aluminum oxide (A12O3) (%) =
T × Weight of 0.01M zinc sulfate solution consumed in second
titration(mL)
weight of the sample(g) × 2
In this case, T is calculated by the following method. It is the weight of aluminum
oxide(mg) (Al2O3) corresponding to 1 mL of 0.01 M zinc sulfate.
∘0.01 M zinc sulfate solution : 2.9 g of zinc sulfate (ZnSO4․7H2O) is dissolved in water
to make 1,000 mL. 500 mg of aluminum (high purity, 99.0%) is precisely weighed
and dissolved in 20 mL hydrochloric acid by gently heating. It is then diluted to
1,000 mL. 10 mL of this solution is transferred into a 500 mL Erlen Meyer flask
with 90 mL of water and 3 mL of hydrochloric acid. 1 drop of methyl orange
solution and 25 mL of 0.02 M EDTA solution are added and ammonia solution is
added drop-wise until its red color turns orange yellow. After adding 10 mL of
ammonim acetate buffer solution and 10 mL of diammonium phosphate buffer
solution, it is boiled for 5 minutes and then quenched, where 3 drops of xylenol
orange solution are added. Zinc sulfate solution is added until the yellow color
becomes red. 2 g of sodium fluoride is added to the resulting solution, which is then
boiled for 2～5 minutes and quenched. The free EDTA is titrated with this zinc
sulfate solution until the yellow color becomes red. T is calculated from the
following equation.
18.896 × W
T =
V
W : Weight of aluminum (g)
V : Weight of zinc sulfate solution consumed in second titration (mL)
Molecular weight of Al2O3 1,000mg 10mL
18.896 ＝ × ×
Molecular weight of Al g 2
(ii) Silicon Dioxide : Weigh 1.0 g of Titanium Dioxide and 10 g of sodium hydrogen
sulfate, transfer into a platinum crucible, and heat gently until completely fused.
Cool, add 25 mL of diluted sulfuric acid (1→2). heat carefully until the precipitate
dissolves, cool, and add 150 mL of water gradually while shaking occasionally.
Filter the solution through a filter paper for quantitative analysis (SC), wash the
crucible with diluted sulfuric acid (1→2), and filter through the same filter paper.
Transfer the filter paper into another platinum crucible. dry at 120℃, and ignite
carefully at 450～550℃. Ignite at 1,000℃ for 30 minutes, allow to cool in a
desiccator, and Accurately weigh the total weight W(g). Add 2 drops of diluted
sulfuric acid (1→2) and 5 mL of hydrofluoric acid, heat gradually and evaporate to
dryness. ignite at 1,000℃ for 30 minutes. allow to cool in a desiccator, Accurately
weigh the total weight w (g), and calculate the content by the following formula :
1103
 Content of silicon＝ dioxide(SiO )(%)
2
W(g)—w(g)
× 100
weight of the sample(g)
Loss on Drying When Titanium Dioxide is dried for 3 hours at 105℃, the weight loss
should not be more than 0.5%.
Loss on Ignition When Titanium Dioxide is dried for 3 hours at 105℃ and heat-treated
at 775～825℃, the weight loss should not be more than 0.5% as anhydrous.
Assay Transfer about 0.2 g of Titanium Dioxide, previously dried and accurately
weighed, into platinum crucible, add 2 g of sodium hydrogen sulfate, covered, and heat
gently until completely fused. Ignite at a high temperature until the color turn to a
deep orange to almost clear liquid. Cool, transfer the contents into a 250 mL beaker,
wash the crucible with 75 mL of diluted sulfuric acid (1→30). transfer the washings
into the beaker, and heat in a water bath until it dissolves and becomes almost clear.
Dissolve 2 g of tartaric acid in the solution, add 2～3 drops of bromothymol blue
solution, and neutralize with ammonia solution. If necessary filtered, and acidify with
1～2 mL of diluted sulfuric acid (1→2), pass an ample amount of hydrogen sulfide
through it, add 30 mL of ammonia solution. Pass hydrogen sulfide through it until
saturated, allow to stand for 10 minutes, filter, and wash the precipitate on the filter
paper 10 times with 25 mL of mixture of ammonium tartrate solution(1→100) and
ammonium sulfide solution (9:1). During filtering and washing, keep the filter paper
immersed in the solution. Combine the filtrate and the washings. To this solution, add
40 mL of diluted sulfuric acid (1→2), boil until the hydrogen sulfide is removed, cool,
and add water to make 400 mL. Add gradually 40 mL of cupferron solution while
stirring, and allow to stand. After a yellow precipitate is formed, add cupferron IS until
a white precipitate is formed. Filter the precipitate with light suction through a filter
paper for quantitative analysis (SC), wash 20 times with diluted hydrochloric acid (1→
10). and remove he water with slightly strong suction. Dry the precipitate together
with the filter paper at 70℃, transfer into a crucible previously accurately weighed.
heat very weakly until the fumes are not appear , ignite gradually. and then ignite at
900～950℃ to constant weight. Cool. and weigh the amount of residue W (g). Using
the values obtained in Purity (5), calculate the content by the following formula:
W(g) × 100 100
×
Weight of the sample(g) 100—Content of aluminum oxide and silicon dioxide(%)
Content of titanium dioxide (TiO2)(%) =

1104
 dl -α-Tocopherol Acetate
O
H3C CH3
H CH3 H CH3 CH3
O
(CH2)3C(CH2)3C(CH2)3CH
H3C O CH3 CH3
CH3

Chemical Formula: C31H52O3

Molecular Weight: 472.75 CAS No.: 58-95-7

Compositional Specifications of dl -α-Tocopherol Acetate

Content dl-α-Tocopherol Acetate should contain not less than 96.0% of dl-α-Tocopherol (C31H52O3).
Description dl-α-Tocopherol Acetate is colorless～yellow viscous liquid and odorless.
Identification 10 mg of dl-α-Tocopherol Acetate is dissolved in 10 mL of anhydrous ethyl
alcohol, and 2 mL of nitric acid is added. After heating for 15 minutes at 75℃, the
solution turns red～orange.
Purity (1) Refractive Index : Refractive Index of dl-α-Tocopherol Acetate should be within a
range of 1.494∼1.499.
(2) Specific Gravity : Specific gravity of dl-α-Tocopherol Acetate should be within a
range of 0.952∼0.966.
(3) Clarity and Color of Solution : When 0.1 g of dl-α-Tocopherol Acetate is dissolved
in 10 mL of anhydrous ethanol, the solution should be clear.
(4) Specific Absorbance : 10 mg of dl-α-Tocopherol Acetate is dissolved in anhydrous
ethyl alcohol to make 100 mL. Absorbance is measured in a cell with 1 cm thickness at
284 nm. It should be a range of ＝ 41.0∼45.0.
(5) Arsenic : It should be no more than 2.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(6) Lead : When 5.0 g of dl-α-Tocopherol Acetate is tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content
should not be more than 2.0 ppm.
(7) α-Tocopherol : Accurately weigh about 1 g of dl-α-Tocopherol Acetate and
proceed as directed under Assay in 「Vitamin E」. The content of α-Tocopherol
should not be more than 0.5%.
(8) Acid Value : Dissolve 1 g of dl-α-Tocopherol Acetate in 25 mL of the 1:1 mixture
of alcohol and ether neutralized with 0.1 N sodium hydroxide solution (indicator :
phenolphthalein solution). Add 0.5 mL of phenolphthalein solution, and titrate with 0.1
N sodium hydroxide solution until a pale red color of the solution persists for 30
seconds. The consumed amount should not be more than 1.0 mL.
Assay Accurately weigh about 0.25 g of dl-α-Tocopherol Acetate, transfer into a 100
mL brown round bottom flask, add 25 mL of anhydrous ethyl alcohol and 20 mL
solution of sulfuric acid in ethyl alcohol (3→20), and attach a reflux condenser to the
flask. The solution is then boiled for 3 hours. After cooling, transfer the solution into
1105
a 200 mL brown mass flask, and add anhydrous ethyl alcohol to make 200 mL. Take
50 mL of this solution, add 50 mL solution of sulfuric acid in ethyl alcohol (3→200)
and 20 mL of water and proceed as directed under Assay in for 「Vitamin E」.
1 mL of 0.01 N ceric ammonium sulfate solution ＝ 2.3638 mg C31H52O3

1106
 d-α-Tocopherol Concentrate
Chemical Formula: C29H50O2
Molecular Weight: 430.71 INS No.: 307a
Synonyms: RRR-α-Tocopherol concentrate;
CAS No.: 59-02-9
5,7,8-trimethyltocol

Definition d-α-Tocopherol Concentrate is a form of vitamin E obtained from edible

vegetable oil. Its major component is d-α-tocopherol. Edible vegetable oil can be added
to adjust the required amount of total tocopherols.
Compositional Specifications of d-α-Tocopherol Concentrate
Content d-α-Tocopherol Concentrate should contain not less than 40.0% of total
tocopherol, of which not less than 95.0% consists of d-α-tocopherol.
Description d-α-Tocopherol Concentrate is pale yellow~reddish brown, clear viscous oil
with slightly characteristic odor.
Identification (1) 50 mg of d-α-Tocopherol Concentrate is dissolved in 10 mL of absolute
alcohol, where 2 mL of nitric acid is added. When this solution is heated for 15
minutes at 75℃, bright red or orange colour developed.
(2) The retention time of the major peak in the chromatogram of the sample solution is
the same as that of the standard solution, both relative to the internal standard, as
obtained in the Assay.
Purity (1) Acidity : 1 g of d-α-Tocopherol Concentrate is dissolved in 25 mL of a
mixture of equal volumes of alcohol and ether that has been neutralized to
phenolphthalein TS with 0.1 N sodium hydroxide. 0.5 mL of phenolphthalein TS is
added to this solution, which is then titrated with 0.1 N sodium hydroxide solution
until the solution remains pale red color after shaking for 30 seconds. The consumed
amount of the titrant should not be more than 1 mL.
(2) Lead : When 5.0 g of d-α-Tocopherol Concentrate is tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content
should not be more than 2.0 ppm.
(3) Specific Rotation : d-α-Tocopherol Concentrate is weighed, equivalent to about
100 mg of total tocopherol, to a separator, and dissolved it in 50 mL of ether. It is
added 20 mL of a 10% solution of potassium ferricyanide in sodium hydroxide
solution (1→125) to the separator, and shake for 3 minutes. Ether solution is washed
with 50m of water and dehydrated with anhydrous sodium sulfate. It is evaporated
the dried ether solution on a water bath under reduced pressure until about 7～8 mL
remain, and then removed the last traces of ether in a blowing nitrogen at a room
temperature. The residue is immediately dissolved in 5 mL of isooctane. When specific
rotation is calculated, it should be high α-type ＝ +24° (or higher).
Assay Should follow the procedure in Assay for d-tocopherol (mixed).

1107
 d-Tocopherol Concentrate, Mixed
Synonyms: RRR-Tocopherols concentrate,
mixed INS No.: 307b

Definition Mixed d-Tocopherol Concentrate is a concentrate of d-Tocopherol obtained

from edible vegetable oil. Main ingredients are d-α-Tocopherol, d-β-Tocopherol, d-γ
-Tocopherol, and d-δ-Tocopherol. Edible vegetable oil can be added to adjust the
content.
Compositional Specifications of d-Tocopherol Concentrate, Mixed
Content Mixed d-Tocopherol Concentrate contains not less than 34.0% of total
tocopherol.
Description Mixed d-Tocopherol Concentrate is yellow∼reddish brown viscous liquid
having a characteristic odor.
Identification (1) 50 mg of Mixed d-Tocopherol Concentrate is dissolved in 10 mL of
anhydrous alcohol, where 2 mL of nitric acid is added. When this solution is heated
at 75℃ for 15 minutes, the solution developed bright red or orange.
(2) The retention time of major peak of chromatogram (obtained in Assay) for high α
-type match with those of standard preparation as compared with the retention time
of peak of internal standard. The retention time of the third major peak of
chromatogram (obtained in Assay) for low α-type matches with that of standard
preparation as compared with internal standard.
Purity (1) Acidity : 1 g of Mixed d-Tocopherol Concentrate is dissolved in 25 mL of
mixture of equal volumes of alcohol and ether that has been neutralized to
phenolphthalein TS with 0.1 N sodium hydroxide, 0.5 mL of phenolphthalein TS is
added to this solution, which is then titrated with 0.1 N sodium hydroxide solution
until the solution remains faintly pink after shaking for 30 seconds. Not more than 1
mL of 0.1 N sodium hydroxide is required.
(2) Lead : When 5.0 g of Mixed d-Tocopherol Concentrate is tested by Atomic
Absorption Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy,
its content should not be more than 2.0 ppm.
(3) Arsenic : It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(4) Mercury : When 0.1 g of Mixed d-Tocopherol Concentrate is tested by Mercury
Test Method, its content should not be more than 1.0ppm.
(5) Specific Rotation : Mixed d-Tocopherol Concentrate is weighed, equivalent to about
100 mg of total tocopherols, to a separator and dissolved in 50 mL of ether. It is
added 20 mL of a 10% solution of potassium ferricyanide in sodium hydroxide
solution (1→125), and shake for 3 minutes. Ether solution is washed with 50 m of
water and dehydrated with anhydrous sodium sulfate. It is evaporated the dried ether
solution on a water bath under reduced pressure until about 7～8 mL remain, and
then removed the last traces of ether in a blowing nitrogen at a room temperature.
The residue is immediately dissolved in 5 mL of isooctane. When specific rotation is
1108
 calculated, it should be high α-type ＝ +24° (or higher), low α-type ＝ +20° (or
higher).
Assay
Solutions
∘Internal Standard Solution : About 600 mg of hexadecyl hexadecanoate is precisely
weighed and dissolved in 2 parts of pyridine and 1 part of
anhydrous propionic acid in a 200 mL volumetric flask,
and diluted to volume with the solution.
∘Preparation of Standard Solution : 12, 25, 37, and 50 mg portions of α-tocopherol
standard is precisely weighed into each of 50 mL
Erlenmeyer flask with a ground joint neck, where 25
mL each of internal standard solution is added. It is
refluxed for 10 minutes under water-cooled
condensers.
∘Preparation of Test Solution : About 60 mg of Mixed d-Tocopherol Concentrateis
precisely weighed into another Erlenmeyer flask, where 10
mL each of internal standard solution is added. It is
refluxed for 10 minutes under water-cooled condensers.
Gas chromatography is carried out under the following
conditions.
Operation Conditions
-Column : Glass tube 4 mm inner diameter × 2 m length
-Column Filler : 80 to 100 mesh Chromosorb W-DMCS coated with 2% to 5%
methylpolysiloxcane gum
-Detector : (Hydrogen) Flame Ionization Detector (FID)
-Temperature at injection port : 290℃
-Column Temperature : a constant temperature in a range of 240∼260℃
-Detector Temperature : 300℃
-Carrier gas and its flow rate : Nitrogen, Flow rate is adjusted so that hexadecyl
hexadecanoate is detected in 18∼20 minutes.
System Suitability
Chromatograph a suitable number of injections of the Assay Preparation, as directed
under Calibration, to assure that the resolution factor, R, between the major peaks
occuring at retention times of approximately 0.5(δ-tocopheryl propionate) and 0.63(β-γ
-tocopheryl propionate), relative of hexadecyl hexadecanoate at 1.0, is not less than
2.5.
Calibration Curve
Chromatograph successive 2 to 5μl portions of each Standard Preparation until the
1109
relative response factor, F, for each is constant(i.e. within a range of approximately
2%) for three consecutive injection. Measure the areas under the first (α-tocopheryl
propionate) and the second (hexadecyl hexadecanoate) major peaks (excluding the
solvent peak), and record the values as As & A1, respectively.
A factor "F" for each concentration of each Standard Solution is obtained from the
following equation.
As C1
F ＝ ×
A1 Cs
C1 : Exact concentration of internal standard solution (mg/mL)
Cs : Exact concentration of tocopherol standard solution (mg/mL)
Relative reaction coefficient curve is prepared by plotting peak area of α-tocopheryl
propionate vs. relative reaction coefficient.
Test Procedure : 2∼5 μl of Test Solution is injected into chromatograph and measured
the areas under the four major peaks occurring at relative retention times of 0.50,
0.63, 0.76, and 1.00. The content (mg) of each tocopherol type for δ-tocopheryl
propionate, β- ＋ γ-tocopheryl propionate, α-tocopheryl propionate and hexadecyl
hexadecanoate in sample is calculated by the following equation.
δ - tocopherol 10C
×
1 a δ
＝ F a
β- + γ-tocopherol
1
10C a
1 δ+γ
×
＝ F a1
α- tocopherol ＝ 10C1
F
×
aα
a1

F is obtained from the relative response factor curve for each the corresponding areas
under the δ-, β- ＋γ-, and α-tocopheryl propionate peak produced by the Sample
Preparation. The relative response factor for δ-tocopheryl propionate and for β- ＋γ
-tocopheryl propionate has been determined empirically to be the same as for
d-tocopheryl propionate.

1110
 d-α-Tocopheryl Acetate
O
H3C CH3
H CH3 H CH3 CH3
O
(CH2)3C(CH2)3C(CH2)3CH
H3C O CH3 CH3
CH3

Chemical Formula: C31H52O3

Molecular Weight: 472.75 CAS No.: 58-95-7

Compositional Specifications of d-α-Tocopheryl Acetate

Content d-α-Tocopheryl Acetate (C31H52O3) should contain within a range of 96.0～
102.0% of d-α-Tocopheryl Acetate.
Description d-α-Tocopheryl Acetate occurs as a colorless to yellow, viscous liquid. It is
odorless or has a characteristic odor.
Identification (1) Add, with swirling, 2 mL of nitric acid to 10 mL of test solution from
Purity (3) specific rotation, and heat at about 75℃ for 15 min. A bright-red to
orange color develops.
(2) The retention time of the major peak in the chromatogram of the test solution is
the same as that of the standard solution, both relative to the internal standard
solution, as obtained in the Assay.
Purity (1) Acidity : Dissolve 1g of d-α-Tocopheryl Acetate in 25 mL of a 1:1
alcohol:ether mixture that has been neutralized to phenolphthalein with 0.1N sodium
hydroxide. Add 0.5 mL of phenolphthalein, and titrate with 0.1N sodium hydroxide
until the solution remains faintly pink after shaking for 30 s. The consumed amount
of the titrant should not be more than 1.0 mL.
(2) Lead : Transfer 10 g of d-α-Tocopheryl Acetate, precisely weighed, into a crucible
or a platinum dish. Add 5 mL of 25% sulfuric acid cautiously and mix well, which is
then evaporated to dryness on a steam bath. Place the dish on a heating plate,
preash slowly until most of sulfuric acid disappears, and then ash at 450∼550℃.
Repeat the above mentioned procedure when ashing is insufficient. Prepare sample
blank by ashing 5 mL of 25% sulfuric acid under the same method. After ashing, add
5 mL of 1N hydrochloric acid and dry it on a steam bath. Add 1 mL of 3N
hydrochloric acid and approximately 5 mL of distilled water and dissolve any residue
on a steam bath. Transfer each solution quantitatively to a 10 mL volumetric flask,
dilute to volume with distilled water, and mix. Dilute it if necessary. This solution is
used for test solution. When the test solution is tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content
should not be more than 2.0 ppm.
(3) Specific rotation
Preparation of Test Solution : Transfer an accurately weighed amount of d-α
-Tocopheryl Acetate, equivalent to about 200 mg of d-α-Tocopherol, into a 150 mL
1111
 round-bottom, glass-stoppered flask, and dissolve it in 25 mL of absolute alcohol.
Add 20 mL of a 1:7 mixture of 2N sulfuric acid in alcohol, and reflux for 3 h,
protected from sunlight. Cool, transfer into a 200 mL brown volumetric flask, dilute
to volume with a 1:72 mixture of 2 N sulfuric acid in ethyl alcohol, and mix. This
solution is used for test solution.
Procedure : Transfer an accurately weighed amount of the test solution, equivalent to
about 100 mg of d-α-Tocopherol, into a separatory funnel, and add 200 mL of
distilled water. Extract first with 75 mL of ether, then with two 25 mL portions of
ether, and combine the ether extracts in another separatory funnel. Add 20 mL of a
10% solution of potassium ferricyanide in sodium hydroxide solution (1→125) to the
ether solution, and shake for 3 min. Wash the ether solution four times with 50 mL
portions of water, discard the water phase, and dry over anhydrous sodium sulfate.
Evaporate the dried ether solution on a water bath or in an atmosphere of nitrogen
until 7 or 8 mL remain, and then complete the evaporation, removing the last traces
of ether without the application of heat, Immediately dissolve the residue in 5 mL of
isooctane, and determine the optical rotation. When specific rotation is measured, [α]
should not be less than [α]=+24°
Assay
Test Solution and Solution Preparation
Internal Standard Solution : Prepare a solution containing about 3 mg of hexadecyl
hexadecanoate in each mL of n-hexane.
Preparation of Standard Solution : Dissolve about 30 mg of d-α-Tocopheryl Acetate
standard, precisely weighed, in 10 mL of internal
standard solution.
Preparation of Test Solution : Dissolve about 30 mg of d-α-Tocopheryl Acetate,
precisely weighed, in 10 mL of internal standard
solution.
Operation Conditions
Column : HP-1(30m × 0.32 μm) or equivalent to this.
Detector : Flame Ionization Detector (FID)
Injector Temperature : 290℃
Column Temperature : 240∼260℃
Detector Temperature : 300℃
Carrier gas : Nitrogen
System Suitability : Chromatograph a suitable number of injections of 1 mg each of d-
α-Tocopherol standard and d-α-Tocopheryl Acetate standard per mL of n-hexane, as
directed under calibration curve section, to ensure that the resolution [R] is not less
than 1.0.
Calibration Curve : Chromatograph successive 2～5 μl portions of standard solution
until the relative response factor is constant (within a range of 2%) for three
consecutive injections. Measure the areas under the major peaks occurring at relative
1112
 retention times of approximately 0.60 for d-α-Tocopheryl Acetate (As) and 1.0 for
hexadecyl hexadecanoate (AI, solvent peak excluded), and record the values as As
and AI, respectively.
A relative response factor "F" for each concentration of each standard solution is
obtained from the following equation.
As C1
F = ×
A1 Cs
CI : Exact concentration of internal standard solution (mg/mL)
Cs : Exact concentration of d-α-Tocopheryl Acetate standard solution (mg/mL)
Procedure : Chromatograph 2∼5 μl of test solution as described under calibration
curve section. Measure the areas under the major peaks occurring at relative
retention times of approximately 0.60 for d-α-Tocopheryl Acetate and 1.0 for
hexadecyl hexadecanoate, and record the values as au and aI, respectively. Calculate
the content of d-α-Tocopheryl Acetate (mg) in the sample by the following equation.

d-α-Tocopheryl Acetate(%) 10C1

×
aU
×
100
= F a1 Weight of the sample (mg)

1113
 d-α-Tocopheryl Acid Succinate
COOH
(CH2)2
C O
O CH3 CH3
H CH3 H CH3
(CH2)3C(CH2)3C(CH2)3CH
H3C O CH3
CH3

Chemical Formula C33H54O5

CH3

Molecular Weight 530.79

Compositional Specifications of d-α-Tocopheryl Acid Succinate
Content d-α-Tocopheryl Acid Succinate (C33H54O5) should contain within a range of 96.
0～102.0% of d-α-Tocopheryl Acid Succinate.
Description d-α-Tocopheryl Acid Succinate occurs as a white to light gray
Identification (1) Add, with swirling, 2 mL of nitric acid to 10 mL of test solution from
Purity (3) specific rotation, and heat at about 75℃ for 15 min. A bright-red to
orange color develops.
(2) The retention time of the major peak in the chromatogram of the Test Solution is
the same as that of the standard solution, both relative to the internal standard
solution, as obtained in the Assay.
Purity (1) Acidity : Dissolve 1g of d-α-Tocopheryl Acid Succinate in 25 mL of a 1:1
alcohol:ether mixture that has been neutralized to phenolphthalein with 0.1N sodium
hydroxide. Add 0.5 mL of phenolphthalein, and titrate with 0.1N sodium hydroxide
until the solution remains faintly pink after shaking for 30 s. The consumed amount of
the titrant should be within a range of 18.0∼19.3 mL.
(2) Lead : Transfer 10 g of d-α-Tocopheryl Acid Succinate, precisely weighed, into a
crucible or a platinum dish. Add 5 mL of 25% sulfuric acid cautiously and mix well,
which is then evaporated to dryness on a steam bath. Place the dish on a heating
plate, preash slowly until most of sulfuric acid disappears, and then ash at 450∼550℃.
Repeat the above mentioned procedure when ashing is insufficient. Prepare sample
blank by ashing 5 mL of 25% sulfuric acid under the same method. After ashing, add
5 mL of 1N hydrochloric acid and dry it on a steam bath. Add 1 mL of 3N
hydrochloric acid and approximately 5 mL of water and dissolve any residue on a
steam bath. Transfer each solution quantitatively to a 10 mL volumetric flask, dilute
to volume with water, and mix. Dilute it if necessary. This solution is used for test
solution. When the test solution is tested by Atomic Absorption Spectrophotometry or
Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content should not be more
than 2.0 ppm.
(3) Specific rotation
Preparation of Test Solution : Transfer an accurately weighed amount of d-α
-Tocopheryl Acid Succinate, equivalent to about 200 mg of d-α-Tocopherol, into a
1114
 250 mL round-bottom, glass-stoppered flask, dissolve it in 50 mL of absolute
alcohol, and reflux for 1 min. While the solution is boiling, add slowly about 1 g of
potassium hydroxide pellets through the condenser to avoid overheating. Continue
refluxing for 20 min, and then, without cooling, add 2 mL of hydrochloric acid,
dropwise, through the condenser. (This is essential to prevent oxidative action by
air while the sample is in an alkaline medium.) Cool, and transfer the contents of
the flask into a 500 mL separatory funnel, rinsing the flask with 100 mL each of
water and of ether and adding the rinsings to the separatory funnel. Shake
vigorously, allow the layers to separate, and collect each of the two layers in
separate separatory funnels. Extract the aqueous layer with two 50 mL portions of
ether, and add these extracts to the main ether extract. Wash the combined ether
extracts with four 100 mL portions of water, and then evaporate the solutions on a
water bath or in an atmosphere of nitrogen until about 7∼8 mL remain. Complete
the evaporation, removing the last traces of ether at room temperature. Immediately
dissolve the residue in a 1:72 mixture of 2 N sulfuric acid in ethyl alcohol to bring
the total volume of 200 mL. This solution is used for the test solution.
Procedure : Transfer an accurately weighed amount of the test solution, equivalent to
about 100 mg of d-α-Tocopherol, into a separatory funnel, and add 200 mL of
water. Extract first with 75 mL of ether, then with two 25 mL portions of ether,
and combine the ether extracts in another separatory funnel. Add 20 mL of a 10%
solution of potassium ferricyanide in sodium hydroxide solution (1→125) to the
ether solution, and shake for 3 min. Wash the ether solution with four 50 mL
portions of water, discard the washings, and dry over anhydrous sodium sulfate.
Evaporate the dried ether solution on a water bath or in an atmosphere of nitrogen
until 7∼8 mL remain, and then complete the evaporation, removing the last traces
of ether at room temperature, Immediately dissolve the residue in 5 mL of
isooctane, and determine the optical rotation. When specific rotation is measured,
[α] should not be less than +24°
Assay Test Solution and Solution Preparation
Internal Standard Solution : Prepare a solution containing about 3 mg of hexadecyl
hexadecanoate in each mL of n-hexane.
Preparation of Standard Solution : Transfer about 30 mg of d-α-Tocopheryl Acid
Succinate standard, precisely weighed, into an
approximately 15 mL screw cap vial. Pipet 2 mL of
absolute methyl alcohol, 1 mL of
2,2-dimethoxypropane, and 0.1 mL of concentrated
hydrochloric acid into the vial, cap, mix well, and
allow to stand in the dark for 1 h. Evaporate to
dryness on a steam bath with the aid of a stream of
nitrogen. Pipet 10 mL of internal standard solution
into the vial, cap, and shake vigorously.
Preparation of Test Solution: Prepare as directed for the preparation of standard
1115
 solution, using an precisely weighed amount of sample
equivalent to about 30 mg of d-α-Tocopheryl Acid
Succinate.
Operation Conditions
Column : HP-1(30m × 0.32 μm) or equivalent to this.
Detector : Flame Ionization Detector (FID)
Injector Temperature : 290℃
Column Temperature : 260∼280℃ isothermally
Detector Temperature : 300℃
Carrier gas : Nitrogen
System suitability : Chromatograph a suitable number of injections of 1 mg each of d-
α-Tocopherol standard and d-α-Tocopheryl Acid Succinate standard per mL of
n-hexane, as directed under calibration curve section, to ensure that the resolution
[R] is not less than 1.0.
Calibration Curve : Chromatograph successive 2～5 μl portions of standard solution
until the relative response factor is constant (within a range of 2%) for three
consecutive injections. Measure the areas under the major peaks occurring at relative
retention times of approximately 1.99 for methyl α-Tocopheryl Succinate (As) and 1.0
for hexadecyl hexadecanoate (AI) and record the values as As and AI, respectively.
A relative response factor "F" for each concentration of each standard solution is
obtained from the following equation.
AS CI
F = ×
AI CS

CI : Exact concentration of internal standard solution (mg/mL)

Cs : Exact concentration of d-α-Tocopheryl Acid Succinate standard solution
(mg/mL)
Procedure : Chromatograph 2∼5 μl of the test solution as described under calibration
curve section. Measure the areas under the major peaks occurring at relative
retention times of approximately 1.99 for methyl α-Tocopheryl Succinate and 1.0 for
hexadecyl hexadecanoate, and record the values as au and aI, respectively. Calculate
the content of d-α-Tocopheryl Acid Succinate (%) in the sample by the following
equation.
d-α-Tocopheryl Acid I10C U a 100
Succinate(%) =
F I
×
a
× weight of the
sample(mg)

1116
 Tomato Color
Synonyms: Natural yellow 27 INS No.: 160d(ii)
Definition
Tomato Color is a pigment obtained from tomatoes (Lycopersicon esculentum MILLER)
of solanaceae by the following processes. Tomatoes are extracted with oil/fat. Or,
dehydrated tomatoes in room temperature or heating condition are extracted with
hexane or acetone and solvents are removed. Or, tomato juice is partitioned. Its major
pigment component is lycopen of carotinoids. Diluent, stabilizer, or solvent can be
added for the purpose of color value adjustment and quality preservation.
Compositional Specifications of Tomato Color
Content Color value ( )of Tomato Color should be more than the indicated value.
Description Tomato Color is dark red powder of oily liquid with a slight characteristic
scent.
Identification Test Solution obtained in Color Value section has a maximum absorption
band near 472 nm.
Purity (1) Arsenic ： It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(2) Lead : When 5.0 g of Tomato Color is tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content
should not be more than 10.0 ppm.
(3) Cadmium : When 5.0 g of Tomato Color is tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content
should not be more than 1.0 ppm.
(4) Mercury : When Tomato Color is tested by Mercury Limit Test, its content should
not be more than 1.0ppm.
(5) Residual Solvents : When Tomato Color is tested by Purity (5) for Paprika Extract
Pigments, the content of residual solvents should be,
Acetone Not more than 30ppm
Hexane Not more than 25ppm
Residue on Ignition When Tomato Color is tested by the procedure in Residues on
Ignition, its content should not be more than 0.1%.
Assay(color value) Appropriate amount of Tomato Color is precisely weighted so that
the absorption is within 0.3～0.7 and dissolved in 50 mL of dichloromethane. The total
volume is brought up to 100 mL with petroleum ether. 1 mL of this solution is diluted
to 100 mL with petroleum ether (Test Solution). If necessary, the solution is
centrifuged and the supernatant is used. Using petroleum ether as a reference solution,
absorption A is measured at the maximum absorption near 472 nm with 1cm path
length. Color value is obtained using the following equation.
Color Value( ) ＝ WeightAof×the1,000 sample(g)

1117
 Tragacanth Gum
INS No.: 413
Synonyms: Tragant CAS No.: 9000-65-1

Definition Tragacanth Gum is a polysaccharide obtained by drying the exuded secretion

from stems of Astragalus gummifer LABILL. of leguminosae or allied species.
Compositional Specifications of Tragacanth Gum
Description Tragacanth Gum is white or whitish powder or white～pale yellowish white,
semi-transparent flexible keratinous platelet or thin fragments.
Identification (1) When 50 mL of water is added to 1 g of Tragacanth Gum, it gradually
forms almost uniformLy dispersion.
(2) When iodine solution is added to the powder of Tragacanth Gum and examined
under a microscope, a few number of blue starch grains are observed.
Purity (1) Arsenic : It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(2) Lead ： When 5.0 g of Tragacanth Gum is tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content
should not be more than 2.0 ppm.
(3) Cadmium : When 5.0 g of Tragacanth Gum is tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content
should not be more than 1.0 ppm.
(4) Mercury : When 0.1 g of Tragacanth Gum is tested by Mercury Test Method, its
content should not be more than 1.0ppm.
(5) E. Coli : When Tragacanth Gum is tested by Microbe Test Methods for E. Coli in
General Test Method 「Standards and Specifications for Foods」, it should be
negative (-).
(6) Salmonella : When Tragacanth Gum is tested by Microbe Test Methods for
Salmonella in General Test Method 「Standards and Specifications for Foods」, it
should be negative (-).
(7) Karaya Gum : 20 mL of water is added to 1 g of Tragacanth Gum, which is boiled
until it forms a homogeneous viscous liquid. 5 mL of hydrochloric acid is add to the
this solution, which is then boiled for 5 minutes. its color should not develop light
pink～red.
(8) Viscosity : 4.0 g of fine powder is weighed into a stirring container. It is uniformLy
wetted with 10 mL of alcohol, added 390 mL of water, then stirred with for 7
minutes (care must be taken to prevent lump formation). The resulting suspension is
transferred into a 500 mL bottle. It is then capped and allowed to stand for 24 hours
in a 25℃water bath(Test Solution). Test Solution is tested by 2. Rotational Type
Viscosity Measurement in Viscosity Measurement. It should not be less than 250 cps.
(9) Acid Insoluble Ash : When Tragacanth Gum is tested as directed under Acid
Insoluble Ash in Ash Test Method, the amount should not be more than 0.5%.
1118
Ash When Tragacanth Gum is tested as directed under total ash in Ash Test, the
amount of ash should not be more than 3.0%.

1119
 Tansglucosidase
1,4-α-D-Glucan 6-α-D-glucosyl transferase
Definition Tansglucosidase is an enzyme obtained from a culture of Aspergillus niger and
its variety, the culture of Bacillus sp and culture of Trichoderma reesei inserted gene
of transglucoamylase from Aspergillus niger. Dilutant or stabilizer can be added for the
purpose of activity adjustment and quality preservation.
Compositional Specifications of Transglucosidase
Description Tansglucosidase is white～dark brown powder, particle, paste or colorless ~
dark brown liquid.
Identification When Transglucosidase is proceeded as directed under Activity Test, it
should have the activity as Transglucosidase.
Purity (1) Arsenic : It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(2) Lead : When 5.0 g of Tansglucosidase is tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content
should not be more than 5.0 ppm.
(3) Coliform Group ： When Tansglucosidase proceed as directed under Microbiological
Methods for Coliform Group in General Testing Methods in 「Standards and
Specifications for Foods」, it should not contain more than 30 per 1 g of this
product.
(4) Salmonella ： When Tansglucosidase proceed as directed under Microbiological
Methods for Salmonella in General Testing Methods in 「Standards and Specifications
for Foods」, it should be negative (-).
(5) E. Coli : When Tansglucosidase is tested by Microbe Test Methods for E. Coli in
General Test Method 「Standards and Specifications for Foods」, it should be
negative (-).
Activity Test (activity)
∘Analysis Principle：Activity test is based on substrate hydrolysis of methyl-D-glucoside
at 40℃ for 60 minutes and pH 5.0.
∘Preparation of Test Solution ： Test Solution (in water) is prepared so that
the difference in absorption (AS-AB) is 0.15∼0.32 under following test method.
∘Test Procedure ： 1 mL of substrate solution and 1 mL of acetic acid sodium acetate
buffer solution (pH 5.0) are mixed in a test tube, which is isothermalized for 5 minutes
in a 40 ± 0.5℃ water bath. Exactly 0.5 mL of Test Solution is added to the tube,
which is mixed by shaking and set aside for 60 minutes in a 40 ± 5℃ water bath. It is
then heated for 5 minutes in a boiling water bath and cooled in running water. 0.1 mL
of this solution is added to a test tube, where 3 mL of colorizing solution is added. It
is set aside for 20 minutes at 40 ± 0.5℃. Absorption (AS) of the resulting solution is
measured at 505 nm with 1cm path length using water as a reference. Separately for
enzyme blank test, 1 mL of acetic acid sodium acetate buffer solution (pH 5.0) and 0.5
mL of Test Solution are added to a test tube, which is set aside for 60 minutes at 40
± 0.5℃. Heat the test tube for 5 minutes in a boiling water bath, and cool it in
1120
 running water. After adding 1 mL of substrate solution, absorption (AB) is measured
using the same procedure as Test Solution.
Standard Curve
Glucose is dried for 6 hours at 105℃. 1 g of dried glucose is precisely weighted and
dissolved in water (total volume = 100 mL, 100 mg/mL). A set of glucose standard
solutions are prepared so that each solution contains 100 μg, 200 μg, 300 μg, 400 μg,
and 500 μg per 1 mL. 0.1 mL of glucose standard solution. Each glucose standard
solution is placed in a test tube, where 3 mL of colorizing solution is added. It is then
set aside for 20 minutes in a 40 ± 0.5℃ water bath. Separately, a reference solution
is prepared using water instead of standard solution. Absorption for each standard
solution is measured. A standard curve of absorption versus concentration of glucose (μ
g).
Enzyme activity is obtained using the following equation.
2.
Transglucosidease unit/g (As - AB) × G × 5 × n
＝ 0.5 0.1W×
G：Amount of glucose (μg) where the difference in absorption is 1 (obtained from the
standard curve).
n ： Dilution factor of test solution
W： Weight of sample(g)
Definition of Activity ： 1 Transglucosidase unit corresponds to an amount of enzyme
that produces 1 μg of glucose in 60 minutes under the test conditions above.
Solutions
∘Substrate Solution ： 2 g of α-Methy1-D-glucoside is weighted and dissolved in water
(total volume = 100 mL).
∘Acetic Acid · Sodium Acetate Buffer Solution (pH 5.0) ： 0.02 M acetic acid are added
to 0.02 M sodium acetate solution so that pH becomes 5.0.
∘Colorizing Solution ： After dissolve Glucose oxidase 550 unit, peroxidase 125 unit in
40 mL of tris·phosphate buffer solution(pH 7.2), add 1 mL of
0.4% of 4-aminoantipyrine solution and 1.4 mL of phenol
solution(5%) and tris·phosphate buffer solution(pH 7.2) to make
to 50 mL.
Storage Standards of Transglucosidase
Tansglucosidase is strongly hygroscopic. Store in a cold dark place and well-closed
containers.

1121
 Transglutaminase
Definition Transglutaminase is an enzyme obtained by the following procedure. Cultures
of Streptoverticillium mobaraense are extracted with water. The extracts are treated
with cold ethyl alcohol to obtain enzyme. Diluent or stabilizer can be added for the
purpose of activity adjustment and quality preservation.
Compositional Specifications of Transglutaminase
Description Transglutaminase is white～deep brown powder, granule, paste, or colorles
s～deep brown liquid.
Identification When Transglutaminase is proceeded as directed under Activity Test, it
should have the activity as Transglutaminase.
Purity (1) Arsenic ： It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(2) Lead : When 5.0 g of Transglutaminase is tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content
should not be more than 5.0 ppm.
(3) Coliform Group ： Transglutaminase is tested by Microbiological Methods for
Coliform Group in General Testing Methods in 「Standards and Specifications for
Foods」. It should contain 30 or less per 1 g of Transglutaminase.
(4) Salmonella ： Transglutaminase is tested by Microbiological Methods for Salmonella in
General Testing Methods in 「Standards and Specifications for Foods」. It should be
negative (-).
(5) E. Coli : When Transglutaminase is tested by Microbe Test Methods for E. Coli in
General Test Method 「Standards and Specifications for Foods」, it should be
negative (-).
Activity Test (activity) Analysis Principle ： Activity test is based on generation of
glutamate-γ-hydroxamate from the reaction between glutamic acid group and
hydroxylamine.
∘Preparation of Test Solution ： An appropriate amount of sample is dissolve in
approximately 45 mL of 0.2 M tris-hydrochloric acid buffer solution (pH 6.0) by
stirring for 30 minutes at room temperature. The solution is diluted exactly to 50 mL
with 0.2 M tris-hydrochloric acid buffer solution (pH 6.0). The concentration should be
such that an absorption value (measured by the following Test Procedure) lies within a
range of 0.3～0.7.
∘Test Procedure： Exactly 0.2 mL of Test Solution is placed in a test tube, which is
pre-heated for 1 minutes in a 37 ± 1℃ water bath. 2 mL of substrate solution
(previously isothermalized for 10 minutes at 37 ± 1℃) is added to Test Solution and
mixed by shaking immediately. This solution is set aside in the same water bath for
exactly 10 minutes at 37 ± 1℃, where 2 mL of colorizing solution is added. The
reaction is stopped and the reaction mixture is centrifuged for 10 minutes at 3,000 rpm
to separate the precipitates. Absorption of the supernatant is measured at 525 nm
using water as a reference. Separately, enzyme blank test solution is prepared as
follows. 0.2 mL of Test Solution and 2 mL of colorizing solution are mixed by shaking
1122
 and set aside for 10 minutes at 37 ± 1℃. After adding 2 mL of substrate solution to
the resulting solution, it is centrifuged at 3,000 rpm. Absorption is measured by the
same procedure as the enzyme test solution. Absorption of Test Solution is obtained by
subtracting the absorption of enzyme blank test solution from that of enzyme test
solution.
∘Standard Curve
64.8 mg of L-glutamate-γ-monohydroxamate is precisely weighted and dissolved in 10
mL of 0.2 M tris-hydrochloric acid buffer solution (pH 6.0). Standard Solutions are
prepared so that 1 mL each contains 8.0, 16.0, 20.0, 24.0, and 32.0 μmol of
L-glutamate-γ-monohydroxamate. 2 mL of substrate solution is added to 0.2 mL of
each Standard Solution at 37 ± 1℃ and set aside for 10 minutes. After adding 2 mL of
colorizing solution, precipitates are removed by the same procedure as Test Solution.
Absorptions at 525 nm are measured using water as a reference. A standard curve of
absorption vs. concentration of L-glutamate-γ-monohydroxamate (μmol/mL) is prepared.
Enzyme activity is calculated by the following equation.

U/g ＝ (As - AB) × G ×

2.5
0.5
×
n
0.1 × W

units/g C×D
＝
W × 10
C ： Concentration of hydroxamate of Test Solution obtained from the standard curve
(μmol/mL)
D ： Dilution factor of Test Solution (mL)
W ： Dmount of sample(g)
10 ： Reaction time (minutes)
Definition of Activity ： 1 Transglucosidase unit corresponds to an amount of enzyme
that produces 1 μmol per 1 minute of hydroxamic acid from the substrate under the
test conditions above.
Solutions
∘Substrate Solution ： 2.42 g of tris(hydroxymethyl)amino-methane, 0.7 g of
hydroxylamine hydrochloride, 0.31 g of glutathione, 1.01 g of
carbobenzyloxy glutaminylglycine are precisely weighted and
dissolved in 80 mL of water. pH is adjusted to 6.0 with 6 N
hydrochloric acid. The total volume is brought up to 100 mL with
water.
∘0.2 M Tris-Hydrochloric Buffer Solution (pH 6.0) ： 24.22 g of
tris(hydroxymethyl)amino-methane dissolve in 800 mL of
water and pH is adjusted to 6.0 with 2.8 N hydrochloric
acid. The total volume is brought up to 1,000 mL with
1123
 water. The solution is stored at 5℃ in a refrigerator.
∘Colorizing Solution
Solution 1 ： 3 N hydrochloric acid
Solution 2 ： 12 g if trichloro acetic acid (Cl3COOH) dissolve in water (total volume =
100 mL).
Solution 3 ： 5 g ferric chloride (FeCl3․6H2O) dissolve in 0.1 N hydrochloric acid (total
volume = 100 mL).
Same amounts of Solution 1, 2, and 3 are well mixed before use.
Storage Standards of Transglutaminase
Store in a cold place in a hermetic, light-resistant container.

1124
 Triacetin
Glyceryl Triacetate

Chemical Formula: C9H14O6

Molecular Weight: 218.21 INS No.: 1518
Synonyms: Glyceryl triacetate CAS No.: 102-76-1

Compositional Specifications of Triacetin

Content Triacetin should contain not less than 98.5% of triacetin (C9H14O6).
Description Triacetin is colorless liquid with slight fluidity. It has a slight fatty scent and
bitter taste.
Identification (1) A few drops of Triacetin is taken into a test tube and approximately
0.5 g of potassium hydrogen sulfate is added. Upon heating, irritating vapor of
aclorein is generated.
(2) A solution obtained in the Assay responds to test of acetates in Identification.
Purity (1) Specific Gravity : Specific gravity should be within a range of 1.154∼1.158.
(2) Refractive Index : Refractive Index of Triacetin should be within a range of 1.429∼
1.431.
(3) Acid Value : Approximately 25 g of Triacetin is precisely weighed. After adding 50
mL of toluene and 2 drops of thymol blue, the solution is titrated with 0.02 N sodium
methoxide·toluene solution until the pale red color persists for 30 seconds. The
consumed amount should not be more than 1.0 mL.
(4) Unsaturated matter : To 10 mL of Triacetin, bromine solution in chloroform solution (1
→100) is drop-wise added until the solution turns yellow. When this solution is then
set-aside for 18 hours in a dark place, any precipitates should not form.
(5) Lead : When 5.0 g of Triacetin is tested by Atomic Absorption Spectrophotometry
or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content should not be more
than 2.0 ppm.
(6) Arsenic : It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
Water Content Water content of Triacetin is determined by water determination
(Karl-Fisher Method) and should not be more than 0.2%.
Assay Approximately 1 g of Triacetin is precisely weighed into a pressurizable bottle.
25 mL of 1 N potassium hydroxide solution and 15 mL of isopropyl alcohol are added
and a cap is placed. Then the bottle is immersed in at water bath so that the solution
level is below the water level, which is then heated for 1 hour at 98 ± 2℃. After
cooling, the excess alkali is titrated with 0.5 N sulfuric acid (indicator : 6～8 drops of
1125
phenolphthalein solution). Separately, a blank test is carried out
1 mL of 0.5 N sulfuric acid ＝ 36.37 mg C9H14O6

1126
 Trisodium Citrate
Sodium Citrate

Chemical Formula: C6H5Na3O7‧nH2O(n＝0, 2, 5)

Molecular Weight: 5hydrates 348.15
2hydrates 294.10 INS No.: 331(iii)
anhydrous 258.07
CAS No.:
Synonyms: Tribasic sodium citrate; Sodium 68-04-2(anhydrous)
citrate
6132-04-3(2hydrates)

Definition Trisodium citrate occurs as crystals (dihydrate, pentahydrate) called trisodium

citrate (crystal) and as anhydrous material called trisodium citrate (anhydrous).
Compositional Specifications of Trisodium Citrate
Content Trisodium Citrate, when calculated on the dried basis, should contain within a
range of 99.0～101.0% of trisodium citrate (C6H5Na3O7 = 258.07).
Description Trisodium Citrate occurs as colorless crystals or as white powder. It is
odorless and has a fresh, salty taste.
Identification (1) Trisodium Citrate responds to the test for Citrate and Sodium Salt in
Identification.
Purity (1) Clarity and Color of Solution : When Trisodium Citrate 1 g is dissolved in 20
mL of water, the solution should be colorless and almost clear.
(2) pH : pH of Trisodium Citrate solution (1→20) should be within a range of 7.6～9.0
(3) Sulfate : When 1 g of Trisodium Citrate is tested by Sulfate Limit Test in
Identification, its content should not be more than the amount that corresponds to 0.5
mL of 0.01 N sulfuric acid.
(4) Arsenic : It should be no more than 1.3 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(5) Lead : When 5.0 g of Trisodium Citrate is tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content
should not be more than 1.0 ppm.
(6) Mercury : When Trisodium Citrate is tested by Mercury Limit Test, its content
should not be more than 1.0 ppm.
Loss on Drying When Trisodium Citrate is dried at 180℃ for 4 hours, the weight loss
should be 30.3 % or less for pentahydrate, 13.5 % or less for dihydrate, and 1.0% or
less for anhydrous form.
Assay Dissolve 0.2 g trisodium Citrate, preivously dried at 180℃ for 2 hours and
accurately weighed, in 30 mL of glacial acetic acid (for non-aqueous titration) by
heating. After cooling, the solution is titrated with 0.1 N perchloric acid (indicator : 1
mL of crystal violet-acetic acid solution). The end point is where the violet color of
1127
the solution changes to blue and then green. Separately, a blank test is carried out by
the same procedure.
1 mL of 0.1 N perchloric acid = 8.602 mg of C6H5O7Na3

1128
 Trypsin
Definition Trypsin is an enzyme obtained from extracts of pancreas of pigs and cows.
Dilutant or stabilizer can be added for the purpose of activity adjustment and quality
preservation.
Compositional Specifications of Trypsin
Description Trypsin is white～deep brown powder, granule, paste or colorless~dark
brown liquid.
Identification When Trypsin is proceeded as directed under Activity Test, it should have
the activity as Trypsin.
Purity (1) Arsenic : It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(2) Lead : When 5.0 g of Trypsin is tested by Atomic Absorption Spectrophotometry
or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content should not be more
than 5.0 ppm.
(3) Coliform Group ： Trypsin is tested by Microbe Test Methods for Coliform Group
in General Test Methods in Food Code. It should not be more than 30 cfu per 1 g of
this product.
(4) Salmonella ： Trypsin is tested by Microbe Test Methods for Salmonella in General
Test Methods in Food Code. It should be negative (-).
(5) E. Coli : When Trypsin is tested by Microbe Test Methods for E. Coli in General
Test Method 「Standards and Specifications for Foods」 it should be negative (-).
Activity Test (activity)
∘Preparation of Test Solution : The final diluted solution in 0.001N hydrochloric acid is
prepared so that it contains 3,000 trypsin units per 1 mL. A certain amount of this
solution is diluted with 0.001N hydrochloric acid so that 0.2 mL of the solution
contains 12, 18, and 24 Trypsin units. This solution is used as following Test
Procedure.
∘Test Procedure : This test is carried out with maintaining around the cell at 25 ± 0.1℃.
Temperature of the reaction cell should be checked before and after the measurement
and the difference should not be more than 0.5℃. 0.2 mL of 0.001 N hydrochloric acid
and 3 mL of substrate solution are placed in a 1cm cell. It is set up in a
spectrophotometer. It is adjusted so that the absorbance at 253 nm is 0.050. In another
cell, accurately pipetted 0.2 mL of Test Solution containing 12 Trypsin units, where 3
mL of substrate solution is added. Using a spectrophotometer, absorbance is measured
in a 30 second interval for 5 minutes. This is repeated with the Standard Solutions
containing 18 and 24 Trypsin units. Absorbance curve vs. time for each concentration
is plotted. Only the values in straight line region are used. An average value of 3
concentrations (only in straight line region) is taken as Trypsin activity.
Trypsin units/mg for each concentration is obtained from the following equation.

1129
 Trypsin units ＝ (A —A )/(T × W × 0.003)
A1 : The last absorbance on the straight line
1 2

A2 : The initial absorbance on the straight line

T : Time difference between the initial and the last time (min)
W : Amount of Trypsin used for absorbance measurement (mg)
Definition of Activity : 1 Trypsin unit corresponds to an activity that changes 0.003
absorbance unit per minute under the test conditions above.
Solutions
∘1/15M Phosphate Buffer Solution (pH 7.6) : 4.54 g of potassium phosphate, monobasic is
dissolved in sufficient amount of water to make 500 mL. Separately,
4.73 g of anhydrous potassium phosphate, dibasic is dissolved in
sufficient amount of water to make 500 mL. 13 mL of potassium
phosphate, monobasic solution is mixed with 87 mL of potassium
phosphate, dibasic solution
∘Substrate Solution : 85.7 mg of N-benzoyl-L-arginine ethyl ester hydrochloride for
Trypsin analysis is dissolved in water and the total volume is
brought up to 100 mL with water (note : Using Trypsin reference
standard, appropriateness of substrate and adjustment of
spectrophotometer are checked). 10 mL of this solution is diluted to
100 mL with 1/15 M phosphate buffer solution (pH 7.6). Absorbance
of this solution is measured at 253 nm with 1cm cell at 25 ± 0.1℃
using water as a reference. Absorbance is adjusted to a range of
0.575∼0.585 using 1/15 M phosphate buffer solution if necessary.
This solution should be used within 2 hours after it is prepared.
Storage Standard of Trypsin
Trypsin is strongly hygroscopic, hence should be stored in a cold dark place with
sealing tightly.

1130
 DL-Tryptophan

Chemical Formula: C11H12O2N2

Molecular Weight: 204.23
Synonyms: DL-α-Amino-3-indolepropionic acid CAS No.: 54-12-6

Compositional Specifications of DL-Tryptophan

Content DL-Tryptophan, when calculated on the dried basis, should contain within a
range of 98.0～102.0% of DL-tryptophan (C11H12O2N2).
Description DL-Tryptophan occurs as white to yellow crystals or crystalline, powder. It
is odorless or has a slight odor and has a slightly sweet taste.
Identification (1) DL-Tryptophan solution (1→500) has no optical rotation.
(2) To 0.1 g of DL-Tryptophan, add 50 mL of water, and dissolve while heating. After
cooling, to 10 mL of the solution, add 5 mL of p-dimethylaminobenzaldehyde solution
and 2 mL of diluted hydrochloric acid, and heat in a water bath for 5 minutes. A
red-purple to blue-purple color becomes.
(3) To 5 mL of DL-Tryptophan solution (1→1,000) add 1 mL of ninhydrin solution (1→
1,000), and heat for 3 minutes. A purple color becomes.
Purity (1) Clarity and Color of Solution : Weigh 0.5 g of DL-Tryptophan, and dissolve in
10 mL of 0.5N sodium hydroxide solution. The solution should not be more than
almost clear, and its color should not be darker than that of Color standard Solution C.
(2) pH : pH of DL-Tryptophan solution (1→50) should be within a range of 5.5～7.0.
(3) Arsenic : It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(4) Lead : When 5.0 g of DL-Tryptophan is tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content
should not be more than 5.0 ppm.
(5) Chloride : When 0.5 g of DL-Tryptophan is proceeded as directed under chloride,
its content should not be more than the amount that corresponds to 0.3 mL of 0.01
N hydrochloric acid.
Loss on Drying When DL-Tryptophan is dried for 3 hours at 105℃, the weight loss
should not be more than 0.3%.
Residue on Ignition When thermogravimetric analysis is done with approximately 1 g of
DL-Tryptophan, the amount of residues should not be more than 0.1%.
Assay Approximately 0.3 g of DL-Tryptophan, previously dried and accurately weighed,
is dissolved in 50 mL of glacial acetic acid by heating. After cooling, titrated with 0.1
1131
N perchloric acid solution (indicator : 10 drops of α-naphtholbenzene solution). The
end point is where the brown color of the solution becomes green.
1 mL of 0.1 N perchloric acid = 20.42 mg of C11H12O2N2

1132
 L-Tryptophan

Chemical Formula: C11H12O2N2

Molecular Weight: 204.23
Synonyms: DL-α-Amino-3-indolepropionic acid CAS No.: 54-12-6

Compositional Specifications of L-Tryptophan

Content L-Tryptophan, when calculated on the dried basis, should contain within a range
of 98.0～102.0% of L-tryptophan (C11H12O2N2).
Description L-Tryptophan as white to yellowish-white crystals or crystalline powder. It
is odorless or has a slight odor and has a slightly bitter taste.
Identification (1) L-Tryptophan solution is levorotatory. Add sodium hydroxide solution
(1→5) to make the solution alkaline. The solution becomes dextrorotatory.
(2) Proceed as directed under Identification (2) and (3) in 「DL-Tryptophan」.
Purity (1) Clarity and Color of Solution : Weigh 0.5 g of L-Tryptophan. and dissolve in
10 mL of 0.5N sodium hydroxide solution. The solution shoud not be more than
almost clear, and its color should not be darker than that of Color standard Solution C.
(2) pH : pH of L-Tryptophan solution (1→100) should be within a range of 5.5～7.0.
(3) Specific Rotation : L-Tryptophan is dried for 3 hours at 105℃. Approximately 0.5 g
is precisely weighed and dissolved in 40 mL of water by heating. After cooling, water is
added to make 50 mL solution. Optical rotation should be within a range of ＝ -30∼
-33°
(4) Arsenic : It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(5) Lead : When 5.0 g of L-Tryptophan is tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content
should not be more than 5.0 ppm.
(6) Chloride : Proceed as directed under Purity (5) in 「DL-Tryptophan」.
Loss on Drying When L-Tryptophan is dried for 3 hours at 105℃, the weight loss
should not be more than 0.3%.
Residue on Ignition When thermogravimetric analysis is done with approximately 1 g of
L-Tryptophan, the amount of residues should not be more than 0.1%.
Assay Approximately 0.3 g of L-Tryptophan, previously dried and accurately weighed, is
dissolved in 50 mL of glacial acetic acid by heating. After cooling, titrated with 0.1 N
perchloric acid solution (indicator : 10 drops of α-naphtholbenzene solution). The end
point is where the brown color of the solution becomes green.
1133
1 mL of 0.1 N perchloric acid = 20.42 mg of C11H12O2N2

1134
 L-Tyrosine
L-β-(p-Hydroxyphenyl)alanine
Chemical Formula: C9H11NO3
Molecular Weight: 181.19
Synonyms: L-β-(p-Hydroxyphenyl)alanine CAS No.: 60-18-4

Compositional Specifications of L-Tyrosine

Content L- Tyrosine, when calculated on the dried basis, should contain within a range
of 98.0～102.0% of L-Tyrosine (C9H11NO3).
Description L-Tyrosine is white crystallite or crystalline powder. It is odorless, and it is
tasteless or has a slightly characteristic odor.
Identification (1) To 5 mL saturated L-Tyrosine solution, add 1 mL of ninhydrin solution
(1→50). When this solution is heated for 3 minutes in a water bath, it becomes
bluish violet color.
(2) When 5 mL of saturated L-Tyrosine solution is mixed with 1 mL of ferrous
chloride solution, which is then heated, solution becomes dark red color.
Purity (1) Clarity and Color of Solution : When 1 g of L-Tyrosine is dissolved in 20 mL
of 1 N hydrochloric acid, the solution should be colorless and almost clear.
(2) pH : pH of saturated L-Tyrosine solution should be within a range of 5.0∼6.5.
(3) Specific Rotation : Approximately 5 g of L-Tyrosine is precisely weighed and
dissolved in 1 N hydrochloric acid, to make 100 mL. Optical rotation of L-Tyrosine is
measured and converted into a dried form. It should be within a range of ＝ -10.5∼
-12.5°
(4) Chloride : When 0.07 g of L-Tyrosine is proceeded as directed under chloride, its
content should not more than the amount that corresponds to 0.2 mL of 0.01 N
hydrochloric acid.
(5) Arsenic : It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(6) Lead : When 5.0 g of L-Tyrosine is tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content
should not be more than 5.0 ppm.
Loss on Drying When L-Tyrosine is dried for 3 hours at 105℃, the weight loss should
not be more than 0.3%.
Residue on Ignition When thermogravimetric analysis is done with L-Tyrosine, the
amount of residues should not be more than 0.1%.
Assay Approximately 0.3 g of L-Tyrosine is precisely weighed and dissolved in 3 mL of
formic acid, where 50 mL of glacial acetic acid for non-aqueous titration is added. It
is then titrated with 0.1 N perchloric acid (indicator : 1 mL Crystal violet glacial
acetic acid solution). End point is where the violet color of the solution becomes
through blue then to green. Separately, a blank test is carried out by the same
procedure.

1135
1 mL of 0.1 N Perchloric acid ＝ 18.119 mg C9H11NO3

1136
 r-Undecalactone

Chemical Formula: C11H20O2

Molecular Weight: 184.28

Synonyms: γ-Undecyl lactone CAS No.: 104-67-6

Compositional Specifications of r-Undecalactone

Content r-Undecalactone should contain not less than 98.0% of r-undecalactone (C11H20O2).
Description r-Undecalactone is a colorless to light yellow, transparent liquid having a
characteristic odor.
Identification To 1 mL of r-Undecalactone, add 6 mL of sodium hydroxide, and heat in a
water bath while shaking. It almost dissolves, and the peach-like odor disappears.
Acidify this solution with diluted sulfuric acid, and heat in a water bath while shaking.
Oil phase separates, and a peach-like odor develops.
Purity (1) Specific Gravity : Specific gravity of r-Undecalactone should be within a
range of 0.942～0.945.
(2) Refractive Index : Refractive Index of r-Undecalactone should be within a range of
1.450～1.454.
(3) Clarity and Color of Solution : When 1 mL of r-Undecalactone is dissolved in 5 mL
of 60% alcohol, the solution be clear.
(4) Acid Value : Acid value of r-Undecalactone is tested by Acid Value in Flavoring
Substance Test. It should not be more than 5.
Assay Accurately weigh about 1 g of r-Undecalactone, and proceed as directed under
Ester Value and Ester Content in flavoring Substances Tests.
1 mL of 0.5 N alcoholic potassium hydroxide = 92.14 mg of C11H20O2

1137
 Urease
Definition Urease is an enzyme obtained from cultures of Lactobacillus fermentum.
Dilutant or stabilizer can be added for the purpose of activity adjustment and quality
preservation.
Compositional Specifications of Urease
Description Urease is white ~ dark brown power, granular, pasty substances or
transparent ~ brown liquid.
Identification When Urease is proceeded as directed under Activity Test, it should have
the activity as Urease.
Purity (1) Arsenic ： It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(2) Lead ： When 5.0 g of Urease is tested by Atomic Absorption Spectrophotometry
or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content should not be more
than 5.0 ppm
(3) Coliform Group ： Phosphodiesterase proceed as directed under Microbe Test
Methods in Coliform Group in General Test Methods in 「Standards and Specifications
for Foods」. It should contain not more than 30 colonies per 1 g of this product.
(4) Salmonella : When Phosphodiesterase is tested by Microbe Test Methods for
Salmonella in General Test Method 「Standards and Specifications for Foods」, it
should be negative (-).
(5) E. Coli : When 25 g of Phosphodiesterase is tested by Microbe Test Methods for
E. Coli in General Test Method 「Standards and Specifications for Foods」, it should
be negative (-).
Activity Test (activity)
Analysis principle : Urea substrate by treating with Urease in pH 4.0 and 37℃ produce
ammonia. React ammonia with phenol-nitroprusside solution and alkaline sodium
hypochlorite solution. Activity test is based on measuring absorbance of it.
Preparation of Test Solution : Dissolve the sample in water to make the final diluent
solution conclude 0.1~0.4 unit per 1 mL.
Procedure : 0.5 mL of test solution and 2.5 mL of 0.1M acetate buffer solution(pH 4.0,
20% ethanol) are added to a test tube for enzyme test and settled at 37±0.5℃ for 5
minutes. Precisely mix it with 1.0 mL of substrate solution warmed at 37±0.5℃. React
this solution for 30 minutes and then stop the reaction by adding 4 mL of 10%
trichloroacetic acid solution (enzyme test solution). Separately, 0.5 mL of test solution
and 2.5 mL of acetate buffer solution(pH 4.0, 20% ethanol) are added in the test tube
for enzyme blank test, and settled for 35 minutes at 37±0.5℃. Add 1.0 mL of
substrate solution to mixed solution after adding 4 mL of 10% trichloroacetic acid
solution (enzyme blank test solution). Take 2 mL of each enzyme test solution and
enzume blank test solution and add water to make 20 mL (When the sample is
insoluble, it is centrifuged and 2 mL of the supernatant is used). Take 4 mL of each
10-times diluted enzyme test solution and enzyme blank test solution. After adding
phenol-nitroprusside solution and alkaline sodium hypochlorite solution to these
1138
 solutions, these are reacted for 30 minutes at 37±0.5℃. Using water as a reference
solution, absorbance is measured at wavelength 640 nm.
Preparation of standard curve : the solutions adding 2 mL of ammonium sulfate standard
solution(0~100 ㎍/mL), 1 mL of 10% trichloroacetic acid solution and 0.625 mL of 0.1M
acetate buffer solution(pH 4.0, 20% ethanol) to make to 20mL are measured following
the same procedure as the 10 times diluted upper solutions. Using 2 mL of water as
reference solution instead of 2 mL of ammonium sulfate standard solution, the
absorbance is measured. A standard curve of concentration of ammonia(㎍/mL) is
prepared.
The enzyme activity is calculated by the following formula.
(units/gUrease
A × 8.0
or units/mL) = 17.03 × 30 × 0.5 × W

A : The difference of ammonia concentration of enzyme test solution and enzyme

blank test solution gained from the standard curves
8.0 : Amount of final reaction solution(mL)
17.03 : Molecular weight of ammonia
30 : Reaction time(minutes)
0.5 : Amount of the test solution for reaction(mL)
W : Weight of sample in 1 mL of test solution(g or mL)
Definition of Activity ： 1 Urease unit corresponds to the amount of enzyme which
produces 1 μmol of ammonia per a minute under the conditions above.
Reagent
Substrate solution : Dissolve 0.60 g of urea in water and make it 100 mL.
0.1M acetate buffer solution(pH 4.0, 20% ethanol)
the 1st solution : Dissolve 6.01 g of acetic acid in water containing 20% ethanol and make
it 1,000 mL.
the 2nd solution : Dissolve 13.61 g of trihydrate of sodium acetate in water containing 20%
ethanol and make it 1,000 mL.
After mixing the 1st and 2nd solutions, adjust pH to 4.0
10% trichloroacetic acid solution : Add water to 100 g of trichloroacetic acid and make it
1,000 mL.
phenol-nitroprusside solution : Dissolve 5 g of phenol and 0.025 g of sodium nitroprusside in
water and make it 500 mL. The solution should be stored in a cold dark place.
alkaline sodium hypochlorite solution : Dissolve 5.0 g of sodium hydroxide(commercial
reagent, about 5% effective chlorine) and 7.5 mL of sodium hypochlorite solution in
water and make it 500 mL. The solution is prepared before use.
Storage Standard of Urease
Urease should be stored in a hermetic container in a cold dark place.
1139
 L-Valine

Chemical Formula: C5H11NO2

Molecular Weight: 117.15 CAS No.: 72-18-4

Compositional Specifications of L-Valine

Content L-Valine, when calculated on the dried basis, should contain within a range of
98.0～102.0% of L-valine (C5H11NO2).
Description L-Valine occurs as white crystals or crystalline powder. It is odorless and
has a light characteristic taste.
Identification (1) Solution of L-Valine in 6 N hydrochloric acid (1→25) is D-form.
(2) To 5 mL of L-Valine solution (1→1,000), add 1 mL of ninhydrin solution, and heat
for 3 minutes. The color of this solution becomes reddish-purple to blue-purple.
Purity (1) Clarity and Color of Solution : 0.5 g of L-Valine is dissolved in 20 mL of
water. The solution should be colorless and the turbidity should not be more than
almost clear.
(2) pH : pH of L-Valin solution (1→30) should be within a range of 5.5～7.0.
(3) Specific Rotation : Dissolve 4 g of L-Valine, previously dried for 3 hours at 105℃
and precisely weighed, and add 6 N hydrochloric acid to make 50 mL. When Optical
rotation of this solution is measured, it should be = +26.5∼+29.0°.
(4) Arsenic : It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(5) Lead : When 5.0 g of L-Valine is tested by Atomic Absorption Spectrophotometry
or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content should not be more
than 5.0 ppm.
(6) Chloride : When 0.5 g of L-Valine is tested by Chloride Limit Test, its content
should not be more than the amount that corresponds to 0.3 mL of 0.01 N
hydrochloric acid.
Loss on Drying When L-Valine is dried for 3 hours at 105℃, the weight loss should not
be more than 0.3%.
Residue on Ignition When thermogravimetric analysis is done with L-Valine, the residue
should not be more than 0.1%.
Assay Proceed as directed under Assay in 「Glycine」.
1 mL of 0.1 N perchloric acid = 11.71 mg of C5H11NO2

1140
 Vanillin

Chemical Formula: C8H8O3

Molecular Weight: 152.15

Synonyms: Vanillic aldehyde CAS No.: 121-33-5

Compositional Specifications of Vanillin

Content Vanillin, when calculated on the dried basis, should contain within a range of
97.0～103.0% of vanillin (C8H8O3).
Description Vanillin occurs as white to light yellow needles or crystalline powder, having
a vanilla-like scent and taste.
Identification (1) To the saturated solution of Vanillin, add 3 drops of ferric chloride
solution. Then the color becomes blue-purple. Heat the solution to about 80℃ for 5
minutes. The color of the solution changes to brown, and a white to gray-white
precipitate is formed.
(2) To 1 g of Vanillin, add 5 mL of sodium hydrogen sulfite solution, dissolve while
warming in hot water and shaking, add 10 mL of diluted sulfuric acid, warm at 60～
70℃ for approximately 5 minutes, and allow to stand. Crystals are precipitated.
Purity (1) Melting Point : Melting point of Vanillin should be within a range of 81～83℃.
(2) Clarity and Color of Solution : When 1 g of Vanillin is dissolved in 20 mL of water
by heating at 80℃, the solution should be clear.
(3) Arsenic : It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(4) Lead : When 5.0 g of Vanillin is tested by Atomic Absorption Spectrophotometry
or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content should not be more
than 2.0 ppm.
Loss on Drying When Vanillin is dried for 4 hours in a vacuum desiccator(silica gel), the
weight loss should not be more than 0.5%.
Residue on Ignition When thermogravimetric analysis is done with Vanillin, the residue
should not be more than 0.05%.
Assay Accurately weigh about 1 g of Vanillin, and proceed as directed under
Hydroxylamine Method 2 in Aldehyde and Ketone Content (3) in Flavoring Substances
Tests, using 15 minutes as the time to allow to stand.

1141
1 mL of 0.5 N hydrochloric acid = 76.07 mg of C8H8O3

1142
 Vitamin A in Oil
Definition Vitamin A in Oil is a fatty oil obtained from the fresh liver, pyloric
appendage, other parts of marine animals, its vitamin A (retinol) concentrate or vitamin
A fatty acid ester (retinol fatty acid ester), or such substances dissolved in edible fats
and oils.
Compositional Specifications of Vitamin A in Oil
Content 1 g of Vitamin A in Oil should contain not less than 30 mg of vitamin A, and
90.0～120.0% of the declared content of vitamin A. 300 mg of vitamin A is equivalent
to 1,000,000 international units.
Description Vitamin A in Oil occurs as a light yellow to reddish-light yellow oily
substance having a slight, characteristic odor.
Identification (1) Dissolve 50 mg of Vitamin A in Oil in chloroform to obtain the solution
containing about 3 μg of vitamin A per mL. To 1 mL of the solution, add 5 mL of
antimony trichloride solution. A blue color develops and immediately fades.
(2) Dissolve 50 mg of Vitamin A in Oil in isopropyl alcohol for vitamin A determination
to obtain the solution containing about 3 μg of vitamin A per 1 mL. The solution
exhibits an absorption maximum at a wavelength of 327 ± 1 nm.
Purity (1) Free Acid : 2 g of Vitamin A in Oil is dissolved in 20 mL of alcohol. Acid
value of this solution is tested by Acid Value in Flavoring Substance Test. It should
not be more than 2.8.
(2) Lead : When 5.0 g of Vitamin A in Oil is tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content
should not be more than 2.0 ppm.
Assay Accurately weigh an amount of Vitamin A in Oil corresponding to not less than
0.15 mg as vitamin A and containing not less than 1 g of fats and oils, transfer into a
flask, and add 30 mL of aldehyde-free alcohol and 1 mL of a solution of pyrogallol in
alcohol (1→10). Add 3 mL of potassium hydroxide solution (9→10), equip with a reflux
condenser, and heat in a water bath for 30 minutes to saponify. Cool quickly to
ordinary temperature. add 30 mL of water, transfer into separating funnel. Wash the
flask with 10 mL of water and then 40 mL of ether for vitamin A determination,
transfer the washings into the separating funnel, shake well, and allow to stand.
Transfer the aqueous layer into a separatory funnel and extract twice with 30 mL of
ether for vitamin A determination. Wash the ether extract with 50 mL of water until
the aqueous layer is not colorized with phenolphthalein solution. Allow to stand for 10
minutes. Remove water completely and transfer the ether layer into an Erlenmeyer
flask. Wash the separatory funnel twice with 10 mL of ether for vitamin A
determination each time and transfer the washings to the Erlenmeyer flask above. Add
5 g of anhydrous sodium sulfate, shake, and decant the ether extract into an
Erlenmeyer flask. Wash the remaining sodium sulfate more than twice with 10 mL of
ether for vitamin A determination each time, and transfer the washings into the Erlen
Meyer flask above. Concentrate the ether extract to approximately 1 mL using a
1143
 Guternadanish concentrator while shaking in a water bath at 45℃, immediately dissolve
in isopropyl alcohol for vitamin A determination, diluting exactly to obtain the solution
containing approximately 3μg of vitamin A per 1μl. Use this solution as the test
solution. Measure absorbances at wavelengths of 310 nm, 325 nm, and 334 nm,
respectively, and calculate the content by the following formula. In this case, ether
and isopropyl for vitamin A determination are used :
Content of vitamin A (mg) ＝＝ (325nm) × 0.549
A325 V
(325nm) = × × f
Wl 100
A310 A334
f = 6.815 - 2.555 ( ) - 4.260 ( )
A325 A325

A : Absorbance at each wavelength

W : Weight (g) of the sample in V mL of the test solution.
f : Correction factor (when it is within 0.970～1.030, 1 is used instead.)
V : Total volume (mL) of the test solution,
l : Path length of the solution (cm)
Storage Standards of Vitamin A in Oil
Place in a light-resistant hermetic container, replace the air with an inert gas, and
store.

1144
 Vitamin B12
Cyanocobalamin

Chemical Formula: C63H88CoN14O14P

Molecular Weight: 1,355.40 CAS No.: 68-19-9

Definition Cyanocobalamin is obtained by separating the cultures of Streptomyces, Bacillus,

Flavobacterium, Propionibacterium, and Rhizobium. The major component is Cyanocobalamin.
Compositional Specifications of Cyanocobalamin
Content If Cyanocobalamin is converted to a dehydrated form, it should contain not less
than 96.0% cyanocobalamin (C63H88CoN14O14P).
Description Cyanocobalamin is dark red crystallite or powder.
Identification (1) When absorbance of the Test Solution in Assay is measured,
absorbance maximum are observed at 277∼279 nm, 360∼362 nm, and 548∼552 nm.
The ratio of A361/A550 is 3.15∼3.40.
(2) Approximately 1 mg of Cyanocobalamin and 50 mg of potassium pyrosulfate is
transferred into a crucible, are melted by heating. After cooling, the lump is broken
into small pieces with a glass rod. It is then dissolved in 3 mL of water by heating.
After adding 1 drop of phenolphthalein TS, sodium hydroxide TS (1→10) is
drop-wise added until the solution shows pale red color. When 500 mg of sodium
acetate, 0.5 mL of dilute acetic acid, and 0.5 mL of sodium nitroso-2-naphthol-
3,6-disulfonate solution (1→500) are added to the resultant solution, red or orange
red color appears immediately. When 0.5 mL of hydrochloric acid is added and the
solution is boiled for 1 minute, the red color persists.
(3) A 50 mL distillation flask (two neck / round bottom) is connected to a vertical
condenser, of which the end is immersed in a test tube with 1 mL of 0.1 N sodium
hydroxide solution. 1.5～2.0 mg of Cyanocobalamin is dissolved in 5 mL of water in
1145
 the flask. 2.5 mL of hypophosphite is added to the flask, which is then gently boiled
for 10 minutes under air. 1 drop of saturated ferrous ammonium sulfate solution is
added to the small test tube and 30 mg of sodium fluoride is added, which is gently
boiled and cooled. Diluted sulfuric acid (1→7) is drop-wise added until the solution
becomes clear. When 3～5 drops of diluted sulfuric acid (1→7) are added additionally,
the solution turns blue or bluish green within a few minutes.
(4) 1 g of Cyanocobalamin dissolves in 80 mL of water. It is almost insoluble in ether,
chloroform, or acetone.
Purity Analogous vitamin B12 : 1 mg of Cyanocobalamin is dissolved in 20 mL of water,
which is transferred into a small separatory funnel. 4 mL of mixture of chloroform and
m-cresol (50:50) is added and mixed well for 1 minute by shaking. It is allowed to
stand to separate phases. The lower phase is transferred into another separatory
funnel, where 5 mL of diluted sulfuric acid (1→7) is added. The mixture is vigorously
shaken. Two phases are separated, centrifuged if necessary. The supernatant should be
colorless or should not be darker than the mixture of 0.15 mL of 0.1 N potassium
permanganate solution and 250 mL water.
Loss on Drying Approximately 25 mg of Cyanocobalamin is accurately weighed and
dried for 2 hours at 105℃ under a decompression of 5 mm Hg or less. The loss on
drying should not be more than 12%.
Assay Approximately 30 mg each of Cyanocobalamin and vitamin B12 standard,
previously measured losses on drying as method used in sample, is accurately
measured and dissolved in water so that the total volume is 1,000 mL, respectively
(Test Solution & Standard Solution). Absorbance of ET and ES for Test and Standard
Solutions are measured at 361 nm with 1 cm path length.

vitamin B (CAmount of Weight(onof dry

vitamin
basisB) (mg)
standard ET
12
H CoN O ×
12 63 88 14 14P)(mg) ＝
ES

1146
 Vitamin B1 Dilaurylsulfate
Thiamine Dilaurylsulfate

Chemical Formula: C36H68O9N4S3‧H2O

Molecular Weight: 815.19 CAS No.: 39479-63-5

Compositional Specifications of Vitamin B1 Dilaurylsulfate

Content Vitamin B1 Dilaurylsulfate, when calculated on the dried basis, should contain
within a range of 98.0～102.0% of Vitamin B1 dilaurylsulfate (C36H68O9N4S3․H2O).
Description Vitamin B1 Dilaurylsulfate occurs as colorless to white crystals or as a white
crystalline powder. It is odorless or has a slight, characteristic odor.
Identification (1) To 1 g of Vitamin B1 Dilaurylsulfate, add 30 mL of water and 15 mL
of hydrochloric acid, which is boiled for approximately 4 hours with a reflux
condenser. After cooling, it is extracted twice with 15 mL each of ether. Ether
extracts are combined and washed with water. Ether is removed by evaporation in a
water bath. The residue is dried for 15 minutes at 100℃ and cooled. The melting
point of Vitamin B1 Dilaurylsulfate should be within a range of 20∼28℃.
(2) To 0.1 g of Vitamin B1 Dilaurylsulfate, add 20 mL of potassium
chloride-hydrochloric acid solution boil for approximately 30 minutes cool, and filter.
When take 1 mL of the filtrate, and add 1 mL of lead acetate solution and 1 mL of
sodium hydroxide solution (1→10), it becomes yellow. The solution is heated in a
water bath, and it turns brown. If it is further set-aside, black brown precipitate is
formed.
(3) To 1 mL of the filtrate above (2), add 5 mL of 0.5 N sodium hydroxide solution,
0.5 mL of potassium ferricyanide solution, and 5 mL of n-butyl alcohol. It is tested
by Identification (1) in 「Vitamin B1 Hydrochloride」.
Purity (1) Chloride : To 0.25 g of Vitamin B1 Dilaurylsulfate, add 30 mL of water, and
shake, which is set-aside for 10 minutes. Add 6 mL of dilute nitric acid and filter
and wash with water. Wash water is added to the filtrate, Test Solution. It is tested
by Chloride Limit Test. Its content should not be more than the amount that
corresponds to 0.4 mL of 0.01 N hydrochloric acid.
(2) Lead : When 5.0 g of Vitamin B1 Dilaurylsulfate is tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content
should not be more than 2.0 ppm.
Loss on Drying When Vitamin B1 Dilaurylsulfate is dried for 24 hours in a vacuum
1147
 desiccator (silica gel), the weight loss should be not more than 2%.
Residue on Ignition When thermogravimetric analysis is done with Vitamin B1
Dilaurylsulfate, the residue should be not more than 0.3%.
Assay Accurately weigh about 0.12 g of Vitamin B1 Dilaurylsulfate, previously dried, add
40 mL of potassium chloride-hydrochloric acid solution, heat in a water bath for 30
minutes while shaking occasionally, cool, filter, wash with 50 mL of water, combine
the filtrate and the washings, and add water to make 100 mL. Measure exactly 2 mL
of this solution, and add water to make 50 mL. Use this solution as the Test Solution.
Accurately weigh about 0.1 g of Vitamin B1 Hydrochloride Reference Standard
(measure previously the water content in the same manner as for 「Vitamin B1
Hydrochloride」), dissolve in 40 mL of potassium chloride hydrochloric acid solution,
and add water to make exactly 200 mL. 2 mL of this solution, accurately weighed, is
diluted to 50 mL with water, Standard Solution. Quantitative analysis is carried out
with test solution and standard solution following 「Vitamin B1 Hydrochloride」.
Weight of Vitamin B1 Hydrochloride
reference standard calculated on the
Contents(%) AT—AT′ × anhydrous basis(g) × 27 . 4 1× 10 0
= AS—AS′ Weight of the sample(g)

1148
 Vitamin B1 Hydrochloride
Thiamine Hydrochloride

Chemical Formula: C12H17ON4ClS‧HCl

Molecular Weight: 337.29 CAS No.: 67-03-8

Compositional Specifications of Vitamin B1 Hydrochloride

Content Vitamin B1 Hydrochloride, when calculated on the anhydrous dried basis, should
contain within a range of 98.0∼102.0% of Vitamin B1 hydrochloride (C12H17ON4ClS․HCl).
Description Vitamin B1 Hydrochloride occurs as white. fine crystals or crystalline
powder. It is odorless or has a slight, characteristic odor.
Identification (1) Dissolve 5 mg of Vitamin B1 Hydrochloride in a mixture of 5 mL of 0.5
N sodium hydroxide solution and 0.5 mL of potassium ferricyanide solution, add 5
mL of n-butyl alcohol, shake vigorously for 2 minutes, allow to stand, and observe
under ultraviolet light. The upper layer emits a blue-purple fluorescence. The
fluorescence disappears upon acidifying the solution. It reappears on making the
solution alkaline.
(2) Dissolve 5 mg of Vitamin B1 Hydrochloride in a mixture of 1 mL of lead acetate
solution and 1 mL of sodium hydroxide solution (1→10). The color of the solution
becomes to yellow. Warm in a water bath. It changes to brown. Then allow to stand.
A black brown precipitate is formed.
(3) Vitamin B1 Hydrochloride responds to the test for Chloride in Identification.
Purity (1) Clarity and Color of Solution : When dissolve 1 g of Vitamin B1 Hydrochloride
in water to make 10 mL, the solution should not be darker than the solution added
water to 1.5 mL of 0.1 N potassium dichromate solution and made to 1,000 mL.
(2) pH : pH of Vitamin B1 Hydrochloride solution (1→100) should be within a range of
2.7～3.4.
(3) Sulfate : When 1.5 g of Vitamin B1 Hydrochloride is tested by Sulfate Limit Test,
its content should not be more than the amount that corresponds to 0.35 mL of 0.01
N sulfuric acid.
(4) Lead : When 5.0 g of Vitamin B1 Hydrochloride is tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content
should not be more than 2.0 ppm.
(5) Nitrate: 0.02 g of Vitamin B1 Hydrochloride is dissolved in water to make to 20
mL, and 2 mL of sulfuric acid is added. After shaking it to mix, cool it. When 2 mL
1149
 of ferrous sulfate solution is added to make layer, the interface layer of two
solutions should not produce a band of brown color.
Water Content Vitamin B1 Hydrochloride is tested by the Back Titration Method in
Water Content Determination (Karl-Fischer Method). The water content should not be
more than 5%.
Residue on Ignition When thermogravimetric analysis is done with Vitamin B1
Hydrochloride, the residue should not be more than 0.2%.
Assay Accurately weigh about 0.1 g each of Vitamin B1 Hydrochloride and Vitamin B1
Hydrochloride Reference Standard (measure previously the water content in the same
manner as for Vitamin B1 Hydrochloride), separately dissolve each in hydrochloric acid
(1→10.000) to make exactly 200 mL, take 2 mL each, and add hydrochloric acid (1→
10,000) to make 50 mL each. Use these solutions as the Test Solution and the
Standard Solution, respectively. Measure exactly 5 mL of the test solution, and
transfer into test tubes T and T' with ground-glass stoppers. Transfer 3 mL of
cyanogen bromide for Vitamin B1 Assay, exactly measured, into T, shake, add quickly
5 mL of sodium hydroxide solution (1→10), exactly measured, and shake again.
Transfer 5 mL of sodium hydroxide solution (1→10), exactly measured, into T'. shake,
add 3 mL of cyanogen bromide IS for Vitamin B1 Assay, exactly measured, and shake
again. Separately, measure exactly 5 mL of the standard solution, transfer into test
tubes S and S' with ground-glass stoppers, and proceed in the same manner as for
the test solution. Measure absorbances AT, AT', As and As' of respective solutions at a
wavelength of 368 nm using water as the reference solution, and calculate the content
by the following formula:
Bromine Cyanide solution for Vitamin B1 Assay : To 2 mL of bromine, add 100 mL of
ice cold water and shake thoroughly, and add drop-wise ice cold potassium
thiocyanide solution (1→10) until the color of bromine is completely decolorized.
Weight
referenceofstandard
Vitamin calculated
B1 Hydrochloride
on the
A —A
Contents(%) = AS—AS′ ×
T T′ anhydrous basis(g) × 100
Weight of the sample(g)

1150
 Vitamin B1 Mononitrate
Thiamine mononitrate

Chemical Formula: C12H17O4N5S

Molecular Weight: 327.37 CAS No.: 532-43-4

Compositional Specifications of Vitamin B1 Mononitrate

Content Vitamin B1 Mononitrate, when calculated on the dried basis, should contain
within a range of 98.0～102.0% of Vitamin B1 Mononitrate (C12H17O4N5S).
Description Vitamin B1 Mononitrate occurs as white to white crystalline powder. It is
odorless or has a slight, characteristic odor.
Identification (1) Proceed as directed under Identification (1) and (2) in 「Vitamin B1
Hydrochloride」.
(2) Vitamin B1 Mononitrate responds to the test for Nitrate in Identification.
Purity (1) pH : pH of Vitamin B1 Mononitrate solution(1→50) should be within a range
of pH 6.5～8.0.
(2) Chloride : When 0.25 g of Vitamin B1 Mononitrate is tested by Chloride Limit Test,
its content should not be more than the amount that corresponds to 0.4 mL of 0.01
N hydrochloric acid.
(3) Lead : When 5.0 g of Vitamin B1 Mononitrate is tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content
should not be more than 2.0 ppm.
Loss on Drying When Vitamin B1 Mononitrate is dried for 2 hours at 105℃, the weight
loss should not be more than 1%.
Residue on Ignition When thermogravimetric analysis is done with Vitamin B1 Mononitrate,
the residue should not be more than 0.2%.
Assay Proceed as directed under Assay in 「Vitamin B1 Hydrochloride」.
Weight
referenceofstandard
Vitamin calculated
B1 Hydrochloride
on the
Contents(%) AT—AT′ × anhydrous basis(g) × 0.970
6 ×0
10
= AS—AS′ Weight of the sample(g)

1151
 Vitamin B1 Naphthalene-1.5-disulfonate
Thiamine Naphthalene-1,5-disulfonate

Chemical Formula: C22H24O7N4S3‧H2O

Molecular Weight: 570.68 CAS No.: 573-09-1

Compositional Specifications of Vitamin B1 Naphthalene-1,5-disulfonate
Content Vitamin B1 Naphthalene-1.5-disulfonate, when calculated on the dried basis,
should contain within a range of 98.0～102.0% of thiamine naphthalene-1.5-disulfonate
(C22H24O7N4S3 = 552.66).
Description Vitamin B1 Naphthalene-1,5-disulfonate occurs as a white, fine crystalline
powder. It is odorless or has a slight, characteristic odor.
Identification (1) Dissolve 10 mg of Vitamin B1 Naphthalene-1,5-disulfonate in 100 mL
of 0.001 N hydrochloric acid. Take 5 mL of the solution, and add 0.001 N
hydrochloric acid to make 100 mL. The solution exhibits an absorption maximum at a
wavelength of 226 ± 1 nm.
(2) Proceed as directed under Identification (1) and (2) in 「Vitamin B1 Hydrochloride」.
Purity (1) Chloride : To 0.25 g of Vitamin B1 Naphthalene-1,5-disulfonate, add 30 mL of
water, and shake which is then set-aside for 10 minutes. Add 6 mL of dilute nitric
acid and filter. When the filtrate is tested by Chloride Limit Test, its content should
not be more than the amount that corresponds to 0.4 mL of 0.01 N hydrochloric
acid.
(2) Lead : When 5.0 g of Vitamin B1 Naphthalene-1.5-disulfonate is tested by Atomic
Absorption Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy,
its content should not be more than 2.0 ppm.
Loss on Drying When Vitamin B1 Naphthalene-1.5-disulfonate is dried for 2 hours at
105℃, the weight loss should be not more than 5%.
Residue on Ignition The amount of residue of Vitamin B1 Naphthalene-1.5-disulfonate should
not be more than 0.2%.
Assay Accurately weigh about 0.16 g of Vitamin B1 Naphthalene-1,5-disulfonate,
previously dried, add 25 mL of diluted hydrochloric acid, heat in a water bath ,cool,
and add water to make exactly 1,000 mL. Take 2 mL of this solution, and proceed as
directed under Assay in 「Vitamin B1 Hydrochloride」.

A —A Weight ofstandard
reference Vitamin calculated
B1 Hydrochloride
on the 1.638 10
Contents(%)
=
T T′ × anhydrous basis(g) × 6 ×0
AS—AS′ Weight of the sample(g)
1152
 Vitamin B1 Rhodanate
Thiamine Thiocyanate

Chemical Formula: C13H17ON5S2‧H2O

Molecular Weight: 341.17 CAS No.: 14940-85-3

Compositional Specifications of Vitamin B1 Rhodanate

Content Vitamin B1 Rhodanate, when calculated on the dried basis, should contain within
a range of 98.0～102.0% of Vitamin B1 Rhodanate (C13H17ON5S2 ＝ 323.45).
Description Vitamin B1 Rhodanate occurs as white crystals or crystalline powder. It is
odorless or has a slight, characteristic odor.
Identification (1) Proceed as directed under Identification (1) and (2) in 「Vitamin B1
Hydrochloride」.
(2) A saturated solution of Vitamin B1 Rhodanate responds to the test for thiocyanide
salt in Identification.
Purity (1) Chloride : To 0.3 g of Vitamin B1 Rhodanate, add 1.5 mL of water, 0.3 g of
ammonium nitrate, and 0.9 mL of sodium hydroxide solution (2→5). Then add
drop-wise 3 mL of hydrogen peroxide gradually while shaking. Heat in a water bath
for 30 minutes while shaking occasionally, cool, and add 3 mL of diluted nitric acid
(2→3) and water to make 50 mL. Add 0.1 mL of dextrin solution (1→50) and 0.5 mL
of silver nitrate solution. Then allow to stand for 5 minutes. The solution should be
not more turbid than the reference solution prepared as follows. Take 0.5 mL of
0.01 N hydrochloric acid and proceed in the same manner as for the test solution.
(2) Lead : When 5.0 g of Vitamin B1 Rhodanate is tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content
should not be more than 2.0 ppm.
Loss on Drying When Vitamin B1 Rhodanate is dried for 2 hours at 105℃, the weight
loss should not be more than 6%.
Residue on Ignition When thermogravimetric analysis is done with Vitamin B1 Rhodanate,
the residue should not be more than 0.2%.
Assay Proceed as directed under Assay in 「Vitamin B1 Hydrochloride」.
Weight of Vitamin B1 Hydrochloride
Contents(%) AT—AT′ × referenceanhydrous
standard calculated
basis(g) on the 0 . 9 5 1 0
×9 ×0
= AS—AS′ Weight of the sample(g)
1153
 Vitamin B2
Riboflavin

Chemical Formula: C17H20N4O6

Molecular Weight: 376.38 INS No.: 101(i)

Synonyms: Lactoflavin CAS No.: 83-88-5

Compositional Specifications of Vitamin B2

Content Vitamin B2, when calculated on the dried basis, should contain within a range of
98.0～102.0% of Vitamin B2 (C17H20N4O6).
Description Vitamin B2 occurs as yellow to light yellow crystals or crystalline powder,
having a slight odor and a bitter taste.
Identification 1 mg of Vitamin B2 is dissolved in water to make 100 mL. The solution is
light yellow-green in color and emits a strong yellowish green fluorescence. The
fluorescence disappears on addition of diluted hydrochloric acid or sodium hydroxide
solution.
Purity (1) Specific Rotation : Dry Vitamin B2, light-shielded, for 2 hours at 105℃.
Dissolve 50 mg of Vitamin B2, precisely weighed, in 2 mL of 0.1 N sodium hydroxide
solution. Add 5 mL of freshly boiled and cooled water, and add 2 mL of ethanol
while shaking sufficiently. Add freshly boiled and cooled water to make exactly 10
mL. When Optical rotation of this solution is measured within 30 minutes, should be
within a range of ＝ -120 ∼ -140°.
(2) Lumiflavin : To 25 mg of Vitamin B2, add 10 mL of alcohol-free chloroform, shake
for 5 minutes, and filter. The color of the filtrate should not darker than that of the
solution prepared by adding water to 3 mL of 0.1 N potassium dichromate to make
1,000 mL.
(3) Arsenic : It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(4) Lead : When 5.0 g of Vitamin B2 is tested by Atomic Absorption Spectrophotometry
1154
 or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content should not be more
than 2.0 ppm.
(5) Cadmium : When 5.0g of Vitamin B2 is tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content
should not be more than 1.0 ppm.
(6) Mercury : When Vitamin B2 is tested by Mercury Limit Test, its content should
not be more than 1.0 ppm.
(7) Unsulfonated Primary Aromatic Amines : When G. Unsulfonated Primary Aromatic
Amines in Coloring Matter Tests is done, the content should not be more than 0.01%
as Aniline.
Loss on Drying When Vitamin B2 is dried for 2 hours at 105℃, the weight loss should
not be more than 1.5%.
Residue on Ignition When thermogravimetric analysis is done with Vitamin B2, the
amount of residue should not be more than 0.3%.
Assay Dissolve 0.015g of Vitamin B2, previously dried and accurately weighed, in 800
mL of diluted glacial acetic acid (1→400) by heating at 60∼70℃, cool, and add water
to make exactly 1,000 mL. Use this solution as the test solution. Prepare the standard
solution, using Riboflavin Reference Standard and proceeding in the same manner as
the sample. Using water as the reference solution, measure absorbances AT and As of
the test solution and standard solution, respectively, at a wavelength of 445 nm, add
0.02 g of sodium hydrosulfite to solution of each. Decolorize by shaking well, and
immediately measure absorbances AT' and AS'. Calculate the content by the following
formula. Avoid direct sunlight during the procedure. and use light-shielded containers.
Content(%) Weight of Vitamin B2 A -A ′ 100
= Standard(mg) × ATS-ATS′ × Weight of
sample(mg)

1155
 Vitamin B2 Phosphate Sodium
Riboflavin 5'-Phosphate Sodium

Chemical Formula: C17H20N4NaO9P‧0～2H2O

Molecular Weight: 514.38 INS No.: 101(ii)

Synonyms: Riboflavin 5′-phosphate ester CAS No.:
monosodium salt 103-40-5(anhydrous)

Compositional Specifications of Vitamin B2 Phosphate Sodium

Content Vitamin B2 Phosphate Sodium, when calculated on the anhydrous basis, should
contain not less than 95.0% of Vitamin B2 Phosphate Sodium (C17H20N4NaO9P = 478.33).
Description Vitamin B2 Phosphate Sodium occurs as yellow to orange crystals or
crystalline powder. It is almost odorless and has a bitter taste.
Identification (1) Proceed as directed under Identification in 「Vitamin B2 .
」

(2) The solution, which is made by decomposition of 50 mg of Vitamin B2 Phosphate

Sodium as B. nitrogen determination method in Nitrogen Determination, responds to the
test for Sodium Salt and Phosphate in Identification.
Purity (1) Clarity and Color of Solution : When 0.2 g of Vitamin B2 Phosphate Sodium is
dissolved in 10 mL of water, the solution should be clear.
(2) Specific Rotation : Approximately 0.3 g of Vitamin B2 Phosphate Sodium is precisely
weighed and dissolved in 5 N hydrochloric acid to make 20 mL. Optical rotation of
Vitamin B2 Phosphate Sodium is measured and converted to a value of a anhydrous. It
should be a within a range of ＝ +38∼+43°.
(3) Lumiflavin : To 35 mg of Vitamin B2 Phosphate Sodium, add 10 mL of alcohol-free
chloroform, shake for 5 minutes, and filter. The color of the filtrate should not be
darker than that of the solution prepared by adding water to 3.0 mL of 0.1 N
potassium dichromate to make 1,000 mL.
(4) Arsenic : It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(5) Lead : When 5.0 g of Vitamin B2 Phosphate Sodium is tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content
1156
 should not be more than 2.0 ppm.
(6) Cadmium : When 5.0g of Vitamin B2 Phosphate Sodium is tested by Atomic
Absorption Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy,
its content should not be more than 1.0 ppm.
(7) Mercury : When Vitamin B2 Phosphate Sodium is tested by Mercury Limit Test,
its content should not be more than 1.0 ppm.
(8) Unsulfonated Primary Aromatic Amines : When G. Unsulfonated Primary Aromatic
Amines in Coloring Matter Tests is done, the content should not be more than
0.007% as Aniline. 10 mg of aniline is precisely weighed and dissolved in 30 mL of
diluted hydrochloric acid (3→10), which is diluted to 100 mL with water. To 1.4 mL
of this solution, hydrochloric acid(1→10) is added to make 100 mL, reference
solution.
Water Content 25 mL of methanol (for Karl-Fischer)·ethylene glycol solution (for
Karl-Fischer) (1:1) is transferred into a dried titration flask and titrated with
Karl-Fischer solution until the end point. 0.1 g of Vitamin B2 Phosphate Sodium is
precisely weighed and immediately placed into a titration flask. It is then titrated by
the Back Titration Method in Water Content Method (Karl-Fischer Method). Water
content should not be more than 10%.
Assay Accurately weigh about 20 mg of Vitamin B2 Phosphate Sodium, and proceed as
directed under Assay in 「Vitamin B2 . Calculate the content by the following formula.
」

Avoid direct sunlight during the procedure and use light-shielded containers.
A -A ′ 1.271
Contents(%)= Weight of Vitamine
(mg)
B2 standard × ATS-ATS′ × Weight of
Sample(mg)
× 100-Water 100
Contents(%)' ×100

1157
 Vitamin B6 Hydrochloride
Pyridoxine Hydrochloride

Chemical Formula: C8H11O3N‧HCl

Molecular Weight: 205.64 CAS No.: 58-56-0

Compositional Specifications of Vitamine B6 Hydrochloride

Content Vitamin B6 Hydrochloride, when calculated on the dried basis, should contain
not less than 98.0% of Vitamin B6 Hydrochloride (C8H11O3N․HCl)
Description Vitamin B6 Hydrochloride occurs as white to light yellow crystals or
crystalline powder. It is odorless.
Identification (1) To 1 mL of Vitamin B6 Hydrochloride solution (1→10,000), add 2 mL
of a solution of 2.6-dibromoquinone chloroamide in ethanol (1→4,000) and 1 drop of
ammonia solution. A blue color develops. When 1 mL of saturated boric acid solution
is added before the test, and the same test is carried out, blue color does not
develop.
(2) Vitamin B6 Hydrochloride responds to the test for Chloride in Identification.
Purity (1) Melting Point : Melting point of Vitamin B6 Hydrochloride should be within a
range of 203～209℃.
(2) pH : pH of Vitamin B6 Hydrochloride solution (0.5→25) should be within a range of
2.5∼3.5.
(3) Lead : When 5.0 g of Vitamin B6 Hydrochloride is tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content
should not be more than 2.0 ppm.
(4) Chloride : 0.5 g of Vitamin B6 Hydrochloride is dissolved in 50 mL of methanol.
Add 5 mL of glacial acetic acid and 2~3 drops of eosin Y solution. When it is
titrated by 0.1 N silver nitrate solution, the content which is calculated on the dried
basis should be 16.9~17.6%.
1 mL of 0.1 N silver nitrate solution = 3.545mg Cl
Eosin Y solution : 50 mg of eosin Y is dissolved in 10 mL of water.
Loss on Drying When Vitamin B6 Hydrochloride is dried for 4 hours in a vacuum
desiccator, the weight loss should not be more than 0.5%.
Residue on Ignition When thermogravimetric analysis is done with Vitamin B6
Hydrochloride, the residue should not be more than 0.1%.
Assay Accurately weigh about 0.4 g of Vitamin B6 Hydrochloride, dissolve in 60 mL of
1158
glacial acetic acid (for non-aqueous titration) and 10 mL of mercury II acetate solution
(for non-aqueous titration). Titrate with 0.1 N perchloric acid (indicator : 1 mL of
crystal violet-glacial acetic acid solution). Separately, carry out a blank test.
1 mL of 0.1 N perchloric acid = 20.56 mg C8H11O3N․HCl

1159
 Vitamin C
L-Ascorbic Acid

Chemical Formula: C6H8O6

Molecular Weight: 176.13 INS No.: 300

Synonyms: Ascorbic acid CAS No.: 50-81-7

Compositional Specifications of Vitamin C

Content Vitamin C, when calculated on the dried basis, should contain no less than
99.0% of Vitamin C(C6H8O6).
Description Vitamin C occurs as white or light yellow crystals, crystalline powder or
powder. It is odorless and has an acid taste.
Identification (1) Melting point of Vitamin C should be within a range of 187∼192℃.
(2) To 2 mL of Vitamin C solution (1→100), 5～6 drops of sodium nitroprusside
solution are added. When 1 drop of sodium hydroxide solution is added, the solution
turns blue immediately.
(3) Dissolve 0.1 g of Vitamin C in 100 mL of metaphosphoric acid solution (1→50), and
add drop-wise iodine solution until a slightly yellowish color develops. Add 1 drop
each of cupric sulfate solution (1→1,000) and pyrrole. and heat in a water bath at 5
0～60℃ for 5 minutes. A blue to bluish green color develops.
(4) To 10 mL of Vitamin C solution (1→100), add 1 mL of potassium permanganate
solution, and then the color disappears immediately.
(5) To 5 mL of Vitamin C solution (1→100), add 0.3 mL of sodium hydroxide solution and
2 drops of uranyl acetate solution, and then the solution turns brown. When 2 mL of
sodium hydroxide solution is added, it changes to light yellow.
Purity (1) Specific Rotation : Approximately 1 g of Vitamin C is precisely weighed and
dissolved in freshly boiled and cooled water to make 10 mL. Optical rotation of this
solution, when calculated on the dried basis, should within a range of ＝ +20.5 ∼
+21.5°.
(2) Arsenic : It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(3) Lead : When 5.0 g of Vitamin C is tested by Atomic Absorption Spectrophotometry
or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content should not be more
than 2.0 ppm.
(4) Mercury : When Vitamin C is tested by Mercury Limit Test, its content should
1160
 not be more than 1.0 ppm.
Loss on Drying When Vitamin C is dried for 3 hours in a vacuum desiccator (silica gel),
the weight loss should not be more than 0.4%.
Residue on Ignition When thermogravimetric analysis is done with Vitamin C, the amount
of residue should not be more than 0.1%.
Assay Dissolve 0.2 g of Vitamin C, previously dried and accurately weighed, in 50 mL
of metaphosphoric acid solution (1→50). Titrate with 0.1 N iodine solution (indicator :
starch solution).
1 mL of 0.1 N iodine solution = 8.806 mg of C6H8O6

1161
 Vitamin D2
Calciferol

Chemical Formula: C28H44O

Molecular Weight: 396.66 CAS No.: 50-14-6

Compositional Specifications of Vitamin D2

Description Vitamin D2 is white crystal and odorless.
Identification (1) 50 mg of Vitamin D2 is dissolved in 1 mL of anhydrous pyridine, where a
solution of 50 mg 3,5-dinitro benzoyl in 1 mL anhydrous pyridine is added and heated
for 10 minutes in a water bath. After cooling, 5 mL of water is added to form
precipitates, which are then filtered and washed with water. Precipitates are twice
recrystallized in acetone and then dried for 2 hours in a vacuum desiccator (sulfuric
acid). Melting point should be within a range of 147∼149℃.
(2) Dissolve 0.5 mg of Vitamin D2 in 5mL of chloroform, add 0.3 mL of anhydrous
acetic acid and 0.1 mL of sulfuric acid and shake. The color of this mixture turns red
then violet, blue and finally green.
Purity (1) Specific Rotation : Approximately 0.3 g of Vitamin D2 is precisely weighed
and dissolved in ethanol to make 20 mL. The optical rotation of this solution should be
within a range of ＝ +102∼+107°.
(2) Specific Absorbance : Specific absorbance is measured at 265nm with a solution of
Vitamin D2 in ethanol (aldehyde free). It should be ＝ 445∼485 at 265 nm.
(3) Ergosterol : 10 mg of Vitamin D2 is dissolved in 2 mL of 90% ethanol. 20 mg of
digitonin is dissolved in 2 mL of 90% ethanol. Two solutions are mixed and kept for
18 hours. Precipitates should not be formed in this solution.
(4) Melting Point : Melting point of Vitamin D2 should be within a range of 115∼119℃.
Storage Standards of Vitamin D2
Vitamin D2 should be preserved in a light-shielded hermetic container filled with
1162
nitrogen in a cool place.

1163
 Vitamin D3
Cholecalciferol

Chemical Formula: C27H44O

Molecular Weight: 384.65 CAS No.: 67-97-0

Compositional Specifications of Vitamin D3

Description Vitamin D3 occurs as white crystals. It is odorless.
Identification (1) Proceed as directed under Identification (1) in 「Vitamin D2 . The
」

melting point should within a range of 133～135℃.

(2) Proceed as directed under Identification (2) in 「Vitamin D2 .
」

Purity (1) Specific Rotation : Approximately 0.1 g of Vitamin D3 is precisely weighed

and dissolved in ethanol to make 200 mL. Optical rotation of this solution should be
within a range of ＝ +103∼+112°.
(2) Specific Absorbance : Specific absorbance is measured at 265 nm with a solution of
Vitamin D3 in aldehyde free ethanol. It should be ＝ 450∼490.
(3) 7-Dehydrocholesterol : Dissolve 10 mg of Vitamin D3 in 2 mL of 90% ethanol, and
add the solution prepared by dissolving 20 mg of digitonin in 2 mL of 90% ethanol,
and allow to stand for 18 hours. Precipitate should not be formed.
(4) Melting Point : Melting point of Vitamin D3 should be within a range of 84～89℃.
Storage Standards of Vitamin D3
Vitamin D3 should be preserved in a light-shielded hermetic container filled with
nitrogen in a cool place.

1164
 Vitamin E
dl -α-Tocopherol

Chemical Formula: C29H50O2

Molecular Weight: 430.72 INS No.: 307c

Synonyms: Alpha-tocopherol CAS No.: 2074-53-5
Compositional Specifications of Vitamin E
Content Vitamin E should contain not less than 96.0% of Vitamin E (C29H50O2).
Description Vitamin E is yellow to brown, viscous and transparent liquid. It is odorless.
Identification Dissolve 10 mg of Vitamin E in 10 mL of anhydrous ethanol, add 2 mL of
nitric acid, and heat at 75℃ for 15 minutes. The color of the solution becomes red～
orange.
Purity (1) Refractive Index : Refractive Index of Vitamin E should be within a range of
1.503～1.507.
(2) Clarity and Color of Solution : When 0.1 g of Vitamin E is dissolved in 10 mL of
anhydrous alcohol, it should be clear.
(3) Specific Absorbance : Accurately weigh about 10 mg of Vitamin E, and dissolve in
anhydrous alcohol to make exactly 200 mL, and measure the absorbance a cell with 1 cm
thickness at 292 nm. It should be within a range of = 71.0～76.0.
(4) Arsenic : It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(5) Lead : When 5.0 g of Vitamin E is tested by Atomic Absorption Spectrophotometry
or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content should not be more
than 2.0 ppm.
Residue on Ignition When thermogravimetric analysis is done with Vitamin E, the amount
of residue should not be more than 0.1%.
Assay Accurately weigh approximately 50 mg of Vitamin E, dissolve in 100 mL of
sulfuric acid in ethyl alcohol mixture (3→200), add 20 mL of water, and titrate with
0.01 N ceric ammonium sulfate solution while stirring well (indicator : 2 drops of
diphenylamine solution). Perform the procedure in a dark place, and the rate of the
titration is about 25 drops per 10 seconds. Titrate until a blue-purple color of the
solution persists for 10 seconds. Perform a blank test in the same manner, and make
any necessary correction.
1165
1 mL of 0.01 N ceric ammonium sulfate = 2.154 mg of C29H50O2

1166
 Vitamin K1
Phylloquinone
Phytonadione

Chemical Formula: C31H46O2

Molecular Weight: 450.71

Synonyms: Phytonadione CAS No.: 84-80-0

Compositional Specifications of Phylloquinone

Content Phylloquinone should contain within a range of 97.0∼102.0% of phylloquinone
(C31H46O2).
Description Phylloquinone is transparent sticky yellow～orange yellow liquid.
Identification (1) UV absorption spectrum of a solution of Phylloquinone in iso-octane (1
→100,000) should be identical as the same absorption spectrum of a phylloquinone
standard.
(2) Dissolve 50 mg of Phylloquinone in 10 mL of alcohol and add 1 mL of 10%
potassium hydroxide alcoholic solution. It turns blue. When it is set-aside, the color
changes from blue to violet and to brown.
(3) Dissovle 50 mg of Phylloquinone in 10 mL mixture of methyl alcohol·alcohol
(1:1)(Test Solution). 0.75 g of sodium hydrosulfite is dissolved in 2 mL of warm
water When this solution is added to the Test Solution and shaken vigorously, the
yellow color disappears.
Purity (1) Refractive Index : Refractive Index of Phylloquinone should be within a range
of 1.525∼1.529.
(2) Clarity and Color of Solution : When 1.0 g of Phylloquinone is dissolved in 10 mL
of iso-octane, the solution should be clear and yellow.
(3) Absorption Ratio : Absorption (A1, A2, and A3) of iso-octane solution of
Phylloquinone (1→100,000) is measured at 248.5 nm, 253.5 nm, and 269.5 nm,
respectively. A2/A1 and A2/A3 should be within a range of 0.69～0.73 and 0.74～0.78,
respectively. Absorption (A4 and A5) of iso-octane solution of Phylloquinone(1→
100,000) is measured at 284.5 nm and 326.0 nm, respectively. A4/A5 should be within
a range of 0.28～0.34.
(4) Lead : When 5.0 g of Phylloquinone is tested by Atomic Absorption
1167
 Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content
should not be more than 2.0 ppm.
(5) Menadione : To 20 mg of Phylloquinone, add 0.5 mL of mixture of alcohol and
water (1:1) and add 1 drop of 1-phenyl-3-methyl-5-pyrazolon in alcohol and 1 drop
of ammonia water, which is set-aside for 2 hours. The solution should not turn bluish
violet.
Assay 0.1 g of Phylloquinone is precisely weighed and transferred into a 100 mL
volumetric flask and add iso-octane to make 100 mL. Take 10 mL of this solution,
add iso-octane to make 100 mL. Take 10 mL of the resulting solution, add iso-octane
to make 100 mL (Test Solution). Separately, a Standard Solution is prepared using
approximately 0.1 g (precisely weighed) of phylloquinone standard by following the
same procedure as above. Maximum absorption near 248.5 nm is measured for Test
Solution and Standard Solution with 1 cm path length using iso-octane as a reference.
The content is calculated by the following equation.
AU WS
Content (%) = × × 100
AS WU
Au ： Absorption of Test Solution
As ： Absorption of Standard Solution
Ws ： Weight of standard material (g)
Wu ： Weight of sample (g)
Storage Standards of Phylloquinone
Phylloquinone should be preserved in a sealed, Light-resistant container.

1168
 Xanthan Gum

INS No.: 415

CAS No.: 11138-66-2

Definition Xanthan Gum is a high-molecular-weight polysaccharide gum produced by a

pure culture fermentation of a carbohydrates with Xanthomonas Campestris, purified by
isopropyl alcohol, dried, and milled. Xanthan Gum is a mixture of sodium, potassium,
and calcium salt of glucose, mannose, and gluconates.
Compositional Specifications of Xanthan Gum
Content Xanthan Gum (on the dried basis) contains 4.2∼5.0% of carbon dioxide (CO2),
which corresponds to 91.0∼108.0% of xanthan gum.
Description Xanthan Gum is white to pale brown powder and has a little odor.
Identification 300 mL of water, previously heated to 80℃, is transferred into a 500 mL
beaker and a stir with a mechanical stirrer. 1.5 g of Xanthan Gum and 1.5 g of locust
bean gum are added and dissolved, which is then kept at 60℃ or higher for 30
minutes. When it allowed to cool at room temperature for at least 2 hours, a rubbery
gel is formed. When locust bean gum is not mixed, a rubbery gel does not form.
Purity (1) Arsenic : It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(2) Lead : When 5.0 g of Xanthan Gum is tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content
should not be more than 2.0 ppm.
(3) Isopropyl Alcohol : 4 g of Xanthan Gum is accurately weighed and transferred into
a 300 mL round bottom flask, 200 mL of water is added, boiling chips and 1 mL of
silicone resin are added and mixed well. Fractionating column is connected to this, 4
mL of internal standard solution is accurately taken and added to a 100 mL flask.
With adjusting the heat so that foam does not enter the column, distill the solution at
the rate of 2~3 mL per 1 minute until the milky liquid becomes about 90 mL, and
water is added to make 100 mL, test solution. However, tert-butyl alcohol (1→1,000)
is used as internal standard solution. Separately, 0.5 g of isopropyl alcohol is
precisely weighed and water is added to make 500 mL, again 2 mL of this solution
and 4 mL of internal standard solution is taken, water is added to make 100 mL,
standard solution. 2μl of test solution and standard solution is taken respectively, and
injected to gas chromatograph as the following operation condition. Then, ratio of
isopropyl alcohol peak against tert-butyl alcohol peak in test solution and standard
solution, QT and QS, is calculated separately, and the content of isopropyl alcohol is
calculated by following formula, the content should not be more than 0.05%.
Contentalcohol(%)
Isopropyl of Weightalcohol(g)
of isopropyl × QT × 2×100 ×100
1169
 = Weight of sample(g) QS 500×100
QT : Ratio of isopropyl alcohol peak against tert-butyl alcohol peak in Test Solution
QS : Ratio of isopropyl alcohol peak against tert-butyl alcohol peak in standard solution
Operation Conditions
Column : PLOT Q or equivalent
Detector : Hydrogen Flame Ionization Detector (FID)
Temperature at injection port : 200℃
Column Temperature : 120℃
Detector temperature : 300℃
Carrier gas : Nitrogen or Helium
(4) Viscosity : Viscosity of 1% aqueous solution of Xanthan Gum is measured by 2.
Rotational Type Viscosity Measurement in Viscosity Measurement. It should be 600
cps or higher.
(5) Nitrogen : When Xanthan Gum is tested by nitrogen determination method, the amount
should not be more than 1.5%.
(6) Total Viable Aerobic Count : When Xanthan Gum is tested by Microbe Test
Methods for Total Viable Aerobic Count (Number of General Germs) in General Test
Method in 「Standards and Specifications for Foods」, it should not be more than
5,000 cfu per 1 g.
(7) E. Coli : When Xanthan Gum is tested by Microbe Test Methods for E. Coli in
General Test Method 「Standards and Specifications for Foods」, it should be
negative (-).
(8) Salmonella : When Xanthan Gum is tested by Microbe Test Methods for Salmonella
in General Test Method 「Standards and Specifications for Foods」, it should be
negative (-).
(9) Number of Fungi : When Xanthan Gum is tested by Microbe Test Methods for
Number of Fungi in General Test Method in 「Standards and Specifications for Food
s」, it should not be more than 500 per 1 g.
Loss on Drying When Xanthan Gum is dried for 2 hours and 30 minutes at 105℃, the
weight loss should not be more than 15%.
Residue on Ignition When Residue on Ignition is done with accurately weighed 3 g of
Xanthan Gum, the amount of residue should be between 6.5 and 16.0%.
Pyrubic Acid (1) Test Solution : 600 mg of Xanthan Gum is precisely weighed and
dissolved in water to make 100 mL. 10 mL of this solution is placed in a 250 mL
round bottom flask and 20 mL of 1N hydrochloric acid is added. Then record the
whole weight and a reflux condenser is attached. It is then refluxed for 3 hours and
cooled. The reflux condenser is removed and water is added to make up for any
weight loss during refluxing. 2 mL of this solution is transferred into a 30 mL
separatory funnel containing 1 mL solution of 1 g 2,4-dinitrophenylhydrazine prepared
in 200 mL 2 N hydrochloric acid with a stop cock. It is then mixed and allowed to
stand at room temperature for 5 minutes. The mixture is then extracted with 5 mL
1170
 of ethylacetate and aqueous phase is discarded. The hydrazone is extracted three 5
mL portions of sodium carbonate TS. The total volume of the resultant extract is
brought up to 50 mL with sodium carbonate TS.
(2) Standard Solution : 45 mg of pyrubic acid is precisely weighed into 500 mL
volumetric flask, diluted with water and mix. 10 mL of this solution is taken and
continued as directed under sample solution.
(3) Test Method : Absorbance of Test Solution and Standard Solution are determined at
375 nm using sodium carbonate TS as a blank. Absorbance value of Test Solution
should be greater than that of Standard Solution (not less than 1.5%).
Assay
Experimental apparatus is as follows.

(1) Experimental Apparatus

A : Soda Water Tower (filled with calcium hydroxide granules)
B : Mercury Valve
C : Side Arm
D : 100 mL Reaction flask with a long neck
E : Heating Device
F : Reflux Condenser
G : 400 mL connection tube which is connected to the reaction tube
H : Stopcock
I : Trap (It is filled with approximately 25 g of 20 mesh zinc or tin and connected to
an absorption tower, J).
J : Absorption Tower (It is consisted of a connection tube and a trap. There is a glass
filter in-between.)
1171
K : Erlenmeyer Flask (Connected to the bottom of the absorption tower)
L : Soda water tower
M : Three way stopcock
N : All the ground joints of capillary controller or needle valve (which controls air flow
or vacuum) are 35/25.
(2) Experimental Method : Approximately 1.2 g of Xanthan Gum is precisely weighed
and transferred into flask (D), where 25 mL of 0.1 N hydrochloric acid and boiling
stones are added. The reaction flask is then connected (Vaseline is applied to the
ground joints. Mercury in the inner tube of the mercury valve (B) is raised by
approximately 5 cm and check for air leakage. The stop cock (M) is closed to hold
the pressure. If the mercury does not drop in 1～2 minutes, there is no leak.). It is
then heated for 2 minutes and cooled for 15 minutes in a flowing air (CO2-free) at a
flow rate of 3,000∼6,000 mL per hour. 23 mL of hydrochloric acid is added through
the connection tube (G) and the absorption tower (J) is disconnected. 25 mL of 0.25
N sodium hydroxide solution and 5 drops of butyl alcohol are added to the absorption
tower, which is then re-connected. Then air (CO2-free) flow at a rate of 2,000 mL
per hour. Hydrochloric acid in the connection tube (G) is transferred to the flask (D),
which is then heated for 2 hours and cooled. Using compressed air, sodium
hydroxide solution in the absorption tower is transferred into the flask (K). The
absorption tower is washed three 15 mL portion of water using compressed air. The
flask is separated from the apparatus. 10 mL of 10% barium chloride solution is
added to the flask, which is then plugged and mixed for approximately 2 minutes. It
is then titrated with 0.1 N hydrochloric acid using phenolphthalein TS as an indicator.
Separately, a blank test is carried out by the same procedure.
0.25 N sodium hydroxide solution 1 mL ＝ 5.5 mg CO2
5.5 × (B-S)
CO2(%) ＝ × 100
2.5 × Weight of the sample(mg)

B : Consumed amount of 0.1 N hydrochloric acid for blank test (mL)

S : Consumed amount of 0.1 N hydrochloric acid for the test (mL)

1172
 Xylanase
Definition Xylanase is an enzyme obtained from cultures of Thermomyces lanuginosus and
Aspergillus oryzae inserted the genes of xylanase. Dilutant or stabilizer can be added for
the purpose of activity adjustment and quality preservation.
Compositional Specifications of Xylanase
Description Xylanase is white ~ dark brown power, granular, pasty substances or
colorless ~ dark brown liquid.
Identification When Xylanase is proceeded as directed under Activity Test, it should have
the activity as Xylanase.
Purity (1) Arsenic ： It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(2) Lead ： When 5.0 g of Xylanase is tested by Atomic Absorption Spectrophotometry
or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content should not be more
than 5.0 ppm
(3) Coliform Group ： Xylanase proceed as directed under Microbe Test Methods in
Coliform Group in General Test Methods in 「Standards and Specifications for Food
s」. It should contain not more than 30 colonies per 1 g of this product.
(4) Salmonella : When Xylanase is tested by Microbe Test Methods for Salmonella in
General Test Method 「Standards and Specifications for Foods」, it should be
negative (-).
(5) E. Coli : When 25 g of Xylanase is tested by Microbe Test Methods for E. Coli in
General Test Method 「Standards and Specifications for Foods」, it should be
negative (-).
Activity Test (activity)
Analysis principle : Azo-wheat arabinoxylan substrate(colored with remazol) by treating
with Xylanase for 15 minutes at pH 6.0, temperature 50℃ is precipitated with ethanol
and activity test is based on colorimetry of the blue color of decomposition supernatant
of remazol colored substrate which is not precipitated.
Preparation of Test Solution : When Xylanase is weighted, use water or phosphate
buffer solution so that 1 mL of the final diluent solution contains 0.4~1.4 Xylanase unit.
Procedure : Take precisely 0.1 mL of test solution into tube, keep it at 50±0.5℃ for 10
minutes. Then add precisely 0.9 mL of substrate solution and immediately shake it to
mix. Keep this solution at 50±0.5℃ precisely for 30 minutes. Then add 5 mL of stop
solution and immediately shake it to mix. Keep this solution for 30 minutes and
centrifuge it by 4,000rpm for 15 minutes. Measure absorbance of supernatant at
wavelength 585nm within 20 minutes.
Preparation of standard curve : Weigh precisely Xylanase(Novozyme co. or its
equivalent) which contains 4000 Xylanase unit. After dissolving it in 0.1M phosphate
buffer solution(pH 6.0), make to volume to 200 mL. Take precisely 2 mL, 3 mL, 4 mL,
5 mL, 6 mL and 7 mL of this solution. Then add 0.1M phosphate buffer solution(pH
6.0) to each solution to make to 100 mL. This solution is used as each standard
solution. 1 mL of each solution contains Xylanase of 0.4, 0.6, 0.8, 1.2 and 1.4 unit.
1173
 Take precisely 0.1 mL of standard solution into each tube, keep it at 50±0.5℃ for 10
minutes. Then add precisely 0.9 mL of substrate solution and immediately shake it to
mix. Keep this solution at 50±0.5℃ precisely for 30 minutes. Then add 5 mL of stop
solution and immediately shake it to mix. Keep this solution for 30 minutes and
centrifuge it by 4,000rpm for 15 minutes. Measure absorbance of supernatant at
wavelength 585nm within 20 minutes. The factor of enzyme(unit/mL) is plotted along
the X axis and the absorbance is plotted along the Y axis. Prepare standard curve of
enzyme activity.
Activity of an enzyme is calculated by the following equation.
X (units/g)
ylanase =
C
W

C : Activity of test solution is obtained from standard curve

W : Weight of sample in 1 mL of test solution(g)
Reagent
Substrate solution : Weigh precisely 0.5 g of azo-wheat arabinoxylan(Megazyme co. or
its equivalent) and dissolve it in 0.1M phosphate buffer solution(pH 6.0). Add 0.1M
phosphate buffer solution(pH 6.0) to make to 100mL.
Stop solution : Add 99.9% ethanol to 6.65 mL of 2N hydrochloric acid to make the total
volume to 1,000 mL.
Phosphate buffer solution(pH 6.0) : Weigh 60.5 g of sodium phosphate,
monobasic(Na2H2PO4 H2O) and 10.945 g of sodium phosphate,dibasic(Na2HPO4 H2O) and
⦁ ⦁

dissolve them in 400 mL of water. Add 2 mL of 4N sodium hydroxide solution and

then add water to make to 500 mL. After taking 200 mL of this solution, add 1,600 mL
of water to mix. Adjust pH to 6.0 with 4N sodium hydroxide solution or 2N
hydrochloric acid and add water to make to 2,000 mL.
Storage Standard of Xylanase
Xylanase should be stored in a hermetic container in a cold dark place.

1174
 Xylitol
1,2,3,4,5 - Pentahydroxypentane

Chemical Formula: C5H12O5

Molecular Weight: 152.15 INS No.: 967

Synonyms: 1,2,3,4,5-Pentahydroxypentane CAS No.: 87-99-0

Compositional Specifications of Xylitol

Content Xylitol, when calculated on the dried basis, should contain within a range of
98.5∼101.0% xylitol (C5H12O5).
Description Xylitol is white crystal or crystalline powder.
Identification (1) When Xylitol proceed as directed under (1) potassium bromide disk
method in Infrared Spectrophotometry, the maximum absorption should appear at the
same wavelength as a xylitol standard. If there is any difference, both the sample and
the standard are dissolved in an appropriate solvent. After solvent is dried, the same
procedure is repeated with the solid material.
(2) 5 g of Xylitol is dissolved in 10 mL mixture of hydrochloric acid : formalin (1:1).
The resulting solution is reacted for 2 hours at 50℃. Then 25 mL of ethyl alcohol is
added. The resulting precipitates are filtered. These are recrystallized twice with
ethyl alcohol. After drying for 2 hours at 105℃, melting point is measured. It should
be within a range of 195∼201℃.
Purity (1) Arsenic ： It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(2) Lead : When 5.0 g of Xylitol is tested by Atomic Absorption Spectrophotometry or
Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content should not be more
than 1.0 ppm.
(3) Nickel : When 5.0 g of Xylitol is tested by Atomic Absorption Spectrophotometry or
Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content should not be more
than 2.0 ppm.
(4) Other Polyvalence Alcohol : L-arabinitol, galactitol, and mannitol, and sorbitol are
quantitatively analyzed following the same procedure as in xylitol. The content of the
total polyvalence alcohols is calculated using the following equation and should not be
more than 2%.

1175
 W S × RU
Content(%) = 100 ×
W U × RS

Ws : Weight of all polyvalence alcohol standards (mg)

Wu : Weight of sample (mg) (as dehydrated form)
Ru : Peak area ratio of polyvalence alcohol derivatives vs. erythritol derivatives in
test solution.
Rs : Peak area ratio of polyvalence alcohol derivatives vs. erythritol derivatives in
standard solution.
(5) Reduced Sugars : Approximately 500 mg of Xylitol is precisely weighed into a 10
mL Erlenmeyer flask with 2 mL of water. Use this solution as the test Solution.
Separately, 2 mL of glucose solution (0.5 mg/mL) is added to another Erlenmeyer
flask. 1 mL each of Fehling solution A and B is added to each Erlenmeyer flask,
respectively. Both solution are boiled and then cooled. Test Solution should be less
turbid than glucose solution, also should show reddish brown precipitates (Not more
than 0.2%).
Water Content Water content of Xylitol is determined by water determination
(Karl-Fisher Titration) and should not be more than 0.5%.
Residue on Ignition When thermogravimetric analysis is done with precisely weighed 10
g of Xylitol, the amount of residue should not be more than 0.1%.
Assay 5 g of Xylitol, precisely weighed, dissolve in water to make 100 mL (Test A
Solution). Separately, 4.9 g of xylitol standard and 25 mg each of L-arabinitol,
galactitol, mannitol and sorbitol, accurately weighed, transfer into a 100 mL volumetric
flask, and add water to make 100 mL. Respectively (Standard A Solution). 1 mL each
of Test A Solution and Standard A Solution transfer into a round bottom flask,
respectively. 1 mL of internal standard solution (500 mg of erythritol is dissolved in
25 mL of water) added to each flask. Each is then evaporated to dryness using a
vacuum evaporator at 60℃ in a water bath. 1 mL of pyridine and 1 mL of anhydrous
acetic acid are added to each flask, where a reflux condenser is attached. Both are
completely acetylated by boiling. Use this solution as the test solution and standard
solution. 1 μl of each Test Solution and Standard Solution is injected into gas
chromatography. The content of xylitol (%) is calculated from the following equation.
Content of xylitol(%) 100 × Ws × Ru
= Wu × Rs
Ws : Weight of xylitol standard (mg)
Wu : Weight of sample (mg) (as dehydrated form)
Ru : Peak area ratio of xylitol derivatives vs. erythritol derivatives in test solution.
Rs : Peak area ratio of xylitol derivatives vs. erythritol derivatives in standard
solution.
Operation Conditions
-Column : A stainless tube with inner diameter of 2 mm and length of 2 m
1176
-Column Filler : Chromosorb W HP coated with 3% OV 225
-Detector : (Hydrogen) Flame Ionization Detector (FID)
-Temperature at injection hole : 250℃
-Column Temperature : 200℃
-Detector Temperature : 250℃
-Carrier gas and flow rate : Nitrogen, 30 mL per minute
-Retention time : Retention time for internal standard (erythritol) is 3.3 minutes.
Relative retention time (1 minute for erythritol) for each component is
approximately 2.77 for L-arabinitol, 3.9 for xylitol, 6.96 for galactitol, 7.63 for
mannitol, and 8.43 for sorbitol.

1177
 D-Xylose

Chemical Formula: C5H10O5

Molecular Weight: 150.13 CAS No.: 58-86-6

Definition D-Xylose is obtained from hydrolysis with hot acidic aqueous solution or
enzyme and separation of wood, cotton (Gossypium arboretum LINNE) of malvaceae,
rice (Oryza sativa LINNE) of gramineae, sugar cane (Saccharum officinarum LINNE) of
gramineae, corn (Zea Mays LINNE) of gramineae or stems, fruits, or skins of other
same genus. Its major component is D-xylose.
Compositional Specifications of D-Xylose
Content After drying, D-Xylose contains 98.0～101.0% D-xylose (C5H10O5).
Description D-Xylose is colorless～white crystallite or white crystalline powder. It has
odorless and sweet taste.
Identification (1) When 2∼3 drops of aqueous solution (1→20) of D-Xylose are added to
5 mL of hot Fehling solution, red precipitate is formed.
(2) 1 g of xylose is dissolved in 25 mL of water (freshly boiled and cooled). This
solution is dextrorotatory.
(3) 1 g of D-Xylose is dissolved in 3 mL of water by heating, where 3 mL mixture of
4 mL alcoholic solution of diphenyl amine (1→40) and 10 mL of diluted hydrochloric
acid. When the solution is heated for 5 minutes in a water bath, it showed yellow～
pale orange color.
(4) 0.5 g of D-Xylose is dissolved in 20 mL of water, where 30 mL of phenylhydrazine
hydrochloride-sodium acetate solution and 10 mL of diluted acetic acid are added.
When the solution is heated in a water bath, precipitate is formed, which are
recrystallized in water. The melting point of the precipitate is 160∼163℃.
Purity (1) Clarity of Solution : When 4 g of D-Xylose is dissolved in 200 mL of water,
it is colorless and almost clear.
(2) Free acid : 1 g of D-Xylose is dissolved in 10 mL of water (freshly boiled and
cooled). When 1 drop of phenolphthalein solution and 1 drop of 0.2 N sodium
hydroxide solution are added to this solution, it should turn red.
(3) Sulfates : 1 g of D-Xylose is dissolved in 30 mL of water. When this Solution is
tested for sulfates, the content should not be more than the amount that corresponds
to 0.1 mL of 0.01 N sulfuric acid.
(4) Arsenic : It should be no more than 1.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(5) Lead : When 5.0 g of D-Xylose is tested by Atomic Absorption Spectrophotometry
1178
 or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content should not be more
than 2.0 ppm.
(6) Other Saccharides : 0.5 g of D-Xylose is dissolved in water to make 1,000 mL. 0.1
mL of D-Xylose is tested by Method 1 in Filter Paper Chromatography. When the top
of developing solution reaches 15cm from the Test Solution spot, stop. The position
of the solution is marked. After the solvent is blow dried, it is developed with the
same solvent until the front reaches the same point. This operation is repeated one
more time. Colorizing solution is sprayed on to the filter paper, which is dried for 5
minutes at 100∼125℃. There should be only one red spot under natural light.
Reference solution is not used.
∘Developing Solution : a mixture of n-butyl alcohol, pyridine, and water (6:4:3)
∘Colorizing Solution : 0.93 g of aniline and 1.66g of anhydrous phthalic acid are dissolved
in 100 mL of n-butyl alcohol (saturated with water).
∘Filter Paper : No.2 filter paper for chromatography is used.
Loss on Drying When 3 g of D-Xylose is dried for 3 hours at 105℃, the weight loss
should not be more than 1%.
Residue on Ignition When Residue on Ignition is done with precisely weighed 5 g of
D-Xylose, the amount of residue should not be more than 0.05%.
Assay Approximately 1 g of dried D-Xylose is precisely weighed and dissolved in water
to make 500 mL. 10 mL of this solution is added into an iodine bottle, where precisely
50 mL of sodium meta periodate solution (1→400) is added and 1 mL of sulfuric acid
is added. It is then heated for 15 minutes in a water bath. After cooling, 2.5 g of
potassium iodide is added and well mixed by shaking. After allowing to stand for 15
minutes in a cold dark place, it is titrated with 0.1 N sodium thiosulfate solution
(indicator : starch solution). Separately, a blank test is carried out.
0.1 N sodium thiosulfate solution 1 mL ＝ 1.877 mg C5H10O5

1179
 Yeast
Definition Liquid yeast is obtained by separating and washing cultures food-grade yeasts
belonging to the Saccharomyces sp in the edible carbohydrate medium. Raw yeast is
obtained by dehydrating and forming. Dry yeast(active) or sterilized dry yeast(inactive)
is obtained by removing water from raw yeast. Small amount of emulsifier can be
added.
Compositional Specifications of Yeast
A. Dry Yeast
Description Dry Yeast is yellow～brown granule, powder, or solid with a characteristic scent.
Purity (1) Activation(In the case, this applies to active dry yeast only) : When 5 g of
Dry Yeast is added to 50 mL of １％ sugar solution and heated to 35∼40℃, gas
should be generated within 2 hours and 30 minutes.
(2) Arsenic ： It should be no more than 5.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(3) Lead : When 5.0 g of Dry Yeast is tested by Atomic Absorption Spectrophotometry
or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content should not be more
than 1.0 ppm.
(4) Total Viable Aerobic Count(In the case, this applies to inactive dry yeast only) :
When Guar Gum is tested by Microbe Test Methods for Total Viable Aerobic Count
(Number of General Germs) in General Test Method in 「Standards and Specifications
for Foods」, it should not be more than 7,500 per 1 g
(5) Coliform Group(In the case, this applies to inactive dry yeast only) ： When yeast
proceed as directed under Microbe Test Methods for Coliform Group in General Test
Methods in 「Standards and Specifications for Foods」, it should contain not more
than 10 colonies per 1 g of this product.
(6) Salmonella(In the case, this applies to inactive dry yeast only) : When Locust Bean
Gum is tested by Microbe Test Methods for Salmonella in General Test Method
「Standards and Specifications for Foods」, it should be negative (-).
B. Raw Yeast
Description Raw Yeast is milky white～yellowish brown solid with a characteristic scent.
Purity (1) Activation : When 5 g of Raw Yeast is added to 50 mL of 10％ sugar solution
and heated to 30∼35℃, gas should be generated within 1 hour.
(2) Arsenic : It should be no more than 3.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(3) Lead : When 5.0 g of Raw Yeast is tested by Atomic Absorption Spectrophotometry
or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content should not be more
than 1.0 ppm.
C. Liquid Yeast
Description Liquid Yeast is white～yellowish brown liquid with a characteristic scent.
Purity (1) Activation : When 5 g of Liquid Yeast is added to 50 mL of 10% sugar
solution and heated to 30∼35℃, gas should be generated within 1 hour.
(2) Arsenic : It should be no more than 1.5 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
1180
 (3) Lead : When 5.0 g of Liquid Yeast is tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content
should not be more than 1.0 ppm.
Storage Standards of Yeast
Dry yeast should be stored in light-resistant and shielded container.

1181
 Yeast Extract
Definition Yeast Extract consists of yeast cell components such as amino acids,
peptides, carbohydrates, and water soluble salts. It is generated from hydrolysis of
polypeptide bonds by yeast that is present in edible yeast, or added edible yeast.
Salts can be added during manufacturing process
Compositional Specifications of Yeast Extract
Content When Yeast Extract is Yeast Extract, it should contain not less than 42% of
protein.
Description Yeast Extract is liquid, powder, granule, or paste.
Purity Place liquid or paste sample in a container, that is previously weighted. Evaporate
the sample in the water bath to dry. For powder and granule, it is dried at 105℃
until the weight becomes constant. Following each content specification is based on a
dried form.
(1) Lead : When 5.0 g of Yeast Extract is tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content
should not be more than 2.0 ppm.
(2) Sodium : Approximately 1.5 g (converted to a dried form) is precisely weighted into
a porcelain crucible and reduced to ash for 2～4 hours at 246∼260℃. Dissolve the
ash with 5 mL of 20% hydrochloric acid. If the residue is needed to completely
dissolve, heat the solution and filter through an acid washed filter paper into a 500
mL flask. Filter paper is washed with warm water to the flask. The volume of the
filtrate is brought up to 500 mL with water. 1 mL of this solution is diluted to 100
mL with water (Test Solution). Separately, 0.5 mL of undiluted sodium standard
solution is diluted to 100 mL with water (Sodium Standard Solution). Sodium Standard
Solution and Test Solution is analyzed with atomic absorption spectrophotometer and
the content of sodium in the sample is obtained not more than 20.0%.
(3) Potassium : Approximately 1 g (converted to a dried form) is precisely weighted
into a porcelain crucible and reduced to ash for 2～4 hours at 246∼260℃. Dissolve
the ash with 5 mL of 20% hydrochloric acid. If the residue is needed to completely
dissolve, heat the solution and filter paper into a 500 mL flask. Filter paper is
washed with warm water to the flask. The volume of the filtrate is brought up to
500 mL with water. 0.8 mL of this solution is diluted to 100 mL with water (Test
Solution). Potassium Standard Solution and Test Solution is analyzed with atomic
absorption spectrophotometer and the content of potassium in the sample is obtained
not more than 13.0%.
∘Potassium Standard Solution : Potassium chloride is dried for 2 hours at 130℃. 9.534
g of dried potassium chloride is precisely weighted and dissolved in water (total
volume = 1,000 mL). 0.4 mL of this solution is further diluted to 1,000mL (Standard
Solution). 1 mL of this solution contains 2 μg of K.
(4) Mercury : When Yeast extract is tested according to Mercury Test, its content
should not be more than 3.0 ppm.
1182
(5) Insoluble substances : Approximately 5 g (converted into a dried form) is precisely
weighted into a 250 mL flask with a stopper, where 75 mL of water is added. It is
covered with a watch glass and gently boiled for 2 minutes. The content is filtered
through a porcelain type glass filter (previously weighted), which is then dried for 1
hour at 105℃. It is cooled in a desiccator and weighted. The content of insoluble
substances should not be more than 2%.
(6) Ratio of Nitrogen in α-Amino Acid over Total Nitrogen ： 7∼25 g (converted into
a dried form without sodium) is precisely weighted into a 500 mL volumetric flask
using 50 mL of warm water (repeated several times). The total volume is brought up
to 500 mL with water (Test Solution). 20 mL of Test Solution is neutralized with 0.2
N barium hydroxide solution or 0.2 N sodium hydroxide solution (indicator :
phenolphthalein TS). Add 10 mL of freshly prepared phenolphthalein : formalin
solution to this solution, which is titrated with 0.2 N barium hydroxide solution until
it turns clear red. A small excess amount of 0.2 N barium hydroxide solution is
precisely added to the resulting solution, which is back titrated with 0.2 N
hydrochloric acid. Separately, a blank test is carried out by following the same
procedure with 20 mL of water. The content of α-amino nitrogen is calculated by the
following equation. The ratio (AN/TN) of α-amino nitrogen (AN) over total nitrogen
(TN) should be 15～55%.
1 mL of 0.2 N barium hydroxide solution ＝ 2.8 mg of α-amino nitrogen
∘Phenolphthalein Formalin Solution ： 50 mL of 40% formalin containing 1 mL of 0.05%
phenolphthalein TS in 50% alcohol (neutralized to pH 7.0 with 0.2 N barium hydroxide
solution or 0.2 N sodium hydroxide solution).
(7) Glutamic Acid : 5 mg (converted to a dried form) of Yeast Extract is precisely
weighted and added with 0.2 N sodium citrate buffer solution (pH 2.2, total volume 5
mL) (Test Solution). If there is any insoluble residue, it is filtered or centrifuged and
the supernatant is used. 2 mL each of Test Solution and glutamic acid standard
solution is analyzed by ion exchange amino acid analyzer. From the obtained
chromatogram, the concentration of glutamic acid (CA, mg/mL) in Test Solution is
obtained. The content of glutamic acid in sample is obtained by the following
equation and it should not be more than 12.0%. The content of glutamic acid in total
amino acid should not be more than 28.0%.
Content of glutamic acid(%) ＝ weightC of×the5 ×sample(mg)
A 100

A A × Cs
CA (mg/mL) ＝
As

AA：Peak area of glutamic acid in Test Solution

1183
As：Peak area of glutamic acid in glutamic acid Standard Solution
Cs：Concentration of glutamic acid Standard Solution (mg/mL)
Glutamic acid content
in total amino acid (%) =
content of glutamic acid(%)
× 100
6.25NT

NT：Total nitrogen content (%)

-Ion Exchange Amino Acid Analyzer : A sulfonated polystyrene column is attached.
sample is eluted by reacting with ninhydrine solution. Absorptions at 440 nm and 570
nm are automatically measured by spectrophotometer.
∘Glutamic Acid standard solution : 1,250 ± 2 mg of glutamic acid is precisely weighted
into a 500 mL volumetric flask, and made 250 mL
with water. dissolve undissolved amino acid by
adding 5 mL of hydrochloric acid. The total volume
is brought up to 500 mL with water. Exactly 1 mL
of this solution is mixed with 4 mL of sodium citrate
buffer solution (pH 2.2) (total volume = 5 mL). 2 mL
of this solution contains 1.0 mg of glutamic acid.
∘0.2 N Sodium Citrate Buffer Solution (pH 2.2) : Dissolve weighted 10.52 g of sodium
citrate in 150 mL of water. pH of this solution
is adjusted to pH 2.2, which is then diluted to
200 mL with water.
∘Ninhydrine standard solution : 18 g of ninhydrin and 0.7 g of hydrindantin is pricesely
weighed and dissolved in 675 mL of dimethyl
sulfoxide. This solution is added to 225 mL of acetic
lithium standard solution (pH 5.2).
(8) Total viable aerobic count : Yeast Extract (converted to a dried form) is tested by
Total viable aerobic count in Microbiological Methods in General Testing Methods in
「Standards and Specifications for Foods」. It should not be more than 50,000 per 1
g.
(9) Fungi : Yeast Extract (converted to a dried form) is tested by Fungi in
Microbiological Methods in General Testing Methods in 「Standards and Specifications
for Foods」. It should not be more than 50 per 1 g.
(10) Coliform Group ： Yeast Extract (converted to a dried form) is tested by
Microbiological Methods for Coliform Group in General Testing Methods in
「Standards and Specifications for Foods」. It should not be more than 10 per 1 g.
(11) Salmonella ： Yeast Extract (converted to a dried form) is tested by
Microbiological Methods for Salmonella in General Testing Methods in 「Standards
and Specifications for Foods」. It should be negative (-).
1184
Assay Approximately 0.3 g (converted to a dried form, nitrogen excluded) of Yeast Extract
is analyzed by the procedure in nitrogen determination method.
0.1 N sulfuric acid 1 mL ＝ 1.401 mg N

1185
 Yucca Extract
Definition Yucca Extract is obtained by extracting roots of yucca (Yucca brevifolia
Engelm, Yucca schidigera) of agavaceae with water. Dilutant or other food additives can
be added for the purpose of quality preservation.
Compositional Specifications of Yucca Extract
Description Yucca Extract is a dark brown liquid with a characteristic scent.
Identification 1 g of Yucca Extract is dissolved in water (total volume = 1,000 mL). This
solution has a maximum absorption band at 250～300 nm.
Purity (1) Acidity： pH of Yucca Extract should be 3.8∼4.0.
(2) Coliform Group ： When Yucca Extract proceed as directed under Microbiological
Methods for Coliform Group in General Testing Methods in 「Standards and
Specifications for Foods」, it should be negative (-).
(3) Formability ： 1.9 L of water is added to a 3.8ℓ glass bottle (16.3cm diameter),
where 6 drops of 85% phosphoric acid are added. Add 60 mL of aqueous solution of
Yucca Extract (1.1→1,000), the bottle is shaken vigorously 100 times. The height of
foam layer should be maintained at 1.2 cm or more for 30 seconds.
(4) Arsenic : It should be no more than 2.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(5) Lead : When 5.0 g of Yucca Extract is tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content
should not be more than 2.0 ppm.
Ash 5 g of Yucca Extract is precisely weighted and tested by Ash and Acid-Insoluble
Ash Limit, the amount of ash should not be more than 10%.
Residue on Ignition When Yucca Extract is tested by Residue on Ignition, its content
should not be more than 5.0%.

1186
 Zinc Gluconate
[CH2OH(CHOH)4COO]2Zn

Chemical Formula: C12H22O14Zn‧nH2O(n＝0～

3)
Molecular Weight: 455.69 CAS No.: 4468-02-4

Compositional Specifications of Zinc Gluconate

Content If Zinc Gluconate, when calculated on the dried basis(anhydrose), it should
contain 97.0～102.0% of zinc gluconate (C12H22O14Zn).
Description Zinc Gluconate occurs as white crystalline powder or granules.
Identification (1) Zinc Gluconate solution (1→10) responds to the test for Zinc Salt in
Identification.
(2) Proceed as directed under Identification (2) for 「Sodium Gluconate」.
Purity (1) Cadmium : When 5.0 g of Zinc Gluconate is tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content
should not be more than 2.0 ppm.
(2) Chloride : When 0.3 g of Zinc Gluconate is tested by Chloride Limit Test, the
content should not be more than the amount that corresponds to 0.42 mL of 0.01 N
hydrochloric acid.
(3) Sulfate : When 0.49 g of Zinc Gluconate is tested by Sulfate Limit Test, the content
should not be more than the amount that corresponds to 0.5 mL of 0.01 N sulfuric
acid.
(4) Lead : When 5.0 g of Manganese Gluconate is tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content
should not be more than 2.0 ppm.
(5) Arsenic : It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(6) Reducing Matter : Approximately 1 g of Zinc Gluconate is weighed and transferred
into a 250 mL Erlenmeyer flask. 10 mL of water is added to dissolve the solid and
25 mL of alkaline copper citrate solution. A small beaker is placed on top of the
flask, which is heated for precisely 5 minutes. It is then rapidly cooled to room
temperature. To this solution, 25 mL of diluted acetic acid (1→10), 10 mL of 0.1 N
iodine solution, 10 mL of dilute hydrochloric acid, and 3 mL of starch solution are
added. The resulting solution is titrated with 0.1 N sodium thiosulfate solution until
the blue color disappears. The content of reduced materials should not be more than
1.0%.

1187
 Content of Reducing =Matter(as glucose)(%) (V1N1 - V2N2) × 27
× 100
weight of the sample(mg)

V1 : Consumed amount of 0.1 N iodine solution (mL)

N1 : Normality of 0.1 N iodine solution
V2 : Consumed amount of 0.1 N sodium thiosulfate solution (mL)
N2 : Normality of 0.1 N sodium thiosulfate solution
27 : Experimental corresponding amount for D-glucose
Water Content Water content of Zinc Gluconate as determined by water content
determination method (Karl-Fischer Method) should not be more than 11.6%.
Assay Accurately weigh about 0.7 g of Zinc Gluconate, add 100 mL of water, dissolve
while warming if necessary, add 5 mL of ammonia-ammonium chloride solution, and
0.1 mL of Eriochrom black solution are added to the solution, which is titrated with
0.05 M EDTA solution until the color becomes blue.
1 mL of 0.05 M EDTA = 22.784 mg of C12H22O14Zn

1188
 Zinc Oxide
Chemical Formula: ZnO

Molecular Weight: 81.38 CAS No.: 1314-13-2

Compositional Specifications of Zinc Oxide

Content After ignition, Zinc Oxide should contain not less than 99.0% of zinc oxide (ZnO).
Description Zinc Oxide is fine, white, and scentless powder.
Identification (1) When Zinc Oxide is strongly heated, it becomes to yellow. After cooling,
the color disappears.
(2) The solution, which Zinc Oxide dissolve in 3 N hydrochloric acid, responds to the
test for Zinc Salt in Identification.
Purity (1) Alkalinity : 2 g of Zinc Oxide is dispersed in 20 mL of water and boiled for 1
minute, which is then filtered. When 0.1 mL of phenolphthalein indicator solution is
added, this solution should not become to red.
(2) Lead : Zinc Oxideis tested by purity (2) for 「Sodium Metaphosphate」(not more
than 10 ppm).
(3) Cadmium : Zinc Oxide is tested by purity (3) for 「Sodium Metaphosphate」(not
more than 3.0 ppm).
(4) Substances that do not precipitate by sulfate : Dissolve about 2 g of Zinc Oxide,
accurately weighed, in 20 mL diluted acetic acid (1→4) and add water to make 200
mL. Zinc is completely precipitated by adding ammonium sulfide standard solution and
the precipitates are filtered. First portion of the filtered solution is discarded. 100 mL
from the later portion is then placed on a platinum dish, which was previously heat
treated until the weight doesn't change. A few drops of sulfuric acid are added to
this solution, which is then evaporated to dryness. It is then heat treated carefully at
800 ± 25℃ until sublimes. After the weight becomes constant, the amount of residue
not more than 5 mg.
Loss on Ignition 2 g of Zinc Oxide is precisely weighed and heat treated at 800 ± 25℃
until the weight becomes constant, the weight loss should not be more than 1%.
Assay Dissolve about 1.5 g of Zinc Oxide, previously weighed and heat treated, in 50
mL of 1 N sulfuric acid that contains 2.5 g of ammonium chloride (heat slowly if
necessary). The solution is then titrated with 1 N sodium hydroxide solution (indicator
: methyl orange solution).
1 mL of 1 N Sulfuric Acid ＝ 40.69 mg ZnO

1189
 Zinc Sulfate
Chemical Formula: ZnSO4‧7H2O

Molecular Weight: 287.54 CAS No.: 7446-20-0

Compositional Specifications of Zinc Sulfate
Content Zinc Sulfate, when calculated on the dried basis(anhydrous), should contain not
less than 98.0 % of zinc sulfate(ZnSO4).
Description Zinc Sulfate occurs as colorless needles, granules, or white crystalline
powder. It is odorless.
Identification Zinc Sulfate solution (1→20) responds to the tests for Zinc Salt and Sulfate
in Identification.
Purity (1) Free acid : When add 1 drop of methyl orange solution to Zinc Sulfate
solution (1→20), the color of the solution should not be changed to pink
(2) Alkali Metal and Alkali-Earth Metals : Weigh 2 g of Zinc Sulfate, transfer into a
200 mL flask, dissolve in 150 mL of water, and add ammonium sulfide until the
precipitate is no longer formed. Add water to make 200 mL, and filter through a dry
filter paper. Discard the initial filtrate. take 100 mL of the subsequent filtrate,
evaporate to dryness, ignite to constant weight, and weigh the residue. It is then heat
treated until the weight becomes constant. The content should not be more than
0.5%.
(3) Arsenic : It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(4) Lead : Zinc Sulfat is tested by purity (2) for 「Sodium Metaphosphate」(not more
than 4.0 ppm).
(5) Cadmium : Zinc Sulfate is tested by purity (3) for 「Sodium Metaphosphate」(not
more than 2.0 ppm).
(6) Mercury : When Zinc Sulfate is tested by Mercury Limit Test, its content should
not be more than 5.0 ppm.
Water Content Precisely weigh 0.1 g of Zinc Sulfate. When it is tested by the direct
titration method in water content determination (Karl-Fischer Method), the water
content should not be more than 43.5%.
Assay Accurately weigh about 300 mg of Zinc Sulfate, add 100 mL of water, add 5 mL
of ammonia-ammonium chloride buffer, and titrate with 0.05 M EDTA (indicator : 0.1 mL
of Eriochrome black T solution) until the color of the solution changes to deep blue.
1 mL of 0.05 M EDTA = 8.073 mg of ZnSO4․7H2O

1190
 Natural Flavoring Substances
Definition These materials are obtained from the following origins by processes such as
extraction, distillation, microbiological or enzymatic processes. They are used to add or
enhance aroma. There are refined oils, extracts, and Oleoresin (spice oleoresins whose
specification is separately set is excluded). However, microorganisms used for
microbiological process shall be listed on [Annex 1] and [Annex 2] of「Food Code」,
and enzymes used for enzymatic process shall be food additives regulated on this
「Food Additives Code」. Moreover, these materials include two or more simple
combinations of the following flavors in a way that does not cause any chemical
changes. And water, spirits(ethyl alcohol), vegetable oil can be added for preserving
quality.
(1) When natural flavoring substances are prepared or processed, appropriate solvents
(ethyl alcohol, hexane, isopropyl alcohol) are used individually or together, and they
are obtained by extraction from each raw material. Used solvents should be removed
upon specification of residual solvents.
Compositional Specifications of natural flavoring substances
Purity Residual Solvents (limited to form of oleoresin) : When natural flavoring
substances is tested by Purity (5) for Paprika Extract Pigments,the content of residual
solvents should be,
Isopropyl alcohol Not more than 50ppm
Hexane Not more than 25ppm

1191
No. General Name Origin Material Name
1 Alfalfa Medicago sativa L.
Almond, bitter(free Prunus
2 from
(Bitterprussicacid)
almond) armeniacaamygdalus persicaPrunus
L., PrunusBatsch. (L.) Batsch.
3 Ambergris Physeter macrocephalus L.
4 Ambrette(seed) Hibiscus moschatus Moench.
5 Amyris(West Indian Amyris balsamifera L.
sandalwood)
6 Angelica root Angelica archangelica L.
7 Angelica seed Angelica archangelica L.

8 Angelica stem Angelica archangelica L.

9 Angola weed Roccella fuciformis Ach
10 Angostura (Cusparia Galipea officinalis Hancock.
bark)
11 Anise Pimpinella anisum L.
12 Apricot kernel (Persic Prunus armeniaca L.
oil)

13 Arnica flowers Arnica montana

A. sororia Greene,L., orA.A.fulgens Pursh,
cordifolia
Hooker.
14 Artemisia (Wormwood) Artemisia spp.
15 Artichoke leaves Cynara scolymus L.
16 Asafetida Ferula assa-foetida L. and related spp.
of Ferula.

1192
No. General Name Origin Name
Balm(Lemon
17 Melissa) balm, Melissa officinalis L.
18 Balsam of Peru Myroxylon pereirae Klotzsch.
19 Basil Ocimum basilicum L.
20 Bay leaves Laurus nobilis L.
21 Bay(Myrcia oil) Pimenta racemosa (Mill.) J. W. Moore.
Styrax benzoin Dryander,
paralleloneurus Pekins, S. S.
22 Benzoin resin tonkinensis
orof the spp.(Pierre)
othergenus the .Craib
ofStyrax SectionexAnthostyrax
Hartwich,

23 Bergamot(Bergamot
orange) Citrus
Wright aurantium
et Arn. L. subsp. bergamia
24 Blackberry bark Rubus, Section Eubatus.
25 Bois de rose Aniba rosaeodora Ducke.
26 Boldus(Boldo) leaves Peumus boldus Mol.
27 Boronia flowers Boronia megastigma Nees.
28 Bryonia root Bryonia alba L., B. diocia Jacq
29 Buchu leaves
Barosma betulina Bartl. Et Wendl., B.
crenulata(L.) Hook. Or B. serratifolia
Willd.
30 Buckbean leaves Menyanthes trifoliata L.
31 Cacao Theobroma cacao L.
32 Cajeput Melaleuca
Melaleuca leucadendron
spp. L., other
33 Camomile(Chamomile)
flowers, Hungarian Matricaria chamomilla L.
34 Camomile(Chamomile)
flowers, Anthemis nobilis L.
English Roman or
35 Camphor tree Cinnamomum
Eberm
camphora (L.) Nees et

1193
No. General Name Origin Name
36 Cananga Cananga odorata Hook. F. and Thoms.
37 Capsicum Capsicum
annuum L.frutescens L. and Capsicum
38 Caraway Carum carvi L.
39 Cardamomseed Elettaria cardamomum Maton.
(Cardamon)
40 Carrot Daucus carota L.
41 Cascara sagrada Rhamnus purshiana DC.
42 Cascarilla bark Croton eluteria Benn.
43 Cassia bark, Chinese Cinnamomum cassia Blume.
44 Cassia
Bataviabark, Padang or Cinnamomum burmannii Blume.
45 Cassia bark, Saigon Cinnamomum loureirii Nees.
46 Cassie flowers Acacia farnesiana(L.) Willd.
47 Castoreum Castor fiber L., C. canadensis Kuhl.
48 Catechu, black Acacia catechu Willd.
49 Cedar,
white(Aborvitae), Thuja occidentalis L.
leaves, and twigs
50 Celery seed Apium graveolens L.
51 Centuary Centaurium umbellatum Gilib
52 Cherry pits Prunus avium L. or P. cerasus L.
53 Cherry laurel leaves Prunus laurocerasus L.
54 Cherry, wild, bark Prunus serotina Ehrh.
55 Chervil Anthriscus cerefolium (L.) Hoffm.
56 Chest nut leaves Castanea dentata (Marsh.) Borkh
57 Chicory Cichorium intybus L.

1194
No. General Name Origin Name
58 Chirata Swertia chirata Buch-Ham
59 Cinchona, red, bark Cinchona succirubra Pav. Or its hybrids
60 Cinchona, yellow, bark
Cinchona
Wedd.,
ledgeriana Moens, C. calisaya
spp. Of Cinchona. these with other
or hybrids of
61 Cinnamon bark, Ceylon Cinnamomum zeylanicum Nees.
Cinnamon
62 Chinese bark, Cinnamomum cassia Blume.
63 Cinnamon bark, Saigon Cinnamomum loureirii Nees.
64 Cinnamon leaf, Ceylon Cinnamomum zeylanicum Nees.
65 Cinnamon leaf, Chinese Cinnamomym cassia Blume.
66 Cinnamon leaf, Saigon Cinnamomum loureirii Nees.
67 Citronella Cymbopogon nardus Rendle.
68 Citrus peels Citrus spp.
69 Civet(Zibeth, Zibet, Civet cats: Viverra civetta Schreber,
Zibetum) Viverra zibetha Schreber.
70 Clary(Clary sage) Salvia sclarea L.
71 Clover Trifolium spp.
72 Coca(decocainized) Erythroxylum
of Erythroxylumcoca
. Lam. and other spp.
73 Coffee Coffea spp.
74 Cognac oil, white and Ethyl oenanthata, so called.
green
75 Cola nut(Cola nut) Cola acuminata Schott and Endl., and
other spp. of Cola.
76 Copaiba South American spp.of Copaifera L.
77 Coriander Coriandrum sativum L.
78 Cork, oak Quercus suber L., Q.occidentalis F. Gay,
Q.acutissima, Q.mongolica, Q.serrata

1195
No. General Name Origin Name
79 Costmary Chrysanthemum balsamita L.
80 Costus root Saussurea lappa Clarke.
81 Cumin(Cummin) Cuminum cyminum L.
Curacao
(Orange, orange
82 peel Citrus aurantium L.
bitter peel)
Currant,
83 and leavesblack, buds Ribes nigrum L.
84 Cusparia bark Galipea officinalis Hancock.
85 Damiana leaves Turnera diffusa Willd.
86 Dandelion Taraxacum officinale Weber and T.
laevigatum DC.
87 Dandelion root Taraxacum officinale Weber and T.
laevigatum DC.
88 Davana Artemisia pallens Wall.
Anethum
graveolenssowa Roxb., (Pucedanum
89 Dill, Indian graveolens L.) et Hook., Anethum
Benth
90 Dittany(Fraxinella) Dictamnus albus L.
roots
91 Dittany of Crete Origanum dictamnus L.
92 Dog grass(Quackgrass, Agropyron repens(L.) Beauv.
Triticum)
93 Dragon's blood Daemonorops spp.
(Dracorubin)
94 Elder tree leaves Sambucus nigra L.
95 Elder flowers Sambucus canadensis L. and S. nigra I.
96 Elecampane
and roots rhizome Inula helenium L.
97 Elemi Canarium
Miq.
commune L. or C. luzonicum
98 Erigeron Erigeron canadensis L.

1196
No. General Name Origin Name
Estragole(Estragon,
99 Esdragol,
Tarragon) Esdragon,
Artemisia dracunculus L.
Eucalyptus
100 leaves globulus Eucalyptus globulus Labill.
101 Fennel, sweet Foeniculum vulgare Mill.
102 Fenugreek Trigonella foenum graecum L.
103 Fir("pine")needles and Abies sibiricaMasters
sachalinesis Ledeb.,orA.A.alba Mill., A.
mayriana
twigs Miyabe et Kudo.
104 Fir, balsam, needles Abies balsamea(L.) Mill.
and twigs
105 Galanga(Galangal) Alpinia officinarum Hance.
106 Galanga, greater Alpinia galanga Willd.
107 Galbanum Ferula galbaniflua Boiss. Et Buhse and
other Ferula spp.
108 Gambir(Catechu, Pale) Uncaria gambir Roxb.
109 Genet flowers Spartium junceum L.
110 Gentian, stemLess Gentiana acaulis L.
111 Gentian
roots rhizome or Gentiana lutea L.
112 Geranium Pelargonium spp.
113 Geranium, East Indian Cymbopogon martini Stapf.
114 Geranium, rose Pelargonium graveolens L'Her.
115 Germander, chamaedrys Teucrium chamaedrys L.
116 Germander, golden Teucrium polium L.
117 Ginger Zingiber officinale Rosc.
118 Grapefruit Citrus paradisi Macf.
119 Guaiac Guaiacum officinale Lor.
Bulnesia sarmienti L., G. sanctum L.,

1197
No. General Name Origin Name
120 Guarana Paullinia cupana HBK.
121 Guava Psidium spp.
122 Haw, black, bark Viburnum dilatatum Thunb.
123 HemLock
twigs needles 및
Tsuga canadensis
heterophylla (Raf.) (L.)
SargCarr., T.
124 Hickory bark Carya spp.
125 Horehound(Hoarhound) Marrubium vulgare L.
126 Hops Humulus lupulus L.
127 Horsemint Monarda punctata L.
128 Hyacinth flowers Hyacinthus orientalis L.
129 Hyssop Hyssopus officinalis L.
130 Iceland moss Cetraria islandica Ach
131 Immortelle Helichrysum angustifolium DC.
132 Imperatoria Peucedanum ostruthium (L.)
Koch(Imperatoria ostruthium L.).)
133 Jasmine Jasminum
of Jasminum.
officinale L. and other spp.
134 Juniper(berries) Juniperus communis L.
135 Labdanum Cistrus spp.
136 Laurel berries Laurus nobilis L.
137 Laurel leaves Laurel spp.
138 Lavender Lavandula officinalis Chaix.
139 Lavender, spike Lavandula latifolia Vill.
140 Lavandin Hybrids between Lavandula officinalis
Chaix and Lavandula latifolia Vill.
141 Lemon Citrus limon(L.) Burm. f.
142 Lemon grass Cymbopogon
Cymbopogon citratus
lexuosusDC. and
Stapf.
143 Lemon peel Citrus limon (L.) Burm. f.
144 Lime Citrus aurantifolia Swingle.
145 Linaloe wood Bursera
and otherdelpechiana
Bursera spp.Poiss.
146 Linden flowers Tilia spp.
No. General Name Origin Name
147 Linden leaves Tilia spp.
148 Locust bean(Carob bean) Ceratonia siliqua L.
149 Lovage Levisticum officinale Koch
1198
150 Lungmoss Sticta pulmonacea Ach.
(Lungwort)
151 Lupulin Humulus lupulus L.
152 Mace Myristica fragrans Houtt.
153 Maidenhair fern Adiantum capillus-veneris L.
154 Mandarin Citrus reticulata Blanco.
155 Maple, mountain Acer spicatum Lam.
156 Marjoram, sweet Majorana hortensis Moench.
157 Mate Ilex paraguariensis St. Hil.
158 Menthol Mentha spp.
159 Menthyl acetate Mentha spp.
160 Mimosa(Black wattle) Acacia decurrens Willd. var.
flowers dealbata
161 Molasses(extract) Saccarum officinarum L.
162 Mullein flowers Verbascum phlomoides L.
or V. thapsiforme Schrad.
163 Musk(Tonquin musk) Musk deer, Moschus moschiferus L.

1199
No. General Name Origin Name
164 Mustard Brassica spp.
165 Myrrh
Commiphora
abyssinica molmol Engl.,
(Berg)
C. or other
Engl.,
Commiphora spp.
166 Myrtle leaves Myrtus communis L.
167 Naringin Citrus paradisi Macf.
168 Neroli, bigarade Citrus aurantium L.
169 Nutmeg Myristica fragrans Houtt.
170 Olibanu Boswellia
Boswellia spp.carteri Birdw., other
171 Onion Allium cepa L.
172 Opopanax(Bisabolmyrrh) Opopanax
opopanax) ofchironium
CommiphoraKocherythraea
(true
Engl. var. Glabrescens
173 Orange, bitter, flowers Citrus aurantium L.
174 Orange, bitter, peel Citrus aurantium L.
175 Orange, sweet Citrus sinensis (L.) Osbeck.
176 Orange, sweet, flowers Citrus sinensis (L.) Osbeck.
177 Orange, sweet, peel Citrus sinensis (L.) Osbeck.
178 Orange leaf Citrus sinensis (L.) Osbeck.
179 Origanum Origanum spp.
180 Orris root Iris germanica
florentina L.(including its variety
Dykes) and I. pallida Lam.

1200
No. General Name Origin Name
181 Palmarosa Cymbopogon martini Stapf.
182 Paprika Capsicum annuum L.
183 Parsley Petroselinum crispum(Mill.) Mansf.
184 Passion flower Passiflora incarnata L.
185 Patchouly Pogostemoncablin
heyneanus Benth. Benth. And P.
186 Peach leaves Prunus persica (L.) Batsch
187 Peach
oil) kernel (Persic Prunus persica Sieb. Et Zucc.
188 Peanut stearine Arachis hypogaea L.
189 Pennyroyal, American Hedeoma pulegioides(L.) Pers
190 Pennyroyal, European Mentha pulegium L.
191 Pepper, black Piper nigrum L.
192 Pepper, white Piper nigrum L.
193 Peppermint Mentha piperita L.
194 Peruvian balsam Myroxylon pereirae klotzsch.
195 Petitgrain Citrus aurantium L.
196 Petitgrain lemon Citrus limon(L.) Burm .f.
197 Petitgrain
tangerine mandarin or Citrus reticulata Blanco.
198 Pimenta(Allspice) Pimenta officinalis Lindl.
199 Pimenta leaf Pimenta officinalis Lindl.
200 Pine, dwarf, needles,
and twigs Pinus mugoZenari
(Haenke) Turra var. pumilio

1201
No. General Name Origin Name
201 Pine, Scotch, needles, Pinus sylvestris L.
and twigs
202 Pine, white, bark Pinus strobus L.
203 Pine, white oil Pinus
spp. palustris Mill., and other Pinus
204 Pipsissewa leaves Chimaphila umbellata Nutt.
205 Pomegranate Punica granatum L.
206 Poplar buds Populus balsamifera L.(P.tacamahacca
Mill.), P. candicans Ait., or P. nigra L.
Xanthoxylum
Americanum (or Zanthoxylum)
207 Prickly ash bark clavaherculis L. Or Xanthoxylum
Mill.
208 Quassia Picrasma excelsaL. (Sw.) Planch, or
Quassia amara
209 Quebracho bark Aspidosperma quebracho-blanco
Schlecht, (Quebrachia lorentzii (Griseb))
210 Quillaia (Soapbark) Quillaja saponaria Mol
211 Quince seed Cydonia oblonga Miller.
212 Red saunders (Red
sandalwood) Pterocarpus santalinus L.
213 Rhatany root Krameria triandra Ruiz et Pav. Or K.
argentea Mart.
214 Rhubarb, garden root Rheum rhaponticum L.
Rhubarb root Rheum
or otherofficinale Baill., R.R. palmatum
spp.(excepting L.,
rhaponticum
215 L.) or hybrids of Rheum grown in
China.
216 Rose absolute Rosa alba L.,Mill.,RosaRosacentifolia
damascena gallica L.,L., Rosa
and
vars. of these spp.
Rose Rosa alba L.,Mill.,RosaRosacentifolia
gallica L.,L., Rosa
217 attar of(ottoroses)
of roses, damascena
vars. of these spp.
and

1202
No. General Name Origin Name
218 Rose buds
Rosa alba L.,Mill.,RosaRosacentifolia
damascena gallica L.,L., Rosa
and
vars. of these spp.
219 Rose flowers
Rosa alba L.,Mill.,RosaRosacentifolia
damascena gallica L.,L., Rosa
and
vars. of these spp.
220 Rose fruits(hips) Rosa alba L.,Mill.,RosaRosacentifolia
damascena gallica L.,L., Rosa
and
vars. of these spp.
221 Rose geranium Pelargonium graveolens L'Her.
222 Rose leaves Rosa spp.
223 Rosemary Rosmarinus officinalis L.
224 Saffron Crocus sativus L.
225 Sage Salvia officinalis L.
226 Sage, Greek Salvia triloba L.
227 Sage, Spanish Salvia lavandulifolia Vahl.
228 St. John's loaf bread Ceratonia siliqua L.
229 St. Johnswort leaves, Hypericum perforatum L.
flowers, and caulis
230 Sandalwood,
white(yellow, or East Santalum album L.
Indian)
231 Sandarac Tetraclinis articulata(Vahl.), Mast
Smilax
(Mexican
aristolochiaefolia
sarsaparilla),
Mill.,
S. regelii Killip
232 Sarsaparilla etfebrifuga Kunth (Ecuadorean S.
Morton(Honduras sarsaparilla),
sarsaparilla), or undetermined Smilax
spp.(Ecuadorian
sarsaparilla). or Central Americal

1203
No. General Name Origin Name
233 Sassafras leaves Sassafras albidum (Nutt.) Nees
234 Savory, summer Satureia hortensis L.
235 Savory, winter Satureia Montana L.
236 Schinus molle Schinus molle L.
237 Senna, Alexandria Cassia acutifolia Delile
238 Simaruba bark Simaruba amara Aubl
239 Sloe berries (Blackthorn Prunus spinosa L.
berries)
240 Snakeroot, Canadian
(Wild ginger) Asarum canadense L.
241 Spearmint Mentha spicata L.
242 Spike lavender Lavandula latifolia Vill.
243 Spruce needles and
twigs
Picea
marianaglauca (Moench) Voss or P.
(Mill.) BSP.
244 Storax(Styrax) Liquidambar
styraciflua L. orientalis Mill. or L.
245 Tamarind Tamarindus indica L.
246 Tangerine Citrus reticulata Blanco.
247 Tansy Tanacetum vulgare L.
248 Tea Thea sinensis L.
249 Thistle,
thistle) blessed(Holy Cnicus benedictus L.
250 Thyme Thymus vulgaris L., Thymus zygis var.
gracilis Boiss.
251 Thyme, white Thymus vulgaris L., Thymus zygis
gracilis Boiss.
252 Thyme, wild or creeping Thymus serpyllum L.

1204
No. General Name Origin Name
253 Tuberose Polianthes tuberosa L.
254 Tolu Myroxylon balsamum (L.) Harms
255 Turmeric Curcuma longa L.
Valerian
256 roots rhizome and Valeriana officinalis L.
257 Vanilla Vanilla
tahitensisplanifolia andr. or Vanilla
. J. W. Moore.
258 Veronica Veronica officinalis L.
259 Vervain, European Verbena officinalis L.
260 Vetiver Vetiveria zizanioides Stapf.
261 Violet, Swiss Viola calcarata L.
262 Violet, flowers Viola odorata L.
263 Violet, leaves Viola odorata L.
264 Violet, leaves absolute Viola odorata L.
265 Walnut husks (hulls),
leaves and green nuts
Juglans nigra L. or J. regia L.
266 Wild cherry bark Prunus serotina Ehrh.
267 Woodruff, sweet Asperula odorata L.
268 Yucca, Joshua tree Youcca brevifolia Engelm
269 Ylang ylang Cananga odorata Hook. F. and Thoms.
270 Yucca, Mohave Yucca schidigera
Mohavensis Sarg)Roezl ex Ortgies (Y.
271 Zedoary bark Curcuma zedoaria Rosc.
272 Mastic Pistacia lentiscus L.
273 Para cress Spilanthesacmella L.
Other natural flavoring substances
manufacturing/processing raw food: flavorings
materials obtained
that areby
274 appropriate
Common for ‘1. Food
Standards and Ingredient Standards’
Specifications for Generalin Foods’
‘Chapter in2.
「Food Code」.

1205
 Synthetic Flavoring Substances
Definition There are synthetic flavoring substances for flavorings as follows. However, this item includes two or more simple
combinations of the following flavors in a way that does not cause any chemical changes. Water, spirits(ethyl alcohol), propylene
glycol, triacetin, glycerin can be added for dilution, dissolution, dispersion, etc.

Order General Name Synonyms

Ethylidine diethyl acetal; acetaldehyde diethyl acetal; diethyl acetal; 1,1- Diethoxyethane; Ethylidine diethyl
A001 Acetal ether; 1,1-Diethoxyethane

A002 Acetaldehyde Acetic aldehyde; Ethanal; Ethyl aldehyde

A003 Acetaldehyde butyl phenethyl acetal 2-Butoxy-2-phenylethoxy-ethane; 1-Butoxy-1-(2-phenylethoxy)ethane

A004 Acetaldehyde diisoamyl acetal Butane, 1,1'-[ethylidenebis(oxy)]bis[3-methyl]-, 3-Methyl-1-[1-(3-methyl-butoxy)- ethoxy]-butane

Ethyl cis-3-hexenyl acetal; cis-1-(ethoxyethoxy)-3-hexene; 1-Ethoxy-1-(cis-3- hexenyloxy)ethane, Leaf acetal;

A005 Acetaldehyde ethyl cis-3-hexenyl acetal Leaf alcohol ethyl acetal; Acetaldehyde ethyl (Z)-3-hexenyl acetal; 1- Ethoxy-1-(3-hexenyloxy)ethane;
Acetaldehyde ethyl 3-hexenyl acetal

Benzene, 2-(1-propoxyethoxy)ethyl; Acetal R; pepital; 1-Phenethoxy-1- propexy-ethane; Propyl phenethyl

A006 Acetaldehyde phenethyl propyl acetal acetal; 2-(1-Propoxyethoxy)ethyl]benzene

A007 Acetamide Acetic acid amide; Acetimidic acid; Ethanamide; Ethanamidic acid; Methanecarboxamide

Methyl 4-methoxyphenyl ketone; 4-Acetylanisole; p-Acetyl anisole; p-Methoxy- acetophenone; Navatone;

A008 Acetanisole
1-(4-Methoxyphenyl)ethanone; 4-Methoxyacetophenone

Acetyl methyl carbinol; 2,3-Butanolone; Dimethylketol; 3-Hydroxy-2-butanone; γ-hydroxy-β-oxobutane; 3-

A009 Acetoin
Hydroxybutan-2-one; Acetoin

Acetylbenzol; Phenyl methyl ketone; Benzoylmethide; Acetyl benzene; Hypnone; Methyl phenyl ketone;
A010 Acetophenone* 1-Phenylethanone

1206
Order General Name Synonyms
1-Methyl-2-oxopropyl acetate; sec-Butan-3-onyl acetate; Acetoin acetate; acetyl methyl carbinyl acetate;
A011 2-Acetoxy-3-butanone 2-Butanon-3-yl acetate; 2-Acetoxy-3-butanone

(2RS,5SR,6SR)-2,6,10,10-Tetramethyl-1-oxaspiro[4,5]dec-6-yl acetate;
A012 6-Acetoxydihydrotheaspirane
2,6,10,10-Tetramethyl-1-oxaspiro(4.5)dec-6-yl acetate

4-(p-Hydroxyphenyl)-2-butanone acetate; 4-(3-Oxobutyl)phenylacetate; p-(2-Acetylethyl)phenylacetate; 4-(4-

A013 4-(p-Acetoxyphenyl)-2-butanone
Acetoxyphenyl)butan-2-one

1-Methyl-2-acetylpyrrole; methyl 1-methylpyrrol-2-yl ketone; 1-methylpyrrol-2-yl methyl ketone;

A014 2-Acetyl-1-methylpyrrole 2-acetyl-n-methyl pyrrol

A015 2-Acetyl-1-pyrroline

A016 3-Acetyl-2,5-dimethylfuran 2,5-Dimethyl-3-acetyl furan

A017 4-Acetyl-2,5-dimethylfuran-3(2H)-one 4-Acetyl-2,5-dimethyl-3(2H)-furanone

A019 4-Acetyl-2-methylpyrimidine Ethanone, 1-(2-methyl-4-pyrimidinyl)-

A020 2-Acetyl-2-thiazoline 2-Acetyl-4,5-dihydrothiazole; acetylthiazoline-2; Acetyl thiazoline-2; 2-Acetyl-4,5-dihydrothiazole

3-Acetyl-2,5-dimethylpyrazine; 2-Acetyl-3,5-dimethylpyrazine and 3-acetyl-2,5- dimethylpyrazine;

A021 2-Acetyl-3,(5 or 6)-dimethylpyrazine
3-Acetyl-2,5-dimethylpyrazine and 3-acetyl-2,6-dimethylpyrazine mixture

A022 2-Acetyl-3,5-dimethylfuran 1-(3,5-Dimethyl-2-furanyl)ethanol; 5-Dimethyl-2-furyl methyl ketone

A023 2-Acetyl-3-ethylpyrazine 2-Acetyl-3-ethyl-1,4-diazine; 3-Ethyl-2-pyrazinyl methyl ketone; 2-Ethyl-3-pyrazinyl methyl ketone

Ethanone, 1-(3-Methylpyrazinyl)-; 1-(3-Methylpyrazinyl)ethan-1-one; 2-Methyl-3-acetylpyrazine;

A024 2-Acetyl-3-methylpyrazine 3-Acetyl-2-methylpyrazine; Ketone, methyl 3-methylpyrazinyl; 2-Acetyl-3-methyl-1,4-diazine

Ethanone, 1-(5-Methyl-2-furanyl)-; 1-(5-Methyl-2-furyl)ethanone; Methyl 5-methyl-2-furyl ketone;

A025 2-Acetyl-5-methylfuran 1-(3-Methyl-2-furyl)ethanone
Celestolide; Crysolide; Ethanone, 1-[6-1,1-Dimethylethyl)-2,3-dihydro-1,1-dimethyl- 1H-indane;
A026 4-Acetyl-6-tert-butyl-1,1-dimethylindan 4-Acetyl-6-(1,1-dimethylethyl)-1,1-dimethylindane; 4- Acetyl-6-t- butyl-1,1-dimethylindane; Celestolide;
4-Acetyl-1,1-dimethyl-6-tert-butylindane

1207
Order General Name Synonyms

A027 3-(Acetylmercapto)hexyl acetate 3-Acethylthiohexyl acetate; 3-Acetylthiohexyl ethanoate

A028 2-Acetylpyrazine Acetylpyrazine; Methylpyrazinyl ketone; 2-Acetylpyrazine
A029 acetylpyridine 2-Acetylpyridine; Methyl-2-pyridyl ketone; 2-Acetopyridine
Methyl pyridyl ketone; Methyl β-pyridyl ketone; 1-(3-Pyridinyl)ethanone; β-Acetylpyridine; Methyl-3-pyridyl
A030 3-Acetylpyridine
ketone

2-Thiazolyl methyl ketone; Methyl-2-thiazoly ketone; 5-Acetyl thiazole; methyl-5- thiazoly ketone;
A031 2-Acetylthiazole 1-(Thiazol-2-yl)ethan-1-one; Ethanone, 1-(2-thiazolyl)-; 2-Thiazolyl methyl ketone

2-Carboxyglutaconic acid; 1,2,3-Propenetricarboxylic acid; Achilleic acid; Citridic acid; equisetic acid;
A032 Aconitic acid 1-Propene-1,2,3-tricarboxylic acid; Prop-1-ene-1,2,3-tricarboxylic acid; Aconitic acid

A033 Adenosine monophosphate Adenosine 5 -monophosphate sodium salt; ; Mono- or Disodium adenylate

Ethyl methylphenylglycidate; Ethyl α,β-epoxy-β-methyl-hydrocinnamate; Ethyl α,β epoxy-β-methylphenyl

A034 Aldehyde C16 propionate; Ethyl 2,3-epoxy-3-phenyl-butanoate; 3-Methyl-3-phenyl glycidic acid ethyl ester; Ethyl
2,3-epoxy-3-methyl-3- phenylpropionate; Ethyl 2,3-epoxy-3-phenylbutyrate; Ethyl 3-methyl-3-phenylglycidate

A035 Allyl 10-undecenoate 2-Propenyl 10-undecenoate; Allyl hendecenoate; Allyl undecylenate; allyl undecylenoate; Allyl 10-undecylenate

2-Propenyl furan-2-ethylbutanoate; 2-Propenyl 2-ethylbutyrate; Allyl 2-ethylbutanoate; 2-Propenyl

A036 Allyl 2-ethylbutyrate
2-ethylbutanoate

Allyl furan-2-carboxylate; Allyl pyromucate; 2-Furancarboxylic acid; 2-Propenyl ester; 2-Propenyl 2-furoate;
A037 Allyl 2-furoate 2-Propenyl furan-2-carboxylate

Allyl ionone; Allyl cyclocitryllideneacetone; Butenyl α-cyclocitrylidenemethyl ketone; α-Cyclocitrylidenemethyl

A038 Allyl α-ionone butenyl ketone; 1-(2,6,6-Trimethyl-2-cyclohexen-1- yl)-1,6-heptadiene-3-one; α-Allylionone

1208
Order General Name Synonyms
2-Propenyl anthranilate; 2-Propenyl 2-aminobenzoate; Allyl 2-aminobenzoate; Allyl ο-aminobenzoate; Vinyl
A039 Allyl anthranilate carbinyl anthranilate

Butenoic acid, 2-propenylester; 2-Propen-1-yl butenoate, 2- Propenyl butyrate; Allyl butanoate;

A040 Allyl butyrate
Allyl-n-butyrate; Vinyl carbinyl butyrate

Vinyl carbinyl cinnamate; Cinnamic acid, allyl ester; 2-propen-1-yl 3-phenyl-2- propenoate; Allyl
A041 Allyl cinnamate 3-phenylpropenoate; Allyl β-phenylacrylate; propenyl cinnamate; 2-Prophenyl 3-phenyl-2-propenoate;
Allyl-β-phenylacrylate; Propenyl cinnamate

A042 Allyl crotonate 2-Butenoic acid, 2-propenyl ester; Crotonic acid, allyl ester

A043 Allyl cyclohexaneacetate Allyl cyclohexylacetate; 2-Propenyl cyclohexaneacetate; 2-Propen-1-yl cyclohexaneacetate

Allyl 4-cyclohexylbutyrate; 2-Propen-1-yl cyclohexanebutyrate; Allyl hexahydrophenylbutyrate; Allyl

A044 Allyl cyclohexanebutyrate
cyclohexyl-n-butyrate, 2-propenyl 4-cyclohexylbutyrate

Allyl 6-cyclohexanehexanoate; 2-Propen-1-yl cyclohexanecaproate; allyl hexahydrophenylhexanoate, 2-propenyl

A045 Allyl cyclohexanehexanoate 6-cyclohexanehexanoate; Allyl cyclohexylcaproate; Allyl cyclohexylcaproate; Allyl 3-cyclohexylhexanoate; Allyl
cyclohexanecaproate

Allyl cyclohexylpropionate; Allyl 3-cyclohexylpropionate; Allyl β-cyclohexylpropionate; 2-propen-1-yl

A046 Allyl cyclohexanepropionate* cyclohexanepropionate; Allyl hexahydrophenylpropionate

Allyl 5-cyclohexylpentanoate; Allyl cyclohexanepentanoate; 2-Propen-1-yl cyclohexanevalerate; 2-Propen-1-yl

A047 Allyl cyclohexanevalerate cyclohexanepentanoate; Allyl hexahydrophenylvalerate; Allyl cyclohexylvalerate; 2-Propenyl
5-cyclohexanepentanoate

A048 Allyl disulfide Diallyl disulfide; 2-Propenyl disulphide

A049 Allyl heptanoate Allyl enanthate; Allyl heptylate; Allyl heptoate; Allyl oenanthate; 2-Propenyl heptanoate

1209
Order General Name Synonyms
A050 Allyl hexanoate* Allyl caproate; Allyl capronate; 2-Propenyl hexanoate

2-Propenyl isothiocyanate; Allyl thiocarbonimide; Allyl isosulfocyanate; Allinat(H&R);

A051 Allyl isothiocyanate* 3-Isothiocyanatopropene;Isothiocyanic acid, allyl ester

Allyl isovalerianate; Allyl isopentanoate; 2-Propenyl 3-methylbutanoate; 2-Propenyl isovalerate; 2-propenyl

A052 Allyl isovalerate isopentanoate; Allyl 3-methylbutanoate

A053 Allyl mercaptan Allyl sulfhydrate; Allylthiol; 2-Propene-1-thiol; 2-Propene-1-thiol

A054 Allyl methyl disulfide Methyl allyl disulfide; Methyl allyl disulphide

A055 Allyl methyl trisulfide Methyl allyl trisulfide; Methyl allyl trisulphide
A056 Allyl nonanoate 2-Propenyl nonanoate; Allyl nonylate; 2-Propenyl pelargonate; Allyl pelargonate
A057 Allyl octanoate 2-Propenyl octylate; 2-Propenyl octanoate; Allyl caprylate; Allyl octylate
A058 Allyl phenoxyacetate 2-propenyl phenoxyacetate; Acetic acid, phenoxy, allyl ester; Acetate PA
A059 Allyl phenylacetate Acetic acid, phenyl, allyl ester, 2-propenyl phenylacetate; Allyl α-toluate
A060 Allyl propionate 2-Propenyl propanoate; Allyl propanoate
Disulfide, 2-propenyl propyl; Disulfide, allyl propyl; 2-Propenyl propyl disulfide, 4,5-dithia-1-octene; Propyl allyl
A061 Allyl propyl disulfide
disulfide

A062 Allyl sorbate 2-Propenyl 2,4-hexadienoate; Allyl-2,4-hexadienoate, 2- propenyl sorbate; Allyl hexa-2,4-dienoate

A063 Allyl sulfide 2-Propenyl sulfide; Diallyl sulfide; Thioallyl ether; 2-Propenyl sulfide,3,3'-thiobispropene; 2-Propenyl sulphide

A064 Allyl thiohexanoate Hexanethioic acid, S-2-propenyl ester

A065 Allyl thiopropionate Thioallyl ester, Propionic acid; Thioacrylic ester, thiopropionic acid, allyl ester

A066 Allyl tiglate Allyl 2-methylcrotonate; Allyl-trans-2,3-dimethylacrylate; Allyl-trans-2-methyl-2-butenoate; 2-propenyl tiglate

A067 Allyl valerate Pentanoic acid, 2-propenyl dster; Valeric acid, allyl ester; Allyl pentanoate

A068 4-Allyl-2,6-dimethoxyphenol 4-Allylsyringol; 6-Methoxy eugenol; Phenol, 2,6-dimethoxy-4-(2-propenyl)-; 4-Methoxyeugenol

1210
Order General Name Synonyms
Phenol, 4-(2-propenyl)-; Chavicol; Phonol, p-allyl; 3-(p-Hydroxyphenyl)-1-propene; p-Hydroxyallylbenzene;
A069 4-Allylphenol
p-Allylphenol

Isopropanolamene; (RS)-1-Amino-2-propanol; DL-1-Amino-2-propanol; α-Aminoisopropyl alcohol;

A070 1-Amino-2-propanol β-Aminoisoproanol; 1-Amino-2-hydroxypropane; 1-Methyl-2-aminoethanol; 2-Hydroxy-1-methylethanol;
2-Hydroxy-1-propylamine threamine

1-Acetyl-2-aminobenzene; o-Acetylaniline; 2-Acethylanaline; 2-Acethylphenylamine; o-Aminoacetophenone;

A071 2-Aminoacetophenone o-Aminoacetylbenzene; 2-Aminophenyl methyl ketone; o-Aminophenyl methyl ketone; Methyl 2-aminophenyl
ketone

Isovaleric acid, ammonium salt; Ammonium isovalerianate; Ammonium 3-methylbutanoate; Butanoic acid,
A072 Ammonium isovalerate 3-methyl-, ammonium salt

A073 Ammonium sulfide Diammonium sulfide; Ammonium monosulfide

Amyl furan-2-carboxylate; Furancarboxylic acid, pentyl ester; Pentyl furan-2-carboxylate; Pentyl-2-furoate;

A074 Amyl 2-furoate 2-Furoic acid; n-Pnetyl furan-2-carboxylate

A075 Amyl alcohol n-Butyl carbinol; 1-Pentanol; pentyl alcohol

A076 N-Amyl butyrate Amyl butanoate; Pentyl butanoate; Pentyl butylrate; Amyl butyrate
A077 N-Amyl formate Amyl formate; Amyl methanoate; n-Pentyl methanoate; Pentyl formate

A078 N-Amyl heptanoate Pentyl heptanoate; Amyl heptanoate; Amyl heptylate; Amyl heptoate; Amyl oenanthate,

A079 N-Amyl hexanoate Amyl caproate; Amyl hexylate; pentyl hexanoate; n-Pentyl hexanoate; Amyl hexanoate; Pentyl caproate

A080 Amyl methyl disulfide Disulfide,methyl pentyl; 1-Methyldisulfanylpentane; 2,3-Dithiaoctane

A081 N-Amyl octanoate Pentyl octylate; Amyl caprylate; Amyl octylate; pentyl octanoate; n-Pentyl octylate; Amyl octanoate

2-Pentyl-5 or 6-keto-1,4-dioxane; 1,4-Dioxan-2-one, 5(or 6)-pentyl-5(or 6)-pentyl-1,4-dioxan-2-one; 5(or

A082 2-Amyl-(5 or 6)-keto-1,4-dioxane 6)-Pentyl-1,4-dioxan-2-one; 5-Pentyl-1,4- dioxan-2-one

1211
Order General Name Synonyms

Buxine; α-Pentyl-β-phenylacrolein; Flomine; Jasmine aldehyde; Floxine; Jasmonal; flosal; Amyl cinnamal; Amyl
A083 α-Amylcinnamaldehyde* cinnamic aldehyde; α-Amyl-β-phenyl-acrolein; 2-Benzylidene heptanal; α-Pentyl-cinnamaldehyde;
α-Amylcinnamaldehyde

α-n-Amylcinnamal, dimethyl acetal; α-Pentylcinnamaldehyde, dimethyl acetal;

α-n-Amyl-β-phenylacroleindimethylacetal; 1,1-Dimethoxy-2-amyl-3-phenyl-2-propene;
A084 α-Amylcinnamaldehyde dimethyl acetal 1,1-Dimethoxy-2-benzylidene-heptane; (2-(Dimethoxylmethyl)-1-heptenyl)benzene, α-amyl-β-phenylacrolein
dimethyl acetal; 1,1-Dimethoxy-2-benzylideneheptane; α-Pentylcinnamaldehyde dimethyl acetal

Ammyl cinnamyl acetate; Acetic acid, α-amylcinnamyl ester; α-n-Amyl-β-phenylacryl acetate; Floxin
A085 α-Amylcinnamyl acetate acetate; α-Pentylcinnamyl acetate; 2-(Phenylmethylene)heptyl acetate

2-Benzylideneheptanol; n-Amyl cinnamic alcohol; 2-Amyl-3-phenyl-2-propen-1-ol;

A086 α-Amylcinnamyl alcohol
2-Benzylidene-heptanol;α-Pentylcinnamyl alcohol; 2-Phenyl-3-phenylprop-2-en-1-ol

α-n-Amyl-β-phenylacryl formate; α-Pentylcinnamyl formate; 2-(Phenylmethylene)heptyl formate;

A087 α-Amylcinnamyl formate α-Amyl-β-phenylacryl formate; α-n-Amyl-phenylacryl formate

α-Amylcinnamyl isovalerianate; α-n-Amyl-β-phenylacryl 3-methylbutanoate; α-n-Amyl-β-phenylacryl

A088 α-Amylcinnamyl isovalerate isovalerate; Floxin isovalerate; α-Pentylcinnamyl isovalerate; 2-(Phenylmethylene)heptyl isovalerate;
α-Amyl-β-phenylacryl isovalerate; α-Amylcinnamyl 3-methylbutyrate; Isovalerate

trans-Methoxy-4(1-propenyl benzene; Anise camphor; 1-Methoxy-4-propenylbenzene; estragole iso; 1-Propene,

1-(4-methoxyphenyl); p-Methoxy-α-phenylpropene; Isoestragole; 1-Methoxy-4-propenyl benzene;
A089 trans-Anethole p-Methoxypropenyl benzene; p-Propenyl anisole; p-Propenylphenyl methyl ether;
4-Methoxy-1-propenylbenzene; p-Methoxy-α-phenylpropene

Benxaldehyde, 2-methoxy; 2-Anisaldehyde; 2-Methoxybenzaldehyde; 2-Methoxybenzenecarboxaldehyde;

A090 O-Anisaldehyde* 2-Methoxyphenylformaldehyde; O-Formylanisole; O-Methoxybenzaldehyde; Salicylaldehyde methyl ether

1212
Order General Name Synonyms
A091 Anisole Phenyl methyl ether; Benzene, methoxy; Methoxybenzene; Methyl phenyl ether

Benzyl alcohol, p-methoxy, acetate; Anisyl alcohol, acetate; 4-Methoxybenzyl acetate; cassi ketone; p-Anisyl
A092 Anisyl acetate acetate; p-Methoxybenzyl acetate; 1-Methoxy-4-acetoxymethylbenzene; Benzenemethanol, 4-methoxy-, acetate

Benzyl alcohol,p-methoxy; Anise alcohol; p-Anisyl alcohol; Anisic alcohol; p-Methoxybenzyl alcohol;
A093 Anisyl alcohol 4-Methoxybenzyl alcohol

Butyric acid, p-methoxybenzyl ester; Butanoic acid, p-methoxybenzyl ester; Benzyl alcohol, p-methoxy,
A094 Anisyl butyrate butyrate; p-Anisyl butyrate; p-Methoxybenzyl butyrate; 4-Methoxybenzyl butanoate; Anisyl butanoate

p-methoxybenzyl alcohol, formate; Anisyl methanoate;4-methoxybenzyl formate; p-Methoxybenzyl methanoate;

A095 Anisyl formate Anisyl alcohol, formate; p-Anisyl formate; p-Methoxybenzyl formate; Benzenemethanol, 4-methoxy-, formate

Anisyl α-toluate; Benzenacetic acid, (4-methoxyphenyl)methyl ester; p-Methoxybenzyl phenylacetate;

A096 Anisyl phenylacetate Phenylacetic aicd p-methoxybenzyl ester; 4-Metoxybenzyl phenylacetate, Anisyl α-toluene

Benzyl alcohol p-methoxy, propionate; Propionic acid, p-methoxybenzyl ester; p-Anisyl propionate;
A097 Anisyl propionate p-Methoxybenzyl propionate; 4-Methoxybenzyl propanoate; Anisyl propanoate; Benzenemethanol; 4-Methoxy-,
propionate

2-Propanone, 1-hydroxy-, acetate; Acetonyl acetate; Acetoxyacetone; Acetoxypropanone; Acetylmethyl acetate;

A098 Acetol acetate O-Acetylacetol; 1-Acetoxy-2-propanone; 1-Acetoxyacetone; 1-Hydroxy-2-propanone acetate; 2-Oxopropyl
acetate; 1-(Acetyloxy)-2-propanone; acetoxy-2-propanone

Propanoic acid, pentyl ester; Propionic acid, pentyl ester; n-Pentyl propionate; Pentyl propanate; Pentyl
A099 Amyl propionate propionate; n-Pentyl propanoate; Amyl propanoate; N-Amyl n-propionate; pentyl propanoate

A100 Amyl isothiocyanate Pentyl isothiocyanate; n-Amyl isothiocyanate; Pentane, 1-isothiocyanato-; 1-Isothiocyanatopentane

1213
Order General Name Synonyms
Ketone, methyl 4-pyridyl; Methyl 4-pyridyl ketone; 4-Pyridyl methyl ketone; Pyridine, 4-acetyl-;
A101 4-Acetylpyridine γ-Acetylpyridine; 1-(4-Pyridinyl)ethanone

A102 Amyl benzoate n-Pentyl benzoate; Pentyl benzoate; Benzoic acid, amyl ester; n-amyl benzoate

Benzoic acid, 2-hydroxy-, pentyl ester; Salicylic acid, pentyl ester; Pentyl salicylate; Amylester kyseliny
A103 Amyl salicylate salicylove; N-Amyl salicylate; Salicylic acid, amyl ester

Valeric acid, pentyl ester; Amyl valerianate; Pentyl pentanoate; Pentyl valerate; 1-Pentyl n-valerate; n-Pentyl
A104 Amyl valerate valerate; Pentyl ester of pentanoic acid; N-Amyl N-valerate

2-Propenoic acid, 3-phenyl-, pentyl ester; Cinnamic acid, pentyl ester;Pentyl cinnamate; Pentyl
A105 Amyl cinnamate (2E)-3-phenyl-2-propenoate; n-amyl cinnamate

A106 Amyl decanoate Pentyl decanoate

A107 Amyl lactate Lactic acid, pentyl ester; Pentyl 2-hydroxypropanoate;Pentyl lactate
1-Propene, 3-(methylthio)-; Methyl allyl sulfide; 3-(Methylthio)propene; 3-(Methylsulfanyl)-1-propene;
A108 Allyl methyl sulfide 3-(methylthio)-1-propene; methyl 2-propenyl sulfide; Methylallyl sulphide;Sulfide, allyl methyl

Butanoic acid, 3-methyl-, pentyl ester; Isovaleric acid, pentyl ester; Pentyl 3-methylbutyrate; 1-Pentyl
A109 Amyl isovalerare isovalerate; Pentyl 3-methylbutanoate; Pentyl isovalerate;N-amyl isovalerate

A110 Allyl propyl sulfide 2-propenyl propyl sulfide; 4-thia-1-heptene

A111 Allyl prop-1-enyl disulfide
A112 Allyl propyl trisulfide Trisulfide, allyl propyl
A113 Acetaldehyde di-cis-3-hexenyl acetal acetaldehyde hexenyl acetal

N-Amyl 2-methyl butyrate; Pentyl 2-methylbutanoate; n-amyl 2-methylbutanoate; pentyl

A114 Amyl 2-methyl butyrate 2-methylbutyrate;Butanoic acid, 2-methyl-, pentyl ester

A115 5-Acetyl-2,3-dihydro-1,4-thiazine acetyl dihydro thiazine

A116 Acetaldehyde 1,3-octanediol acetal
1-Hexyloxy-1-isopentyloxyethane;Acetaldehyde hexyl 3-methylbutyl acetal;hexyl oxy
A117 Acetaldehyde hexyl isoamyl acetal isopentyloxyethane;1-Hexyloxy-1-isopentyloxyethane
3{(4-Amino-2,2-dioxido-1H-2,1,3-benzothiadiazin-5-yl)ox
A118 3-(4-Amino-1H-benzo[c][1,2,6]thiadiazin-5-yloxy)-2,2-dimethyl-N-propylpropanamide-2,2-dioxide
y}-2,2-dimethyl-N-propylpropamide
A119 Acetic acid* Ethanoic acid

1214
Order General Name Synonyms
A120 Acetovanillone
A121 3-(Acetylthio)-hexanal
A122 S-Allyl-L-cysteine (2R)-2-Amino-3-(prop-2-en-1-ylsulfanyl) propanoic acid; (2R)-3-(Allylthio)-2-aminopropanoic acid;
(R)-Allylthio-2-aminopropanoic acid; S-Allylcysteine; (+)-S-Allylcysteine; S-2-Propenylcysteine
gamma-Aminobutanoic acid; gamma-Aminobutryic acid; 3-Carboxypropylamine; 4-Aminobutanoic acid;
A123 4-Aminobutyric acid 4-Aminobutyric acid; GABA
A124 4-Amino-5,6-dimethylthieno[2,3-d]pyrimidin-2(1H)-one
A125 4-Amino-5,6-dimethylthieno[2,3-D]pyrimidin-2(1H)-one
hydrochloride
3-(4-Amino-1H-benzo[c][1,2,6]thiadiazin-5-yloxy-2,2-dimethyl-N-propylpropanamide-2,2-dioxide;
A126 3-[(4-Amino-2,2-dioxido-1H-2,1,3-benzothiadiazin-5-yl)o 3-[(4-Amino-2,2-dioxido-1H-2,1,3-benzothiadiazin-5-yl)oxy]-2,2-dimethyl-N-propyl-propanamide;
xy]-2,2-dimethyl-N-propylpropanamide (1Z)-N-{3-[(4-Imino-2,2-dioxido-3,4-dihydro-1H-2,1,3-benzothiadiazin-5-yl)oxy]-2,2-dimethylpropyl}propanimidic
acid
(3R,3S)-3-[[(4-Amino-2,2-dioxido-1H-2,1,3-benzothiadiazi
A127 n-5-yl)oxy]methyl]-Ncyclopentyl-2-oxo-3-piperidinecarbo (3R,3S)-3-[[(4-Amino-2,2-dioxido-1H-2,1,3-benzothiadiazin-5-yl)oxy]methyl]-N-cyclopentyl-2-oxopiperidine-3-carb
oxamide
xamide
A128 (S)-1-(3-(((4-Amino-2,2-dioxido-1H-benzo[c][1,2,6]thiadia 1-[(3S)-3-[[(4-Amino-2,2-dioxido-1H-2,1,3-benzothiadiazin-5-yl)oxy]methyl]-1-piperidinyl]-3-methyl-1-butanone
zin-
5-yl)oxy)methyl)piperidin-1-yl)-3-methylbutan-1-one
A129 4-Amino-5-(3-(isopropylamino)-2,2-dimethyl-3-oxopropo 3-Quinolinecarboxylic acid, 4-amino-5-[2,2-dimethyl-3-[(1-methylethyl)amino]-3-oxopropoxy]-2-methyl-
xy)-2-methylquinoline-3-carboxylic acid
A130 (2S,5R)-N-[4-2-Amino-2-oxoethyl)phenyl]-5-methyl-2-(p 4-Methyl-2-(1-[[[(2S,5R)-5-Methylethyl)cyclohexyl]carbonyl]amino]-benzeneacetamide;
ropan-2-yl)cyclohexanecarboxamide (2S,5R)-N-[4-(2-amino-2-oxo-ethyl)phenyl]-2-isopropyl-5-methyl-cyclohexanecarboxamide
A131 Amyl phenylacetate

A132 beta-Angelicalactone 5-Methylfuran-2(5H)-one; 4-Methyl-2-butenolide; 4-Hydroxy-2-pentenoic acid gamma-lactone

B001 Benzaldehyde * Bitter almond oil, synthetic; Benzenecarboxaldehyde, artificial; Benzenecarbonal; Benzenemethylal; Benzoic
aldehyde; Benzene methylal

Dimethoxy-(phenyl)-methane; α,α-Dimethoxy toluene; (Dimethoxymethyl)benzene; 1,1-Dimethoxy phenyl

B002 Benzaldehyde dimethyl acetal
methane

Benzaldehyde, cyclic acetal with glycerol; 4-Hydroxymethyl-2-phenyl-m-dioxolane; Benzalglycerin;

5-Hydroxy-2-phenyl-1,3-dioxane; Phenyl-m-dioxan-5-ol (α, α'); 2-phenyl-1,3-dioxan-5-ol (α, α');
B003 Benzaldehyde glyceryl acetal 5-Hydroxy-2-phenyl-1,3-dioxane; 4-(Hydroxymethyl)-2-phenyl-1,3-dioxolane; 2-Phenyl-5-hydroxy-1,3-dioxane;
2-Phenyl-4-hydroxymethyl-1,3-dioxolane; 4-Hydroxy methyl-2-phenyl-1,3-dioxolan

1215
Order General Name Synonyms

B004 Benzaldehyde propylene glycol acetal 4-Methyl-2-phenyl-1,3-dioxolane; 4-Methyl-2-phenyl -m-dioxolane; Benzaldehyde propylene glycol cyclic acetal

B005 Benzenethiol Phenyl mercaptan; Thiophenol

B006 2-Benzofurancarboxaldehyde 2-Formylbenzofuran

α-Hydroxy-α-phenylacetophenone; Benzoyl phenylcarbinol; 2-Hydroxy-2-phenyl- acetophenone;

B007 Benzoin 2-Hydroxy-1,2-diphenylethanone

B008 Benzophenone Diphenylmethanone; α-Oxodiohenylmethane; phenyl ketone; Benzoyl benzene; diphenyl ketone

B009 Benzothiazole

2-Benzoylaminobenzoic acid; dianthramid B; Anthranilic acid, N-benzoyl-; 2-Carboxybenzanilide;

B010 N-Benzoylanthranilic acid N-(2-Carboxyphenyl)benzamide

Benzyl 2,3-dimethyl-2-butenoate; Benzyl methyl tiglate; Benzyl 2,3-dimethyl-trans-2-butanoate; Benzyl

B011 Benzyl 2,3-dimethylcrotonate 2,3-dimethyl-2-butenoate

benzyl methoxyethyl acetal; Acetaldehyde benzyl β-methoxyethyl acetal;

1-Benzoxy-1-(2-methoxyethoxy)-ethane; 1-Benzyloxy-1-(β-methoxy)-ethoxyethane; Acetaldehyde benzyl
B012 Benzyl 2-methoxyethyl acetal 2-methoxyethyl mexed acetal; 1-Benzyloxy-1-(2- methoxyethoxy)ethane; Acetaldehyde benzyl methoxyethyl
acetal; 1-Benzoyl-1-(2-methoxyethoxy)ethane

B013 Benzyl acetate* Benzyl ethanoate; Accetic acid, benzyl ester

B014 Benzyl acetoacetate Benzyl acetyl acetate; benzyl β-ketobutyrate; benzyl 3-oxobutanoate; Benzyl 3-oxobutyrate

B015 Benzyl alcohol* Phenylmethyl alcohol; α-Hydroxy toluene; phenyl carbinol; Phenyl methanol
Benzoic acid, benzyl ester; Benzyl alcohol benzoic ester; Benzyl benzene carboxylate; Benzyl henylformate;
B016 Benzyl benzoate
Phenylmethyl benzoate
B017 Benzyl butyl ether Butyl benzyl ether; n-Butyl benzyl ether
Aldehyde C-19; butyric acid, benzyl ester; Benzyl butanoate; Benzyl n-butyrate; Phenylmethyl butyrate; Benzyl
B018 Benzyl butyrate n-butanoate

1216
Order General Name Synonyms

Isobutyric acid, benzyl ester; Benzyl cinnamate; Benzyl 2-methyl propanoate; Benzyl 3-phenylpropenoate;
B019 Benzyl cinnamate Cinnamein; Benzyl β-phenylacrylate; 2-Propenoic acid, 3-phenyl, phenylmethyl ester

α-Benzyldithio toluene; 1,4-Diphenyl-2,3-dithiobutane; Di(phenylmethyl)disulfide; α-(benzyldithio)toluene;

B020 Benzyl disulfide
1,4-Diphenyl-1,2,3-ithiobutane; Di(phenylmethyl)disulfide

B021 Benzyl ethyl ether Ethyl benzyl ether

B022 Benzyl formate Benzyl methanoate; Formic acid benzyl ester; Phenylmethyl formate

B023 Benzyl hexanoate Hexanoic acid, Phenylmethyl ester; Hexanoic acid, benzyl ester; Benzyl caproate

Benzyl cinnamate; Isobutyric acid, benzyl ester; Benzyl β-phenylacrylate; Benzyl-3-phenylpropenoate;

B024 Benzyl isobutyrate
Cinnamein; Phenylmethyl isobutyrate; Pineapple aldehyde c-19; Benzyl 2-methylpropanoate

B025 Benzyl isovalerate Benzyl isovalerianate; Benzyl isopentanoate; Benzyl 3-methyl butyrate; Benzyl 3-methylbutanoate

Benzylithol; Benzenemethanethiol; Phenylmethanethiol; α-Mercaptotoluene; Benzyl hydrosulfide; Thiobenzyl

B026 Benzyl mercaptan alcohol; α-Toluenthiol; Benzylmercaptan

B027 Benzyl methyl sulfide Methyl benzyl sulfide; α-(Methylthio)toluene; Methylthio methyl benzene

B028 Benzyl phenylacetate Phenylacetic acid, benzyl ester; Benzyl α-toluate; Phenylmethyl phenylacetate; Benzyl-2-phenyl ethanoate

B029 Benzyl propionate * Propionic acid, benzyl ester; Benzyl propanoate

Salicylic acid, benzyl ester; Benzyl o-hydroxybenzoate; Benzyl 2-hydroxybenzoate; Phenylmethyl

B030 Benzyl salicylate
2-hydroxybenzoate

Benzyl tigate; Benzyl 2-methylcrotonate; Benzyl trans-2,3-dimethyl acrylate; Benzyl trans-2-methyl crotonate;
B031 Benzyl trans-2-methyl-2-butenoate
Benzyl 2-methyl-trans-2-butenoate

B032 3-Benzyl-4-heptanone Benzyl dipropyl ketone; morellone; 1-Phenyl-2-ethyl-3-hexanone; morellone

B033 Biphenyl Phenylbenzene, diphenyl

B034 Birch tar oil

1217
Order General Name Synonyms
2,4-Dithiapentane; bis(methyl mercapto)methane; Formaldehyde dimethyl dithioacetal; Formaldehyde dimethyl
B035 Bis(methylthio)methane
mercaptal; Thioformaldehyde dimethul acetal

1,4(8),12-Bisabolatriene; 1-Methyl-4-(1,5-dimethyl-1,4-hexadienyl)-1-cyclohexene; β-bisabolene;

1-Methyl-4-(5-methyl-1-methylene-4-hexenyl)-1-cyclohexene; γ-bisabolene;
B036 Bisabolene 1-Methyl-4-(1,5-dimethyl-4-hexenylidene)-1-cyclohexene;
1-Methyl-4-(1,5-dimethyl-1,4-hexadienyl)-1-cyclohexene

Baros; d-camphanol; 2-Hydroxycamphane; camphol; Endo-2-camphanol; Endo-2-bornanol;

B037 Borneol Endo-2-hydroxycamphane; 2Hydroxybornane; 1,7,7-Trimethylbicyclo(2,2,1)heptan-2-ol; 2-Bornanol; Borneo
camphor; Bornyl alcohol; 2-Camphanol; Baros camphor

Borneol acetate; 2-Camphanyl acetate; l-Bornyl acetate; d-bornyl acetate; Bornyl acetic ether; Bornyl
B038 Bornyl acetate ethanoate; endo-2-bornyl acetate

(1S-endo)-1,7-Trimethylbicyclo[2.2.1]heptan-2-ol acetate; Bicycol[2.2.1]heptan-2-ol, 1,7,7-trimethyl-, acetate,

B039 L-Bornyl acetate (1S,2R,4S)-; (-)-Bornyl acetate

B040 Bornyl butyrate Bornyl butanoate; Butanoic acid,1,7,7-trimethylbicyclo[2.2.1]hept-2-yl ester endo; Butyric acid, 2-bornyl ester

Borneol formate; d-Bornyl formate; Endo-2-bornanyl formate; 2-Camphanyl formate; l-Bornyl formate; Bornyl
B041 Bornyl formate methanoate

Bornyval; Bornyl isovalerianate; Bornyl-3-methylbutanoate; Bornyval; Bornyl 3-Methylpentanoate; Bornyl

B042 Bornyl isovalerate (endo-)
3-methylbutyrate; Bornyl isopentanoate

Bornyl valerianate; Bornyl n-pentanoate; Bicyclo[2.2.1]heptan-2-ol, 1,7,7-trimethyl; Endo-bornyl n-pentanoate;

B043 Bornyl valerate Endo-2-bornyl valerate; Endo-2-camphanyl valerate; Bornyl pentanoate

B044 β-Bourbonene

B045 Butan-2-ol 2-Butanol; 2-Hydroxybutane; Butylene hydrate; Methyl Ethyl carbinol; sec-Butyl alcohol

B046 Butan-3-one-2-yl butanoate 1-Methyl-2-oxopropyl butyrate; sec-Butan-3-onyl butyrate; Acetoyl butyrate

1218
Order General Name Synonyms
B047 2,3-Butanedithiol 2,3-Dimercaptobutane

B048 1,2-Butanedithiol 1,2-Dimercaptobutane

B049 1,3-Butanedithiol 1,3-Dimercaptobutane
B050 2-keto-4-Butanethiol 4-Mercapto-2-butanone; 4- Mercaptobutan-2-one

B051 1-Butanethiol n-Butanethiol; n-Butyl mercaptan; Butyl mercaptan

B052 2-Butanone Methyl ethyl ketone; Mek; Ketone C-4; Ethyl methyl ketone;

B053 (1-Buten-1-yl) methyl sulfide But-1-enyl methyl sulphide; 1-Butenyl methyl sulfide

B054 Butter acids

B055 Butter esters

B056 Butyl 10-undecenoate Butyl 10-hendecenoate; Butyl undecylenoate; Butylundec-10-enoate

B057 N-Butyl 2-methylbutyrate Butyl 2-methylbutyrate; Butyl-2-methylbutanoate

B058 Butyl acetate * Butyl ethanoate; n-butyl acetate

Butyl 3-ketobutyrate; Butyl 3-ketobutanoate; Butyl-β-ketobutyrate; Butyl 3-oxobutanoate, Butyl

B059 Butyl acetoacetate β-ketobutanoate

B060 Butyl alcohol Propyl carbinol; 1-Butanol; n-Butyl alcohol, butan-1-ol; Butan-1-ol; Hydroxybutane

B061 Butyl anthranilate Butyl-2- aminobenzoate; Butyl ο-aminobenzoate; Nibutyl 2-aminobenzoate

B062 Butyl butyrate * n-butyl n-Butanoate; Butyl butanoate

Butyl-O-butyryllactate; Lactic acid, butyl ester, butyrate; Butyl 2-butyryloxypropanoate, Butyl butyrolactate;
B063 Butyl butyryllactate 2-butoxy-1-methyl-2-oxoethyl butyrate; Butyl-α-butyroxy propionate; Butyl 2-(propylcarboxy) propanoate

n-Butyl phenylacrylate; Cinnamic acid, butyl ester; Butyl β-phenyl acrylate; Butyl 3-phenyl propenoate; Butyl
B064 Butyl cinnamate 3-phenylpropenoate

B065 Butyl dec-2-enoate Butyl 2-decenoate

B066 Butyl ethyl disulfide 1-Ethyldisulfanylbutane, 3,4-Dithiaoctane

1219
Order General Name Synonyms
B067 sec-Butyl ethyl ether 2-Butyl ethyl ether (sec-); 2- Butyl ethyl ether; Ether, sec-butyl ethyl

B068 Butyl ethyl malonate Ethyl butyl malonate, Butyl ethyl propanedioate

B069 Butyl formate Butyl methanoate; n-Butyl methanoate

B070 Butyl heptanoate Butyl heptoate; butyl heptylate; n-Butyl heptoate; n-Butyl heptyrate; n-Butyl oenanthate; Butyl oenanthate

B071 Butyl hexanoate Butyl caproate; Butyl carpronate; Butyl hexylate; n-Butyl hexanoate

B072 Butyl isobutyrate Butyl 2-methylpropanoate; n-Butyl 2-methl propanoate; Butyl-2-methylpropionate

B073 Butyl isothiocyanate Isothiocyanic acid, butyl ester; 1-Isothiocyanatobutane; n-Butyl isothiocyanate; 4-Isothiocyanato-but-1-ene

B074 Butyl isovalerate Butyl 3-methylbutanoate; Butyl isopentanoate; Butyl isovalerianate

B075 Butyl lactate Butyl 2-hydroxypropanoate; Butyl α-hydroxypropionate; Butyl hydroxypropanoate

B076 Butyl laurate n-Butyl dodecanoate; Butyl dodecanoate; Butyl laurate; Butyl dodecylate

Butyl acetylpropionate; Butyl 4-ketovalerate; Butyl γ-butyrolactone; Butyl 4-oxopentanoate; Butyl

B077 Butyl levulinate 4-oxovalerate; n-Butyl acetopropionate; n-Butyl γ-ketovallerate; n-Butyl levulinate

B078 Butyl phenylacetate Butyl α-toluate

B079 3-n-Butyl phthalide 3-Butylphthalide

B080 Butyl propionate Butyl propanoate; n-Butyl propanoate

Butyl (2-hydroxyphenyl) formate; Benzoic acid; 2-hydroxy-; Butyl ester; n-Butyl o-hydroxybenzoate; n-Butyl
B081 Butyl salicylate salicylate; Butyl 2-hydroxybenzoate; Butyl (2-hydroxy-phenyl)-methanoate

B082 Butyl stearate Butyl octadecanoate; Butyl octadecylate

Butylthiobutane; n-butylt sulfide; 1-1'-Thiobisbutane; Dibutyl sulfide; n-Butyl sulfide; Butylsulfide; Di-n-butyl
B083 Butyl sulfide sulphide

B084 Butyl valerate n-Butylpentanoate; n-Butyl-n-valerianate; Butyl valerianate

1220
Order General Name Synonyms

2-(sec-Butyl)-4,5-dimethyl-3-thiazoline; 2,5-Dihydro-4,5-dimethyl-2-(1-methylpropyl)- thiazole;

B085 2-(2-Butyl)-4,5-dimethyl-3-thiazoline
2-(1-Methylpropyl)-4,5-dimethyl-3-thiazoline; 2,5-Dihydro-4,5-dimethyl-2-but- 2-yl thiazole

B086 2-(sec-Butyl)cyclohexanone ortho-sec-Butylcyclohexanone: Freskomenthe; 2-(1-Methylpropyl)-cyclohexanone; 2-But-2-ylcyclohexanone

B087 2-Butyl-2-butenal 2-Ethylidene hexanal; 2- Ethylidinehexanal

B088 2-Butyl-5(6-keto-1,4)-dioxane 5(or 6)-Butyl-1,4-dioxane-2-one 1,4-Dioxan-2-one; 5(or 6)-Butyl-1

B089 Butylamine 1-Aminobutane; n-Butylamine

(+/-)-2-Aminobutane; (+/-)-2-Butanamine; (+/-)-2-Butylamine; (+/-)-sec-Butylamine; (RS)-sec-Butylamine;

B090 sec-Butylamine 1-Methylpropanamine; 1-Methylpropylamine; 2-Aminobutane; 2-Butylamine; Butafume; Butan-2-ylamine;
dl-2-Butylamine; DL-sec-Butylamine; Tutane; But-2-ylamine

B091 α-Butylcinnamaldehyde 2-Benzylidene hexanal; Butyl cinnamic aldehyde; α-Butyl-β-phenylacrolein

B092 2-Butylfuran
B093 3-Butylidenephthalide Liguisticum lactone
Butyl aldehyde; Butanal; Butyric aldehyde; 1-Aminobutane; m-Butylamine ; n-Butyraldehyde; Butyric aldehyde;
B094 Butyraldehyde
n-Butanal; Butan-1-al; n-Butyl aldehyde
B095 Butyramide Butyramide; Butanimidic acid; n-Butylamide; Butanamide
B096 Butyric acid * n-Butyric acid; Butanoic acid; Ethylacetic aicd; 1-Propanecarboxylic acid
B097 2-Butyrylfuran 1-(2-Furyl)-1-butanone; 2-Furyl propyl ketone; Furyl n-propyl ketone

Acetic acid, sec-butyl ester; sec-Butyl alcohol acetate; Acetic acid 2-butoxy ester; dl-sec-Butyl acetate;
B098 sec-Butyl acetate sec-Butyl ethanoate; Acetate de butyle secondaire; 1-Methylpropyl acetate; 1-Methylpropyl ethanoate;
2-Butanol acetate;2-Butyl acetate;Acetic acid, 1-methylpropyl este

β-Butylene glycol; Methyltrimethylene glycol; 1-Methyl-1,3-propanediol; 1,3-Butylene glycol;

B099 Butane-1,3-diol 1,3-Dihydroxybutane; 1,3-Butandiol; 1,3-Butylenglykol; 1,3-Butanodiol;Butanediol,1,3-;1,3-Butanediol

B100 2-Butoxyethan-1-ol Ethanol, 2-butoxy-; β-Butoxyethanol; Butyl cellosolve; Butyl glycol; Butyl oxitol; Ethylene glycol butyl ether;

1221
Order General Name Synonyms

Ethylene glycol monobutyl ether; Glycol butyl ether; Glycol monobutyl ether; Monobutyl glycol ether; O-Butyl
ethylene glycol; 2-Butoxy-1-ethanol; 2-Butoxyethanol; 3-Oxa-1-heptanol; Butyl 2-hydroxyethyl ether;
2-Hydroxyethyl n-butyl ether; n-Butoxyethanol; 2-n-Butoxyethanol; Ethylene glycol mono-n-butyl
ether;Butoxyethanol; Butyglycol; Ethylene glycol n-butyl ether; Monobutyl ether of ethylene glycol;Butyl
monoether glycol;2-butoxyethanol ;2-n-Butoxy-1-ethanol

B101 Butyl benzoate n-Butyl benzoate; Benzoic acid n-butyl ester; Butyl ester of benzoic acid;Benzoic acid, butyl ester

Cyclohexene, 1-methyl-4-(5-methyl-1-methylene-4-hexenyl)-, (S)-; 1,5-Heptadiene,

6-methyl-2-(4-methyl-3-cyclohexen-1-yl)-, (S)-(-)-; l-β-Bisabolene; (+,-)-β-Bisabolene;
B102 β-Bisabolene 1-Methyl-4-(5-methyl-1-methylene-4-hexenyl)-1-cyclohexene; (-)-β-bisabolene;
1-Methyl-4-(5-methyl-1-methylene-4-hexenyl)-(S)-cyclohexene

sec-Butyl thioalcohol; sec-Butanethiol; sec-Butyl mercaptan; sec-Butyl thiol; Secondary butylmercaptan;

B103 Butane-2-thiol 1-Methyl-1-propanethiol; 2-Butyl mercaptan; 2-Mercaptobutane; Sec-butyl hydrosulfide;2-Butanethiol
Dimethylethylene glycol; 2,3-Butylene glycol; 2,3-Dihydroxybutane; D-2,3-Butane
B104 Butane-2,3-diol diol;2,3-Butanediol;2,3-Butandiol; 2,3-butanodiol

3-Cyclohexene-1-methanol, α,4-dimethyl-α-(4-methyl-3-pentenyl)-, (R*,R*)-; 5-Hepten-2-ol,

6-methyl-2-(4-methyl-3-cyclohexen-1-yl)-; Bisabolol;
α,4-Dimethyl-α-(4-methyl-3-pentenyl)-3-cyclohexene-1-methanol;
B105 Bisabola-1,12-dien-8-ol 6-Methyl-2-(4-methyl-3-cyclohexen-1-yl)-5-hepten-2-ol;
(R*,R*)-α,4-Dimethyl-α-(4-methyl-3-pentenyl)-3-cyclohexene-1-methanol;
(R*,R*)-α,4-Dimethyl-α-(4-methyl-3-pentenyl)cyclohex-3-ene-1-methanol; Camilol; Dragosantol; Hydagen B;
α-Bisabalol; α-bisabolool

Ether, benzyl methyl; α-Methoxytoluene; Methyl benzyl ether;

B106 Benzyl methyl ether Methoxymethylbenzene; α-Methylbenzyl ether;Benzene, (methoxymethyl)-
B107 Butyl 2-furoate 2-Furoic acid, butyl ester
Formic acid, 1-methylpropyl ester; Formic acid, sec-butyl ester;
B108 sec-Butyl formate sec-Butyl methanoate; s-Butyl formate
Caprylic acid n-butyl ester; n-Caprylic acid n-butyl ester;
B109 Butyl octanoate Octanoic acid, butyl ester; n-Butylcaprylate;

1222
Order General Name Synonyms
n-Butyl n-octanoate; n-Butyl octanoate;Butyl caprylate
B110 Butyl but-2-enoate

n-Butyl methyl ketone; Hexan-2-one; Methyl butyl ketone;

B111 Butyl methyl ketone
Methyl n-butyl ketone; 2-Oxohexane; Hexanone-2; Ketone, butyl methyl;2-Hexanone
Methyl vinylcarbinol; 1-Buten-3-ol; 1-Methyl-2-propenol; 3
B112 But-3-en-2-ol -Butene-2-ol; 3-Hydroxy-1-butene; Propenol, 1-methyl;3-Buten-2-ol

Isothiocyanic acid, benzyl ester; Benzyl mustard oil; Toluene, α-isothiocyanato-;

B113 Benzyl isothiocyanate
(Isothiocyanatomethyl)benzene;Benzene, (isothiocyanatomethyl)-

B114 Benzaldehyde diethyl acetal Benzene, (diethoxymethyl)-; Toluene, α,α-diethoxy-; Diethoxymethyl)benzene

B115 sec-Butyl butyrate Butyric acid, sec-butyl ester; Butanoic acid, 2-butyl ester;Butanoic acid, 1-methylpropyl ester
1-Butene, 4-isothiocyanato-; Isothiocyanic acid, 3-butenyl ester; 4-Isothiocyanato-1-butene;1-butene
B116 3-Butenyl isothiocyanate
4-isothiocyanate

B117 Butanal diethyl acetal Butyraldehyde, diethyl acetal; Butylaldehyde diethyl acetal; 1,1-Diethoxybutane; n-Butyraldehyde diethyl acetal

B118 sec-Butyl Isothiocyanate Butane, 2-isothiocyanato-; Isothiocyanic acid, sec-butyl ester; 2-Isothiocyanatobutane;2-Butyl isothiocyanate

B119 Butyl 2-methylbut-2(cis)-enoate Butyl angelate

Valeric acid, benzyl ester; Benzyanyl; Benzyl pentanoate;Benzyl valerianate; Benzyl N-valerate; Phenylmethyl
B120 Benzyl valerate
(benzyl) valerate; Phenylmethyl pentanoate;Pentanoic acid, phenylmethyl ester

B121 Butyl hex-2-enoate

B122 Bisabola-1,8,12-triene
B123 sec-Butyl lactate Lactic acid, sec-butyl ester
B124 Butyl deca-2,4-dienoate

B125 Butyl decanoate n-Capric acid n-butyl ester; Decanoic acid, butyl ester; Butyl caprate; n-Butyl n-decanoate; n-butyl decanoate

B126 Butyl nonanoate n-butyl nonanoate;Nonanoic acid, butyl ester

1223
Order General Name Synonyms
B127 Bis(1-mercaptopropyl)sulfide Propanethiol, 1,1’-thiobis-
B128 Benzyl octyl ether
B129 Benzyl 2-methylbutyrate Benzyl 2-methylbutanoate;Butanoic acid, 2-methyl-, phenylmethyl ester
B130 1-Butoxy-1-ethoxyethane Butane, 1-(1-ethoxyethoxy)-;1-(1-Ethoxyethoxy)butane
B131 Butyl oct-2-enoate 2-Octenoic acid, butyl ester
B132 Benzyl crotonate
B133 1-Butoxy-1-(2-methylbutoxy)ethane
B134 Butyl hex-3-enoate Butyl trans-3-hexenoate
B135 1-Butoxy-1-isopentyloxyethane
B136 (E)-3-Benzo[1,3]dioxol-5-yl-N,N-diphenyl-2-propenamide (2E)-3-(1,3-Benzodioxol-5-yl)-N,N-diphenylprop-2-enamide
(E)-N-[2-(1,3-Benzodioxol-5-yl)ethyl]-3-(3,4-dimethoxyp
B137 henyl)prop-2-enamide N-(Adamantane-1-yl)-1,3-benzodioxole-5-acrylamide

B138 2-(3-Benzyloxypropyl)pyridine 2-[3-(Phenylmethoxy)propyl]-pyridine

B139 alpha-Bisabolol Levomenol; Kamillosan; Bisabola-1,12-dien-8-ol

B140 3- and 4- butyl-2- thiophenecarboxyaldehyde (mixture) Mixture of 3- and 4- butyl-2- thiophenecarboxyaldehyde

B141 (E)-N-[2-(1,3-Benzodioxol-5-yl)ethyl]-3-(3,4-dimethoxyp Rubescenamine; (2E)-N-[2-(1,3-benzodioxol-5-yl)ethyl]-3-(3,4-dimethoxyphenyl)prop-2-enamide

henyl)prop-2-enamide

B142 (±)-Bicyclo[2.2.1]hept-5-ene-2-carboxylic acid, ethyl (±)-Ethyl bicyclo[2.2.1]hept-5-ene-2-carboxylate; (±)-5-Norbornene-2-carboxylic acid, ethyl ester
ester

B143 Butyl 2-naphthyl ether beta-Naphthol butyl ether; 2-Butoxynaphthalene

C001 delta-Cadinene α-, β-, γ, epsilon-Cadiene

C002 Camphene 3,3-Dimethyl-2-methylene norcamphane; 2,2-Dimethyl-3-methylene norbornane

1224
Order General Name Synonyms

α-Campholene acetate; 1-Acetoxy-2-(2,2,3-trimethyl-3-cyclopentanyl)ethane; 3-Cyclopentene-;-ethanol;

C003 Campholene acetate
2,2,3-Trimethyl-, acetate; 2-(2,2,3-Trimethyl-3- cyclopentenyl)ethyl acetate

α-Campholenol; 3-Cyclopentene-1-ethanol; 2,2,3-Trimethyl-; 2-(2,2,3-trimethyl)-3- cyclopentene-1-ethanol;

C004 α-Campholenic alcohol
2-(2,2,3-Trimethylcyclopent-3-enyl)ethanol; 2-(2,3,3-Trimethyl- cyclopent-3-en-1-yl)ethanol

Gum camphor; Formosa camphor; 2-Camphanone; 2-bornanone; 2-Keto-1,7,7-trimethylnorcamphane;

C005 d-Camphor 1,7,7-Trimethylbicyclo (2.2.1) 2-heptanone; Laurel camphor; d-2-Bornanone; d-2-Camphanone

n-(4-Hydroxy-3-methoxybenzyl)-8-methyl-6-nonenamide; trans-8-Methyl-n-vanillyl-6-nonenamide; Isodecenoic

C006 Capsaicin acid vanillylamide; 8-Methylnon-6-enoyl 4-hydroxy-3-methoxybenzylamide

3-Carene; Isodiprene; d-3-Carene; Car-3-ene; 4,7,7-Trimethyl-3-norcarene;

C007 delta-3-Carene
3,7,7-Trimethylbicyclo[4,1,0]hept-3-ene

Cymophenol; Thymol(iso); Propyl iso o-cresol; p-Cymene-2-ol; 2-p-Cymenol; 2-Hydroxy-p-cymene;

C008 Carvacrol Isopropyl-o-cresol; Isothymol; 2-Methyl-5-isopropyl phenol; 2-Methyl-5-(1-methylethyl)phenol, Cymenphenol;
2-Hydroxy-p-cymenol

C009 Carvacryl ethyl ether Ethyl carvacrol; 2-Ethoxy-p-cymene; Ethyl carvacryl ether

C010 Carveol p-Mentha-6,8-dien-2-ol; 1-Methyl-4-isopropenyl-6-cyclohexen-2-ol

C011 4-Carvomenthenol Terpineol; 4-Terpinenol; 1-p-Menthen-4-ol; 1-Methyl-4-isopropyl-1-cyclohexen-4-ol; Origanol

C012 Carvone Carvol; 6,8(9)-p-Menthadien-2-one; 1-menthyl-4-isopropenyl-6-cyclohexen-2-one

C013 d-Carvone p-Mentha-6,8-dien-2-one; Dextro-carvone; (+)-Carvone

C014 l-Carvone p-Mentha-6,8-dien-2-one; Laevo-carvone; (-)-Carvone; p-Mentha-6,8-dien-2-one

C015 cis-Carvone oxide 1,6-Epoxy-p-menth-8-en-2-one.

C016 Carvone-5,6-oxide 7-Oxabicyclo[4.1.0]heptan-2-one, 1-methyl-4-(1-methylethenyl)-(1S,4R,6S)-; 1,6-Epoxy-p-menth-8-en-2-one

1225
Order General Name Synonyms
C017 Carvyl acetate p-Mentha-6,8-dien-2-yl acetate; Carveyl acetate

C018 Carvyl propionate l-Carveol propionate; 1-p-Mentha-6,8-dien-2-yl propionate

C019 β-Caryophyllene 2-Methylene-6,10,10-trimethylbicyclo (7.2.0) undec-5-ene; Caryophyllene

C020 β-Caryophyllene alcohol Isocaryphyllene

C021 Caryophyllene alcohol acetate Caryophyllene acetate

C022 β-Caryophyllene oxide Caryophyllene epoxide; 4-12,12-Trimethyl-9-methylene-5-oxatricylo[8.2.0.04, 6] dodecane

C023 Cedarwood oil alcohols

C024 Cedarwood oil terpenes

C025 1,4-Cineole 1,4-Epoxy-p-menthane

Cinnamal; Cinnamic aldehyde; β-Phenylacrolein; 3-Phenylpropenal; Zimtaldehyde; Cassiaaldehyde; Benzylidene

C026 Cinnamaldehyde *
acetaldehyde; Phenylacrolein

C027 Cinnamaldehyde ethylene glycol acetal Cinnamic aldehyde ethylene glycol acetal; Cinncloval; 2-Styryl-1,3-dioxolane; 2-styryl-m-dioxolane

3-Phenylacrylic acid; benzylideneacetic acid; Benzenepropenoic acid; Cinnamylic acid; β-Phenylacrylic acid;
C028 Cinnamic acid * 3-Phenylpropenoic acid; 2-Phenyl-2-propenoic acid; Benzenepropenoic acid; tert-β-Phenylacrylic acid;
3-Phenyl-2-propenoic acid

C029 Cinnamyl acetate * 3-Phenyl-2-propen-1-yl acetate; 3-Phenylallyl acetate

C030 Cinnamyl alcohol * Zimtalcohol; Cinnamic alcohol; γ-Phenylallyl alcohol; 3-Phenyl-2-propen-1-ol; styryl carbinol

C031 Cinnamyl benzoate

3-Phenyl-2-propen-1-yl butanoate; Butyric acid, 3-Phenyl-2-propen-1-yl ester; 3-Phenylallyl butyrate; Phenyl
C032 Cinnamyl butyrate propenyl-n-butyrate

3-Phenyl-2-propen-1-yl 3-phenylpropenoate; 3-Phenylallyl cinnamate; Cinnamyl β-phenyl acrylate; Cinnamyl

C033 Cinnamyl cinnamate 3-phenyl propenoate; Phenylallyl cinnamate; Styracin

C034 Cinnamyl formate 3-Phenyl -2-propen-1-yl formate; 3-Phenylallyl formate; Cinnamyl methanoate

1226
Order General Name Synonyms
Cinnamyl 2-methylpropanoate; 3-Phenyl-2-propen-1-yl isobutyrate; 3-Phenyl-2-propen-1-yl
C035 Cinnamyl isobutyrate
2-methylpropanoate; Cinnamyl 2-methylpropanoate

3-Phenylallyl 3-methylbutanoate; 3-Phenyl-2-propen-1-yl 3-methylbutanoate; Cinnamyl 3-methylbutanoate;

C036 Cinnamyl isovalerate Ethyl 4-hydroxy-3-methoxybenzoate; 3-Phenylallyl isovalerate; Cinnamyl-3-methylbutyrate; Cinnamyl
isovalerianate

C037 Cinnamyl phenylacetate 3-Phenyl-2-propen-1-yl phenylacetate; 3-Phenylallyl phenylacetate; Cinnamyl α-toluate

3-Phenyl-2-propen-1-yl propionate; 3-Phenylallyl propionate; γ-Phenylallyl propionate; 3-Phenyl-2-propenyl

C038 Cinnamyl propionate propanoate

Geranial; 2-trans-3,7-Dimethyl-2,6-octadien-1-al; 2-cis-3,7-Ddimethyl-2,6-octadien-1-al;

C039 Citral * 2,6-Dimethyloctadien-2,6-al-8; Neral; Lemarome; Lemarome; 3,7-Dimethyl-2,6-octadienal;
trans-3,7-Dimethylocta-2,6-dienal; cis- and trans-3,7-Dimethyl-2,6-octadienal

C040 Citral diethyl acetal Citrathal; 1,1-Diethoxy-3,7-dimethyl-2,6-octadiene; 3,7-Dimethyl-2,6-octadienal diethylacetal

C041 Citral dimethyl acetal Citrathal; 1,1-Dimethoxy-3,7-dimethyl-2,6-octadiene; 3,7-Dimethyl-2,6-octadienal dimethylacetal

C042 Citral propylene glycol acetal

C043 Citronellal * 3,7-Dimethyl-6-octenal; 3,7-Dimethyl-6-octen-1-al; Rhodinal (dextro-rotatory form)

C044 Citronellol * d-Citronellol or the l-form sec Rhodinol; 3,7-Dimethyl-6-octen-1-ol; (-)-3,7-Dimethyl-6-octen-1-ol

C045 Citronelloxyacetaldehyde.

C046 Citronellyl acetate 3,7-Dimethyl-6-octen-1-yl ethanoate; Citronellyl ethanoate; 3,7-Dimethyl-6-octen-yl acetate

C047 Citronellyl anthranilate 6-Octen-1-ol, 3,7-dimethyl-, 2-aminobenzoate

C048 Citronellyl butyrate 3,7-Dimethyl-6-octen-yl butyrate; 3,7-Dimethyl-6-octen-1-yl butanoate; Citronellyl butanoate

1227
Order General Name Synonyms

C049 Citronellyl formate * 3,7-Dimethyl-6-octen-1-yl methanoate; Citronellyl methanoate; 3,7-Dimethyl-6-octen-1-yl formate

3,7-Dimethyl-6-octen-1-yl 2-methylpropanoate; 3,7-Dimethyl-6-octen-1-yl isobutyrate; Citronellyl

C050 Citronellyl isobutyrate
2-methylpropionate

C051 Citronellyl oxyacetaldehyde Muget aldehyde; 6,10-Dimethyl-3-oxa-9-undecenal

C052 Citronellyl phenylacetate * Citronelly α-toluate; 3,7-Dimethyl-6-octen-1-yl phenylacetate

C053 Citronellyl propionate 3,7-Dimethyl-6-octen-1-yl propanoate; Citronellyl propanoate; 3,7-Dimethyl-6-octen-1-yl propionate

Citronellyl valerianate; 3,7-Dimethyl-6-octen-1-yl pentanoate; Citronellyl pentanoate; 3,7-Dimethyl-6-octen-1-yl

C054 Citronellyl valerate valerate

1-Methyl-4-hydroxybenzene; 1-Hydroxy-4-methylbenzene; p-Cresylic acid; 4-Methylphenol; 4-Cresol;

C055 p-Cresol p-Hydroxytoluene; p-Methyl phenol; 4-Hydroxytoluene

o-Cresylic acid; 2-Hydroxy-1-methylbenzene; 1-Hydroxy-2-methylbenzene; o-Hydroxytoluene; o-Methylphenol;

C056 o-Cresol 2-Methylphenol

m-Cresylic acid; 1-Hydroxy-3-methylbenzene; 3-Hydroxytoluene; 1-Methyl-3-hydroxybenzene; 3-Methylphenol;

C057 M-Cresol m-Methylphenol; 3-Hydroxytoluene

C058 Crotonic acid (E)-2-Butenoic acid; trans-2-Butenoic acid; But-2-enoic acid (cis and trans)

p-Propyl iso benzaldehyde; 4-Isopropylbenzenecarboxaldehyde; 4-(1-Methylethyl)-benzaldehyde; Cumaldehyde;

C059 Cuminaldehyde Cuminal; Cuminic aldehyde; p-Isopropyl benzaldehyde; 4-Isopropylbenzaldehyde

α-Methyl-p-isopropylhydrocinnamaldehyde; 2-Methyl-3-(p-isopropylphenyl) propionaldehyde; Cyclamal;

C060 Cyclamen aldehyde Cyclaviol; Cyclosal; 3-(p-Cumenyl)-2-methylpropionaldehyde

C061 Cycloheptadec-9-en-1-one 9-Cycloheptadecen-1-one; civetone; α-trans-Civettone; Citvettone; cis-9-Cycloheptandecen-1-one

C062 Cyclohexanecarboxylic acid Benzoic acid, Hexahydro; Carboxycyclohexane; Cyclohexylmethanoic acid, Hexahydrobenzoic acid

1228
Order General Name Synonyms
Cyclohexylethyl acetate; Hexahydrophenethyl acetate; 2-Cyclohexylethyl acetate; Cyclohexane ethyl acetate;
C063 Cyclohexaneethyl acetate Ethylcyclohexyl acetate

Anon; Hexanon; Ketohexamethylene; Nadone; Pimelic ketone; Ketohexamethylene; pimelic ketone; Sextone;
C064 Cyclohexanone
Nadone; Cyclohexyl ketone

C065 Cyclohexyl acetate Cyclohexane acetate

C066 Cyclohexyl anthranilate Cyclohexyl 2-aminobenzoate; Cyclohexyl o-aminobenzoate

C067 Cyclohexyl butyrate Cyclohexyl butanoate

C068 Cyclohexyl cinnamate Cyclohexyl β-phenylacrylate; cyclohexyl 3-phenylpropenoate; Cyclohexyl-3-phenyl prop-2-enoate

C069 Cyclohexyl formate Formic acid, cyclohexyl ester

Cyclohexyl isovalerianate; Cyclohexyl isopentanoate; Cyclohexyl 3-methylbutanoate; cyclohexyl

C070 Cyclohexyl isovalerate 2-methylbutanoate

C071 Cyclohexyl propionate

C072 Cyclohexylacetic acid Hexahydrophenylacetic acid; Cyclohexaneacetic acid

2-Pyrazinyl cyclohexyl methyl; (2-Pyrazinylmethyl)cyclohexane; (Pyrazinylmethyl)- cyclohexane;

C073 Cyclohexylmethyl pyrazine 2-Pyrazinycylohexylmethane; 2-(cyclohexylmethyl)pyrazine

C074 Cycloionone 6,7,8,8a-Tetrahydro-2,5,5,8a-tetramethyl-5H-1-benzopyran

C075 Cyclopentanethiol Cyclopentyl mercaptan

Adipic ketone; Dumasin; Ketocyclopentane; Ketopentamethylene; Ketocyclopentane; Ketopentamethylene; Adipic

C076 Cyclopentanone ketone; Dumasin

C077 N-Cyclopropyl-trans-2-cis-6-nonadien-amide N-Cyclopropyl-(E2,Z6)-nonadienamide; 2,6-Nonadienamide, N-cyclopropyl-, (2E,6Z)-

Cymol; Cymene; 4-Methyl-1-isopropylbenzene; p-Methylcumene; 1-Isopropyl-4-methylbenzene;

C078 p-Cymene p-Isopropyltoluene; 1-Methyl-4-isopropyl benzene; p-Methyl-isopropylbenzene; 4-Isopropyl-1-methylbenzene

C079 Cedrol 1H-3a,7-Methanoazulen-6-ol, octahydro-3,6,8,8-tetramethyl-, [3R-(3α,3aβ,6α,7β,8aα)]-; 8βH-Cedran-8-ol;

1229
Order General Name Synonyms
α-Cedrol; (+)-Cedrol; Cedran-8-ol
C080 Cyclopentanol Cyclopentyl alcohol; Hydroxycyclopentane

Cyclohexyl alcohol; Adronal; Adronol; Anol; Hexahydrophenol; Hexalin; Hydroxycyclohexane; Naxol; Phenol,
C081 Cyclohexanol hexahydro-; 1-Cyclohexanol; Cyclohexane, hydroxy-; Hydralin; Hydrophenol

C082 α-Cedrene 1H-3a,7-Methanoazulene, 2,3,4,7,8,8a-hexahydro-3,6,8,8-tetramethyl-, [3r-(3α,3aβ,7β,8aα)]-; Cedr-8-ene

2-Cyclohexen-1-ol, 2-methyl-5-(1-methylethenyl)-, acetate, cis-; p-Mentha-6,8-dien-2-ol, acetate, cis-; Carvyl

C083 cis-Carvyl acetate acetate Z; 5-Isopropenyl-2-methyl-2-cyclohexen-1-yl acetate; Z-carvyl
acetate;cis-2-Methyl-5-(1-methylethenyl)-2-cyclohexen-1-yl acetate

C084 Coumane 1a,7b-dihydrocyclopropa[c]chromen-2(1H)-one; Cyclopropylcoumarin

C085 Carvacryl methyl ether Carvacrol methyl ether; methyl carvacrol
C086 Carvacryl acetate
C087 Citronellyl hexanoate

1H-Cyclopenta[1,3]cyclopropa[1,2]benzene, octahydro-7-methyl-3-methylene-4-(1-methylethyl)-,
[3as-(3aα,3bβ,4β,7α,7as*)]-; 1H-Cyclopenta[1,3]cyclopropa[1,2]benzene,
2,3,3aα,3bα,4,5,6,7-octahydro-4α-isopropyl-7β-methyl-3-methylene-;
C088 β-Cubebene 1H-Cyclopenta[1,3]cyclopropa[1,2]benzene, octahydro-7-methyl-3-methylene-4-(1-methylethyl)-,
(3aα,3bα,4α,7β,7aR*)-;
4-Isopropyl-7-methyl-3-methyleneoctahydro-1H-cyclopenta[2,3]cyclopropa[1,2-a]benzene;β-Cuvebene

C089 8(14)-Cedrene beta-Cedrene

2-Butenoic acid, 2-methyl-, 3,7-dimethyl-6-octenyl ester, (E)-; 3,7-Dimethyl-6-octenyl
C090 Citronellyl tiglate
(2Z)-2-methyl-2-butenoate; E-Citronellyl tiglate

C091 Cedrenol 1H-3a,7-Methanoazulen-5-ol, octahydro-3,8,8-trimethyl-6-methylene-; Cedr-8(15)-en-9-ol

C092 2-Cedrene
C093 Caryophyllene alcohol 4,4,8-trimethyltricyclo[6.3.1.02,5]dodecan-1-ol
C094 Citronellyl decanoate
C095 Citronellyl dodecanoate
4-methyl-2-(2-phenylethenyl)-1,3-dioxolane; 4-Methyl-2-styryl-1,3-dioxolane; 1,3-Dioxolane,
C096 Cinnamaldehyde propyleneglycol acetal 4-methyl-2-(2-phenylethenyl)-

1230
Order General Name Synonyms
C097 (±)-1-Cyclohexylethanol (±)-Methylcyclohexylcarbinol; (±)-Cyclohexanemethanol
C098 L-Cysteine monohydrochloride* L-Cysteine hydrochloride
dl-1,7,7-Trimethylbicyclo[2.2.1]hepta-2-one;dl-2- Camphanone; dl-2-keto-1,7,7-Trimethylnorcamphane;
dl-Camphor
C099 (4S,R)-1,7,7-Trimethylbicyclo[2.2.1]heptan-2-one

C100 Cyclohexanone diethyl acetal Cyclohexanone diethyl acetal; Rhumacetal; 1,1-Diethoxycyclohexane

Cyclopropanecarboxylic acid
C101 (2-isopropyl-5-methyl-cyclohexyl)-amide N-(2-Isopropyl-5-methylcyclohexyl)cyclopropanecarboxamide

N-Cyclopropyl-5-methyl-2-isopropylcyclohexanecarbonec N-Cyclopropyl-5-methyl-2-(1-methylethyl)-cyclohexanecarboxamide;N-Cyclopropyl-5-methyl-2-(propan-2-yl)cyclo
C102 arboxamide hexanecarboximidicacid;Cyclohexanecarboxamide,N-cyclopropyl-5-methyl-2-(1-methylethyl)-

D001 Damascenone 1-(2,6,6,-Trimethyl-1,3-cyclohexadienyl)-2-buten-1-one; Floriffone; β-Damascone;

4-(2,6,6-Trimethylcyclohexa-1,3-dienyl)but-2-en-4-one; β-Damascenone
Damasione; Dihydro floriffone b; 4-(2,6,6-Trimethylcyclohex-1-enyl)but-2-en-4-one;
D002 β-Damascone
1-[(2,6,6)-Trimethyl-cyclohex-1-enyl]-but-2-en-1-one; tr-1-(2,6,6-Trimethyl-1-cyclohexen-1-yl)but-2-en-1-one

2-Buten-1-one, 1-(2-β-6,6-trimethyl-3-cyclohexen-1-α-yl); 1-(2,6,6-Trimethyl-3-

D003 delta-Damascone cyclohexen-1-yl)-2-butene-1-one

Dihydro floriffo; 2-Buten-1-one, 1-(2,6,6-trimethyl-2-cyclohexen-1-yl)-;

D004 α-Damascone 4-(2,6,6-Trimethyl-2-cyclohexenyl)-2-butene-4-one

Trans-1-2(2,6,6-trimethyl-2-cyclohexen-1-yl)but-2-en-1-one; 2-Buten-1-one,
D005 Trans-α-Damascone 1-(2,6,6-trimethyl-2-cyclohexen-1-yl)-, (2E)-

D006 2,4-Ddimethyl-5-acetylthiazole 2,4-Dimethyl-5-thiazoyl methyl ketone; 5-Acetyl-2,4-dimethylthiazole; 2,4-Dimethyl-5-acetylthiazole

3-Heptylacrolein; decenaldehyde; Decylenic aldehyde; n-Decene-2-al; trans-2-Decenal; Decenaldehyde;

D007 Dec-2-enal Decenaldehyde; 3-Heptylacrolein; Decylenic aldehyde; Dec-2-enal; 2-Decen-1-al

D008 (E,E)-2,4-Decadien-1-ol trans,trans-2,4-Decadienol; 2,4-Decanoic acid; Deca-2,4-dien-1-ol

1231
Order General Name Synonyms
Deca-2(trans),4(trans)-dienal; Heptenyl acrolein; 2,4-Decadienal; Deca-2,4-dienal; Heptenyl acrolein;
D009 2-trans,4-trans-Decadienal 2,3-Decadienal
4-Decanolide; 5-Hexyldihydro-2(3H)-furanone; 4-Hydroxydecanoic acid lactone; Deca-1,4-lactone;
D010 γ-Decalactone Decano-1,4-lactone; 4-Hydroxydecanoic acid, γ-lactone; 4-n-Hexyl-4-hydroxybutanoic acid lactone;
γ-n-Decalactone; Decanolide-1,4; γ-n-Hexyl-γ-butyrolactone

5-Decanolide; 6-Pentyltetrahydro-2-pyrone; Deca-1,5-lactone; Decano-1,5-lactone; Decanolide-1,4;

D011 delta-Decalactone γ-n-Hexyl-γ-butyrolactone; 5-Hydroxy-decanoic acid, δ-Lactone; 5-n-Amyl-5-hydroxypentanoic acid lactone;
Decanolide-1,5; Amyl-delta-valerolactone; delta-n-Amyl-delta-valerolactone

Capraldehyde; Aldehyde C-10; Capric aldehyde; Caprinaldehyde; n-Decylaldehyde; Decylic aldehyde; Decyl
D012 Decanal * aldehyde; n-Decanal

Aldehyde C-10 dimethyl acetal; Capraldehyde dimethyl acetal; Decyaldehyde dimethyl acetal; 1,1-Dimethoxy
D013 Decanal dimethyl acetal decane; 10,10-Dimethoxy decane

D014 Decanoic acid Capric aicd; Decylic acid

Nonylacarbinol; Decylic alcohol; Alcohol C-10; capric alcohol; Decyl alcohol; Nonyl carbinol; Decan-1-ol;
D015 1-Decanol * n-Decyl alcohol

D016 3-Decanol Ethyl heptyl carbinol; Heptyl ethyl carbinol

D017 3-Decanone Ethyl heptyl ketone

D018 2-trans-4-trans-7-cis-Decatrienal (2E,4E,7Z)-Decatrienal

D019 3-Decen-2-one Heptylidene acetone; Oenanthylidene acetone ; Dec-3-en-2-one; Enanthylidene acetone

D020 1-Decen-3-ol Heptyl ethenyl carbinol

D021 4-Decenal (Z)-dec-4-en-1-al; Decenaldehyde, Dec-4-enal (cis)

D022 9-Decenal

1232
Order General Name Synonyms
D023 9-Decenoic acid Dec-9-enoic acid

D024 4-Decenoic acid 4-Decenoic acid

D025 5- and 6-Decenoic acid (mixture) Dec-(5- and 6)-enoic acid; Decenoic acid; milk lactone

D026 cis-4-Decenyl acetate 4-Decen-1-ol, acetate, (Z)-dec-4-en-1-al

Decyl ethanoate; Acetate C-10; Decanyl acetate; n-Decyl ethanoate; 1-Acetoxydecane; Acetic acid decyl ester;
D027 Decyl acetate Decanol acetate

D028 Decyl butyrate Decyl butanoate; n-Decyl butanoate; 1-Butyroxy decane

D029 Decyl propionate Decyl propanoate; n-Decyl propanoate; 1-Propionoxy decane

D030 2-Decylfuran Furan, 2-decyl-

5,6-Dihydro-3,6-dimethylbenzofuran-2(4H)-one; 2(4H)-Benzofuranone, 5,6-dihydro-3,6-dimethyl-, (R)-;
D031 Dehydromenthofurolactone
3,6-Dimethyl-5,6-dihydro-2(4H)benzofuranone; 3,6-dimethyl-4,5-dihydro-6H-benzo(b) furan-2-one

4-(2,6,6-Trimethyl-1,3-cyclohexadienyl)-3-butan-2-ol; 1,3-Cyclohexadiene-1-propanol, α-2,6,6-tetramethyl-;

D032 Dehydrodihydroionol
α-2,6,6-tetramethyl-1,3-cyclohexadien-1-propanol

Dehydrodihydro-β-ionone; 3,4-Dehydrodihydro-β-ionone; 4-(2,6,6-Trimethylcyclohexadien-1-yl) 2-butanone;

D033 Dehydrodihydroionone Dehydrodihydroionone

5,6-Dimethyl-8-isopropenyl bicyclo[4.4.0]-1,9-decadien-3-one; 4.β.H,5.α.-eremophila-1(10),8,11-trien-2-one;

D034 Dehydronootkatone 8,9-didehydronootkatone

3,5,8,10-Tetraoxadodecane, 4,6,9-trimethyl-; Acetaldehyde ethyl propylene glycol mixed acetal;

D035 1,2-Di((1'-ethoxy)-ethoxy)propane 4,6,9-Trimethyl-3,5,8,10-tetraoxadodecane

D036 Di(butan-3-one-1-yl) sulfide Di-(3-oxobutyl)sulfide; bis(Butan-3-one-1-yl) sulfide

D037 Diacetyl Dimethyl diketone; Biacetyl; 2,3-Butanedione; 2,3-Diketobutane; Dimethylglyoxal; Dimethylglyoxal

Mixture of dially di-, tri-, tetra-, and pentasulfides; Polysulfides, diallyl; 2-Propenylpolysulfides; allyl
D038 Diallyl polysulfides polysulfides

1233
Order General Name Synonyms

D039 Diallyl trisulfide Allyl trisulfide; Prop-2-enyl-trithio prop-2-ene; Allyl trisulphide

D040 Dibenzyl ether Benzyl ether; Benzyl oxide

D041 Dibutyl sebacate Butyl sebacate; Dibutyl decanedioate; Dibutyl 1,8-octanedicarboxylate; n-Butyl sebacate
4-Butyl-4-octanolide; 5,5-Dibutyldihydro-2(3H)-furanone; 4-Butyl-4-hydroxyoctanoic acid lactone;
D042 4,4-Dibutyl-γ-butyrolactone 4-Butyloctano-1,4-lactone; 4-Butyl-4-hydroxyoctanoic acid, γ-lactone; Dibutyl butyrolactone;
4,4-Dibutyl-4-hydroxy-butyric acid, γ-lactone

D043 Dicyclohexyl disulfide Cyclohexyl disulfide; Disulfide, dicyclohexyl

D044 Diethyl disulfide Disulfide, diethyl; Ethyl disulfide; 3,4-dithiahexane; Ethyl disulphide; Ethyldithioethane

D045 Diethyl malate Diethyl 2-hydroxybutanedioate; d-Ethyl malate; Diethylhydroxysuccinate; Ethyl malate

D046 Diethyl malonate Ethyl propanedioate; Ethyl methanedicarboxylate; Ethyl malonate; Malonic ester

D047 Diethyl sebacate Ehyl decanedioate; Diethyl decanedioate; Diethyl 1,8-octanedicarboxylate; Ethyl sebacate

D048 Diethyl succinate Diethyl butanedioate; Diethyl ethanedicarboxylate; Ethyl succinate

Ethyl sulfide; 1-1'-Thiobisethane; 3-Thiapentane; Diethylthioether; Ethyl monosulfide; Ethyl thioether;Ethyl

D049 Diethyl sulfide thiothane;Thioethyl ether; Sulfodor; Ethane, 1,1-Thiobis-

D050 Diethyl tartrate Diethyl 2,3-dihydroxybutanedioate; Diethyl 2,3-dihydroxysuccinate; ethyl tartrate

D051 Diethyl trisulfide 1-Ethyltrisulfanylethane, 3,4,5-Trithiaheptane

Minture of 3,6-Diethyl-1,2,4,5-tetrathiane and
D052 3,5-diethyl-1,2,4-trithiolane 1,2,4,5-Tetrathiane, 3,6-diethyl- and 1,2,4-trithiolane, 3,5-diethyl-1,2,4-trithiolane

D053 cis-trans-3,5-Diethyl-1,2,4-trithiolane (+/-)-cis-and trans-3,5-Diethyl-1,2,4-trithiolane

D054 3,5-Diethyl-2-methylpyrazine Pyrazine, 3,5-diethyl-2-methyl-pyrazine; 2-Methyl-3,5-diethyl-1,4-diazine; 2,6-Diethyl-3-methylpyrazine

D055 2,5-Diethyl-3-methylpyrazine Pyrazine, 2,5-diethyl-3-methyl-pyrazine; 2,5-Diethyl-3-methyl-1,4-diazine

1234
Order General Name Synonyms
D056 2,3-Diethyl-5-methylpyrazine 2-Methyl-5,6-diethylpyrazine; 2,3-Diethyl-5-methyl-1,4-diazine

D057 2,3-Diethylpyrazine 2,3-Diethyl-1,4-diazine

D058 2,5-Diethyltetrahydrofuran Tetrahydrofuran, 2,5-diethyl-; Furan, 2,5-diethyltetrahydro-;

D059 Difurfuryl ether Furfuryl ether

D060 2,4-Difurfurylfuran Furan, 2,4-bis(2-furanylmethyl)-

D061 6,7-Dihydro-2,3-dimethyl-5H-cyclopentapyrazine 5H-Cyclopentapyrazine, 6,7-dihydro-2,3-dimethyl; (5H)-2,3-dimethyl-6,7- dihydrocyclopenta(B)pyrazine

D062 5,7-Dihydro-2-methylthieno(3,4-d)pyrimidine 5,7-Dihydro-2-methylthieno[3,4d]pyridine; Thieno(3,4d)pyrimidine, 5,7-dihydro-2-methyl

D063 4,5-Dihydro-3(2H)-thiophenone Tetrahydrothiophen-3-one; 3-Tetrahydrothiophenone; 3-thiophanone, 3-thiophane; Dihydrothiophenone

D064 Dihydro-α-ionone 2-Butanone, 4-(2,6,6-trimethyl-2-cyclohexen-1-yl; 4-(2,6,6-trimethyl-2-cyclohexen-1- yl)butan-2-one

D065 Dihydro-β-ionol 1-Cyclohexene-1-propanol, α,2,6,6-tetramethyl-; β-Dihydroionol; 4-(2,6,6- trimethyl-1-cyclohexenyl)butan-2-ol

D066 Dihydro-β-ionone 2-Butanone, 4-(2,6,6-trimethyl-1-cyclohexen-1-yl; 4-(2,6,6-Trimethyl-1- cyclohexenyl)buten-2-one

D067 Dihydrocarveol 8-p-Menthen-2-ol; 6-methyl-3-Isopropenylcyclohexanol; Tuberyl alcohol

p-Menth-8-en-2-one; 3-Isopropenyl-6-methylcyclohexanone; cis-Dihydrocarvone; cis-l-Dihydrocarvone;

D068 Dihydrocarvone 8-p-menthen-2-one; cis-p-Menthen-8(9)-one(2); 1-Methyl-4-isopropenyl cyclohexan-2-one; Cis-Dihydrocarvone;
cis-Menthen- 8(9)-one(2)

p-Menth-8(9)-em-2-yl acetate; Tuberyl acetate; 1-Methyl-4-isopropenylcyclohexan-2- yl acetate; Carhydrine;

D069 Dihydrocarvyl acetate 8-p-Menthen-2-yl; p-Menth-8-(9)-en-2-yl acetate; 6-Methyl-3-isopropenyl cyclohexyl acetate;
6-Methyl-3-(1-methylvinyl)cyclohexyl acetate; Dihydrocarveyl acetate

1,2-Benzodihydropyrone; Hydrocoumarin; o-Hydroxydihydrocinnamic acid lactone;

D070 Dihydrocoumarin 3,4-Dihydro-2h-1-benzopyran-2-one; 2-Chromanone; meliotine; Benzodihydropyrone; 3,4-Dihydrocoumarin;
Hydrocoumarin; Melilotic acid lactone; 2-Oxochroman

1235
Order General Name Synonyms

D071 (+/-)Dihydrofarnesol 3,7,11-Trimethyl-6,10-dodecadien-1-ol, (+/-); 2,3-Dihydrofarnesol,(+/-)

2-Pentyl-3-methyl-2-cyclopenten-1-one; 3-Methyl-2-pentylcyclopent-2-en-1-one; Dihydrojasmone;

D072 Dihydrojasmone 3-Methyl-2-(n-pentanyl)-2-cyclopentene-1-one
2(3H)-Benzofuranone, hexahydro-3,6-dimethyl; 3,6-Dimethylcyclohexylacetolactone;
D073 Dihydromintlactone
2-(2-Hydroxy-4-methylcyclohexy)propionic acid γ-lactone; (+/-)-Dihydromintlactone

D074 1,10-Dihydronootkatone Dihydronootkatone;1,4,4a,5,6,7,8,8a-octahydro-4,4a-dimethyl-6-isopropenyl-2(1H)-naphthalenone

D075 2,5-Dihydroxy-1,4-dithiane 1,4-Dithiane-2,5-diol; Mercaptoacetaldehyde dimer; p-dithiane-2,5-diol

2-Propanone, 1,3-dihydroxy(monomer); 1,3-Dihydroxyacetone; α,α-Dihydroxyacetone(monomer);

D076 Dihydroxyacetone (Bis)hydroxymethylketone(monomer); Chromelin(monomer);1,4-Dioxan-2,5-dimethanol,2,5-dihydroxy-,trans(dimeric
form)

1-(x,y-Dihydroxyphenyl) ethanone; dioxyacetophenone; 2,4-Dihydroxyacetophenone; 1-Phenyletanone, Dihydroxy

D077 Dihydroxyacetophenone derivative; Dihydroxyphenyl methyl ketone; 1-(dihydroxyphenyl)ethanone; 1-Ethanone

D078 2,4-Dihydroxybenzoic acid β-Resorcylic acid; 4-carboxyresorcinol; β-Resorcinolic acid; p-Hydroxysalicylic acid

D079 Diisopentyl thiomalate Butanedioic acid, nercapto-, bis(3-methylbutyl) ester; bis(3-Methylbutyl)- mercaptosuccinate

D080 Diisopropyl disulfide Isopropyl disulfide; 2,5-Dimethyl-3,4-dithiahexane; bis(1-Methylethyl)disulfide; Disulfide, bis(1-methylethyl)

D081 Diisopropyl trisulfide Bis(1-methylethyl)trisulfide; 2,6-Dimethyl-3,4,5-trithiaheptane

D082 Dimercaptomethane Methanedithiol

D083 3,4-Dimethoxy-1-vinylbenzene 3,4-Dimethoxystyrene; 1,2-Dimethoxy-4-vinylbenzene

D084 M-Dimethoxybenzene 1,3-Dimethoxybenzene; Dimethylresorcinol; Resorcinol dimethyl ether

1236
Order General Name Synonyms
Dimethylbenzyl carbinyl acetate; 1,4-Dimethoxybenzene; Dimethyl hydroquinone; Hydroquinone dimethyl ether;
D085 p-Dimethoxybenzene 4-Methoxyphenyl methyl ether

D086 1,2-Dimethoxybenzene Veratrole; o-Dimethyoxybenzene; Catechol dimethyl ether

N1-(2,4-Dimethoxybenzyl)-N2-(2-(pyridin-2-yl)ethyl)oxal
D087 Ethanediamide, N-[(2,4-dimethoxyphenyl)methyl]-N -(2-(2-pyridinyl)ethyl]-
amide
D088 1,1-Dimethoxyethane Acetaldehyde dimethyl acetal; Dimethyl acetal; Ethylidene dimethyl ether

D089 2,6-Dimethoxyphenol 2-Hydroxy-1,3-dimethoxybenzene; syringol; pyrogallol dimethyl ether; Pirogallol, 1,3-dimethyl ether; Syringol

1,1-Imethoxy-E-2-hexene; 2-hexene, 1,1-dimethoxy-,(2E)-; 2-Hexene, 1,1-dimethoxy-, (E)-; (E)-2-Hexenal

D090 1,1-Dimethoxy-trans-2-hexene dimethyl acetal; trans-20-Hexenal dimethyl acetal

1,3-Dimethyl-4-methoxybenzene; 2,4-Dimethyl-1-methoxybenzene; 1-Methoxy-2,4-dimethylbenzene;

D091 2,4-Dimethyl anisole
4-methoxy-m-xylene

Methyl N-methylanthranilate; Dimethyl anthranilate; 2-Methylamino methyl benzoate; Methyl

D092 Dimethyl anthranilate 2-Methylamonobenzoate; Methyl o-Methylaminobenzoate
Benzyl dimethyl carbinyl butyrate; Dmbc butyrate; 2-Benzyl-2-propyl butyrate; 1,1-Dimethyl-2-phenethyl
D093 Dimethyl benzyl carbinyl butyrate butyrate; 2-benzyl-2-propyl butyrate; DMBC butyrate; 2-Methyl-1-phenyl-2-propyl butyrate;
α,α-Dimethylphenethyl butyrate

D094 Dimethyl disulfide Methyldisulfide; Methyl disulphide

Butanoic acid, 4-(Dimethylamino-4-oxo-, (1R,2S,5R)-5-methyl-2-(1-methylethyl)- cyclohexyl ester; Butanoic

D095 (+/-)-N,N-Dimethyl menthyl succinamide
acid, 4-(dimethylamino)-4-oxo-,[1R-(1 α, 2 β, 5 α)]-5-methyl-2-(1-methylethyl)cyclohexyl ester

2,5-Dimethyl-4-methoxy-3(2H)-furanone; 4-Methoxy-2,5-dimethyl-3(2H)-furanone; Furaneol methyl ether;

D096 Dimethyl methoxy furanone Mesifurane; 4-Methoxy-2,5-dimethyl-3-furanone

D097 2,6-Dimethyl octanal Isodecylaldehyde

2-Methyl-4-pheny-2-butyl acetate; 1,1-Dimethyl-3-phenylpropan-1-yl acetate; 1,1-Dimethyl-3-phenylpropyl

D098 Dimethyl phenethyl carbinyl acetate acetate; Dimethyl phenethyl carbinyl acetate
D099 Dimethyl phenethyl carbinyl isobutyrate 2-Methyl-4-pheny-2-butyl isobutyrate; 2-Methyl-4-phenyl-2-butyl 2-methylpropanoate; phenylethyl dimethyl

1237
Order General Name Synonyms
carbinyl isobutyrate; 1,1-Dimethyl-3-phenylpropyl isobutyrate; Dimethyl phenethyl carbinyl isobutyrate

D100 Dimethyl succinate Dimethyl butanedioate; Methyl succinate; Methyl butanedioate

D101 Dimethyl trisulfide Methyl trisulfide; Methyl trithio methane; Methyl trisulphide

D102 2,6-(Dimethyl)thiophenol Benzenethiol, 2,6-dimethyl-; 2,6-dimethylbenzenethiol; 2,5-xylenethiol

D103 3,5-Dimethyl-1,2,4-trithiolane 1,2,4-Trithiolane, 3,5-dimethyl-; 2,5-dimethyl-1,3,4-trithiolane; 3,5-dimethyl-1,2,4- trithiaclopentane

D104 3,4-Dimethyl-1,2-cyclo-pentadione 2-Hydroxy-3,4-dimethyl-2-cyclopenten-1-one

D105 3,5-Dimethyl-1,2-cyclo-pentadione

D106 3,7-Dimethyl-1,3,6,-octatriene β-Ocimene; Ocimene; trans-β-ocimene; 1,3,6-octatriene, 3,7-dimethyl-

Pyrazine, 3,5-dimethyl-3-(2-methylpropyl)- and pyrazine, 3,6-dimethyl-3-(2- methylpropyl)-;
D107 3,5- and 3,6-Dimethyl-1,3-dimethyl-2-isobutylpyrazine 3,5-Dimethyl-3-(2-methylpropyl)-1,4-diazine and 3,6-dimethyl-3- (2-methylpropyl)-1,4-diazine

D108 2,4-Dimethyl-1,3-dioxolane 1,3-Dioxolane, 2,4-dimethyl-; Acetaldehyde cyclic propylene glycol acetal; Propylene acetal

D109 (E,R)-3,7-Dimethyl-1,5,7-octatrien-3-ol 3,7-Dimethylocta-1,5,7-trien-3-ol; Hotrienol; Dehydrolinalool; (E)-3,7-dimethyl-1,5,7-octatrien-3-ol

D110 2,6-Dimethyl-10-methylene-2,6,11-dodecatrienal

D111 3,7-Dimethyl-1-octanol 3,7-Dimethylcotanol; Dihydrocitronellol; Tetrahydrogeraniol

D112 2,5-Dimethyl-2,5-dihydroxy-1,4-dithiane 2,5-Dihydroxy-2,5-dimethyl-1,4-dithiane; 2,5-Dimethyl-2,5-dihydroxy-p-dithiane

Geranyl 2-ethyl butyrate; trans-3,7-Dimethyl-2,6-octadien-1-yl 2-ethylbutanoate; 3,7-Dimethylocta-2,6-dienyl
D113 3,7-Dimethyl-2,6-octadien-1-yl 2-ethylbutanoate 2-ethylbutanoate

D114 2-(3,7-Dimethyl-2,6-octadienyl)cyclopentanone (E)-2-(3,7-Dimethyl-2,6-octadienyl)cyclopentanone; Decenylcyclopentanone; Geranylcyclopentanone

D115 4,5-Dimethyl-2-ethyl-3-thiazoline 2-Ethyl-4,5-dimethyl-3-thiazoline; 2-Ethyl-2,5-dihydro-4,5-dimethylthiazole

1238
Order General Name Synonyms
2,5-Dihydro-4,5-dimethyl-2-(2-methylpro-pyl) thiazole; 2-Isobutyl-4,5-dimethyl- 3-thiazoline;
D116 4,5-Dimethyl-2-isobutyl-3-thiazoline 4,5-Dimethyl-2-(2-methylpropyl)-3-thiazoline; 3-Thiazoline, 4,5-
dimethyl-2-(2-methylpropyl)-

D117 2,4-Dimethyl-2-pentenoic acid

3(2H)-Furanone, 2,5-dimethyl-; 2,3-Dihydro-2,5-dimethyl-3-furanone; 2,5-Dimethyl-2,3-dihydrofuran-3-one;

D118 2,5-Dimethyl-3(2H)-furanone 2,5-Dimethyl-2H-furan-3-one

D119 (+/-)-trans- and cis-4,8-Dimethyl-3,7-nonadien-2-ol (+/-)E- and Z-4,8-Dimethyl-3,7-nonadien-2-ol; 3,7-Nonadien-2-ol, 4,8-dimethyl- (E,Z)-

D120 (E) & (Z)-4,8-Dimethyl-3,7-nonadien-2-one Citronone

(+/-)-trans- and cis-4,8-Dimethyl-3,7-nonadien-2-yl

D121 acetate (+/-)E- and Z-4,8-Dimethyl-3,7-nonadien-2-yl; Acetate; 3,7-Nonadien-2-ol, 4,8-dimethyl-, acetate (E,Z)-

1,3-Diisopropylacetonyl 2-methyl-3-furyl sulfide; 4-Heptanone, 2,6-dimethyl-3-[(2- methyl-3-furanyl)thiol]-;

D122 2,6-Dimethyl-3-[(2-methyl-3-furyl)thio]-4-heptanone 3-((2-Methyl-3-furyl)thio)-2,6-dimethyl-4-heptanone

2,5-Dimethyl-3-(isopentylthio)furan; S-(2,5-Dimethyl-3-furyl) 3-methylbutanethioate;

D123 2,5-Dimethyl-3-furan thioisovalerate S-(2,5-dimethyl-3-furyl)thioisovalerate; 2,5-Dimethyl-3-thioisovaleryfuran

D124 2,5-Dimethyl-3-furanthiol 2,5-Dimethyl-3-furylmercaptan; 2,5-Dimethyl-3-mercaptofuran

Ethanethioic acid, S-(2,5-dimethyl-3-furanyl)ester; S-(2,5-Dimethyl-3-furyl)- ethanethioate;

S-(2,5-Dimethylfuran-3-yl)ethanethioate; S-(2,5-Dimethylfur-3- yl)thioacetate; Thioacetic acid
D125 2,5-Dimethyl-3-furanthiol acetate S-(2,5-dimethylfuran-3-yl)ester; 2,5-Dimethyl-3-t hioacetoxyfuran; 3-Thioacetyl-2,5-dimethylfuran;
3-Acetylthio-2,5-dimethylfuran; 3-(Acetylthio)-2,5-dimethylfuran

D126 bis-(2,5-Dimethyl-3-furyl) disulfide 3,3(1)-Dithiobis(2,5-dimethylfuran); Furan, 3,3"-dithiolbis[2,5-dimethyl]-

3-Hydroxy-4,5-dimethyl-2(5H)-furanone; 3-Hydroxy-4,5-dimethylfuran-2(5H)-one;
D127 4,5-Dimethyl-3-hydroxy-2,5-dihydrofuran-2-one 2,3-Dimethyl-4-Hydroxy-2,5-dihydrofuran-5-one; 3-Hydroxy-4, 5-dimethyl-2(5)-furanone;
2-Hydroxy-3-methyl-2-penten-4-olide; Sugar lactone; 2-Hydroxy-3-methylpent-2-en-1,4-lactone

1239
Order General Name Synonyms

D128 2,5-Dimethyl-3-oxo-(2H)-fur-4-yl butyrate Butanoic acid, 4,5-Dihydro-2,5-dimethyl-4-oxo-3-furanyl ester; 4-Butyroxy-2,5-dimethyl-3(2H)-furanone

D129 2,5-Dimethyl-3-thiofuroylfuran S-(2,5-Dimethyl-3-furyl)thio-2-furoate; 3-Furancarbothioic acid S-(2,5-dimethyl-3-furanyl) ester

D130 1,4-Dimethyl-4-acetyl-1-cyclohexene 1-(1,4-Dimethylcyclohex-3-en-1-yl)ethan-1-one; 1,4-Dimethylcyclohex-3-enyl methyl ketone

3(2H)-Furanone, 4-ethoxy-2,5-dimethyl-; 2,3-Dihydro-2,5-dimethyl-4-ethoxy-3- furanone;

D131 2,5-Dimethyl-4-ethoxyfuran-3(2H)-one 2,5-Dimethyl-2,3-dihydro-4-ethoxyfuran-3-one; 2,5-Dimethyl-4-ethoxy-2H- furan-3-one

D132 2,6-Dimethyl-4-heptanol Di-isobutyl carbinol; 4-Hydroxy-2,6-dimethyl heptane; Di-isobutyl carbinol

D133 2,6-Dimethyl-4-heptanone Di-isobutyl ketone; 4-Heptanone, 2,6-dimethyl; Isobutyl ketone; isovalerone; iso-Nonanone

Citroxide; Furan, tetrahydro-2,2-dimethyl-5-(1-methyl-1-propenyl)-; Ocimen quintoxide; Tetrahydrofuran,

D134 2,2-Dimethyl-5-(1-methylpropen-1-yl)tetrahydrofuran
2,2-dimethyl-5-(1-methyl-1-propenyl)-

2,6-Dimethyl-2,6-undecadien-10-one; Geranyl acetone; 5,9-Undecadien-2-one, 6,10-dimethyl-, (E);

D135 6,10-Dimethyl-5,9-undecadien-2-one
(E)-6,10-dimethylundeca-5,9-dien-2-one; α,β-Dihydropseudoionone

D136 2,6-Dimethyl-5-heptenal 2,6-Dimethylhept-5-1-al; 2,6-Dimethyl-2-hepten-7-al; Melonal

D137 2,4-Dimethyl-5-vinylthiazole

D138 2,6-Dimethyl-6-hepten-1-ol 2,6-Dimethylhept-7-en-1-ol; α-Melonol

D139 3,7-Dimethyl-6-octenoic acid Citronellic acid; Rhodinolic acid; Rhodinic acid

D140 (S)-3,7-Dimethyl-7-octen-1-ol
D141 2,4-Dimethylacetophenone Acetyl-m-xylene; Methyl 2,4-dimethylphenyl ketone; 1-(2,4-Dimethylphenyl)ethanone

1240
Order General Name Synonyms
D142 2,4-Dimethylbenzaldehyde 2,4-Xylylaldehyde; 1-Formyl-2,4-dimethylbenzene

D143 2,3-Dimethylbenzofuran Benzofuran, 2,3-dimethyl-

p-Tolyl methyl carbinol; Methyl-p-tolyl carbinol; 1-p-Tolyl-1-ethanol; 4-(α-Hydroxyethyl)toluene;
D144 p-α-Dimethylbenzyl alcohol 4-Methyl-α-phenethyl alcohol; 1-(4-Methylphenyl)ethanol, 1-p-Tolylethanol; 1-(p- Tolyl)ethan-1-ol; 4-Toluene

D145 a,a-Dimethylbenzyl isobutyrate Phenyldimethylcarbinyl isobutyrate.

(+/-)-trans- and (+/-)E- and Z-5-(2,2-Dimethylcyclopropyl)-3-metyl-2-pentenal; 2-Pentenal,

D146 cis-5-(2,2-Dimethylcyclopropyl)-3-methyl-2-pentenal 5-(2,2-dimethylcyclopropyl)-3-methyl-(E,Z)-; Acitral
p-Tert-butyl 4-tert-butylphenol; p-Tert-butylphenol, 4-Tert-butylphenol; p-Tert-butylphenol;
D147 4-(1,1-Dimethylethyl)phenol 1-Hydroxy-4-tert-butylbenzene

D148 2,5-Dimethylfuran Furan, 2,5-dimethyl-

D149 2,6-Dimethyloctanal Isodecanal; Decylaldehyde(ISO); 2,6-Dimethyl octanoic aldehyde; isoaldehyde C-10; isodecylaldehyde
Dimethyl benzyl carbinyl acetate; 2-Benzyl-2-propylate; 1,1-Dimethyl-2-phenethyl acetate;
D150 α,α-Dimethylphenethyl acetate Benzyldimethylcarbinyl acetate; Benzylpropyl acetate; 2-Benzyl-2-propyl acetate; 2-Methyl-1-phenyl-2-propyl
acetate

D151 α,α-Dimethylphenethyl alcohol Dimethylbenzyl carbinol

D152 α,α-Dimethylphenethyl butyrate Benzyldimethylcarbinyl butyrate

D153 α,α-Dimethylphenethyl formate Benzyldimethylcarbinyl formate

Benzenemethanamine, N,N-α-trimethyl-, (R)-; Benzylamine, N,N,α-trimethyl-, L-(+)-;
(+)-(R)-N,N-Dimethyl-α-phenethylamine; (+)-N,N, α-Trimethylbenzylamine;
D154 N,N-Dimethylphenethylamine (+)-N,N-Dimethyl-α-methylbenzylamine; (R)-(+)-N,N-Dimethyl-1-phenethylamine;
(R)-α-Methylbenzyldimethylamine; (R)-Dimethyl(1-phenylethyl)amine; (R)-N,N-Dimethyl-1-phenethylamine;
(R)-[1-(Dimethylamino)ethyl]benzene

2-Benzyl-2-propanol; 2-Hydroxy-2-methyl-1-phenylpropane; α,α-Dimethylphenethanol; Benzyl dimethyl

D155 α,α-Dimethylphenylethyl alcohol carbinol; Dimethyl benzyl carbinol; 1,1-Dimethyl-2-phenylethanol; 2-Methyl-1-phenyl-propanol-2; 2- Methyl-1-
phenylpropan-2-ol; 2-Benzyl-2-propanol; 2-Hydroxy-2-methyl-1- phenylpropanone

1241
Order General Name Synonyms

2-Benzyl-2-propyl formate; 2-Methyl-1-phenyl-2-propyl formate; Benzyl dimethylcarbinyl formate;

D156 α,α-Dimethylphenylethyl formate Dimethylbenzylcarbinyl formate; α,α-Dimethylphenethyl formate

D157 2,3-Dimethylpyrazine 2,3-Dimethyl-1,4-diazine

D158 2,5-Dimethylpyrazine 2,5-Dimethylpiazine; 2,5-Dimethylparadiazine; 2,5-Dimethyl-1,4-diazine; glycoline

D159 2,6-Dimethylpyrazine 2,6-Dimethylparadiazine; 2,6-Dimethylpiazine; 2,6-Dimethyl-1,4-diazine; 2,6-Dimethyl-p-diazine

D160 2,6-Dimethylpyridine 2,6-Lutidine

p-Propenyl iso benzene; 1-Isopropenyl-4-methylbenzene; p-Isopropenyl toluene;

D161 p-α-Dimethylstyrene 1-Methyl-4-isopropenylbenzene; 2-p-Tolyl propene; 4-α-Dimethylstyrene; dehydro-p-cymene

2,5-Dimethyltetrahydro-3-furyl thioacetate, cis and trans-2,5-Dimethyltetrahydro-3-furyl thioacetate; Ethanethioic acid,

D162 cis and trans isomers S-(tetrahydro-2,5-dimethylfuranyl)ester; S-(2,5-dimethyl)tetrahydrofuran-3-yl thioacetate

2,5-Dimethyltetrahydrofuran-3-thiol, cis and trans

D163 isomers cis & trans 2,5-Dimethyltetrahydrofuran-3-thiol; Tetrahydro-2,5-dimethylfuran-3-thiol

D164 4,5-Dimethylthiazole

D165 2,5-Dimethylthiazole

D166 Diphenyl ether Phenyl ether; Diphenyl oxide

D167 1,3-Diphenyl-2-propanone α,α-1-Diphenylacetone; Benzyl ketone; Dibenzyl ketone; α,α-Diphenylacetone

D168 Dipropyl disulfide Propyldithiopropane; di-n-propyl disulfide; 1-Propyl disulfide; Propyl disulfide

D169 Dipropyl trisulfide Propyl trisulfide; Propyl trithio propane; Propyl trisulphide

1242
Order General Name Synonyms
D170 Disodium succinate Succinic acid, disodium salt; Sodium succinate; Hept-2-enoic acid; Disodium butanedioic acid

D171 1,4-Dithiane p-Dithiane; 1,4-Dithiacyclohexane; Tetrahydro-1,4-dithiin; Diethylene disulfide

Methialdol; 5-(Methylthio)-2-(methyl-thio) methylpent-2-en-1-al; 2-Pentenal,

D172 2,8-Dithianon-4-ene-4-carboxaldehyde
5-(methyl-thio-2-[(methylthio)methyl]-2-pentenal
2-Furfuryl disulfide; Methyl 2-furylmethyl disulfide; Furfuryl methyl disulfide; Bis (2-furfuryl) disulfide;
D173 2,2'-(Dithiodimethylene)difuran difurfuryl Disulfide; Furfuryl disulfide; Difurfuryl disufide
[1,1 -Biphenyl]-3,3 -dicarboxaldehyde, 6,6-dihydroxy-5,5 -dimethoxy-; 3,3 -Biphenyl-dicarboxaldehyde, 6,6
D174 Divanillin -dihydroxy-5,5 -dimethoxy-; 6,6 -Dihydroxy-5,5 -dimethoxybiphenyldicarboxaldehyde; 2,2 -Dihydroxy-3,3
-dimethoxy-5,5 -diformylbiphenyl; 5,5 -Bivanillin; Dehydrodivanillin

D175 2-trans-6-cis-Dodecadienal 2,6-Dodecadienal,(E.Z)-; Dodeca-2,6-dienal

D176 trans,trans-2,4-Dodecadienal (E,E)-2,4-dodecadienal; Dodeca-2,4-dienal

4-Dodecanolide; 5-Octyldihydro-2(3H)-furanone; Dodeca-1,4-lactone; 4-n-Octyl-4-hydroxybutanoic acid lactone;
D177 γ-Dodecalactone Dodecano-1,4-lactone; Dodecanolide-1; 4-Hydroxydodecanoic acid, γ-lactone; γ-Octyl-γ-butyrolactone;
γ-n-Octyl-γ-n-butyrolactone; Dodecanolide-1,4

5-Dodecanolide; 6-Heptyltetrahydro-2-pyrone; Dodeca-1,5-lactone; Dodecanolide-1,5; Dodecano-1,5-lactone;

D178 delta-Dodecalactone n-Heptyl-δ-valerolactone; 5-Hydroxydodecanoic acid, δ-lactone; delta-n-Heptyl-delta-valerolactone;
delta-Heptyl-delta-valerolactone; Dodecanolide-1,5

D179 trans-2-Dodecenal 2-Dodecenal; 3-Nonylacrolein; 2-Dodecenal; n-Dodecenal; Dodec-2-enal

D180 (Z)-4-Dodecenal cis-4-Dodecenal; Tangerinal

D181 2-Dodecenoic acid (E)-2-Decenoic acid, trans-2-Decenoic acid; 2-Decenoic acid

Dodecyl 2-methylpropanoate; Lauryl isobutyrate; Lauryl 2-methylpropanoate; Propanoic acid, 2-methyl-,
D182 Dodecyl isobutyrate dodecyl ester; Lauryl 2-methylpropionate

1243
Order General Name Synonyms

Oxalic acid, diethyl ester; Diethyl ethanedioate; Ethyl oxalate; Diethyl ester kyseliny stavelove; Diethyl ester of
D183 Diethyl oxalate
oxalic acid; Diethyl ester, oxalic acid; Oxalic ether;Ethanedioic acid, diethyl ester

Benzene, 1,1'-methylenebis-; Methane, diphenyl-; Benzene, (phenylmethyl)-; Benzylbenzene; Ditan; Ditane;

D184 Diphenylmethane Benzene, benzyl-; Toluene, α-phenyl-; 1,1'-Dimethylenebis(benzene)

Ethyl carbonate; Diatol; Ethoxyformic anhydride; Diaethylcarbonat;Diethyl ester of carbonic acid;Carbonic acid,
D185 Diethyl carbonate
diethyl ester

2,4-Xylenol; m-Xylenol; 1-Hydroxy-2,4-dimethylbenzene; 4-Hydroxy-1,3-dimethylbenzene; 4,6-Dimethylphenol;

D186 2,4-Dimethylphenol
1,3-Dimethyl-4-hydroxybenzene; 1,2,4-Xylenol;Phenol, 2,4-dimethyl-
Acetaldehyde, dipropyl acetal; Acetaldehyde di-n-propyl acetal; Dipropyl acetal; n-Propyl acetal;
D187 1,1-Dipropoxyethane 1-(1-Propoxyethoxy)propane;Ethane, 1,1-dipropoxy;Propane, 1,1'-[ethylidenebis(oxy)]bis-

D188 2,4-Dimethylpyridine 2,4-Lutidine; α,γ-Dimethylpyridine; 2,4-Lutidene;Pyridine, 2,4-dimethyl-

Malonic acid, dimethyl ester; Dimethyl propanedioate; Methyl malonate; Dimethyl ester of malonic
D189 Dimethyl malonate
acid;Propanedioic acid, dimethyl ester
Dimethyl formal; Anesthenyl; Formal; Formaldehyde dimethyl acetal; Methoxymethyl methyl ether; Methylal;
Methylene dimethyl ether; Methylene glycol dimethylether; Formaldehyde dimethyl; Methylenedioxydimethane;
D190 Dimethoxymethane Formaldehyde methyl ketal; 2,4-Dioxapentane; Methyl formal; Dimethylacetal formaldehyde;Methane,
dimethoxy-

Glutaraldehyde; Pentanedial; Glutural; Glutardialdehyde; Glutaric acid dialdehyde; Glutaric aldehyde; Glutaric
D191 1,3-Diformylpropane dialdehyde; 1,5-Pentanedione; Glutaraldehyd; Glutarol;Glutaclean; Sterihyde; Dioxopentane; Glutaralum;
Gluteraldehyde; Pentane-1,5-dial; Potentiated acid glutaraldehyde;Glutaral;1,5-Pentanedial

Propyl sulfide; Dipropyl thioether; Propyl monosulfide; 4-Thiaheptane; 1,1'-Thiobispropane; n-Propyl sulfide;
D192 Dipropyl sulfide
di-n-Propyl sulfide; Sulfide, n-propyl-; 1-(Propylsulfanyl)propane;Propane, 1,1'-thiobis-

D193 Dodecane Adakane 12; Bihexyl; Dihexyl; n-Dodecane min; Duodecane;n-Dodecane

1244
Order General Name Synonyms
α-Dodecene; n-Dodec-1-ene; Adacene 12; α-Dodecylene; Dodecylene α-;
D194 Dodec-1-ene Dodecene-1;1-Dodecene;Tetrapropylene
Acetaldehyde diphenylethylacetal; (2-[1-(2-Phenylethoxy)ethoxy]ethyl)benzene;Benzene,
D195 1,1-Diphenethoxyethane 1,1'-[ethylidenebis(oxy-2,1-ethanediyl)]bis-;Phenylethylacetal

D196 Dimethylamine N-Methylmethanamine; N,N-Dimethylamine;Methanamine, N-methyl-

Benzaldehyde, 3,4-dihydroxy-; 3,4-Dihydroxybenzenecarbonal; 1,2-Dihydroxy-4-formylbenzene;

D197 3,4-Dihydroxybenzaldehyde
4-Formyl-1,2-dihydroxybenzene; Protocatechualdehyde; Protocatechuic aldehyde;4-Formyl-1,2-benzenediol
Butanedioic acid, dibutyl ester; Succinic acid, dibutyl ester;
D198 Dibutyl succinate Di-n-butyl succinate; Succinic acid di-n-butyl ester

D199 Diethyl maleate Maleic acid, diethyl ester; Ethyl maleat;Diethyl (2Z)-2-butenedioate;2-Butenedioic acid (Z)-, diethyl ester
Adipic acid, diethyl ester; Diethyl hexanedioate; Ethyl δ-carboethoxyvalerate; Ethyl adipate; Diethyl adipatate;
D200 Diethyl adipate
1,6-Diethyl hexanedioate; Diethylester kyseliny adipove;Hexanedioic acid, diethyl ester

Methane, diethoxy-; Ethane, 1,1'-[methylenebis(oxy)]bis-; Diethylformal; Ethoxymethyl ethyl ether; Ethylal;

D201 Diethoxymethane Formaldehyde diethyl acetal;1-(Ethoxymethoxy)ethane;1,1-Diethoxy methane

Pinacolyl alcohol; tert-Butyl Methyl carbinol; 2,2-Dimethyl-3-butanol; 3,3-Dimethyl-2-butanol; Pinacolyl

D202 3,3-Dimethylbutan-2-ol
alcohol-tert-butyl methylcarbinol;2-Butanol, 3,3-dimethyl-

D203 3,4-Dimethylpyridine 3,4-Lutidine; 3,4-Lutidene;Pyridine, 3,4-dimethyl-

D204 2,3-Dimethylpyridine 2,3-Lutidine;Pyridine, 2,3-dimethyl-

D205 2,4-Dimethylhexane Hexane, 2,4-dimethyl-
D206 2,2-Dimethylhexane Hexane, 2,2-dimethyl-
D207 3,5-Dimethylpyridine 3,5-Lutidine;Pyridine, 3,5-dimethyl-
Fumaric acid, diethyl ester; Ethyl fumarate; 2-Butenedioic acid, diethyl ester, (E)-; Diethylester kyseliny
D208 Diethyl Fumarate fumarove; Diethyl ester of (E)-2-Butenedioic acid; Diethyl (2E)-2-butenedioate;2-Butenedioic acid (E)-, diethyl
ester

D209 Diethyl nonanedioate Nonanedioic acid, diethyl ester; Azelaic acid, diethyl ester; Diethyl azelaate;Diethyl azelate

1245
Order General Name Synonyms
D210 2,5-Dimethylthiophene Thiophene, 2,5-dimethyl-
cis-Allo-ocimene; Neo-allo-ocimene; allo-3,7-dimethyl-1,3,6-octatriene (allo-ocimene);
D211 2,6-Dimethylocta-2,4,6-triene neo-allo-3,7-dimethyl-1,3,6-octatriene (neo-allo-ocimene);2,4,6-Octatriene,
2,6-dimethyl-;Allo-Ocimene;(4E,6E)-2,6-Dimethyl-2,4,6-octatriene

D212 1,1-Diethoxyheptane Heptanal, diethyl acetal; Heptaldehyde diethyl acetal; n-Heptanal diethyl acetal;Heptane, 1,1-diethoxy-

D213 2-Decanone Decan-2-one; Methyl octyl ketone; Methyl n-octyl ketone; Octyl methyl ketone

D214 Di-isopentyl succinate Succinic acid, diisopentyl ester

Glutaric acid, diethyl ester; Diethyl glutarate; Ethyl glutarate; Propane-1,3-dicarboxylic acid diethyl
D215 Diethyl pentanedioate ester;Pentanedioic acid, diethyl ester
Butane, 1,1'-[ethylidenebis(oxy)]bis-; Acetaldehyde, dibutyl acetal; Di-n-butyl acetal; Ethane, 1,1-dibutoxy-;
D216 1,1-Dibutoxyethane
1,1-Di-n-butoxyethane; Dibutyl acetal; 1-(1-Butoxyethoxy)butane;6-Methyl-5,7-dioxaundecane

D217 1,1-Dimethoxyhexane Hexane, 1,1-dimethoxy-; hexanal dimethyl acetal

Hexahydropseudoionone; Pseudoionone, hexahydro-; Tetrahydrogeranylacetone;

D218 6,10-Dimethylundecan-2-one 6,10-Dimethyl-2-undecanone;2-Undecanone, 6,10-dimethyl-

D219 1,2-Dihydrolinalool 6-Octen-3-ol, 3,7-dimethyl-; 3,7-Dimethyl-6-octen-3-ol; Dihydrolinalol

D220 2,6-Dimethyloct-6-en-3-one

D221 Dodecyl butyrate 1-Dodecanol, butanoate; Butanoic acid, dodecyl ester;Butyric acid, dodecyl ester

D222 1,1-Diethoxypropane Propionaldehyde, diethyl acetal; Propanaldiethylacetal;Propane, 1,1-diethoxy-

D223 1,1-Dihexyloxyethane

D224 Decanal propyleneglycol acetal

Acetaldehyde, diisobutyl acetal; Propane, 1,1'-[ethylidenebis(oxy)]bis*2-methyl-;
D225 1,1-Di-isobutoxyethane
1-(1-Isobutoxyethoxy)-2-methylpropane; Diisobutyl acetal; Ethane, 1,1-diisobutyloxy

D226 Dimethyl tetrasulfide Dimethyl tetrasulphide; 1,4-Dimethyltetrasulfane;Tetrasulfide, dimethyl

1246
Order General Name Synonyms
D227 3,7-Dimethyloctanal Tetrahydrocitral;Octanal, 3,7-dimethyl-
D228 Dodecan-2-one Decyl methyl ketone; Methyl decyl ketone; Dodecanone-(2);2-Dodecanone
D229 Dodecyl propionate Propanoic acid, dodecyl ester
1,2-Bis(methylmercapto)ethane; 1,2-Bis(methylthio)ethane; 1,2-Bis(methylsulfanyl)ethane;Ethane,
D230 2,5-Dithiahexane 1,2-bis(methylthio)-

D231 2,3-Dihydrofarnesene

D232 Dodecan-2-ol Dodecanol-2;2-Dodecanol

D233 1,1-Dipentyloxyethane
D234 1,1-Di-isobutoxypropane Propanal di-isobutyl acetal
D235 Dec-9-en-1-ol ω-Decen-1-ol; Decylenic alcohol; 9-Decenol; ω-Decenol; 1-Decen-10-ol;9-Decen-1-ol

D236 1,1-Di-isobutoxy-2-methylpropane

D237 1,1-Di-isobutoxypentane Valeraldehyde di-isobutyl acetal; Pentanal diisobutyl acetal

D238 1,1-Di-isobutoxy-3-methylbutane Butane, 1,1-diisobutoxy-3-methyl-
D239 1,1-Di-(2-methylbutoxy)ethane Acetaldehyde di(2-methylbutyl)acetal
1,1-Dimethoxydodecane; Dodecanal dimethyl acetal; Lauryl aldehyde dimethyl acetal;Dodecane,
D240 Dodecanal dimethyl acetal 1,1-dimethoxy-;Lauraldehyde, dimethyl acetal;n-Dodecanal dimethyl acetal
3,7-Dimethyl-1-octen-7-ol; Dihydromyrcenol; 2,6-Dimethyl-oct-7-en-2-ol; Mircenol, 6,10-dihydro;7-Octen-2-ol,
D241 2,6-Dimethyl-7-octen-2-ol
2,6-dimethyl-

D242 neo-Dihydrocarveol 5-Isopropenyl-2-methylcyclohexanol; neo iso dihydrocarveol

Propionic acid, tert-butyl ester;t-Butyl propanoate; t-Butyl propionate; tert-butyl propanoate;Propanoic acid,
D243 1,1-Dimethylethyl propionate 1,1-dimethylethyl ester
1-Octanol, 3,7-dimethyl-, acetate; 3,7-Dimethyl-1-octanol, acetate; Dihydrocitronellyl acetate;
D244 3,7-Dimethyloctyl acetate
3,7-Dimethyloctanyl acetate;Tetrahydrogeranyl acetate

D245 (E)-2-Decenol trans-2-Decen-1-ol; (2E)-2-Decen-1-ol; Dec-2-enol;2-Decen-1-ol

D246 (+/-) cis- and trans-1,2-Dihydroperillaldehyde (+/-)-Z- and E-1,2-Dihydroperillaldehyde;4-Isopropenylcyclohexane-carboxaldehyde

D247 2,6-Dimethoxy-4-vinylphenol

D248 2,6-Dimethylocta-1,5,7-trien-3-ol

1247
Order General Name Synonyms
Naphthalene, 1,2-dihydro-1,1,6-trimethyl-; 1,1,6-Trimethyl-1,2-dihydro-naphthalene (dehydro-ar-ionene);
D249 1,2-Dihydro-1,1,6-trimethylnaphthalene 1,1,6-trimethyl-1,2-dihydronaphthalene

D250 Dihydromyrcenol

D251 2,5-Dimethyl-4-ethyloxazole Oxazole, 4-ethyl-2,5-dimethyl-; 4-Ethyl-2,5-dimethyl-1,3-oxazole

D252 Decanal diethyl acetal 1,1-Diethoxydecane; 1,1-Bis(ethyloxy)decane; n-Decanal diethyl acetal;Decane, 1,1-diethoxy-

D253 3,3-Diethoxybutan-2-one

D254 1,1-Diethoxyundecane
D255 1,1-Diethoxynonane Nonanal diethyl acetal;n-Nonanal diethyl acetal;Nonane, 1,1-diethoxy-
D256 2,5-Dimethyl-2-vinylhex-4-enal
D257 cis-4-Decenol cis-4-Decen-1-ol; (4Z)-4-Decen-1-ol; 4Z-decen-1-ol; (Z)-4-decenol;(Z)-4-decen-1-ol;4-Decen-1-ol, (Z)-

D258 cis-Dec-7-eno-1,4-lactone (Z)-5-(3-Hexenyl)dihydrofuranne-2(3H)-one

D259 11-Dodecenoic acid dodecenoic acid

D260 Di-(1-propenyl)-sulfide (mixture of isomeres) 1Propene, 1-1'-thiobis-, (Z,Z)-;(E,Z) Bis(1-propenyl)sulfide;(E,E) Bis(1-propenyl)sulfide

D261 Dec-7-eno-1,4-lactone
2,3-Dihydro-5,7-dihydroxy-2-(3-hydroxy-4-methoxyphen
D262 yl)-4H-1-benzyopyran-4-one Hesperetin; (±)-Hesperetin; (±)-5,7,3’-Trihydroxy-4’-methoxyflavanone; Eriodictyol 4’-monomethyl ether

N-[2-(3,4-Dimethoxyphenyl)ethyl]-3,4-
D263 Rubenamin;2-Propenamide, 3-(3,4-dimethoxyphenyl)-N-[2-(3,4-dimethoxyphenyl)ethyl]-;
dimethoxycinnamic acid amide
3,6-Dimethyl-2,3,3a,4,5,7a-hexahydro-1-benzofuran;
D264 3,6-Dimethyl-2,3,3a,4,5,7a-hexahydrobenzofuran 3,9-Epoxy-p-Menth-1-ene
cis-3-Hexenal diethyl acetal;3-Hexene, 1,1-diethoxy-, (Z)-;(3Z)-1,1-Diethoxy-3-hexene; (Z)-3-hexenal diethyl
D265 1,1-Diethoxyhex-3-ene
acetal

D266 2,6-Dimethyl-5-heptenal propyleneglycol acetal

D267 2,7-Dimethylocta-5(trans),7-dieno-1,4-lactone

D268 2,4-Dimethyl-4-nonanol dimethyl nonanol

D269 2,4-Dimethyl-3-oxazoline dimethyl oxazoline

D270 Dimethyl benzyl carbinyl crotonate 2-methyl-1-phenyl-2-propyl crotonate

1248
Order General Name Synonyms
D271 N-3,7-Dimethyl-2,6-octadienylcyclopropylcarboxamide Cyclopropanecarboxamide, N-[(2E)-3,7-dimethyl-2,6-octadienyl]-
1,4-Dioxaspiro[4.5]decan-2-one,
D272 Freshone
3,9-dimethyl-6-(1-methylethyl)-
D273 Dimethylbenzyl carbinyl hexanoate
D274 9-Decen-2-one Dec-9-en-2-one; Methyl oct-7-enyl ketone
N1-(2,3-Dimethoxybenzyl)-N2-(2-(pyridin-2-yl)ethyl)
D275 Ethanediamide, N1-[(2,3-dimethoxyphenyl)methyl]- N2-[2-(2-pyridinyl)ethyl]-
oxalamide
D276 2,6-Dipropyl-5,6-dihydro-2H-thiopyran-3-carboxaldehyde 3,6-Dihydro-2,6-dipropyl-2H-thiopyran-5-carboxaldehhyde
2,2-Diethyl-N-(2-hydroxy-1,1-dimethylethyl) butanamide; Butanamide,
D277 N-(1,1-Dimethyl-2-hydroxyethyl)-2,2-diethylbutanamide 2,2-diethyl-N-(2-hydroxy-1,1-dimethylethyl)-

D278 8-Decen-5-olide 2H-Pyran-2-one, tetrahydro-6-(3-pentenyl)-; 8-Decenoic acid, 5-hydroxy-, delta-lactone;

6-(pent-3-en-1-yl)tetrahydro-2H-pyran-2-one
D279 Dimenthyl glutarate Pentanedioic acid, bis[5-methyl-2-(1-methylethyl)cyclohexyl] ester; Glutaric acid, di-(p-menth-3-yl) ester
D280 Dimethyl adipate Hexanedioic acid, dimethyl ester;Dimethyl hexanedioate; Adipic acid, dimethyl ester; Methyl adipate
D281 mixture of 2,4-, 3,5- and Trivertal; Ivy carbaldehyde; Mixture of 2,4-dimethylcyclohex-3-ene-1-carbaldehyde,
3,6-Dimethyl-3-cyclohexenylcarbaldehyde 3,5-dimethylcyclohex-3-ene-1-carbaldehyde and 3,6-dimethylcyclohex-3-ene-1-carbaldehyde
D282 2,5-Dimethyl-6,7-dihydro-5H-cyclopentapyrazine
mixture of 2,5 and
D283 2,7-Dimethyl-6,7-dihydro-5H-cyclopentapyrazine 2,5-Dimethyl-6,7-dihydro-5H-cyclopenta[b]pyrazineand2,7-Dimethyl-6,7-dihydro-5H-cyclopenta[b]pyrazine;

D284 4,5-Dimethyl-2-isobutylthiazole 2-Isobutyl-4,5-dimethyl thiazole; 4,5-Dimethyl-2-(2-methylpropyl)-1,3-thiazole;

4,5-Dimethyl-2-(2-methylpropyl)thiazole
D285 2,6-Dimethyl-5-heptenol
Adipic acid, diisopropyl ester; Hexanedioic acid, bis(1-methylethyl) ester; Hexanedioic acid,
D286 Diisopropyl adipate 1,6-bis(1-methylethyl) ester; Isopropyl adipate
D287 3-(1-((3,5-Dimethylisoxazol-4-yl)methyl)-1H-pyrazol-4-yl 3-[1-[(3,5-Dimethylisoxazol-4-yl)methyl]pyrazol-4-yl]-1-[(3-hydroxyphenyl)methyl]imidazolidine-2,4-dione
)-1-(3-hydroxybenzyl)-imidazolidine-2,4-dione
E001 (+/-)-2,8-Epithio-cis-p-menthane 6-Thiabicyclo[3.2.1]octane, 4,7,7-trimethyl-, (Z)-; Zestoril; 2,8-Epithio-p-menthane
E002 4,5-Epoxy-(E)-2-decenal 3-(3-Pentyloxiran-2-yl)prop-(E)-2-enal, 2-Propenal, 3-(3-pentyloxiranyl),(2E)-
7-Oxabicyclo[4.1.0]heptane-2,5-dione, 1,3,3-
E003 Epoxyoxophorone trimethyl-; 3,5,5-Trimethyl-2,3-epoxycyclohexane-1,4-dione
6-Decanolide; 7-Butyl-2-oxooxacyloheptane; Deca-1,6-lactone; Decano-1,6-lactone; 6-Butylhexanolide;
E004 Epsilon-decalactone
7-butyl-2-oxepanone; 2-oxepanone, 7-butyl
6-Dodecanolid; 7-Hexyl-2-oxooxacycloheptane; Dodeca-1,6-lactone; Dodecano-1,6-lactone;
E005 Epsilon-dodecalactone 7-Hexyl-2-oxepanone; 2-oxepanone, 7-hexyl-

E006 Ethane-1,1-dithiol 1,1-Ethanedithiol

1249
Order General Name Synonyms
Dithioglycol; Ethylene mercaptan; 1,2-Dimercaptoethane; Ethylene dithioglycol; ethylenedimercaptan; Ethylene
E007 1,2-Ethanedithiol dimercaptan

3-(Acetylthio)-2-methylfuran; S-(2-methyl)-3-furyl thioacetate; 2-Methyl-3-thioacetatoxyfuran;

E008 Ethanethioic acid,s-(2-methyl-3-furanyl) ester
2-Methyl-3-furanthiol acetate

E009 Ethanol Ethyl alcohol; Methyl carbinol; Dehydrated alc.; Ethyl hydrate; Ethyl hydroxide

E010 1-Ethoxy-3-methyl-2-butene Prenyl ethyl ether; Ethoxy-3-methyl-2-butene; Ethyl 3-methylbut-2-enyl ether

E011 2-Ethoxy-3-methylpyrazine

E012 p-Ethoxybenzaldehyde Homoanisaldehyde; 4-Ethoxybenzaldehyde

Phenol, 2-(ethoxymethyl)-; o-(ethoxymethyl)hydroxybenzene; o-hydroxybenzyl ethyl ether; α-Ethoxy-o-cresol;
E013 o-(Ethoxymethyl)phenol
2-( Ethoxymethyl)phenol
E014 2-Ethoxythiazole 2-Thiazolyl ethyl ether; Ethyl-2-thiazosyl ether

E015 Ethyl (p-tolyloxy)acetate Vinegar naphtha; Ethyl p-cresoxy acetate; Ethyl (4-methylphenoxy)acetate; Ethyl cresoxyacetate

E016 Ethyl 10-undecenoate Ethyl undec-10-enoate; Ethyl 10-hendecenoate; Ethyl undecylenoate

E017 Ethyl 2-(methyldithio)propionate Ethyl α-(methyldithio)propionate

E018 Ethyl 2-(methylthio)acetate Ethyl(methylthio)acetate, Ethyl β-(methylthio)acetate; Ethyl 2-methylthioacetate

E019 Ethyl 2,4,7-decatrienoate Ethyl deca-2,4,7-trienoate; 2,4,7-Decatrienoic acid, ethyl ester

E020 Ethyl 2,4-dioxohexanoate Ethyl-2,4-diketocaproate; Ethyl propionyl pyruvate; Ethyl propionylpyruvate

Ethyl 2-acetyldihydrocinnamate; Ethyl 2-benzylacetoacetate; Ethyl α-acetylhydroxycinnamate; Ethyl benzyl
E021 Ethyl 2-acetyl-3-phenylpropionate acetoacetate; Ethyl-3-oxo-2-benzylbutanoate
(Acetylamino)ethanethioic acid, S-ethyl ester; S-ethyl 2-acetamidoethanethiolate; N-Acetylthioglycine, S-ethyl
E022 S-Ethyl 2-acetylaminoethanethioate ester; N-Acetylglycinethiol ethyl ester
Ethyl 2-benzylbutyrate; Ethyl 2-ethyl dihydrocinnamate; Ethyl 2-ethyl-3-phenylpropanoate; Ethyl
E023 Ethyl 2-ethyl-3-phenylpropionate
α-ethyldihydrocinnamate; Ethyl benzylbutyrate
E024 Ethyl 2-mercaptopropionate ethyl thioacetate; 2-Mercapto propionic acid, ethyl ester

1250
Order General Name Synonyms

E025 Ethyl 2-methyl-3,4-pentadienoate ethyl 2-methylpenta-3,4-dienoate; 2,4-Pentadienoic acid, 2-methyl-ethyl ester

E026 Ethyl 2-methyl-3-pentenoate ethyl 2-methylpent-3-enoate; 3-Pentenoic acid, 2-methyl-, ethyl ester

E027 Ethyl 2-methyl-4-pentenoate ethyl 2-methylpent-4-enoate; 4-Pentenoic acid, 2-methyl-, ethyl ester

E028 Ethyl 2-methylbutyrate Ethyl 2-methylbutanoate

E029 Ethyl 2-methylpentanoate Ethyl 2-methylvalerate; Pentanoic acid, 2-methyl, ethyl ester

E030 Ethyl 2-nonynoate Ethyl octyne carbonate; Ethyl octyne carboxylate; Ethyl non-2-ynoate; Ethyl hexyl propiolate

E031 Ethyl 3(2-furyl)propionate Ethyl 2-furanpropionate; Ethyl furfurylacetate; Ethyl furylpropionate;

Ethyl 3-(2-furfurylthio)propionate; Ethyl β-furfuryl-α-thiopropionate; propanoic acid,
E032 Ethyl 3-(furfurylthio)propionate 3-[(2-furanylmethyl)thio]-, ethyl ester; Ethyl β-furfuryl-αthiopropionate

E033 Ethyl 3-(methylthio)butyrate

E034 (+/-)Ethyl 3-acetoxy-2-methylbutyrate Butanoic acid, 3-(acetyloxy)-2-methyl, ethyl ester; 3-Acetoxy-2-methylbutyric acid, ethyl ester

E035 Ethyl 3-hexenoate Hydrosorbic acid, ethyl ester

E036 Ethyl 3-hydroxybutyrate Ethyl β-hydroxybutyrate; Ethyl-3-hydroxybutanoate

E037 Ethyl 3-hydroxyhexanoate Hexanoic acid, 3-Hydroxy-, ethyl ester, ethyl 3-hydroxycaproate

E038 (+/-)-Ethyl 3-mercaptobutyrate 3-Mercaptobutyric acid, ethyl ester

E039 Ethyl 3-mercaptopropionate Ethyl 3-thiopropionate; Propanoic acid, 3-mercapto-, ethyl ester

E040 Ethyl 3-methylpentanoate Ethyl 3-methylvalerate; Pentanoic acid, 3-methyl-, ethyl ester

E041 Ethyl 3-methylthiopropionate Ethyl-β-methylthiopropionate; ethyl methylmercaptopropionate

E042 Ethyl 3-oxohexanoate Ethyl-β-ketohexanoate; Ethyl α-ketohexanoate; Ethyl 3-ketohexanoate; hexanoic acid, 3-oxo-, ethyl ester
E043 Ethyl 3-phenylpropionate Ethyl dihydrocinnamate; Ethyl hydrocinnamate

1251
Order General Name Synonyms
E044 Ethyl 4-(acetylthio)butyrate Butanoic acid, 4-(acetylthio)-, ethyl ester

E045 Ethyl 4-(methylthio)butyrate Butanoic acid, 4-methylthio-, ethyl ester

E046 2-Ethyl 4-methylthiazole Thiazole, 2-ethyl-4-methyl-

E047 Ethyl 4-phenylbutyrate Butanoic acid, 4-phenyl, ethyl ester; Ethyl 4-phenylbutanoate; Ethyl phenylbutyrate; Ethyl-γ-phenylbutyrate
E048 Ethyl 5-(methylthio)valerate Pentanoic acid, 5-(methylthio)-, ethyl ester
E049 Ethyl 5-hexenoate 5-Hexenoic acid, ethyl ester

E050 Ethyl acetate* Ethyl ethanoate; Acetic ether; Vinegar naphtha

Ethyl acety acetate; Ethyl 3-oxobutyrate; Ethyl acetylacetate; Ethyl 3-ketobutyrate; Ethyl 3-oxobutanoate;
E051 Ethyl acetoacetate* Acetoacetic ester; Ethyl β-ketobutyrate; ethyl-3-oxobutanoate
Ethyl-2-carboxyglutaconate; Ethyl 1-propene-1,2,3-tricarboxylate; Mixture of mono-di-and tri-ethyl
E052 Ethyl aconitate(mixed esters) propene-1,2,3-tricarboxylate; Triethyl aconitate
E053 Ethyl acrylate Ethyl propeonate

E054 Ethyl anthranilate Ethyl-2-aminobenzoate; Ethyl o-aminobenzoate

E055 Ethyl benzoate Benzenecarboxylate; Ethyl benzenecarboxylate

Ethyl 3-phenyl-3-oxopropionate; Benzoyl acetic ester; ethyl β-keto-β-phenyl propionate; ethyl

E056 Ethyl benzoylacetate
3-phenyl-3-oxopropanoate
Ethyl 3-phenyl-2,3-epoxypropionate; ethyl α,β-epoxy-β-phenylpropionate; ethyl phenylglycidate; Ethyl
E057 Ethyl β-phenylpropionate α,β-epoxy-α-phenylpropionate; Ethyl 3-phenylglycidate
Ethylene undecane dicarboxylate; Tridecanedioic acid cyclic ethylene glycol diester; Ethylene glycol brassylate,
cyclic diester; Cyclo-1,13-ethylenedioxytridecan-1,13-dione; Emeressence 1150 (EMEQ); musk T (TAKA);
E058 Ethyl brassylate 1,4-Dioxacydloheptadecan-5,17-dion; ethyleneglycol tridecadioic acid cyclic diester; MC-5(Soda); Ethylene
brassylate

E059 Ethyl butyrate * Ethyl butanoate; Ethyl n-butanoate; Butyric ether; Ethyl butanoate

Ethyl phenylacrylate; cinnamic acid, ethyl ester; Ethyl β-phenylacrylate; ethyl-3-phenylpropenoate; Ethyl
E060 Ethyl cinnamate * trans-cinnamate

1252
Order General Name Synonyms

E061 Ethyl cis-3-hexenoate Ethyl Z-3-hexenoate; Ethyl (3Z)-hexenoate

E062 Ethyl cis-4,7-octadienoate Ethyl octa-4,7-dienoate; Ethyl (Z)-4,7-octadienoate; 4,7-octadienoic acid, ethyl ester, (Z)-

E063 Ethyl cis-4-heptenoate 4-Heptenoic acid, ethyl ester; (Z)-Ethyl cis-hept-4-enoate; cis-4-Heptenoic acid ethyl ester

E064 Ethyl cis-4-octenoate (Z)-ethyl oct-4-enoate; Ethyl oct-4-enoate

E065 Ethyl cyclohexanecarboxylate Cyclohexanecarboxylic acid, ethyl ester

Ethyl hexahydrophenylpropionate; Cyclohexane ethyl propionate; Ethyl-3-cyclohexyl- propanoate; Ethyl

E066 Ethyl cyclohexanepropionate cyclohexylpropionate; Hexahydro phenylethyl propionate; Ethyl 3-cyclohexylpropionate

E067 Ethyl decanoate* Ethyl caprinate; Ethyl caprate; Ethyl decylate

E068 Ethyl dodecanoate Ethyl laurate; Ethyl dodecylate

E069 Ethyl formate Ethyl methanoate; Formic ether

E070 Ethyl furfuryl ether Furfuryl ethyl ether; 2-(Ethoxymethyl)furan

E071 Ethyl heptanoate* Ethyl caproate; Ethyl heptoate; ethyl heptylate, Ethyl oenanthate; Oenanthic ester

E072 Ethyl hex-2-enoate Ethyl hex-2-enoate; Ethyl (E)-2-hexenoate; 2-hexenoic acid, ethyl ester, (E)-

E073 Ethyl hexadecanoate Ethyl cetylate; ethyl palmitate; Hexadecanoic acid, ethyl ester

E074 Ethyl hexanoate* Capronic ether absolute; Ethyl caproate; Ethyl capronate; ethyl hexylate

E075 Ethyl isobutyrate Ethyl 2-methylpropanoate; Propanoic acid, 2-methyl-ethyl ester; Ethyl isobutanoate

E076 Ethyl isovalerate* Ethyl isovalerianate; Ethyl 3-methylbutanoate; Ethyl isopentanoate; Ethyl β-methylbutyrate

E077 Ethyl lactate Ethyl 2-hydroxypropanoate; Ethyl α-hydroxy propionate

1253
Order General Name Synonyms
Ethyl 4-ketovalerate; Ethyl acetylpropanoate; Ethyl γ-ketovalerate; Ethyl-4-oxopentanoate; Ethyl
E078 Ethyl levulinate 4-oxovalerate; Ethyl laevulate; Ethyl 4-oxopentanoate; Ethyl laevulinate
2-Ethyl-3-hydroxy-4h-pyran-4-one; Veltol-plus; 3-Hydroxy-2-ethyl-4-pyrone; 2-Ethyl pyromeconic acid;
E079 Ethyl maltol
3-Ethyl-2-hydroxy-4H-pyran-4-one; 2-ethyl-3-ol-4H-pyran-5-one; 2-Ethyl-3-ol-4H-pyran-4-one

E080 Ethyl methyl disulfide Methyldisulfanylethane; 2,3-Dithiapentane

Ethyl 2,3-epoxy-3-methyl-3-p-tolylpropionate; Ethyl methyl-p-methylphenylglycidate; Oxiranecarboxylic acid,

E081 Ethyl methyl-p-tolylglycidate 3-methyl-3(4-methylpheny)-ethyl ester; Ethyl 3-methyl-3-(4-methylphenyl)oxiranecarboxylate; Ethyl
2,3-epoxy-3-methyl-3-ptolylpropionate

E082 Ethyl N-ethylanthranilate Benzoic acid, 2-(ethylamino)-, ethyl ester; Ethyl o-(ethylamino)benzoate

E083 Ethyl nitrite Nitrous ether; spirit of nitrous ether

Benzoic acid, 2-(methylamino)-, ethyl ester; Anthranilic acid, N-methyl-, ethyl ester; Ethyl 2-(methylamino)
E084 Ethyl N-methylanthranilate benzoate

E085 Ethyl nonanoate Ethyl nonylate; Ethyl pelargonate

E086 Ethyl octadecanoate Ethyl stearate; Octadecanoic acid, ethyl ester

E087 Ethyl octanoate* Ethyl caprylate; Ethyl octylate

E088 Ethyl oleate Ethyl cis-9-octadecenoate; Ethyl 9-octadecenoate

E089 Ethyl p-anisate Ethyl p-methoxybenzoate; Ethyl 4-methoxybenzoate; Ethyl anisate

E090 Ethyl pentanoate Ethyl valerate; Ethyl valerianate

E091 Ethyl phenylacetate* α-Toluic acid, ethyl ester; Ethyl α-toluate; Ethyl benzeneacetate

E092 Ethyl propionate* Ethyl propanoate; Propionic ether

E093 Ethyl propyl disulfide 1-Ethyldisulfanylpropane, 3,4-Dithiaheptane

1254
Order General Name Synonyms
E094 Ethyl propyl trisulfide 3,4,5-Trithiaoctane

E095 Ethyl pyruvate Ethyl acetylformate; ethyl pyroracemate; Ethyl α-ketopropionate; Ethyl-2-oxopropanoate

E096 Ethyl r-anisate

O-Ethyl s-(2-furylmethyl thiocarbonate; O-Ethyl s-(furan-2-yl methyl)thiocarbonate; O-Ethyl
E097 o-Ethyl s-(2-furylmethyl) thiocarbonate
S-(2-furanylmethyl)thiocarbonate; O-Ethyl S-(2-furanylmethyl)carbonothioate; Ethoxy carbonyl furfurylthiol

E098 Ethyl salicylate Salicylic ether; Sal ethyl; salicylic acid, ethyl ester; Ethyl 2-hydroxybenzoate; Ethyl o-hydroxy benzoate

E099 Ethyl sorbate Ethyl-2,4-hexadienoate; Ethyl hexa-2,4-dienoate; Ethyl sorbate

E100 Ethyl tetradecanoate Ethyl myristate

Acetic acid, thioethyl ester; Thioacetic acid, ethyl ester, S-ethyl acetothiote; Acetic acid thio ethyl;
E101 Ethyl thioacetate Ethanethioic acid, S-ethyl ester
Ethyl trans-2-methylcrotonate; Ethyl 2-methylcrotonate; Ethyl trans-2,3-dimethyl acrylate; Ethyl
E102 Ethyl tiglate trans-2-methyl-2-butenoate; Tiglic acid ethyl ester
E103 Ethyl trans-2, cis-4-decadienoate Ethyldeca-2(cis),4(trans)-dienoate; Ethyl (2E,4Z)-decadienoate

E104 N-Ethyl trans-2-cis-6-nonadienamide 2,6-Nonadienamide, N-ethyl-, (2E,6Z)-

E105 Ethyl trans-2-decenoate Ethyl dec-2-enoate; 2-Decenoic acid, ethylester, (E)-

E106 Ethyl trans-2-hexenoate

E107 Ethyl trans-2-octenoate Ethyl 2-octenoate; 2-Octenoic acid, ethyl ester, (E)-; Ethyl oct-2(trans)-enoate

E108 Ethyl trans-4-decenoate Ethyl dec-4-enoate; 4-Decenoic acid, ethyl ester, (E)-

E109 Ethyl trans-butenoate Ethyl crotonate; ethyl α-crotonate; Ethyl trans-2-butenoate; trans-2-butenoic acid ethylester

E110 Ethyl undecanoate Ethyl hendecanoate; ethyl undecylate; Ethyl undecanoate

Bourbonal; ethyl protal; 3-Ethoxyprotocatechualdehyde; Ethylprotocatechualdehyde-3-ethyl ether;
E111 Ethyl vanillin* 3-Ethoxy-4-hydroxybenzaldehyde
E112 Ethyl vanillin β-D-glucopyranoside Glucoethylvanillin; 3-ethoxy-4-(β-glucopyranosyloxy)benzaldehyde

1255
Order General Name Synonyms
E113 Ethyl vanillin isobutyrate 2-Ethoxy-4-formylphenyl isobutyrate; 2-Ethoxy-4-formylphenyl 2-methylpropanoate

E114 Ethyl vanillin propylene glycol acetal 2-(3-Ethoxy-4-hydroxyphenyl)-4-methyl-1,3-dioxolane; 2-ethoxy-4-(4-methyl-1,3-dioxolan-2yl)phenol

2-Methyl(or ethyl)-(3,5 and 6)-methozypyrazine; 2,5, or 6-Methoxy-3-ethylpyrzine; Mixture of

2-ethyl-3-methoxypyrazine and 2-ethyl-5-methoxypyrazine and 2-ethyl-6-methoxypyrazine and
E115 2-Ethyl(or methyl)-(3-, 5- or 6-)methoxypyrazine 2-methyl-3-methoxypyrazine and 2-methyl-5-methoxypyrazine and 2-methyl-6-methoxypyrazine; 3-Ethyl-(5 or
6)-methoxypyrazine, 5 or 6-Methoxy-3-ethyl-pyrazine
E116 2-Ethyl-1,3,3-trimethyl-2-norbornanol Ethyl fenchol; 2-Ethylfenchol; 2-norbornanol, 2-ethyl-1,3,3-trimethylbicyclo[2.2.1]- heptan-2-ol

E117 2-Ethyl-1-hexanol 2-Ethylhexan-1-ol; 2-Ethyl hexyl alcohol

E118 4-Ethyl-2,6-dimethoxyphenol 4-Ethylsyringol; phenol, 4-ethyl-2,6-dimethoxy-; 2,6-Dimethoxy-4-ethylphenol

E119 3-Ethyl-2,6-dimethylpyrazine 2,6-Dimethyl-3-ethylpyrazine; 2-Ethyl-3,5-dimethylpyrazine; 3,5-Dimethyl-2-ethylpyrazine

E120 1-Ethyl-2-acetyl pyrrole 1-(n-ethylpyrrol-2-yl) ethanone; 1-Ethyl-2-acetylazole; 2-Acetyl-1-ethylpyrrole

E121 2-Ethyl-2-heptenal 2-ethyl-3-butylacrolein; 2- Ethylhept-2-enal

E122 5-Ethyl-2-hydroxy-3-methylcyclopent-2-en-1-one 1,2-cyclohexanedione; 2-Cyclopenten-1-one, 5-ethyl-2-hydroxy-3-methyl-; 5-ethyl-3-methylcyclotene

2-Cyclopenten-1-one, 3-ethyl-2-hydroxy-4-methyl-; 3-Ethyl-2-cyclopenten-2-ol-1-one; ethylcyclopentenolone;

E123 3-Ethyl-2-hydroxy-4-methylcyclopent-2-en-1-one
3-ethyl-4-methylcyclotene
n-Ethyl-p-menthane-3-carboxamide; Cyclohexanecarboxamine, N-ethyl-5-methyl-2-(1-methylethyl)-;
E124 N-Ethyl-2-isopropyl-5-methylcyclohexane carboxamide N-ethyl-p-menthane-3-

E125 5-Ethyl-2-methylpyridine 2-Methyl-5-ethylpyridine; pyridine, 5-ethyl-2-methyl-; 5-Ethyl-2-picoline

3,5-Dimethyl-2-ethylpyrazine; 2,5-Dimethyl-3-ethylpyrazine; Mixture of 2-ethyl-3,5-dimethylpyrazine and

E126 2-Ethyl-3,(5 or 6)-dimethylpyrazine 3-ethyl-2,5-dimethylpyrazine; 2,6- Dimethyl-3-ethylpyrazine; 2-Ethyl-3,6-dimethyl pyrazine;
3-Ethyl-2,5(6)-dimethyl pyrazine; 3,6-Dimethyl-2-ethylpyrazine

1256
Order General Name Synonyms
2-Hydroxy-3-methyl-2-hexen-4-olide; 2,4-Dihydroxy-3-methyl-2-hexenoic acid, γ-lactone;
E127 5-Ethyl-3-hydroxy-4-methyl-2(5H)-furanone 2-Ethyl-3-methyl-4-hydroxydihydro-2,5-furan-5-one; 2-hydroxy-3-methyl-γ-2-hexene-lactone; Ethyl
Fenugreek lactone; Emoxyfurone
E128 2-Ethyl-3-methylpyrazine 2-ethyl-3-methyl-1,4-dizine; 2-Methyl-3-ethylpyrazine

E129 2-Ethyl-4,5-dimethyloxazole 4,5-Dimethyl-2-ethyloxazole; Oxazole, 2-ethyl-4,5-dimethyl-

E130 2-Ethyl-4-hydroxy-5-methyl-3(2H)-furanone Homofuronol (GIV); 5-Ethyl-4-hydroxy-2-methyl-3(2H)-furanone; 3(2H)-furnanone, 5-ethyl-4-hydroxy-2-methyl-

E131 2-Ethyl-5-methylpyrazine 2-Methyl-5-ethylpyrazine; 2-Ethyl-5-methyl-1,4-diazine

E132 2-Ethyl-6-methylpyrazine Pyrazine, 2-ethyl-6-methyl; 2-Methyl-6-ethylpyrazine; 6-Methyl-2-ethypyrazine; 2-Ethyl-6-methyl-1,4-diazine

E133 Ethylamine 1-Aminoethane; Aminoethane; Monoethylamine; n-Ethylamine

E134 4-Ethylbenzaldehyde Benzaldehyde, 4-ethyl; p-ethylbenzaldehyde

1-Phenyl-1-propyl butyrate; Ethyl phenyl carbinyl butyrate;α-phenylproyl butyrate; 1-Phenylpropyl butyrate;

E135 α-Ethylbenzyl butyrate α-Ethylbenzyl butyrate

E136 2-Ethylbutyl acetate β-Ethylbutyl acetate

E137 2-Ethylbutyraldehyde 2-Ethylbutanal; diethylacetaldehyde

E138 2-Ethylbutyric acid 2-Ethylbutyric acid; Diethylacetic acid; α-Ethylbutyric acid

3-Ethyl-2-hydroxy-2-cyclopenten-1-one; 3-Ethylcyclopentane-1,2-dione; 3-Ethyl-2- cyclopenten-2-ol-1-one;

E139 Ethylcyclopentenolone 2-Hydroxy-3-ethyl-2-cyclopenten-1-one; Ethyl cyclopentenolone; Ethyl cyclopentalone
E140 2-Ethylfuran 2-Ethyloxole
2-Methoxy-4-ethylphenol; 1-hydroxy-2-methoxy-4-ethylbenzene; Ethyl 3(2-furyl)propionate;
E141 4-Ethylguaiacol 4-Ethyl-2-methoxyphenol; Homocreosol; 2-Methoxy-2-ethylphenol

E142 2-Ethylhexanethiol 2-Ethylhexane-1-thiol; 2-Ethylhexyl mercaptan

1257
Order General Name Synonyms

1-Ethylhexyl 2-methylcrotonate; Octen-3-yl 2-methyl-2-buttenoate; 2-Butenoic aicd, 2-methyl-, 1-ethylhexyl

E143 1-Ethylhexyl tiglate ester, (E)-; 1-Ethylhexyl 2-methyl-2-butenoate; 1-Ethylhexyl α-methylcrotonate; 3-octyl 2-methylcrotonate;
3-Octyl 2-methyl-2-butenoate; 3-Octyl tiglate; Oct-3-yl 2-methylcrotonate; Oct-3-yl tiglate

E144 (+/-)-4-Ethyloctanal Octanal, 4-ethyl; Excital

E145 4-Ethyloctanoic acid 4-etylcaprylic acid

E146 p-Ethylphenol 4-Hydroxyethylbenzene; 1-Ethyl-4-hydroxybenzene; 4-Ethylphenol

E147 2-Ethylpyrazine 2-Ethyl-1,4-diazine; Ethylpyrazine; 2-Ethyl pyrazine

E148 3-Ethylpyridine β-Ethylpyridine; β-lutidine
E149 2-(Ethylthio)phenol 2-Ethylphenyl mercaptan; 2-Ethylbenzenethiol
Cajeputol; cineole; 1,8-epoxy-p-methane; 1,8- Cineole; 1,8-Oxido-p-menthane;
E150 Eucalyptol* 1,3,3-Trimethyl-2-oxabicyclo[2.2.2]octane
4-Hydroxy-3-methoxy-1-allylbenzene; eugenic acid; 2-Methoxy-4-(2-propen-1-yl) phenol;
1-Hydroxy-2-methoxy-4-propenylbenzene; 4-Allylcetachol-2-methyl ether; 2-methoxy-4-allylphenol;
E151 Eugenol* 4-Allylguaiacol; 4-Allyl-2-methoxyphenol; 1-Hydroxy-2- methoxy-4-allyl benzene;
2-Methoxy-4-prop-2-enylphenol; 1-Hydroxy-2- methoxy-4-(2-propenyl)benzene
2-Methoxy-4-2-propen-1-yl phenyl acetate; 4-allyl-2-methoxyphenyl acetate; Acetyl eugenol; eugenol acetate;
E152 Eugenyl acetate 2-methoxy-4-(3-propenyl)phenyl acetate; Aceteugenol; 2-Methoxy-4-phenyl acetate

E153 Eugenyl benzoate 4-Allyl-2-methoxyphenyl benzoate; benzoyl eugenol; eugenol benzoate

4-(2-propen-1-yl)-2-methoxyphenyl formate; 4-Eugenyl formate; 4-Allyl-2- methoxyphenyl formate;

E154 Eugenyl formate
4-(2-propenyl)-2-methoxyphenyl formate; Eugenol formate

E155 Eugenyl isovalerate 4-Allyl-2-methoxyphenyl isovalerate; Butanoic acid, 3-methyl-, 2-methoxy-4-(2-propenyl)phenyl ester

1258
Order General Name Synonyms

Ethyl hydrosulfide; Ethyl mercaptan; Ethyl sulfhydrate; Ethyl thioalcohol; Mercaptoethane; Thioethanol;
E156 Ethanethiol
Thioethyl alcohol; 1-Mercaptoethane
Ethyl 2-methyllactate; Butyric acid, 2-hydroxy-2-methyl-, ethyl ester; Butanoic acid, 2-hydroxy-2-methyl-,
E157 (+/-) Ethyl 2-hydroxy-2-methylbutyrate ethyl ester, (±); 2-Hydroxy-2-methylbutyric acid ethyl ester; ethyl 2-hydroxy-2-methylbutyrate ; Butyric acid,
2-hydroxy-2-met

Phenol, o-ethyl-; o-Ethylphenol; Phlorol; 1-Ethyl-2-hydroxybenzene; 1-Hydroxy-2-ethylbenzene; Florol;

E158 2-Ethylphenol
Ethylphenol;Phenol, 2-ethyl-

Methacrylic acid, ethyl ester; Ethyl 2-methyl-2-propenoate; Ethyl 2-methylacrylate; Ethyl methyl acrylate;
E159 Ethyl methacrylate Ethyl-α-methyl acrylate; 2-Methylacrylic acid, ethyl ester;2-Methyl-2-propenoic acid ethyl ester;Ethyl
2-methacrylate;2-Propenoic acid, 2-methyl-, ethyl ester

1-Butanol, 2-ethyl-; Pseudohexyl alcohol; 2-Ethylbutyl alcohol; 3-Methylolpentane; 2-Ethylbutanol;

E160 2-Ethylbutan-1-ol 2-Ethylbutanol-1; sec-Hexyl alcohol; sec-Pentyl carbinol; 3-Pentyl carbinol;Ethylbutanol;
sec-Hexanol;2-Ethyl-1-butanol

E161 2-Ethylpyridine α-Ethylpyridine;Pyridine, 2-ethyl-

2-Ethyl-1-hexanol acetate; 2-Ethyl-1-hexyl acetate; β-ethylhexyl acetate; 2-Ethylhexyl ethanoate; Acetic acid
E162 2-Ethylhexyl acetate α-ethylhexyl ester; 2-Ethylhexanyl acetate; 2-Ethylhexylester kyseliny octove; Ethyl hexyl acetate;
Ethyl(2)-hexyl acetate; Octyl acetate;Acetic acid, 2-ethylhexyl ester

α-Ethylcaproaldehyde; Butylethylacetaldehyde; Ethylbutylacetaldehyde; 2-Ethylhexaldehyde;

E163 2-Ethyl hexanal 2-Ethylhexylaldehyde; 3-Formylheptane; 2-Ethylcaproaldehyde; Ethylhexaldehyde; 2-Ethylcapronaldehyde
α-Ethylhexanal; 2-Ethylhexan-1-al;Hexanal, 2-ethyl-

α-Ethylcaproic acid; α-Ethylhexanoic acid; Butylethylacetic acid; Ethylhexanoic acid; Ethylhexoic acid;
2-Butylbutanoic acid; 2-Ethylcaproic acid; 3-Heptanecarboxylic acid; Kyselina heptan-3-karboxylova;
E164 2-Ethyl hexanoic acid 2-Ethyl-1-hexanoic acid; 2-Ethylcapronic acid; Hexonic acid, 2-ethyl-;2-Ethylhexoic acid;Hexanoic acid,
2-ethyl-

E165 4-Ethylpyridine Pyridine, 4-ethyl-; γ-Ethylpyridine

E166 Ethyl isothiocyanate Isothiocyanic acid, ethyl ester; Ethyl mustard oil; Isothiocyanatoethane; Mustard oil;

1259
Order General Name Synonyms
1-Isothiocyanatoethane;Ethane, isothiocyanato-

Linoleic acid ethyl ester; 9,12-Octadecadienoic acid (Z,Z)-, ethyl ester; Ethyl cis,cis-9,12-octadecadienoate;
E167 Ethyl linolate(Ethyl (Z,Z)-9,12-octadecadienoate) Mandenol; Ethyl (9Z,12Z)-9,12-octadecadienoate; ethyl (Z,Z)-9,12-octadecadienoate;Ethyl linoleate

Nicotinic acid, ethyl ester; β-Pyridinecarboxylic acid ethyl ester;Ethyl 3-pyridinecarboxylate; Ignicut;
E168 Ethyl nicotinate
3-Ethoxycarbonyl)pyridine; 3-Carbethoxypyridine; Picolinic acid ethyl ester;3-Pyridinecarboxylic acid, ethyl ester
2-Furoic acid, ethyl ester; Ethyl furan-2-carboxylate; Ethyl pyromucate; Ethyl 2-furancarboxylate;
E169 Ethyl 2-furoate Furan-2-carboxylic acid ethyl ester; 2-Carboethoxyfuran; Ethyl furoate;2-Furancarboxylic acid, ethyl ester

Vanillic acid, ethyl ester; 4-Hydroxy-3-methoxybenzoic acid ethyl ester; Ethyl 4-hydroxy-3-methoxybenzoate;
E170 Ethyl vanillate m-Anisic acid, 4-hydroxy-, ethyl ester; 3-Methoxy-4-hydroxybenzoic acid, ethyl ester;Benzoic acid,
4-hydroxy-3-methoxy-, ethyl ester

E171 3-Ethylphenol Phenol, 3-ethyl-; Phenol, m-ethyl-; m-Ethylphenol; 1-Ethyl-3-hydroxybenzene; 1-Hydroxy-3-ethylbenzene

E172 Ethyl furfuracrylate

Crotonic acid, 3-methyl-, ethyl ester; Ethyl β,β-dimethylacrylate; Ethyl dimethylacrylate; Ethyl
isopropylideneacetate; Ethyl senecioate; Ethyl 3-methyl-2-butenoate; Ethyl 3,3-dimethylacrylate; Ethyl
E173 Ethyl 3-methylcrotonate β-methylcrotonate; Ethyl 3-methylbut-2-enoate;-Methyl-2-butenoic acid, ethyl ester;2-Butenoic acid,
3-methyl-, ethyl ester
o-Menth-8-ene-4-methanol, α,α-dimethyl-1-vinyl-, (1S,2S,4R)-(-)-;
E174 Elemol 2-(3-Isopropenyl-4-methyl-4-vinylcyclohexyl)-2-propanol;Cyclohexanemethanol,
4-ethenyl-α,α,4-trimethyl-3-(1-methylethenyl)-, [1r-(1α,3α,4β)]-
E175 2-Ethylthiophene Thiophene, 2-ethyl-

E176 Ethyl 3-octenoate 3-Octenoic acid, ethyl ester; Ethyl (3E)-3-octenoate;Ethyl oct-3-enoate

Linolenic acid, ethyl ester; Ethyl cis,cis,cis-9,12,15-octadecatrienoate; Ethyl

E177 Ethyl linolenate (9Z,12Z,15Z)-9,12,15-octadecatrienoate; Ethyl α-linolenate;ethyl

1260
Order General Name Synonyms
(Z,Z,Z)-9,12,15-octadecatrienoate;9,12,15-Octadecatrienoic acid, ethyl ester, (Z,Z,Z)-
Benzene, 1-ethyl-4-methoxy-; Anisole, p-ethyl-; p-Ethylanisole; 4-Ethylanisole; 1-methoxy-4-ethyl-benzene;
E178 1-Ethyl-4-methoxybenzene p-Ethylanisol
2-Pentenoic acid, 2-methyl-, ethyl ester (2E); 2-Pentenoic acid, 2-methyl-, ethyl ester (E); Ethyl
E179 Ethyl (E)-2-methyl-2-pentenoate
(E)-2-methyl-2-pentenoate

E180 Ethyl 4-pentenoate Ethyl pent-4-enoate; 4-Ethoxycarbonylbut-1-ene;4-Pentenoic acid ethyl ester

Tea pyrrole;1-Ethyl 1H-Pyrrole-2-carboxaldehyde; 1-Ethyl-2-formylpyrrole; 1H-Pyrrole-2-carboxaldehyde,

E181 1-Ethyl-2-pyrrolecarboxaldehyde 1-ethyl-; Pyrrole-2-carboxaldehyde, 1-ethyl-; 1-Ethylpyrrole-2-aldehyde; N-Ethyl-2-formylpyrrole;
N-Ethylpyrrole-2-carboxaldehyde

E182 Ethyl pent-2-enoate

E183 Ethyl 2-phenylpropionate

E184 1-Ethoxy-1-(2-phenylethoxy)ethane

E185 Ethyl 2-ethylhexanoate Ethyl 2-ethylcaproate;Ethylα-ethylhexanoate;Hexanoic acid, 2-ethyl-, ethyl ester

E186 Ethyl 2-ethylbutyrate Butanoic acid, 2-ethyl-, ethyl ester;2-Ethyl-n-butyric acid ethyl ester
E187 Ethyl 2-acetoxypropionate

E188 1-Ethoxy-1-pentyloxybutane
1,3-Dioxolane, 2-ethyl-4-methyl-; Propanal, cyclic 1-methyl-1,2-ethanediyl acetal;1,3-Dioxolane,
E189 2-Ethyl-4-methyl-1,3-dioxolane 2-ethyl-4-methyl, cis
E190 1-Ethoxy-4-methoxybenzene p-Ethoxyanisole; Ethyl p-methoxyphenyl ether;Benzene, 1-ethoxy-4-methoxy-
1,3-Dioxolane-2-acetic acid, 2,4-dimethyl-, ethyl ester;Ethyl 2,4-dimethyl-1,3-dioxolane-2-acetate;ethyl
E191 Ethyl acetoacetate propylene glycol acetal acetoacetate propylene glycol acetal

E192 Ethyl 4-methylpent-3-enoate

o-Anisic acid, ethyl ester; Ethyl o-methoxybenzoate; o-Methoxybenzoic acid, ethyl ester;Benzoic acid,
E193 Ethyl 2-methoxybenzoate(Ethyl o-anisate) 2-methoxy-, ethyl ester
E194 1-Ethoxy-1-methoxyethane Acetaldehyde, ethyl methyl acetal;Acetaldehyde methyl ethyl acetyl; 1,1-Ethoxymethoxyethane;Ethane,

1261
Order General Name Synonyms
1-ethoxy-1-methoxy-
E195 Ethyl 3,7-dimethyl-2,6-octadienoate
Acetaldehyde ethyl amyl acetal; 1-(1-ethoxyethoxy)pentane (acetaldehyde ethylamyl acetal);Pentane,
E196 1-Ethoxy-1-pentyloxyethane 1-(1-ethoxyethoxy)-

E197 1-Ethoxy-1-isopentyloxyethane

E198 1-Ethoxy-1-(2-methylbutoxy)ethane

E199 3-(Ethylthio)propan-1-ol

E200 5-Ethyl-2-methylthiazole Thiazole, 5-ethyl-2-methyl-; 5-Ethyl-2-methyl-1,3-thiazole;2-methyl-5-ethylthiazole

Cyclohexene, 4-ethenyl-4-methyl-3-(1-methylethenyl)-1-(1-methylethyl)-, (3r-trans)-; p-Menth-3-ene,
E201 δ-Elemene 2-isopropenyl-1-vinyl-, (1S,2R)-(-)-; 3-Isopropenyl-1-isopropyl-4-methyl-4-vinyl-1-cyclohexene
Acetaldehyde, ethyl propyl acetal;1-(1-Ethoxyethoxy)propane; Ethane, 1-ethoxy-1-propoxy;Propane,
E202 1-Ethoxy-1-propoxyethane 1-(1-ethoxyethoxy)-
Ethyl 2-ethyllactate; Pentanoic acid, 2-hydroxy-3-methyl-, ethyl ester (9CI); Valeric acid, 2-hydroxy-3-methyl-,
E203 (+/-) Ethyl 2-hydroxy-3-methylvalerate
ethyl ester (8CI);2-Hydroxy-3-methylpentanoic acid ethyl ester; Ethyl 2-hydroxy-3-methylpentanoate

Ethyl 4-methylvalerate; Ethyl isocaproate; Ethyl isohexanoate;Pentanoic acid, 4-methyl-, ethyl ester; Valeric
E204 Ethyl 4-methylpentanoate acid, 4-methyl-, ethyl ester

E205 (+/-) Ethyl 3-hydroxy-2-methylbutyrate Butanoic acid, 3-hydroxy-2-methyl-, ethyl ester

E206 Ethyl dodec-2-enoate

E207 Ethyl geranyl ether

E208 Ethyl pentadecanoate n-Pentadecanoic acid ethyl ester;Pentadecanoic acid, ethyl ester
E209 Ethyl hept-2-enoate
E210 1-Ethoxy-1-hexyloxyethane Acetaldehyde ethyl hexyl acetal; 1-(1 Ethoxyethoxy) hexane;Ethyl hexyl acetal;Hexane, 1-(1-ethoxyethoxy)-
E211 Ethyl 4-hydroxybenzyl ether
E212 Ethyl dec-9-enoate Ethyl 9-decenoate
[1R-(1α,2β,5α)]-N-[[5-Methyl-2-(1-methylethyl)cyclohexyl]
E213 N-[(Ethoxycarbonyl)methyl)-p-menthane-3-carboxamide carbonyl glycine ethyl ester

E214 cis- and trans-5-Ethyl-4-methyl-2-(2-methylpropyl)- 5-ethyl-2,5-dihydro-4-methyl-2-(2-methylpropyl)-thiazole

1262
Order General Name Synonyms
thiazoline
E215 cis- and trans-5-Ethyl-4-methyl-2-(2-butyl)-thiazoline 5-ethyl-2,5-dihydro-4-methyl-2-(1-methylpropyl)-thiazole

E216 Ethyl 3-acetoxy octanoate Ethyl 3-(acetoxy)octanoate

E217 3-(Ethylthio)butanol

E218 1-Ethoxy-1-(3-methylbutoxy)-3-methylbutane

E219 1-Ethoxy-2-methyl-1-propoxypropane
E220 1-Ethoxy-2-methyl-1-isopentyloxypropane

E221 (+/-)- Ethyl 3-mercapto-2-methylbutanoate

E222 Ethyl alpha-acetylcinnamate Ethyl 2-benzylidene-3-oxobutanoate; Butanoic acid, 3-oxo-2-(phenylmethylene)-, ethyl ester

E223 N-Ethyl-2,2-diisopropylbutanamide N,2-Diethyl-2-(isopropyl)-3-methylbutyramide; Butanamide, N-ethyl-2,2-bis(1-methylethyl)-

Ethyl-2-hydroxy-3-phenylpropanoate; Benzenepropanoic acid, alphahydroxy-, ethyl ester; 3-Phenyllactic acid
E224 Ethyl 2-hydroxy-3- phenylpropionate
ethyl ester; Ethyl phenyllactate; Lactic acid, 3-phenyl-, ethyl ester
N-ethyl-5-methyl-2-(1-methylethenyl)cyclohexanecarbox
E225 amide N-Ethyl-5-methyl-2-(prop-1-en-2-yl)cyclohexanecarboxamide

E226 Ethyl 2,5-dimethyl-3-oxo- 4(2H)-furyl carbonate

E227 (±)-Eriodictyol (±)-3',4',5,7-tetrahydroxyflavanone; 2-(3,4-Dihydroxyphenyl)-5,7-dihydroxy-2,3-dihydrochromen-4-one;
2-(3,4-Dihydroxyphenyl)-5,7-dihydroxy-4-chromanone
E228 2-Ethoxy-3-ethylpyrazine 3-Ethyl-2-ethoxypyrazine
Fructone;Ethylacetoacetate3-ethyleneacetal; Ethyl3-oxobutyrateethyleneketal;
E229 Ethyl acetoacetate ethyleneglycol acetal 1,3-Dioxolane-2-aceticacid,2-methyl-,ethylester,ethyl2-(2-methyl-1,3-dioxolan-2-yl)acetate
E230 Ethyl 5-acetoxyoctanoate delta-Acetoxyoctanoic acid, ethyl ester; Octanoic acid, 5-(acetyloxy)-, ethyl ester
E231 Ethyl 2-acetyloctanoate Ethyl alpha-hexylacetoacetate; Ethyl 2-acetylcaprylate; Octanoic acid, 2-acetyl-, ethyl ester
E232 (2or4)-Ethyl-(4or2),6-dimethyldihydro-1,3,5-dithiazine 2(4)-Ethyl-4(2),6-dimethyldihydro-1,3,5-dithiazinane; Ethyl thialdine
E233 5-Ethyl-2,3-dimethylpyrazine 2,3-Dimethyl-5-ethyl pyrazine
E234 Ethyl 2-hydroxy-4-methylbenzoate
3,7-Dimethyl octa-1,6-dien-3-yl ethyl ether; 3,7-Dimethylocta-1,6-dien-3-yl ethyl ether;
E235 Ethyl linalyl ether 3-Ethoxy-3,7-dimethyl-1,6-octadiene; Linalool ethyl ether, 3-Ethoxy-3,7-dimethylocta-1,6-diene
E236 2-Ethyl-2,5-dihydro-4-methylthiazole 2-Ethyl-4-methyl-3-thiazoline; 2-Ethyl-2,5-dihydro-4-methylthiazole; 2-Ethyl-4-methyl-2,5-dihydro-1,3-thiazole
E237 2-Ethyl-3-(methylthio)pyrazine 2-(Methylthio)-3-ethylpyrazine

1263
Order General Name Synonyms
F001 α-Farnesene 1,3,6,10-Dodecatetraene, 3,7,11-trimethyl (α-isomer)
F002 β-Farnesene 3,7,11-Trimethyl-1,3,6,10-dodecatetraene; 2,6,10-Trimethyl-2,6,9,11-dodecatetrene

2,6,10-Trimethyl-2,6,10-dodecatrien-12-ol; 3,7,11-Trimethyl-2,6,10-dodecatrien-1-ol; 3,7,11-

F003 Farnesol Trimethyldodeca-2,6,10-trien-1-ol; Farnesol

F004 Fenchol 2-Fenchanol; α-Fenchol; 1,3,3-Trimethylbicyclo-2,2,1-heptan-2-ol; 1,3,3-Trimethylbicycloheptan-2-ol

d-1,3,3-Trimethyl-2-norcamphanone; 1,3,3-trimethylbicyclo (2.2.1) heptan-2-one; d-2-Fenchanone; fenchone;
1,3,3-Trimethylbicyclo-1,2,2-heptanone-2; d-1,3,3- Trimethyl-2-norbornanone; Fenchone;
F005 d-Fenchone d-1,3,3-Trimethyl-2-norbornanone; d-1,3,3- Trimehyl-2-norcamphanone;
1,3,3-trimethylbicyclo[2.2.1]heptan-2-one; d-2-fenchanone

F006 Formic acid* Methanoic acid

Myrtenal; benihinal; 2-Formyl-6,6-dimethyl-2-norpinene; 6,6-Dimethyl-2-norpinene- 2-aldehyde;

F007 2-Formyl-6,6-dimethylbicyclo[3.1.1]hept-2-ene 6,6-Dimethylbicyclo[3.1.1]hept-2-ene-2-carboxaldehyde, 6,6-Dimethyl- 2-norpinene-2-carboxaldehyde,
Pin-2-ene-1-carbaldehyde; Pin-2-en-10-al

F008 Furaneol acetate 4-Acetoxy-2,5-dimethylfuran-3(2H)-one

F009 4-[(2-Furanmethyl)thio]-2-pentanone 4-(Furan-2-ylmethylsulfanyl)pentane-2-one; 4-Furfurylthio-2-pentanone

Furfuraldehyde; 2-Furylcarboxaldehyde; fural; 2-Furancarbonal; 2-Formylfuran; 2-Furaldehyde;

F010 Furfural α-Furfuraldehyde; Pyromucic aldehyde; 2-Furancarboxaldehyde

3-[(2-Furanylmethyl)dithio]-2-methylfuran; 2-Methyl-3-[(2-furanylmethyl)-dithio]furan; (2-Methyl-3-furyl)

F011 Furfuryl 2-methyl-3-furyl disulfide furfuryl disulfi de; 3-(Furfuryldithio)-2-methylfuran; 2-Methyl-3- furyl 2-furylmethyl disulphide
F012 Furfuryl 3-methylbutanoate 3-Methylbutanoic acid; Furanylmethyl ester; Furfuryl isovalerate

F013 Furfuryl acetate 2-Furanmethanol, acetate; 2-Furyl carbinyl acetate

F014 Furfuryl alcohol 2-Furancarbinol; 2-Furanmethanol; Furfuralcohol; α-Furylcarbinol; 2-Furylcarbinol; 2-Hydroxymethylfuran

1264
Order General Name Synonyms
3-Octanon-1-ol; Methylol methyl amyl ketone; Ketone alcohol; Caproylethanol; 3-Oxo-1-octanol;
F015 Furfuryl butyrate Hexanoylethanol; 2-Acetyl-1-hexanol; Butanoic acid; 2-Furanylmethyl ester; 2-Furylmethyl butanoate
F016 Furfuryl isopropyl sulfide Isoproypl furfuryl sulfide; Isopropyl furfuryl sulphide

F017 Furfuryl mercaptan α-Furfuryl mercaptan; Furfurylidene-2-butanal; 2-Furanmethanethiol; 2-Furyl methanethiol

F018 Furfuryl methyl ether Methyl furfuryl ether

F019 Furfuryl methyl sulfide Methyl furfuryl sulfide

F020 Furfuryl octanoate α-Furfuryl octanoate; α-Furfuryl caprylate; Octanoic acid; 2-Furanylmethyl ester; 2-furfuryl octanoate

Furfuryl valerate; α-Furfuryl pentanoate; α-Furfuryl valerate; Pentanoic acid; 2-Furanylmethyl ester;
F021 Furfuryl pentanoate
α-Furfuryl pentanoate; Furfuryl pentanoate
F022 Furfuryl propionate Furfuryl propanoate; 2-Furanmethanol propionate

F023 S-Furfuryl thioacetate furfuryl thioacetate; Furfuryl thiol acetate; S-furfuryl acetothioate

F024 S-Furfuryl thioformate 2-furanmethanethiol formate; Furfurylthiol formate; 2-Furfuryl thioformate

F025 S-Furfuryl thiopropionate furfuryl thiopropionate; s-Furfuryl propanethioate

2-Ethyl-3-(2-furyl)-2-propenal; 2-Furfurylidenebutanal; 3-(2-furyl)-2-ethyl-2-propenal;
F026 2-Furfurylidenebutyraldehyde 3-(2-furyl)-2-ethylacrolein; Furfurylidene-2-butyraldehyde; 3-Ethyl-3(2-furyl)-2-propenal;
2-Ethyl-3(2-furyl)acrolein
F027 N-Furfurylpyrrole 1-Furfurylpyrrole; 1-(2-Furfuryl)pyrrole; 1-Furfuryl-1H-pyrrole

F028 2-Furyl methyl ketone 2-Acetylfuran; Methyl 2-furyl ketone; Acetylfuran; 2-Furyl methyl ketone

F029 4-(2-Furyl)-3-buten-2-one 4-(2-Furyl)-3-buten-2-one; furfuralacetone; 3-(2-Furyl)acrylaldehyde; 4-(2- Furyl)but-3-en-2-one

Furyl acrolein; (3-(2-furyl) acrolein); 2-Furanmethanethiol; 2-Furanacrolein; 3-(2-Furyl)-2-propen-1-al;

F030 3-(2-Furyl)acrolein 2-Propenal, 3-(2-Furanyl)-; 3-(2- Furyl)acrylaldehyde

1265
Order General Name Synonyms
1-(2-Furanyl)-3-butanone; 1-(2-Furyl)-3-butanone; 4-(2-Furyl)-2-butanone; Furfurylacetone; 2-Butanone,
F031 1-(2-Furyl)butan-3-one 4-(2-furanyl)-; 4-(2- Furyl) butan-2-one
4-(2-Furyl)but-3-en-2-one; 1-(2- Furyl)-propan-2-one; Furfuryl methyl ketone; 2-Acetonylfuran; Furyl
F032 2-Furyl-2-propanone
acetone; Methyl furfuryl ketone

F033 1-Furyl-2-propanone furyl acetone

1-(2-Furyl)-propan-2-one; Amyl alcohol, commercial; (not well defined); Fusel oil, refined (mixed amyl
F034 Fusel oil, refined alcohols)

α-Furancarboxylic acid; α-Furoic acid; Pyromucic acid; 2-Carboxyfuran; Furan-2-carboxylic acid;

F035 2-Furoic acid Furancarboxylic acid-(2);2-Furancarboxylic acid
Pyrrole-2-carboxaldehyde; Pyrrole-2-aldehyde; 2-Pyrrolylcarboxaldehyde; α-Pyrrolaldehyde;
F036 2-Formyl pyrrole 2-Pyrrolecarbaldehyde;2-Pyrrolecarboxaldehyde; 1H-Pyrrole-2-carbaldehyde; 1H-pyrrole-2-carboxyaldehyde;
2-carboxaldehyde-1H-pyrrole;H-pyrrole-2-carboxaldehyde;2-Pyrrolcarbaldehyde

F037 Furfural diethyl acetal Furan, 2-(diethoxymethyl)-; 2-(Diethoxymethyl)furan;2-Furaldehyde diethyl acetal

F038 l-Fenchone Alpha-fenchone; (1R,4S)-1,3,3-Trimethylbicyclo[2.2.1]heptan-2-one

F039 1-(2-Furfurylthio)-2-propanone (Furfurylthio)acetone; 1-[(Furan-2-ylmethyl)sulfanyl]propan-2-one

(E)-2,6-Octadienoic acid, 3,7-dimethyl- ; 3,7- Dimethyl-2(trans),6-octadienoic acid; 3,7-Dimethylocta-2,6-dienoic

G001 Geranic acid acid

trans-3,7-Dimethyl-2,7-octadien-1-ol; trans-3,7-Dimethyl-2,6-octadien-1-ol; 2,6-Dimethyl-2,6-octadien-8-ol;

G002 Geraniol* trans-3,7-Dimethyl-2,7-octadien-1-ol; 2-trans-3,7-Dimethyl-2,6-octaddien-1-ol; 3,7-Dimethyl-2,6 and
3,6-octadien-1-ol

Butanoic acid, 2-methyl-, (2E)-3,7-dimethyl-2,6-octadienyl ester; Butanoic acid, 2-methyl-,

G003 Geranyl 2-methylbutyrate
3,7-dimethyl-2,6-octadienyl ester, (E)-; Geranyl 2-methylbutanoate

G004 Geranyl acetate* Geranyl ethanoate; trans-3,7-dimethyl-2,6-octadien-1-yl ethanoate; trans-3,7- dimethyl-2,6-octadien-1-yl

1266
Order General Name Synonyms
acetate; 2,6-Dimethyl-2,6-octadiene-8-yl acetate; geraniol acetate

trans-3,7-dimethyl-2,6-octadien-1-yl 3-oxobutanoate; trans-3,7-Dimethyl-2,6-octadien-1-yl acetoacetate;

G005 Geranyl acetoacetate
Geranyl β-ketobutyrate; Geranyl 3-oxo-butanoate

G006 Geranyl acetone 6,10-Dimethyl-5,9-undecadien-2-one.

G007 Geranyl benzoate Geraniol benzoate; trans-3,7-Dimethyl-2,6-octadien-1-yl benzoate; 3,7-Dimethylocta-2(trans),6-dienyl benzoate

G008 Geranyl butyrate trans-3,7-Dimethyl-2,6-octadien-1-yl butanoate

Geranyl methanoate; trans-3,7-Dimethyl-2,6-octadien-1-yl methanoate; trans-3,7-Dimethyl-2,6-octadien-1-yl

G009 Geranyl formate* formate

G010 Geranyl hexanoate trans-3,7-Dimethyl-2,6-octadien-1-yl hexanoate; Geranyl caproate; geranyl hexylate

Geranyl 2-methylpropanoate; trans-3,7-Dimethyl-2,6-octadien-1-yl 2-methylpropanoate;

G011 Geranyl isobutyrate trans-3,7-Dimethyl-2,6-octadien-1-yl isobutyrate; 3,7-Dimethyl-2,6-octadienyl-2-methyl propanoate; Geranyl
2-methylpropionate
Geranyl isovalerianate; trans-3,7-Dimethyl-2,6-octadien-1-yl 3-methylbutanoate;
trans-3,7-dimethyl-2,6-octadien-1-yl isovalerate; trans-3,7-dimethyl-2,6-octadien-1-yl isopentanoate; Geranyl
G012 Geranyl isovalerate 3-methylbutanoate; Geranyl isopentanoate; 3,7-Dimethyl-2,6-octadienyl-3-methylbutanoate; Geranyl
3-methylbutyrate
trans-3,7-Dimethyl-2,6-octadien-1-yl phenylacetate; Geranyl α-toluate; 3,7-dimethylocta-2(trans),6-dienyl
G013 Geranyl phenylacetate
phenylacetate

trans-3,7-Dimethyl-2,6-octadien-1-yl propanoate; Geranyl propanoate; trans-3,7- Dimethyl-2,6-octadien-1-yl

G014 Geranyl propionate propanoate; 2,6-Dimethy octadien-6-yl-8- n-propionate

2-Butenoic acid, 2-methyl 3,7-dimethyl-2,6-octadienyl ester,(E,E)-; Tiglic acid,3,7- dimethyl-2,6-octadienyl

G015 Geranyl tiglate ester; Tiglic acid, geraniol ester

1267
Order General Name Synonyms
Pentanoic acid, (2E)-3,7-dimethyl-2,6-octadienyl ester; 2,6-Octadien-1-ol, 3,7-dimethyl-, valerate, (E)-;
Pentanoic acid, 3,7-dimethyl-2,6-octadienyl ester,
G016 Geranyl valerate (E)-; Valeric acid, 3,7-dimethyl-2,6-octadienyl ester, (E)-; Geraniol valerate; Geranyl pentanoate;
2,6-Dimethyl-2,6-octadiene-8-yl pentanoate
1,2,3,4,6-Pentaacetyl-α-d-glucose; β-Phenylacetyl-dextro-glucose; α-Pebtaacetyl-dextro-glucose;
G017 Glucose pentaacetate 1,2,3,4,6-Pentaacetyl-β-d-glucose; Pentaacetyl glucose; 1,2,3,4,6-pentaacetyl-α-ㅇ-glucose;
1,2,3,4,6-pentaacetyl-β-ㅇ-glucose

G018 Glyceryl 5-hydroxydecanoate Decanoic acid, 5-hydroxy-, Monoester with glycerol; 2,3-Dihydroxypropyl 5-hydroxydecanoate

G019 Glyceryl 5-hydroxydodecanoate Dodecanoic acid, 5-hydroxy-, Monoester with glycerol; 2,3-Dihydroxypropyl 5-hydroxydodecanoate

G020 Glyceryl tribenzoate 1,2,3-Propanetriol tribenzoate; Tribenzoin; Propanetri-1,2,3-yl tribenzoate

G021 Glyceryl tripropionate Propionic acid, triglyceride; Tripropionin; 1,2,3-Tri(propionyloxy)propane

G022 Glycyrrhinzin, ammoniated Glycyrrhizic acid, ammoniated; Glycyrrhizin

Pyroguaiac acid; 1-Oxy-2-methoxybenzene; o-Methylcatechol; 1-Hydroxy-2-methoxybenzene; 2-Methoxyphenol;

G023 Guaiacol
o-Hydroxyanisole; o-Methoxyphenol; Methylcatechol; Pyrocatechol monomethyl ether; 1-Oxy-2-methoxybenzene
1-Acetoxy-2-methoxybenzene; 2-Methoxyphenyl acetate; acetyl guaiacol; o-Methoxyphenyl acetate;
G024 Guaiacyl acetate 2-methoxyphenol acetate; o-Acetoxyanisole; Guaiacyl acetate
o-Methylcatechol acetate; Guaiacol phenylacetate; o-methoxyphenyl phenylacetate; 2-Methoxyphenyl
G025 Guaiacyl phenylacetate phenylacetate; o-Methylcatechol phenylacetate; o-methoxyphenyl acetate

G026 Guaiene 1,4-Dimethyl-7-isopropenyl-D9,10-octahydroazulene

G027 Guaiol acetate 1,4-Dimethyl-7-(a-hydroxyisopropyl)-d9,10-octahydroazulene acetate.

1268
Order General Name Synonyms

4A(2h)-Naphthalenol, octahydro-4,8a-dimethyl-,(4α,4aα,8aβ)-; 4a(2H)-Naphthalenol, octahydro-4,8a-dimethyl-,

G028 Geosmin [4S-(4α,4aα,8aβ)]-; 4a-α-(2H)-Naphthol, octahydro-4-α,8a-β-dimethyl-;
4,8a-Dimethyloctahydro-4a(2H)-naphthalenol

Germacrene D; 8-Isopropyl-1-methyl-5-methylene-1,6-cyclodecadiene;1,6-Cyclodecadiene,
G029 Germacra-1(10),4(14),5-triene 1-methyl-5-methylene-8-(1-methylethyl)-, [s-(e,e)]-;D-Germacrene
N-(2-Hydroxyethyl)-hexonamide; 2,3,4,5,6-Pentahydroxy-N-(2-hydroxyethyl)-hexanamide; gluconic acid
G030 N-Gluconyl ethanolamine ethanolamine; N-(2-Hydroxyethyl)-gluconamide

N-(2-Hydroxyethyl)-hexonamide phosphate; 2-[(2,3,4,5,6-pentahydroxyhexanoyl)amino]ethyl dihydrogen

G031 N-Gluconyl ethanolamine phosphate phosphate; 2,3,4,5,6-Pentahydroxy-N-(2-hydroxyethyl)hexanamide phosphate; Gluconic acid ethanolamine
phosphate

G032 Glyceryl monooleate Monoolein; 2,3-Dihydroxypropyl 9-octadecanoate

G033 Glyceryl monostearate Monostearin; alpha-Monostearin; 1-Glyceryl monooctadecanoate; 2,3-Dihydroxypropyl octadecanoate

G034 Glycyrrhizic acid

3-Hexenyl-2-aminobenzoate; (Z)-Hex-3-enyl anthranilate; (Z)-3-Hexenyl anthranilate; Hex-3(cis)-enyl

H001 cis-3-Hecenyl anthranilate anthranilate; (Z)-Hexenyl 2-aminobenzoate

trans-2-Heptenal; 3-Butylacrolein; β-Butylacrolein; 2-Heotenic aldehyde; 4-Propylcrotonaldehyde;

H002 Hept-2(trans)-enal α,β-heptenoic aldehyde; 2-Heptenal; (E)-2-hepten-1-al; 2-Heptenal; β-Butyl acrolein; Trans-hept-2-en-1-al;
3-Butylacrolein; ß-Butylacrolein; Hept-2-enal; Trans-Hept-2-enal

H003 Hept-2-en-1-yl isovalerate Hept-2-enyl isovalerate; Butanoic acid, 3-methyl-, (E2)-heptenyl ester

H004 trans-2-trnas-4-Heptadien-1-ol 2,4-Heptadien-1-ol, (2E,4E)-; 2,4-Heptadien-1-ol, (E,E)-; (2E,4E)-Heptadienol; (E,E)-Hepta-2,4-dien-1-ol

H005 (E,E)-2,4-Heptadienal 2,4-Heptadienal; trans,trans-2,4-Heptadienal; Hepta-2,4-dienal

1269
Order General Name Synonyms

4-Heptanolide; 5-Propyldihydro-2(3H)-furanone; Hepta-1,4-lactone; Heptanolide-1,4;

4-n-propyl-4-hydroxybutanoic acid lactone; Heptano-1,4-lactone; Heptanolide-(4,1); 4-hydroxyheptanoic acid,
H006 γ-Heptalactone γ-lactone; γ-n-Propyl-γ-butyrolactone; γ-Heptalactone; Heptanolide-(4,1); 4-Hydroxyheptanoic acid,
γ-Lactone

H007 (+/-)-Heptan-2-yl butyrate Hept-2-yl butyrate; 2-Heptyl ester; 1-Methylhexyl butyrate; Butanoic acid; 1-Methylhexyl ester

Hept-3-yl acetate; 1-Ethylpent-1-yl acetate; Acetic acid, 3-Heptyl ester; 1-Ethylpentyl acetate, 3-Heptanol
H008 (+/-)-Heptan-3-yl acetate acetate; Hex-3-enyl but-2-enoate

H009 N-(Heptan-4-yl)benzo[D][1,3]dioxole-5-carboxamide 1,3-Benzodioxole-5-carboxamide, N-(1-propylbutyl)-N-(1-propylbutyl)-1,3- benzodioxole-5-carboxamide

Enanthal; oenanthal; Aldehyde C-7; Enanthaldehyde; n-Heptaldehyde; n-Heptyl aldehyde; Heptyl aldehyde;
H010 Heptanal Heptaldehyde; Aldehyde Heptan-1-alc-7

Enanthal dimethyl acetal; Oenanthal dimethyl acetal; Heptaldehyde dimethyl acetal; 1,1-Dimethoxy heptane;
H011 Heptanal dimethyl acetal Aldehyde C-7 dimethyl acetal
2-Hexyl-4-hydroxymethyl-1,3-dioxolan; 2-Hexyl-4-hydroxy-1,3-dioxan; Mixture of
2-hexyl-4-hydroxymethyl-1,3-dioxolane and 2-hexyl-5-hydroxy-1,3-dioxane; 4-Hexyl-
H012 Heptanal glyceryl acetal (mixed 1,2 and 1,3 acetals) 2-hydroxymethyl-1,3-dioxolane; heptaldehyde glyceryl acetal; 2- Hexyl-4- hydroxymethyl-1,3-dioxolan & 2-
Hexyl-5-hydroxy-1,3-dioxane; 2-Hexyl-4-hydroxy- 1,3-dioxane

H013 2,3-Heptanedione Acetyl pentanoyl; Acetyl valeryl; Valeryl acetyl

H014 2-Heptanethiol (+/-)-2-Heptanethiol

n-Heptylic acid; Oenanthic acid; Heptoic acid; Oenanthylic acid; Enanthic acid; n-Heptanoic; Enanthic;
H015 Heptanoic acid n-Heptanoic acid

1270
Order General Name Synonyms
H016 2-Heptanol 2-Hydroxyheptane; n-amyl methyl carbinol; sec-heptyl alcohol; Amyl methyl carbinol; Methyl amyl carbinol

H017 3-Heptanol Butyl ethyl carbinol; Ethyl butyl carbinol; n-Butyl ethyl carbinol

H018 2-Heptanone Amyl methyl ketone; ketone C-7; Methyl amyl ketone; Heptan-2-one; Amyl methyl ketone

H019 3-Heptanone Butyl ethyl ketone; Ethyl butyl ketone; Ethyl-n-butyl ketone

H020 4-Heptanone Butyrone; dipropyl ketone

H021 (Z)-4-Hepten-1-ol Cis-4-heptenol; 4-(Z)-heptenol

H022 3-Hepten-2-one n-Butylideneacetone; 1-Acetyl-1-pentene; Butylidene acetone; Methyl pentenyl ketone; Hept-3-en-2-one

H023 (+/-)-1-Hepten-3-ol Hept-1-en-3-ol; Butyl vinyl carbinol; 1- Hepten-3-ol

H024 2-Hepten-4-one Propenyl propyl ketone; Ethyl ethylidene acetone; 1-Butyryl propylene; Hept-2-en-4-one

(Z)-hept-4-en-1-al; 4-Hepten-1-al; n-Propylidene butyraldehyde; Cis-4-hepten-1-al; Hept-4-enal;

H025 cis-4-Heptenal Cis-4-Ethylidene butyraldehyde

H026 trans-4-Heptenal trans Hept-4-enal; 4-Hepten-1-al; n-Propylidene butyraldehyde

H027 4-Heptenal diethyl acetal 1,1-Diethoxyhept-4-ene (cis and trans); 1,1-Diethoxy-4-heptene

H028 (E)-2-Heptenoic acid trans-2-Heptenoic acid

H029 trans-3-Heptenyl 2-methylpropanoate trans-3-Heptenyl isobutyrate; Hept-3(trans)-enyl isobutyrate

H030 trans-3-Heptenyl acetate Hept-3(trans)-enyl acetate; 3-Hepten-1-ol, acetate

H031 Hept-trans-2-en-1-yl acetate 2-Hepten-1-ol, acetate, (2E)-; 2-Hepten-1-ol, acetate, (E)-; (E)-2-Heptenyl acetate; trans-2-Heptenyl acetate

H032 Heptyl acetate Heptyl ethanoate; Acetate C-7; Heptanyl acetate

pri-Heptyl alcohol; Hexyl carbinol; Alcohol C-7; Enanthic alcohol; 1-Heptanol; Hydroxy heptane; Heptan-1-ol;
H033 Heptyl alcohol
Enanthyl alcohol
H034 Heptyl butyrate Heptyl butanoate; n-Heptyl-n-butanoate; n-heptyl-n-butyrate

1271
Order General Name Synonyms

H035 Heptyl cinnamate Heptyl-β-phenylacrylate; heptyl-3-phenyl propenoate

H036 Heptyl formate Heptyl methanoate ; n-Heptyl methanoate

H037 Heptyl isobutyrate n-Heptyl dimethylacetate; n-Heptyl isobutanoate; n-Heptyl-2-methylpropanoate

H038 Heptyl octanoate Heptyl caprylate; Heptyl octylate; n-Heptyl octanoate

H039 cis- and trans-2-Heptylcyclopropanecarboxylic acid Cyclopropanecarboxylic acid, 2-heptyl-

3-Heptyl-4-pentanolide; α-n-Heptyl-γ-vaerolactone; 3-Heptyl-5-methyl-2(3H)- furanone;
H040 3-Heptyldihydro-5-methyl-2(3H)-furanone α-Heptyl-γ-valerolactone; α-n-Heptyl-8-valerolactone;
H041 2-Heptylfuran 1-(2-Furyl)-heptane

H042 Hex-2-enyl acetate 2-Hexen-1-yl acetate; 2-hexenyl ethanoate; Hex-2-enyl acetate

H043 Hex-3(trans)-enal

H044 1-Hexadecanol Alcohol C-16; Cetyl alcohol; Palmityl alcohol; Hexadecan-1-ol; n-Hexadecyl alcohol
6-Hexadecenolide; Oxacycloheptadec-7-en-2-one; Hexadec-6-eno-1,16-lactone; Ambrettolide;
Hexadec-6-eno-1,16-lactone; Cyclohexadecen-7-olide; 16-Hydroxy-6- hexadecenoic acid, w-lactone;
H045 omega-6-Hexadecenlactone 16-hydroxy-Δ7-hexadecenoic acid, lactone; hexadec- 7-en-1,16-lactone; omega-6-hexadecenlactone;
16-Hydroxy-7-hexadecenoic acid lactone; 6-Hexadecenolide
H046 2,4-Hexadien-1-ol 1-Hydroxy-2,4-hexadiene, Sorbic alcohol, Sorbyl alcohol; Hexa-2,4-dien-1-ol
trans, trans-2,4-hexadienal; 2-Propylene acrolein; Hexa-2(trans),4(trans)-dienal; Sorbic aldehyde;
H047 (E,E)-2,4-Hexadienal Hexa-2(trans),4(trans)-dienal; Hexa-2,4-dienal

(E,E)-2,4-Hexadienoic acid, Panosorb, (E,E)-1,3-Pentadiene-1-carboxylic acid, Sorbistat; Sorbic acid;

H048 (E,E)-2,4-Hexadienoic acid
Hexa-2,4-dienoic acid

H049 2,4-Hexadienyl acetate Sorbyl acetate; 2,4-Hexadien-1-ol, acetate

H050 2,4-Hexadienyl butyrate Sorbyl butyrate; Butanoic acid, 2,4-Hexadienyl ester

1272
Order General Name Synonyms

H051 2,4-Hexadienyl isobutyrate Sorbyl isobutyrate; Propanoic acid, 2-Methyl-, 2,4-Hexadienyl ester

H052 2,4-Hexadienyl propionate Sorbyl propionate; 2,4-Hexadien-1-ol, propanoate

epsilon-Caprolactam; omega-Caprolactam; 1-Aza-2-cycloheptanone; 2-Azacycloheptanone;
2-Ketohexamethylenimine; 2-Oxohexamethylenimine; 2-Perhydrazepinone; 6-Caprolactam; 6-Hexanelactam;
H053 1,6-Hexalactam Aminocaproic lactam; Azepan-2-one; Caprolactam; Hexahydro-2-azepinone; Hexahydro-2H-azepin-2-one;
Hexano-6-lactam; Hexanoic acid, 6-amino-, cyclic lactam; Hexanolactam
4-Hexanolide; 5-Ethyldihydro-2(3H)-furanone; 4-Hydroxyhexanoic acid lactone; hexa-1,4-lactone; Ethyl
butyrolactone; 4-Ethyl-4-hydroxybutanoic acid lactone; γ-Ethyl-γ-butyrolactone; Hexano-1,4-lactone;
H054 γ-Hexalactone γ-Caprolactone; ethyl butyrolactone; γ-Ethyl-n-butyrolactone; Hexanolide-1,4; 4-Hydroxyhexanoic acid
γ-lactone; Tonkalide; γ-Hexalactone
5-Hexanolide; 6-Methyltetrahydro-2-pyrone; 5-Hydroxyhexanoic acid lactone; 5-Hydroxyhexanoic acid lactone;
5-Methyl-5-hydroxypentanoic acid lactone; 5-Methyl-δ-valerolactone; Hexano-1,5-lactone; 5-Hydroxyhexanoic
H055 delta-Hexalactone acid, δ-lactone; δ-Caprolactone; Tetrahydro-6-methyl-2H-pyran-2-one; delta-Hexalactone;
5-Methyl-d-valerolactone

Hexaldehyde; Caproaldehyde; Aldehyde C-6; n-Caproaldehyde; Caproic aldehyde; Hexoic aldehyde;

H056 Hexanal n-Hexaldehyde

H057 2,3-Hexanedione Butyryl acetyl; Acetyl butyryl; Acetyl-n-butyryl; Methyl propyl diketone

H058 3,4-Hexanedione Diethyl diketone; Dipropionyl; 3,4-Dioxohexane; Diethyl-α, β-diketone

H059 1,6-Hexanedithiol 1,6-Dimercaptohexane; Hexamethylene dimercaptan

1273
Order General Name Synonyms
H060 1-Hexanethiol Hexyl mercaptan
n-Caproic acid; hexoic acid; n-Hexylic acid; Pentane-1-carboxylic acid; Caproic acid; 2-Butylacetic acid;
H061 Hexanoic acid
Pentylformic acid
H062 3-Hexanol Ethyl propyl carbinol; 3-Hydroxyhexane

H063 3-Hexanone Ethyl propyl ketone; 3-Oxohexane

2-Hexenol; trans-2-hexenol; α,β-Hexenol; Leaf alcohol; γ-Propyl allyl alcohol; Hex-2(trans)-en-1-ol;

H064 2-Hexen-1-ol 3-Propylallyl alcohol; Trans-2-hexen-1-ol; trans-2-Hexen-1-ol
3-Hexen-1-ol;(Z)-hex-3-enol; Green leaf alcohol; Leaf alcohol; Blatter alcohol; cis-3-hexenol; β,γ-Hexenol;
H065 cis-3-Hexen-1-ol Hex-3(cis)-en-1-ol; Blatteralkohol; Hex-3-en-1-ol; Hex-3(trans)-en-1-ol
H066 4-Hexen-1-ol Hex-4-en-1-ol; 2-Hexen-ol-6; 4-Hexenyl alcohol

H067 2-Hexen-1-yl acetate

H068 1-Hexen-3-ol Vinyl propyl carbinol; 1-Vinylbutan-1-ol; Vinyl butan-1-ol; Propyl vinyl carbinol

H069 4-Hexen-3-one 2-Hexen-4-one; 2-Hexen-2-one; Hex-2-en-4-one; Propylene ethyl ketone

Hexen-2-al; β-propylacrolein; Leaf aldehyde; trans-2-Hexenal; trans-2-Hexen-1-al; ß-Propylacrolein;
H070 2-Hexenal trans-hex-2-enal
H071 cis-3-Hexenal 3-Hexenal, (Z)-; cis-β,γ-Hexylenic aldehyde; Hex-3-enal

H072 cis-4-Hexenal 4-Hexenal, (Z)-; Hex-4-enal

H073 3-Hexenal

H074 trans-4-Hexenal (E)-4-Hexenal; trans-Hex-4-enal

H075 (E)-2-Hexenal diethyl acetal 2-Hexene,1,1-diethoxy-,(2E)-

β-Propylacrylic acid; 3-Propylacrylic acid; Acrylic, β-propyl acid; Hexen-2-oic acid; α,β-Hexylenic acid;
H076 trans-2-Hexenoic acid α,β-Hexenoic acid; Hex-2(trans)-enoic acid
3-Hexenic acid; hydrosorbic acid; β-Amylene-α-carboxylic acid; 2-Pentene-1- carboxylic acid;
H077 3-Hexenoic acid Propylidenepropionic acid

1274
Order General Name Synonyms
H078 cis-2-Hexenol (Z)-3-Hexen-1-ol; (Z)-2-Hexenol; 2-Hexen-1-ol; Hex-2(cis)-en-1-ol; 2- Hexenol

2-Butanoic acid, 3-hexenyl ester; (E,Z)-Crotonate de (Z)-3-hexenyle; (Z)-3-Hexenyl crotenate; (Z)-2-Butenoic

H079 (Z)-3-Hexenyl (E)-2-butenoate acid 3-hexenyl ester; cis-3-Hexenyl trans-2-butenoate; Hex-3-enyl but-2-enoate

(Z)-Hexenyl(E)-2-Hexenoate; 2-Hexenoic acid, 3-hexenyl ester,(E,Z); 2-Hexenoic acid, (E), 3-hexenyl ester,(Z);
H080 3-Hexenyl 2-hexenoate cis-3-Hexenyl trans-2-hexenoate; Hex-3-enyl hex-2-enoate
3-Hexenyl 2-methylbutyrate; cis-3-Hexenyl-α-methylbutyrate ; Hex-3-enyl 2-methylbutyrate; Hex-3-enyl
H081 3-Hexenyl 2-methylbutanoate 2-methylbutanoate

3-Hexenyl 3-isovalerate; 3-Hexenyl isopentanoate; 3-Hexenyl isovalerate; cis-3-hexenyl isovalerate;

H082 3-Hexenyl 3-methylbutanoate Hex-3-enyl isovalerate

H083 cis-3-Hexenyl acetate cis-3-Hexen-1-yl acetate; cis-3-Hexenyl ethanoate; Hex-3(cis)-enyl acetate

H084 cis-3-Hexenyl benzoate Hex-3-enyl benzoate; 3-Hexen-1-ol, benzoate, (Z); (Z)-3-hexenyl benzoate

H085 cis-3-Hexenyl butyrate Hex-3-enyl butyrate; β,γ-Hexenyl-n-butyrate; cis-3-Hexenyl butanoate; Leaf butyrate

H086 trans-2-Hexenyl butyrate (E)-2-Hexenyl butyrate; Butanoic acid, 2-hexenyl ester; trans-2-Hexenyl butanoate; Hex-2-enyl butyrate

H087 cis-3-Hexenyl cis-3-hexenoate Hex-3-enyl hex-3-enoate; 3-Hexwnoic acid, 3-hexenyl ester, (Z,Z)-; (Z)-3-Hexenyl (Z)-3-hexenoate

3-Hexenyl methanoate; Hex-3(cis)-enyl formate; β,γ-Hexenyl methanoate; (Z)-3-hexenol formate; Leaf

H088 cis-3-Hexenyl formate alcohol formate

H089 trans-3-Hexenyl formate

H090 trans-2-Hexenyl formate Hexen-1-ol, formate,(E)-(E)-Hex-2-enyl formate; Hex-2-enyl formate; (E)-Hex-2-enyl formate

H091 3-Hexenyl formate (cis and trans mixture)

H092 cis-3-Hexenyl hexanoate Hex-3-enyl hexanoate; β,γ-Hexenyl hexoate; cis-3-Hexenyl caproate; Leaf caproate; cis-3-hexen-1-ol

1275
Order General Name Synonyms
hexenoate; 3-Hexenyl caproate

H093 (E)-2-Hexenyl hexanoate Hexanoic acid, (2E)-2-hexenyl ester; trans-2-Hexenyl caproate; trans-2-Hexenyl hexanoate

(Z)-3-Hexenyl isobutyrate; (Z)-Hex-3-enyl isobutyrate; 3-Hexenyl 2-methylpropionate; cis-3-Hexenyl

H094 cis-Hexenyl isobutyrate isobutyrate; Hex-3(cis)-enyl isobutyrate; β,γ-Hexenyl isobutanoate
Butanoic acid, 3-methyl-, 2-hexenyl ester,(E); (E)-Hex-2-enyl isovalerate; trans-2-Hexenyl isovalerate;
H095 (E)-2-Hexenyl isovalerate
Hex-2-enyl isovalerate

Hex-3-enyl lactate; cis-3-Hexenyl 2-hydroxypropanoate; (Z)-3-hexenyl lactate; propanoic acid, 2-hydroxy-,

H096 cis-3-Hexenyl lactate
3-hexenyl ester, (Z)-; Leaf lactate

H097 2-Hexenyl octanoate Octanoic acid, 2-hexenyl ester, (E)-

Benzeneacetic acid, 3-hexenyl ester, (Z)-; cis-3-Hexenyl phenyl acetate; 3-Hexenyl α-toluate; β,τ-hexenyl
H098 3-Hexenyl phenylacetate ο-toluate; β,γ-Hexenyl α-toluate; Hex-3(cis)-enyl phenylacetate

(Z)-3 and (E)-2-Hexenyl propionate; Green note propionate; cis-1-3, trans-2-Hexenyl propionate; Propanoic
H099 cis-3- and trans-2-Hexenyl propionate acid, cis-3, trans-2-hexenyl ester
(E)-2-Hexenyl propionate; 2-Hexen-1-ol, propionate,(E); (E)-Hex-2-enyl propionate; 2-Hexenyl propanoate;
H100 cis-3 and trans-2-Hexenyl propionate trans-2-Hexenyl propionate

2-Hexen-1-ol, propanoate, (E); (E)-Hex-2-enyl-propionate; trans-2-Hexenyl propionate; (Z)-3-hexenyl

H101 cis-Hexenyl propionate propionate; Hex-3(cis)-enyl propionate; β,γ-Hexenyl propanoate

(Z)-3-Hexenyl pyruvate; Propanoic acid, 3-oxo-, 3-hexenyl ester,(Z); Hex-3-enyl 2-oxopropionate; Hex-3-enyl
H102 cis-3-Hexenyl pyruvate pyruvate
(Z)-3-Hexenyl(E)-2-methyl-2-butenoate; (Z)-3-hexenyl2-methylcrotonate; cis-3-Hexenyl α-methylcrotonate;
H103 cis-Hexenyl tiglate cis-3-Hexenyl trans-2-methyl-2-butenoate; cis-3-Hexenyl tiglate; Hex-3(cis)-enyl 2-methylcrotonate;
cis-3-Hexenyl-2-methyl- trans-2-butenoate

H104 (E)-2-Hexenyl valerate trans-2-Hexenyl pentanoate; (E)-Hex-2-enyl valerate; Pentanoic acid, 2-hexenyl ester,(E)

(Z)-3-Hexenyl valerate; cis-3-Hexenyl pentanoate; (Z)-Hex-3-enyl valerate; Valeric acid, 3-hexenyl ester,(Z);
H105 cis-Hexenyl valerate cis-3-Hexenyl valerate; Hex-3-enyl valerate

1276
Order General Name Synonyms

H106 n-Hexyl 2-butenoate Hexyl crotonate; Hexyl 2-butenoate

H107 Hexyl 2-furoate 2-Furancarboxylic acid, hexyl ester; 2-Furoic acid; Hexyl furan-2-carboxylate

H108 Hexyl 2-methyl-3- and 4-pentenoate (mixture) Hexyl-2-methylpent-(3 and 4)-enoate

H109 Hexyl 2-methylbutyrate hexyl 2-methylbutanoate

H110 Hexyl 3-mercaptobutanoate Butanoic acid, 3-mercapto-, Hexyl ester; 3-Mercaptobutanoic acid hexyl ester

H111 Hexyl 3-methylbutanoate Hexyl isovalerate; hexyl isopentanoate; Hexyl isovalerianate

H112 Hexyl acetate Hexyl ethanoate; 1-Acetoxy-hexane

H113 Hexyl alcohol Caproic alcohol; Alcohol C-6; 1-Hexanol; Hexan-1-ol; n-Hexyl alcohol; Amyl carbinol; n-Hexanol

H114 Hexyl benzoate Benzoic acid, hexyl ester; Agrumat; n-Hexyl benzenecarboxylate; n-Hexyl benzoate; Hexyl phenyl methanoate

H115 Hexyl butyrate Hexyl butanoate; n-Hexyl n-butanoate

H116 Hexyl formate Hexyl methanoate; n-Hexyl formate; Formic acid hexyl ester

H117 Hexyl hexanoate Hexyl caproate; Hexyl capronate; hexyl hexylate

H118 Hexyl isobutyrate Hexyl 2-methylpropanoate

H119 Hexyl octanoate Hexyl caprylate; n-Hexyl-n-octanoate; n-Hexyl-n-octoate; n-Hexyl octylate; Hexyl octylate

H120 Hexyl phenylacetate Phenylacetic acid, hexyl ester; Henzeneacetic acid, hexyl ester; Hexyl α-toluate; n-hexyl phenylacetate

H121 Hexyl propionate n-Hexyl propanoate

H122 Hexyl trans-2-hexenoate Hexyl 2-hexenoate; 2-Hexenoic aicd, hexyl ester, (E)-; Hexyl (E)-2-hexenoate

1277
Order General Name Synonyms

H123 2-Hexyl-4,5-dimethyl-1,3-dioxolane Heptanal2,3-butandiol acetal

H124 2-Hexyl-4-acetoxytetrahydrofuran
H125 2-Hexyl-5 or 6-keto-1,4-dioxane 5-Hexyl-1,4-dioxan-2-one
H126 Hexylamine 1-Aminohexane; 1-Hexylamine; Mono-n-hexylamine; n-Hexylamine
α-n-Hexylcinnamic aldehyde; Jasmonal h; 2-Benzylidene-octanal; α-n-Hexyl-β- phenyl acrolein; Hexyl
H127 α-Hexylcinnamaldehyde
cinnamic aldehyde; 1-(phenylmethylene)cotanal
H128 2-Hexylidene cyclopentanone Cyclopentanone, 2-hexylidene-; α-Hexylidene cyclopentanone; Jasmalone; 2- Hexylidenecyclopentan-1-one

H129 2-Hexylthiophene Thiophene, 2-hexyl-

4H-1-Benzopyran-4-one, 2,3-dihydro-5,7-dihydroxy-2-(4-hydroxy-3-methoxyphenyl)-, sodium salt; (+,-)-5,7,4
H130 (-)-Homoeriodictyol, sodium salt
-Trihydroxy-3 -methoxyfl avanone, sodium salt; (+,-)-Homoeriodictyol sodium salt

2-(2-Hycroxy-4-methyl-3-cyclohexenyl) propionic acid Wine lactone; 2(3H)-Benzofuranone, 3a,4,5,7a-tetrahydro-3,6-dimethyl;

H131 γ-lactone 3a,4,5,7a-Tetrahydro-3,6-dimethylbenzofuran-2(3H)-one
2-Phenylpropanal; Hydratropaldehyde; α-Methyltolualdehyde; α-Methylphenyl- acetaldehyde;
H132 Hydratropic aldehyde α-Phenylpropionaldehyde; 2-Phenylpropionaldehyde; 2-Phenylpropanal; 2-Phenylpropionald

H133 Hydratropic aldehyde dimethyl acetal 1,1-Dimethoxy-2-phenylpropane; 2-Phenylpropionaldehyde dimethyl acetal; Phenylpropanal dimethyl acetal

H134 Hydrogen sulfide Hydrosulfuric acid

H135 Hydroquinone monoethyl ether 1-Ethoxy-4-hydroxybenzene; p-Ethoxyphenol; 4-Ethoxyphenol; p-Hydroxyphenetole

4-Hydroxy-2,3-dimethyl-2,4-nonadienoic acid γ lactone; Bovolide; 2(5H)-Furanone,

H136 4-Hydroxy-2,3-dimethyl-2,4-nonadien 3,4-dimethyl-5-pentylidene-; 3,4-Dimethyl-5-pentylidene-5H-furan-2-one;
5-Pentylidene-3,4-dimethyl-2,5-dihydrofuran-2-one; 4-Hydroxy-2,3- dimethyl-2,4- nonadienoic acid γ lactone
2,4-Decadien-5-olide; pentyl-α-pyrone; 6-Pentyl-2H-pyran-2-one; 6-Pentyl-α- pyrone; 2H-pyran-2-one,
H137 5-Hydroxy-2,4-decadienoic acid delta-lactone 6-pentyl-; 5-Hydroxy-2,4-decadienoic acid lactone; 6-amyl- α-pyrone
4-Hydroxy-2,5-dimethylfuran-3(2H)-one; 2,5-Dimethyl-4-hydroxy-3(2H)furanone; fleureol(Fleurchem);
H138 4-Hydroxy-2,5-dimethyl-3(2H)-furanon Fraison(Vioryl); Furanone pure crystals; Strawberry furanone; Furaneol;
2,5-Dimethyl-4-hydroxy-2,3-dihydrofuran-3-one

1278
Order General Name Synonyms

H139 1-Hydroxy-2-butanone 2-Oxo-1-butanol; propionyl carbinol; Ethyl hydroxymethyl ketone; 1-Butanol-2-one

2(5H)-Furanone; Crotonic acid, 4-hydroxy-, γ-lactone; α, β-Crotonolactone; delta, α, β-Butenolide;

γ-Crotolactone; γ-Crotonolactone; γ-Hydroxycrotonic acid lactone; 2,5-Dihydrofuranone; 2-Buten-4-olide;
H140 4-Hydroxy-2-butenoic acid γ-lactone 2-Butenoic acid, 4-hydroxy-, γ-lactone; 2-Oxo-2,5-dihydrofuran; 4-Hydroxy-2-butenoic acid lactone;
5-Oxo-2,5-dihydrofuran-3-yl ester; 5H-Furan-2-one; Cratone; Isocrotonolactone

3-Methyl-1,2-cyclohexanedione; 2-Methyl-3,4-cyclohexanedione; 1,2-Cyclohexanedione; 2-cyclohexen-1-one,

H141 2-Hydroxy-2-cyclohexen-1-one 2-hydroxy-; Cyclohexane-1,2-dione

5-Hydroxy-2-decenoic acid delta-lactone,

H142 5-hydroxy-2-dodecenoic acid delta-lactone
and 5-tetradecenoic acid delta-lactone, mixture of

2-decen-5olide; 6-pentyl-5,6-dihydro-2-pyrone; 2-decene-1,5-lactone; Dec-2-eno- 1,5-lactone; (-)-2-Decenoic

acid, 5-hydroxy, δ-lactone; 5,6-Dihydro-6- pentyl- 2H- pyran-2-one;
H143 5-Hydroxy-2-decenoic acid δ-lactone (R)-5,6-dihydro-6-pentyl-2H-pyran-2-one; Massoia lactone; Massoi lactone; 2H-pyran-2-one,
5,6-dihydro-6-pentyl-, (R)-; 5-Hydroxy-2-decenoic acid lactone

Dodec-2-eno-1,5-lactone; 2-Dodecen-5-olide; 6-Heptyl-2h-dihydro-2-pyrone;

H144 5-Hydroxy-2-dodecenoic acid delta-lactone 6-heptyl-5,6-dihydro(2H)pyran-2-one; 5-Hydroxy-2-dodecenoic acid lactone; Delta-2-dodecenolactone;
6-Heptyl-5,6-dihydro-2-pyrone; 5-Heptyl-2-pentene-5-olide

H145 3-Hydroxy-2-octanone 2-Octanone, 3-hydroxy-

H146 3-Hydroxy-2-oxopropionic acid Propanoic acid, 3-hydroxy-2-oxo-; 3-Hydroxy-2-oxopropanoic acid

H147 3-Hydroxy-2-pentanone Acetyl ethyl carbinol; 2-Pentanone, 3-hydroxy-; 3- Hydroxypentan-2-one; Acetyl ethyl carbonol

1279
Order General Name Synonyms

2-Hydroxy-3,5,5-trimethyl-2-cyclohexenone; 3,5,5-trimethyl-1,2-cyclohexanedione; 2-Cyclohexen-1-one,

H148 2-Hydroxy-3,5,5-trimethyl-2-cyclohexen-1-one
2-hydroxy-3,5,5-trimethyl-; 3,5,5-Trimethyl-1,2-cyclohexanedione
H149 4-Hydroxy-3,5-dimethoxybenzaldehyde Syringic aldehyde; Syringaldehyde; Gallaldehyde 3,5-dimethyl ether
3,7-dimethyl-6-octanolide; 4-methyl-7-(1-methylethyl)-2-oxooxacycloheptane; 3,7-dimethylocta-1,6-lactone;
H150 6-Hydroxy-3,7-dimethyloctanoic acid lactone Menthone lactone; 3,7-Dimethyloctano-1,6-lactone; 6-Hydroxy-3,7-dimethyl caprylic acid, lactone;
4-Methyl-7-isopropyl-2-oxoepanone; Menthane lactone

H151 4-Hydroxy-3-methoxybenzoic acid Vanillic acid; 4-Hydroxy-m-anisic acid

Nonanoyl 4-hydroxy-3-methoxybenzylamide; n-Nonanoyl vanillylamide; Pelargonyl vanillylamide; N-Nonanoyl

H152 N-(4-Hydroxy-3-methoxylbenzyl) nonanamide 4-hydroxy-3-methoxybenzylamide; Nonivamide; vanillylnonanamide; N-(4-Hydroxy-3-methoxybenzyl)nonanamide

Whiskey lactone; 3-Methyloctano-1,4-lactone; 3-Methyl-4-octanolide; 5-butyl-4-methyldihydro-2(3h)-furanone;

H153 4-Hydroxy-3-methyloctanoic acid γ-lactone 4-Hydroxy-3-methyloctanoic acid lactone; methyl octalactone; β-Methyl-γ-octalactone;
4-Butyl-3-methyl-1,4-butyrolactone; 5-butyldihydro-4-methylfuran-2(3H)-one

α-Angelica lactone; 3-penten-4-olide; Pent-3-en-1,4-lactone; 5-Methyl-2(3H)- furanone; 5-

H154 4-Hydroxy-3-pentenoic acid lactone
Methylfuran-2(3H)-one; 4-Hydroxy-3-pentenoic acid lactone; β-γ-Angelica lactone; γ-Methylβ-butenolide

Lilac lactine; 2(3H)-Furanone, 5-ethenyldihydro-5-methyl-; 5-Methyl-5-viyl- dihydrofuran-2-one;

H155 4-Hydroxy-4-methyl-5-hexenoic acid γ lactone 4-Methyl-5-hexen-1,4-olide; 4-Hydroxy-4-methyl-5-hexenoic acid

2(3H)-Furanone, 5-(3-Hexenyl)dihydro-5-methyl-, (Z); (Z)-5-Hex-3-enyldihydro- 5-methylfuran-2(3H)-one;

H156 4-Hydroxy-4-methyl-7-cis-decenoic acid γ lactone Lactone of cis Jasmone; 4-Methyl-cis-7-decene g-lactone; cis-5-Hexenyldihydro-5-methylfuran-2(3H)-one;
4-Hydroxy-4-methyldec-9-enoic acid lactone

H157 2-Hydroxy-4-methylbenzaldehyde 2,4-Cresotaldehyde; 4-Methylsalicylic aldehyde; 4-Methylsalicylaldehyde

2H-Pyran-2-one,tetrahydro-5,6-dimethyl-; Hexanoic acid, 5-hydroxyl-4-methyl-, delta-lactone;

H158 5-Hydroxy-4-methylhexanoic acid delta-lactone 4-Methyl-5-hydroxyhexanoic acid lactone; 5,6-Dimethyltetra- hydropyran-2-one

1280
Order General Name Synonyms

H159 5-Hydroxy-4-octanone 5-Hydroxyoctan-4-one; Butyroin; 5-Octanol-4-one; Butyroin

H160 3-Hydroxy-4-phenylbutan-2-one 2-Butanone, 3-hydroxy-4-phenyl-

H161 3(2)-Hydroxy-5-methyl-2(3)-hexanone

H162 1-(3-Hydroxy-5-methyl-2-thienyl)ethanone Ethanone, 1-(3-hydroxy-5-methyl-2-thienyl)

3(2H)-Furnanone, 4-hydroxy-5-methyl-; 4-Hydroxy-5-methyl-2,3-dihydrofuran-3-one;
H163 4-Hydroxy-5-methyl-3(2H)-furanone 5-Methyl-4-hydroxy-3(2H)-furanone; 2,3-Dihydro-4-hydroxy-5-methylfuran-3-one
(E)-6-dodecen-4-olide; 5-(cis-2octenyl)dihydro-2(3H)-furanone; (Z)-4-hydroxy-6- dodecenoic acid lactone;
Dodec-6-eno-1,4-lactone; γ-Dodecen-6-lactone; 1,4-Dodec- 6-enolactone; cis-6-dodecen-4-olide;
H164 cis-4-Hydroxy-6-dodecenoic acid lactone 2(3H)-furanone, dihydro-5(2-octenyl), (Z)-; cis-dihydro-5-(2-octenyl)-2(3H)furanone; 4-Hydroxy-6-dodecenoic
acid lactone; Dihydro-5(2-octenyl)-2(3H)-furanone
7-Decen-5-olide; 6-Pentyltetrahydro-2-pyrone; 7-decene-1,5-lactone; Dec-7- eno-1,5-lactone; Jasmine lactone;
H165 5-Hydroxy-7-decenoic acid δ-lactone cis-5-(2-Pentenyl)pentanolide; 2H-pyran-2-one, tetrahydro-6-(2-pentenyl)-, Z; 5-Hydroxy-7-decenoic aicd
lactone
8-Undecen-5-olide; 6-Hexyltetrahydro-2-pyrone; Undec-8-eno-1,5-lactone; 2H-pyran-2-one,
6-(3-hexenyl)tetrahydro-, (Z)-; 5-Hydroxy-8-undecenoic acid lactone;
H166 5-Hydroxy-8-undecenoic acid delta-lactone cis-6-(3-Hexenyl)tetrahydro(2H)pyran-2-one; 5-Hydroxyundec-8-enoic acid deltalactone;
6-(3-Hexenyl)tetrahydro(2H)pyran-2-one

H167 2-Hydroxyacetophenone o-Acetylphenol; ethanone, 1-(2-hydroxyphenyl)-; o-hydroxyacetophenone; 2'-Hydroxyacetophenone

H168 4-Hydroxybenzaldehyde p-Oxybenzaldehyde; 4-Formylphenol; p-Formylphenol; p-Hydroxybenzaldehyde

H169 2-Hydroxybenzoic acid 2-Carboxy phenol; 2-Hydroxybenzene carboxylic acid; Salicylic acid; o-Hydroxybenzoic acid

1281
Order General Name Synonyms

H170 4-Hydroxybenzoic acid 4-Carboxyphenol; p-Hydroxybenzoic acid; p-salicylic acid

H171 4-Hydroxybenzyl alcohol 4-Hydroxybenzene methanol; p-Hydroxybenzyl alcohol; p-(Hydroxymethyl)phenol; (4-Hydroxyphenyl)methanol

γ-Butyrolactone; 4-butanolide; Dihydro-2(3H)-furanone; Butyro-1,4-lactone; 4-Hydroxybutanoic acid lactone;

H172 4-Hydroxybutyric acid lactone 1,4-Epoxy butan-1-one; 2-Oxo oxolen; 3 (or 4-)-Hydroxybutyric acid, lactone; 1,2-Butanolide
Citronellalhydrate; Oxydihydrocitronellal; Lily aldehyde; 3,7-Dimethyl-7-hydroxy octanal; 7-Hydroxy-3,7-dimethyl
H173 Hydroxycitronellal * octan-1-al; Laurine, Citronellaldehyde; 3,7-Dimethyl-1,7-octanediol; 7-Hydroxy-3,7-dimethyloctan-1-al
1,1-Diethoxy-3,7-dimethyl-7-octanol; 8,8-Diethoxy-2,6-dimethyl-2-octanol; 1,1- Diethoxy-3,7-dimethyloctan-7-ol;
H174 Hydroxycitronellal diethyl acetal
7-Hydroxy-1,1-diethoxy-3,7-dimethyl octane

8,8-Dimethoxy-2,6-dimethyl-2-octanol; 1,1-Dimethoxy-3,7-dimethyl-7-octanol;
H175 Hydroxycitronellal dimethyl acetal* 8,8-Dimethoxy-2,6-dimethyl-2-octanol; 1,1- Dimethoxy-3,7-dimethyloctan-7-ol

3,7-Dimethyl-1,7-octanediol; Dydroxydihydrocitronellol;citronellolhydrate; 3,7-Dimethyloctane-1,7-diol;

H176 Hydroxycitronellol 3,7-Dimethyl-1,7-octanediol, 2,6-dimethyl-2,8-octanediol; 3,7- Dimethyloctane-1,7-diol; Hydroxycitronellol;
7-Hydoxy-3,7-dimethyloctan-1-ol; Hydroxydihydrocitronellol; hydroxyciol

6-Hydroxy-2,6,10,10-tetramethyl-1-oxasprio(4,5)decane; 1-Oxasprio[4,5]decan-6-ol,
H177 6-Hydroxydihydrotheaspirane
2,6,10,10-tetramethyl-[2S-2α,5α(R-*)]]-

3-Octanon-1-ol; methylol methyl amyl ketone; Ketone alcohol; caproylethanol; 3-Oxo-1-octanol;

H178 3-(Hydroxymethyl)-2-heptanone hexanoylethanol; Octan-3-on-1-ol; Hexanoylethanoate; 1-hydroxyoctan-3-on

H179 3-Hydroxymethyl-2-octanone 3-( Hydroxymethyl)octan-2-one

2-(6,6-Dimethylbicyclo[3.1.1]hept-2-en-2-yl)ethan-1-ol; 6,6-Dimethyl-bicyclo- [3.1.1]hept-2-ene-2-ethanol,

H180 10-Hydroxymethylene-2-pinene Homomyrtenol; 2-Hydroxyethyl-6,6- dimethyl- bicyclo- [3,1,1]-hept-2-ene; 2-Norpinene-2-ethanol,
6,6-Dimethyl-; Nopol; 6,6-Dimethyl-2- norpinene-2-ethanol
5-Nonanolide; 6-Butyltetrahydro-2pyrone, delta-Nonalactone; Nona-1,5-lactone; 5-n-Butyl-5-hydroxypentanoic
H181 Hydroxynonanoic acid delta-lactone acid lactone; 5-Hydroxynonanoic acid lactone; 5-n-Butyl-δ-valerolactone; Nonano-1,5-lactone; δ-Nonalactone;

1282
Order General Name Synonyms
α,n-Butyl-δ-hydroxypelargonic acid, lactone; 6-Butyltetrahydro-2H-pyrann-2-one; 1,5-Nonanolactone;
Nonanolide-1,5; n-Butyl-delta-valerolactone
1-p-Hydroxyphenyl-3-butanone; oxyphenylon; p-Hydrobenzylacetone; p-Hydroxybenzyl acetone;
H182 4-(p-Hydroxyphenyl)-2-butanone 4-(4-Hydroxyphenyl)butan-2-one; Raspberry ketone; Rastone; Oxanone

H183 (+/-)-2-Hydroxypiperitone Piperitone, 2-hydroxy-; Diosphenol; Buccocamphor; 2-Hydroxy-6-isopropyl-3-methyl- 2-cyclohexen-1-one

5-Undecanolide; 6-Hexyltetrahydro-2-pyrone; Undeca-1,5-lactone; delta-Undecalactone;

5-n-Hexyl-5-hydroxypentanoic acid lactone; δ-n-Hexyl-δ-valerolactone; Undecano- 1,5-lactone;
H184 5-Hydroxyundecanoic acid delta-lactone 5-Hydroxyundecanoic acid lactone; Undecanolide-1,5; α-nhexyl- delta- valerolactone;
5-n-Hexyl-5-hydroxypentanoic acid

Phloretin; 2',4',6'-trihydroxy-3-(p-hydroxyphenyl)propiophenone;
3-(4-hydroxy-phenyl)-1-(2,4,6-trihydroxy-phenyl)-propan beta.-(p-Hydroxyphenyl)-2,4,6-trihydroxypropiophenone; beta-(p-Hydroxyphenyl)phloropropiophenone;
H185 -1-one 2',4',6'-Trihydroxy-3-(4-Hydroxyphenyl)propiophenone; 2',4',6'-Trihydroxy-3-(p-hydroxyphenyl)propiophenone;
Dihydronaringenin; Naringenin dihydrochalcone; Phloretol
2-Furaldehyde, 5-(hydroxymethyl)-; 5-Hydrxoymethylfurfural; Hydroxymethylfurfurole;
5-(Hyddroxymethyl)Furfurole; 5-(Hydroxymethyl)-2-formylfuran;5-(Hydroxymethyl)-2-furaldehyde;
5-(Hydroxymethyl)-2-furancarbonal; 5-(Hydroxymethyl)-2-furfural; 5-(Hydroxymethyl)-2-furfuraldehyde;
H186 5-Hydroxymethylfurfuraldehyde 5-(Hydroxymethyl)furan-2-aldehyde; 5-(Hydroxymethyl)furfural;5-Oxymethylfurfurole;
5-Hydroxymethylfurfuraldehyde; 5-Hydroxymethyl-2-furancarbaldehyde; Hydroxymethylfurfuraldehyde;
5-(Hydroxymethyl)-2-furancarboxaldehyde; 2-Hydroxymethyl-5-furfural; 5-(hydroxymethyl)-2-furfural
(HMF);2-Furancarboxaldehyde, 5-(hydroxymethyl)-

Ethanone, 1-(4-hydroxyphenyl)-; p-Hydroxyacetophenone; p-Hydroxyphenyl methyl ketone; p-Oxyacetophenone;

H187 4-Hydroxyacetophenone Methyl p-hydroxyphenyl ketone; Phenol, p-acetyl-; Piceol;4'-Hydroxyacetophenone;Acetophenone, p-hydroxy-;
Hydroxyacetophenone, para;p-Acetylphenol; 4-Acetylphenol

Cyclohexadecanolide; Dihydroambrettolide; Hexadecanoic acid, 16-hydroxy-, ο-lactone; Hexadecanolide;

H188 Hexadecano-1,16-lactone Juniperic acid lactone; 1,16-Hexadecanolide; 16-Hexadecanolactone; 16-Hexadecanolide; Hexadecanolid;
1,16-Hexadecanolactone; 16-Hydroxyhexadecanoic acid lactone;Oxacycloheptadecan-2-one

Acetol; Hydroxyacetone; Acetone alcohol; Acetylcarbinol; Hydroxypropanone; Methanol, acetyl-;

H189 1-Hydroxypropan-2-one 1-Hydroxy-2-propanone; hydroxyacetone (acetol); hydroxypropan-2-one;1-Hydroxyacetone;

1283
Order General Name Synonyms

-Hydroxy-2-propanone2-Propanone, 1-hydroxy-

2-Pentanone, 4-hydroxy-4-methyl-; Acetonyldimethylcarbinol; Diacetone alcohol; Diketone alcohol; Tyranton;

4-Hydroxy-4-methylpentanone; 4-Hydroxy-4-methyl-2-pentanone; 2-Methyl-2-pentanol-4-one;
H190 4-Hydroxy-4-methylpentan-2-one 4-Methyl-2-pentanon-4-ol;4-Hydroxy-2-keto-4-methylpentane; 4-Hydroxy-4-methyl-pentan-2-on;Diacetone;
4-Hydroxy-4-methylpentanone-2;2-Hydroxy-2-methyl-4-pentanone; 2-Methyl-3-pentanol-4-one;
4-Methyl-4-hydroxy-2-pentanone; Hydroxy-4-methyl-2-pentanone; Pyraton

H191 4-Hydroxy-3-methoxycinnamaldehyde

H192 2-Hydroxy-4-methylvaleric acid

p-Hydroxyphenethyl alcohol; 4-Hydroxyphenethyl alcohol; β-(p-Hydroxyphenyl)ethanol;

β-(4-Hydroxyphenyl)ethanol; 2-(p-Hydroxyphenyl)ethanol; 2-(4-Hydroxyphenyl)ethanol; 4-Hydroxyphenylethanol;
H193 2-(4-Hydroxyphenyl)ethan-1-ol Phenethyl alcohol, p-hydroxy-; p-Thyrosol; Tyrosol; p-Tyrosol; 4-Hydroxyphenylethyl alcohol;
p-Hydroxyphenylethyl alcohol; Ethanol, 2-(4-hydroxyphenyl); p-Hydroxy-benzeneethanol; tyrosol
[2-(4-hydroxy-phenyl)ethanol];Benzeneethanol, 4-hydroxy-;4-(2-Hydroxyethyl)phenol

H194 4-Hydroxy-3,5-dimethoxybenzoic acid Benzoic acid, 4-hydroxy-3,5-dimethoxy-; 3,5-Dimethoxy-4-hydroxybenzoic acid; Cedar acid;Syringic acid
3,5-Dimethoxy-4-hydroxycinnamic acid; Sinapinic acid; Sinapic acid; trans-3,5-Dimethoxy-4-hydroxycinnamic
H195 4-Hydroxy-3,5-dimethoxycinnamic acid acid; 2-Propenoic acid, 3-(4-hydroxy-3,5-dimethoxyphenyl)-;
(2E)-3-(4-Hydroxy-3,5-dimethoxyphenyl)-2-propenoic acid;Cinnamic acid, 4-hydroxy-3,5-dimethoxy-

H196 Heptyl heptanoate Heptyl heptoate;Heptanoic acid, heptyl ester

1284
Order General Name Synonyms

Acetic acid, hexadecyl ester; Cetyl acetate; Hexadecyl acetate; Palmityl acetate; n-Hexadecyl ethanoate;
H197 Hexadec-1-yl acetate 1-Acetoxyhexadecane; Acrylated lanolin alcohol; hexadecanyl acetate

H198 Hexadecanal Palmitaldehyde; 1-hexadecanal;n-Hexadecanal

2(3H)-Furanone, 5-dodecyldihydro-; Hexadecanoic acid, 4-hydroxy-, γ-lactone; γ-Palmitolactone;

H199 Hexadecano-1,4-lactone 5-Dodecyldihydro-2(3H)-furanone;γ-hexadecalactone

H200 5-Hexenol 1-Hexen-6-ol; Hex-5-en-1-ol;5-Hexen-1-ol

H201 cis-4-hexen-1-ol (4Z)-4-Hexen-1-ol; (Z)-4-Hexen-1-ol;4-Hexen-1-ol, (z)-

trans-3-Hexen-1-ol; trans-3-Hexenol; E-3-Hexenol; (E)-Hex-3-en-1-ol; (3E)-3-Hexen-1-ol; 3(E)-hexen-1-ol;
H202 trans-3-hexenol (3E)-Hexenol; (E)-3-Hexen-1-ol; (E)Hex-3-enol; (Z)-3-hexen-1-ol;3-Hexen-1-ol, (E)-
Pentanoic acid, hexyl ester; Hexyl pentanoate; Hexyl valerianate; Valeric acid, hexyl ester; 1-Hexyl
H203 Hexyl valerate n-valerate;Hexyl n-valerate
H204 Hexyl heptanoate Heptanoic acid, hexyl ester

H205 2-Hexylpyridine Pyridine, 2-hexyl-; Pyridine, 2-(n-hexyl)-

2-Propenoic acid, 3-(4-hydroxy-3-methoxyphenyl)-; Ferulic acid; 3-(4-Hydroxy-3-methoxyphenyl)-2-propenoic

H206 4-Hydroxy-3-methoxycinnamic acid acid; 3-(4-Hydroxy-3-methoxyphenyl)acrylic acid; 3-Methoxy-4-hydroxycinnamic acid;
(2E)-3-(4-Hydroxy-3-methoxyphenyl)-2-propenoic acid;Cinnamic acid, 4-hydroxy-3-methoxy-
n-Heptadecanol; Heptadecyl alcohol; 1-Hydroxyheptadecane; Prim-n-heptadecyl alcohol;
H207 Heptadecan-1-ol Heptadecanol;1-Heptadecanol
H208 1-Hexene-3-one Propyl vinyl ketone; Vinyl propyl ketone

H209 Heptane-1-thiol n-Heptylmercaptan; Heptyl mercaptan; Heptyl thiol; Normal-heptyl mercaptan

1285
Order General Name Synonyms
Acetophenone, 4'-hydroxy-3',5'-dimethoxy-; Acetosyringone; 1-(4-Hydroxy-3,5-dimethoxyphenyl)ethanone;
3',5'-Dimethoxy-4'-hydroxyacetophenone; Acetosyringon; 3,5-Dimethoxy-4-hydroxyacetophenone; Acetophenone,
H210 4-Hydroxy-3,5-dimethoxyacetophenone 3,5-dimethoxy-4-hydroxy-; 1-(4-Hydroxy-3,5-dimethoxyphenyl)-ethanone (acetosyringone); 4-acetylsyringol;
Phenol, 4-acetyl-2,6-dimethoxy;Ethanone, 1-(4-hydroxy-3,5-dimethoxyphenyl)-
Heptanoic acid, 5-hydroxy-, δ-lactone; 6-Ethyltetrahydro-2H-pyran-2-one;2H-pyran-2-one,
H211 Heptano-1,5-lactone
6-ethyltetrahydro-;δ-Heptalactone;5-Hydroxyheptanoic acid lactone

H212 Hexanal diethyl acetal 1,1-Diethoxyhexane; n-Hexanal diethyl acetal;Hexane, 1,1-diethoxy-

H213 4-Hydroxymethyl-2-methyl-1,3-dioxolane

(3E)-3-Hexenyl acetate; (3E)-Hexenyl acetate; (E)-3-hexen-1-ol acetate; (E)-3-Hexen-1-yl acetate;

H214 trans-3-Hexenyl acetate (E)-3-hexenol acetate; (E)-3-Hexenyl acetate; (E)-Hex-3-enol acetate;3-Hexen-1-ol, acetate, (e)-

H215 4-Hydroxy-3,5-dimethoxycinnamaldehyde
H216 Heptanal propylene glycol acetal

H217 Hexyl isothiocyanate Hexane, 1-isothiocyanato-; Isothiocyanic acid, hexyl ester; n-Hexyl isothiocyanate; 1-Isothiocyanatohexane

H218 4-Hydroxybenzyl methyl ether

H219 2-Heptyl acetate 1-Methylhexyl acetate;2-Heptanol, acetate

H220 Hexyl nonanoate Nonanoic acid, hexyl ester

H221 sec-Heptyl hexanoate Hexanoic acid, 1-methylhexyl ester;1-Methylhexyl hexanoate;2-heptyl hexanoate

1,4,8-Cycloundecatriene, 2,6,6,9-tetramethyl-, (E,E,E)-; Humulene;
H222 3,7,10-Humulatriene Cycloundeca-1,4,8-triene,2,6,6,9-tetramethyl-; 2,6,6,9-Tetramethyl-1,4,8-cycloundecatriene;α-Caryophyllene
H223 Heptyl hexanoate Hexanoic acid, heptyl ester;N-heptyl hexanoate

H224 Hexyl decanoate Decanoic acid, hexyl ester

H225 Hept-3-en-1-ol (3E)-3-Hepten-1-ol;3-Hepten-1-ol

1286
Order General Name Synonyms
H226 Hexyl lactate propanoic acid, 2-hydroxy-, hexyl ester
H227 Hexyl 9-octadecenoate
H228 Hexanal dihexyl acetal
H229 Hexyl dodecanoate
H230 Hex-4-enyl acetate 4-Hexen-1-ol, acetate, (z)-; (Z)-4-Hexen-1-yl, acetate;cis-4-Hexenyl acetate
H231 Hexyl tetradecanoate
H232 5-hexenyl isothiocyanate hexenyl isothiocyanate

H233 Heptyl 2-methylbutyrate heptyl 2-methylbutanoate;Butanoic acid, 2-methyl-, heptyl ester

H234 Heptyl isovalerate

H235 trans-3-Hexenyl hexanoate (E)-3-Hexen-1-ol, hexanoate;(E)-3-hexenyl hexanoate
H236 cis-3-Hexenyl heptanoate(3-Hexenyl heptanoate) Heptanoic acid, 3-hexenyl ester, (z)-; (3Z)-3-Hexenyl heptanoate;(Z)-3-hexenyl heptanoate
Octanoic acid, 3-hexenyl ester, (z)-; cis-3-Hexanyl n-octanoate; (3Z)-3-Hexenyl octanoate; (Z)-3-hexenyl
H237 cis-3-Hexenyl octanoate(Hex-3-enyl octanoate)
octanoate
Benzoic acid, 2-hydroxy-, 3-hexenyl ester, (Z)-; Salicylic acid, 3-hexen-1-yl ester; β,γ-cis-Hexenyl salicylate;
H238 cis-3-Hexenyl salicylate(Hex-3-enyl salicylate) Salicylic acid, 3-hexenyl ester, (Z)-; (3Z)-3-Hexenyl salicylate; (Z)-3-Hexenyl salicylate

H239 3-Hexenyl methyl carbonate

H240 Hex-2-enyl phenylacetate

H241 cis-3-hexenyl decanoate(Hex-3-enyl decanoate) Decanoic acid, 3-hexenyl ester, (z)-;cis-3-Hexenyl n-decanoate; (3Z)-3-Hexenyl decanoate

H242 sec-Hept-4(cis)-enyl acetate

H243 trans-2-Hexenyl 2-methylbutyrate hexenyl methyl butyrate
(+/-)(E)＆(Z)-2-Hexenal propylene glycol acetal; 1,3-Dioxolane, 4-methyl-2-(1E)-1-pentenyl- (9CI);
H244 trans-2-Hexenal propylene glycol acetal
1,3-Dioxolane, 4-methyl-2-(1-pentenyl)-, (E)-
H245 Hexanal butane-2,3-diol acetal
H246 Hexanal octane-1,3-diol acetal hexanal 1,3-octanediol acetal;hexanal octanediol acetal

H247 Hexenal glyceryl acetal

H248 Hex-3-enyl hexadecanoate

H249 Hex-3-enyl 2-ethylbutyrate

1287
Order General Name Synonyms
H250 sec-Heptyl isovalerate
H251 Hexanal hexyl isoamyl acetal
N-(2-Hydroxyethyl)-2,3-dimethyl-2-,3-dimethyl-2-isopro N-(2-Hydroxyethyl)-2,3-dimethyl-2-(1-methylethyl) butanamide;
H252 pylbutanamide N-(2-Hydroxyethyl)-2-isopropyl-2,3-dimethylbutanamide
Tetrahydro-6-undecyl-2H-pyran-2-one; 6-Undecyltetrahydropyran-2-one; delta-Hexadecanolide;
H253 delta-Hexadecalactone delta-Palmitolactone; 5-Hexadecanolide; 5-Hydroxyhexadecanoic acid delta lactone;
6-Undecyltetrahydro-2H-pyran-2-one
H254 cis-3-Hexenoic acid (Z)-Hex-3-enoic acid
H255 cis-3-Hexenyl acetoacetate Butanoic acid, 3-oxo-, (3Z)-3-hexenyl ester; (Z)-Hex-3-en-1-yl 3-oxobutanoate
H256 2-Hexyl-2-decenal
H257 2-Hexylidenehexanal 2-Butyl-2-octenal
H258 4-Hydroxy-6-methyl-2-heptanone
H259 3-Hydroxy-3-methyl-2,4-nonanedione Lactadione
I001 Indole Benzopyrrole; 1-Benzazole; 1-Benzazole; 1-BenzoPyrrole; 2,3-Benzopyrrole
3-Buten-2-ol, 4-(2,6,6-trimethyl-2-cyclohexen-1-yl)-; 4(2,6,6-trimethyl-2- cyclohexenyl)-3-buten-2-ol; 4-(2,6,6-
I002 α-Ionol
Trimethyl-2-cyclohexenyl)but-3-en-2-ol
4-(2,2,6-Trimethyl-1-cyclohexenyl)but-3-en-2-ol; 3-Buten-2-ol, 4-(2,6,6-trimethyl- 1-cyclohexen-1-yl)-;
I003 β-Ionol 4-(2,6,6-trimethyl-1-yl)-3-buten-2-ol
1-(2,6,6-Trimethyl-1,3-cyclohexadienyl)-2-buten-1-one; 4-(2,6,6 Trimethylcyclihexa- 1,3-dienyl)but-2-en-4-one;
I004 α-Ionone* floriffone; α-risone; α-Cyclocitrylideneacetone; 4-(2,6,6- Trimethyl-2-cyclohexen-1-yl)-3-buten-2-one

I005 β-Ionone* Ionone; β-Cyclocitrylideneacetone; 4-(2,6,6-Trimethyl-1-cyclohexen-1-yl)-3- buten-2- one; Irisone

I006 γ-Ionone 4-(2-Methylene-6,6-dimethylcyclohexyl)-3-buten-2-one; 4-(2,2-Dimethyl-6-methylenecyclohexyl)-3-buten-2-one

3-Buten-2-one, 4-(2,2,6-trimethyl-7-oxabicyclo[4.1.0]hept-1-yl)-; 4-(2,6,6-Trimethyl- 7-oxabicyclo[4.1.0]heptane,

3-buten-2-one; β-Ionone 5,6-epoxide; β-Ionone epoxide;
I007 β-Ionone epoxide 4-(1,2-Oxido-2,6,6-trimethylcyclohexyl)-3-buten-2-one; 4-(2,6,6-Trimethyl-1,2- epoxycyclohexyl)-3-buten-2-one;
5,6-β-Ionone epoxide; 5,6-Epoxy-β-ionone

I008 β-Ionyl acetate 3-Buten-2-ol, 4-(2,6,6-trimethyl-1-cyclohexen-1-yl)-, acetate

6-Methylionone; 6-Methyl-α-lonone; 4-(2,5,6,6-Tetramethyl-2- cyclohexenyl)-3- buten-2-one;

I009 α-Irone cis-(2,6)-cis-(21,22)-α-Irone; 6-methyl-x-ionone; 4-(2,5,6,6-Tetramethyl- 2-cyclohexen-1-yl)-3-buten-2-one;
6-Methyl-α-ionone

1288
Order General Name Synonyms

Oxacycloheptadec-10-en-2-one; 9-Hexadecenoic acid, 16-hydroxy-, o-lactone; delta- 9-Isoambrettolic acid,

I010 Isoambrettolide lactone; Oxacycloheptadec-10-en-2-one

I011 Isoamyl 2-furanpropionate a-Isoamyl furfurylacetate.

I012 Isoamyl 2-methylbutyrate 3-Methylbutyl 2-methylbutanoate; Isoamyl 2-methylbutanoate; Isopentyl 2- methylbutanoate

Amyl isoacetate; 3-Methylbutyl acetate; Amyl iso ethanoate; Isoamyl ethanoate; Isopentyl acetate; Common
I013 Isoamyl acetate* amyl acetate; β-Methylbutyl acetate; Isoamyl ethanoate

I014 Isoamyl acetoacetate

Butyl iso carbinol; Amyl iso alcohol; Pentyl iso alcohol; Isopentanol; Isobutyl carbinol; isopentyl alcohol;
I015 Isoamyl alcohol 3-Methyl-1-butanol; Isopentyl alcohol

Pentyl iso benzoate; Amyl iso benzoate; Benzoic acid, isopentyl ester; 3-Methylbutyl benzoate; Amyl benzoate;
I016 Isoamyl benzoate Isopentyl benzoate; Isopentyl phenyl methanoate
Amyl iso butyrate; Pentyl iso butyrate; isopentyl butanoate; Isoamyl butanoate; Pentyl iso butanoate; Amyl iso
I017 Isoamyl butyrate* butanoate; 3-methylbutyl butanoate; 3-Methylbutyl butyrate; Isopentyl butyrate; Isoamyl n-butyrate
Pentyl iso cinnamate; Amyl iso cinnamate; Cinnamic acid, Isoamyl ester; Pentyl iso 3-phenylacrylate; Amyl iso
I018 Isoamyl cinnamate β-phenylacrylate; Pentyl iso 3-phenylpropenoate; isopentyl β-phenylacrylate; Isoamyl β-phenylacrylate;
Isoamyl 3-phenyl-propenoate; Isopentyl cinnamate
Amyl iso formate; Pentyl iso formate; Pentyl iso methanoate; Isopentyl methanoate; Amyl iso methanoate;
I019 Isoamyl formate*
Isoamyl methanoate; 3-Methylbutyl formate; Isopentyl formate; Isoamyl formate

3-Methylcutyl 3-furylpropionate; Amyl(iso) 2-fyranpropuonate; Isoamyl 2-furanpropionate; Isoamyl

I020 Isoamyl formate 2-furylpropionate; Isopentyl 2-furanpropionate; Isoamyl furylpropionate; Isoamyl furfurylacetate; Isoamyl
furfurhydracrylate; α-Isoamyl furfurylacetate

Pentyl iso hexanoate; Pentyl iso caproate; Isopentyl caproate; Amyl iso hexanoate; amyl iso caproate,
I021 Isoamyl hexanoate 3-methybutyl hexanoate; Isoamyl caproate; Isoamyl capronate; isoamyl hexylate; Isopentyl hexanoate; Isoamyl
hexanoate; Isopentyl n-hexanoate

1289
Order General Name Synonyms

Isopentyl isobutyrate; 3-Methylbutyl 2-methylpropanoate; Isopentyl isobutyrate; Isoamyl 2-methylpropanoate;

I022 Isoamyl isobutyrate Iso-amyl 2-methylpropanoate; Iso-amyl isobutyrate; isopentyl 2-methylpropanoate

Amyl iso isovalerate; Pentyl iso isovalerate; Isopentyl isopentanoate; Isoamyl 3-methylbutanoate; Isoamyl
isopentanoate; 3-Methylbutyl 3-methylbutyrate; 3-methylbutyl 3-methylbutanoate; Isopentyl 3-methylbutanoate;
I023 Isoamyl isovalerate* Pentyl iso 3-methylbutanoate; Pentyl iso isopentanoate; Amyl iso 3-methylbutanoate; Amyl iso isopentanoate;
Isopentyl isovalerate; Isopentyl isopentanoate; Iso amyl ß-methyl butyrate

Amyl iso laurate; Amyl iso dodecanoate; Pentyl iso laurate; Pentyl iso dodecanoate; Isopentyl dodecanoate;
I024 Isoamyl laurate Isopentyl dodecylate, 3-methylbutyl dodecanoate; Isoamyl dodecanoate; Isoamyl dodecylate; Isopentyl laurate;
3-Methylbutyl laurate; Isoamyl laurate

Pentyl iso nonanoate; Amyl iso nonanoate; Isopentyl nonylate; 3-Methylbutyl nonaoate; 3-Methylbutyl
I025 Isoamyl nonanoate pelargonate; Isopentyl pelargonate; Amyl iso pelargonate; Amyl iso nonylate; Isoamyl nonylate; Isoamyl
pelargonate; Isopentyl nonanoate

Pentyl iso octanoate; Amyl iso octanoate; amyl iso caprylate; Pentyl iso octylate; Isopentyl octylate; Amyl iso
I026 Isoamyl octanoate
octylate; 3-Methylbutyl octanoate; Isoamyl caprylate; isoamyl octylate; Isopentyl octanoate; Isopentyl octanoate

Amyl iso phenylacetate; Pentyl iso phenylacetate; Phenylacetic acid, Isopentyl ester; Amyl iso α-toluate;
I027 Isoamyl phenylacetate 3-Methylbutyl phenylacetate; Isoamyl α-toluate; Isopentyl phenylacetate; Pentyl phenylacetate and
3-methylbutyl phenylacetate

Amyl iso propionate; Pentyl iso propionate; Isopentyl propanoate; Isoamyl propanoate; 3-methylbutyl
I028 Isoamyl propionate* propanoate; 3-Methylbutyl propionate; Pentyl iso propanoate; Amyl iso propanoate; Isopentyl propionate;
Isoamyl propionate

Amyl iso pyruvate' pentyl iso pyruvate; Isoamyl α-ketopropionate; Isoamyl 2-oxopropanoate; Isopentyl
I029 Isoamyl pyruvate
pyruvate; 3-Methylbutyl 2-oxopropanoate; Isoamyl pyroracemate; Pentyl pyruvate

Amyl iso salicylate; Amyl iso o-hydroxybenzoate; Pentyl iso salicylate; 3-Methylbutyl o-hydroxybenzoate;
I030 Isoamyl salicylate 3-Methylbutyl salicylate; Pentyl iso o-hydroxybenzoate; Isopentyl o-hydroxybenzoate; Salicylic acid, isopentyl

1290
Order General Name Synonyms

ester; Isoamyl 2-hydroxybenzoate; Isoamyl o-hydroxybenzoate; isopentyl salicylate; Isopentyl 2-hydroxybenzoate

Borneo(iso); Exo-2-camphanol; exo-2-bornanol; Isobornyl alcohol; Isocamphol; (iso)-Camphol;

I031 Isoborneol (exo)-2-Camphanol; (exo)-2-Bornanol; Bornan-2-ol; exo-1,7,7- Trimethylbicyclo[2.2.1]heptan-2-ol

I032 Isobornyl 2-methylbutyrate Butanoic acid, 2-methyl-, 1,7,7-trimethylbicyclo-[2.2.1]hept-2-yl ester

Bornyl iso acetate; exo-2-bornyl acetate; Bornyl iso ethanoate; Isobornyl ethanoate; exo-2-camphanyl acetate;
I033 Isobornyl acetate 2-Camphanyl acetate

I034 Isobornyl formate Bornyl iso formate; exo-2-bornyl formate; Isobornyl methanoate; exo-2-camphanyl formate

I035 Isobornyl isobutyrate Propanoic acid, 2-methyl-, (1R,2R,4R)-1,7,7-trimethylbicyclo[2.2.1]hept-2-yl ; Isobornyl 2-methylpropionate

Isobornyl isovalerianate; Bornyl iso isovalerianate; Bornyl iso isovalerate; Isobornyl 3-methylbutanoate; Isobornyl
I036 Isobornyl isovalerate isopentanoate; Bornyl iso isopentanoate; Bornyl iso 3-methylbutanoate; Isobornyl 3-methylbutyrate

I037 Isobornyl propionate Bornyl iso propionate; exo-2-bornyl propionate; Isobornyl propionate; exo-2-camphanyl propionate

I038 Isobutyl 2-butenoate Isobutyl crotonoate

2-Methylpropyl 3-(methylthio)butyrate; 2-Methylpropyl 3-(methylthio)butanoate; Butanoic acid, 3-(methylthio)-,

I039 (+/-)-Isobutyl 3-methylthiobutyrate 2-methylpropyl ester; Isobutyl 3-(methylthio)butyrate

I040 Isobutyl acetate Butyl iso acetate; Butyl iso ethanoate; 2-methyl-1-propyl acetate; isobutyl ethanoate

I041 Isobutyl acetoacetate Butyl iso acetoacetate; butyl iso 3-ketobutyrate; isobutyl 3-ketobutyrate; Butyl iso 3-ketobutanoate; isobutyl

1291
Order General Name Synonyms
3-ketobutanoate; 2-methyl-1-propyl acetoacetate; Butyl iso 3-Oxobutanoate; Isobutyl-β-ketobutyrate;
Isobutyl-3-oxobutanoate; 2-Methylpropyl 3-oxobutyrate
Butyl iso alcohol; butanol(iso); Propyl iso carbinol; 2-Methyl-1-propanol; Isopropyl carbinol; Isobutanol;
I042 Isobutyl alcohol
2-Methylpropanol; 2- Methylpropan-1-ol; Isobutanol; Isopropyl carbinol
Butyl iso angelate; Buty iso cis-2-methyl-2-butenoate; Isobutyl 2-methylbut-2(cis)- enoate; Isobutyl
I043 Isobutyl angelate
cis-α,β-dimethylacrylate; Isobutyl cis-2-methyl-2-butenoate; isobutyl cis-α-methylcrotonate

I044 Isobutyl anthranilate Butyl iso anthranilate; Butyl iso o-aminobenzoate; Isobutyl 2-aminobenzoate; Isobutyl o-aminobenzoate

butyl iso benzoate; 2-methylpropyl benzoate; Isobutyl benzenecarboxylate, Eglantine; Isobutyl phenyl
I045 Isobutyl benzoate methanoate

Butyl iso butyrate; 2-methyl-1-propyl butyrate; butyl iso butanoate; isobutyl butanoate; 2-Methyl propanyl
I046 Isobutyl butyrate butyrate; 2-methylpropyl butanoate

Isobutyl-3-phenylpropenoate; isobutyl-β-phenylacrylate; Labdanol; 2-methylpropyl cinnamate; 2-Methylpropyl

I047 Isobutyl cinnamate β-phenylacrylate; 2-Methylpropyl 3-phenylpropenoate

I048 Isobutyl formate Butyl iso formate; 2-Methyl-1-propyl formate; Isobutyl methanoate; Butyl iso methanoate; Tetryl formate

I049 Isobutyl furyl propionate Isobutyl 3-(2-furyl)propionate; Isobutyl 2-furanpropionate; Isobutyl furfurylacetate; Isobutyl-2-furanpropionate

Butyl iso heptanoate; Butyl iso heptoate; 2-Methyl-1-propyl heptanoate; Isobutyl heptoate; Isobutyl heptylate;
I050 Isobutyl heptanoate Isobutyl heptoate

Butyl iso hexanoate; Butyl iso caproate; 2-Methyl-1-propyl caproate, 2-methylpropyl hexanoate; Isobutyl
I051 Isobutyl hexanoate caproate; Isobutyl capronate; isobutyl hexylate

Butyl iso isobutyrate; Butyl iso 2-methylpropanoate; 2-Methyl-1-propyl 2-methylpropanoate; Isobutyl

I052 Isobutyl isobutyrate 2-methylpropanoate; Isobutyl 2-methylpropionate

1292
Order General Name Synonyms

I053 Isobutyl N-methylanthranilate Benzoic acid, 2-(methylamino)-, 2-methylpropyl ester

I054 Isobutyl phenylacetate* Butyl iso phenylacetate; 2-Methylpropyl phenylacetate; Isobutyl α-toluate

I055 Isobutyl propionate Butyl iso propionate; Isobutyl propanoate; Butyl iso propanoate; 2-Methyl-1-propryl propanoate

Butyl iso salicylate; 2-Methyl-1-propyl salicylate; Butyl iso o-hydroxybenzoate; 2-Methylpropyl

I056 Isobutyl salicylate o-hydroxybenzoate; Isobutyl o-hydroxybenzoate; Isobutyl 2-hydroxybenzoate; 2-Methylpropyl 2-hydroxybenzoate;
Butyl salicylate
2-Butyl-iso-3-methoxypyrazine; 2-Methoxy-3-(2-methylpropyl)pyrazine; 2-Methoxy-3- isobutylpyrazine;
I057 2-Isobutyl-3-methoxypyrazine
2-Butyl-3-methoxypyrazine
2-Butyl-iso-3-methylpyrazine; 2-Methyl-3-isobutyl pyrazine; 2-methyl-3-(2- methylpropyl)-pyrazine;
I058 2-Isobutyl-3-methylpyrazine 2-(2-Methylpropyl)-3-methylpyrazine; 2-Isobutyl-3-methyl- 1,4-diazine; 2-Butyl-3-methylpyrazine

2-Isobutyl-4,6-dimethyldihydro-1,3,5-dithiazine and 2(4)-Isobutyl-4(2),6-dimethyldihydro-4H-1,3,5-dithiazine; Dimethyl isobutyl dihydro- 1,3,5-dithiazine;

I059
4-isobutyl-2,6-dimethyldihydro-1,3,5-dithiazine (mixture) Dihydro-2-isobutyl-4,6-dimethyl-4h-1,3,5-dithiazine and dihydro-6- isobutyl-2,4-dimethyl-4h-1,3,5-dithiazine

1-Amino-2-methylpropane; 2-Methyl-1-aminopropane; 2-Methyl-1-propanamine; 2-Methylpropanamine;

I060 Isobutylamine 2-Methylpropylamine; 3-Methyl-2-propylamine; iso-Butylamine; Monoisobutylamine; Valamine

N-Isobutyl (E2),(E4)-decadienamide; 2,4-Decadienamide, N-(2-methylpropyl)-, (2E, 4E)-; 2,4-Decadienamide,

N-(2-methylpropyl)-, (E,E)-; 2,4-Decadienamide, N- isobutyl-, (E,E)-;
I061 N-Isobutyldeca-trans-2-trans-4-dienamide (E,E)-N-(2-Methylpropyl)-2,4-decadienamide; N-(2-methyl- propyl)deca-trans-2-trans-4-dienamide;
N-Isobutyl-2-trans-4-trans-decadienamide; N-Isobutyl deca-trans-2-trans-4-dienamide; Pellitorin; Pellitorine;
trans-Pellitorine

Benzylisobutyl carbinol; α-butyl iso phenethyl alcohol; 2-Methylpropyl benzyl carbnol; Benzyl isoamyl alcohol;
I062 α-Isobutylphenethyl alcohol isobutyl benzylcarbinol; 4-Methyl-1-yl-1- phenyl-2- pentanol; 4-Methyl-1-phenyl-2-pentanol, 2-Methyl propyl
benzyl carbinol, Benzylisoamyl acetone; 4- Methyl-1-phenylpentan-2-ol

I063 2-Isobutylthiazole 2-Butyl iso thiazole; Thiazole, 2-isobutyl; 2-Butylthiazole

Butyraldehyde(iso); butyl iso aldehyde; Butyric iso aldehyde; Isobutyl aldehyde; isobutyric aldehyde; 2-Methyl
I064 Isobutyraldehyde propanal; Isobutanal

1293
Order General Name Synonyms

I065 Isobutyric acid Butyric iso acid; 2-Methylpropionic acid; Isopropylformic acid; 2-Methylpropanoic acid; Isobutyric acid

4-Hydroxy-3-methoxy-1-propen-1-yl benzene; 3-Methoxy-4-hydroxy-1-propen-1-yl benzene;

I066 Isoeugenol* 1-Hydroxy-2-methoxy-4-propenylbenzene; 2-Methoxy-4-propenylphenol; 4-propenyl guaiacol;
1-Hydroxy-2-methoxy-4-propen-1-ylbenzene; 2-Methoxy-4-(1-prophenyl)phenol
Isoeugenol acetate; 4-Acetoxy-3-methoxy-1-(1-propen-1-yl) benzene; 2-Methoxy-4- (prop-1-enyl)phenyl
I067 Isoeugenyl acetate acetate; Acetyl isoeugenol; 2-Methoxy-4-propenylphenyl acetate; Acetisoeugenol
4-Propenyl-1(benzyloxy)-2-methoxybenzene; Benzyl 2-methoxy-4-propenylphenyl ether;
I068 Isoeugenyl benzyl ether 1-Benzyloxy-2-methoxy-4-propenylbenzene; 2-Methoxy-4-propenylphenyl benzyl ether; Benzyl isoeugenyl
ether; Benzyl isoeugenol; 2-Methoxy-4- propenylphenyl ether

1-Ethoxy-2-methoxy-4-(prop-1-enyl)benzene; 1-Ethoxy-2-methoxy-4- propenylbenzene;

I069 Isoeugenyl ethyl ether 2-Ethoxy-5-propenylanisole; Ethyl isoeugenol; Ethyl isoeugenyl ether; 1-Ethoxy-2-methoxy-4-benzene

4-(1-Propen-1-yl)-2-methoxyphenyl formate; 2-Methoxy-4-(1-propen-1-yl) phenyl formate;

I070 Isoeugenyl formate 2-Methoxy-4-propenyl phenyl formate; propenyl-2-methoxyphenyl formate; 4-Methoxy-4-phenyl formate;
2-Methoxy-4-propenylphenyl formate

Isoeugenol methyl ether; 3,4-Dimethoxy-1-(1-propen-1-yl) benzene; 1,2-Dimethoxy-4- propenylbenzene; Methyl

I071 Isoeugenyl methyl ether
isoeugenol; 4-Propenyl veratrole; 1,2- Dimethoxy-4- (prop- 1-enyl)benzene; 1,2-Dimethoxy-4-propen

2-Methoxy-4-(1-propen-1-yl) phenyl phenylacetate; Isoeugenol α-toluate; 2-Methoxy-4-propenyl

I072 Isoeugenyl phenylacetate phenylacetate; 4-Propenylguaiacyl phenylacetate; 2-Methoxy-4-phenyl phenylacetate

1294
Order General Name Synonyms
2-hexylidene cyclopentanone and 2-hexyl-2-cyclopenten-1-one (mixture); 2-Hexyl-2- cyclopenten-1-one and
I073 Isojasmone 2-hexylidenecyclopentanone (mixture); 2-Methyl-3-(2- pentenyl)-2-cyclopenten-1-one;
2-Hexyl-cyclopenten-2-one-1

cis-Menthone; cis-2-Methyl-5-isopropylcyclohexanone; d,l-Isomenthone; Cyclohexanone,

I074 DL-Isomenthone 5-methyl-2-(1-methylethyl)-, (Z)-; Isomenthone; cis-para-Menthan- 3-one;
cis-1-Methyl-4-isopropyl-3-cyclohexanone; 1-Methyl-4-isopropyl-3- cyclohexanone; d,l-cis-para-Menthan-3-one

I075 α-Isomethylionyl acetate 3-Methyl-4-(2,6,6-trimethyl-2-cyclohexen-1-yl)-3-buten-2-yl acetate

γ-Methylionone; Raldeine-γ; iraldeine-γ; α-Cyclocitrylidene butanone; Methyl-γ- ionone(so called);

I076 α-Isomethyl ionone
4-(2,6,6-Trimethyl-2-cyclohexen-1-yl)-3-methyl-3- buten-2-one; Isomethylionone

I077 β-Isomethylionone 3-Buten-2-one, 3-methyl-4-(2,6,6-trimethyl-1-cyclohexen-1-yl)-

2-(α-Methylvinyl) pyrazine; 2-Isopropenyl-1,4-diazine; 2-(1-methylvinyl)pyrazine; 2-Isopropenylpyrazine;

I078 Isoorioenyl pyrazine (Isopropenyl)
Isopropenylpyrazine

3-Methylbutyl 2-furylbutyrate; Amyl 2-furanbutyrate; Isoamyl 2-furanbutyrate; Isopentyl 2-furanbutyrate;

I079 Isopentyl 4-(2-furan)butyrate Isopentyl furyl-2-butyrate; Isoamyl furfurylpropionate; 3-Methylbutyl 2-furanbutyrate; α-Isoamyl
furfurylpropionate

Amyl iso acetoacetate; Isopenetyl acetoacetate; 3-Methylbutyl acetoacetate; 3-methylbutyl 3-oxobutanoate;

Isopentyl β-ketobutyrate; isopentyl β-ketobutyrate; Pentyl iso 3-oxobutanoate; Isopentyl 3-oxobutanoate;
I080 Isopentyl acetoacetate Amyl iso β-ketobutyrate; 3-Methylbutyl β-ketobutyrate; Amyl iso 3-oxobutanoate; Isoamyl β-ketobutyrate;
Isoamyl 3-oxobutanoate, 3-Methylbutyl 3-oxobutyrate; Pentyl 3-Oxobutanoate
Pentyl iso amine; 1-Aminoisopentane; Butyl iso carbylamine; Isoamylamine; 3-Methylbutylamine; isoamino
I081 Isopentyl amine pentane; Isobutyl carbylamine; 1-Butanamine, 3-methyl-

N-(3-Methylbutylidene)-3-methyl-1-butylamine; N-Isoamylidene-isoamylamine; 1-Butanamine,

I082 Isopentylidene isopentylamine
3-methyl-N-(3-methylbutylidene)-

1295
Order General Name Synonyms

2-Cyclohexen-1-one, 3,5,5-trimethyl-; isoacetophorone; 3,5,5-Trimethyl-2-cyclohexen- 1-one;

I083 Isophorone 3,5,5-Trimethylcyclohex-2-en-1-one; 1,5,5-Trimethyl-3-oxocyclohexene; 1,3,3-Trimethylcyclohexane-5-one;
Isophorone

I084 Isoprenyl acetate 3-Methyl-3-butenyl acetate

I085 Isopropenyl acetate

Anhydro linalool oxide; 2-Ethenyl-2-methyl-5-(1-methylethenyl) tetrahydrofuran; furan,

I086 5-Isopropenyl-2-methyl-2-vinyl tetrahydrofuran 2-ethenyl-tetrahydro-2-methyl-5-(1-methylethenyl)-; 2-Methyl-2-vinyl- 5- isopropenyl tetrahydroforan;
Anhydrolinalool oxide

Cyclopentanecarboxaldehyde, 2-methyl-5-(1-methylethenyl)-, [R-(1α,2α,5α0]-;

cis-5-Isopropenyl-cis-2-methylcyclopentan-1-carboxalde cis-2-methyl-cis-5-isopropenylcyclopentan-1-carboxaldehyde; Photocitral; 5-(1-
I087 hyde Methylene-ethyl)-2-methylcyclopentanecarboxaldehyde; Photocitral; 5- Isopropenyl-2-
methylcyclopentanecarboxaldehyde; Photocitral A
I088 Isopropyl 2-methylbutyrate Butanoic acid, 2-methyl-, 1-methylethyl ester; 1-Methylethyl-2-methylbutanoate

I089 Isopropyl acetate Propyl iso acetate

Propyl iso alcohol; Propanol(iso); Petrohol; sec-Propyl alcohol; Dimethylcarbinol; Isopropanol; 2-propanol;
I090 Isopropyl alcohol *
Isopropanol; Propan-2-ol; Isopropanol

I091 Isopropyl benzoate Propyl iso benzoate; 1-Methylethyl benzoate

I092 Isopropyl butyrate Propyl iso butyrate; propyl iso butanoate; Isopropyl butanoate; Isopropyl n-butanote; Isopropyl

Propyl iso cinnamate; 1-Methylethyl-3-phenylpropenoate; Isopropyl β-phenylacrylate; Isopropyl

I093 Isopropyl cinnamate 3-phenylpropenoate

1296
Order General Name Synonyms
I094 Isopropyl formate Isopropyl methanoate; Propyl iso formate; Propyl iso methanoate

Propyl iso hexanoate; Propyl iso hexylate; Propyl iso capronate; Propyl iso caproate; Isopropyl caproate;
I095 Isopropyl hexanoate Isopropyl capronate; isopropyl hexylate

I096 Isopropyl isobutyrate Propyl iso isobutyrate; Isopropyl 2-methylpropanoate; Propyl-iso-2-methylpropanoate

Propyl iso isovalerate; Isopropyl isovalerianate; Propyl iso isopentanoate; Isopropyl isopentanoate; Isopropy
I097 Isopropyl isovalerate 3-methylbutanoate; Propyl iso 3-methylbutanoate
Tetradecanoic isopropyl ester; Isopropyl tetradecanoate; Tetradecanoic acid, 1-Methylethyl ester; Isopropyl
I098 Isopropyl myristate
myristate
p-Propyl iso phenylacetaldehyde; Cortexal; Cumylacetaldehyde; Cuminic acetaldehyde;
I099 p-Isopropyl phenylacetaldehyde p-Cymen-7-carboxaldehyde; homo-cuminic aldehyde; 4-Isopropyl phenyl acetaldehyde;
2-(p-Isopropylphenyl)acetaldehyde; Cumylaldehyde; p-Propylphenylacetaldehyde

I100 Isopropyl phenylacetate Isopropyl α-toluate

I101 Isopropyl propionate Propyl iso propionate; Isopropanoate

Propan-2-yl(2E, 4E)-hexa-2,4-dienoate;
I102 Isopropyl sorbate 2,4-Hexadienoic acid, 1-methylethyl ester;
Isopropyl 2,4-hexadienoate

Crotonate; Isopropyl-2-methyl-2-butenoate; Propyl iso tiglate; Propyl iso α-methylcrotonate; Isopropyl

I103 Isopropyl tiglate 2-methylcrotonate; Isopropyl-α-methyl crotonate; isopropyl-3-methyl-2-butenoate; Propyl tiglate
2-Cyclohexenone, 4-(1-methylethyl)-; 4-Isopropylcyclohex-2-enone; 4-Isopropylcyclohex-2-en-1-one, Crypton;
I104 4-Isopropyl-2-cyclohexenone Cryptone; dl-Kryptone
2-Isopropyl-4,6-dimethyl and 2(4)-Isopropyl-4(2),6-dimethyldihydro-4H-1,3,5-dithiazine; 4,6-Dimethyl-2-
I105 4-isopropyl-2,6-dimethyldihydro-1,3,5-dithiazine (1-methylethyl)dihydro-1,3,5-dithiazine; Dimethyl isopropyl dihydro-1,3,5-dithiazine;
(mixture) Dihydro-2-isopropyl-4,6-dimethyl-4h-1,3,5-dithiazine and dihydro-4-isopropyl-2,6- dimethyl-4h-1,3,5-dithiazine

I106 2-Isopropyl-4-methylthiazole Thiazole, 4-methyl-2-(1-methylethyl)-; 4-Methyl-2-isopropylthiazole

I107 2-Isopropyl-5-methyl-2-hexenal iso-Dihydrovandulyl aldehyde

1297
Order General Name Synonyms

p-Propyl iso acetophenone; p-Isopropylacetylbenzene; 4-Isopropylacetophenone; Acetocumene; p-Acetyl cumol;

I108 p-Isopropylacetophenone 1,4-Acetyl-isopropyl benzol; 1-Isopropyl-4- acetylbenzene; p-Isopropyl acetylbenzol; Methyl p-isopropylphenyl
ketone; 1-(4-Isopropylphenyl)ethanone; p-Acetylcumene; p-Propylacetophenone

I109 Isopropylamine 1-Methylethylamine; 2-Aminopropane; 2-Propylamine; Monoisopropylamine; sec-Propylamine

Cuminol; Cumin alcohol; p-Cymen-7-ol; Cumic alcohol; Cuminic alcohol; Cuminol; Cuminyl alcohol;
I110 p-Isopropylbenzyl alcohol
p-cymen-1-ol; 4-Isopropylbenzyl alcohol

2-Ethyl (or methyl)-(3,5 or 6)-isopropylpyrazine; 2-Isopropyl-(3,5 or 6)-methoxypyrazine; 2-propyl-iso-(3,6 or

6)-methoxypyrazine; 2-Isopropyl-3- methoxypyrazine; 2-Isopropyl-5-methoxypyrazine;
I111 Isopropylmethoxypyrazine 2-Isopropyl-6-methoxypyrazine; 2-methoxy-3 or 6-(1-methylethyl)pyrazine; Methoxy isopropyl pyrazines
mixture; 2- Isopropyl-3-methoxypyrazine; 2-Methoxy-(3,5 or 6)-isopropylpyrazine

2-Isopropyl- N,2,3-trimethylbutanamide; N,2,3-Trimethyl-2-(1-methylethyl)butanamide;

I112 2-Isopropyl-N,2,3-trimethyl butyram 2-Isopropyl-N,2,3-trimethylbutyramide; N,2,3-trimethyl-2-isopropylbutanamide

o-Cumenol; 1-Hydroxy-2-isopropylbenzene; o-Isopropylphenol; Phenol, 1-(1-methylethyl)-; Phenol,

I113 2-Isopropylphenol 2-(1-methylethyl)-; 1-Hydroxy-1-isopropylbenzene

p-Propyl iso hydrocinnamLdehyde; 3-(4-Isopropylphenyl)propionaldehyde; Cuminyl acetaldehyde; p-cymyl

I114 3-(p-Isopropylphenyl)propionaldehyde propanal; p-Isopropylhydrocinnamaldehyde; 3-(p-Isopropylphenyl)-propionic aldehyde;
3-(p-Cumenyl)propionaldehyde, p-Cumminylpropanal; 3-(p-Cumenyl)propionaldehyde

I115 2-Isopropylpyrazine Pyrazine, (1-methylethyl)- isopropyl-Pyrazine; Isopropylpyrazine; Isopropyl-1,4-diazine

Pulegol (iso); p-8(9)-Menthen-3-ol; p-Menth-8-en-3-ol; 1-Methyl-4-isopropenyl- cyclohexan-3-ol;

I116 Isopulegol
p-Menth-8(9)-en-3-ol; l-Isopulegol

δ-8(9)-p-Menthen-3-one; 1-Isopropyl-4-methyl-2-cyclohexanone; 1-Propyl-iso-4- methyl-2-cyclohexanone;

I117 Isopulegone p-Menth-8-en-3-one; 1-Methyl-4-isopropenylcyclo- hexan-3-one; 1-Methyl-4-isopropenyl-3-cyclohexanone;
trans-p-Menth-8-en-3- one

1298
Order General Name Synonyms
Pulegol-iso-acetate; 1-Methyl-4-isopropenylcyclohexan-3-yl acetate; p-menth-8- en- 3-yl acetate; Isopulegol
I118 Isopulegyl acetate acetate; Acetylated citronellal; Pulegol acetate; 5-Methyl-2-isopropenylcyclohexyl acetate

I119 Isoquercitrin, enzymatically modified α-Glycosyl-isoquercitrin; Isoquercetin

I120 Isoquinoline Quinoline(iso); 3,4-benzopyridine; 2-Azanaphthalene; 2-Benzazine; Benzo(o)pyridine; BenzoPyrine

Active valeric acid; Valeric iso acid; 3-Methylbutyric acid; 3-Methylbutanoic acid; Delphinic acid; Isobutyl
I121 Isovaleric acid formic acid; Isopropyl lacetic acid; β-Methyl butyric acid; valerianic acid; Isopentanoic acid

Methacrylic acid, isobutyl ester; Isobutyl α-methylacrylate; Isobutyl methacrylate; Isobutyl

I122 Isobutyl 2-methylprop-2-enoate 2-methyl-2-propenoate; 2-Methylpropyl methacrylate; Isobutyl α-methacrylate;2-Propenoic acid, 2-methyl-,
2-methylpropyl ester
Phenol, p-isopropyl-; p-Cumenol; p-Isopropylphenol; Australol; 4-(1-Methylethyl)phenol;
I123 4-Isopropylphenol
1-Hydroxy-4-isopropylbenzene;p-Cuminol ;Phenol, 4-(1-methylethyl)-

I124 Isopentyl heptanoate Heptanoic acid, 3-methylbutyl ester; ; 3-methylbutyl heptanoate;iso-Amyl n-heptanoate

I125 Isobutyl hexadecanoate Hexadecanoic acid, 2-methylpropyl ester

Hexadecanoic acid, 1-methylethyl ester; Palmitic acid, isopropyl ester; Hexadecanoic acid, isopropyl ester;
Isopropyl n-hexadecanoate; Isopropyl ester of hexadecanoic acid; 1-Methylethyl ester1-methylethyl
I126 Isopropyl hexadecanoate hexandecanoate; Hexadecanoic acidisopropyl n-hexadecanoate; 1-methylethyl hexadecanoate; 2-propyl
hexadecanoate;Isopropyl palmitate
1,2,3,4-tetrahydro-1,1,6-trimethyl-naphthalene; Ionene; 1,1,6-trimethyltetraline;
I127 α-Ionene 1,1,6-Trimethyl-1,2,3,4-tetrahydronaphthalene;ionene (1,1,6-trimethyl-1,2,3,4-tetrahydronaphthalene);
Naphthalene, tetrahydro-1,1,6-trimethyl-;Naphthalene, 1,2,3,4-tetrahydro-1,1,6-trimethyl-
1-Hexadecen-3-ol, 3,7,11,15-tetramethyl-; Hexadec-1-en-3-ol, 3,7,11,15-tetramethyl-;
I128 Isophytol 3,7,11,15-Tetramethyl-1-hexadecen-3-ol; 1-Hexadecene-3-ol, 3,7,11,15-tetramethyl

I129 2-Isopropyl-5-methylphenyl acetate O-Acetylthymol; Thymol acetate; Thymyl acetate; Thimyl acetate;Phenol, 5-methyl-2-(1-methylethyl)-, acetate

1299
Order General Name Synonyms

Isobutyl 2-hydroxypropanoate; 2-methylpropyl 2-hydroxypropanoate;Propanoic acid, 2-hydroxy-, 2-methylpropyl

I130 Isobutyl lactate ester

Propane, 1-isothiocyanato-2-methyl-; Isothiocyanic acid, isobutyl ester; i-Butyl isothiocyanate; 2-Methylpropyl

I131 Isobutyl isothiocyanate isothiocyanate; 1-Isothiocyanato-2-methylpropane

Phenol, m-isopropyl-; m-Cumenol; m-Isopropylphenol; 3-(1-Methylethyl)phenol; Isopropylphenol, meta;Phenol,

I132 3-Isopropylphenol 3-(1-methylethyl)-

I133 Isoamyl isothiocyanate Butane, 1-isothiocyanato-3-methyl-;1-Isothiocyanato-3-methylbutane

I134 2-Isopropylpyridine Pyridine, 2-(1-methylethyl)-

2H-2,4a-Methanonaphthalene, 1,3,4,5,6,7-hexahydro-1,1,5,5-tetramethyl-, (2S,4aR)-(-)-;

2H-2,4a-Methanonaphthalene, 1,3,4,5,6,7-hexahydro-1,1,5,5-tetramethyl-; 2H-2,4a-Methanonaphthalene,
I135 Isolongifolene 1,3,4,5,6,7-hexahydro-1,1,5,5-tetramethyl-, (2S-cis)-;
(-)-Isolongifoline;Isolongipholene;2H-2,4a-methanonaphthalene, 1,3,4,5,6,7-hexahydro-1,1,5,5-tetramethyl-, (2s)-
Isobutyraldehyde, diethyl acetal; Isobutylaldehyde diethyl acetal; 1,1-Diethoxy-2-methylpropane;
I136 Isobutanal diethyl acetal
1,1-Diethoxyisobutane;Propane, 1,1-diethoxy-2-methyl-
Valeric acid, 3-methylbutyl ester; iso-Amyl N-valerate; 3-Methylbutyl pentanoate;Pentanoic acid, 3-methylbutyl
I137 Isopentyl valerate ester;Isopentyl pentanoate

I138 Isopropyl isothiocyanate Propane, 2-isothiocyanato-; 2-Isothiocyanatopropane

I139 [R-(E)]-5-Isopropyl-8-methylnona-6,8-dien-2-one isopropyl methyl nonadienone

I140 Isoamyl decanoate(3-methylbutyl decanoate) Pentadecanoic acid, 3-methylbutyl ester; iso-Amyl n-decanoate; Isopentyl decanoate;3-methylbutyl decanoate

I141 Isopropyl decanoate Decanoic acid, 1-methylethyl ester;N-capric acid isopropyl ester
Butyric acid, 2-methyl-, isobutyl ester; Isobutyl 2-methylbutanoate; 2-Methyl-1-propyl 2-methylbutyrate;
I142 Isobutyl 2-methylbutyrate 2-methylpropyl 2-methylbutanoate;Butanoic acid, 2-methyl-, 2-methylpropyl ester

1300
Order General Name Synonyms
Butane, 1,1-diethoxy-3-methyl-; Isovaleraldehyde, diethyl acetal; 3-Methylbutanal, diethyl acetal;
I143 Isovaleraldehyde diethyl acetal 1,1-diethoxy-3-methyl butane; isopentanal diethyl acetal
I144 Isobutyl 10-undecenoate isobutyl undecenoate
n-Octanoic acid isopropyl ester; Octanoic acid, 1-methylethyl ester; Octanoic acid, isopropyl ester; iso-Propyl
I145 Isopropyl octanoate n-octanoate;2-propyl octanoate

n-Caprylic acid isobutyl ester; Octanoic acid, 2-methylpropyl ester; iso-Butyl caprylate; Octanoic acid, isobutyl
I146 Isobutyl octanoate ester; iso-Butyl n-octanoate;2-methylpropyl octanoate

I147 Isopropyl crotonate

I148 3-Isopropenylpentanedioic acid

I149 1-Isobutoxy-1-ethoxyethane

I150 Isopropyl dodecanoate Dodecanoic acid, 1-methylethyl ester; Isopropyl laurate

Isoamyl angelate; (Z)-2-Methyl-2-butenoic acid 3-methylbutyl ester; 2-Butenoic acid, 2-methyl-,
I151 Isopentyl 2-methylcrotonate 3-methylbutylester
Valeric acid, isobutyl ester; Isobutyl valerinate; 2-Methyl-1-propyl n-valerate; 2-Methylpropyl valerate; Isobutyl
I152 Isobutyl valerate pentanoate;Pentanoic acid, 2-methylpropyl ester
I153 1-Isopentyloxy-1-pentyloxyethane
Valeric acid, isopropyl ester; Pentanoic acid isopropyl ester; Isopropyl pentanoate;Pentanoic acid, 1-methylethyl
I154 Isopropyl valerate ester

I155 2-Isobutyl-4-methyl-1,3-dioxolane 1,3-Dioxolane, 4-methyl-2-(2-methylpropyl)-; 2-Isobutyl-4-methyl-1,3-dioxolane

I156 Isodihydrocarveol

I157 Isoamyl lactate(3-methylbutyl 2-hydroxypropanoate) Propanoic acid, 2-hydroxy-, 3-methylbutyl ester; Isopentyl 2-hydroxypropanoate; 3-methylbutyl lactate
Tetradecanoic acid, 2-methylpropyl ester;2-methylpropyl tetradecanoate;Myristic acid isobutyl ester;Isobutyl
I158 Isobutyl tetradecanoate myristate
Oxazole, 4,5-dimethyl-2-(2-methylpropyl)-;2-Isobutyl-4,5-dimethyl-1,3-oxazole; Oxazole,
I159 2-Isobutyl-4,5-dimethyloxazole
4,5-dimethyl-2-isobutyl;4,5-Dimethyl-2-isobutyloxazole
Decanoic acid, 2-methylpropyl ester; Decanoic acid, isobutyl ester; 2-methylpropyl decanoate;N-capric acid
I160 Isobutyl decanoate isobutyl ester
I161 S-Isopropyl 3-methylbut-2-enethioate S-Isopropyl thiosenecioate; S-isopropyl 3-methylthiocrotonate;isopropyl methyl but enethioate

1301
Order General Name Synonyms
I162 Isobutyl dodecanoate Lauric acid isobutyl ester;Dodecanoic acid, 2-methylpropyl ester; 2-methylpropyl dodecanoat;Isobutyl laurate

I163 Isovaleraldehyde glyceryl acetal

I164 Isopentyl tetradecanoate

I165 1-Isobutoxy-1-ethoxypropane

I166 2-Isopropyl-4-methyl-1,3-dioxolane 1,3-Dioxolane, 4-methyl-2-(1-methylethyl), trans

I167 1-Isobutoxy-1-isopentyloxyethane
I168 Isopentyl hexadecanoate 3-Methylbutyl hexadecanoate
I169 1-Isobutoxy-1-ethoxy-3-methylbutane
I170 1-Isopentyloxy-1-propoxyethane
I171 1-Isopentyloxy-1-propoxypropane
2-(5-Isopropyl-2-methyl-tetrahydrothiophen-2-yl)
I172 ethylacetate Tetrahydro-2-methyl-5-(1-methylethyl)-2-thiopheneethanolacetate
(2-(3-Methylbutoxy)ethyl)benzene; 3-Methylbutyloxyethylbenzene; 1-(2-((3-Methylbutyl)oxy)ethyl)benzene;
I173 Isoamyl phenethyl ether (2-(3-Methylbutoxy)ethyl)benzene; 2-(3-Methylbutoxy)ethylbenzene; Isopentylphenethylether;
Greenether;2-(3-Methylbutoxy)ethylbenzene
3-[3-(2-Isopropyl-5-methylcyclohexyl)-ureido]-butyric Ethyl 3-(3-(2-isopropyl-5-methylcyclohexyl)ureido)butanoate;
I174 acid ethyl ester 3-[[[[5-Methyl-2-(1-methylethyl)cyclohexyl]amino]carbonyl]cmino]bytanoic acid ethyl ester
I175 2-(5-Isopropyl-2-methyl-tetrahydrothiophen-2-yl)-ethan
ol
I176 2-Isopropyl-4-methyl-3-thiazoline 2,5-Dihydro-2-isopropyl-4-methylthiazole; Thiazole, 2,5-dihydro-4-methyl-2-(1-methylethyl);
4-methyl-2-(propan-2-yl)-2,5-dihydro-1,3-thiazole
L002 Lauryl acetate Acetate C-12; dodecanyl acetate; Dodecyl acetate; Lauryl ethanoate; Dodecanyl ethanoate; Lauryl acetate
Alcohol C-12; Dodecyl; n-Dodecyl alcohol; 1-Dodecanol; Dodecyl carbinol; Dodecan-1-ol; Dodecyl alcohol;
L003 Lauryl alcohol
1-Dodecanol; Undecyl carbinol

3-Acetylpropionic acid; Laevulic acid; 3-Ketobutane-1-carboxylic acid; γ-Oxopentanoic acid; 4-oxovaleric acid;
L004 Levulinic acid laevulinic acid; β-Acetylpropionic acid; γ-Ketovaleric acid; 4-Oxopentanoic acid; Acetopropionic acid;
Levulinic acid

Cinene; citrene; Cajeputene; Carvene;dipentene; Kautschin; 1,8(9)-p-Menthadiene; p-Mentha-1,8-diene;

L005 d-Limonene 1-Methyl-4-isopropenyl-1-cyclohexene; d-1-Methyl-4- isopropenyl-1-cyclohexene

L006 l-Limonene Levo-Limonene

1302
Order General Name Synonyms

Linalol; 2,6-Dimethyl-2,7-octadiene-6-ol; Coriandrol (d-linalool from coriander oil);

L007 Linalool*
3,7-Dimethyl-1,6-octadien-3-ol; dl-linalool (synthetic); 2,6-Dimethyl-octadien-2,7-ol-6

2-Methyl-2-vinyl-5-(2-hydroxy-2-propyl_tetrahydrofuran; 5(2-Hydroxyisopropyl)-2-
L008 Linalool oxide methyl-2-vinyltetrahydrofuran; 2-Furanmethanol, 5-ethenyltetrahydro-α,α-5- trimethyl-, cis;
cis-trans-2-vinyl-2-methyl-5-(1'hydroxy-1'- methylethyl)- tetrahydrofuran; Linalool oxide (5-ring)

1,5-Dimethyl-1-ethenylhex-4-enyl acetate; Licareol acetate; Linalool acetate; Bergamol;

L009 Linalyl acetate* 3,7-Dimethyl-1,6-octadien-3-yl acetate
3,7-Dimethyl-1,6-octadien-3-yl anthranilate; Linalyl o-aminobenzoate; 3,7-Dimethyl-
L010 Linalyl anthranilate
1,6-octadien-3-yl-2-aminobenzoate; Linalyl 2-aminobenzoate

L011 Linalyl benzoate 1,5-Dimethyl-1-vinylhex-enyl benzoate; Linalool benzoate; 3,7-Dimethyl-1,6- octadien- 3-yl benzoate

1,5-Dimethyl-1-ethenylhex-4-enyl butyrate; 3,7-Dimethyl-1,6-octadien-3-yl butyrate;

L012 Linalyl butyrate 3,7-Dimethyl-1,6-octadien-3-yl butanoate; linalool isobutyrate; Linalyl-n-butyrate; linalool butanoate
3,7-Dimethyl-1,6-octadien-3-yl cinnamate; 3,7-Dimethyl-1,6-octadien-3-yl 3-phenylpropenoate;
L013 Linalyl cinnamate 3,7-Dimethyl-1,6-octadien-3-yl β-phenylacrylate; Linalyl β-phenylacrylate; linalyl 3-phenylpropenoate; Linalyl
3-phenylpropenoate
1,5-Dimethyl-1-ethenylhex-4-enyl formate; 3,7-Dimethyl-1,6-octadien-3-yl formix acid ester; Linalool formate;
L014 Linalyl formate
3,7-Dimethyl-1,6-octadien-3-yl formate

1,5-Dimethyl-1-ethenylhex-4-enyl hexanoate; 3,7-dimethylocta-1,6-dien-3-yl hexanoate; linalyl capronate;

L015 Linalyl hexanoate linalyl caproate; Linalyl hexoate; linalyl hexylate; Linalyl hexoate; 3,7-Dimethyl-1,6-octadien-3-yl hexanoate

1,5-Dimethyl-1-ethenylhex-4-enyl 3-methylpropionate; 3,7-Dimethylocta-1,6- dien-3-yl isobutylate; Linalool

L016 Linalyl isobutyrate isobutyrate; Linalyl 3-methylpropionate; 3,7-Dimethyl-1,6- octadien-3-yl 2-methylpropanoate; Linalool
2-methylpropanoate; Linalyl 2-methylpropionate

1,5-Dimethyl-1-ethenylhex-4-enyl 3-methylbutyrate; 3,7-dimethylocta-1,6-dien-3-yl isovalerate; Linalyl

L017 Linalyl isovalerate isopentanoate; Linalyl 3-methylbutylate; Linalyl isovalerianate; 3,7-Dimethyl-1,6-octadien-3-yl isovalerate;
3,7-Dimethyl-1,6-octadien-3-yl 3-methylbutanoate; Linalyl 3-methylbutanoate

1303
Order General Name Synonyms

1,5-Dimethyl-1-ethenyhex-3-enyl octanoate; 3,7-Dimethyl-1,6-octadien-3-yl octanoate; Linalool octanoate;

L018 Linalyl octanoate
Linalyl caprylate; Linalyl octoate; linalyl octylate

Benzeneacetic acid, 1-ethenyl-1,5-dimethyl-4-hexenyl ester; 3,7-dimethyl-1,6- octadien-3-yl phenylacetate;

L019 Linalyl phenylacetate
Linalyl α-toluate; 1,5-dimethyl-1-vinylhex-4-enyl phenylacetate

1,5-Dimethyl-1,6-octadien-3-yl propionate; Linalool propanoate; 3,7-Dimethyl-1,6- octadien-3-yl propionate;

L020 Linalyl propionate 3,7-Dimethyl-1,6-octadien-3-yl-propanoate

(9Z,12Z)-cotadeca-9,12-dienoic acid; 9,12-Octadecadienoic acid; 9,12,15- octadecatrienoic acid;

L021 linoleic acid and linolenic acid (mixture) Octadeca-9,12-dienoic acid

1,4-Methanoazulene, decahydro-4,8,8-trimethyl-9-methylene-, (1S,3aR,4S,8aS)-(+)-; (+)-Longifolene;

L022 Longifolene D-longifolene; 1,4-Methanoazulene, decahydro-4,8,8-trimethyl-9-methylene-; (+)-Longofolene;
(+)-Longifolen;1,4-Methanoazulene, decahydro-4,8,8-trimethyl-9-methylene-, [1S-(1α,3aβ,4α,8aβ)]-

4-Hexen-1-ol, 5-methyl-2-(1-methylethenyl)-, (r)-; 4-Hexen-1-ol, 2-isopropenyl-5-methyl-, (-)-;

L023 Lavandulol (R)-Lavandulol; 2-Isopropenyl-5-methyl-4-hexen-1-ol;(-)-Lavandulol
Propanamide, 2-hydroxy-N-(2-hydroxyethyl)-; N-(β-Hydroxyethyl)-2-hydroxypropionamide;
L024 N-Lactoyl ethanolamine N-(β-Hydroxyethyl)lactamide; N-Hydroxyaethyllactamid; 2-Hydroxy-N-(2-hydroxyethyl)propanamide; Lactic acid
monoethanolamide; Monoethanolamine lactic acid amide;N-(2-Hydroxyethyl)lactamide

Pentanoic acid, 1-ethenyl-1,5-dimethyl-4-hexenyl ester; Linalyl N-valerate; 1,5-Dimethyl-1-vinyl-4-hexenyl

L025 Linalyl valerate pentanoate

L026 Lavandulyl Acetate

L027 Linalool oxide(5) acetate

1304
Order General Name Synonyms

N-(2-hydroxy-1-oxopropyl)ethanolamine O-phosphate; 2-[(2-hydroxyproanoyl)amino]ethyl dihydrogen phosphate;

L028 N-Lactoyl ethanolamine phosphate Phosphoric acid mono-[2-(2-hydroxypropionylamino)-ethyl] ester
L029 Lauric acid Dodecanoic acid
Epoxylinalool (pyranoid); 6-Ethenyl-2,2,6-trimethyl tetrahydro-2H-pyran-3-ol;
6-Ethenyl-2,2,6-trimethyltetrahydro-2H-pyran-3-ol; 6-Ethenyl-3,4,5,6-tetrahydro-2,2,6-trimethyl-2H-pyran-3-ol;
L030 Linalool oxide pyranoid 3-Hydroxy-2,2,6-trimethyl-6-vinyl tetrahydropyran; Linalool pyran oxide;
Tetrahydro-2,2,6-trimethyl-6-vinyl-2H-pyran-3-ol; 2,2,6-Trimethyl-6-vinyl tetrahydro-2H-pyran-3-ol;
2,2,6-Trimethyl-6-vinyltetrahydro-2H-pyran-3-ol; 6-Ethenyl-2,2,6-trimethyloxan-3-ol
3-Hydroxy-2-methyl-4h-pyran-4-one; 3-hydroxy-2-methyl-γ-pyrone; Palatone; Corps praline; Veltol;
M001 Maltol* 3-Hydroxy-2-methyl-(1,4-pyran); 3-hydroxy-2-methyl-4-pyrone; larixinic acid; 2-Methyl pyromeconic acid;
4H-Pyran-4-one, 3-hydroxy-2-methyl; 2-Methyl pyromeconic acid
M002 Maltol propionate 4H-Pyran-4-one, 2-methyl-3-(1-oxopropoxy)-, Veltol propionate
Maltyl 2-methylpropanoate; 2-methyl-4-pyron-3-yl 2-methylpropanoate; propanoic acid, 2-methyl-,
M003 Maltyl isobutyrate 2-methyl-4-oxo-4H-pyran-3-yl ester; Maltol isobutyrate

M004 p-Menth-1-en-3-ol 1-Methyl-4-isopropyl-1-cyclohexen-3-ol; Neopiperitol(trans-form); piperitol

M005 p-Menth-1-en-9-al Carvomenthenal

Terpinen-1-ol; 4-Isopropyl-1-methyl-3-cyclohexen-1-ol; 1-Terpinenol; Δβ-para- Menthen-1-ol;

M006 p-Menth-3-en-1-ol 1-Methyl-4-isopropyl-3-cyclohexen-1-ol; 1-Terpinenol; 1- Terpinenol; p-3-Methenol-1

M007 p-Menth-8-en-1-ol 1-Methyl-4-isopropenylcyclohexan-1-ol; β-Terpineol; 4-Isopropenyl-1-methyl- 1- cyclohexanol

2-Cyclohexen-1-one, 3-methyl-6-(1-methylethylidene)-; 1-Methyl-4-isopropylidene- 1-cyclohexen-3-one;
M008 p-Mentha-1,4(8)-dien-3-one Piperitenone; 3-Methyl-6-(1-methylethylidene)cyslohex-2-en- 1-one; Piperitenone;
4-Isopropylidene-1-methyl-1-cyclohexen-3-one

1-Cyclohexene-1-carboxaldehyde, 4-(1-methylethenyl)-; Dihydrocuminic aldehyde;

M009 p-Mentha-1,8-dien-7-al 4-isopropenyl-1-cyclohexene-1-carboxaldehyde; Perilla aldehyde; Perillaldehyde; p-mentha-1,8-dien-7-al

Dihydrocuminic alcohol; Hydrocumin alcohol; Menthadien -7-carbinol; 4-isopropenyl- 1-cyclohexenecarbinol;

M010 p-Mentha-1,8-dien-7-ol Iso-carveol; Perilla alcohol; 1-Hydroxymethyl-4- isopropenyl-1-cyclohexene; Perillyl alcohol; Dihydrocuminyl
alcohol

1305
Order General Name Synonyms

Perillyl acetate; Acetic acid, perillyl ester; Menthadien-7-carbinyl acetate; 1,8-para- Menthadien-7-yl acetate;
M011 p-Mentha-1,8-dien-7-yl acetate 4-Isopropenyl-1-cyclohexene carbinol acetate; Dihydrocuminyl acetate;
4-(1-Methylvinyl)cyclohex-1-ene-1-methylacetate; Perilla acetate; p-Mentha-1,8-dien-7-yl acetate

M012 p-Mentha-8-thiol-3-one 8-Mercapto-p-menthane-3-one; 8-Mercapto-3-p-menthanone; Thiomenthone; 8-Mercaptomenthone

cis- and trans-p-1(7),8-Menthadien-2-yl acetate; p-Mentha-1(7),8-dien-2-yl acetate, Acetic acid,

M013 p-1(7)8-Menthadien-2-yl acetate, cis and trans isomers p-1(7),8-menthadien-2-yl ester; Menthadienyl acetate; p-Mentha-1,8(10)- dien-9-yl acetate

M014 Menthadienol p-Mentha-1,8(10)-dien-9-ol.

Carvomenthol; Cyclohexanol, 2-Methyl-5-(1-methylethyl)-;Hexahydrocarvacrol; 3-Isopropyl-6-methylcyclohexanol;

M015 p-Menthan-2-ol
1-Methyl-4-isopropyl-2-cyclohexanol

Carvomenthone; Tetrahydrocarvone; 1-Methyl-4-isopropylcyclohexan-2-one; 5-Isopropyl-2-methylcyclohexanone;

M016 p-Menthan-2-one Tetrahydromenthone

Cyclohexanemethanol,2-hydroxy-α,α,4-trimethyl; 2-(2'Hydroxypropan-2'-yl)-5- methylcyclohexanol;

M017 p-Menthane-3,8-diol 2-Hydroxy-α,α,4-trimethylcyclohexanmethanol

M018 1-p-Menthen-9-yl acetate 9-Acetoxy-1-p-menthene; 3-cyclohexene-1-menthanol, α,4-dimethyl-,acetate; p-menth-1-en-9-yl acetate

M019 1-p-Menthene-8-thiol α,α,4-Trimethyl-3-cyclohexene-1-methanethiol; p-Menth-1-ene-8-thiol

M020 Menthofuran 4,5,6,7-Tetrahydro-3,6-dimethylbenzofuran; 3,9-Epoxy-p-mentha-3,8-diene

Peppermint camphor; 5-Methyl-2-isopropylhexahydrophenol; 5-Methyl-2-isopropyl- cyclohexanol;

menthacamphor; 1-Isopropyl-iso-4-methylcyclohexan-2-ol; 1-Propyl-iso- 4-methylcyclohexan-2-ol;
M021 ㅣ-Menthol* Hexahydrothymol; 3-p-Menthanol; p-menthan-3-ol; 1-Methyl-4-isopropylcyclohexan-3-ol, 1-3-p-Menthanol;
dl-3-p-Menthanol; 2-Isopropyl-5-methylcyclohexanol

1306
Order General Name Synonyms
M022 dl-Menthol*
2-Isopropyl-5-methylcyclohexanol; ; 2-Propyl-iso-5-methylcyclohexanol; 2-Isopropyl-5-methylcyclohexanol;
M023 d-neo-Menthol
d-β-Pulegomenthol; (+)-Neo-menthol

Carbonic acide, 2-hydroxyethyl 5-methyl-2-(1-methylethyl)cyclohexyl ester; l-Menthol 1-(or 2)-propylene glycol

M024 (-)-Menthol 1- and 2-propylene glycol carbonate carbonate; Menthol propylene glycol carbonate

Carbonic acide, 2-hydroxyethyl 5-methyl-2-(1-methylethyl)cyclohexyl ester; l-menthol ethylene glycol

M025 (-)-Menthol ethylene glycol carbonate carbonate; 2-Hydroxyethyl 5-methyl-2-(1-methylethyl)cyclohexyl carbonate; Menthol glycol carbonate
D,L-Menthol(+/-)-propylene glycol carbonate; Carbonic acid, 2-hydroxypropyl-5-
M026 D,L-Menthol-propylene glycol carbon methyl-2-(1-methylethyl)cyclohexylester; 5-Methyl-2-(1-methylethyl)-2-hydroxy propyl carbonic acid cyclohexyl
ester
4-Isopropyl-1-methylcyclohexan-3-one; 4-Propyl-iso-1-methylcyclohexan-3-one;
M027 Menthone 2-Isopropyl-5-methyl-cyclohexanone; p-Menthan-3-one, trans-p-Menthan-3-one, trans-menthone;
trans-2-Methyl-5-isopropylcyclohexanone

1,4-Dioxaspiro[4,5]decane-2-menthanol; l-Menthone 1,2-glycerol ketal; l-menthone 1,2-glyceryl ketal;

M028 DL-Menthone 1,2-glycerol ketal 6-Isopropyl-9-methyl-1,4-dioxaspiro[4,5]decana-2-methanol;
l-9-Methyl-6-(1-methylethyl)-1,4-dioxaspiro[4,5]decane-2-methanol

1,4-Dioxaspiro[4,5]decane-2-menthanol; d,l-Menthone 1,2-glycerol ketal; d,l-Methyl-

M029 (-)Menthone-1,2-glycerol ketal 6-(1-methylethyl)-1,4-dioxaspiro[4,5]fecane-2-mthanol; Frescolat racemic ; DL- Menthone-1,2-glycerol ketal

Menthon 8-thioacetate; (S)-menthon-8-yl thioacetate; menthone thioacetate; 8-Acetylthio-p-menthan-3-one;

8-Acetylthiomenthan-3-one; cis-1-methyl-1-(4-methyl- 2-oxocyclohexyl)ethyl thioacetate;
M030 cis and trans-Menthone-8-thioacetate cis-2-(1-Acetylthio-1-methylethyl)- 5- methylcyclohexanone; trans-1-methyl-1-(4-methyl-2-oxocyclohexyl)ethyl
thioacetate; trans-2-(1-Acetylthio-1-methylethyl)-5-methylcycloxanone

M031 3-(L-Menthoxy)-2-methylpropane-1,2-diol 3-l-Menthoxy-2-methylpropan-1,2-diol

Ethanol, 2-[[5-methyl-2-(1-methylethyl)cyclohexy]-oxy]-; 2-(p-Menthan-3-yloxy) ethanol;

M032 2-(L-Menthoxy)ethanol 3-(2-Hydroxyethoxy)-p-menthane; Coolact5

1307
Order General Name Synonyms

p-Menthan-3-yl acetate; 5-Methyl-2-(1-methylethyl)cyclohexyl acetate; l-p-Menth-3- yl acetate; Menthol

M033 Menthyl acetate acetate; 1-Isopropyl-4-methylcyclohex-2-yl acetate

Menthyl 3-methylbutanoate; Menthyl isovalerianate; Menthyl isopentanoate; 1-Isopropyl-4-methylcyclohex-2-yl

M034 Menthyl isovalerate 3-methylbutanoate; Menthol isovalerate; 1-propyl- iso-4-methylcyclohex-2-yl 3 methylbutanoate; p-Menth-3-yl
isovalerate; validol
Frescolate; α-Hydroxypropanoic acid, 5-methyl-2-(1-methylethyl)cyclohexyl ester; (-)-p-Menthan-3-yl lactate;
M035 l-Menthyl lactate propanoic acid, 2-hydroxy-, 5-methyl-2-(1-methylethyl) cyclohexyl ester; (-)-Menthyl lactate;
5-Methyl-2-(1-methylethyl)cyclohexyl α-hydroxypropanoate; l-p-Menthan-3-yl lactate
Cyclohexane,2-methoxy-4-methyl-1-(1-methylethyl)-,(1S,2R,4R)-; 1-Isopropyl-2- methoxy-4-methylcyclohexane;
M036 L-Menthyl methyl ether
2-Isopropyl-5-methylcyclohexyl methyl ether; 1-Menthyl methyl ether

D- and L-proline, 5-oxo, 5-methyl-2-(1-methylethyl)cyclohexyl ester; 2-Isopropyl-5-methylcyclohexyl

M037 Menthyl pyrolidone carboxylate 5-oxo-2-pyrrolidine carboxylate; Questice

M038 Menthyl valerate Pentanoic acid, (1R,2S,5R)-5-methyl-2-(1-methylethyl)cyclohexyl ester; Methyl pentanoate; Methyl valerianate

M039 3-Mercapto-2-butanone

M040 erythro and threo-3-Mercapto-2-methylbuan-1-ol 1-Butanol, 3-mercapto-2-methyl; 3-Mercapto-2-methylbutyl alcohol

M041 3-Mercapto-2-methylpentan-1-ol (racemic)

M042 3-Mercapto-2-methylpentanal

M043 3-Mercapto-2-pentanone

1308
Order General Name Synonyms
M044 4-Mercapto-2-pentanone 2-Pentanone, 4-mercapto-4-Mercaptopentan-2-one

M045 1-Mercapto-2-propanone Mercaptoacetone

2-Butanol, 3-mercapto-, (R*-, S*-)-; 2-Hydroxy-3-butanethiol; 3-hydroxy-2-butanethiol; 3-Mercapto-2-butanol;
M046 2-Mercapto-3-butanol 3- Mercaptobutan-2-ol
M047 3-Mercapto-3-methyl-1-butanol 1-Butanol, 3-mercapto-3-methyl-; 3-Methyl-3-mercaptobutyl alcohol; 3-Mercapto-3-methylbutyl alcohol
3-Methyl-3-thiobutyl formate; 1-Butanol, 3-mercapto-3-methyl, formate ester; 3-Methyl-3-mercaptobutyl
M048 3-Mercapto-3-methylbutyl formate formate

M049 (+/-)-4-Mercapto-4-methyl-2-pentanol 2-Pentanol, 4-mercapto-4-methyl-

M050 4-Mercapto-4-methyl-2-pentanone Thiomethyl pentanone-4,4,2; 2-Mercapto-2-methylpentan-4-one

2-Methoxythiophenol; Benzenethiol, o-methoxy-; Methoxybenzenethiol; o-Methoxythiophenol; Thioguaiacol;

M051 2-Mercaptoanisole
2-Methoxybenzenethiol

M052 3-Mercaptohexanol 3-Mercapto-1-hexanol, 3-Thiohexan-1-ol; 3-Thiohexanol; 3-Thiohexanol

M053 3-Mercaptohexyl acetate 3-Thiohexyl acetate; 3-Thiohexyl ethanoate

M054 3-Mercaptohexyl butyrate 3-Thiohexyl butrate; 3-Thiohexyl butanoate

M055 3-Mercaptohexyl hexanoate 3-Mercaptohexyl caproate;3-Thiohexyl caoroate; 3-thio-1-hexyl caproate; 3-Thio-1-hexyl hexanoate

M056 2-(Mercaptomethyl)pyrazine Mercaptomethylpyrazine; Pyrazine methanethiol; Pyrazinyl methylmercaptan

M057 (+/-)-2-Mercaptomethylpentan-1-ol (+/-)-2-Mercapto-2-methylpentan-1-ol

Mixture of 2,6,6 trimethyl-bicyclo[3.1.1]heptane-(2,3 and 10)-thiols; Bicyclo[3.1.1]heptane-2-thiol,

M058 2-, 3- and 10-Mercaptopinane 2,6,6-trimethyl-; pinanethiol; Pinanyl mercaptan

M059 2-Mercaptopropionic acid Thiolactic acid; α-Mercaptopropanoic acid; 2-Thiolpropionic acid

M060 Methionyl butyrate 1-Propanol, 3-(methylthio)-, butyrate; Butyric acid, 3-(methylthio)propyl ester; 3-(Methylthio)propyl butyrate

M061 3-(1-Methoxy)-1,2-propanediol 3-1-Menthoxypropane-1,2-diol; 3-L-Menthoxypropane-1,2-diol; 3-l-(p-Menthane-3- yloxy-1,2-propanediol

1309
Order General Name Synonyms
M062 trans- and cis-1-Methoxy-1-decene (E)- and (Z)-1-Methoxy-1-decene; 1-Decene, 1-methoxy- (E,Z)-; Decanal methyl enol ether

M063 4-Methoxy-2-methyl-2-butanethiol 4-Methoxy-2-methylbutanethiol; 2-Butanethiol, 4-methoxy-2-methyl-

2-Methoxy-3-sec-butylpyrazine; 2-(1-Methylpropyl)-3-methoxypyrazine; 2-Sec- butyl- 3-methoxypyrazine,

M064 2-Methoxy-3-(1-methylpropyl)pyrazine
2-(2-Bytyl)-3-methoxypyrazine; 2-But-2-yl-3-methoxypyrazine; 2-Methoxy-3-(1-methylpropyl)-cyclohexanone

M065 (S1)-Methoxy-3-heptanethiol 3-Heptanethiol, 1-methoxy-, (3S); Aruscol

2-Methoxy-3-methylpyrazine; 2-Methoxy-5-methylpyrazine;2-methoxy-6- methylpyrazine; Mixture of

M066 2,5 or 6-Methoxy-3-methylpyrazine(mixture of isomers) 2-methoxy-3-methylpyrazine; Methylmethoxypyrazine

M067 1-Methoxy-4-(1-propenyl)benzene Anethole; p-Propylanisole; Isoestragole; p-Propylphenyl methylether; Propenylanisole;

N1-(2-Methoxy-4-methylbenzyl)-N2-(2-(pyridin-2-yl)ethy
M068 Ethanediamide, N-[(2-methoxy-4-methylphenyl)methyl]-N-[2-(2-pyridinyl)ethyl]-
l)oxalamide
N1-(2-Methoxy-4-methylbenzyl)-N2-(2-(5-methylpyridin-
M069 2-yl)ethyl)oxalamide Ethanediamide, N-[(2-methoxy-4-methylphenyl)methyl]-N -[2-(5-methyl-2- pyridinyl)ethyl]-

3-Methoxy-4-hydroxytoluene; Homocatechol monoethyl ether; 1-Hydroxy-2-methoxy- 4-methylbenzene;

M070 2-Methoxy-4-methylphenol Valspice; Cresol; 4-Hydroxy-3-methyl-1-methyl benzene; 2-Methoxy- p-cresol; 4-methylguaiacol
Dihydroeugenol;Phenol, 2-methoxy-4-propyl-; 4-Propylguaiacol; 5-propyl-o- hydroxyanisole;
M071 2-Methoxy-4-propylphenol
4-Propyl-o-methoxyphenol; 4-Propyl-ortho-Methoxyphenol; 5-Propyl-ortho-Hydroxyanisole

4-Hydroxy-3-methoxystyrene; p-vinylguaiacol / 4-Hydroxy-3-methoxystyrene; Phenol, 4-ethenyl-2-methoxy-;

M072 2-Methoxy-4-vinylphenol p-Vinylcatechol-o-methyl ether; p-Vinylguaiacol; Vinyl guaiacol; p-Vinylcatechol-Omethyl ether

1-(2-Methoxyphenyl)ethanone; 2-Acetylanisole; 2-Methoxyphenyl methyl ketone; Methyl 2-methoxyphenyl

M073 2-Methoxyacetophenone ketone; Methyl o-methoxyphenyl ketone; o-Acetylanisole; o-Methoxyacetophenone

3-(4-Methoxyphenyl)-2-methylprop-2-enal; 3-(p-Methoxyphenyl)-2-methyl-2-propenal;
M074 p-Methoxy-α-methylcinnamaldehyde 4'-Methoxy-2-methylcinnamaldehyde; α-Methyl-p-methoxycinnamaldehyde;
3-(2-Methoxyphenyl)-2-methyl-2-propenal; α-Methylmethoxycinnamic aldehyde

M075 p-Methoxybenzaldehyde p-Anisaldehyde; Anisic aldehyde; aubepine; 4-Methoxybenzaldehyde; Aubepine; Aubepine liquid

1310
Order General Name Synonyms

M076 2-Methoxybenzoic acid o-Anisic acid; o-Methoxybenzoic acid; Salicylic acid methyl ether

M077 3-Methoxybenzoic acid 3-Anisic acid; m-Anisic acid; m-Methoxybenzoic acid

M078 4-Methoxybenzoic acid 4-Anisic acid; Anisic acid; p-Anisic acid, p-Methoxybenzoic acid; Draconic acid

β-(o-Methoxyphenyl) acrolein; 3-(o-methoxyphenyl)-2-propenal; Methoxycinnamaldehyde;

M079 o-Methoxycinnamaldehyde 3-(4-Methoxyphenyl)-2-propenal; 2-propenal, 3-(4-methoxy0-phenyl)-; 2'-Methoxycinnamaldehyde;
β-o-Methoxyphenyl acrolein; 3-o-Methoxyphenyl-2-propenal; 3-(2-Methoxyphenyl)-2-propenal
3-(4-Methoxyphenyl)-2-propenal; 4-Methoxycinnamaldehyde; p-Cumaric aldehyde methyl ether;
M080 p-Methoxycinnamaldehyde β-(p-Methoxyphenyl)-acrolein; 3-(p-Methoxyphenyl)-propenal; 3-(p-Methoxyphenyl)propen-2-al-1;
3-4-Methoxyphenyl-2-propenal
Ethone; p-Methoxystyryl ethyl ketone; α-Methyl anisylacetone; α-Methylanisylideneacetone;
M081 1-(p-Methoxyphenyl)-1-penten-3-one
1-(4-Methoxyphenyl)-1-penten-3-one; amethylanisylidene acetone; 1-(4- Methoxyphenyl)pent-1-en-3-one

p-Methoxybenzylacetone; Methyl oxanone; Bramble ketone; Frambinonmethylether; Ketanone; Anisyl acetone;

M082 4-(p-Methoxyphenyl)-2-butanone Rambinone methylether; p-Methoxy phenylbutanone; Raspberry ketone methylether;
4-(4-Methoxyphenyl)-2-butanone, Methyloxanone; Raspberry ketone

4-Methoxyphenylacetone; Anisic ketone; anisketone; Anisyl methyl ketone; p-Methoxyphenylacetone;

M083 1-(p-Methoxyphenyl)-2-propanone
1-(4-Methoxyphenyl)-2-propanone; 3-(4-Methoxyphenyl)- propan-2-one; Anisic ketone

Isopropyl 4-methyloxystryl ketone; α,α-Dimethylanisylacetone; p-Methoxystyryl isopropyl ketone; Isopropyl

M084 1-(4-Methoxyphenyl)-4-methyl-1-penten-3-one
p-methoxystyryl ketone; Methoxystyryl isopropyl ketone

M085 Methoxypyrazine 2-Methoxy-1,4-diazine; 2-methoxypyrazine

1311
Order General Name Synonyms

M086 Methyl (E)-2-(Z)-4-decadienoate Methyl deca-2,4-dienoate

M087 Methyl (methylthio) acetate Acetic acid, (methylthio)-, methyl ester; Methyl 2-(methylthio)acetate; (Methylthio)acetic acid methyl ester

M088 Methyl 10-undecenoate 10-Undecenoic acid, methyl ester; Methyl undec-10-enoate; Methyl undecylenate
1-Acetylcyclohexyl acetate; 1-Acetoxy-1-acetylcyclohexane; 1-Acetoxycyclohexyl acetate; ethanone,
M089 Methyl 1-acetoxycyclohexyl ketone
1-[1-(acetyloxy)cyclohexyl]-
Methyl propenyl disulfide; Disulfide, methyl 1-propenyl-; Methyldithio-1-propene; 1-propenyl methyl disulfide;
M090 Methyl 1-propenyl disulfide
1-Propenyl methyl disulphide

M091 Methyl 2-furoate Methyl furoate; Furan-α-carboxylic acid, methyl ester; Methyl-2-furoate; methyl pyromucate; 2-Furoic acid
Methyl 2-hydroxy-4-methylvalerate; Methyl 2-hydroxyisocaproate; Pentanoic acid, 2-hydroxy-4-methyl-, methyl
M092 Methyl 2-hydroxy-4-methylpentanoate ester

M093 Methyl 2-methyl-2-propenoate 2-Propenoic acid, 2-methyl-, methyl ester; Methyl 2-methacrylate, 2-(methoxycarbonyl)-1-propene

M094 Methyl 2-methyl-3-furyl disulfide Furan, 2-methyl-3-(methyldithio)-; 2-Methyl-3-(methyldithio)furan, 2-Methyl-3-furyl methyl disulfide

M095 S-Methyl 2-methylbutanethioate Methyl 2-(methylthio)butyrate; Methylthiol 2-methylbutyrate

M096 Methyl 2-methylbutyrate Butanoic acid, 2-methyl-, methyl ester; Methyl-2-methylbutanoate; Methyl methylethylacetate

M097 Methyl 2-methylpentanoate Methyl 2-methylvalerate; Pentanoic acid, 2-methyl-, methyl ester

M098 Methyl 2-nonenoate

M099 Methyl 2-nonenonate Methyl non-2-enoate; Methyl nonylenate; Methyl nonylenoate

Methyl 2-keto-3-methylvalerate; methyl 3-methyl-2-oxovalerate; Pentanoic acid, 3-methyl-2-oxo-, methyl

M100 Methyl 2-oxo-3-methylpentanoate ester; Methyl 2-oxo-3-methylvalerate; Methyl 2-keto-3-methylpentanoate

1312
Order General Name Synonyms
M101 Methyl 2-pyrrolyl ketone 2-Pyrrolyl methyl ketone; 2-Acetyl pyrrole; 2-Acetopyrrole; Methyl-2-pyrrolyl ketone

M102 Methyl 2-undecynoate Methyl decine carbonate; Methyl decyne carbonate; Methyl undec-2-ynoate; Methyl octyl propiolate

3-(Methylthio)butyric acid methyl ester; Butanoic acid, 3-(methylthio)-, methyl ester; 3-Methylsulfanylbutyric
M103 Methyl 3-(methylthio)butanoate
acid methyl ester

M104 Methyl 3,7-dimethyl-6-octenoate Methyl citronellate ; Methyl-3,7-dimethyl-oct-6-enoate

M105 Methyl 3-hexenoate o-Hexylhexanolide; Methyl hydrosorbate

Hexanoic acid, 3-hydroxy-, methyl ester; Methyl β-hydroxycaproate; Methyl β-hydroxyhexanoate; Methyl
M106 Methyl 3-hydroxyhexanoate 3-hydroxycapropate

M107 Methyl 3-mercaptobutanoate Butanoic acid, 3-mercapto-, methyl ester; 3-Mercaptobutanoic acid methyl ester

M108 S-Methyl 3-methylbutanethioate Methyl thioisovalerate; S-methyl 3-methylbutyrate; Methane thioisopentanoate

Methyl β-methylthiopropionate; Methylmercaptomethylpropionate; Methyl-β- methylmercaptopropionate;

M109 Methyl 3-methylthiopropionate Methyl-β-methylthiopropionate; β-Methylthiopropionic acid, methyl ester ; Methyl β-Methiopropionate

M110 Methyl 3-nonenoate 3-Nonenoic acid, methyl ester; Methyl non-3-enoate

M111 Methyl 3-phenylpropionate Methyl dihydrocinnamate; Methyl hydrocinnamate; Methyl phenyl propionate

Methyl 4-(methylmercapto)butyrate; Mixture of methyl 9,12-octadecadienoate and methyl

M112 Methyl 4-(methylthio)butyrate
9,12,15-octadecatrienoate; Methyl γ-methyl mercapto butyrate; Methyl γ-(methylthio)butyrate

M113 S-Methyl 4-methylpentanethioate

M114 Methyl 4-methylvalerate Methyl isobutyrylacetate; Methyl isocaproate; Methyl-4-methyl pentanoate; Methyl isobutyl acetate

M115 Methyl 4-phenylbutyrate Methyl γ-phenylbutyrate; γ-Phenylbutyric aicd, methyl ester

M116 (+/-)-Methyl 5-acetoxyhexanoate Hexanoic acid, 5-(acetyloxy)-,methyl ester; 5-Acetoxyhexanoic acid methyl ester

M117 Methyl 9-undecenoate methyl undec-9-enoate; Methyl undecylenate; Methyl 9-hendecenoate; Methyl 9- undecylenate

1313
Order General Name Synonyms
M118 Methyl acetate Methyl ethanoate

M119 Methyl anisate Methyl p-anisate; Methyl p-methoxybenzoate; Methyl 4-methoxybenzoate

M120 Methyl anthranilate * o-Amino methyl benzoate; Methyl 2-aminobenzoate; methyl o-aminobenzoate

M121 Methyl benzoate Methyl benzenecarboxylate; Niobe oil

M122 S-Methyl benzothioate Methanethiol, Benzoate; Methylthiyl benzoate; Methane thiobenzoate; S-Methyl thiobenzoate

M123 Methyl benzyl disulfide Benzyldithiomethane; Benzyl methyl disulfide; disulfide, phenylmethyl methyl; Methyl phenylmethyl disulfide
Cetone d; Oranger crystals; β-Acetylnaphthalene; 2'-Acetonaphthone; 2-acetyl- naphthalene; methyl naphthyl
M124 Methyl β-naphthyl ketone*
ketone; β-naphthyl methyl ketone; 1-(2-Naphthyl) ethanone; Methyl 2-naphthyl ketone

M125 4-Methyl biphenyl p-Methyldiphenyl; p-methylphenylbenzene; 4-Methyl-1,1'-biphenyl; Phenyl-p-tolyl; p-Phenyltoluene

M126 Methyl butyrate Methyl butanoate

M127 Methyl caproate Methyl hexanoate; Methyl hexanoate; methyl hexylate

M128 Methyl cinnamate* Methyl-3-phenyl propenoate; Methyl-3-phenyl prop-2-enoate

M129 Methyl cis-3-hexenoate Methyl (Z)-3-hexenoate

M130 Methyl cis-4-octenoate (Z)-methyl cot-4-enoate; Methyl oct-4(cis)-enoate

M131 Methyl cis-5-octenoate 5-Octenoic acid, methyl ester, (5Z)

M132 Methyl cyclohexanecarboxylate Cyclohexanecarboxylic acid, methyl ester

4-Methyl-4-decanolide; 5-Hexyldihydro-5-methyl-2(3H)-furanone; 5-Hexyl-5- methyldihydrofuran-2(3H)-one;
M133 γ-Methyl decalactone Dihydrojasmone lactone; 2(3H)-furanone, 5-hexyldihydro-5-methyl-; 4-Methyldecanolide; lactojasmone; Methyl
γ-decalactone; Dihydrojasmone lactone
hedione; Methyl 3-oxo-2-pentyl-1-cyclopentylacetate; 2-Amylcyclopentanone acetic acid, methyl ester; Methyl
M134 Methyl dihydrojasmonate hydrojasmonate; Methyl-(2-amyl-3-oxocyclopentyl); methyl-2-(-pentyl-3-oxo-1-cyclopentyl)acetate; Methyl

1314
Order General Name Synonyms
epi-dihydrojasmone; Jasmonic acid, (E)-dihydro-, methyl ester
M135 Methyl disulfide dimethyl disulfide

M136 Methyl ethyl sulfide (Methylthio)Ethane; 1-(methylthio)Ethane; 2-Thiabutane; Ethyl methyl sulfide; Ethyl methyl thioether

M137 Methyl ethyl trisulfide Ethyl methyl trisulfide, 2,3,4-Trythiahexane; 2,3,4-Trithiohexane

M138 Methyl furfuryl disulfide Methyl 2-furylmethyl disulfide; Furfuryl methyl disulfide

M139 Methyl heptanoate Methyl heptoate; Methyl heptylate; Methyl oenanthate

Methyl 2-octynoate; Methyl heptine carbonate; Methyl heptyne carbonate; Methyl oct-2-ynoate; Methyl
M140 Methyl heptin cabonate pentylpropiolate
M141 Methyl hex-2-enoate Methyl-α,β-hexanoate; methyl-β-propylacrylate

M142 S-Methyl hexanethioate

M143 Methyl isobutyrate Methyl dimethylacetate; Methyl-2-methylpropanoate

M144 Methyl isopentyl disulfide Disulfi de, isopentyl methyl; Isoamyl methyl disulfi de; Isopentyl methyl disulfi de; Methyl isopentyl disulfi de
Methyl isovalerianate; Methyl isopentanoate; Methyl 3-methylbutyrate; Methyl 3-methylbutanoate; Methyl
M145 Methyl isovalerate ß-methyl butyrate
Methyl 3-oxo-2-pent-2-enyl-1-cyclopentylacetate; 2-Pentenyl cyclopentanone-3- acetic acid, methyl ester;
M146 Methyl jasmonate 2-(cis-Penten-2'-yl)-3-oxo-cyclopentane acetic acid, methyl ester; methyl (2-pent-2-enyl-3-oxo-1-cyclopentyl)
acetate; Methyl epi-jasmonate

M147 Methyl laurate Methyl dodecanoate; Methyl dodecylate; Methyl laurate

Methyl linoleate; Methyl linolenate, methyl linoleate mixture; methyl 9,12- octadecadienoate; methyl
M148 Methyl linoleate and methyl linolenate (mixture) 9,12,15-octadecatrienoate mixture; 9,12,15-Octadecatrienoic acid, methyl ester, (Z,Z,Z,)-; Linoleic and linolenic
methyl acids; Methyl octadeca-9(cis),12(cis)-dienoate

1315
Order General Name Synonyms

M149 Methyl mercaptan Thiomethyl alcohol; methyl sulfhydrate; Mercaptomethane; Methanethiol; Methylmercaptan

M150 Methyl myristate Methyl tetradecanoate; Methyl n-tetradecanoate; Methyl myristate

Benzoic acid, 2-(dimethylamino)-, methyl ester; Anthranilic acid, N,N-dimethyl-, methyl ester; Methyl
M151 Methyl N,N-dimethylanthranilate 2-(dimethylamino)benzoate; Methyl o-(dimethylamino)benzoate

Benzoic acid, 2-(acetylamino)-, methyl ester; Anthranilic acid, N-acetyl-, methyl ester; Methyl
M152 Methyl N-acetylanthranilate 2-(acetylamino)benzoate; Methyl 2-acetamidobenzoate; Methyl N- acetoanthranilate;
o-(Methoxycarbonyl)acetanilide; o-Acetamidobenzoic acid methyl ester
Benzoic acid, 2-(formylamino)-, methyl ester; Methyl o-formamidobenzoate; N-Formylanthranilic acid, methyl
M153 Methyl N-formylanthranilate ester

M154 Methyl nicotinate 3-Carbomethoxypyridine; Methyl 3-pyridinecarboxylate; 3-Pyridinecarboxylic acid, methyl ester

M155 Methyl N-methylanthranilate* Dimethyl anthranilate

M156 Methyl nonanoate Methyl nonylate; Methyl pelargonate; Methyl nonylate

M157 Methyl octanoate Methyl caprylate; Methyl octoate; Methyl octylate

M158 Methyl octyne carbonate Methyl 2-nonynoate; Methyl octine carbonate; Methyl octyne carbonate
o-Methoxy methyl benzoate; Methyl salicylate o-methyl ether; Dimethyl salicylate; Methyl o-anisate; Methyl
M159 Methyl o-methoxybenzoate 2-methoxybenzoate; Methyl salicylate methyl ether; o-Methoxybenzoic acid methyl ester
M160 Methyl phenethyl ether Pandanol; 2-Methoxyethyl benzene; Phenylethyl methyl ether; Phenylethylmethylether

M161 Methyl phenyl disulfide Phenyl methyl disulfide

1316
Order General Name Synonyms

(methylthio)Benzene; 1-phenyl-1-thioethane; Methyl phenyl thioether; Phenyl methyl sulfide;

M162 Methyl phenyl sulfide
Phenylthiomethane; Thioanisol; Thioanisol; Thioanisole; Benzene, (methylthio)-; Sulfide, methyl phenyl-

M163 Methyl phenylacetate Phenylacetic acid methyl ester; Methyl α-toluate

M164 Methyl p-hydroxybenzoate Methylparaben

M165 S-Methyl propanethioate Propanethioic acid, S-methyl ester; S-Methyl thiopropionate

M166 Methyl propionate Methyl propanoate

M167 Methyl propyl disulfide Methyldithiopropane; Methyl n-propyl disulfide; Propyl methyl disulfide
M168 Methyl propyl trisulfide Propyl methyl trisulfide; Methyl trithio propane; Propyl methyl trisulphide
M169 3-(2-Methyl propyl) pyridine 3-Butyl iso pyridine; 3-Isobutyl pyridine; 3-ButylPyridine
M170 2-(2-Methyl propyl)pyridine 2-Butyl iso pyridine; 2-Isobutyl pyridine; 2-ButylPyridine
M171 Methyl p-tert-butylphenylacetate p-tert-Butylphenylacetic acid, methyl ester; Methyl (4-(1,1-dimethylethyl)phenyl)- acetate
Methyl 2-hydroxybenzoate; synthetic wintergreen oil; synthetic sweet birch oil; synthetic teaberry oil; Methyl
M172 Methyl salicylate* o-hydroxybenzoate
2,4-Hexadienoic acid, methyl ester; methyl 2,4-hexadienoate; methyl (E,E)-2,4- hexadienoate; Methyl
M173 Methyl sorbate hexa-2,4-dienoate

M174 Methyl sulfide 2-Thiapropane; Thiobismethane; Dimethyl sulfide

M175 S-Methyl thioacetate S-methyl acetothioate; Methanethiol acetate; S-methyl ethanethioate

M176 Methyl thiobutyrate S-methyl butanethioate; Methylthiol n-butyrate; Thiobutyric acid, methyl ester; Mathanethiol n-butyrate

Methyl 2-thiofuroate; Methanethiol furoate; Methyl thiofuroate; Thiofuroic acid, methylester; S-methyl
M177 S-Methyl thiofuroate 2-furanthiocarboxylate; Furoylthiomethane; Methyl thio-2-furoate
M178 Methyl trans-2-octenoate Methyl (E)-2-octenoate; 2-Octenoic acid, methyl ester, (E)-; Methyl-2-octenoate; Methyl oct-2(trans)-enoate

M179 Methyl valerate Methyl pentanoate; Methyl-n-valerate; methyl valerianate

1317
Order General Name Synonyms

M180 3-Methyl-1,2,4-trithiane 1,2,4-Trithiane, 3-methyl, 3-Methyl-1,2,4-trithiacyclohexane

M181 2-Methyl-1,3-cyclohexadiene Dihydrotoluene(1,3); dihydrotoluene(delta1,3)

M182 2-Methyl-1,3-dithiolane

M183 2-Methyl-1-butanethiol Amyl mercaptan; 2-Methylbutyl mercaptan; Thioamyl alcohol

(+/-)2-Methyl-1-butanol; 2-Methyl-n-butanol; 2-Methylbutyl alcohol; Active amyl alcohol; Active primary amyl
M184 (+/-)-2-Methyl-1-butanol alcohol; Primary active amyl alcohol; sec-Butylcarbinol
M185 3-Methyl-1-cyclopentadecanone d,l-Muscone; methyloxaltone; 3-emthylcyclopentadecanone; 3- Methylcyclopentadecan-1-one; Muscone
M186 1-Methyl-1-cyclopenten-3-one 3-Methyl-2-cyclopenten-1-one; 1-Methyl-1-cyclopenten-3-one

M187 2-Methyl-1-methylthio-2-butene 2-Methyl-1-methylsulfanyl-but-2-ene; Methyl 2-methyl-2-butenyl sulfi de

M188 3-Methyl-1-pentanol 3-methylpentan-1-ol; 2-ethyl-4-butanol; 1-pentanol, 3-methyl-

2-phenylpropan-2-yl isobutyrate; α,α-dimethylbenzyl 2-methylpropanoate; Phenyl dimethyl carbinyl

M189 1-Methyl-1-phenethyl isobutyrate isobutyrate; Dimethyl phenyl carbinyl isobutyrate; Phenylpropan-2-yl 2-methylpropionate; α,α-Dimethylbenzyl
isobutyrate; 2-Phenylpropan-2-yl 2-methylpropanoate
M190 4-Methyl-1-phenyl-2-pentanone Benzyl isobutyl ketone; Isobutyl benzyl ketone; Benzyl 2-methylpropyl ketone

M191 2-Methyl-1-propanethiol Isobutyl nercaptan

M192 (2S-trans)-5 Methyl-2-(1-methylethyl)cyclohexanone l-Menthone

cis Jasmone; Jasmone; 3-Methyl-2-pent-2-enylcyclopent-2-en-1-one; 3- Methyl-2-

M193 3-Methyl-2-(2-pentenyl)-2-cyclopenten-1-one (pent-2(cis)-enyl)cyclopent-2-en-1-one
γ-Clausenane; Rosefuran; 2-(3-Methyl-2-butenyl)-3-methylfuran; Furan, 3-methyl- 2-(3-methyl-2-butenyl)-;
M194 3-Methyl-2(3-methylbut-2-enyl)furan
3-Methyl-2(3-methylbut-2-en-1-yl)furan

M195 2-Methyl-2-(methyldithio)propanal 2-Methyl-2-(methyldithio)propionaldehyde; 2-(Methyldithio)isobutyraldehyde

1318
Order General Name Synonyms

M196 1-Methyl-2,3-cyclohexadione 3-Methyl-1,2-cyclohexanedione; 2-methyl-3,4-cyclohexanedione; 3- Methylcyclohexan-1,2-dione

2-Methyl-4,5-hexanedione; acetyl isovaleryl; Isobutyl methyl diketone; Isobutyl methyl glyoxal; Acetyl
M197 5-Methyl-2,3-hexanedione isopentanoyl

M198 3-Methyl-2,4-nonanedione 3-Methylnonane-2,4-dione

M199 4-Methyl-2,6-dimethoxyphenol 2,6-Dimethoxy-p-cresol; 4-Methylsyringol; Phenol, 2,6-dimethoxy-4-methyl-

Isopentyl mercaptan; isoamyl mercaptan; Isopentanethiol; Isoamyl thioalcohol; Isoamyl sulfhydrate;

M200 3-Methyl-2-butanethiol sec-Isoamylmercaptan

M201 3-Methyl-2-butanol Isopropyl methyl carbinol; 2-Butanol, 3-methyl; Methyl isopropyl carbinol

M202 3-Methyl-2-buten-1-ol Prenol

M203 2-Methyl-2-butenal 2-Methylcrotonaldehyde; 2-Methyl crotonaldehyde; tiglic aldehyde; 2,3-Dimethyl- acrolein; Tiglaldehyde

3-Methylcrotonaldehyde; 2-Butenal, 3-methyl-; 3-Methylcrotonaldehyde; Prenal; senecialdehyde; 3-Methyl

M204 3-Methyl-2-butenal but-2-enal
2-Methyl-2-butenoic acid; 2-Butenoic acid, 2-methyl-, (E); trans-2-Methyl-crotonic acid; tiglic acid;
M205 trans-2-Methyl-2-butenoic acid trans-2-methylcrotonic acid

M206 3-Methyl-2-cyclohexen-1-one 3-Methyl-Δ2-cyclohexenone; 3-Methyl-d-2-cyclohexenone; 1- Methyl-1- cyclohexenone-3

M207 3-(5-Methyl-2-furyl) butanal 3-(5-Methyl-2-furyl) butyraldehyde; 2 Furanpropanal, β,5-dimethyl-

3-(5-Methylfuryl)acrolein; 1-(5-Methyl-2-furanyl)-1-propen-3-al; 3-(5-Methyl-2- furanyl)-2-propenal;

M208 3-(5-Methyl-2-furyl)prop-2-enal
5-Methyl-2-furanacrolein; 2-Propenal, 3-(5-methyl-2-furanyl)-

M209 5-Methyl-2-hept-4-one Fibertone; hazeltone; 2-hepten-4-one, 5-methyl

M210 2-(4-Methyl-2-hydroxyphenyl)propionic acid γ-lactone dimethyl-3,6-benzo-2(3H)-furanone; furaminton

1319
Order General Name Synonyms

M211 2-Methyl-2-octenal

M212 3-Methyl-2-oxobutanoic acid 3-Methyl-2-oxobutyric acid; 2-Oxoisovaleric acid; Dimethylpyruvic acid

M213 3-Methyl-2-oxobutanoic acid, sodium salt Soudim 3-methyl-2-oxobutyrate,Sodium, α-ketoisovalerate; Sodium 3-methyl-2- oxobutanoate

M214 3-Methyl-2-oxopentanoic acid 3-Methyl-2-oxovaleric acid, Methyl ethyl pyruvic acid; Sodium 3-methyl-2- oxopentanoic acid
4-Methyl-2-oxovaleric acid, Isopropyl pyruvic acid; 2-Keto-4-methyl-pentanoic acid; 4-Methyl-2-oxopentanoic
M215 4-Methyl-2-oxopentanoic acid
acid; α-Ketoisocaproic acid

M216 3-Methyl-2-oxopentanoic acid, sodium salt Soudim 3-methyl-2-oxobutyrate

Sodium 4-methyl-2-oxovalerate, 4-Methyl-2-oxovaleric acid, Sodium salt; Sodium 4-methyl-2-ketopentanoate;

M217 4-Methyl-2-oxopentanoic acid, sodium salt
Sodium 4-methyl-2-oxopentanoate

Isobutyl methyl ketone; Isopropylacetone; Isohexanone; Butyl iso methyl ketone; hexone; Methyl isobutyl
M218 4-Methyl-2-pentanone ketone; isohexanone-2

α-Methyl-β-ethylacrolein; 3-Ethyl-2-methylacraldehyde 2-propylidene propionaldehyde; Methyl ethyl acrolein;

M219 2-Methyl-2-pentenal 2,4-Dimethyl crotonaldehyde; Homotiglic aldehyde; Isohexenal

M220 4-Methyl-2-pentenal

Strawberriff; 3-Ethyl-2-methylacrylic acid; β-Amylene-β-carboxylic acid; 2-Pentene-2-carboxylic acid;

M221 2-Methyl-2-pentenoic acid 2-Propylidenepropionic acid; 2-Pentene-2-carboxylic acid

2-Amyl-4-methyl-1,3-dioxolane; 1,3-Dioxolane, 4-methyl-2-pentyl-, cis 4-Methyl-2-pentyl-1,3-dioxolane;

M222 4-Methyl-2-pentyl-1,3-dioxolane Hexanal propylene glycol acetal

M223 5-Methyl-2-phenyl-2-hexenal 2-Phenyl-5-methyl-2-hexenal

M224 4-Methyl-2-phenyl-2-pentenal Eglantal

α-iso-Propyl phenylacetaldehyde; α-Phenylisopentanal; α-Isopropyl phenylacetaldehyde; α-phenyl

M225 3-Methyl-2-phenylbutyraldehyde
isovaleraldehyde; 3-Methyl-2-phenylbutanal; α-iso-propyl phenylacetaldehyde

1320
Order General Name Synonyms
5-Methyl-2-thiophenecarbaldehyde; 5-Methyl-2-thenaldehyde; 5-Methyl-2- thiophenecarbaldehyde;
M226 5-Methyl-2-thiophenecarboxyaldehyde 2-Formyl-5-methylthiophen; 2-Thiophene carboxaldehyde, 5-methyl; 2-Thiophenecarbaldehyde,5-methyl-
Furfurylidene-2-propanal; α-Methyl-β-furylacrolein; 2-Methyl-3-(2-furyl)propenal; 2-methyl-3-furylacrolein;
M227 2-Methyl-3-(2-furyl)acrolein α-Methylfurylacrolein; 2-propenal, 3-(2-furanyl)-2-methyl-; 3-(2- Furyl)-2-methylprop-2-enal;
2-Furfurylidenepropionaldehyde; α-Methyl-β- furylacrolein

M228 5-Methyl-3(2H)-furanone 3(2H)-Furanone, 5-methyl-

M229 2-Methyl-3-(methylthio)furan Dimethylthiofuran; 2-Methyl-3-thiomethylfuran

Satinaldehyde; 2-Methyl-3-(p-tolyl)propionaldehyde; 2-Methyl-3-(4- methylphenyl)- propanal;

M230 2-Methyl-3-(p-methylphenyl)propanal
2-Methyl-3-tolylpropionaldehyde

1. 2-Furfurylthio-3-methylpyrazine; 2. 2-furfurylthio-5-methylpyrazine; 3. 2-furfurylthio-6-methylpyrazine;

M231 2-Methyl-3,5 and 6-(furfurylthio)pyrazine 2-Furfuryl thio-(3,5 or 6)-methylpyrazine; Methyl(furfurylthio)pyrazine (mixture of isomers)
2-Methyl-3-ethoxypyrazine and 2-methyl-5-ethoxypyrazine and 2-methyl-6- ethoxypyrazine, 2-ethoxy-3 or 5
M232 2-Methyl-3,5 or 6-ethoxypyrazine
or 6-methylpyrazine

M233 6-Methyl-3,5-heptadien-2-one 2-Methyl-hepta-2,4-dien-6-one; methyl heptadienone; 1-Acetyl-4-methyl-1,3- pentadiene

M234 2-Methyl-3-buten-2-ol

M235 2-Methyl-3-furanthiol 2-Methyl-3-furylmercaptan

M236 2-Methyl-3-furfurylthiopyrazine

M237 bis(2-Methyl-3-furyl) disulfide 3,3'-Dithio-bis-(2-methylfuran); 3,3'-Dithio-2,2'-dimethyldifuran; 2-Methyl-3-furyl disulfide

1321
Order General Name Synonyms
3.3'-Tetrathio-bis(2-methylfuran); Bis(2-methyl-3-furyl) tetrasulfide; 2-Methyl-3-furyl tetrasulfide;
M238 bis(2-Methyl-3-furyl) tetrasulfide 2-Methyl-3-furyl tetrasulphide
2-Butanone, 3-[(2-methyl-3-furanyl)thio]-; 3-[(2-Methyl-3-furyl)sulfanyl]-2-butanone;
M239 (+/-)-3-[(2-Methyl-3-furyl)thio]-2-butanone 3-[(2-Methyl-3-furanyl)sulfanyl]-2-butanone

M240 3-[(2-Methyl-3-furyl)thio]-4-heptanone 1,3-Diethylacetonyl 2-methyl-3-furyl sulfide; 4-heptanone, 3-[(2-methyl-3- furanyl)]thiol-

M241 4-[(2-Methyl-3-furyl)thio]-5-nonanone 1,3-Dipropylacetonyl 2-methyl-3-furyl sulfide; 5-nonanone, 4-((2-methyl-3-furyl)thio)-

M242 (E)-6-Methyl-3-hepten-2-one trans-6-Methylhept-3-en-2-one; 3-Hepten-2-one, 6-methyl-

M243 5-Methyl-3-hexen-2-one Isobutylidene acetone; 5- Methylhex-3-en-2-one

M244 Methyl-3-methyl-1-butenyl disulphide

M245 1-Methyl-3-methyoxy-4-isopropylbenzene 1-Isopropyl-2-methoxy-4-methylbenzene; 3-Methyl-p-cymene; Thymol methylether; 3-Methoxy-para-Cymene

M246 (E)-7-Methyl-3-octen-2-one trans-7-Methyl-3-octen-2-one; 7- Methyl-3-octenone-2

M247 4-Methyl-3-penten-2-one Isopropylidene acetone; Methyl isobutenyl ketone; Mesityl oxide

M248 2-Methyl-3-pentenoic acid 3-Pentenoic acid, 2-methyl-

M249 2-Methyl-3-tetrahydrofuranthiol bis-(2-methyl-3-tetrahydrofuran)disulfide; 2- Methyltetrahydrofuran-3-thiol

4,5-Dihydro-2-methyl-3-thioacetoxyfuran; 4,5-Dihydro-2-methyl-3-furanthiol acetate; ethanethioic acid,
M250 2-Methyl-3-thioacetoxy-4,5-dihydrofuran S-(4,5-dihydro-2-methyl-3-furanyl)ester; 2-Methyl-4,5- dihydro-3-furanthiol acetate;
S-(4,5-dihydro-2-methyl)-3-furyl thioacetate
M251 2-Methyl-3-tolylpropionaldehyde (mixed o,m,p-) 2-Methyl-3-tolyl propanal

M252 7-Methyl-4,4a,5,6-tetrahydro-2(3H)-naphthalenone 2(3H)-Naphthalenone, 4,4a,5,6-tetrahydro-7-methyl-

M253 2-Methyl-4-pentenoic acid 2-methylpent-4-enoate; 4-Pentenoic acid, 2-methyl-

1322
Order General Name Synonyms
Butanol, 2-methyl-4-phenyl-; Dimethylphenylethyl carbinol; Dimethyl phenylethyl carbinol;
M254 2-Methyl-4-phenyl-2-butanol 1,1-dimethyl-3-phenyl-1-propanol; α,α-Dimethyl-γ phenylpropyl alcohol; Phenyl ethyl dimethyl carbinol;
Phenylethyl dimethyl carbinol
M255 2-Methyl-4-phenyl-2-butyl acetate Dimethylphenylethyl carbinyl acetate

M256 2-Methyl-4-phenyl-2-butyl isobutyrate Dimethylphenyl ethylcarbinyl isobutyrate

3-Benzylidene-2-butanone; 1-Methyl-1-benzylideneacetone; α-methyl-α- benzalacetone; Benzylidene methyl

M257 3-Methyl-4-phenyl-3-buten-2-one
ethyl ketone; 3-Benzylidene-butane-2-one; Benzylidene methyl acetone; Benzylidene methyl acetone

M258 2-Methyl-4-phenylbutyraldehyde 2-Methyl-4-phenylbutanal; Butanol, 2-

M259 2-Methyl-4-propyl-1,3-oxathiane 1,3-Oxathiane, 2-methyl-4-propyl-; Oxane

M260 2-Methyl-5-(methylthio)furan 2-Methyl-5-thiomethylfuran; Methyl 5-methyl-2-furyl sulfide; (5- Methylfuryl-2)- thiomethane

M261 Methyl-5-hepten-2-ol

M262 6-Methyl-5-hepten-2-one 2-Methyl heptenone; 2-Methyl-2-hepten-6-one; methyl hexenyl ketone; Methyl heptenone

M263 6-Methyl-5-hepten-2-yl acetate 5-Hepten-2-ol, 6-methyl-, acetate; (+/-)-Sulcatol acetate

Methallyl acetone; 4-Acetyl-2-methyl-1-butene; Isobutylidene acetone; 2-Methylallylacetone;

M264 5-Methyl-5-hexen-2-one 2-Methyl-1-hexen-5-one; 2-Methyl-allylacetone

M265 2-Methyl-5-isopropylpyrazine 5-Isopropyl-2-methylpyrazine; 2-Isopropyl-5-methylpyrazine; 5-Methyl-5-isopropyl- 1,4-diazine

M266 2-Methyl-5-methoxythiazole 5-Methoxy-2-methylthiazole

M267 3-Methyl-5-propyl-2-cyclohexen-1-one Celery ketone; 3-Methyl-5-propyl-2-cyclohexenone; 1-Methyl-5-n-propyl-1- cyclohexen-3-one

4-Methyl-5-(β-hydroxyethyl)-thiazole; 5-Hydroxyethyl-4-methylthiazole; 5-(2-hydroxyethyl-4-methylthiazole;

M268 4-Methyl-5-thiazole ethanol 2-(4-Methylthiazol-5-yl)ethanol; sulfurol; 4-methyl-5-thiazolylethanol; 5-β-Hydroxyethyl-4-methylthiazole;
4-Methyl-5-thiazole ethanol; 5-Thiazole ethanol, 4-methyl-
4-Methyl-5-(2-acetoxyethyl)-thiazole; Sulfuryl acetate; 4-Methyl-5-thiazolylethanol acetate;
M269 4-Methyl-5-thiazoleethanol acetate 4-Methyl-5-thiazolylethyl acetate; 4-Methyl-5-thiazoleethanol acetate; 5-Thiazoleethanol, 4-methyl-, acetate

1323
Order General Name Synonyms
(+/-)-2-(5-Methyl-5-vinyltetrahydrofuran-2-yl)propionald
M270 ehyde 2-Furanacetaldehyde, 5-ethenyltetrahydro-α,5-dimethyl-, (+/-); Lilac aldehyde, (+/-)

M271 4-Methyl-5-vinylthiazole Thiazole, 4-methyl-5-vinyl

5h-5-Methyl-6,7-dihydrocyclopenta(b) pyrazine; 6,7-Dihydro-5-methyl-5h- cyclopentapyrazine; Maple lactone

M272 5-Methyl-6,7-dihydro-5H-cyclopentapyrazine pyrazine

p-Tolyl methyl ketone; 1-Acetyl-4-methylbenzene; p-Acetotoluene; p-methylacetophenone; 1-Methyl-4-acetyl

M273 p-Methyl acetophenone* benzene; Methyl p-toly ketone; 1-(4-Methylphenyl)ethane; p-Acetyl toluene
2-Methylallyl butanoate; Isopropenyl carbinyl-n-butyrate; Methanllyl butyrate; β-methylallyl-n-butyrate;
M274 2-Methylallyl butyrate 2-Methyl-2-propen-1-yl butyrate

Iraldein; α-Cetone; α-Cyclocitrylidene butanone; α-Cyclocitrylidene methyl ethyl ketone; α-n-methylionone;

M275 Methyl-α-ionone Raldeine; 5-(2,6,6-Trimethyl-2-cyclohexen-1-yl)-4- penten-3-one

1-Methoxy-2-methylbenzene; o-Cresyl methyl ether; 2-Methoxy toluene; o-methoxy toluene; Methyl o-toly
M276 o-Methylanisole ether

4-Methoxytoluene; o-Methyl-p-cresol; 1-Methoxy-4-methylbenzene; p-Cresyl methyl ether; p-Methoxy toluene;

M277 p-Methylanisole Methyl p-cresol; Methyl p-toly ether; Methyl ptolyl ether

sec-Phenylethyl acetate; α-Phenylethyl acetate; Styrollylacetat; 1-Phenethyl acetate; Gardenol; Methyl

M278 α-Methylbenzyl acetate phenylcarbinyl acetate; Styrallyl acetate; Styrolene acetate; 1-Phenylethyl acetate, Phenyl methyl carbinyl
acetate; Styrallyl acetate

2-Methylbenzyl acetate; Tolyl acetate; Mixture of o-methylbenzyl acetate and m-methylbenzyl acetate and
M279 Methylbenzyl acetate (mixed o,m,p) p-methylbenzyl acetate, Acetoxymethyl-toluene(o,m,p); Tolubenzyl acetate(o,m,p); Tolyl carbinyl acetate(o,m,p);
Tolyl acetate
1-Phenylethan-1-ol; 1-phenyl-1-hydroxyethane; Methylphenylcarbinol; 1-Phenylethanol; α-Phenylethyl alcohol;
M280 α-Methylbenzyl alcohol Phenyl methyl carinol; Styralyl alcohol; Styroly alcohol; Styrallyl alcohol

M281 α-Methylbenzyl butyrate 1-Phenyl-1-ethyl butanoate; 1-Phenethyl butyrate; Methyl phenylcarbinyl-n-butyrate; styralyl butyrate;

1324
Order General Name Synonyms

1-Phenylethyl butyrate; Methyl phenyl carbinyl butyrate; α-Phenylethyl butyrate

α-Methylbenzyl methanoate; 1-Phenyl-1-ethyl formate; 1-Phenyl-1-ethyl methanoate; 1-Phenethyl formate;

M282 α-Methylbenzyl formate
Methyl phenylcarbinyl formate; Styralyl formate; 1-Phenylethyl formate; α-Methylbenzyl formate

1-Phenyl-1-ethy isobutyrate; α-Methylbenzyl 2-methylpropanoate; 1-Phenyl-1-ethyl 2-methylpropanoate;

1-Phenethyl isobutyrate; Methyl phenylcarbinyl isobutyrate; styralyl isobutyrate; 1-Phenylethyl
M283 α-Methylbenzyl isobutyrate 2-methylpropanoate, 1-Phenyldthyl isobutyrate; α-phenethyl-2-methylpropanoate; α-Methylbenzyl isobutyrate;
Methyl phenyl carbinyl butyrate

1-Phenyl-1-ethyl propionate; 1-Phenethyl propionate; Methyl phenylcarbinyl propionate; styrallyl propionate;

M284 α-Methylbenzyl propionate 1-Phenylethyl propionate; α-Phenylethyl propionate

β-Iraldeine; β-Cetone; β-Cyclocitrylidene butanone; β-n-Methylionone; Raldeine;

M285 Methyl-β- ionone
5-(2,6,6-trimethyl-1-cyclohexen-1-yl)-4-penten-3-one; ß-Methylionone

α-Methyl-β-hydroxypropyl
M286 α-methyl-β-mercaptopropyl sulfide 2-Butanol, 3-[2-mercapto-1-methylpropyl)thio]-; 3-((2-Mercapto-1-methylpropyl)thio)- 2-butanol

M287 2-Methylbut-2-en-1-ol

M288 3-Methylbutanethiol Isoamyl mercaptan; 3-Methy-1-butanethiol, Isoamyl mercaptan; 3- Methylbutane-1- thiol

M289 2-Methylbutyl 2-methylbutyrate 2-Methylbutyl 2-methylbutanoate; α,β-Methylbutyl-dl-2-methyl butanoate

Methylbutyl 2-isovalerate; 2-Methylbutyl isopentanoate; d-sec-Butylcarbinyl isopentanoate; 2-Methylbutyl

M290 2-Methylbutyl 3-methylbutanoate
isovalerate; 2-Methylbutyl isovalerianate

M291 2-Methylbutyl acetate 2- Methylbutyl acetate

1325
Order General Name Synonyms
Butylamine, 2-methyl-; (+/-)-2-Methylbutylamine; β-Methylbutylamine; 1-Amino-2- methylbutane;
M292 2-Methylbutylamine 2-Ethylpropylamine; 2-Methyl-1-butanamine; 2-Methyl-1-butylamine; 2-Methylbutanamine; 2-Methylbutylamine;
dl-2-Methylbutylamine

M293 2-Methylbutyraldehyde 2-methylbutanal; 2-Methylbutanal-1; α-Methyl butyraldehyde; methyl ethyl acetaldehyde

Amyl iso aldehyde; Valeric iso aldehyde; Valeraldehyde(iso); Butanal, 3-methyl-; Isoamyl aldehyde;
M294 3-Methylbutyraldehyde Isopentaldehyde, isovaleraldehyde; isovaleral; Isovaleric aldehyde; 3-Methylbutanal

Butane-2-carboxylic acid; 2-Methylbutanoic acid; α-Methyl butyric acid; Methylethyl acetic acid; Optically
M295 2-Methylbutyric acid active isovaleric acid

α-Methylcinnamal; α-methyl cinnamic aldehyde; 2-methyl-3-phenyl-2-propenal; 3-Phenyl-2-methyl acrolein;

M296 α-Methylcinnamaldehyde Methyl,α-cinnamaldehyde; 2- Methylcinnamaldehyde

M297 p-Methylcinnamaldehyde 3-p-Tolylpropenal; 3-(p-Methylphenyl)-propenal; 3-(4-methylphenyl)-2-propenal

6-Methyl-2h-1-benzopyran-2-one; 6-Methyl-cis-o-coumarinic lactone; 5-Methyl-2- hydroxyphenylpropenoic acid

M298 6-Methylcoumarin lactone; Cocodescol; 6-Methylbenzopyrone; Pralina; Toncair; Toncarine; Tonkarin

M299 3-Methylcrotonic acid Senecioic acid; 3,3-Dimethylacrylic acid; β,β-Dimethylacrylic acid; 3-Methyl-but- 2-enoic acid

M300 2-Methylcrotonic acid Tiglic acid; 2-Methyl crotonic acid; 2-Methyl-2-butenoic acid; trans-2,3-Dimethyl- acrylic acid

M301 2-Methylcyclohexanone Methyl anone

M302 3-Methylcyclohexanone Tetrahydro-m-cresol

M303 4-Methylcyclohexanone

M304 Methylcyclopentenolone 3-Methyl-2-cyclopenten-2-ol-1-one; maple lactone; Cyclotene; 2-Hydroxy-3- methyl-2-cyclopenten-1-one;

1326
Order General Name Synonyms
Kentonarome; 3-methylcyclopentan-1,2-dione; Methylcyclopentenolone; 3-Methylcyclepentane-1,2-dione;
Corylone
4-(2,6,6-Trimethyl-3-cyclohexen-1-yl)-3-methyl-3-buten-2-one; β-Iso methylionone; deta-methylionone;
M305 Methyl-delta-ionone Isomethyl-β-ione; 5-(2,6,6-Trimethyl-3-cyclohexen-1-yl)- 4- penten-3-one
M306 (R)-5-(1-Methylethyl)-2-methyl-1,3-cyclohexadiene

M307 (+/-)-1-2-Methylfuran Ethanol, 1-ethoxy-, acectate; 1-Ethoxy-1-ethanol acetate; 1-Ethoxyethyl acetate

M308 2-Methylfuran α-Methylfuran; Silvan; Sylvan; Furan, 2-methyl-

M309 5-Methylfurfural 5-Methyl-2-furaldehyde; α-Methylfurfural

M310 (+/-)3-Methyl-γ-decalactone 2(3H)-Furanone; 5-hexyldihydro-4-methyl-(9CI), 5-Hexylihydro-4-methylfuran- 2(3H)-one

M311 2-Methylheptan-3-one Butyl isopropyl ketone; 3-Heptanone; 2-Methylbutyl isopropyl ketone

M312 2-Methylheptanoic acid Hexane-2-carboxylic acid; Isocaprylic acid; Isooctanoic acid; Methylamylacetic acid; 2-Methyloenanthic acid

2-Methylcaproic acid; 2-Butylpropionic acid; Butyl methylacetic acid; Hexane-2-carboxylic acid;

M313 2-Methylhexanoic acid 2-Butylpropanoic acid

M314 5-Methylhexanoic acid Hexanoic acid, 5-methyl-; Isoheptanoic acid; Isovenanthic acid; Isoenanthic acid; Isoamyl acetic acid

dl-(3-Amino-3-carboxypropyl)dimethyl sulfonium chloride; dl-Methylmethionine sulfonium chloride;

M315 S- Methylmethioninesulphonium chloride S-Methylmethioninesulphonium chloride; Vitamin U; DL-(3-Amino-3-carboxypropyl)dimethylsulphonium chloride

M316 1-Methylnaphthalene α-Methylnaphthalene

M317 4-Methylnonanoic acid Isodecanoic acid; 4-Methylpelargonic acid; Nonanoic acid, 4-methyl-

M318 2-Methyloctanal Methyl hexyl acetaldehyde

1327
Order General Name Synonyms
M319 4-Methyloctanoic acid Isononanoic acid; Octanoic acid, 4-methyl-

M320 4-Methylpent-2-enoic acid 4-Methyl-2-pentenoic acid; 4-methylpent-2-en-1-oic acid

Methyl isopropyl diketone; Methyl propyl iso diketone; Propyl iso methyl diketone; Acetyl isobutyryl;
M321 4-Methylpentan-2,3-dione 4-Methyl-2,3-pentanedione
M322 Methylpentanal 2-Methylpentanal; 2-Methyl valeraldehyde

M323 3-Methylpentanoic acid 2-Methylbutane-1-carboxylic acid; sec-Butylacetic acid; β-Methylvaleric acid; 3-Methylvaleric acid
Isocaproic acid; Isohexanoic acid; 3-Methylbutane-1-carboxylic acid; 4-Methylvaeric acid; pentanoic acid,
M324 4-Methylpentanoic acid 4-methyl-
1-Phenyl-2-propyl butyrate; 3-(p-Methylphenyl)-propenal; 1-Methyl-2-phenylethyl butyrate; Methyl benzyl
M325 α-Methylphenethyl butyrate
carbinyl butyrate
2-Pipecoline; (+/-)-α-Pipecoline; (+/-)-2-Methylpiperidine; α-Methylpiperidine; α-Pipecoline;
M326 2-Methylpiperidine
DL-2-Methylpiperidine

M327 2-Methylpropyl 3-methylbutyrate Isobutyl isovalerate; 2-Methylpropyl 3-methylbutanoate; Isobutyl isovalerate

M328 2-(1-Methylpropyl)thiazole 2-sec-Butyl thiazole; 2-But-2-ylthiazole; Thiazole, 2-sec-butyl-

M329 2-Methylpyrazine 2-Methyl-1,4-diazine; methylpyrazine

M330 6-Methylquinoline p-Methylquinoline; p-toluquinoline; Cincholeidine; Lepidine; Quinoline, 4-methyl-; Quinoline, 6-methyl

M331 5-Methylquinoxaline 5-Methyl-1,4-benzodiazine; Menoxaline

M332 Methylsulfinylmethane Methyl sulfoxide; Dimethyl sulfoxide; Dimethyl-sulfoxide-

2-Methyl-4,5-dihydro-3(2h)-thiophenone; 2-Methylthiolan-3-one; 4,5-Dihydro-2- methyl-3(2h)-thiophenone;
M333 2-Methyltetrahydrothiophen-3-one 2-Methyl-4,5-dihydro-3(2h)thio-phenone; 4,5- Dihydro-2-methylthiophene-3(2H)-one;
2-Methyltetrathiophen-3-one; 2-Methyl-4,5-3-thiophenone; Dihydrothiophenone-3(2H), 2-methyl-
Dihydro-2-methyl-3(2h)-furanone; 4,5-Dihydro-2-methylfuran-3(2H)-one; Tetrahydro-2-methyl-3-oxofuran;
M334 2-Methyltetrahydrofuran-3-one
Dihydro-2-methyl-3-furanone; Dihydrofuranone- 3(2H)-, 2-methyl
M335 4-Methylthiazole Thiazole, 4-methyl-

Acetyl lactic acid thiomethyl ester; S-methyl-2-(acetyloxy) propanethioate; propanethioic acid, 2-(acetyloxy)-,
M336 Methylthio 2-(acetyloxy)propionate S-methyl ester; Thiomethyl acetylacetate

1328
Order General Name Synonyms

M337 3-(Methylthio)-1-hexanol 3-Methylmercapto-1-hexanol

M338 1-(Methylthio)-2-butanone 2-Thia-4-hexanone

M339 4-(Methylthio)-2-butanone 3-Methylmercapto-2-butanone; Methyl propyl thioketone; 4-Methyl-2-butane-thione; 2-Pentane thione

M340 3-(Methylthio)-2-butanone 2-Butanone, 3-(methylthio)-; (+/-)-3-(Methylthio)butanone

Mixture of 2-methyl-3-(methylthio)pyrazine and 2-methyl-5-(methylthio)pyrazine and
2-methyl-6-(methylthio)pyrazine, 2-Methyl-3,5-or 6-methylthiopyrazine; Methylpyrazinyl methyl sulfides
M341 (3,5 or 6)-(Methylthio)-2-methylpyrazine (Mixture); (Methylthio)methylpyrazine(mixture of isomers); Pyrazine, methyl(methylthio);
Methyl(methylthio)pyrazine (mixture of isomers)

M342 4-(Methylthio)-2-pentanone 2-Pentanone, 4-(methylthio)-

M343 4-(Methylthio)-4-methyl-2-pentanone 4-methyl-4-(methylthio)-2-pentanone

3-(Methylthio)-butyraldehyde; 3-Methyl thio butyraldehyde; 3-Methyl propanethiol; Thio isoamyl aldehyde; Thio
M344 3-(Methylthio)butanal isovaleraldehyde

γ-(Methylmercapto) butyraldehyde; 4-(Methylthio) butyraldehyde; 4-(Methylmercapto)butanal,

M345 4-(Methylthio)butanal
4-(methylthio)butanal; γ-methylthiobutyraldehyde
M346 4-(Methylthio)butanol 4-(Methylthio)-1-butanol
β-(Methylthio)ethanol; β-Hydroxyethyl methyl sulfide; β-Methylmercaptoethanol; 2-Hydroxyethyl methyl
M347 2-(Methylthio)ethanol sulfide; 2-Methylmercaptoethanol; Hydroxyethyl methyl sulfide; Methyl 2-hydroxyethyl sulfide;
S-Methylmercaptoethanol; 2-(Methylthio)ethan-1-ol

M348 (+/-)-3-(Methylthio)heptanal

M349 3-(Methylthio)hexyl acetate 3-(Methylthio)-1-hexyl acetate

1329
Order General Name Synonyms

M350 3-(Methylthio)methylthiophene 3-Methylsulfanylmethylthiophene

2-(Methylthio)phenol; Thioguaiacol; 1-Hydroxy-2-methylmercaptobenzene; 2-Hydroxy-2-methylmercaptobenzene;

M351 o-(Methylthio)phenol 2-Methylmercaprto phenol; Methyl-(2- hydroxyphenol)sulfide; 1-Thioguaiacol
3-(Methylthio)propan-1-ol; Methionol; 3-Methylthiol propyl alcohol; γ-Hydroxypropyl methyl sulfide; γ-Methyl
M352 3-(Methylthio)propanol mercaptopropyl alcohol; Methyl-3-hydroxypropyl sulfide; 3-Hydroxypropyl methyl sulfide;
3-(Methylthio)propylalcohol
Methylmercapto propionaldehyde; 3-Methylmercapto propionaldehyde; β-methylthio propionaldehyde;
M353 3-(Methylthio)propionaldehyde β-Methylmercapto propionaldhyde; Methional; β-methiopropionaldehyde; methyl-β-mercaptopropionaldehyde;
3-Methylthiopropanol; 3-(Methylthio)propanal

M354 3-(Methylthio)propyl acetate 3-Acetoxypropyl methyl sulfide; Methionyl acetate; 1-Propanol, 3-(methylthio)-, acetate

M355 3-(Methylthio)propyl isothiocyanate 3-Methylmercatopropyl isothiocyanate; Isothiocyanic acid, 3-(Methylthio)propyl ester

M356 Methylthio-2-(propionyloxy)propionate S-Methyl-2-(propionyloxy)propanethioate; Propionyl lactic acid thiomethyl ester; Thiomethyl propionyllacetate

M357 1-Methylthio-2-propanone (Methylthio)Acetone; α-(Methylthio)Acetone; α-(Methylthio)Propanone; 2-Thia-4-pentanone

M358 2-Methylthioacetaldehyde Methylmercapto acetaldehyde; Methyl mercapto aldehyde

M359 3-Methylthiohexanal 3-Methylthiohexaldehyde

M360 Methylthiomethyl butyrate

M361 Methylthiomethyl hexanoate

1330
Order General Name Synonyms
M362 2-(Methylthiomethyl)-3-phenylpropenal α-Benzylidene methional; 2-Propenal, 2-(methylthiomethyl)-3-phenyl-

M363 2-(Methylthiomethyl)butenal 2-Ethylidene methional; 2-( Methylthiomethyl)but-2-enal

M364 Methylthiomethylmercaptan Methanethiol, 1-methylthio-; (Methylthio)methanethiol

M365 12-Methyltridecanal
Methyl n-nonyl acetaldehyde; Aldehyde C-12, M.N.A.; 2-Methylhendecanal; methyl nonyl acetaldehyde;
M366 2-Methylundecanal 2-methylundecanal
2-Methylpentanoic acid; 2-Methylpentanoic-1-acid; methyl propyl acetic acid; α-Methyl valeric acid;
M367 2-Methylvaleric acid Pentane-2-carboxylic acid
5,6,7,7a-Tetrahydro-3,6-dimethylbenzofuran-2(4H)-one; 2(4H)-Benzofuranone, 5,6,7,7a-tetrahydro-3,6-dimethyl-;
M368 Mintlactone dehydroxymenthofurolactone; 3,6-Dimethyl- 5,6,7,7a-tetra-hydro-2(4H)-benzofuranone;
3,6-Dionethyl-4,5,6,7-tetra-hydro- 7aH-benzo(b) furan-2-one; Menthalactone

M369 L-Monomenthyl glutarate Pentanedioic acid, mono[5 methyl-2-1(1-methylethyl)cyclohexyl] ester[1L][1R(-) ]Monomethyl glutarate

Butanedioic acid,monomethyl ester; Mono-Menth-3-yl succinate; Butanedioic acid,

mono-(5-methyl-2-isopropyl-cyclohexyl)ester; 5-Methyl-2-(1-methylethyl_cyclohexyl butanedioate, mono ester;
M370 Monomenthyl succinate mono- Menth-3-yl succinate; Butanedioic acid, mono[5-methyl 2-(1-methyl-ethyl)cyclohexyl]ester,
[1R-(1α,2β,5α)]

M371 Myrcene 7-Methyl-3-methylene-1,6-octadiene

M372 Myristaldehyde Aldehyde C-14; myristic aldehyde; Tetradecanal; n-Tetradecyl aldehyde; Tetradecyl aldehyde; Tetradecan-1-al

6,6-Dimethyl-2-oxymethylbicyclo [1.1.3]-hept-2-ene; 10-hydroxy-2-pinene;2- pinen- 10-ol;

M373 Myrtenol 6,6-Dimethylbicyclo[3.1.1]hept-2-ene-methanol; 6,6-Dimethyl-2-oxomethylbicyclo [1,3,3]-hept-2-ene

M374 Myrtenyl acetate (6,6-Dimethylbicyclo[3.3.1]hept-2-en-2-yl)methyl acetate; 2-Pinen-10-ol acetate

Myrtenyl formate; (6,6-Dimethylbicyclo[3.3.1]hept-2-en-2-yl)methyl formate;

M375 6,6-Myrtenyl formate
2-Hydroxymethyl-6,6-dimethylbicyclo[3.1.1]hept-2-enyl formate; 2-Pinen-10-ol formate

1331
Order General Name Synonyms
2-Propanol, 2-methyl-; tert-Butyl Alcohol; tert-Butanol; Trimethylcarbinol; Trimethylmethanol;
1,1-Dimethylethanol; 2-Methyl-2-propanol; tert-Butyl hydroxide; 2-Methylpropanol-2; t-Butyl alchohol; t-Butyl
M376 2-Methylpropan-2-ol hydroxide; Methanol, trimethyl-; 2-Methyl n-propan-2-ol; Tert.-butyl alcohol; Methyl-2
propanol-2;t-Butanol;Ethanol, 1,1-dimethyl-
3-Methyl-3-pentanol; Methyldiaethylcarbinol; Methyldiethylcarbinol; 3-Methyl-pentanol-(3); Methyl-3
M377 3-Methylpentan-3-ol pentanol-3;3-Pentanol, 3-methyl-
Terpin; 1,8-Terpin; Dipenteneglycol; 4-(1-Hydroxy-1-methylethyl)-1-methylcyclohexanol;Cyclohexanemethanol,
M378 p-Menthane-1,8-diol
4-hydroxy-α,α,4-trimethyl-

m-Cresol, 6-tert-butyl-; 2-tert-Butyl-5-Methylphenol; 6-tert-Butyl-m-Cresol; 6-tert-Butyl-3-Methylphenol;

M379 5-Methyl-2-(tert-butyl)phenol
2-t-Butyl-5-methylphenol;Phenol, 2-(1,1-dimethylethyl)-5-methyl-;3-Methyl-6-tert-butylphenol

M380 2-Methylnaphthalene β-Methylnaphthalene; Methyl-2-naphthalene;Naphthalene, 2-methyl-

Khinaldin; Quinaldine; Chinaldine; 2-Methylchinolin;
M381 2-Methylquinoline
α-Methylquinoline;Quinoline, 2-methyl-

M382 2-Methyl-4,5-benzo-oxazole 2-Methyl-1,3-benzoxazole;Benzoxazole, 2-methyl-;2-Methylbenzoxazol

p-Toluic acid, methyl ester; p-Carbomethoxytoluene; Methyl p-methylbenzoate; Methyl p-toluate; Methyl
M383 Methyl 4-methylbenzoate 4-toluate; 4-Methylbenzoic acid, methyl ester; Methyl ester of 4-methylbenzoic acid; p-Toluylic acid, methyl
ester;Methyl 4-toluate;Benzoic acid, 4-methyl-, methyl ester
Acetoacetic acid, methyl ester; Methyl acetylacetate; Methyl 3-oxobutyrate; Acetoacetic methyl ester; Methyl
M384 Methyl acetoacetate acetylacetonate; Methylester kyseliny acetoctove;
3-Oxobutanoic acid methyl ester; Methyl 3-oxobutanoate;Butanoic acid, 3-oxo-, methyl ester
M385 Methyl formate Formic acid, methyl ester; Methyl methanoate; Methylformiaat; Methyl ester of formic acid

Isobutylmethylcarbinol; Isobutylmethylmethanol; Methylisobutylcarbinol; 2-Methyl-4-Pentanol;

4-Methyl-2-Pentanol; 1,3-Dimethylbutanol; Methyl amyl alcohol; 2-Methanol-4-pentanol; 4-Methylpentanol-2;
M386 4-Methylpentan-2-ol 4-Pentanol, 2-methyl-; 4-Methyl-2-pentyl alcohol; 1,3-Dimethyl-1-butanol; Methyl-2-pentanol; Methylpentanol;
Pentanol, 4-methyl-; Sec-hexyl alcohol;2-Pentanol, 4-methyl-

3-Picoline; β-Methylpyridine; β-Picoline; m-Picoline; meta-Methylpyridine;

M387 3-Methylpyridine B-Picoline;5-Methylpyridine;Pyridine, 3-methyl-

1332
Order General Name Synonyms
Capric acid methyl ester; Methyl caprate; Methyl caprinate; Methyl-n-caprate;Methyl n-decanoate; n-Capric
M388 Methyl decanoate acid methyl ester;Decanoic acid, methyl ester

Palmitic acid, methyl ester; n-Hexadecanoic acid methyl ester; Methyl n-hexadecanoate;Methyl
M389 Methyl hexadecanoate
palmitate;Hexadecanoic acid, methyl ester

Stearic acid, methyl ester; n-Octadecanoic acid, methyl ester; Methyl n-octadecanoate; Methyl stearate;
M390 Methyl octadecanoate
Methyl ester of octadecanoic acid; Methyl (Z)-9-octadecenoate;Octadecanoic acid, methyl ester
Oleic acid, methyl ester; Methyl cis-9-octadecenoate; (Z)-9-Octadecenoic acid methyl ester;
cis-9-Octyldecenoic acid, methyl ester; Emery; Emery, oleic acid ester; Methyl 9-octadecenoate; Methyl
cis-9-octadecanoate; Methyl cis-9-octadecenoate; oleic acid methyl ester; Methyl (9Z)-9-octadecenoate;
M391 Methyl oleate 9-octadecenoic acid, methyl ester (Z); Methyl-cis-oleate; Methyl (Z)-9-oleate;Methyl cis-9-octadecanoate;Methyl
cis-9-octadecenoate, oleic acid methyl ester;cis-9-Octadecenoic acid, methyl ester;9-Octadecenoic acid (Z)-,
methyl ester

M392 2-Methyl-4,5-benzothiazole 2-Methyl-1,3-benzothiazole;Benzothiazole, 2-methyl-;2-Methylbenzothiazole

Propanedioic acid; Carboxyacetic acid; Dicarboxymethane; Methanedicarboxylic acid; Kyselina malonova;

M393 Malonic acid Methanedicarbonic acid

Phenol, 3-methoxy-; m-Guaiacol; Phenol, m-methoxy-; m-Hydroxyanisole; m-Methoxyphenol; Resorcinol methyl

M394 3-Methoxyphenol ether; Resorcinol monomethyl ether; 1-Hydroxy-3-methoxybenzene; 3-Hydroxyanisole

Phenol, 4-methoxy-; Phenol, p-methoxy-; p-Guaiacol; p-Hydroxyanisole; p-Methoxyphenol; Hydroquinone

M395 4-Methoxyphenol methyl ether; Hydroquinone monomethyl ether; 1-Hydroxy-4-methoxybenzene; 4-Hydroxyanisole; Monomethyl
ether hydroquinone;Hydroxyanisole;Mequinol

M396 4-Methylquinoline Lepidine; γ-Methylquinoline; p-Methylquinoline; Cincholepidine; Lepidin; 4-Lepidine;Quinoline, 4-methyl-

Dihydro-α-terpineol; 1-Methyl-4-isopropylcyclohexane-8-ol; 2-(4-Methylcyclohexyl)-2-propanol;

M397 p-Menthan-8-ol α-Dihydroterpineol;Cyclohexanemethanol, α,α,4-trimethyl-

1333
Order General Name Synonyms

M398 4-Methylpent-3-enoic acid Pyroterebic acid;3-Pentenoic acid, 4-methyl-;4-Methyl-3-pentenoic acid

M399 Myrtanol Bicyclo[3.1.1]heptane-2-methanol, 6,6-dimethyl-;(6,6-Dimethylbicyclo[3.1.1]hept-2-yl)methanol

Ethyl 2-methylbutyl ketone; 3-Methyl-5-heptanone;

M400 5-Methylheptan-3-one 5-Methyl-3-heptanone; 5-Methylheptanone-(3); Ethyl sec-amyl ketone;3-Heptanone, 5-methyl-

M401 Myrcenol 2-Methyl-6-methylene-7-octen-2-ol; 3-Methylene-7-methyl-1-octen-7-ol;7-Octen-2-ol, 2-methyl-6-methylene-

M402 2-Methylthiophene 2-methylthiacyclopentadiene;Thiophene, 2-methyl-

Isothiocyanic acid, methyl ester; Isothiocyanatomethane;

M403 Methyl isothiocyanate Methyl mustard oil; Methyl thioisocyanate;Methyl-isothiocyanat;Methane isothiocyanate;Methane, isothiocyanato-

Isopropyl methyl ketone; Ketone, isopropyl methyl; Methyl butanone-2; Methyl isopropyl ketone;
M404 3-Methylbutan-2-one Methylbutanone; 3-Methyl-2-butanone; 2-Acetylpropane;2-Butanone, 3-methyl-

M405 3-Methylpentan-2-ol 3-Methyl-2-pentanol; 3-Methyl-4-pentanol;2-Pentanol, 3-methyl-

sec-Butyl Methyl ketone; Methyl sec-butyl ketone; Methyl 1-methylpropyl ketone;

M406 3-Methylpentan-2-one 3-Methyl-2-pentanone;2-Pentanone, 3-methyl-

Acetophenone, 2'-methyl-; o-Acetyltoluene; o-Methylacetophenone; 2-Acetyltoluene;

M407 2-Methylacetophenone 1-(2-Methylphenyl)ethanone;2'-Methylacetophenone; 2'-Methylacetylphenone;Ethanone, 1-(2-methylphenyl)-

2-Pentanol, 2-methyl-; 2-Hydroxy-2-methylpentane; 1,1-Dimethylbutanol; 2-Methyl-2-hydroxypentane; Methyl-2

M408 2-Methylpentan-2-ol pentanol-2;2-Methyl-2-pentanol

M409 3-Methoxybenzaldehyde m-Anisaldehyde; m-Methoxybenzaldehyde; 3-Anisaldehyde; Metamethoxybenzaldehyde;Benzaldehyde, 3-methoxy-

Pyruvic acid, methyl ester; Methyl pyruvate; Methylglyoxylic acid methyl ester;Propanoic acid, 2-oxo-, methyl
M410 Methyl 2-oxopropionate ester;Methyl 2-oxopropanoate

M411 3-Methylthiophene 3-Thiotolene; Methyl-3-thiophene;Thiophene, 3-methyl-

1334
Order General Name Synonyms
M412 2-Methylhexan-3-ol 1-Isopropyl-1-butanol; 2-Methyl-3-hexanol; 5-Methyl-4-hexanol;3-Hexanol, 2-methyl-
Crotonic acid, methyl ester, (E)-; trans-2-Butenoic Acid methyl ester; Methyl trans-crotonate; Methyl
trans-2-butenoate; (E)-2-Butenoic acid methyl ester; Methyl α-crotonate; Methyl E-crotonate; Methyl
M413 Methyl crotonate (2E)-2-butenoate; Methyl 2-butenoate, (E)-; methyl (E)-2-butenoate;(E)-Crotonic acid methyl ester;2-Butenoic
acid, methyl ester, (E)-
M414 6-Methylheptan-3-one Ethyl isoamyl ketone; 2-Methyl-5-heptanone; 6-Methyl-3-heptanone;3-Heptanone, 6-methyl-
Isohexyl alcohol; Isohexanol; 2-Methyl-5-pentanol; 4-Methyl-1-pentanol; 4-methylpentanol; Pentanol,
M415 4-Methylpentan-1-ol 4-methyl-;1-Pentanol, 4-methyl-

Sulfide, butyl methyl; Butyl methyl sulfide; Butyl methyl thioether; 2-Thiahexane; 1-(Methylthio)butane; Butyl
M416 Methyl butyl sulfide methyl sulphide; Methyl-n-butyl sulfide; n-Butyl methyl sulfide; 1-(Methylsulfanyl)butane;Butane,
1-(methylthio)-

Propanoic acid, 3-(methylthio)-; Propionic acid, 3-(methylthio)-; 4-Thiapentanoic acid;

M417 3-(Methylthio)propionic acid
3-(Methylsulfanyl)propanoic acid;3-(Methylthio)propionic acid
Isobutenylcarbinol; Isopropenylethyl alcohol; 2-Methyl-1-buten-4-ol; 3-Isopentenyl alcohol;
M418 3-Methylbut-3-en-1-ol 3-Methyl-3-buten-1-ol; Methallyl carbinol; 3-methyl-3-butenol; Methyl-3-but-3-en-1-ol;3-Buten-1-ol, 3-methyl-

M419 Methyl 4-pentenoate methyl pentenoate

M420 2-Methyloctan-1-ol 1-Octanol, 2-methyl-;2-Methyl-1-octanol

M421 2-Methylhexanal 2-Methylhexanaldehyde;Hexanal, 2-methyl-

M422 6-Methylheptan-2-one 2-Methyl-6-heptanone; 6-Methyl-2-heptanone; Methyl isohexyl ketone;2-Heptanone, 6-methyl-

M423 Myrcenyl acetate
M424 Methyl deca-4,8-dienoate
2-Formyl-1-methylpyrrole; N-Methyl-2-formylpyrrole; 1-Methyl-2-formylpyrrole;
N-Methylpyrrole-2-carboxaldehyde; 1-Methylpyrrole-2-carboxaldehyde; Pyrrole-2-carboxaldehyde, 1-methyl-;
N-Methylpyrrole-2-aldehyde; 1-Methyl-1H-pyrrole-2-carbaldehyde; 1-Methyl-2-pyrrolaldehyde;
M425 1-Methyl-1H-pyrrole-2-carboxaldehyde 1-methyl-2-pyrrolecarboxaldehyde; 1-methylformylpyrrole; 1-Methylpyrrole-2-carbaldehyde;
N-methylpyrrole-2-carboxy aldehyde;1-methylpyrrole-2-carboxyaldehyde;1H-Pyrrole-2-carboxaldehyde,
1-methyl-

1335
Order General Name Synonyms
M426 p-Mentha-1,3-dien-7-al
M427 Methyl 4-methoxybenzyl ether

M428 4-Methylhexanoic acid

M429 8-p-menthene-1,2-diol limonenediol;8,9-p-Menthen-1,2-diol; 8-p-Menthene-1,2-diol; d-Limonene-1,2-diol; Limonene glycol

M430 Menthyl formate
M431 Methyl geranate 2,6-Octadienoic acid, 3,7-dimethyl-, methyl ester; Methyl (2E)-3,7-dimethyl-2,6-octadienoate;Methyl geraniate

M432 2-Methylbutyl propionate 1-Butanol, 2-methyl-, propanoate; 1-Butanol, 2-methyl-, propionate;1-Butanol, 2-methyl-, propanoate
Propanoic acid, 2-methyl-, 2-methylbutyl ester; Isobutyric acid, 2-methylbutyl ester;2-Methylbutyl
M433 2-Methylbutyl isobutyrate
2-methylpropanoate; 2-Metylbutyl Isobutyrate

M434 Methyl dec-2-enoate Methyl ester of 2-Decenoic acid; Methyl (2E)-2-decenoate;2-Decenoic acid, methyl ester;Methyl 2-decenoate

M435 2-Methylbutyl hexanoate Hexanoic acid, 2-methylbutyl ester; 2-Methylbutyl caproate

S-Methyl methanethiosulphonate; S-Methyl methanethiosulfonate; Methanesulfonothioic acid, S-methyl ester;
M436 Methyl methanethiosulfonate Methanesulfonic acid, thio-, S-methyl ester; Methyl methanesulfonothioate; S-Methyl methanesulfonothioate;
dimethyl thiosulfonate; S-methyl methylthiosulfonate;Methyl methanethiosulfonate

M437 1,1-Diethoxy-2-methylbutane Butyraldehyde, 2-methyl-, diethyl acetal;Butane, 1,1-diethoxy-2-methyl-

M438 3-Methylhexanoic acid

Sulfide, methyl propyl; 2-Thiapentane; 1-(Methylthio)propane; 1-(Methylsulfanyl)propane;Propane,

M439 Methyl propyl sulfide 1-(methylthio)-

Vanillic acid, methyl ester; Methyl 3-methoxy-4-hydroxybenzoate; Methyl 4-hydroxy-3-methoxybenzoate;

4-Hydroxy-3-methoxybenzoic acid methyl ester; Methyl ester of 4-hydroxy-3-methoxybenzoic acid;
M440 Methyl vanillate 4-Hydroxy-3-methoxybenzoic acid methyl ester;Vanillic acid methyl;Benzoic acid, 4-hydroxy-3-methoxy-,
methyl ester

1336
Order General Name Synonyms
M441 4-Methyl-2-propyl-1,3-dioxolane 1,3-Dioxolane, 4-methyl-2-propyl

M442 4-methylthiobutyl isothiocyanate 1-isothiocyanato-4-(methylthio)-butane;methyl thio butyl isothiocyanate

M443 6-(methylthio)hexyl isothiocyanate

M444 5-(methylthio)pentyl isothiocyanate

M445 2-Methylbut-3-en-1-ol 2-Methyl-3-buten-1-ol; 2-methyl-3-butene-1-ol;3-Buten-1-ol, 2-methyl-
M446 Methyl hexyl ether Ether, hexyl methyl; Hexyl methyl ether; 1-Methoxyhexane;Hexane, 1-methoxy-
M447 2-(Methylthio) Ethyl Acetate

M448 Methyl isoprenyl sulfide

M449 Menthyl hexanoate

M450 Methyl dodec-2-enoate

M451 2-(4-Methyl-5-thiazolyl)ethyl formate sulfuryl formate;Methanoic acid, 2-(4-methyl-5-thiazolyl)ethyl ester
Tiglic acid methyl ester; 2-Butenoic acid, 2-methyl-, methyl ester, (E)-; Crotonic acid, 2-methyl-, methyl
ester, (E)-; Methyl (E)-2-methylcrotonate; Methyl trans-2-methyl-2-butenoate; 2-Carbomethoxy-2-butene, (E)-;
M452 Methyl tiglate(Methyl 2-methylcrotonate) Methyl α-methylcrotonate; Methyl trans-2-methylcrotonate; Methyl (2E)-2-methyl-2-butenoate;
2-Methylerotonic acid (Tiglicacid), methyl ester; methyl (E)-2-methyl-2-butenoate
M453 Methyl dec-4-enoate
M454 Methyl prop-1-enyl sulfide

M455 α-Muurolene

M456 2-Methyl-1,1-di-isopentyloxypropane
M457 Megastigma-4,6,8-trien-3-one
M458 3-Methyl-1,1-di-isopentyloxybutane
M459 1-(2-Methylbutoxy)-1-isopentyloxyethane

1337
Order General Name Synonyms
M460 3-Methylhexanal Hexanal, 3-methyl-
M461 Methyl 3-acetoxyhexanoate Hexanoic acid, 3-(acetyloxy)-,methyl ester
cis-p-Mentha-2,8-dien-1
M462 2,8-p-menthadien-1-ol
p-menth-2,8-dien-1-ol;
M463 2-Methoxy-3-propylpyrazine
M464 Menthyl phenylacetate

M465 3-Mercapto-2-methylpropionic acid

M466 Myrtanyl acetate (6,6-Dimethylbicyclo[3.1.1]hept-2-yl)methyl acetate;Bicyclo[3.1.1]heptane-2-methanol, 6,6-dimethyl-, acetate

M467 1-Mercapto-p-menthan-3-one mercapto menthanone
Mixture of methyl cyclohexadiene and methylene Cyclohexene, 3-methylene-; 1-Methylene-2-cyclohexene;
M468 cyclohexene 3-Methylene-1-cyclohexene;1-Methyl-1,3-cyclohexadiene

M469 6-Methyloctanal

M470 8-(Methylthio)-p-menthan-3-one

M471 Methyl prop-1-enyl trisulfide

M472 3-Methylnonano-1,4-lactone
M473 2-Methylbutyl formate 1-Butanol, 2-methyl-, formate
M474 3-Mercapto-3-methyl-1-butyl acetate 3-Mercapto-3-methylbutyl acetate; 3-Methyl-3-sulfanylbutyl acetate;
M475 2-Methylbutyl butyrate Butanoic acid, 2-methylbutyl ester; 2-methylbutyl butanoate
M476 3-Methyl-3-buten-1-yl hexanoate 3-Methylbut-3-en-1-yl hexanoate
M477 3-Methyl-3-buten-1-yl butyrate
M478 2-Methylbutyl dodecanoate
M479 2-Methylbutyl decanoate
M480 p-Menthan-8-yl acetate
Butanoic acid, 3-oxo-, 5-methyl-2-(1-methylethyl)cyclohexyl ester, [1R-(1α,2 β,5α)]-DSL; Butanoic acid,
M481 l-Menthyl acetoacetate 3-oxo-, 5-methyl-2-(1-methylethyl)cyclcohexyl ester, [1R-(1α,2β,5α)]- (AICS); (-)-Menthyl acetoacetate
M482 6-Methylene-2,10,10-trimethyl-1-oxaspiro[4.5]dec-7-ene Vitispirane;2,10,10-trimethyl-6-methylene-1-oxaspiro[4.5]dec-7-ene
M483 1-(Methylthio)pentan-3-one 1-(Methylthio)-3-pentanone; 3-Pentanone, 1-(methylthio)-; 1-(Methylsulfanyl)-3-pentanone

M484 2-Methylbutyl octanoate 2-Methylbutyl caprylate

1338
Order General Name Synonyms

M485 Megastigma-5,8-dien-4-one

M486 Methyl heptenone propylene glycol acetal

M487 S-(Methylthiomethyl) 2-methylpropanethioate

M488 Methyl propyl tetrasulfide
M489 3-Mercapto-1-butyl acetate 3-Mercaptobutyl acetate

M490 2-(3-Methyl-1,3-butadienyl)-4-methyltetrahydrofuran

M491 2-Methylbutyl tetradecanoate

M492 2-(4-Methyl-5-thiazolyl)ethyl propionate sulfuryl propionate;Propanoic acid, 2-(4-methyl-5-thiazolyl)ethyl ester (9CI)

M493 2-(4-Methyl-5-thiazolyl)ethyl butanoate sulfuryl butyrate

M494 Sulfuryl hexanoate 2-(4-Methyl-5-thiazolyl)ethyl hexanoate

(+/-)-cis- and trans-2-methyl-2-(4-methyl-3-pentenyl)
M495 2-methyl-2-(4-methylpent-3-enyl)cyclopropane-1-carbaldehyde
cyclopropanecarbaldehyde
2-Methylbutyl 3-methyl-2-butenoate
M496 (2-Methylbutyl 3-methylbutenoate) 2-Methylbutyl senecioate

M497 Sulfuryl decanoate 2-(4-Methyl-5-thiazolyl)ethyl decanoate

M498 (+/-)-Menthyl 3-hydroxybutyrate Menthyl methyllactate; Butanoic acid, 3-hydroxy-, 5-methyl-2-(1-methylethyl)cyclohexyl ester

M499 2-(4-Methyl-5-thiazolyl)ethyl octanoate Octanoic acid, 2-(4-methyl-5-thiazolyl)ethyl ester (6CI)

M500 5-Methylhexyl acetate methyl hexyl acetate

M501 2-(5-Methyl-4-thiazolyl)ethyl isobutyrate sulfuryl isobutyrate ;Propanoic acid, 2-methyl-, 2-(5-methyl-4-thiazolyl)ethyl ester (9CI)

M502 2-Methyl-3-furyl methylthiomethyl disulfide 2-methyl{[(methylsulfanyl)methyl] disulfanyl}furan

M503 3-Mercaptoheptyl acetate Aruscolate

M504 4-Methylpentyl isovalerate methyl pentyl isovalerate

M505 Myristic acid Tetradecanoic acid; Crodacid

1339
Order General Name Synonyms
(R)-N-(1-Methoxy-4-methylpentan-2-yl)-3,4-dimethylben Benzamide,N-[(1R)-1-(methoxymethyl)-3-methylbutyl]-3,4-dimethyl-;
M506 zamide N-[(2R)-1-Methoxy-4-methyl-2-pentanyl]-3,4-dimethylbenzamide
3-Methyl-5-(2,2,3-trimethylcyclopent-3-en-1-yl)pent-4-e
M507 n-2-ol Ebanol; 4-Penten-2-ol, 3-methyl-5-(2,2,3-trimethyl-3-cyclopenten-1-yl)-
2-Methyl-3-(3,4-methyenedioxyphenyl)propanal; alpha-Methyl-3,4-(methylenedioxy)hydrocinnamaldehyde;
M508 3-(3,4-Methylenedioxyphenyl)-2-methylpropanal 2-Methyl-3-(3,4-methyenedioxyphenyl)propionaldehyde; alpha-Methyl-1,3-benzodioxole-5-propionaldehyde;
1,3-Benzodioxole-5-propanal, alpha.-methyl-
M509 d-8-p-Menthene-1,2-epoxide D-1,2-Epoxylimonene; D-Limonene 1,2-epoxide; (4R)-1-Methyl-4-(prop-1-en-2-yl)-7-oxabicyclo[4.1.0]heptane
M510 2-Mercaptoheptan-4-ol 2-Sulfanylheptan-4-ol; 2-Thioheptan-4-ol; 2-Mercapto-4-heptanol
M511 3-Mercaptohexanal Hexanal, 3-mercapto-
M512 4-Mercapto-3-methyl-2-butanol 4-Thio-3-methyl-2-butanol; 3-Methyl-4-sulfanyl-2- butanol; 3-Methyl-4-sulfanyl-butan-2-ol
M513 3-Mercapto-1-pentanol
2-Mercaptoethanecarboxylic acid; Thiohydracrylic acid; 3-Thiopropionic acid; 3-Thiopropanoic acid; Propanoic
M514 3-Mercaptopropionic acid acid, 3-mercapto-; 3-mercaptopropanoic acid
M515 L-Methionylglycine {[(2S)-2-Amino-4-(methylsulfanyl)butanoyl]amino}acetic acid
M516 (±)-6-Methoxy-2,6-dimethylheptanal 6-Methoxy-2,6-dimethylheptanal
M517 2-(4-Methoxyphenoxy)propionic acid
(1R,2S,5R)-N-(4-Methoxyphenyl)-5-methyl-2-(1-methylet (1R,2S,5R)-Methoxyphenyl)-5-methyl-2-propan-N-(4-2-ylcyclohexane-1-carboxamide;
M518 hyl)cyclohexanecarboxamide N-(4-Methoxyphenyl)-p-menthane-carboxamide;
(1R,2S,5R)-N-(4-Methoxyphenyl)-5-methyl-2-(propan-2-yl)cyclohexanecarboxamide
M519 2-Methoxy-6-(2-propenyl)phenol o-Eugenol; 2-Allyl-6-methoxyphenol
M520 2-Methoxypyridine
M521 4-Methylbenzaldehyde propyleneglycol acetal 1,3-Dioxolane, 4-methyl-2-p-tolyl-; 1,3-Dioxolane, 4-methyl-2-(4-methylphenyl)-
M522 4-Methylbenzyl alcohol p-Tolylcarbinol; p-Tolualcohol; 4-(Hydroxymethyl)toluene; 4-Methylbenzenemethanol; (4-Methylphenyl)methanol
M523 N-(2-Methylcyclohexyl)-2,3,4,5,6-pentafluorobenzamide PFMC benzamide; 2,3,4,5,6-Pentafluoro-N-(2-methylcyclohexyl)benzenecarboximidic acid
M524 8-Methyldecanal
Methyl2-oxopropyldisulfide; 1-(Methyldithio)-2-propanone; 1-Methyldisulfanyl)acetone;
M525 1-Methyldithio-2-propanone 1-(Methyldithio)-2-propanone; 1-(Methyldisulfanyl)propan-2-one
M526 Methyl 3-(furfurylthio)propionate Methyl furfuyl mercaptopropionate; Methyl 3-[(furan-2-ylmethyl)sulfanyl]propanoate
M527 6-Methylheptanal Isooctan-1-al
M528 8-Methylnonanal Isodecanal
M529 Methyl octyl sulfide Methyl(octyl)sulfane; 2-Thiadecane; 1-Methylthiooctane; 1-Methylsulfanyloctane
M530 4-Methylpentyl-4-methylvalerate 4-Methylpentyl 4-methylpentanoate; Pentanoic acid, 4-methyl-, 4-methylpentyl ester; 4-Methylpentanoic acid,
4-methylpentyl ester

1340
Order General Name Synonyms
2-(4-Methylphenoxy)-N-(1H-pyrazol-3-yl)-N-(thiophen-2
M531 -ylmethyl)acetamide N-(1H-Pyrazol-5-yl)-N-(thiophen-2-ylmethyl)-2-(p-tolyloxy)acetamide

M532 Methyl beta-phenylglycidate (±)-Methyl 2,3-epoxycinnamate; Methyl 3-phenyl oxirane-2-carboxylate; Methyl 3-phenyloxirane-2-carboxylate;
3-Phenyl glycidic acid methyl ester; Methyl 3-phenyloxirane-2-carboxylate

M533 trans,trans/cis,trans-2,6,8-N-(2-Methylpropyl)-2,6,8-decat 2E,6Z,8E-DecatrienoicacidN-isobutylamide; N-Isobutyldeca-trans-2,cis-6,trans-8-trienamide;

(2E,6Z,8E)-N-(2-Methylpropyl)-2,6,8-decatrienamide; Spilanthol;
rienamide (1Z,2E/6Z,8E)-N-(2-Methylpropyl)deca-2,6,8-trienimidicacid
M534 4-Methyl-2-propyl-1,3-oxathiane 2-Propyl-4-methyl-1,3-oxathiane
M535 (+/-)-2-Methyltetrahydrofuran-3-thiol acetate 2-Methyl tetrahydrofuran-3-thioacetate; 2-Methyl-3-thioacetoxytetrahydrofuran;
(?)-(2-Methyltetrahydrofuran-3-yl) ethanethioate
M536 3-(Methylthio)-decanal 3-(Methylsulfanyl)decanal
M537 3-(Methylthio)propylamine S-Methylhomocysteamine; 1-Amino-3-(methylthio)propane; 3-(Methylmercapto)propylamine; 3-Aminopropyl
methyl sulfide; 3-(Methylsulfanyl)propylamine; 3-(Methylthio)propan-1-amin
M538 3-(Methylthio)propyl hexanoate Hexanoic acid, 3-(methylthio)propyl ester; Methionyl hexanoate
(1-Methyl-2-(1,2,2-trimethylbicyclo[3.1.0]
M539 hex-3-ylmethyl)cyclopropyl) methanol Cyclopropanemethanol, 1-methyl-2-[(1,2,2-trimethylbicyclo[3.1.0]hex-3-yl)methyl]-
N001 2-Naphthalenethiol 2-Naphthyl mercaptan; 2-mercaptonaphthalene; 2-Thionaphthol; β-Thionapthol
N002 β-Naphthyl anthranilate 2-Naphthyl anthranilate; 2-Naphthalenol, 2-aminobenzoyl ester; 2-Naphthyl o-aminobenzoate
Nerolin; Bromelia; 2-Ethoxynaphthalene; Ethyl-2-naphthyl ther; Ethyl-β-naphthyl ether; Nerolin ll; Nerolin
N003 β-Naphthyl ethyl ether bromelia
N004 β-Naphthyl methyl ether
N005 β-Naphtyl isobutyl ether Isobutyl β-naphthyl ether; Fragarol; 2-isobutoxynaphthalene; Isobutyl β-naphthyl ether; Naphthalene,
2-(2-methylpropoxy)-; Nerolin fragarol
N006 Neohesperidine dihydrochalcone Neohespiridin DHC
N007 Nerol Nerosol; Allerol; cis-2,6-Dimethyl-2,6-octadien-8-ol; Nergenol; Nerodol; Nerolo; Neraniol;
cis-3,7-Dimethyl-2,6-octadien-1-ol Note: see Geraniol for trans-form; Nerolol
N008 Nerol oxide 3,6-Dihydro-4-methyl-2(2-methylpropen-1-yl)-2H-pyran; 3,6-Dihydro-4-methyl-2-
(2-methyl-1-propenyl)-2H-pyran
N009 Nerolidol Peruviol; methylvinyl homogeranyl carbinol; Melaleucol; Dodecatriene; 3,7,11- Trimethyl-1,6,10-dodecatrien-3-ol
N010 Neryl acetate cis-3,7-Dimethyl-2,6-octadien-1-yl ethanoate; Neryl ethanoate; cis-3,7-Dimethyl-2,6- octadien-1-yl acetate
N011 Neryl butyrate cis-3,7-Dimethyl-2,6-octadien-1-yl butanoate; cis-3,7-Dimethyl-2,6-octadien-1-yl butyrate; Neryl-n-butyrate
N012 Neryl formate cis-3,7-Dimethyl-2,6-octadien-1-yl methanoate; cis-3,7-Dimethyl-2,6-octadien-1-yl formate; Meryl methanoate
N013 Neryl isobutyrate cis-3,7-Dimethyl-2,6-octadien-1-yl 2-methylpropanoate; cis-3,7-Dimethyl-2,6- octadien-1-yl isobutyrate; neryl
2-methylpropanoate; 2-cis-3,7-Dimethyl-2,6-octadien- 1-yl isobutyrate
Neryl isovalerianate; Neryl 3-methylbutanoate; cis-3,7-Dimethyl-2,6-octadien-1-yl butanoate;
3-Methylbutanoate; cis-3,7-Dimethyl-2,6-octadien-1-yl isopentanoate; cis-3,7-Dimethyl-2,6-octadien-1-yl
N014 Neryl isovalerate isovalerate; Neryl-β-methylbutyrate; cis-3,7-Dimethyl-2,6-octadien-1-yl-2-methylbutanoate; Neryl
3-methylbutyrate

1341
Order General Name Synonyms
Neryl propanoate; cis-3,7-Dimethyl-2,6-octadien-1-yl propionate; cis-3,7-Dimethyl-2,6- octadien-1-yl
N015 Neryl propionate propanoate
N016 Non-2-enal 3-Hexyl-2-propenal; 3-Hexylacrolein; Heptylideneacetaldehyde; β-Hexylacrolein; α-Nonenyl aldehyde;
Nonylenic aldehyde; trans-2-Nonenal
N017 Nona-2,4,6-trienal
N018 Nona-2-trans-6-cis-dienal 2,6-Nonadienal; Cucumber aldehyde; Nona-2,6-dienal; 2,6-nonadienal(trans, cis)
N019 2,6-Nonadien-1-ol 2,4-Nonadienal; Nonadienol; Cucumber alcohol; Violet leaf alcohol; tr-2, cis-6- Nonadien-1-ol

N020 (E,Z)-3,6-Nonadien-1-ol (E)-3-(Z)-nonadien-1-ol; trans-3-cis-6-nonadienal

N021 (Z,Z)-3,6-Nonadien-1-ol Nona-3,6-dien-1-ol; cis-3, cis-6-nonadienol

N022 2,4-Nonadien-1-ol

N023 (E,Z)-2,6-Nonadien-1-ol acetate trans-2-cis-6-Nonadien-1-yl acetate

N024 (E,Z)-3,6-Nonadien-1-ol-acetate trans-3-cis-6-Nonadien-1-yl acetate

trans,trans-2,4-nonadien-1-al; trans-2- Nonenal; 3-Hexyl-2-propenal; Non-2-enal; 3 or ß-hexyl acrolein;

N025 2,4-Nonadienal
Heptyliceneacetaldehyde; tr-2, tr-4-Nonadienal

N026 2-trans, 6-trans-Nonadienal Nona-2(trans),6(trans)-dienal; 2,6-Nonadienal, (E,E)-; (E,E)-nona-2,6-dienal

N027 2,6-Nonadienal diethyl acetal 1,1-Diethoxy-2,6-nonadiene; 1,1- Diethoxynona-2,6-diene; Nonadienyl diethyl acetal

4-nonanolide; 5-pentyldihydro-2(3H)-furanonenona-1,4-lactone; aldehyde c-18; 4-n-Amyl-4-hydroxybutyric acid

N028 γ-Nonalactone* lactone; γ-pelargolactone; γ-Nonyllactone; Nonano-1,4-lactone; γ-Amyl butyrolactone; Coconut aldehyde;
4-Hydroxynonanoic acid, γ-lactone; nonanolide; γ-Lactone; Nonanolide-1,4; γ-Nonalactone

N029 (+/-)Nonan-3-yl acetate 3-Nonanol, acetate; 1-Ethylhept-1-yl acetate; 1-Ethylheptyl acetate, Non-3-yl acetate

Pelargonaldehyde; Nonoic aldehyde; Nonyl-aldehyde; Aldehyde C-9; Nonanoic aldehyde; n-Nonyl aldehyde;
N030 Nonanal α-Oxononane; Pelargonic aldehyde; n-Nonanal

Nonane diacetate; Jasmon acetate; Octyl crotonate, Mixture of 3-acetate and 1-(2-hydroxyethyl)heptyl acetate;
N031 1,3-Nonanediol acetate (mixed esters) Hexylene glycol diacetate; 3-hexy-1,3-propane-diol acetate, mixed esters; Nonanediol-1,3-acetate; Octylcrotonyl

1342
Order General Name Synonyms
acetate; Diacetate; diasmol; Diasmylacetate; Drago-jasimia; jasmelia; jasmonyl; Jersemal; Hexylene glycol
acetate; 1,3-Nonanediol acetate; Acetoxy nonyl acetate(mixed esters)

N032 Nonanediol diacetate

N033 1,4-Nonanediol diacetate 1,4-Nonadiol diacetate; Nonane-1,4-diyl diacetate; Nonanediol-1,4 acetate

N034 1,9-Nonanedithiol 1,9-Dimercaptononane; nonamethylene dimercaptan

N035 Nonanoic acid Nonoic acid; n-nonylic acid; Octane-1-carboxylic acid; Pelargonic acid; Nonylic acid; Nonoic

n-heptyl methyl carbinol; Methyl n-butyl carbinol; Methyl-n-Heptyl carbinol; sec-n-Nonanol; Methyl heptyl
N036 2-Nonanol carbinol
1-hydroxy-3-nonanone acetate; Ketone alcohol ester; Methylol methyl hexyl ketone acetate; 3-Oxononanyl
N037 3-Nonanon-1-yl acetate
acetate
N038 2-Nonanone Hethyl methyl ketone; Nonan-2-one; Methyl heptyl ketone; 3-Oxononyl acetate

N039 3-Nonanone Ethyl hexyl ketone; 3-Oxononanone

N040 cis-6-Nonen-1-ol cis-6-Nonenol; 6-Nonen-1-ol, (Z)-; Non-6-en-1-ol

N041 cis-2-Nonen-1-ol (Z)-2-nonen-1-ol; 2-Nonen-1-ol,(Z)-; Non-2(cis)-en-1-ol

N042 3-Nonen-2-one Methyl heptenyl ketone

N043 cis-6-Nonenal Non-6(cis)-enal; 6-Nonenal, (Z)-; cis-6-Nonen-1-al; Non-6-enal

N044 2-Nonenoic acid (E)-2-Nonenoic acid; trans-2-Nonenoic acid

N045 2-Nonenoic acid γ-lactone 5-Pentyl-5H-furan-2-one; 2(5H)-Furanone, 5-pentyl-; 2-Nonenoic acid, 4-hydroxy-, γ-lactone

1343
Order General Name Synonyms
N046 trans-2-Nonenol Non-2(trans)-en-1-ol; trans-2-nonen-1-ol

N047 Nonyl acetate Acetate C-9; Nonanol acetate; n-Nonyl acetate; Pelargonyl acetate; Nonyl ethanoate

N048 Nonyl alcohol Nonalol; Alcohol C-9; Nonanol-1; 1-nonanol; Octyl carbinol; Pelargonic alcohol; Nonan-1-ol; n-Nonyl alcohol

Nonyl isovalerianate; Nonyl 3-methylbutanoate; Nonanol isopentanoate; n-nonyl 3-methylbutanoate; Nonyl

N049 Nonyl isovalerate isopentanoate

N050 Nonyl octanoate Nonyl caprylate; n-Nonyl octoate; Nonyl octylate

4a,5-Dimethyl-1,2,3,4,4a,5,6,7-octahydro-7-keto-3-isopropenylnaphthalen; 4,4a,5,6,7,8-
N051 Nootkatone Hexahydro-6-isopropenyl-4,4a-dimethyl-2(3H)-naphthalenone; 4a,5-Dimethyl-
1,2,3,4,4a,5,6,7-keto-3-isopropenyl-naphthalene; 5,6-Dimethyl-8-isopropenyl-bicyclo- (4,4,0)-dec-1-en-3-one

1,7-Heptanedicarboxylic acid; Heptanedicarboxylic acid; Azelainic acid; Azelaic acid, technical grade;
N052 Nonanedioic acid 1,9-Nonanedioic acid; 1,7-Dicarboxyheptan;n-Nonanedioic acid
N053 (E)-4-Nonenal 4-Nonenal, (4E); (E)-Non-4-enal; trans-4-nonenal;

N054 8-Nonen-2-one Non-8-en-2-one

N055 cis-3-Nonen-1-ol (3Z)-3-Nonen-1-ol; (Z)-3-nonen-1-ol;3-Nonen-1-ol, (Z)-

N056 Non-3-enyl acetate

N057 Nonanal dimethyl acetal Nonane, 1,1-dimethoxy-; n-Nonanal dimethyl acetal; 1,1-Dimethoxynonane

N058 1-Nonen-3-ol Hexylvinylcarbinol; 1-Vinylheptanol; Non-1-en-3-ol; nonene-1-ol-3;1-Nonene-3-ol

N059 5-Nonen-(E)-2-one (5E)-5-Nonen-2-one

1344
Order General Name Synonyms
N060 Non-2-en-4-one 2-Nonen-4-one;(2E)-2-Nonen-4-one;Nonenone

N061 2,4-Nonadiene (2E,4E)-2,4-Nonadiene; (E,E) - 2,4-nonadiene;trans-2,trans-4-nonadiene

N062 Nonanal propyleneglycol acetal 2-Octyl-4-methyl-1,3-dioxolane

6-Nonen-1-ol, acetate, (z)-;(Z)-6 Nonen-1-yl acetate; (Z)-6-nonenyl acetate; (Z)-non-6-en-1-yl
N063 Non-6-enyl acetate
acetate;(6Z)-6-Nonenyl acetate
N064 2-Nonanone propyleneglycol acetal 2-heptyl-2,4-dimethyl-1,3-dioxolane

N065 E-6-Nonenal trans-6-Nonenal

N066 (±)-Naringenin (±)-5,7-Dihydroxy-2-(4-hydroxyphenyl)-4H-chroman-4-one

Glucopyranoside,3,5-dihydroxy-4-(p-hydroxyhydrocinnamoyl)phenyl2-O-(6-deoxy-alpha-L-mannopyranosyl)-,beta-
N067 Naringin dihydrochalcone D-;
1-[4-[[2-O-(6-Deoxy-alpha-L-mannopyranosyl)-beta-D-glucopyranosyl]oxy]-2,6-dihydroxyphenyl]-3-(4-hydroxyph
enyl)-1-propanone

N068 1-Nonen-3-one

O001 Ocimene 3,7-Dimethyl-1,3,6-octatriene; trans-b-Ocimene

O002 8-Ocimenyl acetate 2,6-Dimethyl-2,5,7-octatriene-1-yl acetate; Piperitanate

O003 9-Octadecenal Olealdehyde; Elialdehyde; Octadecenyl aldehyde; Oleic Aldehyde

O004 Octadien-1-ol (E,E)-2,4-Octadien-1-ol; trans-2,4-Octadienol; trans,trans-2,4-Octadien-1-ol

O005 (E,E)-3,5-Octadien-2-one Octa-3,5-dien-2-one trans, trans-3,5-Octadien-2-one; trans,trans-3,5-octadien-2-one

O006 2-trans-6-trans-Octadienal 2,6-Octadienal; Octa-2(trans),6(trans)-dienal; 2,6-Octadienal,(E,E)-; trans,trans-2,6- octadienal

O007 trans,trans-2,4-Octadienal Octa-2(trans),4(trans)-dienal; 2,4-Octadienal; (E,E)-2,4-octadienal

1345
Order General Name Synonyms
2H-1-Benzopyran-2-one, octahydro-; Bicyclononalactone; Cyclohexyl lactone;
O008 Octahydrocoumarin Octahydro-2H-1-benzopyran-2-one
4-Octanolide; 5-Butyldihydro-2(3H)-furanone; Octa-1,4-lactone; 4-n-Butyl-4- hydroxybutyric acid lactone;
O009 γ-Octalactone Octano-1,4-lactone; γ-n-Butyl-γ-butyrolactone; 4-Hydroxyoctanoic acid, γ-lactone; n-octalactone;
octanolide-1,4
5-Octanolide; 6-propyltetrahydro-2-pyrone; 5-Hydroxyoctanoic acid lactone; Octa-1,5-lactone;
5-Hydroxyoctanoic acid lactone; δ-Propyl-δ-valerolactone; 5-Propyl-5-hydroxypentanoic acid lactone;
O010 delta-Octalactone Octano-1,5-lactone; Tetrahydro-6-propyl- 5-hydroxy-2H-pyran-2-one; octanoic acid, Δ-lactone;
delta-Octalactone
(+/-)Octan-3-yl formate; 3-Octanol, formate; Oct-3-yl formate; 1-Ethylhex-1-yl formate; (+/-)-Octan-3-yl
O011 Octan-3-yl formate formate

O012 Octanal* Aldehyde C-8; Caprylaldehyde; Caprylic aldehyde; n-Octaldehyde; n-Octylaldehyde; n-Octanal; Octyl aldehyde
Aldehyde C-8 dimethyl acetal; caprylaldehyde dimethyl acetal; 1,1-Dimethoxy octane; octaldehyde dimethyl
O013 Octanal dimethyl acetal acetal; C-8 dimethylacetal; Octanal dimethyl acetal; Caprylaldehyde dimethyl acetal
O014 2,3-Octanedione Octan-2,3-dione
O015 1,8-Octanedithiol 1,8-Dimercaptooctane; Octamethylene dimercaptan

O016 Octanoic acid Carprylic acid; C-8- acid; Octoic acid; C-8; Octylic acid; 1-Heptanecarboxilic acid
Alcohol C-8; n-Caprylic alcohol; Heptyl carbinol; Octyl alcohol; Capryl alcohol; pri-octyl alcohol; n-Octyl
O017 1-Octanol alcohol; Caprylic alcohol; pri.-Octyl alcohol
Octyl alcohol, secondary; Capryl alcohol, secondary; sec-Caprylic alcohol; sec-Capryl alcohol; Methyl hexyl
O018 2-Octanol
carbinol; Hexyl methyl carbinol; sec-n-Octyl alcohol; Octan-2-ol; sec-octhyl alcohol
O019 3-Octanol Amyl ethyl carbinol; Ethyl n-amyl carbinol; d-n-Octanol; Amylethylcarbinol
O020 2-Octanone Hexyl methyl ketone; n-Hexyl methyl ketone; methyl hexyl ketone; Octan-2-one
O021 3-Octanone Amyl ethyl ketone; Ethyl amyl ketone; Ethyl-n-amyl ketone

O022 cis-3-Octen-1-ol cis-3-Octenol; 3-octen-1-ol, (Z)-; Oct-3-en-1-ol

O023 cis-5-Octen-1-ol Z-5-octen-1-ol; Oct-5(cis)-en-1-ol

O024 (E)-2-Octen-1-ol Oct-2-en-1-ol; trans-2-Octen-1-ol

O025 2-Octen-1-yl acetate Oct-2-enyl acetate; 2-Octen-1-ol, acetate, (E)-

O026 3-Octen-2-ol Methyl hexenyl carbinol; trans-3-Octen-2-ol

O027 3-Octen-2-one Methyl hexenyl ketone; Oct-3-en-2-one

1346
Order General Name Synonyms
Amyl vinyl carbinol; Matsutake alcohol; 3-octenol; n-Pentyl vinyl carbinol; Oct-1-en-3-ol; Amylvinylcarbinol;
O028 1-Octen-3-ol
Matsuka alcohol; Matsutakeol; Pentyl vinyl carbinol

O029 1-Octen-3-one Amyl vinyl ketone; Vinyl amyl ketone

Pentyl crotonyl acetate; Amyl vinyl carbinol acetate; 3-Acetoxy octene; Amyl crotonyl acetate; Amyl vinyl
O030 1-Octen-3-yl acetate carbinyl acetate; Octenyl acetate; β-octenyl acetate; n-pentyl vinyl carvinyl acetate; Matsutake acetate;
Oct-1-en-3-yl acetate; Amyl crotonyl acetate

O031 1-Octen-3-yl butyrate Butanoic acid, 1-ethenylhexyl ester; Oct-1-en-3-yl butyrate

O032 (E)-2-Octen-4-ol Oct-2-en-4-ol; trans-2-octenol-4; Butyl propenyl carbinol; 2-Octen-4-ol; trans-2-octen-4-ol

O033 2-Octen-4-one Butylpropenyl ketone; Propenyl butyl ketone ; Butyl propenyl ketone

O034 2-Octenal 2-Pentyl acrolein; α-Amyl acrolein

O035 cis-5-Octenal Oct-5(cis)-enal; 5-Octenal, (Z)-; (Z)-5-Octenal

O036 2-Octenoic acid (E)-2-Octanoic acid; trans-2-octenoic acid

trans-2-Octen-1-yl butanoate; trans-2-Octen-1-yl butyrate; Oct-2(trans)-enyl butyrate; trans-2-Octenyl

O037 trans-2-Octenyl butyrate
butyrate

O038 (Z)-5-Octenyl propionate (Z)-5-octen-1-yl propanoate; (Z)-5-octen-1-yl propionate; cis-5-Octen-1-yl propionate

O039 cis-3-Octenyl propionate Pearlate; 3-Octen-1-ol, propanoate, (Z)-

2-Hexylidene cyclopentanone and 2-hexyl-2-cyclopenten-1-one (mixture); 2-Hexyl-2-cyclopenten-1-one and
O040 (E)-2-(2-Octenyl)cyclopentanone 2-hexylidenecyclopentanone (mixture); 2-Hexylcyclopent-2-en-1-one and 2-hexylidenecyclypentanone,

1347
Order General Name Synonyms
Dihydrojasmone; n-Hexylidene cyclopentanone; 2-(2-octenyl)cyclopentanone
O041 Octyl 2-furoate 2-Furancarboxlic acid, octyl ester. Octyl 2-furancarboxylate; 2-Furoic acid

O042 Octyl 2-methylbutyrate Butanoic acid, 2-methyl-, octyl ester; Octyl-2-methylbutanoate

O043 Octyl acetate Octyl ethanoate; Acetate C-8; Capryl acetate; n-octyl acetate; 2-Ethyl hexyl acetate

O044 3-Octyl acetate n-Amyl ethyl carbinyl acetate; 1-Ethyl hexyl acetate

O045 Octyl butyrate Octyl butanoate; Octyl-n-butyrate; 3-octyl butyrate

O046 Octyl formate n-Octyl formate; Octyl formate; octyl methanoate

O047 Octyl heptanoate Octyl heptoate; Octyl heptylate; Heptanoic acid, octyl ester; Octyl oenanthate

O048 Octyl isobutyrate Octyl 2-methylpropanoate

Octyl isovalerianate; Octyl isopentanoate; Octyl 3-methylbutyrate; n-Octyl-3- methylbutyrate; Octyl

O049 Octyl isovalerate
3-methylbutanoate

O050 Octyl octanoate Octyl caprylate; n-Octyl octoate; Octyl octylate

O051 Octyl phenylacetate n-Octyl phenylacetate; Octyl-n-toluate; n-Octyl-α-toluate; Octyl α-toluate

O052 Octyl propionate Octyl propanoate

O053 2-Oxo-3-phenyl propionic acid 3-Phenylpyruvic acid; 3-Phenyl-2-oxopropanoic acid

4,4-Dimethoxy-2-butanone, Acetylaldehyde dimethylacetal; 3-Ketobutyraldehyde dimethyl acetal; Acetyl
O054 3-Oxobutanal dimethyl acetal
acetaldehyde, dimethyl acetal; 1,1-Dimethyl-oxy-3-butanone; 4,4- Dimethoxybutan-2-one
O055 2-Oxobutyric acid Butanoic acid, 2-oxo-; α-Ketobutyric acid; Ketobutyric acid
Glyceryl ester of 3-oxodecanoic acid; 2,3-Dihydroxypropyl 3-oxodecanoate; Glyceryl β-ketodecanoate; Glyceryl
O056 3-Oxodecanoic acid glyceride monoester of 3-oxodecanoic acid
Glyceryl ester of 3-oxododecanoic acid; 2,3-Dihydroxypropyl 3-oxododecanoate; Glyceryl β-ketododecanoate;
O057 3-Oxododecanoic acid glyceride Glyceryl monoester of 3-oxododecanoic acid
Glyceryl ester of 3-oxohexadecanoic acid; 2,3-Dihydroxypropyl 3-oxohexadecanoate; Glyceryl
O058 3-Oxohexadecanoic acid glyceride β-ketohexadecanoate; Glyceryl monoester of 3-oxohexadecanoic acid

1348
Order General Name Synonyms
Glyceryl ester of 3-oxohexanoic acid; 2,3-Dihydroxypropyl 3-oxohexanoate; Glyceryl β-ketohexanoate; Glyceryl
O059 3-Oxohexanoic acid glyceride diester of 3-oxohexanoic acid

Glyceryl ester of 3-oxooctanoic acid; 2,3-Dihydroxypropyl 3-oxoctanoate; Glyceryl β-ketooctanoate; Glyceryl

O060 3-Oxooctanoic acid glyceride monoester of 3-oxooctanoic acid

O061 2-Oxopentanedioic acid 2-Oxoglutaric acid; 2-Ketoglutaric acid; α-Ketoglutaric acid; 2-Oxo-1,5-pentanedioic acid
Glyceryl ester of 3-oxotetradecanoic acid; 2,3-Dihydroxypropyl 3-oxotetradecanoate; Glyceryl
O062 3-Oxotetradecanoic acid glyceride β-ketotetradecanoate; Glyceryl monoester of 3-oxotetradecanoic acid
O063 1-Octene α-Octene; α-Octylene; n-1-Octene; Caprylene; Oct-1-ene; OCTENE-1; Neodene 8; Octylene
n-Octadecanol; n-Octadecyl alcohol; n-1-Octadecanol; Octadecyl alcohol; Stearol; Stearyl alcohol; Stenol;
O064 Octadecan-1-ol Steraffine; Decyl octyl alcohol; 1-Hydroxyoctadecane; Octadecanol;Octanodecanol;1-Octadecanol
9-Octadecen-1-ol, (Z)-; cis-9-Octadecen-1-ol; cis-9-Octadecenyl Alcohol; (Z)-9-Octadecen-1-ol;
O065 cis-9-Octadecenol
Octadec-9-en-1-ol; Octadec-9Z-enol; (9Z)-9-Octadecen-1-ol;Oleic alcohol;Octadec-9-en-1-ol;Oleyl Alcohol
O066 Oleyl acetate

O067 2-Octylthiophene 2-n-Octylthiophene;Thiophene, 2-octyl-

O068 3-octenoic acid octenoic acid

O069 Octyl hexanoate Hexanoic acid, Octyl ester;n-Octyl hexanoate

O070 4,5-Octanedione(Octane-4,5-dione) n-Octane-4,5-dione; Bibutyryl; 4,5-Octadione

O071 Ocimenol 2,6-Dimethyl-5,7-octadien-2-ol; (5E)-2,6-Dimethyl-5,7-octadien-2-ol;5,7-Octadien-2-ol, 2,6-dimethyl-

O072 4-Octen-3-one Oct-4-en-3-one; (4E)-4-Octen-3-one

O073 trans-4-Octenoic acid

O074 Octane-1,3-diol Propane-1,3-diol, 1-pentyl-;1,3-Octanediol

O075 cis-5-Octenoic acid octenoic acid

O076 cis-4-Octenol octenol

1349
Order General Name Synonyms

O077 Octanal diethyl acetal 1,1-Diethoxyoctane;n-Octanal diethyl acetal;Octane, 1,1-diethoxy-

O078 1,5-Octadien-3-one Octa-1,5-dien-3-one;octadien

O079 Octa-3,5-dien-1-ol

O080 Octanal propylene glycol acetal

O081 Octa-1,5-dien-3-ol

O082 Oleic acid Oleinic acid; trans-Elaidic acid; (Z)-Octadeca-9-enoic acid

O083 1,5-Octadien-3-ol Octa-1,5-dien-3-ol; Octa-1,5-dien-3-ol, (E)-isomer

O084 Octahydro-4,8a-dimethyl-4a(2H)-naphthol Geosmin; Octahydro-4,8a-dimethyl-4a(2H)-naphthol; 4,8a-Dimethyloctahydronaphthalen-4a(2H)-ol;

4a(2H)-Naphthalenol, octahydro-4,8a-dimethyl-1,10-Dimethyl-9-decalol

O085 (R)-(-)-1-Octen-3-ol (R)-Oct-1-en-3-ol

O086 cis-5-Octenyl acetate (5Z)-Octen-1-ol acetate; (Z)-5-Octenyl acetate; cis-5-Octenyl acetate; (5Z)-Oct-5-en-1-yl acetate

O087 2-Octyl-2-dodecenal

5-Tridecanolide; 6-Octyltetrahydro-2H-pyran-2-one; Tetrahydro-6-octyl-2H-pyran-2-one; delta-Tridecalactone;

O088 (±)-6-Octyltetrahdro-2H-pyran-2-one 5-Hydroxytridecanoic acid delta lactone; delta-Octylvalerolactone; Trideca-1,5-lactone

s-Trioxane; 2,4,6-Trimethyl-1,3,5-trioxane; Acetaldehyde, trimer; Elaldehyde; paracetaldehyde;

P001 Paraldehyde
2,4,6-Trimethyl-1,3,5-trioxacyclohexane

P002 Pent-2-enyl hexanoate 2-Penten-1-yl hexanoate

P003 omega-Pentadecalactone Angelicalactone; Exaltolide; 15-Hydroxypentadecanoic acid; w-Lactonel pentadecanolide; Thibetolide;

1350
Order General Name Synonyms
15-Pentadecanolide; Oxacyclohexadecan-2-one; Pentadeca-1,5-lactone; Cyclopentadecanolide; Pentadecanolide;
Muscolactone; 14-Oxytetradecane carbonic acid lactone; Pentadecano-1,15-lactone; Pentalide;
omega-Pentadecalactone; 15-Hydroxytetradecanoic acid lactone; 1,15-Epoxypentadecan-1-one
P004 2-Pentadecanone Methyl tridecyl ketone; Pentadecan-2-one; 2-Oxopentadecane
P005 2,4-Pentadienal
P006 2,3-Pentadione β,γ-Dioxopentane; Pentan-2,3-dione; Acetyl propionyl; 2,3-Pentanedione
P007 2-Pentanethiol sec-Amylmercaptan; 2-Mercaptopentane; 1-Methylbutanethiol; 2-Pentyl mercaptan
P008 2-Pentanol Propyl methyl carbinol; α-Methylbutanol; sec-amyl Alcohol; Methyl n-propyl carbinol; sec-n-Amyl alcohol

P009 2-Pentanone Propyl methyl ketone; Ethyl acetone; Methyl propyl ketone; Pentane-2-one
P010 2-Pentanoylfuran 1-(2-Furanyl)-1-pentanone; Butyl 2-furyl ketone; 1-Pentanone, 1-(2-furanyl)-; 1-Pentanone, 1-(2-furyl)-
P011 3-Penten-2-one Ethylidene acetone; methyl propenyl ketone
P012 1-Penten-3-ol Vinyl ethyl carbinol; Ethyl vinyl carbinol; Pent-1-en-3-ol; B-Pentenol
P013 1-Penten-3-one Ethyl vinyl ketone; propionyl ethylene
P014 2-Penten-3-one 2-Pentylpyridine; 2-Amylpyridine
P015 2-Pentenal 3-Ethyl-2-propenal; 3-Ethylacrolein; 2-Ethylacrylic aldehyde
P016 4-Pentenoic acid Pent-4-enoic acid; Allyl acetate; allyl acetic acid
P017 2-Pentenoic acid Pent-2-enoic acid; Pent-2-en-1-oic acid
P018 4-Pentenyl acetate 4-Penten-1-ol, acetate; 4-Penten-1-yl acetate; 5-Acetoxy-1-pentene; 1-Acetoxy-4- Pentene
P019 Pentyl 2-furyl ketone 2-Furyl pentyl ketone; 2-Hexanoylfuran; 1-(2-furyl-1-hexanone)
P020 2-Pentyl acetate 1-Methylbutyl acetate, 2-Pentanol acetate

P021 2-Pentyl butyrate 1-Methylbutyl butyrate; 2-pentyl butanoate; Pent-2-yl butyrate

P022 2-Pentyl-1-buten-3-one 3-Methylene-2-octanone; 2-Octanoic acid, 3-methylene-

Pentylamine; 1-Aminopentane; 1-Pentylamine; Amylamine; Monoamylamine; Monopentylamine; n-Amylamine;

P023 Pentylamine n-Pentylamine; Norleucamine

1351
Order General Name Synonyms
P024 2-Pentylfuran 2-Amylfuran
p-Mentha-1,5-diene; 1-methyl-4-propyl-iso-1,5-cyclohexadiene; Dihydro-p-cymene;
5-propyl-iso-2-methyl-1,3-cyclohexadiene; 4-Propyl-iso-1-methyl-1,5-cyclohexadiene;
P025 α-Phellandrene 1-Proypl-iso-4-methyl-2,4-cyc;Ohexadiene; 1-Isopropyl-4-methyl-2,4-cyclohexadiene;
4-Isopropyl-1-methyl-1,5-cyclohexadiene; 5-Isopropyl-2-methyl-1,3-cyclohexadiene;
1-Methyl-4-isopropyl-1,5-cyclohexadiene; 2-Methyl-5-isopropyl-1,3-cyclohexadiene; ; Phellandrene
P026 Phenethyl 2-furoate 2-Furancarboxylic acid; 2-phenethyl ester; 2-Phenethyl 2-furoate
β-Phenethyl α-methylbutanoate; Benzylcarbinyl 2-methylbutyrate; 2-Phenylethyl 2-methylbutanoate; Anatolyl;
P027 Phenethyl 2-methylbutyrate Benzyl carbinyl ethyl methyl acetate; phenethyl-α- methylbutanoate

P028 Phenethyl acetate* Benzyl carbinyl acetate; 2-Phenylethyl acetate

2-Phenylethyl alcohol; Benzylmethanol; 1-Phenyl-2-ethanol; 2-Phenylethan-1-ol; Benzyl carbinol;

P029 Phenethyl alcohol 2-Phenylethanol; phenylethyl alcohol; β-Phenyethyl alcohol
2-Aminoethylbenzene; 2-Phenylethylamine; β-Phenylethylamine; 1-amino-2- phenylethane; β-Aminoethyl
P030 Phenethyl amine
benzene

P031 Phenethyl anthranilate 2-Phenylethyl anthranilate; Benzyl carbinyl anthranilate; β-Phenylethyl-o- aminobenzoate
P032 Phenethyl benzoate Benzylcarbinyl benzoate; 2-Phenylethyl benzoate

P033 Phenethyl butyrate 2-Phenylethyl butyrate; benzylcarbinyl butyrate; 2-Phenylethyl butanoate; β-Phenethyl-n-butanoate
2-phenylethyl cinnamate; β-Phenethyl-β-phenylacrylate; Benzylcarbinyl 3-phenylpropenoate; 2-Phenylethyl
P034 Phenethyl cinnamate 3-phenylpropenoate; Benzyl carbinyl cinnamate; Phenylethyl-β-phenyacrylate;
β-Phenethyl-3-phenylpropenoate; Benzylcarbinyl cinnamate
2-Phenylethyl methanoate; Benzylcarbinyl methanoate; Phenylethyl formate; Benzyl carbinyl formate; Phenethyl
P035 Phenethyl formate methanoate; 2-Phenylethyl formate
Benzylcarbinyl octanoate; 2-phenylethyl caprylate; Phenyl ethyl caproate; β-phenethyl hexoate; benzyl
P036 Phenethyl hexanoate carbinyl hexylate; Benzylcarbinyl hexanoate; 2-Phenethyl hexanoate; 2-Phenylethyl caproate; 2-Phenylethyl
hexanoate; Benzylcarbinyl caproate
Benzylcarbinyl isobutyrate; Phenethyl 2-methylpropanoate; Benzylcarbinyl 2-methylpropanoate; 2-Phenylethyl
P037 Phenethyl isobutyrate
isobutyrate
Benzene, (2-isothiocyanatoethyl)-, Isothiocyanic acid, phenethyl ester; β-Phenethyl isothiocyanate;
P038 Phenethyl isothiocyanate 2-Phenylethyl isothiocyanate; Phenethyl mustard oil
Phenethyl isovalerianate; Benzylcarbinyl isovalerate; Benzylcarbinyl 3-methylbutanoate; 2-phenylethyl
P039 Phenethyl isovalerate 3-methylbutanoate; benzylcarbinyl isopentanoate; Benzyl carbinyl isovalerianate; Phenethyl isopentanoate;
Phenethyl-3-methylbutyrate; 2-phenylethyl isovalerate

1352
Order General Name Synonyms
P040 Phenethyl mercaptan 2-Phenylethane-1-thiol; 2-Phenylethanethiol; 2-Phenethylthiol; 2-Phenylethanethiol
Phenyl ethyl caprylate; Phenethyl octoate; phenyl ethyl octanoate; Benzyl carbinyl octylate; 2-Phenylethyl
P041 Phenethyl octanoate
octanoate, Benzylcarbinyl octanoate; 2-Phenylethyl caprylate
2-Phenylethyl α-toluate; Benzylcarbinyl α-toluate; Benzyl carbinyl Phenylacetate; 2-Phenylethyl
P042 Phenethyl phenylacetate phenylacetate; phenethyl-α-toluate

P043 Phenethyl propionate 2-Phenylethyl propanoate; Benzyl carbinyl propionate; 2-Phenylethyl propionate; Phenylethyl propionate

2-Phenylethyl 2-hydroxybenzoate; Benzylcarbinyl 2-hydroxybenzoate; Benzyl carbinyl salicylate;

P044 Phenethyl salicylate Phenethyl-2-hydroxybenzoate; Phenethyl-o-hydroxybenzoate; 2-Phenylethyl salicylate; 2-Phenylethyl salicylate;
Benzylcarbinyl salicylate

2-Phenylethyl senecioate; 2-Phenylethyl 3-methyl-2-butenoate; 2-Phenethyl 3-methylcrotonate;

P045 Phenethyl senecioate Phenethyl-3,3-dimethylacrylate; Phenethyl-3-methyl-2-butenoate; phenethyl-3-methylcrotonate; Phenethyl
3,4-dimethylacrylate

2-Phenylethyl tiglate; 2-Phenylethyl-trans-2-methylbutenoate; 2-Phenylethyl- rans-2,3-dimethylacrylate;

Phenethyl 2-methylcrotonate; Benzyl carbinyl tiglate; Phenethyl trans-2,3-dimethylacrylate; Phenethyl
P046 Phenethyl tiglate trans-2-methylbutenoate; Phenethyl trans-2-methylcrotonate; Phenylethyl tiglate; (E)-2-Phenylethyl
2-methylbutenoate

P047 Phenol Carbolic acid; Benzenol; Hydroxybenzene; Phenic or phenylic acid; Phenyl hydroxide; oxybenzene

P048 Phenoxyacetic acid phenylium; Glycoic acid phenyl ether; Phenoxyethanoic acid; o-Phenylglycolic acid

2-Phenoxyethyl 2-methylpropanoate; Ethyleneglycol monophenylether, isobutyrate; 2-Phenoxyethyl isobutanoate;

P049 2-Phenoxyethyl isobutyrate
Phenylcellosolve isobutyrate; Phenoxyethyl isobutyrate; Floranol

(Acetyloxy)benzene; Phenol acetatel; Acetoxybenzene; Acetic acid, phenyl ester; Phenol acetate;
P050 Phenyl acetate Acetoxybenzene

P051 Phenyl disulfide Diphenyl disulfide; phenyldithiobenzene; Biphenyl disulfide

P052 Phenyl salicylate Phenyl-2-hydroxybenzoate; 2-Hydroxybenzenoic acid, Phenyl ester; Salol

1353
Order General Name Synonyms

P053 1-Phenyl-(3 or 5)-propylpyrazole 1-Phenyl-3 or 5-propyl-1,2-diazole; 1-Phenyl-3 or 5-propyl-1,2-diaxole; 1H-pyrazole, 1-phenyl-3(or 5)-propyl-

P054 1-Phenyl-1,2-propanedione Phenyl methyl diketone; Acety benzoyl; Methyl phenyl diketone; Methyl phenyl glyoxal

α-Ethylbenzyl alcohol; α-Hydroxypropylbenzene;1-Phenylpropyl alcohol; Dihydro isocinnamic alcohol;

P055 1-Phenyl-1-propanol Dihydro-α-phenyl allyl alcohol; Ethyl phenyl carbinol; phenyl ethyl carbinol; sec-Phenyl propyl alcohol;
1-Phenylpropanol

Dihydrocinnamyl alcohol; Benzyl ethyl alcohol; Hydrocinnamyl alcohol; Phenyl propyl alcohol; 3-Phenylpropanol,
P056 3-Phenyl-1-propanol Phenethyl carbinol; 3-hydroxy-1-phenylpropane; (3-Hydroxypropyl)benzene

P057 4-Phenyl-2-butanol Methyl 2-phenylethyl carbinol; Methyl phenylethyl carbinol;Phenylethyl methyl carbinol

P058 2-Phenyl-2-butenal 2-Phenyl crotonaldehyde; 2-Phenyl-but-2-en-1-al

1-Methyl-3-phenylpropyl acetate; Phenylethyl methyl carbinyl acetate; 1-Methyl-3- phenylpropyl acetate;

P059 4-Phenyl-2-butyl acetate Methyl phenyl ethyl carbinyl acetate; 4- Phenyl-2-butyl acetate

3-(2-Furyl)-2-phenylprop-2-enal; Benzeneacetaldehyde, α-(2-furanylmethylene)-, (E)-;

P060 2-Phenyl-3-(2-furyl) prop-2-enal 2-Furfurylidenephenylacetaldehyde

P061 4-Phenyl-3-buten-2-ol Methyl styryl carbinol; Homocinnamyl alcohol; α- Methylcinnamyl alcohol

Benzilideneacetone; Benzylidene acetone; cinnamyl methyl ketone; Methyl styryl ketone; Methyl cinnamyl
P062 4-Phenyl-3-buten-2-one ketone; 4- Phenylbut-3-en-2-one; Acetocinnamone; Benzalacetone

P063 2-Phenyl-3-carbethoxyfuran Ethyl 2-phenyl-3-furoate; 3-furanecarboxylic acid, 2-phenyl-, ethyl ester; Phenyl oxaromate

1354
Order General Name Synonyms
3-Methyl-1-phenylpentan-3-ol; Methyl ethyl phenylethyl carbinol; 3-methyl-1-phenyl- -entanol; Phenylethyl
P064 1-Phenyl-3-methyl-3-pentanol methyl ethyl carbinol; 3-Methyl-1-phenyl-3-pentanol;

P065 (+/-)-2-Phenyl-4-methyl-2-hexenal Benzeneacetaldehyde, α-(2-methylbutylidene)-; 2-Hexenal, 4-methyl-2-phenyl-

P066 3-Phenyl-4-pentenal 3-Phenyl-3-vinylpropionaldehyde; β-Vinylhydrocinnamaldehyde

P067 2-Phenyl-4-pentenal Benzeneacetaldehyde, α-2-propenyl

Phenylacetic aldehyde; benzylcarboxaldehyde; Hyacinthin; 1-Oxo-2-phenylethane; α-Toluic aldehyde;

P068 Phenylacetaldehyde
α-Tolualdehyde; α-toly aldehyde; Phenylacetic aldehyde; Benzylcarboxyaldehyde,1-Oxo-2-

P069 Phenylacetaldehyde 2,3-butylene glycol acetal 2-Benzyl-4,5-dimethyl-1,3-dioxane; 4,5-Dimethyl-2-benzyl-1,3-dioxolan; 2-Benzyl- ,5-dimethyl-1,3-dioxolane

P070 Phenylacetaldehyde diisobutyl acetal 1,1-Diisobutoxy-2-phenylethane; 1,1-Di(2-methylpropoxy)-2-phenylethane

Viridine; rosal; Vertodor; 1,1-Dimethoxy-2-phenylethane; α-Toluic aldehyde dimethylacetal; α-Tolyl aldehyde

P071 Phenylacetaldehyde dimethyl acetal dimethyl acetal
5-Hydroxy-2-benzyl-1,3-dioxane and 4-hydroxymethyl-2-benzyl-1,3- dioxolane mixture);
P072 Phenylacetaldehyde glyceryl acetal
5-Hydroxymethyl-2-benzyl-1,3-dioxolane; 5-Hydroxymethyl-2- benzyl-1,3-dioxolane

P073 Phenylacetic acid Benzylcarboxylic acid; α-Toluic acid

P074 (+/-)-1-Phenylethylmercaptan Benzenemethanethiol, α-methyl, (+/-); 1-Phenylethanethiol,(+/-)

P075 5-Phenylpentanol Benzenepentanol; Phenylamyl alcohol; Benzenepentan-1-ol

1355
Order General Name Synonyms

2-Biphenylol; [1,1'-Biphenyl]-2-ol; Dowicide;1, 2-Hydroxy-1,1'-biphenyl; o-Hydroxybiphenyl; o-Phenylphenol,;

P076 2-Phenylphenol Biphenyl-2-ol; (1-1'-biphenyl)-2-ol; 2-Hydroxydiphenyl; o-Hydroxydiphenyl; Torsite; Xenol; 2-Biphenylol

P077 2-Phenylpropan-1-ol Hydratropic alcohol; Hydratropyl alcohol; 2-Phenylpropyl alcohol; b-Methylphenethyl alcohol

3-Phenylpropanal; Benzyl acetaldehyde; Dihydrocinnamic aldehyde; hydrocinnamaldehyde; hydrocinnamic

P078 3-Phenylpropionaldehyde
aldehyde; β-Phenyl propionaldehyde; β-Phenyl propionaldehyde; Phenylpropyl aldehyde; Benzenepropanal
β-Phenylpropionic acid; Dihydrocinnamic acid; Benzylacetic acid; Hydrocinnamic acid; γ-phenylpropionic acid;
P079 3-Phenylpropionic acid Benzenepropanoic acid

β-Phenylpropyl acetate; Phenylpropyl acetate; Hydrocinnamyl acetate; Benzenepropanol acetate;

P080 3-Phenylpropyl acetate
3-Phenyl-1-propyl acetate
Hydratropyl butyrate; β-methyl phenethyl butyrate; α-Phenylpropyl alcohol, butyric ester;
P081 2-Phenylpropyl butyrate 2-Phenylpropyl-n-butyrate

Hydrocinnamyl 3-phenylpropenoate; β-Phenylpropyl cinnamate; 3-Phenylpropyl 3-phenylpropenoate;

P082 3-Phenylpropyl cinnamate Hydrocinnamyl cinnamate; 3-Phenylpropyl-β-phenylacrylate; 3-Phenylpropyl-3-phenyl-2-propenoate;
Phenylpropyl cinnamate

Hydrocinnamyl methanoate; β-Phenylpropyl formate; 3-Phenylpropyl methanoate; Hydrocinnamyl formate;

P083 3-Phenylpropyl formate 3-Phenyl-1-propyl methanoate; Benzenepropanol formate; Phenylpropyl formate
Hydrocinnamyl caproate; Hydrocinnamyl hexanoate; 3-Phenylpropyl caproate; Phenylpropyl capronate;
P084 3-Phenylpropyl hexanoate phenylpropyl hexylate
Hydratopyl isobutyrate; α-Phenylpropyl alcohol, isobutyric ester; 2-Methyl-2- henylethyl 2-methylpropanoate;
P085 2-Phenylpropyl isobutyrate Hydratropyl 2-methylpropanoate; 2-Phenylpropyl 2-methylpropanoate; 2-α-Phenylpropyl alcohol, isobutyric
ester
3-phenylpropyl 2-methylpropanoate; β-phenylpropyl 2-methylpropanoate; hydrocinnamyl 2-methylpropanoate;
P086 3-Phenylpropyl isobutyrate Hydrocinnamyl isobutyrate
3-Phenylpropyl isovalerianate; Hydrocinnamyl 3-methylbutanoate; 3-phenylpropyl 3-methylbutanoate;
P087 3-Phenylpropyl isovalerate 3-Phenylpropyl isopentanoate; β-Phenylpropyl 3-methylbutanoate; Hydrocinnamyl isovalerate;
3-Phenylpropyl-β-methylbutyrate; 3-Phenylpropyl isovaleriate

Hydrocinnamyl propionate; 3-Phenylpropyl propanoate; β-Phenylpropyl propionate; Benzenepropanol

P088 3-Phenylpropyl propionate propionate; Phenylpropyl propionate; β-Phenylpropyl propanoate

1356
Order General Name Synonyms

P089 2-(3-Phenylpropyl)pyridine Pyridine, 2-(3-phenylpropyl)-

P090 2-(3-Phenylpropyl)tetrahydrofuran 2-Hydrocinnamyl tetrahydrofuran; α-(3-Phenylpropyl)-tetrahydrofuran

P091 Phthalide 2-Hydroxymethylbenzoic acid γ lactone; α-Hydroxy-o-toluic acid lactone; 1(3H)-Isobenzofuranone

P092 Phytol

P093 Phytyl acetate

P094 3-Pinanone Isopinocamphone; Bicyclo[3.1.1]heptan-3-one, 2,6,6-trimethyl-

P095 Pine tar oil

Bicyclo[3.1.1]heptan-3-ol, 6,6-dimethyl-2-methylene-; 6,6-Dimethyl-3-hydroxy-2-

P096 2(10)-Pinen-3-ol methylenebicyclo(3.1.1)heptane; pinocarveol; Pinocarveol; 2(10)-Pinenol-3

P097 α-Pinene Pinene; Pin-2(3)-enel; 2-Pinene; 2,6,6-Trimethylbicyclo-(3,1,1)-2-heptene; Pin-2(3)-ene

6,6-Dimethyl-2-methylenebicyclo -(3,1,1)-heptane; Pseudopinene; Pin-2(10)-ene; 6,6-Dimethyl-2-methylene

P098 β-Pinene norpinane; nopinene; 2(10)-pinene

1,4-Diazocyclohexane; 1,4-Piperazine; Antiren; Diethylenediamine; Dispermine; Eraverm; Hexahydropyrazine;

P099 Piperazine Lumbrical; Piperizidine; Pipersol; Pyrazine hexahydride

P100 Piperidine Hexahydropyridine; Hexazane; Pentamethylenimine

P101 Piperine Piperoylpiperidine; 1-Piperolypiperidine

P102 Piperitenone oxide 7-Oxabicyclo[4.1.0]heptan-2-one, 6-methyl-3-(1-methylethylidene)-; 1,2-Epoxy-p- menth-4-(8)-en-3-one

1357
Order General Name Synonyms

d-piperitone; α-piperitone; 1-Methyl-4-isopropyl-1-cyclohexen-3-one; 4-Propyl-iso-1-

P103 Piperitone ethyl-1-cyclohexen-3-one; p-Menth-1-en-3-one; 4-isopropyl-1-methyl-1- yclohexen- -one,
6-Isopropyl-3-methylcyclohex-2-enone

2-Cyclohexen-1-one, 3-Methyl-6-isopropyl, (6R)-; 2-Cyclohexen-1-one, 3-methyl-6- 1-methylethyl)-,(6R)-;

P104 L-Piperitone p-Menth-1-en-3-one; (-)-Piperitone

Dioxymethylene protocatechuic aldehyde; Heliotropine; 3,4-methylenedioxy- benzaldehyde; piperonylaldehyde;

P105 Piperonal * Protocatechualdehyde methylene ether

P106 Piperonyl acetate Heliotropin acetate; 1,3-Benzodioxole-5-methaol, acetate; Heliotropyl acetate; 3,4-Methylenedioxybenzyl acetate

4-(3,4-methylenedioxyphenyl)2-butanone; Dulcinyl; 2-Butanone, 4-(1,3-benzodioxol-5- l); Dulcinyl; Heliotropyl

P107 Piperonyl acetone acetone

3,4-Methylenedioxybenzyl 2-methylpropanoate; piperonyl 2-methylpropanoate; heliotropyl 2-methylpropanoate;

P108 Piperonyl isobutyrate Heliotropyl isobutyrate; 3,4-Methylenedioxybenzyl isobutyrate; Piperonyl 2-methylpropionate

P109 Polylimonene

P110 Potassium 2-(1'-ethoxy)ethoxypropanoate 1-Ethoxyethyl ether of potassium lactate; potassium O-(1'-ethoxy)ethoxypropanoate

P111 Potassium acetate

P112 Prenyl caproate Hexanoic acid, 3-methyl-2-butenyl ester

3-Methylbuten-2-yl acetate, 2-Buten-1-ol, 3-methyl-, acetate; 2-Buten-1-ol, 3-methyl-, acetate;
P113 Prenyl acetate
3-Methyl-2-butenyl acetate
Benzoic acid, hexyl ester; 2-Buten-1-ol, 3-methyl-, benzoate; 3-Methyl-2-butenyl benzoate; Benzoic acid,
P114 Prenyl benzoate 3-methyl-2-butenyl ester
P115 Prenyl formate 2-Buten-1-ol, 3-methyl-,formate; Methanoic acid, 3-methyl-2-butenyl ester
P116 Prenyl isobutyrate Propanoic acid, 2-methyl-, 3-; Methyl-2-butenyl ester; Isobutyric acid, 3-methyl-2- butenyl ester

1358
Order General Name Synonyms

S-Prenyl thioacetate; S-(3-methyl-2-butenyl)acetothioate, S-3-methyl-2-butenyl ethanethioate;

P117 Prenyl thioacetate 3-methyl-3-butenyl thioacetate; Ethanethioic acid, S-(3-methyl-2-buten-1-yl) ester; Thioacetic acid,
S-(3-methyl-but-2-en-1-yl) ester

P118 Prenylthiol 3-Methyl-2-buten-1-thiol, Prenyl mercaptan; 3-Methyl-2-butenyl mercaptan; 3-Methyl-2-butenthiol-1

P119 1,2-Propanedithiol 1,2- Dimercaptopropane

P120 1,3-Propanedithiol 1,3-Dimercaptopropane; trimethylene dimercaptan

P121 Propanethiol n-Thiopropyl alcohol; n-Propyl mercaptan; Propylthiol; 1-Propanethiol; 1-Propane- 1-thiol; Propyl mercaptan

P122 2-Propanethiol Isopropyl mercaptan

P123 Propenyl propyl disulfide 1-Propenyl propyl disulfide; Prop-1-enyl propyl disulfide

4-Prophenyl-2,6-dimethoxy phenol; 2,6-Dimethoxy-4-prop-1-enylphenol; 6-Methoxyisoeugenol; phenol,

P124 Propenyl-2,6-dimethoxyphenol 2,6-dimethoxy-4-(1-propenyl)-, (E)-; 4-propenylsyringol
Vanitrope; Ethoxyprop-3-enylphenol; 6-Ethoxy-m-anol; 1-ethoxy-2-hydroxy-4- propenylbenzene;
P125 Propenylguaethol 2-Ethoxy-5-propenylphenol; hydroxymethyl anethole; 2-Propwnyl-6 -ethoxyphenol; 6- Ethoxyprop-3-enylphenol;
5-Propenylguaethol; 3-Propenyl-6- ethoxyphenol

P126 (Z)-4-Propenylphenol Phenol, 4-(1-propenyl)-isochavicol

P127 Propionaldehyde Methylacetaldehyde; Propanal; Propyl aldehyde; Propion aldehyde; Propan-1-al; Aldehyde c-3

P128 Propionic acid* Methylacetic acid; Ethylformic acid; Propanoic acid

1-Propanone, 1-(4,5-dihydro-2-thiazoly)-; 1-(4,5-Dihydro-1,3-thiazol-2-yl)-1- propanone; 1-Propanone,

P129 2-Propionyl-2-thiazoline
1-(2-thiazolin-2-yl)-

1359
Order General Name Synonyms
P130 2-Propionylpyrrole Ethyl 2-pyrrolyl ketone; 1-(2-Pyrrolyl)-1-propanone

P131 2-Propionylpyrroline 1-(3,4-Dihydro-2H-pyrrol-5-yl)-1-propanone

P132 2-Propionylthiazole 1-Propanone, 1-(5-methyl-2-furanyl)-; 1-(2-Thiazoly)-1-propanone; Thiazole, 2-propionyl-

Phenyl ethyl ketone; 1-phenyl-1-propanone; 1-Propanone, 1-phenyl-; Propionylbenzene; 1-Phenyl-1-propanone,

P133 Propiophenone Ethyl phenyl ketone; Propiophenone

P134 Propyl 2,4-decadienoate Propyl deca-2,4-dienoate

Propyl-3-(2-furyl)-2-propenoate; Propyl 3-(2-furyl)acrylate; Propyl β-furylacrylate; propyl-3-furylpropenoate;

P135 Propyl 2-furanacrylate
propyl 3(2-furyl)propenoate; Propyl furanacrylate; Propyl furylacrylate
Furancarboxylic acid, propyl ester; propyl furan-2-carboxylate; n-Propyl pyromucate; 2-Furoic acid; n-Propyl
P136 Propyl 2-furoate furan-2-carboxylate

P137 Propyl 2-mercaptopropionate 2-Mercaptopropanoic acid, propyl ester; Propyl 2-sulfanylpropanoate

P138 Propyl 2-methyl-3-furyl disulfide 2-Methyl-3-furyl propyl disulfide; 2-Methyl-3-(propyldithio)furan

P139 Propyl acetate Propyl ethanoate; n-Propyl acetate

Ethylcarbinol; Albacol; optal; 1-Propanol; Propylic alcohol; n-Propyl alcohol; n-propanol; Propylic alcohol;
P140 Propyl alcohol Propan-1-ol
4-Propylmethoxybenzene; 1-Methoxy-4-propylbenzene; Dihydroanethole; 1-Methoxy- 4-n-propylbenzene; Methyl
P141 p-Propyl anisole p-propylphenyl ether; Propylmethoxybenzene; p-Propylanisole; p-n-Propyl anisole; 4-Propylmethoxybenzene;

P142 Propyl benzoate n-Propyl benzenecarboxylate; n-Propyl benzoate; Propyl phenyl methanoate

P143 Propyl butyrate n-Propyl-n-butanoate; n-Propyl butyrate; Propyl butanoate

n-Propyl cinnamate; Propyl-β-phneyl acrylate; Propyl-3-phenylpropenoate; n-Propyl 3-phenylpropenoate;

P144 Propyl cinnamate n-Propyl β-phenylacrylate

P145 Propyl disulfide

1360
Order General Name Synonyms

P146 Propyl formate n-Propyl formate; n-Propyl methanoate

P147 propyl furfuryl disulfide 2-[(propyldithio)methyl]-furan; Furfuryl propyl disulfide

P148 Propyl heptanoate n-Propyl heptoate; n-propyl heptylate; Propyl heptylate; Propyl heptoate; Propyl oenanthate

P149 Propyl hexanoate n-Propyl caproate; n-Propyl-n-hexoate; n-Propyl hexylate; Propyl caproate

P150 Propyl isobutyrate n-Propyl isobutyrate; n-Proypl-2-methylpropanoate

Propyl isovalerianate; Propyl 3-methylbutanoate; Propyl isopentampate; propyl 3-methylbutyrate; n-Propyl
P151 Propyl isovalerate isovalerate; n-propyl-β-methylbutyrate; n-propyl methylbutyrate

P152 Propyl phenylacetate n-Propyl-α-toluate; Propyl α-toluate; Propyl α-Toluate

Propyl 4-hydroxybenzoate; Benzoic acid, p-hydroxy-, propyl ester; Preserval P; propyl chemosept;
P153 Propyl p-hydroxybenzoate Propylparasept; Propylparaben

P154 Propyl propionate Propyl propanoate; n-Propyl propionate

P155 Propyl thioacetate Acetic acid, thiopropy ester; S-propyl thioacetate, Propanethiol acetate; Ethanethioic acid, S-propyl ester

P156 4-Propyl-2,6-dimethoxyphenol 2,6-Dimethoxy-4-propylphenol; Phenol, 2,6-dimethyoxy-4-propyl; 4-Propylsyringol

P157 Propylamine 1-Aminopropane; 1-Propylamine; Mono-n-propylamine; Monopropylamine; n-Propylamine; Propan-1-ylamine

P158 Propylene glycol dibenzoate 1,2-Propanediol dibenzoate

Propylene glycol monostearate; Propylene glycol octadecanoate; Octadecanoic acid, 2-hydroxypropyl ester;
P159 Propylene glycol stearate
Propylene glycol monooctadecanoate

P160 3-Propylidenephthalide Celeiax

Benzylpropyl carbinol; Benzylbutyl alcohol; Benzyl-n-propyl carbinol; 1-Phenyl-2- pentanol;

P161 α-Propylphenethyl alcohol 1-phenylpentan-2-ol; n-propyl benzyl carbinol

1361
Order General Name Synonyms

P162 o-Propylphenol 1-(2-Hydroxyphenyl)propane; phenol, 2-propyl-; 2-Propylphenol

P163 p-Propylphenol Phenol, 4-propyl-; 4-Propylphenol; 1-(4-Hydroxyphenyl)propane

P164 2-Propylpyrazine Propylpyrazine, 2-propyl-1,4-diazine

P165 2-Propylpyridine
1-Methyl-4-isopropenylidene-3-cyclohexanone; δ-4(8)-p-menthen-3-one;
P166 Pulegone 1-Isopropylidene-4-methyl-2-cyclohexanone; p-Menth-4(8)-en-3-one; 1-methyl-4-
isopropylidenecyclohexan-3-one; 5-Methyl-2-(1-methylethylidene)cyclohexanone
P167 Pyrazine p-Diazine; 1,4-Diazine; Piazine; Paradiazine; 1,4-Diazabenzene; d-Diazine

P168 Pyrazineethanethiol Pyrazinyl ethanethiol; 2-(Pyrazinyl)ethanethiol; 2-pyrazinyl ethylmercaptan

P169 Pyrazinyl methyl sulfide Pyrazinylmethyl methyl sulfide; 2-methylthiopyrazine; Methylthioprazine; Pyrazinylmethyl methyl sulphide

P170 Pyridine Azine; Azabenzene

P171 2-Pyridine methanethiol 2-Pyridylmethanethiol; 2-Pyridylmethyl mercaptan; 2-Mercaptomethylpyridine

P172 Pyroligneous acid

P173 Pyroligneous acid extract Pyroligneous vinegar; Wood vinegar

P174 Pyrrole Azloe; imidole; Divynyleneimine

P175 Pyrrolidine Tetrahydropyrrole; Tetramethylenimine

P176 1-Pyrroline 3,4-dihydro-(2H)-pyrolle

2-Ketopropionaldehyde; Acetyl formaldehyde; 1,2-ketopropionic aldehyde; α-ketopropionic aldehyde; Methyl

P177 Pyruvaldehyde
glyoxal; 2-Oxopropanal; Pyruvic aldehyde; Propan-2-on-1-al

1362
Order General Name Synonyms
P178 Pyruvic acid 2-Ketopropionic acid; Acetylformic acid; α-Ketopropionic acid; 2-Oxopropanoic acid; Pyroracemic acid
α-Acetylacetophenone; Acetoacetophenone; cetylbenzoylmethane; Benzoylacetone; 1-Benzoyl-2-propanone; ;
P179 1-Phenylbutan-1,3-dione 2-Acetylacetophenone; 2-Propanone, benzoyl-; 1-Benzoylacetone; Benzoyl-aceton;1,3-Butanedione,
1-phenyl-;1-Phenyl-1,3-butanedione
Diethyl ketone; 1,3-Dimethylacetone; Ethyl Ketone; Metacetone;Methacetone; Propione; Ethyl propionyl;
P180 3-Pentanone
Pentan-3-one;Diethylcetone; Pentanone-3; Dimethylacetone
2-Propanone, 1-phenyl-; Methyl benzyl ketone; Phenyl-2-propanone; Phenylacetone; 1-Phenyl-2-propanone;
P181 1-Phenylpropan-2-one
3-Phenyl-2-propanone; α-Phenylacetone; Phenylmethyl methyl ketone; 1-Phenylacetone;Benzyl methyl ketone
Allyl alcohol; Allylic alcohol; Vinylcarbinol; 1-Propen-3-ol; 2-Propenol; 2-Propenyl alcohol; 3-Hydroxypropene;
Propenol; Propen-1-ol-3; Propenyl alcohol; 1-Propenol-3; 2-Propene-1-ol; 3-Hydroxy-1-propene;
P182 Prop-2-en-1-ol 1-Propenol-3-ol; Propene-1-ol; Propenol-3; 4-Quinolinecarboxylic acid, 2-phenyl-; 2-propen-1-ol (allyl
alcohol);2-Propen-1-ol
n-Amyl mercaptan; n-Pentyl mercaptan; Amyl hydrosulfide; Amyl mercaptan; Amyl sulfhydrate; Amyl
P183 1-Pentanethiol thioalcohol; Pentane-1-thiol; Pentanethiol; Pentyl mercaptan; 1-Mercaptopentane; Mercaptan amylique;
Pentalarm;1-Pentanthiol
P184 1,5-Pentanedioic acid Glutaric acid; 1,3-Propanedicarboxylic acid; Pentandioic acid;Pentanedioic acid
2,4-Pentanedione; Acetoacetone; Diacetylmethane; 2-Propanone, acetyl-; 2,4-Dioxopentane;
P185 Pentan-2,4-dione 2,4-Pentadione;Pentane-2,4-dione;Acetone, acetyl-;Pentanedione; Pentanedione-2,4; Acetyl
2-propanone;2,4-Pentandione;Acetylacetone

Valeric acid, propyl ester; n-Propyl n-valerate; Propyl pentanoate; n-propyl pentanoate;Pentanoic acid, propyl
P186 Propyl valerate
ester

ψ-Ionone; Citrylideneacetone;6,10-Dimethyl-3,5,9-undecatrien-2-one; 2,6-Dimethylundeca-2,6,8-triene-10-one;

P187 Pseudoionone (3E,5E)-6,10-Dimethyl-3,5,9-undecatrien-2-one; 2,6-Dimethyl hendeca-2,6,8-trien-10-one
P188 1,2,3,5,6-pentathiepane Lenthionine; Lenthionin
2-Phenylpropanoic acid; α-Phenylpropionic acid; α-Methylphenylacetic acid; Hydratropic acid;
P189 2-Phenylpropionic acid dl-α-Phenylpropionic acid; α-Methylbenzeneacetic acid;
Propanoic acid, 2-phenyl;Benzeneacetic acid, α-methyl-
Butyrophenone; n-Butyrophenone; Phenyl propyl ketone; Propyl phenyl ketone;1-Butanone,
P190 1-Phenylbutan-1-one
1-phenyl-;1-Phenyl-1-butanone
Cyclohexene, 3-methylene-6-(1-methylethyl)-; p-Mentha-1(7),2-diene; Phellandrene, β;
P191 β-Phellandrene 3-Isopropyl-6-methylene-1-cyclohexene; 3-methylene-6-(1-methylethenyl)-cyclohexane
P192 Pentan-3-ol Diethyl carbinol; 3-Pentyl alcohol; sec-Amyl alcohol; Pentanol-3;3-Pentanol
Propanoic acid, 2-hydroxy-, propyl ester;
P193 Propyl lactate propyl 2-hydroxypropanoate

1363
Order General Name Synonyms
Benzyl alcohol, α,α-dimethyl-; α-Cumyl alcohol; α,α-Dimethylbenzyl alcohol; Dimethylphenylcarbinol;
Dimethylphenylmethanol; 1-Hydroxycumene;
P194 2-Phenylpropan-2-ol 2-Phenyl-2-propanol; 2-Propanol, 2-phenyl-; α,α-Dimethylbenzenemethanol; Phenyldimethylcarbinol;
2-Phenylisopropanol; 1-Methyl-1-phenylethanol;Benzenemethanol, α,α-dimethyl-
P195 Propyl octanoate Octanoic acid, propyl ester; n-Propyl n-octanoate; n-propyl octanoate
n-Amyl acetate; n-Pentyl acetate; Amyl acetate; Birnenoel; Acetic acid, amyl ester; Amyl acetic ester; Amyl
acetic ether; Banana oil; Pear oil; Pent-acetate; 1-Pentanol acetate; 1-Pentyl acetate; Acetic acid n-amyl
P196 Pentyl acetate ester; n-Pentyl ethanoate; Pentyl ester of acetic acid; Acetic acid, n-pentyl ester; 1-Acetoxypentane;Primary
amyl acetate;Acetic acid, pentyl ester

P197 Pentadecane n-Pentadecane

P198 Pentadecan-1-ol n-Pentadecanol; n-1-Pentadecanol; Pentadecyl alcohol; Pentadecanol-(1);1-Pentadecanol;Pentadecanol

P199 Pent-4-en-1-ol 4-Pentenol; 4-Pentenyl alcohol; 4-Pentene-1-ol;4-Penten-1-ol

Pentadecylic acid; n-Pentadecanoic acid;

P200 Pentadecanoic acid n-Pentadecylic acid; Pentadecanoic (Palmitic) acid

P201 Propyl propane thiosulfonate 1-Propanesulfonothioic acid, S-propyl ester

P202 4-Pentenal Pent-4-enal

P203 Propyl hexadecanoate Hexadecanoic acid, propyl ester;Propyl palmitate

1364
Order General Name Synonyms
Isobutyric acid, pentyl ester; Amyl isobutyrate; Pentyl isobutyrate; 1-Pentyl isobutyrate; N-Amyl iso-butyrate;
P204 Pentyl 2-methylpropanoate Penthyl iso-butyrate; Pentyl isobutanoate;n-Pentyl isobutyrate;Propanoic acid, 2-methyl-, pentyl ester

2-Butanone, 4-phenyl-; Benzylacetone; Methyl phenethyl ketone; Methyl 2-phenylethyl ketone; Phenethyl
P205 4-Phenylbutan-2-one methyl ketone; 1-Phenyl-3-butanone; Methyl phenylethyl ketone; β-Phenylethyl methyl ketone;
4-phenyl-2-butanone (benzyl acetone); 4-phenylbutanone;4-Phenyl-2-butanone

P206 Propyl dodecanoate Dodecanoic acid, propyl ester;Propyl laurate

P207 2-Propylfuran Furan, α-propyl-; 2-n-Propylfuran;Furan, 2-propyl-

P208 2-Pentylthiophene(2-Amylthiophene) Thiophene, 2-pentyl-; 2-n-Amylthiophene; 2-n-Pentylthiophene

1,6-Methanonaphthalen-1(2H)-ol, octahydro-4,8a,9,9-tetramethyl-, [1R-(1α,4β,4aα,6β,8aα)]-;
1,6-Methanonaphthalen-1β(2H)-ol, 3,4,4aβ,5,6β,7,8,8a-octahydro-4α,8aβ,9,9-tetramethyl-; Patchoulic alcohol;
P209 Patchoulol Patchoulol; 1,6-Methanonaphthalen-1(2H)-ol, octahydro-4,8a,9,9-tetramethyl-,
(1α,4β,4aα,6β,8aα)-;Patchoulanol
Butanoic acid, 3-phenylpropyl ester; Butyric acid, 3-phenylpropyl ester; Phenylpropyl butyrate; Phenylpropyl
P210 3-Phenylpropyl butyrate n-butyrate;3-Phenylpropyl butanoate

2-Phenylethyl pentanoate;Valeric acid, phenethyl ester;Valeric acid, 2-phenylethyl ester; Phenylethyl

P211 Phenethyl valerate
N-valerate; 2-Phenylethyl pentanoate; phenylethyl pentanoate;Pentanoic acid, 2-phenylethyl ester

P212 Pentyl 2-methylisocrotonate

2-Butenoic acid, propyl ester; Crotonic acid, propyl ester; Propyl 2-butenoate; Propyl
P213 Propyl crotonate (2E)-2-butenoate;(E)-2-Butenoic acid propyl ester

P214 4-pentenyl isothiocyanate pentenyl isothiocyanate

P215 (Z)-2-Pentenol 2-Penten-1-ol;pent-2-en-1-ol

P216 Propyl decanoate Decanoic acid, propyl ester; n-propyl decanoate

1365
Order General Name Synonyms

P217 Propyl 2-methylbutyrate Butanoic acid, 2-methyl-, propyl ester; n-Propyl 2-methyl butyrate;Propyl 2-methylbutanoate

P218 3-Pentenol-1 (3E)-3-Penten-1-ol;3-Penten-1-ol;3-pentenol

P219 5-Pentyl-3H-furan-2-one 4-Hydroxy-3-nonenoic acid lactone, 5-(1-pentyl)-3H-furan-2-one, 5-amyl-3H-furan-2-one

P220 2-(trans-2-Pentenyl)cyclopentanone JASMINONE; (E)-2-(Pent-2-enyl)cyclopentan-1-one,

2-Propyl-4,5-dimethyloxazole(4,5-Dimethyl-2-propyloxaz
P221 ole) 4,5-Dimethyl-2-propyloxazole;4,5-Dimethyl-2-propyl-1,3-oxazole;Oxazole, 4,5-dimethyl-2-propyl-

P222 Phenethyl decanoate Decanoic acid 2-phenylethyl ester; Phenylethyl n-decanoate;2-Phenylethyl decanoate
P223 Phenethyl crotonate

P224 2-Pentyl 2-methylpentanoate 1-methylbutyl 2-methylpentanoate

P225 Pyrrolidino-[1,2E]-4H-2,4-dimethyl-1,3,5-dithiazine 2,4-dimethyltetrahydropyrrolo[2,1-d][1,3,5]-dithiazine;dimethyl pyrrolidino dithiazine

P226 Phenethyl lactate

P227 Palmitic acid Hexadecanoic acid; Hexadecylic acid; Cetylic acid; 1-Pentadecanecarboxylic acid
4-Methyl-2-(1-phenylethyl)-1,3-dioxolane; 1,3-Dioxolane, 4-methyl-2-(1-phenylethyl)-; Hydratropic aldehyde
P228 2-Phenylpropanal propyleneglycol acetal propylene glycol acetal

P229 2-Pyrrolidone 2-Pyrrolidinone; pyrrolidin-2-one; 2-Ketopyrrolidine

P230 3-Pentanethiol 3-Pentyl mercaptan; 3-Mercapopentane; Pentane-3-thiol

P231 2-Phenoxyethanol beta-Phenoxyethanol; 1-Hydroxy-2-phenoxyethane; Ethylene glycol monophenyl ether

1366
Order General Name Synonyms

P232 2-Phenoxyethyl propionate 2-Phenoxyethyl propanoate

P233 Phenylacetaldehyde diethyl acetal (2,2-Diethoxyethyl)benzene; 1,1-Diethoxy-2-phenylethane; Benzeneacetaldehyde, diethyl acetal

P234 Pinocarvyl acetate 6,6-Dimethyl-2-methylenebicyclo[3.1.1]hept-3-yl acetate

P235 Piperonal propyleneglycol acetal 4-(4-Methyl-1,3-dioxolan-2-yl)-1,3-benzodioxole; 4-Methyl-2-(3,4-methylenedioxyphenyl)-1,3-dioxolane

P236 S-Prenyl thioisobutyrate Propanethioic acid, 2-methyl-, S-(3-methyl-2-buten-1-yl) ester; S-3-Methylbut-2-enyl 2-methylpropanethioate

P237 S-Prenyl thioisopentanoate S-3-Methylbut-2-enyl 3-methylbutanethioate; Butanethioic acid, 3-methyl-, S-(3-methyl-2-buten-1-yl) ester

P238 1,3-Propanediol

1367
Order General Name Synonyms

P239 1,1-Propanedithiol 1,1-Dimercaptopropane; 1,1-Propanedithiol;Propane-1,1-dithiol

P240 2-Propionylthiophene

Q001 Quinine bisulfate

Q002 Quinine hydrochloride Quinine monohydrochloride; Quinine chloride

Q003 Quinine sulphate

1-Benzazine; Benzo(b)pyridine; 2,3-Benzopyridine; chinoleine; Leucoline; 2,3-Benzopyrine; Benzopyrine;

Q004 Quinoline
Chinolein; 1-Azanephthalene; Leucol
1,3-Benzenediol; m-dihydroxybenzene; Benzene-1,3-diol; Resorcinol; 1,3- Dihydroxybenzene;
R001 Resorcinol m-Dihydroxybenzene
R002 Rhodinol l-Citronellol; 3,7-dimethyl-6-octen-1-ol; 3,7-Dimethyl-7-octen-1-ol; α-Citronellol; 2,6-Dimethyl-1-octen-8-ol
Rhodinyl ethanoate; 3,7-Dimethyl-7-octen-1-yl ethanoate; 3,7-Dimethyl- 7-octen-1-yl acetate; α-Citronellyl
R003 Rhodinyl acetate acetate

R004 Rhodinyl butyrate 3,7-Dimethyl-6 or 7-octen-1-yl butanoate; Citronellyl butyrate

3,7-Dimethyl-6 or 7-octen-1-yl formate; Rhodinyl methanoate; 3,7-Dimethyl-6 or 7-octen-1-yl methanoate;
R005 Rhodinyl formate
Citrinellyl formate; α-Citronellyl formate
Rhodinyl 2-methylpropanoate; 3,7-dimethyl-6 or 7-octen-1-yl 2-methylpropanoate; 3,7-dimethyl-6 or
R006 Rhodinyl isobutyrate 7-octen-1-yl isobutyrate; Citronellyl isobutyrate
Rhodinyl isovalerianate; 3,7-Dimethyl-6 or 7-octen-1-yl isovalerate; Rhodinyl 3-methylbutanoate; Rhodinyl
isopentanoate; 3,7-Dimethyl-6 or 7-octen-1-yl 3-methylbutanoate; Citronellyl isovalerate;
R007 Rhodinyl isovalerate rhodinyl-β-methylbutyrate; 3,7-dimethyl-7-octen-1-yl isopentanoate; Rhodinyl isopentanoate; α-Citronellyl
isopentanoate
3,7-Dimethyl-6 or 7-octen-1-yl phenylacetate; Citronellyl phenylacetate; rhodinyl α-toluate;
R008 Rhodinyl phenylacetate 3,7-Dimethyloct-7-enyl 2-phenylacetate; α-Citronellyl phenylacetate
3,7-Dimethyl-7-octen-1-yl propanoate; rhodinyl propanoate; 3,7-dimethyl-7-octen-1-yl propionate; Citronellyl
R009 Rhodinyl propionate propionate; α-Citronellyl propionate

1368
Order General Name Synonyms
R010 Rum ether Ethyl oxyhydrate
S001 Salicylaldehyde Salicylal; 2-Hydroxybenzaldehyde; o-Hydroxybenzaldehyde; Salicylic aldehyde
12-β-Santalen-14-ol; Argeol; arheol; d-α-santalol; l-β-santalol; 2-Methyl-5-(2,3-
S002 Santalol (α and β) dimethyltricyclo[2.2.1.0(2.6)]hept-3-yl)pent-2-en-1-ol and 2-methyl-5-(2-methyl- 3-
methylenebicyclo[2.2.1]hept-2-yl)pent-2-en-1-ol; β-Santalol; 12-α-Santalen-14-ol
α-Santaalol, acetate; β-Santalol, acetate; 2-Methyl-5-(2,3-dimethyltricyclo- [2.2.1.0(2.6)]hept-3-yl)pent-2-enyl
S003 Santalyl acetate (α and β) acetate and 2-methyl-5-(2-methyl-3- methylenebicyclo[2.2.1]hept-2-yl)pent-2-enyl acetate
β-Santalyl phenylacetate; α-santalyl phenylacetate; Santalyl α-toluate; α-Santalyl α-toluate; β-santalyl
S004 Santalyl phenylacetate (α and β) α-toluate; 5-(2,3-Dimethyltricyclo[2.2.1.0(2.6)]hept-3-yl)- 2-methylpent-2-enyl phenylacetate and
2-methyl-5-(2-methyl-3-methylene- bicyclo[2.2.1]hept-2-yl)pent-2-enyl phenylacetate
Decahydro tetramethylnaphtho-furanone; naphtho[2,1-b]furan-2(1H)-one, decahydro- 3a,6,6,9a-tetramethyl,
S005 Sclareolide
[3aR-(3a,α,5a β,9a α,9b β]; norambrienolide; Decahydrotetramethylnaphtho[2,1b]furan-2(1H)one
S006 β-Sinensal 2,6-dimethyl-10-methylene-2,6,11-dodecatrienal
S007 Skatole 3-Methyl-4,5-benzopyrrole; 3-Methylindole; β-methylindole; 3-methyl(1H)indole; Skatole

S008 Sodium 2-(4-methoxyphenoxy)propanoate Sodium 2-(4-methoxyphenoxy)propionate; Propanoic acid, 2-(4-methoxyphenoxy), sodium salt
Sodium 3-mercapto-2-oxopropionate; Sodium mercaptopyruvate; Pyruvic acid, 3-mercapto-, Sodium salt; Sodium
S009 Sodium 3-mercaptooxopropionate
3-mercapto-2-oxopropanote

S010 Sodium 3-methoxy-4-hydroxycinnamate Sodium 3-(4-hydroxy-3-methoxyphenyl)propenoate; sodium ferulate

S011 Sodium 4-(methylthio)-2-oxobutanoate 4-(Methylthio)-2-oxobutyric acid; 4-(methylthio)-2-oxobutanoic acid; 4-(methylthio)-2- ketobutyric acid

S012 Sodium 4-methoxybenzoyloxy acetate

spiro(2,4-Dithia-1-methyl-8-oxa-bicyclo[3.3.0]octane-3,3'-(1'-oxa-2'-methyl)-cyclopentane) and
Spiro[2,4-dithia-1-methyl-8-oxabicyclo(3.3.0)octane-3,3'-( spiro(Dithia-6-methyl-7-oxa-bicyclo[3.3.0]octane-3,3'-(1'-oxa- 2-methyl)- cyclopentane);
S013 1'-oxa-2'-methyl)-cyclopentane] hexahydro-2',3a-dimethylspiro[1,3]dithiolo(4,5-b)furan-2 ,3'(2'h)furan; Spiro [dithia-6-methyl-7-oxabicyclo [3.3.0]
octane-3,3-α-(1-α- oxa-2-methyl)- cyclopentane] (isomere component)
S014 Styrene Vinylbenzol; Phenylethene; Vinylbenzene; Styrol; Phenylethylene

S015 Sucrose octaacetate Octoacetyl sucrose; Octaacetyl sucrose

S016 α-Santalene Tricyclo[2.2.1.0(2,6)]heptane, 1,7-dimethyl-7-(4-methyl-3-pentenyl)-, (-)-; (-)-α-Santalene; Santalen; Santalene

1369
Order General Name Synonyms

1-Naphthalenepropanol, α-ethenyldecahydro-2-hydroxy-α,2,5,5,8a-pentamethyl-, [1r-[1α(r*),2β,4aβ,8aα]]-;

S017 Sclareol Labd-14-ene-8,13-diol, (13R)-;
1-(3-Hydroxy-3-methyl-4-pentenyl)-2,5,5,8a-tetramethyldecahydro-2-naphthalenol

4(10)-Thujene; Sabinen; (+)-Sabinene; 1-Isopropyl-4-methylenebicyclo[3.1.0]hexane;

S018 Sabinene 1-isopropyl-4-methylenebicyclo[3.1.0]hexane (sabinene); 4-thujene; Sabinene
(β-Thujene);Sabenene;Bicyclo[3.1.0]hexane, 4-methylene-1-(1-methylethyl)-

S019 Styryl acetate

S020 Stearic acid Octadecanoic acid

Terpinene; 1-Methyl-4-propyl(iso)-1,3-cyclohexadiene; p-Menthadiene-1,3; 1,3-p- menthadiene;
T001 α-Terpinene 1-Methyl-4-isopropyl-1, 3-cyclohexadiene; 1-Methyl-4- isopropylcyclohexadiene-1,3; p-Mentha-1,3-diene

1-Methyl-4-propyl(iso)-1,4-cyclohexadiene; p-mentha-1,4-diene; Crithmene; Moslene; 1,4-p-Menthadiene;

T002 γ-Terpinene 1-Methyl-4-isopropyl-1,4-cyclohexadiene

1-p-Menthen-8-ol; Terpineol schlechthin; α-terpilenol; 1-Methyl-4-proypl-iso-1- cyclohexen-8-ol;

T003 α-Terpineol p-Menth-1-en-8-ol; 1-methyl-4-isopropyl-1-cyclohexen-8-ol; α-Terpineol;
1-Methyl-4-isopropyl-1-cyclohexen-8-ol; α-Terpilenol; α,α-4- trimethyl-3-cyclohexene-1-methanol

T004 Terpinolene Tereben; Terpinene; p-Menth-1,4(8)-diene; 1-Methyl-4-isopropylidene-1-cyclohexene; 1,4(8)-terpadiene

Methen1-1yl-8 acetate; menthen-1-yl-8-acetate; Terpineol acetate; α-Terpinyl acetate; p-Menth-1-en-8-yl

T005 Terpinyl acetate acetate; 3-Cyclohexene-1-methanol, α,α, 4-trimethyl, acetate; Terpineol acetate

α-Terpinyl anthranilate; p-mentha-1-en-8-yl 2-aminobenzoate; Terpinyl anthranilate; p-Menth-1-en-8-yl

T006 Terpinyl anthranilate anthranilate; Terpinyl-2-aminobenzoate; Terpinyl-o-aminobenzoate

T007 Terpinyl butyrate p-Menth-1-en-8-ol butyrate; p-Menth-1-en-8-yl butyrate

1370
Order General Name Synonyms
p-Menth-1-en-8-yl 3-phenylpropenoate; p-Menth-1-en-8-yl cinnamate; Terpinyl β-phenacrylate;
T008 Terpinyl cinnamate Terpinyl-3-phenyl propenoate; (Z)-1-methyl-1-(4-methyl-3- cyclohexen-1-yl) ethyl cinnamate

T009 Terpinyl formate α-Terpinyl formate; p-Menth-1-en-8-yl formate

Terpinyl 2-methylpropionate; p-Menth-1-en-8-yl isobutyrate; 1-Methyl-1-(4-methylcyclohex-3-enyl)ethyl

T010 Terpinyl isobutyrate 2-methylpropionate
Isopentanoate; p-Menth-1-en-8-yl 3-methylbutanoate; p-Menth-1-en-8-yl isopentanoate; Terpinyl
T011 Terpinyl isovalerate isopentanoate; p-Menth-1-en-8-yl 3-methylbutyrate; p-Menth-1-en-8-yl isovalerate;
p-Menth-1-en-8-yl-β-methylbutyrate; terpinyl isovalerianate
Menthen-1-yl-8-ate; p-Menth-1-en-8-ol propionate; p-Menth-1-en-8-yl propanoate; p-Menth-1-en-8-yl
T012 Terpinyl propionate propionate; p-Menthanyl propionate (mixed isomers)

T013 Tetradec-2-enal

4-Tetradecanolide; 6-Nonyltetrahydro-2-pyrone; Tetradeca-1,5-lactone; Tetradecano- 1,5-lactone;

T014 delta-Tetradecalactone 5-Hydroxytetradecanoic acid lactone; 2H-pyran-2-one, tetrahydro-6- nonyl-
T015 (Z)-8-Tetradecenal (Z)-Tetradec-8-enal
Menthofuran (tetrahydro-4-methyl-2-(2-methyl-1-p); 2-(2-Methylprop-1-enyl)-4- methyltetrahydropyran;
T016 Tetrahydro-4-methyl-2-(2-methylpropen-1-yl)pyran Tetrahydro-4-methyl-2-(2-methyl-1-propenyl)-(2H)pyran; Rosenoxid inaktiv(Dragon); Rose oxide;
Tetrahydro-4-methyl-2- (2-methylpropen- 1-yl)pyran

3-Cyclohexene-1-carboxylic acid, 4-(1-methylethyl)-,(±); 4-isopropyl-3- cyclohexene- 1-carboxylic acid;

T017 1,2,5,6-Tetrahydrocuminic acid 4-(1-Methylethyl)-3-cyclohexene-1-carboxylic acid; 1-(4-Isopropylcyclohex-3-enyl)carboxylic acid

T018 Tetrahydrofurfuryl acetate Tetrahydro-2-furyl methylacetate

T019 Tetrahydrofurfuryl alcohol Tetrahydro-2-furancarbinol; Tetrahydro-2-furanmethanol; Tetrahydro-2-furylmethanol

T020 Tetrahydrofurfuryl butyrate Tetrahydrofurfuryl-n-butyrate; Tetrahydro-2-furylmethyl-n-butanoate

1371
Order General Name Synonyms

Tetrahydrofurfuryl 3-phenylpropenoate; Tetrahydro-2-furylmethyl 3-phenylpropenoate; tetrahydro-2-furylmethyl

T021 Tetrahydrofurfuryl cinnamate cinnamate; Cinnamic acid, tetrahydrofurfuryl ester

T022 Tetrahydrofurfuryl propionate Tetrahydrofurfuryl propanoate; 2-Tetrahydrofurfurylmethyl propionate; Tetrahydro-2-furylmethylpropionate

3,7-Dimethyloctan-3-ol; 3,7-dimethyloctanol-3; Tetrahydrolinalool; Tetrahydrolinalol; 1-Ethyl-1,5-dimethyl

T023 Tetrahydrolinalool hexanol

Tetrahydro-pseudo-ionone; Tetrameran (IFF); Dihydrogeranyl acetone; 6,10-Dimethyl- 9-undecen-2-one;

T024 3,4,5,6-Tetrahydropseudoionone 6,10-Dimethylundec-9-en-2-one

T025 Tetrahydro-pseudo-ionone 6,10-Dimethyl-9-undecen-2-one

T026 5,6,7,8-Tetrahydroquinoxaline Cyclohexapyrazine; tetrahydroquinoxaline

Mixture of 5-ethyl-2,3,4,5-tetramethyl-2-cyclohexen-1-one and 5-ethyl-3,4,5,6-

T027 Tetramethyl ethylcyclohexenone (mixture of isomers) tetramethyl-2-cyclohexen-1-one

Ambroxan; ambrox; Dodecahydro-3a,6,6,9a-tetramethylnaphtho (2,1-b) furan;

T028 1,5,5,9-Tetramethyl-13-oxatricyclo(8.3.0.0(4,9))tridecane Dodecahydro-3a,6,6,9a-tetramethylnaphto (2,1-b)furan; Tetramethyl- perhydronaphtofuran

T029 2,3,5,6-Tetramethylpyrazine Tetramethylpyrazine; Tetramethyl-1,4-diazine

Spiroxide; 1-Oxaspiro[4,5]dec-6-ene, 2,6,10,10-tetramethyl-; 1-Oxaspiro-2,6,10,10- tetra-methyl[4,5]dec-6-ene;

T030 Theaspirane 2,6,10,10-tetramethyl-1-oxaspiro(4,5)dec-6-ene

Vitamin b1 hydrochloride; 3-((4-Amino-2-methyl-5-pyrimidinyl)methyl)-5-(2- hydroxy- ethyl)-4-methylthiazolium

T031 Thiamine hydrochloride chloride, Aneurine hydrochoride; Thiamine; Vitamin B1

1372
Order General Name Synonyms

T032 Thiazole

T033 2-Thienyl disulfide 2,2'-Dithiodithiophene; 2,2-α-Dithiodithiophene

T034 2-Thienylmercaptan 2-Mercaptothiophene; 2-thienylthiol; thiophene-2-thiol; 2-Thionyl mercaptan; 2-Thiophenethiol

T035 Thioacetic acid Ethanethioic acid; Thiolacetic acid; Acetothioic acid

Difurfuryl monosulfide; 2-Furfuryl monosulfide; Difurfuryl sulfide; bis(2-furfuryl)sulfide; 2-Furfuryl monosulfide;

T036 2,2'-(Thiodimethylene)difuran 2,2'- (Thiodimethylene)-difuran; 2-Furfuryl monosulphide; Difurfuryl monosulphide;

3,7-Dimethyl-2(trans),6-octadien-1-thiol, 3,7-Dimethyl-2,6-octadien-1-yl mercaptan;

T037 Thiogeraniol 3,7-Dimethyl-2,6-octadien-1-thiol; 2,6-octadiene-1-thiol, 3,7-dimethyl-,(E)-

T038 4-Thujanol Sabina hydrate; Sabinene hydrate; 2-Methyl-5-(1-methylethyl)bicyclo[3.1.0]hexan-2-ol; Thujan-4-ol

Bicyclo[3.1.0]hexan-3-ol, 4-methyl-1-(1-methylethyl)-, (1S,3S,4R,5R)-; 3-Thujanol, (1S,3S,4R,5R)-(-)-;
T039 Thujyl alcohol Bicyclo[3.1.0]hexan-3-ol, 4-methyl-1-(1-methylethyl)-, [1S-(1.α., 3.α.,4.α.,5.α)]-; (-)-3-neoisothujanol;
(-)-Thujol; 3-neoIsothujanol, (-)-; thijol, (-)-
5-Methyl-2-isopropylphenol; 2-Isopropyl-5-methylphenol; α-Cymophenol; 6-isopropyl-m-cresol;
T040 Thymol 5-Methyl-2(1-methylethyl)phenol; 3-p-Cymenol; 3-Hydroxy-p-cymene; p-Isopropyl-m-cresol;
1-Methyl-3-hydroxy-4-isopropylbenzene; 3-Methyl-6-isopropylphenol; Thyme camphor; m-Thymol
2-(o-,m-,p-Cresyl)-5-hydroxydoixan; 2-(o-,m-,p-cresyl)-5-hydroxymethyldioxolan;
2-(methylphenyl)-1,3-dioxan-5-ol, mixed o-,m-,p- tolyl glycerin; 2-(2,3 and
T041 Tolualdehyde glyceryl acetal 4-methylphenyl)-5-hydroxy-1,3-dioxane and 2-(2,3 and 4-methylphenyl)-5- phdroxymethyl-1,3-dioxolane
(mixture), Tolyl glycerin; 2-(o,m,p-cresyl)-5-hydroxy dioxane and 2-(o,m,p-cresyl)-5-hydroxymethyldioxolane
mixture; 2-(o,m,p-cresyl)- 4-hydroxymethyldioxolane; 2-5-hydroxymethyldioxolane
Mixture of o-methylbenzaldehyde and m-methylbenzaldehyde and p-methylbenzaldehyde, Toluic aldehyde
T042 Tolualdehydes (mixed o,m,p)
(mixed o,m,p); Tolyl aldehyde (mixed o,m,p); methylbenzaldehyde(mixed 2,3,4); Toluic aldehyde(mixed 2,3,4)

T043 o-Toluenethiol 2-Methylthiophenol; o-tolylmercaptan; 2-Methylbenzene-1-thiol; 2-Methylbenzenethiol

T044 2-(p-Toly)propionaldehyde p-methyl-α-Methylphenylacetaldehyde; p-Methylhydratropaldehyde

1373
Order General Name Synonyms

p-Tolyl isovalerate; p-cresyl 3-methylbutanoate; p-Methylphenyl 3-methylbutyrate; 4-Methylphenyl isovalerate;

T045 p-Tolyl 3-methylbutyrate
p-Cresyl isovalerate; p-Tolyl isovalerate; p-Cresyl isopentanoate; 4-Methylphenyl 3-methylbutyrate
T046 o-Tolyl acetate 2-Methylphenyl acetate; o-Cresol acetate; Acetyl o-cresol; o-Cresyl acetate; α-Cresylic acetate

p-Cresylic acetate; p-tolyl ethanoate; Acetyl-p-cresol; p-cresyl acetate; p-methylphenyl acetate; cresyl acetate
T047 p-Tolyl acetate para(Givaudan Roure); p-Cresyl acetate; 4-methylbenzoic acid methyl ester; Acetyl p-Cresol

p-Tolyl 2-methylpropanoate; p-Methylphenyl isobutyrate; p-Methylphenyl 2-methylpropanoate; p-Cresyl

T048 p-Tolyl isobutyrate
isobutyrate

o-Cresyl isobutyrate; 2-Methylphenyl 2-methylpropanoate; Propanoic acid, 2-Methyl-, 2-methylphenyl ester;

T049 o-Tolyl isobutyrate
0-Tolyl 2-methylpropanoate

T050 p-Tolyl laurate p-Methylphenyl dodecanoate; p-Cresyl dodecanoate; p-Cresyl laurate; p-Tolyl dodecanoate; p-Tolyl dodecylate

p-Cresyl caprylate; p-Cresyl octanoate; p-Methylphenyl octanoate; Octanoic acid, 4-methylphenyl ester,
T051 p-Tolyl octanoate p-Tolyl caprylate

p-Methylphenyl phenylacetate; narcissin; p-Cresyl phenylacetate; p-tolyl α-toluate; p-Cresyl α-toluate;

T052 p-Tolyl phenylacetate p-Methylphenyl α-toluate

T053 o-Tolyl salicylate Benzoic acid, 2-hydroxy-, 2-methylphenyl ester, o-cesyl salicylate; 2-Methylphenyl 2-hydroxybenzoate

T054 4-(p-Tolyl)-2-butanone p-Methylbenzylacetone; 4-(4-Methylphenyl)-2-butanone

T055 p-Tolylacetaldehyde p-Methyl phenylacetaldehyde; Syringa aldehyde; (4-Methylphenyl)acetaldehyde

T056 Tributyl acetylcitrate Acetyl tributylcitrate; Tributyl 2-acetox-1,2,3-propanetricarboxylate

T057 Tributyrin Glyceryl tributyrate; butyrin; 1,2,3-tri(butyryloxy)propane; Tributyrin

1374
Order General Name Synonyms

T058 2-Tridecanone Tridecan-2-one; Hendecyl methyl ketone; methyl undecyl ketone

T059 2-trans-4-cis-7-cis-Tridecatrienal Trideca-2(trans),4(cis),7(cis)-trienal; 2,4,7-Tridecatrienal, (E,Z,Z)-; Trideca-2,4,7-trienal

T060 2-Tridecenal

T061 trans-2-Tridecenal 3-Decylacrolein; Tridec-2-enal; aldehyde C-13

Cirtric acid, triethyl ester; Ethyl citrate; 1,2,3-Propanetricarboxylic acid, 2-hydroxy-, triethyl ester; Triethyl
T062 Triethyl citrate
2-hydroxy-1,2,3-propane-tricarboxylate

T063 Triethylamine Triethylamine; (Diethylamino)ethane; N,N-Diethylethanamine

T064 2,4,6-Triisobutyl-5,6-dihydro-4H-1,3,5-dithiazine 4H-1,3,5-Dithiazine, dihydro-2,4,6-tri(2-methylpropyl)-; Dihydro-2,4,6-triisobutyl-4h- 1,3,5-dithiazine

T065 3,3,5-Trimethyl cyclohexanol Cyclonol; Homomenthol; 1-Methyl-3,3-dimethyl cyclohexan-5-ol; 3,3,5- Trimethylcyclohexan-1-ol

T066 2,6,6-Trimethyl-1&2-cyclohexen-1-carboxaldehyde α,β-Cylclocitral (mixture); 2,6,6- Trimethylcyclohex-2-ene-1-carboxaldehyde; β- Cyclocitral

Acetone propylene glycol acetal; 2,2,4-Trimethyl-1,3-dioxolane; propylene glycol acetone ketal; Acetone
T067 2,2,4-Trimethyl-1,3-dioxacyclopentane propylene glycol ketal

1375
Order General Name Synonyms

T068 2,6,6-Trimethyl-1-cyclohexen-1-acetaldehyde β-Homocyclocitral; 2,6,6- Trimethylcyclohex-1-en-1-acetaldehyde

2,6,6-Trimethyl-1 or 2-cyclohexen-1-carboxaldehyde; 2,6,6-Trimethyl-2-cyclohexene-1- carboxaldehyde;

T069 2,6,6-Trimethyl-1-cyclohexen-1-carboxaldehyde β-cyclocitral; cyclocitral

T070 3,5,5-Trimethyl-1-hexanol 3,5,5,-trimethylhexanol; Isononanol; Isononyl alcohol; tert-butyl isopentanol; Trimethyl hexyl alcohol

6,10,14-Trimethylpentadeca-5,9,13-trien-2-one; 6,10,14-Trimethyl-5,9,13- penta- decatrien-2-one; farnesyl

T071 2,6,10-Trimethyl-2,6,10-pentadecatrien-14-one acetone; 2,6,10-Trimethyl-2,6,10- pentadecatrien- 14-one

T072 3,7,11-Trimethyl-2,6-10-dodecatrienal 3,7,11-Trimethyl dodecatrien-2,6,10-al-1; Farnesal

cis-1-(2,6,6-Trimethyl-2-cyclohexen-1-yl)but-2-en-1-on
T073 e cis-α-Damascone

(+/-)-(2,6,6-Trimethyl-2-hydroxycyclohexylidene)acetic
T074 acid γ-lactone (+/-)Dihydroactinidiolide-5,6,7,7α-Tetrahydro-4,4,7α-trimethyl-2(4H)benzofuranone

T075 1,3,3-Trimethyl-2-norbornanyl acetate Fenchyl acetate; Fenchyl acetate

T076 2,6,6-Trimethyl-2-vinyltetrahydropyran Bois de rose oxide; 2H-pyran, 2-ethenyltetrahydro-2,6,6-trimethyl-; Trimethyl-2,2,6- vinyl-6-tetrahydropyrane

T077 trans- and cis-2,4,8-Trimethyl-3,7-nonadien-2-ol 3,7-Nonadien-2-ol, 2,4,8-trimethyl- (2E,4Z)-; Cranberry extra

T078 2,3,4-Trimethyl-3-pentanol Diisopropyl methyl carbinol

T079 (+/-)-2,4,8-Trimethyl-7-nonen-2-ol 7-Nonen-2-ol, 2,4,8-trimethyl-

T080 Trimethylamine N,N-Dimethylmethylamine

2-p-Tolyl-2-propanol; 2-(4-Methylphenyl)-2-propanol; 8-Hydroxy-p-cymene; 2-(4-Methylphenyl)propan-2-ol;
T081 p-α,α-Trimethylbenzyl alcohol
p-Cymen-8-ol; Dimethyl-p-tolylcarbinol; 2-(4- Methylphenyl)propan-2-ol

T082 2,6,6-Trimethylcyclohex-2-ene-1,4-dione 3,5,5-Trimethyl-2-cyclohexene-1,4-dione; 2-Cyclohexenedione-1,4,3,5,5-trimethyl-

2,2,6-Trimethyl-1,3-cyclohexadien-1-carboxaldehyde; 2,2,6-trimethyl-4,6- cyclohexadien-1-carboxaldehyde;

1,1,3-Trimethyl-2-formylcyclohexa-2,4-diene; Dehydro β-cyclocitral; safranal;
T083 2,6,6-Trimethylcyclohexa-1,3-dienyl methanal 2,6,6-Trimethylcyclohexa-1,3-diene-1-carbaldehyde; 2,3-Dihydro-2,2,6-trimethylbenzaldehyde;
2,6,6-Trimethyl-1,3-cyclohexadenal

1376
Order General Name Synonyms

T084 2,2,6-Trimethylcyclohexanone Cyclohexanone, 2,2,6-trimethyl-

Acetaldehyde, (2,2,3-trimethylcyclopent-3-en-1-yl); Campholenic aldehyde;

T085 2,2,3-Trimethylcyclopent-3-en-1-yl acetaldehyde (R)-2,2,3-trimethylcyclopent-3-ene-1-acetaldehyde; α-Campholenic aldehyde;
(2,3,3-Trimethylcyclopent-3-en-1-yl-2)acetaldehyde

2,4,5-Trimethyl-3-oxazoline; Oxazole, 2,5-dihydro-2,4,5-trimethyl-; 2,4,5-Trimethyl-2,5- dihydrooxazole;

T086 2,4,5-Trimethyl-delta-3-oxazoline
3-Oxazoline, 2,4,5-trimethyl

4H-1,3,5-dithiazine, dihydro-2,4,6-trimethyl-(2α, 4α, 6α)-; 2,4,6-Trimethyldihydro-1,3,5-dithiazine;

T087 2,4,6-Trimethyldihydro-4H-1,3,5-dithiazine 2,4,6-Trimethylperhydro-1,3-dithiazine; 2,6-Dihydro-2,4,6-trimethyl-1,3,5-dithiazine;
Dihydro-2,4,6-trimethyl-1,3,5(4H)dithiazine; Dihydro-2,4,6-trimethyl-4h-1,3,5-dithiazine, Thialdine
T088 3,7,11-Trimethyldodeca-2,6,10-trienyl acetate Farnesol acetate; Farnesyl acetate

T089 3,5,5-Trimethylhexanal Verdinal; Hexanal, 3,5,5-trimethyl; Vandor B; Isononylaldehyde; Tert-Butylisopentanal

T090 Trimethylamine oxide Trimethylamine, N-oxide; N,N-Dimethylmethanamine N-oxide

T091 2,3,6-Trimethylphenol 3-Hydroxypseudocumene; Methyl xylenol-2,3,6; 3-Hydroxypseudocumene

T092 2,3,5-Trimethylpyrazine Trimethhylpyrazine; 2,3,5-Trimethyl-1,4-diazine

T093 2,4,5-Trimethylthiazole

T094 Tripropylamine N,N-Dipropyl-1-propanamine; Propyldi-n-propylamine; Tri-n-propylamine

T095 1,2,3-Tris([1'-ethoxy]-ethoxy)propane 3,5,9,11-Tetraoxatridecane, 7-(1-ethoxyethoxy)-4,10-dimethyl-; Acetaldehyde ethyl glyceryl mixed acetal

T096 2,4,6-Trithiaheptane bis-(Methylthiomethyl)sulfi de

T097 2,3,5-Trithiahexane Methyl(methylthio)methyl disulfide; (Methyldithio) (methylthio)methane; 2,4,5- Trithiahexane

2,2,4,4,6,6-Hexamethyl-s-trithiane; 2,2,4,4,6,6-Hexanethyl-5-trithiane; 1,3,5-trithiane, 2,2,4,4,6,6-hexamethyl-;
T098 Trithioacetone 2,2,4,4,6,6-Hexamethyl-1,3,5-trithiane
T099 Tuberose lactone 2(3H)-Furanone, dihydro-5-(2,5-octadienyl)-; (Z,Z)-6,9-Dodecadien-4-olide, (z,z)-

1377
Order General Name Synonyms
4-(2-Aminoethyl)phenol; 2-(4-Hydroxyphenyl) ethylamine; Systogene; Tocosine; Uteramine; Tyrosamine;
T100 Tyramine p-β-Aminoethylphenol; 4-Hydroxyphenylethylamine; 4-Hydroxyphenethylamine; p-Hydroxyphenylethylamine;
p-Hydroxyphenethylamine; Benzeneethanamine
α-Formylthiophene; α-Thiophenecarboxaldehyde; 2-Formylthiophene; 2-Thienylaldehyde;
2-Thienylcarboxaldehyde; 2-Thiophenealdehyde; Thiophene-2-carboxaldehyde; Thiophene-2-aldehyde;
T101 Thiophene-2-carbaldehyde 2-Thiophenecarbaldehyde; 2-Thiophenaldehyde; 2-thiophencarboxaldehyde; 2-thiophene carboxyaldehyde;
2-thiophenic aldehyde; thiophen-2-carboxaldehyde;2-Carboxaldehyde-thiophene;2-Thiophenecarboxaldehyde
α,γ,α'-Collidine; γ-Collidine; s-Collidine; 2,4,6-Collidine; sym-Collidine; 2,4,6-Kollidin; a,g,a'-Collidine;
T102 2,4,6-Trimethylpyridine g-Collidine; Collidine;Pyridine, 2,4,6-trimethyl-

Tetramethylene sulfide; Thiacyclopentane; Thilane; Thiolane;

T103 Tetrahydrothiophene Thiophane; Tetramethylene sulphide; Thiolan Tetrahydrothiofen; Thiofan;Tetrahydrothiophen;Thiophene,
tetrahydro-

Thiacyclopentadiene; Thiofuram; Thiofuran; Thiofurfuran; Thiole; Thiotetrole; Divinylene sulfide;Furan,

T104 Thiophene Thio-;Thiaphene;Thiofen

n-Tetradecan-1-ol; n-Tetradecanol; n-Tetradecyl alcohol; Myristic alcohol; Myristyl alcohol; Tetradecyl alcohol;
T105 Tetradecan-1-ol n-Tetradecanol-1;1-Hydroxytetradecane; Myristryl alcohol; Tetradecanol-1;Tetradecanol; 1-Tetradecanol

Ethane, 1,1',1''-[methylidynetris(oxy)]tris-;Orthoformic acid, triethyl ester; Aethon; Ethone; Orthoformic acid

T106 Triethoxymethane ethyl ester;Triethyl orthoformate; Ethyl formate(ortho); 1-(Diethoxymethoxy)ethane;Triethoxmethane;Methane,
triethoxy-; 1,1',1'-(Methylidynetris(oxy))tris(ethane); Triethyl ester of Orthoformic acid;Ethyl orthoformate

T107 1,2,4-Trithiolane

T108 1,2,4,5-Tetrathiane s-Tetrathiane; 1,2,4,5-Tetrathiacyclohexane

Hexahydrofarnesyl acetone; 6,10,14-Trimethyl-2-pentadecanone; 6,10,14-Trimethylpentadecan-2-one
T109 6,10,14-Trimethylpentadecan-2-one (hexahydrofarnesylacetone); 6,10,14-trimethylpentadecanone;2-Pentadecanone, 6,10,14-trimethyl-
Tricyclo[2.2.1.0(2,6)]heptane, 1,7,7-trimethyl-; Tricyclene; 1,7,7-Trimethyltricyclo[2.2.1.0(sup2,6)]heptane;
T110 1,7,7-Trimethyltricyclo[2.2.1.0.(2.6)]heptane α-Tricyclene; 1,7,7-Trimethyl-tricyclo[2.2.1.0*2,6*]heptane;Tricyclo[2.2.1.02,6]heptane, 1,7,7-trimethyl-
Mesitol; 1-Hydroxy-2,4,6-trimethylbenzene; 2-Hydroxymesitylene;Mesityl alcohol;2,4,6-Trimetylofenol;Phenol,
T111 2,4,6-Trimethylphenol 2,4,6-trimethyl-

1378
Order General Name Synonyms
1,5-Heptadien-4-one, 3,3,6-trimethyl-; Isoartemisia ketone; 2,5,5-Trimethyl-2,6-heptadien-4-one; Artemesia;
T112 3,3,6-Trimethylhepta-1,5-dien-4-one Hepta-1,5-dien-4-one, 3,3,6-trimethyl;Artemesia ketone;3,3,6-Trimethyl-1,5-heptadien-4-one

T113 Tetradecane n-Tetradecane

Methylsyringol; Pyrogallol trimethyl ether;
T114 1,2,3-Trimethoxybenzene Tri-O-methylpyrogallol; Benzene, 1,2,3-trimethoxy-

T115 Tridecanoic acid n-Tridecanoic acid; n-Tridecoic acid; Tridecylic acid

Dihydroisophorone; 3,5,5-Triethylcyclohexanone; 3,3,5-trimethyi-cyclohexanone;Cyclohexanone,

T116 3,3,5-Trimethylcyclohexan-1-one 3,3,5-trimethyl-;3,3,5-Trimethylcyclohexanone

T117 Tetradecan-2-one 2-Tetradecanone

β-Ethoxypropionaldehyde diethyl acetal; 3-Ethoxypropionaldehyde diethyl acetal; Propionaldehyde, 3-ethoxy-,

T118 1,1,3-Triethoxypropane diethyl acetal; Propane, 1,3,3-triethoxy-; 1,3,3-Triethoxypropane;Propane, 1,1,3-triethoxy-

T119 Tridecanal n-Tridecylaldehyde; Tridecanaldehyde; Tridecyl aldehyde; 1-Tridecanal; Tridecane aldehyde; n-Tridecanal

T120 α-Terpinyl methyl ether

Diacetyl trimer;Furo[2,3-d]-1,3-dioxol-6a(3aH)-ol, 2,5-diacetyldihydro-2,3a,5-trimethyl-; Furo[2,3-d]-1,3-dioxole,

1,1’-(Tetrahydro-6a-hydroxy-2,3a,5- ethanone derivative 2,3-Butanedione trimer;
T121 trimethylfuro[2,3-d]-1,3-dioxole-2,5-diyl)bis-ethanone
2,5-Diacetyl-3a,5,6,6a-tetrahydro-6a-hydroxy-2,3a,5trimethylfuro[2,3-d]-1,3dioxole; Biacetyl trimer

2,6,6-trimethyl-2-cyclohexenone; 2,6,6-Trimethylcyclohex-2-enone; 2-Cyclohexen-1-one, 2,6,6-trimethyl-;

T122 2,6,6-Trimethylcyclohex-2-en-1-one 5-Cyclohexen-1-one, 2,2,6-trimethyl;2,6,6-Trimethyl-2-cyclohexen-1-one

T123 Trimethyloxazole 2,4,5-Trimethyloxazole; 2,4,5-Trimethyl-1,3-oxazole; Oxazole, 2,4,5-trimethyl;Oxazole, trimethyl-

T124 4-(2,3,6-Trimethylphenyl)but-3-en-2-one

1379
Order General Name Synonyms
1,6,10-Dodecatrien-3-ol, 3,7,11-trimethyl-, (Z)-(S)-(+)-; (+)-Nerolidol; D-nerolidol; Nerolidol; Nerolidol, cis-(+)-;
T125 [S-(cis)]-3,7,11-Trimethyl-1,6,10-dodecatrien-3-ol Peruviol; 3,7,11-Trimethyl-1,6,10-dodecatriene-3-ol, Z-; (6Z)-3,7,11-Trimethyl-1,6,10-dodecatrien-3-ol;
(Z)-Nerolidol;1,6,10-Dodecatrien-3-ol, 3,7,11-trimethyl-, [S-(Z)]-

T126 trans-2-Tridecenol (E)-2-Tridecenol; (E)-2-Tridecen-1-ol; (E)-Tridec-2-en-1-ol; trans-2-Tridecen-1-ol;

T127 Triethylthialdine 2,4,6-Triethyl-1,3,5-dithiazinane

T128 3,3,5-Trimethylcyclohexyl acetate Cyclohexanol, 3,3,5-trimethyl-, acetate; Homomenthol acetate; Homomenthyl acetate

T129 2,6,10-Trimethyl-9-undecenal 2,6,10-Trimethylundec-9-enal

U001 2,4-undecadienal tr-2, tr-4-Undecadienal

U002 2,3-Undecadione Acetyl nonanoyl; Acetyl nonyryl; Acetyl pelargonyl; Acetyl nonanyl
4-Undecanolide; 5-heptyldihydro-2(3H)-furanone; Aldehyde c-14 pure; undeca-1,4- lactone; γ-Undecyl lactone;
4-Hydroxyundecanoic acid, γ-lactone; 1,4-Hendecanolide; 4-n-heptyl-4-Hydroxybutanoic acid lactone;
U003 γ-Undecalactone * 4-Hydroxyundecanoic acid lactone; γ-n-Heptyl-γ-butyrolactone; Undecano-1,4-lactone; γ-Heptyl
butyrolactone; 4-Hydroxyundecanoic acid, γ-lactone; Peach aldehyde; undecanolide- 1,4; aldehyde C?14;
γ-Undecalactone; γ-Heptyl butyrolactone

Aaldehyde C-11(saturated); hendecanal; α-Oxo-undecane; n-Undecylic aldehyde; Undecylenic; Undecylic

U004 Undecanal
aldehyde; Aldehyde C-11 undecylic; Undecanoic aldehyde; n-Undecylaldehyde; Undecan-1-al

U005 Undecanoic acid n-Undecoic acid; n-Undecylic acid; Decane-α-carboxylic acid; Hendecanoic acid

1380
Order General Name Synonyms

U006 2-Undecanol sec-Undecylic alcohol; Methyl nonyl carbinol; 2-Hendecanol; sec-Undecyl alcohol

U007 2-Undecanone 2-Hendecanone; 2-oxoundecane; Nonyl methyl ketone; Rue ketone; Methyl nonyl ketone; Undecanone

U008 6-Undecanone Undecan-6-one, Diamyl ketone; Dipentyl ketone

U009 1,3,5-Undecatriene Undeca-1,3,5-triene; Galbanolene; Galbanolene super

U010 2-Undecen-1-ol 1-Hydroxy-2-undecene; trans-2-Undecenol

U011 Undecen-1-ol Undecylenic alcohol

U012 10-Undecen-1-yl acetate Acetate C-11; 10-hendecenyl acetate; Undecenyl acetate; Undecelynic acetate; Undec-10-enyl acetate

Aldehyde C-11 undecylenic; Hendecen-9-al; Undecenoic aldehyde; Undecylenic aldehyde; 10-Hendecenal;

U013 9-Undecenal 9-Undecylenic aldehyde
Acetate C-11 undecylenic; Hendecenal; Undecylenic aldehyde; 10-Hendecenal; Undecylenic aldehyde (mixed
U014 10-Undecenal isomers); Undecenal; Intreleven aldehyde; Aldehyde C-11
U015 2-Undecenal 2-Undecen-1-al; Undecen-2-al; 3-Octylacrolein

U016 Undecenal

U017 10-Undecenoic acid 10-Hendecenoic acid; Undecylenic aicd

U018 Undecyl alcohol Alcohol C-11; Hendecanol; 1-Undecanol; Alcohol c-11 undecylic; Decyl carbinol; 1-Hendecanol; Undecan-1-ol

U019 Undecyl acetate n-undecyl acetate;1-Un

U020 10-Undecen-2-one undecenone

1381
Order General Name Synonyms
U021 Undecanal propylene glycol acetal

U022 3,5-Undecadien-2-one Undeca-3,5-dien-2-one

U023 (E)-4-Undecenal (E)-Undec-4-enal; trans-Undec-4-enal; 4E-Undecenal

1,2,3,5,6,7,8,8a-Octahydro-1,8a-dimethyl-7-(1-methylethenyl)-naphthalene;
V001 Valencene 1,2,3,5,6,7,8a-Octahydro-1,8a-dimethyl-7-isopropenyl napthalene

n-valeraldehyde; Pentanal; Amylaldehyde; n-Pentanal; Valeral; n-Valeric aldehyde; Valeric aldehyde;

V002 Valeraldehyde Pentan-1-al; Aldehyde c-5

V003 Valeric acid Valerianic acid; Pentanoic acid; Propylacetic acid; 1-Butanecarboxilic acid
4-pentanolide; 5-Methyldihydro-2(3H)-furanone; penta-1,4-lactone; 3-Valerolantone; 3-methylbutyrolactone;
γ-Methyl-γ-butyrolactone; Pentano-1,4-lactone; 2(3H)- Furanone, dihydro-5-methyl-; 4-Hydroxypentanoic
V004 γ-Valerolactone acid, γ-lactone; γ-Methyl-γ- butyrolactone; 4-Methyl-4-hydroxybutanoic acid lactone; Pentanolide-1,4;
4-Valerolactone; γ-valeryllactone; 4-Hydroxypentanoic acid lactone; γ-Pentalactone
Vanillic aldehyde; 3-methoxy-4-hydroxybenzaldehyde; Vanillaldehyde; 4-Hydroxy- 3- methoxybenzaldehyde;
V005 Vanillin *
methyl protocatechuic aldehyde; Protocatechualdehyde-3- methylether
4-(l-Menthoxymethyl)-2(3-methoxy-4-hydroxyphenyl)-1,3-dioxolane;
V006 Vanillin 3-(l-menthoxy)propane-1,2-diol acetal 4-[2-(Methylethyl)-5-methylcyclohexyloxy]-2,5-dioxolanyl-2-methoxyphenol
2-(4-Hydroxy-3-methoxyphenyl)-4,5-dimethyl-1,3-dioxolane, 4-(4,5-dimethyl-1,3-
V007 Vanillin erythro- and threo-butan-2,3-diol acetal
dioxolan-2-yl)-2-methoxyphenol
Isobutavan; m-Anisaldehyde, 4-hydroxy, 2-methyl propionate; Benzaldehyde, 4-hydroxy, 3-methoxy,
2-methylpropanoate; 4-Formyl-2-methoxy-phenyl 2-methylpropanoate; isobutyric acid, ester with vanillin;
V008 Vanillin isobutyrate 3-Methoxy-4- isobutyrylbenzaldehyde; Propanoic acid, 2-methyl, 4-formyl-2-methoxyphenyl ester;
4-Hydroxy-3-methoxybenzaldehyde; 4-Hydroxy-m-anisaldehyde 2-methyl propionate; anillyl isobutyrate;
4-Isobutyryl-m-anisaldehyde
2-(3-methoxy-4-hydroxyphenyl)-4-methyl-1,3-dioxolane; 2-Methoxy-4-(4-methyl-1,3- dioxolan-2-yl)phenol;
V009 Vanillin propylene glycol acetal 4-Methyl-2-(4-hydroxy-3-methoxyphenyl)-1,3-dioxolane

V010 Vanillyl acetate Acetyl vanillin; 3-Methoxy-4-acetoxy benzaldehyde; 4-Acetoxy-3-methoxy- benzaldehyde; Benzaldehyde,

1382
Order General Name Synonyms
4-(acetyloxy)-3-methoxy-; Vanillin acetate
Benzenemethanol, 4-hydroxy-3-methoxy-; 4-Hydroxy-3-methoxybenzyl alcohol;
V011 Vanillyl alcohol 4-hydroxy-3-methoxyphenylmethanol

4-(Butoxymethyl)-2-methoxyphenol; Phenol, 4-(butoxymethyl)-2-methoxy-; Butyl vanillyl ether;

V012 Vanillyl butyl ether
2-methoxy-4-(butoxymethyl)phenol

V013 Vanillyl ethyl ether 4-(Ethoxymethyl)-2-methoxyphenol, Vee; Ethyl 4-hydroxy-3-methoxybenzyl ether

3-Buten-2-one, 4-(4-hydroxy-3-methoxyphenyl)-; 4-(4-Hydroxy-3-methoxyphenyl)but- 3-en-2-one; Methyl
V014 Vanillylidene acetone 3-methoxy-4-hydroxystyrl ketone; Dihydrozingerone
Dimethyl ether protocatechualdehyde; Veratric aldehyde; 3,4-Dimethoxybenzaldehyde;
V015 Veratraldehyde 3,4-Dimethoxybenzenecarbonal; Methyl vanillin; Protocatechualdehyde dimethylether; Vanillin methyl ether;
O-Methyl vanillin; p-Veratric aldehyde
Bicyclo[3,1,1]hept-2-en-2-ol, 4,6,6-trimethyl-; 4-Hydroxy-2,6,6-trimethylbicyclo(3,1,1)- hept-2-ene; 2-Pinen-4-ol;
V016 Verbenol d-Verbenol; Pin-2-en-4-ol; 2-Pinenol-4; 2-pinen-4-ol

V017 Verbenone Pin-2-en-4-one; 4,6,6-Trimethyl-bicyclo[3.1.1]hept-3-en-2-one; Bicyclo[3.1.1]hept-3- en-2-one, 4,6,6-trimethyl-

Vetivenol; Vetiverol; Lignolia; Khusimol; Octahydro-7,7-dimethyl-8-methylene-1H, 3A,
V018 Vetiverol 6-methanoazulene-3-methanol; 6-Azulenol, 1,2,3,3a,4,5,6,8a-octahydro-4,8- dimethyl-2-(1-methylethylidene)-;
Vetivol
Vetacetyl; Vetacetia; Acetivenol; 6-Azulenol, 1,2,3,3a,4,5,6,8a-octahydro-4,8- dimethyl-2-(1-methylethylidene)-,
V019 Vetiveryl acetate acetate; Vetiver acetate; Vetivert acetate
V020 o-Vinyl anisole 1-Methoxy-2-vinylbenzene; 2-Methoxystyrene; o-Methoxystyrene

V021 p-Vinylphenol 4-Vinylphenol; 4-Ethenylphenol; 4-Hydroxystyrene; phenol, 4-ethenyl-

1H-Cycloprop[e]azulen-4-ol, decahydro-1,1,4,7-tetramethyl-, [1ar-(1aα,4β,4aβ,7α,7aβ,7bα)]-;

V022 Viridiflorol 1,1,4,7-Tetramethyldecahydro-1H-cyclopropa[e]azulen-4-ol;Viridflorol

V023 Valeraldehyde dibutyl acetal

1,3-Dioxolane, 2-butyl-4-methyl-; 2-Butyl-4-methyl-1,3-dioxolane; 1,3-Dioxolane, 2-butyl-4-methyl, trans;

V024 Valeraldehyde propylene glycol acetal 1,3-Dioxolane, 4-methyl-2-butyl;1,3-Dioxolane, 2-butyl-4-methyl, cis

1383
 Order General Name Synonyms

X001 2,6-Xylenol 2-Hydroxy-1,3-dimethylbenzene; 2,6-Dimethylphenol

X002 2,5-Xylenol 2,5-Dimethylpheno, 1-hydroxy-2,5-dimethylbenzene; phenol, 2,5-dimethyl-; 2,5- Dimethylphenol

X003 3,4-Xylenol 3,4-Dimethylphenol; 1-Hydroxy-3,4-dimethylbenzene; Phenol, 3,4-dimethyl-

Y001 Yuzunone (8E)-6,8,10-Undecatrien-3-one; trans/cis,trans-6,8,10-Undecatrien-3-one

4-(4-Hydroxy-3-methoxyphenyl)-2-butanone; 2-(4-Hydroxy-3-methoxyphenyl) ethyl methyl ketone;

4-Hydroxy-3-methoxy benzylacetone; (4-Hydroxy-3-methoxy- phenylethyl)methyl ketone; 3-Methoxy-4-hydroxy
Z001 Zingerone benzylacetone; 4-(3-Methoxy- 4-hydroxyphenyl)-2-butanone; Vanillyl acetone; 2-Ethyl methyl ketone;
3-Methoxy-4-methoxybenzylacetone

* These synthetic flavoring substances shall be in accordance with their individual standards and specifications,
as they are listed in Ⅱ.4. Specification of Food Additives.

1384
 Boiler Water Additives
Definition Food additives allowed to use as Boiler Water Additives purpose are
shown below table. The food additives listed in Ⅱ.4. Standards and Specifications
must be suitable for those each standard and specification. However, the Boiler
Water Additives contain the following food additives in a simple mixture of two or
more food additives by a method that does not cause any chemical changes, and
water or glucose could be added for the purpose of quality preservation, dilution
and etc.

No. Food additives

1 Ammonium alginate
2 Ammonium hydroxide
3 Disodium dihydrogen pyrophosphate
4 Disodium ethylenediaminetetraacetate
5 Erythorbic acid
6 Food starch modified
7 Magnesium sulfate
8 Phosphoric acid
9 Polyethylene glycol
10 Polysorbate 20
11 Polysorbate 60
12 Potassium alginate
13 Potassium carbonate
14 Potassium hydroxide
15 Potassium phosphate, dibasic
16 Potassium phosphate, monobasic
17 Potassium phosphate, tribasic
18 Potassium tripolyphosphate
19 Silicon dioxide
20 Sodium acetate
21 Sodium alginate
1385
No. Food additives
22 Sodium bicarbonate
23 Sodium bisulfite
24 Sodium carbonate
25 Sodium carboxymethyl cellulose
26 Sodium erythorbate
27 Sodium hydroxide
28 Sodium metabisulfite
29 Sodium metaphosphate
30 Sodium nitrate
31 Sodium phosphate, monobasic
32 Sodium phosphate, tribasic
33 Sodium polyacrylate
34 Sodium polyphosphates; Pentasodium
tripolyphosphate triphosphate; Sodium
35 Sodium pyrophosphate
36 Sodium sulfate
37 Sodium sulfite
38 Sorbitan esters of fatty acids
39 Tannic acid
40 Trisodium citrate

1386
B. Mixed Preparations
L-Sodium Glutamate preparations
Definition L-Sodium Glutamate preparations should contain not less than 50.0% of L-sodium
glutamate (as a major component) and other synthetic food additives. Or it can be mixed and
diluted with one or more of spices (powder, juice, or extract), sodium chloride (salt), starch,
glucose, sugar, or dextrin and used as a flavoring (soups are excluded). The specifications
still apply even though the content of L-sodium glutamate is not more than 50.0% if only
sodium chloride (salt) and hexane are mixed for dilution.
Compositional Specifications of Ingredient Containing L-Sodium Glutamate preparations
Content L-Sodium Glutamate preparations should contain not less than 90.0% of the labeled
L-sodium glutamate content.
Description L-Sodium Glutamate preparations is powder, crystallite, or granule with its
characteristic colorful gloss.
Identification An aqueous solution containing 0.1% of L-sodium glutamate preparations(if
necessary, filtered) should have the same red spot as the standard, when thin layer
chromatography is carried out under the following conditions.
Conditions for Thin Layer Chromatography
-Developing Solvent ： n-butyl alcohol：glacial acetic acid：water (2：1：1)
-Thin Layer Plate ： Silica gel
-Developing Distance ： 10∼15 cm
-Colorizing Agent ： 0.2 g of ninhydrine is dissolved in n-butyl alcohol (saturated with
water) to make 100 mL.
Purity (1) Arsenic ： Proceed as directed under in Purity (1) for Mixed Preparations.
(2) Lead ： Proceed as directed under in Purity (2) for Mixed Preparations.
Assay (L-Sodium Glutamate preparations)
(1) Apparatus
Amino acid analyzer or its equivalent
(2) Preparation of Test Solution : 0.2g of sample is taken. Add Lithium citrate buffer
solution(pH 2.2) to make 100mL. 1mL of the solution is taken and diluted to 50mL. It is Test
Solution. Test as following below procedure.
(3) Operaion Condition
1) The measuring condition of amino acid analyzer
Column : HR Na Column (4.6mm × 200mm) or its equivalent
Column Temperature : 78℃
Detector and Wave : Absorbance (570nm)
Mobile Phase and Flow Rate:
- Buffer Solution : Lithium citrate buffer(pH 2.8) is flowed to the speed of
20mL/h
1387
 - Reaction Solution : Ninhydrin TS is flowed to the speed of 25mL/h
- Reactor Temperature : 135℃
- Injection Amount : 40㎕
(4) Test Solution
1) Buffer Solution : Lithium citrate buffer(pH 2.8)
2) Ninhydrin Solution : 18 g of Ninhydrin and 0.7g of hydrindantin are precisely weighed
and dissolved in 675 mL of dimethylsulfoxide. 225 mL of acetic lithium
solution (pH 5.2) is added to the above solution.
3) Standard Stock Solution : 0.2g of Standard L-sodium glutamate is taken.
Add Lithium citrate buffer solution(pH 2.2) to make 100mL volume.
4) Standard Solution : 1mL of Standard Stock Solution is taken. Add Lithium
citrate buffer solution(pH 2.2) to make 50mL volume.

1388
 Alkali Additives for Noodles Preparations
Definition Alkali Additives for Noodles contains one or more of sodium salts or potassium
salts such as sodium carbonate, potassium carbonate, sodium hydrogencarbonate, and
phosphates. There are solid alkali additives for noodles preparations, liquid additives for
noodles preparations, and diluted/powdered additives for noodles preparations(diluted with
wheat flour or insoluble starch).
A. Compositional Specifications of Solid Alkali Additives for Noodles preparations
Description Solid Alkali Additives for Noodles preparations is colorless～white powder,
crystalline lump, or their mixture.
Identification (1) An aqueous solution (1→10) of Solid Alkali Additives for Noodles
preparations shows reactions of alkali.
(2) An aqueous solution (1→10) of Solid Alkali Additives for Noodles preparations shows
reactions of Potassium Salts(A) or Sodium Salts(B) in Identification.
(3) An aqueous solution (1→10) of Solid Alkali Additives for Noodles preparations containing
carbonates or hydrogen carbonates shows reactions of Carbonates(A) in Identification.
(4) An aqueous solution (1→10) of Solid Alkali Additives for Noodles preparations containing
phosphates is acidified with diluted nitric acid. It shows reactions of Phosphates(B) in
Identification.
Purity (1) Clarity of Solution ： 200 mL aqueous solution containing 10 g of Solid Alkali
Additives for Noodles preparations is colorless and slightly turbid or better.
(2) Alkali Metal Hydroxide ： 10 g of Solid Alkali Additives for Noodles preparations is
dissolved in water so that the total volume is 200 mL (Solution A). 50 mL of barium
chloride solution and water are added to 40 mL of Solution A to bring the total volume to
100 mL. It is then shaken vigorously and filtered. When 3 drops of 0.1 N hydrochloric acid
and 2 drops of phenolphthalein TS are added to 50 mL of the filtrate, it should not
become red.
(3) Silicate Salts ： 1 drop of phenolphthalein TS is added to 10 mL of Solution A in (2),
where diluted hydrochloric acid is added until red color disappears. It is then heated for
15 minutes in a water bath and cooled. If the solution becomes red, diluted hydrochloric
acid is added until the red color disappears. 1 drop of methylene blue TS and 10 mL of
saturated ammonium chloride solution are added to the resulting solution, which is allowed
to stand for 2 hours. This solution should not yield colored precipitates or turbidity with
color.
(4) Chlorides ： 1 mL of Solution A in (2) proceed as directed under chlorides. The content
should not be more than the amount that corresponds to 0.5 mL of 0.01 N hydrochloric
acid.
(5) Arsenic ： It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(6) Lead : Proceed as directed unde in Purity (2) for Mixed Preparations. Test solution is
prepared by purity (2) for 「Sodium Metaphosphate」.

1389
B. Compositional Specifications of Liquid Alkali Additives for Noodles preparations
Content Liquid Alkali Additives for Noodles preparations is an aqueous solution of one or
more of sodium salts or potassium salts such as sodium carbonate, potassium carbonate,
sodium hydrogencarbonate, and phosphates.
Description Liquid Alkali Additives for Noodles preparations is colorless transparent liquid.
Identification Proceed as directed under Identification in Compositional Specifications of Solid
Alkali Additives for Noodles preparations. However, an aqueous solution(1→20) of Liquid
Alkali Additives for Noodles preparations is used.
Purity (1) Specific Gravity ： Specific Gravity should be 1.20∼1.33.
(2) Alkali Metal Hydroxides, Silicates, Chlorides, Arsenic, and Lead ： According to the
specific gravity in (1), 100 mL solution, containing an amount of sample indicated in Table 1,
is prepared (Solution A). Solution A proceed as directed under Purity (2), (3), (4), (5), and
(6) in Compositional Specifications of Solid Alkali Additives for Noodles preparations.
Table 1.
weight of weight of weight of
s.g. sample s.g. sample s.g. sample
taken(mL) taken(mL) taken(mL)
1.20 19.9 1.25 15.5 1.30 12.7
1.21 18.8 1.26 14.9 1.31 12.2
1.22 17.8 1.27 14.3 1.32 11.8
1.23 17.0 1.28 13.7 1.33 11.4
1.24 16.2 1.29 13.2
s.g. : specific gravity
C. Compositional Specifications of Diluted/Powdered Alkali Additives for Noodles preparations
Description Diluted/Powdered Alkali Additives for Noodles preparations is homogeneous whit
e～pale yellow powder.
Identification (1) Dissolve 5 g of Diluted/Powdered Alkali Additives for Noodles preparations
in 50 mL of water, and stand for a while to settle starch. Discard the supernatant by
tilting off. Do the same operation for several times and if iodine is added to some of the
debris, it becomes dark indigo color.
(2) Proceed as directed under Identification in Compositional Specifications of Solid Alkali
Additives for Noodles preparations. However, Test Solution is prepared by the following
procedure. 10 g of Diluted/Powdered Alkali Additives for Noodles preparations, is well
mixed with 50 mL of water by shaking, which is then filtered. The filtrate is used instead
of the aqueous solution (1→10) for solid alkali additives for noodles preparations.
Purity (1) Specific Gravity ： 60 g of Diluted/Powdered Alkali Additives for Noodles
preparations is well mixed in 200 mL of water by shaking, which is filtered. Specific
gravity of the filtrate should be 1.12∼1.17.
(2) Alkali Metal Hydroxides, Silicates, and Chlorides ： According to the specific gravity of
the filtrate in (1), take an amount of sample indicated in Table 2, and make to 100 mL
solution, is prepared (Solution A). Solution A proceed as directed under Purity (2), (3), and
(4) in Compositional Specifications of Solid Alkali Additives for Noodles preparations.
Table 2.
1390
 weight of weight of weight of
s.g. sample s.g. sample s.g. sample
taken(mL) taken(mL) taken(mL)
1.12 34.3 1.14 29.2 1.16 25.4
1.13 31.7 1.15 27.2 1.17 23.7
s.g. : specific gravity
(3) Insoluble substances ： 100 mL of sodium hydroxide solution (1→100) is added to 0.5 g
of Diluted/Powdered Alkali Additives for Noodles preparations, which is heated for 15
minutes, allowed to stand for 30 minutes, and filtered. The residue is washed with water
until the filtrate is no longer alkaline. The residue is ignited with the filter paper until the
weight becomes constant. The content of insoluble substances should not be more than 10
mg.
(4) Arsenic : It should be no more than 2.5 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(5) Lead : Proceed as directed unde in Purity (2) for Mixed Preparations. Test solution is
prepared by purity (2) for 「Sodium Metaphosphate」.

1391
 Preservatives preparations
Definition Preservative preparations is a mixture of two or more preservatives or a mixture
of one or more preservatives with other food additives or diluents for convenience. For the
cases where two or more preservatives are mixed, it is mixed and diluted to be appropriate
for standards of usage on individual preservative.
Compositional Specifications of Preservatives preparations
Content Preservative preparations should be 90.0∼110.0% of the labeled contents.
Identification When Preservative preparations proceed as directed under Identification, labeled
preservative should be identified. Salts are identified as acid.
1) Benzoic acid, dehyacetic acid, sorbic acid, and p-hydroxybenzoic acid esters
(1) Identification by Thin Layer Chromatography
Preparation of a test solution: Quantitative method 1) After releasing the ether obtained in
accordance with the preparation of the test solution, add a small amount of ethanol (1~2 mL)
instead of 0.1% acetanilideacetone solution to the residue as a test solution.
Thin-layer plates: Use silica gel for thin-layer chromatography(Silica gel 60 RP-18 F254S or
equivalent for Methyl p-hydroxybenzoic acid esters, and silica gel 60 kieselguhr F254 or
equivalent for benzoic acid, dehydroacetic acid and sorbic acid).
Test operation: At about 1.5 cm from the bottom edge of a plate, make spots using each of
20 μL of test solution and standard solutions of preservatives at intervals of about 2 cm. Dry
the plate after the development using each mobile phase 1 and 2, then make a comparative
observation of the spots under the ultraviolet light(254 nm).
Test solution
Preservatives standard solutions: Dissolve 10 mg of benzoic acid standard solution in 1 mL
of acetone, and dissolve 10 mg of dehydroacetic acid standard solution in 1 mL of acetone.
Dissolve 10 mg of sorbic acid in 5 mL of acetone, and and dissolve 10 mg of
p-hydroxybenzoic acid esters in 5 mL of acetone as standard solutions.
Deployment solvent: 1. For p-hydroxybenzoic acid esters : acetone〮water(60 : 40, v/v), 2. For
benzoic acid, dehydroacetic acid, and sorbic acid: xylene〮methanol〮acetic acid (20 : 0.5 : 0.3,
v/v/v)
(2) Identification by Gas Chromatography
It is tested according to benzoic acid, dehydroacetic acid, sorbic acid, and p-hydroxybenzoic
acid esters of Assay 1).
2) Sodium Propionates and Calcium Propionates
(1) 0.5∼1 g of Preservative preparations is dissolved in 10 mL of water. When 10 mL of
diluted sulfuric acid is added to this solution and heated, a characteristic odor is generated.
(2) Proceed and identified as directed under in Assay 2) for Propionic Acid.
(3) Preservative (0.5 g as propionic acid) is dissolved in 10 mL of water (and filtered if it is
diluted with starch). The solution (or filtrate) shows the reaction of (1)sodium salts or (4)
potassium salts of Identification in General Test Methods.
Purity (1) Arsenic : Proceed as directed unde in Purity (1) for Mixed Preparations.
1392
 (2) Preparations. Lead： Proceed as directed unde in Purity (2) for Mixed Preparations.
Assay
1) Benzoic acid, dehydroacetic acid, sorbic acid, and p-hydroxybenzoic acid esters
(1) Gas Chromatography
A) Pretreatment of sample
Sample (corresponding to 50∼100 mg as preservatives) is precisely weighed in a beaker
and dissolved or dispersed in 100 mL of water. (If it contains oil/fat, sample is neutralized
by 10% sodium hydroxide solution or 10% hydrochloric acid and transferred into a 500 mL～
1 l round bottom flask, where 5 mL of 15% tartaric acid solution, approximately 80 g of
sodium chloride, and 1 drop of silicone resin are added. The total volume is brought up to
150～200 mL with water. It is then distilled in a steam distillation apparatus. Distillate is
collected at a rate of 10 mL per minute up to 500 mL. 100 mL of the distillate is
transferred into a beaker.) The content in the beaker is acidified with 10% hydrochloric acid
(about pH 2), where 10 g of sodium chloride is dissolved. The resulting solution is extracted
3 times with 40 mL each of ether. The combined ether extracts are washed 3 times with 10
mL each of water and dehydrated with anhydrous sodium sulfate. The solvent is removed by
evaporation under vacuum at 20∼30℃. The resulting residue is dissolved in 0.1% acetanilide
acetone solution so that it contains 0.5～1.0 mg as preservative (Test Solution). Test
Solution is analyzed by the procedures in Gas Chromatography of General Test Methods
under the following conditions.
B) Reagents and Conditions
∘Standard Solutions ： 50 mg each of sorbic acid, benzoic acid, dehydroacetic acid, and
p-hydroxybenzoic acid esters is precisely weighed and dissolved in 0.1% acetanilide acetone
solution (total volume = 100 mL, 500 μg/mL).
-Column：coated with 1∼5% diethylene glycol succinate polyester (DEGS), or 1∼10%
neopentyl glycol succinate polyester (NPGS), or silicone 30 on Chromosorb W(60∼80
Mesh) .
-Injection Port Temperature ： 210∼230℃
-Column Temperature ： 140∼200℃
-Detector Temperature ： 230∼250℃
-Carrier Gas and Flow Rate ： N2, 30∼60 mL/min
(2) Acid Alkali Neutralization by Titration
Diluent of Single Component：sample (an amount corresponding to 0.2～0.5 g as
preservative) is treated by the procedure in A) Pretreatment of sample in 1) of Assay. The
residue obtained after evaporating ether is tested for the Content Test Method for each
Compositional Specifications. The content of salts is corrected by converting the content of
combined salts.

1393
2) Propinoic Acid
(1) Gas Chromatography
Preparation of Test Solution : Sample (50∼100 mg as propionic acid) is placed in a 500
mL distillation flask, where 100 mL of water, 40 g of sodium chloride, 10 mL of 10%
phosphoric acid, and 1 drop of silicone resin are added. It is then distilled to collect
250 mL of distillate. The end of the condenser is immersed in 10 mL of 1% sodium
hydroxide solution. Precisely 25 mL of distillate is taken, and concentrated and dried by
evaporation under vacuum. The residue is dissolved in 1 mL of water. This solution is
added to the top of the ion exchange resin column. The eluted solution is collected into
a 10 mL volumetric flask with 1 mL of internal standard solution. The remaining residue
is dissolved in 1 mL each of water at a time. The same procedure is repeated until the
total volume of the effluent becomes 10 mL (Test Solution).Test Solution is analyzed by
the procedures in Gas Chromatography of General Test Methods under the following
conditions.
Operation conditions
Column for Gas Chromatography：Glass or stainless steel tube (3∼4 mm × 1∼3 m) or
its equivalent
Detector : Hydrogen Flame Ionization Detector (FID)
Injection Port Temperature ： 200∼240℃
Column Temperature ： 160∼200℃ (Chromosorb 101)
110∼120℃ (AT 1200)
Detector Temperature ： 200∼250℃
Carrier Gas and Flow Rate ： N2, 30∼60 mL/min
Reagents
Propionic Acid Standard Solution： 0.1 g of propionic acid is dissolved in 10 mL of
internal standard solution, which is diluted to 100 mL with water (freshly prepared
before use).

1394
 Sodium Saccharin Preparations
Definition Sodium Saccharin preparations is a mixed and diluted ingredients consisting of 1 or
more of glucose, starch, sodium bicarbonate, edible salt(except processed salt), or DL-alanine,
glycine, D-sorbitol, D-sorbitol solution, or L-sodium glutamate so that it should contain no less
than 5% of its major component, sodium saccharin.
Compositional Specifications of Sodium Saccharin preparations
Content Sodium Saccharin preparations should contain 90.0～110.0% of the labeled amount of
sodium saccharin (C7H4O3NSNa․2H2O).
Description Sodium Saccharin preparations is white～pale yellow powder, granule, tablet, or
liquid with sweet taste.
Identification (1) sample, corresponding to 2 g of sodium saccharin (C7H4O3NSNa․2H2O), is
precisely weighed and dissolved in 50 mL of water, and after centrifuge, add 5 mL of
hydrochloric acid is added to the upper layer. This solution is extracted three times with 50 mL
of ether. The ether layer is washed three times with 10 mL of water. Ether is removed from
the extracts and the residue is dried for 2 hours at 105℃. Its melting point should be 224∼23
0℃.
(2) 20 mg of residue in (1) is mixed with 40 mg of resorcin, where 10 drops of sulfuric acid
are added. It is then gently heated until the mixture turns dark green. It is then cooled
and dissolved by adding 10 mL of water and 10 mL of sodium hydroxide solution. This
solution exhibits green fluorescence.
(3) 0.1 g of the extract in (1) is dissolved in 5 mL of sodium hydroxide solution, which is
evaporated to dryness. It is melted by carefully heating to avoid carbonization until
ammonia odor disappears. After cooling, the residue is dissolved in about 20 mL of water,
which is neutralized with diluted hydrochloric acid and filtered. When 1 drop of ferric
chloride solution is added to the filtrate, it becomes violet～red.
(4) Sodium Saccharin preparations is reduced to ash. These ash show the reactions of
sodium salts in Identification.
(5) 1 g of Sodium Saccharin preparations is dissolved in 20 mL of water, where 5 mL of
Fehling solution is added. When this solution is heated, red precipitates of copper dioxide
are formed.
(6) 0.4 g of Sodium Saccharin preparations is dissolved in 10 mL of diluted sulfuric acid,
where 0.2 g of potassium permanganate is added. When this solution is boiled, a odor of
acetaldehyde is generated.
(7) 5 g of Sodium Saccharin preparations is dissolved in 50 mL of water, which is allowed to
settle for precipitating starch. Supernatant is decanted. The residue is mixed with water.
Starch is settled and supernatant is decanted. This is repeated several times. When iodine
solution is added to the residue, it becomes dark indigo in color.(Only applies if starch is
included)
Purity (1) Arsenic ： Proceed as directed under in Purity (1) for Mixed Preparations.
(2) Lead： Proceed as directed unde in Purity (2) for Mixed Preparations.
Assay Sample, corresponding to 0.3 g of sodium saccharin preparations, is precisely weighed
1395
and dissolved in 20 mL of water, which is transferred into a separatory funnel. It is acidified
with dilute hydrochloric acid. Precipitates are extracted with 40 mL of mixture of alcohol and
chloroform (1:9). It is again extracted 4 times with 20 mL mixture. The extracts are filtered
through a filter paper wetted with a mixture of alcohol and chloroform. The filtrate is
evaporated to complete dryness. The residue is dissolved in about 75 mL of hot water. After
cooling, it is titrated with 0.1 N sodium hydroxide solution (indicator ： 3 drops of
phenolphthalein solution).
0.1 N sodium hydroxide solution 1 mL ＝ 24.12 mg C7H4O3NSNa․2H2O

1396
 Prepared Tar Dyes preparations
Definition Prepared tar dye preparations is a mixture of 2 or more tar dyes or a mixture of
one or more of tar dyes with other food additives or diluents.
Compositional Specifications of Tar Dyes Preparations
Identification (1) Dyes ： An aqueous solution is prepared so that the concentration of a dye
with the highest content is 0.05%. 0.002 mL of this solution is tested by the procedure in
Method 1 of Filter Paper Chromatography (developing solvent : n-butyl alcohol, anhydrous
alcohol, 1% ammonia solution = 6 : 2 : 3). Chromatography grade filter paper is used.
Developing is stopped when the solvent reaches up to 15 cm and the paper is dried. The
spots (positions and colors) of Test Solution and Reference Solution are compared under
natural light using white background. If the content of a dye is too minute for detection,
then not detected colour exist, this test is repeated with an aqueous solution containing
0.05% of the dye. It is acceptable if the minor pigments are detected from the dyes with
higher contents.
(2) Diluents (only when Diluents are used.)
(A) Starch (when dye solution is turbid or precipitates are present) ： A certain amount of
sample is dissolved in 10 times of water, which is allowed to settle down starch.
Supernatant is decanted. The residue is re-mixed with water, which is allowed to settle
down starch. Supernatant is decanted. This is repeated several times to decolorize the
residue. The reside is tested by the following procedures.
① When iodine solution is added to the residue, it becomes dark indigo in color.
② The residue is suspended in an appropriate amount of water, which is acidified with
dilute hydrochloric acid and inverted by heating. This solution is neutralized with sodium
hydroxide solution. When Fehling reaction is carried out, red precipitates of copper dioxide
are generated.
(B) Glucose and Sugar (when dye solution is clear or precipitates are not present) ：an
appropriate amount of sample is dissolved in 10 times of water, where an appropriate
amount of activated carbon is added. It is decolorized by heating and then filtered. The
filtrate is tested by the following procedures.
① Glucose ： A portion of this filtrate is neutralized and tested by Fehling reaction. If
there is glucose present, red precipitates of copper dioxide are generated.
② Sugar ： The remaining filtrate is acidified with diluted hydrochloric acid and inverted
by heating. This solution is neutralized with sodium hydroxide solution. When Fehling
reaction is carried out, red precipitates of copper dioxide are generated under the
presence of sugar.
Purity (1) Arsenic ： Proceed as directed under in Purity (1) for Mixed Preparations.
(2) Lead ： Proceed as directed under in Purity(2) for Mixed Preparations.

1397
 Baking Powder Preparations
Baking Powder
Compositional Specifications of Baking Powder Preparations
Baking Powder, Type 1 Baking powder of type 1 is a raising agent, containing carbonates or
bicarbonates, prepared by mixing acidic compounds.
Ammonium baking powder is excluded.
Description Baking powder preparations is white～grayish white powder or fragile lump.
Purity (1) Nitric Acid Insoluble substances ： 5 g of Baking powder preparations is mixed for
3 minutes in 30 mL of water, which is filtered. The insoluble substances are washed
thoroughly washed with water. The bottom of filter paper is punctured and the insoluble
substances are rinsed with 40 mL of diluted nitric acid into a beaker. It is boiled for 1
minute, cooled, and filtered through a Gooch crucible. The insoluble substances are washed
with water until the filtrate is no longer acidic. The insoluble substances (along with the
crucible) are dried by heating until the weight becomes constant. The amount of the
residues should not be more than 0.1g. (Should not be more than 2%).
(2) pH ： When 1 g of Baking powder preparations is mixed in 50 mL of water, which is
heated until bubbling stops and cooled, pH of the liquid should be 5.0∼8.5.
(3) Arsenic ： It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test.
(4) Lead : Proceed as directed unde in Purity (2) for Mixed Preparations. Test solution is
prepared by purity (2) for 「Sodium Metaphosphate」.
(5) Amount of Evolving Gas ： When the amount of evolving gas is measured, it should not
be less than 70 mL.
Baking Powder, Type 2 Baking powder of type 2 is a raising agent, containing carbonates or
bicarbonates, separately packaged and prepared for mixing just before using it. It should
follow the specifications and procedures for Baking Powder, Type 1. However, pH in Purity
(2) should be 4.0∼8.5.
Ammonium baking powder Baking powder preparations is a baking powder with ammonia salts
as its major components. It is tested by the specifications and procedures for Baking
Powder, Type 1. However, pH in Purity (2) should be 6～9. Amount of evolving gas in Purity
(5) is measured with water in a leveling bottle instead of diluted sulfuric acid.

1398
 Mixed preparations
Definition Mixed preparations is a mixture of two or more food additives or a mixture of one
or more additives with diluents. However, if an individual component has its own
specifications, it is not regulated by the specifications provided in this section.
Compositional Specifications of Mixed preparations
Description There should not be any color, taste, or odor other than mixed additives. It is a
powder, crystallite, or liquid, etc.
Purity (1) Arsenic ： It should be no more than 4.0 ppm tested by Arsenic Limit Test. The
amount should be no more than the sum amount calculated as a percentage of arsenic in
individual compounds, tested by Arsenic Limit Test. However, if there is no specification of
compound(food additive), its arsenic amount shall be 4.0 ppm, arsenic amount of diluting
agent which is food ingredient shall be 1.5 ppm(Arsenic trioxide, As2O3). The sum of arsenic
amounts shall be rounded up from the second decimal place.
(2) Lead : When 5.0 g of Mixed preparations is tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, the lead amount
should be no more than the sum amount calculated as a percentage of lead in individual
compounds. However, if there is no specification of compound(food additive), its lead
amount shall be 10 ppm, lead amount of diluting agent which is food ingredient shall be 1.0
ppm, and lead amount of water shall be 0.05 ppm. The sum of lead amounts shall be
rounded up from the second decimal place

1399
5. Use Level of each food additive
A. Food additives
The following additives should be used in accordance with each use level. However, if
there is no specified use level of food additive, it should be used in accordance with the
section Ⅱ.2.1).

Food additive Use Level Major

functional
class
The usage of Acesulfame Potassium should Sweetener
be1. Confectionery, boiled foods(only with
agricultural products as main ingredient): no
more than 2.5g/kg
2.3. Chewing gum: nojams,
Sauce, candies, morepickled
than 5.0g/kg
food products,
frozen
ice cream mixes and flour pastes:ice nocreams,
confectionery products, more
than 1.0g/kg
4. Beverages, processed milk, fermented
milk: no more
the product that than
is to0.50g/kg (However,
be diluted before
drinking is based on the diluted
5. Sugar substitute product: no more than form)
Acesulfame Potassium 15g/kg
6.7. Cereals:
Foods nofor more than medical
special 1.2g/kg purpose: no
more than 0.5g/kg
8. Weight control formulas: no more than
0.45g/kg
9. Other foods: no more than 0.35g/kg
10. 2.0g/kg(However,
Health functional food: for nothemore health
than
functional food which is drank by
dilution,
6.0g/kg) it should be no more than

Acetic Acid It should be used in accordance with Section Acidity

Ⅱ.2.1). regulator
-Acetolactate decarboxylase It should be used in accordance with Section Enzyme
α
Ⅱ.2.1). preparations
Acetone should be used only for the Extraction
following Forfood items
the or separation
1. ingredients.(However, function. of oil solvent
it should be
removed
completed.) before the final product is
Acetone 2. For the extraction or the separation of
the functional raw material for health
functional food: asnotacetone)
residual amount more than 0.03g/kg(The

1400
 Food additive Use Level Major
functional
class

Acetophenone Acetophenone should be used for flavorings F l a v o u r i n g

only. agent
Acid Clay should be useddeodorizing,
only for a refining,
filtering Filter aid
aid(filtering, discoloring,
and etc.) in food manufacturing or processing.
However,
product it should
is be removed
completed. The before theamount
residual final
should be no more than 0.5%.(if it is used with
diatomaceous
perlite, activatedearth,carbon,kaolin,and bentonite, talc,
other insoluble
Acid Clay minerals, the sum of the residues should be no
more than 0.5%).

Active Carbon should be used only for a Filter aid

filtering
refining, aid(filtering,
etc.) in discoloring,
food deodorizing,or
manufacturing
processing. However, it should be removed
before
residual theamount
final product
should beis completed.
no more than The
Active Carbon 0.5%.(if it is used with diatomaceous earth,
kaolin, bentonite, talc, perlite, acid clay, and
other
residuesinsoluble
should beminerals, the 0.5%).
no more than sum of the

5'-Adenylic acid should be used only for the F o r t i f y i n g

following
be1. Milk food items and the usage should nutrient
formulas, infant formulas, follow-up
formulas, Baby foods for infants/young
5'-Adenylic Acid children(Entry
for infants/young into children
force: 2020.1.1),
with milkformulas
protein
allergy, special formulas
children: no more than 0.075g/kgfor infants/young

It should be used in accordance with Section Aregulator

cidity
Adipic Acid Ⅱ.2.1). Raising agent

DL-Alanine It should be used in accordance with Section Fnutrient

ortifying
Ⅱ.2.1).
L-Alanine It should be used in accordance with Section F o r t i f y i n g
Ⅱ.2.1). nutrient
Alfalfa Extract Alfalfa Extract should not be used in the Colour
1401
 Food additive Use Level Major
functional
class
food items listed below. fishes and shellfishes,
1. Natural food[meat,
fruits, vegetables, algae,their Legume
vegetables
processed food(peeled, cut, and etc.)] simply
and pulses, and
2.3. Teas
4. Coffee
Hot pepper powder, shredded hot pepper
5.6. Kimchi products
Gochujang
seasoned hot (hot
pepper pepper
soy paste soy paste),
7. Vinegars

It should be used in accordance with Section Emulsifier

Alginic Acid Ⅱ.2.1). Thickener
Stabilizer
Allyl Caproate Allyl Caproate should be used for flavorings Flavouring
only. agent
Allyl Cyclohexanepropionate should be used Flavouring
Allyl Cyclohexanepropionate for flavorings only. agent
Allyl Isothiocyanate Allyl Isothiocyanate should be used for Flavouring
flavorings only. agent
Aluminium Ammonium Sulfate should be used Acidity
only for the following
as aluminium should be food items. The usage regulator
Raising agent
1. Breads,
Confectionery, mixes for confectionery, Stabilizer
frying: no more than 0.1g/kg(if mixes
mixes for breads, for
it is used
with
Sodium Aluminium Potassium Sulfate,
Sodium Aluminium Phosphate, Basic,Acidic,
Aluminium Phosphate, the
total of usage as aluminium should be no
2. moreProcessed
than 0.1g/kg.) peanut or nut
product(chestnuts
tuberous and only),
corm processed
vegetable
Aluminium Ammonium Sulfate product(sweet potatoes only), other
processed
fruit/vegetablefish product
meat products,
: no processed
more than
0.1g/kg(if it is used with Aluminium
Potassium
aluminium Sulfate,
should thebe total
no ofmore
usagethanas
0.1g/kg)
3. Noodles, mixes forprocessed
fishery products, noddles, other
starchprocessed
product,
Dumpling skin: not more that 0.2g/kg(if it
isSulfate,
used the
alongtotalwithof Aluminium
usage as Potassium
aluminium
should be no more than 0.2g/kg.)
4. Pickled food: not more than 0.5g/kg(if it
1402
 Food additive Use Level Major
functional
class
isSulfate,
used the
alongtotalwithof Aluminium Potassium
usage as aluminium
should be no more than 0.5g/kg.)

Aluminium
only for thePotassium
followingSulfate should Thebe usage
food items. used Aregulator
cidity
as aluminium should be Raising agent
1. Confectionery, mixes for confectionery, Stabilizer
Breads,
frying: nomixes for 0.1g/kg(if
more than breads, mixes
it is usedfor
with
Sodium Aluminium Ammonium Sulfate,
Sodium Aluminium Phosphate, Basic,Acidic,
Aluminium Phosphate, the
total of usage as aluminium should be no
2. moreProcessed
than 0.1g/kg.) peanut or nut
product(chestnuts
tuberous only), processed
product(sweet potatoes only),vegetable
and corm other
processed fish meat products, processed
fruit/vegetable
0.1g/kg(if it isproduct used : with
no more
Aluminiumthan
Ammonium
aluminium Sulfate,
should the be total
no ofmoreusagethanas
Aluminium Potassium Sulfate 0.1g/kg)
3. processed
Noodles, fishery
mixes for noddles,processed
products, other
starch product, Dumpling skin: not more
that 0.2g/kg(if
Aluminium it is Sulfate,
Ammonium used along
the withof
total
usage as aluminium should be no more
than 0.2g/kg.)
4. Pickled
is used along food: with
not more than 0.5g/kg(if
Aluminium Ammoniumit
Sulfate,
should betheno more
total than
of 0.5g/kg.)
usage as aluminium

1403
 Food additive Use Level Major
functional
class
Amidated Pectin It should be used in accordance with Section Thickener
Ⅱ.2.1).
Ammonia shouldproduct
be neutralized
is completed.or removed Aregulator
cidity
Ammonia before the final
manufacturing
solvent
It should be used in accordance with Section Emulsifier
Ammonium Alginate Ⅱ.2.1). Thickener
Stabilizer
It should be used in accordance with Section Aregulator
cidity
Ammonium Bicarbonate Ⅱ.2.1). Raising agent
It should be used in accordance with Section Aregulator
cidity
Ammonium Carbonate Ⅱ.2.1). Raising agent

Ammonium Chloride It should be used in accordance with Section Raising agent

Ⅱ.2.1).
It should be used in accordance with Section Acidity
Ammonium Hydroxide Ⅱ.2.1). regulator
Ammonium
for Molybdate should be used only Fnutrient
ortifying
Ammonium Molybdate 1. Foods for special medical purposes
2. Health functional food
Ammonium
for the Persulfate
following food shouldthebeusage
item. usedshould
only Flour
agent treatment
Ammonium Persulfate be
1. Wheat flour products : no more than
0.3g/kg
It should be used in accordance with Section Acidity
regulator
Ammonium Phosphate, Dibasic Ⅱ.2.1). Raising agent
It should be used in accordance with Section A c i d i t y
Ammonium Phosphate, Monobasic Ⅱ.2.1). regulator
Raising agent
Ammonium Phosphatides should be used Emulsifier
only
shouldforbe the following food item. The usage
Ammonium Phosphatides 1. Other
more cocoa products, chocolates: no
than 10g/kg

1404
 Food additive Use Level Major
functional
class
Ammonium Sulfate It should be used in accordance with Section Raising agent
Ⅱ.2.1).
-Amylase It should be used in accordance with Section Enzyme
α
Ⅱ.2.1). preparations
β-Amylase
It should be used in accordance with Section Enzyme
Ⅱ.2.1). preparations
α-Amylcinnamaldehyde should be used for Flavouring
α-Amylcinnamaldehyde flavorings only. agent
Anisaldehyde Anisaldehyde should be used for flavorings Flavouring
only. agent
Annatto Extract should not be used in the Colour
following
1. Naturalfoodfood[meat,
items. fishes and shellfishes,
fruits, vegetables, algae, Legume
vegetables and pulses, and their simply
processed food(peeled, cut, and etc.)]
2. Teas
3.4. Coffee
Hot pepper powder, shredded hot pepper
5. Kimchi products
6. Gochujang(hot pepper soy paste),
Annatto Extract 7. seasoned
Vinegars hot pepper soy paste
8. containing
Spice products(only
hot pepper orthe hot products
pepper
powder)

Annatto, Water-soluble should not be used Colour

in the following food items.
1. fruits,
Natural food[meat, fishesalgae,
and shellfishes,
vegetables and pulses, and their Legume
vegetables, simply
processed
2.3. Teas food(peeled, cut, and etc.)]
Coffee
4. Hot pepper powder, shredded hot pepper
5.6. Kimchi products
Gochujang (hot pepper soy paste),
Annatto, Water-Soluble seasoned hot pepper soy paste
7.8. Vinegars
Spice Products(only the products
containing
powder) hot pepper or hot pepper

1405
 Food additive Use Level Major
functional
class

-Apo-8'-Carotenal
following food items. should not be used in the Colour
β

1. fruits,
Natural food[meat, fishesalgae,
and shellfishes,
vegetables and pulses, and their Legume
vegetables,
simply
processed
2. Teas food(peeled, cut, and etc.)]
3. Coffee
-Apo-8'-Carotenal 4. Hot pepper powder, shredded hot pepper
β 5.6. Kimchi products
Gochujang (hot pepper soy paste),
7. Vinegars pepper soy paste
seasoned hot

Arabic Gum It should be used in accordance with Section Thickener

Stabilizer
Ⅱ.2.1).
Arabino Galactan It should be used in accordance with Section Thickener
Stabilizer
Ⅱ.2.1).
L-Arginine It should be used in accordance with Section Fortifying
Ⅱ.2.1). nutrient
L-AscorbyI Palmitatefoodshould
for the following items.be The
used usage
only Antioxidant
Fortifying
should be fats and oils(excluding imitation
1. Edible nutrient
cheese and vegetable cream): no more
than 0.5g/kg(if
L-ascorbyl stearate, it theis totalusedusagewithof
L-ascorbyI palmitate and L-ascorbyl
stearate should be no more than
0.5g/kg) no more than 0.5 g/kg
2. Mayonnaise:
3. Processed
Confectionery,
Saccharide Breads,
Product,RiceLiquidCakes,
tea,
L-Ascorbyl Palmitate Foods for special Medical
Purposes(Excluding
infants/young SpecialWeight
children), formulasControl
for
Formulas, Foods for Pregnant/Lactating
women, Alcoholic product,
fruit/vegetable Beverages, Processed
tuberous and corm vegetable Processed product,
Processed Fish Meat Products, Other
Processed Fishery : noProducts,
processed Products more thanOther 1.0
g/kg
4. Candies, Cocoa Products or Chocolates,
Oil-fied noodle, Composite seasoning,
Spice preparation,
more than 0.5 g/kg Dumpling skin : no
1406
 Food additive Use Level Major
functional
class
5. it’s
Health functional foods are followed by
regulation.
L-AscorbyI Palmitatefoodshould
items.be The
used usage
only Antioxidant
for the following Fortifying
should be fats and oils(excluding imitation nutrient
1. Edible
cheese and vegetable cream): no more
than 0.5g/kg(if it theis totalusedusagewithof
L-ascorbyl stearate,
L-ascorbyI palmitate and L-ascorbyl
stearate should be no more than
0.5g/kg)
2. Mayonnaise: no more than 0.5 g/kg
3. Processed
Confectionery,
SaccharideBreads,
Product,RiceLiquidCakes,
tea,
Foods for special Medical
L-Ascorbyl Palmitate Purposes(Excluding Special formulas for
infants/young
Formulas, Foodschildren), Weight Control
for Pregnant/Lactating
women, Alcoholic product,
fruit/vegetable Beverages, Processed
Processed
tuberous and corm vegetable product,
Processed Fish Meat Products, Other
Processed
processed Products Fishery : noProducts,
more thanOther 1.0
g/kg
4. Candies, Cocoa Products or Chocolates,
Oil-fied noodle, Composite seasoning,
Spice preparation, Dumpling skin : no
5. more
Healththanfunctional
0.5 g/kg foods are followed by
it’s regulation.
L-AscorbyI Stearate should be used only for Antioxidant
the1. following
Edible fats food and
items.oils(excluding imitation Fnutrient
ortifying
cheese and vegetable cream): no more
L-Ascorbyl Stearate than
L-ascorbyI 0.5g/kg(if
palmitate,it theis totalusedusagewithof
L-ascorbyl stearate and L-ascorbyI
palmitate should be no more than
0.5g/kg)functional food
2. Health
Asparaginase It should be used in accordance with Section Enzyme
Ⅱ.2.1). preparations
L-Asparagine It should be used in accordance with Section Fnutrient
ortifying
Ⅱ.2.1).
The
foods usage
are notof restricted.
Aspartame is as belows. Other Sweetener
1. Breads, confectionery, mixes for breads,
mixes
5.0g/kg for confectionery: Not more than
Aspartame 2. Cereals: Not more than 1.0g/kg
3. Foods
more than for special medical purposes: Not
1.0g/kg
4. Weight control formulas: Not more than
0.8g/kg
5. Health functional food: Not more than
1407
 Food additive Use Level Major
functional
class
5.5g/kg

L-Aspartic Acid It should be used in accordance with Section Fnutrient

ortifying
Ⅱ.2.1).
Azodicarbonamide should be used only for Flour
the following food item. agent treatment
Azodicarbonamide 1.45mg/kg
Wheat flour products: not more that

Beeswax It should be used in accordance with Section Coating agent

Ⅱ.2.1).
Beet Red should not be used in the food Colour
items listed below.
1. Natural food[meat, fishes and shellfishes,
fruits,
vegetables vegetables,
and pulses, and algae,their Legume
simply
processed
2. Teas food(peeled, cut, and etc.)]
3. Coffee
4. Hot pepper powder, shredded hot pepper
5.6. Kimchi products
Gochujang (hot pepper soy paste),
Beet Red
7. Vinegars pepper soy paste
seasoned hot
8. Spice products(only the products
containing hot pepper or hot pepper
powder)

Bentonite
aid(filtering,should bediscoloring,
used only for deodorizing,
a filtering Filtering aid
refining, and etc.) in food manufacturing or
processing.
before the However,
final it should
product is be removed
completed. The
Bentonite residual amount should be no more than
0.5%.(if
kaolin, itacidis used
clay, with
talc, diatomaceous
perlite, earth,
activated
carbon, and other insoluble minerals, the
sum of the residues should be no more than
0.5%).
Benzaldehyde Benzaldehyde
only. should be used for flavorings Fagent
lavouring
Benzoic
following acid
food should
items. beTheused
usage onlyas for the
benzoic Preservative
Benzoic Acid acid should be
1. non-heated
Fruit/vegetableproducts): beverages(excluding
No more than
0.6g/kg(In the case of concentrated fruit
1408
Food additive Use Level Major
functional
class
juice, fruit/vegetable juice, if sorbate,
it is usedor
with sorbic acid, potassium
calcium sorbate,and thesorbicsumacidof should
usage beas
benzoic acid
no more than 1.0 g/kg, and the usage of
benzoic acid should be no more than
0.6g/kg)
2. Carbonated beverage: No more than
0.6g/kg(If itsorbate
is usedor with sorbicsorbate,
acid,
potassium calcium
the sum of usage as benzoic acid and
sorbic
0.6g/kg, acid
and should
the be noas sorbic
usage more than acid
should be no more than 0.5g/kg)
3. products),
Other beverages(excluding
ginseng/red powder
ginseng
beverages: No more than 0.6g/kg(if it is
used with ethyl ρ-hydroxybenzoate or
methyl
usage ρas-hydroxybenzoate,
benzoic acidthe and sum ofρ
-hydroxybenzoic
than 0.6g/kg, and acid should
the usage be no asmoreρ
-hydroxybenzoic acid should be no more
than 0.1g/kg)
4. sauce,
Korean-style soy sauce, soy
acid-hydrolyzed brewed sauce,soy
enzyme-hydrolyzed
soy sauce: No more soythan sauce, 0.6g/kg(ifblended
it is
used with ethyl ρ-hydroxybenzoate or
Methyl ρ-hydroxybenzoate, the sum of
usage as benzoic
-hydroxybenzoic acid should acid be noand moreρ
than 0.6g/kg, and
-hydroxybenzoic the usage
acid should be no asmoreρ
than 0.25g/kg)
5. Aloe whole leaves(including Aloe gel)
health functional food(However, in the
case of using more than two kinds of
health
proportionfunctional
of food
the materials,
aloe apply
whole
leaves(including the aloe gel) health
functional
0.5g/kg(if foodis content):
it used withNo sorbic
more acid,
than
potassium sorbate, or calcium sorbate,
the
sorbicsumacidof usage
should asbe benzoicno more acid than
and
1.5g/kg, and the usage of sorbic acid
should No
6. Jams: be nomoremorethanthan1.0g/kg(if
1.0g/kg) it is used
with sorbic acid, potassium sorbate,
calcium
ethyl sorbate, methyl ρ-hydroxybenzoate,
ρ-hydroxybenzoate, propionic acid,
sodium propionate, or calcium propionate,
the sum of usage as benzoic acid, sorbic
acid, p-hydroxybenzoic
acid should be no more acid, than 1.0andg/kg)
propionic
7. itMango
is usedchutney: No moreρ-hydroxybenzoate
with Methyl than 0.25g/kg(if
or ethyl ρ-hydroxybenzoate, the sum of
usage as benzoic
-hydroxybenzoic acid should acid be noand moreρ
1409
 Food additive Use Level Major
functional
class
8. than
0.25g/kg).
Margarine: No more than 1.0g/kg(if it is
used with sorbic acid, potassium sorbate or
calcium sorbate, the sum of usage as
sorbic acid and benzoic acid should be no
more thanacid 2.0g/kg, and the more
usage thanas
benzoic should be no
0.1g/kg)
9. Pickled food,it mayonnaise: No sorbic
more acid,
than
1.0g/kg(if is used with
potassium sorbate or calcium sorbate, the
sum
acid of usagebe asno benzoic acid1.5g/kg,
and sorbic
the usage of sorbic acid should be and
should more than no
more than 1.0g/kg)
Benzyl Acetate Benzyl Acetate should be used for flavorings Flavouring
only. agent
Benzyl Alcohol Benzyl Alcohol should be used for flavorings Flavouring
only. agent
Benzyl Propionate Benzyl Propionate should be used for Flavouring
flavorings only. agent
Berries Color should not be used in the Colour
following food items.
1. Natural food[meat, fishes and shellfishes,
fruits,
vegetables vegetables,
and pulses, and algae,their Legume
simply
processed
2. Teas food(peeled, cut, and etc.)]
3. Coffee
4. Hot pepper powder, shredded hot pepper
5.6. Kimchi products
Gochujang (hot pepper soy paste),
Berries Color seasoned
7.8. Vinegars hot pepper soy paste
Spice Products(only the products
containing
powder) hot pepper or hot pepper

Betaine It should be used in accordance with Section Fenhancer

lavour
Ⅱ.2.1).
Biotin It should be used in accordance with Section Fnutrient
ortifying
Ⅱ.2.1).
Black
the carrot food
following extractitem.should be used only for Colour
Black carrot extract 1. Candies
Branching glycosyltransferase It should be used as in accordance with the Emzyme
1410
 Food additive Use Level Major
functional
class
Section.Ⅱ.2.1). preparations
Butane should be used only for the following E x t r a c t i o n
food items before
or function, and it product
should beis solvent
removed the final
completed.
1. when
For manufacturing
extracting fatsedible
and fatsoil andcomponent
Butane oils
2. For extracting or separating functional
material of health functional food

Butyl Acetate Butyl Acetate should be used for flavorings Flavouring

only. agent
Butyl Butyrate Butyl Butyrate should be used for flavorings Flavouring
only. agent
Butylated Hydroxy Anisole should be used Antioxidant
only for the following food items. The usage
should be
1. Edible
cheese fatsand and oils(excluding
vegetable cream), imitation
butters,
dried
shellfish: no more than 0.2g/kg(If itandis
fish and shellfish, salted fish
used with butyl hydroxy toluene or
tertiary-butyl hydroquinone, the sum of
usage as butylated
butyl hydroxy toluene and hydroxy anisole,
tertiary-butyl
hydroquinone
0.2g/kg) should be no more than
2. Immersion solution of frozen fish and
shellfish(excluding frozen fresh fish and
shellfish,
1g/kg(If itandis rawusedoysters): no more
with butyl than
hydroxy
toluene
the orof usage
tertiary-butyl hydroquinone,
anisole, butyl hydroxy toluenehydroxy
sum as butylated and
Butylated Hydroxy Anisole tertiary-butyl hydroquinone should be no
3. more
Chewingthan gum:
1g/kg)no more than 0.4g/kg (If
ittertiary-butyl
is used withhydroquinone,
butyl hydroxythetoluene sum orof
usage as butylated hydroxy anisole, butyl
hydroxy
hydroquinone toluene
should and
be no tertiary-butyl
more than
0.4 g/kg)
4. moreWeightthan control
0.05g/kg formulas,
(If it is cereals:
used no
with
butyl hydroxy toluene, sum of usage as
butylated hydroxy anisole and butyl
hydroxy
0.05g/kg) toluene should be no more than
5. Mayonnaise: no more than 0.14g/kg

1411
 Food additive Use Level Major
functional
class

Butylated Hydroxy Toluene should be used Antioxidant

only forbe the following food items. The usage
should
1. Edible fats and oils(excluding imitation
cheese andandvegetable cream), butters,
dried
shellfish: no more than 0.2g/kg(If itandis
fish shellfish, salted fish
used with butyl
tertiary-butyl hydroxy theanisole
hydroquinone, sum orof
usage as butyl hydroxy toluene,
butylated hydroxy anisole and
tertiary-butyl hydroquinone should be
no more than 0.2g/kg)
2. shellfish(excluding
Immersion solutionfrozen of frozen
fresh fish
fish and
and
shellfish, and raw oysters): no more than
1g/kg(If it is used with butyl hydroxy
anisole
the sumor of tertiary-butyl
usage as butyl hydroquinone,
hydroxy
toluene,
tertiary-butyl hydroquinone should be and
butylated hydroxy anisole no
more than 1g/kg)
3. Chewing gum: no more than 0.4g/kg(If it
Butylated Hydroxy Toluene istertiary-butyl
used with hydroquinone,
butyl hydroxytheanisolesum orof
usage
butylated as hydroxy butyl hydroxy anisole toluene,
and
tertiary-butyl hydroquinone should be no
more than 0.4g/kg)
4. moreWeightthan control
0.05g/kgformulas,
(If it is cereals:
used with no
butyl
ashydroxy hydroxy hydroxy
butylated anisole, the sum and
of usage
anisole should be no more butyl
toluene than
0.05g/kg)
5. Mayonnaise: no more than 0.06g/kg

tert-Butylhydroquinone
for the following foodshoulditems.be The
used usage
only Antioxidant
tert-Butylhydroquinone should be
1. Edible
cheese fats
and and oils(excluding
vegetable cream), imitation
butters,
dried fish and shellfish, salted fish and
1412
 Food additive Use Level Major
functional
class
shellfish:
used withno butyl
more than 0.2g/kg(If
hydroxy anisoleit oris
butylated hydroxy toluene, hydroquinone,
the sum of
usage as tertiary-butyl
butyl hydroxy toluene and butylated
hydroxy anisole should be no more than
0.2g/kg)
2. Immersion solution of frozen fish and
shellfish(excluding frozen fresh fish than
and
shellfish, and raw oysters): no more
1g/kg (If it is used with butyl hydroxy
anisole
sum orof butylated
usage hydroxy
as toluene, the
tertiary-butyl
hydroquinone, butyl hydroxy toluene and
butylated
more than hydroxy
1 g/kg) anisole should be no
3. Chewing gum: no more than 0.4g/kg(If it
is used with butyl hydroxy anisole or
butylated
usage as hydroxy toluene, hydroquinone,
tertiary-butyl the sum of
butyl
hydroxyhydroxy toluenebe and
anisole should no morebutylated
than
0.4g/kg)

Butyric Acid Butyric Acid should be used for flavorings F l a v o u r i n g

only. agent
Cacao color should not be used in the food Colour
items listed below.
1. fruits,
Natural food[meat,
vegetables, fishesalgae,
and shellfishes,
Legume
vegetables
processed and pulses,
food(peeled, cut, and
and their
etc.)] simply
2. Teas
3.4. Coffee
Cacao Color 5. Hot pepper
Kimchi powder, shredded hot pepper
products
6. Gochujang(hot pepper soy paste),
7. seasoned
Vinegars hot pepper soy paste

Caffeine should be used only for carbonated F l a v o u r

beverage. The usage of caffeine should be enhancer
no
matter.more(If than 0.015%is asbeverage
the product anhydrous dry
base that
Caffeine isconsumption
intend to anduse final
by diluting five times for
food category of the
product correspond to the carbonated
1413
 Food additive Use Level Major
functional
class
beverage, the beusage of the
product should no more than beverage
0.075%. base

Calcium Acetate It should be used in accordance with Section Aregulator

cidity
Ⅱ.2.1).
It should be used in accordance with Section Emulsifier
Calcium Alginate Ⅱ.2.1). Thickener
Stabilizer
It should be used in accordance with Section Fnutrient
ortifying
Calcium L-Ascorbate Ⅱ.2.1). Antioxidant
Calcium Benzoate should be used only for Preservative
the following food items. The usage as
benzoic acid should be beverages(excluding
1. Fruit/vegetable
non-heated
0.6g/kg(In theproducts): No more than
case of concentrated fruit
juice, fruit/vegetable juice, if it is used
with sorbic acid, potassium sorbate, or
calcium sorbate,and thesorbicsumacidof should
benzoic acid usage be as
no more acid
benzoic than should
1.0 g/kg,beandno themoreusagethanof
0.6g/kg)
2. Carbonated beverage: No more than
0.6g/kg(If
potassium itsorbate is usedor with calciumsorbicsorbate,
acid,
the
sorbicsumacidof usage
should asbe benzoic
no acid than
more and
0.6g/kg, and the usage as sorbic acid
Calcium Benzoate 3. should be nobeverages(excluding
Other
products),
more than 0.5g/kg) powder
Ginseng/red ginseng
beverages:
used with No more
ethyl than 0.6g/kg(if
ρ-hydroxybenzoate or
it is
methyl ρ-hydroxybenzoate, the sum of
usage as benzoic acid and ρ
-hydroxybenzoic
than 0.6g/kg, and acid should
the usagebe no asmoreρ
-hydroxybenzoic
than 0.1g/kg) acid should be no more
4. Korean-style soy sauce, brewed soy
sauce, acid-hydrolyzed
enzyme-hydrolyzed soy soy blended
sauce, sauce,
soy sauce: No more than 0.6g/kg(if it is
used
Methyl withρ-hydroxybenzoate,
ethyl ρ-hydroxybenzoate
the sum orof
usage as benzoic acid and ρ
-hydroxybenzoic acid should be no more
than 0.6g/kg, and
-hydroxybenzoic the usage
acid should be no asmoreρ
5. than
Aloe0.25g/kg)
whole leaves(including Aloe gel)
1414
 Food additive Use Level Major
functional
class
health
case of functional
using morefood(However,
in theof
than two kinds
health functional food materials, apply
proportion of the aloe whole
leaves(including the aloe gel) health
functional foodis content): No sorbic
more acid,
than
0.5g/kg(if it used with
potassium sorbate, or calcium sorbate,
the sumacidof usage asbe benzoic acid than
and
sorbic should no more
1.5g/kg, and the usage of sorbic acid
should No
6. with
Jams: be nomoremorethanthan1.0g/kg(if
1.0g/kg) it is used
sorbic acid, potassium sorbate,
calcium sorbate, methyl ρ-hydroxybenzoate,
ethyl ρ-hydroxybenzoate, propionic acid,
sodium propionate, or calcium propionate,
the sum of usage as benzoic acid, sorbic
acid, p-hydroxybenzoic
acid should be no more than acid, 1.0andg/kg)
propionic
7. itMango
is usedchutney: No moreρ-hydroxybenzoate
with Methyl than 0.25g/kg(if
or ethyl ρ-hydroxybenzoate, the sum of
usage as benzoic acid and ρ
-hydroxybenzoic
than 0.25g/kg). acid should be no more
8. used
Margarine: No more
with sorbic acid, than 1.0g/kg(if
potassium sorbateit oris
calcium sorbate, the sum of usage as
sorbic acid and benzoic acid should be no
more
benzoicthanacid 2.0g/kg,
should and be nothe more usage thanas
9. 0.1g/kg)
Pickled food, mayonnaise: No more than
1.0g/kg(if it is used with sorbic acid,
potassium sorbate or calcium sorbate, the
sum of usage as benzoic acid and sorbic
acid should be no more than 1.5g/kg, and
the
moreusage of sorbic acid should be no
than 1.0g/kg)
It should be used in accordance with Section A c i d i t y
Ⅱ.2.1). regulator
Fortifying
Calcium Carbonate nutrient
Raising agent
Gum base

The usage of Calcium Thickener

Carboxymethylcellulose
than 2% of the food item(if it is used more
should be no with Stabilizer
methylcellulose, sodium
Calcium Carboxymethylcellulose carboxymethyl starch, the sum of sodium
carboxymethylcellulose or
should be no more than 2 % of the usage food
item). However, health
should not be restricted. functional food

1415
 Food additive Use Level Major
functional
class
It should be used in accordance with Section Emulsifier
Calcium Caseinate Ⅱ.2.1). Thickener
Stabilizer
It should be used in accordance with Section Tofu Firming
Ⅱ.2.1). agent
Calcium Chloride Fnutrient
ortifying

It should be used in accordance with Section A c i d i t y

Calcium Citrate Ⅱ.2.1). regulator
Fortifying
nutrient
Calcium
Ethylenediaminetetraacetate should beDisodium used Antioxidant
only
as for anhydrous
the following food items. TheDisodium
Calcium usage
Ethylenediaminetetraacetate should be
1. Sauce, mayonnaise: no more than
0.075g/kg(if
disodium, the itsumisof used usage with EDTA
as anhydrous
2. EDTA
Canneddisodium
or bottledshouldfoods:
be 0.075g/kg)
no more than
0.25g/kg(if it is used with EDTA
disodium, the sum of usage as anhydrous
3. EDTA disodium shouldcanned
Beverages(only be 0.025g/kg)
or bottled
products,
no more than 0.035g/kg(if it isandusedcoffee):
and excluding teas with
EDTA disodium, the sum of usage as
anhydrous EDTA disodium should be
4. 0.035g/kg)
Margarine: no more than 0.1g/kg(if it is
used withas EDTA disodium, the disodium
sum of
Calcium usage
Disodium should be 0.1g/kg) anhydrous EDTA
Ethylenediaminetetraacetate 5. vinegar-pickled
Vinegar-pickled cabbage:cucumber
no more than and
0.22g/kg(if it is used with EDTA
disodium,
EDTA the sumshould
disodium of usage
be as anhydrous
0.22g/kg)
6. Dried fruits(only bananas): no more than
0.265g/kg(if
disodium, the itsumisof used
usage with
as EDTA
anhydrous
EDTA disodium should be 0.265g/kg)
7. Processed tuberous and corn vegetable
product(only
than 0.365g/kg(if frozenit ispotatoes):
used withno EDTA more
disodium,
EDTA the sumshould
disodium of usage
be as anhydrous
0.365g/kg)
8. Peanut butter: no more than 0.1g/kg(if it
isusage
used aswith anhydrous
EDTA disodium, EDTA thedisodium
sum of
should be 0.1g/kg)

1416
 Food additive Use Level Major
functional
class

It should be used in accordance with Section A c i d i t y

Ⅱ.2.1). regulator
Raising agent

Calcium Dihydrogen
Pyrophosphate

Calcium Ferrocyanide should be used only for A n t i c a k i n g

edible salts(excluding
ferrocyanide ion shouldsolar
be salt). The usage as agent
1. isEdible
used slats:
withno more than ferrocyanide
potssium 0.010g/kg(if orit
sodium ferrocyanide, the sum of usage as
ferrocyanide
0.010g/kg) ion should be no more than
Calcium Ferrocyanide

The
should usage
be of Calcium Gluconate as calcium Aregulator
cidity
1. Breads: no more than 1.75% Fortifying
2. Other foods: no more than 1%(However, nutrient
inusesthe andcase Health
of Foodsfunctional
for special
food,dietary
they
Calcium Gluconate should be in accordance with their food
codes.)

1417
 Food additive Use Level Major
functional
class

The
calciumusage
shouldof calcium
glycerophosphate
than 1% of theas
Fnutrient
ortifying
be no more
Calcium Glycerophosphate foods.(However, in theandcaseHealth
of Foods for
special dietary uses functional
food, they should be in accordance with
their food codes.)
It should be used in accordance with Section
Aregulator
cidity
Calcium Hydroxide Ⅱ.2.1). Fortifying
nutrient
Calcium Hypochlorite should be used for S t e r i l i z i n g
sterilization of foods
vegetables, and etc andsuchit should
as fruits,
be agent
removed before the final product is
completed.

Calcium Hypochlorite

It should be used in accordance with Section A c i d i t y

Calcium Lactate Ⅱ.2.1). regulator
Fnutrient
ortifying
It should be used in accordance with Section Fnutrient
ortifying
Calcium Oxide Ⅱ.2.1). Aregulator
cidity
The
Calciumusage
shouldof beCalcium
no morePantothenate
than 1% asof Fnutrient
ortifying
Calcium Pantothenate foods. However, in the case of Foods for
special
food, dietaryshouldusesbeandin Health
they functional
accordance with
their food codes.
The usageshould
Calcium of Calciumbe no Phosphate,
more thandibasic
1% asof Aregulator
cidity
foods.
special However,
dietary in theandcaseHealth
uses of Foods for
functional Fnutrient
ortifying
Calcium Phosphate, Dibasic food, they should be in accordance with Raising agent
their food codes.

1418
 Food additive Use Level Major
functional
class
The usageas Calcium
of Calcium
should bePantothenate,
Aregulator
cidity
monobasic no more
than 1% of foods. However, in the case of Raising
Calcium Phosphate, Monobasic Foods for special dietary uses and Health o r t i f agent
Fnutrient ying
functional food, they should be in
accordance with their food codes.
The usage of Calcium Pantothenate, tribasic Acidity
asfoods.Calcium shouldin betheno case
moreofthan
Foods1% forof
regulator
However, Fortifying
Calcium Phosphate, Tribasic special dietary uses and Health functional
food, they should be in accordance with
nutrient
Raising agent
their food codes.
Calcium Propionate should be used only for Preservative
the
The usage following food items
as propionic acid and
shouldthebe function.
1.2. Breads:
Cheeses:no nomoremore than than
2.5g/kg3.0g/kg(if it is
used with sorbic acid, calcium sorbate,
or potassium sorbate, the sum of usage
asbe nopropionic
more than acid3.0g/kg)
and sorbic acid should
3. with
Jams: nosorbic more acid,
than 1.0g/kg(if
potassium it issorbic,
used
calcium sorbic, benzoic acid, potassium
Calcium Propionate benzoate,
benzoate, methyl calcium p-hydroxybenzoate,
benzoate, sodiumor
ethyl p-hydroxybenzoate, the sum of
usage as propionic acid, sorbic acid,
benzoic
should beacid, and than
no more p-hydroxybenzoic
1.0g/kg). acid

It should be used in accordance with Section Fnutrient ortifying

Calcium 5'-Ribonucleotide Ⅱ.2.1). Flavour
enhancer
Calcium
anticaking silicate
agent,should andbe used only aid.
filtering for Aagent
nticaking
However, If it is used for a filtering aid, it Filter aid
should
isagent, be removed
completed. If it before
is used the
for final
a product
anticaking
it should be used only for the
Calcium silicate following food items and the usage should
be
1. Processed milk cream(only powder
products
than 1%(ifforit vending
is used machine)：
with siliconnodioxide
more
or calcium silicate, the sum of usage
2. should be no more
Powdered than 1%) for vending
milks(only
1419
 Food additive Use Level Major
functional
class
machine)：
with siliconnodioxide
more than 1%(if it issilicate,
used
or calcium
the sum of usage should be no more
than 1%)
3. Edible salts： no more than 2% (if it is
used with siliconof dioxide or calcium
silicate, the sum usage should be no
more than 2%)

Calcium Sorbate should be used only for the Preservative

following
acid should food
be items. The usage as sorbic
1. Cheeses: no more than 3.0g/kg(if it is
used with or propionic
propionate, acid, sodium
calcium propionate, the
sum of usage as propionic acid and
sorbic acid should be no more than
3.0g/kg) meat products(excluding seasoned
2. Processed
meats,
processed meat animalextract product), other
food product(only the
product contains other meat), processed fish
meat products, salted and fermented sea
urchin,
more than peanut better, imitationin cheese:
2.0g/kg(however, the caseNotof
sausage using collagen
level as sorbic acid shallcasing,
be notsum moreof than
use
2.0 g/kg)
3. Collagen casing: no more than 0.1g/kg
4. products(However,
Salted and product fermented seafood
which account
for not more than
korean-style 8% , of saltDoenjang
Doenjang only),,
Calcium sorbate Gochujang
Cheonggukjang, mixed paste, Chunjang,
(However, non-dried
products only), dried fish
boiled foods(ingredients for agricultural and shellfish,
foods only), flour pastes, sauce: no more
than
sauce, 1.0g/kg(However,
if it is used inwiththe Methyl case ofρ
-Hydroxybenzoate
-Hydroxybenzoate, the orsum ofEthylusage asρ
sorbic acid and ρ-Hydroxybenzoic acid
should
usage be noρ-Hydroxybenzoic
as more than 1.0g/kg, acid andshould
the
be no more than 0.2g/kg)
5. health
Aloe whole leaves(including Aloein gel)
case of using more than two kinds theof
functional food(However,
health
usage appliesfunctionalproportion
food materials,
of the aloe the
whole leaves(including the aloe gel)
health
than functional it food
1.0g/kg(if is content):
used with nobenzoic
more
acid, sodium benzoate, potassium
benzoate
usagebe asorno sorbic
ofshould calciumacidbenzoate, the sum
more than 1.5g/kg and acid
and benzoic the
1420
Food additive Use Level Major
functional
class
usage
more thanas 0.5g/kg)
benzoic acid should be no
6. juice:
Concentrated fruit juice, fruit/vegetable
with benzoic acid, sodium it benzoate,
no more than 1.0g/kg(if is used
potassium benzoate oras calcium benzoate,
the sum of usage sorbic acid and
benzoic acid should be no more than
1.0g/kg andno more
the usage as benzoic aicd
should be than 0.6g/kg)
7. Carbonated beverages: no more than
0.5g/kg(If
sodium it is used
benzoate, with benzoic
potassium benzoate acid,or
calcium benzoate, the sum of usage as
sorbic
no moreacidthanand0.6 benzoic
g/kg, andacidtheshould
usage beas
sorbic acid should be no more than 0.5
g/kg)
8. Jams:
with nobenzoic more than acid,1.0 sodium
g/kg(if itbenzoate,
is used
potassium
methyl benzoate, calcium benzoate,
p-hydroxybenzoate, ethyl
p-hydroxybenzoate, propyl
p-hydroxybenzoate, propionic acid,
sodium
propionate, propionate,
the total usage or of calciumsorbic
acid, benzoic acid, p-hydroxybenzoic
acid, and propionic acid should be no
more than 1.0 g/kg)
9. Dried fruits, tomato ketchup ,
Sugar-preserved
sugar-preserved dried foods): food(excluding no more
than 0.5g/kg.
10. Pickled food, mayonnaise: no more than
1.0g/kg(if it is used with benzoic acid,
sodium benzoate, potassium benzoate or
calcium benzoate, in that the total
usage of benzoic acid and sorbic acid
should
the usagebe asno benzoic
more thanacid 1.5 g/kgbe and
should no
more than 1.0 g/kg)
11. pasteurized
Fermented beverages): beverages(excluding
no more than
0.05g/kg.
12. wine),
Fruit Yakju Takjuclear
wine,(korean (koreanrice turbid
wine): riceNot
more than 0.2g/kg.
13. used
Margarine:
with no moreacid,
benzoic thansodium
1.0g/kg(if it is
benzoate,
potassium benzoate, or calcium benzoate,
the
benzoictotal acid
usageshould
of sorbic
be noacidmoreand thanthe
2.0g/kg and the usage as benzoic acid
should be no more than 1.0 g/kg)
14. syrupProcessed
and paste):saccharide
no more thanproduct(only
1.0g/kg
15. products):
Spice nopreparation(excluding
more than 1.0g/kg dried
16. Health functional food(only liquid
products,
leaves(includingexcluding Aloe aloe gel) healthwhole
1421
 Food additive Use Level Major
functional
class
functional food): no more than 2.0g/kg
It should be used in accordance with Section Fnutrient
ortifying
Calcium Stearate Ⅱ.2.1). Emulsifier
Calcium
only for theStearoyl
followingLactylate
should be used Emulsifier
food items.
1.2. Breads andcream
mixes for bread
Vegetable
3. Egg white
4. H angwa (koreanConfectionery(excluding
confectionery)) traditional
Calcium Stearoyl Lactylate 5. Processed tuberous and corn vegetable
product

It should be used in accordance with Section Tofu

agent Firming
Ⅱ.2.1). Aregulator
cidity
Calcium Sulfate Fortifying
nutrient

It should be used in accordance with Section Emulsifier

Coating agent
Candelilla Wax Ⅱ.2.1).
Capric Acid It should be used in accordance with Section manufacturing
solvent
Ⅱ.2.1).
Caprylic acid It should be used in accordance with Section manufacturing
solvent
Ⅱ.2.1).
Caramel color should not be used in the Colour
food items listed
1. fruits,
Natural below. fishes and shellfishes,
food[meat,
vegetables, algae, Legume
vegetables
processed and pulses,cut, and
food(peeled, and their simply
etc.)]
2. Teas(except for Solid tea, and liquid tea
that is diluted for drinking)
3. Teas containing ginseng or red ginseng
components
Caramel Color 4.5. Coffee
Hot pepper powder, shredded hot pepper
6. Kimchi products
Gochujang
7. seasoned hot (hot
pepper pepper
soy paste soy paste),
8. Health supplement food containing
ginseng or red ginseng components

1422
 Food additive Use Level Major
functional
class

It should be used in accordance with Section Propellant

Carbon Dioxide Ⅱ.2.1). Pgasa c k a g i n g
Carmine should not be used in the food Colour
items listed below.
1. Natural food[meat, fishes and shellfishes,
fruits,
vegetables vegetables, algae,their Legume
processed food(peeled, cut, and etc.)] simply
and pulses, and
2.3. Teas
Coffee
4. Hot pepper powder, shredded hot pepper
5. Kimchi products
Gochujang
6. seasoned hot (hot
pepper pepper
soy paste soy paste),
Carmine 7.8. Vinegars
Spice Products(only the products
containing hot pepper or hot pepper
powder)

It should be used in accordance with Section Emulsifier

Carnauba Wax Ⅱ.2.1). Thickener
Stabilizer
L-Carnitine It should be used in accordance with Section Fnutrient
ortifying
Ⅱ.2.1).
Carotene
items should
listed below. not be used in the food Colour
Fnutrient
ortifying
1. Natural food[meat, fishes and shellfishes,
fruits,
vegetables vegetables, algae,their Legume
processed food(peeled, cut, and etc.)] simply
and pulses, and
2. Teas
3.4. Coffee
Hot pepper powder, shredded hot pepper
Carotene 5.6. Kimchi products
Gochujang
seasoned hot (hot
pepper pepper
soy paste soy paste),
7. Vinegars

1423
 Food additive Use Level Major
functional
class
-Carotene should not be used in the food Colour
items listed below. Fortifying
β

1. fruits,
Natural food[meat, fishes and shellfishes, nutrient
vegetables, algae, Legume
vegetables and pulses, and their simply
processed food(peeled, cut, and etc.)]
2.3. Teas
Coffee
4.5. Hot pepper powder, shredded hot pepper
Kimchi products
6. Gochujang(hot pepper soy paste),
β-Carotene 7. seasoned
Vinegars hot pepper soy paste

It should be used in accordance with Section Emulsifier

Carrageenan Ⅱ.2.1). Thickener
Stabilizer
Carthamus red should not be used in the Colour
food items listed
1. Natural below. fishes and shellfishes,
food[meat,
fruits,
vegetables vegetables, algae,their Legume
and pulses, and simply
processed food(peeled, cut, and etc.)]
2.3. Teas
4. Coffee
Hot pepper powder, shredded hot pepper
5. Kimchi products
Carthamus Red Gochujang
6. seasoned hot (hot
pepper pepper
soy paste soy paste),
7. Vinegars

Carthamus yellow should not be used in the Colour

food items listed below.
1. fruits,
Natural food[meat, fishesalgae,
and shellfishes,
Carthamus Yellow vegetables and pulses, and their Legume
vegetables, simply
processed
2.3. Teas food(peeled, cut, and etc.)]
Coffee
4. Hot pepper powder, shredded hot pepper
1424
 Food additive Use Level Major
functional
class
5.6. Kimchi products
Gochujang (hot pepper soy paste),
7. Vinegars pepper soy paste
seasoned hot

It should be used in accordance with Section Emulsifier

Casein Ⅱ.2.1). Thickener
Stabilizer
Castor oil should only be used for the Coating agent
following food items
1. Candies: and thethanusage0.5g/kg(for
no more is, a Ragent
eleasing
release agent)
Castor oil 2. Tablets(for a coating agent)

Catalase It should be used in accordance with Section Epreparations

nzyme
Ⅱ.2.1).
Cellulase It should be used in accordance with Section E n z y m e
Ⅱ.2.1). preparations
It should be used in accordance with Section Thickener
Cellulose, Microcrystalline Ⅱ.2.1). Stabilizer
Anticaking
agent
It should be used in accordance with Section Thickener
Stabilizer
Cellulose, Powdered Ⅱ.2.1). Aagent
nticaking

Chitin It should be used in accordance with Section Thickener

Stabilizer
Ⅱ.2.1).
Chitosan It should be used in accordance with Section Thickener
Stabilizer
Ⅱ.2.1).
Chitosanase It should be used in accordance with Section Enzyme
Ⅱ.2.1). preparations
Chlorine should be used only for the Flour treatment
following
1. foodflour
Wheat item and the usage
products: no should
more bethan agent
Chlorine 2.5g/kg
Chlorine
following Dioxide shouldor befunction.
food items used only
The forusage
the Flour
agent treatment
Chlorine Dioxide should be Sterilizing
1. Wheata chlorine
30mg/kg(for flour dioxide)
for breads: no more than agent
1425
 Food additive Use Level Major
functional
class
2. vegetables,
For pasteurization
and etc.of food
and such
as fruits,
it should be
removed before the final product is
completed(for a chlorine dioxide solution).

Chlorophyll should not be used in the food Colour

items listed below.
1. fruits,
Natural food[meat,
vegetables, fishesalgae,
and shellfishes,
Legume
vegetables
processed and pulses,
food(peeled, cut, and
and their
etc.)] simply
2. Teas
3.4. Coffee
Hot pepper powder, shredded hot pepper
Chlorophyll 5. Kimchi products
6. Gochujang(hot pepper soy paste),
7. seasoned
Vinegars hot pepper soy paste

Choline Bitartrate It should be used in accordance with Section Fortifying

Ⅱ.2.1). nutrient
Choline chloride It should be used in accordance with Section Fortifying
Ⅱ.2.1). nutrient
Chromic chloride should be used only for Fortifying
the1. Foods
following
for food items
special medical purposes nutrient
Chromic chloride 2. Health functional food

Cinnamaldehyde Cinnamaldehyde
flavorings only. should be used for Fagent
lavouring
Cinnamic Acid Cinnamic Acid should be used for flavorings Flavouring
only. agent
Cinnamyl Acetate Cinnamyl Acetate should be used for Flavouring
flavorings only. agent
Cinnamyl Alcohol Cinnamyl Alcohol should be used for Flavouring
flavorings only. agent
Citral Citral should be used for flavorings only. Flavouring
agent
Citric Acid It should be used in accordance with Section Aregulator
cidity
1426
 Food additive Use Level Major
functional
class
Ⅱ.2.1).
Citronellal Citronellal sshould be used for flavorings Fagent
lavouring
only.
Citronellol Citronellol should be used for flavorings Fagent
lavouring
only.
Citronellyl Acetate Citronellyl Acetate should be used for Fagent lavouring
flavorings only.
Citronellyl Formate Citronellyl Formate should be used for Fagent lavouring
flavorings only.
Cochineal Extract should not be used in the Colour
food items listed
1. fruits,
Natural below. fishes and shellfishes,
food[meat,
vegetables, algae, Legume
vegetables and pulses,cut,andand their
processed food(peeled, etc.)] simply
2. Teas
3. Coffee
4.5. Hot pepper
Kimchi powder, shredded hot pepper
products
Gochujang
6. seasoned hot (hot
pepper pepper
soy paste soy paste),
Cochineal Extract 7. Vinegars
8. Spice Products(only the products
containing
powder) hot pepper or hot pepper

Copper Chlorophyll
the following food should
items. beThe
used usage
only foras Colour
copper
1. should be form): no more than
Kelp(anhydrous
0.15g/kg
Copper Chlorophyll 2. Preserved vegetables or fruits: no more
than 0.1g/kg gum and candies: no more than
3. Chewing
0.05g/kg
4. Agar in canned green pea product: no
more than 0.0004g/kg
Copper Gluconate
the following should be used only for Fnutrient
food items. ortifying
1. Cereals
2. formulas,
Milk formulas,
Baby infant
foods formulas,
for follow-up
infants/young
Copper Gluconate children(Entry into force:2020.1.1)
3.4. Food
Weightforcontrol
specialformulas
medical purposes
5. Health functional food

1427
 Food additive Use Level Major
functional
class

Cross-Linked Sodium Carboxymethyl Coating agent

Cross-Linked Sodium Cellulose
functional
should be
food(tablet
used
or its
only for capsule
coating,
health
Carboxymethyl Cellulose only) and capsules for a coating agent.
Crude
should beMagnesium
used only Chloride(Sea
for the followingWater)
food Tofu
agent Firming
Crude
Water) Magnesium Chloride(Sea item.
1. Soybean curds for a firming agent
Cupric Sulfate should be used only for the Fortifying
food items. However, in case of grape nutrient
wines,
be less thethanresidual amount as copper should manufacturing
solvent
1.2. Grape
Cerealswines : 1mg/kg
3. Milk formulas, infant formulas, follow-up
formulas, Baby foods for infants/young
children(Entry
4. Food into force:
for special medical2020.1.1),
purposes
Cupric Sulfate 5.6. Weight control formulas
Health functional food

Curmumin
items listed should
below. not be used in the food Colour
1. fruits,
Natural food[meat,
vegetables, fishesalgae,
and shellfishes,
Legume
vegetables and pulses, and their simply
processed food(peeled, cut, and etc.)]
2.3. Teas
Coffee
4.5. Hot pepper
Kimchi powder, shredded hot pepper
products
Curcumin 6. Gochujang(hot pepper soy paste),
seasoned hot pepper soy paste
7. Vinegars

1428
 Food additive Use Level Major
functional
class
Curdlan It should be used in accordance with Section Thickener
Ⅱ.2.1). Stabilizer
Cyclodextrin It should be used in accordance with Section Stabilizer
Ⅱ.2.1).
Cyclodextrin Syrup It should be used in accordance with Section Stabilizer
Ⅱ.2.1).
L-Cystein Monohydrochloride should be used Flour treatment
only for theflour
following food items or function. agent
1.2. Wheat
Fruit juice products Fnutrient
ortifying
L-Cysteine Monohydrochloride 4. Breads
3. and mixes for breads
For flavorings Fagent
lavouring

L-Cystine It should be used in accordance with Section Fnutrient

ortifying
Ⅱ.2.1).
5'-Cytidylic acid should be used for the Fortifying
following food items only and the usage is, nutrient
1. Milk formulas, infant formulas, follow-up
formulas,
children(EntryBabyinto foods
force: for
2020.1.1),infants/young
formulas
5'-Cytidylic acid for infants/young children with milk
allergy, special formulas for infants/young protein
children: no more than 0.125g/kg

It should be used in accordance with Section Coating

Thickeneragent
Dammar Gum Ⅱ.2.1). Stabilizer

5'-Deaminase It should be used in accordance with Section E n z y m e

Ⅱ.2.1). preparations
Decanal Decanal should be used for flavorings only. Flavouring
agent
Decanol Decanol should be used for flavorings only. Fagent
lavouring
Dextran It should be used in accordance with Section ThickenerStabilizer
Ⅱ.2.1).
Dextranase It should be used in accordance with Section
Ⅱ.2.1).
It should be used in accordance with Section Enzyme preparations
Diastase(Diastatic Power, DP) Ⅱ.2.1).
Diatomaceous earth(dried, calcined, Filter aid
Diatomaceous Earth flux-calcined) should be used only for a
filtering aid(filtering, discoloring, deodorizing,
1429
 Food additive Use Level Major
functional
class
refining,
processing.andHowever,
etc.) in itfoodshould
manufacturing
be removedor
before theamount
final product is completed. The
residual should be no more than
0.5%(if it is used with kaolin, bentonite, aicd
clay, talc, perlite, activated carbon,of and
other
residues should be no more than 0.5%). the
insoluble minerals, the sum

Dibenzoyl Thiamine It should be used in accordance with Section Fnutrient

ortifying
Ⅱ.2.1).
Dibenzoyl Thiamine ItⅡ.2.1).
should be used in accordance with Section Fnutrient
ortifying
Hydrochloride
Diluted
only for Benzoyl Peroxide
the following food should
item. Thebe usage used Ft r el a tom ue n rt
Diluted Benzoyl Peroxide should
1. Wheatbe flour products: no more than agent
0.3g/kg
Disodium 5'-Cytidylate
for the following food should only usage
items. The be usedof Fnutrient
ortifying
Disodium 5'-Cytidylate should be
1. Milk formulas, infant formulas, follow-up
formulas, Baby foods for infants/young
Disodium 5'-Cytidylate children(Entry
for infants/younginto children
force: with
2020.1.1),milk formulas
protein
allergy, special formulas for infants/young
children： no more than 0.142g/kg

It should be used in accordance with Section A c i d i t y

Disodium Dihydrogen Ⅱ.2.1). regulator
Raising agent
Pyrophosphate
Disodium Ethylenediaminetetraacetate should Antioxidant
be used only for the folloing food items.
The usage as anhydrous
ethylenediaminetetraacetate should be disodium
1. 0.075g/kg(if
Sauce, mayonnaise:
it is usedno with more EDTA
than
D i s o d i u m disodium, the sum of usage as anhydrous
Ethylenediamine-tetraacetate 2. EDTA disodium shouldfoods:
be 0.075g/kg)
0.25g/kg(if it is used nowithmoreEDTA
Canned or bottled than
disodium,
EDTA the sumshould
disodium of usage
be as anhydrous
0.025g/kg)
3. Beverages(only canned or bottled
products, and excluding teas and coffee):
1430
 Food additive Use Level Major
functional
class
no moredisodium,
than 0.035g/kg(if
EDTA the sumit ofis used
usagewithas
anhydrous EDTA disodium should be
0.035g/kg)
4. Margarine: no more than 0.1g/kg(if it is
used withas EDTA disodium, the disodium
sum of
usage anhydrous EDTA
should be 0.1g/kg)
5. vinegar-pickled
Vinegar-pickled cucumber and
cabbage: no more than
0.22g/kg(if it is used with EDTA
disodium,
EDTA the sumshould
disodium of usage
be as anhydrous
0.22g/kg)
6. Dried fruits(only bananas): no more than
0.265g/kg(if
disodium, the itsumisof used usage with EDTA
as anhydrous
EDTA disodium should be 0.265g/kg)
7. Processed tuberous and corn vegetable
product(only
than 0.365g/kg(iffrozenit ispotatoes):
used withno EDTA
more
disodium,
EDTA disodiumthe sumshould
of usage as anhydrous
be 0.365g/kg)
8. Peanut butter: no more than 0.1g/kg(if it
is used with EDTA disodium, the sum of
usage
should beas 0.1g/kg)
anhydrous EDTA disodium

Disodium
only for Glycyrrhizinate
following food should be used Sweetener
items.
1. Korean-style doenjang(soybean paste),
2. Doenjang(soybean
Korean-style
acid-hydrolyzed soy paste) brewed soy sauce,
sauce, soy sauce,
Disodium Glycyrrhizinate enzyme-hydrolyzed soy sauce, blended soy
sauce

It should be used in accordance with Section F o r t i f y i n g

Ⅱ.2.1). nutrient
Flavour
Disodium 5'-Guanylate enhancer
Disodium 5'-inosinate It should be used in accordance with Section F o r t i f y i n g
Ⅱ.2.1). nutrient
1431
 Food additive Use Level Major
functional
class
Fenhancer
lavour
It should be used in accordance with Section Fnutrient
ortifying
Disodium 5'-Ribonucleotide Ⅱ.2.1). Fenhancer
lavour
It should be used in accordance with Section Aregulator cidity
Disodium Succinate Ⅱ.2.1). Flavour
enhancer
Disodium DL-Tartrate It should be used in accordance with Section A c i d i t y
Ⅱ.2.1). regulator
It should be used in accordance with Section A c i d i t y
Disodium L-Tartrate Ⅱ.2.1). regulator
Fnutrient
ortifying
Disodium 5'-Uridylatefoodshould
for the following items.be The
used usage
only fnutrient
ortifying
should
1. Milkbe formulas, infant formulas, follow-up
formulas, Baby foods for infants/young
children(Entry into force: 2020.1.1), formulas
Disodium 5'-Uridylate for
allergy,infants/young children with
special formulas milk protein
for infants/young
children：
2. Food no more nothanmore0.099g/kg
for patients: than 8g/kg

It should be used in accordance with Section F o r t i f y i n g

Dry Formed Vitamin A Ⅱ.2.1). nutrient
It should be used in accordance with Section Antioxidant
Enzymatically Decomposed Ⅱ.2.1).
Apple Extract
Enzymatically Decomposed Lecithin ItⅡ.2.1).
should be used in accordance with Section Emulsifier
Enzymatically Modified It should be used in accordance with Section F o r t i f y i n g
Hesperidine Ⅱ.2.1). nutrient
It should be used in accordance with Section Antioxidant
Enzymatically Modified Rutin Ⅱ.2.1).
Enzymatically Modified Stevia should not be Sweetener
used in the food items listed below.
Enzymatically Modified Stevia 1.2. Sugars
3. Glucose
Starch syrup
4. Honeys
1432
 Food additive Use Level Major
functional
class

Erythorbic
antioxidant. Acid should be only used for a
Erythorbic Acid Antioxidant
It should be used in accordance with Section Fenhancer
lavour
Erythritol Ⅱ.2.1). Sweetener
Humectant
Ester gum should be used only for the Gum base
following food items or function. Stabilizer
Ester Gum 1.2. For a gum base
Carbonated beverages, other beverages
Ethyl
followingAcetate shouldor befunction.
food items used only for the Esolvent
xtraction
1.2. For
For flavorings
a manufacturing solvent of polyvinyl Fagent
lavouring
acetate
3. Extracting or separating functional material
Ethyl Acetate of0.005g/kg(as
health functional
the sum of food: no more than
the residues)

Ethyl Acetoacetate Ethyl Acetoacetate should be used for Flavouring

flavorings only. agent
Ethyl Butyrate Ethyl Butyrate should be used for flavorings Flavouring
only. agent
Ethyl
Cellulose cellulose,Modified It should be used in accordance with Section Thickener
Stabilizer
Ⅱ.2.1).
Ethyl Cinnamate Ethyl Cinnamate should be used for Flavouring
flavorings only. agent
Ethyl Decanoate Ethyl Decanoate should be used for Flavouring
flavorings only. agent
Ethyl Heptanoate Ethyl Heptanoate should be used for Flavouring
flavorings only. agent
Ethyl Hexanoate Ethyl Hexanoate should be used for Flavouring
flavorings only. agent
Ethyl
for thep-Hydroxybenzoate
following food shouldThebe used
items. usage onlyof Preservative
Ethyl ρ-Hydroxybenzoate as p-hydroxybenzoic
acid should be
Ethyl p-Hydroxybenzoate 1.2. Capsules：
Jams: no moreno more thanthan1.0g/kg(if
1.0g/kg it is used
with sorbicbenzoic
sorbate, acid, potassium
acid, sorbate, benzoate,
potassium calcium
calcium benzoate, sodium benzoate, ethyl ρ
1433
 Food additive Use Level Major
functional
class
-hydroxybenzoate, propionic propionate,
acid, sodium
propionate, and calcium the
sum of usage as sorbic acid, benzoic
acid,
propionic p-hydroxybenzoic
acid should be no acid,
and
more than
3. 1.0g/kg)
Mango
it is chutney:
no more
sodiumthan benzoate
0.25g/kg(if,
used with
potassium benzoate, calcium thebenzoate andof
ethyl p-hydroxybenzoate, sum
usage as benzoic acid and ρ
-hydroxybenzoic
more than 0.25g/kg)acid should be no
4. Korean-style soy sauce, Brewed soy sauce,
Acid-hydrolyzed
Enzyme-hydrolyzed soy sauce, soy Blendedsauce, soy
sauce： no more than 0.25g/kg(if it is used
with benzoic acid, sodium benzoate,
potassium
sum of usage benzoate,as calcium
benzoic benzoate,
acid and theρ
-hydroxybenzoic
than 0.6g/kg, and acid should
the usagebe no asmoreρ
-hydroxybenzoic acid should be no more
than 0.25g/kg)
5.6. Vinegars：
Other nobeverages(excluding
more than 0.1g/L. powder
products),
no more than Ginseng/red
0.1g/kg(ifginseng
it is beverages:
used with
benzoic acid, sodium benzoate, potassium
benzoate, calcium benzoate, the sum of
usage as benzoic
-hydroxybenzoic acid and
acid should be noρ
more than 0.6g/kg, and the usage as
ρ -hydroxybenzoic acid should be no
more than 0.1g/kg)
7. Sauce： no more than 0.2g/kg(if it is
used with sorbic acid, potassium sorbate
or calcium sorbate, the sum of usage as
ρ-hydroxybenzoic acid and sorbic acid
should
usage be as noρ-hydroxybenzoic
more than 1.0g/kg, acid andshould
the
8. beFruits(peels
no more thanonly)：
0.2g/kg) no more than
0.012g/kg
9. Vegetables(peels only)： no more than
0.012g/kg
Ethyl isovalerate Ethyl
flavoringsIsovalerate
only. should be used for Fagent lavouring
Ethyl Octanoate Ethyl
flavoringsOctanoate
only. should be used for Fagentlavouring
Ethyl Phenylacetate Ethyl
flavoringsPhenylacetate
only. should be used for Fagent
lavouring
Ethyl Propionate Ethyl
flavoringsPropionate
only. should be used for Fagent
lavouring
Ethyl Vanillin Ethyl
only. vanillin should be used for flavorings Fagent
lavouring
Eucalyptol Eucalyptol should be used for flavorings Flavouring
1434
 Food additive Use Level Major
functional
class
only. agent
Eugenol Eugenol should be used for flavorings only. Fagent
lavouring
It should be used in accordance with Section Epreparations
nzyme
Exomaltotetrahydrolase Ⅱ.2.1).
Ferric Ammonium Citrate It should be used in accordance with Section Fnutrient
ortifying
Ⅱ.2.1).
Ferric Chloride It should be used in accordance with Section Fortifying
Ⅱ.2.1). nutrient
Ferric Citrate It should be used in accordance with Section Fnutrient
ortifying
Ⅱ.2.1).
Ferric Phosphate It should be used in accordance with Section Fnutrient
ortifying
Ⅱ.2.1).
It should be used in accordance with Section Fortifying
Ferric Pyrophosphate Ⅱ.2.1). nutrient
Ferrous Fumarate It should be used in accordance with Section Fortifying
Ⅱ.2.1). nutrient
Ferrous Guconatefoodshould
the following items.be The
used usage
only foras Aregulator
cidity
ferrous ion should be Fortifying
1. Processed olive products： no more than nutrient
0.15g/kg
2. Milk formulas, infant formulas, follow-up
Ferrous Gluconate formulas,
(Entry intoBaby force:
foods for2020.1.1),
infants/young
formulaschildren
for
infants/young children with milk protein allergy,
special formulas
3. Health functionalforfood
infants/young children

It should be used in accordance with Section A c i d i t y

Ferrous Lactate Ⅱ.2.1). regulator
Fnutrient
ortifying

Ferrous Sulfate It should be used in accordance with Section Fnutrient

ortifying
Ⅱ.2.1).
Ferulic Acid It should be used in accordance with Section Antioxidant
Ⅱ.2.1).
Folic Acid It should be used in accordance with Section F o r t i f y i n g
Ⅱ.2.1). nutrient
Food Blue No. 1 should be used only for Colour
the
be following food items. The usage should
Food Blue No.1 1. Confectionery: no more than 0.2g/kg
2. Candies and chewing gum: no more than
0.3g/kg
1435
 Food additive Use Level Major
functional
class
3. Frozen
than 0.15g/kgconfectionery products: no more
4.5. Breads: no more thanthan
0.2g/kg
Rice cakes: no more 0.15g/kg
6. Dumpling: no more than 0.1g/kg
7. chocolates:
Other processed cocoa0.1g/kg
product and
no more than
8. Other jam: no more than 0.25g/kg
9. syrups:
Other nosugar, other 0.3taffies, and sugar
more than g/kg
10. Sausages and fish sausage: no more
than
11. 0.1g/kg
Fruit/vegetable
beverages, other beverages,
beverages: carbonated
no more
than
is to be diluted before drinking thatis
0.1g/kg(However, the product
based on the diluted form)
12. Spices products(only processed horseradish
products
no more thanand processed
0.1g/kg mustard products):
13.
14. Sauce:
Pickledno morefood thanproducts(only
0.1g/kg Hermetic
sealing, heat-pasteurization or sterilization
pickled food products, but excluding pickled radish):
15. no Alcoholic
more than 0.5 g/kg
beverages(excluding Takju,
Yakju
added to spirits): noCheongju
, Soju , and more thanwhich is not
0.2g/kg
16. Vegetable cream: no more than 0.1g/kg
17. Ready-to-eat foods : no more than
0.05g/kg
18. Processed cereal product: no more than
0.3g/kg
19. Processed pulse product and processed
tuberous and corn vegetable product:
no more than 0.2g/kg
20. Processed starch product: no more than
0.15g/kg
21. product,
Other processed
processed edible
saccharidefat and oil
product,
other processed fishery product, and
other
0.5g/kg processed product: no more than
22. Health functional food(only coating of
tablet or capsule) and capsules: no more
than 0.3g/kg
23. Ice creams, ice cream mixes: no more
than 0.15g/kg
24. Coffee(surface decoration only): no
more than 0.1 g/kg(the sum of usage
should be no more than 0.1 g/kg, when
combination of Food Red No.3, Food
Red No.40 and Food Yellow No.4)

Food only
Blue forNo.1theAluminium
following Lake should The
be Colour
Food Blue No.1 Aluminium used
usage as a Food Blue No.1 should be
food items.
Lake 1.2. Confectionery: no more gum:
than 0.2g/kg
Candies and chewing no more than
1436
 Food additive Use Level Major
functional
class
0.3g/kg
3. Frozen confectionery products: no more
than 0.15g/kgno more than 0.2g/kg
4.5. Breads:
Rice cakes: no more than 0.15g/kg
6.7. Dumpling: no more thancocoa 0.1g/kgproduct and
Other processed
chocolates: no more than 0.1g/kg
8.9. Other jam:sugar,
no moreotherthantaffies,
0.25g/kgand sugar
Other
syrups: no more than 0.3 g/kg
10.
than Sausages and fish sausage: no more
0.1g/kg
11. Fruit/vegetable beverages, carbonated
beverages, other beverages:
than 0.1g/kg(However, no more
the product that
is to be diluted before drinking is
based on the diluted form)
12. Spices
productsproducts(only
and processedprocessed
mustard horseradish
products):
no more than 0.1g/kg
13. Sauce: no more than 0.1g/kg
14. Pickled food products(only Hermetic
sealing, heat-pasteurization or sterilization
pickled
no morefood
thanproducts,
0.5 g/kg but excluding pickled radish):
15. Yakju Alcoholic
, Soju, and beverages(excluding
Cheongju which isTakjunot,
added to spirits): no more than 0.2g/kg
16. Vegetable cream: no more than 0.1g/kg
17. Ready-to-eat foods : no more than
0.05g/kg
18. Processed cereal product: no more than
0.3g/kg
19. Processed pulse product and processed
tuberous and corn vegetable product:
no more than 0.2g/kg
20. Processed starch product: no more than
0.15g/kg
21. product,
Other processed
processed edible fat and
saccharide product,oil
other
other processed product:
processed fishery noproduct,
more and
than
0.5g/kg
22. tablet
Healthor functional
capsule) andfood(only
capsules:coating
no moreof
than 0.3g/kg
23. than
Ice creams,
0.15g/kg ice cream mixes: no more
Food
following BluefoodNo.2items.
should
The beusage
usedshould
only befor the Colour
1. Confectionery: no more than 0.2g/kg
2. Candies and chewing gum: no more than
Food Blue No.2 0.3g/kg
3. Frozen confectionery products: no more
than 0.15g/kgno more than 0.2g/kg
4. Breads:
5. Rice cakes: no more than 0.15g/kg
6. chocolates:
Other processedno more than cocoa0.45g/kg
product and

1437
 Food additive Use Level Major
functional
class
7. Other jam, Other sugar: no more than
0.3g/kg
8.9. Sausages: no more thanthan
0.1 g/kg
10. Fruit/vegetable beverages0.3g/kg
Fish sausage: no more
and other
beverages: no more thanto
0.1g/kg(However, the product that is
be diluted before drinking is based on
11. the
diluted form) processed horseradish
Spices products(only
products and processed mustard products):
noPickled
12. sealing,more than food0.3g/kg
products(only Hermetic
heat-pasteurization or sterilization
pickled
no morefoodthanproducts,
0.3g/kg but excluding pickled radish):
13. Alcoholic beverages(excluding Takju,
Yakju
added
, Soju, and Cheongju which is not
to spirits):
14. Processed cerealnoproduct:
more than no 0.3g/kg
more than
0.2g/kg
15. Processed saccharide product: no more
than 0.3g/kg
16. Other processed product: no more than
0.45g/kg
17. Health functional food(only coating of
tablet or capsule) and capsules: no more
than 0.3g/kg
18. Ice creams, ice cream mixes: no more
than 0.15g/kg
Food Blue No.2 Aluminium Lake should be Colour
used
usage only for theBluefollowing
as a Food No.2 should foodbe items. The
1. Confectionery: no more than 0.2g/kg
2. Candies and chewing gum: no more than
0.3g/kg
3. Frozen confectionery products: no more
than 0.15g/kgno more than 0.2g/kg
4.5. Breads:
Rice cakes: no more than 0.15g/kg
6. Other processed cocoa product and
7. chocolates:
Other jam,noOther more than
sugar:0.45g/kg
no more than
0.3g/kg
8. Sausages: no more than 0.1 g/kg
Food
Lake Blue No.2 Aluminium 9. Fish sausage: no more than 0.3g/kg
10. beverages:
Fruit/vegetable nobeveragesmoreand other
0.1g/kg(However, the product that isthanto
be
the diluted
diluted before drinking is based on
form)
11. Spices products(only processed horseradish
products and processed mustard products):
12. noPickled
more than food0.3g/kg
products(only Hermetic
sealing,
pickled food products, but excludingor pickled
heat-pasteurization sterilization
radish):
no more than 0.3g/kg
13. Yakju Alcoholic
, Soju, and Cheongju which isTakju
beverages(excluding not,
1438
 Food additive Use Level Major
functional
class
14. added
to spirits):
cerealnoproduct:
more than
Processed no 0.3g/kg
more than
0.2g/kg
15. 0.3g/kg
Processed saccharide product: no more
than
16. Other processed product: no more than
0.45g/kg
17. Health functional food(only coating of
tablet or capsule) and capsules: no more
than 0.3g/kg
18. Ice creams, ice cream mixes: no more
than 0.15g/kg

Food Green No.3 should be used only for the Colour

following food items.
1. Confectionery: no The
moreusage should be
than 0.1g/kg
2. Candies: no more than 0.4g/kg
3. Breads and Rice cakes: no more than
0.1g/kg
4. Chocolates: no more than 0.6g/kg
5.6. Other
Sausagesjam: and
no more
fish than
sausage:0.4g/kg
no more than
0.1g/kg
7. beverages,
Fruit/vegetableand beverages,
other carbonated
beverages: no
more than 0.1g/kg(However, the product
that
basedison tothebediluteddilutedform)before drinking is
8. Spices products(only processed horseradish
products
no more and 0.1g/kg
than processed mustard products):
Food Green No.3 9. Pickled food products(only Hermetic
sealing,
food heat-pasteurization
products, but excluding or sterilization
pickled radish): nopickled
more
than 0.3g/kg
10. Alcoholic beverages(excluding Takju,
Yakju
added, toSoju , andnoCheongju
spirits): more thanwhich 0.1g/kgis not
11. saccharide
Processed cereal product,product,and processed other
processed fishery product: no more
12. than Health0.1g/kg
tablet or functional
capsule) andfood(only
capsules:coating
no moreof
13. thancreams,
Ice 0.6g/kg ice cream mixes: no more
than 0.1g/kg

1439
 Food additive Use Level Major
functional
class

Food Green No.3 Aluminium Lake should be Colour

used
usage only for the
as a Food Greenfollowing foodbeitems. The
No.3 should
1. Confectionery: no more than 0.1g/kg
2. Candies: no more than 0.4g/kg
3. Breads and Rice cakes: no more than
0.1g/kg
4.5. Chocolates:
Other jam: nono moremore than
than 0.4g/kg
0.6g/kg
6. Sausages and fish sausage: no more than
0.1g/kg
7. beverages,
Fruit/vegetableand beverages,
other beverages:carbonatedno
more than 0.1g/kg(However,
that is to be diluted before drinking is the product
based on the diluted form)
8. Spices products(only processed horseradish
products
no more than and 0.1g/kg
processed mustard products):
9. sealing,
Pickledheat-pasteurization
food products(only
or sterilizationHermetic
pickled
food products, but excluding pickled radish): no more
Food Green No.3 Aluminium Lake 10.thanAlcoholic
0.3g/kg
Yakju , Soju, and beverages(excluding
Cheongju which isTakjunot,
11. added to spirits):cereal
Processed no more than 0.1g/kg
product, processed
saccharide product, and other
processed
than 0.1g/kg fishery product: no more
12. Health functional food(only coating of
tablet
than or capsule) and capsules: no more
0.6g/kg
13. Ice creams, ice cream mixes: no more
than 0.1g/kg

Food Red No.102 should be used only for Colour

the
be following food items. The usage should
Food Red No.102 1. traditional confectionery)): Hangwa
Confectionery(only no more(korean
than
1440
 Food additive Use Level Major
functional
class
0.2g/kg gum: no more than 0.3g/kg
2. Chewing
3.4. Rice cakes:nonomore morethanthan0.5g/kg
0.05g/kg
Dumpling:
5. Other processed cocoa product: no more
than 0.3g/kg
6.7. Sausages:
Beverageno more base:than no0.05g/kgmore than
0.05g/kg(However, the product that onis theto
be diluted before drinking is based
diluted form)
8. products
Spices and products(only
processed processedproducts):
mustard horseradish
no
more than 0.5g/kg
9. myeongnan-jeot
Salted-fermented ): noseafood
more thanproducts(only
0.5g/kg
10. Pickled food products(only Hermetic
sealing, heat-pasteurization or sterilization
pickled
radish): nofoodmoreproducts,
than 0.5g/kgbut excluding pickled
11. SojuAlcoholic which is Takju
beverages(excluding
, and Cheongju , Yakjuto,
not added
spirits): no more than 0.2g/kg
12. Processed pulse product and processed
tuberous
no more than and 0.2g/kg
corn vegetable product:
13. thanProcessed
0.3g/kg saccharide product: no more
14. Other processed fishery product and other
processed product: no more than 0.5g/kg
15. orHealth functional
capsule) and food(only
capsules: coating
no moreof tablet
than
0.3g/kg

Food Red No.2 should be used only for the Colour

following food items. The
1. confectionery))
Confectionery(only usage
Hangwa shouldtraditional
(korean be
and chewing gum: no more than
0.3g/kg
2.3. Rice cakes:nonomore
morethan
than0.05g/kg
0.3g/kg
Sausages:
Food Red No.2 4. Beverage base: no more than
0.3g/kg(However, the product
be diluted before drinking that onis theto
is based
5. diluted
Spices form)
products(only processed horseradish
products and processed mustard products): no
more than 0.5g/kg seafood products(only
6. myeongnan-jeot
Salted-fermented ): no more than 0.03g/kg
1441
 Food additive Use Level Major
functional
class
7. sealing,
Pickled heat-pasteurization
food products(only Hermetic
or sterilization
pickled foodmoreproducts, but excluding pickled
radish): no than 0.5g/kg
8. Alcoholic beverages(excluding Takju, Yakju,
Soju
spirits):
Cheongju
, andno more
than
which
0.1g/kg
is not added to
9. Vegetable cream: no more than 0.5g/kg
10. Ready-to-eat foods: no more than
0.3g/kg
11. Processed cereal product, processed
starch
saccharide product
product: and
no processed
more than
0.3g/kg
12. other
Other processed
processed product:
fishery noproduct
more thanand
0.5g/kg
13. Health functional food(only coating of tablet
or0.3g/kg
capsule) and capsules: no more than

Food Red No.2 Aluminum Lake should be Colour

used
usage only for theRedfollowing
as a Food foodbe items. The
No.2 should
Confectionery(onlyand Hangwa
1. confectionery)) chewing(korean
gum: no traditional
more than
0.3g/kg
2.3. Rice cakes:nonomore
Sausages: morethan
than0.05g/kg
0.3g/kg
4. Beverage base: no more than
0.3g/kg(However,
be diluted before the product
drinking is that onis theto
based
diluted form)
5. products
Spices andproducts(only
processed processedproducts):
mustard horseradish
no
more than 0.5g/kg
Food Red No.2 Aluminum Lake 6. Salted-fermented seafood products(only
myeongnan-jeot): no more than 0.03g/kg
7. Pickled food products(only Hermetic
sealing,
pickled heat-pasteurization
food products, but or sterilization
excluding pickled
radish): no more than 0.5g/kg
8. Soju
Alcoholic
, and beverages(excluding
Cheongju which is Takju
not , Yakjuto,
added
spirits): no more than 0.1g/kg
9. Vegetable cream: no more than 0.5g/kg
10. Ready-to-eat foods: no more than
0.3g/kg
11. starch
Processed productcereal product,
and processed
processed
saccharide product: no more than
1442
 Food additive Use Level Major
functional
class
12. 0.3g/kg
Other processed fishery product and
other processed product: no more than
0.5g/kg
13. Health functional food(only coating of tablet
or0.3g/kg
capsule) and capsules: no more than

Food
following RedfoodNo.3items.
shouldThebeusage
usedshould
only be
for the Colour
1. Confectionery and candies: no more than
0.3g/kg
2. Chewing gum: no more than 0.05g/kg
3. Frozen confectionery products: no more
than 0.15g/kg
4. Breads,
more than 0.3g/kgrice cakes and dumpling: no
5. chocolates:
Other processed
no more than cocoa0.3g/kg
products and
6. Other jam, other sugar and other taffies:
no more than 0.3g/kg
7.8. Sausages:
Fish sausage: no more
no more thanthan
0.03g/kg
0.3g/kg
9. beverages
Fruit/vegetable
and other beverages: carbonated
beverages, no more
than 0.3g/kg(However, the product that
ison tothe bediluted
dilutedform)before drinking is based
Food Red No.3 10. Spices products(only processed horseradish
products
no more and processed
than 0.5g/kg mustard products):
11. Sauce: no more than 0.3g/kg
12. myeongnan-jeot
Salted-fermented): noseafood products(only
13. Pickled food products(only 0.5g/kg more than Hermetic
sealing, heat-pasteurization or sterilization
pickled
radish): nofoodmoreproducts, but excluding pickled
than 0.2g/kg
14. Soju Alcoholic
, and beverages(excluding
Cheongju which is Takju
not , Yakjuto,
added
spirits): no more than 0.3g/kg
15. 0.3g/kg
Ready-to-eat foods : no more than
16. Processed cereal product and
processed starch product: no more than
17. 0.3g/kg
Processed tuberous and corn vegetable
18. Other noprocessed
product: more thanedible0.2g/kgfat and oil
product, other processed fishery product,
1443
 Food additive Use Level Major
functional
class
and other processed product: no more
than 0.5g/kg
19. than
Processed saccharide product: no more
0.1g/kg
20. Health functional food(only coating of
tablet or capsule) and capsules: no more
than 0.3g/kg
21. Ice creams and ice cream mixes: no more
than 0.3g/kg
22. Coffee(surface decoration only): no
more than 0.1 g/kg(the sum of usage
should be no more than 0.1 g/kg, when
combination of Food Red No.40, Food
Blue No.1 and Food Yellow No.4)
Food Red No.40 should be used only for the Colour
following food items. The usage should be
1. Confectionery, candies and chewing gum:
no2. more
Frozenthanconfectionery
0.3g/kg products: no more
than 0.15g/kg
3. Breads and rice cakes: no more than
0.3g/kg
4. Other processed cocoa products and
chocolates:
5. Other jam: nono more
more than
than 0.3g/kg
0.3g/kg
6. syrups:
Other nosugar,
more thanother 0.3g/kg
taffies, and sugar
7. Sausages: no more than 0.025g/kg
8. Fish sausage: no more than 0.3g/kg
9. beverages
Fruit/vegetable
and otherbeverages,
beverages: carbonated
no more
than 0.3g/kg(However, the
to be diluted before drinking is basedproduct that onis
the diluted form)
10. Spices products(only processed horseradish
products
more thanand0.3g/kg
processed mustard products): no
Food Red No.40 11.
12. Sauce: no more thanseafood
Salted-fermented 0.3g/kg products(only
myeongnan-jeot): no more than 0.3g/kg
13. Pickled food products(only Hermetic
sealing,
pickled foodheat-pasteurization or sterilization
products, but excluding pickled
radish): no more than 0.3 g/kg
14. Alcoholic beverages(excluding Takju, Yakju,
Soju , and Cheongju which is not added to
spirits): no more thanand0.3g/kg
15. noVegetable
more than 0.3g/kg ready-to-eat foods:
cream
16. product,
Processed processed
cereal product, processedproduct,
saccharide starch
other processed fishery product, and other
processed product: no more than 0.3g/kg
17. tuberous
Processedandpulse corn product
vegetableandproduct:
processed
no
more than 0.2g/kg
18. Health functional food(only coating of
tablet or capsule) and capsules: no more
19. than 0.3g/kgand ice cream mixes: no more
Ice creams
1444
 Food additive Use Level Major
functional
class
than 0.3g/kg
20. Coffee(surface decoration only): no
more than 0.1 g/kg(the sum of usage
should be no more than 0.1 g/kg, when
combination of Food Red No.3, Food
Blue No.1 and Food Yellow No.4)
Food Red No.40 Aluminium Lake should be Colour
used only for theRed following foodbeitems. The
usage as a Food No.40 should
1. Confectionery, candies and chewing gum: no
more than 0.3g/kg
than 0.15g/kgconfectionery products: no more
2. Frozen
3. Breads and rice cakes: no more than
0.3g/kg
4. Other processed cocoa products and
chocolates: no more than 0.3g/kg
5.6. Other
Otherjam:sugar,
no moreotherthantaffies,
0.3g/kg and sugar
syrups: no nomoremorethanthan0.3g/kg
7. Sausages: 0.025g/kg
8. Fish sausage: no more than 0.3g/kg
9. Fruit/vegetable beverages, carbonated
beverages and other beverages:
than 0.3g/kg(However, the productnothatmoreis
tothe bediluted
dilutedform)before drinking is based on
10. Spices products(only processed horseradish
products and processed mustard products): no
more than
Food Red No.40 Aluminium Lake 11. Sauce: no 0.3g/kg
more than 0.3g/kg
12. myeongnan-jeot
Salted-fermented): noseafood more thanproducts(only
0.3g/kg
13. Pickled food products(only Hermetic
sealing, heat-pasteurization or sterilization
pickled
radish): nofoodmoreproducts, but excluding pickled
than 0.3g/kg
14. Soju Alcoholic
, and beverages(excluding
Cheongju which is Takju
not , Yakjuto,
added
spirits): no more than 0.3g/kg
15. Vegetable cream and ready-to-eat foods:
16. noProcessed
more thancereal 0.3g/kgproduct, processed starch
product,
other processed processed
fisherysaccharide
product, andproduct,
other
processed product: no more than 0.3g/kg
17. tuberous
Processedandpulse corn product
vegetableandproduct:
processed
no
more than 0.2g/kg
18. tabletHealthor functional
capsule) food(only
and capsules: coating
no of
more
than 0.3g/kg
19. Ice creams and ice cream mixes: no
more than 0.3g/kg
Food Starch Modified It should be used in accordance with Section Thickener
Stabilizer
Ⅱ.2.1).
Food Yellow No.4 Food Yellow No.4
the following food should
items. Thebe used
usageonlyshould
for Colour
be
1445
 Food additive Use Level Major
functional
class
1.2. Confectionery: no more gum:than 0.2g/kg
Candies and chewing no more than
0.3g/kg
3. Frozen
than 0.15g/kgconfectionery products: no more
4.5. Breads: no more thanthan
0.2g/kg
Rice cakes: no more 0.15g/kg
6. Dumpling: no more than 0.5g/kg
7. noOther processed cocoa product and chocolates:
more than 0.4g/kg
8. Other jam: no more than 0.2g/kg
9. syrups:
Other nosugar,
more other 0.5g/kg
than taffies, and sugar
10. Sausages: no more than 0.3g/kg
11.
12. Fish sausage: no more
Fruit/vegetable than 0.5g/kg
beverages, carbonated
beverages and other beverages: no
more than 0.1g/kg(However, the
product
drinking isthatbasedis onto thebediluted
dilutedform)before
13. Spices
productsproducts(only
and processedprocessed
mustard horseradish
products):
no more than 0.5g/kg
14. Sauce: no more than 0.5g/kg
15. myeongnan-jeot
Salted-fermented): noseafood
more than products(only
0.5g/kg
16. sealing,
Pickled heat-pasteurization
food products(only Hermetic
or sterilization
pickled food products, but excluding pickled
radish): no more than 0.5g/kg
17. SojuAlcoholic which is Takju
beverages(excluding
, and Cheongju , Yakjuto,
not added
spirits): no cream:
18. Vegetable more thanno 0.2g/kg
more than 0.5g/kg
19. Ready-to-eat foods: no more than
0.05g/kg
20. tuberous
Processed and pulsecorn product and processed
vegetable product:
21. nostarchmore than cereal
Processed 0.1g/kg product, processed
product, processed saccharide
product,
product, andotherother processed
processed fishery
product:
no more than 0.5g/kg
22. product:
Other noprocessed
more thanedible0.3g/kgfat and oil
23. Health functional food(only coating of
tablet
than or capsule) and capsules: no more
0.3g/kg
24. Ice creams, ice cream mixes: no more
than 0.15g/kg
25. Coffee(surface decoration only): no
more than 0.1 g/kg(the sum of usage
should be no more than 0.1 g/kg, when
combination of Food Red No.3, Food
Red No.40 and Food Blue No.1)
Food Yellow No.4 Aluminium Lake should be Colour
Food Yellow No.4 Aluminium Lake used
usage
only for the following food items. The
as a Food Yellow No.4than
should0.2g/kg
be
1. Confectionery: no more
1446
 Food additive Use Level Major
functional
class
2. Candies and chewing gum: no more than
0.3g/kg
3. Frozen confectionery products: no more
than 0.15g/kg
4. Breads: no more than 0.2g/kg
5.6. Rice cakes:nonomoremorethan
than0.5g/kg
0.15g/kg
Dumpling:
7. Other processed cocoa product and chocolates:
no morejam:thanno0.4g/kg
8.9. Other
Other sugar,moreotherthantaffies,
0.2g/kg and sugar
10. syrups:
Sausages: no more
no thanthan
more 0.5g/kg
0.3g/kg
11. Fish sausage: no more than 0.5g/kg
12. beverages
Fruit/vegetable beverages,
and other beverages: carbonated no
more than 0.1g/kg(However, the
product that is to be diluted before
13. drinking is based on the
Spices products(only diluted horseradish
processed form)
products
no more thanand processed
0.5g/kg mustard products):
14. Sauce: no more than 0.5g/kg
15. Salted-fermented seafood products(only
16. myeongnan-jeot
Pickled food ): noproducts(only
more than 0.5g/kgHermetic
sealing, heat-pasteurization or
pickled food products, but excluding pickledsterilization
radish): no more than 0.5g/kg
17. Alcoholic beverages(excluding Takju, Yakju,
Soju
spirits): Cheongju
, andno more than which
0.2g/kgis not added to
18.
19. Vegetable
Ready-to-eatcream: foods:
no morenothanmore 0.5g/kgthan
0.05g/kg
20. Processed pulse product and processed
tuberous and corn vegetable product:
no more than 0.1g/kg
21. starch
Processedproduct,cereal processed
product, saccharide
processed
product, other processed fishery
product,
no more and 0.5g/kg
than other processed product:
22. Other processed edible fat and oil
23. product:
Health nofunctional
more thanfood(only
0.3g/kg coating of
tablet or capsule) and capsules: no more
than
24. than 0.3g/kg ice cream mixes: no more
Ice creams,
0.15g/kg
Food
the following No.5
Yellow food should
items. Thebe usedusageonlyshould
for Colour
be
1.2. Confectionery:
Candies and chewing no more gum:than 0.2g/kg
no more than
Food Yellow No.5 0.3g/kg
3. Frozen confectionery products, breads
and rice cakes: no more than 0.05g/kg
4.5. Dumpling: no more thancocoa
Other processed 0.4g/kgproduct and

1447
 Food additive Use Level Major
functional
class
chocolates:
jam: nono more
more than than 0.3g/kg
0.4g/kg
6. Other
7. syrups:
Other nosugar, other 0.4g/kg
taffies, and sugar
more than
8. Sausages and fish sausage: no more than
0.3g/kg
9. beverages
Fruit/vegetable
and otherbeverages,beverages: carbonated
no more
than 0.1g/kg(However, the product that
ison tothe bediluted
dilutedform)before drinking is based
10. products
Spices and products(only
processed processedproducts):
mustard horseradish
no
more than 0.3g/kg
11.
12. Sauce: no more thanseafood
Salted-fermented 0.3g/kg products(only
myeongnan-jeot): no more than 0.3g/kg
13. Pickled food products(only Hermetic
sealing,
pickled foodheat-pasteurization or sterilization
products, but excluding pickled
radish): no more than 0.3 g/kg
14. Alcoholic beverages(excluding Takju, Yakju,
Soju , and Cheongju which is not added to
spirits): no more than 0.2g/kg
15. cream:
Processed no morestarchthanproduct
0.4g/kgand Vegetable
16. 0.3g/kgReady-to-eat foods: no more than
17. Processed cereal product, other
processed edible fat and oil product and
processed
than 0.3g/kgsaccharide product: no more
18. product:
Processedno moretuberous than and corn vegetable
0.05g/kg
19. Other processed fishery product: no
more than 0.2g/kg
20. 0.4g/kg
Other processed product: no more than
21. tabletHealthor functional
capsule) and food(only
capsules: coating
no moreof
than 0.3g/kg
22. Ice creams, ice cream mixes: no more
than 0.3g/kg
Food
used only YellowforNo.5 the Aluminium
following food Lake items.
should Thebe Colour
usage as a Food Yellow No.5 should be
1.2. Confectionery:
Candies and no more gum:
chewing than 0.2g/kg
no more than
0.3g/kg
3. andFrozen rice confectionery
cakes: no more products,
than 0.05g/kgbreads
Food Yellow No.5 Aluminium Lake 4. Dumpling: no more than 0.4g/kg
5. Other processed cocoa product and
chocolates:
6. Other jam: nono more
more than than 0.3g/kg
0.4g/kg
7. syrups:
Other nosugar,more than other 0.4g/kg
taffies, and sugar
8. Sausages and fish sausage: no more than
0.3g/kg
9. Fruit/vegetable beverages, carbonated
1448
 Food additive Use Level Major
functional
class
beverages and other beverages: no more
than 0.1g/kg(However, the product that
ison tothe bediluted
dilutedform)before drinking is based
10. Spices products(only processed horseradish
products and0.3g/kg
processed mustard products): no
more than
11. Sauce: no more than 0.3g/kg
12. myeongnan-jeot
Salted-fermented seafood products(only
13. Pickled food products(only 0.3g/kg
): no more than
Hermetic
sealing,
pickled heat-pasteurization or sterilization
radish): nofoodmoreproducts,
than 0.3g/kgbut excluding pickled
14. SojuAlcoholic which is Takju
beverages(excluding
, and Cheongju , Yakjuto,
not added
spirits): no more than 0.2g/kg
15. Processed starch product and Vegetable
16. cream: no more than
Ready-to-eat foods:0.4g/kg
no more than
0.3g/kg
17. Processed cereal product, other
processed edible fat and oil product and
processed saccharide product: no more
18. than 0.3g/kgtuberous and corn vegetable
Processed
19. product:
Other noprocessed
more thanfishery 0.05g/kgproduct: no
more than 0.2g/kg
20. Other processed product: no more than
21. 0.4g/kg
Health functional food(only coating of
tablet or capsule) and capsules: no more
than 0.3g/kg
22. Ice creams, ice cream mixes: no more
than 0.3g/kg
Formic acid should be used for flavorings Flavouring
Formic Acid only. agent
Fumaric acid It should be used in accordance with Section Acidity
Ⅱ.2.1). regulator
Furcelleran It should be used in accordance with Section Stabilizer
Thickener
Ⅱ.2.1).
-galatosidase It should be used in accordance with Section Enzyme
α
Ⅱ.2.1). preparations
Gallic Acid It should be used in accordance with Section Antioxidant
Ⅱ.2.1).
Garden Balsam Extract It should be used in accordance with Section Antioxidant
Ⅱ.2.1).
Gardenia
food items blue
listed should
below. not be used in the Colour
Gardenia Blue 1. Natural food[meat, fishes and shellfishes,
fruits, vegetables, algae, Legume
vegetables and pulses,cut, and
processed food(peeled, their simply
and etc.)]
1449
 Food additive Use Level Major
functional
class
2.3. Teas
Coffee
4.5. Hot pepper powder, shredded hot pepper
Kimchi products
6. Gochujang(hot pepper soy paste),
7. seasoned
Vinegars hot pepper soy paste

Gardenia red should not be used in the food Colour

items listed below.
1. Natural food[meat, fishes and shellfishes,
fruits,
vegetables vegetables,
and pulses, and algae,their Legume
simply
processed
2. Teas food(peeled, cut, and etc.)]
3. Coffee
4. Hot pepper powder, shredded hot pepper
Gardenia Red 5.6. Kimchi products
Gochujang (hot pepper soy paste),
7. Vinegars pepper soy paste
seasoned hot

Gardenia
food itemsyellow
listed should not be used in the Colour
below.
1. Natural food[meat, fishes and shellfishes,
fruits, vegetables, algae, Legume
vegetables and pulses,cut, and
processed food(peeled, their simply
and etc.)]
2.3. Teas
Coffee
4. Hot pepper powder, shredded hot pepper
5.6. Kimchi products
Gochujang
Gardenia Yellow seasoned hot (hot
pepper pepper
soy paste soy paste),
7. Vinegars

It should be used in accordance with Section Emulsifier

Gelatin Ⅱ.2.1). Gelling agent
Stabilizer
1450
 Food additive Use Level Major
functional
class
Gellan Gum It should be used in accordance with Section Thickener
Ⅱ.2.1). Stabilizer
Geraniol Geraniol should be used for flavorings only. F l a v o u r i n g
agent
GeranyI Acetate should be used for Fagent lavouring
Geranyl Acetate flavorings only.
Geranyl Formate Geranyl Formate should be used for Flavouring
flavorings only. agent
Gibberellic acid should be used only for the manufacturing
following for the following food item. solvent
Gibberellic Acid 1. For manufacturing malt of fermented
alcoholic
beverage beverage and distilled alcoholic
Glacial Acetic Acid It should be used in accordance with Section Aregulator
cidity
Ⅱ.2.1).
-Glucanase It should be used in accordance with Section Enzyme
β
Ⅱ.2.1). preparations
Glucoamylase It should be used in accordance with Section Epreparations
nzyme
Ⅱ.2.1).
Glucomannan It should be used in accordance with Section Thickener
Ⅱ.2.1). Stabilizer
Gluconic Acid It should be used in accordance with Section Aregulator
cidity
Ⅱ.2.1).
It should be used in accordance with Section Tofu
agent Firming
Ⅱ.2.1). Acidity
Glucono-δ-Lactone regulator
Raising agent

Glucosamine It should be used in accordance with Section Thickener

Stabilizer
Ⅱ.2.1).
α-Glucosidase
It should be used in accordance with Section Epreparations
nzyme
Ⅱ.2.1).
Glucose Isomerase It should be used in accordance with Section Enzyme
Ⅱ.2.1). preparations
Glucose Oxidase It should be used in accordance with Section Enzyme
Ⅱ.2.1). preparations
It should be used in accordance with Section Flavour
L-Glutamic Acid Ⅱ.2.1). enhancer
Fnutrient
ortifying

1451
 Food additive Use Level Major
functional
class
Glutaminase It should be used in accordance with Section Epreparations
nzyme
Ⅱ.2.1).
L-Glutamine It should be used in accordance with Section F o r t i f y i n g
Ⅱ.2.1). nutrient
Glycerin It should be used in accordance with Section Humectant
Ⅱ.2.1). Stabilizer
It should be used in accordance with Section Emulsifier
Gum base
Glycerin Esters of Fatty Acids Ⅱ.2.1).
It should be used in accordance with Section F o r t i f y i n g
Glycine Ⅱ.2.1). nutrient
Flavour
enhancer
-Glycosidase It should be used in accordance with Section E n z y m e
β
Ⅱ.2.1). preparations
Gold
followingLeaffoodshould
items be used only for the Colour
1. Alcoholic beverages and jams
2. Other foods(Exterior coatings or exterior
Gold Leaf decorations only)

Grape juice color should not be used in the Colour

food items listed below.
1. Natural food[meat, fishes and shellfishes,
fruits,
vegetables vegetables,
and pulses, and algae,their Legume
simply
processed food(peeled, cut, and etc.)]
2.3. Teas
Coffee
4.5. Hot pepper
Kimchi powder, shredded hot pepper
products
6. Gochujang(hot pepper soy paste),
Grape Juice Color 7.8. seasoned
Vinegars hot pepper soy paste
Spice Products(only the products
containing
powder) hot pepper or hot pepper

Grape Seed Extract It should be used in accordance with Section Antioxidant

Ⅱ.2.1).
Grape Skin Extract Grape
the foodSkin
itemsExtract should not be used in Colour
listed below.
1452
 Food additive Use Level Major
functional
class
1. fruits,
Natural food[meat,
vegetables, fishesalgae,
and shellfishes,
Legume
vegetables and pulses, and their simply
processed food(peeled, cut, and etc.)]
2. Teas
3.4. Coffee
5. Hot
pepper powder, shredded hot pepper
Kimchi
6. seasoned
products
Gochujang (hot pepper soy paste),
hot pepper soy paste
7. Vinegars

It should be used in accordance with Section Preservative

Grapefruit Seed Extract Ⅱ.2.1). manufacturing
solvent
Guar Gum It should be used in accordance with Section Thickener
Ⅱ.2.1). Stabilizer
Gum Ghatti It should be used in accordance with Section Thickener
Stabilizer
Ⅱ.2.1).
Heme Iron It should be used in accordance with Section Fnutrient
ortifying
Ⅱ.2.1).
Hemicellulase It should be used in accordance with Section Enzyme
Ⅱ.2.1). preparations
Hesperidin It should be used in accordance with Section Fnutrient
ortifying
Ⅱ.2.1).
Hexane should be used only for the Extraction
following
the residuesfoodas items
hexaneorshould
function.
be The sum of solvent
1. For extracting fats and oil component
when
no moremanufacturing
than 0.005g/kgedible fats and oils:
Hexane 2. For extracting or separating functional
material
more thanof0.005g/kg
health functional food: no

Hibiscus
items Colorbelow.
listed should not be used in the food Colour
1. Natural food[meat, fishes and shellfishes,
fruits, vegetables, algae, Legume
vegetables and pulses,cut, and
processed food(peeled, their simply
and etc.)]
Hibiscus Color 2.3. Teas
4. Coffee
Hot pepper powder, shredded hot pepper
5.6. Kimchi products
Gochujang (hot pepper soy paste),
1453
 Food additive Use Level Major
functional
class
7. seasoned
Vinegars hot pepper soy paste

L-Histidine It should be used in accordance with Section Fnutrient

ortifying
Ⅱ.2.1).
L-Histidine Monohydrochloride It should be used in accordance with Section Fortifying
Ⅱ.2.1). nutrient
Hyaluronic acid It should be used in accordance with Section Thickener
Ⅱ.2.1). Stabilizer
Hydrochloric Acid should be neutralized or manufacturing
Hydrochloric Acid removed
completed. before the final product is solvent
Hydrogen should be used only for the Packaging
following food items or function.
1. For hydrogenating in the manufacture of gas
manufacturing
edible
and oils, imitation cheese andanimal
fats and oils(excluding fats
vegetable solvent
Hydrogen cream)
2. Beverages(excluding teas and coffee)

Hydrogen peroxide should be decomposed or S t e r i l i z i n g

Hydrogen Peroxide removed
completed. before the final product is agent manufacturing
solvent
Hydroxycitronellal Hydroxycitronellal
flavorings only. should be used for Fagent lavouring
y d r o x y c i t r o n e l l a l Hydroxycitronellal
HDimethylacetal Dimethylacetal should be Fagent
used for flavorings only. lavouring
Hydroxypropyl Cellulose It should be used in accordance with Section Thickener
Stabilizer
Ⅱ.2.1).
It should be used in accordance with Section Thickener
Hydroxypropylmethyl Cellulose Ⅱ.2.1). Stabilizer
Hypochlorous
sterilization Acid Water should
of foods such beas usedfruits,
for Sagent
terilizing
Hypochlorous Acid Water vegetables,
removed beforeand etcthe andfinal it product
should beis
completed.
Inositol It should be used in accordance with Section F o r t i f y i n g
Ⅱ.2.1). nutrient
Invertase It should be used in accordance with Section E n z y m e
Ⅱ.2.1). preparations

1454
 Food additive Use Level Major
functional
class
Ion Exchangeshould
Resins(granule,
be removeddispersion
before and
manufacturing
Ion Exchange Resin suspension) the
solvent
final product is completed.
α-Ionone should be used for flavorings only. Flavouring
α-Ionone agent
β-Ionone should be used for flavorings only. Flavouring
β-Ionone agent
Iron Sesquioxide
following food should be used only for Colour
items.
Iron Sesquioxide 1. Bananas(only severed surface of the
banana tip)
2. Konjac
Iron, Electrolytic It should be used in accordance with Section F o r t i f y i n g
Ⅱ.2.1). nutrient
Iron, Reduced It should be used in accordance with Section F o r t i f y i n g
Ⅱ.2.1). nutrient
Isoamyl Acetate Isoamyl Acetate should be used for Fagent
flavorings only. lavouring
Isoamyl Butyrate lsoamyl Butyrate should be used for F l a v o u r i n g
flavorings only. agent
Isoamyl Formate Isoamyl Formate should be used for F l a v o u r i n g
flavorings only. agent
Isoamyl isovalerate lsoamyl Isovalerate should be used for F l a v o u r i n g
flavorings only. agent
Isoamyl Propionate Isoamyl Propionate should be used for F l a v o u r i n g
flavorings only. agent
Isobutyl Phenylacetate should be used for F l a v o u r i n g
Isobutyl Phenylacetate flavorings only. agent
Isoeugenol Isoeugenol
only. should be used for flavorings Fagent
lavouring
L-Isoleucine It should be used in accordance with Section Fnutrient
ortifying
Ⅱ.2.1).
Isomalt It should be used in accordance with Section Sweetener
Ⅱ.2.1).
Isopropyl Alcohol should be used only for manufacturing
the following food items or function. solvent
1.2. ForSugars：
flavoringsnot more than 0.01g/kg(The Esolvent
xtraction
sum of residues as isopropyl alcohol)
3. material
For extracting
of or functional
health separating food:
functional
not
Isopropyl Alcohol more than 0.05g/kg(The sum of residues
as isopropyl alcohol)

1455
 Food additive Use Level Major
functional
class

Itaconic Acid It should be used in accordance with Section Aregulator cidity

Ⅱ.2.1).
Kaoliang
food items Color
listed should
below. not be used in the Colour
1. fruits,
Natural food[meat,
vegetables, fishesalgae,
and shellfishes,
Legume
vegetables and pulses, and their simply
processed food(peeled, cut, and etc.)]
2.3. Teas
Coffee
4.5. Hot pepper
Kimchi powder, shredded hot pepper
products
Kaoliang Color 6. Gochujang(hot pepper soy paste),
seasoned hot pepper soy paste
7. Vinegars

Kaolin should be discoloring,

aid(filtering, used only for deodorizing,
a filtering Filter aid
refining, and etc.) in food manufacturing or
processing. However, it should be removed
before
residual theamount
final product
should beis completed.
no more than The
Kaolin 0.5%(if
acid it isbentonite,
clay, used withtalc,diatomaceous
perlite, earth,
activated
carbon, and other insoluble minerals, the
sum
0.5%).of the residues should be no more than

Karaya Gum It should be used in accordance with Section Thickener

Stabilizer
Ⅱ.2.1).
Koji It should be used in accordance with Section Enzyme
Ⅱ.2.1). preparations
Lac
itemsColorlisted should
below. not be used in the food Colour
1. fruits,
Natural food[meat,
vegetables, fishesalgae,
and shellfishes,
Legume
vegetables and pulses, and their simply
Lac Color processed food(peeled, cut, and etc.)]
2.3. Teas
Coffee
4.5. Hot
Kimchipepper powder, shredded hot pepper
products
6. Gochujang(hot pepper soy paste),
1456
 Food additive Use Level Major
functional
class
7. seasoned
Vinegars hot pepper soy paste
8. Spicehot pepper
Products(only the powder)
products
containing or hot pepper

Lactase It should be used in accordance with Section E n z y m e

Ⅱ.2.1). preparations
Lactic Acid It should be used in accordance with Section A c i d i t y
Ⅱ.2.1). regulator
Lactitol It should be used in accordance with Section Sweetener
Humectant
Ⅱ.2.1).
Lactoferrin Concentrates It should be used in accordance with Section F o r t i f y i n g
Ⅱ.2.1). nutrient
It should be used in accordance with Section Antifoaming
agent
Lauric Acid Ⅱ.2.1). manufacturing
solvent
Laver
items Color below.
listed should not be used in the food Colour
1. Natural food[meat, fishes and shellfishes,
fruits,
vegetables vegetables, algae,their Legume
and pulses, and simply
processed food(peeled, cut, and etc.)]
2.3. Teas
4. Coffee
Hot pepper powder, Shredded hot pepper
5. Kimchi products
Laver Color Gochujang
6. Seasoned hot(hot
pepper pepper
soy pastesoy paste),
7. Vinegars

Lecithin It should be used in accordance with Section Emulsifier

Ⅱ.2.1).
L-Leucine It should be used in accordance with Section Fnutrient
ortifying
Ⅱ.2.1).
Licorice Extract It should be used in accordance with Section Sweetener
Ⅱ.2.1).
1457
 Food additive Use Level Major
functional
class
Linalool Linalool should be used for flavorings only. Fagent
lavouring
Linalyl Acetate Linalyl Acetate should be used for flavorings Flavouring
only. agent
Lipase It should be used in accordance with Section Enzyme
Ⅱ.2.1). preparations
Liquid Paraffin should be used only for the Releasing
following food items. The usage should be a agent
1. Breads：
releasing agent) no more than 0.15%(for Coating agent
2. Capsules：
releasing agent) no more than 0.6%(for a
Liquid Paraffin 3. Dried fruits and vegetables： no more
than 0.02%(for a releasing agent)
agent)Fruits and vegetables(for a coating
4.

Locust Bean Gum It should be used in accordance with Section Thickener

Stabilizer
Ⅱ.2.1).
L-Lysine It should be used in accordance with Section F o r t i f y i n g
Ⅱ.2.1). nutrient
It should be used in accordance with Section Fnutrient
ortifying
L-Lysine Monohydrochloride Ⅱ.2.1).
Lysozyme It should be used in accordance with Section E n z y m e
Ⅱ.2.1). preparations
It should be used in accordance with Section Aregulator
cidity
Ⅱ.2.1). Raising
Magnesium Carbonate o r t i f agent
Fnutrient ying

It should be used in accordance with Section Soybean curds

Ⅱ.2.1). Firming
o r t i fagent
Fnutrient ying
Magnesium Chloride
It should be used in accordance with Section A c i d i t y
Magnesium Gluconate Ⅱ.2.1). regulator
Fortifying
nutrient
It should be used in accordance with Section Aregulator
cidity
Magnesium Hydroxide Ⅱ.2.1). Fortifying
nutrient
It should be used in accordance with Section Aregulator
cidity
Magnesium L-Lactate Ⅱ.2.1). Fortifying
1458
 Food additive Use Level Major
functional
class
nutrient
Magnesium Oxide It should be used in accordance with Section Fnutrient
ortifying
Ⅱ.2.1).
It should be used in accordance with Section Aregulator
cidity
Ⅱ.2.1). Fortifying
Magnesium Phosphate, Dibasic nutrient
Raising agent
It should be used in accordance with Section A c i d i t y
Ⅱ.2.1). regulator
Fortifying
Magnesium Phosphate, Tribasic nutrient
Raising agent
Magnesium Silicate should be used only for A n t i c a k i n g
anticaking agent and
used for filtering aid, filtering
it shouldaid.be Ifremoved
it is agent
Filter aid
before the final product is completed, and if
it is used for anticaking agent, it should be
used
the usageonly should
for thebe following food items and
1. forProcessed milk cream(powder
vending machine only)： no more products
than
1%(if it is used with silicon dioxide or
calcium silicate, the sum of usage should
2. bePowdered
no more than 1%)
milks(products for vending
Magnesium Silicate machine
is used with silicon dioxide or1%calcium
only)： no more than (if it
silicate, the sum of usage should be no
3. more
Ediblethansalts：
1%) no more than 2%(if it is
used with silicon dioxide or calcium
silicate,
more thanthe2%)sum of usage should be no

It should be used in accordance with Section Fnutrient

ortifying
Magnesium Stearate Ⅱ.2.1). Emulsifier
It should be used in accordance with Section Soybean
Firming curds
agent
Ⅱ.2.1). Fnutrient
ortifying
Magnesium Sulfate

Maize Morado Color Maize

the foodMorado Colorbelow.
items listed should not be used in Colour

1459
 Food additive Use Level Major
functional
class
1. fruits,
Natural food[meat,
vegetables, fishesalgae,
and shellfishes,
Legume
vegetables and pulses, and their simply
processed food(peeled, cut, and etc.)]
2. Teas
3.4. Coffee
5. Hot
pepper powder, shredded hot pepper
Kimchi
6. seasoned
products
Gochujang (hot pepper soy paste),
hot pepper soy paste
7. Vinegars
8. containing
Spice products(only
hot pepper orthe hot products
pepper
powder)

It should be used in accordance with Section A c i d i t y

DL-Malic Acid Ⅱ.2.1). regulator
Raising agent
D-Maltitol It should be used in accordance with Section Sweetener
Humectant
Ⅱ.2.1).
Maltitol Syrup It should be used in accordance with Section Sweetener
Ⅱ.2.1). Humectant
Maltogenic Amylase It should be used in accordance with Section Epreparations
nzyme
Ⅱ.2.1).
Maltol Maltol should be used for flavorings only. Flavouring
agent
Maltotriohydrolase It should be used in accordance with Section Epreparations
nzyme
Ⅱ.2.1).
Manganese Chloride It should be used in accordance with Section Fortifying
Ⅱ.2.1). nutrient
Manganese citrate It should be used in accordance with Section Fnutrient
ortifying
Ⅱ.2.1).
Manganese Gluconate
for the following should be used only
food items. Fnutrient
ortifying
1.2. BreadsCarbonated
beverages(which are beverages,
mixed beverage other
and
beverage base)
Manganese Gluconate 3.4. Milk productsmeat products(excluding Meat
Processed
extract product)egg products
5. Processed
6. Processed fish meat products
7.8. Imitation
Vegetablecheese
cream
1460
 Food additive Use Level Major
functional
class
9. formulas,
Milk formulas, Infant for
formulas, follow-up
Baby foods infants/young
children(Entry into children
force:2020.1.1),
Formulas for infants/young with milk
protein allergy, Special formulas for
infants/young children
10. Health functional food

Manganese Sulfate It should be used in accordance with Section Fnutrient

ortifying
Ⅱ.2.1).
D-Mannitol It should be used in accordance with Section Sweetener
Ⅱ.2.1). Humectant
Masticatory
chewing gum Substances
base only. should be used for Gum base
Masticatory Substances
dl-Menthol dlonly.
-Menthol should be used for flavorings F l a v o u r i n g
agent
l-Menthol lonly.
-Menthol should only be used for flavorings F l a v o u r i n g
agent
DL-Methionine It should be used in accordance with Section Fnutrient
ortifying
Ⅱ.2.1).
L-Methionine It should be used in accordance with Section Fnutrient
ortifying
Ⅱ.2.1).
ρ-Methyl Acetophenone
pflavorings
-Methyl Acetophenone should be used for
only.
Flavouring
agent
Methyl Alcohol should be used only for Extraction
Methyl Alcohol extraction
material in and separation
health functionalof foods.
functional
The raw
sum solvent
of residues should be no more than 0.05
g/kg.
Methyl Anthranilate Methyl Anthranilate should be used for Flavouring
flavorings only. agent
Methyl Cellulose should be used no more Thickener
than
Sodium2% inCarboxymethylcellulose,
the food(if it is usedCalcium with Stabilizer
Carboxymethylcellulose or Sodium
Carboxymethyl
should Starch, the sum of usage
Methyl Cellulose However, health functional foods are food).
be no more than 2% in the not
restricted.

1461
 Food additive Use Level Major
functional
class
Methyl
flavorings Cinnamate
Methyl Cinnamate should be used for Fagent
lavouring
only.
Methyl Hesperidin It should be used in accordance with Section Fortifying
Ⅱ.2.1). nutrient
Methyl ρ-Hydroxybenzoate should be used only Preservative
for the followingρ-Hydroxybenzoate
food items. The usage asof
Methyl
p-hydroxybenzoic acid should be
1.2. Capsules：
Jams: no more no morethanthan1.0g/kg(if
1.0g/kg it is used
with sorbic acid, potassium sorbate, calcium
sorbate, benzoic acid, potassium benzoate,
calcium benzoate, sodium
-hydroxybenzoate, propionicbenzoate,
acid, ethyl
sodiumρ
propionate,
sum of usage and ascalcium
sorbicpropionate,
acid, benzoic the
acid, p-hydroxybenzoic acid, and
propionic acid should be no more than
3. 1.0g/kg)
Mango chutney: no more than 0.25g/kg(if
itpotassium
is usedbenzoate,
with calcium
sodium benzoate
benzoateand,
ethyl p-hydroxybenzoate, the sum of
usage as benzoic acid and ρ
-hydroxybenzoic
more than 0.25g/kg)acid should be no
4. sauce,Korean-style soy sauce, soy
Acid-hydrolyzed Brewed sauce,soy
Enzyme-hydrolyzed soy sauce, Blended
soy sauce： no more than 0.25g/kg(if it is
M e th y l p - Hydroxybenzoate used
potassiumwith benzoate,
benzoic acid,
calciumsodium benzoate,
benzoate, the
sum of usage
-hydroxybenzoic as
acid benzoic
should acid
be no and
more ρ

than 0.6g/kg, and the usage as ρ

-hydroxybenzoic
than 0.25g/kg) acid should be no more
5. Vinegars： no more than 0.1g/L.
6. products),
Other Ginseng/red
beverages(excluding
ginseng powder
beverages:
no more than 0.1g/kg(if it is used with
benzoic acid, sodium benzoate, potassium
benzoate,
usage ascalciumbenzoic benzoate,acidthe and sum ofρ
-hydroxybenzoic
more than 0.6g/kg,acidandshould the usage be no as
ρ -hydroxybenzoic acid should be no
more
7. used Sauce： thanno0.1g/kg)
moreacid,thanpotassium
0.2g/kg(ifsorbate
it is
with sorbic
orρ-hydroxybenzoic
calcium sorbate,acid the sum
and ofsorbic
usageacidas
should be no more than 1.0g/kg, and the
usage as ρ-hydroxybenzoic acid should
8. beFruits(peels
no more thanonly)：
0.2g/kg) no more than
0.012g/kg
9. Vegetables(peels only)： no more than
1462
 Food additive Use Level Major
functional
class
0.012g/kg
flavoringsN-Methylanthranilate
Methyl should be used for Fagent
lavouring
Methyl N-Methylanthranilate only.
Methyl β-Naphthyl Ketone should be used F l a v o u r i n g
Methyl β-Naphthyl Ketone for flavorings only. agent
Methyl Salicylate Methyl Salicylate should be used for Flavouring
flavorings only. agent
Methyl ethyl cellulose It should be used in accordance with Section Thickener
Ⅱ.2.1). Stabilizer
(6S)-5-Methyltetrahydrofolic Acid, fortifying
Glucosamine Salt
(6S)-5-Methyltetrahydrofolic the following food item.should be used only for nutrient
Acid, Glucosamine Salt 1. Health functional food
It should be used in accordance with Section Thickener
Stabilizer
Microfibrillated Cellulose Ⅱ.2.1).
Milk Clotting Enzyme It should be used in accordance with Section Enzyme
Ⅱ.2.1). preparations
Milt Protein It should be used in accordance with Section Fortifying
Ⅱ.2.1). nutrient
Modified Hop Extract Modified Hop Extract should be used for Flavour
Beer only. enhancer
Monascus color below.
food items listed should not be used in the Colour
1. Natural food[meat, fishes and shellfishes,
fruits,
vegetables vegetables, algae,their Legume
processed food(peeled, cut, and etc.)] simply
and pulses, and
2. Teas
3.4. Coffee
Hot pepper powder, shredded hot pepper
5.6. Kimchi products
Gochujang (hot pepper soy paste),
Monascus Color seasoned hot pepper soy paste
7.8. Vinegars
Spice products(only
containing hot pepper orthe hot products
pepper
powder)

Monascus Yellow Monascus yellow should not be used in the Colour

food items listed below.
1463
 Food additive Use Level Major
functional
class
1. fruits,
Natural food[meat,
vegetables, fishesalgae,
and shellfishes,
Legume
vegetables and pulses, and their simply
processed food(peeled, cut, and etc.)]
2. Teas
3.4. Coffee
5. Hot
pepper powder, shredded hot pepper
Kimchi
6. seasoned
products
Gochujang (hot pepper soy paste),
hot pepper soy paste
7. Vinegars

Monoammonium L-Glutamate It should be used in accordance with Section Fenhancer

lavour
Ⅱ.2.1).
Monopotassium L-Glutamate It should be used in accordance with Section Flavour
Ⅱ.2.1). enhancer
It should be used in accordance with Section Aregulator
cidity
Monosodium Fumarate Ⅱ.2.1).
Monosodium L-Glutamate It should be used in accordance with Section Flavour
Ⅱ.2.1). enhancer
Morpholine Salts of Fatty Acids should be Coating agent
Morpholine Salts of Fatty Acids used for peels
vegetable coating
only.agent on fruit peels or
Mucin It should be used in accordance with Section Fnutrient
ortifying
Ⅱ.2.1).
It should be used in accordance with Section Antifoaming
agent
Myristic acid Ⅱ.2.1). manufacturing
solvent
Naringin It should be used in accordance with Section F l a v o u r
Ⅱ.2.1). enhancer
Natamycin should be used on the cheese Preservative
surface only. 2,The
than 1mg/dm and usage
should should
not bebedetected
no moreat
the depth of 5 mm and a deeper surface
Natamycin from the surface(no more than 0.020g/kg).

Neotame
following should
food beTheused
items. usage only
shouldforbe the Sweetener
Neotame 1. Chewing gum: no more than 1.0g/kg
2.3. Rice
Jams:cakes:
no moreno more than 0.033g/kg
than 0.070g/kg
1464
 Food additive Use Level Major
functional
class
4. Concentrated
than 0.065g/kg fruit/vegetable juice: no more
5. Foods for special medical purposess: no
more than 0.033g/kg
6. Weight control formulas: no more than
0.065g/kg
7.8. Vinegars:
Sauce, noMayonnaise:
more than 0.012g/kg
no more than
0.070g/kg
9.10.Tomato
Spiceketchup:
no more nothan more
0.070g/kgthan
preparation:
0.012g/kg
11. Composite seasoning: no more than
0.032g/kg
12. Seasoned fish sauce: no more than
0.012g/kg
13. Picked food: no more than 0.100g/kg
14. Processed peanut or nut products: no
more
15. than 0.033g/kgfruit/vegetable product: no
Processed
more than 0.100g/kg
16. Chesses: no more than 0.033g/kg
17. Vegetable cream: no more than
0.065g/kg
18.
19. Cereals: no more than
Ready-to-eat food: 0.160g/kg
no more than
0.033g/kg
20. Ready-to-cook food: no more than
0.032g/kg
21. Other processed agricultural product: no
more than 0.033g/kg
22. Yeast foods: no more than 0.065g/kg
than 0.100g/kg saccharide product: no more
23. Processed
24. Milk creams: no more than 0.065g/kg
25. Health functional food: no more than
0.090g/kg

Nickel should be used only for the following Manufacturing

food item.product
the1. final and itis completed.
should be removed before solvent
Nickel For catalyst in the hydrogenating
processing of Blended edible oil,
processed fat more
margarine: not and than
oil, 1.0mg/kg(as
shortening and
the
sum of the residues)
Nicotinamide should not be used in the food Fortifying
items listed below. nutrient
Nicotinamide 1.2. Meat
Fish and Shellfish(it means fresh
shellfish.)
Nicotinic Acid should not be used in the Fortifying
Nicotinic Acid food items listed below.
1. Meat nutrient
1465
 Food additive Use Level Major
functional
class
2. Fish and Shellfish(it means fresh
shellfish.)

Nisin shouldusage
be used for beprocessed cheese Preservative
Nisin only. The should no more than
250mg/kg.
ItⅡ.2.1).
shouldHowever,
be usedIfinit accordance
is used aswith
SectionitPropellant
Nitrogen a liquid, Packaging
should be removed before the final product gas
is completed.
It should be used in accordance with Section Propellant
Nitrous Oxide Ⅱ.2.1). Pgasa c k a g i n g
γ-Nonalactone should be used for flavorings Flavouring
γ-Nonalactone only. agent
Octyl Aldehyde Octyl Aldehyde should be used for flavorings Flavouring
only. agent
It should be used in accordance with Section Antifoaming
Oleic acid Ⅱ.2.1). agent
manufacturing
solvent
Oleoresin Paprika should not be used in the Colour
food items listed
1. Natural below. fishes and shellfishes,
food[meat,
fruits,
vegetables vegetables, algae,their Legume
processed food(peeled, cut, and etc.)] simply
and pulses, and
2.3. Teas
4. Coffee
Hot pepper powder, shredded hot pepper
5.6. Kimchi products
Gochujang
Oleoresin Paprika seasoned hot (hot
pepper pepper
soy paste soy paste),
7. Vinegars
8. containing
Spice products(only
hot pepper orthe hot products
pepper
powder)

Onion Color should not be used in the food Colour

items listed below.
1. fruits,
Natural food [meat, fishesalgae,
vegetables, and shellfishes,
Legume
Onion Color vegetables
processed food(peeled, cut, and etc.)] simply
and pulses, and their
2. Teas
3. Coffee
1466
 Food additive Use Level Major
functional
class
4.5. Hot pepper powder, shredded hot pepper
Kimchi
6. seasoned
products
Gochujang (hot pepper soy paste),
hot pepper soy paste
7. Vinegars

-Oryzanol It should be used in accordance with Section Antioxidant

γ
Ⅱ.2.1).
Oxalic
product Acid should be removed before the final manufacturing
is completed. solvent
Oxalic Acid
It should be used in accordance with Section Propellant
Ⅱ.2.1). Pgasa c k a g i n g
Oxygen manufacturing
solvent
Oxystearin should be used only for the Stabilizer
following
1. Ediblefoodfatsitemandand oils(excluding
the usage should be Antifoaming
imitation agent
cheese, vegetable cream)： no more than
Oxystearin 0.125%

Ozone Water should be used for sterilization Sterilizing

Ozone Water ofit foods(fruits,
should be vegetables
removed and
beforeetc) the
only final
and agent
product is completed.
It should be used in accordance with Section Antifoaming
agent
Palmitic Acid Ⅱ.2.1). manufacturing
solvent
Pancreatin It should be used in accordance with Section E n z y m e
Ⅱ.2.1). preparations
Pecan nut color should not be used in the food Colour
items listed below.
1. fruits,
Natural food[meat,
vegetables, fishesalgae,
and shellfishes,
Legume
vegetables
processed and pulses,
food(peeled, cut, and
and their
etc.)] simply
Pecan Nut Color 2. Teas
3. Coffee
4.5. Hot
Kimchipepper powder, shredded hot pepper
products
Gochujang
6. seasoned hot (hot
pepper pepper
soy paste soy paste),
7. Vinegars
1467
 Food additive Use Level Major
functional
class

Pectin It should be used in accordance with Section Thickener

Ⅱ.2.1). Stabilizer
Pectinase It should be used in accordance with Section Enzyme
Ⅱ.2.1). preparations
Pepsin It should be used in accordance with Section Epreparations
nzyme
Ⅱ.2.1).
Perilla Color should not be used in the food Colour
items listed below.
1. Natural food[meat, fishes and shellfishes,
fruits,
vegetables vegetables, algae,their Legume
and pulses, and simply
processed food(peeled, cut, and etc.)]
2. Teas
3.4. Coffee
Hot pepper powder, shredded hot pepper
5.6. Kimchi products
Gochujang
Perilla Color seasoned hot (hot
pepper pepper
soy paste soy paste),
7.8. Vinegars
Spice products(only the products
containing hot pepper or hot pepper powder)

Perlite should decolorization,

aid(filtering, be used fordeodorization,
filtering Filter aid
refining and etc) during food manufacturing
orremoved
processingbefore only. theHowever,
final it product
should beis
completed and the sum of the residues
Perlite should be no more than 0.5%(if it is used
with other insoluble earth,
as diatomaceous mineralkaolin,
substances such
bentonite,
acid
etc, theclay,sumtalc,of perlite, active should
the residues carbon,be andno
more than 0.5%).
Peroxyacetic acid should be used only for S t e r i l i z i n g
the
only following food items.
for sterilization, It shouldor bespread
and soaking used agent
peroxyacetic acid shall be shacked off or
Peroxyacetic acid drained
final off from
food the foodis surface
product before The
completed. the
usage(concentration) as peroxyacetic acid and
1-hydroxyethylidene-1,1-diphosphonic(HEDP)
acid should be no more than
1468
 Food additive Use Level Major
functional
class
Ingredient Fruits/vegetables Meat
mammals:
Peroxyacetic
acid 0.080g/kg 1.8g/kg
poultry:
2.0g/kg
mammals:
0.024g/kg
HEDP 0.0048g/kg poultry:
0.136g/k
g
Persimmon color should
food items listed below. not be used in the Colour
1. fruits,
Natural food[meat,
vegetables, fishesalgae,
and shellfishes,
Legume
vegetables and pulses, and their simply
processed food(peeled, cut, and etc.)]
2.3. Teas
Coffee
4.5. Hot pepper
Kimchi powder, shredded hot pepper
products
Persimmon Color 6. Gochujang(hot pepper soy paste),
seasoned hot pepper soy paste
7. Vinegars

It should be used in accordance with Section Coating agent

Petroleum Wax Ⅱ.2.1). Gum base
Phaffia
items Colorbelow.
listed should not be used in the food Colour
1. Natural food[meat, fishes and shellfishes,
fruits, vegetables, algae, Legume
vegetables and pulses,cut, and
processed food(peeled, their simply
and etc.)]
2.3. Teas
4. Coffee
Hot pepper powder, shredded hot pepper
Phaffia Color 5.6. Kimchi products
Gochujang
seasoned hot (hot
pepper pepper
soy paste soy paste),
7. Vinegars

DL-Phenylalanine It should be used in accordance with Section F o r t i f y i n g

1469
 Food additive Use Level Major
functional
class
Ⅱ.2.1). nutrient
L-Phenylalanine It should be used in accordance with Section Fnutrient
ortifying
Ⅱ.2.1).
Phenylethyl
flavorings only.Acetate
Phenylethyl Acetate should be used for Fagent
lavouring
Phosphodiesterase It should be used in accordance with Section Epreparations
nzyme
Ⅱ.2.1).
Phospholipase It should be used in accordance with Section Epreparations
nzyme
Ⅱ.2.1).
It should be used in accordance with Section Acidity
Phosphoric Acid Ⅱ.2.1). regulator
Fortifying
nutrient
Phytic Acid should not be used for the food Acidity
items listedforbelow.
1. Foods special dietary uses regulator
Phytic Acid 2. Health functional food

Piperonal Piperonal should be used for flavorings only. F l a v o u r i n g

agent
Polybutene should be used for a chewing Gum base
Polybutene gum base only.

Polydextrose It should be used in accordance with Section HumectantStabilizer

Ⅱ.2.1).
Polyethylene
the following glycol
food should
item. Thebe used
usageonlyshould
for Coating agent
be1. Health functional food(tablet or its
Polyethylene Glycol coating, capsule part of capsules only)
and capsules for a coating agent: no
more than 10of the
total weight g/kg(the
tablet orusage applies to
capsule)
It should be used in accordance with Section Sweetener
Polyglycitol Syrup Ⅱ.2.1). Humectant
Stabilizer
Polyisobutylene Polyisobutylene should be used for a Gum base
chewing gum base only.
It should be used in accordance with Section Thickener
Poly-r-glutamic acid Ⅱ.2.1). Stabilizer
-Polylysine It should be used in accordance with Section Preservative
ε
Ⅱ.2.1).
1470
 Food additive Use Level Major
functional
class
Polysorbate 20 It should be used in accordance with Section Emulsifier
Ⅱ.2.1).
Polysorbate 60 It should be used in accordance with Section Emulsifier
Ⅱ.2.1).
Polysorbate 65 It should be used in accordance with Section Emulsifier
Ⅱ.2.1).
Polysorbate 80 It should be used in accordance with Section Emulsifier
Ⅱ.2.1).
Polyvinyl Acetate should be used only for Gum base
the1. Chewing
following gum
food for
items.
a gum base Coating agent
Polyvinyl Acetate 2. Fruit peels or vegetable peels for a
coating agent
Polyvinyl Alcohol should be used only for health Coating agent
Polyvinyl Alcohol functional food(tablet or its coating, capsule
only) and capsules for a coating agent.
Polyvinyl
only for a Polypyrrolidone shouldbe beremoved
filter aid. it should used Filter aid
before the final product is completed.
Polyvinyl Polypyrrolidone

Polyvinyl Pyrrolidone should be used only Coating agent

for food items listed below. the usage Stabilizer
should be
1.2. Beer: no more
Vinegars: thanthan
no more 0.01g/kg
0.04g/kg
Polyvinyl pyrrolidone 3. Fruit wine, liqueur: no more than
0.06g/kg
4. Health functional food(tablet or its coating,
capsule
agent only) and capsules for a coating
It should be used in accordance with Section Emulsifier
Potassium Alginate Ⅱ.2.1). Thickener
Potassium Aluminium silicate-based pearlescent Colour
Potassium Aluminium pigments
following should
food item. be used only for the
silicate-based
pigments pearlescent 1. Fruit wine, General Distilled Alcoholic
Beverage, Liqueur : Not more than 0.3%
Potassium Benzoate should be used only for Preservative
the
benzoicfollowing foodbe items. The usage as
acid should
Potassium Benzoate 1. non-heated
Fruit/vegetable
products): beverages(excluding
no more than
0.6g/kg(However, In case of concentrated
fruit
is usedjuice, with
and fruit/vegetable
sorbic acid, juice, if it
potassium
1471
Food additive Use Level Major
functional
class
sorbate,
usage asor benzoic
calcium acid sorbate,
and thesorbicsumacidof
should beas nobenzoic
more than 1.0g/kg, and the
usage acid should be no
more than 0.6g/kg)
2. 0.6g/kg(If
Carbonatedit beverages: no sorbic
more acid,than
is used with
potassium sorbate or calcium sorbate,
the sumacidof usage asbe benzoic acid than
and
sorbic should no more
0.6g/kg, and the usage of sorbic acid
should
Otherbe nobeverages(excluding
3. products), more than 0.5g/kg) powder
Ginseng/red ginseng
beverages:
used with methyl ρ-hydroxybenzoateit oris
no more than 0.6g/kg(if
ethyl ρ-hydroxybenzoate, the sum of
usage as benzoic acid and ρ
-hydroxybenzoic
than 0.6g/kg, and acid should
the usage be no ofmoreρ
-hydroxybenzoic
than 0.1g/kg) acid should be no more
4. Korean-style soy sauce, brewed soy sauce,
acid-hydrolyzed soy sauce,
enzyme-hydrolyzed soy sauce,
sauce: no more than 0.6g/kg(if it is used blended soy
with methyl ρ-hydroxybenzoate
-hydroxybenzoate, the sum of orusage ethyl asρ
benzoic acid and ρ-hydroxybenzoic acid
should be no more than 0.6g/kg, and the
usage
be no more of ρthan -hydroxybenzoic
0.25g/kg) acid should
5. health
Aloe wholefunctionalleaves(including
food(However,Aloein gel) the
case of using more than two kinds of
health functional food materials, the
usage apply proportion of the aloe whole
leaves(including the aloe gel) health
functional
0.5g/kg(if foodis content):
it used withno sorbic
more acid,
than
potassium sorbate, or calcium sorbate,
the
sorbic sumacidof usage
should asbe benzoic
no acid than
more and
1.5g/kg, and the usage of sorbic acid
6. should
Jams: nobe nomoremorethanthan1.0g/kg(if
1.0g/kg) it is used
with sorbic acid, potassium sorbate, calcium
sorbate,
-hydroxybenzoate,methyl ρ-hydroxybenzoate,
propionic acid, ethyl
sodium ρ
propionate, or calcium propionate, the sum
ofp-hydroxybenzoic
usage as benzoic acid, acid, propionic
and sorbic acid,acid
should no more than 1.0g/kg)
7. Mango chutney: no more than 0.25g/kg(if it
isethylusedρ-hydroxybenzoate,
with methyl ρ-hydroxybenzoate
the sum of usageor
asshould
benzoic
be noacidmoreandthan ρ-hydroxybenzoic acid
0.25g/kg).
8. Margarine: no more than 1.0g/kg (if it is
used
or calcium with sorbic
sorbate,acid,the potassium
sum of usage sorbateas
1472
 Food additive Use Level Major
functional
class
sorbic acid and benzoicandacidtheshould
more than 2.0g/kg, usagebe noas
benzoic acid should be no more than
0.1g/kg)
9. Pickled food, mayonnaise: no more than 1.0
g/kg(if it sorbate
is usedor calcium
with sorbic acid,
potassium sorbate, the
sum of usage as benzoic acid and sorbic
acid should ofbe sorbic
no moreacidthanshould
1.5g/kg,be and
the usage no
more than 1.0g/kg)
It should be used in accordance with Section Aregulator cidity
Ⅱ.2.1). Raising
Potassium Bicarbonate F o r t i f agent
ying
nutrient
It should be used in accordance with Section Aregulator
cidity
Potassium DL-Bitartrate Ⅱ.2.1). Raising agent
It should be used in accordance with Section A c i d i t y
Potassium L-Bitartrate Ⅱ.2.1). regulator
Raising agent
It should be used in accordance with Section Aregulator
cidity
Ⅱ.2.1). Raising
Potassium Carbonate, Anhydrous F o r t i f agent
ying
nutrient
It should be used in accordance with Section Emulsifier
Potassium Caseinate Ⅱ.2.1). Thickener
Stabilizer
It should be used in accordance with Section F l a v o u r
Ⅱ.2.1). enhancer
Gelling agent
Potassium Chloride Fnutrient
ortifying

It should be used in accordance with Section A c i d i t y

Potassium Citrate Ⅱ.2.1). regulator
Fnutrient
ortifying
Potassium Copper Chlorophyllin should be Colour
used
usage only
as for theshould
copper following
be food items. The
Potassium Copper Chlorophyllin 1. Kelp(anhydrous form): no more than
0.15g/kg
2. Preserved vegetables or fruits: no more
1473
 Food additive Use Level Major
functional
class
than 0.1g/kg gum and candies: no more than
3. Chewing
0.05g/kg
4. Agar in canned green pea product: no
more than 0.0004g/kg
Potassium Ferrocyanide should be The
used usage
only Aagent
nticaking
for edible salts(excluding solar salt).
as ferrocyanide ion should be
1. isEdibleusedslats:withno more thanferrocyanide
0.010g/kg(if orit
calcium
Potassium Ferrocyanide sodium ferrocyanide, the sum of usage as
ferrocyanide
0.010g/kg) ion should be no more than

It should be used in accordance with Section A c i d i t y

Potassium Gluconate Ⅱ.2.1). regulator
Fortifying
nutrient
Potassium Glycerophosphate It should be used in accordance with Section F o r t i f y i n g
Ⅱ.2.1). nutrient
Potassium Hydroxide
before the final product isshould be removed Aregulator
completed. cidity
Potassium Hydroxide
It should be used in accordance with Section Fnutrient
ortifying
Ⅱ.2.1). Flour treatment
Potassium Iodate agent
It should be used in accordance with Section F o r t i f y i n g
Ⅱ.2.1). nutrient
Flour treatment
Potassium Iodide agent
It should be used in accordance with Section Aregulator cidity
Potassium Lactate Ⅱ.2.1). Flavour
enhancer
Potassium Metabisulfite should be used only Preservative
for
amount the offollowing
PotassiumfoodMetabisulfite
items. Theasresidual sulfur Antioxidant
dioxide should be less than
Potassium Metabisulfite 1. dried
Dried gourd
of shavings(which
gourd removing is itsslicedcores):
and
5.0g/kg
2.3. Molasses:
Starch 0.3g/kg
syrup and other
4. Fruit wines: 0.350 g/kg taffies: 0.20g/kg
5. Fruit/Vegetable Beverage: 0.030g/kg(However,
1474
Food additive Use Level Major
functional
class
only
whichfruit
are juice
drankandor concentrated
fruit more
juice
used by dilution
thanProcessed
5 times: 0.150g/kg)
6. 0.030g/kg(However, fruit/vegetable
in case of a product:product
which is drank or used by dilution more
than 5 times: 0.150g/kg)
7. Dried fruits: 1.0g/kg(However, the
fruits(dried products only) which are Korean
edible
food ingredients in 「The
Pharmacopoeia」(announced Ministry of Food
and Drug Safety)
Traditional or 「Nationaland Standard
Medicinal(Herbal of
Botanical)
Materials」(announced Ministry of Food and
Drug
on theseSafety)standards
are applied
and to2.0g/kg
a sulfurin dioxide
dried
apricot, 0.20g/kg in dried coconut)
8. Dried vegetables, dried mushrooms:
0.50g/kg(However,
mushrooms(dried products the only)vegetables
which andare
edible food ingredients in
Pharmacopoeia」(announced Ministry of Food「The Korean
and Drug Safety) or 「National Standard of
Traditional Medicinal(Herbal and Botanical)
Materials」(announced
Drug Safety) are applied Ministry of Fooddioxide
to a sulfur and
9. onDried
these standards)
agricultural/forest products(However,
the plant ingredients excluding No.7, 8(dried
products only) which are edible food ingredients
inMinistry
「Theof FoodKorean Pharmacopoeia」(announced
and Drug Safety) or 「National
Standard
Botanical) Materials」(announced Ministry andof
of Traditional Medicinal(Herbal
Food and Drug Safety) and Rehmannia glutinosa
var.
these
purpurea
standards)
are applied to a sulfur dioxide on
10. Konjac powder: 0.90g/kg
11.
12. Shrimps:
Frozen 0.10g/kg
fresh (peeled 0.10g/kg
crabs: shrimp) (peeled
crab)
13.
14. Saccharidess:
Vinegars: 0.020g/kg
0.10g/kg
15. Dried potatoes: 0.50g/kg
16.
17. Sauce: 0.30g/kg 0.20g/kg
Spice preparation:
18. Other processed fishery
products(excluding
crab), processed shrimp,
peanut or frozen
nut fresh
products,
pickled foods products, breads, carbonated
beverages,
skin, dried confectionery,
fish/shellfish noddles,
fillet dumpling
products,
candies, cocoa products or chocolates, other
beverages, processed tuberous and corm
vegetable product(excluding
konjac powder), processed pulsedriedproduct,
potatoboiled
and
foods(ingredients for agricultural
Brandy, General Distilled Alcoholicfoods only),
Beverage,
other alcoholic beverages, parboiled rice, jams,
starch
Doenjangproducts,
(soybeanprocessed saccharide product,
paste) : 0.030g/kg
1475
 Food additive Use Level Major
functional
class
19. 100%
Processed cerealfor product(products
corn germ the manufacture ofof
corn oil only): 0.20g/kg
It should be used in accordance with Section A c i d i t y
Potassium Metaphosphate Ⅱ.2.1). regulator
Raising agent
Potassium Nitratefoodshould
items.be The
used usage
only foras Cr e to t el not iuo nr
the following
nitrite ion should
1. Processed meat beproducts(excluding Meat Extract agent
Preservative
Product), other processed animal food
Potassium Nitrate product(only the product contains other meat):
0.07g/kg
2. Cheeses: 0.05g/kg
3. Salted alaska cod’s roe： 0.2g/kg
It should be used in accordance with Section A c i d i t y
Potassium Phosphate, Dibasic Ⅱ.2.1). regulator
Raising agent
It should be used in accordance with Section A c i d i t y
Ⅱ.2.1). regulator
Raising
Potassium
Monobasic
Phosphate, F o r t i f agent
ying
nutrient
It should be used in accordance with Section Aregulator
cidity
Ⅱ.2.1). Raising agent
Potassium Phosphate, Tribasic Fnutrient
ortifying

It should be used in accordance with Section A c i d i t y

Potassium Polyphosphate Ⅱ.2.1). regulator
Raising agent
It should be used in accordance with Section Aregulator
cidity
Potassium Pyrophosphate Ⅱ.2.1). Raising agent
It should be used in accordance with Section Aregulator
cidity
Potassium Sodium L-Tartrate Ⅱ.2.1).
Potassium Sorbate should be used only for Preservative
the following food items. The usage as
Potassium Sorbate sorbic acid should
1. Cheeses: no be
more than 3.0g/kg(if it is
used
propionate, or propionic
with acid, sodium
calcium propionate, the
1476
Food additive Use Level Major
functional
class
sum
sorbic ofacidusageshould
as propionic acid than
and
be no more
3.0g/kg) meat products(excluding seasoned
2. Processed
meats, meat extract product), other
processed animalotherfoodmeat),
product(only the
product contains processed fish
meat products, salted and fermented sea
urchin, peanut better, imitationin cheese: Notof
more than 2.0g/kg(however, the case
sausage using collagen casing, sum of use
level
2.0 as sorbic acid shall be not more than
g/kg)
3. Collagen casing: no more than 0.1g/kg
4. products(However,
Salted and product fermented seafood
which account
for no more than 8% of salt only),
korean-style
Gochujang ,
Doenjang
mixed
,
paste,
Doenjang
Chunjang ,
Cheonggukjang (However, non-dried,
products only), dried fishforandagricultural
boiled foods(ingredients shellfish,
foods only), flour pastes, sauce: no more
than 1.0g/kg(However, in the case of
sauce, if it is usedor with Ethyl
-Hydroxybenzoate Methyl ρρ
-Hydroxybenzoate,
sorbic acid and the sum of usage as
ρ-Hydroxybenzoic acid
should be no more than 1.0g/kg, and the
usage as ρ-Hydroxybenzoic acid should
5. beAloeno more
wholethanleaves(including
0.2g/kg) Aloe gel)
health functional food(However,
case of using more than two kinds in theof
health functional food materials, the
usage applies proportion of the aloe
whole leaves(including the aloe gel)
health functional food content): no more
than
acid, 1.0g/kg(if
sodium it benzoate,
is used withpotassiumbenzoic
benzoate or calcium benzoate, the sum
ofshould
usagebe asno sorbic acid and benzoic acid
usage as benzoic acid should be the
more than 1.5g/kg and no
more than 0.5g/kg)
6. Concentrated fruit juice, fruit/vegetable
juice: no more than 1.0g/kg(if it is used
with
potassium benzoic acid,or sodium
benzoate calcium benzoate,
benzoate,
the sum of usage as sorbic acid and
benzoic
1.0g/kg acid should be no more than
should beandno more the usage as benzoic aicd
than 0.6g/kg)
7. Carbonated beverages: no more than
0.5g/kg(If
sodium benzoate, it is used with benzoic
potassium benzoateacid,or
calcium
sorbic acid benzoate, the sumacidof should
and benzoic usage beas
no more than 0.6 g/kg, and the usage as
sorbic
g/kg) acid should be no more than 0.5
1477
 Food additive Use Level Major
functional
class
8. with
Jams: nobenzoicmore than
acid,1.0 sodium
g/kg(if itbenzoate,
is used
potassium benzoate, calcium benzoate,
methyl p-hydroxybenzoate, ethyl
p-hydroxybenzoate, propyl
p-hydroxybenzoate, propionicpropionate,
acid,
sodium propionate, or calcium
the total usage of sorbic acid, benzoic
acid, p-hydroxybenzoic acid, and
propionic acid should be no more than
1.0 g/kg)
9. Sugar-preserved
Dried fruits, tomato food(excluding ketchup ,
sugar-preserved dried foods): no more than
10.0.5g/kg.
Pickled food, mayonnaise: no more than
1.0g/kg(if it is used with benzoic acid,
sodium benzoate, potassium benzoate or
calcium
usage of benzoate,
benzoic acidin and that sorbic
the totalacid
should
the usage as benzoic acid should be and
be no more than 1.5 g/kg no
more than 1.0 g/kg)
11. Fermented beverages(excluding
pasteurized
0.05g/kg. beverages): no more than
12. wine),Fruit Yakju Takjuclear
wine,(korean (koreanrice turbid
wine): riceno
more than 0.2g/kg.
13. Margarine: no more than 1.0g/kg(if it is
used with benzoate,
potassium benzoic acid, sodium benzoate,
or calcium benzoate,
the
benzoic acid should be no moreand than
total usage of sorbic acid the
2.0g/kg and the usage as benzoic acid
should be no more than 1.0 g/kg)
14. syrup Processed saccharide product(only
and paste): Not more than
15. 1.0g/kg Spice nopreparation(excluding
products): more than 1.0g/kg dried
16. products,
Health functional
excluding food(only
aloe liquid
whole
leaves(including Aloe gel) health
functional food): no more than 2.0g/kg
Potassium Sulfate It should be used in accordance with Section Acidity
Ⅱ.2.1). regulator
L-Proline It should be used in accordance with Section Fortifying
Ⅱ.2.1). nutrient
Propionic Acid should be used only for the Preservative
following food items
usage as propionic acid and
shouldthebefunction. The Fagent
lavouring
1. Breads: no more than 2.5g/kg
Propionic acid 2. usedCheeses:
with nosorbic
more acid,
than calcium
3.0g/kg(ifsorbate,
it is
or potassium sorbate, the sum of usage
asbe nopropionic
more than acid3.0g/kg)
and sorbic acid should
1478
 Food additive Use Level Major
functional
class
3. Jams:
with nosorbic
more acid,
than 1.0g/kg(if
potassiumit issorbic,
used
calcium sorbic, benzoicbenzoate,
acid, potassium
benzoate, calcium sodiumor
benzoate, methyl p-hydroxybenzoate,
ethyl p-hydroxybenzoate, thesorbicsum acid,of
usage as propionic acid,
benzoic acid, and p-hydroxybenzoic acid
should be no more than 1.0g/kg).
4. For flavoring

Propyl
followingGallate shouldThebe usage
food items. used should
only for
be the Antioxidant
1. imitation
Edible cheese
fats andand oils(excluding for
vegetable cream),
Propyl Gallate Butters: no more than 0.1g/kg
If propylene glycol is used directly in the final Emulsifier
product, it shall if beusedusedas ain diluent,
only: However, the following
emulsifierfoodsor Humectant
Stabilizer
stabilizer for food additives, it shall be used no
more than 2% of the final product.
1.2. Dumplings：
Processed peanutnoormore Nut than
Products1.2%: no more than
2.3.5%Ice creams： no more than 2.5%
4. Confectionaries, Candies, Chewing Gum, Flavored
oil,
Spice Noodles, LiquidOtherTea,Processed
Products, Other beverages,
Products Sauces,
: no
Propylene Glycol more than 2%
5.Products,
Breads, Chocolates,
Rice Cakes, Processed Froxen Confectionary
Saccharide
Product, Jams, Vegetable cream, Carbonated
Beverages, Processed salt, Pickled Food Products,
Alcoholic Beverages,
Product, Capsules OtherthanProcessed
: no more 1% Agricultural
6.2%(However,
Health functional
in the casefoodof the : nohealthmorefunctional
than
food which is diluted and then consumed, it shall
be no more than 0.3 %)

The
should Usage
be no ofmore
Propylene
than Glycol
1% of Alginate
the food Emulsifier
Thickener
Propylene Glycol Alginate items. Stabilizer
It should be used in accordance with Section Emulsifier
Propylene
Fatty Acids Glycol Esters of Ⅱ.2.1).

1479
 Food additive Use Level Major
functional
class
Protease It should be used in accordance with Section Epreparations
nzyme
Ⅱ.2.1).
Psyllium Seed Gum It should be used in accordance with Section Thickener
Ⅱ.2.1). Stabilizer
Pullulan It should be used in accordance with Section Coating agent
Ⅱ.2.1).
Pullulanase It should be used in accordance with Section Epreparations
nzyme
Ⅱ.2.1).
Purple sweet potato color should not be Colour
used in the food
1. Natural items listed
food[meat, fishesbelow.
and shellfishes,
fruits,
vegetables and pulses, and their Legume
vegetables, algae, simply
processed food(peeled, cut, and etc.)]
2. Teas
3.4. Coffee
Hot pepper powder, shredded hot pepper
5.6. Kimchi products
Gochujang (hot pepper soy paste),
Purple Sweet Potato Color seasoned hot pepper soy paste
7. Vinegars
8. containing
Spice products(only
hot pepper orthe hot products
pepper
powder)

Purple yamlisted
colorbelow.
should not be used in the Colour
food items
1. Natural food[meat, fishes and shellfishes,
fruits,
vegetables vegetables, algae,their Legume
and pulses, and simply
processed food(peeled, cut, and etc.)]
2.3. Teas
4. Coffee
Hot pepper powder, shredded hot pepper
5.6. Kimchi products
Gochujang
Purple Yam Color seasoned hot (hot
pepper pepper
soy paste soy paste),
7.8. Vinegars
Spice products(only the products
containing hot pepper or hot pepper
powder)

1480
 Food additive Use Level Major
functional
class
Quercetin It should be used in accordance with Section Antioxidant
Ⅱ.2.1).
Quillaia Extract It should be used in accordance with Section Emulsifier
Ⅱ.2.1).
Red cabbage colorbelow.
should not be used in the Colour
food items listed
1. Natural food[meat, fishes and shellfishes,
fruits, vegetables, algae,their Legume
vegetables
processed food(peeled, cut, and etc.)] simply
and pulses, and
2.3. Teas
Coffee
4. Hot pepper powder, shredded hot pepper
5. Kimchi products
Gochujang
6. seasoned hot (hot
pepper pepper
soy paste soy paste),
Red Cabbage Color 7.8. Vinegars
Spice products(only the products
containing hot pepper or hot pepper
powder)

Red radish color should not be used in the Colour

food items listed below.
1. Natural food[meat, fishes and shellfishes,
fruits,
vegetables vegetables,
and pulses, and algae,their Legume
simply
processed food(peeled, cut, and etc.)]
2.3. Teas
Coffee
4.5. Hot pepper
Kimchi powder, shredded hot pepper
products
6. Gochujang(hot pepper soy paste),
Red Radish Color 7.8. seasoned
Vinegars hot pepper soy paste
Spice products(only the products
containing hot pepper or hot pepper
powder)

D-Ribose It should be used in accordance with Section Sweetener

Ⅱ.2.1).
Rice Bran Wax It should be used in accordance with Section Coating agent
Ⅱ.2.1).
1481
 Food additive Use Level Major
functional
class
Rosin It should be used in accordance with Section Gum base
Ⅱ.2.1).
Rutin should not be used in the food items Colour
listed below. Antioxidant
1. fruits,
Natural food [meat, fishes and shellfishes,
vegetables vegetables,
algae,their Legume
and pulses, and simply
processed food(peeled, cut, and etc.)]
2.3. Teas
Coffee
4.5. Hot pepper
Kimchi powder, shredded hot pepper
products
Rutin 6. Gochujang(hot pepper soy paste),
7. seasoned
Vinegars hot pepper soy paste

Safron color should not be used in the food Colour

items listed below.
1. Natural food[meat, fishes and shellfishes,
fruits,
vegetables vegetables, algae,their Legume
and pulses, and simply
processed food(peeled, cut, and etc.)]
2. Teas
3.4. Coffee
Hot pepper powder, shredded hot pepper
5.6. Kimchi products
Gochujang (hot pepper soy paste),
Saffron Color seasoned hot pepper soy paste
7. Vinegars

Sandalwood red should not be used in the Colour

food items listed
1. fruits,
Natural below. fishes and shellfishes,
food[meat,
vegetables, algae, Legume
vegetables and pulses, and their simply
processed food(peeled, cut, and etc.)]
2. Teas
Sandalwood Red 3.4. Coffee
Hot pepper powder, shredded hot pepper
5. Kimchi products
Gochujang
6. seasoned hot (hot
pepper pepper
soy paste soy paste),
7. Vinegars
8. containing
Spice products(only
hot pepper orthe hot products
pepper
powder)
1482
 Food additive Use Level Major
functional
class

Seed Malt It should be used in accordance with Section Epreparations

nzyme
Ⅱ.2.1).
Sepia color should not be used in the food Colour
items listed below.
1. Natural food[meat, fishes and shellfishes,
fruits,
vegetables vegetables,
and pulses, and algae,their Legume
simply
processed
2. Teas food(peeled, cut, and etc.)]
3. Coffee
4. Hot pepper powder, shredded hot pepper
Sepia Color 5.6. Kimchi products
Gochujang (hot pepper soy paste),
7. Vinegars pepper soy paste
seasoned hot

L-Serine It should be used in accordance with Section F o r t i f y i n g

Ⅱ.2.1). nutrient
It should be used in accordance with Section Antioxidant
Sesame Seed Oil Unsaponified Ⅱ.2.1).
Matter
Shea nut color should not be used in the Colour
food items listed
1. fruits,
Natural below. fishes and shellfishes,
food[meat,
vegetables, algae, Legume
vegetables
processed and pulses,cut, and
food(peeled, and their simply
etc.)]
2. Teas
3. Coffee
4.5. Hot pepper
Kimchi powder, shredded hot pepper
products
Shea Nut Color Gochujang
6. seasoned hot (hot
pepper pepper
soy paste soy paste),
7. Vinegars

Shellac It should be used in accordance with Section Coating agent

1483
 Food additive Use Level Major
functional
class
Ⅱ.2.1).
Silicon dioxide should be usedagent
only and for Aagent
nticaking
anticaking agent, antifoaming
filtering aid. However, If it is used for a Filter aid
filtering aid, it should be removed before Antifoaming
the final product is completed. If it is used agent
for a anticaking agent, it should be used
only forshould
the befollowing food items and the
usage
1. Processed milk cream(only powder
products
than 1%(iffor itvending
is machine)：
used with no more
magnesium
silicate or calcium silicate, the sum of
2. usage should bemilks(only
Powdered no more thanfor1%) vending
Silicon Dioxide machine)： no more than 1%(if it is used
with magnesium silicate or calcium
silicate,
more thanthe1%)sum of usage should be no
3. Edible
used with salts：magnesium
no more silicate
than 2%or (ifcalcium
it is
silicate, the sum of usage should be no
more than 2%)
4. Other foods: no more than 2%

Silicone Resin should be used only for a Antifoaming

Silicone Resin antifoaming agent. The usage should be no agent
more than 0.05g/kg of food items.
Smoke Flavors should be used for flavorings Flavouring
Smoke Flavours only. It should not be used for agent
Beverages(excluding teas and coffee).
Sodium Acetate It should be used in accordance with Section Aregulator
cidity
Ⅱ.2.1).
It should be used in accordance with Section Emulsifier
Thickener
Sodium Alginate Ⅱ.2.1). Stabilizer
Sodium
be used Aluminium
only for Phosphate,
the following Acidic
food should
items. Aregulator
cidity
The usage as aluminium should be Raising agent
1. breads,
Confectionery, mixes for confectionery,
mixes for breads, mixes for
Sodium Aluminium Phosphate, frying: no more than 0.1g/kg(if it is used
Acidic with
AluminiumAluminium
Ammonium Potassium
Sulfate, Sulfate,
Sodiumof
Aluminium Phosphate, Basic, the total
usage as aluminium should be no more
than 0.1g/kg)

1484
 Food additive Use Level Major
functional
class
Sodium
be used Aluminium
only for thePhosphate,
followingBasicfood should
items. Aregulator
cidity
The usage as aluminium should beConfectionery, Emulsifier
1. breads,
Confectionery, mixes for
mixes for breads, mixes for
frying: no more than Potassium
0.1g/kg(if it isSulfate,
used
with Aluminium
Sodium Aluminium Phosphate, Aluminium
Aluminium
Ammonium Sulfate, Sodium
Phosphate, Acidic, bethe nototalmoreof
Basic usage as aluminium should
than 0.1g/kg)

It should be used in accordance with Section Fnutrient

ortifying
Sodium L-Ascorbate Ⅱ.2.1). Antioxidant
Sodium Benzoate should be used only for Preservative
the following food items. The usage as
benzoic acid should be beverages(excluding
1. Fruit/vegetable
non-heated
0.6g/kg(In theproducts): no more than
case of concentrated fruit
juice, fruit/vegetable juice, if it is used
with sorbic acid, potassium sorbate, or
calcium sorbate,and thesorbicsumacidof should
benzoic acid usage beas
no more acid
benzoic than should
1.0 g/kg,beandno themore usagethanof
0.6g/kg)
2. Carbonated beverage: no more than
0.6g/kg(If
potassium itsorbateis usedor with calciumsorbicsorbate,
acid,
the sum of usage as benzoic acid and
sorbic
0.6g/kg, acidand should
the usagebe noas sorbicmore thanacid
Sodium Benzoate should be
3. products), no more than
Other beverages(excluding 0.5g/kg) powder
Ginseng/red ginseng
beverages:
used with noethyl
more ρ-hydroxybenzoate
than 0.6g/kg(if it oris
methyl ρ-hydroxybenzoate, the sum of
usage as benzoic acid and ρ
-hydroxybenzoic
than 0.6g/kg, and acid should
the usage be no asmoreρ
-hydroxybenzoic
than 0.1g/kg) acid should be no more
4. Korean-style soy sauce, brewed soy
sauce, acid-hydrolyzed
enzyme-hydrolyzed soy soy blended
sauce, sauce,
soy sauce: no more than 0.6g/kg(if it is
used
Methyl withρ-hydroxybenzoate,
ethyl ρ-hydroxybenzoate
the sum orof
usage as benzoic acid and ρ
-hydroxybenzoic acid should be no more
than 0.6g/kg, and
-hydroxybenzoic the usage
acid should be no asmoreρ
1485
 Food additive Use Level Major
functional
class
5. than
Aloe0.25g/kg)
whole leaves(including Aloe gel)
health functional food(However, in theof
case of using more than two kinds
health functional food materials, apply
proportion of thethealoe aloegel) health whole
leaves(including
functional food content): no more than
0.5g/kg(if itsorbate,
is usedor with sorbicsorbate,
acid,
potassium calcium
the sum of usage as benzoic acid and
sorbic
1.5g/kg, acid
and should
the be noof sorbic
usage more thanacid
should be no more than 1.0g/kg)
6. with
Jams: no more acid,
sorbic than 1.0g/kg(if
potassium it issorbate,
used
calcium sorbate, methyl ρ-hydroxybenzoate,
ethyl ρ-hydroxybenzoate, propionic acid,
sodium
the sum propionate,
of usage asor benzoic
calcium acid,
propionate,
sorbic
acid, p-hydroxybenzoic acid,
acid should be no more than 1.0 g/kg) and propionic
7. Mango chutney: no more than 0.25g/kg(if it
is used with Methyl ρ-hydroxybenzoate or
ethyl ρ-hydroxybenzoate, the sum of usage
as benzoic acid and ρ-hydroxybenzoic acid
8. Margarine: nomore
should be no morethanthan0.25g/kg).
1.0g/kg(if it is
used with sorbic acid, potassium sorbate
or calcium sorbate, the sum of usage as
sorbic
more thanacid and benzoicandacidtheshould
2.0g/kg, usagebe noas
benzoic
0.1g/kg) acid should be no more than
9. Pickled food, mayonnaise: no more than
1.0g/kg(if it is used with sorbic acid,
potassium sorbate or calcium sorbate, the
sum of usage as benzoic acid and sorbic
acid
the shouldof besorbic
usage no more
acid than 1.5g/kg,
should be no and
more
than 1.0g/kg)
It should be used in accordance with Section Aregulator cidity
Ⅱ.2.1). Raising
Sodium Bicarbonate F o r t i f agent
ying
nutrient

Sodium Bisulfite should be used only for Bleaching

the
amount following
of SodiumfoodBisulfite
items.as The
sulfur residual
dioxide agent
Preservative
should be less than Antioxidant
1. Dried gourd shavings(which is sliced and
Sodium Bisulfite dried
5.0g/kg of gourd removing its cores):
2.3. Molasses: 0.3g/kg
Starch syrup and other taffies: 0.20g/kg
4. Fruit wines: 0.350g/kg
5. Fruit/Vegetable Beverage: 0.030g/kg(However,
1486
Food additive Use Level Major
functional
class
only
whichfruit
are juice
drankandor concentrated
fruit more
juice
used by dilution
thanProcessed
5 times: 0.150g/kg)
6. 0.030g/kg(However, fruit/vegetable
in case of a product:
product
which is drank or used by dilution more
than 5 times: 0.150g/kg)
7. Dried fruits: 1.0g/kg(However, the
fruits(dried products only) which are Korean
edible
food ingredients in 「The
Pharmacopoeia」(announced Ministry of Food
and Drug Safety)
Traditional or 「Nationaland Standard
Medicinal(Herbal of
Botanical)
Materials」(announced Ministry of Food and
Drug
on theseSafety)standards
are appliedand to2.0g/kg
a sulfurin dioxide
dried
apricot, 0.20g/kg in dried coconut)
8. Dried vegetables, dried mushrooms:
0.50g/kg(However,
mushrooms(dried products the only)
vegetables
which andare
edible food ingredients in
Pharmacopoeia」(announced Ministry of Food「The Korean
and Drug Safety) or 「National Standard of
Traditional Medicinal(Herbal and Botanical)
Materials」(announced
Drug Safety) are applied Ministry of Fooddioxide
to a sulfur and
9. onDried
these standards)
agricultural/forest products(However,
the plant ingredients excluding No.7, 8(dried
products only) which are edible food ingredients
inMinistry
「Theof FoodKorean Pharmacopoeia」(announced
and Drug Safety) or 「National
Standard
Botanical) Materials」(announced Ministry andof
of Traditional Medicinal(Herbal
Food and Drug Safety) and Rehmannia glutinosa
var.
these
purpurea
standards)
are applied to a sulfur dioxide on
10. Konjac powder: 0.90g/kg
11.
12. Shrimps:
Frozen 0.10g/kg(peeled
fresh crabs: shrimp)
0.10g/kg(peeled
crab)
13.
14. Saccharidess:
Vinegars: 0.020g/kg
0.10g/kg
15. Dried potatoes: 0.50g/kg
16.
17. Sauce: 0.30g/kg 0.20g/kg
Spice preparation:
18. Other processed fishery
products(excluding
crab), processed shrimp,
peanut or frozen
nut fresh
products,
pickled foods products, breads, carbonated
beverages,
skin, dried confectionery,
fish/shellfish noddles,
fillet dumpling
products,
candies, cocoa products or chocolates, other
beverages, processed tuberous and corm
vegetable product(excluding
konjac powder), processed pulsedriedproduct,
potatoboiled
and
foods(ingredients for agricultural
Brandy, General Distilled Alcoholicfoods only),
Beverage,
other alcoholic beverages, parboiled rice, jams,
starch
Doenjangproducts,
(soybeanprocessed saccharide product,
paste) : 0.030g/kg
1487
 Food additive Use Level Major
functional
class
19. 100%
Processed cerealfor product(products
corn germ the manufacture ofof
corn oil only): 0.20g/kg
It should be used in accordance with Section A c i d i t y
Ⅱ.2.1). regulator
Raising
Sodium Carbonate F o r t i f agent
ying
nutrient
The usage of Sodium Carboxymethyl Starch Thickener
should
items.(If be it nois more
used thanwith2%Methylcellulose,
of the food Stabilizer
Sodium Carboxymethylcellulose or of Calcium
Sodium Carboxymethyl Starch Carboxymethylcellulose, the sum
should be no more than 2%. However, health usage
functional foods are not restricted.)
The
shouldusage
be noof Sodium Carboxymethyl
more than 2% of theStarch
food Thickener
Stabilizer
items.(If it is used with Methylcellulose,
Sodium Carboxymethylcellulose Sodium Carboxymethyl Starch or Calcium
Carboxymethylcellulose,
should be no more than the2%. sum of health
However, usage
functional foods are not restricted.)
It should be used in accordance with Section Emulsifier
Sodium Caseinate Ⅱ.2.1). Thickener
Stabilizer
Sodium Copper Chlorophyllin should be used Colour
only
shouldforbe.theThefollowing
usage asfood items.
copper Thebeusage
should
1. Kelp(anhydrous form): no more than
0.15g/kg
2. Preserved vegetables or fruits: no more
Sodium copper chlorophyllin than 0.1g/kg gum and candies: no more than
3. Chewing
0.05g/kg
4. Agar
more in canned green pea product: no
than 0.0004g/kg

Sodium
for the Dehydroacetate
following food should be used
items. The usageonlyas Preservative
dehydroacetic acid should be
Sodium Dehydroacetate 1. Cheeses,
than 0.5g/kg butters, margarine: no more

Sodium Diacetate
the following food should
items. beTheused
usageonlyshould
for Aregulator
cidity
Sodium Diacetate be1. Breads： no more than 0.4%

1488
 Food additive Use Level Major
functional
class
2. andEdible oils,
fats and oils(excluding
cheese, animal
fats
imitation vegetable
cream), processed meat products (excluding
meat extract product), egg products, and
candies： no more than 0.1%
3.4. Sauces： no more than 0.25% no more
Soups and confectioneries：
than 0.05%

Sodium Erythorbate Sodium Erythorbate should only be used for

antioxidant. Antioxidant

Sodium Ferric Pyrophosphate It should be used in accordance with Section Fortifying

Ⅱ.2.1). nutrient
Sodium ferrocyanide should be used only for Anticaking
edible salts(excluding
ferrocyanide solar besalt).noThemore
ion should usagethanas agent
0.010g/kg.(If it is used with potassium
ferrocyanides or calcium ferrocyanides, the sum
Sodium Ferrocyanide ofmoreusage as ferrocyanide
than 0.010g/kg for edibleionsalts.
should be no

Sodium Ferrous food

for the following Citrateitems.
should be used only Fnutrient
ortifying
1.2. Foods
Health for special food
functional medical purposes
Sodium Ferrous Citrate

Sodium Fluoride should be used only for the F o r t i f y i n g

following
1. Foods food
for item.
patient(only Balanced nutritional nutrient
Sodium Fluoride food for patient)
It should be used in accordance with Section A c i d i t y
Ⅱ.2.1). regulator
Emulsifier
Sodium Gluconate Fortifying
nutrient
Sodium Hydrosulfite should be used only for B l e a c h i n g
the
amountfollowing food Hydrosulfite
of Sodium items. Theas residual
sulfur agent
Preservative
dioxide should be less than Antioxidant
Sodium Hydrosulfite 1. dried
Dried gourd shavings(which is sliced and
5.0g/kg of gourd removing its cores):
2.3. Molasses:
Starch 0.3g/kg
syrup and other taffies: 0.20g/kg
4. Fruit wines: 0.350g/kg
1489
Food additive Use Level Major
functional
class
5. Fruit/Vegetable
only fruit juiceBeverage:
0.030g/kg(However,
and concentrated fruit juice
which are drank or used by dilution more
than 5 times: 0.150g/kg)
6. Processed fruit/vegetable product:
0.030g/kg(However, in caseby ofdilution
a product
which is drank or used more
than 5 times: 0.150g/kg)
7. fruits(dried
Dried products
fruits: only) 1.0g/kg(However, the
which are edible
food ingredients in 「The Korean
Pharmacopoeia」(announced
and Drug Safety) or MinistryStandard
「National of Foodof
Traditional Medicinal(Herbal and Botanical)
Materials」(announced
Drug Safety) are applied Ministry of Fooddioxide
to a sulfur and
on these standards and 2.0g/kg in dried
apricot, 0.20g/kg in dried coconut)
8. 0.50g/kg(However,
Dried vegetables,the driedvegetables mushrooms: and
mushrooms(dried products
edible food ingredients in 「The Koreanonly) which are
Pharmacopoeia」(announced Ministry of Food
and Drug Safety) or 「National Standard of
Traditional Medicinal(Herbal
Materials」(announced Ministryandof Food
Botanical)
and
Drug Safety)
on these standards)are applied to a sulfur dioxide
9. Dried agricultural/forest products(However,
the plant ingredients excluding No.7, 8(dried
products
in 「Theonly)Korean which arePharmacopoeia」(announced
edible food ingredients
Ministry
Standard ofofFoodTraditional
and Drug Medicinal(Herbal
Safety) or 「National and
Botanical) Materials」(announced Ministry of
Food and Drug Safety) and Rehmannia glutinosa
var.purpurea are applied to a sulfur dioxide on
these standards)
10.
11. Konjac
Shrimps: powder: 0.90g/kg shrimp)
0.10g/kg(peeled
12. Frozen fresh crabs: 0.10g/kg(peeled
crab)
13.
14. Saccharidess:
Vinegars: 0.10g/kg 0.020g/kg
15.
16. Dried
Sauce:potatoes:
0.30g/kg 0.50g/kg
17. Spice preparation: 0.20g/kg
18. products(excluding
Other processed
shrimp, frozen fishery
fresh
crab), processed peanut or nut products,
pickled
beverages, foodsconfectionery,
products, breads, carbonated
skin, dried fish/shellfish fillet dumpling
noddles, products,
candies, cocoa products or chocolates, other
beverages, processed tuberous
vegetable product(excluding dried and
potato corm
and
konjac powder), processed pulse product,
foods(ingredients for agricultural foods only), boiled
Brandy, General Distilled Alcoholic Beverage,
other
starch alcoholic
products,beverages,
processed parboiled
sacchariderice,product,
jams,
1490
 Food additive Use Level Major
functional
class
19. Doenjang
(soybean paste)product(products
: 0.030g/kg
Processed cereal of
100%
corn oilcorn
only):germ
for the manufacture of
0.20g/kg
Sodium Hydroxide should be neutralized oris Aregulator
cidity
removed before the final product
Sodium Hydroxide completed. manufacturing
solvent
Sodium Hydroxide Solution should be A c i d i t y
Sodium Hydroxide Solution neutralized or removed before the final regulator
product is completed. manufacturing
solvent
Sodium
sterilizationHypochlorite
of foods should
such asbe fruits
used and
for Sagent
terilizing
Sodium Hypochlorite vegetables,
removed before and etcthe andfinal it product
should beis
completed. However, It should not be used
for sesame.
Sodium Iron Chlorophyllin should not be used Colour
in1. theNatural
food items listed below.
food[meat, fishes and shellfishes,
fruits, vegetables,
vegetables and pulses, and algae,their Legume
simply
processed food(peeled, cut, and etc.)]
2. Teas
3.4. Coffee
Hot pepper powder, shredded hot pepper
Sodium Iron Chlorophyllin 5.6. Kimchi products
Gochujang (hot pepper soy paste),
seasoned hot pepper soy paste
7. Vinegars

It should be used in accordance with Section Aregulator

cidity
Ⅱ.2.1). Flavour
Sodium Lactate enhancer
Emulsifier
Fortifying
nutrient
Sodium Lauryl Sulfate should be used only Emulsifier
Sodium Lauryl Sulfate for1. Health
the following foodfoods,
functional item. capsules
It should be used in accordance with Section Acidity
Sodium DL-Malate Ⅱ.2.1). regulator
Raising agent
1491
 Food additive Use Level Major
functional
class
Sodium
for the Metabisulfite
following foodshould items. beTheusedresidual
only Bagent
leaching
amount of Sodium Metabisulfite as sulfur Preservative
dioxide should be less than Aregulator
cidity
1. Dried gourd shavings(which is sliced and
dried of gourd removing its cores):
5.0g/kg
2. Molasses: 0.3g/kg
3.4. Starch syrup 0.350g/kg
and other taffies: 0.20g/kg
Fruit wines:
5. Fruit/Vegetable Beverage: 0.030g/kg(However,
only
which fruit
are juice
drank andor concentrated
used by fruit more
dilution juice
than 5 times: 0.150g/kg)
6. 0.030g/kg(However,
Processed fruit/vegetablein case of a product:product
which is drank or used by dilution more
than 5 times: 0.150g/kg)
7. fruits(dried
Dried products
fruits: only)1.0g/kg(However,
which are edible the
food ingredients in Ministry
Pharmacopoeia」(announced 「The ofKorean Food
and Drug Safety) or 「National Standard of
Traditional Medicinal(Herbal and Botanical)
Materials」(announced
Drug Safety) are applied Ministry of Fooddioxide
to a sulfur and
on these0.20g/kg
apricot, standards
in driedandcoconut)
2.0g/kg in dried
8. Dried vegetables, dried mushrooms:
0.50g/kg(However, the vegetables and
Sodium Metabisulfite mushrooms(dried
edible food ingredients products inonly)「ThewhichKorean are
Pharmacopoeia」(announced
and Drug Safety) or 「National MinistryStandard
of Foodof
Traditional Medicinal(Herbal and Botanical)
Materials」(announced Ministry of Food and
Drug Safety) are applied to a sulfur dioxide
on these standards)
9. theDriedplant agricultural/forest products(However,
products only) which are edible foodNo.7,ingredients
ingredients excluding 8(dried
inMinistry
「Theof Food Korean
and Pharmacopoeia」(announced
Drug Safety) or 「National
Standard of Traditional Medicinal(Herbal and
Botanical)
Food and Drug Safety) and Rehmannia glutinosaof
Materials」(announced Ministry
var.
these
purpurea
standards)
are applied to a sulfur dioxide on
11. Konjac
10. Shrimps:powder: 0.90g/kg shrimp)
0.10g/kg(peeled
12. Frozen fresh crabs: 0.10g/kg(peeled
crab)
13. Saccharidess: 0.020g/kg
14. Vinegars: 0.10g/kg
15.
16. Dried
Sauce:potatoes:
0.30g/kg 0.50g/kg
17.
18. Spice preparation:
Other 0.20g/kg
processed fishery
products(excluding shrimp, frozen fresh
crab),
pickled processed
foods products,peanut breads,
or nutcarbonated
products,
1492
 Food additive Use Level Major
functional
class
beverages,
skin, driedconfectionery,
fish/shellfishnoddles,
fillet dumpling
products,
candies, cocoa products or chocolates, other
beverages,
vegetable product(excluding dried potato corm
processed tuberous and
and
konjac powder), processed pulse product, boiled
foods(ingredients for agricultural
Alcoholicfoods
only),
Brandy, General Distilled Beverage,
other alcoholic beverages, parboiled rice,product,
jams,
starch products, processed saccharide
Doenjang
19. 100%
(soybean paste) : 0.030g/kg
Processed cerealfor product(products of
corn germ
corn oil only): 0.20g/kg the manufacture of
It should be used in accordance with Section A c i d i t y
Sodium Metaphosphate Ⅱ.2.1). regulator
Raising agent
Sodium Metasilicate should be used only for Filter aid
edible fats and cheese,
oils, imitation oils(excluding animaloils)fatsasanda
vegetable
Sodium Metasilicate filter
the finalaidproduct
and itis should be removed before
completed.
Sodium methoxide should be used only for manufacturing
processed oils and fats. However, It should solvent
be degradedAlso, before
completed. methyl final
alcoholproducts
should beis
Sodium Methoxide removed, which is formatted as residues.

theSodium Molybdate
following should be used only for Fnutrient
food items. ortifying
Sodium Molybdate 1.2. Foods for special medical purposess
Health functional food

Sodium Nitrate should be used only for the Colour

following
nitrite ion food
shoulditems.
be The usage as residual ragent
ettention
1. Processed meat products(excluding meat Preservative
extract
food product), other
product(only the processed
product animal
contains
Sodium Nitrate other meat): 0.07g/kg
2. Cheese: 0.05g/kg

Sodium Nitrite should be used only for the Colour

following food items. The usage as residual rettention
nitrite ion shouldmeat
1. extract
Processed be products(excluding meat agent
Preservative
Sodium Nitrite product), other processed animal
food
other product(only
meat) : the product contains
0.07g/kg
2. Fish sausages: no more than 0.05g/kg
1493
 Food additive Use Level Major
functional
class
myeongnan-jeot
3. pollack
roe) and(salted-fermented
salmon Alaska
roe-jeot: no
more than 0.005g/kg

Sodium Oleate It should be used in accordance with Section Coating agent

Ⅱ.2.1).
Sodium Pantothenate It should be used in accordance with Section F o r t i f y i n g
Ⅱ.2.1). nutrient
It should be used in accordance with Section A c i d i t y
Ⅱ.2.1). regulator
Raising agent
Sodium Phosphate, Dibasic Fortifying
nutrient
It should be used in accordance with Section A c i d i t y
Ⅱ.2.1). regulator
Raising agent
Sodium Phosphate, Monobasic Fnutrient
ortifying

It should be used in accordance with Section A c i d i t y

Ⅱ.2.1). regulator
Raising agent
Sodium Phosphate, Tribasic Fnutrient
ortifying

The usage of Sodium Polyacrylate should be Thickener

Sodium Polyacrylate no more than 0.2% of the food items. Stabilizer
It should be used in accordance with Section Aregulator
cidity
Sodium Polyphosphate Ⅱ.2.1). Raising agent
Sodium Propionatefoodshould
the following items.be Theused usage
only foras Preservative
propionic
1. Breads:acidno should be 2.5g/kg
more than
2. Cheeses: no more than 3.0g/kg(if it is
used with sorbic
oras potassium sorbate,acid,thecalcium
sum of sorbate,
usage
propionic acid and sorbic acid should
Sodium Propionate 3. beJams:
no more than than
3.0g/kg)
with sorbic acid, 1.0g/kg(if
no more potassiumit issorbic,
used
calcium
benzoate, sorbic,calciumbenzoicbenzoate,
acid, potassium
sodium
benzoate, methyl p-hydroxybenzoate, or
ethyl
usage p-hydroxybenzoate,
as propionic acid, thesorbicsum acid,of
benzoic acid, and p-hydroxybenzoic acid
1494
 Food additive Use Level Major
functional
class
should be no more than 1.0g/kg).

It should be used in accordance with Section Aregulator

cidity
Sodium Pyrophosphate Ⅱ.2.1). Raising agent
Sodium Saccharin should be used only for Sweetener
the
be following food items. The usage should
1. Salted and fermented seafood products,
pickled food products, boiled foods: no
more thanproducts:
2. Kimchi 1.0g/kg no more than 0.2g/kg
3. ginseng/red
Beverages(excluding fermented teas)
ginseng beverages, beverages,
: no
more than 0.2g/kg (However, only a
product which is drank or used by dilution
4. more than 5 fish
Processed times:meat
no moreproducts:
than 1.0g/kg)
no more
than 0.1g/kg
5. Cereals: no more than 0.1g/kg
6. Puffed rice: no more than 0.5g/kg
7. Foods for special medical purposes: no
more thancontrol
8. Weight 0.2g/kgformulas: no more than
0.3g/kg
9. Health functional food: no more than
1.2g/kg
Sodium Saccharin 10.
11. Chewing
Jams: no gum:
more nothanmore than 1.2g/kg
0.2g/kg
12. Soy sauces and pastes: no more than
0.2g/kg
13.
14. Sauce:
Tomatonoketchup:
more than 0.16g/kg
no more than 0.16g/kg
15. Takju
0.08g/kg (turbid rice wine): no more than
16. Soju(Korean kistilled spirits): no more
than 0.08g/kg
17. Fruit wines: no more than 0.08g/kg
18. Other cocoa products, Chocolates: no
more
19. than 0.5g/kg
Breads: no morenothan
20. Confectioneries: more0.17g/kg
than 0.1g/kg
21. Candies:
22. 0.1g/kg no more than 0.5g/kg
Frozen confectionery products: no more
than
23. Ice creams: no more than 0.1g/kg
24. than
more Seasoned
0.1g/kgdried fish/shellfish fillet: no
25.
26. Rice cakes: noseasoning:
Composite more than 0.2g/kg
no more than
1495
 Food additive Use Level Major
functional
class
1.5g/kg
27. Mayonnaise: no more than 0.16g/kg
28. than
Processed fruit/vegetable product: no
more 0.2g/kg
29. Maize(only boiled or steamed): no more
than 0.2g/kg
30. Processed
more than 0.3g/kg Saccharide products: no
Sodium
followingSelenate
items should be used only for the
Fnutrient
ortifying
Sodium Selenate 1. Milk formulas, infant formulas, follow-up
formulas
2. Food for special medical purposes
3. Health functional food
Sodium Selenite should be used only for the Fortifying
following items nutrient
Sodium Selenite 1. Milk formulas, infant formulas, follow-up
formulas
2.3. Food
Healthforfunctional
special medical
food purposes
It should be used in accordance with Section A c i d i t y
Sodium Sesquicarbonate Ⅱ.2.1). regulator
Raising agent
Sodium Silicoaluminate should be used only A n t i c a k i n g
for the following food items. The usage as a agent
aluminium should be
1. Processed edible salt: no more than
1.0g/kg
2.3. Other beverages:
Vegetable cream: nono more
more than
than 0.4g/kg
0.6g/kg
4. Other processed cocoa product: no more
Sodium Silicoaluminate than 0.5g/kg
5. Composite seasoning: no more than
1.0g/kg

Sodium Stearoyl Lactylate should be used Emulsifier

only for theandfollowing
1.2. Breads mixes foodbread
for items.
Noodles, dumpling skin
3.4. Vegetable
Sauce cream
5. Cheeses
Sodium Stearoyl Lactylate 6.Confectionery(excluding
Hangwa (Korean
confectionery)) traditional

1496
 Food additive Use Level Major
functional
class
It should be used in accordance with Section Aregulator cidity
Sodium Sulfate Ⅱ.2.1). Fnutrient
ortifying
Sodium Sulfite shouldThe be residual
used onlyamount for theof Bagent
leaching
following food items.
Sodium Sulfite as sulfur dioxide should be Preservative
less than gourd shavings(which is sliced and Antioxidant
1. dried
Dried
of gourd removing its cores):
5.0g/kg
2.3. Molasses:
Starch syrup 0.3g/kg
and other taffies: 0.20g/kg
4.5. Fruit wines:
Fruit/Vegetable 0.350g/kg
only fruit juice Beverage: 0.030g/kg(However,
and concentrated fruit juice
which are drank
than 5 times: 0.150g/kg) or used by dilution more
6. Processed fruit/vegetable product:
0.030g/kg(However, in case of a product
which
than 5 istimes:
drank0.150g/kg)
or used by dilution more
7. fruits(dried
Dried productsfruits: only)1.0g/kg(However,
which are edible the
food ingredients in 「The Korean
Pharmacopoeia」(announced Ministry of Food
and Drug Safety)
Traditional or 「Nationaland Standard
Medicinal(Herbal Botanical)of
Materials」(announced
Drug Safety) are applied Ministry of Fooddioxide
to a sulfur and
on these standards and 2.0g/kg in dried
Sodium Sulfite apricot, 0.20g/kg in dried coconut)
8. 0.50g/kg(However,
Dried vegetables,the driedvegetables mushrooms: and
mushrooms(dried
edible food products
ingredients inonly)
「The which are
Korean
Pharmacopoeia」(announced Ministry of Food
and Drug Safety)
Traditional or 「NationalandStandard
Medicinal(Herbal Botanical)of
Materials」(announced Ministry of Food and
Drug Safety) are applied to a sulfur dioxide
9. onDriedthese standards)
agricultural/forest products(However,
the plant
products ingredients
only) which areexcluding
edible No.7,ingredients
food 8(dried
in 「The Korean Pharmacopoeia」(announced
Ministry
Standard ofofFoodTraditional
and Drug Medicinal(Herbal
Safety) or 「National
Botanical) Materials」(announced Ministry andof
Food and Drug Safety) and Rehmannia glutinosa
var.
thesepurpurea
standards)are applied to a sulfur dioxide on
11. Konjac
10. Shrimps:powder: 0.90g/kg shrimp)
0.10g/kg(peeled
12. Frozen fresh crabs: 0.10g/kg(peeled
crab)
13.
14. Saccharidess:
Vinegars: 0.10g/kg 0.020g/kg
15. Dried potatoes: 0.50g/kg
1497
 Food additive Use Level Major
functional
class
16.
17. Sauce:
0.30g/kg 0.20g/kg
Spice preparation:
18. products(excluding
Other processed fishery
shrimp, frozen fresh
crab), processed peanut or nut products,
pickled foodsconfectionery,
products, breads, carbonated
beverages,
skin, dried fish/shellfish fillet dumpling
noddles,
products,
candies, cocoa products or chocolates, other
beverages,
vegetable product(excluding dried potato corm
processed tuberous and
and
konjac powder),
foods(ingredients processed pulse
for agricultural product, boiled
Brandy, General Distilled Alcoholicfoods only),
Beverage,
other
starch alcoholic
products,beverages,
processed parboiled
sacchariderice,product,
jams,
Doenjang(soybean paste) : 0.030g/kg
19. Processed cereal product(products of
100%
corn oilcorn
only):germ for the manufacture of
0.20g/kg
Sorbic Acid should be used only for the Preservative
following food items. The usage as sorbic
acid should be
1. Cheeses:
used with no more than 3.0g/kg(if
propionic acid, sodium it is
propionate,
sum of usage or calcium
as propionic propionate,
acid and the
sorbic acid should be no more than
3.0g/kg)
2. seasoned
Processedmeats,meatmeat products(excluding
extract product),
other processed animal
the product contains other food product(only
meat),
processed fish meat products, salted and
fermented sea urchin, peanut better,
imitation
2.0g/kg(however,cheese:in Not the case moreof sausage than
using
sorbic collagen
acid casing,
shall be sum
not of use than
more level 2.0as
Sorbic Acid g/kg)
3. Collagen casing: no more than 0.1g/kg
4. products(However,
Salted and product fermented seafood
which account
for no more than
korean-style 8% , of saltDoenjang
Doenjang only),,
Gochujang
Cheonggukjang, mixed paste, Chunjang,
(However, non-dried
products only), dried fish
boiled foods(ingredients for agricultural and shellfish,
foods
than only), flour pastes,in sauce:
1.0g/kg(However, the nocasemoreof
sauce, if it is used with Methyl ρ
-Hydroxybenzoate or Ethyl ρ
-Hydroxybenzoate,
sorbic acid and the sum of usage as
ρ-Hydroxybenzoic acid
should
usage asbe noρ-Hydroxybenzoic
more than 1.0g/kg, acid andshouldthe
be no more than 0.2g/kg)
5. health
Aloe wholefunctionalleaves(including
food(However,Aloein gel) the
1498
Food additive Use Level Major
functional
class
case
health of functional
using morefoodthan materials,
two kinds theof
usage applies proportiontheof aloe the aloe
whole leaves(including gel)
health functional food content): no more
than 1.0g/kg(if it benzoate,
is used withpotassium benzoic
acid, sodium
benzoate or calcium benzoate, the sum
ofshouldusagebe asno sorbic acid and benzoic acid
usage as benzoic acid should be the
more than 1.5g/kg and
no
more
6. juice: than
Concentrated 0.5g/kg)
no more fruit than juice,
1.0g/kg(iffruit/vegetable
it is used
with
potassium benzoate or calcium benzoate,
benzoic acid, sodium benzoate,
the sum of usage as sorbic acid and
benzoic acid should be no more than
1.0g/kg
should beandno more the usage as benzoic aicd
than 0.6g/kg)
7. 0.5g/kg(If
Carbonatedit beverages:
is used withno benzoic more acid,
than
sodium benzoate, potassium benzoate or
calcium benzoate, the sum of usage as
sorbic
no moreacidthanand0.6 benzoic
g/kg, andacidtheshouldusage beas
sorbic
g/kg) acid should be no more than 0.5
8. Jams: no more than 1.0 g/kg(if it is used
with benzoic acid, sodium benzoate,
potassium
methyl benzoate, calcium benzoate,
p-hydroxybenzoate, ethyl
p-hydroxybenzoate,
p-hydroxybenzoate, propionic acid, propyl
sodium propionate, or calcium propionate,
the total usage of sorbic acid, benzoic
acid, p-hydroxybenzoic acid, and
propionic acid should be no more than
1.0 Dried
g/kg) fruits, tomato ketchup ,
9. Sugar-preserved food(excluding
sugar-preserved
0.5g/kg. dried foods): no more than
10. Pickled food, mayonnaise: 1.0g/kg(if it
isbenzoate,
used with benzoic benzoate
potassium acid, sodiumor
calcium benzoate, in that the total
usage
should ofbe benzoic acidthanand1.5sorbic acid
the usage as benzoic acid should be and
no more g/kg no
more
11. pasteurizedthan 1.0
Fermented g/kg)
beverages):beverages(excluding
no more than
0.05g/kg.
12. wine),Fruit Yakju Takjuclear
wine,(korean (koreanrice turbid
wine): rice
no
more than 0.2g/kg.
13. Margarine: no more than 1.0g/kg(if it is
used with benzoic acid, sodium benzoate,
potassium
the total usage benzoate,of orsorbiccalcium
acid benzoate,
and the
1499
 Food additive Use Level Major
functional
class
benzoic acid theshould
usagebe asno benzoic
more than
2.0g/kg and acid
should be no more than 1.0 g/kg)
14. syrup
Processed saccharide
and paste): Not product(only
more than
1.0g/kg
15. products):
Spice nopreparation(excluding
more than 1.0g/kg dried
16. products,
Health functional food(only liquid
excluding aloe whole
leaves(including Aloe gel) health
functional food): no more than 2.0g/kg
It should be used in accordance with Section Emulsifier
Sorbitan Esters of Fatty Acids Ⅱ.2.1). Gum base
D-Sorbitol It should be used in accordance with Section Sweetener
Ⅱ.2.1). Humectant
D-Sorbitol Solution It should be used in accordance with Section Sweetener
Humectant
Ⅱ.2.1).
Spice Oleoresins hould not be used in the Flavour
food items listed
1. Natural below. fishes and shellfishes,
food[meat, enhancer
fruits,
vegetables vegetables,
and pulses, and algae,their Legume
simply
processed food(peeled, cut, and etc.)]
２. Hot pepper powder, shredded hot
pepper
３. Kimchi products
Spice Oleoresins Gochujang
４. seasoned hot(hot
pepperpepper
soy pastesoy paste),
５. Vinegars

Spirulina color should not be used in the Colour

food items listed below.
1. fruits,
Natural food[meat,
vegetables, fishesalgae,
and shellfishes,
Legume
vegetables
processed food(peeled, cut, and etc.)] simply
and pulses, and their
2. Teas
3.4. Coffee
Spirulina Color 5. Hot pepper
Kimchi powder, shredded hot pepper
products
Gochujang
6. seasoned hot (hot
pepper pepper
soy paste soy paste),
7. Vinegars

1500
 Food additive Use Level Major
functional
class
Stearic Acid It should be used in accordance with Section manufacturing
Ⅱ.2.1). solvent
Steviol
food itemsglycoside
should not be used in the Sweetener
listed below.
1.2. Sugars
3. Glucose
Starch syrup
Steviol glycoside 4. Honeys

It should be used in accordance with Section A c i d i t y

Succinic Acid Ⅱ.2.1). regulator
Flavour
enhancer
Sucralose
following food should
items.beTheusedusage only
shouldforbe the Sweetener
1.2. Confectioneries:
Chewing gum: nono more more than
than 2.6g/kg
1.8g/kg
3. Jams: no more than 0.4g/kg
4. Beverages, processed milk, fermented
milks: no more
the product that isthanto be0.40g/kg(However,
diluted before
5. drinking
Sugar is based
substitute on the diluted
product: no form)
more than
12g/kg
6.7. Cereals:
Foods no for more
specialthanmedical
1.0g/kg purposes: no
Sucralose more than 0.4g/kg
8. Weight control formulas: no more than
0.32g/kg
9. Other foods: no more than 0.58g/kg
10. Health functional food: no more than
1.25g/kg

Sucrose Esters of Fatty Acids ItⅡ.2.1).

should be used in accordance with Section Emulsifier
Gum base
Sulfur
following Dioxide
food should Thebe residual
items. used onlyamount
for theof Bagent
leaching
Sulfur Dioxide as sulfur dioxide should be Preservative
Sulfur Dioxide less than gourd shavings(which is sliced and
1. dried
Dried Antioxidant
of gourd removing its cores):
5.0g/kg
2.3. Molasses: 0.3g/kg
Starch syrup and other taffies: 0.20g/kg
1501
Food additive Use Level Major
functional
class
4.5. Fruit wines: 0.350g/kg
Fruit/Vegetable Beverage: 0.030g/kg(However,
only fruit juice andor concentrated fruit more
juice
which are drank used by dilution
than 5 times: 0.150g/kg)
6. 0.030g/kg(However,
Processed fruit/vegetable product:
which is drank or used by dilutionproduct
in case of a
more
than 5 times: 0.150g/kg)
7. fruits(dried
Dried productsfruits: only)
1.0g/kg(However, the
which are edible
food ingredients in Ministry
Pharmacopoeia」(announced 「The ofKorean
and Drug Safety) or 「National StandardFoodof
Traditional Medicinal(Herbal
Materials」(announced Ministry andof FoodBotanical)
and
Drug Safety) are applied to a sulfur dioxide
on these standards and 2.0g/kg in dried
8. apricot,
Dried0.20g/kg in dried coconut)
vegetables, dried mushrooms:
0.50g/kg(However,
mushrooms(dried products only) the vegetables
which and are
edible food ingredients in 「The Korean
Pharmacopoeia」(announced Ministry of Food
and Drug Safety)
Traditional or 「NationalandStandard
Medicinal(Herbal Botanical)of
Materials」(announced
Drug Safety) are applied Ministry of Fooddioxide
to a sulfur and
on these standards)
9. Dried agricultural/forest products(However,
the plantonly)ingredients
products which areexcluding
edible foodNo.7,ingredients
8(dried
inMinistry
「Theof Food Korean Pharmacopoeia」(announced
and Drug Safety) or 「National
Standard of Traditional Medicinal(Herbal and
Botanical) Materials」(announced Ministry of
Food and DrugareSafety) and Rehmannia glutinosa
var.
these
purpurea
standards)
applied to a sulfur dioxide on
10. Konjac
11. Shrimps:powder: 0.90g/kg shrimp)
0.10g/kg(peeled
12. Frozen fresh crabs: 0.10g/kg(peeled
crab)
13. Saccharidess: 0.020g/kg
14.
15. Vinegars:
Dried potatoes:0.10g/kg
0.50g/kg
16. Sauce: 0.30g/kg
17.
18. Spice preparation: 0.20g/kg
products(excluding processed
Other shrimp, frozen fishery fresh
crab),
pickled processed peanut or nut products,
beverages,foodsconfectionery,
products, breads,
noddles,carbonated
dumpling
skin, dried fish/shellfish fillet products,
candies,
beverages,cocoa productstuberous
processed or chocolates,
and othercorm
vegetable product(excluding dried potato
konjac powder), processed pulse product, boiled and
foods(ingredients for agricultural foods only),
Brandy, Generalbeverages,
other alcoholic Distilled parboiled
Alcoholic rice,
Beverage,
jams,
1502
 Food additive Use Level Major
functional
class
starch products,
(soybeanprocessed
saccharide product,
Doenjang
19. 100% Processed
paste) : 0.030g/kg
cerealfor product(products of
corn germ the manufacture of
corn oil only): 0.20g/kg
Sulfuric
Sulfuric Acid removed Acid before should
the befinal neutralized
product oris manufacturing
solvent
completed.
Tagetes Extract should not be used in the Colour
food items listed below.
1. Natural food[meat, fishes and shellfishes,
fruits, vegetables, algae, Legume
vegetables and pulses,cut, and
processed food(peeled, their simply
and etc.)]
2.3. Teas
Coffee
4. Hot pepper powder, shredded hot pepper
Tagetes Extract 5. Kimchi products
Gochujang
6. seasoned hot (hot
pepper pepper
soy paste soy paste),
7. Vinegars

Talc should be used only for manufacturing Filter aid

food, chewing deodorization,
decolorization, gum, filtering aid(filtering,
refining etc)and Gum base
Surface-finis
surface-finishing agent for tablets.
if it is used for filtering aid, it should be However, hing agent
removed before the final product is
completed.
1. than
The sum of residues
0.5%(if it is should
used bewithno other
more
Talc insoluble mineral substances such as
Diatomaceous
Acid Clay, Perlite,Earth,ActiveKaolin,
CarbonBentonite,
etc, the
sum
2. the of residues should be 0.5%)
than 5.0%usage of Chewing gum: no more

Tamarind Color should not be used in the Colour

food items listed
1. Natural below. fishes and shellfishes,
food[meat,
fruits,
vegetables vegetables, algae,their Legume
and pulses, and simply
processed food(peeled, cut, and etc.)]
Tamarind Color 2.3. Teas
4. Coffee
Hot pepper powder, shredded hot pepper
5.6. Kimchi products
Gochujang
seasoned hot (hot
pepper pepper
soy paste soy paste),
7. Vinegars
1503
 Food additive Use Level Major
functional
class

Tamarind Gum It should be used in accordance with Section Thickener

Ⅱ.2.1). Stabilizer
Tannase It should be used in accordance with Section Enzyme
Ⅱ.2.1). preparations
Tannic Acid It should be used in accordance with Section Fenhancer
lavour
Ⅱ.2.1).
Tara Gum It should be used in accordance with Section Thickener
Stabilizer
Ⅱ.2.1).
DL-Tartaric Acid It should be used in accordance with Section Acidity
Ⅱ.2.1). regulator
L-Tartaric Acid It should be used in accordance with Section Aregulator
cidity
Ⅱ.2.1).
Taurine It should be used in accordance with Section Fortifying
Ⅱ.2.1). nutrient
Tea Catechin It should be used in accordance with Section Antioxidant
Ⅱ.2.1).
Tea Extract It should be used in accordance with Section Antioxidant
Ⅱ.2.1).
Thaumatin It should be used in accordance with Section Sweetener
Ⅱ.2.1).
L-Theanine It should be used in accordance with Section Fortifying
Ⅱ.2.1). nutrient
DL-Threonine It should be used in accordance with Section Fnutrient
ortifying
Ⅱ.2.1).
L-Threonine It should be used in accordance with Section Fnutrient
ortifying
Ⅱ.2.1).
Titanium dioxide should not be used in the Colour
food items listed
1. fruits,
Natural below. fishes and shellfishes,
food[meat,
vegetables, algae, Legume
vegetables and pulses, and their simply
processed
2. Loaf breadfood(peeled,
and spongecut,cakeand etc.)]
Titanium Dioxide 3. Cocoa mass, cocoa butter and cocoa
powder
4. Jams
5.6. MilkProcessed
products meat products(excluding
sausages, meat extract products)
7. Egg product
1504
 Food additive Use Level Major
functional
class
8. sausage)
Processed fish meat products(excluding
fish
9.10.Soybean
Edible
curds,
fats
Muk(starch
and
jellies) imitation
oils(excluding
cheese, vegetable cream, and other
edible fat and oil products)
11. Noodles
12. Teas
13. CoffeeFruit/vegetable beverages(excluding
14.
fruit/vegetable drink)
15.
16. Soy milks beverages
Fermented
17. Ginseng/red ginseng beverages
18.
19. Soy sauces and pastes
Vinegars
20. Tomato ketchup
21. Curries
22. Hot pepper powder, shredded hot
pepper
23.
24. Natural
Compositespiceseasoning
25. Mayonnaise
26. Kimchi products
27.
28. Salted
Pickledand fermented
food seafood products
products(excluding
Hermetic
or sterilizationsealing, heat-pasteurization
pickled food products)
29. Pickled radish
30. Boiled foods
31.
32. Processed peanut or nut products
Seasoned laver
33.
34. Honeys
Ready-to-cook food
35. Retort foods
36. Foods for special dietary uses
37. Health functional food(excluding tablet’s
coating or capsule)
It should be used in accordance with Section Fnutrient
ortifying
dl-α-Tocopherol Acetate Ⅱ.2.1). Antioxidant
It should be used in accordance with Section Fortifying
d-α-Tocopherol Concentrate Ⅱ.2.1). nutrient
Antioxidant
d-Tocopherol Concentrate, ItⅡ.2.1).
should be used in accordance with Section Fortifying
nutrient
Mixed Antioxidant
It should be used in accordance with Section Fnutrient
ortifying
d-a-Tocopheryl Acetate Ⅱ.2.1). Antioxidant
It should be used in accordance with Section Fnutrient
ortifying
d-a-Tocopheryl Acid Succinate Ⅱ.2.1). Antioxidant
Tomato Color Tomato Color should not be used in the Colour
food items listed below.
1505
 Food additive Use Level Major
functional
class
1. fruits,
Natural food[meat,
vegetables, fishesalgae,
and shellfishes,
Legume
vegetables and pulses, and their simply
processed food(peeled, cut, and etc.)]
2. Teas
3.4. Coffee
5. Hot
pepper powder, shredded hot pepper
Kimchi
6. seasoned
products
Gochujang (hot pepper soy paste),
hot pepper soy paste
7. Vinegars

Tragacanth Gum It should be used in accordance with Section Thickener

Ⅱ.2.1). Stabilizer
Transglucosidase It should be used in accordance with Section E n z y m e
Ⅱ.2.1). preparations
Transglutaminase It should be used in accordance with Section Epreparations
nzyme
Ⅱ.2.1).
Triacetin It should be used in accordance with Section Emulsifier
Gum base
Ⅱ.2.1).
It should be used in accordance with Section A c i d i t y
Trisodium Citrate Ⅱ.2.1). regulator
Fortifying
nutrient
Trypsin It should be used in accordance with Section E n z y m e
Ⅱ.2.1). preparations
DL-Tryptophan It should be used in accordance with Section F o r t i f y i n g
Ⅱ.2.1). nutrient
L-Tryptophan It should be used in accordance with Section F o r t i f y i n g
Ⅱ.2.1). nutrient
L-Tyrosine It should be used in accordance with Section F o r t i f y i n g
Ⅱ.2.1). nutrient
γ-Undecalactone
r-Undecalactone should be used for F l a v o u r i n g
flavorings only. agent
Urease It should be used in accordance with Section E n z y m e
Ⅱ.2.1). preparations
L-Valine It should be used in accordance with Section Fnutrient
ortifying
Ⅱ.2.1).
Vanillin Vanillin should be used for flavorings only. Fagent
lavouring
VitaminAinoil It should be used in accordance with Section F o r t i f y i n g
Ⅱ.2.1). nutrient
1506
 Food additive Use Level Major
functional
class
Vitamin B12 It should be used in accordance with Section Fnutrient
ortifying
Ⅱ.2.1).
Vitamin B1 Dilaurylsulfate ItⅡ.2.1).
should be used in accordance with Section Fnutrient
ortifying
It should be used in accordance with Section Fortifying
Vitamin B1 Hydrochloride Ⅱ.2.1). nutrient
It should be used in accordance with Section Fortifying
Vitamin B1 Mononitrate Ⅱ.2.1). nutrient
It should be used in accordance with Section Fnutrient
ortifying
Vitamin B1
Naphthalene-1.5-disulfonate Ⅱ.2.1).
Vitamin B1 Rhodanate It should be used in accordance with Section Fortifying
Ⅱ.2.1). nutrient
Vitamin B2 It should be used in accordance with Section Fortifying
Ⅱ.2.1). nutrient
Vitamin B2 Phosphate Sodium ItⅡ.2.1).
should be used in accordance with Section Fortifying
nutrient
It should be used in accordance with Section Fnutrient
ortifying
Vitamin B6 Hydrochloride Ⅱ.2.1).
It should be used in accordance with Section Antioxidant
Vitamin C Ⅱ.2.1). Fnutrient
ortifying
Vitamin D2 It should be used in accordance with Section Fnutrient
ortifying
Ⅱ.2.1).
Vitamin D3 It should be used in accordance with Section Fnutrient
ortifying
Ⅱ.2.1).
Vitamin E It should be used in accordance with Section Fnutrient
ortifying
Ⅱ.2.1).
Vitamin
following K1 food should be usage
items. The used should
only forbe the Fnutrient
ortifying
1. formulas,
Milk formulas,Baby Infant
foods formulas,
for follow-up
infants/young
children (Entry into force: 2020.1.1)
Vitamin K1 2. Food for special medical purposes
3. Health functional food

Xanthan Gum ItⅡ.2.1).

should be used in accordance with Section Thickener
Stabilizer
Xylanase It should be used in accordance with Section Epreparations
nzyme
Ⅱ.2.1).
1507
 Food additive Use Level Major
functional
class
Xylitol It should be used in accordance with Section Sweetener
Ⅱ.2.1). Humectant
D-Xylose It should be used in accordance with Section Sweetener
Ⅱ.2.1).
Yeast It should be used in accordance with Section Raising agent
Ⅱ.2.1).
Yeast Extract It should be used in accordance with Section Fenhancer
lavour
Ⅱ.2.1).
Yucca Extract It should be used in accordance with Section Emulsifier
Ⅱ.2.1).
Zinc Gluconate should be used only for the Fortifying
following food items. nutrient
1. Beverages(excluding Teas and Coffee)
2.3. Cereals
Milk formulas, Infant formulas, follow-up
formulas, Babyintofoods
children(Entry for infants/young
force:2020.1.1)
Zinc Gluconate 4. Food for special medicinal purposes
5. Weight control formulas
6. Health functional food

Zinc Oxide It should be used in accordance with Section Fnutrient

ortifying
Ⅱ.2.1).
Zinc
followingSulfate
food should
items. be used only for the Fnutrient
ortifying
1.2. Cereals,
Milk beer, otherInfant
formulas, alcoholic beverages
formulas, follow-up manufacturing
solvent
formulas, Baby foods for infants/young
children(Entry
3. Food into force:
for special medical2020.1.1)
purposes
Zinc Sulfate 4. Weight control formulas
5. Health functional food

Natural Flavoring Substances Natural flavoring substances should be used

for flavorings only.
Flavouring
agent
Synthetic flavoring should be used for Flavouring
Synthetic Flavoring Substances flavorings only. agent
Itwhich
shouldis beusedusedfor only to clean thefoodboileror
manufacturing Boiler
AdditivesWater
Boiler Water
Additives processing steam.

1508
1509
B. Mixed Preparations
Unless otherwise specified, when there is use level on ingredients of mix preparations it
should be properly used by its use level(it corresponds to use level of appropriate
additives)
C. Milk formulas, Infant formulas, Follow-up formulas, Baby foods for infants/young
children(Entry into force:2020.1.1), Formulas for infants/young children with milk protein
allergy, and Special formulas for infants/young children
Whereas specified food categories are not mentioned on the use level table of section Ⅱ.5.
for each food additive, Milk formulas, Infant formulas, Follow-up formulas, Baby foods for
infants/young children(Entry into force:2020.1.1), Formulas for infants/young children with
milk protein allergy, and Special formulas for infants/young children (hereinafter referred to
as “milk formulas etc.”) should only be used for the following food additives.
(1) Food additives, which are used to nutrients supplement in Milk formula etc. refer to the
followings. However, Sodium Selenite and Sodium Selenate should only be used for Milk
formulas, Infant formulas, Follow-up formulas, Formulas for infants/young children with
milk protein allergy, and Special formulas for infants/young children. Sodium Molybdate,
Ammonium Molybdate and Chromic Chloride should only be used for Formulas for
infants/young children with milk protein allergy and Special formulas for infants/young
children.
Nutrient List of Food Additives
Calcium Citrate
Calcium Gluconate
Calcium Glycerophosphate
Calcium Oxide
Calcium Chloride
Calcium
(Ca) Calcium Lactate
Calcium Phosphate, Tribasic*
Calcium Phosphate, Dibasic*
Calcium Phosphate, Monobasic*
Calcium Carbonate
Calcium Sulfate
Ferric Citrate
Ferric Ammonium Citrate
Iron Ferrous Gluconate
(Fe) Ferric Phosphate*
Iron, Electrolytic
Ferrous Lactate
1510
Nutrient List of Food Additives
Ferrous Fumarate
Ferric Pyrophosphate*
Sodium Ferric Pyrophosphate*
Heme Iron
Iron, Reduced
Ferrous Sulfate
Magnesium Oxide
Magnesium Hydroxide
Magnesium Chloride
Magnesium Magnesium Phosphate, Tribasic*
(Mg)
Magnesium Phosphate, Dibasic*
Magnesium Carbonate
Magnesium Sulfate
Trisodium Citrate
Sodium Gluconate
Sodium Lactate
Sodium Phosphate, Tribasic*
Sodium Sodium Phosphate, Dibasic*
(Na) Sodium Phosphate, Monobasic*
Sodium L-Tartrate
Sodium Carbonate
Sodium Bicarbonate
Sodium Sulfate
Potassium Citrate
Potassium Gluconate
Potassium Glycerophosphate*
Potassium
(K) Potassium Chloride
Potassium Phosphate, Dibasic*
Potassium Phosphate, Monobasic*
Potassium Bicarbonate
Copper Copper Gluconate
(Cu) Cupric Sulfate
Iodine Potassium Iodide
(I) Potassium Iodate
Zinc Zinc Gluconate
(Zn)
1511
 Nutrient List of Food Additives
Zinc Oxide
Zinc Sulfate
Manganese Citrate
Manganese Manganese Gluconate
(Mn) Manganese Chloride
Manganese Sulfate
Selenium Sodium Selenate
(Se) Sodium Selenite
Chrome
(Cr) Chromic Chloride
Molybdenum Sodium Molybdate
(Mb) Ammonium Molybdate
Dry Formed Vitamin A
Vitamin A Vitamin A in Oil
β-Carotene

Vitamin D Calciferol
Cholecalciferol
dl-α-Tocopherol
Vitamin E d-α-Tocopheryl Acetate
dl-α-Tocopheryl Acetate
L-Ascorbic Acid
Vitamin C Sodium L-Ascorbate
Calcium L-Ascorbate
L-Ascorbyl Palmitate
Vitamin B1 Thiamine Hydrochloride
Thiamine Mononitrate
Vitamin B2 Riboflavin
Riboflavin 5'-Phosphate Sodium
Niacin Nicotinic Acid
Nicotinamide
Vitamin B6 Pyridoxine Hydrochloride
Folic acid Folic Acid
Pantothenic
acid Calcium Pantothenate
Vitamin B12 Cyanocobalamin
Vitamin K1 Phylloquinone

1512
 Nutrient List of Food Additives
Biotin Biotin
L-Leucine
L-Methionine
L-Valine
L-Cystine
L-Arginine
Amino acid L-Isoleucine
L-Threonine
L-Tryptophan
L-Tyrosine
L-Phenylalanine
L-Histidine
Disodium 5'-Guanylate
Disodium 5'-Ribonucleotide
Calcium 5'-Ribonucleotide
Nucleotide 5'-Cytidylic Acid
Disodium 5'-Cytidylate
5'-Adenylic Acid
Disodium 5'-Uridylate
Disodium 5'-Inosinate
Choline Chloride
Inositol
Others Phosphoric Acid*
Choline Bitartrate
L-Carnitine
Taurine
* It can also be used as a material food additive of Nutrient Phosphorus(P)

(2) Followings are food additives that are allowed to use in Milk formulas, etc. for purposes
other than nutrient fortifying, and use levels are as shown.

1513
 UsetoLevel
(When
eaten after dilution,products
Food Additives it comes that are
it is applied as
diluted products.)
No more than 2 g/kg
Guar Gum (But no more than 10 g/kg Children)
for Cereal
Formulas for Infants/Young
Citric Acid It should be used as in accordance
with Section Ⅱ.2.1).
Trisodium Citrate It should be used as in accordance
with Section Ⅱ.2.1).
Potassium Citrate It should be used as in accordance
with Section Ⅱ.2.1).
Glucoamylase It should be used as in accordance
with Section Ⅱ.2.1).
Glycerin Esters of Fatty Acids No more than 9 g/kg
Lactoferrin Concentrates It should be used as in accordance
with Section Ⅱ.2.1).
Lecithin No
(But more
no than than
more 5 g/kg15 g/kg for Cereal
Formulas for Infants/Young Children)
Locust Bean Gum No
(Butmore than than
no more 2 g/kg10 g/kg for Cereal
Formulas for Infants/Young Children)
Lysozyme It should be used as in accordance
with Section Ⅱ.2.1).
Maltogenic Amylase It should be used as in accordance
with Section Ⅱ.2.1).
Mucin It should be used as in accordance
with Section Ⅱ.2.1).
Vanilla It should be used as in accordance
(Naturalextract
Flavoring Substances) with Section Ⅱ.2.1).
No more than 0.05 g/kg
Vanillin (But
Other noFoods
moreforthanInfants/Young
0.07 g/kg for
Children)
No more than 5 g/kg
(But no more
Formulas for than 60 g/kg Children,
Infants/Young for Cereal
Food Starch Modified Formulas for Infants/Young Children
with milk protein allergy, and Other
Foods for Infants/Young Children)
Potassium Hydroxide
removed before should
the final be is
product
Potassium Hydroxide
completed.
Calcium Hydroxide It should be used as in accordance
with Section Ⅱ.2.1).
Arabic Gum No more than 2 g/kg
1514
 UsetoLevel
(When
eaten after dilution,products
Food Additives it comes that are
it is applied as
diluted products.)
(But no more than 10 g/kg for Cereal
Formulas for Infants/Young Children)
-Amylase, Nonbacterial It should be used as in accordance
α
with Section Ⅱ.2.1).
-Amylase, Bacterial It should be used as in accordance
α
with Section Ⅱ.2.1).
Calcium L-Ascorbate No more than 0.2 g/kg
No more than than
0.05 g/kg
L-Ascorbyl Palmitate (But
Cereal Formulas for 0.2
no more g/kg for
Infants/Young
Children and Other
Infants/Young Foods for
Children)
Ethyl Vanillin No
(Butmore than than
no more 0.05g/kg
0.07 g/kg for Other
Foods for Infants/Young Children)
Magnesium Chloride It should be used as in accordance
with Section Ⅱ.2.1).
Lactic Acid No more than 2 g/kg
Potassium Phosphate, Dibasic It should be used as in accordance
with Section Ⅱ.2.1).
Gelatin It should be used as in accordance
with Section Ⅱ.2.1).
Carrageenan No more than 1 g/kg
Casein It should be used as in accordance
with Section Ⅱ.2.1).
Sodium Caseinate It should be used as in accordance
with Section Ⅱ.2.1).
Sodium Carbonate It should be used as in accordance
with Section Ⅱ.2.1).
Sodium Bicarbonate It should be used as in accordance
with Section Ⅱ.2.1).
Potassium Bicarbonate It should be used as in accordance
with Section Ⅱ.2.1).
Potassium Carbonate, Anhydrous It should be used as in accordance
with Section Ⅱ.2.1).
d-Tocopherol concentrate, Mixed No more than 0.03 g/kg
Pectin No more than 10 g/kg
Plant Protease It should be used as in accordance
with Section Ⅱ.2.1).

1515
III. Standards and Specification for Food Contact Surface Sanitizing Solutions
1. Standards for Manufacturing and Preparation
1) General active and inert ingredient for use in food-contact surface sanitizing solutions
The active and inert ingredients for use in food-contact surface sanitizing solutions are as
follows. However, food additive(excluding product that should be removed or neutralized before
the final food product is completed) or food raw materials authorized for use in Republic of
Korea can be used.
No. Ingredients CAS No.

1 Hydrogen peroxide 7722-84-1

2 Peroxyoctanoic acid 33734-57-5
3 Peroxyacetic acid 79-21-0
4 Citric acid 77-92-9
5 D-Gluconic acid, monosodium salt 527-07-1
6 Neodecanoic acid 26896-20-8
7 Nonanoic acid 112-05-0
8 Decanoic acid 334-48-5
9 Benzenesulfonic acid, 27176-87-0
dodecyl-

10 Benzenesulfonic acid, 25155-30-0

dodecyl-, sodium salt

11 Sodium dimethylbenzene 1300-72-7

sulfonate(Xylenesulfonic acid, sodium salt)
12 1-Octanamine, N,N-dimethyl- 7378-99-6
Phenol, 4-(1,1-dimethyl-
13 80-46-6
propyl)-
14 Dioctyl sodium sulfosuccinate 577-11-7
15 Methylene blue 61-73-4
16 2,4-Pentanediol, 2-methyl- 107-41-5
Sulfuric acid monododecyl
17 ester, sodium salt 151-21-3
(sodium lauryl sulfate)
18 Ethanol, 2-butoxy- 111-76-2
19 Boric acid, sodium salt 7775-19-1
20 Potassium bromide 7758-02-3
21 Magnesium oxide 1309-48-4
Trichloroisocyanuric acid
22 (1,3,5-Triazine-2,4,6(1H,3H,5H)-trione,1,3,5-trichlor 87-90-1
o)
23 Sodium trichloroisocyanurate 29680-41-9
24 Potassium trichloroisocyanurate -

Butanedioic acid, sulfo-,

25 1,4-dioctyl ester, sodium salt 1639-66-3

26 9-Octadecenoic acid(9Z)-, 68988-76-1

1516
No. Ingredients CAS No.
sulfonated
9-Octadecenoic acid(9Z)-,
27 68443-05-0
sulfonated, sodium salts
Fatty acids, tall-oil,
28 68309-27-3
sulfonated, sodium salts
1-Octanesulfonic acid,
29 113652-56-5
2-sulfino-
Ethanesulfonic acid, 2-
30 132-43-4
[cyclohexyl(1-oxohexadecyl) amino]-, sodium salt
31 Chlorite 14998-27-7
α-alkyl-ω-hydroxypoly (oxypropylene) and/or poly
32* (oxyethylene) polymers where the alkyl chain -
contains a minimum of six carbons

Sodium-α-alkyl(C12-C15)-ω-hydroxypoly(oxyethylene
33 ) -
sulfate with the poly (oxyethylene) content
averaging one mole
34 Ethanol 64-17-5
35 Ethanol, 2-(2-ethoxyethoxy)- 111-90-0
Ethylenediaminetetraacetic
36 64-02-08
acid(EDTA), tetrasodium salt
Ethylenediaminetetraacetic acid(EDTA), disodium
37 139-33-3
salt
38 Chlorate 14866-68-3
39 N-Decyl-N,N-dimethyl-1-decanaminium chloride 7173-51-5
Di-n-alkyl(C8-C10) dimethyl ammonium chloride,
40 average molecular weight -
(in amu), 332 to 361
Chloromelamine(1,3,5-
41 Triazine, N,N',N"-trichloro -2,4,6-triamino-) 7673-09-8

n-Alkyl(C12-C14) dimethyl ethylbenzyl ammonium

42 chloride, average molecular weight(in amu), 377 to -
384
n-Alkyl (C12-C18) dimethyl ethylbenzyl ammonium
43
chloride, average molecular weight(in amu), 384
44 Alkyl(C12-C18) benzyldimethyl chlorides -
45 Ammonium chloride 12125-02-9
Oxirane, methyl-, polymer
46* with oxirane, minimum 9003-11-6
molecular weight (in amu), 1,900
Oxirane, methyl-, polymer with oxirane, block,
47 average molecular weight (in amu), 1,900 106392-12-5

Oxirane, methyl-, polymer with oxirane, block,

48 minimum average molecular weight -
(in amu), 2,000

Oxirane, methyl-, polymer with oxirane, block, 27

to 31 moles of polyoxypropylene, average
49 -
molecular weight
(in amu), 2,000

1517
No. Ingredients CAS No.
50 Oxychloro species -
Octadecanoic acid, calcium
51 1592-23-0
salt(Calcium stearate)
52 1,2-Octanedisulfonic acid 113669-58-2
53 Octanoic acid 124-07-2
54 1-Octanesulfonic acid 3944-72-7
1-Octanesulfonic acid,
55 5324-84-5
sodium salt
56 Butanedioic acid, octenyl- 28805-58-5
57 Iodine 7553-56-2
58 Sodium iodide 7681-82-5
59 Potassium iodide 7681-11-0
60 Hydriodic acid 10034-85-2
61 Chlorine dioxide 10049-04-4
Dichloroisocyanuric acid
62 (1,3,5-Triazine-2,4,6(1H,3H,5H)-trione, 2782-57-2
1,3-dichloro-)
Sodium dichloroisocyanurate
63 (1,3,5-Triazine-2,4,6(1H,3H,5H)-trione, 2893-78-9
1,3-dichloro-, sodium salt)
Sodium dichloroisocyanurate
64 dihydrate(1,3,5-Triazine- 51580-86-0
2,4,6(1H,3H,5H)-trione, 1,3-dichloro-, sodium salt)

Dichloroisocyanuric acid,
65 potassium salt 2244-21-5
(1,3,5-Triazine-2,4,6(1H,3H,5H)-trione,1,3-dichloro
-, potassium salt)
66 Phosphoric acid 7664-38-2
67 Phosphoric acid, 7558-80-7
monosodium salt

68 Phosphoric acid, 7601-54-9

trisodium salt
69 Iodine monochloride 7790-99-0
Silver ions resulting from the use of electrolytically
70 -generated silver ions stabilized in citric acid as 14701-21-4
silver dihydrogen citrate (does not include metallic
silver)
71 Lactic acid 50-21-5
72* Nitric acid 7697-37-2
73 Hypochlorous acid 7790-92-3
74 Sodium hypochlorite 7681-52-9
75 Lithium hypochlorite 13840-33-0
76 Potassium hypochlorite 7778-66-7
77 Calcium hypochlorite 7778-54-3
78 Acetic acid 64-19-7

n-Carboxylic acids(C6-C12)[consisting of a mixture

79 of not less than 56% octanoic acid and not less -
than 40% decanoic acid]

80 Fatty acids, coco, 61789-30-8

1518
 No. Ingredients CAS No.
potassium salts
Acetic acid, chloro-,
sodium salt, reaction
81 products with 68608-66-2
4,5-dihydro-2-undecyl-1H-imidazole-1-ethanol and
sodium hydroxide
82 Phenol, 4-chloro-2-(phenylmethyl)- 120-32-1
83 3-Cyclohexene-1-methanol, α,α,4-trimethyl- 98-55-5
84 Phenylphenol 90-43-7
([1,1'-Biphenyl]-2-ol)

Butoxy monoether of
mixed(ethylene-propylene)
85* polyalkylene glycol, minimum average molecular -
weight
(in amu), 2,400

Butoxy monoether of
mixed(ethylene-propylene)poly alkylene glycol,
86 cloud point of 90-100° in 0.5 aqueous solution, -
average molecular
weight (in amu), 3,300

Poly(oxy-1,2-ethanediyl),
α-[(1,1,3,3-tetramethylbutyl) phenyl]-ω-hydroxy-,
87* produced with one mole of the phenol and 4 to -
14 moles ethylene oxide
Polyoxyethylene
88 polyoxypropylene block -
polymer(MW 2,800)
89 Poly(hexamethylene 32289-58-0
biguanide)hydrochloride
90 2-Propanol(isopropanol) 67-63-0
91 Propionic acid 79-09-4
92 2,6-Pyridine dicarboxylic acid 499-83-2
93 Phosphonic acid, 2809-21-4
(1-hydroxyethylidene)bis-
94 Sulfuric acid 7664-93-9
The ingredient marked with “*” should not use as active ingredient in
food-contact surface sanitizing solutions.

1519
 2) General food-contact surface sanitizing solutions
(1) Food-contact surface sanitizing solutions should contain active ingredient on sterilizing and
antimicrobial effect for harmful microorganisms.
(2) Food-contact surface sanitizing solutions should conform to the standards and
specifications of individual specifications.
(3) Water for manufacturing Food-contact surface sanitizing solutions should be appropriate to
the water quality standard of the drinking water according to 「Drinking Water
Management Act」.
2. General Use Level on Food-Contact Surface Sanitizing Solutions
Food-contact surface sanitizing solutions should be used appropriately within the individual use
level for the purpose of sterilizing and antimicrobial effect, and it should be removed in
appropriate ways, such as natural-air drying, hot-air drying, before contacting with food.
3. Preservation and Distribution Standards
1) The storage and sale place of products shall be kept clean and well ventilated.
2) The product shall be sealed and stored in a cool, dry place where direct sunlight and heat
are avoided to prevent deterioration.
3) Products shall be stored separately to prevent contamination of food and food additives,
etc.
4) Products shall not be stored with other products such as chemicals, agricultural chemicals,
and toxic substances, etc.
5) Containers and packaging shall not be damaged during the transportation and packaging
process of the product, and care should be taken not to cause as much impact as possible.
6) Products that are discolored or damaged due to carelessness during storage shall not be
sold.

1520
4. Standards and Specification
Ethanol Preparations
Definition Ethanol preparations contains Ethanol as an active ingredient. However, Diluent,
stabilizers, dissolving agents, etc. can be added for dilution or stability in quality.
Compositional Specifications of Ethanol preparations
Description Ethanol preparations is colorless∼pale yellow liquid with characteristic odor.
Identification Pipet about 0.6 g of ethanol preparations and add acetone to bring the volume
to 25 mL, test solution. Shake the sample until it is completely dispersed, if necessary,
centrifuge it and use the supernatant. Separately, add acetone to 0.6 g of ethanol standard
material to make 25 mL, standard solution. Gas chromatography is carried out with both
solutions under the following operation conditions. Retention time of the main peak of Test
Solution should be identical to that of Standard Solution.
Operation Condition
Column : DB WAX(30m×0.53㎜ ID, coating thickness 1.0㎛)or its equivalent
Detector : Hydrogen Flame Ionization Detector (FID)
Column Temperature : 60～150℃
Temperature at injection port : 150～200℃
Detector Temperature: 150～200℃
Carrier gas and Flow rate : N2 or He, flow rate 1mL/min
Test of Bactericidal Activity When ethanol preparations is tested by Test Method of Bacterial
Suspension or Test Method of Bacterial Surface in Test of Bactericidal Activity, it should be
appropriate.

1521
 N-Decyl-N,N-dimethyl-1-decanaminium Chloride Preparations
Definition It contains N-decyl-N,N-dimethyl-1-1-decanaminium Chloride as an active ingredient.
However, Diluent, stabilizers, dissolving agents, etc. can be added for dilution or stability in
quality.
Compositional Specifications of N-decyl-N,N-dimethyl-1-1-decanaminium Chloride preparations
Description N-decyl-N,N-dimethyl-1-1-decanaminium Chloride preparations is liquid with
characteristic odor.
Identification (1) N-decyl-N,N-dimethyl-1-1-decanaminium Chloride preparations responds to the
tests for Ammonium Salt and Chlorides.
(2) Pipet 1 g of N-decyl-N,N-dimethyl-1-1-decanaminium Chloride preparations and dilute to
volume of 100 mL with water, test solution. Separately, when adding 5 mL of test solution
to the mixture of 2∼3 drops of brom phenol blue․sodium hydroxide solution, 5 mL of 0.1N
sodium hydroxide solution, and 5 mL of chloroform, the chloroform layer of the solution
appears blue.
Test of Bactericidal Activity When N-decyl-N,N-dimethyl-1-1-decanaminium Chloride
preparations is tested by Test Method of Bacterial Suspension in Test of Bactericidal
Activity, it should be appropriate.

1522
 n-Alkyl(C12-C18)benzyldimethylammonium Chloride Preparations
Definition n-alkyl(C12-C18)benzyldimethylammonium Chloride Preparations contains Quaternary
ammonium compounds, n-alkyl(C12-C14)benzyl-dimethyl chlorides or 1 or more of Quaternary
ammonium compounds, n-alkyl(C12-C18) dimethyl ethylbenzyl ammonium chloride (average
molecular weight 377∼384), n-alkyl(C12-C18) dimethyl ethylbenzyl ammonium chloride (average
molecular weight 384), Quaternary ammonium compounds, di-n-alkyl(C8-C10) dimethyl ammonium
chloride (average molecular weight 332 to 361), or Poly (hexamethylene biguanide) hydrochloride
contained to Quaternary ammonium compounds, alkyl(C12-C14) benzyl-dimethyl chlorides as an
active ingredient. However, Diluent, stabilizers, dissolving agents, etc. can be added for dilution
or stability in quality.
Compositional Specifications of n-Alkyl(C12-C18)benzyldimethylammonium Chloride
Description n-alkyl(C12-C18)benzyldimethylammonium Chloride Preparations is liquid with
characteristic odor.
Identification (1) n-alkyl(C12-C18)benzyldimethylammonium Chloride Preparations responds to the
tests for Ammonium Salt and Chlorides.
(2) Pipet 1 g of n-alkyl(C12-C18)benzyldimethylammonium Chloride Preparations and dilute to
100 mL with water, test solution. Separately, when adding 5 mL of test solution to the
mixture of 2∼3 drops of Brom phenol blue ․ Sodium hydroxide solution, 5 mL of 0.1N
sodium hydroxide solution, and 5 mL of chloroform, the chloroform layer of the solution
becomes blue.
Test of Bactericidal Activity When n-alkyl(C12-C18)benzyldimethylammonium Chloride
Preparations is tested by Test Method of Bacterial Suspension in Test of Bactericidal
Activity, it should be appropriate.

1523
 Sodium Dichloroisocyanurate Preparations
Definition Sodium Dichloroisocyanurate preparations contains Sodium Dichloroisocyanurate and
Sodium Dichloroisocyanurate 2 hydrate as active ingredients. However, Diluent, stabilizers,
dissolving agents, etc. can be added for dilution or stability in quality.
Compositional Specifications of Sodium Dichloroisocyanurate preparations
Description Sodium Dichloroisocyanurate preparations is white crystallite, white granular
powder or tablet with odor of chlorine.
Identification (1) When diluted hydrochloric acid is added to Sodium Dichloroisocyanurate
preparations, gas with odor of chlorine is generated.
(2) Gas in (1) make the colour of potassium iodide starch paper (wetted with water) blue.
(3) Sodium Dichloroisocyanurate preparations responds to the tests for (1) Sodium Salt in
Identification.
Purity (1) Iron : 1 g of Sodium Dichloroisocyanurate preparations, ignited by the procedure in
Residues on Ignition, and then the residue is generated. To the residue, add 2 mL of
diluted hydrochloric acid(1→2), dissolve, and evaporate to dryness it in a water bath.
Dissolve it in 1 mL of hydrochloric acid and dilute to 50 mL with water. Pipet 10 mL of
this solution, dilute to 40 mL with water, add 40 mg of ammonium persulfate and 10 mL of
ammonium thiocyanate solution., then red or pink color develops. That color should not be
deeper than the color appeared when 3 mL of iron standard solution is taken instead of
test solution and proceeded in the same manner as test solution. (not more than 150 ppm).
(2) Lead : When 2.0 g of Sodium Dichloroisocyanurate Preparations is tested by Atomic
Absorption Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its
content should not be more than 10 ppm.
Test of Bactericidal Activity When Sodium Dichloroisocyanurate preparations is tested by Test
Method of Bacterial Suspension in Test of Bactericidal Activity, it should be appropriate.

1524
 Sodium Hypochlorite Preparations
Definition This item contains Sodium Hypochlorite preparations as active ingredient and
includes acquiring saline solution by electrolysis. However, Diluent, stabilizers, etc. can be
added for dilution or stability in quality.
Compositional Specifications of Sodium Hypochlorite preparations
Description Sodium Hypochlorite preparations is colorless to light green-yellow liquid or
powder having an odor of chlorine.
Identification (1) Sodium Hypochlorite preparations is diluted with water so that 50～100㎍ of
active chlorine is contained per mL of Sodium Hypochlorite preparations, test solution.
Separately, pipet 0.5 mL of sodium stock standard solution and dilute to 100 mL with
water, sodium standard solution. When Sodium standard solution and test solution are
tested by Atomic Absorption Spectrophotometry, the peak of sodium should be identified.
(2) To 5 mL of test solution in (1), add 1 mL of sodium hydroxide solution(1→2,500) and 0.2
mL of potassium iodine solution, the color of the solution turns yellow. Again add 0.5 mL
of starch solution, then the solution becomes deep blue.
(3) To 5 mL of test solution in (1), add 0.1 mL of potassium permanganate solution(1→300)
and add 1 mL of sulfuric acid(1→20) to this solution, then the red violet of solution
doesn't fade.
(4) To 90 mL of test solution in (1), add 100 mL of sodium hydroxide (1→5), then the
solution shows maximum absorption band at 290～294nm.
Test of Bactericidal Activity When Sodium Hypochlorite preparations is tested by Test Method
of Bacterial Suspension in Test of Bactericidal Activity, it should be appropriate.

1525
 Hypochlorous Acid Water Preparations
Definition Hypochlorous Acid Water preparations is obtained by electrolysis of hydrochloric
acid or saline solution. The aqueous solution contains Hypochlorous Acid as an active
ingredient. This item includes strongly acidic hypochlorous acid water (aqueous solution
obtained from both poles by electrolyzing sodium chloride (not more than 0.2%) in an
electrolytic bath with septum composed of anode and cathode, which are separated by
septum), moderately acidic hypochlorous acid water (aqueous solution obtained from both
poles by electrolyzing an valid concentration of sodium chloride in an electrolytic bath with
septum composed of anode and cathode, which are separated by septum or solution that
collect under the anodes added solution that collect under the cathode) and slightly acidic
hypochlorous acid water (aqueous solution, which is adjusted with valid concentration after
adding sodium chloride to the hypochlorous acid water, in an aseptate electrolytic bath
without septum) are included in this material.
Compositional Specifications of Hypochlorous Acid Water preparations
Description Hypochlorous Acid Water preparations is colorless, odorless or with slight odor of
chlorine.
Identification (1) To 5 mL of Hypochlorous Acid Water preparations, add 1 mL of sodium
hydroxide(1→2,500) and 0.2 mL of potassium iodide, then yellow color develops. When
adding 0.5 mL of starch solution to this solution, deep blue color develops.
(2) To 5 mL of Hypochlorous Acid Water preparations, add 0.1 mL of potassium
permanganate solution(1→300) and add 1 mL of sulfuric acid(1→20) to this solution, then
red violet color doesn't fade.
(3) To 90 mL of Hypochlorous Acid Water, add 100 mL of sodium hydroxide(1→5), then the
solution exhibits an absorption maximum at a wavelength of 290~294 nm.
Purity (1) pH : When pH is determined by glass electrode method, not more than 2.7 for
strongly acidic Hypochlorous Acid Water, 2.7~5.0 for moderately acidic Hypochlorous Acid
Water and 5.0∼6.5 for slightly acidic Hypochlorous Acid Water.
(2) Evaporation Residue : When pipetting 20.0g of Hypochlorous Acid Water preparations and
drying it for 2 hours at 110℃ after evaporating water, the residue should not be more
than 0.25%.
Test of Bactericidal Activity When Hypochlorous Acid Water preparations is tested by Test
Method of Bacterial Suspension in Test of Bactericidal Activity, it should be appropriate.

1526
 Poly(hexamethylenebiguanide)hydrochloride Preparations
Definition Poly (hexamethylenebiguanide) hydrochloride preparations contains Poly
(hexamethylenebiguanide) hydrochloride or Quaternary ammonium compounds, Poly
(hexamethylenebiguanide) hydrochloride containing di-n-alkyl(C8-C10) dimethyl ammonium
chloride (average molecular weight 332 to 361) as active ingredient . However, Diluent,
stabilizers, dissolving agents, etc. can be added for dilution or stability in quality.
Compositional Specifications of Poly(hexamethylenebiguanide)hydrochloride preparations
Description Poly(hexamethylenebiguanide)hydrochloride preparations is liquid with characteristic
odor.
Identification (1) Poly(hexamethylenebiguanide)hydrochloride preparations responds to the
tests for Ammonium Salt and Chlorides.
(2) Pipet 1 g of Poly(hexamethylenebiguanide)hydrochloride preparations and dilute to 100
mL with water, test solution. Separately, add 5 mL of test solution to the mixture of 2∼3
drops of Brom phenol blue ․ Sodium hydroxide solution, 5 mL of 0.1N sodium hydroxide
solution, and 5 mL of chloroform, then the chloroform layer of the solution becomes blue.
Test of Bactericidal Activity When Poly(hexamethylenebiguanide)hydrochloride preparations is
tested by Test Method of Bacterial Suspension in Test of Bactericidal Activity, it should be
appropriate.

1527
 Hydrogen Peroxide Preparations
Definition It contains Hydrogen Peroxide preparations as active ingredient. However, Diluent,
stabilizers, dissolving agents, etc. can be added for dilution or stability in quality.
Compositional Specifications of Hydrogen Peroxide preparations
Description Hydrogen Peroxide preparations is a colorless, clear liquid. It has a slight odor.
Identification (1) When adding 5 mL of dilute sulfuric acid and 1 mL of potassium
permanganate solution to an aqueous solution of Hydrogen Peroxide (1→10), bubbles are
formed and the color of the solution disappears.
(2) Hydrogen Peroxide preparations shows the peroxide reaction in Identification.
Purity (1) Free acid : Add freshly boiled and cooled water to 3 mL of Hydrogen Peroxide
preparations and make to 50 mL. When adding 1 mL of 0.02 N sodium hydroxide solution
and 3 drops of phenolphthalein solution, the solution should turn red.
(2) Arsenic : Mix 0.25 mL of Hydrogen Peroxide preparations with 10 mL of water. Add a
small amount of this solution in small portions to a platinum crucible in a water bath to
evaporate the liquid to dryness. Add a small amount of water to the residues and use the
entire solution as a Test Solution. This Test Solution is tested for arsenic and its content
should be appropriate (Not more than 4ppm).
(3) Lead : Add 10 mL of water to 5 g of Hydrogen Peroxide preparations. And add a small
amount of this solution in small portions to a platinum crucible in a water bath to warming
it until forming bubbles is ended. Add 0.5N of nitric acid to make to 25mL. This solution
is used as a Test Solution. When test solution is tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content should
not be more than 4.0 ppm.
(4) Tin : Add 10 mL of water to 5 g of Hydrogen Peroxide preparations. And add a small
amount of this solution in small portions to a platinum crucible in a water bath to warming
it until forming bubbles is ended. Add 1N of hydrochloric acid to make to 25mL. This
solution is used as a Test Solution. When test solution is tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content should
not be more than 10 ppm.
(5) Iron : Add 10 mL of water to 5 g of Hydrogen Peroxide preparations. And add a small
amount of this solution in small portions to a platinum crucible in a water bath to warming
it until forming bubbles is ended. Add 0.5N of nitric acid to make to 25mL. This solution
is used as a Test Solution. When test solution is tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content should
not be more than 0.5 ppm.
(6) Residue on evaporation : To 10 mL of Hydrogen Peroxide, add about 20 mL of water.
Add this solution in small portions to a platinum crucible. Evaporate it to dryness by gently
heating in a water bath and cool down. Dry the residues for 1 hour at 105℃ and the
amount should not be more than 3 mg.
(7) Phosphate Salt : To 8 mL of Hydrogen Peroxide, add 10 mL of water and 3 mL of
1528
 hydrochloric acid. Then evaporate it to dryness by gently heating in a water bath. Add
about 30 mL of warm water to dissolve the residues, which is then cooled down. Dilute
the solution to 50mL with water, Test Solution. Transfer 5 mL of Test Solution into a
Nestler tube, where 4 mL of dilute sulfuric acid (1→6) and 1 mL of ammonium molybdate
solution (1→20) are added. Then mix it well by shaking and allowed to stand for 3
minutes, where 1 mL of 1-amino-2-naphthol-4-sulfonate solution is added. Heat it for 30
minutes in a water bath at 60℃ and cool down in running water. The resulting blue color
should not be deeper than that of the solution prepared by the same procedure with 5 mL
of phosphate salt standard solution.
Test of Bactericidal Activity When Hydrogen Peroxide preparations is tested by Test Method
of Bacterial Suspension(Test Method of Spore Suspension when used for sterilization of food
container and packaging) in Test of Bactericidal Activity, it should be appropriate.

1529
 Peroxyacetic Acid Preparations
Definition Peroxyacetic Acid preparations is obtained by reaction of hydrogen peroxide and
acetic acid, containing peroxyacetic acid, hydrogen peroxide and acetic acid as active
ingredient or it is obtained by reaction of hydrogen peroxide, acetic acid, and caprylic
acid(synonym: octanoic acid) containing peroxyacetic acid, peroxyoctanoic acid, hydrogen
peroxide, caprylic acid, and acetic acid as active ingredient. However,
1-hydroxytiliden-1,1-dipophonic acid, Phosphoric acid, or Sodium 1-Octanesulfonate are able
to be added for dilution or quality stability.
Compositional Specifications of Peroxyacetic Acid preparations
Description Peroxyacetic Acid preparations is a colorless, clear liquid. It has a characteristic
pungent odor.
Purity (1) Arsenic : Pipet 0.25 mL of Peroxyacetic Acid preparations and mix it with 10 mL
of water. Add a small amount of this solution in small portions to a platinum crucible in a
water bath to evaporate the liquid to dryness. Add a small amount of water to the residues
and use the entire solution as Test Solution. This Test Solution is tested for arsenic and
its content should be appropriate (Not more than 4ppm).
(2) Lead : Add 10 mL of water to 5 g of Peroxyacetic Acid preparations. And add a small
amount of this solution in small portions to a platinum crucible in a water bath to warming
it until forming bubbles is ended. Add 0.5N of nitric acid to make to 25mL. This solution
is used as a Test Solution. When test solution is tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content should
not be more than 4.0 ppm.
Test of Bactericidal Activity When Peroxyacetic Acid preparations is tested by Test Method
of Bacterial Suspension(Test Method of Spore Suspension when used for sterilization of food
container and packaging) in Test of Bactericidal Activity, it should be appropriate.

1530
 Citric Acid Preparations
Definition Citric Acid preparations contains Citric Acid as an active ingredient. However,
Diluent, stabilizers, dissolving agents, etc. can be added for dilution or stability in quality.
Compositional Specifications of Citric Acid preparations
Description Citric Acid preparations occurs as transparent liquid having a characteristic odor.
Identification An aqueous solution of Citric Acid preparations (1→10) is acidic.
Purity (1) Sulfate : When 0.5 g of Citric Acid preparations is tested for Sulfates, its content
should not be more than the amount that corresponds to 0.5 mL of 0.01 N sulfuric acid.
(2) Oxalate : When 1 g of Citric Acid preparations is dissolved in 10 mL of water, where 2
mL of calcium chloride solution is added, it should not be turn turbid.
(3) Arsenic : When 0.77 g of Citric Acid preparations is dissolved in 5 mL of water, which
is tested by Arsenic Limit Test, its content should not be more than 1.33 ppm.
(4)Lead : When 5.0 g of Citric Acid Preparations is tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content should
not be more than 0.5ppm.
(5) Mercury : When Citric Acid preparations is tested by Mercury Limit Test, its content
should not be more than 1.0 ppm.
(6) Calcium : 1 g of Citric Acid is dissolved in 10 mL of water, which is neutralized with
ammonia solution. When 1 mL of ammonium oxalate solution is added, it should not be turn
turbid.
(7) Coloring Substance by Sulfuric Acid : 5 mL of sulfuric acid is added to 0.5 g of Citric
acidis, dissolved by heating at 90℃ for 1 hour. When the color of the solution is observed
with a white background, the color should not be deeper than that of the color standard K.
(8) Polynuclear Aromatic Hydrocarbon : 25 g of Citric Acid is dissolved in 30 mL of water
by heating at about 50℃. After cooling, the solution is extracted 3 times with 20 mL each
of n-hexane for UV absorption spectrophotometry grade. It is centrifuged at 2,500～3,000
rpm for about 10minutes and concentrated to 1～2 mL by evaporating n-hexane out. After
cooling, n-hexane (for UV absorption spectrophotometry grade) is added to the concentrate
to bring the total volume to 10 mL, Test Solution. Absorbance of test solution is measured
at 260～350 nm with 1 cm cell. The difference in absorbance (compared to reference
solution) should not be more than 0.05 in this range. In this case, use the reference
solution obtained by following method. To 30 mL of water, extract 3 times with 20 mL of
n-hexane(UV absorption spectrophotometry grade) repeatedly, and follow the same
procedure as test solution.
(9) Isocitric acid : Weigh 0.5g of Citric Acid, heat at 105℃ for 3 hours, cool, and dissolve in
10 mL of acetone. Measure 0.005 mL of the test solution, and perform Paper
Chromatography without using a control solution. No more than one spot is observed. For
the filter paper, use a No. 2 filter paper for chromatography, and stop the development
when the developing solvent rises about 25 cm. Then air-dry, and spray with bromophenol
blue TS for citric acid. Allow a n-butanol-formic acid-water mixture(8:3:2) to stand, and
use the upper layer abtained as the developing solvent.
1531
Test of Bacterial Activity Citric acid preparations is tested as directed under Test of
Bacterial Suspension in Test of Bacterial Activity. It should be appropriate.

1532
 Iodine Preparations
Definition Iodine preparations contains Iodine as an active ingredient. However, Potassium
Iodine can be added for dilution or stability in quality.
Compositional Specifications of Iodine preparations
Description Iodine preparations occurs as reddish brown liquid having a characteristic odor.
Purity (1) Chloride and Bromide : Dissolve 1.0 g of Iodine preparations in 20 mL of water and
shake it to mix and filter it. Add 1 drop of sulfurous acid water(1→5) to 10 mL of the
balance solution until yellow color is clear. After adding 1 mL of ammonia solution to this
solution, again add 1 mL of silver nitrate solution little by little and water to make to 20
mL. Shake it to mix and filter it. 2 mL of the first balance solution is discarded. When 10
mL of the next balance solution is taken and 2.0 mL of nitric acid and water are added to
make to 20 mL, the turbidity of solution should not be darker than a reference solution.
Add 5 mL of water to 0.20 mL of 0.01 mol hydrochloric acid, 2.5 mL of ammonia solution,
1 mL of silver nitrate solution, 2.0 mL of nitric acid and water to make to 20 mL, this
solution is used as a reference solution.
(2) Lead : When 5.0 g of Iodine preparations is tested by Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content should
not be more than 10 ppm.
Test of Bacterial Activity Iodine preparations is tested as directed under Test of Bacterial
Suspension in Test of Bacterial Activity. It should be appropriate.

1533
 Chlorine Dioxide Preparations
Definition Chlorine Dioxide Preparations contain Chlorine Dioxide as an active ingredient.
However, Diluent, stabilizers, dissolving agents, etc. can be added for dilution or stability in
quality.
Compositional Specifications of Chlorine Dioxide preparations
Description Chlorine Dioxide preparations occurs as pale yellow liquid having a pungent odor.
Identification When the mixed solution(5 mL of acetic acid and 1 g of potassium iodine) is
added to 5 mL of this diluted solution(10 mg/L), the color of this solution become yellow.
Again when 1 mL of starch solution is added, the color of this solution become dark blue.
Test of Bacterial Activity Chlorine Dioxide preparations is tested as directed under Test of
Bacterial Suspension in Test of Bacterial Activity. It should be appropriate.

1534
 Lactic Acid Preparations
Definition Lactic Acid preparations contains Lactic Acid as an active ingredient. However,
Diluent, stabilizers, dissolving agents, etc. can be added for dilution or stability in quality.
Description Lactic Acid preparations is odorless or have a characteristic odor.
Identification (1) An aqueous solution of Lactic Acid (1→10) is acidic.
(2) Lactic Acid preparations responds to the tests for Lactic Acid Salt in Identification.
Purity (1) Clarity and Color of Solution : Concentrate the Lactic Acid to 80% concentration.
Take 10 g of the solution, add 12 mL of ether, and mix. The solution is clear, or passes
the following test. Filter the solution mixed with ether through a glass filter (1G3), wash
the residue three times with 10 mL of ether each time, then once with 10 mL of acetone,
dry the residue together with the filter under reduced pressure at 50℃ for 14 hours. The
amount of the residue is not more than 0.07 g.
(2) Citric Acid, Oxalic Acid, Tartaric Acid, and Phosphoric Acid : When Lactic Acid
(corresponding to 0.8 g of Lactic Acid) is dissolved in 10 mL of water, where 40 mL of
potassium hydroxide solution is added and boiled for 2 minutes, it should not turn turbid
(3) Sulfate : When Lactic Acid (correspond in to 0.8 g of Lactic Acid) is tested by Sulfate
Limit Test, its content should not be more than the amount that corresponds to 0.2 mL of
0.01 N sulfuric acid.
(4) Cyanide : Weigh Lactic Acid (corresponding to 0.8 g of Lactic Acid), and dissolve in
water to make 100 mL. Take 10 mL of this solution. transfer into a Nestler tube, add 1
drop of phenolphthalein solution, and add sodium hydroxide solution (1→10) until the color
of the solution changes to pink. Add 1.5 mL of sodium hydroxide solution (1→10) and
water to make 20 mL, and heat in a water bath for 10 minutes. Cool, neutralize with
diluted acetic acid (1→20), and after the pink color of the solution disappears, add 1 drop.
Add 10 mL of phosphate buffer (pH 6.8) and 0.25 mL of chloroamine T, stopper tightly,
shake gently, allow to stand for 3～5 minutes, add 15 mL of pyridine-pyrazolone solution
and water to make 50 mL, and allow to stand at about 25℃ for 30 minutes. The color of
the solution does not change to blue.
(5) Arsenic : When Lactic Acid (corresponding to 0.4 g of Lactic Acid) is mixed with 5 mL of
water, and add water to make 10 mL. Take 5 mL of this solution and test by Arsenic
Limit Test and its content should not be more than 4 ppm.
(6) Lead : When 5.0 g of Lactic Acid is tested by Atomic Absorption Spectrophotometry or
Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, its content should not be more than 2.0
ppm.
(7) Mercury : When Lactic Acid is tested by Mercury Limit Test, its content should not be
more than 1.0 ppm.
(8) Iron : Lactic Acid (corresponding to 0.8 g of lactic acid) transfer into a Nestler Tube,
and dissolve in 6 mL of dilute nitric acid (1→10) and 10 mL of water, add water to make
25 mL. Use this solution as the test Solution. 50 mg of ammonium persulfate and 5 mL of
ammonium thiocyanate solution (2→25) are added to Test Solution. The resulting color
should not be deeper than that of a solution prepared by treating 1 mL of iron standard
1535
 solution by the same procedure as the Test Solution.
(9) Chlorides : Accurately weigh a portion of sample equivalent to about 5 g of lactic acid,
dissolve in 50mL of water, and neutralize to litmus with sodium hydroxide solution. (1 in
4). Add 2 mL of potassium chromate TS and titrate with 0.1N silver nitrate to the first
appearance tf a red tinge, its content should not be more than 0.2%.
1 mL of 0.1N silver nitrate solution = 3.545mg Cl
(10) Realdily Carbonizable Substances : Weigh Lactic Acid (corresponding to 2 g of lactic
acid) adjust to 15℃, gradually superimpose on top of 5 mL sulfuric acid pre-adjusted to 1
5℃, and keep at 15℃. Even if a band is formed at the interface within 15 minutes, its
color should not change to dark gray.
(11) Volatile Fatty Acid : Lactic Acid (corresponding to 2 g of lactic acid), where water is
added to bring the volume to 5 mL, if necessary, is heated in a water bath, it should not
generate an odor of lactic acid.
(12) Methanol : To Lactic Acid (corresponding to 4 g of lactic acid), add 8 mL of water and
5 g of calcium carbonate, distill the solution, take about 5 mL of the initial distillate, and
add water to make 100 mL. Use this solution as the test solution. Measure 1.0 mL of the
test solution, add 0.1 mL of phosphoric acid (1→20) and 0.2 mL of potassium
permanganate solution (1→300), allow to stand for 10 minutes, add 0.4 mL of anhydrous
sodium sulfite solution (1→5) and 3 mL of sulfuric acid, then add 0.2 mL of chromotropic
acid solution. The color of the solution is not darker than that of the following reference
solution. Measure 1.0 mL of methanol. add water to make 100 mL, measure 1.0 mL of this
solution, and add water to make 100 mL. Use this solution as the solution.
Test of Bactericidal Activity When Lactic Acid preparations is tested by Test Method of
Bacterial Suspension in Test of Bactericidal Activity, it should be appropriate.

1536
5. Use Level of Food Contact Surface Sanitizing Solution
Hydrogen Peroxide Preparations
Hydrogen Peroxide should be only used for sanitizing food contact material, container, and
packaging below.
1. When using sterilizing and fumigating of food contact surfaces, the usage is as below
1) Food-contact surfaces in public eating places (including food service providing food for
less than 50 persons at a time) : not more than 91㎎/L (as Hydrogen Peroxide)
2) Dairy-processing equipment : not more than 465㎎/L (as Hydrogen Peroxide)
3) Food-processing equipment : not more than 1,100㎎/L (as Hydrogen Peroxide)
2. When using for sterilization of food container and packaging
1) It should be removed by rinsing with sterile water or drying with hot air.
2) Residual quantity test below should be proceeded, the residue of Hydrogen Peroxide in
container․packaging should be not more than 0.5㎎/L.
Residual test
Preparation of a Test Solution: After sterilizing the containers and packages for food, rinse
them with sterilized water or dry them with hot air. Put water into the container or package
before the final food is contained. and use it as a test solution.
Test Operation: Take exactly 20 mL of a test solution, add 50 mL of 1N sulfuric acid, add 3
∼5 drops of a ferroin solution, shake it occasionally, and titrate it with a 0.001N sodium
sulfate solution until a pale red color disappears. Perform the blank test in the same way.
1 mL of 0.001N sodium sulfate solution = 17μg H2O2
Test solution
Ferroin test solution : Dissolve 0.7g of ferrous sulfate(seven hydrate) and 1.76g of
o-phenanthroline hydrochloride(one hydrate) in water to prepare an 100mL solution.
Peroxyacetic Acid Preparations
Peroxyacetic acid should be only used for sanitizing food contact material, container, and
packaging below.
1. When using sterilizing and fumigating of food contact material, the usage is as below
1) Food-contact surfaces in public eating places (including food service providing food for
less than 50 persons at a time)
Peroxyacetic Acid Not more than 58㎎/l
Hydrogen peroxide Not more than 91㎎/l
Peroxyoctanoic acid Not more than 52㎎/l
Octanoic acid Not more than 52㎎/l
(1-hydroxyethylidene)bis-, phosphoric acid Not more than 14㎎/l
1537
1-Octanesulfonic acid, sodium salt Not more than 46㎎/l
2) Dairy-processing equipment
Peroxyacetic Acid Not more than 315㎎/l
Hydrogen peroxide Not more than 465㎎/l
Peroxyoctanoic acid Not more than 122㎎/l
Octanoic acid Not more than 176㎎/l
(1-hydroxyethylidene)bis-, phosphoric acid Not more than 34㎎/l
1-Octanesulfonic acid, sodium salt Not more than 297㎎/l
3) Food-processing equipment
Peroxyacetic Acid Not more than 315㎎/l
Hydrogen peroxide Not more than 1,100㎎/l
Peroxyoctanoic acid Not more than 122㎎/l
Octanoic acid Not more than 234㎎/l
(1-hydroxyethylidene)bis-, phosphoric acid Not more than 34㎎/l
1-Octanesulfonic acid, sodium salt Not more than 312㎎/l
2. When using for sterilization of food container and packaging
1) It should be removed by rinsing with sterile water or drying with hot air.
2) Residual quantity test below should be proceeded, the residue of Hydrogen Peroxide in
container․packaging should be not more than 0.5㎎/l.
Citric Acid Preparations
Citric acid should be only used for sanitizing food contact material below.
1. Food-contact surfaces in public eating places (including food service providing food for
less than 50 persons at a time)
2. Dairy-processing equipment
3. Food-processing equipment
Ethanol Preparations
Ethanol should be only used for sanitizing food contact material below. The usage is as
below.
1. Food-contact surfaces in public eating place (including food service providing food for
less than 50 persons at a time)
2. Dairy-processing equipment
3. Food-processing equipment
1538
Quaternary ammonium Compounds, n-Alkyl(C12-C18)benzyldimethyl Chloride Preparations
Quaternary ammonium Compounds, n-Alkyl(C12-C18)benzyldimethyl Chloride should be only
used for sanitizing food contact material below. The usage is as below.
1. Food-contact surfaces in public eating places (including food service providing food for
less than 50 persons at a time)

Quaternary ammonium compounds,

Not more ammonium,
quaternary
than 200㎎/
if
l used(as withsumotherof
alkyl(C12-C18)benzyl-dimethyl chlorides quaternary ammonium, not more than 200
㎎/l as sum of quaternary ammonium)

Quaternary
n-alkyl(C ammonium compounds, Not more ammonium,
than 200㎎/ l used(as withsumotherof
12-C14)dimethyl thylbenzyl quaternary if
ammonium chloride (average molecular quaternary ammonium, not more than 200
weight 377 to 384) ㎎/l as sum of quaternary ammonium)

Quaternary
n-alkyl(C12-C18)ammonium
dimethyl compounds,
ethylbenzyl Not more ammonium,
quaternary than 200㎎/ if l used(as withsumotherof
ammonium chloride, average molecular quaternary ammonium, not more than 200
weight(in amu), 384 ㎎/l as sum of quaternary ammonium)

Quaternary
di-n-alkyl(C ammonium compounds, Not more than 150㎎/l (as sum of
8-C10) dimethyl ammonium quaternary ammonium, if used with other
chloride (average molecular weight 332 quaternary ammonium, not more than 200
to 361) ㎎/l as sum of quaternary ammonium)
Poly(hexamethylene
biguanide) hydrochloride Not more than 550㎎/l

2. Dairy-processing equipment

Quaternary ammonium compounds, Not more ammonium,

quaternary than 200㎎/lif (as withsumotherof
used
achlorides
lkyl(C 12-C18)be nzyl-dim et hyl quaternary ammonium, not more than 200
㎎/l as sum of quaternary ammonium)

1539
Quaternary ammonium compounds, Not more ammonium,
than 200㎎/l (as withsumotherof
n-alkyl(C12-C14)dimethyl thylbenzyl quaternary if used
ammonium chloride (average molecular quaternary ammonium, not more than 200
weight 377 to 384) ㎎/l as sum of quaternary ammonium)
Quaternary ammonium compounds, Not more ammonium,
than 200㎎/l (as withsumotherof
n-alkyl(C12-C18) dimethyl ethylbenzyl quaternary if used
ammonium chloride, (average molecular quaternary ammonium, not more than 200
weight, 384) ㎎/l as sum of quaternary ammonium)
Quaternary ammonium
di-n-alkyl(C8-C10) dimethyl compounds,
ammonium Not more ammonium,
quaternary than 150㎎/l
if (as withsumotherof
used
chloride (average molecular weight 332 quaternary ammonium, not more than 200
to 361) ㎎/l as sum of quaternary ammonium)
Poly(hexamethylene
biguanide) hydrochloride Not more than 550㎎/l
3. Food-processing equipment
Not more than 200㎎/l (as sum of
Quaternary
alkyl(C12-C18)benzyl-dimethyl chlorides quaternary
ammonium compounds, ammonium, not
quaternary ammonium, if used
morewith
than other
400
㎎/l as sum of quaternary ammonium)

Quaternary
n-alkyl(C12-Cammonium compounds,
14)dimethyl thylbenzyl Not more ammonium,
quaternary than 200㎎/ if l used(as withsumotherof
ammonium
weight 377 chloride
to 384) (average molecular quaternary
㎎/l as sum ammonium,
of quaternarynotammonium)
more than 400

Quaternary ammonium compounds, Not more than 200㎎/l (as sum of

n-alkyl(C
ammonium12-Cchloride,
18) dimethyl ethylbenzyl quaternary ammonium, if used with other
(average molecular quaternary ammonium, not more than 400
weight, 384) ㎎/l as sum of quaternary ammonium)
Quaternary
di-n-alkyl(C ammonium compounds, Not more than 240㎎/l (as sum of
8-C10) dimethyl ammonium quaternary ammonium, if used with other
chloride (average molecular weight 332 quaternary ammonium, not more than 400
to 361) ㎎/l as sum of quaternary ammonium)
Poly(hexamethylene Not more than 550㎎/l
biguanide) hydrochloride
1-Decanaminium, N-decyl-N,N-dimethyl-, Chloride Preparations
1-Decanaminium, N-decyl-N,N-dimethyl-, Chloride should be only used for sanitizing food
contact surface for preparing and processing of food. The usage should be not more than
200㎎/l (as quaternary ammonium).
Iodine Preparations
Iodine should be only used for sanitizing food contact material below. The usage is as below.
1. Food-contact surfaces in public eating places (including food service providing food for
1540
 less than 50 persons at a time)
Iodine Not
iodide,more
than than
not more
l (asl astitrated
25㎎/25㎎/
sum of iodine,
titrated ifiodine)
used with other

Iodine Potassium Not

iodide,more
than than
not more
l (asl astitrated
25㎎/25㎎/
sum of iodine,
titrated ifiodine)
used with other

2. Dairy-processing equipment
Iodine Not more than 25㎎/l (as titrated iodine, if used with other
iodide, not more than 25㎎/l as sum of titrated iodine)
Iodine Potassium Not more than 25㎎/l (as titrated iodine, if used with other
iodide, not more than 25㎎/l as sum of titrated iodine)
3. Food-processing equipment
Iodine Not more than 25㎎/l (as titrated iodine, if used with other
iodide, not more than 25㎎/l as sum of titrated iodine)
Iodine Potassium Not more than 25㎎/l (as titrated iodine, if used with other
iodide, not more than 25㎎/l as sum of titrated iodine)
Sodium Dichloroisocyanurate Preparations
Sodium Dichloroisocyanurate should be only used for sanitizing food contact material below.
1. Food-contact surfaces in public eating places (including food service providing food for
less than 50 persons at a time) : not more than 100㎎/l (as active chlorine)
2. Dairy-processing equipment : not more than 100㎎/l (as active chlorine)
3. Food-processing equipment : not more than 100㎎/l (as active chlorine)
Hypochlorous Acid, Sodium Salt Sodium Hypochlorite Preparations
Ethanol should be only used for sanitizing food contact material below. The usage is as
below.
1. Food-contact surfaces in public eating place (including food service providing food for
less than 50 persons at a time) : not more than 200㎎/l (as active chlorine)
2. Dairy-processing equipment : not more than 200㎎/l (as active chlorine)
3. Food-processing equipment : not more than 200㎎/l (as active chlorine)
Hypochlorous Acid Water Preparations
Hypochlorous Acid Water should be only used for sanitizing food contact material below.
The usage is as below.
1. Food-contact surfaces in public eating places (including food service providing food for
less than 50 persons at a time) : not more than 200㎎/l (as active chlorine)
2. Dairy-processing equipment : not more than 200㎎/l (as active chlorine)
1541
 3. Food-processing equipment : not more than 200㎎/l (as active chlorine)
Poly(hexamethylenebiguanide)hydrochloride Preparations
Poly(hexamethylenebiguanide)hydrochloride should be only used for sanitizing food contact
material below. The usage is as below.
1. Food-contact surfaces in public eating places (including food service providing food for
less than 50 persons at a time)
Poly(hexamethylenebiguanide)hydrochloride Not more than 550㎎/l
㎎/l
Quaternary ammonium chloride
compounds,(average
di-n-alkyl(C8-C10) Not
(as more than 150quaternary
dimethyl ammonium molecular ammonium)
weight 332 to 361)
2. Dairy-processing equipment
Poly(hexamethylenebiguanide)hydrochloride Not more than 550㎎/l
Quaternary ammonium compounds, di-n-alkyl(C8-C10) Not ㎎/l
dimethyl ammonium chloride (average molecular (as more than 150quaternary
weight 332 to 361) ammonium)
3. Food-processing equipment
Poly(hexamethylenebiguanide)hydrochloride Not more than 550㎎/l
㎎/l
Quaternary ammonium chloride
compounds,(average
di-n-alkyl(C8-C10) Not
(as more than 240quaternary
dimethyl ammonium molecular ammonium)
weight 332 to 361)
Chlorine Dioxide Preparations
Chlorine Dioxide Preparations should be only used for sanitizing food contact material below.
The usage is as below.
1. Food-contact surfaces in public eating places (including food service providing food for
less than 50 persons at a time) : not more than 200㎎/l
2. Dairy-processing equipment : not more than 200㎎/l
3. Food-processing equipment : not more than 200㎎/l
Lactic Acid Preparations
Lactic Acid Preparations should be only used for sanitizing food contact material below. The
usage is as below.
1. Food-contact surfaces in public eating places (including food service providing food for
less than 50 persons at a time)
2. Dairy-processing equipment
3. Food-processing equipment
1542
IV. General Test Methods

1. Gas Chromatography
This method is to identify and quantify the separated phases from an evaporated sample.
The evaporated sample gets separated by the interaction with column filler phase in the
column while is carried by a gas (carrier gas). If the column filler is solid, it is called
gas-solid chromatography. If the column filler consists of inert solid coated with liquid, it is
called gas-liquid chromatography.
In the former case, passing of solution is delayed by absorption or expulsion and for the latter
case, it is done by distribution between gaseous mobile phase and stationary liquid. The
components that affects the separation include the flow rate of carrier gas, length and inside
diameter of column, particle size of solid porous support material, type of liquid used, the
relative volume of liquid vs. solid porous support material, and temperature.
A. Apparatus
Basic equipment for Gas Chromatography consists of carrier gas inlet, sample injection port,
column, detector and data recording equipment.
B. Procedure
Unless stated otherwise, the following method is to be used. After pre-setting measurement
value, column detector temperature and carrier gas flow rate of the carrier gas are set up
by the conditions as specified for each item. A prescribed volume of test solution or
standard solution specified for each item is injected into the sample injection port using a
micro-syringe for gas chromatography. The separated components are collected by a
detector and a chromatogram is obtained using a recorder.
The peak location of the component on chromatogram is indicated by retention time (time
after injecting test solution up to the peak position) or retention volume (retention time x
carrier gas volume). These values are characteristic of each substance under certain
conditions.
These are used to identify the components in the sample
Quantitative information can be obtained from the peak area or peak height from a
chromatogram. Generally, one of the following methods is used.
(1) Internal Standard Method
A set of standard solutions are prepared by incrementally adding a known amount of
standard test material to a certain amount of internal standard material as specified for
each item. A certain amount of each standard solution is injected. A calibration curve is
prepared from the obtained chromatogram by plotting the ratios of peak areas or peak
heights between standard test material and internal standard material (vertical axis) vs. the
ratio between the amounts of standard test material and internal standard or the amount of
standard test material (horizontal axis).
1543
 A test solution is prepared by the method specified for each item. The same amount as in
standard solution is added to the test solution. Then a chromatogram is obtained under the
same conditions as in standard solutions. The amount of the component is obtained from
the ratio of peak area or peak height between the test component and the internal
standard. The internal standard is selected so that it is stable and completely separable
from the test component as well as other components in the test material.
(2) Absolute Calibration Curve Method
A set of standard test solutions are prepared with incremental concentrations. A certain
amount of each solution is precisely injected. A calibration curve is prepared from the
obtained chromatogram by plotting the peak areas or peak heights of the standard test
component (vertical axis) vs. the amount of the standard test component. material and
internal standard or the amount of standard test material (horizontal axis). A test solution
is prepared by the method specified for each item. A chromatogram is obtained under the
same conditions as the calibration curve. The content of the test component is obtained
from the calibration curve. In this method, all the test conditions should be kept strictly
consistent.
(3) Area Percentage Method
The peak area sum of all the components is set as 100. The content ratio of each
component is obtained from peak area ratio. Peak height and peak area in (1), (2), and (3)
are usually measured by the following methods.
(A) Peak Height Method
A vertical line is drawn from the peak vertex to the horizontal axis. A tangent line
connecting the base line of the peak is drawn. The length between the peak vertex and
the intersection is measured.
(B) Peak Area Method
1) Width at half-height method：Peak width at the half maximum is multiplied by the
peak height.
2) Weight Method：The peak is cut out from the chromatogram and weighed directly.
3) Automatic Integration Method：Signals from the detector is integrated using an
automatic integrator.
Note：Reagents and solutions used in the test should not show any peaks that interfere with
the measurement.

1544
 2. Residue on Ignition
Sulfuric acid is added to the sample, which is then heat treated to test the amount of
residues. Unless otherwise specified, 1～2 g of sample is precisely weighed into a previously
weighed platinum, quartz, or porcelain crucible. sample is wetted with sulfuric acid and slowly
reduced to ash by heating. After cooling, 1 mL of sulfuric acid is added to the crucible, which
is then slowly heated until sulfuric acid vapor subsides. Then the crucible is heat treated at
450∼550℃ until the residues turn white. The crucible is cooled in a desiccator and weighed.
If there is no specification for the heat treatment time, it is heated until the weight becomes
constant.

1545
 3. Loss on Drying and Loss on Ignition
This method is used to measure the amount of water content and other volatile material in a
sample upon drying or heat treatment.
A. Loss on Drying
If a sample is a large crystal or lump, it is ground quickly to a diameter of approximately 2
mm or less. Unless otherwise specified, 1～2 g of the ground sample is layed out flatly in a
weighing bottle(which is previously dried for approximately 30 minutes and weighed) to form
a layer of 5 mm or less and dried in a drier without a cap as specified for each sample.
The cap is placed on the bottle, which is then weighed. If it is dried by heating, the weight
is measured after cooling. If the sample melts at a temperature lower than the specified
drying temperature, it is dried for 1～2 hours at a temperature which is 5∼10℃ lower than
the melting point and dried at the specified temperature.
B. Loss on Ignition
Should follow the procedure in loss on drying. Unless otherwise specified, heat treatment
temperature is carried out at 450∼550℃ and platinum, quartz or porcelain crucible is used
instead of weighing bottle.

1546
 4. Refractive Index
Refractive Index of a material is a light velocity ratio within a material vs. in vacuum. It is
the ratio of incident angle vs. refraction angle of the sinusoidal wave of the light. Generally,
refractive index varies with wavelength and temperature. In this test, refractive index (n) is
measured using D (589 nm) from sodium spectrum as a light source at a temperature t℃ in air.
Unless otherwise specified, refractive index is measured using Abbe refractometer at a
temperature within ±0.2℃of the specified temperature.

1547
 5. Methoxyl Determination
This method is to quantitatively analyze methoxyl group by the following procedure. Hydriodic
acid is added to the sample, which generates methyl iodide upon heating. Methyl iodide is
oxidized with bromine, where potassium iodide and diluted sulfuric acid. The resulting iodine is
titrated with sodium thiosulfate solution.
ROCH3 ＋ HI ＝ CH3I ＋ ROH
CH3I ＋ 3Br2 ＋ 3H2O ＝ CH3Br ＋ 5HBr ＋ HIO3
HIO3 ＋ 5HI ＝ 3I2 ＋ 3H2O
A. Apparatus
The apparatus is depicted in the figure below (unit ： mm).

A : flask for decomposition

B : gas inlet tube
C : ground joint
D : air cooling part
E : gas washing part
F : glass stopper
G : round face ground joint
H : gas pipe
J : absorbent tube,
K : gas outlet tube
B. Preparation of Scrubbing Solution and Absorbing Solution
1) Washing solution ： Red phosphor (1 g) is dispersed in 100 mL of water.
2) Absorbent solution ： Potassium acetate (15 g) is dissolved in 150 mL mixture of glacial
1548
 acetic acid and anhydrous acetic acid (9:1), 145 mL of which is mixed with 5 mL of
bromine. This solution is prepared just before use.
C. Procedure
Gas washing part E is filled to 1/2 with washing solution and absorbent tube J is filled with
approximately 20 mL of absorbent solution. sample, which corresponds to approximately 6.5
mg of methoxyl group (CH3O：31.03), is precisely weighed into a flask for decomposition A,
where boiling stone and approximately 6 mL of hydroiodic acid are added. The ground joint
C of A is wetted with 1 drop of hydroiodic acid, connected to an air condenser D, which is
then connected to the round face ground joint G where appropriate amount of silicone grease
is applied. Nitrogen or carbon dioxide is introduced through the gas inlet B. Using an
appropriate regulator, the gas flow rate is adjusted to roughly 2 bubbles per second through
the gas outlet E. A is immersed in an oil bath, which is heated so that it reaches 150℃ in
20～30 minutes. It is then boiled for 60 minutes at that temperature. After removing the oil
bath, it is cooled in air and G is removed. The content in J is transferred into a 500 mL
Erlenmeyer flask (with a stopper) that is filled with 10 mL of sodium acetate solution is (1→
5). J is washed several times with water into the flask. Water is added to bring the total
volume to approximately 200 mL. While shaking, formic acid is drop-wise added until the
red color of bromine disappears and 1 mL of formic acid is added. After adding 3 g of
potassium iodide and 15 mL of dilute sulfuric acid, a cap is placed and the flask is shaken
gently and set aside for 5 minutes. The separated iodine is titrated with 0.1 N sodium
thiosulfate solution (indicator : 1 mL of starch solution). Separately, a blank test is carried
out by following the same procedure.
0.1 N sodium thiosulfate solution 1 mL ＝ 0.5172 mg CH3O

1549
 6. Thin Layer Chromatography
A. Preparation of Thin Layer Plate
A glass plate with smooth surface and uniform thinkness (50×200 mm or 200×200 mm) is
fixed on a thin layer preparation plate. Glass surface is wiped clean with gauze wetted with
alcohol. An appropriate amount of absorbant is well dispersed in water (approximately 1:1)
by shaking for approximately 30 seconds. Using an applicator, the glass plate is uniformLy
coated with the dispersion (0.2～0.3 mm thickness). After setting aside for approximately 10
minutes, it is dried for 30 minutes at 105∼120℃(or follow other directions if specified),
activated, and stored in a desiccator.
B. Procedure
Developing solution is filled up to approximately 10 mm from the bottom of the developing
bath. A cap is placed on the bath so that the bath is saturated with the vapor of the
developing solvent. Test solution and standard solution are spotted at 2 cm from the bottom
of the thin layer plate. These spots are separated approximately 1.5 cm from each other and
their diameter should not exceed 5 mm. Spots are completely dried and the plates are
carefully inserted into the developing bath so that the solvent doesn't touch the spots. The
bath is sealed with a cap and the solvent is developed up to 10～15cm (approximately 15～
60 minutes). The plates are air-dried and oveserved under a UV light (254 nm or 360 nm)
or sunlight. If necessary, a spray reagent is used and the spots are compared. Rf values are
obtained by the following equation.

1550
 7. Quantitative Test for Generated Gas
A. Apparatus
The apparatus is depicted in the figure below (unit：mm).

A ： Thick Erlenmeyer flask for gas generation (approximately 250 mL volume)

B ： Gas burette (300 mL volume with 0.5 mL graduation)
C ： Level bottle (approximately 600 mL volume)
D and E ： Rubber tube
F, G and H ： Rubber stopper
Dilute sulfuric acid is added to a level bottle C so that a weak acidity is established with
methyl orange. However, when ammonia is being measured, distilled water is used instead of
diluted sulfuric acid. After the temperature reaches 85℃ by adding 200 mL of boiling water to
gas generation flask A, 2 g of sample (2 g of sample with a mixing ratio given in the
directions if it is Type 2 synthetic swelling agent) is wrapped in Obrite paper, which is then
again wrapped with a fliter paper. It is then placed in the flask, which is immediately
connected to the gas burette with a rubber tube. The flask is gently shaken occasionally. The
volume of the generating gas is measured in 3 minutes.

1551
 8. Arsenic Limit Test
This method is to test the tolerance level of arsenic contained in a sample. The amount is
expressed by the amount of arsenic trioxide (As2O3).
A. Colorimetry
1) Preparation of Test Solution
The preparation of the test solution is carried out according to the following method.
However, in the case of items not listed in the following items, preparations should be
made with reference to the preparation of similar items.
(1) Method 1
Weigh the amount of sample specified by each of the following items, and unless other wise
stipulated add 5 mL of water. And if necessary, the test solution is prepared by heating and
dissolving.
Items the amount
Disodium 5'-Guanylate, Manganese Citrate, Copper
Gluconate,
L-Glutamine,Manganese
Glycerin, Gluconate, Zinc Gluconate,
Glycine, Sodium Dehydroacetate,
L-Lysine, L-Lysine Monohydrochloride, L-Leucine,
Disodium 5'-Ribonucleotide, D-Ribose, D-Mannitol,
D-Maltitol, Sodium Metaphosphate, Potassium
Metaphosphate, Betaine, DL-Malic Acid, Sodium DL-Malate,
Disodium Dihydrogen
Sorbate, Calcium Pyrophosphate,
Sorbate, D-Sorbitol, L-Serine,
D-SorbitolPotassium
Solution,
Oxalic Acid, Disodium 5'-Cytidylate, L-Arginine,
L-Ascorbate, Aspartame, Sodium Benzoate, DL-Alanine, Sodium
L-Alanine, Erythorbic Acid, Sodium Erythorbate,
Magnesium Chloride, Ammonium Chloride, Potassium
Chloride, Calcium
5’-Inosinate, SodiumChloride, Disodium
Diacetate, Itaconic5'-Uridylate,
Acid, SodiumDisodium 0.25g
Phosphate,
Phosphate, Tribasic, Potassium Phosphate,
Dibasic, Ammonium Phosphate, Tribasic,
Dibasic, Sodium
Potassium Phosphate, Dibasic, Sodium Phosphate,
Monobasic, Ammonium Disodium
Phosphate,DL-Tartrate,
Monobasic, Disodium
Potassium
Phosphate, Monobasic,
L-Tartrate, Sodium Iron Chlorophyllin, Sodium Acetate,
Calcium
Carbonate,Acetate, Ammonium
L-Theanine, Bicarbonate,
L-Threonine, Ammonium
Triacetin, Sodium
Pantothenate, Calcium Pantothenate, Sodium Propionate,
Calcium
Potassium Propionate, L-Proline,
Pyrophosphate, Sodium
Succinic Acid,Pyrophosphate,
Disodium
Succinate, Sulfuric Acid, Magnesium Sulfate, Zinc Sulfate,
Ferrous Sulfate, -Histidine, L-Histidine Monohydrochloride
Sodium sulfate 0.33g
Monosodium L-Glutamate 0.4g
Sodium Polyphosphate, Potassium Polyphosphate 0.5g
Citric
Acetic acid,
AcidTrisodium citrate, Potassium Citrate, Glacial 0.77g
D-Xylose 1g
0.25g
Aluminium Ammonium Sulfate, Aluminium Potassium Sulfate (Taken 200℃, after drying at
4hr)
Glucono-
Potassiumδ-Lactone, GluconicEthylenediaminetetraacetate,
Iodide, Disodium Acid, L-Valine, sucralose, 0.25g, Water 10mL
Calcium Disodium Ethylenediaminetetraacetate, Potassium
1552
 Items the amount
DL-Bitartrate, Potassium L-Bitartrate, Potassium
Bicarbonate, DL-Threonine, Fumaric Acid, Monosodium
Fumarate, Potassium Sulfate
Manganese Sulfate 0.25g, Water 25mL
Phosphoric Acid 0.38g, Water 20mL
Lactitol 0.39g(anhydrous),
Water 20mL
Sodium Lactate 0.77g, Water 10mL
Potassium Gluconate 0.25g, Water 10mL
5mL,
hydrochloric acid Addtowater to and
massthen
up
50 mL,
take 5 mL of it.
fitrate from acid
insolubles test, add
Iron, Electrolytic water to 100 mL,
and mL
thenoftake
it. 25
0.5g,
Add 5 mL of water and
Lactic Acid mix. After mixing
add moreand
10 mL, water
thento
take 5 mL of it.
0.66g,
Phytic Acid Addandwater
then totake10 5mL,
mL
of it.
Propylene Glycol Add water10g,to 200 mL,
and thenof take
it. 5 mL
fitrate fromtest,
insolubles acidadd
Iron, Reduced water to 100 mL,
and then
mL oftakeit. 12.5
(2) Method 2
Add the following amount of items to a crucible made of made of platinum, quartz, or
porcelain. Add 10 mL of magnesium nitrate in ethanol (1 → 50), and heat them with
ethanol to slowly burn it on 450 to 550 ℃ to make it ash. If the hydrocarbon is present,
immerse it in a small amount of nitric acid, heat it again, and then burn it in 450 to 550 ℃
to make it ash. After cooling it down, add 3 mL of hydrochloric acid to the residue, which
is then dissolved by heating in a water bath. And then use it as a test solution.
Items the amount
Gum Ghatti, Persimmon Color, Masticatory Substances,
Cellulose, Microcrystalline, Cinnamic Acid, Kaoliang Color,
Guar Gum, Koji, Silicone Resin, β-Glucanase, Glucomannan,
0.25g
Glucosamine, α-Glucosidase, Glucoamylase, Glucose
Oxidase, Glucose Isomerase, Ferrous Gluconat,
Glutaminase, L-Glutamic Acid, Glycerin Esters of Fatty

1553
 Items the amount
Acids, Laver Color, Natamycin, Dextranase, Dextran
, Copper Chlorophyll, Potassium Copper Chlorophyllin,
Butylated Hydroxy Toluene, 5'-Deaminase,
Diastase(Diastatic Power, DP), Lauric Acid, Lac Color,
Lactase, Lecithin, Rosin, Locust Bean Gum, Rutin,, Lipase,
Tagetes Extract, Maltogenic Amylase, Maltotriohydrolase,
Maltol, Methyl β-Naphthyl Ketone, Methyl Cellulose,
Methyl ethyl cellulose, dl-Menthol, l-Menthol, Gallic Acid,
Propyl Gallate, Hibiscus Color, Mucin, Myristic Acid,
Beeswax, Vanillin, Berries Color, β-Glycosidase, Modified
Hop Extract, Garden Balsam Extract, Butylated Hydroxy
Anisole, Riboflavin 5'-Phosphate Sodium, L-Ascorbic Acid,
dl-α-Tocopherol, Beet Red, Psyllium Seed Gum, Saffron
Color, Cellulase, Sorbitan Esters of Fatty Acids, Sorbic
Acid, Stearic Acid, Calcium Stearate, Sodium Stearoyl
Lactylate, Calcium Stearoyl Lactylate, Spirulina Color,
L-Cystine, Shea Nut Color, Curcumin, Rice Bran Wax,
Adipic Acid, Arabinogalactan, Arabic Gum, Amidated Pectin,
α-Amylase, α-Acetolactate decarboxylase, Calcium
L-Ascorbate, L-Ascorbyl Stearate, L-Ascorbyl Palmitate,
Asparaginase, L-Asparagine, L-Aspartic Acid,
Azodicarbonamide, β-Apo-8'-Carotenal, Annatto Extract,
Benzoic Acid, Potassium Benzoate, Calcium Benzoate,
Alginic Acid, Sodium Alginate, Ammonium Alginate,
Potassium Alginate, Calcium Alginate, Propylene Glycol
Alginate, α-Galactosidase, Alfalfa Extract, Ammonium
Phosphatides, Onion Color, Ester Gum, Ethyl Vanillin, Ethyl
Cellulose, Exo-maltotetrahydrolase, γ-Oryzanol, Sepia
Color, Oleic Acid, Urease, Milk Clotting Enzyme, Liquid
Paraffin, Milt Protein, Isomalt, Ion Exchange Resin,
Invertase, Sandalwood Red, Sucrose Esters of Fatty Acids,
Xylanase, Purple Sweet Potato Color, Maize Morado Color,
Purple Yam Color, Xanthan Gum, Red Radish Color, Red
Cabbage Color, Gellan Gum, Crude Magnesium Chloride(Sea
Water), DL-Tartaric Acid, L-Tartaric Acid, Gibberellic
Acid, Perilla Color, Tea Extract, Tea Catechin, Sesame
Seed Oil Unsaponified Matter, Acetic Acid, Polyvinyl
Acetate, Gardenia Red, Gardenia Blue, Gardenia Yellow,
Carnauba Wax, Carrageenan, β-Carotene, Carotene, Sodium
Carboxymethyl Cellulose, Calcium Carboxymethyl Cellulose,
Sodium Carboxymethyl Starch, Cacao Color, Catalase,
Caffeine
, Capric Acid, Caprylic Acid, Candelilla Wax, Curdlan,
Quercetin, Chlorophyll, Chitosanase, Chitosan, Chitin, Tara
Gum, Tamarind Color, Tannase, tert-Butylhydroquinone,
Tomato Color, d-Tocopherol Concentrate, Mixed,
Tragacanth Gum, Transglucosidase, Transglutaminase,
Trypsin, L-Tyrosine, Methyl p-Hydroxybenzoate, Ethyl
p-Hydroxybenzoate, Oleoresin Paprika, Phaffia Color,
Pancreatin, Palmitic Acid, Furcelleran, Ferulic Acid, Pectin,
Pepsin
, Grape Juice Color, Grape Skin Extract, Grape Seed
Extract, Phosphodiesterase, Phospholipase, Poly-γ-glutamic
acid, ε-Polylysine, Polybutene, Polysorbate 20, Polysorbate
60, Polysorbate 65, Polysorbate 80, Sodium Polyacrylate,
Polyisobutylene, Pullulanase, Protease
, Propionic Acid, Propylene Glycol Esters of Fatty Acids,
Castor oil, Pecan Nut Color, Piperonal, Spice Oleoresins,
Hemicellulase, Hesperidin, Heme Iron, Monascus Color,
Monascus Yellow, Carthamus Red, Carthamus Yellow,
Ammonium Sulfate, Enzymatically Decomposed Lecithin
Licorice Extract, Biotin 0.38g
Naringin, Lactoferrin Concentrates, Microfibrillated 0.5g

1554
 Items the amount
Cellulose, Cellulose, Powdered, Petroleum Wax, Shellac,
Yucca Extract, Inositol, Grapefruit Seed Extract, Koji,
Sodium Caseinate, Calcium Caseinate, Quillaia Extract,
Tamarind Gum, Thaumatin, dl-α-Tocopheryl Acetate,
Pullulan, Enzymatically Modified Rutin, Enzymatically
Modified Stevia, Enzymatically Modified Hesperidine,
Hyaluronic Acid
Nisin, Lysozyme, Food Starch Modified, Steviol Glycoside,
0.77g
Caramel Color, Carmine, Cochineal Extract
Cyclodextrin Syrup, Taurine 1g

(3) Prepare a test solution by using the method specified for each of the following items.
Items Preparation Method
Add 5 mL of dilute hydrochloric acid to 0.25 g of
this item and heat it. After cooling in the ice
Diluted Benzoyl Peroxide water immediately, filter it, was the residue with
15 mL of water, and then use it as a test
solution.
Take 0.25 mL of this item, add water to mass up
to 10 mL. Put it in a platimun crucible, and heat
Hydrogen Peroxide it gently on the water bath to evaporate to dry
up. And put a little bit of water to the residue,
and then use it as a test solution.
Dissolve 0.5 g of this item in the 5 mL of water,
and then add 1 mL of sulfuric acid and 10 mL of
sulfurous acid. And then concentrate by
Ammonium Persulfate evaporation to make it to approximately 2 mL.
After adding water to make it 10 mL, take 5 mL
of it and use it as test solution.
Add 5 mL of water, 1 mL of sulfuric acid and 10
mL of sulfurous acid to 0.5 g of this item, and
Ferric Citrate, concentrate by evaporation to make it to
Ferric Ammonium Citrate approximately 2 mL. Then add water to make it
10 mL, take 5 mL of it and use it as test
solution.
To 0.77 g of this item, add 5 mL of dilute
Calcium Citrate hydrochloric acid and heat it to be dissolved, and
then use it as a test solution.
Take 2.5 g of this item to the 250 mL flask.
After adding 50 mL of 0.5N hydrochloric acid to
it, close with watch glass and slowly heat until
boiling point. After boiling 30 minutes, cool down
Magnesium Silicate, and sink the insoluble materials. Take supernatant
Calcium Silicate and filter with Whatman No.3 filter paper or same
kind of paper. The insoluble materials and beaker
with 10 mL of hot water three times. After
cooling, add 100 mL of water and take 10 mL of
it, and use it as a test solution.
Add 50 mL of dilute hydrochloric acid to 5 g of
this item. Shake it for 15 minutes at 50℃. And
then heat it on the water bath for 1 hour and add
Diatomaceous Earth water if it is evaporated. After cooling, filter it
and wash the residue of filter paper with water,
and add more water to make it 100 mL. Take 2
mL of it and use it as a test solution.
Dissolve 0.25 g of this item with 20 mL of warm
Calcium Gluconate water, and use it as a test solution.

1555
 Items Preparation Method
1.25 g of this item to the flask for
decomposition
Take
, add 10 mL of sulfuric acid and
10mL of nitric acid and heat until white smoke is
generated. When the solution become brown, cool
down and add 2mL of nitric acid and heat it
again.
This operation is repeated until the liquid turns
Disodium Glycyrrhizinate from light to pale yellow. After cooling, 15 mL of
saturated ammonium hydroxide solution is added
and the mixture is heated until white smoke is
generated. After cooling again, water is added to
make 25 mL, and 5 mL of this solution is used as
test solution.

Take 0.2 g of this item and take 5 mL of aqua

regia in a platinum, quartz or porcelain crucible,
Gold Leaf and heat it until white smoke is generated. After
cooling, water is carefully added to make 5 mL,
and this solution is used as the test solution.
0.5 g of this item and 0.3 g of anhydrous sodium
carbonate are placed in a porcelain crucible. 1 mL
of bromine-bromide solution is added, shaken well
and evaporated to dryness in a water bath. After
Sodium Copper Chlorophyllin cooling, add both 2 mL of bromine-hydrochloric
acid solution and water to the residue to make 10
mL, and take 5 mL of this solution as test
solution.

Calcium 5'-Ribonucleotide,
5'-Cytidylic Acid,
5'-Adenylic Acid,
Calcium Phosphate, Tribasic,
Magnesium Phosphate, Dibasic, Dissolve 0.25 g of this item to the 5 mL of
Calcium Phosphate, Dibasic, hydrochloric acid, and use it as a test solution.
Calcium Phosphate, Monobasic,
Magnesium Carbonate,
Calcium Carbonate

Weigh 0.25 g of this item accurately and put it in

a 150 mL beaker. Add 10 mL of water, and add
10 mL of nitric acid and 5 mL of sulfuric acid
carefully. Evaporate to 5 mL in a water bath, and
heat on a soleplate until white smoke is
generated. After cooling, use 10 mL of water to
Sodium metabisulfite wash the wall of the beaker carefully, and then
heat it on a hot plate and cool it until the white
smoke of the sulfuric acid is generated. Wash and
flush with water repeatedly. Cool it down again
and add more water to make 10 mL. Use this
solution as test solution.
Weigh 2.5 g of this item and dissolve it in water
to make 25 mL. Take 5 mL of this solution, add
Potassium Metabisulfite, 1 mL of sulfuric acid in it. And concentrate by
Sodium bisulfite,
Sodium sulfite evaporation to approximately 2 mL, add more
water to make 10 mL, and take 5 mL of this
solution as test solution.
Dissolve 5 g of this item in water, which was
boiled and cool downed, to make 100 mL. Slowly
add hydrochloric acid(1→4) to 5 mL of the test
Sodium Methoxide solution, neutralize, evaporate to dryness in a
water bath. Add 5 mL of water to the residue,
and use this as test solution.

1556
 Items Preparation Method
Take 0.5 g of this item to a 500 mL flask for
decomposition. Add 5 mL of sulfuric acid and 5
mL of nitric acid to the flask and heated, and add
2~3 mL of nitric acid more and continue heating
DL-Methionine, until the solution becomes pale yellow. After
L-Methionine cooling, add 15 mL of saturated ammonium
hydroxide solution and heating concentrate until
white smoke is generated and make it to 2~3 mL.
After cooling, add water to make 10 mL, use 5
mL of this solution as test solution.
Add 5 mL of dilute sulfuric acid to 0.25 g of
Potassium Sorbate. The mixture is heated in a
water bath for 30 minutes. After cooling, the
Morpholine Salts of Fatty Acids precipitated fatty acid is extracted with ether and
the residue is concentrated by evaporation in a
water bath to give a volume of about 5 mL. Use
this as test solution.
Add 5 mL of dilute hydrochloric acid to 0.5 g of
Calcium Sulfate. Shake for 15 minutes, heat it at
70 ℃ and cool down it quickly, and filter. Wash
Kaolin the residue with 5 mL of diluted hydrochloric acid
and 10 mL of water. Add the washed solution to
the filtrate, add water to make 20 mL, and take
10 mL of this solution as test solution.
Add 10 mL of diluted hydrochloric acid to 0.77 g
of this item. Then shake for 15 minutes, heat it
at 70 ° C. Cool down rapidly and then filter.
Wash the residue with 10 mL of diluted
Bentonite hydrochloric acid and 20 mL of water, and add
the washed solution to the filtrate. Then, add
water to make 40 mL, and take 20 mL of this
solution as test solution.
Put 1 g of this item to a flask for decomposition,
and add 20 mL of nitric acid and the heat it
mildly until the contents become a fluid phase.
After cooling, add 5 mL of sulfuric acid and heat
until white smoke is generated. When the solution
still shows brown, cool down and add additional 5
Dry Formed Vitamin A mL of nitric acid. This operation is repeated until
the liquid turns from light to pale yellow. After
cooling, add 15 mL of saturated ammonium
hydroxide solution and heat it again until white
smoke is generated. After cooling, add water to
make 20 mL, and take 5 mL of this solution as
test solution.
Riboflavin This is tested by Arsenic in Coloring matter Test.
Put 1.25 g of Sodium DL-Malate in a flask for
decomposition. Add 10 mL of nitric acid and 5
mL of sulfuric acid and heated. This operation is
repeated until the liquid turns from light to pale
yellow and is heated until white smoke is
Sodium Saccharin generated. After cooling, add 10 mL of water and
15 mL of saturated ammonium hydroxide solution,
and heat again until white smoke is generated.
After cooling, add water to make 25 mL, take 5
mL of this solution and use this as the test
solution.

1557
 Items Preparation Method
After drying in advance, 2.5 g is placed in a 250
mL beaker. Add 100 mL of hydrochloric acid (1→
25) and mix well. Cover with a watch glass and
boil for 15 minutes while stirring to avoid
excessive foaming. The hot supernatant was
filtered at high flow rate into a 200 mL flask.
Acid Clay The residue on the filter paper was rinsed four
times with 25 mL of hot hydrochloric acid (1→
25), the previous filtrate and the washings were
combined and cool down at room temperature.
Add hydrochloric acid(1→25) to make 200 mL,
and take 20 mL of this solution as test solution.
Sodium Aluminium Phosphate,
Acidic, Add 10 mL of hydrochloric acid(1→2) to dissolve
Sodium Aluminium Phosphate, 0.25 g of this item. Add water to make 25 mL,
and use this as test solution.
Basic
Magnesium Oxide, Add 5 mL of hydrochloric acid(1→4) to dissolve
Magnesium Hydroxide 0.25 g of this item, and use this as test solution.
Add 15 mL of diluted hydrochloric acid to
Calcium Oxide dissolve 0.25 g of this item, and use this as test
solution.
Add 30 mL of hydrochloric acid (1 → 2) and 1
mL of nitric acid to 1 g of this item. It is
dissolved by heating. It is concentrated by
evaporation on a water bath to make about 5 mL.
Add 15 mL of water and the filter the mixture.
The insolubles are washed with hot water three
Iron Sesquioxide times. Washings are combined and add 50 mL of
water in it. Take 25 mL of this solution and add
1 mL of sulfuric acid. Concentrate by
evaporatation until white smoke is generated, add
10 mL of sulfurous acid, and evaporate it to
about 2 mL. Then add water to make 5 mL, and
use this as test solution.
Sodium Sesquicarbonate, Add 4 mL of water to dissolve 0.25 g of this
item. Slowly add 2 mL of hydrochloric acid, and
Sodium Bicarbonate use this as test solution.
Dissolve 50 g of Potassium Sorbate in water,
which was boiled and cooled down, to make 250
mL. Use this as test solution. Add 5 mL of water
Sodium hydroxide
to 1.3 mL of this test solution, and neutralize by
slowly adding hydrochloric acid, and use this
solution as test solution.
Add water, which was boiled and cooled down, to
this item. Calculate from the indicated amount and
make up to 20% as sodium hydroxide, and use
Sodium Hydroxide Solution this as test solution. Add 5 mL of water to 1.3
mL of this test solution, neutralize by slowly
adding hydrochloric acid, and use this solution as
test solution.
Ammonium hydroxide, Add 5 mL of water to 0.25 g of this item, add
hydrochloric acid and neutralize. Use this as test
Potassium hydroxide solution.
Calcium Hydroxide,
Ferric Phosphate, Add 5 mL of hydrochloric acid(1→2) to this item,
Ferric Pyrophosphate, and use this as test solution.
Sodium Ferric Pyrophosphate
0.25 g of this item is tested for arsenic in the
Annatto, Water-Soluble dye test.

1558
 Items Preparation Method
1 g of this item is placed in a 100 mL flask for
decomposition, and 5 mL of sulfuric acid and 5
mL of nitric acid are added and heated.
Sometimes, 2-3 mL of nitric acid is added and
heating is continued until the solution becomes
L-Cysteine Monohydrochloride light to pale yellow. After cooling, add 15 mL of
saturated ammonium hydroxide solution and heat
to 2 ~ 3 mL until white smoke is generated.
After cooling, water is added to make 10 mL, and
5 mL of this solution is taken as test solution.
Add 5 mL of water and 1 mL of sulfuric acid to
1 g of this item. Add 10 mL of sulfuric acid,
place in a small beaker. Then heat in a water
Cyclodextrin bath and evaporate to about 2 mL with sulfuric
acid. Add water to make 5 mL, and use this as
test solution.
10 g of this item is placed in a 250 mL beaker.
Add 50 mL of 0.5 N hydrochloric acid. Cover
with a watch glass and heat slowly until boiling.
Subsequently, boil the mixture for 15 minutes,
and cooled down. When the insolubles are settled,
Sodium Silicoaluminate filter the supernatant with Whatman No.4 filter
paper or the equivalent. Wash the insolubles and
the beaker with 10 mL of hot water for 4 times
and filter through the filter paper. Add water to
make 100 mL, and take 2.5 mL of this solution as
test solution.
Dissolve 0.25 g of this item in 5 mL of water.
Add 2 mL of hydrochloric acid and evaporate to
Sodium Nitrite dryness in a water bath. Add 5 mL of water to
the residue to dissolve, and use this solution as
test solution.
The residue of the Erlenmeyer flask obtained in
the nonvolatile material test is dissolved in 2 mL
of aqua regia. Add 250 mL of water, and use this
Chlorine solution as test solution(A). 1 mL of this solution
corresponds to 1 g of Cl2. Take 10 mL of test
solution(A) and dilute with water to make 100
mL. Take 2.5 mL of this solution as test solution.
0.5 g of this item is dissolved in 20 mL of water,
Ferric Chloride and Add 0.2 g of L-ascorbic and dissolve, and
use this as test solution.
Add 30 mL of hot water to 5 g of this item and
mix well. After adding 6 mL of sulfuric acid(1→
Sodium Oleate 20), remove extracted fatty acid with ether
extraction. Add water to residue to make 50 mL.
Take 5 mL of it, and use it as test solution.
After drying, weigh accurately about 10.0 g, add
to a beaker, add 50 mL of 0.5 N hydrochloric
acid, cover the watch, and boil for 15 minutes.
After cooling, transfer to a 100~150 mL
centrifuge tube, centrifuge for 10-15 min. Until
the insoluble material sinks, then filter the
supernatant with filter paper (Whatman No. 4 or
Silicon Dioxide equivalent) and transfer the filtrate to a 100 mL
flask. Add 10~15 mL of hot water to the residue,
mix and centrifuge, and filter the supernatant and
add to the filtrate. This operation is repeated two
more times, and then add to the filtrate. Water is
added to make 100 mL, and 2.5 mL of the
solution is used as test solution.

1559
 Items Preparation Method
Place 10 g of this item in a 250 mL beaker and
add 50 mL of hydrochloric acid (1→20). Cover
the watch, and heat until boiling. Boil more for 15
minutes and then centrifuged to precipitate
insoluble material. Filter the supernatant, and
Titanium Dioxide wash the water 3 times with 10 mL of hot water.
Filter using the same filter paper, wash the used
filter paper with 10~15 mL of hot water, add the
washing solution to the filtrate, add water to
make 100 mL, and use 7.5 mL of this solution as
test solution.
Dissolve 0.25 g of this item in 10 mL of 1 N
L-Isoleucine hydrochloric acid, and use this solution as test
solution.
Place 0.25 g of this item is in a 500 mL flask for
decomposition. Add 5 mL of nitric acid, and heat
the mixture gently. Add 2 to 3 mL of nitric acid
and continue heating until the solution becomes
Xylitol light~pale yellow. After cooling, add 15 mL of
saturated ammonium hydroxide solution and heat
to 2~3 mL until white smoke generated.
Neutralize with ammonia water or ammonia
solution, and use this as test solution.
Place 0.25 g of this item is in a 500 mL flask for
decomposition. Add 5 mL of nitric acid, and heat
the mixture gently. Add 2 to 3 mL of nitric acid
Magnesium L-Lactate, and continue heating until the solution becomes
light~pale yellow. After cooling, add 15 mL of
Potassium Sodium L-Tartrate saturated ammonium hydroxide solution and heat
to 2~3 mL until white smoke generated.
Neutralize with ammonia water or ammonia
solution, and use this as test solution.
Dissolve 0.5 g of this solution in water to make
25 mL. Add 1 mL of sulfuric acid and 10 mL of
Ferrous Lactate sulfurous acid, and concentrate by evaporation to
approximately 2 mL. Add water to make 10 mL.
Take 5 mL of this solution as test solution.
Weigh 1.0 g as Potassium Lactate, dissolve in 10
mL of water. Add 1 mL of sulfuric acid and 10
Potassium Lactate mL of sulfuric acid. Evaporate to 2 mL, and add
water to make 10 mL. Take 5 mL of this solution
as test solution.
Dissolve 0.5 g of this item in 10 mL of water,
add 1 mL of sulfuric acid and 10 mL of sulfuric
Calcium Lactate acid, and concentrate by evaporation to 2 mL.
Add water to make 10 mL. Take 5 mL of this
solution as test solution.
Dissolve 0.25 g of this item in 10 mL of diluted
Magnesium Phosphate, Tribasic hydrochloric acid, and use this solution as the
test solution.

1560
 Items Preparation Method
10 g of this item is placed in a flask and 60 mL
of hydrochloric acid (1→4) is added. The stopper
is sealed and heated to dissolve. About 15 mL of
bromine TS is mixed and heated to neutralize
with excess ammonia solution. 1.5 g of sodium
phosphate are added. Add about 30 mL of the
Gelatin solution and leave it for about 1 hour, then filter
and take the precipitated sediment. It is washed 5
times with 10 mL of mixed liquid of 1 volume of
ammonia solution and 3 volumes of water. The
precipitate is dissolved in hydrochloric acid (1→4)
to make exactly 50 mL, and take 5 mL of this
solution as test solution.
Dissolve 2.5g of this item in 10 mL of water, add
5 mL of hydrochloric acid, and concentrate by
Sodium Nitrate, evaporation to make about 2 mL. Then add 50
mL of water. Add 1 mL of sulfuric acid to 5 mL
Potassium Nitrate of the solution, heat it until white smoke occurs,
cool it down and add 5 mL of water. Use this as
the test solution.
Dissolve 2.5g of this item in 25 mL of water. Add
1 mL of sulfuric acid to 5 mL of the solution.
Sodium Hydrosulfite Then concentrate by evaporation to make about 2
mL. Add water to make 10 mL, and use 5 mL of
it as test solution.
Place 0.25 g of this item in flask for
decomposition. Add 5 mL of sulfuric acid and 5
mL of nitric acid. Then heat the mixture gently.
Add 2~3 mL of nitric acid at a time and continue
Karaya Gum, heating until it becomes light~pale yellow. After
cooling, add 15 mL of saturated ammonium
Tannic Acid hydroxide solution, and concentrate the mixture
by heating to 2~3 mL until the white smoke of
sulfuric acid is generated. The solution is
neutralized with ammonia water or ammonia
solution, and use it as test solution.
Dissolve 0.25 g of this item. in 5 mL of water.
Sodium Carbonate Add 1 mL of sulfuric acid slowly. And use this as
test solution.
Dissolve 1 g of this item in 10 mL of water, and
add 2 mL of sulfuric acid slowly. Then add water
Potassium Carbonate, Anhydrous to make 20 mL and use 5 mL of it as test
solution.
Weigh 0.25 g this item, add 5 mL of hydrochloric
acid (1→4) and shake well. Then heat it slowly
until it boils. Cool down quickly and filter. Wash
Talc the residue with 5 mL of hydrochloric acid (1→4)
and then with 10 mL of water. Add the solution
to the filtrate, and use this solution as test
solution.
DL-Tryptophan, Dissolve 0.25 g of this item in a mixture of 3 mL
of 1 N hydrochloric acid and 2 mL of water by
L-Tryptophan heating. Then use this as test solution.
Add 5 mL of diluted hydrochloric acid to the 5 g
of this item. And shake for 15 minutes at about
50 ℃, heat in a water bath for one hour while
adding water by replenishing the evaporated
Perlite water. Cool down and filter it. Wash the residue
on the filter paper with water, combine it with
the filtrate. Add water to make 100 mL, and take
2 mL of this to use as test solution.

1561
 Items Preparation Method
Dissolve 0.25 g of this item in 10 mL of 2 N
L-Phenylalanine
hydrochloric acid, and use it as test solution.
Place 0.25 g of this item to the digestion flask.
Add 5 mL of sulfuric acid and 5 mL of nitric acid
. The mixture is heated gently. Add 2~3 mL of
nitric acid at a time and continue heating until
light~pale yellow occurs. After cooling, add 15
Polydextrose mL of saturated ammonium hydroxide solution and
heat to 2~3 mL until dark white smoke appears.
Then neutralize it with ammonia water or
ammonia solution, and use this solution as test
solution.
Dissolve 1 g of this item by heating with 10 mL
of water and 10 mL of sulfuric acid. After
cooling, add 30 mL of water to the solution,
which is then filtered through a 100 mL flask.
Ferrous Fumarate The precipitate is washed with water and the
washed solution is combined with the filtrate to
make 100 mL. Take 25 mL of the solution and
use it as test solution.
Take 12.5 mL of a test solution and evaporate
for drying in a water bath. Add 5 mL of water, 1
mL of sulfuric acid and 10 mL of sulfurous acid,
Active Carbon and concentrate by evaporation to about 2 mL in
a water bath. Add water to make it 5 mL, and
use it as test solution.
Dissolve 0.25 g of this item in 5 mL of water.
Add 2 mL of acetic acid and 1.5 g of potassium
Cupric Sulfate iodide, and allows it to stand for 5 minutes. Then,
Dissolve by adding 0.2 g of L-ascorbic acid, and
use it as test solution.
Add 1 mL of Hydrochloric Acid and 30 mL of
water to 1 g of this item. Dissolve by heating in
Calcium Sulfate a water bath, add water to make 40 mL, and take
10 mL of this solution as the test solution.
Place 2 g of this item in a 500 mL flask for
decomposition. Add 20 mL of water and 30 mL of
nitric acid, and mix well and heat it slowly. After
cooling, add 10 mL of sulfuric acid and heat it
again adding 2~3 mL of nitric acid as needed
until the solution becomes pale yellow. After
cooling, add 75 mL of water and 25 mL of
saturated ammonium hydroxide solution, and heat
it until white smoke of sulfuric acid occurs. After
cooling, add about 50 mL of water, and neutralize
with ammonia water or ammonia solution while
Yeast cooling. If necessary, evaporate it to less than
100 mL and add water to make exact 100 mL.
Take 20 mL of this solution and use it as test
solution. However, the standard color of dry yeast
is obtained by with 5 mL of arsenic standard
solution and 20 mL of the test solution. the
standard color of raw yeast is obtained by taking
6 mL of arsenic standard solution and using the
same method. The standard color of liquid yeast
is obtained by taking 3 mL of arsenic standard
solution and using the same method.

1562
 Items Preparation Method
Place 0.5 g of this item in a flask for
decomposition, and add 5 mL of sulfuric acid and
5 mL of nitric acid. And the mixture is heated
gently. Again, add 2~3 mL of nitric acid at a time
Enzymatically Decomposed Apple and continue heating until light~pale yellow
appears. After cooling, add 15 mL of saturated
Extract ammonium hydroxide solution, and concentrate by
heating to 2~3 mL until the white smoke of
sulfuric acid is generated. The solution is
neutralized with ammonia water or ammonia
solution and use it as test solution.
1. Solid Alkali Additions for Noodles Preparations
Dissolve 10 g of this item in water to make it
200 mL and make it A-liquid. Neutralize 5 mL of
A solution with dilute hydrochloric acid and use it
as a test solution.
2. Diluted/Powdered Alkali Additions for Noodles
Preparations
Take 5 g of this item into a decomposition flask
and apply 15 mL of sulfuric acid and 40 mL of
Alkali Additives for Noodles nitric acid to heat it until white smoke occurs. If
the liquid shows brown color, cool it down and
Preparations add 5 mL of nitric acid to heat it until the liquid
turns pale yellow. Cool it down, then apply 15 mL
of a saturated ammonium hydroxide solution and
heat it again until white smoke occurs. Cool it
down and add water to make 50 mL and make it
B-liquid. 4 mL of B solution shall be suitable for
testing in accordance with the arsenic test
method(2.5 ppm or less). However, for the
standard color, 12.5 mL of an arsenic standard
solution is taken and processed as in the case of
samples.
Put 2.5 g of this item into a 100 mL flask and add
10 mL of water to heat it until the bubble stops,
neutralize it with dilute hydrochloric acid or
sodium hydroxide, and add 5 mL of hydrochloric
acid to heat it for 30 minutes in the bath, cool it
down, and add water to 25 mL. To 5 mL of this
Baking Powder Preparations solution, add 10 mL of sulfuric acid and
evaporating until it becoems about 2 mL. Add
water to 10 mL, and use it as test solution of 5
mL in accordance with a arsenic test method. It
shall be suitable. However, when neutralizing with
ammonia water or ammonia solution, adjust the
pH to 2.5∼3.5 (not more than 4 ppm).

1563
 Items Preparation Method
Preparation of a test solution: When burning a
small sample and burning it, make it according to
Act 1 and if not, make it according to Act 2.
Act 1: Put 2 g of samples into a 500 mL
decomposition flask and add 20 mL of water and
30 mL of nitric acid and slowly heat it, and cool it
down. Then, add 10 mL of sulfuric acid to reheat.
If necessary, add 2∼3 mL each of nitric acid to
heat them until liquid becomes colorless~light
yellow. Cool it down and add 75 mL of water and
25 mL of a saturated ammonium hydroxide solution
to heat it until white smoke of sulfuric acid occurs.
Mixed preparations
After cooling down, cool it down by adding about
50 mL of water and neutralize it with ammonia
water or ammonia solution. If necessary, evaporate
it to 100 mL or less, and add water to make it
exact 100 mL.
Act 2: Add 10 mL of nitric acid to 2 g of sample,
and heat it in a bath for 15 minutes. After cooling
down, add 20 mL of water and filter it. Wash the
residuals on the filter with 20 mL of water and add
up. Neutralize with ammonia water or ammonia
solution and evaporate it to 100 mL or less, then
add water to make exact 100 mL.

2) Apparatus
The apparatus is depicted in the figure below (unit：mm).

A ： approximately 60 mL generator bottle with 40 mL indicating line.

B ： glass tube with 6.5 mm inner diameter
1564
 C and D ： a ground joint glass tube with 6.5 mm inner diameter and 18 mm outer
diameter at the joint. Inner joint and the outer joint forms a concentric circle.
E ： rubber stopper
F ： narrow part of the glass tube B. Glass wool is inserted up to this part.
G ： rubber board
H ： clamp
The glass tube B is filled with glass wool up to the height of approximately 30 mm from F
and soaked uniformLy with a 1:1 mixture of water and lead acetate solution. Then, the solution
is sucked in from the bottom of the tube. The excess liquid in the wool and the glass wall is
removed.
Right before the use of apparatus, a mercuric bromide test paper is inserted in the joint of the
glass tubes C and D. Both tubes are secured with a clamp.
3) Procedure
Unless otherwise specified, a required amount of test solution is transferred into the
generator bottle and, if necessary, it is neutralized with ammonia water or ammonia solution.
Then, 5 mL of diluted hydrochloric acid (1→2) and 5 mL of potassium iodide solution are
added, which is set aside for 2～3 minutes. To this solution, 5 mL of stannous chloride
solution is added, which is set aside for 10 minutes. Water is added to bring the total
volume to 40 mL, where 2 g of granular zinc. The glass tubes, B, C, and D are inserted into
the rubber stopper, which is then placed on the generator bottle. The bottle is immersed (up
to approximately 3/4 of its height) in a water bath at 25℃ and kept for 1 hour.
4) Preparation of Color Standard
Unless otherwise stated, 1 mL of arsenic standard solution or the amount corresponding to
the specifications is transferred into the generator bottle. The same procedure described
above is followed.
5) Arsenic Limit
The procedures in 2) and 3) should be simultaneously followed and at least two sets of
apparatus should be used. Right after the test, the mercuric bromide test paper is taken out
and the colorimetry is carried out while avoiding direct sunlight. Here, the resulting color in
B should not be darker than that in C. If the colors obtained from the same procedure are
different, the test should be repeated.
6) Notice on Procedure
(1) The test solution used in this test or the solution used to make the test solution should
not be involved in color reaction at all in the test.
(2) To ensure that the generated gas does not leak at all, the joints, where the mercuric
bromide test paper is inserted, should be kept tight.
(3) The color of the mercuric bromide test paper fades by the exposure to light, heat and
moisture. Therefore, colorimetry should be carried out immediately. The discoloration can
be avoided temporarily by storing the paper in a desiccator.
B. Analysis method
1) Preparations of test solution
1565
(1) Wet decomposition method
Place 5~10 g of the sample into a flask for decomposition. Add 50~70 mL of water and
10~40 mL of nitric acid, and mix and leave for a while. Then, after the reaction is done
while heating the mixture, cool it down and add 5~20 mL of sulfuric acid and heat it
again. When the content starts to boil, add 2~3 mL of nitric acid at a time and continue
heating. When the contents become yellow to colorless, it is assumed that the
decomposition is finished. After cooling the decomposed solution, add 30~50 mL of water
and 10~25 mL of saturated ammonium hydroxide solution, and heat it until white smoke
of sulfuric acid occurs. Then cool it down and add water to make it a certain amount and
set as a test solution. Perform the same procedure for the black test solution to correct
the test solution. The standard solution is also diluted in the blank test solution described
above.
(2) Microwave method
Add 0.5 mL of the sample to a Microwave digestion system, add 7 mL of nitric acid and
1 mL of 30% hydrogen peroxide, and decompose as heating. Transfer it to a volumetric
flask or the like and set a certain amount (depending on the amount of sample taken). Or
perform the same procedure for the black test solution to calibrate the test solution. The
standard solution is also diluted in the blank test solution described above.
In the case of insoluble materials such as acid clay, kaolin, bentonite, talc, diatomaceous
earth and magnesium carbonate, 0.5 g of the sample is precisely weighed and placed
carefully so as not to touch the wall of the microwave container made of quartz or
tetrafluoromethane. 7 mL of nitric acid, 2 mL of hydrochloric acid, and 1 mL of sulfuric
acid are treated and decomposed. After cooling to room temperature, they are transferred
to a volumetric flask, and water is added to make 50 mL. Separately, the same procedure
for the black test solution is performed to calibrate the test solution. The standard
solution is also diluted in the blank test solution described above.
(3) Solvent extraction method
This test method can be applied to products with high concentrations of inorganic salts.
A) Reagent
(A) MIBK (Methyl isobutyl ketone) or chloroform
(B) Not containing DDTC (diethyl dithiocarbamic acid), silver
B) Test operation
Take 10~50 mL of test solution and blank test solution, respectively in a separatory
funnel, add 2~10 mL of 25% ammonium citrate solution and 2 drops of bromothymol blue
(BTB) solution. Neutralize with ammonia water until the color of the solution turns from
yellow to pale green, and add 2~10 mL of 40% ammonium sulfate TS and water to make
a certain amount. Add 1~5 mL of 10% DDTC solution and shake. Add 20 mL of MIBK
(or chloroform), shake vigorously and leave it for a while. Take a MIBK (or chloroform)
layer. Repeat the above procedure with 20 mL of MIBK (or chloroform) and combine the
filtrates. Heat the dispersion to 80 ℃ on a hot plate, blow off all the solvent, add 7 mL
of hydrogen peroxide and 1 mL of hydrogen peroxide to the residue, heat it again on
the hot plate, and completely decompose and dry. The residue is redissolved in 1 N
1566
 nitric acid solution, and use it as test solution. Standard solutions are also obtained by
the same procedure.
2) Automic Absorption Spectrophotometry
A) Arsenic standard solution
Prepare arsenic trioxide(As2O3) followed by arsenic standard of V. 4. Standard solution.
However, if a commercially available arsenic standard solution is used, it should be
converted to arsenic trioxide(As2O3).
B) Test operation
After preparing above test solution, follow 18. Automic Absorption Sepctrophotometry.
3) Inductively Coupled Plasma(ICP)
A) Arsenic standard solution
Prepare arsenic trioxide(As2O3) followed by arsenic standard of V. 4. Standard solution.
However, if a commercially available arsenic standard solution is used, it should be
onverted to arsenic trioxide(As2O3).
B) Test operation
After preparing above test solution, follow 19. Arsenic standard solution(When measuring
the mass value of a target element in a salt-rich food additive, the disturbance factor is
removed through the reaction gas (NH3, O2, He, CH4 gas, etc.) in order to reduce the amount
error by the medium.

4) Automic Absorption Spectrophotometry or Inductively Coupled Plasma(Reduced vaporization

method)
A) Analysis Principle
The absorbance and the luminous intensity of the test solution are measured using a
reducing gasifier.
B) Reagents and test solution
① Potassium iodide(KI)
② Sodium borohydride(NaBH4)
③ Sodium hydroxide(NaOH)
④ Hydrochloric acid(HCl)
⑤ Arsenic standard solution : Prepare arsenic trioxide(As2O3) followed by arsenic standard
of V. 4. Standard solution. However, if a commercially available arsenic standard
solution is used, it should be converted to arsenic trioxide(As2O3).
다) Test operation
Dilute the test solution with 1% nitric acid. 3 g of potassium iodide was added to the
test solution and the blank test solution, and the mixture was allowed to stand for 1
hour. Then, the test solution and blank test solution, 1: 1 hydrochloric acid, 0.6~1.0%
sodium borohydride solution and 0.1~0.5% sodium hydroxide solution were injected into
a reductive vaporizer. Then, the absorbance and luminous intensity of arsenic are
measured.
1567
 9. Boiling Point and Amount of Distillate
Method 1
A. Apparatus
The apparatus is depicted in the figures (1～4) below (unit：mm).

A : Distillation Flask(It is made of hard glass with the capacity of about 300 mL. Refer to
figure 2.)
B : Cooling Tube(It is made of hard glass. See the figure 4)
C : Adapter (refer to figure 3)
D : volumetric cylinder (100 mL with 1 mL graduation)
E : Support (It is a metal cylinder with several ventilation holes and it can control the
flame of the burner. At the top of the support, two asbestos plates, which are
approximately 6 mm thick and have a 30∼40 mm circular hole at the center, are
1568
 placed.)
F ： Burner
G ： Thermometer
H ： Auxiliary Thermometer (The mercury column should be located at the center of the
mercury reservoir.)
I ： Wind Protector
J ： Cork stopper
Glass apparatus should be completely dried. The end of the adaptor (C) should be in touch
the wall of the volumetric cylinder (D). Boiling stone or capillary tube is added to the
distillation flask (A). The top of the flask and the separation tube are insulated with asbestos
wool.
B. Procedure
With a volumentric cylinder (D), 100 mL of the test solution is measured into a distillation
flask (A). This volumetric cylinder does not have to be washed and it can be used as a
receiving vessel. Once the apparatus is set up, water is circulated through the cooling tube,
the distillation flask is heated, and the distillation is carried out for 10 minutes. Heating is
adjusted so that 4～5 mL of distillate is collected per 1 minute. Unless otherwise specified,
the boiling point range is determined such that the lowest is when the fifth drop of the
distillate is collected and the highest is when the last drop of liquid evaporates from the
bottom of the distillation flask. The correction for the exposed part of the thermometer and
atmospheric pressure is done by the following equation.
Correction for the exposed part of the thermometer
T1 ＝ t ＋ 0.00015(t－t1)n
T1 : corrected temperature of the exposed part of the thermometer
t : temperature of thermometer
t1 : temperature of auxiliary thermometer
n : number of degrees of mercury column located at the exposed part of the thermometer
Correction for the atmospheric pressure
T ＝ T1 ＋ 0.00012(760－P)(273＋ T1)
T ： corrected temperature
P ： pressure when the test is carried out
For the distillate that flows out at the temperature of 80℃, the sample is cooled to below 1
5℃ before the test and 100 mL of the liquid is used as a sample for the test. A piece of
paper is cut to fit into the end of the adaptor and used as the cover of the volumetric
cylinder, which is immersed in a water bath at 15℃ or lower up to the 100 mL mark. Then
1569
 the amount of distillate is recorded at the same temperature at which the sample is
extracted.
Method 2
This method is used to measure the amount of distillate in liquid at distillation temperature
of 170℃ or lower.
A. Apparatus
The apparatus is depicted in the figures (1～5) below (unit：mm).

A : Distillation flask (It is made of hard glass with the capacity of about 200 mL. See the
figure 2.)
B : Separation tube (It is made of hard glass and about 1 mm thick. See the figure 3)
C : Cooling tube (It is made of hard glass. See the figure 4.)
D : Adapter (It is made of hard glass. See the figure 5.)
E : Volumetric cylinder (100 mL with 1 mL graduation)
F : Support (Same as Method 1)
G : Burner
H : Thermometer
I: Auxiliary thermometer (The mercury column should be located at the center of the
mercury reservoir.)
J : Cork stopper
Glass apparatus should be completely dried. The end of the adaptor (D should be in touch the
1570
wall of the volumetric cylinder (E). Boiling stone or capillary tube is added to the distillation
flask (A). The distillation flask and the separation tube (B) (except for the side arm) are
insulated with glass wool.
B. Procedure
Should follow the procedure in Method 1.
However, the flow rate is kept at 3∼4 mL per minute.

1571
 10. Specific Gravity
Specific gravity is defined as the ratio of the mass of the sample to the mass of an equal volume
of the standard material. In this specification, the specific gravity means the means the ratio
of the weight of the sample to that of an equal volume of water at t'℃ and t℃. Unless otherwise
specified, the specific gravity (d) means the ratio of the weight of the sample to that of an
equal volume of water at 20℃, and is determined by one of the following methods.
A. Measurement by Pycnometer
A pycnometer is a container made of glass with a capacity of usually 10 to 100 mL. It has a
ground, glass stopper fitted with a thermometer, and has a side tube with a mark and a
ground glass cap. A pycnometer is previously washed, dried, and weighed (W). After
removing the stopper and the cap, the pycnometer is completely filled with a sample, which
is then kept at 1∼3℃ lower than the specified temperature. The cap is placed while
carefully preventing formation of bubbles. The temperature is gradually raised until the
thermometer shows the specified temperature. The excess sample above the mark is
removed through the side arm, which is then capped and wiped clean on the outside. It is
then weighed (W1). Again, using the same specific gravity bottle, the same procedure is
repeated with distilled water. It is then weighed (W2). Specific gravity (d) is obtained by the
following equation.

B. Measurement by Mohr-Westphal Balance

While maintaining the balance horizontal, a glass weight, where a thermometer is inserted, is
hung at the right end of the scale bar. The glass weight is immersed in distilled water in a
cylinder. The biggest rider is hung at the mark 10, and the balance is leveled by adjusting
the screw at a specified temperature. The same procedure is repeated with the sample and
the specific gravity is recorded at the position of rider when the balance is leveled. The
liquid level should be adjusted so that the length of the metal needle submerged in the liquid
is the same as that in distilled water case.
C. Measurement by Hydrometer
A hydrometer with a required precision at a specified temperature is used. The hydrometer
is cleaned with alcohol or ether. After well mixing the sample by shaking, the hydrometer is
floated after bubbles disappear. At a specified temperature, the specific gravity is recorded
from the top of the meniscus when the hydrometer is stationary. However, if the reading
directions are provided for the hydrometer, those should be followed.
D. Measurement by Sprengel-Ostwald Pycnometer

1572
 A Sprengel-Ostwald pycnometer is a vessel made of glass with a capacity of usually 1 to 10
mL. As shown in the figure 1, both the ends are thick-walled fine tubes (A), one of which
has a mark (C). A platinum or an aluminium wire (D) is hung at this mark. Previously cleaned
and dried pycnometer is weighed (W). Another fine tube (B) that has no marks is immersed in
the sample, which is kept at a temperature 3 ～ 5℃ lower than the specified temperature. A
rubber tube or a ground fine tube is attached at the end of the other tube (A), and the
sample is gently sucked in until it comes up above the mark C, while preventing formation of
bubbles. The pycnometer is immersed in a water bath, which is kept at a specified
temperature for about 15 minutes. The end of the fine tube (B) is blocked with a piece of
filter paper and the sample front is brought up to the mark. Then, the apparatus is removed
from the water bath, wiped clean, and weighed (W1). The same procedure is repeated using
the same pycnometer and distilled water (instead of the sample) and it is weighed (W2).
Specific gravity (d) is obtained by the following equation.

1573
 11. Optical Specific Rotation
Specific rotation of an optically activated material and it solution are expressed by the
equation (1) and (2), respectively. The symbol + and - denote dextrorotatory (right) and
levorotatory(left), respectively. The symbol ° is attached to upper right of a number
representing the degree.

․․․․․․․․․․․․․․․(1)

․․․․․․․․․․․․․(2)
α ： Corrected angular rotation, in degrees
l ： Path length of the liquid (dm)
d ： Specific gravity
ｃ ： Smount of sample (g) in 100 mL solution
Optical rotation and specific rotation are determined with the specific monochromatic light
x (expressed by wavelength or the name of the light source) at a temperature t℃. Unless otherwise
specified, it is measured under the conditions of temperature at 20℃, path length of 100 mm, and
the D line (589.0 and 589.6 nm) in sodium spectrum

1574
 12. Water Determination (Karl Fischer Method)
The determination of water is based upon the quantitative reaction of water with iodine and
sulfur dioxide under the presence of pyridine and an methyl alcohol as shown in the reactions
below.
H2O＋I2＋SO2＋3C5H5N → 2(C5H5N＋H)I-＋C5H5N SO3
C5H5N SO3＋CH3OH → (C5H5N＋H)O-SO2․ O ․CH3
A. Apparatus
It usually consists of two automatic burettes, a titration flask, and a stirrer. If necessary, an
electronic device is used to determine the end point. Karl-Fischer solution is highly
hygroscopic, therefore, moisture absorption from outside should be prevented. Silica gel,
phosphorus pentoxide, or granular calcium chloride is used to prevent moisture absorption.
B. Reagent and Test Solution
∘Karl Fischer Methyl Alcohol: Magnesium powder (5 g) is added to 1,000 mL of methyl
alcohol, which is heated using a reflux condenser with a calcium chloride tube. If
necessary, the reaction is accelerated by adding 0.1 g of mercuric chloride. When the
generation of bubbles stops, methyl alcohol is distilled while avoiding introduction of
moisture. The amount of moisture is kept at less than 0.5 mg per 1 mL. Moisture should
be avoided for storage.
∘Karl Fischer Pyridine: Potassium hydroxide or barium oxide is added to pyridine. The
container is capped with a stopper, which is then set aside several days. It is then
distilled and the distillate is stored in a moisture free environment. Then distill and store
by avoiding atmospheric moisture. The amount of moisture is kept at less than 1 mg per
1 mL. It is stored in a moisture free environment.
∘Karl Fisher solution
(A) Preparation ： Iodine (63 g) is dissolved in 100 mL of Karl-Fischer pyridine, which is
cooled in an ice bath. Dry sulfur dioxide passed through until its weight reaches 32.3
g, where Karl-Fischer methyl alcohol is added to bring the total volume to 500 mL. It
is then set aside for 24 hours. Since the solution degrades with time, it should be
standardized right before use. It should be stored in a dark, moisture-free, and cool
place.
(B) Standardization ： 25 mL of Karl Fischer methyl alcohol are transferred into a titration
flask, which is heated until the color of the solution changes from yellow to reddish
brown. Exactly 50 mg of water is added to this solution, which is heated immediately.
While avoiding moisture, the solution is titrated with the Karl Fischer solution to the
endpoint, where the same color change occurs as above. 1 milliliter of Karl-Fischer
solution corresponds to f mg of water (H2O).
f ＝ Amount of water(H2O)(mg)

1575
 Titrated volume of the Karl Fisher solution(mL)

∘Standard solution of water and methyl alcohol

(A) Preparation ： Karl Fischer Methyl alcohol (500 mL) is transferred into a 1,000 mL
flask, where 2 mL of water and Karl Fischer methyl alcohol are added so that the
total amount reaches 1,000 mL. The solution should be standardized right after the
standardization of the Karl Fischer solution. It should be stored in a dark,
moisture-free, and cool place with a small temperature variation.
(B) Standardization ： As describred in (5), 20 mL of Water-Methyl Alcohol Solution are
transferred into a titration flask and titrated with the Karl Fischer solution until the
color of the solution changes from yellow to reddish brown. One milliliter of
Water-Methyl Alcohol Solution corresponds to f' mg of water (H2O).

f × Titrated volume of the Karl Fisher solution(mL)

f ′＝
Volume of standardization(mL)
In principle, the titration using Karl Fischer solution should be carried out at the same
temperature as its standardization temperature. If the sample is not colored, the endpoint can
be determined visually. In this case, the point, where the solution becomes reddish brown
changing from yellow (vice versa in case of back titration) in color, is the endpoint. If the
sample is colored, the endpoint is determined electrically (Dend Stop End Point Method). In
this case, two platinum electrodes are immersed in the solution to be titrated, and a constant
current (5～10 μA) is applied to the solution using a variable resistor. Then Karl Fischer
solution is drop-wise added. As the titration proceeds, the needle of the microammeter starts
to swing vigorously and after a few seconds it comes back to its starting position. When the
titration reaches the endpoint, the microampere meter swings even more vigorously (50～150 μ
A) for 30 seconds or longer. At this point, the titration is considered to be at the endpoint. In
case of back titration, the needle of the microampere meter immediately returns back to its
starting position at the end point under the presence of excess amount of Karl-Fischer
solution. An apparatus with the Magic Eye can be used in replace of microampere meter.
Unless otherwise directed, the titration with the Karl Fischer solution can be carried out by
one of the following two methods. Normally, back titration is preferable in case of electrical
method. The f of the Karl Fischer solution decreases with time. Precisely 20 mL of
Water-Methyl Alcohol standard solution is titrated by following the standardization procedure
of Water-Methyl Alcohol standard solution and f is obtained by the following equation.
f ′ × Volume of standardization(mL)
f ＝
Titrated volume of the Karl Fisher solution(mL)

(A) Direct Titration : Karl Fischer Methyl alcohol (25 mL) is placed in a dried titration flask,
which is then titrated with the Karl Fischer solution to the endpoint. A precisely measured
amount (preferably containing 10 to 50 mg of water) of sample is quickly transferred into
1576
 the titration flask, which is stirred vigorously and then titrated again to the end point.
Titrated volume of the Karl Fisher solution(mL) ×
Water content(%) ＝ f × 100
sample(mg)

(B) Back Titration : Approximately 20 mL of Karl Fischer methyl alcohol is placed in a

titration flask, where an excess amount of Karl Fischer solution is added to the end point
while stirring vigorously. to the endpoint. A precisely measured amount (preferably
containing 10 to 50 mg of water) of sample is quickly transferred into the titration flask,
which is stirred vigorously with an excess amount of Karl-Fischer solution and then
titrated with water-methyl alcohol standard solution to the end point.
Water (Titrated volume of the Karl Fisher solution(mL) × f) - (Volume of standardization(mL))
content = × f′ × 100
(%) sample(mg)

1577
 13. Paper Chromatography
Method 1
A. Apparatus

The apparatus is depicted in the figures below (unit：mm).

A : cylindrical glass vessel
B : chromatography filter
C : position of reference solution
D : position of test solution
E : developing solvent
F : rubber or glass stopper
B. Procedure
With a pencil, a straight line is drawn at approximately 40 mm from the bottom edge of the
chromatography paper (B). On this line, a specified amount of the test solution and the
reference solution are spotted with a micro pipette or a capillary and dried, where these
solutions are prepared as specified for each item. The spots should be approximately 25 mm
apart from each other. Using a thread or needle, the filter paper is hung vertically on the
stopper (F) in a cylindrical glass vessel
(A) that contains a specified developing solvent (E) without touching the wall of the vessel.
The filter paper is immersed approximately up to 10 mm from bottom edge in the solvent.
The vessel is sealed and set aside. When the solvent front reaches a specified distance from
the spots, the paper is removed from the vessel and dried. The positions and colors of the
developed spots from the test and reference solutions are observed under natural sunlight
and then UV light. If necessary, it is colorized by the specified method.
1578
Method 2
A. Apparatus

The apparatus is depicted in the figures below (unit：mm).

A : circular chromatography paper (diameter 120∼130 mm)
B : cylindrical filter paper (Thimble Filter)
C : developing solvent
D : petridish
E : glass hermetical container
F : glass tube
B. Procedure
At the center of a circular chromatography paper (A), a circle with 10 mm radius is drawn
with a pencil. On this line, a specified amount of the test solution and the reference
solution are spotted with a micro pipette or a capillary and dried, where these solutions are
prepared as specified for each item. The total number of the spots should be 6～8 and they
should be apart at the same interval along the circle. A hole with 5 mm diameter punched
out at the center of the chromatography paper, where the cylindrical filter paper (Thimble
Filter) (B) is inserted. The circular chromatography paper (A) is placed on top of a petri
dish (D) with a developing solvent (C) so that the cylindrical filter paper (Thimble Filter) is
submerged into the solvent up to approximately 5 mm from the bottom. It is then set aside
in a hermetical container. When the solvent front reaches a specified distance, the
chromatography paper is removed from the container and dried in air. The same procedure
as in Method 1 is followed.
Method 3
A. Apparatus

1579
 The apparatus is depicted in the figures below (unit：mm).
A : a box made of hard synthetic resin
B : developing container made of hard resin (50x30x230)
C : chromatography paper
D & E：glass plate (70×220)
F : developing solvent
G : position for test solution or reference solution
H : cover
B. Procedure
Chromatography paper is cut to 200 mm width and 400 mm length. A parallel line is drawn
with a pencil at 50 mm from the short side. On this line, a specified amount of the test
solution and the reference solution are spotted with a micro pipette or a capillary and dried
in air. The spots should be approximately 25 mm apart from each other. This paper is
sandwiched with two glass plates (D & E) so that the paper is exposed up to 40 mm from
the bottom (i.e. 10 mm from the line is covered with glass plate). The glass plates are
placed in a container (B) with a specified developing solvent (F), which is then set aside in
a hermetical box (A). When the solvent front reaches a specified distance, the paper is
removed from the box and dried in air. The same procedure as in Method 1 is followed.
C. Rf
The position of the test solution or the reference solution in Method 1 or 3 is A, and the
solvent front is B. The center of the developed spot is C from the test solution or the
reference solution. The ratio of fronts (Rf) is obtained from the following equation.
Distance between AC
Rf ＝
Distance between AB

Rf is a characteristic value for a material under the same conditions such as the developing
1580
temperature, the properties of chromatography paper, and the choice of developing solvent.

1581
 14. Softening Point Measurement
A. Apparatus
It is depicted in figure 1.

A : iron ball (diameter 9.5 mm, weight 3.5 g)

B : a round brass plate, figure 2 (unit：mm).
C : metallic round support plate (approximately 80 mm× 60 mm× 2 mm), which has a hole
(I) at the center for mercury reservoir for a thermometer and 4 fix holes (H) for a
round plate around the center hole. The distance between the edge of I and the center
of H is 17 mm or less.
D : bottom plate (approximately 80 mm× 60 mm× 2 mm) with 40 convection holes (J).
E : settling plate (approximately 126 mm× 28 mm× 2 mm)
F : thermometer (mercury type)
G : beaker (inner diameter 85 mm or higher, height 127 mm or higher)
H : fix hole in the circular plate (diameter 19 mm)
I : hole for mercury reservoir (diameter 2 mm)
J : convection hole (diameter approximately 4 mm)
K1 & K2 : supporting pole
The distance from the bottom of E to the top of B is 80 mm or longer. The distance from
the bottom of B to the top of D is 25.4 ± 0.2 mm. The distance from the bottom of D to the
bottom of G is 20∼30 mm. The center of mercury reservoir of the thermometer (F) should
be at the same level of the bottom of B.
B. Procedure
Place a round plate (B) on a plucked metal plate and put enough samples and melt them quickly
at low temperatures as possible taking care not to create bubbles. Cool down the round plate
molten the sample, then cut off the inflated part from the plane, including the top of the round
plate, with a small knife that is slightly heated.
Freshly boiled and cooled water is poored into the beaker (G) (over 90 mm in depth) and the
water is kept at 15∼35℃. At the center of the sample surface in the round plate, the iron ball
1582
(A) is placed and the plate is inserted into the fixing hole (H). The distance between the top of
the round plate and the water surface is kept at 50 ± 2 mm. After 15～20 minutes, heating is
started. The source of heat such as burner flame, is adjusted so that it is uniformLy distributed
from the center to the edge of beaker bottom.
In 3 minutes of heating, the rising rate is maintained at 5 ± 0.5℃ per minute. The softening point
is where the sample softens, gets dropped from the round plate, and finally contact with the
bottom plate. For each measurement, 4 round plates are used and at least 2 measurements are
done. An average value is obtained.

1583
 15. Flame Coloration Test

Platinum wire used for this test has a diameter of approximately 0.8 mm. Its straight tip is
used as it is. If the sample is solid, a small amount of hydrochloric acid is added to make it
into a paste, a small amount of which is stained to approximately 5 mm from the tip of the
platinum wire. While keeping the wire horizontal as shown in the figure, it is tested in a
colorless flame. If the sample is liquid, the platinum wire is dipped into the sample up to 5 mm
from the tip. It is then tested by following the same procedure as the solid sample. When
potassium in a sodium salt is tested, the flame is observed using a cobalt glass. Frame color
reaction persists approximately for 4 seconds

1584
 16. Test Methods for Chloride and Sulfate Salts
This method is used to test the allowed limit of chlorides or sulfates in a sample
A. Chloride Limit Test
Unless otherwise specified, a specified amount of sample is dissolved in approximately 30
mL of water in a Nestler tube. If the solution is alkaline, it is neutralized with dilute nitric
acid and then 6 mL of dilute nitric acid is added. It is then diluted with water to 50 mL. If it
is specified to use a test solution, it is diluted to 50 mL with dilute nitric acid 6 mL and
water in a Nestler tube. In another Nestler tube, a specified amount of 0.01 N hydrochloric
acid is added, where 6 mL of nitric acid and water are added to bring the total volume to
50 mL. If the solution is not clear, both solutions are filtered under the same conditions. To
both solutions, 1 mL each of silver nitrate solution is added and well mixed. While avoiding
the direct sunlight, the mixtures are set aside for 5 minutes. Both tubes are compared in
terms of turbidity with a black background.
B. Sulfate Limit Test
Unless otherwise specified, a specified amount of sample is dissolved in approximately 30
mL of water in a Nestler tube. If the solution is alkaline, it is neutralized with dilute
hydrochloric acid and then 1 mL of dilute hydrochloric acid is added. It is then diluted with
water to 50 mL. If it is specified to use a test solution, it is diluted to 50 mL with water in
a Nestler tube. In another Nestler tube, a specified amount of 0.01N sulfuric acid is added,
where 1 mL of hydrochloric acid and water are added to bring the total volume to 50 mL. If
the solution is not clear, both solutions are filtered under the same conditions. To both
solutions, 2 mL each of barim chloride solution is added, well mixed, and set aside 10
minutes. Both tubes are compared in terms of turbidity with a black background.

1585
 17. Thermometers
Generally, Needle shape thermometer (stick shape) or mercury thermometer (stick shape) is
used after correction. However, for congealing point, melting point, boiling point, and
distillation range, Needle shape thermometer (stick shape) is used. Specifications for needle
shape thermometer (stick shape) are as follow.
No.1 No.2 No.3 No.4 No.5 No.6
liquid mercury mercury mercury mercury mercury mercury
filling gas nitrogen nitrogen nitrogen nitrogen nitrogen nitrogen
temperature range -17～5 0℃
40～10
0℃
90～15
0℃
140～20
0℃
190～25
0℃
240～32
0℃
smallest tick 0.2℃ 0.2℃ 0.2℃ 0.2℃ 0.2℃ 0.2℃
major tick (per) 1℃ 1℃ 1℃ 1℃ 1℃ 1℃
tick label (per) 2℃ 2℃ 2℃ 2℃ 2℃ 2℃
length(mm) 280～300 280～300 280～300 280～300 280～300 280～300
diameter of lower 6.0℃ 6.0℃ 6.0℃ 6.0℃±0.1 6.0℃±0.1 6.0℃±0.1
body (mm) ±0.1 ±0.1 ±0.1
length of mercury 12～15 12～15 12～15 12～15 12～15 12～15
reservoir (mm)
distance
bottom offrom the
mercury
reservoir to the 75～90 75～90 75～90 75～90 75～90 75～90
lowest tick (mm)
distance from theticktop
to the highest
(mm) 35～50 35～50 35～50 35～50 35～50 35～50
distanceoffrom
bottom the
mercury
reservoir to 60 60 60 60 60 60
submerge line (mm)
handle shape ring ring ring ring ring ring
allowed error 0.2℃ 0.2℃ 0.2℃ 0.2℃ 0.2℃ 0.2℃

1586
 18. Atomic Absorption Spectrophotometry
Metal atom is dissociated from a test solution by an appropriate method into an atomic
vapor. Use ground state absorbs specific wavelengths from light, using a Spectrophotometric
method, an absorbance is measured and from this absorbance a concentration of the target
element is obtained. There are two methods in atomizing a metal, Flame Type and Cold Vapor
Type.
A. Apparatus
Generally, it consists of light source, atomization part, spectrometer, and photometer. Light
source is used a hollow cathode lamp or a discharge lamp. There are two types for an
atomization part, Flame Type (direct vaporizer) and Cold Vapor Type. Cold Vapor Type is
further divided into reductive evaporation and thermal evaporation. Flame type of atomizer
consists of a burner and a gas flow regulator. Reductive evaporator consists of a hermetic
container and a pump. Thermal evaporator consists of a quartz dish and a heater. A
spectrometer is used a diffraction grid or a prism. Photometer consists of a detector and an
indicating instrument.
B. Preparation of Test solution
Unless specified sample weight in the monograph, 5∼10g of sample is accurately weighed
into crucible or platinum plate, dried, carbonized, and reduced to ash at 450～550℃. If it
isn't reduced to ash, cool it. As ashing supplement, 2~5 mL of nitric acid(1→2) or 50%
magnesium nitrate solution or aluminum nitrate ․ calcium nitrate solution (40 g of aluminum
nitrate and 20 of calcium nitrate are dissolved in 100 mL of water) are added, wetted, dried,
and continued ashing. If ashing is not enough, repeat above process one time. If necessary,
2∼5 mL of nitric acid(1→2) is added and reduced to ash, lastly. After being reduced to
ash, the residue is wet with water, and 2~4 mL of hydrochloric acid is added and
evaporated to dryness. Specified solvents for each test method (1N hydrochloric acid for tin,
0.5 N nitric acid for other metals) are added, heated, and dissolved. Filter with filter paper if
insoluble substances exist. Unless specified solvent, 0.5 N nitric acid is added to make
25mL, test solution. However, for tin, nitrate or nitric acid should not be used as ashing
complement. For other metals, they are used only if they don't affect test procedure.
Proceed under the same manner for blank test solution to correct test solution.
C. Procedure
Unless otherwise specified, a test solution is prepared by a specified procedure for each
item and tested by one of the following methods.
(1) Flame Type
A specified lamp is used as a light source. The lamp is switched on. The spectrometer is
adjusted to the specified wavelength to be analyzed and an appropriate current setting is
established. A specified mixture of combustible and support gases is ignited. Gas flow
rate and pressure are adjusted. Zero point correction is carried out by sparying a solvent
into the flame. A test solution prepared by a specified procedure is sprayed into the
flame and its absorption is measured.
(2) Cold Vapor Type
1587
 A specified lamp is used as a light source. The lamp is switched on. The spectrometer is
adjusted to the specified wavelength to be analyzed and an appropriate current setting is
established. In case of a reductive evaporator, a test solution is placed in a hermetic
container with an appropriate reducing agent and evaporated. In case of a thermal
evaporator, a sample is evaporated by heating. Absorption by this atomic vapor is
measured.
D. Assay
Usually, one of the following methods is followed. For a quantitative analysis, interference
and blank correction (background) should be considered.
(1) Calibration Curve Method
3 or more standard solutions having different concentration are prepared. A calibration
curve is prepared from the absorption measurements of these solutions. A test solution
having a measurable concentration is prepared and its absorption is measured. The
concentration of the target atom is obtained from the calibration curve.
(2) Standard Material Method
Standard solution is incrementally added to a set of (at least 3) test solutions having the
same amount. Solvent is added to each solution so that the total volume is identical.
Absorption of each solution is measured. Absorption is plotted against the standard
element concentration. The concentration of the test element is obtained from the
distance between the origin and the intersection between the extrapolated regression line
and the horizontal axis. However, this method is only valid when the calibration curve in
(1) is a straight line that passes through the origin.
(3) Internal Standard Method
Standard solution is added to a certain amount of internal standard element so that a
known amount of standard test element is contained incrementally. Then, solvent is added
to each solution so that the total volume is identical. Absorption of each solution is
measured. Absorption ratio is plotted against the added standard element concentration.
The same amount of internal standard element is added to a test solution. The ratio
between absorption by the test element (obtained by the same conditions as in calibration
curve) and the internal standard element is obtained. Using this ratio, the concentration of
test element is obtained from the calibration curve.
Note ： Reagent and Test Solution should not interfere with the measurement.

1588
 19. Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy
A. Apparatus
Generally, it consists of excitation source part, sample injection port, light emission part,
spectrometer, photometer, an indication and recording part. Excitation source part is
composed of an electric power source, a control system, and circuit to supply and control
the electric energy which excites and emits an element in a sample. This part also includes
gas supply system and cooling apparatus. The sample injection port is composed of a
nebulizer and a spray chamber. The light emission part is composed of a torch tube and a
high-frequency induction coil. The spectroscope part is composed of a light-converging
system and a spectroscope such as a diffracting grating. The photometry part is composed
of a detector and a signal processing system. The indication and recording part is composed
of a display and a recording device. The ICP-atomic emission spectrometry includes
single-element-sequential-type- and multiple-element-sequential-type-measuring methods
using a wavelength scanning spectroscope, and a simultanneously measuring method using a
wavelength-fixed-type polychrometer.
B. Preparation of Test Solution
Unless specified sample preparation in the monograph, proceed as directed under preparation
of test solution(na) in Atomic Absorption Spectrophotometry.
C. Procedure
Confirm that all live parts are normal. Switch on the excitation source part and the control
system. When a vacuum-type spectroscope is used to measure the emission line in
vacuum-ultraviolet region, purge sufficiently the light-path between the light emission part
and the spectroscope with argon or nitrogen gas for 10 minutes. Set the flow rate for argon
or nitrogen gas to the specified rate, switch on the high frequency power supply, and
generate the plasma. Correct the wavelength of spectroscope with the emission spectral line
of a mercury lamp. Introduce the test solution and the standard solution or control solution
prepared as specified in the individual monograph and measure the emission intensity of an
appropriate emission line of the object element.
D. Assay
Usually, the determination is done using one of the following methods. In the determination,
the interference and blank correction (background) should be corrected.
(1) Calibration Curve Method
Prepare standard solutions of three or more different concentrations, measure the
emission intensities of these standard solutions, and prepare a calibration curve from the
obtained values. Then, measure the emission intensity for the test solution with a
concentration adjusted to a measurable range, and determine the amount(concentration) of
the object element from the calibration curve.
(2) Standard Addition Method
To equal volumes of three or more test solutions, add to each the standard solution so
that the stepwise increasing amounts of the object element are contained in the solutions,
and add the solvent to make a definite volume. Measure the emission intensity for each
1589
 solution, and plot the amounts(concentrations) of added standard object element on the
abscissa and the emission intensities on the ordinate on the graph. Extend the calibration
curve obtained by linking the plots, and determine the amount (concentration) of object
element from the distance between the origin and the intersecting point of the calibration
curve on the abscissa. This method is applicable only when the calibration curve drawn
as directed in section (1) above is a straight line passing through the origin.
(3) Internal Standard Method
Prepare several solutions containing a constant amount of the specified internal standard
element, and known graded amounts of the standard object element. For these solutions,
measure the emission intensities of the standard object element and internal standard
element at the analytical wavelength of each element under the same measuring
conditions, and obtain the ratios of each emission intensity of standard object element to
the emission intensity of the internal standard element. Prepare a calibration curve by
plotting the amounts (concentrations) of standard element on the abscissa and the ratios
of emission intensity on the ordinate. Then, prepare the test solutions, adding the same
amount of internal standard element as in the standard solution. Proceed under the same
conditions as for preparing the calibration curve, obtain the ratio of the emission intensity
of standard object element to that of internal standard element, and determine the amount
(concentration) of the object element from the calibration curve.
Note ： For this test, avoid the use of reagents, test solutions, and gases which interfere
with the determination.

1590
 20. Mercury Test
Unless specified test in the individual monograph, proceed under one of the following
methods.
A. Cold Vapor Atomic Absorption Spectrophotometry
1) Apparatus
(1) Atomic Absorption Spectrometer : quartz absorption cell is attached
(2) Lamp : Hollow cathode mercury lamp
(3) Mercury vapor apparatus
2) Solution
(1) Stannous chloride solution : 10 g of stannous chloride dihydrate (SnCl2․2H2O) is dissolved
in 1N sulfuric acid to make 1,000mL.
(2) Mercury standard solution
0.135 g of mercury (ll) chloride is dissolved in 100 mL of 10% nitric acid and water is added
to make 1,000 mL. When using, this solution is 1.000 times diluted with 1% nitric acid, standard
solution. Also, standard solutions on the market may also be used, and use it by dilution with
0.001% L-cysteine solution.
Mercury standard solution 1mL = 0.1 μg Hg
3) Preparation of Test solution
Unless specified test in the individual monograph, 5～10g of sample is transferred into a
flask for decomposition. 10 mL of water and 20 mL of nitric acid are added, shaken slowly
and 20 mL of sulfuric acid is slowly added. A reflex condenser is attached to the flask,
which is boiled until brown smoke is not generated. When the solution doesn't become
colorless∼light yellow transparent solution, 5 mL of nitric acid is added after cooling, and
repeat the process above. After cooling, 50 mL of water and 10 mL of 10% urea solution
area added and boiled for 10 minutes. It is cooled, 1 g of potassium permanganate is added,
occasionally shaken for 10 minutes, and allow to stand. Repeat this until purple-pink color
remains. After boiling for 20 minutes, purple-pink color is discharged, then cool it. 1 g of
potassium permanganate is added and heated for 20 minutes again. When purple-pink color
of the solution is discharged, repeat 2 times adding and heating of potassium permanganate,
and cooled. Add 20 % hydroxylamine hydrochloride solution carefully until the solution
becomes colorless and transparent. After cooling, the decomposed solution is transferred to
another flask and inside, connecting part of a reflex condenser and a flask for
decomposition are washed with water. Rinsing water is added to this, make a certain
amount with water, test solution.

1591
 Example of mercury decomposition apparatus
4) Procedure
100 mL each of test solution and blank test solution whose concentration of sulfuric acid is
previously adjusted to 20%(v/v) is taken to test solution bottle. After being connected to
vapor apparatus, 10 mL of stannous chloride solution is added, and immediately, stopper is
placed. Absorbance is measured at 253.7 nm by circulating air in absorption cell using
diaphram pump. Separately, water is added to 1, 5, 10, 15, 20mL each of mercury standard
solution to make 100 mL, respectively. Standard solution proceed in the same manner as
test solution and calibration curve is prepared by measuring absorbance. Absorbance of test
solution is substituted to the calibration curve and the content of mercury is calculated.
B. Gold amalgam Atomic Absorption Spectrophotometry
1) Apparatus
Use mercury measurement apparatus, which automatizes combustion of sample, collection by
gold amalgam, and measurement by cold vapor Atomic Absorption Spectrophotometry. Mercury
measurement apparatus whose a special catalyst is set on the combustion part, can be used.
2) Reagent and Solution
(1) Mercury standard stock solution : 0.135g of mercury (ll) chloride is dissolved in 0.001%
L-cysteine solution to make 1,000mL.
Mercury standard stock solution 1mL = 100μg Hg
(2) Mercury standard solution : Undiluted mercury standard solution is diluted with 0.001%
L-cysteine solution to make 0～200 ng/mL. Also, standard solutions on the market may also be
used, and use it by dilution with 0.001% L-cysteine solution.
(3) Additives : When using (a) aluminum oxide and (b) calcium hydroxide ․ sodium
carbonate(1:1), activate for 30 minutes at 950℃.
3) Procedure
Approximately 1 g of additive (a) is uniformly spread on ceramic boat and in case of solid
sample, 10∼300 mg of finely cut and homogenized sample is taken. In case of liquid sample, 0.1
∼0.5 mL of sample is completely infiltrated into additive (a). On that, about 0.5 g of additive (a)
1592
and 1 g of additive (b) are uniformLy spread in turn to form the layer. In case of automatic
mercury measurement apparatus whose a special catalyst is set on the combustion part, additive is not
added to nickel boat and only sample is taken. Boat is transferred into combustion furnace and air or
oxygen is flowed about the rate of 0.5～1l/min. It is heated about 900℃, mercury is spilled, and
collected in collection tube. Collection tube is heated about 700℃, mercury vapor is sent to cold
vapor Atomic Absorption Spectrophotometry apparatus and absorbance is measured, A. Separately,
absorbance is measured in the same manner with additive on ceramic boat, Ab. Separately, calibration
curve is prepared from absorbance, which is obtained by same preparation using mercury standard
solution. Value of A - Ab is substituted to calibration curve and the content of mercury in sample is
calculated.

1593
 21. Assay for Alkali Salt of Organic Acid
Unless otherwise specified, sample (corresponding to approximately 0.3 g of sodium) is
precisely weighed into a quartz or platinum crucible with 20～30 mm diameter. It is slowly
heated initially, then continuously ramped up, and completely carbonized for approximately 2
hours. The crucible turns dark red at the heating temperature (300∼400℃). Care must be
taken so that the burner flame should not touch the carbonized material. After cooling,
carbonized material is crushed with a glass rod and transferred into a beaker along with the
crucible. Approximately 50 mL of water is added to the beaker, where 50 mL of 0.5 N sulfuric
acid is added. The beaker is covered with a watch glass and heated for 1 hour in a water
bath. The content is filtered. If the filtrate is colored, sample is taken freshly and carbonized
sufficiently. Residues on the beaker, crucible, and filter paper are washed well with warm
water until the wash water does not turn a blue litmus paper red. The wash water is added to
the filtrate. The excess acid is titrated with 0.5 N sodium hydroxide solution (indicator : 3
drops of methyl red solution). A 1 mL equivalent is multiplied to the amount of consumed acid
to obtain the amount of salts in the sample.
This method is not to be applied for the alkali salts of organic acids that contains sulfur or
halogens.

1594
 22. Melting Point
Melting Point means the temperature at which or within the range of which a
solid completely melts and is determined by an appropriate one of the methods given
below. For convenience of measurement, solids are classified into the following two
types
Class 1 substances ： easily powdered material
Class 2 substances ： fat, fatty acids, paraffin, a material that is very difficult to be
powdered
A. Procedure for Cass 1 Substances
(1) Apparatus
The apparatus is depicted in the figures below (unit：mm).

A : Round bottom flask for melting point measurement

B : Following solutions are used.
Measurement for 220℃ or below : Cupric sulfate
Measurement for 200～300℃ : Sulfuric acid and potassium sulfate (7:3 in weight) are
dissolved by stirring and heating.
C : Thermometer
D : Auxiliary thermometer
E : Capillary (inner diameter approximately 1mm, length 50～70mm, one end is blocked)
F : Ventilation hole
(2) Procedure
sample is finely ground into powder and, unless otherwise specified, dried for
approximately 24 hours in a desiccator (sulfuric acid). It is packed into a capillary (E) up
to a thickness of 2.5～3.5 mm. If it is specified to be tested in a sealed container, the
1595
 open end is sealed. The capillary is attached to the side of a thermometer so that the
sample layer is located at the center of the mercury bulb. The thermometer is placed and
fixed at the center of a round bottom flask (A) for melting point measurement with a cork
or rubber stopper. An auxiliary thermometer (D) is placed so that the center of its
mercury reservoir is located at the middle position between the solution surface and the
mercury level of thermometer at the melting point (t). An appropriate thermometer is used
depending on the measuring temperature range. When the apparatus is set up, the solution
is heated to a temperature that is approximately 10℃ lower than the expected melting
point. Ramping rate is set to 3℃ per minute up to a temperature that is approximately 5℃
lower than the expected melting point. Then it is set to 1℃ per minute. The temperature,
where the contact part between inner wall of the capillary and the sample becomes damp
or the sample crumbles, is recorded as the beginning of melting point. The temperature,
where the sample melts completely and becomes transparent, is recorded as the end of
melting point.
Correction for the exposed part of thermometer is done by the following equation.
T ＝ t ＋ 0.00015(t－t')n
T : corrected temperature
t : temperature reading by the thermometer
t' : temperature reading by the auxiliary thermometer
t" : If there is not marks in the thermometer at the solution surface, the temperature is
read by inserting externally.
n : degrees in the exposed thermometer part (t - t")
B. Procedure for Cass 2 Substances
A sample is melted at a lowest possible temperature and it is sucked into a capillary up to
approximately 10 mm. This capillary is cooled for approximately 24 hours at 10℃ or lower,
or for at least 2 hours in an ice bath. The capillary is tied to the thermometer so that the
sample is located at center of the mercury reservoir. It is then submerged into a beaker
with water so that the top of the sample is approximately 10 mm below the water surface.
While stirring continuously, the water is heated at a rate of increase of approximately 1℃
per 2 minutes until the temperature reaches a point approximately 5℃ below the expected
melting point. The melting point is where the sample floats within the capillary.

1596
 23. Congealing Point
A. Solid at Room Temperature

<figure 1>
(1) Apparatus
The apparatus is outlined in figure 1.
A : Test tube (inner diameter approximately 22 mm, length approximately 160 mm)
B : Large test tube (inner diameter approximately 33 mm, length approximately 150 mm)
C : Stirring pole (diameter approximately 1～3 mm)
D : Cooling bath, water or ice is used and the temperature is kept at approximately 5℃
lower than the congealing point.
E : Wooden cover
F & G : Thermometer
H : Auxiliary thermometer
I & J : Cork stopper
(2) Procedure
Approximately 20 g of sample is placed in a well dried test tube (A), where a thermometer
(F) an auxiliary thermometer (H), and a stirring pole (C) are set up using a cork stopper.
Mercury bulb of the thermometer (F) is positioned slightly lower than the center of the
sample and that of the auxiliary thermometer (H) is positioned at the middle between the
surface of the sample and the temperature reading at the congealing point by the
thermometer (F). sample in test tube (A) is completely melted in a water or sulfuric acid
bath at a temperature that is approximately 10℃ higher than the expected congealing
point. The melted sample is transferred into a large test tube (B), which is then
submerged into a cooling bath (D).It is stirred with a stirring pole at the rate of 1 time for
2 seconds. In the beginning, the temperature falls slowly. The temperature slightly rises as
crystallization starts and remains constant for a while. The temperature reading at this
point is corrected for the exposed part of the thermometer by the following equation. This
1597
 corrected temperature is congealing point.

T ＝ t ＋ 0.00015(t - t')n
T : Corrected temperature
t : Temperature reading by thermometer
t' : Temperature reading by auxiliary thermometer
n : The number of degrees in the exposed part of the thermometer
If there are significant amount of impurities in the sample, the congealing point curve shows
a shape as depicted in figure B, C, or D (not figure A). In figure B and D, the intersection
of extrapolated lines for solid and liquid phases is the congealing point. In figure C, the
method in figure A is followed. In any cases, the correction for the exposed part should be
done.
B. Liquid at Room Temperature
(1) Apparatus
The apparatus is outlined in figure 2.

1598
 <figure 2>
A : Test tube (inner diameter approximately 22 mm, length approximately 160 mm)
B : Large test tube (inner diameter approximately 33 mm, length approximately 160 mm)
C : Stirring pole (diameter approximately 1～3 mm)
D : Cooling bath, water or ice is used and the temperature is kept at approximately 5℃
lower than the congealing point.
E : Container for cooling bath, metallic container with insulation material (F)
F : Insulation material
G : Wooden cover
H, I, J, & K : Cork stopper
L & M : Thermometer
N : Auxiliary thermometer
(2) Procedure
Should follow the same procedure for solid material with approximately 20 mL of sample.

1599
 24. Infrared Spectrophotometry
This method is used to qualitatively or quantitatively analyzing a sample based on the fact
that a material shows a characteristic absorption pattern depending on its chemical structure in
infrared absorption spectrum in a range of 4,000～667 cm-1. Infrared beam is passed through a
sample and an absorption is measured at each wavenumber. A spectrum is plotted as a graph
with wavenumbers on the abscissa and transmittance(%) or absorption on ordinate.
A. Apparatus and Procedure
Double beam infrared spectrophotometer is set up in a clean room, where the humidity is
kept at 50% and lower and vibration is kept minimal. The ideal room temperature is 20∼2
5℃. The linearity of the absorption should be within ± 1% in a transmittance(%) range of 20
∼80% and the transmittance(%) is measured twice and its reproducibility should be within ±
0.5%. The reproducibility of wavenumber should be within ± 5 cm-1 near 3,000 cm-1 and
within ± 1 cm-1 near 1,000 cm-1, respectively. When a polystyrene film (approximately 0.03
m in thickness) is used, it is adjusted so that the absorptions occur at the wave numbers as
shown in the following figure.

B. Preparation of sample
A sample is prepared so that the transmittance% for the strongest absorption band falls
within 20∼80%. Sodium chloride, potassium bromide, or potassium bromide iodine (K2BrI) is
used as a window plate material.
(1) Potassium Bromide Disk Method
In a quartz mortar, 1∼2 mg of solid sample and 100∼200 mg of potassium bromide (IR
spectroscopy grade) are quickly ground and mixed into fine powder while preventing
moisture absorption. The mixture is then palletized under a reduced pressure of 5 mmHg
using a dry press by applying a pressure of 5∼10 t/cm2 against the pallet face for 5～8
minutes.
(2) Solution Method
Solid or liquid sample is dissolved in a solvent specified for each item. The solution is
injected into a liquid cell. The same solvent is injected into a correction cell. The
1600
 thickness of liquid cell is 0.1 mm or 0.5 mm.
(3) Paste Method
Solid sample is finely ground and mixed with fluid paraffin in a mortar. The paste is
inserted between two window plates. Care must be taken so that air is not introduced into
the assembly.
(4) Liquid Film Method
Liquid layer, that is formed with 1～2 drops of liquid sample between two window plates,
is measured. If it is necessary to have thicker liquid layer, Aluminum foil is inserted
between two window plates to increase the path length.
(5) Thin Film Method
Sample is dissolved in a specified solvent for each item. A window plate is coated with
this solution. The solvent is dried off with a heat gun. The remaining thin film of the
sample is measured. If the sample is in a form of film with a thickness of 0.02 mm or
less, it is measured directly.
(6) Gas Sample Measurement
A gas cell with a path length of 5∼10 cm is evacuated and filled with a sample up to a
pressure specified for each item. If necessary, a gas cell with 1 m or longer can be used.

1601
 25. Viscosity
1. Viscosity measurement by capillary tube viscometer
The unit of viscosity is the Centistokes (cSt) and the viscosity is measured with the
following Ubbelohde viscometer or Cannon Ubbelohde viscometer.
A. Apparatus
The apparatus is depicted in the figures below (unit：mm).

A, B & C ： Tube part

D, E & F ： Spherical part
G, H, I & J ： Marking line
K ： Capillary
The relation between the inside diameter of capillary and the measurable range of the
viscosity is as follows.
Inner Diameter Viscosity Range
0.56∼0.60 2∼10
0.75∼0.79 6∼30
0.85∼0.89 10∼50
1.07∼1.13 20∼100
1.40∼1.46 60∼300
1.66∼1.67 100∼500
1.92∼1.98 200∼1,000
1602
 2.63∼2.71 600∼3,000
3.01∼3.11 1,000∼5,000
3.58∼3.66 2,000∼10,000
B. Procedure
A sample is placed in a tube A, preventing the formation of bubbles in the sample solution.
When the viscometer stands vertically, the surface of the liquid sample should be placed in
the middle between the marking line G and H of the spherical part D. Then the viscometer
is immersed into an isothermal water bath at a specified temperature until the spherical part
F of a tube B is fully submerged under water and fixed vertically. It is then set aside for 20
minutes until the temperature of the sample reaches the specified temperature. With the tube
C covered with a finger, the sample is sucked in through the tube B until the sample surface
reaches the center of spherical part F. Then the tube C is opened and tube B is closed with
a finger. When the sample in the lower part of the capillary drops, the tube B is opened and
the time (t) taken for the meniscus to move from I to J is measured (in 0.1 seconds). For a
set of measurements (2 or more), an average value is obtained and its difference form
individual measurement should not be more than 0.1% at 16℃ or higher and not be more
than 0.5% at 16℃ or lower. Viscosity is obtained by the following equation.
V = Kt (cSt)
where K is the viscometer constant, which is obtained from the same operation with distilled
water or a standard solution of which viscose is already known. The temperature where K is
attained may differ from the temperature where the viscosity of the sample is measured. If t
is less than 200, a measurement is repeated using a viscometer with a capillary, which has a
smaller inner diameter r of the capillary is smaller.
2. Viscosity measurement by rotational viscometer
A. Apparatus
-Viscometer ： Model LVP Brookfield or its equivalent (which can measure over 25～10,000 cps
at 25℃) is used. It comes with a set of spindles to be used for different range of viscosity. For
Model LVP Brookfield, spin and speed are as follows.
range(cps) spindle No. speed (rpm) scale factor
10～100 1 60 100 1
100～200 1 30 100 2
200～1,000 2 30 100 10
1,000～4,000 3 30 100 40
4,000～10,000 4 30 100 200
-Stirrer : As shown in figure 1, the stirrer is equipped with a stirring pole and a variable
speed controller which can go up to 1,500 rpm.
1603
 (Note: AH Thomas Co Catalogue No. 9240-K with a stainless-propeller of 1℃-1/2 inch 3
blade type may be used)
-Container for a sample : A glass container with 13.3 mm in depth, 60 mm in outer
diameter and 236 mL in volume is used.

<figure 1>
B. Procedure
4 g of sample (or a specified amount for each item) is placed in the container with a known
weight, where water is added to bring the total weight to 400 g. The blade of the stirring
pole is positioned in the middle of the liquid, which is stirred at 800 ± 100 rpm. After 1.5 hours,
the speed is adjusted appropriately so that air is not introduced and it is stirred for 30 minutes.
After removing the stirring bar, the temperature of the sample is maintained at 25℃in an
isothermal water bath of 25 ± 0.2℃, unless otherwise specified. An appropriate spindle
and speed are selected and the spindle is spun until the reading becomes constant. The
viscosity is calculated by multiplying the coefficient in the table above with viscosity reading.

1604
 26. Heavy Metal Limit Test
This is a method to determine the allowable total limit of metallic impurities contained in a
sample by colorizing of a test solution with sodium sulfate solution. The allowed limit of the
metallic component is expressed in the equivalent color and indicated in the amount of the lead
in the standard reference solution (ppm of sample).
∘Lead Standard Stock Solution : After dissolving 159.8 mg of lead nitrate in 10 mL of dilute
nitric acid, the solution is diluted to 1000 mL with water. For the preparation and
storage of this solution, a glass container that does not contain soluble lead salts should
be used
∘Lead Standard Solution : 10 mL of lead standard stock solution is diluted to 100 mL with
water. This solution is prepared before use and contains 0.01 mg per 1 mL. For
example, when 1 g of sample is tested using 1.5 mL of lead standard solution as a
reference, the sample contains 15ppm of lead.
Procedure
Unless otherwise specified, a specified amount of sample is placed in a Nestler tube and
dissolved in approximately 40 mL of water. The total volume is brought up to 50 mL with 2
mL of dilute acetic acid and water. Separately, an amount of lead standard solution
(equivalent to the specified allowed limit) is dilute to 50 mL with 2 mL of dilute acetic acid
and water in a Nesler tube. After adding 2 drops each of sodium sulfate solution to each
tube, well mixing, and setting aside for 5 minutes, both tubes are observed for color
comparison with a white background.

1605
 27. Nitrogen Determination
A. Kjeldahl Method
(1) Apparatus
The apparatus is depicted in the figures below (unit：mm).
Ground joints may be used.

A : flask for decomposition (hard glass with 500～800

mL)
B : glass tube
C : funnel for addition of alkaline solution
D : rubber tube (there is a pinch cork at the connection
between B & C)
E : Wagner tube
F : distillation tube
G : condenser
H : absorption flask (capacity : about 300 mL)
(2) Procedure
Unless otherwise specified, an amount of a sample corresponding to 20～30 mg of
Nitrogen is placed in a flask for decomposition (A), add 5 g of potassium sulfate powder,
0.5 g of cupric sulfate, and 20 mL of sulfuric acid. The flask is tilted at a 45 degree
angle, and heated gently until bubbles subside. It is boiled further at a higher temperature
until it becomes blue transparent solution. And then boiled for 1～2 hours. After cooling,
15 mL of water is slowly added to the solution. 2 or 3 granules of boiling tips or
granulated zinc are added to the solution and the apparatus is set-up as shown in the
figure. 25 mL of 0.1 N sulfuric acid and 50 mL of water are added into the absorption
flask (H). The end of the condenser (G) is immersed in the solution. Using a funnel (C),
85 mL of sodium hydroxide solution (2→5) is slowly added and its residue is washed down
with a small amount of water. The pinch cork at D is closed and the decomposition flask
is gently shaken to mix the content. It is then gently heated to boil and then boiled
vigorously until 2/3 of the content is distilled out. The end of the cooling device is
removed from the solution surface and its end is washed with water. Distillation is
continued for a while. The excess amount of acid is titrated with 0.1 N sodium hydroxide
solution (indicator：3 drops of mixed solution of bromcresol green and methyl red).
Separately, a blank test is carried out by the same procedure.
0.1 N sulfuric acid 1 mL ＝ 1.401 mg N
B. Semi-micro Kjeldahl Method
(1) Apparatus
It is made of hard glass as shown in the figure (units：mm). Ground joints may be used.
1606
 A : flask for decomposition (capacity : about 200 mL)
B : steam generator (capacity : about 1,000 mL)
C : Wagner tube
D : funnel for water
E : steam tube
F : funnel for alkaline solution
G : rubber tube (there is a pinch cork at the connection
between E & F)
H : tube
I : small hole (inner diameter is almost same as the inner
diameter of the tube)
J : condenser
K : end of cooling device (tip is angled)
L : absorption flask (capacity : about 300 mL)
If the apparatus is stored as assembled, Wagner tube (C) and its associated tubes need to
be wrapped with asbestos mixed with magnesium carbonate dispersed in water.
Decomposition flask (A) needs to be wrapped with cloth or asbestos sheet. Glycerin is
applied to the rubber stopper between distillation device and decomposition flask. Rubber
stopper and rubber hose are boiled in sodium hydroxide solution for 10 minutes and washed
well with water before use. In a steam generator (B), water, 2～3 drops of sulfuric acid, and
boiling stone are added. After use, the absorption flask (L) is washed thoroughly with water
and sealed for storage.
(2) Procedure
An amount of sample corresponding to 2～3 mg of nitrogen is placed in the flask for
decomposition (A), where 1 g of the mixture of powdered potassium sulfide and copper
sulfide (10:1) is added. If the sample was attached to the neck of the flask, it is flushed it
in a minimum amount of water. After slowly adding 7 mL of sulfuric acid along the inner
wall of the flask, 1 mL of hydrogen peroxide is carefully added by the same method. The
flask is heated on an asbestos net until the content becomes a blue transparent solution
and carbonized matter on the inner wall disappears. If decomposition is insufficient, a small
amount of hydrogen peroxide is added and cooled. Then it is heat treated again.
After cooling, 20 mL of water is carefully added and cooled and the flask is connected to
the distillation apparatus, which is previously cleaned with steam. In the absorption flask
(L), 15 mL of boric acid solution (1→25) and 3 drops of mixed solution of bromcresol
green methyl red solution are added. An appropriate amount of water is added so that the
tip of the cooling tube (K) is submerged into this solution. 30 mL of sodium hydroxide
solution (2→5) is added through the funnel (F), which is washed with 10 mL of water. The
pinch cork at G is closed and steam is passed through to start distillation. After collecting
1607
 80～100 mL of distillate, the tip of the distillation tube is removed from the solution and
the tip is washed with a small amount of water. Water is added to bring the total volume
to 157～180 mL, it is titrated with 0.01 N sulfuric acid. When the solution becomes almost
colorless near the end point of titration, 1 drop of the mixture of bromcresol green․methyl
red solution is added and further titrated. The end point is where the solution becomes
slightly red in color. Separately, a blank test is carried by the same procedure.
0.01 N sulfuric acid 1 mL ＝ 0.1401 mg N

C. Method using protein analyzer

Reagents and specimens, preparation of test solutions, testing method, and etc. may be
changed depending on the type of analyzer.
(1) Devices
A) Protein decomposition device
B) Distillation and titration
(2) Operating method
Unless otherwise specified, weighing sample, containing approximately 20∼30 mg of
nitrogen, precisely, and put it into the decomposition tube and add 2 tablets of
decomposition catelyst. 1.4∼2.0:1 ratio of Sulfuric acid to potassium sulfate as
decomposition catelyst is effective for the decomposition..
Add 12 mL of concentrated sulfuric acid to the decoposition tube, but if the sample has
more than 10 % fat, add 15 mL of concentrated sulfuric acid.
Disassemble for 45∼60 minutes at 420 ℃ and cool down to the ordinary temperature if the
color of the solution is either clear pale blue(if copper catelyst is used) or transparent
yellow(if selenium catelyst is used).
After cooling down, add 80 mL of distilled water to the solution carefully.
Add collected solution, which is mixed with 25 mL of mixed indicator, in a triangular flask,
and place it in the distillation device and lift up the flask base. when distilled, the distillate
is put into the clathrate solution. Add 50 mL of sodium hydroxide solution(2→5)(the amount
is 4 times bigger than the amount of sulfuric acid used as dicomposition) to the
decomposition tube. Distill it for 3∼4 minutes in the distillation device. The collected
solution in the triangular flask of distillation device is capturing the alkali(ammonia) in the
distillation solution and turns to green.
Titrate until a pale pink color is reached with hydrochloric acid solution(typically 0.1N or
0.2N).
Record the amount of acid used for titration.
In the case of an automatic unit, all the distillation, titration and calculation process are
performed automatically.
(3) Calculation
Nitrogen(%) (Consumed HCl (mL) - Blank test (mL)) × M × 14.01 × 100
1608
 = sample (mg)
14.01 : Atomic amount of nitrogen
M : Molecular concentration of HCl
Decomposition catylst : Kjeltabs or equivalent
Boric acid solution : 100 g(or 400 g) of H3BO3, 100 mL of 0.1 % bromocrezoline solution,
and 1 %(or 4 %) of boronic acid solution where 100 mL of 0.1% methyl
red solution is added to make 10 mL

28. pH Determination
pH is measured with a pH meter using a glass electrode.
pH represents an activity of hydrogen ion in a solution and is defined by the following
equation. In a dilute solution, this value is very close to a natural log of a reciprocal value of
hydrogen ion concentration.
E - Es
pH ＝ pHs +
2.3026 RT/F

pHs ： pH value of a pH standard solution

E ： Voltage of a battery formed by combination of glass electrode and reference electrode
in a test solution. Its constitution is expressed as follows.
Glass electrode | test solution || reference electrode
Es ： Voltage of a battery formed by combination of glass electrode and reference
electrode in a pH standard solution. Its constitution is expressed as follows.
1609
 Glass electrode | pH standard solution || reference electrode
R ： Gas constant
T ： Absolute temperature
F ： Faraday constant
Values of 2.3026 RT/Fat various temperature is listed in the talbe below.
Temperature 2.3026 RT/F Temperature 2.3026 RT/F
5℃ 0.05519 35℃ 0.06114
10℃ 0.05618 40℃ 0.06213
15℃ 0.05717 45℃ 0.06313
20℃ 0.05817 50℃ 0.06412
25℃ 0.05916 55℃ 0.06511
30℃ 0.06015 60℃ 0.06610
∘Preparation of pH standard solution : pH standard solution is used as a standard for pH.
Water used in pH standard solution is prepared by the following procedure. Purified water is
distilled. Distillate is boiled for at least 15 minutes to remove carbon dioxide. It is cooled
with a carbon dioxide absorption tube (sodium carbonate). pH standard solution is stored in a
hard glass or polyethylene bottle. Extended storage may cause change in pH. Acidic pH
standard solution should be used in 3 months and alkaline pH solution should be stored with
a carbon dioxide tube (sodium carbonate) and used in 1 month.
1) Oxalate pH Standard Solution : Potassium tetra-oxalate (pH measurement grade) is ground
into powder and dried in a desiccator (silica gel), 12.71 g (0.05 gram moles) of which is
dissolved in water to make 1 L.
2) Phthalate pH Standard Solution : Potassium hydrogen phthalate (pH measurement grade) is
ground into powder and dried at 110℃ until the weigh becomes constant, 10.21 g (0.05
gram moles) of which is dissolved in water to make 1 L.
3) Phosphate pH standard solution : Monopotassium phosphate and Sodium hydrogen
phosphate anhydrous (both pH measurement grade) are ground into powder and dried at
110℃ until the weigh becomes constant. 3.40 g (0.025 gram moles) of Monopotassium
phosphate and 3.55 g (0.025 gram molecule) of sodium hydrogen phosphate are dissolved
in water to make 1 L.
4) Borate pH standard solution : Sodium borate is dried in a desiccator (sodium bromide
soaked in water) until the weight becomes constant, 3.81 g (0.01 gram moles) of which is
dissolved in water (total volume = 1 L).
5) Carbonate pH standard solution : 2.10 g (0.02 gram moles) of sodium hydrogen carbonate
for pH measurement, which is dried in a desiccator (silica gel) until the weight becomes
1610
 constant and 2.65 g (0.025 gram moles) of sodium carbonate, which is dried at 300～500℃
until the weight becomes constant are dissolved in water to make 1 L.
6) Calcium hydroxide pH standard solution : Calcium hydroxide (pH measurement grade) is
ground into powder, 5 g of which is placed in a flask. It is mixed and saturated with 1 L
of water at 23 ～ 27℃. Supernatant is filtered and the filtrate is used (approximately 0.02
M).
pH values of these standard solutions at various temperatures are shown in the following
table. pH values not listed in the table are obtained by interpolation.
Structure of pH meter : A pH meter is generally comprises a detecting part that has a glass
electrode and a reference electrode and the indication part that indicates pH corresponding
to the detected electromotive force. Indication part has a tap for the regulation of
asymmetric electric potential and for the temperature compensation and a tap for the
sensitivity regulation. The reproducibility of the pH meter should be within ± 0.05 when pH of
pH standard solution is measured 5 times (electrode should be washed well with water after each
measurement)

pH Values of pH Standard Solution

Temperature oxalate phthalate pH Standard Solution
phosphate borate carbonate KOH
0℃ 1.67 4.01 6.98 9.46 10.32 13.43
5℃ 1.67 4.01 6.95 9.39 10.25 13.21
10℃ 1.67 4.00 6.92 9.33 10.18 13.00
15℃ 1.67 4.00 6.90 9.27 10.12 12.81
20℃ 1.68 4.00 6.88 9.22 10.07 12.63
25℃ 1.68 4.01 6.86 9.18 10.02 12.45
30℃ 1.69 4.01 6.85 9.14 9.97 12.30
35℃ 1.69 4.02 6.84 9.10 9.93 12.14
40℃ 1.70 4.03 6.84 9.07 11.99
50℃ 1.71 4.06 6.83 9.01 11.70
60℃ 1.73 4.10 6.84 8.96 11.45

Procedure : The glass electrode should be kept in water for more than several hours before
use. The power of the pH meter should be turned on for at least 5 minutes before use.
The detection part is washed with water, which is then is wiped with a filter paper. When
a single point correction is performed, the tap for temperature compensation should be
matched with the temperature of pH standard solution. Then the detection part is immersed
for longer than 2 minutes in the pH standard solution which has the nearest pH value to
1611
 the pH of test solution. The tap for the regulation of asymmetric electric potential is
adjusted so that the pH reading matches with the pH of the standard solution at that
temperature.
When a two-point correction is performed, the tap for temperature compensation is matched
with the solution temperature. It is immersed in a phosphate pH standard solution that has
the nearest pH value to a test solution. The tap for the sensitivity adjustment or the tap for
the temperature compensation (regardless of the temperature of the standard solution) is
manipulated by the same procedure as described before. After the adjustment, the detection
part is washed well with water, which is then is wiped with a filter paper and pH is read.
Note ： Detailed structure and Procedure differ with pH meter.
A solution with pH 11 and alkaline metal ions has large errors, so an electrode with a
small alkali-related errors should be used (necessary correction should be done).
It is desirable to match the temperature of test solution with that of pH standard solution.

1612
 29. Identification
This is used to identify each item. Unless otherwise specified, the concentration of test
solution is approximately 1%.
(1) Sodium
(A) When potassium pyroantimonate solution is added to a neutral～weakly alkaline solution
(1→20) of sodium, white crystalline precipitate is formed (scratching the inner wall of the
test tube with a glass rod accelerates the precipitation).
(B) When sodium is tested by the Flame Coloration Test, it shows a yellow color.
(2) Salicylate
(A) When 5～6 drops of dilute ferric chloride solution is added to a neutral solution of
salicylate, the solution becomes purple then colorless.
(B) When dilute hydrochloric acid is added to a salicylate solution (1→20), crystalline
precipitate is created. The precipitate is separated, washed with cold water, and dried.
The melting point of the precipitate is 158～161℃.
(3) Benzoate
(A) When a solution of benzoate (1→20) is acidified with dilute hydrochloric acid, crystalline
precipitate is formed. The precipitate is separated, washed with cold water, and dried. The
melting point of the precipitate is 122℃.
(B) When ferric chloride solution is added to a neutral solution of benzoate (1→20), reddish
brown precipitate is produced. When diluted hydrochloric acid is added, white precipitate is
separated out.
(4) Calcium
(A) When calcium salt is tested by the Flame Coloration Test, it shows a red color.
(B) When ammonium oxalate solution (1→30) is added to an acid solution of calcium salt
with hydrochloric acid, white precipitate is formed. The separated precipitate is insoluble
in dilute acetic acid, but it is soluble in dilute hydrochloric acid.
(5) Citrate
(A) When a mixed solution of phyridine․anhydrous acetic acid (3:1) is added to 2～3 mg of
citrate, the color becomes deep red.
(B) Potassium permanganate solution (1/3 volume) is added to an acidic solution of citrate (1
→20) with sulfuric acid, which is heated until the color disappears. White precipitate is
produced by drop-wise adding bromine solution.
(6) Nitrite
(A) When dilute sulfuric acid is added to nitrite solution (1→20), yellowish brown gas with
characteristic smell is generated. If a small amount of crystalline ferrous sulfate is added
the solution, it becomes dark brown in color.
(B) When 2～3 drops of potassium iodide solution is added to a solution of nitrite, where
dilute hydrochloric acid is drop-wise added, the solution becomes yellowish brown.
Eventually blackish purple precipitate is formed. The solution becomes deep blue when
starch solution is added.
1613
(7) Sulfite and Hydrogensulfite
(A) When iodine potassium․iodide solution is drop wise added to an acidic solution of sulfite
or hydrogen sulfite in acetic acid, the color of the solution is disappears.
(B) When a same amount of dilute hydrochloric acid is added to an acidic solution of sulfite
or hydrogen sulfite in acetic acid (1→20), sulfur dioxide (SO2) smell is generated but the
solution doesn't turn turbid (distinct from thiosulfate). When 1 drop of sodium sulfate
solution is added, the solution becomes turbid with white color, which gradually becomes
yellow precipitate.
(8) Aluminum
(A) When ammonium chloride solution and ammonia solution are added to a solution of
aluminum salt (1→20), white gel-like precipitate is produced. The precipitate does not
dissolve by adding an excess amount of ammonium solution.
(B) When sodium hydroxide solution is added a solution of aluminum salts (1→20), white
gel-like of precipitate is created. The precipitate dissolves by adding an excess amount of
sodium hydroxide solution.
(C) When ammonium solution is added to a solution of aluminum salts until a small amount of
precipitate is produced, where 5 drops of alizarin S solution (1→1,000) are added. The
color of the precipitate changes to red
(9) Ammonium
An excess amount of sodium hydroxide solution is added to ammonium salts. Upon heating, a
gas with ammonia odor is generated. This gas turns a red litmus paper (wetted with water)
blue.
(10) Chloride
(A) Sulfuric acid and potassium permanganate are added to a solution of chloride salt (1→
20). Upon heating, gas with chlorine odor is generated. This gas turns the color of
potassium iodine starch paper (wetted with water) to blue.
(B) When silver nitrate solution is added to a chloride solution, white precipitate is created.
The precipitate does not dissolve by adding dilute nitric acid, but it does dissolve by
adding an excess amount of ammonia solution.
(11) Peroxide
(A) To a 1:1 mixture of ethyl acetate and peroxide solution, 1～2 drops of potassium
bichromate solution is added. When the solution is acidified with dilute sulfuric acid, the
aqueous layer becomes blue. When the mixture is shaken and settled to separate, the blue
color migrates to the ethyl acetate layer.
(B) When potassium permanganate solution (1→300) is added a solution of peroxide in
sulfuric acid, bubbles are created and the color disappears.
(12) Permanganate
(A) A solution of permanganate has a reddish purple color.
(B) When an excess amount of hydrogen peroxide is added to an acidic solution of
permanganate in sulfuric acid, bubbles are generated and then disappear.
(C) When an excess amount of oxalic acid solution is added to an acidic solution of
1614
 permanganate in sulfuric acid, the color of the solution disappears
(13) Potassium
(A) When potassium salts is tested by the Flame Coloration Test, it shows a light purple
color. If the flame is yellow, it shows as reddish purple color through a cobalt glass.
(B) When sodium hydrotartarate solution is added to a neutral solution of potassium salt(1→
20), white crystalline precipitate is formed. (The scratching on the inner wall of the test
tube with a glass rod accelerates the precipitation.) The precipitate separated from the
solution dissolves when ammonia solution, sodium hydroxide solution or sodium carbonate
solution is added
(14) Glycerophosphorate
(A) When ammonium molybdate solution is added to the solution of glycerophosphorate,
precipitate is not produced when the solution is cold. Upon boiling for an extended period
of time, yellow precipitate is formed.
(B) Glycerophosphorate is mixed with a same amount of potassium hydrogen sulfate powder.
When the mixture is gently heated in a direct fire, an irritating odor of acrolein is
generated.
(15) Acetate
(A) When diluted sulfuric acid (1→2) is added to acetate, acetic acid smell is created upon
heating.
(B) When sulfuric acid and a small amount of alcohol are added to acetate and heated, an
odor of ethyl acetate is generated.
(C) When ferric chloride solution is added to a neutral solution of acetate (1→20), it turns
reddish brown. Upon heating, it forms reddish brown precipitate. When hydrochloric acid is
added, the precipitate dissolves and the solution becomes yellow in color
(16) Bromate
(A) When 2∼3 drops of silver nitrate solution is added to an acidic solution with nitric acid
of bromate (1→20), white precipitate is formed, which dissolves by heating. If a drop of
sodium nitrite solution is added, light yellow precipitate is produced.
(B) When 5∼6 drops of sodium nitrite solution is added to an acidic solution with nitric acid
of bromate (1→20), yellow～reddish brown color appears. If 1 mL of chloroform is added
and mixed by shaking, chloroform layer shows yellow～reddish brown color.
(17) Tartarate
(A) When silver nitrate solution is added to a neutral solution of tartarate (1→20), white
precipitate is formed. If nitric acid is added to the separated precipitate, it dissolves. If
ammonia solution is added to the separated precipitate and heated, it dissolves and forms
a silver mirror.
(B) 2 drops of acetic acid, 1 drop of ferrous sulfate solution, and 2～3 drops of hydrogen
peroxide are added to tartrate solution (1→20), where an excess amount potassium
hydroxide is added. The mixture turns reddish purple～purple.
(C) To 5 mL of sulfuric acid, 2～3 drops of Resorcin solution (1→50) and 2～3 drops of
potassium bromide are added. This solution is added to 2～3 drops of tartarate solution (1
1615
 →20). It is then heated for 5～10 minutes in a water bath. The solution becomes deep
blue in color. When the resulting solution is cooled and mixed with an excess amount of
water, it becomes red.
(18) Nitrate
(A) When ferrous sulfate solution is added on top of a cooled mixture (1:1) of nitrate
solution and sulfuric acid, a dark brown band is formed at the interface.
(B) When sulfuric acid and copper fragments are added to a nitrate, reddish brown gas is
generated.
(C) Even when potassium permanganate solution is added to an acidic solution of nitrate in
sulfuric acid, the solution does not decolorizes (distinct from nitrite).
(19) Carbonate
(A) When diluted hydrochloric acid is added to carbonate, bubbles are generated due to
formation of gas. If the gas is passed through calcium hydroxide solution, white precipitate
is formed. (same as bicarbonate)
(B) When magnesium sulfate solution is added to carbonate solution (1→20), white precipitate
is produced. When dilute acetic acid is added, the precipitate dissolves.
(C) A cold solution of carbonate turns deep red by adding phenolphthalein solution. (distinct
from bicarbonate)
(20) Bicarbonate
(A) When diluted hydrochloric acid is added to bicarbonate, bubbles are generated due to
formation of gas. If the gas is passed through calcium hydroxide solution, white precipitate
is created. (same as carbonate)
(B) When magnesium sulfate solution is added to bicarbonate solution (1→20), white
precipitate is not created at normal temperature. However, white precipitate is formed
upon boiling.
(C) A cold solution of bicarbonate does not turn red by adding phenolphthalein solution. Even
if it does get colored, the red color is extremely pale (distinct from carbonate).
(21) Thiocyanate
(A) When excess amount of silver nitrate is added to thiocyanate solution, white precipitate
is formed. The precipitate does not dissolve by adding diluted hydrochloric acid, but
dissolves by adding aqueous ammonia solution.
(B) When ferric chloride solution is added to thiocyanate solution, it turns scarlet in color
and this color does not disappear by adding hydrochloric acid.
(22) Ferrous salt
(A) When potassium ferricyanide is added to a weakly acidic solution of ferrous salts, blue
precipitate is formed. The precipitate does not dissolve when diluted hydrochloric acid or
diluted nitric acid is added.
(B) When sodium hydroxide solution or ammonia solution is added to ferrous salt solution,
gel-like white precipitate is formed (If this is well shaken, the color becomes greyish
green and gradually turns reddish brown). When sodium sulfide solution is added, the color
of precipitate changes to black. When diluted hydrochloric acid is added, the precipitate
dissolves
1616
(23) Thiosulfates
(A) When iodide․potassium iodide is drop-wise added to an acidic solution in acetic acid of
thiosulfate, the color of the solution disappears.
(B) When a same amount of diluted hydrochloric acid is added to thiosulfate solution, sulfur
dioxide smell is generated and the solution gradually becomes turbid with white color.
When this is set aside, its color is changed to yellow.
(C) When an excess amount of silver nitrate standard solution is added to thiosulfate
solution, white precipitate is formed. If the precipitate is set aside, its color is changed to
black.
(24) Ferric salts
(A) When potassium ferrocyanide is added to a weakly acidic solution of ferric salt, blue
precipitate is created. The precipitate does not dissolve when diluted hydrochloric acid or
diluted nitric acid is added.
(B) When Sodium hydroxide solution or ammonia solution is added to ferric salt solution,
gel-like reddish brown precipitate is formed. When sodium sulfate solution is added, the
color of precipitate changes to black. When diluted hydrochloric acid is added to the
separated precipitate, the precipitate dissolves. The solution is turbid with white color.
(C) If ammonium thiocyanate solution is added to a neutral or weakly acidic solution of ferric
salt, deep red color appears. This color persists even by adding hydrochloric acid but
disappears by adding mercuric chloride.
(25) Cupric salts
(A) If a clean iron fragment is placed in an acidic hydrochloric acid solution of cupric salt
(with hydrochloric acid), red metal is precipitated from its surface.
(B) When a small amount ammonia solution is added to cupric salt solution, light blue
precipitate is formed. If ammonia standard solution is added to this solution, the precipitate
dissolves and its color turns deep blue.
(C) When potassium ferrocyanide solution is added to cupric salt solution, reddish precipitate
is formed. When dilute acetic acid is added to a portion of this solution, the precipitate
does not dissolve. When ammonia solution is added to another portion of this solution, the
precipitate dissolves and its color turns deep blue.
(26) Lactate
When potassium permanganate solution is added to an acidic sulfuric acid solution (1→20)
and heated, acetaldehyde smell is generated.
(27) Magnesium
When ammonium chloride solution and ammonium carbonate solution are added to magnesium
salt solution, precipitate is not created. However, if sodium phosphate dibasic is added to the
resulting solution, white crystalline precipitate is created. The separated precipitate is
insoluble in ammonia solution.
(28) Sulfate
(A) When barium chloride solution is added to sulfate solution, white crystalline precipitate is
formced. The precipitate is insoluble in hydrochloric acid or weak nitric acid.
1617
 (B) When Lead acetate solution is added to a neutral solution of sulfate, white precipitate is
formed. If ammonium acetate solution is added, the precipitate dissolves.
(C) Even if the same amount of weak hydrochloric acid is added to sulfate solution, it does
not become turbid (distinct from thiosulfate). Also, Sulfur dioxide odor is not generated.
(distinct from sulfite).
(29) Phosphate (Orthophosphate)
(A) When Silver nitrate solution is added to a neutral solution of phosphate, yellow
precipitate is formed. The precipitate dissolves when diluted nitric acid or ammonia
solution is added.
(B) Ammonium molybdate solution is added to a neutral or acidic nitric acid solution of
phosphate. When this solution is heated, yellow precipitate is produced. The precipitate
dissolves when sodium hydroxide or ammonia solution is added.
(30) Bromide
(A) When silver nitrate standard solution is added to bromide solution, light yellow
precipitate is formed. The precipitate is hardly soluble in diluted nitric acid or ammonia
solution. The precipitate is separated, where ammonia water is added and mixed by
shaking. Solution is separated from the precipitate. When the solution is acidified with
dilute nitric acid, it becomes turbid with white color.
(B) If chlorine standard solution is added to bromide solution, yellow～reddish brown color
appears. When chloroform or carbon disulfide is added to a portion of this solution and
mixed, the lower layer has yellow～reddish brown color. If phenol is added to another
portion of the solution, white precipitate is formed.
(31) Zinc
(A) Under the presence of sodium acetate, zinc salt produces white precipitate by hydrogen
sulfide. The precipitate is insoluble in acetic acid, but is soluble in diluted hydrochloric
acid. The similar precipitate is created in a neutral or alkaline solution by ammonium
sulfide.
(B) When Potassium ferrocyanide is added to zinc salt solution, white precipitate is produced
and it is insoluble in diluted hydrochloric acid.
(32) Iodide
When chlorine solution is added to an aqueous solution of iodide, iodide is extricated while
changing the color from yellow to red. If chloroform is added to this solution and the
mixture is shaken, the chloroform layer shows purple color. If starch standard solution is
added to isolated iodine, the solution turns blue. If silver nitrate solution instead of starch
standard solution is added, yellow precipitate is formed, which is insoluble in nitric acid and
ammonia solution.
(33) Succinic acid salt
Adjust pH of succinic acid salt solution (1→20) to 6-7. To 5mL of the solution, add 1mL of
ferric chloride TS. A yellow -red precipitate is formed.

1618
 30. Readily Carbonizable Substances Test
This is to test for the allowed limit of impurities in substances, which are easily colored
sulfuric acid, when a sample is dissolved in sulfuric acid. Unless otherwise specified, a
specified amount of powdered sample is dissolved (small amount at a time) in 5 mL of 94.5%∼
95.5% of sulfuric acid by mixing with a glass rod in a test tube made of clear hard glass. The
solution is set aside for 15 minutes. Separately, color standard solution is placed in a test
tube. Both tubes are observed for comparison with a white background. Observation is made
from the side and the top. If it is specified that the sample needs to be dissolved by heating,
colorimeter test is carried out after heating as specified for the item.

1619
 31. Ash and Acid-Insoluble Ash Limit Test
A. Ash
Unless otherwise specified, 3g of sample is placed in a crucible, which is previously dried
and weighed, and reduced to ash at 550℃ until readily carbonizable substances disappears. It
is then cooled in a desiccator and weighed. If carbonization is incomplete, it is wetted with
1～2 drops water in a cooled crucible. It is dried in a water bath and then reduced to ash
again.
B. Acid-Insoluble Ash
To the ash obtained from A, 25 mL of dilute hydrochloric acid is added and the mixture is
boiled for 5 minutes. It is then filtered through a quantitative filter paper. The residue is
thoroughly washed with boiling water. The filter paper is dried and burned to obtain the
amount of ash. The amount of acid-insoluble ash is obtained by subtracting the filter paper
ash from the total ash.

1620
 32. Spectrophotometry
This method is to measure the degree of absorption of light in a narrow characteristic
wavelength range. Absorption spectrum which material solution shows in visible and ultraviolet
region depends on the chemical structure of each material.
Therefore, by detecting absorption in various wavelengths, a material can be identified.
Usually, absorption of a solution at a certain concentration at max wavelength (λmax) and min
wavelength (λmin) is measured, which is then used to Identification, Purity, and Assay test.
When a monochromatic light passes through a solution of a certain material, the ratio of the
transmitted light intensity (I) to the incident light intensity (Io) is called the transmittance (T).
Absorbance (A) is the common logarithm of the reciprocal of transmittance.

Absorbance (A) is proportional to the concentration (c) of the solution and the pathlength (l)
the layer of of the solution.
A ＝ kc l

The absorbance with 1cm (l) and 1% (c) is specific optical density (E), and the absorbance
with 1cm (l) and 1M (c) is molecular extinction coefficient (E). Molecular extinction coefficient
at the maximum absorption wavelength is Emax.
Absorption measurement is carried out with a solution using a specified solvent. It is
desireable to have a concentration of a solution so that the absorption within 0.2～0.7. If the
absorption is too high, the solution is diluted to an appropriate concentration.
a
＝
c(%) × l

a
E ＝
c(mol) × l
l ： path length (cm)
a ： absorption from the measurement
c(%) ： concentration of test solution (w/v%)
c(mol) ： concentration of test solution (mol)
A. Apparatus and Preparation
A photoelectric spectrophotometer or photoelectric colorimeter is used as a measuring
apparatus. Photoelectric spectrophotometer consists of a monochrometer and a photoelectric
photometer. A tungsten lamp and a hydrogen discharge lamp are used as light source to
measure absorption in visible and UV range, respectively. A photoelectric colorimeter
1621
 consists of optical filter and photoelectric photometer. A tungsten lamp is used as a light
source to measure absorption in visible range. As a cuvette, quartz is used for UV
absorption and glass is used for visible absorption.
First, using a specified filter for each method or a filter that has measuring wavelength as a
central wavelength, ut us adjusted so that a reference solution that lies in a light path gives
a zero absorption at a wavelength of spectrophotometer that matches the measuring
wavelength. Then a test solution is placed in the light path and an absorption is measured. If
possible, a filter with a central transmission wavelength that closely matches with the
maximum absorption band of the solution. It is also recommended that wavelength band of
the filter transmission is narrower than the absorption band.
In absorption measurement of each additive, "a blank test is carried out to correct" means
that a sample is not used as a reference. It rather means that a solution treated by the
same procedure as above is used. "A blank test is carried out using a solvent as a
reference" means the same solvent to dissolve the sample is used as a reference solvent.
B. Determination Procedure
The equation expressing absorbance (A) is Beer-Lambert's law. This applies to a certain
range of concentration of a sample. When absorbance measurement is used as a Assay, this
measurable range of concentration should be known. When a standard material is not
specified, a pure material of the sample should be used. A set of solutions with various
concentrations are prepared and absorbance for each solution is measured. A curve of
absorbance vs. concentration is prepared. The linear region of the curve obeys the
Beer-Lambert Law and is used as a calibration curve for quantitative analysis.
C. Calibration of Wavelength and Absorbance Scales
Wavelength values are usually examined using quartz mercury lamp or glass mercury lamp at
239.95, 253.65, 302.16, 313.16, 334.15, 365.48, 404.66, 435.83, 546.10 nm and hydrogen
discharge lamp at 486.13, 656.28 nm. Absorbance values are examined with a 0.006 w/v% solution
of potassium bichromate (standard reagent) in 0.01N sulfuric acid. of this solution at 235
(min), 257 (max), 313 (min), and 350 nm (max) are 125.2, 145.6, 48.9, and 107.0, respectively.

1622
 33. Coloring Matter Tests
A. Water Insoluble substances
2 g of sample is well mixed in 200 mL of boiling water by shaking and filtered through a
crucible type glass filter (1G4) that is previously weighed. Insoluble substances are washed
with boiling water until the wash water becomes colorless and dried along with the filter for
3 hours at 135℃. After cooling in a desiccator, the filter with insoluble substances is
weighed.
B. Chloride and Sulfate
Precisely 0.1 g of sample is weighed and dissolved in water to make 100 mL, Use this
solution as the Test Solution. Separately, 0.165 g of sodium chloride, which is dried at 500～
600℃ for 1 hr, is dissolved in water to make 1,000 mL, Standard Stock Solution of chloride
ion. Also, precisely 0.148 g of sodium sulfate, which is dried at 100℃ for 2 hrs, is dissolved
in water to make 1,000 mL, Standard Stock Solution of sulfate ion.
Standard Solutions are prepared by diluting 0.2 mL, 1 mL, 10 mL and 50 mL each of the
above Standard Stock Solutions to 100 mL with water. With 20 μl each of Test and Standard
Solutions, ion chromatography is carried out under the following operation conditions. A
calibration curves are prepared from the peak areas of chloride ions and sulfate ions in each
Standard Solution. The content of each ion is obtained from the calibration curve using a
peak area of Test Solution. Then the concentrations of sodium chloride and sodium sulfate
are obtained by multiplying 1.65 and 1.48 to the amount of chloride ion and sulfate ion.
Finally, the contents of sodium chloride and sodium sulfate in the sample are calculated.
Operation Conditions
-Detector : Electrical Conductivity Meter
-Packing material : Porous anion exchange resin
-Column : Stainless steel or plastic tube with inner diameter 2∼4 mm, length 20∼25 cm
-Eluant : 1.8 mM sodium carbonate solution
1.7 mM sodium carbonate solution
-Flow rate : 1.0∼1.5 mL/minute
C. Arsenic
0.5 g of Arsenic is placed in a platinum, quartz, or porcelain crucible. 20 mL of magnesium
nitrate in ethyl alcohol (1→50) is added to the crucible and then alcohol is ignited. It is then
reduced to ash by heating at 450∼550℃. If carbonaceous substance persists, it is wetted
with a small amount of nitric acid, which is further heat treated at 450∼550℃. After cooling,
6 mL of hydrochloric acid is added to the residue and approximately 10 mL of water is
added if necessary, which is then heated in a water bath. After cooling, the solution is
brought up to 25 mL with water (Test Solution). When test for arsenic is carried out with
this test solution, it should not be more than 4ppm. The color reference is prepared by
following the same procedure with 2mL of arsenic standard solution.
D. Heavy Metals
2.5 g of sample is reduced to ash by the same procedure in Residues on Ignition. To the
resulting ash, 3 mL of hydrochloric acid and then 7 mL of water are added and mixed. It is
1623
then filtered through a quantitative filter paper (Type 5, C). The residues are washed with 5
mL of dilute hydrochloric acid and 5 mL of water, which is added to the filtrate, Solution A.
The residues on the filter paper are dried along with the filter paper at 105℃, which is then
reduced to ash in a platinum crucible by heating at approximately 450℃. 1∼2 g of
anhydrous sodium carbonate is added to the crucible, which is then covered and heated to
melt the carbonate. After cooling, 10 mL of water is added, which is acidified by drop-wise
adding 3～6 mL of hydrochloric acid. It is transferred into a beaker with a small amount of
water, and then water to make 50 mL. Use this solution as the test solution. Separately, a
blank test solution is prepared by following the same procedure without the sample.
(1) Zinc ： 2.5 mL of test solution is diluted to 50 mL with 10 mL of diluted hydrochloric
acid(1→4) and water, solution B. Separately, 2.5 mL of zinc standard solution, 10 mL of
diluted hydrochloric acid(1→4) and water are added to 2.5 mL of blank test solution,
which is then diluted to 50 mL, reference solution. For the solution B and the reference
solution, proceed as directed under Atomic Absorption Spectrophotometry under the
following operating condition. The absorbance of solution B should not be higher than that
of reference solution (not more than 200 ppm).
Operation Conditions
Combustible gas : Acetylene
Combustible supporting gas : Air
Lamp : Zinc hollow cathode lamp
Wavelength : 213.9 nm
(2) Chromium ： Unless otherwise specified, 10 mL of test solution is diluted to 50 mL with
10 mL of diluted hydrochloric acid(1→4) and water, solution C. Separately, 10 mL of
chromium standard solution, 10 mL of diluted hydrochloric acid(1→4) and water are added
to 10 mL of blank test solution, which is then diluted to 50 mL, reference solution. For
the solution C and reference solution, proceed as directed under Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry under the following operating conditions. The absorbance of the
solution C should not be higher than that of reference solution (not more than 50 ppm).
Operation Condition
Combustible gas : Acetylene
Combustible supporting gas : Air
Lamp : Chromium hollow cathode lamp
Wavelength : 357.9nm
(3) Iron ： 2 mL of test solution is diluted to 50 mL with 10 mL of diluted hydrochloric
acid(1→4) and water, solution D. Separately, 5 mL of iron standard solution, 10 mL of
diluted hydrochloric acid(1→4) and water are added to 2 mL of blank test solution, which
is then diluted to 50 mL, reference solution. For the solution C and reference solution,
proceed as directed under Atomic Absorption Spectrophotometry under the following
operating condition. The absorbance of solution D should not be higher than that of
reference solution (not more than 500 ppm).
Operation Condition
Combustible gas : Acetylene
1624
 Combustible supporting gas : Air
Lamp : Iron hollow cathode lamp
Wavelength : 248.3nm
(4) Manganese ： Unless otherwise specified, 4 mL of test solution is diluted to 50 mL with
10 mL of diluted hydrochloric acid(1→4) and water, solution E. Separately, 1 mL of
manganese standard solution, 10 mL of diluted hydrochloric acid(1→4) and water are
added to 4 mL of blank test solution, which is then diluted to 50 mL, reference solution.
For the solution E and reference solution, proceed as directed under Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry under the following operating condition, the absorbance of solution E
should not be higher than that of reference solution (not more than 50 ppm).
Operation Condition
Combustible gas : Acetylene
Combustible supporting gas : Air
Lamp : Manganese hollow cathode manganese lamp
Wavelength : 279.5nm
(5) Other Heavy Metals ： Solution A is diluted to 50 mL with water, 20 mL of the solution
is transferred into a Nestler tube. After adding 1 drop of phenolphthalein solution,
ammonia solution is added until the solution turns red and 2 mL of acetic acid (1→4) is
added. The resulting solution is filtered, if necessary. The filter paper is washed with
water and wash water is added to the filtrate. The filtrate is diluted to 50 mL with water,
Solution H. Separately, 2.0 mL of lead standard solution and 1 drop of phenolphthalein
solution are added to 20 mL of blank test solution, which is treated by the same
procedure as the test solution H, Use this solution as the solution I. 2 drops each of
sodium sulfate solution are added to Solutions H and I. They are mixed by shaking and
set aside for 5 minutes. The color of H should not be deeper than that of I, (Not more
than 20ppm).
E. Other Coloring Matters
Ammonium acetate solution is added to 5.0 mL, 2.0 mL and 1.0 mL each of standard stock
solution. Each solution is diluted to exactly 100 mL with water, standard solution. Liquid
chromatography is carried out with 20 μl each of test and standard solutions under the
following operation conditions. Peak area of Subsidiary Colors in test solution is measured.
From the calibration curve, the amount of each pigment is obtained. The sum of each
pigment is calculated.
Operation Conditions
-Detector: Visible Light Spectrophotometer
-Column: Chemically bonded C18 column with 5 μm (inner diameter 4∼6 mm, length 15∼30
cm) or its equivalent
-Flow Rate: 1 mL/minute
-Wavelength: 515 nm
-Carrier Phase : A: ammonium acetate solution (7.7→1,000)
B: acetonitrile : methanol (70:30)
Solution A : Solution B (100:0) → Solution A : Solution B (30:70) 25 minutes
1625
F. Unreacted raw materials and products of side reactions
Ammonium acetate solution is added to 5.0 mL, 2.0 mL and 1.0 mL each of standard stock
solution. Each solution is diluted to 100 mL with water, standard solution. Liquid
chromatography is carried out with 20 μl each of test and standard solutions under the
following operation conditions. Peak area of Unreacted raw materials and products of side
reactions in test solution is measured. From the calibration curve, the amount is obtained.
Operation Conditions
-Detector : Visible Light Spectrophotometer
-Column : Chemically bonded C18 column with 5 μm (inner diameter 4∼6 mm, length 15∼
30cm) or its equivalent
-Flow Rate : 1 mL/minute
-Wavelength : 290 nm
-Carrier Phase : A : ammonium acetate solution (7.7→1,000)
B : acetonitrile : methanol (70:30)
Solution A : Solution B(100:0) → Solution A : Solution B (30:70) 50 minutes
G. Unsulfonated Primary Aromatic Amines
(1) As Aniline
Accurately 2 g of sample is weighed into a separatory funnel containing 100 mL of water
and dissolved by adding 50 mL of water, where 5 mL of sodium hydroxide solution (4→
100) and 50 mL of ethyl acetate are added, shaken well, and extracted. Ethyl acetate layer
is separated out. Water layer is further extracted 50 mL of ethyl acetate and the acetate
layer is added to the previous extract. It is washed with sodium hydroxide solution (4→
1,000) until the color disappears. The extract is again extracted three times with 10 mL of
dilute hydrochloric acid (3→10). Hydrochloric acid phase are combined and diluted to 100
mL with water, Solution A. After cooling 10 mL of Solution A for 10 minutes in a test tube
in an ice bath, 1 mL of potassium bromate solution (1→2) and 0.05 mL of sodium nitrite
solution (1→30) are added, which is then set aside for 10 minutes in ice.
This mixed solution is transferred into a 25 mL volumetric flask with 1mL of 0.05 mo1/l of
3-hydroxy-2,7-naphthalein sulfonate disodium solution and 10 mL of sodium carbonate
solution (1→10), which is filled with water to 25 mL. It is then set aside for 15 minutes,
Test Solution.
Separately, 10 mg of aniline is dissolved in 30 mL of diluted hydrochloric acid (3→10),
which is diluted to 100 mL with water. 2.0 mL of this solution is further diluted to 100 mL
with dilute hydrochloric acid (1→10). This solution is treated by the same procedure as
Solution A and its absorption is measured.
In case of Test Solution, 10 mL of Solution A is added to 25 mL of volumetric flask,
where 1 mL of 0.05 mo1/l of 3-hydroxy-2,7-naphthalein sulfonate disodium solution and
10 mL of sodium carbonate solution (1→30). Then water is added to bring the total volume
to 25 mL, Reference Solution. Absorption at 510 nm for each solution is measured.
Absorbance of the test solution should be less than that of the reference solution.
H. Assay
(1) Titanium Trichloride Method
1626
 (A) A specified amount of test solution is placed in a 500 mL Erlenmeyer flask, where 15 g
of sodium citrate and water are added to bring the total volume to approximately 200
mL. While bubbling carbon dioxide through and boiling the solution vigorously, it is
titrated with 0.1 N titanium trichloride. The end point is where the characteristic color of
the sample disappears
(B) The same procedure in (A) is followed with 15 g of sodium hydrogen tartarate instead
of sodium citrate.
(C) The same procedure in (A) is followed with 15g of sodium hydrogen tartarate instead of
sodium citrate. However, as an indicator, 10 mL of food colorant green No.2 solution (1→
1,000) is used. Separately, a blank test is carried out.
(2) Weight Method
A specified amount of test solution is placed in a 500 mL beaker, which is boiled and then
cooled. To this solution, 25 mL of dilute hydrochloric acid (1→50) is added, which is
boiled again. The inner wall of the beaker is washed with approximately 5 mL of water
and the beaker is covered with a watch glass. It is heated for 5 hours in a water bath and
cooled in air. The precipitate is filtered through a glass filter (1G4) with a known weight.
It is washed 3 times with 10 mL each of dilute hydrochloric acid (1→200) and then twice
with 10 mL each of water. The precipitate is dried along with the glass filter for 3 hours
at 135℃, cooled in a desiccator, and weighed.

1627
 34. Coloring Matter Aluminum Lake Test
A. Hydrochloric Acid- and Ammonia-Insoluble substances
20 mL of water is added to 2 g of sample, where 20 mL of hydrochloric acid is added and
mixed well. After adding and mixing with 300 mL of boiling water, it is covered with a
watch glass, heated for 30 minutes in a water bath, and cooled. The supernatant is filtered
through a glass filter (1G4) with a known weight. The insoluble substances are transferred
to the glass filter with approximately 30 mL of water. It is then washed twice with 5 mL
each of water. It is again washed with 1% ammonia solution until the wash liquid becomes
almost colorless. It is then washed with 10 mL of 1% hydrochloric acid. It is further washed
with water until the wash water does not react with silver nitrate solution. It is dried along
with the glass filter for 3 hours at 135℃, cooled in a desiccator, and weighed.
B. Arsenic
0.5 g of Arsenic is placed in a platinum, quartz, or porcelain crucible. 20 mL of magnesium
nitrate in ethyl alcohol (1→10) is added to the crucible and then alcohol is ignited. It is then
reduced to ash by heating at 450∼550℃. If carbonaceous substance persists, it is wetted
with minute amount of nitric acid, which is further heat treated at 450∼550℃. After cooling,
6 mL of hydrochloric acid is added to the residue and approximately 10 mL of water is
added if necessary, which is then heated in a water bath. After cooling, the solution is
brought up to 25 mL with water (Test Solution). When test for arsenic is carried out with
this test solution, it should not be more than 4ppm. The color reference is prepared by
following the same procedure with 2 mL of arsenic standard solution.
C. Heavy Metals
2.5 g of sample is reduced to ash by the same procedure in Residues on Ignition. To the
resulting ash, 5 mL of hydrochloric acid and 1 mL of nitric acid are added and lumps are
crushed. It is evaporated to dryness in a water bath. Again, 5 mL of hydrochloric acid is
added to crush the lumps. It is again evaporated to dryness in a water bath. The residues
are dissolved by adding 10 mL of dilute hydrochloric acid and heating. After cooling, it is
filtered through a quantitative filter paper (Type 5, C). The residues are washed with 30 mL
of dilute hydrochloric acid, which is added to the filtrate. The filtrate is evaporated to
dryness in a water bath. The residues are dissolved in 10 mL of dilute hydrochloric acid by
heating. After cooling, it is filtered. The container and the filter paper are washed with a
small amount of water. Wash water is added to the filtrate, where pH is adjusted to
approximately 4 using ammonium acetate solution (1→10). It is then diluted to 100 mL with
water. Separately, a blank test solution is prepared by following the same procedure without
the sample.
(1) Zinc ： To 10 mL of test solution, 10 mL of diluted hydrochloric acid(1→4) and water
are added to bring the total volume to 50 mL, solution A. Separately, 2.5 mL of zinc
standard solution, 10 mL of diluted hydrochloric acid(1→4) and water are added to 10 mL
of blank test solution so that the total volume is 50 mL, reference solution. For the
solution A and the reference solution, proceed as directed under Atomic Absorption
Spectrophotometry under the following operating condition, the absorbance of solution A
1628
 should not be higher than that of reference solution (not more than 50 ppm).
Operation Condition
Combustible gas : Acetylene
Combustible supporting gas : Air
Lamp : Zinc hollow cathode lamp
Wavelength : 213.9nm
(2) Iron ： 4 mL of test solution is diluted to 50 mL with 10 mL of diluted hydrochloric
acid(1→4) and water, solution B. Separately, 5 mL of iron standard solution, 10 mL of
diluted hydrochloric acid(1→4) and water are added to 4 mL of blank test solution, which
is then diluted to 50 mL, reference solution. For the solution A and the reference
solution, proceed as directed under Atomic Absorption Spectrophotometry under the
following operation condition, the absorbance of solution B should not be higher than that
of reference solution (not more than 250 ppm).
Operation Condition
Combustible gas : Acetylene
Combustible supporting gas : Air
Lamp : Iron hollow cathode lamp
Wavelength : 248.3nm
(3) Other Heavy Metals ： 40 mL of test solution is diluted to 50 mL with water, Solution E.
Separately, 40 mL of blank test solution, 2 mL of lead standard solution, and water are
mixed to have 50 mL of Solution F. When 2 drops each of sodium sulfide solution is added
to each Solution E & F, which is then mixed by shaking and set aside for 5 minutes, the
color of Solution E should not be deeper than that of Solution F (Not more than 20ppm).
D. Barium
1 g of sample is placed in a platinum crucible, which is reduced to ash by following the
procedure in Residues on Ignition. Ash is well mixed with 5g of anhydrous sodium carbonate.
The crucible is covered and heated to melt the content. After heating for additional 10
minutes, it is cooled and 20 mL of water is added. The contents are dissolved by heating in
a water bath.
After cooling, the solution is filtered and the residues are washed with water until the wash
water does not show the reaction of sulfate salts. The residues along with the filter paper
are transferred into a beaker, where 30 mL of dilute hydrochloric acid. It is well mixed and
boiled. After cooling, it is filtered and the residues are washed with 10 mL of water and the
wash water is added to the filtrate. The filtrate is evaporated to dryness in a water bath.
The residues are dissolved by adding 5 mL of water, which is then filtered, if necessary.
0.25 mL of dilute hydrochloric acid is added and mixed well. Water is added to the filtrate
to bring the total volume to 25 mL, test solution. Separately, 0.5 mL of dilute hydrochloric
acid and water are added to 0.5 mL of barium standard solution, which is then diluted to 25
mL, reference solution. Proceed test for the test solution and the reference solution as
directed under Inductively Coupled Plasma Atomic Emission Spectrometry. The emission
intensity of test solution should not be higher than that of reference solution (not more than
500 ppm).
1629
E. Assay
(A) A specified amount of sample is placed in a 500 mL wide-mouth Erlenmeyer flask,
where 20 mL of dilute sulfuric acid and then 50 mL of boiling water are added. The
sample is dissolved by heating. To this solution, 150 mL of boiling water and then 15g of
sodium citrate are added. While bubbling carbon dioxide through and vigorously boiling the
solution, it is titrated with 0.1 N titanium trichloride solution. The end point is when the
characteristic color of the sample is discharged.
(B) The same procedure in (A) is followed with 15g of sodium hydrogen tartarate instead of
sodium citrate.
(C) The same procedure in (A) is followed with 15g of sodium hydrogen tartarate instead of
sodium citrate. However, as an indicator, 10 mL of light green SF yellowish solution (1→1,000)
is used. Separately, a blank test is carried out.

1630
 35. Flavoring Substances Test
A. Halogenated Compounds
(1) Copper Screen Method ： Copper wire, which is used at the end of copper screen of 15
mm width, 5 cm length, approximately 1 mm mesh size, is used. This copper screen is
burned in a colorless flame of a burner until green color in the flame disappears and
cooled in air. This is repeated several times so that a film of oxide is formed. After
cooling, the screen is coated with 3 drops of sample and burned. This is repeated 3 times.
When this screen is burned in a colorless outer flame, that is adjusted to approximately 4
cm in height, green colored flame should not appear
(2) Ignition Method ： A quantitative filter paper is cut into a siae of 5 cm width and 6 cm
length, which is dipped into a sample and placed on a watch glass. The watch glass is
placed on a tripod and the filter paper is ignited. Watch glass is immediately covered with
a 1l beaker, which is wetted with water. After ignition is finished, the inner wall of the
beaker is washed 10 mL of water. 1 drop of nitric acid and then 1 drop of silver nitrate
solution are added to the wash water. The resulting turbidity should not be higher than
that of a reference solution that is prepared by following the same procedure without a
sample.
B. Acid Value
Unless otherwise specified, approximately 10 g of sample is precisely weighed and dissolved
(by heating, if necessary) in approximately 50 mL of alcohol (neutralized with 0.1 N
potassium hydroxide using phenolphthalein solution) or 1:1 mixture of alcohol and ether. It is
titrated with 0.1 N sodium hydroxide solution using a micro-burette until a red color persists
for 30 seconds (indicator : 1 mL phenolphthalein solution). If the precipitate of sample is
formed, additional solvent is added to dissolve it.
0.1N NaOH consumption (mL) × 5.611
Acid Value ＝
Sample(g)

C. Ester Value and Ester Content

Unless otherwise specified, a specified amount of sample is precisely weighed into a 150 mL
flask, where 10 mL of alcohol and 3 drops of phenolphthalein solution are added. It is
neutralized with 0.1 N potassium hydroxide solution. 25 mL of 0.5 N alcoholic solution of
potassium hydroxide is added. A reflux condenser is attached to the flask, which is gently
boiled for 1 hour in a water bath. After cooling, 1 mL of phenolphthalein solution is added to
the solution and excess alkali is titrated with 0.5 N hydrochloric acid. Separately, a blank
test is carried out.
(a - b) × 28.05
Ester Value ＝
Sample (g)

The equation for ester content below applies only to the monobasic acid esters.
1631
 Molecular weight of ester × (a - b) × 0.5
Ester Content(%) ＝ × 100
Sample (g) × 1,000

a ： consumed amount of 0.5N hydrochloric acid in blank test (mL)

b ： consumed amount of 0.5N hydrochloric acid for test solution (mL)
D. Saponification Value
Unless otherwise specified, a specified amount of sample is precisely weighed into a 150 mL
flask, where 25 mL of 0.5 N alcoholic solution of potassium hydroxide. A reflux condenser is
attached to the flask, which is gently boiled for 1 hour in a water bath. After cooling, 1 mL
of phenolphthalein solution is added to the solution and excess alkali is titrated with 0.5 N
hydrochloric acid. Separately, a blank test is carried out.
(a - b) × 28.05
Saponification Value ＝
Sample(g)

a ： consumed amount of 0.5 N hydrochloric acid in blank test (mL)

b ： consumed amount of 0.5 N hydrochloric acid for test solution (mL)
E. Phenol Content
Unless otherwise specified, the content of phenol is measured as the content of matters in a
sample that are soluble in alkali hydroxides and by the following method.

<Cassia flask>
10 mL of sample is placed in 150 mL of Cassia flask, where 75 mL of potassium hydroxide
solution is added in 3 portions. It is mixed well by shaking for 5 minutes. It is set aside for
30 minutes, where 1N potassium hydroxide solution is slowly added until the insoluble oil
rises up to the graduated marks of the flask. After setting aside for 1 hour, the amount is
measured.

1632
 Phenol Content (%) ＝ 10 × [10 amount of insoluble oil (mL)]
F. Alcohol Content
Alcohol content is the content of isolated alcohols that are present in a sample.
Procedure
Unless otherwise specified, the following method is followed.
Method 1
In a 100 mL flask with an air condenser, 10 mL of sample, 10 mL of anhydrous acetic acid,
and 1 g of anhydrous sodium acetate (freshly melt by heating) are added and gently boiled
for 1 hour in a water bath. After setting aside for 15 minutes, 50 mL of water is added,
which is heated for 15 minutes in a water bath. After cooling, the contents is transferred
into a separatory funnel and the aqueous phase is separated out. Oil phase is washed with
sodium carbonate solution until the wash solution becomes basic. It is then washed with
sodium chloride solution until the wash solution becomes neutral. This oil phase is
transferred into a dried container, where approximately 2 g of anhydrous sodium sulfate is
added and mixed well by shaking. It is set aside for 30 minutes and then filtered. A
specified amount of acetylated oil is precisely weighed and tested by the following ester
value measurement method.
This ester value is also called acetyl value and calculated by the following equation.
Acetyl (a - b) × 28.05
Value ＝ Acetylated oil(g)

(1) A sample without ester

Alcohol Content(%) Molecular weight of alcohol × (a - b) × 0.5
= × 100
[Acetylated oil(g) - 0.02102(a - b)] × 1,000

Acetyl Value × Molecular weight of alcohol

＝
561.1 - (0.4204 × Acetyl Value)

a ： consumed amount of 0.5 N hydrochloric acid in blank test (mL)

b ： consumed amount of 0.5 N hydrochloric acid for test solution (mL)
Method 2
A specified amount of sample is precisely weighed into a 200 mL flask with a stopper,
where 5 mL of anhydrous acetic acid·pyridine solution is added. The connection part is
wetted with 2～3 drops of pyridine and the stopper is loosened. It is then heated for 1 hour
in a water bath. After cooling, the inner wall of flask and the stopper are washed with 10
mL of water into the flask. After a stopper is placed, it is mixed by shaking and cooled to
normal temperature. The connection part and the inner wall are washed with 5 mL of
neutralized alcohol into the flask. It is then titrated with 0.5N alcoholic solution of potassium
hydroxide (indicator : 2～3 drops of cresol red·thymol blue solution). Separately, a blank test
1633
 is carried out by the same procedure.
Molecular weight of alcohol × (a - b) × 0.5
Alcohol content (%) ＝ × 100
Sample (g) × 1,000

a ： consumed amount of 0.5 N alcoholic solution of KOH for blank test (mL)
b ： consumed amount of 0.5 N alcoholic solution of KOH in a test solution (mL)
G. Aldehydes and Ketones content
(1) Sodium Hydrogen Sulfite Method
Unless otherwise specified, 10 mL of sample is placed in a 150 mL Cassia flask, where 75
mL of sodium hydrogen sulfite solution is added and mixed. It is heated while shaking
occasionally in a boiling water bath until the lump disappears completely. 25 mL of sodium
hydrogen sulfite solution is added to the solution, shaken and mixed, which is then set
aside for 10 minutes in a boiling water bath. Sodium hydrogen sulfite solution is slowly
added until the insoluble oil rises up to the graduated marks of the flask. After setting
aside for 1 hour, the amount is measured.
Content of aldehydes and ketones (%) ＝ 10 × [10 amount of insoluble oil (mL)]
(2) Sodium Sulfite Method
Unless otherwise specified, 75 mL of freshly prepared 30% sodium sulfite solution and 2
drops of phenolphthalein solution are added to a 150 mL Cassia flask and isolated alkali is
neutralized with acetic acid. 10 mL of sample is added to the flask, which is well shaken
in a boiling water bath. Isolated alkali is occasionally neutralized with acetic acid. If the
solution does not show red～pale red color by adding 3 drops of phenolphthalein solution,
the flask is set aside for 15 minutes in a boiling water bath. 30% of sodium sulfite solution
(neutralized with acetic acid using phenolphthalein solution as an indicator) is slowly added
until the insoluble oil rises up to the graduated marks of the flask. After setting aside for
1 hour, the amount is measured.
Content of aldehydes and ketones (%) ＝ 10 × [10 amount of insoluble oil (mL)]
(3) Hydroxylamine Method
Method 1
A specified amount of sample is precisely weighed and well mixed by shaking with 50 mL of
0.5 N hydroxylamine hydrochloride solution, which is set aside or gently boiled in a water
bath using a reflux condenser for a specified period of time. It is then cooled to room
temperature. Isolated acid is titrated with 0.5N alcoholic solution of potassium hydroxide.
Separately, a blank test is carried out by the same procedure
Content of aldehydes and ketones molecular weight of aldehydes and ketones × (a- b) ×
× 100
(%) ＝ 0.5

1634
 Weight of sample(g) × 1,000

a ： consumed amount of 0.5 N alcoholic solution of KOH for test solution (mL)
b ： consumed amount of 0.5 N alcoholic solution of KOH in a blank test (mL)
Method 2
A specified amount of sample is precisely weighed and mixed well by shaking in 75 mL of
hydroxylamine solution, which is set aside or gently boiled in a water bath using a reflux
condenser for a specified period of time. It is then cooled to room temperature. The excess
amount of hydroxylamine is titrated with 0.5 N hydrochloric acid. The end point is where the
color of solution changes from violet to greenish yellow. Separately, a blank test is carried
out by the same procedure.

Content of aldehydes and ketones molecular weight of aldehydes and ketones × (b – a)

× 0.5 × 100
(%) ＝
sample(g) × 1,000

a ： consumed amount of 0.5N hydrochloric acid in test solution (mL)

b ： consumed amount of 0.5N hydrochloric acid for blank test (mL)

1635
 36. Oils Test
Oils test is measured for acid value, saponification value and ester value about fatty acid,
aliphatic alcohols, and ester of fatty acid except for flavoring.
A. Acid value : Unless otherwise directed, a specified amount of sample is accurately
weighed and dissolved(by heating, if necessary) in approximately 50mL of mixture of
ethyl alcohol and ether(1:1), previously neutralized to 0.1N alcoholic potassium
hydroxide(indicator : phenolphtalein TS). After cooling, add a few drops of phenolphthalein
TS and titrate, while shaking, with 0.1N alcoholic potassium hydroxide TS to the first
pink color that persists for at least 30seconds.
Acid Value = Amount of 0.1N potassium hydroxide(mL) ⅹ 5.611/Weight of sample (g)
B. Saponification Value
Unless otherwise directed, a specified amount of sample is accurately weighed and
dissolved in 40mL of ethyl alcohol(by heating, if necessary), and added 20mL of
alcoholic potassium hydroxide TS. A reflex condenser is connected to the flask, which is
gently boiled with shaking for 30 min in a water bath. After cooling, wash the condenser
with a few mL of water, add a few drops of phenolphthalein TS and titrate the excess
potassium hydroxide with 0.5N hydrochloric acid. Perform a blank determination using
the same amount of alcoholic potassium hydroxide TS.
Saponification value = (a-b) ⅹ28.05/ weight of sample (g)
a: Consumed amount of 0.5N hydrochloric acid in blank test (mL)
b: Consumed amount of 0.5N hydrochloric acid in sample solution (mL)
C. Ester value
Unless otherwise specified, Ester value is calculated by the formula after measuring
saponification value and acid value.
Ester value= saponification value - acid value
D. Hydroxyl Value
Unless otherwise specified, approximately 1g of the sample is accurately weighed and
transfer it into a round flask indicated in the picture below. 5mL of pyridine acetic
anhydride reagent is accurately taken and placed in the flask. Small funnel is placed on the
entrance of the flask, and the bottom of the flask is immersed about 1cm in the oil bath of
95～100℃. Next, shake the flask, and heat for 10minutes. After cooling, funnel and upper
part of the flask are washed with 5mL alcohol. Excess acetic acid is titrated with alcoholic
potassium hydroxide (indicator: 1mL of phenolphthalein TS). Blank test is conducted as the
same manner.
Hydroxyl Value = (a-b) ⅹ28.05/ sample weight (g) + acid value

1636
a: Consumed amount of 0.5N alcoholic potassium hydroxide in blank test (mL)
b: Consumed amount of 0.5N alcoholic potassium hydroxide in sample solution (mL)

1637
 37. Test of Bactericidal Activity
Analyzing Principle : this test method is to figure out whether a food contact surface
sanitizer/disinfectant has sanitizer/disinfectant efficacy. There are Test of Bacterial
Suspension, Test of Bacterial Surface, and Test of Spore Suspension. Unless otherwise
specified, the Test of Bacterial Suspension is used for the measurement.
Definition of Sanitizer/Disinfectants Efficacy: Reduction ratio(%) of initial bacterial count(cfu/mL)
of test bacteria toward viable counts(cfu/mL) under the regulated condition toward sanitizers
and disinfectants for food utensils, containers and packages
A. Test of Bacterial Suspension
1) Preparation of test solution
Prepare a test solution by diluting it with hard water(F. Solution ②) to 1.25 times higher
than the concentration leballed on a sample. The prepared test solution shall be used
immediately and shall not be used longer than maximum 2 hours. However, for a sample
that are not diluted, use undiluted test solution.

2) Test Organisms
Use following 2 strains as standard strains.
- Escherichia coli ATCC 10536 or Escherichia coli ATCC 11229
- Staphylococcus aureus ATCC 6538
However, besides standard strains above, additional strains can be selected from below
example:
- Bacillus cereus ATCC 21772
- Vibrio parahaemolyticus ATCC 27969
- Salmonella typhimurium ATCC 13311
- Listeria monocytogenes ATCC 19111 (or Listeria monocytogenes ATCC 19115)
3) Incubation of Test Strain
Spread the test strain on TSA(E. broth ①) and incubate at 36±1℃ for 18 to 24 hours. This
is called 1st incubation, and do the 2nd incubation in the same way as the 1st one. Use the
2nd incubated test strain in the test. However, for the incubation of V. paraemolyticus among
the additional test strains, inoculate 10μL of the test strain into 10 mL of TSB(E. broth ②)
which is previously adjusted to 2% sodium chloride, and incubate it at 36±1°C for 18 to 24
hours. When the 1st incubation is completed, do the 2nd incubation to 100 mL of TSB which
is previously adjusted to 2% sodium chloride.
4) Preparation of bacterial test suspension and counting
(1) Preparation
Transfer the second incubated test bacteria, according to 3) abo ve, to a 100mL conical flask,
1638
 containing 10 mL of tripton physiology saline (F. Reagent ①) and 5 g of glass beads (D.
Instrument and material ①), using platinum. Soak the platinum transferred by the test bacteria in
the tripton physiology saline and rub it on the wall of the conical flask so that the strain falls
completely. Mix it well using a stirrer (D. instrument and material ②) for 3 minutes. Then, take
the liquid inside the glass bead and transfer it to another test tube. Adjust viable cell count to
1.5×108~5.0×108 cfu/mL using tripton physiology saline, leave it at constant-temperature waterbath
of 20±1°C (D. Instrument and material ③) before using it as a test strain suspension solution.
The test strain suspension solution shall be used within two hours of manufacture.
However, in the case of V. paraehamolyticus of the additional test strain, the incubated
bacteria of 3) above are placed in a sterilized 50mL centrifuge tube and the centrifuge (D.
Instrument and material ④, 20°C, 5000xg(6,000 rpm)) for 5 minutes, and discard the
supernatant carefully, and add 25 mL of tripton physiology saline to the remained strain. stir
it for 10 seconds using a shaker. After the stir is done, do the centrifuge and then discard
the supernatant again. Then add 2 mL of tripton physiology saline to make the strains
suspended. Add 10mL of tripton physiology saline and 5g of glass bead to a 100 mL conical
flask, and add prepared bacterial test suspension solution. Mix them well for 3 minutes using
shaker. Then adjust viable cell count to 1.5~5×108 cfu/mL using tripton physiology saline, leave it
at constant-temperature water bath of 20±1°C for 2 hours, and use this as bacterial test
suspension solution.
(2) Counting
Prepare 10-6~10-7 dilutions of the bacterial test suspension with diluent, tripton physiology saline.
Take 1 mL each of these fluids into the duplicate petridishes(D. Apparatus and materials) and
aseptically pipette approximately 15 mL of TSA medium maintaining 45±1℃. After well mixed and
solidified, add 3~5 mL of TSA medium and duplicated to prevent the occurrence of spreading
colonies. Upside down the cooled and solidified petridishes and incubate at 36±1℃ for 48±2hours.
After incubation, count the number of bacteria (N) of the test strains in accordance with the
following formula. Calculate the number of viable cells in bacteria test suspension by taking a
petridish that generated 15 to 300 colonies. If the results of the effective range are found in the
dilution drainage of 10-6 and 10-7, calculate the number of bacteria by using the following formula.
However, if the results of the effective range are obtained only from one stage of dilution, the
calculation is performed by multiplying the arithmetic mean and the dilution multiple. The
calculated results are rounded until two digits are obtained between 1.0 and 9.9, and expressed in
multipled by 10 times(e.g, 2.7×108 cfu/mL).
Count of viable cells in bacterial test suspension(N , cfu/mL) =  
    
 

c : The sum of the colonies counted on petridishes

n1 : The number of petridishes counted at dilution of 10-6
n2 : The number of petridishes counted at dilution of 10-7
d : The dilution rate(10-6) of first dilution
1639
5) Preparation of bacterial test suspended diluent and counting
(1) Preparation
Prepare the test strains of the above 4) by diluting them with tripton-physiological saline to
ensure that the count of viable cells are 3.0×102~1.6×103 cfu/mL.
(2) Counting
Dilute the test strains with tripton-physiological saline 10 times, add 1 mL of the dilute
solution to the two sterilized petridishes, and distribute about 15 mL of the TSA culture
medium at 45±1°C. Then, add 3∼5 mL of the TSA culture medium. After incubating the
frozen petridish upside down, incubate it at 36±1°C for 48±2 hours, and count of viable cells.
The number of viable cells(Nv) of the test strains is calculated according to the following
calculation formula. The number of viable cells of the test strains shall be 3.0×102∼1.6×103
cfu/mL.
The count of viable cells of the test strains (N v, cfu/mL) = 


× 

c : The sum of the colonies counted on petridishes

n : The number of petridishes counted

6) Test Procedure
The temperature of product test solution, bacterial test suspension, bacterial suspended diluent,
test solution, and water maintain at 20±1℃ in a constant temperature water bath.
(1) Test Procedure
Add 1 mL of the interfering substance and 1 mL of the test strains in the test tube (D. D.
Apparatus and material ⑥) and mix them immediately and leave them in the 20±1°C constant
water bath for 2 minutes. Afterwards, add 8 mL of the test solution and mix it and respond for
5 minutes in an constant temperature water bath at 20±1°C. Take 1 mL of this reaction mixture
and neutralize it in a test tube containing 8 mL of neutralizer and 1 mL of distilled water for 5
minutes in an constant temperature water bath at 20±1°C. Put 1 mL of this neutralizing mixture
into two sterilized petridishes and add them to the above. Cultivate it as shown in 4). Recall the
viable cells(Na) in this test. Calculate it according to the formula above A.5).(2).
However, add 9.8 mL of the test solution and prepare the concentration of the interfering
substance and the suspended solution of the test strains 10 times higher than the concentration
used. Add 0.1 mL of each specimen and operate it the same as the test operation.
(2) Test for Validation
Verification tests include test conditions verification tests, neutralizer toxicity verification tests,
and dilution neutralization verification tests, which shall be carried out as shown in the main test
above.
① Validation of experimental conditions
1640
 Add 1 mL of bacterial suspended diluent and 1 mL of the interfering substance into a test tube
and mix them immediately and leave them in the 20±1°C a constant temperature water bath for
2 minutes. Then, add 8 mL of hard water to mix and respond for 5 minutes in an constant
temperature water bath at 20±1°C. Put 1 mL of this reaction mixture into two sterilized
petridishes and cultivate it as shown in A.4).(2). Calculate the viable cells(A) in the test
condition verification method according to the following calculation formula. At this time, the
number of viable cells in the verification test of the test conditions shall not be less than 0.05
times of the number of viable cells in test suspended diluent(Nv).
The count of viable cells in the verification test of the test conditions(A, cfu/mL) = 



c : The sum of the colonies counted on petridishes

n : The number of petridishes counted
Ⓑ Neutralizer toxicity validation
Add 1 mL of test suspended diluent, 8mL of neutralizer, and 1 mL of distilled water to the test
tube and mix them immediately and respond for 5 minutes in constant temperature water bath at
20±1°C. Put each 1 mL of this reaction mixture into two sterilized petridishes, and cultivate it as
shown in A.4).(2). The viable cells(B) of the neutralizer toxicity verification test is calculated
according to the ① Validation of experimental conditions. At this time, the viable cells(B) of the
neutralizer toxicity verification test shall not be less than 0.05 times of test suspended
diluent(Nv).
Ⓒ Dilution-neutralization validation
Place 8 mL of test solution, 1 mL of interfering substance and 1 mL of tripton-physiological
saline into a test tube. Mix for a few seconds and incubate in a constant temperature water bath
at 20±1℃ for 5 minutes. Take 1 mL of the mixture into a test tube filled with 8 mL of
neutralizer and incubate it in a constant temperature water bath at 20±1℃ for 5 minutes. To this
solution, add 1 mL of test suspended diluent, mix, and incubate in a constant temperature water
bath at 20±1℃ for 30 minutes. Take 1 mL each of the mixture into duplicate petridishes and
incubate them by adding TSA medium in the same manner as above A.4).(2). The number of
viable cells of Dilution-neutralization validation is calculated according to the ① Validation of
experimental conditions. At this time, the viable cells(C) of the Dilution-neutralization validation
test shall not be less than 0.05 times of the viable cells(B) of the neutralizer toxicity verification
test.
7) Conclusion
Calculate the rate of reduction of viable cells in test bacteria according to the following equation
and consider it appropriate if the rate of reduction of viable cells is not less than 99.999%.

1641
 N – The number of viable sells in test strain suspension(cfu/.mL)
Na - The number of viable cells by sterilization in test solution*(cfu/mL)
* Apply “1.5×102 cfu/mL” as the number of viable cells(Na) when counted colonies is not more
than 15, and apply “3×103 cfu/mL" as the number of viable cells(Na) when counted colones is
not less than 300 in the product test procedure.
B. Test of Bacterial Surface
This test method is to measure the reduction rate of the number of viable cells on each surface
by applying test suspended solution containing interfering substances to a stainless steel
surface(dry body) and then treating the test solution to this membrane for five minutes at 20±1°C
and immediately suppressing the reaction using a verified neutralizer. However, during this test,
the test shall be carried out with the tryton physiology saline instead of the test solution, and the
verification test shall be carried out simultaneously.
1) Preparation of test solution
The test solution shall be manufactured by diluting the hard water according to the concentration
indicated on the samples. The manufactured test solution shall be used immediately and shall not
exceed 2 hours. However, for samples that are not diluted and are still used, use the undiluted
solution.
2) Test Organisms
Use 2 strains as standard organism in A.2). Additional organisms are not used.
3) Working Cultures of Test Organisms
Follow A.3).
4) Preparation and counting of bacterial test suspension
Follow A.4).
5) Preparation for inoculating solution of test surfaces
Add 400 μL of test suspension and 100 μL of interfering substance to a small test tube. Shake
the test tube for 1 minute using a mechanical shaker. Maintain the suspension in the
constant-temperature water bath at 20±1℃ for 30 minutes. This is inoculating of test surface.
6) Preparation of test surfaces
Inoculate 10μL of E. coli inoculated test surfaces onto the middle of carrier(D. Apparatus and
materials ⑦) and dry on 36±1℃ heat plate. This is E. coli test surface.
7) Test Procedure
The temperature of product test solution, test solution, apparatus, etc. should be stabilized at 20±
1℃. Carrier and glass bottle(D. Apparatus and materials ⑧) are previously dried in desiccator(D.
Apparatus and materials ⑨).
(1) Test Procedure
Carefully place the dried inoculated surfaces upwards and put it into a glass bottle using
sterilized tongs. Add 50 μL of product test solution on the middle of test surface in glass
bottle. Maintain it at 20±1℃ for 5 minutes. Add 9.95 mL of neutralizer and 2∼3g of glass
beads, mix for 1 minute in a mechanical shaker, and filter with membrane filtration
1642
 apparatus(D. Apparatus and materials ⑩). When filtering, rinse 100∼150 mL of diluent(TSCS)
2 times or 3 times. Separate filtration membrane from membrane filtration apparatus and
incubate following A.6).(2).①. Proceed the test procedure above five times with prepared E.
coli test surface. Calculate the number of viable cells(Nd) following equation.
The number of viable bacterial cells in test procedure
and test for validation (cfu/carrier) =
c : the sum of the colonies counted on petridishes taken into account
n : the number of petridishes taken into account
d : the dilution factor corresponding to the dilution taken into account
Separately, calculate the number of viable cells(Nc) in reference test by using diluent (TSCS).
Dilute the mixture by 10-2, 10-3, and 10-4 with diluent (TSCS) and filter with membrane
filtration apparatus. Proceed the test procedure of surface 3 times. The number of viable cells
in reference test of each cell should not be less than 1.5×105 cfu/carrier under the formula
above B.7).(1).
(2) Test for Validation
① Validation of neutralization
Add 9.95 mL of neutralizer and 50 μL of test solution into glass bottle. Mix and maintain at
20±1℃ for 5 minutes. Then add E. coli test surface and 2∼3 g of glass bead. Mix for 1
minute in a mechanical shaker. Dilute the mixture by 10-3, 10-4 and 10-5 with diluent (TSCS)
and filter with membrane filtration apparatus. When filtering, rinse 100∼150 mL of diluent
(TSCS) 2 times or 3 times. Separate filtration membrane from membrane filtration apparatus
and incubate following A.6).(2).①. Proceed the described test procedure above two times with
previously prepared E. coli test surface. Calculate the number of viable cells(A) in validation
of neutralization under the equation B.7).① above. The number of viable cells of each
bacterial organism of the validation of neutralization should not be less than 1.5×105
cfu/carrier.
② Neutralizer toxicity validation
Add 9.95 mL of neutralizer and 50 μL of diluent (TSCS) into glass bottle. Mix and maintain
at 20±1℃ for 5 minutes. Then add E. coli test surface and 2∼3 g of glass bead. Mix for 1
minute in a mechanical shaker. Dilute the mixture by 10-3, 10-4 and 10-5 with diluent (TSCS)
and filter with membrane filtration apparatus. When filtering, rinse 100∼150 mL of diluent
(TSCS) 2 times or 3 times. Separate filtration membrane from membrane filtration apparatus
and incubate following A.6).(2).①. Proceed the described test procedure above two times with
previously prepared E. coli test surface. Calculate the number of viable cells(B) in Neutralizer
toxicity validation under the equation B.7).① above. The number of viable cells of each
bacterial organism counted in the Neutralizer toxicity validation should not be less than 0.5
times of the number of viable cells(cfu/mL) counted in the test for validation and should not
be more than 2 times of the number of viable cells(cfu/mL) counted in the test for validation.

1643
 8) Conclusion
It is appropriate when the reduction in viability is not less than 99.99%.

N c - Viable counts in reference test (cfu/carrier)

N d - The number of viable cells by sterilization in test solution*(cfu/carrier)
* Apply “1.5×10 cfu/carrier” as the number of viable cells when counted colonies is not more
than 15, and apply “3×102 cfu/carrier” as the number of viable cells when counted colones is
not less than 300 in the product test procedure.
C. Test of Spore Suspension
1) Preparation of test solution
The test solution shall be manufactured by diluting the hard water reactor 1.25 times higher than
the concentration indicated on the samples. The manufactured test solution shall be used
immediately and shall not be used exceeding maximum 2 hours. However, for samples that are
not diluted and are still used, use the undiluted solution.
2) Test Organisms
Bacillus subtilis ATCC 6633
3) Preparation of spore solution
Inoculate test organisms into TGB medium(E.. medium ③) and incubate them at 30±1℃ for 18∼
24 hours. 2∼3 mL of this culture fluid is inoculated into a hardened culture bottle(D. Apparatus
and materials ⑪) with MYA medium(D. medium ④), and incubate at 30±1℃ for 8∼10 days.
Collect spores using sterilized glass beads and distilled water, and centrifuge at 10,000 rpm for
20 minutes. After removing the upper layer solution, repeat the process of washing it by floating
it in sterilized distilled water four times, then float the fine dust in sterilized distilled water and
heat it at 75±1℃ for 10 minutes to prepare the spore solution. Store the prepared spore solution
(5±1℃) in the refrigerator and use it, but keep it frozen for long-term storage.
4) Preparation and counting of spore suspension
(1) Preparation
Adjust the number of viable cells to 1.5～5×106 cfu/mL using sterilized distilled water to the
spore solution which is C.3) above. Confirm the spore is free of nutrition cells using an optical
microscope(D. Apparatus and materials ⑫). Maintain it in a constant temperature water bath at
20±1℃ and use this as spore suspension. This solution shall be used within 2 hours after
preparation.
(2) Counting
Dilute the spore suspension 10-4∼10-5 times with sterilized distilled water, and add 1 mL of
each of the two sterilized petridishes and distribute 15 mL of the GYA medium(E. medium ⑤)
at 45±1°C aseptic, and then add 3∼5 mL of the GYA medium to cool it down and overlay it.
After incubating it at 30±1°C for 3 days with the cooling condensed petridishes upside down,
1644
 calculate the spore number(N) of spore suspention. The spore factor of the spore suspension
shall be 1.5×106∼5×106 cfu/mL.

The number of spre of the spore c

suspension(N , cfu/mL) ＝ (n1+0.1n2)d

c : the sum of the colonies counted on the petridish taken into account
n1 : the number of petridishes first dilution
n2 : the number of petridishes second dilution
d : the dilution factor corresponding to the first dilution
5) Preparation and counting of spore suspended diluent
(1) Preparation
Dilute spore suspended diluent with water to adjust the number of spores to 6×102～3×103
cfu/mL. This is spore suspended diluent.
(2) Counting
Dilute spore suspended diluent 10 times with sterilized distilled water. Transfer 1 mL each of
this solution into two separate petridishes and add GYA medium maintained at 45±1℃.
Incubate in the same manner as C.4).(2) above. Calculate the number colonies(Nv) in the spore
suspended diluent under the equation below. Spores number(Nv) in spore suspended diluent
shall be 6×102～3×103 cfu/mL.
Spore number(Nv) in spore suspended c × 10
diluent(Nv, cfu/mL) ＝ n

c : the sum of the colonies counted on the petridish taken into account
n : the number of petridishes counted
6) Test procedure
(1) Test Procedure
Pipette 1 mL of interfering substance and 1 mL of spore suspensions into a test tube.
Immediately mix and maintain it in a constant temperature water bath at 20±1℃ for 2
minutes. Add 8 mL of test solution and mix, then react for 60 minutes in a constant
temperature water bath at 20±1℃. Pipette 1 mL of this reacted mixture, transfer it into a test
tube filled with 8 mL of neutralizer and 1 mL of distilled water. Neutralize it in a constant
temperature water bath at 20±1℃ for 5 minutes. After neutralization, take 1 mL of neutralized
mixture into two separate petridishes and incubate them by adding GYA medium. Calculate the
spore number of the test procedure with the formula C.5).(2) above.
However, for the sample with undiluted solution, add 9.8 mL of test solution and add 0.1 mL
each of interfering substance and bacterial suspension which were prepared their concentration
1645
 10 times higher than that used above, and proceed in the same manner as the test procedure
above.
(2) Test for Validation
Test for Validation include validation of experimental conditions, neutralizer toxicity validation,
and dilution-neutralization validation, which shall be performed in the same manner of the Test
Procedure above.
① Validation of experimental conditions
Pipette 1 mL of interfering substance and 1 mL of spore suspended diluent into a test tube.
Mix for a few seconds and leave in a constant temperature water bath at 20±1℃ for 2
minutes. Add 8 mL of hard water, mix, and react it for 60 minutes in a constant
temperature water bath at 20±1℃. Take 1 mL each of the mixture and transfer into two
separate petridishes. Incubate them under C.4).(2) adding GYA medium. Calculate the spores
number(A) in the validation of experimental conditions under the formula below. At this
time, the spores number in validation of experimental conditions shall not be less than 0.05
times or more than the spres number(Nv) in spore suspended diluent.
The spores number in validation of experimental conditions c
(A, cfu/mL) ＝ n

c : the sum of the colonies counted on the petridish taken into account
n : the number of petridishes counted
② Neutralizer toxicity validation
Place 8 mL of neutralizer, 1 mL of water, and 1 mL of spore suspended diluent in a test
tube. Mix for a few seconds and react for 5 minutes in a constant temperature water bath
at 20±1℃. Take 1 mL each of the mixture and transfer into two separate petridishes.
Incubate them by adding GYA medium in the same manner as (C.4).(2). Calculate the
spores number(B) in the neutralizer toxicity validation under the formula C.6).(2). The
Spores number(B) shall be 0.05 times or more than the spores numbe(Nv) in spore
suspended diluent.
③ Dilution-neutralization validation
Place 1 mL of interfering substance, 1 mL of water, and 8 mL of test solution in a test
tube. Mix for a few seconds and react for 60 minutes in a constant temperature water bath
at 20±1℃. Transfer 1 mL of the mixture into a test tube filled with 8 mL of neutralizer.
React it for 5 minutes in a constant temperature water bath at 20±1℃. To this mixture
solution, add and mix 1 mL of spore suspended diluent and react for 30 minutes in a 20±
1℃ constant temperature water bath. Take a sample of 1 mL each of the mixture and
transfer into two separate petridishes. Incubate them by adding GYA medium in the same
manner as C.4).(2) above. Calculate the spore numbers(C) in Dilution-neutralization
validation under the formula C.6).(2).①. At this time, the spres number(C) of
dilution-neutralization validation shall be 0.5 times or more than the spores number(Nv) of
in spore suspended diluent.
1646
7) Conclusion
It is appropriate when the reduction rate of the spores number is not less than 99.9%.

N – The spore numbers of spore suspended diluent(cfu/mL)

Na - The spore numbers of test procedure*(cfu/mL)
* Apply “1.5×102 cfu/carrier” as the number of viable cells(Na) when counted colonies are not
more than 15, and apply “3×103 cfu/mL" as the number of viable cells when counted colones
are not less than 300 in the test procedure.

D. Apparatus and materials

① Glass bead (diameter 3∼4 mm)
② Stirrer, mixer
③ Water bath(Contains automatic temperature control function, 20±1℃)
④ Centrifuger
⑤ Petridish
⑥ Test tube (18 x 170 mm, etc)
⑦ Carrier (ø1cm×0.07cm stainless steel disk ANSI 304 2B)
⑧ Glass bottle(bottom diameter 2∼3 cm, capacity 15∼20 mL)
⑨ Desicator
⑩ Membrane filteration device(membrane filteration diameter: 47∼50 mm pore size : 0.45㎛, It
shall be capable of holding at least 50 mL of a solution, using a device designed to
allow 100 mL of a cleaning solution to be filtered between 20∼40 seconds with a
uniform filtration rate when vacuum is used)
⑪ Roux bottle(500 mL)
⑫ Optical microscope
⑬ Clean bench
⑭ Autoclave
⑮ Dry oven
⑯ Incubator(36±1℃, 30±1℃)
⑰ Freezer and refrigerator(containing –70℃ freezer)
⑱ Ultra pure water system
⑲ Colony counter
⑳ pH meter
◯21 Pipette(1 mL, 5 mL, 10 mL, etc)
◯22 Slide/ cover glass
◯23 Alcohol lamp, platimum gold, platimum wire, etc.

1647
 E. Culture media
In preparing mediums for an experiment, already commercialized medium can be used, and it can
be followed by each manufacturer’s preparation method to be used.
① TSA (Tryptone Soya Agar)
Tryptone, pancreatic digest of casein 15.0 g
Soya peptone, papaic digest of soybean meal 5.0 g
NaCl 5.0 g
Agar 15.0 g
Dissolve above ingredients in 1,000 mL of distilled water. Adjust the pH to 7.2±0.2 and
sterilize at 121℃ for 15 minutes.
② TSB (Tryptone Soya Broth)
Tryptone, pancreatic digest of casein 15.0 g
Soya peptone, papaic digest of soybean meal 5.0 g
NaCl 5.0 g
Dissolve above ingredients in 1,000 mL of distilled water. Adjust the pH to 7.2 and sterilize
at 121℃ for 15 minutes.
③ TGB (Tryptone glucose broth)
Yeast Extract 2.5 g
Tryptone 5.0 g
Glucose 1.0 g

Dissolve above ingredients in 1,000 mL of distilled water. Adjust the pH to 7.2±0.2 and
sterilize at 121℃ for 15 minutes.
④ MYA (yeast extract agar)
Meat Extract 10.0 g
Yeast Extract 2.0 g
MnSO4·H2O 0.04 g
Agar 15.0 g

Dissolve above ingredients in 1,000 mL of distilled water. Adjust the pH to 7.2±0.2 and
sterilize at 121℃ for 15 minutes.
⑤ GYA (glucose yeast extract agar)
Amino Acids, acid hydrolysis of casein 1.0 g
Soluble Starch 1.0 g

1648
 Glucose 2.5 g
Yeast Extract 2.5 g
FeSO4 0.1 g
MnSO4·H2O 0.0001 g
Agar 15.0 g

Dissolve above ingredients in 1,000 mL of distilled water. Adjust the pH to 6.8±0.2 and
sterilize at 121℃ for 15 minutes.
F. Test solution
① Tryptone sodium chloride solution(TSCS)
Tryptone, pancreatic digest of casein 1.0 g
NaCl 8.5 g

Dissolve above ingredients in 1,000 mL of distilled water. Adjust the pH to 7.2±0.2 and
sterilize at 121℃ for 15 minutes.
② Hard water
- Solution A: Prepare 1 L solution by dissolving 19.84 g of magnesium chloride(MgCl2) and
46.24g of calcium chloride (CaCl2) in distilled water. This solution can be refrigerated and
used for up to one month.
- Solution B: Dissolve 35.02 g of sodium carbonate (NaHCO3) with distilled water and adjust it
to 1,000 mL. This solution can be refrigerated and used for up to one week.
Put 3.0 mL of solution A in a 1,000 mL mass flask, and add at least 600 mL of distilled
water. After applying 8.0 mL of solution B, add distilled water to make 1,000 mL. Adjust pH
of the solution to 7.0±0.2 and sterilize it with filtration. This mixture shall be used within 12
hours.
③ Interfering substance
Dissolve 0.3 g of bovine albumin fraction V in 100 mL of distilled water, and sterilize it with
filtration. If this interfering substance causes precipitation in response to the test solution, it
can be tested using other appropriate interfering substances, and the interfering substance used
shall have the same interference effect as this interfering substance.
④ Neutralizer
lecithin 3g
polysorbate 80 30 g
sodium thiosulfate 5g
L-histidine 1g
saponine 30 g
Dissolve above ingredients in tryptone sodium chloride solution to make 1,000 mL. Adjust the
1649
pH to 7.2±0.2 and sterilize at 121℃ for 15 minutes. Other neutralizers that have been validated
in the verification tests may be used instead of this neutralizer.

1650
Ⅴ. Reagents․test solutions․volumetric standard solutions and standard solutions
Please refer to the original text.

1651
ⅤI. Re-examine Deadline
According to 「Framework Act on Administrative Regulations」Article 8 and 「Regulations on
the Issuance and Management of Directives and Standing Rules」(Presidential Directive
No.248), this shall be reviewed for improvement and other actions for every three years
(which refers to until December 31 of every three years) as of January 1st, 2017.

1652
[Annex 1] Matters concerning Application for Establishment of Standards and Specifications of
Food Additives and Revision of Use Level
Please refer to the original text.

1653
[Table 1] Submission Data for Establishment of Standards and Specifications of Food
Additives and Revision of Use Level
Category New Use Level Specification
Establishment Revision Revision
1. Overview ○ ○ ○
2. Origins or extent of discovery, and Current
situation of use in other countries
A. Origins or extent of discovery ○ △ △
B. Current situation of use in other countries ○ ○ ○
3. Manufacturing method ○ △ △
○
4. Data of draft of Specification (Summit data for
any of the
items below)
A. Name ○ △
B. Structural formula or rational formula ○ △
C. Molecular formula or molecular weight ○ △
D. Definition ○ △
E. Content ○ △
F. Description ○ △
G. Identification ○ △
H. Purity ○ △
I. Loss of drying, ignition loss, or Moisture ○ △
J. Residue on ignition ○ △
K. Assay ○ △
L. Stability of Food additives ○ △
M. Method for analysis of food additives in food ○ △
N. Basis of establishing draft specification ○ △ ○
5. Technical necessity and justification of use ○ ○ △
6. Data for Safety
A. Data for Toxicity
1) Repeated Dose Toxicity study ○ △ △
2) Reproductive and developmental toxicity study ○* △ △
3) Genotoxicity study ○ △ △
4) Immunotoxicity study ○* △ △
5) Chronic·carcinogenicity study ○* △ △
B. Data for internal kinetics ○ △ △
C. Data of daily intake ○ ○ △
D. Data of microorganisms used in manufacturing △ △
food additives
7. Data for draft Use level ○ ○ △

1654
[Table 2] Microorganisms which their safety data may be omitted partially
No. Microorganisms No. Microorganisms
1 Actinoplanes missouriensis 32 Leuconostoc mesenteroides
2 Alcaligenes faecalis 33 Microbacterium arborescens
3 Aspergillus aculeatus 34 Microbacterium imperiale
4 Aspergillus awamori 35 Micrococcus lysodeikticus
5 Aspergillus kawachii 36 Monascus pilosus
6 Aspergillus melleus 37 Monascus purpureus
7 Aspergillus niger 38 Moniliella pollinis
8 Aspergillus oryzae 39 Penicillium chrysogenum
9 Aspergillus shirousamii 40 Penicillium citrinum
10 Aspergillus usamii 41 Penicillium funiculosum
11 Aureobasidium pullulans 42 Penicillium multicolor
12 Bacillus acidopullulyticus 43 Pseudomonas elodea
13 Bacillus amyloliquefaciens 44 Pseudomonas stutzeri
14 Bacillus circulans 45 Pullulanibacillus naganoensis
15 Bacillus coagulans 46 Rhizomucor miehei
16 Bacillus licheniformis 47 Rhizomucor pusillus
17 Bacillus pumilus 48 Rhizopus oryzae
18 Bacillus stearothermophilus 49 Saccharomyces cerevisiae
19 Bacillus subtilis 50 Streptococcus bovis ORLA-JENSEN
20 Candida lipolytica 51 Streptomyces albulus
21 Candida rugosa 52 Streptomyces griseus
22 Candida utilis 53 Streptomyces murinus
23 Chaetomium gracile 54 Streptomyces olivaceus
24 Escherichia coli K-12 55 Streptomyces olivochromogenes
25 Gibberella fujikuroi 56 Streptomyces rubiginosus
26 Humicola insolens 57 Streptoverticillium mobaraense
27 Klebsiella aerogenes 58 Talaromyces emersonii
28 Kluyveromyces fragilis 59 Trichoderma reesei
29 Kluyveromyces lactis 60 Trichoderma viride
30 Lactobacillus fermentum 61 Trichosporonoides megachilensis
31 Lactococcus lactis 62 Xanthomonas campestris
* Also includes the microorganisms listed in 「Food Code」[Annex 1] and [Annex 2]
(Excluding the clause at the bottom of the table) or in QPS(Qualified presumption of safety)
of EFSA(European Food Safety Authority).

1655
[Annex1 Form No.1] Application form for Establishment of Standards and Specifications of
Food Additives

1656
[Annex1 Form No.2] Application form for Revision of Standards and Specifications of Food
Additives

1657
[Annex 2] List No Longer Recognized as Food Additives
Cancelation Date Food Additives Reasons
1996.04.26. Potassium bromate Safety issues
2004.07.16. Madder Color Safety issues
Deletion in individual
additives list due to the
2005.12.14. Lactones list establishment of
Synthetic Flavoring
Substances
Deletion in individual
additives list due to the
2005.12.14. Aromatic aldehydes list establishment of
Synthetic Flavoring
Substances
Deletion in individual
additives list due to the
2005.12.14. Aromatic alcohols list establishment of
Synthetic Flavoring
Substances
Deletion in individual
additives list due to the
2005.12.14. Esters list establishment of
Synthetic Flavoring
Substances
Deletion in individual
additives list due to the
2005.12.14. Ethers list establishment of
Synthetic Flavoring
Substances
Deletion in individual
additives list due to the
2005.12.14. Isothiocyanates list establishment of
Synthetic Flavoring
Substances
Deletion in individual
Indole, Amin, Oxazole, Thiazole, Quinoline, additives list due to the
2005.12.14. Pyrazine, Pyrrole, Pyridine and its list establishment of
derivatives Synthetic Flavoring
Substances

1658
Cancelation Date Food Additives Reasons
Deletion in individual
additives list due to the
2005.12.14. Fatty acids list establishment of
Synthetic Flavoring
Substances
Deletion in individual
additives list due to the
2005.12.14. Aliphatic aldehydes list establishment of
Synthetic Flavoring
Substances
Deletion in individual
additives list due to the
2005.12.14. Aliphatic alcohols list establishment of
Synthetic Flavoring
Substances
Deletion in individual
additives list due to the
2005.12.14. Aliphatic hydrocarbons list establishment of
Synthetic Flavoring
Substances
Deletion in individual
additives list due to the
2005.12.14. Thioalcohols list establishment of
Synthetic Flavoring
Substances
Deletion in individual
additives list due to the
2005.12.14. Thioethers list establishment of
Synthetic Flavoring
Substances
Deletion in individual
additives list due to the
2005.12.14. Ketones list establishment of
Synthetic Flavoring
Substances
Deletion in individual
additives list due to the
2005.12.14. Phenols list establishment of
Synthetic Flavoring
Substances

1659
Cancelation Date Food Additives Reasons
Deletion in individual
additives list due to the
2005.12.14. Phenol Ethers list establishment of
Synthetic Flavoring
Substances
Deletion in individual
additives list due to the
2005.12.14. Furfural and its derivatives list establishment of
Synthetic Flavoring
Substances
Deletion in individual
additives list due to the
2005.12.14. Terpene Hydrocarbons list establishment of
Synthetic Flavoring
Substances
No designation in major
foreign countries.
2006.12.27. Basic Sodium Aluminium Carbonate No information of
domestic use has been
received.
2008.06.24. Propyl ρ-Hydroxybenzoate Safety issues
2009.01.02. Butyl ρ-Hydroxybenzoate Safety issues
2009.01.02. Isobutyl ρ-Hydroxybenzoate Safety issues
2009.01.02. Isopropyl ρ-Hydroxybenzoate Safety issues
No designation in major
foreign countries.
2009.07.10. Kusagi Color No information of
domestic use has been
received.
No designation in major
foreign countries.
2009.07.10. Peanut Color No information of
domestic use has been
received.
No designation in major
foreign countries.
2009.07.10. Corn Color No information of
domestic use has been
received.
2009.11.19. Sodium Dichloroisocyanurate Safety issues

1660
Cancelation Date Food Additives Reasons
No designation in major
foreign countries.
2010.11.12. Trisodium Glycyrrhizinate No information of
domestic use has been
received.
No designation in major
foreign countries.
2010.11.12. Dehydroacetic Acid No information of
domestic use has been
received.
No designation in major
foreign countries.
2010.11.12. Thiamine Naphthalene-2,6-disulfonate No information of
domestic use has been
received.
No designation in major
foreign countries.
2010.11.12. Thiamine Phenolphthalinate No information of
domestic use has been
received.
No designation in major
foreign countries.
2010.11.12. Defatted Ricebran Extract No information of
domestic use has been
received.
No designation in major
foreign countries.
2010.11.12. Bleaching Powder No information of
domestic use has been
received.
No designation in major
foreign countries.
2012.03.27. Crayfish Color No information of
domestic use has been
received.
No designation in major
foreign countries.
2012.03.27. L-Sorbose No information of
domestic use has been
received.

1661
Cancelation Date Food Additives Reasons
No designation in major
foreign countries.
2012.03.27. Mutastein No information of
domestic use has been
received.
No designation in major
foreign countries.
2012.03.27. Krill Color No information of
domestic use has been
received.
2015.02.24. 3-acetyl- 2,5-dimethylthiophene Safety issues
(A018, Synthetic Flavoring Substances)
2018.06.29. C006 Capsaicin Safety issues
(Synthetic Flavoring Substances)
2018.06.29. D210 2,5-Dimethylthiophene Safety issues
(Synthetic Flavoring Substances)
2018.06.29. E002 4,5-Epoxy-(E)-2-decenal Safety issues
(Synthetic Flavoring Substances)
2018.06.29. E175 2-Ethylthiophene Safety issues
(Synthetic Flavoring Substances)
2018.06.29. F036 Pyrrole-2-carbaldehyde Safety issues
(Synthetic Flavoring Substances)
2018.06.29. M009 p-Mentha-1,8-dien-7-al Safety issues
(Synthetic Flavoring Substances)
2018.06.29. M014 Menthadienol Safety issues
(Synthetic Flavoring Substances)
2018.06.29. M020 Menthofuran Safety issues
(Synthetic Flavoring Substances)
2018.06.29. M375 Myrtenyl formate Safety issues
(Synthetic Flavoring Substances)
2018.06.29. M402 2-Methylthiophene Safety issues
(Synthetic Flavoring Substances)
2018.06.29. M411 3-Methylthiophene Safety issues
(Synthetic Flavoring Substances)
2018.06.29. M436 Methyl methanethiosulfonate Safety issues
(Synthetic Flavoring Substances)
2018.06.29. N037 3-Nonanon-1-yl acetate Safety issues
(Synthetic Flavoring Substances)
2018.06.29. P166 Pulegone Safety issues
(Synthetic Flavoring Substances)
2018.06.29. P185 Pentan-2,4-dione Safety issues
(Synthetic Flavoring Substances)
2018.06.29. P201 Propyl propane thiosulfonate Safety issues
(Synthetic Flavoring Substances)
1662
Cancelation Date Food Additives Reasons
2018.06.29. S014 Styrene Safety issues
(Synthetic Flavoring Substances)
T069 2,6,6-Trimethyl
2018.06.29. –1-cyclohexen-1-carboxaldehyde Safety issues
(Synthetic Flavoring Substances)
2018.06.29. V018 Vetiverol Safety issues
(Synthetic Flavoring Substances)
2018.06.29. V019 Vetiveryl acetate Safety issues
(Synthetic Flavoring Substances)

1663
[Annex 3] Specifications of Trichloroethylene, Methylene Chloride and
1-hydroxyethylidene-1,1-diphosphoric acid(HEDP)

Trichloroethylene
Ethylene Trichloride
1,1,2-Trichloroethylene
H Cl
｜ ｜
Cl—C＝C—Cl
C2HCl3 Molecular Weight 131.39

Compositional Specifications of Trichloroethylene

Description Trichloroethylene is a colorless, transparent liquid with a chloroform-like odor
and sweetness.
Purity (1) Specific Gravity : Specific gravity of Trichloroethylene should be within a range of
1.454∼1.458
(2) Acidity and alkalinity : Apply 2 drops of phenolphthalein solution to 25 mL of water, add
0.01N sodium hydroxide solution until a pale red color appears, and shake it by adding 25
mL (amount equivalent to 36g) of this item for 30 seconds. If a pale red color exists, the
consumption shall be not more than 0.9 mL when shaken repeatedly until the pale red
color disappears and titrated with 0.01 N hydrochloric acid. After a pale red color
disappears, the consumption of 0.01N sodium hydroxide solution shall not be more than 1.0
mL when titrate with the 0.01N sodium hydroxide solution until a pale red color appears.
(3) Lead: When trichloroethylene is taken and tested in accordance with the atomic absorption
photometry or the induction combined plasma luminous intensity method, the amount shall
not be more than 1.0 ppm.
(4) Distillation test: When measuring oil in accordance with the viscosity and fluid
measurement method, a minimum of 95 % (v/v) shall be spilled at 86 to 88°C.
(5) Released halogen: When adding 10 mL of an iodine potassium solution (1→10) and 1 mL
of an starch test solution, the color blue shall not appear in the water layer.
(6) Evaporative residues: When 69 mL of trichloroethylene(approximately 100g) is dried in a
bath for 30 minutes at 105°C, the amount shall not be more than 10 ppm.
Moisture The moisture of trichloroethylene shall not be more than 0.05 % when tested in
accordance with the Water Quantification Method (Cal-Fisher Method).
Methylene Chloride
Dichloromethane
CH2Cl2 Molecular Weight 84.93

Compositional Specifications of Methylene Chloride

1664
Description Methylene Chloride is a colorless, nonflammable liquid.
Purity (1) Specific Gravity : Specific gravity of Trichloroethylene should be within a range of
1.318∼1.323
(2) Acidity(as hydrochloric acid) : Approximately 100 mL(amount of about 132 g) of
Methylene Chloride shall be put in a separatory funnel with 100 mL of water and shake
intensely for two minutes. When water layer is taken and titrated with a 0.01N sodium
hydroxide solution, its consumption shall not be more than 3.6 mL(indicator: 4 drops of
Bromothymol blue).
(3) Lead: When methylene chloride is taken and tested in accordance with the atomic
absorption photometry or the induction combined plasma luminous intensity method, the
amount shall not be more than 1.0 ppm.
(4) Distillation test: When measuring oil in accordance with the viscosity and fluid
measurement method, a minimum of 95 % (v/v) shall be spilled at 39.5 to 40.5 °C.
(5) Released halogen: 10 mL of Methylene Chloride is put in a separatory funnel with 25 mL
of water, and shake intensely for one minute. When layers are completely separated,
discard lower layer. Then put 1 mL of iodine potassium test solution and several drops of
starch test solution to the water layer, and blue color shall not appear when waiting for 5
minutes.
(6) Evaporative residues: When 38 mL of methylene chloride(approximately 50 g) is dried in a
bath for 30 minutes at 105°C, the amount shall not be more than 20 ppm.
Moisture The moisture of methylene chloride shall not be more than 0.02 % when tested in
accordance with the Water Quantification Method (Cal-Fisher Method).

1665
 1-hydroxyethylidene-1,1-diphosphonic acid(HEDP)

Formula: C2H8O7P2

Molecular weight: 206.03

Synonyms: Phosphonic acid,(1-hydroxyethylidene)bis- CAS No. : 2809-21-4

Compositional Specifications of 1-hydroxyethylidene-1,1-diphosphonic acid(HEDP)

Content It contains within a range of 58.0～62.0 % of HEDP.
Description HEDP is a clear, transparent liquid with a colorelss∼pale yellow color.
Purity (1) Acidity : This solution(1→100) should not be more than pH 2.0.
(2) Specific gravity: The specific gravity of HEDP is 1.430∼1.471.
(3) Chloride: When tested in accordance with the Chloride Limit Test by precisely weighing 5
g of HEDP, the amount shall not be more than the corresponding 0.56 mL of 0.01 N
hydrochloric acid (not more than 0.004 %)
(4) Phosphorous acid: Weigh 1.5 g of HEDP precisely and put it into an iodine flask and add
20 mL of water and 50 mL of a phosphoric acid buffer(pH 7.3). Adjust the pH to 7.3 using
sodium hydroxide solution(1→2). Then, take exactly 25 mL of 0.05 mol/L iodine solution,
seal it up, let it stand in a dark place for 15 minutes, add 5 mL of acetic acid, and titrate
the iodine with a 0.1mol/L sodium thiosulfate solution(indicator: 1∼3 mL of starch test
solution). Shake it continuously until the yellow color disappears, and add 0.1 mol/L sodium
thiosulfate solution at a constant rate. The end point is when the color blue disappears.
Perform the blank test in the same way. The amount of phosphorous acid(H3PO3) shall not
be more than 4.0 % calculated by the following formula.
1mL of 0.05mol/L iodine solution = 4.10mg H3PO3
Test solution
Phosphoric acid buffer(pH 7.3): Dissolve 138 g of Sodium phosphate,
monobasic(NaH2PO4·H2O) in 800mL of water, and add sodium hydroxide solution(1→2) to
make it exact 1,000 mL with water.
(5) Lead: When precisely weighing 5.0 g of HEDP and tested in accordance with the atomic
absorption method or the induction combined plasma luminous intensity method, the amount
shall not be more than 5.0 ppm.
(6) Iron: When precisely weighing 5.0 g of HEDP, and tested in accordance with the atomic
absorption method or the induction combined plasma luminous intensity method, the amount
shall not be more than 10 ppm.
(7) Arsenic: When tested in accordance with the Arsenic Test Method, the amount shall not
be more than 4.0 ppm.
Assay Weigh approximate 0.3 g of HEDP and dissolve in 50 mL of water, and titrate 1 mol/L
1666
 sodium hydroxide solution with stirring. The end point is second inflection point and
identify using a potentionmeter. The consumption of 1 mol/L sodium hydroxide solution at
the end point shall be a(mL), and the content of 1-hydroxytilidene-1, 1-dipsponinic acid
shall be obtained by the following formula.
Content(%) = a × 206.0 Amount acid(%)
of × 1.675
Sample(g) × 30 phosphorous

1667
[Annex 4] Regulations on Determination of Naturally Occurring Food Additives
Chapter 1. Purpose
The purpose of this regulation is to stipulate details for determining whether the detected food
additives are naturally occurring food additives, which are not intentionally used in food, health
functional food and livestock products whose standards and specifications are specified
according to the Article 7 of 「Food Sanitation Act」, Article 14 of 「Health Functional Foods
Act」, and Article 4 of 「The Special Act on Imported Food Safety Management」.
Chapter 2. Definitions
In this Regulation, “Natural occurrence” means the condition in which the food additives are
naturally derived from food but is not intentionally used.
Chapter 3. Object(Apply to)
Natural occurrence are apply to the only food additives that are detected from the food, health
functional food or livestock products which is not intentionally used. However, except the food
additives derived from the food materials that are already allowed to be used in those
materials.

Chapter 4. Determination of Natural Occurrence

The Ministry of Food and Drug Safety’s minister is able to admit the food additives as
naturally occurring if a person submits scientific data to prove it as natural occurrence.
Chapter 5. Submission data
1. The scope of the submission data is as follows. However, some of the submissions may be
omitted if there is a reasonable excuses.
A. Data on the name and content of food additives
B. Data on food type, mixing ratio of raw material, manufacturing process, etc.
C. Data that can prove the natural occurrence in raw materials and manufacturing process
D. Test report on food additives detected in raw materials, etc.
E. Other data that is recognized as to demonstrate natural occurrence
2. The issuer of a test report shall be the testing and inspection institution designated by
Article 6 and 8 of 「Act on Testing and Inspection in the Food and Drug Industry」.
3. The samples shall be based on the ingredients listed in [Annex 1] “Materials Available for
Food” of 「Food Code」.
4. The number of samples shall be a total of nine of three different production sites or
manufacturers. However, it may be changed if it is admitted by the Ministry of Food and
Drug Safety’s minister due to the supply and demand of samples and regional
characteristics, etc.

1668
 Chapter 6. Request for reviews
1. The Ministry of Food and Drug Safety’s minister may request reviews to the Director General of
National Institute of Food and Drug Safety Evaluation, and may approve it’s possibility of natural
occurrence by reviewing the results overall.
2. The Ministry of Food and Drug Safety’s minister may request advice from the experts if
necessary, and may approve the possibility of natural occurrence based on its results. In this
case, allowance and travel expenses may be paid within the budget.
Chapter 7. Data supplementation, etc
Supplementation or cessation might be required if the case fits to any of the followings :
1. Supplementation
A. If the data is incomplete or missing
B. If data is not reliable
C. If it is necessary for the review of the natural occurrence
2. Cessation
A. If it is not a subject of reviews or not comply with this regulations
B. If the supplementary data is insufficient for the reviews or the supplementary data has not
been submitted
Chapter 8. Public disclosure
In order to prevent confusion in the administration and provide information to trader, the MFDS
responds of natural occurrence might be disclosed on the web site(www.foodsafetykorea.go.kr).

1669
 Regulation Number
No. (Date of entry into Contents
force)
135 MFDS Regulation Supplementary Provisions<#2018-53, 2018. 6. 29.>
#2018-84
(2018.11.1.) Article 1(Date of entry into force) ① This regulation is
effective from November 1st, 2018.
② Notwithstanding Section ①, Use level revision of
Ⅱ.5.A.L-Ascorbyl Palmitate and Ⅱ.5.C.(2) for Milk
formulas, etc. are effective from July 1st, 2019.
Article 2 (Example) This regulation shall apply to food
additives, food or health functional foods (hereinafter
referred to as "food additives, etc.") manufactured,
processed, subdivided or imported(based on the date of
shipment) for the first time since the date of entry into
force.
Article 3 (Interim measures for matters under inspection) If
the inspection is on-going at the time of entry into force,
it shall apply the previous regulation.
Article 4 (Interim measures for food additives, etc. which are
already manufactured) If the food additives, etc. are
already manufactured, processed, subdivided, or
imported(based on the date of shipment) following the
previous regulation, they are still able to be sold after
the date of entry into force(If there is a expiration date,
they are able to be sold until the expiration date). Also,
food additives, etc., which are manufactured or processed
using these food additives, etc., are able to be sold until
the expiration date of the products.
136 MFDS Regulation Supplementary Provisions<#2019-1, 2019. 1. 9.>
#2019-1
(2019.1.9.) Article 1(Date of entry into force) ① This regulation is
effective from January 9th, 2019.
② Notwithstanding Section ①, Use level revision of
Ⅱ.5.A.L-Ascorbyl Palmitate and Propylene Glycol are
effective from July 1st, 2019.
Article 2 (Example) This regulation shall apply to food
additives, food or health functional foods (hereinafter
referred to as "food additives, etc.") manufactured,
processed, subdivided or imported(based on the date of

1670
 shipment) for the first time since the date of entry into
force.
Article 3 (Interim measures for matters under inspection) If
the inspection is on-going at the time of entry into force,
it shall apply the previous regulation.
Article 4 (Interim measures for food additives, etc. which are
already manufactured) If the food additives, etc. are
already manufactured, processed, subdivided, or
imported(based on the date of shipment) following the
previous regulation, they are still able to be sold after
the date of entry into force(If there is a expiration date,
they are able to be sold until the expiration date). Also,
food additives, etc., which are manufactured or processed
using these food additives, etc., are able to be sold until
the expiration date of the products.
137 MFDS Regulation Supplementary Provisions<#2019-63, 2019. 7. 25.>
#2019-63
(2019.7.25.) Article 1(Date of entry into force) This regulation is effective
from July 25th, 2019.
Article 2 (Example) This regulation shall apply to food
additives, food or health functional foods (hereinafter
referred to as "food additives, etc.") manufactured,
processed, subdivided or imported(based on the date of
shipment) for the first time since the date of entry into
force.
Article 3 (Interim measures for matters under inspection) If
the inspection is on-going at the time of entry into force,
it shall apply the previous regulation.
Article 4 (Interim measures for food additives, etc. which are
already manufactured) If the food additives, etc. are
already manufactured, processed, subdivided, or
imported(based on the date of shipment) following the
previous regulation, they are still able to be sold after
the date of entry into force(If there is a expiration date,
they are able to be sold until the expiration date). Also,
food additives, etc., which are manufactured or processed
using these food additives, etc., are able to be sold until
the expiration date of the products.
Article 5 (Revision of other regulation) With the
implementation of this regulation, following 「Food Code」
Chatper5.12.12-2.5).(5) provision(sorbic acid, potassium

1671
 sorbate and calcium sorbate part of preservatives) is
implemented as below.
Sorbic acid,sorbate,Not more than 1.0applicable
g/kg (asto
Potassium sorbic acid; only
Calcium sorbate mayonnaise; if used with
benzoic acid,benzoate
sodiumor benzoate,
potassium calcium
benzoate, the sum of usage as
sorbic acid and benzoic acid
shall be not
usagemoreas than
1.5 g/kg,
and the benzoic acid
shall not be more than 1.0
g/kg)
138 MFDS Regulation Supplementary Provisions<#2019-71, 2019. 8. 26.>
#2019-71
(2019.8.26.) Article 1(Date of entry into force) This regulation is effective
from August 26th, 2019. However, Revised regulation of II.5.A
and B which is related to Baby foods for infants/young
children are effective from January 1st, 2020.
Article 2(Interim measures for matters under inspection) If the
inspection is on-going at the time of entry into force, it
shall apply the previous regulation.
Article 3 (Interim measures for food additives, etc. which are
already manufactured) If the food additives, etc. are already
manufactured, processed, subdivided, or imported(based on
the date of shipment) following the previous regulation, they
are still able to be sold after the date of entry into force(If
there is a expiration date, they are able to be sold until the
expiration date). Also, food additives, etc., which are
manufactured or processed using these food additives, etc.,
are able to be sold until the expiration date of the products.
139 MFDS Regulation Supplementary Provisions<#2019-88, 2019. 10. 11.>
#2019-88
(2019.10.11.) Article 1(Date of entry into force) This regulation is effective
from October 11th, 2019.
Article 2 (Example) ① This regulation shall apply to food
additives, food, health functional foods or livestock products
(hereinafter referred to as "food additives, etc.")
manufactured, processed, subdivided or imported(based on the
date of shipment) for the first time since the date of entry
into force.
Article 3 (Interim measures for matters under inspection) If the
inspection is on-going at the time of entry into force, it
1672
 shall apply the previous regulation.
140 MFDS Regulation Supplementary Provisions<#2019-134, 2019. 12. 19.>
#2019-134
(2019.12.19.) Article 1(Date of entry into force) This regulation is effective
from December 19th, 2019. However, Revised regulation of
II.1.5) which is manufacturing standard for nitrous oxide is
effective from January 1st, 2021.
Article 2 (Example) ① This regulation shall apply to food
additives, food, health functional foods or livestock products
manufactured, processed, subdivided or imported(based on the
date of shipment) for the first time since the date of entry
into force.
② Notwithstanding Section ①, amended provision of II.1.5)
also apply to food additives already manufactured, processed,
subdivided and imported prior to the implementation of the
regulation.
Article 3 (Interim measures for matters under inspection) ① If
the inspection is on-going at the time of entry into force, it
shall apply the previous regulation.
② Notwithstanding Section ①, amended provision of II.1.5)
also apply to matters in progress of inspection at the time of
public notification.
141 MFDS Regulation Supplementary Provisions<#2020-18, 2020. 3. 20.>
#2020-18
(2020.3.20.) Article 1(Date of entry into force) This regulation is effective
from March 20th, 2020.
Article 2 (Example) ① This regulation shall apply to food
additives, food, health functional foods or livestock products
manufactured, processed, subdivided or imported(based on the
date of shipment) for the first time since the date of entry
into force.
Article 3 (Interim measures for matters under inspection) ① If
the inspection is on-going at the time of entry into force, it
shall apply the previous regulation.
Article 4 (Amendment of other regulation) Some part of ‘Food
Code’ is amended as follow.
“(3) Tar colors: Shall not be detected.” changes to “Not
permitted tar colors: Shall not be detected.” in the
Chapter5.9.9-2.5).
“(3) Tar colors” changes to “Not permitted tar colors” in the

1673
 Chapter5.9.9-2.6)Test Methods.
142 MFDS Regulation Supplementary Provisions<#2020-59, 2020. 7. 10.>
#2020-59
(2020.7.10.) Article 1(Date of entry into force) This regulation is effective
from July 10th, 2020.
Article 2 (Example) ① This regulation shall apply to food
additives, food, health functional foods or livestock products
manufactured, processed, subdivided or imported(based on the
date of shipment) for the first time since the date of entry
into force.
② Notwithstanding Section ①, amended provision of
I..3.5).(3) also apply to food additives already manufactured,
processed, subdivided and imported prior to the
implementation of the regulation.
Article 3 (Interim measures for matters under inspection) ① If
the inspection is on-going at the time of entry into force, it
shall apply the previous regulation.
② Notwithstanding Section ①, amended provision of I.3.5).(3)
also apply to matters in progress of inspection at the time of
public notification.

1674